ASME BPVC.I I I .

A-2017

SECTION III
R ules for Construction of
Nuclear Facility Components

2017
ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code
An International Code
APPEN DIC ES
Markings  such  as  “ASME,”  “ASME  Standard,”  or  any  other  marking  including  “ASME,”  ASME 
logos,  or  the  Certification  Mark  shall  not  be  used  on  any  item  that  is  not  constructed  in 
accordance with all of the applicable requirements of the Code or Standard. Use of ASME’s name, 
logos,  or  Certification  Mark  requires  formal  ASME  certification;  if  no  certification  program  is 
available, such ASME markings may not be used. (For Certification and Accreditation Programs, 
see https://www.asme.org/shop/certification‐accreditation.) 
 
Items produced by parties not formally certified by ASME may not be described, either explicitly 
or implicitly, as ASME certified or approved in any code forms or other document. 
 AN INTERNATIONAL CODE

2017 ASME Boiler &

Pressure Vessel Code
2017 Edition July 1, 2017

III
RULES FOR CONSTRUCTION
OF NUCLEAR FACILITY
COMPONENTS
Appendices
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee
on Construction of Nuclear Facility Components

Two Park Avenue • New York, NY • 10016 USA

 Date of Issuance: July 1, 2017

This international code or standard was developed under procedures accredited as meeting the criteria for
American National Standards and it is an American National Standard. The Standards Committee that approved
the code or standard was balanced to assure that individuals from competent and concerned interests have
had an opportunity to participate. The proposed code or standard was made available for public review and com-
ment that provides an opportunity for additional public input from industry, academia, regulatory agencies, and
the public-at-large.
ASME does not “approve,” “rate,” or “endorse” any item, construction, proprietary device, or activity.
ASME does not take any position with respect to the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any
items mentioned in this document, and does not undertake to insure anyone utilizing a standard against liability
for infringement of any applicable letters patent, nor assume any such liability. Users of a code or standard are
expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such
rights, is entirely their own responsibility.
Participation by federal agency representative(s) or person(s) affiliated with industry is not to be interpreted as
government or industry endorsement of this code or standard.
ASME accepts responsibility for only those interpretations of this document issued in accordance with the es-
tablished ASME procedures and policies, which precludes the issuance of interpretations by individuals.
The endnotes and preamble in this document (if any) are part of this American National Standard.

ASME collective membership mark

Certification Mark

The above ASME symbol is registered in the U.S. Patent Office.

“ASME” is the trademark of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers.

No part of this document may be reproduced in any form, in an electronic

retrieval system or otherwise, without the prior written permission of the
publisher.

Library of Congress Catalog Card Number: 56-3934

Printed in the United States of America

Adopted by the Council of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers, 1914; latest edition 2017.

The American Society of Mechanical Engineers

Two Park Avenue, New York, NY 10016-5990

Copyright © 2017 by
THE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS
All rights reserved
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

List of Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii
Statement of Policy on the Use of the Certification Mark and Code Authorization in Advertising . . . . . . . . . . xxiv
Statement of Policy on the Use of ASME Marking to Identify Manufactured Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv
Submittal of Technical Inquiries to the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Standards Committees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviii
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xlvii
Organization of Section III . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l
Summary of Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . liii
List of Changes in Record Number Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lix
Cross-Referencing and Stylistic Changes in the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . lxi
Mandatory Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Mandatory Appendix I Design Fatigue Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Mandatory Appendix II ......................................................... 26
Article II-1000 Experimental Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
II-1100 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
II-1200 Permissible Types of Noncyclic Tests and Calculation of Stresses . 26
II-1300 Test Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
II-1400 Interpretation of Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
II-1500 Cyclic Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
II-1600 Determination of Fatigue Strength Reduction Factors . . . . . . . . . . . 33
II-1700 Experimental Stress Analysis of Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
II-1800 Experimental Determination of Stress Indices for Piping . . . . . . . . 34
II-1900 Experimental Determination of Flexibility Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Article II-2000 Experimental Determination of Stress Intensification Factors 35
II-2100 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
II-2200 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
II-2300 Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
II-2400 Stress Intensification Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
II-2500 Variations in Materials and Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
II-2600 Test Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Mandatory Appendix III Stress Intensity Values, Allowable Stress Values, Fatigue
Strength Values, and Mechanical Properties for Metallic
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Article III-1000 Determination of Allowable Stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
III-1100 Location of Design Stress Intensity, Allowable Stress, Yield Strength,
and Ultimate Tensile Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
III-1200 Derivation of the Design Stress Intensity and Allowable Stress
Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
III-1300 Fatigue Strength Values for All Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
III-1400 Mechanical and Physical Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Mandatory Appendix IV Approval of New Materials Under the ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

iii
Mandatory Appendix V Certificate Holder’s Data Report Forms, Instructions, and Ap-
plication Forms for Certificates of Authorization for Use of
Certification Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Mandatory Appendix VI Rounded Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Article VI-1000 Rounded Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
VI-1100 Acceptance Standards for Radiographically Determined Rounded
Indications in Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Mandatory Appendix XI Rules for Bolted Flange Connections for Class 2 and 3 Compo-
nents and Class MC Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Article XI-1000 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
XI-1100 General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Article XI-2000 Materials for Bolted Flange Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
XI-2100 Material Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Article XI-3000 Design Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
XI-3100 General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
XI-3200 Class RF Flange Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Mandatory Appendix XII ......................................................... 105
Article XII-1000 Design Considerations for Bolted Flange Connections . . . . . . . . 105
XII-1100 Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Mandatory Appendix XIII Design Based on Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Article XIII-1000 General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
XIII-1100 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
XIII-1200 Design Acceptability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
XIII-1300 Terms Relating to Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Article XIII-2000 Stress Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
XIII-2100 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
XIII-2200 Design Stress Values and Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
XIII-2300 Derivation of Stress Intensities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
XIII-2400 Derivation of Stress Differences for Evaluation of Cyclic Operation 115
XIII-2500 Applications of Elastic Analysis for Stresses Beyond the Yield
Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
XIII-2600 Classification of Stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Article XIII-3000 Stress Limits for Other Than Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
XIII-3100 Primary Stress Intensity Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
XIII-3200 Applications of Plastic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
XIII-3300 External Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
XIII-3400 Primary Plus Secondary Stress Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
XIII-3500 Analysis for Fatigue Due to Cyclic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
XIII-3600 Testing Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
XIII-3700 Special Stress Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
XIII-3800 Deformation Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Article XIII-4000 Stress Limits for Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
XIII-4100 Design Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
XIII-4200 Level A and Level B Service Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
XIII-4300 Level C Service Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
XIII-4400 Level D Service Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Mandatory Appendix XVIII ......................................................... 133
Article XVIII-1000 Capacity Conversions for Pressure Relief Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
XVIII-1100 Procedure for Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

iv
Mandatory Appendix XIX ......................................................... 142
Article XIX-1000 Integral Flat Head With a Large Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
XIX-1100 General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
XIX-1200 Design Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Mandatory Appendix XXI Adhesive Attachment of Nameplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Article XXI-1000 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
XXI-1100 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Mandatory Appendix XXII ......................................................... 146
Article XXII-1000 Rules for Reinforcement of Cone‐to‐Cylinder Junction Under
External Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
XXII-1100 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
XXII-1200 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
XXII-1300 Design Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Mandatory Appendix XXIII Qualifications and Duties of Certifying Engineers Performing
Certification Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Article XXIII-1000 Qualifications and Duties ................................. 150
XXIII-1100 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................................. 150
XXIII-1200 Qualifications . . . . . . . . . . . . ................................. 150
XXIII-1300 Duties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................................. 152
Mandatory Appendix XXIII Supplements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Supplement 1 Mandatory Requirements for Demonstrating Certifying Engi-
neer Qualifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Supplement 2 Mandatory Requirements for Establishing ASME Code
Knowledge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Supplement 3 Mandatory Certification Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Supplement 4 Nonmandatory Sample Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Mandatory Appendix XXIV Standard Units for Use in Equations ....................... 167
Mandatory Appendix XXV ASME-Provided Material Stress–Strain Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Article XXV-1000 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
XXV-1100 Stress–Strain Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Mandatory Appendix XXVI Rules for Construction of Class 3 Buried Polyethylene Pressure
Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Article XXVI-1000 General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
XXVI-1100 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
XXVI-1200 Qualification of Polyethylene Material Organizations . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
XXVI-1300 Certificate Holder Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Article XXVI-2000 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
XXVI-2100 General Requirements for Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
XXVI-2200 Polyethylene Compound and Material Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
XXVI-2300 Polyethylene Material Fusing Verification Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
XXVI-2400 Repair of Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
XXVI-2500 General Requirements for Quality Testing and Documentation . . . 176
Article XXVI-3000 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
XXVI-3100 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
XXVI-3200 Soil and Surcharge Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
XXVI-3300 Temperature Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

v
 XXVI-3400 Seismic Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Article XXVI-4000 Fabrication and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
XXVI-4100 General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
XXVI-4200 Forming, Fitting, and Aligning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
XXVI-4300 Fusing Qualifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
XXVI-4400 Rules Governing Making, Examining, and Repairing Fused Joints . 202
XXVI-4500 Mechanical Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
XXVI-4600 Pipe Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
XXVI-4700 Thrust Collars Using Polyethylene Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Article XXVI-5000 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
XXVI-5100 General Requirements for Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
XXVI-5200 Examinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
XXVI-5300 Acceptance Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
XXVI-5400 Qualification and Certification of NDE Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
XXVI-5500 Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Article XXVI-6000 Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. . .. ............................. 212
XXVI-6100 General Requirements .. . .. . .. ............................. 212
XXVI-6200 Hydrostatic Tests . . . . .. . .. . .. ............................. 212
XXVI-6300 Pressure Test Gages . . .. . .. . .. ............................. 213
Article XXVI-7000 Overpressure Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Article XXVI-8000 Nameplates, Stamping, and Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
XXVI-8100 General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Article XXVI-9000 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
XXVI-9100 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Mandatory Appendix XXVI Supplements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Supplement XXVI-I Polyethylene Standards and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Supplement XXVI-IIA Part A: Ultrasonic Examination of High Density Polyethylene . 219
Supplement XXVI-IIB Part B: Microwave Examination of High Density Polyethylene 221
Supplement XXVI-III Data Report Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Nonmandatory Appendix XXVI Supplements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Supplement XXVI-A Fusing Machine Operator Qualification Training . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Supplement XXVI-B Unacceptable Fusion Bead Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Supplement XXVI-C Alternative Seismic Analysis Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Supplement XXVI-D Electrofusion Operator Qualification Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Mandatory Appendix XXVII Design by Analysis for Service Level D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Article XXVII-1000 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
XXVII-1100 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
XXVII-1200 Applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
XXVII-1300 Intent of Level D Service Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
XXVII-1400 Terms Related to Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Article XXVII-2000 Methods and Requirements for Analyses ................... 233
XXVII-2100 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .................... 233
XXVII-2200 System Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .................... 233
XXVII-2300 Component Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .................... 233
XXVII-2400 Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .................... 233

vi
 Article XXVII-3000 Component Acceptability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
XXVII-3100 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
XXVII-3200 Elastic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
XXVII-3300 Inelastic Analyses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
XXVII-3400 Compressive Stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
XXVII-3500 Bearing and Shear Stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
XXVII-3600 Bolted Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Nonmandatory Appendices . . . . . . . . ........................................................... 237
Nonmandatory Appendix A ......................................................... 237
Article A-1000 Stress Analysis Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
A-1100 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Article A-2000 Analysis of Cylindrical Shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
A-2100 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
A-2200 Stress Intensities, Displacements, Bending Moments, and Limiting
Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Article A-3000 Analysis of Spherical Shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
A-3100 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
A-3200 Stress Intensities, Bending Analysis, Displacements, and Edge Loads 242
Article A-4000 Design Criteria and Equations for Torispherical and Ellipsoidal
Heads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
A-4100 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Article A-5000 Analysis of Flat Circular Heads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
A-5100 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
A-5200 Loads, Displacements, and Geometry Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Article A-6000 Discontinuity Stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
A-6100 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
A-6200 Method of and Procedure for Discontinuity Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Article A-7000 Thermal Stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
A-7100 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Article A-8000 Stresses in Perforated Flat Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
A-8100 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Article A-9000 Interaction Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
A-9100 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
A-9200 Interaction Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
A-9300 Allowable Loads and Stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
A-9400 New Interaction Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
A-9500 Determination of Allowable Bending Strength of Beams by the Ap-
parent Stress Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Nonmandatory Appendix B Owner’s Design Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Article B-1000 Introduction and Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
B-1100 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
B-1200 Scope of Certified Design Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Article B-2000 Generic Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
B-2100 Certified Design Specification Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
B-2200 Operability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
B-2300 Regulatory Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Article B-3000 Specific Vessel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
B-3100 Certified Design Specification Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

vii
 Article B-4000 Specific Pump Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
B-4100 Certified Design Specification Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
B-4200 Operability Requirements for Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
B-4300 Regulatory Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Article B-5000 Specific Valve Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
B-5100 Certified Design Specification Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
B-5200 Operability Requirements for Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
B-5300 Regulatory Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Article B-6000 Specific Piping Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
B-6100 Certified Design Specification Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Article B-7000 Specific Containment Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
B-7100 Certified Design Specification Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Article B-8000 Specific Support Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
B-8100 Certified Design Specification Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
B-8300 Regulatory Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Article B-9000 Specific Core Support Structures Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
B-9100 Certified Design Specification Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Article B-10000 Specific Parts and Miscellaneous Items Requirements . . . . . . . 300
B-10100 Certified Design Specification Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Nonmandatory Appendix C ......................................................... 301
Article C-1000 Certificate Holder’s Design Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
C-1100 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
C-1200 Thermal Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
C-1300 Structural Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
C-1400 Fatigue Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Nonmandatory Appendix D Preheat Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Article D-1000 Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
D-1100 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
D-1200 Ferrous Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Nonmandatory Appendix E Minimum Bolt Cross‐Sectional Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Article E-1000 Introduction and Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
E-1100 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
E-1200 Design Cross‐Sectional Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Nonmandatory Appendix F ......................................................... 309
Article F-1000 Rules for Evaluation of Service Loadings With Level D Service
Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
F-1100 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
F-1200 Intent of Level D Service Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
F-1300 Level D Service Limits and Design Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
F-1400 Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Nonmandatory Appendix G Fracture Toughness Criteria for Protection Against Failure . . . 319
Article G-1000 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Article G-2000 Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. .. ........................ 320
G-2100 General Requirements . . . . . . .. . .. .. ........................ 320
G-2200 Level A and B Service Limits . .. . .. .. ........................ 320
G-2300 Level C and D Service Limits . .. . .. .. ........................ 326
G-2400 Hydrostatic Test Temperature .. . .. .. ........................ 326

viii
 Article G-3000 Piping, Pumps, and Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
G-3100 General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Article G-4000 Bolting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
G-4100 General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Nonmandatory Appendix L Class FF Flange Design for Class 2 and 3 Components and Class
MC Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Article L-1000 Class FF Flanges — Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
L-1100 General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Article L-2000 Class FF Flanges — Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
L-2100 Material Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Article L-3000 Class FF Flanges — Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
L-3100 General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
L-3200 Design of Flanges and Bolting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Nonmandatory Appendix M Recommendations for Control of Welding, Postweld Heat
Treatment, and Nondestructive Examination of Welds . . . . . 345
Article M-1000 Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
M-1100 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
M-1200 Welding Procedure Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
M-1300 Welding Performance Qualification and Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
M-1400 Control of Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
M-1500 Nondestructive Examination of Welds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
M-1600 Postweld Heat Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
M-1700 Examination and Dimensional Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Nonmandatory Appendix N Dynamic Analysis Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Article N-1000 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
N-1100 Introduction and Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
N-1200 Seismic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
N-1300 Flow‐Induced Vibration of Tubes and Tube Banks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
N-1400 Dynamics of Coupled Fluid‐Shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
N-1500 Fluid Transient Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
N-1600 Miscellaneous Impulsive and Impactive Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
N-1700 Combined Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
N-1800 References to Nonmandatory Appendix N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Nonmandatory Appendix O Rules for Design of Safety Valve Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Article O-1000 Introduction and Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
O-1100 Scope and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
O-1200 Method of and Procedure for Load Computation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
O-1300 Stress Evaluation Open System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
O-1400 Closed Discharge Systems — Open Discharge Systems With Long
Discharge Pipes — Systems With Slug Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
O-1500 Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Nonmandatory Appendix P ......................................................... 417
Article P-1000 Certified Material Test Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
P-1100 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
P-1200 General Required Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
P-1300 Information Required Under Specific Circumstances . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
P-1400 Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

ix
Nonmandatory Appendix Q ......................................................... 419
Article Q-1000 Design Rules for Clamp Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Q-1100 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Nonmandatory Appendix R Determination of Permissible Lowest Service Metal Tempera-
ture From T N D T for Division 1, Classes 2 and MC; and Division
3, Class WC Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Article R-1000 Permissible Lowest Service Metal Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
R-1100 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
R-1200 Determination of Permissible Lowest Service Metal Temperature . 426
Nonmandatory Appendix S ......................................................... 428
Article S-1000 Pump Shaft Design Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
S-1100 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
S-1200 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
S-1300 Design Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
S-1400 Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
S-1500 Operating Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
S-1600 Shaft Failure Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Article S-2000 Design Procedure . . . . . . .. . .. ............................. 431
S-2100 Critical Speeds . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. ............................. 431
S-2200 Maximum Torsional Load . .. . .. ............................. 431
S-2300 Shaft Evaluation . . . . . . . . . .. . .. ............................. 431
S-2400 Other Considerations . . . . .. . .. ............................. 431
Nonmandatory Appendix T ......................................................... 433
Article T-1000 Recommended Tolerances for Reconciliation of Piping Systems 433
T-1100 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
T-1200 Total Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Nonmandatory Appendix U ......................................................... 440
Article U-1000 Rules for Pump Internals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
U-1100 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
U-1200 General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
U-1300 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
U-1400 Fabrication Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Nonmandatory Appendix W ......................................................... 457
Article W-1000 Environmental Effects on Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
W-1100 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
W-1200 Section XI and Plex Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Article W-2000 Summaries of Corrosion Damage Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
W-2100 Stress Corrosion Cracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
W-2200 General Corrosion or Wastage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
W-2300 Pitting Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
W-2400 Crevice Corrosion and Denting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
W-2500 Intergranular Corrosion Attack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
W-2600 MIC and Fouling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
W-2700 Environmental Effects on Fatigue-Life Crack Initiation and Growth 477
W-2800 Flow-Accelerated Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
W-2900 Erosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Article W-3000 Summaries of Embrittlement Damage Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . 483
W-3100 Irradiation‐Assisted Stress Corrosion Cracking (IASCC) . . . . . . . . . . 483
W-3200 Thermal Aging Embrittlement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

x
 W-3300 Irradiation Embrittlement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
W-3400 Hydrogen Damage Embrittlement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Article W-4000 Summaries of Other Damage Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
W-4100 Fretting and Wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
W-4200 Thermal Fatigue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
W-4300 Dynamic Loading — Vibration, Water Hammer, and Unstable Fluid
Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
W-4400 Creep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Nonmandatory Appendix Y Evaluation of the Design of Rectangular and Hollow Circular
Cross Section Welded Attachments on Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Article Y-1000 Introduction and Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Y-1100 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Article Y-2000 Procedure for Evaluation of the Design of Rectangular Cross
Section Attachments on Class 1 Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Y-2100 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Y-2200 Limitations to Applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Y-2300 Nomenclature and Definitions (See Figure Y-2300-1) . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Y-2400 Evaluation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Y-2500 Analysis Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Article Y-3000 Procedure for Evaluation of the Design of Rectangular Cross
Section Attachments on Class 2 or 3 Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Y-3100 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Y-3200 Limitations to Applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Y-3300 Nomenclature and Definitions (See Figure Y-3300-1) . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Y-3400 Evaluation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Y-3500 Analysis Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Article Y-4000 Procedure for Evaluation of the Design of Hollow Circular Cross
Section Welded Attachments on Class 1 Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Y-4100 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Y-4200 Limitations to Applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Y-4300 Nomenclature and Definitions (See Figure Y-4300-1) . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Y-4400 Evaluation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Y-4500 Analysis Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Article Y-5000 Procedure for Evaluation of the Design of Hollow Circular Cross
Section Welded Attachments on Class 2 and 3 Piping . . . . . . 515
Y-5100 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Y-5200 Limitations to Applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Y-5300 Nomenclature and Definitions (see Figure Y-5300-1) . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Y-5400 Evaluation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Y-5500 Analysis Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Nonmandatory Appendix Z ......................................................... 518
Article Z-1000 Interruption of Code Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Z-1100 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Z-1200 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Z-1300 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Z-1400 Other Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Z-1500 Resumption of Code Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Nonmandatory Appendix AA Guidance for the Use of U.S. Customary and SI Units in the ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Article AA-1000 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
AA-1100 Use of Units in Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520

xi
 AA-1200 Guidelines Used to Develop SI Equivalents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
AA-1300 Soft Conversion Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Nonmandatory Appendix BB Metallic Braided Flexible Hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Article BB-1000 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
BB-1100 Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Article BB-2000 Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
BB-2100 Sheaths, End Pieces, and Braids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Article BB-3000 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
BB-3100 Design Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
BB-3200 General Design Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
BB-3300 Special Design Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Article BB-4000 Fabrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
BB-4100 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Article BB-5000 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
BB-5100 Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Article BB-6000 Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
BB-6100 Hydrostatic and Pneumatic Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Article BB-7000 Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
BB-7100 Provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Nonmandatory Appendix CC Alternative Rules for Linear Piping Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Article CC-1000 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
CC-1100 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Article CC-2000 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
CC-2100 Material Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Article CC-3000 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
CC-3100 Design Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Article CC-4000 Fabrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
CC-4100 Fabrication Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Article CC-5000 Examination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
CC-5100 Examination Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Article CC-8000 Nameplates, Stamping With Certification Mark, and Data
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
CC-8100 General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Nonmandatory Appendix DD Polyethylene Material Organization Responsibilities Diagram 537
Article DD-1000 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
DD-1100 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Nonmandatory Appendix EE Strain-Based Acceptance Criteria Definitions and Background
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Article EE-1000 Strain Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
EE-1100 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
EE-1200 Background Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Nonmandatory Appendix FF Strain-Based Acceptance Criteria for Energy-Limited Events . . 549
Article FF-1000 Acceptance Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
FF-1100 Strain-Based Acceptance Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549

xii
 Nonmandatory Appendix GG Minimum Thickness for Pipe Bends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Article GG-1000 Minimum Thickness for Pipe Bends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
GG-1100 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Nonmandatory Appendix HH Rules for Valve Internal and External Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Article HH-1000 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
HH-1100 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
HH-1200 General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
HH-1300 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
HH-1400 Design Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
HH-1500 Fabrication Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Nonmandatory Appendix JJ Evaluation of Thermal Stratification in Class 1 Piping Systems 578
Article JJ-1000 Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
JJ-1100 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
JJ-1200 Load Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
JJ-1300 Stress Analysis per NB-3600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
JJ-1400 Stress Analysis per NB-3200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580

FIGURES
I-9.1 Design Fatigue Curves for Carbon, Low Alloy, and High Tensile Steels for Metal Tempera-
tures Not Exceeding 700°F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
I-9.1M Design Fatigue Curves for Carbon, Low Alloy, and High Tensile Steels for Metal Tempera-
tures Not Exceeding 370°C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
I-9.2 Design Fatigue Curves for Austenitic Steels, Nickel–Chromium–Iron Alloy, Nickel–Iron–
Chromium Alloy, and Nickel–Copper Alloy for Temperatures Not Exceeding 800°F . . . 7
I-9.2M Design Fatigue Curves for Austenitic Steels, Nickel–Chromium–Iron Alloy, Nickel–Iron–
Chromium Alloy, and Nickel–Copper Alloy for Temperatures Not Exceeding 425°C . . . 8
I-9.3 Design Fatigue Curves for Wrought 70 Copper–30 Nickel Alloy for Temperatures Not Ex-
ceeding 800°F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
I-9.3M Design Fatigue Curves for Wrought 70 Copper–30 Nickel Alloy for Temperatures Not Ex-
ceeding 425°C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
I-9.4 Design Fatigue Curves for High Strength Steel Bolting for Temperatures Not Exceeding
700°F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
I-9.4M Design Fatigue Curves for High Strength Steel Bolting for Temperatures Not Exceeding
370°C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
I-9.5 Design Fatigue Curves for Nickel–Chromium–Molybdenum–Iron Alloys (UNS N06003,
N06007, N06455, and N10276) for Temperatures Not Exceeding 800°F . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
I-9.5M Design Fatigue Curves for Nickel–Chromium–Molybdenum–Iron Alloys (UNS N06003,
N06007, N06455, and N10276) for Temperatures Not Exceeding 425°C . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
I-9.6 Design Fatigue Curves for Grade 9 Titanium for Temperatures Not Exceeding 600°F . . . 17
I-9.6M Design Fatigue Curves for Grade 9 Titanium for Temperatures Not Exceeding 315°C . . . 18
I-9.7 Design Fatigue Curves for Nickel–Chromium Alloy 718 (SB-637 UNS N07718) for Design of
2 in. (50 mm) and Smaller Diameter Bolting for Temperatures Not Exceeding 800°F
(427°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
I-9.8 Design Fatigue Curves, ksi, for Ductile Cast Iron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
I-9.8M Design Fatigue Curves, MPa, for Ductile Cast Iron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
II-1430-1 Construction for II-1430 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
II-1520(c)-1 Construction of the Testing Parameters Ratio Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
II-1520(c)-2 Construction of the Testing Parameters Ratio Diagram for Accelerated Tests . . . . . . . . . . 32
II-2310-1 Schematic of Test Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
II-2330-1 Displacement D and Force F Recorded During Loading and Unloading of Test Specimen,
With Linear Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
VI-1134-1 Aligned Rounded Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
VI-1134-2 Groups of Aligned Rounded Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

xiii
VI-1136-1 Charts for t Equal to 1/8 in. to 1/4 in. (3 mm to 6 mm), Inclusive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
VI-1136-2 Charts for t Over 1/4 in. to 3/8 in. (6 mm to 10 mm), Inclusive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
VI-1136-3 Charts for t Over 3/8 in. to 3/4 in. (10 mm to 19 mm), Inclusive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
VI-1136-4 Charts for t Over 3/4 in. to 2 in. (19 mm to 50 mm), Inclusive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
VI-1136-5 Charts for t Over 2 in. to 4 in. (50 mm to 100 mm), Inclusive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
VI-1136-6 Charts for t Over 4 in. (100 mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
XI-3120-1 Types of Flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
XI-3240-1 Values of T, U , Y , and Z (Terms Involving K ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
XI-3240-2 Values of F (Integral Flange Factors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
XI-3240-3 Values of V (Integral Flange Factors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
XI-3240-4 Values of F L (Loose Hub Flange Factors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
XI-3240-5 Values of V L (Loose Hub Flange Factors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
XI-3240-6 Values of f (Hub Stress Correction Factor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
XIII-1300-1 Example of Acceptable Local Primary Membrane Stress Due to Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
XIII-1300-2 Examples of Reversing and Nonreversing Dynamic Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
XIII-2100-1 Stress Classification Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
XIII-3770-1 Local Thin Area in a Cylindrical Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
XVIII-1110-1 Constant C for Gas or Vapor Related to Ratio of Specific Heats (k = c p /cv) . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
XVIII-1110-1M Constant C for Gas or Vapor Related to Ratio of Specific Heats (k = c p /cv) . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
XVIII-1140-1 Flow Capacity Curve for Rating Nozzle Type Safety Valves on Saturated Water (Based on
10% Overpressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
XVIII-1140-1M Flow Capacity Curve for Rating Nozzle Type Safety Valves on Saturated Water (Based on
10% Overpressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
XIX-1110-1 Applicable Configurations of Flat Heads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
XIX-1110-2 Integral Flat Head With Large Central Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
XXVI-2234-1 Thrust Collars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
XXVI-3132-1 Nomenclature for Mitered Elbows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
XXVI-4110-1 Thermal Fusion Butt Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
XXVI-4110-2 Electrofusion Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
XXVI-4230-1 Tapered Transition Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
XXVI-4520-1 Transition Flange Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
XXVI-4520-2 Transition Flange Arrangement (HDPE to HDPE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
XXVI-5220-1 Fusion Pipe Joint Examination Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
XXVI-5220-2 Electrofusion Joint Examination Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
XXVI-5321-1 Polyethylene Pipe Butt Fusion Joint O.D. Bead (Cross-Section View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
XXVI-5330-1 Laminar Flaws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
XXVI-B-1 Unacceptable Fusion Bead Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
A-2120-1 ............................................................................ 238
A-3120-1 ............................................................................ 243
A-5120-1 ............................................................................ 249
A-5212-1 ............................................................................ 250
A-5213-1 ............................................................................ 250
A-5221-1 ............................................................................ 251
A-5222-1 ............................................................................ 251
A-6230-1 ............................................................................ 254
A-6230-2 ............................................................................ 255
A-6230-3 ............................................................................ 256
A-6230-4 ............................................................................ 256
A-6230-5 ............................................................................ 256
A-8120-1 ............................................................................ 262
A-8131-1 ............................................................................ 263
A-8132.1-1 ............................................................................ 264
A-8132.2-1 ............................................................................ 264
A-8132.3-1 ............................................................................ 264
A-8132.4-1 ............................................................................ 265
A-8142-1 ............................................................................ 265

xiv
A-8142-2 ............................................................................ 266
A-8142-3 ............................................................................ 267
A-8142-4 ............................................................................ 269
A-8142-5 ............................................................................ 270
A-8142-6 ............................................................................ 271
A-8143.2-1 ............................................................................ 272
A-8153-1 ............................................................................ 273
A-9210(d)-1 Interaction Curve for Beams Subject to Bending and Shear or to Bending, Shear, and Direct
Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
A-9523.1-1 Sign Convention and Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
A-9531-1 Bending and Shear Stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
A-9532(c)(3)-1 Interaction Exponent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
A-9533(b)-1 Interaction Curve for Bending and Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
A-9541-1 Trapezoidal Stress–Strain Relationship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
A-9541-2 Ultimate and Yield Trapezoidal Intercept Stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
A-9541-3 Linearized Ultimate and Yield Bending Stresses for Rectangular Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
A-9541-4 Proportional Limit as a Function of Yield Stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
A-9542-1 Linearized Bending Stress Versus Allowable Stress for SA-672 A50 Material at 600°F
(316°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
B-2123-1 Time‐Dependent Load Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
G-2210-1 ............................................................................ 321
G-2210-1M ............................................................................ 322
G-2214-1 ............................................................................ 323
G-2214-1M ............................................................................ 324
G-2214-2 ............................................................................ 325
L-3191-1 Bolt Hole Flexibility Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
L-3191-2 Flange Dimensions and Forces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
L-3230-1 Group 1 Flange Assembly (Identical Flange Pairs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
L-3230-2 Group 2 Flange Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
L-3230-3 Group 3 Flange Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
N-1211(a)-1 Horizontal Design Response Spectra Scaled to 1g Horizontal Ground Acceleration . . . . . . 349
N-1211(b)-1 Vertical Design Response Spectra Scaled to 1g Horizontal Ground Acceleration . . . . . . . . 351
N-1211(a)-1M Horizontal Design Response Spectra Scaled to 1g Horizontal Ground Acceleration . . . . . . 353
N-1211(b)-1M Vertical Design Response Spectra Scaled to 1g Horizontal Ground Acceleration . . . . . . . . 354
N-1226-1 Response Spectrum Peak Broadening and Peak Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
N-1226-2 Use of Floor Spectra When Several Equipment Frequencies Are Within the Widened
Spectral Peak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
N-1228.3-1 Coefficients for a Component of Shear for a Unit Displacement of a Nondatum Support . 370
N-1321-1 Vortices Shed From a Circular Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
N-1321-2 Some Typical Cross Sections of Bluff Bodies That Can Experience Vortex Shedding . . . . . 380
N-1323-1 Synchronization of the Vortex Shedding Frequency and the Tube Natural Frequency for a
Single, Flexibly‐Mounted Circular Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
N-1331-1 Response of a Tube Bank to Cross Flow (Ref. [115]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
N-1331-2 Tube Vibration Patterns at Fluid-Elastic Instability for a Four‐Tube Row (Ref. [118]) . . . 385
N-1331-3 Tube Arrangements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
N-1331-4 Stability Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
N-1343-1 Random Excitation Coefficient for Arrays in Cross Flow (Ref. [100]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
N-1430-1 Vibration Forms for Circular Cylindrical Shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
N-1451-1 Comparison of Fritz and Kiss Solution With Exact Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
N-1470-1 Imaginary Part of Z as a Function of b /a for Selected Value of S (Ref. [146]) . . . . . . . . . . 401
N-1722.2-1 Definition of Notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
N-1723.1-1 ............................................................................ 405
N-1723.1-2 ............................................................................ 405
N-1723.1-3 ............................................................................ 406
N-1723.1-4 ............................................................................ 406
O-1120(e)-1 Application Point of Venting Force F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

xv
O-1120(e)-2 Limiting Safety Valve Arrangements and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Q-1130-1 Typical Hub and Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Q-1130-2 Typical Clamp Lug Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
R-1200-1 Determination of Permissible Lowest Service Metal Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
S-1600-1 Typical Centrifugal Pump Shaft Failure Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
S-2300-1 Steps in the Design of a Pump Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
T-1213-1 Illustrations of Angular Dimensions — Pipe Legs, Valves, Supports, Bends . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
T-1213-2 Illustrations of Linear Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
U-1500-1 Typical for Type A, C, E, F, and/or Some J (NB‐3400) Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
U-1500-2 Typical for Type B and D Pumps (NC-3400 and ND‐3400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
U-1500-3 Typical for Type G and H Pumps (NC-3400 and ND‐3400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
U-1500-4 Typical for Type K Pumps (NC-3400 and ND‐3400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
U-1500-5 Typical for Type L Pumps (NC-3400 and ND‐3400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
U-1500-6 Reciprocating Plunger Pump (NC-3400 and ND‐3400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
U-1500-7 Typical for Type A and C Pumps (NC-3400 and ND‐3400) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
W-2120-1 Environmental Conditions Required for SCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Y-2300-1 Nomenclature Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Y-3300-1 Nomenclature Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Y-4200-1 Weld Type Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Y-4300-1 Nomenclature Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Y-5300-1 Nomenclature Illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
BB-3300-1 Bellows Configuration and Wrap Angle, α . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
DD-1100-1 Polyethylene Material Organization Responsibilities per NCA-3970 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
EE-1120-1 Typical Engineering Tensile Stress–Strain Curve (Ref. [1]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
EE-1120-2 Comparison of Engineering and True Stress–Strain Curves (Ref. [1]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
EE-1230-1 Quasi-Static Tensile Test Results for 304/304L Base and Welded Material at 300°F
(149°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
EE-1230-2 Quasi-Static Tensile Test Results for 316/316L Base and Welded Material at 300°F
(149°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
EE-1230-3 Comparison of Base and Welded 304/304L Material to Identical Impact Tests at −20°F
(−29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
EE-1230-4 Comparison of Base and Welded 316/316L Material to Identical Impact Tests at −20°F
(−29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
HH-1120-1 Gate Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
HH-1120-2 Globe Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
HH-1120-3 Swing Check Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
HH-1120-4 Globe Check Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
HH-1120-5 Diaphragm Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
HH-1120-6 Plug Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
HH-1120-7 Globe Check Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
HH-1120-8 Butterfly Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
HH-1120-9 Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
HH-1120-10 Ball Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
HH-1120-11 Nozzle Check Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
JJ-1100-1 Sample Thermal Stratification Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
JJ-1330-1 Decomposition of Stratification Temperature Distribution Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580

TABLES
1 Section III Appendices Reference Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xlvii
I-9.0 Tabulated Values of S a , ksi, From Figures I-9.1 Through I-9.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
I-9.0M Tabulated Values of S a , MPa, From Figures I-9.1M Through I-9.4M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
I-9.1 Tabulated Values of S a , ksi (MPa), From Figures I-9.1 and I-9.1M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
I-9.2 Tabulated Values of S a , ksi (MPa), From Figures I-9.2 and I-9.2M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
I-9.5 Tabulated Values of S a , ksi (MPa), From Figures I-9.5 and I-9.5M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
I-9.6 Tabulated Values of S a , ksi (MPa), for Grade 9 Titanium From Figures I-9.6 and I-9.6M 19
I-9.7 Tabulated Values of S a , ksi (MPa), From Figure I-9.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

xvi
I-9.8 Tabulated Values of S a , ksi, From Figure I-9.8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
I-9.8M Tabulated Values of S a , MPa, From Figure I-9.8M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
II-2440-1 Stress Intensification Increase Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
V-1000 Guide for Preparation of Data Report Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
VI-1132-1 Maximum Size of Nonrelevant Indications and Acceptable Rounded Indications — Ex-
amples Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
XI-3221.1-1 Gasket Materials and Contact Facings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
XI-3221.1-2 Effective Gasket Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
XI-3230-1 Moment Arms for Flange Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
XI-3240-1 Flange Factors in Formula Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
XIII-2600-1 Classification of Stresses in Vessels for Some Typical Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
XIII-2600-2 Classification of Stresses in Piping, Typical Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
XIII-3110-1 Primary Stress Intensity Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
XIII-3200-1 Collapse Load Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
XIII-3450-1 Values of m , n, and T m a x for Various Classes of Permitted Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
XVIII-1110-1 Superheat Correction Factor, K s h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
XVIII-1110-1M Superheat Correction Factor, K s h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
XVIII-1110(a)-1 Molecular Weights of Gases and Vapors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
XXII-1200-1 Values of Δ for Junctions at the Large Cylinder for α ≤ 60 deg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
S2-1 Design Specification — Divisions 1 Through 3 and 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
S2-2 Design Report — Divisions 1, 3, and 5 (Excluding Nonmetallic CSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
S2-3 Load Capacity Data Sheet — Divisions 1 and 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
S2-4 Fabrication Specification — Division 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
S2-5 Overpressure Protection Report — Divisions 1, 2, and 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
S2-6 Construction Specification, Design Drawings, and Design Report — Divisions 2 and 5
(Nonmetallic CSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
XXIV-1000 Standard Units for Use in Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
XXVI-2221-1 Certification Requirements for Polyethylene Compound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
XXVI-2511-1 Minimum Quality Testing Requirements for Polyethylene Compound Lots . . . . . . . . . . 177
XXVI-2512-1 Minimum Quality Testing Requirements for Natural Compound Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
XXVI-2513-1 Testing Requirements for Pigment Concentrate Compound Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
XXVI-2520(a)-1 Minimum Quality Testing Requirements for Polyethylene Source Material . . . . . . . . . . 179
XXVI-2520(a)-2 Minimum Quality Testing Requirements for Polyethylene Material — Pipe . . . . . . . . . . 179
XXVI-3131-1(a) Long-Term Allowable Stress, S , for Polyethylene, psi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
XXVI-3131-1M(a) Long-Term Allowable Stress, S , for Polyethylene, MPa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
XXVI-3131-1(b) Elevated Temperature Allowable Stress, S, for Polyethylene, psi (MPa) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
XXVI-3132-1 Geometric Shape Ratings (GSR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
XXVI-3133-1 S A , Allowable Secondary Stress Limit, psi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
XXVI-3133-1M S A , Allowable Secondary Stress Limit, MPa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
XXVI-3210-1 Maximum Allowable Ring Deflection, Ω m a x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
XXVI-3210-2 Soil Support Factor, F S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
XXVI-3210-3 Modulus of Elasticity of Polyethylene Pipe, E p i p e , psi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
XXVI-3210-3M Modulus of Elasticity of Polyethylene Pipe, E p i p e , MPa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
XXVI-3220-1 Allowable Sidewall Compression Stress, S c o m p (psi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
XXVI-3220-1M Allowable Sidewall Compression Stress, S c o m p (MPa) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
XXVI-3221.2-1 Ovality Correction Factor, f O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
XXVI-3223-1 Design and Service Level Longitudinal Stress Factor, K ′ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
XXVI-3223-2 Short Duration (5 min) Allowable Longitudinal Tensile Stress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
XXVI-3311-1 Stress Indices, Flexibility, and Stress Intensification Factors for PE Piping Components 193
XXVI-4521.1-1 Torque Increments for Flanged Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
XXVI-I-100-1 PE Standards and Specifications Referenced in Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
XXVI-IIA-421 Requirements of an Ultrasonic Examination Procedure for HDPE Techniques . . . . . . . . 220
XXVI-IIB-421.1-1 Requirements of a Microwave Examination Procedure for HDPE Techniques . . . . . . . . 221
XXVI-A-110-1 Fusion Standards and Specifications Referenced in Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
XXVI-C-100-1 Seismic Strain Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
A-5240-1 .......................................................................... 252

xvii
A-9210(d)-1 Interaction Equations for Common Beam Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
A-9521(b)-1 .......................................................................... 277
D-1210-1 Suggested Minimum Preheat Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
F-1200-1 Level D Service Limits — Components and Supports Elastic System Analysis Acceptance
Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
L-3212-1 Trial Flange Thickness and Area of Bolting for Various Groups of Assemblies and Flange
Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
L-3240-1 Summary of Applicable Equations for Different Groups of Assemblies and Different Ca-
tegories of Flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
N-1211(a)-1 Horizontal Design Response Spectra Relative Values of Spectrum Amplification Factors
for Control Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
N-1211(b)-1 Vertical Design Response Spectra Relative Values of Spectrum Amplification Factors for
Control Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
N-1225.1.1(b)-1 Minimum Support Load Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
N-1226-1 Suggested Frequencies, Hz, for Calculation of Ground and Floor Response Spectra . . . 364
N-1230-1 Damping Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
N-1311-1 Added Mass for Lateral Acceleration of Structures in a Fluid Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
N-1311-2 Guidelines for Damping of Flow‐Induced Vibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
N-1324.2(a)-1 Semiempirical Correlations for Predicting Resonant Vortex‐Induced Vibration
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Q-1180-1 Allowable Design Stress for Clamp Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
T-1222-1 Branch/Run Size Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
U-1600-1 Summary of Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
U-1610-1 Materials for Pump Internal Items for Class 1, 2, and 3 Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
CC-3120-1 Correlation of Service Loadings and Stress Limit Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
EE-1150-1 Examples of Triaxiality Factor Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
EE-1250-1 Factors for Specified Strain Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
FF-1122-1 Permitted Material Specifications and Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
GG-1100-1 Minimum Thickness for Pipe Bends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
HH-1120-1 Summary of Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
HH-1312-1 Allowable Stress Values, S, for Material for Internal and External Items (U.S. Customary
Units) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
HH-1312-1M Allowable Stress Values, S, for Material for Internal and External Items (SI Units) . . . . 572

FORMS
N-1 Certificate Holder’s Data Report for Nuclear Vessels* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
N-1A Certificate Holder’s Data Report for Nuclear Vessels* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
N-2 Certificate Holder’s Data Report for Identical Nuclear Parts and Appurtenances . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
N-3 Owner’s Data Report for Nuclear Power Plant Components* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
N-5 Certificate Holder's Data Report for Installation or Shop Assembly or Nuclear Power Plant
Components, Supports, and Appurtenances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
N-6 Certificate Holders’ Data Report for Storage Tanks* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
NPP-1 Certificate Holder's Data Report for Fabricated Nuclear Piping Subassemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
NPV-1 Certificate Holder’s Data Report for Nuclear Pumps or Valves* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
NV-1 Certificate Holder’s Data Report for Pressure or Vacuum Relief Valves* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
NCS-1 Certificate Holder’s Data Report for Core Support Structures* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
NF-1 Certificate Holder’s Data Report for Supports* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
NM-1 Certificate Holder’s Data Report for Tubular Products and Fittings Welded With Filler Metal* . 62
NS-1 Certificate Holder’s Certificate of Conformance for Welded Supports* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
C-1 Certificate Holder’s Data Report for Concrete Reactor Vessels and Containments* . . . . . . . . . . . 65
G-1 GC Certificate Holder’s Data Report for Graphite Core Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
G-2 GC or Graphite Quality System Certificate Holder’s Data Report for Machined Graphite Core
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
G-4 GC or Graphite Quality System Certificate Holder’s or GQSC Holder’s Data Report for Installation
of Graphite Core Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
S4-1 Design Specification (Div. 1, 2, and 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

xviii
S4-2 Design Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
S4-3 Overpressure Protection Report (Div. 1, 2, and 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
S4-4 Design Specification (Div. 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
S4-5 Fabrication Specification (Div. 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
S4-6 Construction Specification (Div. 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
NM(PE)-2 Data Report for Nonmetallic Batch-Produced Products Requiring Fusing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

ENDNOTES ................................................................................. 581

xix
ð17Þ LIST OF SECTIONS
SECTIONS
I Rules for Construction of Power Boilers

II Materials
• Part A — Ferrous Material Specifications
• Part B — Nonferrous Material Specifications
• Part C — Specifications for Welding Rods, Electrodes, and Filler Metals
• Part D — Properties (Customary)
• Part D — Properties (Metric)

III Rules for Construction of Nuclear Facility Components

• Subsection NCA — General Requirements for Division 1 and Division 2
• Appendices
• Division 1*
– Subsection NB — Class 1 Components
– Subsection NC — Class 2 Components
– Subsection ND — Class 3 Components
– Subsection NE — Class MC Components
– Subsection NF — Supports
– Subsection NG — Core Support Structures
• Division 2 — Code for Concrete Containments
• Division 3 — Containment Systems for Transportation and Storage of Spent Nuclear Fuel and High-Level
Radioactive Material
• Division 5 — High Temperature Reactors

IV Rules for Construction of Heating Boilers

V Nondestructive Examination

VI Recommended Rules for the Care and Operation of Heating Boilers

VII Recommended Guidelines for the Care of Power Boilers

VIII Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels

• Division 1
• Division 2 — Alternative Rules
• Division 3 — Alternative Rules for Construction of High Pressure Vessels

IX Welding, Brazing, and Fusing Qualifications

X Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessels

XI Rules for Inservice Inspection of Nuclear Power Plant Components

XII Rules for Construction and Continued Service of Transport Tanks

*
The 2015 Edition of Section III was the last edition in which Section III, Division 1, Subsection NH, Class 1 Components in Elevated Tem-
perature Service, was published. The requirements located within Subsection NH were moved to Section III, Division 5, Subsection HB, Subpart
B for the elevated temperature construction of Class A components.

xx
 INTERPRETATIONS
Interpretations are issued in real time in ASME’s Interpretations Database at http://go.asme.org/Interpretations. His-
torical BPVC interpretations may also be found in the Database.

CODE CASES
The Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code committees meet regularly to consider proposed additions and revisions to the
Code and to formulate Cases to clarify the intent of existing requirements or provide, when the need is urgent, rules for
materials or constructions not covered by existing Code rules. Those Cases that have been adopted will appear in the
appropriate 2017 Code Cases book: “Boilers and Pressure Vessels” or “Nuclear Components.” Supplements will be sent
or made available automatically to the purchasers of the Code Cases books up to the publication of the 2019 Code.

xxi
 FOREWORD*

In 1911, The American Society of Mechanical Engineers established the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee to for-
mulate standard rules for the construction of steam boilers and other pressure vessels. In 2009, the Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Committee was superseded by the following committees:
(a) Committee on Power Boilers (I)
(b) Committee on Materials (II)
(c) Committee on Construction of Nuclear Facility Components (III)
(d) Committee on Heating Boilers (IV)
(e) Committee on Nondestructive Examination (V)
(f) Committee on Pressure Vessels (VIII)
(g) Committee on Welding, Brazing, and Fusing (IX)
(h) Committee on Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessels (X)
(i) Committee on Nuclear Inservice Inspection (XI)
(j) Committee on Transport Tanks (XII)
(k) Technical Oversight Management Committee (TOMC)
Where reference is made to “the Committee” in this Foreword, each of these committees is included individually and
collectively.
The Committee’s function is to establish rules of safety relating only to pressure integrity, which govern the
construction** of boilers, pressure vessels, transport tanks, and nuclear components, and the inservice inspection of nu-
clear components and transport tanks. The Committee also interprets these rules when questions arise regarding their
intent. The technical consistency of the Sections of the Code and coordination of standards development activities of the
Committees is supported and guided by the Technical Oversight Management Committee. This Code does not address
other safety issues relating to the construction of boilers, pressure vessels, transport tanks, or nuclear components, or
the inservice inspection of nuclear components or transport tanks. Users of the Code should refer to the pertinent codes,
standards, laws, regulations, or other relevant documents for safety issues other than those relating to pressure integ-
rity. Except for Sections XI and XII, and with a few other exceptions, the rules do not, of practical necessity, reflect the
likelihood and consequences of deterioration in service related to specific service fluids or external operating environ-
ments. In formulating the rules, the Committee considers the needs of users, manufacturers, and inspectors of pressure
vessels. The objective of the rules is to afford reasonably certain protection of life and property, and to provide a margin
for deterioration in service to give a reasonably long, safe period of usefulness. Advancements in design and materials
and evidence of experience have been recognized.
This Code contains mandatory requirements, specific prohibitions, and nonmandatory guidance for construction ac-
tivities and inservice inspection and testing activities. The Code does not address all aspects of these activities and those
aspects that are not specifically addressed should not be considered prohibited. The Code is not a handbook and cannot
replace education, experience, and the use of engineering judgment. The phrase engineering judgment refers to technical
judgments made by knowledgeable engineers experienced in the application of the Code. Engineering judgments must
be consistent with Code philosophy, and such judgments must never be used to overrule mandatory requirements or
specific prohibitions of the Code.
The Committee recognizes that tools and techniques used for design and analysis change as technology progresses
and expects engineers to use good judgment in the application of these tools. The designer is responsible for complying
with Code rules and demonstrating compliance with Code equations when such equations are mandatory. The Code
neither requires nor prohibits the use of computers for the design or analysis of components constructed to the
*
The information contained in this Foreword is not part of this American National Standard (ANS) and has not been processed in accordance
with ANSI's requirements for an ANS. Therefore, this Foreword may contain material that has not been subjected to public review or a con-
sensus process. In addition, it does not contain requirements necessary for conformance to the Code.
**
Construction, as used in this Foreword, is an all-inclusive term comprising materials, design, fabrication, examination, inspection, testing,
certification, and pressure relief.

xxii
requirements of the Code. However, designers and engineers using computer programs for design or analysis are cau-
tioned that they are responsible for all technical assumptions inherent in the programs they use and the application of
these programs to their design.
The rules established by the Committee are not to be interpreted as approving, recommending, or endorsing any pro-
prietary or specific design, or as limiting in any way the manufacturer’s freedom to choose any method of design or any
form of construction that conforms to the Code rules.
The Committee meets regularly to consider revisions of the rules, new rules as dictated by technological development,
Code Cases, and requests for interpretations. Only the Committee has the authority to provide official interpretations of
this Code. Requests for revisions, new rules, Code Cases, or interpretations shall be addressed to the Secretary in writing
and shall give full particulars in order to receive consideration and action (see Submittal of Technical Inquiries to the
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Standards Committees). Proposed revisions to the Code resulting from inquiries will be pre-
sented to the Committee for appropriate action. The action of the Committee becomes effective only after confirmation
by ballot of the Committee and approval by ASME. Proposed revisions to the Code approved by the Committee are sub-
mitted to the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) and published at http://go.asme.org/BPVCPublicReview to
invite comments from all interested persons. After public review and final approval by ASME, revisions are published at
regular intervals in Editions of the Code.
The Committee does not rule on whether a component shall or shall not be constructed to the provisions of the Code.
The scope of each Section has been established to identify the components and parameters considered by the Committee
in formulating the Code rules.
Questions or issues regarding compliance of a specific component with the Code rules are to be directed to the ASME
Certificate Holder (Manufacturer). Inquiries concerning the interpretation of the Code are to be directed to the Commit-
tee. ASME is to be notified should questions arise concerning improper use of an ASME Certification Mark.
When required by context in this Section, the singular shall be interpreted as the plural, and vice versa, and the fem-
inine, masculine, or neuter gender shall be treated as such other gender as appropriate.

xxiii
 STATEMENT OF POLICY ON THE USE OF THE CERTIFICATION
MARK AND CODE AUTHORIZATION IN ADVERTISING

ASME has established procedures to authorize qualified organizations to perform various activities in accordance
with the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. It is the aim of the Society to provide recognition
of organizations so authorized. An organization holding authorization to perform various activities in accordance with
the requirements of the Code may state this capability in its advertising literature.
Organizations that are authorized to use the Certification Mark for marking items or constructions that have been
constructed and inspected in compliance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code are issued Certificates of
Authorization. It is the aim of the Society to maintain the standing of the Certification Mark for the benefit of the users,
the enforcement jurisdictions, and the holders of the Certification Mark who comply with all requirements.
Based on these objectives, the following policy has been established on the usage in advertising of facsimiles of the
Certification Mark, Certificates of Authorization, and reference to Code construction. The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers does not “approve,” “certify,” “rate,” or “endorse” any item, construction, or activity and there shall be no state-
ments or implications that might so indicate. An organization holding the Certification Mark and/or a Certificate of
Authorization may state in advertising literature that items, constructions, or activities “are built (produced or per-
formed) or activities conducted in accordance with the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,”
or “meet the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.” An ASME corporate logo shall not be used
by any organization other than ASME.
The Certification Mark shall be used only for stamping and nameplates as specifically provided in the Code. However,
facsimiles may be used for the purpose of fostering the use of such construction. Such usage may be by an association or
a society, or by a holder of the Certification Mark who may also use the facsimile in advertising to show that clearly spe-
cified items will carry the Certification Mark. General usage is permitted only when all of a manufacturer’s items are
constructed under the rules.

STATEMENT OF POLICY ON THE USE OF ASME MARKING TO

IDENTIFY MANUFACTURED ITEMS

The ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code provides rules for the construction of boilers, pressure vessels, and nuclear
components. This includes requirements for materials, design, fabrication, examination, inspection, and stamping. Items
constructed in accordance with all of the applicable rules of the Code are identified with the official Certification Mark
described in the governing Section of the Code.
Markings such as “ASME,” “ASME Standard,” or any other marking including “ASME” or the Certification Mark shall not
be used on any item that is not constructed in accordance with all of the applicable requirements of the Code.
Items shall not be described on ASME Data Report Forms nor on similar forms referring to ASME that tend to imply
that all Code requirements have been met when, in fact, they have not been. Data Report Forms covering items not fully
complying with ASME requirements should not refer to ASME or they should clearly identify all exceptions to the ASME
requirements.

xxiv
SUBMITTAL OF TECHNICAL INQUIRIES TO THE BOILER AND ð17Þ

PRESSURE VESSEL STANDARDS COMMITTEES

1 INTRODUCTION
(a) The following information provides guidance to Code users for submitting technical inquiries to the applicable
Boiler and Pressure Vessel (BPV) Standards Committee (hereinafter referred to as the Committee). See the guidelines
on approval of new materials under the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code in Section II, Part D for requirements for
requests that involve adding new materials to the Code. See the guidelines on approval of new welding and brazing ma-
terials in Section II, Part C for requirements for requests that involve adding new welding and brazing materials (“con-
sumables”) to the Code.
Technical inquiries can include requests for revisions or additions to the Code requirements, requests for Code Cases,
or requests for Code Interpretations, as described below:
(1) Code Revisions. Code revisions are considered to accommodate technological developments, to address admin-
istrative requirements, to incorporate Code Cases, or to clarify Code intent.
(2) Code Cases. Code Cases represent alternatives or additions to existing Code requirements. Code Cases are writ-
ten as a Question and Reply, and are usually intended to be incorporated into the Code at a later date. When used, Code
Cases prescribe mandatory requirements in the same sense as the text of the Code. However, users are cautioned that
not all regulators, jurisdictions, or Owners automatically accept Code Cases. The most common applications for Code
Cases are as follows:
(-a) to permit early implementation of an approved Code revision based on an urgent need
(-b) to permit use of a new material for Code construction
(-c) to gain experience with new materials or alternative requirements prior to incorporation directly into the
Code
(3) Code Interpretations
(-a) Code Interpretations provide clarification of the meaning of existing requirements in the Code and are pre-
sented in Inquiry and Reply format. Interpretations do not introduce new requirements.
(-b) If existing Code text does not fully convey the meaning that was intended, or conveys conflicting require-
ments, and revision of the requirements is required to support the Interpretation, an Intent Interpretation will be issued
in parallel with a revision to the Code.
(b) Code requirements, Code Cases, and Code Interpretations established by the Committee are not to be considered
as approving, recommending, certifying, or endorsing any proprietary or specific design, or as limiting in any way the
freedom of manufacturers, constructors, or Owners to choose any method of design or any form of construction that
conforms to the Code requirements.
(c) Inquiries that do not comply with the following guidance or that do not provide sufficient information for the Com-
mittee’s full understanding may result in the request being returned to the Inquirer with no action.

2 INQUIRY FORMAT
Submittals to the Committee should include the following information:
(a) Purpose. Specify one of the following:
(1) request for revision of present Code requirements
(2) request for new or additional Code requirements
(3) request for Code Case
(4) request for Code Interpretation
(b) Background. The Inquirer should provide the information needed for the Committee’s understanding of the In-
quiry, being sure to include reference to the applicable Code Section, Division, Edition, Addenda (if applicable), para-
graphs, figures, and tables. Preferably, the Inquirer should provide a copy of, or relevant extracts from, the specific
referenced portions of the Code.

xxv
 (c) Presentations. The Inquirer may desire to attend or be asked to attend a meeting of the Committee to make a for-
mal presentation or to answer questions from the Committee members with regard to the Inquiry. Attendance at a BPV
Standards Committee meeting shall be at the expense of the Inquirer. The Inquirer’s attendance or lack of attendance at
a meeting will not be used by the Committee as a basis for acceptance or rejection of the Inquiry by the Committee. How-
ever, if the Inquirer’s request is unclear, attendance by the Inquirer or a representative may be necessary for the Com-
mittee to understand the request sufficiently to be able to provide an Interpretation. If the Inquirer desires to make a
presentation at a Committee meeting, the Inquirer should provide advance notice to the Committee Secretary, to ensure
time will be allotted for the presentation in the meeting agenda. The Inquirer should consider the need for additional
audiovisual equipment that might not otherwise be provided by the Committee. With sufficient advance notice to the
Committee Secretary, such equipment may be made available.

3 CODE REVISIONS OR ADDITIONS

Requests for Code revisions or additions should include the following information:
(a) Requested Revisions or Additions. For requested revisions, the Inquirer should identify those requirements of the
Code that they believe should be revised, and should submit a copy of, or relevant extracts from, the appropriate require-
ments as they appear in the Code, marked up with the requested revision. For requested additions to the Code, the In-
quirer should provide the recommended wording and should clearly indicate where they believe the additions should be
located in the Code requirements.
(b) Statement of Need. The Inquirer should provide a brief explanation of the need for the revision or addition.
(c) Background Information. The Inquirer should provide background information to support the revision or addition,
including any data or changes in technology that form the basis for the request, that will allow the Committee to ade-
quately evaluate the requested revision or addition. Sketches, tables, figures, and graphs should be submitted, as appro-
priate. The Inquirer should identify any pertinent portions of the Code that would be affected by the revision or addition
and any portions of the Code that reference the requested revised or added paragraphs.

4 CODE CASES
Requests for Code Cases should be accompanied by a statement of need and background information similar to that
described in 3(b) and 3(c), respectively, for Code revisions or additions. The urgency of the Code Case (e.g., project un-
derway or imminent, new procedure) should be described. In addition, it is important that the request is in connection
with equipment that will bear the Certification Mark, with the exception of Section XI applications. The proposed Code
Case should identify the Code Section and Division, and should be written as a Question and a Reply, in the same format
as existing Code Cases. Requests for Code Cases should also indicate the applicable Code Editions and Addenda (if ap-
plicable) to which the requested Code Case applies.

5 CODE INTERPRETATIONS
(a) Requests for Code Interpretations should be accompanied by the following information:
(1) Inquiry. The Inquirer should propose a condensed and precise Inquiry, omitting superfluous background infor-
mation and, when possible, composing the Inquiry in such a way that a “yes” or a “no” Reply, with brief limitations or
conditions, if needed, can be provided by the Committee. The proposed question should be technically and editorially
correct.
(2) Reply. The Inquirer should propose a Reply that clearly and concisely answers the proposed Inquiry question.
Preferably, the Reply should be “yes” or “no,” with brief limitations or conditions, if needed.
(3) Background Information. The Inquirer should provide any need or background information, such as described in
3(b) and 3(c), respectively, for Code revisions or additions, that will assist the Committee in understanding the proposed
Inquiry and Reply.
If the Inquirer believes a revision of the Code requirements would be helpful to support the Interpretation, the In-
quirer may propose such a revision for consideration by the Committee. In most cases, such a proposal is not necessary.
(b) Requests for Code Interpretations should be limited to an Interpretation of a particular requirement in the Code or
in a Code Case. Except with regard to interpreting a specific Code requirement, the Committee is not permitted to con-
sider consulting-type requests such as the following:
(1) a review of calculations, design drawings, welding qualifications, or descriptions of equipment or parts to de-
termine compliance with Code requirements

xxvi
 (2) a request for assistance in performing any Code-prescribed functions relating to, but not limited to, material
selection, designs, calculations, fabrication, inspection, pressure testing, or installation
(3) a request seeking the rationale for Code requirements

6 SUBMITTALS
(a) Submittal. Requests for Code Interpretation should preferably be submitted through the online Interpretation Sub-
mittal Form. The form is accessible at http://go.asme.org/InterpretationRequest. Upon submittal of the form, the In-
quirer will receive an automatic e-mail confirming receipt. If the Inquirer is unable to use the online form, the
Inquirer may mail the request to the following address:

Secretary
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Committee
Two Park Avenue
New York, NY 10016-5990

All other Inquiries should be mailed to the Secretary of the BPV Committee at the address above. Inquiries are unlikely
to receive a response if they are not written in clear, legible English. They must also include the name of the Inquirer and
the company they represent or are employed by, if applicable, and the Inquirer’s address, telephone number, fax num-
ber, and e-mail address, if available.
(b) Response. The Secretary of the appropriate Committee will provide a written response, via letter or e-mail, as ap-
propriate, to the Inquirer, upon completion of the requested action by the Committee. Inquirers may track the status of
their Interpretation Request at http://go.asme.org/Interpretations.

xxvii
ð17Þ PERSONNEL
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Standards Committees,
Subgroups, and Working Groups
January 1, 2017

TECHNICAL OVERSIGHT MANAGEMENT COMMITTEE (TOMC) CONFERENCE COMMITTEE

T. P. Pastor, Chair J. F. Henry D. A. Douin — Ohio, Secretary J. LeSage, Jr. — Louisiana
S. C. Roberts, Vice Chair R. S. Hill III M. J. Adams — Ontario, Canada A. M. Lorimor — South Dakota
J. S. Brzuszkiewicz, Staff Secretary G. G. Karcher J. T. Amato — Minnesota M. Mailman — Northwest
R. W. Barnes W. M. Lundy W. Anderson — Mississippi Territories, Canada
R. J. Basile G. C. Park R. D. Austin — Arizona D. E. Mallory — New Hampshire
T. L. Bedeaux M. D. Rana R. J. Brockman — Missouri W. McGivney — City of New York,
D. L. Berger J. H. Burpee — Maine New York
R. F. Reedy, Sr.
D. A. Canonico M. Byrum — Alabama S. V. Nelson — Colorado
B. W. Roberts
A. Chaudouet C. B. Cantrell — Nebraska
F. J. Schaaf, Jr. A. K. Oda — Washington
D. B. DeMichael S. Chapman — Tennessee
B. F. Shelley M. Poehlmann — Alberta, Canada
R. P. Deubler D. C. Cook — California
P. D. Edwards W. J. Sperko B. J. Crawford — Georgia J. F. Porcella — West Virginia
J. G. Feldstein D. Srnic E. L. Creaser — New Brunswick, C. F. Reyes — City of Los Angeles,
R. E. Gimple R. W. Swayne Canada California
T. E. Hansen C. Withers J. J. Dacanay — Hawaii M. J. Ryan — City of Chicago,
G. W. Hembree J. E. Batey, Contributing Member C. Dautrich — North Carolina Illinois
R. Delury — Manitoba, Canada D. Sandfoss — Nevada
P. L. Dodge — Nova Scotia, Canada M. H. Sansone — New York
D. Eastman — Newfoundland and A. S. Scholl — British Columbia,
Labrador, Canada Canada
J. J. Esch — Delaware T. S. Seime — North Dakota
A. G. Frazier — Florida C. S. Selinger — Saskatchewan,
HONORARY MEMBERS (MAIN COMMITTEE) T. J. Granneman II — Oklahoma Canada
D. R. Hannon — Arkansas J. E. Sharier — Ohio
F. P. Barton W. G. Knecht
E. G. Hilton — Virginia N. Smith — Pennsylvania
T. M. Cullen J. LeCoff
C. Jackson — City of Detroit, R. Spiker — North Carolina
G. E. Feigel T. G. McCarty
Michigan
O. F. Hedden G. C. Millman D. J. Stenrose — Michigan
M. L. Jordan — Kentucky
M. H. Jawad R. A. Moen R. J. Stimson II — Kansas
E. Kawa, Jr. — Massachusetts
A. J. Justin R. F. Reedy, Sr.
A. Khssassi — Quebec, Canada R. K. Sturm — Utah
J. Klug — City of Milwaukee, S. R. Townsend — Prince Edward
Wisconsin Island, Canada
K. J. Kraft — Maryland R. D. Troutt — Texas
K. S. Lane — Alaska M. C. Vogel — Illinois
L. C. Leet — City of Seattle, T. Waldbillig — Wisconsin
Washington M. Washington — New Jersey
ADMINISTRATIVE COMMITTEE
T. P. Pastor, Chair J. F. Henry
S. C. Roberts, Vice Chair R. S. Hill III
J. S. Brzuszkiewicz, Staff Secretary
G. C. Park
R. W. Barnes
M. D. Rana
T. L. Bedeaux
D. L. Berger B. F. Shelley
G. W. Hembree W. J. Sperko

INTERNATIONAL INTEREST REVIEW GROUP

V. Felix C. Minu
MARINE CONFERENCE GROUP
Y.-G. Kim T. S. G. Narayannen
H. N. Patel, Chair G. Pallichadath S. H. Leong Y.-W. Park
J. S. Brzuszkiewicz, Staff Secretary N. Prokopuk W. Lin A. R. R. Nogales
J. G. Hungerbuhler, Jr. J. D. Reynolds O. F. Manafa P. Williamson

xxviii
 COMMITTEE ON POWER BOILERS (BPV I) Subgroup on Materials (BPV I)
D. L. Berger, Chair Y. Oishi G. W. Galanes, Chair F. Masuyama
R. E. McLaughlin, Vice Chair E. M. Ortman J. F. Henry, Vice Chair D. W. Rahoi
U. D’Urso, Staff Secretary J. T. Pillow M. Lewis, Secretary J. M. Tanzosh
J. L. Arnold M. Slater S. H. Bowes
J. Vattappilly
D. A. Canonico J. M. Tanzosh D. A. Canonico
K. K. Coleman D. E. Tompkins K. K. Coleman F. Zeller
P. D. Edwards D. E. Tuttle K. L. Hayes M. Gold, Contributing Member
J. G. Feldstein J. Vattappilly J. S. Hunter B. W. Roberts, Contributing
G. W. Galanes R. V. Wielgoszinski O. X. Li Member
T. E. Hansen F. Zeller
J. F. Henry Y. Li, Delegate
J. S. Hunter H. Michael, Delegate
G. B. Komora B. W. Roberts, Contributing
W. L. Lowry Member
F. Massi D. N. French, Honorary Member
L. Moedinger T. C. McGough, Honorary Member Subgroup on Solar Boilers (BPV I)
P. A. Molvie R. L. Williams, Honorary Member
E. M. Ortman, Chair P. Jennings
R. E. Hearne, Secretary D. J. Koza
H. A. Fonzi, Jr. F. Massi
G. W. Galanes S. V. Torkildson, Contributing
Subgroup on Design (BPV I) J. S. Hunter Member

J. Vattappilly, Chair P. A. Molvie

D. I. Anderson, Secretary L. S. Tsai
D. Dewees M. Wadkinson
H. A. Fonzi, Jr. C. F. Jeerings, Contributing Member
J. P. Glaspie S. V. Torkildson, Contributing
G. B. Komora Member Germany International Working Group (BPV I)
H. Michael, Chair T. Ludwig
H. P. Schmitz, Secretary R. A. Meyers
M. Bremicker F. Miunske
Subgroup on Fabrication and Examination (BPV I) P. Chavdarov P. Paluszkiewicz
B. Daume H. Schroeder
J. L. Arnold, Chair T. E. Hansen
J. Fleischfresser A. Spangenberg
P. Becker C. T. McDaris
E. Helmholdt M. Sykora
D. L. Berger R. E. McLaughlin
R. Kauer J. Henrichsmeyer, Contributing
S. Fincher R. J. Newell
S. Krebs Member
G. W. Galanes Y. Oishi
P. F. Gilston J. T. Pillow
J. Hainsworth R. V. Wielgoszinski

Subgroup on General Requirements and Piping (BPV I) India International Working Group (BPV I)

E. M. Ortman, Chair R. E. McLaughlin U. Revisanakaran, Chair G. V. S. Rao

D. Tompkins, Vice Chair B. J. Mollitor A. J. Patil, Vice Chair M. G. Rao
F. Massi, Secretary J. T. Pillow H. Dalal, Secretary
N. Satheesan
P. Becker D. E. Tuttle K. Asokkumar
G. U. Shanker
D. L. Berger M. Wadkinson M. R. Kalahasthi
I. Kalyanasundaram D. Shrivastava
P. D. Edwards R. V. Wielgoszinski
G. W. Galanes C. F. Jeerings, Contributing Member A. R. Patil S. Venkataramana
T. E. Hansen S. V. Torkildson, Contributing
M. Lemmons Member
W. L. Lowry R. Uebel, Contributing Member

Task Group on Modernization of BPVC Section I

Subgroup on Locomotive Boilers (BPV I)
D. I. Anderson, Chair R. E. McLaughlin
L. Moedinger, Chair S. D. Jackson U. D’Urso, Staff Secretary P. A. Molvie
S. M. Butler, Secretary M. A. Janssen J. L. Arnold E. M. Ortman
P. Boschan D. Dewees
S. A. Lee J. T. Pillow
J. R. Braun G. W. Galanes
G. M. Ray B. W. Roberts
R. C. Franzen, Jr. J. P. Glaspie
G. W. Galanes R. B. Stone T. E. Hansen D. E. Tuttle
D. W. Griner M. W. Westland J. F. Henry J. Vattappilly

xxix
 COMMITTEE ON MATERIALS (BPV II) Subgroup on International Material Specifications (BPV II)
J. F. Henry, Chair J. M. Tanzosh A. Chaudouet, Chair M. Ishikawa
J. F. Grubb, Vice Chair R. G. Young A. R. Nywening, Vice Chair O. X. Li
C. E. O’Brien, Staff Secretary F. Zeller T. F. Miskell, Secretary W. M. Lundy
F. Abe O. Oldani, Delegate D. A. Canonico E. Upitis
A. Appleton H. D. Bushfield, Contributing H. Chen F. Zeller
J. Cameron Member A. F. Garbolevsky O. Oldani, Delegate
D. A. Canonico M. Gold, Contributing Member D. O. Henry H. Lorenz, Contributing Member
A. Chaudouet W. Hoffelner, Contributing Member
D. B. Denis M. Katcher, Contributing Member
J. R. Foulds Subgroup on Nonferrous Alloys (BPV II)
M. L. Nayyar, Contributing Member
D. W. Gandy
E. G. Nisbett, Contributing Member
M. H. Gilkey R. C. Sutherlin, Chair D. W. Rahoi
D. T. Peters, Contributing Member
J. A. Hall M. H. Gilkey, Vice Chair W. Ren
B. W. Roberts, Contributing J. Calland
K. M. Hottle J. Robertson
Member D. B. Denis
M. Ishikawa E. Shapiro
O. X. Li E. Thomas, Contributing Member J. F. Grubb
E. Upitis, Contributing Member M. H. Skillingberg
F. Masuyama T. Hartman
T. M. Cullen, Honorary Member A. Heino J. Weritz
R. K. Nanstad
K. E. Orie W. D. Edsall, Honorary Member M. Katcher R. Wright
D. W. Rahoi G. C. Hsu, Honorary Member J. A. McMaster S. Yem
E. Shapiro R. A. Moen, Honorary Member L. Paul D. T. Peters, Contributing Member
M. J. Slater C. E. Spaeder, Jr., Honorary
R. C. Sutherlin Member
R. W. Swindeman A. W. Zeuthen, Honorary Member Subgroup on Physical Properties (BPV II)
J. F. Grubb, Chair H. D. Bushfield, Contributing
D. B. Denis, Vice Chair Member
E. Shapiro
Executive Committee (BPV II)
J. F. Henry, Chair J. F. Grubb
C. E. O’Brien, Staff Secretary R. W. Mikitka Subgroup on Strength, Ferrous Alloys (BPV II)
A. Appleton B. W. Roberts M. J. Slater, Chair M. Ortolani
A. Chaudouet M. J. Slater S. W. Knowles, Secretary D. W. Rahoi
J. R. Foulds R. C. Sutherlin F. Abe M. S. Shelton
M. Gold R. W. Swindeman D. A. Canonico R. W. Swindeman
A. Di Rienzo J. M. Tanzosh
J. R. Foulds R. G. Young
J. A. Hall F. Zeller
J. F. Henry M. Gold, Contributing Member
Subgroup on External Pressure (BPV II) K. Kimura M. Nair, Contributing Member
R. W. Mikitka, Chair J. R. Harris III F. Masuyama B. W. Roberts, Contributing
D. L. Kurle, Vice Chair T. Ono Member
M. H. Jawad
J. A. A. Morrow, Secretary
C. R. Thomas
L. F. Campbell
M. Wadkinson
H. Chen Subgroup on Strength of Weldments (BPV II & BPV IX)
D. S. Griffin M. Katcher, Contributing Member
J. F. Grubb C. H. Sturgeon, Contributing W. F. Newell, Jr., Chair J. F. Henry
S. Guzey Member S. H. Bowes E. Liebl
K. K. Coleman J. Penso
M. Denault D. W. Rahoi
P. D. Flenner B. W. Roberts
J. R. Foulds W. J. Sperko
Subgroup on Ferrous Specifications (BPV II) D. W. Gandy J. P. Swezy, Jr.
M. Ghahremani J. M. Tanzosh
A. Appleton, Chair C. Hyde K. L. Hayes M. Gold, Contributing Member
K. M. Hottle, Vice Chair D. S. Janikowski
P. Wittenbach, Secretary L. J. Lavezzi
H. Chen S. G. Lee Working Group on Materials Database (BPV II)
B. M. Dingman W. C. Mack
M. J. Dosdourian R. W. Swindeman, Chair J. L. Arnold, Contributing Member
A. S. Melilli
O. Elkadim C. E. O’Brien, Staff Secretary J. Grimes, Contributing Member
K. E. Orie
J. D. Fritz F. Abe W. Hoffelner, Contributing Member
M. Gold J. Shick J. R. Foulds T. Lazar, Contributing Member
T. Graham E. Upitis J. F. Henry D. T. Peters, Contributing Member
J. M. Grocki J. D. Wilson M. J. Slater W. Ren, Contributing Member
J. F. Grubb R. Zawierucha R. C. Sutherlin B. W. Roberts, Contributing
J. Gundlach E. G. Nisbett, Contributing Member D. Andrei, Contributing Member Member

xxx
Working Group on Creep Strength Enhanced Ferritic Steels (BPV II) Executive Committee (BPV III)
J. F. Henry, Chair W. F. Newell, Jr. R. S. Hill III, Chair J. C. Minichiello
J. A. Siefert, Secretary M. Ortolani A. Byk, Staff Secretary M. Morishita
F. Abe J. Parker T. M. Adams D. K. Morton
S. H. Bowes W. J. Sperko C. W. Bruny
J. A. Munshi
D. A. Canonico R. W. Swindeman P. R. Donavin
K. K. Coleman J. M. Tanzosh R. M. Jessee C. A. Sanna
P. D. Flenner R. H. Worthington R. B. Keating S. Sham
J. R. Foulds R. G. Young R. P. McIntyre W. K. Sowder, Jr.
G. W. Galanes F. Zeller
M. Gold G. Cumino, Contributing Member
F. Masuyama B. W. Roberts, Contributing
T. Melfi Member Subcommittee on Design (BPV III)
P. R. Donavin, Chair M. N. Mitchell
D. E. Matthews, Vice Chair W. J. O’Donnell, Sr.
G. L. Hollinger, Secretary E. L. Pleins
Working Group on Data Analysis (BPV II)
T. M. Adams S. Sham
J. F. Grubb, Chair W. Ren R. L. Bratton
J. P. Tucker
F. Abe M. Subanovic C. W. Bruny
W. F. Weitze
J. R. Foulds R. P. Deubler
M. J. Swindeman K. Wright
M. Gold R. I. Jetter
J. F. Henry R. W. Swindeman C. Jonker T. Yamazaki
M. Katcher B. W. Roberts, Contributing R. B. Keating J. Yang
F. Masuyama Member K. A. Manoly R. S. Hill III, Contributing Member
R. J. Masterson M. H. Jawad, Contributing Member

China International Working Group (BPV II)

Subgroup on Component Design (SC-D) (BPV III)
B. Shou, Chair X. Wang
A. T. Xu, Secretary F. Yang T. M. Adams, Chair T. M. Musto
W. Fang G. Yang R. B. Keating, Vice Chair T. Nagata
Q. C. Feng H.-C. Yang S. Pellet, Secretary A. N. Nguyen
S. Huo R. Ye G. A. Antaki E. L. Pleins
F. Kong L. Yin S. Asada I. Saito
H. Li D. Zhang J. F. Ball G. C. Slagis
J. Li H. Zhang C. Basavaraju
J. R. Stinson
S. Li X.-H. Zhang R. P. Deubler
G. Z. Tokarski
Z. Rongcan Yingkai Zhang P. Hirschberg
J. P. Tucker
S. Tan Yong Zhang O.-S. Kim
R. Klein P. Vock
C. Wang Q. Zhao
H. Kobayashi C. Wilson
J. Wang S. Zhao
Q.-J. Wang J. Zou K. A. Manoly J. Yang
R. J. Masterson C. W. Bruny, Contributing Member
D. E. Matthews A. A. Dermenjian, Contributing
J. C. Minichiello Member
COMMITTEE ON CONSTRUCTION OF NUCLEAR FACILITY D. K. Morton K. R. Wichman, Honorary Member
COMPONENTS (BPV III)
R. S. Hill III, Chair M. Morishita
R. B. Keating, Vice Chair D. K. Morton Working Group on Core Support Structures (SG-CD) (BPV III)
J. C. Minichiello, Vice Chair T. Nagata
A. Byk, Staff Secretary R. F. Reedy, Sr. J. Yang, Chair M. Nakajima
T. M. Adams I. Saito J. F. Kielb, Secretary M. D. Snyder
A. Appleton S. Sham L. C. Hartless A. Tsirigotis
R. W. Barnes C. T. Smith D. Keck R. Vollmer
W. H. Borter W. K. Sowder, Jr. T. Liszkai R. Z. Ziegler
C. W. Bruny W. J. Sperko H. S. Mehta J. T. Land, Contributing Member
T. D. Burchell J. P. Tucker
R. P. Deubler K. R. Wichman
A. C. Eberhardt C. S. Withers
Working Group on Design of Division 3 Containment Systems
R. M. Jessee Y. H. Choi, Delegate
(SG-CD) (BPV III)
R. I. Jetter T. Ius, Delegate
C. C. Kim H.-T. Wang, Delegate D. K. Morton, Chair E. L. Pleins
G. H. Koo M. Zhou, Contributing Member D. J. Ammerman C. J. Temus
V. Kostarev E. B. Branch, Honorary Member G. Bjorkman
X. Zhai
K. A. Manoly G. D. Cooper, Honorary Member V. Broz
D. E. Matthews D. F. Landers, Honorary Member S. Horowitz I. D. McInnes, Contributing Member
R. P. McIntyre R. A. Moen, Honorary Member D. W. Lewis H. P. Shrivastava, Contributing
M. N. Mitchell C. J. Pieper, Honorary Member J. C. Minichiello Member

xxxi
Working Group on HDPE Design of Components (SG-CD) (BPV III) Working Group on Valves (SG-CD) (BPV III)

T. M. Musto, Chair P. Krishnaswamy P. Vock, Chair C. A. Mizer

J. Ossmann, Secretary K. A. Manoly S. Jones, Secretary J. O’Callaghan
T. M. Adams M. Martin M. C. Buckley H. O’Brien
T. A. Bacon J. C. Minichiello R. Farrell K. E. Reid II
M. Brandes D. P. Munson G. A. Jolly J. Sulley
D. Burwell F. J. Schaaf, Jr. J. Klein I. H. Tseng
S. Choi R. Stakenborghs T. Lippucci J. P. Tucker
J. R. Hebeisen H. E. Svetlik

Working Group on Vessels (SG-CD) (BPV III)

Working Group on Piping (SG-CD) (BPV III) D. E. Matthews, Chair T. J. Schriefer
C. Wilson, Secretary M. C. Scott
G. A. Antaki, Chair R. B. Keating
C. Basavaraju P. K. Shah
G. Z. Tokarski, Secretary V. Kostarev
J. V. Gregg, Jr. J. Shupert
T. M. Adams D. Lieb
M. Kassar
T. A. Bacon T. B. Littleton C. Turylo
R. B. Keating
C. Basavaraju Y. Liu D. Vlaicu
D. Keck
J. Catalano J. F. McCabe W. F. Weitze
J. Kim
F. Claeys J. C. Minichiello T. Yamazaki
O.-S. Kim
C. M. Faidy I.-K. Nam
T. Mitsuhashi R. Z. Ziegler
R. G. Gilada M. S. Sills
M. Nair A. Kalnins, Contributing Member
N. M. Graham G. C. Slagis
M. A. Gray N. C. Sutherland
R. J. Gurdal C.-I. Wu
R. W. Haupt A. N. Nguyen, Contributing Member
A. Hirano N. J. Shah, Contributing Member Subgroup on Design Methods (SC-D) (BPV III)
P. Hirschberg E. A. Wais, Contributing Member
M. Kassar E. C. Rodabaugh, Honorary C. W. Bruny, Chair D. Keck
J. Kawahata Member S. McKillop, Secretary M. N. Mitchell
K. Avrithi W. J. O’Donnell, Sr.
W. Culp P. J. O’Regan
P. R. Donavin
W. D. Reinhardt
J. V. Gregg, Jr.
H. T. Harrison III P. Smith
Working Group on Pressure Relief (SG-CD) (BPV III) S. D. Snow
K. Hsu
J. F. Ball, Chair A. L. Szeglin C. Jonker W. F. Weitze
K. R. May D. G. Thibault M. Kassar K. Wright
D. Miller I. H. Tseng

Working Group on Design Methodology (SG-DM) (BPV III)

Working Group on Pumps (SG-CD) (BPV III) S. D. Snow, Chair J. F. McCabe
C. F. Heberling II, Secretary S. McKillop
R. Klein, Chair M. Higuchi
K. Avrithi S. Ranganath
D. Chowdhury, Secretary R. Ladefian C. Basavaraju W. D. Reinhardt
P. W. Behnke W. Lienau D. L. Caldwell D. H. Roarty
R. E. Cornman, Jr.
K. J. Noel D. Dewees P. K. Shah
X. Di
R. A. Patrick C. M. Faidy R. Vollmer
M. D. Eftychiou
J. Sulley R. Farrell S. Wang
A. Fraser
R. Udo H. T. Harrison III W. F. Weitze
C. Gabhart
P. Hirschberg J. Wen
R. Ghanbari A. G. Washburn
M. Kassar T. M. Wiger
R. B. Keating K. Wright
J. Kim J. Yang
H. Kobayashi R. D. Blevins, Contributing Member
T. Liszkai M. R. Breach, Contributing Member
Working Group on Supports (SG-CD) (BPV III)
J. R. Stinson, Chair S. Pellet
U. S. Bandyopadhyay, Secretary I. Saito
K. Avrithi H. P. Srivastava Working Group on Environmental Effects (SG-DM) (BPV III)
T. H. Baker
C. Stirzel
F. J. Birch C. Jonker, Chair J. Kim
R. P. Deubler G. Z. Tokarski B. D. Frew, Secretary J. E. Nestell
N. M. Graham P. Wiseman W. Culp M. Osterfoss
R. J. Masterson C.-I. Wu P. J. Dobson T. J. Schriefer

xxxii
 Working Group on Environmental Fatigue Evaluation Methods Subgroup on Elevated Temperature Design (SC-D) (BPV III)
(SG-DM) (BPV III)
S. Sham, Chair G. H. Koo
K. Wright, Chair S. R. Gosselin T. Asayama S. Majumdar
M. A. Gray, Vice Chair Y. He C. Becht IV J. E. Nestell
W. F. Weitze, Secretary P. Hirschberg F. W. Brust W. J. O'Donnell, Sr.
T. M. Adams H. S. Mehta P. Carter R. W. Swindeman
S. Asada T. Metais B. F. Hantz D. S. Griffin, Contributing Member
K. Avrithi J.-S. Park A. B. Hull W. J. Koves, Contributing Member
R. C. Cipolla D. H. Roarty M. H. Jawad D. L. Marriott, Contributing
T. M. Damiani I. Saito R. I. Jetter Member
C. M. Faidy D. Vlaicu
T. D. Gilman R. Z. Ziegler

Working Group on Allowable Stress Criteria (SG-ETD) (BPV III)

R. W. Swindeman, Chair D. Maitra
R. Wright, Secretary S. N. Malik
Working Group on Fatigue Strength (SG-DM) (BPV III)
J. R. Foulds J. E. Nestell
P. R. Donavin, Chair S. H. Kleinsmith C. J. Johns W. Ren
M. S. Shelton, Secretary S. Majumdar K. Kimura B. W. Roberts
T. M. Damiani S. N. Malik T. Le M. Sengupta
D. Dewees S. Mohanty M. Li S. Sham
C. M. Faidy
D. H. Roarty
S. R. Gosselin
R. J. Gurdal A. Tsirigotis
C. F. Heberling II K. Wright
Working Group on Analysis Methods (SG-ETD) (BPV III)
C. E. Hinnant H. H. Ziada
P. Hirschberg W. J. O'Donnell, Sr., Contributing P. Carter, Chair T. Krishnamurthy
K. Hsu Member M. J. Swindeman, Secretary T. Le
M. R. Breach S. Sham
M. E. Cohen D. K. Williams
R. I. Jetter

Working Group on Graphite and Composites Design

(SG-DM) (BPV III)
Working Group on Creep-Fatigue and Negligible Creep (SG-ETD)
M. N. Mitchell, Chair S. T. Gonczy
(BPV III)
M. W. Davies, Vice Chair M. G. Jenkins
T. D. Burchell, Secretary Y. Katoh T. Asayama, Chair T. Le
A. Appleton J. Ossmann F. W. Brust B.-L. Lyow
S. R. Cadell M. Roemmler P. Carter S. N. Malik
S.-H. Chi S. Yu R. I. Jetter H. Qian
W. J. Geringer G. L. Zeng G. H. Koo S. Sham

Working Group on Elevated Temperature Construction (SG-ETD)

Working Group on Probabilistic Methods in Design (BPV III)
(SG-DM) (BPV III)
M. H. Jawad, Chair M. N. Mitchell
M. Golliet, Chair M. Morishita A. Mann, Secretary B. J. Mollitor
T. Asayama P. J. O'Regan D. I. Anderson C. Nadarajah
K. Avrithi N. A. Palm R. G. Brown
P. Prueter
D. O. Henry I. Saito D. Dewees
R. S. Hill III B. F. Hantz M. J. Swindeman
R. I. Jetter J. P. Glaspie, Contributing Member
S. Krishnamurthy D. L. Marriott, Contributing
T. Le Member

Special Working Group on Computational Modeling for Explicit

Dynamics (SG-DM) (BPV III)
Working Group on High Temperature Flaw Evaluation (SG-ETD)
G. Bjorkman, Chair W. D. Reinhardt
(BPV III)
D. J. Ammerman, Vice Chair P. Y.-K. Shih
V. Broz, Secretary F. W. Brust, Chair H. Qian
S. D. Snow
M. R. Breach N. Broom D. L. Rudland
C.-F. Tso
J. M. Jordan P. Carter P. J. Rush
S. Kuehner M. C. Yaksh T. Le D.-J. Shim
D. Molitoris U. Zencker S. N. Malik S. X. Xu

xxxiii
 Special Working Group on Inelastic Analysis Methods (SG-ETD) Subgroup on Materials, Fabrication, and Examination (BPV III)
(BPV III)
R. M. Jessee, Chair J. Johnston, Jr.
S. Sham, Chair T. Hassan B. D. Frew, Vice Chair C. C. Kim
S. X. Xu, Secretary G. H. Koo S. Hunter, Secretary M. Lashley
R. W. Barnes B.-L. Lyow W. H. Borter T. Melfi
J. A. Blanco M. J. Swindeman T. D. Burchell H. Murakami
B. R. Ganta G. L. Zeng G. R. Cannell J. Ossmann
P. J. Coco J. E. O’Sullivan
M. W. Davies M. C. Scott
R. H. Davis W. J. Sperko
Subgroup on General Requirements (BPV III) D. B. Denis J. R. Stinson
R. P. McIntyre, Chair E. C. Renaud G. B. Georgiev J. F. Strunk
L. M. Plante, Secretary J. Rogers S. E. Gingrich R. Wright
V. Apostolescu D. J. Roszman M. Golliet S. Yee
A. Appleton C. T. Smith J. Grimm H. Michael, Delegate
S. Bell W. K. Sowder, Jr. L. S. Harbison R. W. Barnes, Contributing Member
J. R. Berry R. Spuhl
J. DeKleine G. E. Szabatura
J. V. Gardiner D. M. Vickery
J. W. Highlands C. S. Withers
E. V. Imbro H. Michael, Delegate
Working Group on Graphite and Composite Materials (SG-MFE)
K. A. Kavanagh G. L. Hollinger, Contributing
(BPV III)
Y.-S. Kim Member
T. D. Burchell, Chair W. J. Geringer
M. W. Davies, Vice Chair S. T. Gonzcy
M. N. Mitchell, Secretary M. G. Jenkins
Working Group on Duties and Responsibilities (SG-GR) (BPV III)
A. Appleton Y. Katoh
J. V. Gardiner, Chair Y. Diaz-Castillo R. L. Bratton J. Ossmann
G. L. Hollinger, Secretary K. A. Kavanagh S. R. Cadell M. Roemmler
D. Arrigo S.-H. Chi N. Salstrom
J. M. Lyons
S. Bell A. Covac T. Shibata
L. M. Plante
J. R. Berry S. W. Doms S. Yu
D. J. Roszman S. F. Duffy G. L. Zeng
P. J. Coco
M. Cusick B. S. Sandhu
J. DeKleine E. M. Steuck
N. DeSantis J. L. Williams

Working Group on HDPE Materials (SG-MFE) (BPV III)

Working Group on Quality Assurance, Certification, and Stamping
M. Golliet, Chair D. P. Munson
(SG-GR) (BPV III)
M. A. Martin, Secretary T. M. Musto
C. T. Smith, Chair D. T. Meisch W. H. Borter S. Patterson
C. S. Withers, Secretary R. B. Patel G. Brouette
S. Schuessler
V. Apostolescu E. C. Renaud M. C. Buckley
A. Appleton T. Rezk J. Hakii R. Stakenborghs
O. Elkadim J. Rogers J. Johnston, Jr. M. Troughton
S. M. Goodwin W. K. Sowder, Jr. P. Krishnaswamy B. Hauger, Contributing Member
J. Grimm R. Spuhl
J. W. Highlands J. F. Strunk
Y.-S. Kim G. E. Szabatura
B. McGlone D. M. Vickery
R. P. McIntyre C. A. Spletter, Contributing Member
Joint ACI-ASME Committee on Concrete Components for Nuclear
Service (BPV III)
J. A. Munshi, Chair N. Orbovic
Special Working Group on General Requirements Consolidation
J. McLean, Vice Chair C. T. Smith
(SG-GR) (BPV III)
A. Byk, Staff Secretary J. F. Strunk
J. V. Gardiner, Chair J. Rogers K. Verderber, Staff Secretary T. Tonyan
C. T. Smith, Vice Chair D. J. Roszman C. J. Bang S. Wang
S. Bell B. S. Sandhu L. J. Colarusso T. J. Ahl, Contributing Member
M. Cusick G. J. Solovey A. C. Eberhardt J. F. Artuso, Contributing Member
Y. Diaz-Castillo F. Farzam J.-B. Domage, Contributing Member
R. Spuhl
J. Grimm P. S. Ghosal J. Gutierrez, Contributing Member
J. M. Lyons G. E. Szabatura B. D. Hovis T. Kang, Contributing Member
B. McGlone J. L. Williams T. C. Inman T. Muraki, Contributing Member
R. Patel C. S. Withers C. Jones B. B. Scott, Contributing Member
E. C. Renaud S. F. Harrison, Contributing O. Jovall M. R. Senecal, Contributing
T. Rezk Member N.-H. Lee Member

xxxiv
 Working Group on Design (BPV III-2) Working Group on In-Vessel Components (BPV III-4)
N.-H. Lee, Chair J. A. Munshi M. Kalsey, Chair Y. Carin
M. Allam T. Muraki
S. Bae S. Wang
L. J. Colarusso M. Diaz, Contributing Member
A. C. Eberhardt S. Diaz, Contributing Member
F. Farzam A. Istar, Contributing Member
P. S. Ghosal B. R. Laskewitz, Contributing Working Group on Magnets (BPV III-4)
B. D. Hovis Member S. Lee, Chair K. Kim, Vice Chair
T. C. Inman B. B. Scott, Contributing Member
C. Jones Z. Shang, Contributing Member
O. Jovall M. Sircar, Contributing Member

Working Group on Materials, Fabrication, and Examination Working Group on Materials (BPV III-4)
(BPV III-2)
M. Porton, Chair P. Mummery
P. S. Ghosal, Chair N. Lee
T. Tonyan, Vice Chair C. T. Smith
M. Allam J. F. Strunk
C. J. Bang D. Ufuk
J.-B. Domage J. F. Artuso, Contributing Member
A. C. Eberhardt J. Gutierrez, Contributing Member Working Group on Vacuum Vessels (BPV III-4)
C. Jones B. B. Scott, Contributing Member I. Kimihiro, Chair B. R. Doshi
T. Kang Z. Shang, Contributing Member L. C. Cadwallader

Special Working Group on Modernization (BPV III-2)

J. McLean, Chair S. Wang
N. Orbovic, Vice Chair S. Diaz, Contributing Member Subgroup on High Temperature Reactors (BPV III)
A. Adediran
J.-B. Domage, Contributing Member
O. Jovall M. Morishita, Chair G. H. Koo
C. T. Smith F. Lin, Contributing Member R. I. Jetter, Vice Chair D. K. Morton
M. A. Ugalde N. Stoeva, Contributing Member S. Sham, Secretary
J. E. Nestell
N. Broom
G. L. Zeng
T. D. Burchell
Subgroup on Containment Systems for Spent Nuclear Fuel and M. W. Davies X. Li, Contributing Member
High-Level Radioactive Material (BPV III) S. Downey L. Shi, Contributing Member
D. K. Morton, Chair C. J. Temus
D. J. Ammerman, Vice Chair W. H. Borter, Contributing Member
G. R. Cannell, Secretary R. S. Hill III, Contributing Member
G. Bjorkman P. E. McConnell, Contributing
V. Broz Member Working Group on High Temperature Gas-Cooled Reactors
S. Horowitz A. B. Meichler, Contributing (BPV III-5)
D. W. Lewis Member
E. L. Pleins T. Saegusa, Contributing Member J. E. Nestell, Chair T. Le
R. H. Smith N. M. Simpson, Contributing M. Sengupta, Secretary T. R. Lupold
G. J. Solovey Member N. Broom S. N. Malik
T. D. Burchell D. L. Marriott
M. W. Davies D. K. Morton
Subgroup on Fusion Energy Devices (BPV III) R. S. Hill III S. Sham
E. V. Imbro G. L. Zeng
W. K. Sowder, Jr., Chair G. Li R. I. Jetter X. Li, Contributing Member
D. Andrei, Staff Secretary X. Li Y. W. Kim L. Shi, Contributing Member
D. J. Roszman, Secretary P. Mokaria
L. C. Cadwallader T. R. Muldoon
B. R. Doshi M. Porton
M. Higuchi F. J. Schaaf, Jr.
G. Holtmeier P. Smith
M. Kalsey Y. Song Working Group on High Temperature Liquid-Cooled Reactors
K. A. Kavanagh M. Trosen (BPV III-5)
K. Kim C. Waldon
S. Sham, Chair R. I. Jetter
I. Kimihiro I. J. Zatz
T. Asayama, Secretary G. H. Koo
S. Lee R. W. Barnes, Contributing Member
M. Arcaro T. Le
R. W. Barnes S. Majumdar
P. Carter M. Morishita
Working Group on General Requirements (BPV III-4)
M. E. Cohen J. E. Nestell
D. J. Roszman, Chair W. K. Sowder, Jr. A. B. Hull G. Wu, Contributing Member

xxxv
 Argentina International Working Group (BPV III) India International Working Group (BPV III)
O. Martinez, Staff Secretary M. M. Gamizo B. Basu, Chair S. Kovalai
A. Acrogliano A. Gomez G. Mathivanan, Vice Chair D. Kulkarni
W. Agrelo I. M. Guerreiro C. A. Sanna, Staff Secretary M. Ponnusamy
G. O. Anteri I. A. Knorr S. B. Parkash, Secretary R. N. Sen
M. Anticoli M. F. Liendo A. D. Bagdare K. R. Shah
C. A. Araya L. R. Miño V. Bhasin A. Sundararajan
J. P. Balbiani J. Monte
A. A. Betervide R. L. Morard
D. O. Bordato A. E. Pastor
G. Bourguigne
E. Pizzichini
M. L. Cappella
A. Politi Korea International Working Group (BPV III)
A. Claus
J. L. Racamato
R. G. Cocco G. H. Koo, Chair D. Kwon
H. C. Sanzi
A. Coleff S. S. Hwang, Vice Chair B. Lee
A. J. Dall’Osto G. J. Scian
O.-S. Kim, Secretary D. Lee
L. M. De Barberis G. G. Sebastian
H. S. Byun Sanghoon Lee
D. P. Delfino M. E. Szarko
G.-S. Choi Sangil Lee
D. N. Dell’Erba P. N. Torano
S. Choi S.-G. Lee
F. G. Diez A. Turrin J. Y. Hong
O. A. Verastegui H. Lim
A. Dominguez N.-S. Huh
S. A. Echeverria M. D. Vigliano I.-K. Nam
J.-K. Hwang
J. Fernández P. Yamamoto B. Noh
C. Jang
E. P. Fresquet M. Zunino C.-K. Oh
I. I. Jeong
H. J. Kim C. Park
J. Kim H. Park
J.-S. Kim J.-S. Park
K. Kim T. Shin
M.-W. Kim S. Song
Y.-B. Kim J. S. Yang
China International Working Group (BPV III) Y.-S. Kim O. Yoo

J. Yan, Chair G. Sun

W. Tang, Vice Chair Z. Sun
C. A. Sanna, Staff Secretary G. Tang
Y. He, Secretary L. Ting
L. Guo Y. Tu Special Working Group on Editing and Review (BPV III)
Y. Jing Y. Wang
D. E. Matthews, Chair D. K. Morton
D. Kang H. Wu
R. L. Bratton L. M. Plante
Y. Li X. Wu
R. P. Deubler R. F. Reedy, Sr.
B. Liang S. Xue
A. C. Eberhardt C. Wilson
H. Lin Z. Yin
J. C. Minichiello
S. Liu G. Zhang
W. Liu W. Zhang
J. Ma W. Zhao
K. Mao Y. Zhong
W. Pei Z. Zhong
Special Working Group on HDPE Stakeholders (BPV III)
D. Burwell, Chair D. Keller
S. Patterson, Secretary M. Lashley
T. M. Adams K. A. Manoly
M. Brandes D. P. Munson
S. Bruce
Germany International Working Group (BPV III) T. M. Musto
S. Choi
J. E. O’Sullivan
C. Huttner, Chair C. Krumb C. M. Faidy
M. Golliet V. Rohatgi
H.-R. Bath, Secretary W. Mayinger
J. Grimes F. J. Schaaf, Jr.
B. Arndt D. Moehring
M. Bauer D. Ostermann R. M. Jessee R. Stakenborghs
G. Daum G. Roos J. Johnston, Jr. M. Troughton
R. Doring J. Rudolph
L. Gerstner C. A. Sanna
G. Haenle H. Schau
K.-H. Herter R. Trieglaff
R. E. Hueggenberg P. Völlmecke
Special Working Group on Honors and Awards (BPV III)
E. Iacopetta J. Wendt
U. Jendrich F. Wille R. M. Jessee, Chair D. E. Matthews
D. Koelbl M. Winter A. Appleton J. C. Minichiello
G. Kramarz N. Wirtz R. W. Barnes

xxxvi
 Special Working Group on Industry Experience for New Plants Subgroup on Cast Boilers (BPV IV)
(BPV III & BPV XI)
J. P. Chicoine, Chair J. A. Hall
J. T. Lindberg, Chair O.-S. Kim T. L. Bedeaux, Vice Chair J. L. Kleiss
E. L. Pleins, Chair Y.-S. Kim J. M. Downs
J. Ossmann, Secretary K. Matsunaga
T. L. Chan D. E. Matthews
H. L. Gustin Subgroup on Materials (BPV IV)
R. E. McLaughlin
P. J. Hennessey
D. O. Henry D. W. Sandusky M. Wadkinson, Chair J. A. Hall
J. Honcharik T. Tsuruta J. Calland A. Heino
E. V. Imbro R. M. Wilson J. M. Downs B. J. Iske
C. G. Kim S. M. Yee

Subgroup on Water Heaters (BPV IV)

J. Calland, Chair R. E. Olson
Special Working Group on International Meetings (BPV III) L. Badziagowski M. A. Taylor
C. T. Smith, Chair R. S. Hill III J. P. Chicoine T. E. Trant
A. Byk, Staff Secretary M. N. Mitchell C. Dinic R. D. Troutt
T. D. Burchell R. F. Reedy, Sr. B. J. Iske
S. W. Cameron C. A. Sanna
R. L. Crane
Subgroup on Welded Boilers (BPV IV)
P. A. Molvie, Chair J. L. Kleiss
L. Badziagowski R. E. Olson
Special Working Group on New Plant Construction Issues (BPV III) T. L. Bedeaux G. Scribner
E. L. Pleins, Chair M. Kris B. Calderon R. D. Troutt
M. C. Scott, Secretary J. C. Minichiello J. Calland M. Wadkinson
A. Byk C. Dinic R. V. Wielgoszinski
D. W. Sandusky
A. Cardillo
R. R. Stevenson
P. J. Coco
J. Honcharik R. Troficanto COMMITTEE ON NONDESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION (BPV V)
E. V. Imbro M. L. Wilson
G. W. Hembree, Chair R. W. Kruzic
O.-S Kim J. Yan
F. B. Kovacs, Vice Chair C. May
J. S. Brzuszkiewicz, Staff Secretary A. B. Nagel
S. J. Akrin T. L. Plasek
J. E. Batey F. J. Sattler
Special Working Group on Regulatory Interface (BPV III)
P. L. Brown P. B. Shaw
E. V. Imbro, Chair K. Matsunaga M. A. Burns
G. M. Gatti, Delegate
P. Malouines, Secretary D. E. Matthews B. Caccamise
X. Guiping, Delegate
S. Bell C. Emslander
B. McGlone A. S. Birks, Contributing Member
A. Cardillo N. Y. Faransso
A. T. Roberts III N. A. Finney J. Bennett, Alternate
P. J. Coco
J. Grimm R. R. Stevenson A. F. Garbolevsky H. C. Graber, Honorary Member
J. Honcharik M. L. Wilson J. F. Halley O. F. Hedden, Honorary Member
J. W. Houf J. R. MacKay, Honorary Member
S. A. Johnson T. G. McCarty, Honorary Member

COMMITTEE ON HEATING BOILERS (BPV IV)

Executive Committee (BPV V)
J. A. Hall, Chair G. Scribner
T. L. Bedeaux, Vice Chair R. D. Troutt F. B. Kovacs, Chair N. Y. Faransso
G. Moino, Staff Secretary M. Wadkinson G. W. Hembree, Vice Chair N. A. Finney
B. Calderon R. V. Wielgoszinski J. S. Brzuszkiewicz, Staff Secretary S. A. Johnson
J. Calland H. Michael, Delegate J. E. Batey A. B. Nagel
J. P. Chicoine D. Picart, Delegate B. Caccamise
J. M. Downs A. Heino, Contributing Member
B. J. Iske S. V. Voorhees, Contributing
J. Klug Member Subgroup on General Requirements/Personnel Qualifications and
P. A. Molvie J. L. Kleiss, Alternate Inquiries (BPV V)
C. Emslander, Chair S. A. Johnson
J. W. Houf, Vice Chair F. B. Kovacs
S. J. Akrin
Subgroup on Care and Operation of Heating Boilers (BPV IV) D. I. Morris
J. E. Batey
A. B. Nagel
M. Wadkinson, Chair J. A. Hall N. Carter
T. L. Bedeaux P. A. Molvie N. Y. Faransso A. S. Birks, Contributing Member
J. Calland C. Lasarte, Contributing Member N. A. Finney J. P. Swezy, Jr., Contributing
J. M. Downs G. W. Hembree Member

xxxvii
Special Working Group on NDE Resource Support (SG-GR/PQ & I) Working Group on Guided Wave Ultrasonic Testing (SG-VM) (BPV V)
(BPV V)
N. Y. Faransso, Chair S. A. Johnson
N. A. Finney, Chair R. Kelso J. E. Batey, Vice Chair G. M. Light
D. Adkins C. Magruder D. Alleyne P. Mudge
J. Anderson J. W. Mefford, Jr. N. Amir M. J. Quarry
D. Bajula K. Page J. F. Halley J. Vanvelsor
J. Bennett D. Tompkins
C. T. Brown D. Van Allen
T. Clausing T. Vidimos Italy International Working Group (BPV V)
J. L. Garner R. Ward
K. Hayes M. Wolf P. L. Dinelli, Chair M. A. Grimoldi
A. Veroni, Secretary G. Luoni
R. Bertolotti O. Oldani
Subgroup on Surface Examination Methods (BPV V) F. Bresciani
P. Pedersoli
G. Campos
S. A. Johnson, Chair G. W. Hembree A. Tintori
N. Caputo
J. Halley, Vice Chair R. W. Kruzic M. Colombo M. Zambon
S. J. Akrin B. D. Laite F. Ferrarese G. Gobbi, Contributing Member
J. E. Batey C. May E. Ferrari G. Pontiggia, Contributing Member
P. L. Brown L. E. Mullins
B. Caccamise A. B. Nagel
N. Carter F. J. Sattler
N. Y. Faransso P. B. Shaw COMMITTEE ON PRESSURE VESSELS (BPV VIII)
N. Farenbaugh G. M. Gatti, Delegate R. J. Basile, Chair G. B. Rawls, Jr.
N. A. Finney A. S. Birks, Contributing Member S. C. Roberts, Vice Chair F. L. Richter
E. Lawson, Staff Secretary C. D. Rodery
S. J. Rossi, Staff Secretary E. Soltow
Subgroup on Volumetric Methods (BPV V) G. Aurioles, Sr. J. C. Sowinski
A. B. Nagel, Chair G. W. Hembree J. Cameron D. B. Stewart
N. A. Finney, Vice Chair S. A. Johnson A. Chaudouet D. A. Swanson
S. J. Akrin D. B. DeMichael J. P. Swezy, Jr.
F. B. Kovacs
J. E. Batey J. P. Glaspie
R. W. Kruzic S. Terada
P. L. Brown J. F. Grubb
C. May E. Upitis
B. Caccamise L. E. Hayden, Jr.
L. E. Mullins R. Duan, Delegate
J. M. Davis G. G. Karcher
T. L. Plasek P. A. McGowan, Delegate
N. Y. Faransso D. L. Kurle
H. Michael, Delegate
A. F. Garbolevsky F. J. Sattler K. T. Lau
M. D. Lower K. Oyamada, Delegate
J. F. Halley C. Vorwald
R. Mahadeen M. E. Papponetti, Delegate
R. W. Hardy G. M. Gatti, Delegate
R. W. Mikitka X. Tang, Delegate
U. R. Miller M. Gold, Contributing Member
B. R. Morelock W. S. Jacobs, Contributing Member
Working Group on Acoustic Emissions (SG-VM) (BPV V)
T. P. Pastor K. Mokhtarian, Contributing
N. Y. Faransso, Chair S. R. Doctor D. T. Peters Member
J. E. Batey, Vice Chair R. K. Miller M. J. Pischke C. C. Neely, Contributing Member
M. D. Rana K. K. Tam, Honorary Member

Working Group on Radiography (SG-VM) (BPV V)

B. Caccamise, Chair G. W. Hembree Subgroup on Design (BPV VIII)
F. B. Kovacs, Vice Chair S. A. Johnson
D. A. Swanson, Chair M. D. Rana
S. J. Akrin R. W. Kruzic
J. C. Sowinski, Vice Chair G. B. Rawls, Jr.
J. E. Batey B. D. Laite
M. Faulkner, Secretary S. C. Roberts
P. L. Brown C. May
G. Aurioles, Sr. C. D. Rodery
C. Emslander R. J. Mills
S. R. Babka T. G. Seipp
N. Y. Faransso A. B. Nagel
O. A. Barsky D. Srnic
A. F. Garbolevsky T. L. Plasek
R. J. Basile S. Terada
R. W. Hardy B. White
M. R. Breach
J. Vattappilly
F. L. Brown
R. A. Whipple
D. Chandiramani
Working Group on Ultrasonics (SG-VM) (BPV V) K. Xu
B. F. Hantz
N. A. Finney, Chair R. W. Kruzic C. E. Hinnant K. Oyamada, Delegate
J. F. Halley, Vice Chair C. S. Hinson M. E. Papponetti, Delegate
B. D. Laite
B. Caccamise M. H. Jawad W. S. Jacobs, Contributing Member
C. May
J. M. Davis D. L. Kurle P. K. Lam, Contributing Member
L. E. Mullins K. Mokhtarian, Contributing
C. Emslander M. D. Lower
N. Y. Faransso A. B. Nagel R. W. Mikitka Member
P. T. Hayes F. J. Sattler U. R. Miller S. C. Shah, Contributing Member
S. A. Johnson C. Vorwald T. P. Pastor K. K. Tam, Contributing Member

xxxviii
 Working Group on Design-By-Analysis (BPV VIII) Task Group on U-2(g) (BPV VIII)
B. F. Hantz, Chair S. Krishnamurthy G. Aurioles, Sr. R. F. Reedy, Sr.
T. W. Norton, Secretary A. Mann S. R. Babka S. C. Roberts
R. G. Brown G. A. Miller R. J. Basile M. A. Shah
D. Dewees C. Nadarajah D. K. Chandiramani D. Srnic
R. D. Dixon P. Prueter R. Mahadeen D. A. Swanson
Z. Gu M. D. Rana U. R. Miller J. P. Swezy, Jr.
C. F. Heberling II T. G. Seipp T. W. Norton R. Uebel
C. E. Hinnant M. A. Shah T. P. Pastor K. K. Tam, Contributing Member
R. Jain S. Terada
M. H. Jawad D. Arnett, Contributing Member

Subgroup on Heat Transfer Equipment (BPV VIII)

Subgroup on Fabrication and Examination (BPV VIII)
G. Aurioles, Sr., Chair U. R. Miller
J. P. Swezy, Jr., Chair B. F. Shelley S. R. Babka, Vice Chair D. Srnic
D. I. Morris, Vice Chair P. L. Sturgill P. Matkovics, Secretary A. M. Voytko
E. A. Whittle, Vice Chair E. Upitis D. Angstadt R. P. Wiberg
B. R. Morelock, Secretary K. Oyamada, Delegate M. Bahadori I. G. Campbell, Contributing
N. Carter J. H. Barbee Member
W. J. Bees, Contributing Member
S. Flynn O. A. Barsky
L. F. Campbell, Contributing I. Garcia, Contributing Member
S. Heater L. Bower
Member J. Mauritz, Contributing Member
O. Mulet A. Chaudouet
M. J. Pischke W. S. Jacobs, Contributing Member T. W. Norton, Contributing Member
M. D. Clark
M. J. Rice J. Lee, Contributing Member S. Jeyakumar F. Osweiller, Contributing Member
C. D. Rodery R. Uebel, Contributing Member G. G. Karcher J. Pasek, Contributing Member
D. L. Kurle R. Tiwari, Contributing Member
R. Mahadeen S. Yokell, Contributing Member
S. Mayeux S. M. Caldwell, Honorary Member

Subgroup on General Requirements (BPV VIII)

M. D. Lower, Chair K. T. Lau
J. P. Glaspie, Vice Chair T. P. Pastor
F. L. Richter, Secretary S. C. Roberts
Task Group on Plate Heat Exchangers (BPV VIII)
R. J. Basile J. C. Sowinski
D. T. Davis P. Speranza P. Matkovics, Chair R. Mahadeen
D. B. DeMichael D. B. Stewart S. R. Babka D. I. Morris
M. Faulkner D. A. Swanson K. Devlin M. J. Pischke
F. Hamtak R. Uebel S. Flynn C. M. Romero
L. E. Hayden, Jr. C. C. Neely, Contributing Member J. F. Grubb E. Soltow
F. Hamtak D. Srnic

Task Group on Subsea Applications (BPV VIII)

R. Cordes, Chair F. Kirkemo
L. P. Antalffy Subgroup on High Pressure Vessels (BPV VIII)
C. Lan
R. C. Biel N. McKie D. T. Peters, Chair E. A. Rodriguez
P. Bunch G. M. Mital, Vice Chair E. D. Roll
S. K. Parimi
J. Ellens A. P. Maslowski, Staff Secretary K. C. Simpson, Jr.
S. Harbert M. Sarzynski
L. P. Antalffy J. R. Sims
X. Kaculi Y. Wada R. C. Biel D. L. Stang
K. Karpanan D. T. Peters, Contributing Member P. N. Chaku F. W. Tatar
R. Cordes
S. Terada
R. D. Dixon
J. L. Traud
L. Fridlund
R. Wink
R. T. Hallman
A. H. Honza K.-J. Young
Task Group on UG-20(f) (BPV VIII) R. M. Hoshman, Contributing
J. A. Kapp
S. Krishnamurthy, Chair B. R. Macejko J. Keltjens Member
T. Anderson J. Penso A. K. Khare D. J. Burns, Honorary Member
K. Bagnoli M. Prager N. McKie D. M. Fryer, Honorary Member
R. P. Deubler M. D. Rana S. C. Mordre G. J. Mraz, Honorary Member
B. F. Hantz G. T. Nelson E. H. Perez, Honorary Member

xxxix
 Subgroup on Materials (BPV VIII) Italy International Working Group (BPV VIII)

J. Cameron, Chair D. W. Rahoi G. Pontiggia, Chair M. Guglielmetti

P. G. Wittenbach, Vice Chair R. C. Sutherlin A. Veroni, Secretary P. Mantovani
K. Xu, Secretary E. Upitis B. G. Alborali M. Massobrio
A. Di Rienzo G. S. Dixit, Contributing Member P. Angelini L. Moracchioli
J. D. Fritz M. Gold, Contributing Member R. Boatti C. Sangaletti
J. F. Grubb M. Katcher, Contributing Member A. Camanni S. Sarti
M. Kowalczyk J. A. McMaster, Contributing P. Conti A. Teli
W. M. Lundy Member P. L. Dinelli I. Venier
J. Penso E. G. Nisbett, Contributing Member F. Finco G. Gobbi, Contributing Member

Subgroup on Toughness (BPV II & BPV VIII) Special Working Group on Bolted Flanged Joints (BPV VIII)
D. L. Kurle, Chair J. P. Swezy, Jr. R. W. Mikitka, Chair J. R. Payne
K. Xu, Vice Chair S. Terada W. Brown G. B. Rawls, Jr.
N. Carter E. Upitis H. Chen M. S. Shelton
W. S. Jacobs W. J. Koves
J. Vattappilly
K. E. Orie
M. D. Rana K. Oyamada, Delegate
F. L. Richter K. Mokhtarian, Contributing
K. Subramanian Member
D. A. Swanson C. C. Neely, Contributing Member
Working Group on Design (BPV VIII Div. 3)
E. D. Roll, Chair K. C. Simpson
C. Becht V J. R. Sims
R. C. Biel D. L. Stang
R. Cordes K. Subramanian
Subgroup on Graphite Pressure Equipment (BPV VIII)
R. D. Dixon S. Terada
A. Viet, Chair C. W. Cary L. Fridlund
J. L. Traud
G. C. Becherer E. Soltow R. T. Hallman
R. Wink
F. L. Brown A. A. Stupica K. Karpanan
Y. Xu
J. Keltjens
N. McKie F. Kirkemo, Contributing Member
G. M. Mital D. J. Burns, Honorary Member
S. C. Mordre D. M. Fryer, Honorary Member
G. T. Nelson G. J. Mraz, Honorary Member
China International Working Group (BPV VIII) D. T. Peters E. H. Perez, Honorary Member
X. Chen, Chair D. Luo
B. Shou, Vice Chair Y. Luo
Z. Fan, Secretary C. Miao
Y. Chen X. Qian
Z. Chen B. Wang
Working Group on Materials (BPV VIII Div. 3)
J. Cui F. Xu
R. Duan F. Xuan F. W. Tatar, Chair J. A. Kapp
W. Guo K. Zhang L. P. Antalffy A. K. Khare
B. Han Y. Zhang P. N. Chaku
J. Hu S. Zhao
Q. Hu J. Zheng
H. Hui G. Zhu

Task Group on Impulsively Loaded Vessels (BPV VIII)

E. A. Rodriguez, Chair R. A. Leishear
G. A. Antaki P. O. Leslie
Germany International Working Group (BPV VIII)
J. K. Asahina F. Ohlson
P. Chavdarov, Chair D. Koelbl D. D. Barker C. Romero
A. Spangenberg, Vice Chair S. Krebs A. M. Clayton N. Rushton
H. P. Schmitz, Secretary T. Ludwig J. E. Didlake, Jr. J. H. Stofleth
B. Daume T. A. Duffey Q. Dong, Contributing Member
R. A. Meyers
A. Emrich B. L. Haroldsen H.-P. Schildberg, Contributing
H. Michael
J. Fleischfresser K. Hayashi Member
A. Gastberg P. Paluszkiewicz D. Hilding J. E. Shepherd, Contributing
R. Helmholdt H. Schroeder K. W. King Member
R. Kauer M. Sykora R. Kitamura M. Yip, Contributing Member

xl
 Subgroup on Interpretations (BPV VIII) Subgroup on Plastic Fusing (BPV IX)
U. R. Miller, Chair D. I. Morris E. W. Woelfel, Chair J. E. O’Sullivan
E. Lawson, Staff Secretary D. T. Peters D. Burwell E. G. Reichelt
G. Aurioles, Sr. S. C. Roberts M. Ghahremani M. J. Rice
R. J. Basile C. D. Rodery K. L. Hayes S. Schuessler
J. Cameron D. B. Stewart R. M. Jessee M. Troughton
R. D. Dixon P. L. Sturgill J. Johnston, Jr. J. Wright
M. Kowalczyk D. A. Swanson
D. L. Kurle J. P. Swezy, Jr.
M. D. Lower J. Vattappilly
R. Mahadeen P. G. Wittenbach
G. M. Mital T. P. Pastor, Contributing Member

Subgroup on Welding Qualifications (BPV IX)

COMMITTEE ON WELDING, BRAZING, AND FUSING (BPV IX)
M. J. Rice, Chair E. G. Reichelt
D. A. Bowers, Chair W. J. Sperko J. S. Lee, Vice Chair M. B. Sims
M. J. Pischke, Vice Chair M. J. Stanko M. Bernasek W. J. Sperko
S. J. Rossi, Staff Secretary P. L. Sturgill M. A. Boring S. A. Sprague
M. Bernasek J. P. Swezy, Jr. D. A. Bowers
M. A. Boring P. L. Van Fosson P. L. Sturgill
R. B. Corbit
J. G. Feldstein E. W. Woelfel J. P. Swezy, Jr.
P. D. Flenner
P. D. Flenner A. Roza, Delegate P. L. Van Fosson
L. S. Harbison
S. E. Gingrich M. Consonni, Contributing Member K. L. Hayes T. C. Wiesner
K. L. Hayes S. A. Jones, Contributing Member W. M. Lundy A. D. Wilson
R. M. Jessee A. S. Olivares, Contributing T. Melfi D. Chandiramani, Contributing
J. S. Lee Member W. F. Newell, Jr. Member
W. M. Lundy S. Raghunathan, Contributing B. R. Newton M. Consonni, Contributing Member
T. Melfi Member S. Raghunathan M. Degan, Contributing Member
W. F. Newell, Jr. R. K. Brown, Jr., Honorary Member
D. K. Peetz M. L. Carpenter, Honorary Member
E. G. Reichelt B. R. Newmark, Honorary Member
M. J. Rice S. D. Reynolds, Jr., Honorary
M. B. Sims Member

Subgroup on Brazing (BPV IX) Italy International Working Group (BPV IX)

M. J. Pischke, Chair A. F. Garbolevsky A. Camanni, Chair N. Maestri

E. W. Beckman N. Mohr A. Veroni, Secretary M. Mandina
L. F. Campbell A. R. Nywening P. Angelini M. Massobrio
M. L. Carpenter J. P. Swezy, Jr. R. Boatti
L. Moracchioli
P. L. Dinelli
G. Pontiggia
F. Ferrarese
A. Ghidini S. Verderame
Subgroup on General Requirements (BPV IX) E. Lazzari A. Volpi
P. L. Sturgill, Chair R. M. Jessee L. Lotti G. Gobbi, Contributing Member
E. W. Beckman D. Mobley
J. P. Bell D. K. Peetz
D. A. Bowers J. Pillow
G. Chandler H. B. Porter
P. R. Evans J. P. Swezy, Jr.
S. Flynn K. R. Willens
P. Gilston E. W. Woelfel COMMITTEE ON FIBER-REINFORCED PLASTIC PRESSURE VESSELS
F. Hamtak E. Molina, Delegate (BPV X)
A. Howard B. R. Newmark, Honorary Member
D. Eisberg, Chair D. H. Hodgkinson
B. F. Shelley, Vice Chair L. E. Hunt
P. D. Stumpf, Staff Secretary D. L. Keeler
Subgroup on Materials (BPV IX)
A. L. Beckwith B. M. Linnemann
M. Bernasek, Chair M. J. Pischke D. Bentley D. H. McCauley
T. Anderson A. Roza F. L. Brown
N. L. Newhouse
J. L. Arnold C. E. Sainz J. L. Bustillos
D. J. Painter
E. Cutlip B. R. Colley
W. J. Sperko A. A. Pollock
S. S. Fiore T. W. Cowley
M. J. Stanko G. Ramirez
S. E. Gingrich I. L. Dinovo
L. S. Harbison P. L. Sturgill M. R. Gorman J. R. Richter
R. M. Jessee J. Warren B. Hebb D. O. Yancey, Jr.
T. Melfi C. Zanfir M. J. Hendrix P. H. Ziehl

xli
 COMMITTEE ON NUCLEAR INSERVICE INSPECTION (BPV XI) China International Working Group (BPV XI)
G. C. Park, Chair S. A. Norman J. H. Liu, Chair Y. Liu
S. D. Kulat, Vice Chair J. E. O’Sullivan Y. Nie, Vice Chair W. N. Pei
R. W. Swayne, Vice Chair R. K. Rhyne C. Ye, Vice Chair C. L. Peng
L. Powers, Staff Secretary A. T. Roberts III M. W. Zhou, Secretary G. X. Tang
V. L. Armentrout D. A. Scarth J. F. Cai Q. Wang
J. F. Ball F. J. Schaaf, Jr. D. X. Chen Q. W. Wang
W. H. Bamford J. C. Spanner, Jr. H. Chen Z. S. Wang
S. B. Brown D. J. Tilly H. D. Chen L. Wei
T. L. Chan D. E. Waskey Y. B. Guo F. Xu
R. C. Cipolla J. G. Weicks Y. Hou Z. Y. Xu
D. R. Cordes H. D. Chung, Delegate D. M. Kang Q. Yin
D. D. Davis C. Ye, Delegate S. W. Li K. Zhang
R. L. Dyle R. E. Gimple, Contributing Member X. Y. Liang X. L. Zhang
E. V. Farrell, Jr. R. D. Kerr, Contributing Member S. X. Lin Y. Zhang
M. J. Ferlisi B. R. Newton, Contributing Member L. Q. Liu Z. M. Zhong
P. D. Fisher R. A. West, Contributing Member
E. B. Gerlach R. A. Yonekawa, Contributing
T. J. Griesbach Member Germany International Working Group (BPV XI)
J. Hakii M. L. Benson, Alternate
D. O. Henry J. T. Lindberg, Alternate H.-R. Bath U. Jendrich
W. C. Holston R. O. McGill, Alternate R. Doring H. Schau
D. W. Lamond C. J. Wirtz, Alternate B. Erhard
H.-J. Scholtka
D. R. Lee C. D. Cowfer, Honorary Member M. Hagenbruch
G. A. Lofthus F. E. Gregor, Honorary Member B. Hoffmann X. Schuler
E. J. Maloney O. F. Hedden, Honorary Member E. Iacopetta J. Wendt
G. Navratil P. C. Riccardella, Honorary Member

Special Working Group on Editing and Review (BPV XI)

R. W. Swayne, Chair J. E. Staffiera
C. E. Moyer D. J. Tilly
K. R. Rao C. J. Wirtz

Task Group on Inspectability (BPV XI)

Executive Committee (BPV XI)
J. T. Lindberg, Chair D. Lieb
S. D. Kulat, Chair W. C. Holston M. J. Ferlisi, Secretary G. A. Lofthus
G. C. Park, Vice Chair D. W. Lamond W. H. Bamford D. E. Matthews
L. Powers, Staff Secretary J. T. Lindberg A. Cardillo P. J. O’Regan
W. H. Bamford R. K. Rhyne D. R. Cordes
J. Ossmann
R. L. Dyle J. C. Spanner, Jr. D. O. Henry
R. Rishel
M. J. Ferlisi R. W. Swayne E. Henry
J. Honcharik S. A. Sabo
E. B. Gerlach M. L. Benson, Alternate
J. Howard P. Sullivan
R. Klein C. Thomas
C. Latiolais J. Tucker

Task Group on ISI of Spent Nuclear Fuel Storage and Transportation

Containment Systems (BPV XI)
K. Hunter, Chair R. M. Meyer
A. Alleshwaram, Secretary B. L. Montgomery
Argentina International Working Group (BPV XI)
D. J. Ammerman M. Moran
O. Martinez, Staff Secretary R. J. Lopez W. H. Borter T. Nuoffer
D. A. Cipolla M. Magliocchi J. Broussard M. Orihuela
A. Claus L. R. Miño S. Brown R. Pace
D. Costa J. Monte C. R. Bryan
E. L. Pleins
D. P. Delfino M. D. Pereda T. Carraher
R. Sindelar
D. N. Dell’Erba A. Politi D. Dunn
H. Smith
A. Dominguez C. G. Real N. Fales
S. A. Echeverria F. M. Schroeter R. C. Folley J. C. Spanner, Jr.
E. P. Fresquet G. J. Scian B. Gutherman C. J. Temus
M. M. Gamizo M. J. Solari S. Horowitz G. White
I. M. Guerreiro P. N. Torano M. W. Joseph X. J. Zhai
M. F. Liendo O. A. Verastegui H. Jung P.-S. Lam, Alternate
F. Llorente P. Yamamoto M. Liu J. Wise, Alternate

xlii
 Subgroup on Evaluation Standards (SG-ES) (BPV XI) Task Group on Evaluation Procedures for Degraded Buried Pipe
(WG-PFE) (BPV XI)
W. H. Bamford, Chair Y. S. Li
N. A. Palm, Secretary R. O. McGill R. O. McGill, Chair G. A. A. Miessi
H. D. Chung H. S. Mehta S. X. Xu, Secretary M. Moenssens
R. C. Cipolla K. Miyazaki G. A. Antaki D. P. Munson
R. L. Dyle R. Pace R. C. Cipolla R. Pace
C. M. Faidy J. C. Poehler K. Hasegawa P. J. Rush
B. R. Ganta S. Ranganath K. M. Hoffman D. A. Scarth
T. J. Griesbach D. A. Scarth
K. Hasegawa T. V. Vo
K. Hojo K. R. Wichman
D. N. Hopkins S. X. Xu
K. Koyama M. L. Benson, Alternate
D. R. Lee T. Hardin, Alternate Working Group on Operating Plant Criteria (SG-ES) (BPV XI)
N. A. Palm, Chair A. D. Odell
A. E. Freed, Secretary R. Pace
V. Marthandam, Secretary J. C. Poehler
K. R. Baker S. Ranganath
Task Group on Evaluation of Beyond Design Basis Events (SG-ES) W. H. Bamford W. L. Server
(BPV XI) M. Brumovsky
D. V. Sommerville
T. L. Dickson
R. Pace, Chair S. A. Kleinsmith C. A. Tomes
R. L. Dyle
K. E. Woods, Secretary H. S. Mehta A. Udyawar
S. R. Gosselin
G. A. Antaki D. V. Sommerville T. J. Griesbach T. V. Vo
P. R. Donavin M. Hayashi D. P. Weakland
T. V. Vo
R. G. Gilada S. A. Kleinsmith K. E. Woods
K. R. Wichman
T. J. Griesbach H. Kobayashi H. Q. Xu
H. L. Gustin G. M. Wilkowski
H. S. Mehta T. Hardin, Alternate
M. Hayashi S. X. Xu
K. Hojo T. Weaver, Contributing Member

Working Group on Pipe Flaw Evaluation (SG-ES) (BPV XI)

Working Group on Flaw Evaluation (SG-ES) (BPV XI) D. A. Scarth, Chair E. J. Houston
R. C. Cipolla, Chair D. R. Lee G. M. Wilkowski, Secretary R. Janowiak
S. X. Xu, Secretary Y. S. Li K. Azuma S. Kalyanam
W. H. Bamford W. H. Bamford K. Kashima
M. Liu
M. L. Benson M. L. Benson V. Lacroix
H. S. Mehta
B. Bezensek M. Brumovsky Y. S. Li
G. A. A. Miessi
M. Brumovsky F. W. Brust R. O. McGill
K. Miyazaki H. D. Chung
H. D. Chung R. K. Qashu H. S. Mehta
T. E. Demers R. C. Cipolla
S. Ranganath G. A. A. Miessi
C. M. Faidy N. G. Cofie
P. J. Rush K. Miyazaki
B. R. Ganta J. M. Davis
D. A. Scarth S. H. Pellet
R. G. Gilada T. E. Demers
W. L. Server C. M. Faidy H. Rathbun
H. L. Gustin P. J. Rush
F. D. Hayes D.-J. Shim B. R. Ganta
A. Udyawar S. R. Gosselin D.-J. Shim
P. H. Hoang
T. V. Vo C. E. Guzman-Leong A. Udyawar
K. Hojo
B. Wasiluk K. Hasegawa T. V. Vo
D. N. Hopkins
K. R. Wichman P. H. Hoang B. Wasiluk
Y. Kim
K. Koyama G. M. Wilkowski K. Hojo S. X. Xu
V. Lacroix D. L. Rudland, Alternate D. N. Hopkins A. Alleshwaram, Alternate

Task Group on Crack Growth Reference Curves (BPV XI) Subgroup on Nondestructive Examination (SG-NDE) (BPV XI)
D. A. Scarth, Chair D. N. Hopkins J. C. Spanner, Jr., Chair J. T. Lindberg
H. I. Gustin, Secretary K. Kashima D. R. Cordes, Secretary G. A. Lofthus
W. H. Bamford K. Koyama T. L. Chan G. R. Perkins
M. L. Benson D. R. Lee S. E. Cumblidge S. A. Sabo
F. W. Brust H. S. Mehta F. E. Dohmen F. J. Schaaf, Jr.
R. C. Cipolla K. Miyazaki K. J. Hacker R. V. Swain
R. L. Dyle S. Ranganath J. Harrison C. J. Wirtz
K. Hasegawa T. V. Vo D. O. Henry C. A. Nove, Alternate

xliii
Working Group on Personnel Qualification and Surface Visual and Task Group on Repair by Carbon Fiber Composites
Eddy Current Examination (SG-NDE) (BPV XI) (WGN-MRR) (BPV XI)

J. T. Lindberg, Chair D. O. Henry J. E. O'Sullivan, Chair P. Raynaud

J. E. Aycock, Secretary J. W. Houf B. Davenport C. W. Rowley
C. Brown, Secretary C. Shinsky M. Golliet V. Roy
S. E. Cumblidge J. C. Spanner, Jr. L. S. Gordon J. Sealey
A. Diaz J. T. Timm M. P. Marohl N. Stoeva
N. Farenbaugh C. J. Wirtz N. Meyer M. F. Uddin
R. P. Ojdrovic J. Wen
D. Peguero T. Jimenez, Alternate
A. Pridmore G. M. Lupia, Alternate

Working Group on Procedure Qualification and Volumetric Working Group on Design and Programs (SG-RRA) (BPV XI)
Examination (SG-NDE) (BPV XI)
S. B. Brown, Chair H. Malikowski
G. A. Lofthus, Chair F. E. Dohmen A. B. Meichler, Secretary M. A. Pyne
J. Harrison, Secretary K. J. Hacker O. Bhatty
P. Raynaud
G. R. Perkins, Secretary D. A. Kull R. Clow
M. T. Anderson C. A. Nove R. R. Stevenson
R. R. Croft
M. Briley D. Nowakowski E. V. Farrell, Jr. R. W. Swayne
A. Bushmire S. A. Sabo E. B. Gerlach R. Turner
D. R. Cordes R. V. Swain
M. Dennis S. J. Todd
S. R. Doctor D. K. Zimmerman Subgroup on Water-Cooled Systems (SG-WCS) (BPV XI)
D. W. Lamond, Chair K. W. Hall
G Navratil, Secretary P. J. Hennessey
J. M. Agold K. Hoffman
V. L. Armentrout S. D. Kulat
Subgroup on Repair/Replacement Activities (SG-RRA) (BPV XI) J. M. Boughman
T. Nomura
S. B. Brown
E. B. Gerlach, Chair J. E. O’Sullivan S. T. Chesworth T. Nuoffer
E. V. Farrell, Jr., Secretary S. Schuessler D. D. Davis G. C. Park
J. F. Ball R. R. Stevenson H. Q. Do H. M. Stephens, Jr.
S. B. Brown M. J. Ferlisi M. J. Homiack, Alternate
R. W. Swayne
R. Clow
D. J. Tilly
P. D. Fisher
K. J. Karwoski D. E. Waskey
Task Group on High Strength Nickel Alloys Issues (SG-WCS) (BPV XI)
S. L. McCracken J. G. Weicks
B. R. Newton P. Raynaud, Alternate R. L. Dyle, Chair H. Malikowski
B. L. Montgomery, Secretary S. E. Marlette
W. H. Bamford G. C. Park
P. R. Donavin G. R. Poling
K. Hoffman J. M. Shuping
K. Koyama J. C. Spanner, Jr.
Working Group on Welding and Special Repair Processes (SG-RRA) C. Lohse D. P. Weakland
(BPV XI)
D. E. Waskey, Chair M. Kris Working Group on Containment (SG-WCS) (BPV XI)
D. J. Tilly, Secretary S. L. McCracken
D. Barborak D. B. Meredith H. M. Stephens, Jr., Chair J. McIntyre
S. J. Findlan S. G. Brown, Secretary J. A. Munshi
B. R. Newton
P. D. Fisher P. S. Ghosal
J. E. O’Sullivan M. Sircar
M. L. Hall H. T. Hill
K. J. Karwoski D. Segletes R. D. Hough S. Walden, Alternate
C. C. Kim J. G. Weicks B. Lehman T. J. Herrity, Alternate

Working Group on Inspection of Systems and Components

(SG-WCS) (BPV XI)
M. J. Ferlisi, Chair S. D. Kulat
Working Group on Nonmetals Repair/Replacement Activities
N. Granback, Secretary A. Lee
(SG-RRA) (BPV XI)
J. M. Agold G. J. Navratil
J. E. O'Sullivan, Chair T. M. Musto R. W. Blyde
T. Nomura
S. Schuessler, Secretary S. Patterson C. Cueto-Felgueroso
J. Johnston, Jr. A. Pridmore H. Q. Do J. C. Nygaard
M. Lashley P. Raynaud K. W. Hall R. Rishel
M. P. Marohl F. J. Schaaf, Jr. K. M. Hoffman J. C. Younger

xliv
 Working Group on Pressure Testing (SG-WCS) (BPV XI) COMMITTEE ON TRANSPORT TANKS (BPV XII)
J. M. Boughman, Chair A. E. Keyser M. D. Rana, Chair M. Pitts
S. A. Norman, Secretary D. W. Lamond N. J. Paulick, Vice Chair T. A. Rogers
T. Anselmi J. K. McClanahan R. Lucas, Staff Secretary S. Staniszewski
Y.-K. Chung B. L. Montgomery A. N. Antoniou A. P. Varghese
M. J. Homiack C. Thomas P. Chilukuri J. A. Byers, Contributing Member
W. L. Garfield R. Meyers, Contributing Member
G. G. Karcher M. R. Ward, Contributing Member

Task Group on Buried Components Inspection and Testing

(WG-PT) (BPV XI)
D. W. Lamond, Chair B. Davenport
J. M. Boughman, Secretary A. Hiser Executive Committee (BPV XII)
M. Moenssens, Secretary J. Ossmann
T. Anselmi N. J. Paulick, Chair M. D. Rana
R. Lucas, Staff Secretary S. Staniszewski
M. Pitts A. P. Varghese

Working Group on Risk-Informed Activities (SG-WCS) (BPV XI)

M. A. Pyne, Chair D. W. Lamond
S. T. Chesworth, Secretary R. K. Mattu
J. M. Agold A. McNeill III Subgroup on Design and Materials (BPV XII)
C. Cueto-Felgueroso
G. J. Navratil A. P. Varghese, Chair T. A. Rogers
R. Haessler
P. J. O’Regan R. C. Sallash, Secretary S. Staniszewski
J. Hakii
N. A. Palm D. K. Chandiramani K. Xu
K. W. Hall
D. Vetter P. Chilukuri
M. J. Homiack A. T. Duggleby, Contributing
Y. Doron
S. D. Kulat J. C. Younger Member
R. D. Hayworth
G. G. Karcher T. J. Hitchcock, Contributing
S. L. McWilliams Member
N. J. Paulick M. R. Ward, Contributing Member
Working Group on General Requirements (BPV XI) M. D. Rana J. Zheng, Contributing Member
R. K. Rhyne, Chair P. J. Hennessey
C. E. Moyer, Secretary E. J. Maloney
J. F. Ball R. K. Mattu
T. L. Chan T. Nuoffer

Subgroup on Fabrication, Inspection, and Continued Service

(BPV XII)

Special Working Group on Reliability and Integrity Management M. Pitts, Chair L. Selensky
Program (BPV XI) P. Chilukuri, Secretary S. Staniszewski
R. D. Hayworth S. E. Benet, Contributing Member
F. J. Schaaf, Jr., Chair D. M. Jones K. Mansker J. A. Byers, Contributing Member
A. T. Roberts III, Secretary A. L. Krinzman G. McRae A. S. Olivares, Contributing
N. Broom D. R. Lee O. Mulet Member
S. R. Doctor R. K. Miller T. A. Rogers L. H. Strouse, Contributing Member
S. Downey M. Rudek S. V. Voorhees, Contributing
M. N. Mitchell
J. D. Fletcher R. C. Sallash Member
J. T. Fong R. Morrill
T. Graham T. Roney
N. Granback R. W. Swayne
J. Grimm S. Takaya

Subgroup on General Requirements (BPV XII)

S. Staniszewski, Chair P. Chilukuri, Contributing Member
JSME/ASME Joint Task Group for System-Based Code (SWG-RIM)
B. F. Pittel, Secretary K. L. Gilmore, Contributing Member
(BPV XI)
A. N. Antoniou T. J. Hitchcock, Contributing
T. Asayama, Chair D. R. Lee Y. Doron Member
S. R. Doctor H. Machida J. L. Freiler G. McRae, Contributing Member
K. Dozaki M. Morishita W. L. Garfield S. L. McWilliams, Contributing
S. R. Gosselin O. Mulet Member
A. T. Roberts III
M. Hayashi M. Pitts T. A. Rogers, Contributing Member
D. M. Jones F. J. Schaaf, Jr. T. Rummel D. G. Shelton, Contributing Member
Y. Kamishima S. Takaya R. C. Sallash L. H. Strouse, Contributing Member
A. L. Krinzman D. Watanabe L. Selensky M. R. Ward, Contributing Member

xlv
 Subgroup on Nonmandatory Appendices (BPV XII) Subcommittee on Safety Valve Requirements (SC-SVR)

N. J. Paulick, Chair D. G. Shelton D. B. DeMichael, Chair W. F. Hart

S. Staniszewski, Secretary S. E. Benet, Contributing Member C. E. O’Brien, Staff Secretary D. Miller
P. Chilukuri J. F. Ball B. K. Nutter
D. D. Brusewitz, Contributing
R. D. Hayworth J. Burgess
Member T. Patel
K. Mansker S. Cammeresi
T. J. Hitchcock, Contributing M. Poehlmann
S. L. McWilliams J. A. Cox
Member Z. Wang
N. J. Paulick R. D. Danzy
M. Pitts A. P. Varghese, Contributing J. P. Glaspie J. A. West
T. A. Rogers Member S. F. Harrison S. R. Irvin, Sr., Alternate
R. C. Sallash M. R. Ward, Contributing Member

COMMITTEE ON OVERPRESSURE PROTECTION (BPV XIII)

D. B. DeMichael, Chair S. F. Harrison
Subgroup on Design (SC-SVR)
C. E. O’Brien, Staff Secretary W. F. Hart
J. F. Ball D. Miller D. Miller, Chair T. Patel
J. Burgess B. K. Nutter C. E. Beair J. A. West
S. Cammeresi T. Patel B. Joergensen R. D. Danzy, Contributing Member
J. A. Cox M. Poehlmann B. J. Mollitor
R. D. Danzy Z. Wang
J. P. Glaspie J. A. West

COMMITTEE ON BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL CONFORMITY

ASSESSMENT (CBPVCA) Subgroup on General Requirements (SC-SVR)
P. D. Edwards, Chair D. Cheetham, Contributing Member J. F. Ball, Chair J. P. Glaspie
L. E. McDonald, Vice Chair T. P. Beirne, Alternate G. Brazier B. F. Pittel
K. I. Baron, Staff Secretary J. B. Carr, Alternate J. Burgess M. Poehlmann
M. Vazquez, Staff Secretary J. W. Dickson, Alternate D. B. DeMichael D. E. Tuttle
J. P. Chicoine J. M. Downs, Alternate S. T. French J. White
D. C. Cook B. J. Hackett, Alternate
T. E. Hansen
B. L. Krasiun, Alternate
K. T. Lau
D. W. Linaweaver, Alternate
D. Miller
P. F. Martin, Alternate
B. R. Morelock
I. Powell, Alternate
J. D. O’Leary
G. Scribner R. Rockwood, Alternate
Subgroup on Testing (SC-SVR)
B. C. Turczynski L. Skarin, Alternate
D. E. Tuttle R. D. Troutt, Alternate W. F. Hart, Chair A. Donaldson
R. Uebel S. V. Voorhees, Alternate T. P. Beirne G. D. Goodson
E. A. Whittle P. Williams, Alternate J. E. Britt B. K. Nutter
R. V. Wielgoszinski A. J. Spencer, Honorary Member J. Buehrer C. Sharpe
S. Cammeresi Z. Wang
J. A. Cox A. Wilson
J. W. Dickson S. R. Irvin, Sr., Alternate
COMMITTEE ON NUCLEAR CERTIFICATION (CNC)
R. R. Stevenson, Chair S. F. Harrison, Contributing
J. DeKleine, Vice Chair Member
E. Suarez, Staff Secretary S. Andrews, Alternate
G. Gobbi D. Arrigo, Alternate
S. M. Goodwin J. Ball, Alternate U.S. Technical Advisory Group ISO/TC 185 Safety Relief Valves
J. W. Highlands P. J. Coco, Alternate
K. A. Huber T. J. Bevilacqua, Chair D. Miller
P. D. Edwards, Alternate
J. C. Krane C. E. O’Brien, Staff Secretary B. K. Nutter
D. P. Gobbi, Alternate
M. A. Lockwood J. F. Ball T. Patel
K. M. Hottle, Alternate
R. P. McIntyre G. Brazier J. A. West
K. A. Kavanagh, Alternate D. B. DeMichael
L. M. Plante
P. Krane, Alternate
H. B. Prasse
T. E. Quaka D. Nenstiel, Alternate
C. T. Smith M. Paris, Alternate
C. Turylo G. Szabatura, Alternate
D. M. Vickery A. Torosyan, Alternate
E. A. Whittle S. V. Voorhees, Alternate
C. S. Withers S. Yang, Alternate

xlvi
 INTRODUCTION

Section III appendices are referred to as either Section III Appendices or Subsection Appendices. These appendices are
further designated as either mandatory or nonmandatory for use. Mandatory Appendices are referred to in the Section
III rules and contain requirements that must be followed in construction. Nonmandatory Appendices provide additional
information or guidance when using Section III.
Section III Appendices are contained in this book. These appendices have the potential for multiple subsection applic-
ability. Mandatory Appendices are designated by a Roman numeral followed, when appropriate, by Arabic numerals to
indicate the various articles, subarticles, and paragraphs of the appendix, such as II-1500 or XIII-2131. Nonmandatory
Appendices are designated by a capital letter followed, when appropriate, by Arabic numerals to indicate various
articles, subarticles, and paragraphs of the appendix, such as D-1200 or Y-2410.
Subsection Appendices are specifically applicable to one subsection and are contained within that subsection.
Subsection-specific Mandatory and Nonmandatory Appendices are numbered in the same manner as Section III Appen-
dices but with a subsection identifier (e.g., NF, D2, HBB, etc.) preceding either the Roman numeral or the capital letter for
a unique designation. For example, NF-II-1100 or NF-A-1200 would be a part of Subsection NF Mandatory Appendix
NF-II or Nonmandatory Appendix NF-A, respectively. For Subsection CC, D2-IV-1120 or D2-D-1330 would be a part
of Subsection CC Mandatory Appendix D2-IV or Nonmandatory Appendix D2-D, respectively.
A Reference Table (Table 1) has been developed for Section III Appendices to provide additional guidance on appendix
usage for the Code user. This Reference Table, reflecting down to a Subsection level, does not take precedence over Code
rules.

TABLE 1 ð17Þ

SECTION III APPENDICES REFERENCE TABLE

Div.
Division 1 2 Division 3 Division 5
Sub. Subsections Sub. Subsections Subsections
HA HB HC HF HG HH
Sub- Sub- Sub- Sub- Sub- Sub- Sub- Sub- Sub- Sub-
Appendix part part part part part part part part part part
Identifier NCA NB NC ND NE NF NG CC WA WB WC A B A B (1) A B (1) A A B (1) A
MANDATORY APPENDICES
I X X X X X (3) (3) (3) (3) X
II X X X X X X X (3) X (3) (3) (3) X
III X X X X X (3) (3) (3) (3)
IV X (3) (3) (3) (3)
V X (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) X (2) X (3) (2) (3) (2) (3) (3) (2) (4)
VI X X X X X X X X (3) (5) (3) (3) (3)
VII Not in use
VIII Not in use
IX Not in use
X Not in use
XI X X X X X (3) (3) (3) (3)
XII (3) (3) (3) (3)
XIII X X X X (3) (3) (3) (3)
XV Not in use

xlvii
 TABLE 1
SECTION III APPENDICES REFERENCE TABLE (CONT'D)

Div.
Division 1 2 Division 3 Division 5
Sub. Subsections Sub. Subsections Subsections
HA HB HC HF HG HH
Sub- Sub- Sub- Sub- Sub- Sub- Sub- Sub- Sub- Sub-
Appendix part part part part part part part part part part
Identifier NCA NB NC ND NE NF NG CC WA WB WC A B A B (1) A B (1) A A B (1) A
MANDATORY APPENDICES
XVI Not in use
XVII Not in use
XVIII X X X X (3) (3) (3) (3)
XIX X X (3) (3) (3) (3)
XX Not in use
XXI X (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (3) (2) (3) (2) (3) (3) (2)
XXII X (3) (3) (3) (3)
XXIII X X X X X (2) (2) (2) X (2) X (3) (5) (3) (2) (3) (3) (2) (4)
XXIV X (3) (3) (3) (3)
XXV
NONMANDATORY APPENDICES
A X X X X X X X X (3) X (3) (3) (3) X
B X (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) X (3) (2) (3) (2) (3) (3) (2) (4)
C X (2) X (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) X (2) X (3) (2) (3) (2) (3) (3) (2) (4)
D X X X X X X (5) X X (3) (5) (3) (3) (3)
E X X X (3) X (3) (3) (3)
F X X X X X X X X X (3) X (3) (3) (3) X
G X X X (2) X X X X (2) X X (2) (3) X (3) (2) (3) (3) X
H Not in use
I Not in use
J Not in use
K Not in use
L X X (3) (3) (3) (3)
M (3) (3) (3) (3)
N (3) (3) (3) (3)
O (3) (3) (3) (3)
P (3) (3) (3) (3)
Q (3) (3) (3) (3)
R X X X (3) (3) (3) (3)
S X X X (3) (3) (3) (3)
T X (3) (3) (3) (3)
U (3) (3) (3) (3)
V Not in use
W X (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (3) (2) (3) (2) (3) (3) (2)
X Not in use
Y X X X (3) (3) (3) (3)
Z (3) (3) (3) (3)
AA X (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) X (3) (2) (3) (2) (3) (3) (2) (4)
BB X X (3) (3) (3) (3)
CC X (2) (2) (3) (3) (3) (3)

xlviii
 TABLE 1
SECTION III APPENDICES REFERENCE TABLE (CONT'D)

NONMANDATORY APPENDICES
DD X (2) (2) (3) (3) (3) (3)
EE
FF X X

GENERAL NOTE: This reference table is not intended to provide specific Code requirements. It provides general guidance only. Mandatory
and Nonmandatory Appendices marked with an ‘X’ in the table are specifically referred to in the identified Subsection rules. Section III Man-
datory Appendices are not to be interpreted as being a requirement for all Section III Subsections. However, certain Mandatory or Nonman-
datory Section III Appendices may be appropriate for use in other subsections as long as the respective subsection rules are satisfied.
Sub. = Subsection
Div. = Division
NOTES:
(1) Subpart B for Subsections HB, HC, and HG contain provisions for the use of all or portions of the rules in Division 1, Subsections NB, NC,
and NG, respectively, if creep effects are negligible. In those circumstances, the reference to the Appendices is governed by the reference
defined for those respective subsections of Division 1.
(2) The Appendix reference determined by Subsection NCA (or, for Division 5, via Subsection HA, Subpart A referencing Subsection NCA)
shall apply.
(3) The Appendix reference determined by the referenced Division 1 Subsection shall apply.
(4) The Appendix reference determined by Subsection HA, Subpart B shall apply.
(5) The Appendix reference determined by Subsection NB shall apply.

xlix
ð17Þ ORGANIZATION OF SECTION III

1 GENERAL
Section III consists of Division 1, Division 2, Division 3, and Division 5. These Divisions are broken down into Subsec-
tions and are designated by capital letters preceded by the letter “N” for Division 1, by the letter “C” for Division 2, by the
letter “W” for Division 3, and by the letter “H” for Division 5. Each Subsection is published separately, with the exception
of those listed for Divisions 2, 3, and 5.
• Subsection NCA — General Requirements for Division 1 and Division 2
• Appendices
• Division 1*
– Subsection NB — Class 1 Components
– Subsection NC — Class 2 Components
– Subsection ND — Class 3 Components
– Subsection NE — Class MC Components
– Subsection NF — Supports
– Subsection NG — Core Support Structures
• Division 2 — Code for Concrete Containments
– Subsection CC — Concrete Containments
• Division 3 — Containment Systems for Transportation and Storage of Spent Nuclear Fuel and High-Level Radioactive
Material
– Subsection WA — General Requirements for Division 3
– Subsection WB — Class TC Transportation Containments
– Subsection WC — Class SC Storage Containments
– Subsection WD — Class ISS Internal Support Structures
• Division 5 — High Temperature Reactors
– Subsection HA — General Requirements
Subpart A — Metallic Materials
Subpart B — Graphite Materials
Subpart C — Composite Materials
– Subsection HB — Class A Metallic Pressure Boundary Components
Subpart A — Low Temperature Service
Subpart B — Elevated Temperature Service
– Subsection HC — Class B Metallic Pressure Boundary Components
Subpart A — Low Temperature Service
Subpart B — Elevated Temperature Service
– Subsection HF — Class A and B Metallic Supports
Subpart A — Low Temperature Service
– Subsection HG — Class A Metallic Core Support Structures
Subpart A — Low Temperature Service
Subpart B — Elevated Temperature Service
– Subsection HH — Class A Nonmetallic Core Support Structures
Subpart A — Graphite Materials
Subpart B — Composite Materials

2 SUBSECTIONS
Subsections are divided into Articles, subarticles, paragraphs, and, where necessary, subparagraphs and
subsubparagraphs.
*
The 2015 Edition of Section III was the last edition in which Section III, Division 1, Subsection NH, Class 1 Components in Elevated Tem-
perature Service, was published. The requirements located within Subsection NH were moved to Section III, Division 5, Subsection HB, Subpart
B for the elevated temperature construction of Class A components.

l
3 ARTICLES
Articles are designated by the applicable letters indicated above for the Subsections followed by Arabic numbers, such
as NB-1000. Where possible, Articles dealing with the same topics are given the same number in each Subsection, except
NCA, in accordance with the following general scheme:
Article Number Title
1000 Introduction or Scope
2000 Material
3000 Design
4000 Fabrication and Installation
5000 Examination
6000 Testing
7000 Overpressure Protection
8000 Nameplates, Stamping With Certification Mark, and Reports

The numbering of Articles and the material contained in the Articles may not, however, be consecutive. Due to the fact
that the complete outline may cover phases not applicable to a particular Subsection or Article, the rules have been pre-
pared with some gaps in the numbering.

4 SUBARTICLES
Subarticles are numbered in units of 100, such as NB-1100.

5 SUBSUBARTICLES
Subsubarticles are numbered in units of 10, such as NB-2130, and generally have no text. When a number such as
NB-1110 is followed by text, it is considered a paragraph.

6 PARAGRAPHS
Paragraphs are numbered in units of 1, such as NB-2121.

7 SUBPARAGRAPHS
Subparagraphs, when they are major subdivisions of a paragraph, are designated by adding a decimal followed by one
or more digits to the paragraph number, such as NB-1132.1. When they are minor subdivisions of a paragraph, subpar-
agraphs may be designated by lowercase letters in parentheses, such as NB-2121(a).

8 SUBSUBPARAGRAPHS
Subsubparagraphs are designated by adding lowercase letters in parentheses to the major subparagraph numbers,
such as NB-1132.1(a). When further subdivisions of minor subparagraphs are necessary, subsubparagraphs are desig-
nated by adding Arabic numerals in parentheses to the subparagraph designation, such as NB-2121(a)(1).

9 REFERENCES
References used within Section III generally fall into one of the following four categories:
(a) References to Other Portions of Section III. When a reference is made to another Article, subarticle, or paragraph, all
numbers subsidiary to that reference shall be included. For example, reference to Article NB-3000 includes all material
in Article NB-3000; reference to NB-3100 includes all material in subarticle NB-3100; reference to NB-3110 includes all
paragraphs, NB-3111 through NB-3113.
(b) References to Other Sections. Other Sections referred to in Section III are the following:
(1) Section II, Materials. When a requirement for a material, or for the examination or testing of a material, is to be in
accordance with a specification such as SA-105, SA-370, or SB-160, the reference is to material specifications in Section
II. These references begin with the letter “S.”

li
 (2) Section V, Nondestructive Examination. Section V references begin with the letter “T” and relate to the nondes-
tructive examination of material or welds.
(3) Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications. Section IX references begin with the letter “Q” and relate to weld-
ing and brazing requirements.
(4) Section XI, Rules for Inservice Inspection of Nuclear Power Plant Components. When a reference is made to inser-
vice inspection, the rules of Section XI shall apply.
(c) Reference to Specifications and Standards Other Than Published in Code Sections
(1) Specifications for examination methods and acceptance standards to be used in connection with them are pub-
lished by the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). At the time of publication of Section III, some such
specifications were not included in Section II of this Code. A reference to ASTM E94 refers to the specification so desig-
nated by and published by ASTM, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428.
(2) Dimensional standards covering products such as valves, flanges, and fittings are sponsored and published by
The American Society of Mechanical Engineers and approved by the American National Standards Institute.** When a
product is to conform to such a standard, for example ASME B16.5, the standard is approved by the American National
Standards Institute. The applicable year of issue is that suffixed to its numerical designation in Table NCA-7100-1, for
example ASME B16.5-2003. Standards published by The American Society of Mechanical Engineers are available from
ASME (https://www.asme.org/).
(3) Dimensional and other types of standards covering products such as valves, flanges, and fittings are also pub-
lished by the Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry and are known as Standard Prac-
tices. When a product is required by these rules to conform to a Standard Practice, for example MSS SP-100, the Standard
Practice referred to is published by the Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.
(MSS), 127 Park Street, NE, Vienna, VA 22180. The applicable year of issue of such a Standard Practice is that suffixed
to its numerical designation in Table NCA-7100-1, for example MSS SP-89-2003.
(4) Specifications for welding and brazing materials are published by the American Welding Society (AWS), 8669
Doral Boulevard, Suite 130, Doral, FL 33166. Specifications of this type are incorporated in Section II and are identified
by the AWS designation with the prefix “SF,” for example SFA-5.1.
(5) Standards applicable to the design and construction of tanks and flanges are published by the American Petro-
leum Institute and have designations such as API-605. When documents so designated are referred to in Section III, for
example API-605–1988, they are standards published by the American Petroleum Institute and are listed in Table NCA-
7100-1.
(d) References to Appendices. Section III uses two types of appendices that are designated as either Section III Appen-
dices or Subsection Appendices. Either of these appendices is further designated as either Mandatory or Nonmandatory
for use. Mandatory Appendices are referred to in the Section III rules and contain requirements that must be followed in
construction. Nonmandatory Appendices provide additional information or guidance when using Section III.
(1) Section III Appendices are contained in a separate book titled “Appendices.” These appendices have the potential
for multiple subsection applicability. Mandatory Appendices are designated by a Roman numeral followed, when appro-
priate, by Arabic numerals to indicate various articles, subarticles, and paragraphs of the appendix, such as II-1500 or
XIII-1210. Nonmandatory Appendices are designated by a capital letter followed, when appropriate, by Arabic numerals
to indicate various articles, subarticles, and paragraphs of the appendix, such as D-1200 or Y-1440.
(2) Subsection Appendices are specifically applicable to just one subsection and are contained within that subsec-
tion. Subsection-specific mandatory and nonmandatory appendices are numbered in the same manner as Section III Ap-
pendices, but with a subsection identifier (e.g., NF, NH, D2, etc.) preceding either the Roman numeral or the capital letter
for a unique designation. For example, NF-II-1100 or NF-A-1200 would be part of a Subsection NF mandatory or non-
mandatory appendix, respectively. For Subsection CC, D2-IV-1120 or D2-D-1330 would be part of a Subsection CC man-
datory or nonmandatory appendix, respectively.
(3) It is the intent of this Section that the information provided in both Mandatory and Nonmandatory Appendices
may be used to meet the rules of any Division or Subsection. In case of conflict between Appendix rules and Division/
Subsection rules, the requirements contained in the Division/Subsection shall govern. Additional guidance on Appendix
usage is provided in the front matter of Section III Appendices.
**
The American National Standards Institute (ANSI) was formerly known as the American Standards Association. Standards approved by the
Association were designated by the prefix “ASA” followed by the number of the standard and the year of publication. More recently, the Amer-
ican National Standards Institute was known as the United States of America Standards Institute. Standards were designated by the prefix
“USAS” followed by the number of the standard and the year of publication. While the letters of the prefix have changed with the name of
the organization, the numbers of the standards have remained unchanged.

lii
SUMMARY OF CHANGES

Errata to the BPV Code may be posted on the ASME Web site to provide corrections to incorrectly published items, or to
correct typographical or grammatical errors in the BPV Code. Such Errata shall be used on the date posted.

Information regarding Special Notices and Errata is published by ASME at http://go.asme.org/BPVCerrata.

Changes given below are identified on the pages by a margin note, (17), placed next to the affected area.

The Record Numbers listed below are explained in more detail in “List of Changes in Record Number Order” following
this Summary of Changes.

Page Location Change (Record Number)

xx List of Sections Updated
xxv Submittal of Technical Revised in its entirety (13-2222)
Inquiries to the Boiler
and Pressure Vessel
Standards Committees
xlvii Introduction In Table 1, Appendix XIV row deleted and for Appendix XIII, “X”
added in NB column (16-148)
xxviii Personnel Updated
l Organization of Section III (1) In “1 General,” title of Section III, Division 3 revised (13-1594)
(2) In “1 General,” for Section III, Division 3, Subsection WD added
(3) In “1 General,” entry for Subsection NH deleted and footnote
editorially revised
(4) In “9 References,” subparas. (a) and (d)(1) revised (16-148)
26 II-1100 Paragraph added (16-626)
26 II-1221 Revised (16-626)
27 II-1240 First sentence revised (16-148)
28 II-1510 (1) Subparagraphs (a) and (b) revised (16-626)
(2) Former endnote 1 incorporated into II-1100 and deleted from
Endnotes (16-626)
28 II-1520 Subparagraphs (a) and (b) revised (16-626)
33 II-1610 Subparagraph (b) revised (16-148)
39 Mandatory Appendix III Revised in its entirety (15-2079)
67 Form G-1 Added and editorially revised (14-2186, 17-1302)
69 Form G-2 Added and editorially revised (14-2186, 17-1302)
71 Form G-4 Added and editorially revised (14-2186, 17-1302)
73 Table V-1000 Revised (14-2186)
86 XI-1121 Former endnote 2 incorporated into Table XI-3221.1-1 General Note
and deleted from Endnotes (16-626)
86 XI-1123 Former endnote 3 incorporated into paragraph and deleted from
Endnotes (16-626)
89 XI-3130 In nomenclature, terms for b , m , and y revised (16-626)

liii
Page Location Change (Record Number)
94 Table XI-3221.1-1 General Note revised (16-626)
95 XI-3223 Former endnote 4 incorporated into paragraph and deleted from
Endnotes (16-626)
97 XI-3261 Former endnote 5 added as fourth paragraph and deleted from
Endnotes (16-626)
100 XI-3262 Former endnote 6 added as an in-text Note and deleted from
Endnotes (16-626)
107 Mandatory Appendix XIII Revised in its entirety (02-2618, 15-2523, 17-418)
132 Mandatory Appendix XIV Deleted (16-148)
133 XVIII-1110 Former endnotes 13 and 14 incorporated into text and deleted from
Endnotes (16-2030)
141 XVIII-1150 (1) Former endnote 15 deleted (16-2030)
(2) First sentence revised (16-2030)
(3) Former endnote 16 incorporated into paragraph following
nomenclature and deleted from Endnotes (16-2030)
150 Mandatory Appendix XXIII Title revised (11-243, 15-209)
150 XXIII-1100 First paragraph revised (11-243)
150 XXIII-1200 XXIII-1210 through XXIII-1270 revised (11-243, 15-209)
152 XXIII-1300 XXIII-1310 through XXIII-1370 revised (15-209)
155 Supplement 1 Title, first paragraph, and 1.1 and 1.2 revised (15-209)
156 Supplement 2 Title and first, third, and sixth paragraphs revised (15-209)
159 Table S2-3 Entries for Nonmandatory Appendix F deleted (15-2531)
163 Supplement 3 Added (15-209)
164 Supplement 4 (1) Former Supplement 3 redesignated as Supplement 4 (15-209)
(2) Former Forms S3-1 through S3-5 revised and redesignated as
Forms S4-1 through S4-5, respectively (15-209)
(3) Form S4-6 added (15-209)
170 XXVI-2110 Subparagraph (b) revised (15-805)
172 XXVI-2230 Subparagraph (d) revised (15-805)
172 XXVI-2231 Subparagraph (d) revised (15-805)
172 XXVI-2232 Subparagraphs (e) and (f) revised (15-805)
172 XXVI-2233 Subparagraph (c) revised (15-805)
173 XXVI-2234 Subparagraphs (c) and (e), and XXVI-2234.3(b) revised (15-805)
173 XXVI-2235 Subparagraphs (d) and (f) revised (15-805)
173 XXVI-2236 Added (15-805)
173 XXVI-2237 Former XXVI-2236 redesignated as XXVI-2237, and subpara. (e)
revised (15-805)
174 Figure XXVI-2234-1 In General Note, "W m i n " corrected by errata to "w m i n " (16-1122)
175 XXVI-2238 (1) Former XXVI-2237 redesignated as XXVI-2238 (15-805)
(2) First paragraph and subparas. (c) and (e) revised (15-805)

liv
Page Location Change (Record Number)
175 XXVI-2310 (1) Subparagraph (d) revised (15-805)
(2) New subpara. (f) added and former subpara. (f) redesignated as
(g) (15-805)
176 XXVI-2320 Revised in its entirety (15-805)
176 XXVI-2330 Revised in its entirety (15-805)
176 XXVI-2400 First paragraph revised (15-805)
177 Table XXVI-2511-1 Revised (15-805)
178 Table XXVI-2512-1 Revised (15-805)
179 Table XXVI-2520(a)-1 Notes revised (15-805)
179 Table XXVI-2520(a)-2 In “Test Method” column, fifth entry revised (15-805)
180 XXVI-2530 Subparagraphs (a)(3) and (b)(11) revised (15-805)
181 XXVI-3100 First sentence revised (15-805)
181 XXVI-3110 In nomenclature, terms for A b , D i , d i , D o , d o , F b , I , n b , S b , t , W i , Z b ,
Z r , and σ b added, and term for Z revised (15-805)
183 XXVI-3132 Subparagraphs (a) and (c) revised, and subpara. (e) added (15-805)
184 XXVI-3132.1 Subparagraph (c) revised (15-805)
184 XXVI-3134 Added (15-805)
185 XXVI-3135 Added (15-805)
185 XXVI-3210 Omega symbols corrected by errata from italic to roman (16-1122)
186 XXVI-3230 Added (15-805)
187 XXVI-3314 Added (15-805)
189 Figure XXVI-3132-1 Revised (15-805)
190 Table XXVI-3133-1 Last entry in last column corrected by errata (15-805, 16-1123)
190 Table XXVI-3210-1 General Note added (15-805)
192 Table XXVI-3220-1 Revised (15-805)
192 Table XXVI-3220-1M Revised (15-805)
193 Table XXVI-3311-1 Revised (15-805)
196 XXVI-4110 Subparagraphs (a), (b), and (c) revised (15-805)
197 Figure XXVI-4110-2 Added (15-805)
197 XXVI-4130 Subparagraph (c) added (15-805)
198 XXVI-4131.1 Revised (15-805)
198 XXVI-4131.3 Added (15-805)
198 XXVI-4212 Subparagraph (b) revised (15-805)
198 XXVI-4231 (1) First paragraph and subparas. (a), (b), and (c) revised (15-805)
(2) Subparagraph (d) added (15-805)
198 XXVI-4240 Revised (15-805)
199 Figure XXVI-4230-1 Revised (15-805, 16-1122)
201 XXVI-4312 Revised in its entirety (15-805)

lv
Page Location Change (Record Number)
201 XXVI-4321 Subparagraphs (b) and (c) revised (15-805)
201 XXVI-4322 First sentence revised (15-805)
201 XXVI-4322.1 Revised (15-805)
201 XXVI-4323 Last sentence revised (15-805)
202 XXVI-4332 Revised (15-805)
202 XXVI-4333 Revised (15-805)
202 XXVI-4342 Subparagraphs (a), (b), and (e) revised (15-805)
202 XXVI-4412 Subparagraphs (a)(1) and (b) revised (15-805)
202 XXVI-4421 Title revised (15-805)
202 XXVI-4422 Title and subpara. (a) revised (15-805)
203 XXVI-4423 Title revised (15-805)
203 XXVI-4440 First paragraph revised (15-805)
203 XXVI-4451 Subparagraph (b) revised (15-805)
203 XXVI-4452 Revised (15-805)
203 XXVI-4520 Subparagraphs (a), (d), (e), and (f) revised (15-805)
204 XXVI-4521 Added (15-805)
205 Figure XXVI-4520-2 Added (15-805)
205 Table XXVI-4521.1-1 Added (15-805)
206 XXVI-5111 (1) Subparagraph (c) revised (15-805, 15-1010)
(2) New subpara. (d) added, and former subpara. (d) redesignated
as (e) (15-805)
206 XXVI-5113 Subparagraphs (a), (b), (c), and (c)(4) revised (15-805)
206 XXVI-5114 Subparagraphs (a)(2) through (a)(5) and (b) revised (15-805)
207 XXVI-5210 Revised (15-805)
207 XXVI-5220 Revised (15-805)
207 XXVI-5321 Title and subpara. (a) revised (15-805)
209 XXVI-5322 Added (15-805)
209 XXVI-5325 Former XXVI-5322 redesignated as XXVI-5325 (15-805)
208 Figure XXVI-5220-2 Added (15-805)
209 XXVI-5330 Revised (15-805)
211 XXVI-5410 Subparagraph (b) revised (15-805)
211 XXVI-5421 Subparagraph (b) revised (15-805)
211 XXVI-5422 Subparagraph (b)(2) revised (15-805)
210 Figure XXVI-5330-1 Added (15-805)
212 XXVI-6111 Revised (15-805)
212 XXVI-6114.1 Revised (15-805)
212 XXVI-6121 Revised (15-805)

lvi
Page Location Change (Record Number)
213 XXVI-6223 Subparagraph (a) revised (15-805)
213 XXVI-6224 Revised (15-805)
217 XXVI-9100 (1) In definition of lot, subpara. (b) revised (15-805)
(2) Definition of void free deleted (15-805)
218 Table XXVI-I-100-1 Revised (15-805)
219 Supplement XXVI-IIA Former Supplement XXVI-II redesignated as Supplement XXVI-IIA
(15-805)
220 Table XXVI-IIA-421 Entry for “Scanning technique” revised (15-805)
221 Supplement XXVI-IIB Added (15-805)
229 Supplement XXVI-D Added (15-805)
232 Mandatory Appendix Added (15-2522)
XXVII
252 A-5250 Revised (16-148)
253 A-6110 Subparagraph (c)(4) revised (16-148)
254 A-6233 Step 9 revised (16-148)
264 A-8142.1 Subparagraphs (a) and (b) revised (16-148)
265 A-8142.2 Subparagraphs (a), (b), and last paragraph of Example 2 revised
(16-148)
268 A-8143.1 Revised (16-148)
287 B-2123.1 Subparagraph (a) revised (16-148)
290 B-2163 Last sentence revised (16-148)
303 C-1340 Revised (16-148)
307 Nonmandatory (1) Title added (15-2081)
Appendix E (2) Article E-1000 title, and E-1110, E-1210(a)(1), and E-1210(b)
revised (15-2081, 16-148, 16-626, 16-1877)
(3) In E-1120, endnotes 25 and 26 deleted, and definition of b
revised (16-626)
309 F-1321 Revised (16-148)
309 F-1321.4 Subparagraphs (a) and (b) revised (16-148)
311 F-1321.6 Subparagraph (a) revised (16-148)
311 F-1321.7 Revised (16-148)
311 F-1321.9 Revised (16-148)
313 F-1332.7 Following the equation, clarifying phrase and definition of F a l l
added by errata (15-2509)
314 F-1334.5 Former F-1334.6(d) redesignated as F-1334.5(d) by errata
(15-2509, 15-2748)
314 F-1334.6 Subparagraph (d) redesignated as F-1334.5(d) by errata (15-2509,
15-2748)
316 F-1341.4 Subparagraph (a) revised (16-148)
326 G-2222 Subparagraph (d) revised (16-148)

lvii
Page Location Change (Record Number)
333 L-3191 (1) Definitions of b and y revised (16-626)
(2) Following definition of C 4 , former endnote 32 added as an
in-text Note and deleted from Endnotes (16-626)
339 L-3231.1 Former endnotes 33 and 34 added as in-text Notes and deleted from
Endnotes (16-626)
342 L-3243 Former endnote 35 incorporated into (a)(4)(-b) and deleted from
Endnotes (16-626)
344 L-3250 Former endnote 36 added as an in-text Note and deleted from
Endnotes (16-626)
347 Nonmandatory (1) Title added (15-2082)
Appendix N (2) Article N-1000 title and N-1100 revised (15-2082)
367 N-1227.2 Subparagraph (b) revised (15-2082)
413 Nonmandatory (1) Title added (15-2083)
Appendix O (2) Article O-1000 title, O-1110(a), and O-1120(g) revised (15-2083,
16-2008)
414 Figure O-1120(e)-2 Revised (16-2008)
428 S-1320 Last sentence corrected by errata (16-1166)
485 W-3210 First paragraph revised (16-148)
505 Nonmandatory Title added (15-2086)
Appendix Y
505 Article Y-1000 Title and Y-1110 revised (15-2086)
510 Y-3410 In subpara. (b)(2), text following eq. (NC-9) revised editorially
516 Y-5410 In subpara. (b)(2), text following eq. (NC-9) restructured by errata
(16-620)
518 Z-1300 Subparagraph (a) revised (13-970)
518 Z-1400 Subparagraphs (a), (e)(2), (e)(4), and (e)(5) revised (13-970)
519 Z-1500 Revised (13-970)
520 Article AA-1000 Article designator and title added, and paragraphs redesignated
editorially
523 Nonmandatory Title revised (15-2087)
Appendix BB
523 BB-1100 Revised (15-2087)
524 BB-2100 Former endnote 40 incorporated into first paragraph and deleted
from Endnotes (15-1904)
531 CC-1111 Revised (15-2088)
532 CC-2110 Former endnote 41 added as an in-text Note following subpara. (c)
and deleted from Endnotes (16-2027)
543 EE-1220 Former endnote 43 incorporated into third paragraph and deleted
from Endnotes (15-2548)
578 Nonmandatory Added (16-2046)
Appendix JJ

lviii
LIST OF CHANGES IN RECORD NUMBER ORDER

Record Number Change

02-2618 Completed revision of Mandatory Appendix XIII.
11-243 Revised title of Mandatory Appendix XXIII to reflect certification activities. Revised XXIII-1110
to certification rather than specialty field. Revised XXIII-1210 to clarify certification and speci-
alty field.
13-970 Aligned Nonmandatory Appendix Z with NCA-5000, re: spelling out ANI, ANIS, and AIA before
use of the abbreviation. Updated grammar. Clarified “Inspector” to mean the ANI.
13-1594 Revised the Organization of Section III to address the incorporation of a new proposed Subsec-
tion WD that addresses internal support structures.
13-2222 Revised the front guidance on interpretations in its entirety.
14-2186 Revised Mandatory Appendix V to add Graphite Core Component Certificate Holder’s Data Re-
port Forms G-1, G-2, and G-4 and Instructions.
15-209 Revised the term “Registered Professional Engineer” to “Certifying Engineer” and added re-
quirements to be consistent with changes in Mandatory Appendix XXIII.
15-805 Added provisions and requirements for electrofusion socket couplings and branch saddle con-
nections.
Added provisions for microwave volumetric examination of electrofusion fittings. Revised re-
quirements for HDPE to metallic flanged connections, and added provisions for HDPE-to-HDPE
flanged connections. Revised hydrostatic test pressure requirements. Added various other clar-
ifications and minor technical changes. Added reference to ASTM standards for acceptance of
volumetric examination for HDPE fittings.
Incorporated comments and resolved negatives from first consideration ballot 16-1916. Added
t to the nomenclature of XXVI-3110. Corrected editorial omissions for t e l b o w in XXVI-3132.1(c)
and Table XXVI-3132-1. These changes have been reviewed and approved by WG-HDPE Mate-
rials (III), WG-HDPE Design (III), WG-NMRR (XI), and SG-CD (III,) as applicable, and by
SG-MFE (III).
Incorporated editorial corrections.
15-1010 Revised XXVI-5111(c) to state: “Ultrasonic examination shall be in accordance with Section V,
Article 4 and Supplement XXVI-II. In cases of conflict, Supplement XXVI-II shall govern.”
15-1904 In Nonmandatory Appendix BB, incorporated endnote 40 into the body of the Code as the last
sentence of the first paragraph of BB-2100.
15-2079 Made minor revisions to Mandatory Appendix III.
15-2081 Made minor revisions to Nonmandatory Appendix E.
15-2082 Made minor revisions to Nonmandatory Appendix N.
15-2083 Made minor revisions to Nonmandatory Appendix O.
15-2086 Made minor revisions to Nonmandatory Appendix Y.
15-2087 Made minor revisions to Nonmandatory Appendix BB.
15-2088 Made minor revisions to Nonmandatory Appendix CC.
15-2509 Errata correction. See Summary of Changes for details.
15-2522 Renumbered and revised Nonmandatory Appendix F as Mandatory Appendix XXVII.
15-2523 Updated cross-reference in XIII-1144 for new Mandatory Appendix XVII.
15-2531 Removed cross-references to Nonmandatory Appendix F in Table S2-3, Load Capacity Data
Sheet.
15-2548 Updated Nonmandatory Appendix EE, to incorporate some endnotes into the text and delete
some endnotes.
15-2748 Errata correction. See Summary of Changes for details.
16-148 Revised numerous sections of text related to incorporation of revised Mandatory Appendix XIII.
16-620 Errata correction. See Summary of Changes for details.
16-626 Deleted endnote 1; incorporated text into II-1100. Removed reference to appurtenances and
portions of components and appurtenances from Article II-1000. Deleted endnote 2; incorpo-
rated text into the General Note to Table XI-3221.1-1, and updated the locations that referenced
the endnote to reference the table. Deleted endnote 3; incorporated text into XI-1123. Deleted

lix
 Record Number Change
endnote 4; incorporated text into XI-3223. Deleted endnote 5; incorporated text into XI-3261.
Deleted endnote 6; incorporated text into XI-3262. Deleted endnotes 25 and 26; incorporated
text into the General Note to Table XI-3221.1-1, and updated locations that referenced the end-
notes to reference the table. Deleted endnote 32; incorporated text into L-3191. Deleted end-
note 33; incorporated text into L-3231.1. Deleted endnote 34; incorporated text into L-3231.1.
Deleted endnote 35; incorporated text into L-3243(a). Deleted endnote 36; incorporated text
into L-3250.
16-1122 Errata correction. See Summary of Changes for details.
16-1123 Errata correction. See Summary of Changes for details.
16-1166 Errata correction. See Summary of Changes for details.
16-1877 Updated cross-references in Nonmandatory Appendix E, E-1110.
16-2008 In O-1110, added “on a pressure vessel or in a” to second sentence. Added “or pressure vessel”
to O-1120(g), and updated Figure O-1120(e)-2.
16-2027 Deleted endnote 41; incorporated text into CC-2110.
16-2030 Moved endnotes 13 through 16 to Mandatory Appendix XVIII. Incorporated endnote 15 into
first sentence of XVIII-1150.
16-2046 Added New Nonmandatory Appendix JJ to provide guidance for evaluation of thermal stratifi-
cation in Class 1 piping systems.
17-418 Errata correction. See Summary of Changes for details.
17-1302 Newly added Forms G-1, G-2, and G-4, editorially revised.

lx
CROSS-REFERENCING AND STYLISTIC CHANGES IN THE BOILER
AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE

There have been structural and stylistic changes to BPVC, starting with the 2011 Addenda, that should be noted to aid
navigating the contents. The following is an overview of the changes:

Subparagraph Breakdowns/Nested Lists Hierarchy

• First-level breakdowns are designated as (a), (b), (c), etc., as in the past.
• Second-level breakdowns are designated as (1), (2), (3), etc., as in the past.
• Third-level breakdowns are now designated as (-a), (-b), (-c), etc.
• Fourth-level breakdowns are now designated as (-1), (-2), (-3), etc.
• Fifth-level breakdowns are now designated as (+a), (+b), (+c), etc.
• Sixth-level breakdowns are now designated as (+1), (+2), etc.

Footnotes
With the exception of those included in the front matter (roman-numbered pages), all footnotes are treated as end-
notes. The endnotes are referenced in numeric order and appear at the end of each BPVC section/subsection.

Submittal of Technical Inquiries to the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Standards Committees
Submittal of Technical Inquiries to the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Standards Committees has been moved to the front
matter. This information now appears in all Boiler Code Sections (except for Code Case books).

Cross-References
It is our intention to establish cross-reference link functionality in the current edition and moving forward. To facil-
itate this, cross-reference style has changed. Cross-references within a subsection or subarticle will not include the des-
ignator/identifier of that subsection/subarticle. Examples follow:
• (Sub-)Paragraph Cross-References. The cross-references to subparagraph breakdowns will follow the hierarchy of
the designators under which the breakdown appears.
– If subparagraph (-a) appears in X.1(c)(1) and is referenced in X.1(c)(1), it will be referenced as (-a).
– If subparagraph (-a) appears in X.1(c)(1) but is referenced in X.1(c)(2), it will be referenced as (1)(-a).
– If subparagraph (-a) appears in X.1(c)(1) but is referenced in X.1(e)(1), it will be referenced as (c)(1)(-a).
– If subparagraph (-a) appears in X.1(c)(1) but is referenced in X.2(c)(2), it will be referenced as X.1(c)(1)(-a).
• Equation Cross-References. The cross-references to equations will follow the same logic. For example, if eq. (1) ap-
pears in X.1(a)(1) but is referenced in X.1(b), it will be referenced as eq. (a)(1)(1). If eq. (1) appears in X.1(a)(1) but
is referenced in a different subsection/subarticle/paragraph, it will be referenced as eq. X.1(a)(1)(1).

lxi
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

MANDATORY APPENDICES

MANDATORY APPENDIX I
DESIGN FATIGUE CURVES

1
 Table I-9.0
Tabulated Values of S a , ksi, From Figures I-9.1 Through I-9.4
Number of Cycles [Note (1)]
8.5E2 1.2E4
[Note [Note
Figure Curve 1E1 2E1 5E1 1E2 2E2 5E2 (2)] 1E3 2E3 5E3 1E4 (2)] 2E4 5E4 1E5 2E5 5E5 1E6
I-9.1 (See Table I-9.1) … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … …
I-9.2 (See Table I-9.2) … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … …
I-9.3 S y = 18.0 ksi 260 190 125 95 73 52 … 44 36 28.5 24.5 … 21 17 15 13.5 12.5 12.0
I-9.3 S y = 30.0 ksi 260 190 125 95 73 52 … 44 36 28.5 24.5 … 19.5 15 13 11.5 9.5 9.0
I-9.3 S y = 45.0 ksi 260 190 125 95 73 52 46 39 24.5 15.5 12 … 9.6 7.7 6.7 6.0 5.2 5.0
I-9.4 MNS ≤ 2.7 S m 1150 760 450 320 225 143 … 100 71 45 34 … 27 22 19 17 15 13.5
[Note (3)]
I-9.4 MNS = 3 S m [Note (3)] 1150 760 450 300 205 122 … 81 55 33 22.5 … 15 10.5 8.4 7.1 6 5.3

GENERAL NOTES:
(a) All notes on the referenced figures apply to these data.
(b) Interpolation between tabular values is permissible based upon data representation by straight lines on a log‐log plot. Accordingly, for S i > S > S j

ASME BPVC.III.A-2017
2

where S , S i , and S j are values of S a ; N , N i , and N j are corresponding numbers of cycles from design fatigue data.
Example: From the data given in the Table above, use the interpolation equation above to find the number of cycles N for S a = 53.5 ksi when UTS ≤ 80 ksi in Figure I-9.1:

NOTES:
(1) The number of cycles indicated shall be read as follows: IEJ = I × 10J, e.g., 5E2 = 5 × 102 or 500.
(2) These data points are included to provide accurate representation of curves at branches or cusps.
(3) MNS is the Maximum Nominal Stress.
 Table I-9.0M
Tabulated Values of S a , MPa, From Figures I-9.1M Through I-9.4M
Number of Cycles [[Note (1)]]
8.5E2 1.2E4
[Note [Note
Figure Curve 1E1 2E1 5E1 1E2 2E2 5E2 (2)] 1E3 2E3 5E3 1E4 (2)] 2E4 5E4 1E5 2E5 5E5 1E6
I-9.1M (See Table I-9.1) … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … …
I-9.2M (See Table I-9.2) … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … …
I-9.3M S y = 124 MPa 1793 1310 862 655 503 359 … 303 248 197 169 … 145 117 103 93 86 83
I-9.3M S y = 207 MPa 1793 1310 862 655 503 359 … 303 248 197 169 … 134 103 90 79 66 62
I-9.3M S y = 310 MPa 1793 1310 862 655 503 359 317 269 169 107 83 … 66 53 46 41 36 34
I-9.4M MNS < 2.7 S m 7929 5240 3103 2206 1551 986 … 689 490 310 234 … 186 152 131 117 103 93
[Note (3)]
I-9.4M MNS = 3 Sm [Note (3)] 7929 5240 3103 2068 1413 841 … 558 379 228 155 … 103 72 58 49 41 37

GENERAL NOTES:
(a) All notes on the referenced figures apply to these data.
(b) Interpolation between tabular values is permissible based upon data representation by straight lines on a log‐log plot. Accordingly, for S i > S > S j

ASME BPVC.III.A-2017
3

where S , S i , and S j are values of S a ; N , N i , and N j are corresponding numbers of cycles from design fatigue data.
Example: From the data given in the Table above, use the interpolation equation above to find the number of cycles N for S a = 369 MPa when UTS ≤ 552 MPa in Figure I-9.1M:

NOTES:
(1) The number of cycles indicated shall be read as follows: IEJ = I × 10J, e.g., 5E2 = 5 × 102 or 500.
(2) These data points are included to provide accurate representation of curves at branches or cusps.
(3) MNS is the Maximum Nominal Stress.
 Figure I-9.1
Design Fatigue Curves for Carbon, Low Alloy, and High Tensile Steels for Metal Temperatures Not Exceeding 700°F

103

For UTS ≤ 80 ksi

102
Value of Sa, ksi

ASME BPVC.III.A-2017
For UTS 115 − 130 ksi
4

10

1
10 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 1010 1011

Number of cycles, N

GENERAL NOTES:
(a) E = 30 × 106 psi
(b) Interpolate for UTS 80.0 ksi to 115.0 ksi.
(c) Table I-9.1 contains tabulated values and an equation for an accurate interpolation of these curves.
 Figure I-9.1M
Design Fatigue Curves for Carbon, Low Alloy, and High Tensile Steels for Metal Temperatures Not Exceeding 370°C

104

For UTS ≤ 552 MPa

103
Value of Sa, MPa

ASME BPVC.III.A-2017
For UTS 793 − 896 MPa
5

102

10
10 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 1010 1011

Number of cycles, N

GENERAL NOTES:
(a) E = 207 × 103 MPa
(b) Interpolate for UTS 552 MPa to 793 MPa.
(c) Table I-9.1 contains tabulated values and an equation for an accurate interpolation of these curves.
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table I-9.1
Tabulated Values of S a , ksi (MPa), From Figures I-9.1 and I-9.1M
UTS 115 ksi to 130 ksi
Number of Cycles (UTS 793 MPa to UTS ≤ 80 ksi
[Note (1)] 896 MPa) (UTS ≤ 552 MPa)
1E1 420 (2 896) 580 (3 999)
2E1 320 (2 206) 410 (2 827)
5E1 230 (1 586) 275 (1 896)
1E2 175 (1 207) 205 (1 413)
2E2 135 (931) 155 (1 069)
5E2 100 (689) 105 (724)
1E3 78 (538) 83 (572)
2E3 62 (427) 64 (441)
5E3 49 (338) 48 (331)
1E4 44 (303) 38 (262)
1.2E4 [Note (2)] 43 (296)
2E4 36 (248) 31 (214)
5E4 29 (200) 23 (159)
1E5 26 (179) 20 (138)
2E5 24 (165) 16.5 (114)
5E5 22 (152) 13.5 (93)
1E6 20 (138) 12.5 (86)
1E7 17.8 (123) 11.1 (77)
1E8 15.9 (110) 9.9 (68)
1E9 14.2 (98) 8.8 (61)
1E10 12.6 (87) 7.9 (54)
1E11 11.2 (77) 7.0 (48)

GENERAL NOTES:
(a) All notes in Figures I-9.1 and I-9.1M apply to this data.
(b) Interpolation between tabular values is permissible based
upon data representation by straight lines on log–log plot.
see Table I-9.0 or Table I-9.0M, General Note (b).
NOTES:
(1) The number of cycles indicated shall be read as follows:
IEJ = I × 10J, e.g., 5E6 = 5 × 106 or 5,000,000
(2) These data points are included to provide accurate representa-
tion of curves at branches or cusps.

6
 Figure I-9.2
Design Fatigue Curves for Austenitic Steels, Nickel–Chromium–Iron Alloy, Nickel–Iron–Chromium Alloy, and Nickel–Copper Alloy for
Temperatures Not Exceeding 800°F

103
Value of Sa, ksi

ASME BPVC.III.A-2017
102
7

10

10 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 1010 1011

Number of cycles, N

GENERAL NOTES:
(a) E = 28.3 × 106 psi
(b) Table I-9.2 contains tabulated values and an equation for an accurate interpolation of this curve.
 Figure I-9.2M
Design Fatigue Curves for Austenitic Steels, Nickel–Chromium–Iron Alloy, Nickel–Iron–Chromium Alloy, and Nickel–Copper Alloy for
Temperatures Not Exceeding 425°C

104

103
Value of Sa, MPa

ASME BPVC.III.A-2017
8

102

10
10 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 1010 1011

Number of cycles, N

GENERAL NOTES:
(a) E = 195 × 103 MPa
(b) Table I-9.2 contains tabulated values and an equation for an accurate interpolation of this curve.
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table I-9.2
Tabulated Values of S a , ksi (MPa), From Figures I-9.2 and I-9.2M
Number of Cycles [Note (1)] Stress Amplitude
1E1 870 (6 000)
2E1 624 (4 300)
5E1 399 (2 748)
1E2 287 (1 978)
2E2 209 (1 440)
5E2 141 (974)
1E3 108 (745)
2E3 85.6 (590)
5E3 65.3 (450)
1E4 53.4 (368)
2E4 43.5 (300)
5E4 34.1 (235)
1E5 28.4 (196)
2E5 24.4 (168)
5E5 20.6 (142)
1E6 18.3 (126)
2E6 16.4 (113)
5E6 14.8 (102)
1E7 14.4 (99.0)
1E8 14.1 (97.1)
1E9 13.9 (95.8)
1E10 13.7 (94.4)
1E11 13.6 (93.7)

GENERAL NOTES:
(a) All notes in Figures I-9.2 and I-9.2M apply to this data.
(b) Interpolation between tabular values is permissible based
upon data representation by straight lines on log–log plot.
See Table I-9.0 or Table I-9.0M, General Note (b).
NOTE:
(1) The number of cycles indicated shall be read as follows:
IEJ = I × 10J, e.g., 5E6 = 5 × 106 or 5,000,000

9
 Figure I-9.3
Design Fatigue Curves for Wrought 70 Copper–30 Nickel Alloy for Temperatures Not Exceeding 800°F

103

102
Value of Sa, ksi

ASME BPVC.III.A-2017
Sy = 18.0 ksi

Sy = 30.0 ksi
10

10

Sy = 45.0 ksi

1
10 102 103 104 105 106
´
Number of cycles, N

GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Care should be exercised in the purchase of this material to ensure that maximum static yield strength is known. These curves may be interpolated for yield strengths between 30.0 ksi and
45.0 ksi.
(b) E = 20 × 106 psi
(c) Table I-9.0 contains tabulated values and an equation for an accurate interpolation of these curves.
 Figure I-9.3M
Design Fatigue Curves for Wrought 70 Copper–30 Nickel Alloy for Temperatures Not Exceeding 425°C

104

103
Value of Sa, MPa

ASME BPVC.III.A-2017
Sy = 124 MPa
11

Sy = 207 MPa

102

Sy = 310 MPa

10
10 102 103 104 105 106
Number of cycles, N

GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Care should be exercised in the purchase of this material to ensure that maximum static yield strength is known. These curves may be interpolated for yield strengths between 207 MPa
and 310 MPa.
(b) E = 138 × 103 MPa
(c) Table I-9.0M contains tabulated values and an equation for an accurate interpolation of these curves.
 Figure I-9.4
Design Fatigue Curves for High Strength Steel Bolting for Temperatures Not Exceeding 700°F

103

102

ASME BPVC.III.A-2017
Value of Sa, ksi
12

Max. nominal
stress  2.7 Sm

10

Max. nominal
stress  3.0 Sm

1
10 102 103 104 105 106

Number of cycles, N

GENERAL NOTES:
(a) E = 30 × 106 psi
(b) Table I-9.0 contains tabulated values and an equation for an accurate interpolation of these curves.
 Figure I-9.4M
Design Fatigue Curves for High Strength Steel Bolting for Temperatures Not Exceeding 370°C

104

103
Value of Sa, MPa

ASME BPVC.III.A-2017
13

Max. nominal
stress  2.7 Sm

102

Max. nominal
stress  3.0 Sm

10
10 102 103 104 105 106

Number of cycles, N

GENERAL NOTES:
(a) E = 207 × 103 MPa
(b) Table I-9.0M contains tabulated values and an equation for an accurate interpolation of these curves.
 Figure I-9.5
Design Fatigue Curves for Nickel–Chromium–Molybdenum–Iron Alloys (UNS N06003, N06007, N06455, and N10276) for Temperatures Not
Exceeding 800°F

3
10
Sa at 1011 cycles
 14.5 ksi with maximum mean stress

ASME BPVC.III.A-2017
23.7 ksi with zero mean stress
Value of Sa, ksi

2
10
14

With zero mean stress

With maximum mean stress

10 2 3 4
10 10 10 10 105 106 107 108 109 1010 1011

Number of cycles, N

GENERAL NOTES:
(a) E = 28.3 × 106 psi
(b) Table I-9.5 contains tabulated values and an equation for an accurate interpolation of these curves.
 Figure I-9.5M
Design Fatigue Curves for Nickel–Chromium–Molybdenum–Iron Alloys (UNS N06003, N06007, N06455, and N10276) for Temperatures Not
Exceeding 425°C

104

Sa at 1011 cycles
 100 MPa with maximum mean stress
163 MPa with zero mean stress

ASME BPVC.III.A-2017
Value of Sa, MPa

3
10

With zero mean stress

15

2 With maximum mean stress

10

10
2 3 4
10 10 10 10 105 106 107 108 109 1010 1011

Number of cycles, N

GENERAL NOTES:
(a) E = 195 × 103 MPa
(b) Table I-9.5 contains tabulated values and an equation for an accurate interpolation of these curves.
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table I-9.5
Tabulated Values of S a , ksi (MPa), From Figures I-9.5 and I-9.5M
Number of Cycles [Note (1)] Zero Mean Stress Maximum Mean Stress
1E1 708.0 (4 881) 708.0 (4 881)
2E1 512.0 (3 530) 512.0 (3 530)
5E1 345.0 (2 379) 345.0 (2 379)
1E2 261.0 (1 800) 261.0 (1 800)
2E2 201.0 (1 386) 201.0 (1 386)
5E2 148.0 (1 020) 148.0 (1 020)
1E3 119.0 (820) 119.0 (820)
2E3 97.0 (669) 97.0 (669)
5E3 76.0 (524) 76.0 (524)
1E4 64.0 (441) 64.0 (441)
2E4 56.0 (386) 56.0 (386)
5E4 46.3 (319) 46.3 (319)
1E5 40.8 (281) 40.8 (281)
2E5 35.9 (248) 35.9 (248)
5E5 31.0 (214) 26.0 (179)
1E6 28.2 (194) 20.7 (143)
2E6 26.9 (185) 18.7 (129)
5E6 25.7 (177) 17.0 (117)
1E7 25.1 (173) 16.2 (112)
2E7 24.7 (170) 15.7 (108)
5E7 24.3 (168) 15.3 (105)
1E8 24.1 (166) 15.0 (103)
1E11 23.7 (163) 14.5 (100)

GENERAL NOTE: Interpolation between tabular values is permissible based upon data representation
by straight lines on a log–log plot. See Table I-9.1, General Note (b).
NOTE:
(1) The number of cycles indicated shall be read as follows:
IEJ = I × 10J, e.g., 5E6 = 5 × 106 or 5,000,000

16
 Figure I-9.6
Design Fatigue Curves for Grade 9 Titanium for Temperatures Not Exceeding 600°F

103

ASME BPVC.III.A-2017
Value of Sa, ksi
17

102

With zero mean stress

With maximum mean stress

10
10 102 103 104 105 106
Number of cycles, N
 Figure I-9.6M
Design Fatigue Curves for Grade 9 Titanium for Temperatures Not Exceeding 315°C

104

ASME BPVC.III.A-2017
Value of Sa, MPa
18

103

With zero mean stress

With maximum mean stress

102
10 102 103 104 105 106

Number of cycles, N
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table I-9.6
Tabulated Values of S a , ksi (MPa), for Grade 9 Titanium From Figures I-9.6 and I-9.6M
Maximum Mean
Number of Cycles Zero Mean Stress Stress
10 151.6 (1 045) 151.6 (1 045)
20 132.4 (913) 132.4 (913)
50 110.8 (764) 110.8 (764)
100 96.8 (667) 96.8 (667)
200 84.6 (583) 84.6 (583)
500 70.8 (488) 67.9 (468)
1000 61.9 (427) 56.7 (391)
2000 54.2 (374) 47.3 (326)
5000 45.2 (312) 37.4 (258)
10000 39.4 (272) 31.4 (216)
20000 34.4 (237) 26.6 (183)
50000 28.9 (199) 21.8 (150)
100000 25.8 (178) 19.1 (132)
200000 24.6 (170) 18.5 (128)
500000 23.4 (161) 17.9 (123)
1000000 22.6 (156) 17.4 (120)

19
 Figure I-9.7
Design Fatigue Curves for Nickel–Chromium Alloy 718 (SB-637 UNS N07718) for Design of 2 in. (50 mm) and Smaller Diameter Bolting for
Temperatures Not Exceeding 800°F (427°C)

1,000 6,900

E  29.82  106 psi (205  103 MPa)

ASME BPVC.III.A-2017
Value of Sa (MPa)
Value of Sa (ksi)
20

100 Curve A 690

Curve B

Curve C

Curve D

10 69
1.E+01 1.E+02 1.E+03 1.E+04 1.E+05 1.E+06 1.E+07 1.E+08 1.E+09 1.E+10 1.E+11
Number of Cycles, N

GENERAL NOTE: Table I-9.7 contains tabulated values for accurate interpolation of these curves.
 Table I-9.7
Tabulated Values of S a , ksi (MPa), From Figure I-9.7
U.S. Customary Units SI Units
σ m a x ≤ 1 015
Mean Stress σ m a x ≤ 100 ksi σ m a x ≤ 120 ksi σ m a x ≤ 135 ksi σ m a x ≤ 147 ksi Mean Stress σ m a x ≤ 690 MPa σ m a x ≤ 830 MPa σ m a x ≤ 930 MPa MPa
Number of Cycles Curve A Curve B Curve C Curve D Number of Cycles Curve A Curve B Curve C Curve D
[Note (1)] S a , ksi S a , ksi S a , ksi S a , ksi [Note (1)] S a , MPa S a , MPa S a , MPa S a , MPa
1E1 753 753 753 753 1E1 5 191 5 191 5 191 5 191
2E1 540 540 540 540 2E1 3 723 3 723 3 723 3 723
5E1 365 365 365 365 5E1 2 516 2 516 2 516 2 516
1E2 273 273 273 273 1E2 1 882 1 882 1 882 1 882
2E2 217 217 217 217 2E2 1 496 1 496 1 496 1 496
4E2 173 173 173 173 4E2 1 192 1 192 1 192 1 192
5E2 160 160 160 155 5E2 1 103 1 103 1 103 1 068
8E2 141 141 141 114 8E2 972 972 972 786
1E3 133 133 121 99 1E3 917 917 834 682
2E3 110 100 84 68 2E3 758 689 579 468
5E3 85 71 58 48 5E3 586 489 399 330

ASME BPVC.III.A-2017
1E4 70 58 48 39 1E4 482 399 330 268
2E4 60 49 39 32 2E4 413 337 268 220
5E4 49 40 32 27 5E4 337 275 220 186
21

1E5 43 35 28 23 1E5 296 241 193 158

2E5 38 31 25 20 2E5 262 213 172 137
5E5 33 27 22 18 5E5 227 186 151 124
1E6 31 25 20 16 1E6 213 172 137 110
2E6 29 23 19 15 2E6 199 158 131 103
5E6 27.1 21.6 17.5 14.2 5E6 186 148 120 97
1E7 26.3 20.6 16.8 13.8 1E7 181 142 115 95
2E7 25.4 20.2 16.5 13.3 2E7 175 139 113 91
5E7 24.8 19.7 15.9 12.9 5E7 170 135 109 88
1E8 24.6 19.6 15.7 12.7 1E8 169 135 108 87
1E11 22.8 18.3 14.8 12.1 1E11 157 126 102 83

GENERAL NOTE: Interpolation between tabular values is permissible based upon data representation by straight lines on a log–log plot. See Table I-9.1, General Note (b).
NOTE:
(1) The number of cycles indicated shall be read as follows: IEJ = I × 10J, e.g., 5E6 = 5 × 106 or 5,000,000.
 Figure I-9.8
Design Fatigue Curves, ksi, for Ductile Cast Iron

1,000

With zero mean stress

100

ASME BPVC.III.A-2017
Value of Sa (ksi)
22

10

With maximum mean stress

1
101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108

Number of Cycles, N
 Figure I-9.8M
Design Fatigue Curves, MPa, for Ductile Cast Iron

104

103

ASME BPVC.III.A-2017
Value of Sa (MPa)

With zero mean stress

23

102

With maximum mean stress

101 1
10 102 103 104 105 106 107 108

Number of Cycles, N
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table I-9.8
Tabulated Values of S a , ksi, From Figure I-9.8
Values of S a , ksi
Number of Maximum Mean
Cycles Zero Mean Stress Stress
1E1 112 112
2E1 94 94
5E1 76 76
1E2 65 65
2E2 56 56

5E2 45 45
1E3 38 38
2E3 32 32
5E3 27 27
1E4 24 24

2E4 21 21
5E4 18 18
1E5 17 17
2E5 15 15
3E5 15 15

5E5 14 13
1E6 13 11
2E6 12 10
5E6 12 9
1E7 11 8

2E7 11 8
5E7 11 7
1E8 11 7

24
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table I-9.8M
Tabulated Values of S a , MPa, From Figure I-9.8M
Values of S a , MPa
Number of Maximum Mean
Cycles Zero Mean Stress Stress
1E1 772 772
2E1 649 649
5E1 522 522
1E2 447 447
2E2 386 386

5E2 307 307

1E3 261 261
2E3 223 223
5E3 185 185
1E4 162 162

2E4 144 144

5E4 125 125
1E5 114 114
2E5 105 105
3E5 101 101

5E5 96 88
1E6 90 76
2E6 86 67
5E6 82 60
1E7 79 55

2E7 77 52
5E7 75 49
1E8 73 48

25
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

MANDATORY APPENDIX II

ARTICLE II-1000
EXPERIMENTAL STRESS ANALYSIS

ð17Þ II-1100 INTRODUCTION II-1115 Temperature Limits

Throughout this Article, wherever the word component Experimental methods shall not be used to justify ex-
or components is used, it shall be understood to include ceeding applicable temperature limits.
portions thereof, and also appurtenances and portions
thereof.
II-1200 PERMISSIBLE TYPES OF NONCYCLIC
II-1110 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS TESTS AND CALCULATION OF
II-1111 When Experimental Stress Analysis Is STRESSES
Required II-1210 TESTS FOR DETERMINING GOVERNING
The critical or governing stresses in parts for which STRESSES
theoretical stress analysis is inadequate or for which de- Permissible types of tests for the determination of gov-
sign rules are unavailable shall be substantiated by ex- erning stresses are strain measurement tests and photo-
perimental stress analysis. elastic tests. Brittle coating tests may be used only for
the purpose described in II-1310.
II-1112 When Reevaluation Is Not Required
Reevaluation is not required for configurations for II-1220 TESTS FOR DETERMINING COLLAPSE
which there are available detailed experimental results LOAD
that are consistent with the requirements of this Article.
Strain measurement tests may be used for the determi-
II-1113 Discounting of Corrosion Allowances nation of collapse load. Distortion measurement tests may
be used for the determination of collapse load, if it can be
The test procedures followed and the interpretation of clearly shown that the test setup and the instrumentation
the results shall be such as to discount the effects of ma- used will give valid results for the configuration on which
terial added to the thickness of members, such as corro- the measurements are made.
sion allowance, or of other material which cannot be
considered as contributing to the strength of the part. II-1221 Fatigue Tests for Evaluation of Cyclic ð17Þ

II-1114 Inspection and Reports Loading

Tests conducted in accordance with this Article need Fatigue tests as described in II-1500 may be used to
not be witnessed by the Inspector. However, a detailed re- evaluate the adequacy of a component for cyclic loading.
port of the test procedure and the results obtained shall
be included with the Design Report (NCA‐3551). The re- II-1230 TESTS TO DESTRUCTION
port shall show that the instrumentation used was within Results of tests to destruction are not acceptable except
calibration. as provided for piping in NB‐3649.

26
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ð17Þ II-1240 CALCULATION OF STRESSES II-1300 TEST PROCEDURES

A modified Poisson’s ratio is given by XIII-2500 and II-1310 LOCATION OF TEST GAGES
identified as being applicable only to local thermal stres-
(a) In tests for determination of governing stresses, suf-
ses. It should be noted that some situations can arise in
ficient locations on the component shall be investigated to
which the use of the modified value of Poisson’s ratio is
ensure that the measurements are taken at the most cri-
indicated for the calculation of stresses of other than ther-
tical areas and to permit conservative determination of
mal origin. Strictly speaking, this modified value should
the bending and peak stress components. The location
be used in any calculation which results in stresses that
of the critical areas and the optimum orientation of test
exceed a stress intensity range of 2S y . For designs which
gages may be determined by a brittle coating test.
meet the basic stress limits this modification is important
(b) In tests made for the measurement of collapse load,
only for local thermal stresses such as skin stresses. When
sufficient measurements must be taken so that all areas
calculating the stress range in an element such as a fati-
that have any reasonable probability of indicating a mini-
gue test model which does not meet the basic stress lim-
mum collapse load are adequately covered. If strain gages
its, the effect of the modified Poisson’s ratio should be
are used to determine the collapse load, particular care
considered.
should be given to assure that the measured strains
(either membrane, bending or a combination) are actually
II-1250 STRAIN MEASUREMENT TEST indicative of the load carrying capacity of the structure. If
PROCEDURE distortion measurement devices are used, care should be
II-1251 Requirements for Strain Gages given to assure that it is the change in cardinal dimen-
Strain gages of any type capable of indicating strains to sions or deflections that is measured, such as diameter
0.00005 in./in. (0.00005 mm/mm) may be used. It is rec- or length extension, or beam or plate deflections that
ommended that the gage length be such that the maxi- are indicative of the tendency of the structure to actually
mum strain within the gage length does not exceed the collapse.
average strain within the gage length by more than
II-1320 REQUIREMENTS FOR PRESSURE GAGES
10%. Instrumentation shall be such that both surface
principal stresses may be determined at each gage loca- Pressure gages shall meet the requirements of
tion in the elastic range of material behavior at that gage NB‐6400.
location. A similar number and orientation of gages at
each gage location are required to be used in tests beyond II-1330 APPLICATION OF PRESSURE OR LOAD
the elastic range of material behavior. The strain gages (a) In tests for determining governing stresses, the in-
and cements that are used shall be shown to be reliable ternal pressure or mechanical load shall be applied in
for use on the material surface finish and configuration such increments that the variation of strain with load
considered to strain values at least 50% higher than those can be plotted so as to establish the ratio of stress to load
expected. in the elastic range. If the first loading results in strains
that are not linearly proportional to the load, it is permis-
II-1252 Use of Models for Strain or Distortion sible to unload and reload successively until the linear
Measurements proportionality has been established. When frozen stress
photoelastic techniques are used, only one load value can
(a) Except in tests made for the measurement of col-
be applied, in which case the load shall not be so high as
lapse load, strain gage data may be obtained from the ac-
to result in deformations that invalidate the test results.
tual component or from a model component of any scale
(b) In tests made for the measurement of collapse load,
that meets the gage length requirements of II-1251. The
the proportional load shall be applied in sufficiently small
model material need not be the same as the component
increments so that an adequate number of data points for
material but shall have an elastic modulus which is either
each gage are available for statistical analysis in the linear
known or has been measured at the test conditions. The
elastic range of behavior. All gages should be evaluated
requirements of dimensional similitude shall be met as
prior to increasing the load beyond this value. A least
nearly as possible.
square fit (regression) analysis shall be used to obtain
(b) In the case of collapse load tests, only full scale mod-
the best fit straight line, and the confidence interval shall
els, prototypical in all respects, are permitted unless the
be compared to preset values for acceptance or rejection
experimenter can clearly demonstrate the validity of the
of the strain gage or other instrumentation. Unacceptable
scaling laws used.
instrumentation will be replaced and the replacement in-
strumentation tested in the same manner.
II-1260 PHOTOELASTIC TEST TECHNIQUES (c) After all instrumentation has been deemed accept-
Either two dimensional or three dimensional techni- able, the test should be continued on a strain or displace-
ques may be used in photoelastic testing as long as the ment controlled basis with adequate time permitted
model represents the structural effects of the loading. between load changes for all metal flow to be completed.

27
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

II-1400 INTERPRETATION OF RESULTS II-1500 CYCLIC TESTS

II-1510 WHEN CYCLIC TESTS MAY BE USED ð17Þ
II-1410 INTERPRETATION TO BE ON ELASTIC
BASIS (a) Experimental methods constitute a reliable means
of evaluating the capability of components to withstand
Linear elastic theory shall be used to determine the de- cyclic loading. In addition, when it is desired to use higher
sign load stresses from the strain gage data. The calcula- peak stresses than can be justified by the methods of
tions shall be performed under the assumption that the II-1200 to II-1400 and the fatigue curves of Mandatory
material is elastic. The elastic constants used in the eva- Appendix I, the adequacy of a component to withstand
luation of experimental data shall be those applicable to cyclic loading may be demonstrated by means of a fatigue
the test material at the test temperature. test. The fatigue test shall not be used, however, as justi-
fication for exceeding the allowable values of primary or
primary plus secondary stresses.
(b) When a fatigue test is used to demonstrate the ade-
II-1420 REQUIRED EXTENT OF STRESS
quacy of a component to withstand cyclic loading, a de-
ANALYSIS
scription of the test shall be included in the Design
The extent of experimental stress analysis performed Report. This description shall contain sufficient detail to
shall be sufficient to determine the governing stresses show compliance with the requirements of this subarticle.
for which design values are unavailable, as described in
II-1111. When possible, combined analytical and experi- II-1520 REQUIREMENTS FOR CYCLIC TESTING ð17Þ
mental methods shall be used to distinguish among OF COMPONENTS
primary, secondary, and peak stresses so that each com- The applicable requirements of (a) through (g) below
bination of categories can be controlled by the applicable shall be met.
stress limit. (a) The test component being tested shall be con-
structed of material having the same composition and
subjected to mechanical working and heat treatment that
II-1430 CRITERION OF COLLAPSE LOAD result in mechanical properties equivalent to those of the
material in the prototype component. Geometrical simi-
(a) For distortion measurement tests, the loads are larity must be maintained, at least in those portions
plotted as the ordinate and the measured deflections whose ability to withstand cyclic loading is being investi-
are plotted as the abscissa. For strain gage tests, the loads gated, and in those adjacent areas which affect the stres-
are plotted as the ordinate and the maximum principal ses in the portion under test.
strains on the surface as the abscissa. (b) The test component shall withstand the number of
(b) The least square fit (regression) line as determined cycles as set forth in (c) below before failure occurs. Fail-
from the data in the linear elastic range is drawn on each ure is herein defined as a propagation of a crack through
the entire thickness, such as would produce a measurable
plot considered. The angle that the regression line makes
leak in a pressure-retaining member.
with the ordinate is called θ . A second straight line, here-
(c) The minimum number of cycles N T (hereinafter re-
after called the collapse limit line, is drawn through the
ferred to as test cycles), which the component shall with-
intersection of the regression line with the abscissa so
stand and the magnitude of the loading (hereinafter
that it makes an angle ϕ = tan−1 (2tan θ ) with the ordi-
referred to as the test loading) to be applied to the com-
nate. (See Figure II-1430-1.) The test collapse load is de-
ponent during the test, P T shall be determined by multi-
termined from the maximum principal strain or
plying the specified service cycles N D by a specified factor
deflection value at the first data point for which there K T N and the specified service loads P D by K T S . Values of
are three successive data points that lie outside of the col- these factors shall be determined by means of the testing
lapse limit line. This first data point is called the collapse parameters ratio diagram, the construction of which is
load point. The test collapse load is taken as the load on given in (1) through (3) below and is illustrated in Figure
the collapse limit line which has the maximum principal II-1520(c)-1. When applicable, the requirements of (d)
strain or deflection of the collapse load point. The collapse through (f) shall be met.
load used for design or evaluation purposes shall be the (1) Project a vertical line from the specified service
test collapse load multiplied by the ratio of the material cycles N D on the abscissa of S a of Mandatory Appendix
yield strength at Design Temperature (Section II, Part D, I to an ordinate value of K s × S a D . The parameter K s is de-
Subpart 1, Table Y‐1) to the test material yield strength termined using (g). Label this point A.
at the test temperature. Careful attention shall be given (2) Extend a horizontal line through the point D until
to the actual as‐built dimensions of the test model when its length corresponds to an abscissa value of K n × N D .
correlating the collapse load of the test model to that ex- The parameter K n is determined using (g). Label this
pected for the actual structure being designed. point B.

28
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure II-1430-1
Construction for II-1430

Collapse limit line

Collapse load point

Regression line
Test collapse load
Load

Strain or Displacement

29
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure II-1520(c)-1
Construction of the Testing Parameters Ratio Diagram

For Point C
SaC
KTS =
SaD
Design Fatigue NC
KTN =
Curve ND
Value of Sa , psi (kPa)

SaA A

SaC C
SaD D
B

KsSaD

KnND

ND NC NB
Number of Cycles, N

30
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(3) Connect the points A and B. The segment AB em- (f) Accelerated fatigue testing (test cycles N T are less
braces all the allowable combinations of K T S and K T N . For than specified service cycles N D ) may be conducted if
accelerated testing, see (f). Any point C on this segment the specified service cycles N D are greater than 104 and
may be chosen at the convenience of the tester. Referring the testing conditions are determined by the procedures
to Figure II-1520(c)-1, the factors K T S and K T N are de- of (1) through (3) below, which are illustrated in Figure
fined as follows: II-1520(c)-2. In this figure, the points A, B, and D corre-
spond to similar labeled points in Figure II-1520(c)-1.
(1) The minimum number of test cycles N T m i n shall
be
and

Project a vertical line through N T m i n on the abscissa

thus, of S a versus N diagram such that it intersects and extends
beyond the fatigue design curve.
(2) Construct a curve through the point A and inter-
sect the vertical projection of N T [see (1)] by multiplying
every point on the fatigue design curve by the factor K s ,
(d) It should be noted that, if the test article is not a full which is evaluated according to (g). Label the intersection
size component but a geometrically similar model, then of this curve and the vertical projection of N T m i n as A′.
the value P T shall be adjusted by the appropriate scale (3) Any point C on the segment A′, A, B determines
factor to be determined from structural similitude princi- the allowable combinations of K T S and K T N . The factors
ples if the loading is other than pressure. The number of K T S and K T N are obtained in the same manner as in (c).
cycles that the component shall withstand during this test (g) The values of K s and K n are the multiples of factors
without failure shall not be less than N T while subjected that account for the effects of size, surface finish, cyclic
to a cyclic test loading P T , which shall be adjusted, if re- rate, temperature, and the number of replicate tests per-
quired, using model similitude principles if the compo- formed. They shall be determined as follows:
nent is not full size.
(e) In certain instances, it may be desirable (or possi-
ble) in performing the test to increase only the loading
or number of cycles, but not both, in which event two spe- but shall never be allowed to be less than 1.25 and
cial cases of interest result from the above general case, as
described in (1) and (2) below.
(1) Case 1 (Factor Applied to Cycles Only). In this case,
K T S = 1 and
but shall never be allowed to be less than 2.6, where
K s c = factor for differences in design fatigue curves at
various temperatures
The number of test cycles that the component shall K s f = factor for the effect of surface finish
withstand during this test shall not be less than = 1.175 − 0.175 (SFM/SFP), where SFM/SFP is the ra-
N T = K T N × N D , while subjected to the specified service tio of model surface finish to prototype surface fin-
loading, P D , adjusted as required, if a geometrically simi- ish, in. × 10−6 arithmetic average (AA)
lar model is used. K s l = factor for the effect of size on fatigue life
(2) Case 2 (Factor Applied to Loading Only). In this = 1.5 − 0.5 (L M /L P ), where L M /L P is the ratio of
case, K T N = 1 and linear model size to prototype size
K s s = factor for the statistical variation in test results
= 1.470 − 0.044 × number of replicate tests
K s t = factor for the effect of test temperature
= (S a N at test temperature)/(S a N at Design Tem-
The component shall withstand a number of cycles at
perature), where S a N equals S a from applicable fa-
least equal to the number of specified service cycles, N D ,
tigue curve at N cycles
while subjected to a cyclic test loading P T = K T S × P D ,
again adjusted as required, if a geometrically similar mod- No value of K s l , K s f , K s t , K s s , or K s c less than 1.0 may
el is used. be used in calculating K s .

31
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure II-1520(c)-2
Construction of the Testing Parameters Ratio Diagram for Accelerated Tests

For Point C
SaC
KTS =
SaD
Design Fatigue
NC
Curve KTN =
ND

Design Fatigue Curve

Value of Sa, psi (kPa)

x KS

A'

SaC C
A

SaD D
B

NT min = 100 ND

NTmin NC ND
Number of Cycles, N

32
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

II-1521 Nomenclature II-1720 APPLICABILITY OF AVAILABLE

EXPERIMENTAL DATA
The symbols defined below are used in II-1520.
In accordance with II-1112 reevaluation is not required
K s , K n = factors that account for the effects of size, for configurations for which there are available detailed
surface finish, cyclic rate, temperature, and experimental results that are consistent with the require-
the number of replicate tests performed ments of this Appendix. In order that available experi-
K T S , K T N = factors used to determine the test loading mental data may be interpreted as providing
and test cycles, respectively information pertinent to the analysis of slightly different
N C = number of cycles at point C configurations, thereby possibly minimizing the need for
N D = specified service cycles additional investigations, the guidelines of II-1730 are
N T = testing cycles presented.
N T m i n = minimum number of test cycles
P D = specified service loading II-1730 GUIDELINES FOR USE OF AVAILABLE
P T = test loading EXPERIMENTAL DATA
S a C = alternating stress at point C
S a D = alternating stress at point D
II-1731 Effect of d/D Ratio
For an unreinforced opening or for an opening where
II-1600 DETERMINATION OF FATIGUE the reinforcement is provided primarily by a uniform in-
STRENGTH REDUCTION FACTORS crease in component wall thickness, the stresses around
ð17Þ II-1610 PROCEDURES the opening will increase with increasing d /D ratio of
the opening (diameter of nozzle or opening to diameter
Experimental determination of fatigue strength reduc- of shell). Therefore, experimental data for a small d/D ra-
tion factors shall be in accordance with the procedures tio cannot be safely applied to a larger d/D ratio but can
of (a) through (e) below. be applied to a smaller d /D ratio provided the experi-
(a) The test part shall be fabricated from a material ments were made at a d/D ratio <0.5.
within the same P‐Number grouping of Section IX, Table
QW/QB-422 and shall be subjected to the same heat treat- II-1732 Effect of D/T Ratio
ment as the component. For an unreinforced opening or for an opening where
(b) The stress level in the specimen shall be such that the reinforcement is provided primarily by a uniform in-
the stress intensity does not exceed the limit prescribed crease in component wall thickness, the stresses around
by XIII-3400 and so that failure does not occur in less than the opening will increase with increasing D/T ratio (thin-
1000 cycles. ner shell component). Therefore, experimental data for a
(c) The configuration, surface finish, and stress state of relatively small D /T ratio cannot be safely applied to a
the specimen shall closely simulate those expected in the larger D /T ratio but can be applied to a smaller D /T ratio.
components. In particular, the stress gradient shall not be
more abrupt than that expected in the component. II-1733 Proximity to Gross Discontinuities
(d) The cyclic rate shall be such that appreciable heat- Generally, the stress data available in the literature are
ing of the specimen does not occur. applicable only to single openings. Such data shall be con-
(e) The fatigue strength reduction factor shall prefer- sidered valid only for a connection sufficiently removed
ably be determined by performing tests on notched and from another nozzle, opening, flange, or other major dis-
unnotched specimens and calculated as the ratio of the continuity so that superposition of stresses will not pro-
unnotched stress to the notched stress for failure. duce an unacceptable value of stress intensity.

II-1734 Requirements for Fillets

Stresses at the outside juncture of a nozzle and shell are
II-1700 EXPERIMENTAL STRESS ANALYSIS greatly influenced by the fillet or transition at the junc-
OF OPENINGS ture. Generally speaking, stress data available in the lit-
erature are for certain specific fillet radii. Other factors
II-1710 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
being equal, these stress data may be considered valid
The stress intensities for opening configurations which for fillet radii equal to or greater than those used in the
do not meet the requirements of NB‐3331, NB‐3338.2(d), test but shall not be considered valid for smaller fillet ra-
or NB‐3339.1 shall be determined in accordance with the dii or undefined fillets and transitions such as for a trian-
methods of this subarticle. gular weld fillet, as commonly used.

33
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

II-1800 EXPERIMENTAL DETERMINATION II-1900 EXPERIMENTAL DETERMINATION

OF STRESS INDICES FOR PIPING OF FLEXIBILITY FACTORS
In course of preparation. Pending publication, stress in- In course of preparation. Pending publication, flexibil-
dices for piping shall be determined in accordance with ity factors shall be determined in accordance with the
the rules of NB‐3680. rules of NB‐3686.

34
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE II-2000
EXPERIMENTAL DETERMINATION OF STRESS INTENSIFICATION
FACTORS

II-2100 INTRODUCTION (a) The machine framework must be sufficiently stiff to

prevent anchor rotations.
This Appendix presents a method to experimentally de-
(b) The pipe component shall be mounted close to the
termine stress intensification factors (SIF) of piping com-
fixed end of the test assembly, but no closer than two pipe
ponents for use in the design of piping systems in
diameters.
accordance with NC/ND‐3600.
(c) The free end shall be hinged in a slide capable of ap-
plying a fully reversible displacement.
II-2200 DEFINITIONS (d) The test equipment shall be calibrated to read dis-
placements with an accuracy of 1% of the imposed dis-
Stress Intensification Factor. A fatigue strength reduc- placement amplitude.
tion factor which is the ratio of the elastically predicted
bending moment producing fatigue failure in a given
number of cycles in a butt weld on a straight pipe of nom- II-2320 TEST SPECIMEN
inal dimensions, to that producing failure in the same
number of cycles in the component under consideration. The test specimen shall be SA-106 Grade B pipe and
equivalent plates and forgings, otherwise the rules of
II-2510 apply.
II-2300 TEST PROCEDURE The fabrication, welding, and examinations of the
tested components shall be the same as will be followed
II-2310 TEST EQUIPMENT in fabrication of the component. Weld contours should
A schematic of a test arrangement is given in Figure be representative of those intended to be used in
II-2310-1. fabrication.

Figure II-2310-1
Schematic of Test Assembly

Tested Applied
fitting in-plane
displacement

Fixed end

35
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

II-2330 APPLIED MOMENT (d) The number of cycles N at which the leak occurred
shall be recorded. The cyclic displacements shall be se-
(a) The test specimen shall be placed in the test config-
lected such that failure occurs in a minimum of N = 500
uration and displacements shall be applied in steps to ob-
cycles of reversed displacements.
tain a load–displacement plot analogous to that shown in
Figure II-2330-1. At least five points must be recorded in
the linear region of the plot. II-2400 STRESS INTENSIFICATION FACTOR
(b) The loading sequence shall be stopped when the re-
corded load–displacement is no longer linear. II-2410 CALCULATED STRESS
(c) The specimen must then be unloaded, following the (a) The distance L between the point of applied dis-
same recording sequence as during loading. placement and the leak point is measured.
(d) The linear region of the load–displacement curve (b) The imposed displacement is entered on the load–
and its straight‐line extension will be used in determining displacement curve established in II-2330, and the corre-
the force F e in II-2400. sponding force is noted as F e .
(c) The applied moment at leakage M e is to be calcu-
II-2340 CYCLES TO LEAKAGE lated as
(a) The test specimen shall be placed in the test config-
uration and pressurized with water. The pressure should
be sufficient to detect leakage, such as 15 psig to 100 psig where
(100 kPa to 700 kPa).
(b) The specimen shall be subjected to fully reversed F e = force corresponding to the applied displacement,
cyclic displacements until a visible through‐wall leak de- read on the straight line of Figure II-2330-1
velops in the component or its weld to the pipe. Other L = distance between the point of applied displace-
equivalent methods of through‐wall crack detection are ment and the leak point, in the direction perpendi-
permissible. cular to the imposed displacement
(c) The fully reversible displacements shall be applied M e = applied elastic moment at leakage
at a frequency not to exceed 120 cycles per minute. (d) The elastically calculated stress amplitude corre-
sponding to the elastic moment at leakage is

Figure II-2330-1
Displacement D and Force F Recorded During
Loading and Unloading of Test Specimen, With
Linear Displacement where
S = leakage stress
Z = section modulus as defined in II-2420
II-2420 SECTION MODULUS
The value of the section modulus, Z, used in calculating
the leakage stress in II-2410 shall be that intended to be
used in design. The section modulus of the matching pipe
is typically used in design. If the leakage stress is com-
puted using Z other than that of the matching pipe, the
manner in which Z is computed must be explicitly speci-
fied in the definition of the stress intensification factor,
F and the value of Z at the same location shall be used in
design.

II-2430 STRESS INTENSIFICATION FACTOR

The stress intensification factor is established as

where

D, in. (mm) b = material exponent; 0.2 for a carbon steel test

specimen

36
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

C = material constant; 245,000 psi (1 690 MPa) for a II-2500 VARIATIONS IN MATERIALS AND
carbon steel test specimen GEOMETRY
i = stress intensification factor
N = number of cycles to leakage II-2510 MATERIAL CONSTANT AND MATERIAL
S = leakage stress EXPONENT
When using a test specimen made of Code‐listed mate-
II-2440 NUMBER OF TEST SPECIMENS
rials other than carbon steel, a new material constant C
(a) The value of the stress intensification factor i shall and material exponent b shall be established as follows.
be the average value from several, preferably a minimum (a) A butt-welded test specimen of the tested material
of four, cyclic displacement tests. shall be fabricated and tested in accordance with II-2300.
(b) Where less than four tests are conducted, the calcu- (b) The cyclic test of II-2330 shall be repeated for a
lated stress intensification factor i shall be increased by a minimum of eight specimens subject to different applied
factor C i given in Table II-2440-1. displacements.
(c) The pairs of values (N,S) shall be plotted on log‐log
scale.
II-2450 DIRECTIONAL STRESS INTENSIFICATION (d) The material constant C and the material exponent
FACTORS b shall be obtained by tracing a best estimate straight line
through the (N,S) points, in the form
(a) For non‐axisymmetric components, a directional
stress intensification factor shall be established indepen-
dently for each direction of bending.
(b) Where the design Code requires the use of a single
stress intensification factor, the largest value from the di-
rectional stress intensification factors shall be used. II-2520 GEOMETRIC SIMILARITY
(a) The stress intensification factor derived from the
tests is applicable to components that are geometrically
II-2460 VARIABLE AMPLITUDE TEST similar within 20% of the dimensions of the test
If the applied displacement amplitude is changed dur- specimens.
ing a cyclic test, the number of cycles to leakage shall be (b) Dimensional extrapolations other than in (a) above
determined by shall be identified in the test report, along with their tech-
nical justification.

II-2600 TEST REPORT

where A test report shall be prepared and certified to meet the
b = material exponent requirements of this Appendix by a Professional Engineer
= 0.2 for steels competent in the design and analysis of pressure piping
N = equivalent number of cycles to leakage, at max- systems. The test report shall be complete and written
imum amplitude X j to facilitate an independent review. The report shall
N i , N j = number of cycles at amplitudes X i , X j , where all contain
Xi < Xj (a) description of the tested specimen
r i = X i /X j ; r i < 1 (b) nominal pipe and fitting size and dimensions and
X i , X j = amplitudes of displacement applied during cy- actual cross‐sectional dimensions of importance in inter-
cles N i , N j , in. (mm) preting the test results
(c) description and photographs or sketches of the test
equipment, including positioning of the test specimens in
the machine
Table II-2440-1 (d) calibration of the test equipment. This information
Stress Intensification Increase Factor may be provided by reference
Number of (e) Certified Material Test Reports for the tested com-
Test Increase ponent, including mill‐test value of yield and ultimate
Specimens Factor, C i strength
1 1.2 (f) component and component‐to‐pipe weld examina-
2 1.1
tions where they are required by the construction Code,
3 1.05
≥4 1.0
with certification of Code compliance of the welds
(g) loading and unloading load–displacement points
and line, in accordance with II-2330

37
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(h) values of material constants C and b , section modu- (j) description, and photograph(s) or sketch(es) of the
lus Z , number of cycles to leakage N , length to leakage leakage location
point L, force F e , and moment M e for each test (k) justification for geometrical similarity, if any, in ac-
(i) derivation of the stress intensification factor i for cordance with II-2520
each test

38
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

MANDATORY APPENDIX III ð17Þ

STRESS INTENSITY VALUES, ALLOWABLE STRESS VALUES,

FATIGUE STRENGTH VALUES, AND MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
FOR METALLIC MATERIALS

ARTICLE III-1000
DETERMINATION OF ALLOWABLE STRESSES

III-1100 LOCATION OF DESIGN STRESS III-1300 FATIGUE STRENGTH VALUES FOR

INTENSITY, ALLOWABLE STRESS, ALL MATERIALS
YIELD STRENGTH, AND ULTIMATE The fatigue curves of Mandatory Appendix I for metallic
TENSILE VALUES materials are obtained from uniaxial strain cycling data in
All design stress intensity values, allowable stress val- which the imposed strain amplitude (half range) is multi-
ues, and ultimate and yield strength values for use in de- plied by the elastic modulus to put the values in stress
sign under the rules of this Section are given in Section II, units. A best fit to the experimental data is obtained by ap-
Part D. These values are grouped according to tempera- plying the method of least squares to the logarithms of the
ture. In every application of the values, the temperature stress values. The curves are adjusted where necessary to
is to be understood as being the actual material tempera- include the maximum effect of mean stress. For all figures
ture. The allowable stress values provided in Section II, except Figure I-9.2, the design fatigue strength values are
Part D are provided for design below the creep regime. obtained from the best fit curve by applying a factor of 2
They are limited to use at temperatures of 700°F on stress or a factor of 20 on cycles, whichever is the more
(371°C) and below for ferritic materials, and 800°F conservative at each point. The design fatigue strength
(427°C) and below for austenitic materials. For design values for Figure I-9.2 are obtained from the best fit curve
above these temperatures or for nonmetallic materials, by applying a factor of 2 on stress or a factor of 12 on cy-
see the applicable Division or Subsection for guidance. cles, whichever is more conservative at each point.

III-1200 DERIVATION OF THE DESIGN III-1400 MECHANICAL AND PHYSICAL

STRESS INTENSITY AND PROPERTIES
ALLOWABLE STRESS VALUES All mechanical and physical design properties of metal-
For other than bolting materials, the bases for the de- lic materials, e.g., modulus of elasticity and coefficient of
sign stress intensity and allowable stress values for me- thermal expansion, for use with this Section are given in
t a l l i c m a t e r i a l s a r e g i v e n in S e c ti o n I I , P a r t D , Section II, Part D. In the absence of available data given
Mandatory Appendices 1 and 2. Section II, Part D, Manda- in Section II, Part D, the design may be based on available
tory Appendix 1 provides this information for the allow- manufacturer’s data for that material unless otherwise
able stress values; Section II, Part D, Mandatory prohibited by this Section. Substantiation of this data
Appendix 2 provides this information for the design shall be included in the design output documents.
stress intensity. The bases for the design stress intensity
and allowable stress values for bolting materials are pro-
vided in Section II, Part D, Mandatory Appendix 2.

39
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

MANDATORY APPENDIX IV
APPROVAL OF NEW MATERIALS UNDER THE ASME BOILER AND
PRESSURE VESSEL CODE

See Section II, Part D, Mandatory Appendix 5.

40
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

MANDATORY APPENDIX V
CERTIFICATE HOLDER’S DATA REPORT FORMS, INSTRUCTIONS,
AND APPLICATION FORMS FOR CERTIFICATES OF
AUTHORIZATION FOR USE OF CERTIFICATION MARK

The instructions for the Data Report Forms (see Table

V-1000) are identified by parenthesized numbers corre-
sponding to the circled numbers on the sample Forms
in this Appendix.

41
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

FORM N-1 CERTIFICATE HOLDER’S DATA REPORT FOR NUCLEAR VESSELS*

As Required by the Provisions of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1 Pg. 1 of F
56

1. Manufactured and certified by F

1
(name and address of N Certificate Holder)

2. Manufactured for F
2
(name and address of Purchaser)

3. Location of installation F
3
(name and address)

4. Type F
4 F
5 F
6 F
7 F
8 F
9 F
10
(horizontal or vertical) (tank, jacketed, heat ex.) (Certificate Holder’s serial no.) (CRN) (drawing no.) (National Bd. no.) (year built)

5. ASME Code, Section III, Division 1 F

11 F
12 F
13 F
14
(edition) [Addenda (if applicable) (date)] (class) (Code Case no.)
Items 6–10 inclusive to be completed for single wall vessels, jackets of jacketed vessels, or shells of heat exchangers.

6. Shell F
15 F
16 F
17 F
18 F
19 F
20
(material spec. no.) (tensile strength) (nominal thickness) (minimum design thickness) (diameter ID) [length (overall)]

7. Seams F
21 F
22 F
23 F
24 F
25 F
22 F
23 F
26
(long.) (HT1) (RT) (eff. %) (girth) (HT1) (RT) (no. of courses)

8. Heads F
15 F
16 F
15 F
16
[(a) material spec. no.] (tensile strength) [(b) material spec. no.] (tensile strength)

Location (top, Corrosion Crown Knuckle Elliptical Conical Hemispherical Flat Side to Pressure
F
27
bottom, ends) Thickness Allowance Radius Radius Ratio Apex Angle Radius Diameter (convex or concave)

(a)
(b)

If removable, bolts used F

15 F
28
Other fastening F
29

(material spec. no., size, quantity) (describe or attach sketch)

9. Jacket closure F
30
(Describe as ogee & weld, bar, etc. If bar, give dimensions, describe, or sketch)

10. Design pressure2 F

31
at max. temp. F
32
. Min. pressure-test temp. F
33
. Pneu., hydro., or comb. test pressure F
34

Items 11 and 12 to be completed for tube sections.

11. Tubesheets F
15 F
35 F
36 F
37
(stationary, material spec. no.) [diameter (subject to press.)] (thickness) [attachment (welded, bolted)]

F
15 F
38 F
36 F
37
(floating, material spec. no.) (diameter) (thickness) (attachment)

12. Tubes F
15 F
40 F
41 F
42 F
43
(material spec. no.) (OD) [thickness (inches or gage)] (no.) [type (straight or U)]
Items 13 to 16 inclusive to be completed for inner chambers of jacketed vessels, or channels of heat exchangers.

13. Shell F
15 F
16 F
17 F
18 F
19 F
20
(material spec. no.) (tensile strength) (nominal thickness) (minimim design thickness) (diameter ID) [length (overall)]

14. Seams F
21 F
22 F
23 F
24 F
25 F
22 F
23 F
26
[long. (welded. dbl., single)] [HT1 (yes or no)] (RT) (eff. %) (girth) (HT1) (RT) (no. of courses)

15. Heads F
15 F
16 F
15 F
16 F
15 F
16
[(a) material spec. no.] (tensile strength) [(b) material spec. no.] (tensile strength) [(c) material spec. no.] (tensile strength)

Crown Knuckle Elliptical Conical Hemispherical Flat Side to Pressure

F
27
Location Thickness Radius Radius Ratio Apex Angle Radius Diameter (convex or concave)

(a) Top, bottom, ends

(b) Channel
(c) Floating

If removable, bolts used F

15 F
26
Other fastening F
29
(material spec. no., size, quantity) (describe or attach sketch)

16. Design pressure2 F

31
at F
32
. Min. pressure-test temp. F
33
. Pneu., hydro., or comb. test pressure F
34

1 Ifpostweld heat treated. 2 List other internal or external pressure with coincident temperature when applicable.
* Supplemental information in the form of lists, sketches, or drawings may be used provided: (1) size is 81/2  11; (2) information in items 1 through 4 on this Data Report
is included on each sheet; and (3) each sheet is numbered and the number of sheets is recorded at the top of this form.

(07/10)

42
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

FORM N-1 (Back — Pg. 2 of F

56
)
Certificate Holder’s Serial No. F
6

17. Nozzles, inspection and safety valve openings F

44 F
15 F
18 F
19

Purpose Diameter How Reinforcement

(inlet, outlet, drain, etc.) Quantity or Size Type Attached Material Thickness Material Location

18. Supports: Skirt F

45
Lugs F
45
Legs F
45
Other F
45
Attached F
45
(yes or no) (quantity) (quantity) (describe) (where and how)
19. Remarks: F
46

CERTIFICATION OF DESIGN
Design specification certified by F
49
P.E. State Reg. no.
Design report certified by F
50
P.E. State Reg. no.

F
69
CERTIFICATE OF SHOP COMPLIANCE
We certify that the statements made in this report are correct and that this nuclear vessel conforms to the rules for construction of the ASME
Code, Section III, Division 1.
N Certificate of Authorization No. Expires
Date Name Signed
(N Certificate Holder) (authorized representative)

F
68
CERTIFICATE OF SHOP INSPECTION
I, the undersigned, holding a valid commission issued by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors and employed by

of have inspected the component described in this Data Report on

, and state that to the best of my knowledge and belief, the Certificate Holder has constructed this component in accordance
with the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1.
By signing this certificate neither the inspector nor his employer makes any warranty, expressed or implied, concerning the component described
in this Data Report. Furthermore, neither the inspector nor his employer shall be liable in any manner for any personal injury or property damage
or a loss of any kind arising from or connected with this inspection.
Date Signed Commission F
67

(Authorized Nuclear Inspector) [National Board Number and Endorsement]

F
70
CERTIFICATE OF FIELD ASSEMBLY COMPLIANCE
We certify that the statements on this report are correct and that the field assembly construction of all parts of this nuclear vessel conforms to
the rules of construction of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1.
N Certificate of Authorization No. Expires
Date Name Signed
(N Certificate Holder) (authorized representative)

F
71
CERTIFICATE OF FIELD ASSEMBLY INSPECTION
I, the undersigned, holding a valid commission issued by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors and employed by

of have compared the statements in this Data Report with the described component
and state that parts referred to as data items , not included in the certificate of shop
inspection, have been inspected by me on and that to the best of my knowledge and belief, the Certificate Holder has
constructed and assembled this component in accordance with the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1.
By signing this certificate neither the inspector nor his employer makes any warranty, expressed or implied, concerning the component described
in this Data Report. Furthermore, neither the inspector nor his employer shall be liable in any manner for any personal injury or property damage
or a loss of any kind arising from or connected with this inspection.
Date Signed Commission F
67

(Authorized Nuclear Inspector) [National Board Number and Endorsement]

(07/11)

43
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

FORM N-1A CERTIFICATE HOLDER’S DATA REPORT FOR NUCLEAR VESSELS*

Alternate Form for Single Chamber Completely Shop-Fabricated Vessels Only
As Required by the Provisions of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1 Pg. 1 of F
56

1. Manufactured and certified by F

1
(name and address of N Certificate Holder)
2. Manufactured for F
2
(name and address of Purchaser)
3. Location of installation F
3
(name and address)

4. Type F
4 F
6 F
7 F
8 F
9 F
10
(horizontal or vertical) (Certificate Holder’s serial no.) (CRN) (drawing no.) (National Bd. no.) (year built)

5. ASME Code, Section III, Division 1: F

11 F
12 F
13 F
14
(edition) [Addenda (if applicable) (date)] (class) (Code Case no.)

6. Shell F
15 F
16 F
17 F
18 F
19 F
20
(material spec. no.) (tensile strength) (nominal thickness) (minimum design thickness) (diameter ID) [length (overall)]

7. Seams F
21 F
22 F
23 F
24 F
25 F
22 F
23 F
26
(long.) (HT1) (RT) (eff. %) (girth) (HT1) (RT) (no. of courses)
8. Heads F
15 F
16 F
15 F
16
[(a) material spec. no.] (tensile strength) [(b) material spec. no.] (tensile strength)

Location (top, Crown Knuckle Conical Hemispherical Flat Side to Pressure

F
27
bottom, ends) Thickness Radius Radius
Elliptical
Ratio Apex Angle Radius Diameter (convex or concave)

(a)
(b)
If removable, bolts used F
15 F
28
Other fastening F
29
(material spec. no., T.S., size, quantity) (describe or attach sketch)

9. Design pressure2 F
31
at max. temp. F
32
. Min. pressure test temp. F
33
Hydro., pneu., or comb. test pressure F
34

10. Nozzles, inspection and safety valve openings F

44 F
15 F
18 F
19

Purpose Diameter How Reinforcement

(inlet, outlet, drain, etc.) Quantity or Size Type Attached Material Thickness Material Location

11. Supports: Skirt F

45
Lugs F
45
Legs F
45
Other F
45
Attached F
45
(yes or no) (quantity) (quantity) (describe) (where and how)

12. Remarks F
46

CERTIFICATION OF DESIGN
Design specification certified by F
49
P.E. State Reg. no.
Design report certified by F
50
P.E. State Reg. no.
F
69
CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE
We certify that the statements made in this report are correct and that this nuclear vessel conforms to the rules for construction of the ASME
Code, Section III, Division 1. N Certificate of Authorization No. Expires
Date Name Signed
(N Certificate Holder) (authorized representative)

F
68
CERTIFICATE OF INSPECTION
I, the undersigned, holding a valid commission issued by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors and employed by

of have inspected the component described in this Data Report on

, and state that to the best of my knowledge and belief, the Certificate Holder has constructed this component in accordance
with the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1.
By signing this certificate neither the inspector nor his employer makes any warranty, expressed or implied, concerning the component described
in this Data Report. Furthermore, neither the inspector nor his employer shall be liable in any manner for any personal injury or property damage
or a loss of any kind arising from or connected with this inspection.
Date Signed Commission F
67

(Authorized Nuclear Inspector) [National Board Number and Endorsement]

1 If
postweld heat treated. 2 List other internal or external pressure with coincident temperature when applicable.
* Supplemental information in the form of lists, sketches, or drawings may be used provided: (1) size is 81/2  11; (2) information in items 1 through 4 on this Data
Report is included on each sheet; and (3) each sheet is numbered and the number of sheets is recorded at the top of this form.

(07/11)

44
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

FORM N-2 CERTIFICATE HOLDER’S DATA REPORT FOR IDENTICAL

NUCLEAR PARTS AND APPURTENANCES*
As Required by the Provisions of the ASME Code, Section III
Not to Exceed One Day’s Production
Pg. 1 of F
56

1. Manufactured and certified by F

1
(name and address of NPT Certificate Holder)

2. Manufactured for F
2
(name and address of purchaser)

3. Location of installation F
3
(name and address)

4. Type F
8 F
15 F
16 F
7 F
10
(drawing no.) (material spec. no.) (tensile strength) (CRN) (year built)

5. ASME Code, Section III, Division 1 F

11 F
12 F
13 F
14
(edition) [Addenda (if applicable) (date)] (class) (Code Case no.)

6. Fabricated in accordance with Const. Spec. (Div. 2 only) F

77
Revision F
77
Date F
77
(no.)

7. Remarks F
46

8. Nom. thickness F
17
Min. design thickness F
18
Diameter ID F
19
Length overall F
20

9. When applicable, Certificate Holder’s Data Reports are attached for each item of this report.

National National
Part or Appurtenance Board No. Part or Appurtenance Board No.
Serial Number in Numerical Order Serial Number in Numerical Order
F
6 F
9 F
6 F
9

(1) (26)
(2) (27)
(3) (28)
(4) (29)
(5) (30)
(6) (31)
(7) (32)
(8) (33)
(9) (34)
(10) (35)
(11) (36)
(12) (37)
(13) (38)
(14) (39)
(15) (40)
(16) (41)
(17) (42)
(18) (43)
(19) (44)
(20) (45)
(21) (46)
(22) (47)
(23) (48)
(24) (49)
(25) (50)

10. Design pressure F

31
. Temperature F
32
. Hydro. test pressure F
33 F
34
at temp. .
(when applicable)

* Supplemental information in the form of lists, sketches, or drawings may be used provided: (1) size is 81/2  11; (2) information in items 2 and 3 on this Data Report is
included on each sheet; and (3) each sheet is numbered and the number of sheets is recorded at the top of this form.

(07/10)

45
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

FORM N-2 (Back — Pg. 2 of F

56
)

Certificate Holder’s Serial Nos. F

6
through

CERTIFICATION OF DESIGN

Design specifications certified by F

49
P.E. State Reg. no.
(when applicable)

Design report* certified by F

50
P.E. State Reg. no.
(when applicable)

F
69
CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE

We certify that the statements made in this report are correct and that this (these)
conforms to the rules of construction of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1.

NPT Certificate of Authorization No. Expires

Date Name Signed

(NPT Certificate Holder) (authorized representative)

F
68
CERTIFICATE OF INSPECTION

I, the undersigned, holding a valid commission issued by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors and employed by

of have inspected these items described in this Data Report on , and state that to the
best of my knowledge and belief, the Certificate Holder has fabricated these parts or appurtenances in accordance with the ASME Code, Section III,
Division 1. Each part listed has been authorized for stamping on the date shown above.
By signing this certificate neither the inspector nor his employer makes any warranty, expressed or implied, concerning the equipment described
in this Data Report. Furthermore, neither the inspector nor his employer shall be liable in any manner for any personal injury or property damage
or loss of any kind arising from or connected with this inspection.

Date Signed Commission F

67

(Authorized Nuclear Inspector) [National Board Number and Endorsement]

(07/11)

46
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

FORM N-3 OWNER’S DATA REPORT FOR NUCLEAR POWER PLANT COMPONENTS*
As Required by the Provisions of the ASME Code, Section III
Pg. 1 of F
56

1. Name of Owner F
1

2. Address of Owner F
2

3. Name of power plant F

52 F
53 F
9
(unit no.) (National Bd. no.)

4. Location of power plant F

3

5. NUCLEAR VESSELS (List all nuclear concrete and metallic vessels or core supports and attach copies of all N and NPT Certificate Holder’s Data
Reports. Forms N-1, N-1A, N-2, NCS-1, and C-1.)

Certificate Holder and Serial Number State No. or CRN National Bd. No. Year Built

F
1 F
6 F
7 F
9 F
10

Attach supplemental pages as required.

6. NUCLEAR PIPING (Identify all nuclear piping by listing system identification appearing on Form N-5 and attach copies of all N-5 Data Reports for
nuclear piping.)

Certificate Holder and Serial Number Piping System Identification National Bd. No. Year Built

F
1 F
6 F
51 F
9 F
10

Attach supplemental pages as required.

* Supplemental information in the form of lists, sketches, or drawings may be used provided: (1) size is 81/2  11; (2) information in items 1 through 4 on this Data Report
is included on each sheet; and (3) each sheet is numbered and the number of sheets is recorded at the top of this form.

(09/06)

47
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

FORM N-3 (Back — Pg. 2 of F

56
)

Unit No. F
53

7. NUCLEAR PUMPS & VALVES (List and identify all nuclear pumps and valves and attach copies of all N Certificate Holder’s Data Reports, Forms
NV-1 and NPV-1.)

Certificate Holder Pump Valve Cert. Holder's Serial No. National Bd. No. Year Built

F
1 F
54 F
54 F
6 F
9 F
10

Attach supplemental pages as required.

8. Remarks
F
46

F
69
OWNER’S CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETED INSTALLATION

I, the undersigned, certify that the statements made in this report are correct and have checked all nuclear components coming under the scope
of the ASME Code, Section III, and state that to the best of my knowledge and belief, each Certificate Holder has met all the rules of construction
of the ASME Code, Section III. Attached are copies of Certificate Holder’s Data Reports covering all nuclear components.
Owner’s Certificate of Authorization No. Expires

Date Signature
(authorized representative)

F
68
CERTIFICATE OF INSPECTION

I, the undersigned, holding a valid commission issued by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors and employed by

of , based on audits of the owner’s quality assurance program and supporting documentation for components
and/or appurtenances and installation of same described in this Data Report on , state that to the best of my
knowledge and belief, the owner, or his designee, as applicable, has complied with the requirements of the ASME Code, Section III.
By signing this certificate, neither the inspector nor his employer makes any warranty, expressed or implied, concerning the components and/or
appurtenances and installation of same described in this owner’s Data Report. Furthermore, neither the inspector nor his employer shall be liable
in any manner for any personal injury or property damage or a loss of any kind arising from or connected with this audit activity.

Date Signed Commission F

67

(Authorized Nuclear Inspector) [National Board Number and Endorsement]

(07/11)

48
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

FORM N-5 CERTIFICATE HOLDER’S DATA REPORT FOR INSTALLATION OR SHOP ASSEMBLY OF
NUCLEAR POWER PLANT COMPONENTS, SUPPORTS, AND APPURTENANCES*
As Required by the Provisions of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1 F
56
Pg. 1 of

1. Installed and certified by F

1
(name and address of N or NA Certificate Holder)

2. Installed for F
2
(name and address of Purchaser)

3. Location of installation F
3
(name and address)
4. System identification F
51 F
6 F
8 F
7 F
9 F
10
(system name) (Cert. Holder’s serial no.) (drawing no.) (CRN) (National Bd. no.) (year installed)
5. ASME Code, Section III, Division 1 F
11 F
12 F
13 F
14
(edition) [Addenda (if applicable) (date)] (class) (Code Case no.)
6. N Certificate Holder having overall responsibility F
1
(name and address)
7. Nuclear components, parts, appurtenances, and supports installed: (List each item and attach copies of N Certificate Holders’ Data Reports and
NPT Certificate Holder’s Data Reports.)
Components
(b) Name of
(a) Comp. or Appurt. Certificate Holder (c) Serial No. (d) CRN No. (e) National Bd. No. (f) Year Built

F
62 F
1 F
6 F
7 F
9 F
10

Piping and part installation

(a) Piping or Part (b) Name of (f) Year Built—Parts
Subassembly Certificate Holder (c) Serial No. (d) CRN No. (e) National Bd. No. Only

F
63 F
1 F
6 F
7 F
9 F
10

Support installation
(b) Name of (d) Design Rept./Load
(a) Support No. Certificate Holder (c) Serial No. Capac. Data Sheet (e) CRN No. (f) National Bd. No. (g) Year Built

F
64 F
1 F
6 F
61 F
7 F
9 F
10

Additional material excluding welding material

(a) Name of Manufacturer (b) Material Spec. No. (c) Dimensions—Overall

F
59 F
15 F
20

8. Installation in accordance with

Procedure or Drawing No. Prepared by

F
8 F
60

9. Hydrostatic test pressure F

34
at temp. F
33
. System design pressure F
31
at temp. F
32

10. Remarks
F
46

* Supplemental information in the form of lists, sketches, or drawings may be used provided: (1) size is 81/2  11; (2) information in items 1 and 4 on this Data Report is
included on each sheet; and (3) each sheet is numbered and the number of sheets is recorded at the top of this form.

(07/10)

49
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

FORM N-5 (Back — Pg. 2 of F

56
)
Certificate Holder’s Serial No. F
6

CERTIFICATION OF DESIGN FOR PIPING SYSTEM

Design information on file at F

47

Design report on file at F

48

Design specification certified by F

49
P.E. State Reg. no.

Design report certified by F

50
P.E. State Reg. no.

Design conditions of pressure piping F

31
psi. Temp.
F
32
F.

F
70 CERTIFICATE OF INSTALLATION COMPLIANCE

We certify that the statements made in this report are correct and that this installation conforms to the rules for construction of the ASME Code,
Section III, Division 1, and was performed in accordance with the documents listed in 8 above.

N or NA Certificate of Authorization No. Expires

Date Name Signed

(N or NA Certificate Holder) (authorized representative)

F
71 CERTIFICATE OF INSTALLATION INSPECTION

I, the undersigned, holding a valid commission issued by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors and employed by

of have inspected the installation of the items described in this Data Report on and
state that to the best of my knowledge and belief, the Certificate of Authorization Holder has performed this installation in accordance with the
ASME Code, Section III, Division 1.
By signing this certificate neither the inspector nor his employer makes any warranty, expressed or implied, concerning the installation described
in this Data Report. Furthermore, neither the inspector nor his employer shall be liable in any manner for any personal injury or property damage
or a loss of any kind arising from or connected with this inspection.

Date Signed Commission F

67
(Authorized Nuclear Inspector) [National Board Number and Endorsement]

F
69 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE FOR OVERALL RESPONSIBILITY

Following completion of the above, the Certificate of Authorization Holder accepting overall responsibility for the piping system shall complete
the following statement.
We certify that the statements made by this report are correct and that the piping system conforms to the rules for construction of the ASME
Code, Section III, Division 1.

N Certificate of Authorization No. Expires

Date Name Signed

(N Certificate Holder) (authorized representative)

F
68 CERTIFICATE OF INSPECTION

I, the undersigned, holding a valid commission issued by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors and employed by

of have inspected the piping system described in this Data Report on and
state that to the best of my knowledge and belief, the Certificate Holder has connected this piping system in accordance with the ASME Code,
Section III, Division 1.
By signing this certificate, neither the inspector nor his employer makes any warranty, expressed or implied, concerning the piping system described
in this Data Report. Furthermore, neither the inspector nor his employer shall be liable in any manner for any personal injury or property damage
or a loss of any kind arising from or connected with this inspection.

Date Signed Commission F

67

(Authorized Nuclear Inspector) [National Board Number and Endorsement]

(07/11)

50
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

FORM N-6 CERTIFICATE HOLDER’S DATA REPORT FOR STORAGE TANKS*

As Required by the Provisions of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1
Pg. 1 of F
56

1. Manufactured and certified by F

1
(name and address of N Certificate Holder)

2. Manufactured for F
2

(name and address of purchaser)

3. Location of installation F
3

(name and address)

4. Type F
4 F
6 F
7 F
8 F
9 F
10

(horizontal or vertical tank) (Cert. Holder’s serial no.) (CRN) (drawing no.) (National Bd. no.) (year built)

5. ASME Code, Section III, Division 1 F

11 F
12 F
13 F
14
(edition) [Addenda (if applicable) (date)] (class) (Code Case no.)

6. Shell F
15 F
17 F
18 F
16 F
19 F
20
[material (spec. no., grade)] (nominal thickness) (design thickness) (minimum tensile) (diameter ID) [length (overall)]

7. Seams F
21 F
23 F
24 F
22 F
25 F
23 F
26

[long. (welded, dbl., [RT (spot or full)] [eff. (%)] [HT1 (yes)] [girth (welded, dbl., [RT (spot, partial or (no. of courses)
sngl., lap. butt)] sngl., lap. butt)] full)]
8. Heads (a) F
15
T.S. F
16
(b) F
15
T.S. F
16
[material (spec. no., grade)] [material (spec. no., grade)]

Location (top,
bottom, Minimum Design Crown Knuckle Elliptical Conical Hemispherical Flat Side to Pressure Type of Joint
ends) Thickness Thickness Radius Radius Ratio Apex Angle Radius Diameter (convex or concave) (lap or butt)
(a)
(b)

If removable, bolts used (describe other fastenings) F

15 F
26
(material, spec. no., gr., size. no.)

9. Design Pressure2 F
31
at max. temp. F
32
. Min. pressure-test temp. F
33
. Pneu., hydro., or comb. test pressure F
34

10. Nozzles, inspection and safety valve openings F

15 F
18 F
19 F
44

Purpose Diameter Nominal Reinforcement How

(inlet, outlet, drain, etc.) No. or Size Type Material Thickness Material Attached Location

11. Supports: Skirt F

45
Lugs F
45
Legs F
45
Other F
45
Attached F
45

(yes or no) (no.) (no.) (describe) (where and how)

12. Remarks
F
46

1 Ifpostweld heat treated. 2 List other internal or external pressures with coincident temperature when applicable.

* Supplemental information in the form of lists, sketches, or drawings may be used provided: (1) size is 81/2  11; (2) information in items 1 through 4 on this Data Report
is included on each sheet; and (3) each sheet is numbered and the number of sheets is recorded at the top of this form.

(07/10)

51
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

FORM N-6 (Back — Pg. 2 of F

56
)

Certificate Holder’s Serial No. F

6

CERTIFICATION OF DESIGN

Design specification certified by F

49
P.E. State Reg. no.
Design information on file at F
42

F
69
CERTIFICATE OF SHOP COMPLIANCE

We certify that the statements made in this report are correct and that this storage tank conforms to the rules for construction of the ASME Code,
Section III, Division 1.
N Certificate of Authorization No. Expires

Date Name Signed

(N Certificate Holder) (authorized representative)

F
68
CERTIFICATE OF SHOP INSPECTION

I, the undersigned, holding a valid commission issued by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors and employed by

of have inspected the storage tank described in this Data Report on

, and state that to the best of my knowledge and belief, the Certificate Holder has constructed this storage tank in accor-
dance with the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1.
By signing this certificate neither the inspector nor his employer makes any warranty, expressed or implied, concerning the storage tank described
in this Data Report. Furthermore, neither the inspector nor his employer shall be liable in any manner for any personal injury or property damage
or a loss of any kind arising from or connected with this inspection.

Date Signed Commission

F
67

(Authorized Nuclear Inspector) [National Board Number and Endorsement]

F
70 CERTIFICATE OF FIELD ASSEMBLY COMPLIANCE

We certify that the statements on this report are correct and that the field assembly construction of all parts of this storage tank conforms to the
rules of construction of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1.
N Certificate of Authorization No. Expires

Date Name Signed

(N Certificate Holder) (authorized representative)

F
71 CERTIFICATE OF FIELD ASSEMBLY INSPECTION

I, the undersigned, holding a valid commission issued by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors and employed by

of have compared the statements in this Data Report with the described storage tank
and state that parts referred to as data items , not included in the Certificate of Shop
Inspection, have been inspected by me on and that to the best of my knowledge and belief the Certificate Holder has constructed
and assembled this storage tank in accordance with the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1.
By signing this certificate, neither the inspector nor his employer makes any warranty, expressed or implied, concerning the installation described
in this Data Report. Furthermore, neither the inspector nor his employer shall be liable in any manner for any personal injury or property damage
or a loss of any kind arising from or connected with this inspection.

F
67
Date Signed Commission
(Authorized Nuclear Inspector) [National Board Number and Endorsement]

(07/11)

52
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

FORM NPP-1 CERTIFICATE HOLDER’S DATA REPORT FOR FABRICATED

NUCLEAR PIPING SUBASSEMBLIES*
As Required by the Provisions of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1
Pg. 1 of F
56

1. Fabricated and certified by F

1
(name and address of NPT Certificate Holder)

2. Fabricated for F
2
(name and address of Purchaser)

3. Location of installation F
3
(name and address)

4. Type F
6 F
7 F
8 F
9 F
10
(Certificate Holder’s serial no.) (CRN) (drawing no.) (National Bd. no.) (year built)

5. ASME Code, Section III, Division 1: F

11 F
12 F
13 F
14
(edition) [Addenda (if applicable) (date)] (class) (Code Case no.)

6. Shop hydrostatic test F

34
at F
33
(if performed)

7. Description of piping F
51 F
55 F
15

8. Certificate Holder’s Data Reports properly identified and signed by commissioned inspectors have been furnished for the following items of this
report F
80

9. Remarks F
46

F 69
CERTIFICATE OF SHOP COMPLIANCE
We certify that the statements made in this report are correct and that the fabrication of the described piping subassembly conforms to the rules
for construction of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1.

NPT Certificate of Authorization No. Expires

Date Name Signed

(NPT Certificate Holder) (authorized representative)

F
68
CERTIFICATE OF SHOP INSPECTION

I, the undersigned, holding a valid commission issued by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors and employed by

of have inspected the piping subassembly described in this Data Report on

, and state that to the best of my knowledge and belief, the Certificate Holder has fabricated this piping subassembly in
accordance with the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1.
By signing this certificate neither the inspector nor his employer makes any warranty, expressed or implied, concerning the piping subassembly
described in this Data Report. Furthermore, neither the inspector nor his employer shall be liable in any manner for any personal injury or property
damage or a loss of any kind arising from or connected with this inspection.

Date Signed Commission F

67

(Authorized Nuclear Inspector) [National Board Number and Endorsement]

* Supplemental information in the form of lists, sketches, or drawings may be used provided: (1) size is 81/2  11; (2) information in items 1 through 4 on this Data Report
is included on each sheet; and (3) each sheet is numbered and the number of sheets is recorded at the top of this form.

(07/11)

53
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

FORM NPP-1 (Back — Pg. 2 of F

56
)

Certificate Holder’s Serial No. F

6

10. Description of field fabrication F

51 F
55

11. Pneu., hydro., or comb. test pressure F

34
at temp. F
33
(if performed)

F
70 CERTIFICATE OF FIELD FABRICATION COMPLIANCE

We certify that the statements made in this report are correct and that the field fabrication of the described piping subassembly conforms with
the rules for construction of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1.

NPT Certificate of Authorization No. Expires

Date Name Signed

(Certificate Holder) (authorized representation)

F 71
CERTIFICATE OF FIELD FABRICATION INSPECTION
I, the undersigned, holding a valid commission issued by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors and employed by

of have compared the statements in this Data Report with the described piping subassembly
and state that parts referred to as data items , not included in the Certificate of Shop Inspection,
have been inspected by me on and that to the best of my knowledge and belief the Certificate Holder has fabricated this
piping subassembly in accordance with the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1.
By signing this certificate neither the inspector nor his employer makes any warranty, expressed or implied, concerning the piping subassembly
described in this Data Report. Furthermore, neither the inspector nor his employer shall be liable in any manner for any personal injury or property
damage or a loss of any kind arising from or connected with this inspection.

Date Signed Commission F

67

(Authorized Nuclear Inspector) [National Board Number and Endorsement]

(07/11)

54
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

FORM NPV-1 CERTIFICATE HOLDER’S DATA REPORT FOR NUCLEAR PUMPS OR VALVES*
As Required by the Provisions of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1
Pg. 1 of F
56

1. Manufactured and certified by F

1
(name and address of N Certificate Holder)

2. Manufactured for F
2

(name and address of Purchaser)

3. Location of installation F
3
(name and address)

4. Model No., Series No., or Type F

104
Drawing F
8
Rev. F
8
CRN F
7

5. ASME Code, Section III, Division 1 F

11 F
12 F
13 F
14
(edition) [Addenda (if applicable) (date)] (class) (Code Case no.)

6. Pump or valve F
100
Nominal inlet size F
83
Outlet size F
83

7. Material
(a) valve Body F
15
Bonnet F
15
Disk F
15
Bolting F
15

(b) pump Casing F

15
Cover F
15
Bolting F
15

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

Certificate National Body/Casing Bonnet/Cover Disk
Holder’s Board Serial Serial Serial
Serial No. No. No. No. No.

F
6 F
9 F
102 F
102 F
102

* Supplemental information in the form of lists, sketches, or drawings may be used provided: (1) size is 81/2  11; (2) information in items 1 through 4 on this Data Report
is included on each sheet; and (3) each sheet is numbered and the number of sheets is recorded at the top of this form.

(07/10)

55
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

FORM NPV-1 (Back — Pg. 2 of F

56
)

Certificate Holder’s Serial No. F

6

8. Design conditions F
105 F
106
or valve pressure class F
81
(pressure) (temperature)

9. Cold working pressure F

103

10. Hydrostatic test F

105
. Disk differential test pressure F
98

11. Remarks

CERTIFICATION OF DESIGN

Design Specification certified by F

49
P.E. State Reg. no.
Design Report certified by F
50
P.E. State Reg. no.

F
69
CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE

We certify that the statements made in this report are correct and that this pump or valve conforms to the rules for construction of the
ASME Code, Section III, Division 1.
N Certificate of Authorization No. Expires

Date Name Signed

(N Certificate Holder) (authorized representative)

F
68
CERTIFICATE OF INSPECTION

I, the undersigned, holding a valid commission issued by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors and employed by

of have inspected the pump, or valve, described in this Data Report on

, and state that to the best of my knowledge and belief, the Certificate Holder has constructed this pump, or valve,
in accordance with the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1.
By signing this certificate neither the inspector nor his employer makes any warranty, expressed or implied, concerning the component described
in this Data Report. Furthermore, neither the inspector nor his employer shall be liable in any manner for any personal injury or property damage
or a loss of any kind arising from or connected with this inspection.

Date Signed Commission F

67
(Authorized Nuclear Inspector) [National Board Number and Endorsement]

(07/11)

56
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

FORM NV-1 CERTIFICATE HOLDER’S DATA REPORT FOR PRESSURE OR VACUUM

RELIEF VALVES*
As Required by the Provisions of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1
Pg. 1 of F
56

1. Manufactured and certified by F

1
(name and address of NV Certificate Holder)

2. Manufactured for F
2

(name and address of Purchaser)

3. Location of installation F
3
(name and address)

4. Valve F
104
Orifice size F
82
Nom. inlet size F
83
Outlet size F
83
(model no., series no.)

5. ASME Code, Section III, Division 1 F

11 F
12 F
13 F
14
(edition) [Addenda (if applicable) (date)] (class) (Code Case no.)

6. Type F
84 F
85 F
86 F
87 F
34
at F
33
(spring, pilot, or power operated) (set pressure) (blowdown) (rated temp.) (hydro. test., inlet)

7. Identification
F
6 F
7 F
8 F
9 F
10

(Cert. Holder’s serial no.) (CRN) (drawing no.) (National Bd. no.) (year built)

8. Control ring settings F

108

9. Pressure-retaining items
Serial No. or Identification Material Spec., Including Type or Grade Tensile Strength

Body F
6 F
15 F
16

Bonnet or Yoke
Support Rods
Nozzle
Disk
Spring Washers
Adjusting Screws
Spindle
Spring
Bolting
Other Items

10. Relieving capacity F

86
@ F
65
overpressure as certified by the National Board F
66

(steam or fluid) (date)

11. Remarks F
46

CERTIFICATION OF DESIGN
Design Specification certified by F
49
P.E. State Reg. no.
Design Report certified by F
50
P.E. State Reg. no.

F
69 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE
We certify that the statements made in this report are correct and that this valve conforms to the rules for construction of the ASME Code, Section III,
Division 1.
NV Certificate of Authorization No. Expires

Date Name Signed

(NV Certificate Holder) (authorization representative)

* Supplemental information in the form of lists, sketches, or drawings may be used provided: (1) size is 81/2  11; (2) information in items 1 through 4 on this Data
Report is included on each sheet; and (3) each sheet is numbered and the number of sheets is recorded at the top of this form.

(07/17)

57
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

FORM NV-1 (Back — Pg. 2 of F

56
)

Certificate Holder’s Serial No. F

6

F
68
CERTIFICATE OF INSPECTION

I, the undersigned, holding a valid commission issued by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors and employed by

of have inspected the valve described in this Data Report on and

state that to the best of my knowledge and belief, the Certificate Holder has constructed this valve in accordance with the ASME Code, Section III,
Division 1.
By signing this certificate neither the inspector nor his employer makes any warranty, expressed or implied, concerning the component described
in this Data Report. Furthermore, neither the inspector nor his employer shall be liable in any manner for any personal injury or property damage
or a loss of any kind arising from or connected with this inspection.

Date Signed Commission F

67
(Authorized Nuclear Inspector) [National Board Number and Endorsement]

(07/11)

58
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

FORM NCS-1 CERTIFICATE HOLDER’S DATA REPORT FOR CORE SUPPORT STRUCTURES*
As Required by the Provisions of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1
Pg. 1 of F
56

1. Manufactured and certified by F

1

(name and address of N Certificate Holder)

2. Manufactured for F
2

(name and address of Purchaser)

3. Location of installation F
3
(name and address)

4. Type F
39 F
6 F
7 F
8 F
9 F
10
(structure) (C.H.’s serial no.) (CRN) (drawing no.) (National Bd. no.) (year built)
5. ASME Code, Section III, Division 1 F
11 F
12 F
13 F
14
(edition) [Addenda (if applicable) (date)] (class) (Code Case no.)
6. Manufactured in accordance with Specification F
78
Rev. Date F
78

(Design Report or Load Capacity Data Sheet)

7. List of Drawings (with last revision and date)

8. Remarks F
46

CERTIFICATION OF DESIGN
Design specification certified by F
49
P.E. State Reg. no.
Design report certified by F
50
P.E. State Reg. no.

F69
CERTIFICATE OF INTERNAL STRUCTURES
The undersigned, having a valid Certification of Authorization, certify that the construction of the internal structures will not adversely affect the
integrity of the core support structures.

N Certificate of Authorization No. Expires

Date Name Signed

(N Certificate Holder) (authorized representative)

F
69
CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE
We certify that the statements made in this report are correct and that this set of core support structures conforms to the rules of construction
of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1.
N Certificate of Authorization No. Expires

Date Name Signed

(N Certificate Holder) (authorized representative)

F
68
CERTIFICATE OF INSPECTION
I, the undersigned, holding a valid commission issued by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors and employed by

have inspected the core support structure described in this Data Report on , and state that to the best of my knowledge
and belief, the Certificate Holder has constructed this item in accordance with the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1. By signing this certificate
neither the inspector nor his employer makes any warranty, expressed or implied, concerning the item described in this Data Report. Furthermore,
neither the inspector nor his employer shall be liable in any manner for any personal injury or property damage or a loss of any kind arising from
or connected with this inspection.

Date Signed Commission F

67
(Authorized Nuclear Inspector) [National Board Number and Endorsement]

* Supplemental sheets in the form of lists, sketches, or drawings may be used provided: (1) size is 81/2  11; (2) information in items 1 through 4 on this Data Report is
included on each sheet; and (3) each sheet is numbered and the number of sheets is recorded at the top of this form.

(07/11)

59
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

FORM NF-1 CERTIFICATE HOLDER’S DATA REPORT FOR SUPPORTS*

As Required by the Provisions of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1 Pg. 1 of F
56

1. Manufactured by F
1

(name and address of NPT Certificate Holder)

2. Manufactured for F
2

(name and address of Purchaser)

3. Location of installation F
3

(name and address)

4. Type
F
96 F
97 F
10

(describe) (Design Report or Load Capacity Data Sheet) (Year built)

5. ASME Code, Section III, Division 1 F

11 F
12 F
13 F
14

(edition) [Addenda (if applicable) (date)] (class) (Code Case no.)

6. Identification
(b) (c) (d) (e)
(a) Material Canadian Applicable National
Support Specification Registration Drawings With Board
I.D. No. No. No. Last Rev. & Date No.

(1)
F
64 F
15 F
7 F
8 F
9

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

7. Remarks
F
46

* Supplemental information in the form of lists, sketches, or drawings may be used provided: (1) size is 81/2  11; (2) information in items 1 through 4 on this Data
Report is included on each sheet; and (3) each sheet is numbered and the number of sheets is recorded at the top of this form.

(07/10)

60
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

FORM NF-1 (Back — Pg. 2 of F

56
)

Support I.D. Nos. F

64
through

CERTIFICATION OF DESIGN

Design Specification certified by

F
49
P.E. State Reg. No.
Design Report certified by F
50
P.E. State Reg. No.

F
69
CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE

We certify that the statements made in this report are correct and that these supports conform to the rules for construction of the ASME Code,
Section III, Division 1.
NPT Certificate of Authorization No. Expires

Date Name Signed

(NPT Certificate Holder) (authorized representative)

F
68
CERTIFICATE OF INSPECTION

I, the undersigned, holding a valid commission issued by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors and employed by
of
have inspected the supports described in this Data Report on , ,
and state that to the best of my knowledge and belief, the Certificate Holder has constructed these supports in accordance with the ASME Code,
Section III, Division 1.

By signing this certificate, neither the inspector nor his employer makes any warranty, expressed or implied, concerning the component supports
described in this Data Report. Furthermore, neither the inspector nor his employer shall be liable in any manner for any personal injury or property
damage or a loss of any kind arising from or connected with this inspection.

Date Signed Commission

(Authorized Nuclear Inspector) [National Board Number and Endorsement]

(07/11)

61
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

FORM NM-1 CERTIFICATE HOLDER'S DATA REPORT FOR

TUBULAR PRODUCTS AND FITTINGS WELDED WITH FILLER METAL*
As Required by the Provisions of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1
Pg. 1 of F
56

1. Manufactured and certified by F

1
(name and address of NPT Certificate Holder)

2. Manufactured for F
2

(name and address of Purchaser)

3. Location of installation F
3
(name and address)

4. Identification F
79 F
8 F
9 F
10

(lot, etc.) (drawing no.) (National Bd. no.) (year built)

5. ASME Code, Section III, Division 1 F

11 F
12 F
13 F
14

(edition) [Addenda (if applicable) (date)] (class) (Code Case no.)

6. Mat’l. Spec. F
15 F
16 F
17 F
19 F
20
(SA or SB and no.) (tensile strength) (nominal thickness) (diameter ID) (pipe length and fitting type)

7. Shop hydrostatic test pressure

F
34
at F
33
(if performed)

8. Remarks F
46

F
69
CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE

We certify that the statements made in this report are correct and that the products defined in this report conform to the rules for construction
of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1. The radiographic film and a radiographic report showing film location are attached to the Certified
Material Test Reports provided for the material covered by this report.
NPT Certificate of Authorization No. Expires

Date Name Signed

(NPT Certificate Holder) (authorized representative)

F
68
CERTIFICATE OF INSPECTION

I, the undersigned, holding a valid commission issued by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors and employed by

of have inspected the products described in this Data Report on

, and state that to the best of my knowledge and belief, the Certificate Holder has constructed this product in accordance
with the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1.
By signing this certificate neither the inspector nor his employer makes any warranty, expressed or implied, concerning the products described
in this Data Report. Furthermore, neither the inspector nor his employer shall be liable in any manner for any personal injury or property damage
or a loss of any kind arising from or connected with this inspection.

Date Signed Commission F

67

(Authorized Nuclear Inspector) [National Board Number and Endorsement]

*Supplemental information in the form of lists, sketches, or drawings may be used provided: (1) size is 81/2  11; (2) information in items 1 through 4 on this Data Report
is included on each sheet; and (3) each sheet is numbered and number of sheets is recorded at the top of this form.

(07/11)

62
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

FORM NS-1 CERTIFICATE HOLDER’S CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMANCE FOR WELDED SUPPORTS*

As Required by the Provisions of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 1 Pg. 1 of F
56

1. Manufactured by F
1
(name and address of NS Certificate Holder)

2. Manufactured for F
2

(name and address of Purchaser)

3. Location of installation F
3
(name and address)

4. Type F
96 F
97 F
10

(describe) (Design Report or Load Capacity Data Sheet) (Year built)

5. ASME Code, Section III, Division 1 F

11 F
12 F
13 F
14
(edition) [Addenda (if applicable) (date)] (class) (Code Case no.)
6. Identification
(b) (c) (d)
(a) Material Canadian Applicable
Support Specification Registration Drawings With
I.D. No. No. No. Last Rev. & Date

(1) F
64 F
15 F
7 F
8

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

7. Remarks F
46

* Supplemental information in the form of lists, sketches, or drawings may be used provided: (1) size is 81/2  11; (2) information in items 1 through 4 on this Certificate of
Conformance is included on each sheet; and (3) each sheet is numbered and the number of sheets is recorded at the top of this form.

(07/10)

63
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

FORM NS-1 (Back — Pg. 2 of F

56
)

Support I.D. Nos. F

64
through

CERTIFICATION OF DESIGN

Design Specification certified by F

49
P.E. State Reg. No.
Design Report certified by F
50
P.E. State Reg. No.

F
69
CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMANCE

We certify that the statements made in this report are correct and that these supports conform to the rules for construction of the ASME Code,
Section III, Division 1.
NS Certificate of Authorization No. Expires

Date Name Signed

(NS Certificate Holder) (authorized representative)

(07/10)

64
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

FORM C-1 CERTIFICATE HOLDER’S DATA REPORT

FOR CONCRETE REACTOR VESSELS AND CONTAINMENTS*
As Required by the Provisions of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 2
Pg. 1 of F
56

1. Constructed and certified by F

1
(name and address of N Certificate Holder)

2. Constructed for F
2

(name and address of Owner)

3. Location F
3
(name and address)

4. F
6 F
7 F
9 F
10

(Certificate Holder’s serial no.) (CRN) (National Bd. no.) (year built)

Type F
5 F
88 F
8

(reactor vessel or containment) (construction reinforced or prestressed concrete) (drawing no.)

5. ASME Code, Section III, Division 2 F

11 F
12 F
13 F
14
(edition) [Addenda (if applicable) (date)] (class) (Code Case no.)

6. Design conditions
(a) Drawing and revision Design pressure F
31
Design temp. F
32

(b) Design specification no. F

78
Revision Date
(c) Foundation type F
91
Dome type F
90
(soil, rock bearing, piles, etc.) (spherical, elliptical, flat, etc.)

7. Nominal dimensions F
19 F
17 F
20 F
89 F
17
(inside diameter) (wall thickness) (foundation top to (dome height) (dome thickness)
springline height)
8. Construction specifications (list all construction specifications) F
77

Title No. Revision Date

9. Type of post-tensioning system

(a) Tendon material F
15
Min. tensile F
16
Diameter or size F
38
Corrosion protection
(grout, grease, etc.)

(b) Fabricated by F
1
Installed by
F
1

10. Liner and sleeves (if within constructor’s responsibility)

(a) Liner material F
15
Min. yield F
107
Bottom thickness F
17

Wall thickness F
17 Dome thickness F
17

(b) Sleeve material

F
15
Min. yield
F
107
Number and sizes
F
38

11. Parts (fabricated, installed, or constructed by others)

List each item and attach copy of Certificate Holder’s Data Report

Manufacturer’s
Part Drawing & Rev. Name of CH Serial No. CRN National Bd. No. Year Built
F
63 F
8 F
1 F
6 F
7 F
9 F
10

12. Additional material excluding welding material

Name of Supplier Material Specification Dimensions

F
59 F
15 F
20

* Supplemental information in the form of lists, sketches, or drawings may be used provided: (1) size is 81/2  11; (2) information in items 1 through 6 on this Data Report
is included on each sheet; and (3) each sheet is numbered and the number of sheets is recorded at the top of this form.

(07/10)

65
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

FORM C-1 (Back — Pg. 2 of F

56
)

Certificate Holder’s Serial No. F

6

13. Construction Report No. F

93
Date

14. List of Penetrations F96

Attach a complete list of penetrations (i.e., personnel locks, equipment hatch, electrical, etc.) to this report. State the type, size, manufacturer,
and serial number.

15. Test Pressure F

34
Date tested

16. Remarks: F
46

CERTIFICATION OF DESIGN

Design Specification on file at F

109

Design Specification certified by F

49
P.E. State Reg. no.
Design Report on file at
F
48

Design Report certified by F

50
P.E. State Reg. no.

F
69
DESIGNER'S REPORT OF CERTIFICATION

I, the undersigned, representing the Designer and employed by have examined

and evaluated the Construction Report for the component described in this Data Report. Following evaluation, the Construction Report has been
certified and to the best of my knowledge and belief the Constructor has constructed this component in accordance with the rules of the ASME
Code, Section III, Division 2, and the construction specification listed herein, and these construction specifications meet the requirements of the
Design Specification.

Date Signed
(authorized representative)

P.E. State Reg. no.

F
70
CERTIFICATE OF CONSTRUCTION COMPLIANCE

We certify that the statements made in this report are correct and that all details of materials, construction, and workmanship of this component
conform to the rules for construction of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 2, and the Construction Specifications listed herein.

Certificate of Authorization No. Expires

Date Constructor Signed

(N Certificate Holder) (authorized representative)

F
71
CERTIFICATE OF INSPECTION

I, the undersigned, holding a valid commission issued by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors and employed by

of , have inspected the concrete reactor vessel or containment described in this Constructor's Data Report
and state that to the best of my knowledge and belief this component has been constructed in accordance with the ASME Code, Section III, Division 2.

By signing this certificate neither the Authorized Inspector nor his employer makes any warranty, expressed or implied, concerning the component
described in this report. Furthermore, neither the Authorized Inspector nor his employer shall be liable in any manner for any personal injury or
property damage or a loss of any kind arising from or connected with this inspection.

Date Signed Commission F

67

(Authorized Nuclear Inspector) [National Board Number and Endorsement]

(07/11)

66
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

FORM G-1 GC CERTIFICATE HOLDER’S DATA REPORT FOR GRAPHITE CORE ASSEMBLIES*
As Required by the Provisions of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 5 Pg. 1 of F
56 ð17Þ

1. Constructed and certified by F

1
(name and address of GC Certificate Holder)

2. Constructed for F
2

(name and address of purchaser)

3. Location of installation F
3
(name and address)

4. Type F
110 F
8 F
111 F
6 F
9

(core design type) (Drawing No.) (Graphite Core Assembly Serial No.) (Vessel Serial No.) (National Bd. no.)

5. ASME Code, Section III, Division 5 F

11 F
12 F
14 F
115 F
7 F
10

(edition/date) [Addenda (if applicable)] (Code Case no.) (Class) (CRN) (year built)
F
46
6. Remarks

F
69
CERTIFICATION OF DESIGN
Design specification certified by F
49
P.E. State Reg. no.
Design report certified by F
50
P.E. State Reg. no.
GC Certificate of Authorization No. Expires
Date Name Signed
(GC Certificate Holder) (authorized representative)

F
69
CERTIFICATE OF SHOP COMPLIANCE
We certify that the statements made in this report are correct and that the Graphite Core Components in this Graphite Core Assembly conform to
the rules for construction of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 5.
GC Certificate of Authorization No. Expires
Date Name Signed
(GC Certificate Holder) (authorized representative)

F
68
REVIEW AND ACCEPTANCE OF SHOP INSPECTION
I, the undersigned, holding a valid commission issued by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors and employed by

of have reviewed and accepted the G-2 Data Report Form(s) for the
Graphite Core Components described in this Data Report on and state that to the best of my knowledge and belief, the
Certificate Holder has machined the Graphite Core Components in accordance with the ASME Code, Section III, Division 5.
By signing this certificate neither the inspector nor his employer makes any warranty, expressed or implied, concerning the Graphite Core
Components described in this Data Report. Furthermore, neither the inspector nor his employer shall be liable in any manner for any personal
injury or property damage or a loss of any kind arising from or connected with this inspection.
Date Signed Commission F
67

[Authorized Nuclear Inspector (Graphite)] [National Board Number and Endorsement]

F
70
CERTIFICATE OF FIELD ASSEMBLY COMPLIANCE
We certify that the statements made are correct and that the field assembly of the Graphite Core Assembly in this nuclear vessel conforms to
the rules of construction of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 5.
GC Certificate of Authorization No. Expires
Date Name Signed
(GC Certificate Holder) (authorized representative)

F
68 REVIEW AND ACCEPTANCE OF FIELD ASSEMBLY
I, the undersigned, holding a valid commission issued by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors and employed by
of
have reviewed and accepted the G-4 Data Report Form(s) for the Graphite Core Components described in this Data Report on ,
and state that to the best of my knowledge and belief, the Certificate Holder has assembled the Graphite Core Components in accordance
with the ASME Code, Section III, Division 5.
By signing this certificate neither the inspector nor his employer makes any warranty, expressed or implied, concerning the Graphite Core
Components described in this Data Report. Furthermore, neither the inspector nor his employer shall be liable in any manner for any personal
injury or property damage or a loss of any kind arising from or connected with this inspection.

Date Signed Commission F

67

[Authorized Nuclear Inspector (Graphite)] [National Board Number and Endorsement]

* Supplemental information in the form of lists, sketches, or drawings may be used provided: (1) size is 81/2  11 or A4; (2) information in items 1 through 4 on this Data
Report is included on each sheet; and (3) each sheet is numbered and the number of sheets is recorded at the top of this form.

(07/17)

67
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

FORM G-1 (Back — Page 2 of F

56
)

F
71 CERTIFICATION OF GRAPHITE CORE ASSEMBLY COMPLIANCE
I, the undersigned, holding a valid commission issued by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors and employed by
of
have compared the statements in this Data Report with the described Graphite Core Assembly and state that parts referred to as data
items, not included in the certificate of shop inspection, have been inspected by me on , and state that to the best of my
knowledge and belief, the Certificate Holder has constructed and assembled the Graphite Core Assembly in accordance with the ASME Code,
Section III, Division 5.
By signing this certificate neither the inspector nor his employer makes any warranty, expressed or implied, concerning the Graphite Core
Assembly described in this Data Report. Furthermore, neither the inspector nor his employer shall be liable in any manner for any personal
injury or property damage or a loss of any kind arising from or connected with this inspection.

Date Signed Commission F

67

[Authorized Nuclear Inspector (Graphite)] [National Board Number and Endorsement]

(07/17)

68
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

FORM G-2 GC OR GRAPHITE QUALITY SYSTEM CERTIFICATE HOLDER’S DATA REPORT FOR
MACHINED GRAPHITE CORE COMPONENTS* ð17Þ
As Required by the Provisions of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 5 Pg. 1 of F
56

1. Machined and certified by F

1
(name and address of GC or Graphite Quality System Certificate Holder)

2. Manufactured for F
2

(name and address of purchaser)

3. Location of installation F
3
(name and address)

4. Type F
110 F
15 F
10

(core design type) (material spec. no.) (year built)

5. ASME Code, Section III, Division 5 F

11 F
12 F
14 F
115
(edition/date) [Addenda (if applicable)] (date) (Code Case no.) (Class)

6. Remarks
F
46

7. When applicable, GC or Graphite Quality System Certificate Holder’s Data Reports or GMO’s Reports are attached for each Graphite Core Component
listed in this report.

112 Graphite Core Component 113 Graphite Core Component 112 Graphite Core Component 113 Graphite Core Component
Identification (Serial) No. Material Traceability Code Identification (Serial) No. Material Traceability Code
1 26
2 27
3 28
4 29
5 30
6 31
7 32
8 33
9 34
10 35
11 36
12 37
13 38
14 39
15 40
16 41
17 42
18 43
19 44
20 45
21 46
22 47
23 48
24 49
25 50

* Supplemental information in the form of lists, sketches, or drawings may be used provided: (1) size is 81/2  11 or A4; (2) information in items 2 and 3 on this Data
Report is included on each sheet; and (3) each sheet is numbered and the number of sheets is recorded at the top of this form.

(07/17)

69
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

FORM G-2 (Back — Page 2 of F

56
)

F
69
GC or GRAPHITE QUALITY SYSTEM CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE
We certify that the statements made in this report are correct and that the Graphite Core Component(s) listed in this report conform(s) to the rules
for construction of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 5.

GC Certificate of Authorization or Graphite Quality System Certificate No. Expires

Date Name Signed

(GC or Graphite Quality System Certificate Holder) (authorized representative)

F
68
CERTIFICATE OF INSPECTION

I, the undersigned, holding a valid commission issued by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors and employed by
of
have inspected these items described in this Data Report on , and state that to the best of my knowledge and
belief, the Certificate Holder has machined these Graphite Core Components in accordance with the ASME Code, Section III, Division 5.
By signing this certificate neither the inspector nor his employer makes any warranty, expressed or implied, concerning the equipment
described in this Data Report. Furthermore, neither the inspector nor his employer shall be liable in any manner for any personal injury
or property damage or loss of any kind arising from or connected with this inspection.

Date Signed Commission F

67

[Authorized Nuclear Inspector (Graphite)] [National Board Number and Endorsement]

(07/17)

70
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

FORM G-4 GC OR GRAPHITE QUALITY SYSTEM CERTIFICATE HOLDER’S or GQSC HOLDER’S DATA REPORT
FOR INSTALLATION OF GRAPHITE CORE COMPONENTS* ð17Þ
Pg. 1 of F
56
As Required by the Provisions of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 5

1. Installed and certified by F

1
(name and address of GC or Graphite Quality System Certificate Holder)

2. Installed for F
2

(name and address of Purchaser)

3. Location of installation F
3
(name and address)

4. Type F
110 F
15 F
10

(core design type) (material spec. no.) (year built)

5. ASME Code, Section III, Division 5 F

11 F
12 F
14 F
115
(edition/date) [Addenda (if applicable)] (Code Case no.) (Class)
F
46
6. Remarks

7. When applicable, GC or Graphite Quality System Certificate Holder’s Data Reports or GMO’s Reports are attached for each Graphite Core Component
when listed in this report.

112 Graphite Core Component 114 Installation Location 112 Graphite Core Component 114 Installation Location
Identification or Serial No. (Layer and Plan Position) Identification or Serial No. (Layer and Plan Position)
1 26
2 27
3 28
4 29
5 30
6 31
7 32
8 33
9 34
10 35
11 36
12 37
13 38
14 39
15 40
16 41
17 42
18 43
19 44
20 45
21 46
22 47
23 48
24 49
25 50

* Supplemental information in the form of lists, sketches, or drawings may be used provided: (1) size is 81/2  11 or A4; (2) information in items 2 and 3 on this Data
Report is included on each sheet; and (3) each sheet is numbered and the number of sheets is recorded at the top of this form.

(07/17)

71
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

FORM G-4 (Back — Page 2 of F

56
)

F
69
GC or GRAPHITE QUALITY SYSTEM CERTIFICATE OF INSTALLATION COMPLIANCE
We certify that the statements made in this report are correct and that the installation of the Graphite Core Component(s) forming the Graphite
Core Assemply listed in this report conform(s) to the rules of construction of the ASME Code, Section III, Division 5.

GC Certificate of Authorization or Graphite Quality System Certificate No. Expires

Date Name Signed

(GC or Graphite Quality System Certificate Holder) (authorized representative)

F
68
CERTIFICATE OF INSPECTION

I, the undersigned, holding a valid commission issued by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors and employed by
of
have inspected these items described in this Data Report on , and state that to the best of my knowledge and
belief, the Certificate Holder has installed these Graphite Core Components in accordance with the ASME Code, Section III, Division 5.
By signing this certificate neither the inspector nor his employer makes any warranty, expressed or implied, concerning the equipment
described in this Data Report. Furthermore, neither the inspector nor his employer shall be liable in any manner for any personal injury
or property damage or loss of any kind arising from or connected with this inspection.

Date Signed Commission F

67

[Authorized Nuclear Inspector (Graphite)] [National Board Number and Endorsement]

(07/17)

72
ð17Þ Table V-1000
Guide for Preparation of Data Report Forms
Applies to Form Ref. to
Circled
Nos. in
N-1 N-1A N-2 N-3 N-5 N-6 NPP-1 NPV-1 NV-1 NCS-1 NS-1 NM-1 C-1 G-1 G-2 G-4 Forms Instructions for Completion
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X (1) Name and address as listed on ASME Certificate of Authorization.
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X (2) Name and address of purchaser.
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X (3) Name, address, and unit number of power plant where item is to be installed.
X X … … … X … … … … … … … … … … (4) Type of installation intended (horizontal or vertical).
X … … … … … … … … … … … X … … … (5) Description or application of vessel (reactor vessel tank, jacketed, heat exch.,
containment, etc.).
X X X X X X X X X X … … X X … … (6) Item serial no.
X X X X X X X X X X X … X X … … (7) Canadian Registration No. for item.
X X X ... X X X X X X X X X X … … (8) Indicate drawing numbers, including applicable revision number, that cover
general assembly and list of materials. For Canadian registered vessels, the
number of the drawing approved by provincial authorities.

ASME BPVC.III.A-2017
X X X X X X X X X X … X X X … … (9) National Board Number from Certificate Holder’s series of Numbers to be
stamped sequentially without skips or gaps.
X X X X X X X … X X … X X X X X (10) Shall be the year certified by the Inspector on the Certificate Holder’s Data
73

Report.
X X X … X X X X X X X X X X X X (11) ASME Code, Section III, Edition used for construction (e.g., 1986, etc.).
X X X … X X X X X X X X X X X X (12) ASME Code, Section III, Addenda used for construction (e.g., A86, A87, etc.).
X X X … X X X X X X X X X … … … (13) ASME Code Section III, Class 1, 2, 3, MC, CB, CC, or CS.
X X X … X X X X X X X X X X X X (14) All Code Case Numbers and revisions used for construction, including design,
fabrication, and materials used, must be listed. Where more space is needed
use the “Remarks” section or list on a supplemental page. Code Cases used
by Material Manufacturers and Material Suppliers shall be listed on the Data
Report.
X X X … X X X X X … X X X … X X (15) Material Specification Number. Show complete specification number and
grade of actual material used. Material is to be as designated in ASME Code,
Section III or as permitted in Code Cases.
X X X … … X … … X … … X X … … … (16) For the “N” forms, Section II, Part D, “Min. Tensile Strength.” For Form C-1, the
ASTM specifications per Section III, Div. 2, CC-2400.
X X X … … X … … … … … X X … … … (17) Nominal thickness.
X X X … … X … … … … … … … … … … (18) Minimum thickness as specified by design.
X X X … … X … … … … … X X … … … (19) Inside diameter.
X X X … X X … … … … … X X … … … (20) Length or height overall, including heads.
X X … … … X … … … … … … … … … … (21) Type of longitudinal joint (single butt-welded or double butt-welded joint).
X X … … … X … … … … … … … … … … (22) Indicate postweld heat treatment (yes or no).
X X … … … X … … … … … … … … … … (23) Indicate degree of radiographic examination (full, partial, spot, or none).
X X … … … X … … … … … … … … … … (24) Weld joint efficiency as determined by design (%).
X X … … … X … … … … … … … … … … (25) Type of girth joint (single butt welded or double butt welded).
X X … … … X … … … … … … … … … … (26) Number of sections (courses) joined by girth welds.
 Table V-1000
Guide for Preparation of Data Report Forms (Cont'd)
Applies to Form Ref. to
Circled
Nos. in
N-1 N-1A N-2 N-3 N-5 N-6 NPP-1 NPV-1 NV-1 NCS-1 NS-1 NM-1 C-1 G-1 G-2 G-4 Forms Instructions for Completion
X X … … … X … … … … … … … … … … (27) Location of heads (top, bottom, ends, floating, or channel) and description of
head geometry in applicable space.
X X … … … X … … … … … … … … … … (28) Diameter and number of bolts.
X X … … … … … … … … … … … … … … (29) Other fastenings such as quick opening; describe fully or attach sketch.
X … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … (30) Describe type of jacket closure geometry, including dimensions or attach
sketch (e.g., ogee and weld, bar, etc.).
X X X … X X … … … … … … X … … … (31) Design Pressure specified in Design Specification.
X X X … X X … … … … … … X … … … (32) Design Temperature specified in Design Specification.
X X X … X X X … X … … X … … … … (33) Minimum pressure‐test temperature as specified in Design Specification.
X X X … X X X … X … … X X … … … (34) Circle type of test used and specify test pressure (pneumatic, hydrostatic, or

ASME BPVC.III.A-2017
combination test, as applicable).
X … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … (35) Nominal diameter subject to pressure (refer to design documents).
X … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … (36) Nominal thickness of tubesheet.
X … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … (37) Method of tubesheet attachments (describe whether bolted, welded or other;
74

attach sketch as necessary).

X … … … … … … … … … … … X … … … (38) Specify nominal outside diameter.
… … … … … … … … … X … … … … … … (39) Describe type of core support structure component (e.g., bottom grid, fuel
support, top guide, etc.).
X … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … (40) Nominal outside diameter of tubes.
X … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … (41) Nominal wall thickness of tubes or gage size.
X … … … … X … … … … … … … … … … (42) Number of tubes.
X … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … (43) Actual tube configuration (straight or U‐tube, etc.).
X X … … … X … … … … … … … … … … (44) Nozzles, inspection, and safety valve openings; list all openings, regardless of
size, penetrating pressure boundary.
X X … … … X … … … … … … … … … … (45) Describe: (a) type of support (skirt, lugs, legs, etc.); (b) location of support
(top, bottom, side, etc.); (c) method of attachment (bolted, welded, etc.).
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X (46) Describe any additional Code requirements, restrictions, or additional
information, including marking in lieu of stamping, not otherwise covered in
Data Report. Include any required tests or examination not performed when
Data Report is completed.
… … … … X … … … … … … … … … … … (47) Specify the name and address of the organization where design information is
on file.
… … … … X … … … … … … … X … … … (48) Specify the name and address of the organization where Design Report or
Design Specification is on file.
X X X … X X … X X X X … X X … … (49) Enter the name of engineer who certified the Design Specification. Show state
of registration and number. List name of individual only, signature not
required. (Applies to Form N-2 only when Design Specification is required.)
 Table V-1000
Guide for Preparation of Data Report Forms (Cont'd)
Applies to Form Ref. to
Circled
Nos. in
N-1 N-1A N-2 N-3 N-5 N-6 NPP-1 NPV-1 NV-1 NCS-1 NS-1 NM-1 C-1 G-1 G-2 G-4 Forms Instructions for Completion
X X X … X … … X X X X … X X … … (50) Enter name of engineer who certified the Design Report. Show state of
registration and number. List name of individual only, signature not
required in space provided. (Applies to Form N-2 only when Design Report
is required.)
… … … X X … X … … … … … … … … … (51) System name is identified in the Design Specification (main steam, feedwater,
safety injection, etc.).
… … … X … … … … … … … … … … … … (52) Name of power plant designated by utility.
… … … X … … … … … … … … … … … … (53) Number designation of unit.
… … … X … … … … … … … … … … … … (54) Specify whether pump, valve, or safety relief valve.
… … … … … … X … … … … … … … … … (55) Describe the piping, flanges, and fittings assembled and covered by Data

ASME BPVC.III.A-2017
Report including material specification [see Note (15)] or as an alternative,
reference applicable sketch or drawing and attach to the Data Report.
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X (56) When supplemental sheets are attached to the Data Report, each page is
sequentially numbered and the total number of sheets is identified on the
75

top right hand corner of the Data Report in the space provided.
… … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … (57) Actual operating pressure for the system. (This may differ from the Design
Pressure in the design certification block on back of Form N-5.)
… … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … (58) Actual operating temperature for the system. (This may differ from the Design
Pressure in the design certification block on back of Form N-5.)
… … … … X … … … … … … … X … … … (59) Name of Material Manufacturer.
… … … … X … … … … … … … … … … … (60) Name of person approving drawing or procedure.
… … … … X … … … … … … … … … … … (61) List report or data sheet number as applicable.
… … … … X … … … … … … … … … … … (62) Indicate valve, vessel, pump, or appurtenance.
… … … … X … … … … … … … X … … … (63) Indicate piping subassembly or part.
… … … … X … … … … … X … … … … … (64) List support identification number, model, or catalog item.
… … … … … … … … X … … … … … … … (65) Indicate fluid used for National Board capacity test; the certified relieving
capacity; and the percent overpressure used during the capacity test or
pressure differential for vacuum relief valves.
… … … … … … … … X … … … … … … … (66) Date of National Board capacity test certification.
X X X X X X X X X X … X X X X X (67) The Inspector’s National Board Commission No. and Endorsement must be
shown.
X X X X X X X X X X … X … X X X (68) This certificate is to be completed by the Certificate Holder and signed by the
Authorized Nuclear Inspector who performs the inspection.
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X (69) Certificate of Compliance block is to show the name of the responsible
Certificate Holder as shown on his ASME Code Certificate of Authorization.
This should be signed in accordance with the organizational authority
defined in the Quality Assurance Program.
 Table V-1000
Guide for Preparation of Data Report Forms (Cont'd)
Applies to Form Ref. to
Circled
Nos. in
N-1 N-1A N-2 N-3 N-5 N-6 NPP-1 NPV-1 NV-1 NCS-1 NS-1 NM-1 C-1 G-1 G-2 G-4 Forms Instructions for Completion
X … … … X X X … … … … … X X … … (70) Certificate of Compliance block for field installation work or assembly is to be
signed by the Certificate Holder’s representative in charge of field
fabrication. This should be signed in accordance with organizational
authority defined in the Quality Assurance Program.
X … … … X X X … … … … … X X … … (71) This certificate block is for the Authorized Inspector to sign for any field const
ruction or assembly work. See Note (67) for National Board Commission
Number requirements.
… … … … … X … … … … … … … … … … (72) Specific gravity (density of fluid in relation to water, water being 1.0).
… … … … … X … … … … … … … … … … (73) Maximum height of fluid in tank.
… … … … … X … … … … … … … … … … (74) Temperature of test.
… … … … … X … … … … … … … … … … (75) Impact test lateral expansion.

ASME BPVC.III.A-2017
… … … … … X … … … … … … … … … … (76) Minimum temperature [only when below −20°F (−29°C)] for design.
… … X … … … … … … … … … X … … … (77) Identification number and title of Division 2 Construction Specification,
including applicable revision number and the date of the revision (applies to
Division 2 items only).
76

… … … … … … … … … X … … X … … … (78) Design Specification identifying number, including applicable revision number

and the date of the revision.
… … … … … … … … … … … X … … … … (79) Heat or lot identification number of material used for fabrication.
… … … … … … X … … … … … … … … … (80) List items included in the piping subassembly for which Certificate Holder’s
Data Reports have been completed, including serial number or National
Board number and brief identifying description.
… … … … … … … X … … … … … … … … (81) Valve pressure class designation per ASME B16.34.
… … … … … … … … X … … … … … … … (82) Diameter of orifice opening.
… … … … … … … X X … … … X … … … (83) Enter the nominal pipe size of inlet or outlet opening.
… … … … … … … … X … … … … … … … (84) Indicate method of valve operation (spring, pilot operated, or power
operated).
… … … … … … … … X … … … … … … … (85) Set opening pressure of valve.
… … … … … … … … X … … … … … … … (86) Difference between opening and reseating pressure.
… … … … … … … … X … … … … … … … (87) Temperature rating of valve at the rated relieving capacity.
… … … … … … … … … … … … X … … … (88) Concrete construction type (reinforced or prestressed).
… … … … … … … … … … … … X … … … (89) Height of dome above springline.
… … … … … … … … … … … … X … … … (90) Geometry of dome (spherical, ellipsoidal, conical, flat, etc.).
… … … … … … … … … … X … X … … … (91) Foundation type and underlying substrata.
… … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … (92) Date Design Report certified.
… … … … … … … … … … … … X … … … (93) Construction report identification number and certification date.
… … … … … … … … … … … … X … … … (94) Describe corrosion protection and coatings for post‐tensioning tendons.
… … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … (95) List all penetrations (openings), regardless of size, passing through the
pressure boundary. State type (name), size, shape (circular, rectangular,
etc.), and serial number.
 Table V-1000
Guide for Preparation of Data Report Forms (Cont'd)
Applies to Form Ref. to
Circled
Nos. in
N-1 N-1A N-2 N-3 N-5 N-6 NPP-1 NPV-1 NV-1 NCS-1 NS-1 NM-1 C-1 G-1 G-2 G-4 Forms Instructions for Completion
… … … … … … … … … … X … X … … … (96) Type of support (plate and shell, linear, standard support).
… … … … … … … … … … X … … … … … (97) Design Report or load capacity data sheet (indicate which).
… … … … … … … X … … … … … … … … (98) Disk differential pressure. A pressure equal to 110% of the valve pressure
rating at 100°F (38°C).
… … … … … … … … … … X … … … … … (99) Description of part (support) (snubber, sway brace, clevis, U‐bolt, threaded
rod with fastener, etc.).
… … … … … … … X … … … … … … … … (100) Pump or valve (indicate which).
… … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … (101) Brief description of service (feedwater, reactor cooling, safety injection,
component cooling, etc.).
… … … … … … … X … … … … … … … … (102) Mark number (the unique identification assigned by the Material
Manufacturer to provide traceability to the CMTR).

ASME BPVC.III.A-2017
… … … … … … … X … … … … … … … … (103) Cold working pressure: the pressure at 100°F (38°C) as established by the
pressure–temperature tables in ASME B16.34 (valves only).
… … … … … … … X … … … … … … … … (104) Model number, series number, type (either a number traceable to the type or a
77

description of the type for example gate, globe, butterfly, etc.).

… … … … … … … X … … … … … … … … (105) Pressure equal to or greater than the Design Pressure specified in the Design
Specification.
… … … … … … … X … … … … … … … … (106) Coincident temperature per ASME B16.34 to pressure listed in Note (105).
This temperature shall be equal to or greater than the Design Temperature
specified in the Design Specification.
… … … … … … … … … … … … X … … … (107) Minimum allowable yield strength specified in the appropriate Material
Specification.
… … … … … … … … X … … … … … … … (108) Indicate final ring position(s) with respect to an indicated reference point.
… … … … … … … … … … … … X … … … (109) Name of certifying Professional Engineer. Show state of registration and
registration number.
… … … … … … … … … … … … … X X X (110) Core design type.
… … … … … … … … … … … … … X … … (111) Graphite Core Assembly number.
… … … … … … … … … … … … … … X X (112) Graphite Core Component Identification (Serial) Number.
… … … … … … … … … … … … … … X … (113) Graphite Core Component Material Traceability Code.
… … … … … … … … … … … … … … … X (114) Layer and Plan Position (marked on drawing?).
… … … … … … … … … … … … … X X X (115) ASME Section Ill, Division 5, Class.

GENERAL NOTES:
(a) All blanks on the Data Report must contain an entry. If an entry is not applicable, enter “N/A” into the blank. Any quantity to which units apply shall be entered on the Manufacturer’s
Data Report with the chosen units.
(b) If space on Data Report is not sufficient for required information, either the remarks section is used or a supplementary sheet shall be attached and information listed by line number.
(c) These instructions constitute a nonmandatory guide for completion of Data Reports for items constructed to Section III Editions and Addenda prior to the Winter 1984 Addenda.
(d) The NS‐1 Certificate is a Certificate of Conformance and is used in lieu of a Code Data Report form for welded supports.
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

MANDATORY APPENDIX VI
ROUNDED INDICATIONS

ARTICLE VI-1000
ROUNDED INDICATIONS

VI-1100 ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS FOR VI-1132 Relevant Indications (See Table

RADIOGRAPHICALLY DETERMINED VI-1132-1 for Examples)
ROUNDED INDICATIONS IN WELDS Only those rounded indications which exceed the fol-
VI-1110 APPLICABILITY OF THESE STANDARDS lowing dimensions shall be considered relevant:
(a) 1/10t for t less than 1/8 in. (3 mm);
These standards are applicable to ferritic, austenitic, (b) 1/64 in. (0.4 mm) for t equal to 1/8 in. to 1/4 in. (3 mm
and nonferrous material. to 6 mm), inclusive;
(c) 1/32 in. (0.8 mm) for t greater than 1/4 in. to 2 in.
(6 mm to 50 mm), inclusive;
VI-1120 TERMINOLOGY (d) 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) for t greater than 2 in. (50 mm).
VI-1121 Rounded Indications
Indications with a maximum length of three times the VI-1133 Maximum Size of Rounded Indication
width or less on the radiograph are defined as rounded (See Table VI-1132-1 for Examples)
indications. These indications may be circular, elliptical, The maximum permissible size of any indication shall
conical, or irregular in shape and may have tails. When be 1/4t or 5/32 in. (4 mm), whichever is less, except that
evaluating the size of an indication, the tail shall be in- an isolated indication separated from an adjacent indica-
cluded. The indication may be from any source in the tion by 1 in. (25 mm) or more may be 1/3 t or 1/4 in.
weld, such as porosity, slag, or tungsten. (6 mm), whichever is less. For t greater than 2 in.
(50 mm), the maximum permissible size of an isolated in-
dication shall be increased to 3/8 in. (10 mm).
VI-1122 Aligned Indications
A sequence of four or more rounded indications shall VI-1134 Aligned Rounded Indications
be considered to be aligned when they touch a line paral- Aligned rounded indications are acceptable when the
lel to the length of the weld drawn through the center of summation of the diameters of the indications is less than
the two outer rounded indications. t in a length of 12t (see Figure VI-1134-1). The length of
groups of aligned rounded indications and the spacing be-
tween the groups shall meet the requirements of Figure
VI-1123 Thickness, t VI-1134-2.
t is the thickness of the weld, of the pressure-retaining
material, or of the thinner of the sections being joined, VI-1135 Spacing
whichever is least. If a full penetration weld includes a fil- The distance between adjacent rounded indications is
let weld, the thickness of the fillet weld throat shall be in- not a factor in determining acceptance or rejection, except
cluded in t. as required for isolated indications or groups of aligned
indications.

VI-1130 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA

VI-1136 Rounded Indication Charts
VI-1131 Image Density
(a) The rounded indications as determined from the
Density within the image of the indication may vary radiographic film shall not exceed that shown in the
and is not a criterion for acceptance or rejection. charts.

78
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table VI-1132-1
Maximum Size of Nonrelevant Indications and Acceptable Rounded Indications — Examples Only
Maximum Size of Acceptable Rounded Indication, Maximum Size of
in. (mm) Nonrelevant
Thickness t, in. (mm) Random Isolated Indication, in. (mm)
< 1/8 (<3) 1
/4t 1
/3t 1
/10t
1
/8 (3) 0.031 (0.79) 0.042 (1.07) 0.015 (0.38)
3
/16 (5) 0.047 (1.19) 0.063 (1.60) 0.015 (0.38)
1
/4 (6) 0.063 (1.60) 0.083 (2.11) 0.015 (0.38)
5
/16 (8) 0.078 (1.98) 0.104 (2.64) 0.031 (0.79)
3
/8 (10) 0.091 (2.31) 0.125 (3.18) 0.031 (0.79)
7
/16 (11) 0.109 (2.77) 0.146 (3.71) 0.031 (0.79)
1
/2 (13) 0.125 (3.18) 0.168 (4.27) 0.031 (0.79)
9
/16 (14) 0.142 (3.61) 0.188 (4.78) 0.031 (0.79)
5
/8 (16) 0.156 (3.96) 0.210 (5.33) 0.031 (0.79)
11
/16 (17) 0.156 (3.96) 0.230 (5.84) 0.031 (0.79)
3
/4 to 2, incl. (19 to 50, incl.) 0.156 (3.96) 0.250 (6.35) 0.031 (0.79)
>2 (>50) 0.156 (3.96) 0.375 (9.53) 0.063 (1.60)

(b) The charts in Figures VI-1136-1 through VI-1136-6 VI-1137 Weld Thickness, t, Less Than 1/8 in.
illustrate various types of assorted, randomly dispersed, (3 mm)
and clustered rounded indications for different weld
For t less than 1/8 in. (3 mm), the maximum number of
thicknesses greater than 1/8 in. (3 mm). These charts re-
rounded indications shall not exceed 12 in a 6 in.
present the maximum acceptable concentration limits
(150 mm) length of weld. A proportionally fewer number
for rounded indications.
of indications shall be permitted in welds less than 6 in.
(c) The chart for each thickness range represents full‐
(150 mm) in length.
scale 6 in. (150 mm) radiographs and shall not be en-
larged or reduced. The distributions shown are not neces-
sarily the patterns that may appear on the radiograph, but VI-1138 Clustered Indications
are typical of the concentration and size of indications The illustrations for clustered indications show up to
permitted. four times as many indications in a local area, as that
shown in the illustrations for random indications. The
length of an acceptable cluster shall not exceed the lesser
of 1 in. (25 mm) or 2t . Where more than one cluster is
present, the sum of the lengths of the clusters shall not ex-
ceed 1 in. (25 mm) in a 6 in. (150 mm) length of weld.

79
 Figure VI-1134-1
Aligned Rounded Indications

ASME BPVC.III.A-2017
L1 Lx
80

L2

GENERAL NOTE: Sum of L 1to L x shall be less than t in a length of 12t .

 Figure VI-1134-2
Groups of Aligned Rounded Indications

ASME BPVC.III.A-2017
L1 3L2 L2 3L3 L3 3L3 L4
81

Maximum Group Length Minimum Group Spacing

1 3
L = /4 in. (6 mm) for t less than /4 in. (19 mm) 3L where L is the length of the longest
L = 1/3 t for t equal to 3/4 in. to 21/4 in. (19 mm to 57 mm) adjacent group being evaluated.
L = 3/4 in. (19 mm) for t greater than 21/4 in. (57 mm)

GENERAL NOTE: The sum of the group lengths shall be less than t in a length of 12t.
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure VI-1136-1
Charts for t Equal to 1/8 in. to 1/4 in. (3 mm to 6 mm), Inclusive

(a) Random Rounded Indications [Typical

concentration and size permitted in
any 6 in. (150 mm) length of weld.]

1 in. (25 mm) 1 in. (25 mm)

(b) Isolated Indication (Maximum size (c) Cluster

per Table VI-1132-1.)

Figure VI-1136-2
Charts for t Over 1/4 in. to 3/8 in. (6 mm to 10 mm), Inclusive

(a) Random Rounded Indications [Typical

concentration and size permitted in
any 6 in. (150 mm) length of weld.]

1 in. (25 mm) 1 in. (25 mm)

(b) Isolated Indication (Maximum size (c) Cluster

per Table VI-1132-1.)

82
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure VI-1136-3
Charts for t Over 3/8 in. to 3/4 in. (10 mm to 19 mm), Inclusive

(a) Random Rounded Indications [Typical

concentration and size permitted in
any 6 in. (150 mm) length of weld.]

1 in. (25 mm) 1 in. (25 mm)

(b) Isolated Indication (Maximum size (c) Cluster

per Table VI-1132-1.)

Figure VI-1136-4
Charts for t Over 3/4 in. to 2 in. (19 mm to 50 mm), Inclusive

(a) Random Rounded Indications [Typical

concentration and size permitted in
any 6 in. (150 mm) length of weld.]

1 in. (25 mm) 1 in. (25 mm)

(b) Isolated Indication (Maximum size (c) Cluster

per Table VI-1132-1.)

83
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure VI-1136-5
Charts for t Over 2 in. to 4 in. (50 mm to 100 mm), Inclusive

(a) Random Rounded Indications [Typical

concentration and size permitted in
any 6 in. (150 mm) length of weld.]

1 in. (25 mm) 1 in. (25 mm)

(b) Isolated Indication (Maximum size (c) Cluster

per Table VI-1132-1.)

84
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure VI-1136-6
Charts for t Over 4 in. (100 mm)

(a) Random Rounded Indications [Typical

concentration and size permitted in
any 6 in. (150 mm) length of weld.]

1 in. (25 mm) 1 in. (25 mm)

(b) Isolated Indication (Maximum size (c) Cluster

per Table VI-1132-1.)

85
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

MANDATORY APPENDIX XI
RULES FOR BOLTED FLANGE CONNECTIONS FOR CLASS 2 AND 3
COMPONENTS AND CLASS MC VESSELS

ARTICLE XI-1000
INTRODUCTION

XI-1100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS XI-1122 Conditions for Which Design

Calculations Shall Be Made
XI-1110 SCOPE
In the design of a bolted flange connection, complete
(a) The rules in Mandatory Appendix XI apply specifi- calculations shall be made for two separate and indepen-
cally to the design of bolted flange connections for Class dent sets of conditions which are defined in the following
2 and 3 components and Class MC vessels, and are to be subparagraphs.
used in conjunction with the applicable requirements in
Subsections NC, ND, and NE. These rules provide only XI-1122.1 Design Conditions. The Design Conditions
for hydrostatic end loads and gasket seating loads. For a are those required to resist the hydrostatic end force of
discussion of design considerations for bolted flange con- the Design Pressure tending to part the joint and to main-
nections, see Mandatory Appendix XII. tain on the gasket or joint contact surface sufficient com-
(b) Only circular flanges designated Class RF are cov- pression to assure a tight joint, all at the Design
ered by the rules of Mandatory Appendix XI. The design Temperature. The minimum load is a function of the De-
procedures for Class RF flanges, as defined in XI-3211, sign Pressure, the gasket material, and the effective gas-
are given in XI-3200. For Class FF flanges, see Nonmanda- ket or contact area to be kept tight under pressure [as
tory Appendix L. calculated by eq. XI-3221.1(1) and determines one of
(c) The flange design methods stipulated in this Appen- the two requirements for the amount of bolting A m 1 . This
dix are primarily applicable to circular flanges under in- load is also used for the design of the flange in eq.
ternal pressure. However, Class RF flanges may be used XI-3223(3).
under external pressure when designed in accordance XI-1122.2 Gasket Seating Conditions. The gasket
with XI-3260. seating conditions are those existing when the gasket or
joint contact surface is seated by applying initial load with
XI-1120 ELEMENTS INVOLVED IN FLANGE the bolts when assembling the joint, at atmospheric tem-
DESIGN perature and pressure. The minimum initial load consid-
ð17Þ XI-1121 General Considerations ered to be adequate for proper seating is a function of the
This method of designing a flange involves the selection gasket material and the effective gasket or contact area to
of the gasket material, type and dimensions, flange facing, be seated [as calculated by eq. XI-3221.2(2)] and deter-
bolting, hub proportions, flange width, and flange thick- mines the other of the two requirements for the amount
ness (see Tables XI-3221.1-1 and XI-3221.1-2). Flange di- of bolting A m 2 . For the design of the flange, this load is
mensions shall be such that the stresses in the flange, modified in eq. XI-3223(4) to take account of the Design
calculated in accordance with XI-3240, do not exceed Conditions when they govern the amount of bolting re-
the allowable flange stresses specified in XI-3250 for quired A m , as well as the amount of bolting actually pro-
Class RF flanges. All calculations shall use dimensions in vided A b .
the corroded condition.
XI-1123 Bolted Flange Connections to External ð17Þ
Piping
It is recommended that bolted flange connections con-
forming to the standards listed in NC‐3362, ND‐3362, and
NE‐3362, as applicable, be used for connections to exter-
nal piping. These standards may be used for other bolted

86
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

flange connections within the limits of size in the stan- construction. Flanges fabricated from rings may be used
dards and the pressure–temperature ratings permitted in place of the hub flanges in these standards, provided
in Subsection NC, ND, or NE. The ratings in these stan- that their strength, calculated by the rules in this Appen-
dards are based on the hub dimensions given or on the dix, is not less than that calculated for the corresponding
minimum specified thickness of flanged fittings of integral size of hub flange.

87
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE XI-2000
MATERIALS FOR BOLTED FLANGE CONNECTIONS

XI-2100 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS (b) Hubbed flanges, except as permitted in (a), shall not
be machined from plate or bar stock material unless the
XI-2110 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS material has been formed into a ring and, further, pro-
Materials used in the construction of bolted flange con- vided that
nections shall comply with the material requirements giv- (1) in a ring formed from plate, the original plate sur-
en in Subsection NC, ND, or NE, as applicable. faces are parallel to the axis of the finished flange (this is
not intended to imply that the original plate surface be
XI-2120 HEAT TREATMENT OF FLANGES present in the finished flange).
Flanges made from ferritic steel and designed in accor- (2) the joints in the ring are welded butt joints that
dance with this Appendix shall be given a normalizing or conform to the requirements of the applicable Subsection.
full annealing heat treatment when the thickness of the The thickness to be used to determine postweld heat
flange section exceeds 3 in. (75 mm). treatment and radiography requirements shall be the les-
ser of t or (A − B)/2, when these symbols are as defined
XI-2130 WELDABILITY OF FLANGES AND in XI-3130.
POSTWELD HEAT TREATMENT (c) The back of the flange and the outer surface of the
Material on which welding is to be performed shall be hub shall be examined by the magnetic particle method
proved of good weldable quality. Satisfactory qualifica- (NC‐2545) or the liquid penetrant method (NC‐2546) to
tion of the welding procedure under Section IX is consid- ensure that these surfaces are free from defects.
ered as proof. Welding shall not be performed on steel
that has a carbon content greater than 0.35%. All welding
XI-2150 BOLTING MATERIALS
on flange connections shall comply with the requirements Bolts, studs, nuts, and washers shall comply with the
for postweld heat treatment given in Subsection NC, ND, requirements of the applicable Subsection. It is recom-
or NE, as applicable. mended that bolts and studs not be smaller than 1/2 in.
(13 mm). If bolts or studs smaller than 1/2 in. (13 mm)
XI-2140 FABRICATED HUBBED FLANGES are used, ferrous bolting material shall be of alloy steel.
Fabricated hubbed flanges shall be in accordance with Precautions shall be taken to avoid overstressing small
(a) through (c). diameter bolts.
(a) Hubbed flanges may be fabricated from a hot‐rolled
or hot‐forged billet. The axis of the finished flange shall be
parallel to the long axis of the original billet. (This is not
intended to imply that the axis of the finished flange
and the original billet must be concentric.)

88
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE XI-3000
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

XI-3100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

XI-3110 SCOPE
(a) The rules of XI-3200 apply to Class RF flanges as de-
fined in XI-3212.
(b) The flange design methods given in XI-3210
through XI-3250 apply to Class RF flanges under internal
pressure. The flange design methods for Class RF flanges Figure XI-3120-1 sketches (8), (8a), (8b), and (9) show
under external pressure or under both internal and exter- typical optional type flanges. Welds and other details of
nal pressure are given in XI-3260. construction shall satisfy the dimensional requirements
given in those sketches.

XI-3120 TYPES OF FLANGES

XI-3130 NOMENCLATURE ð17Þ
For purposes of computation, there are three types as
described in (a), (b), and (c). The nomenclature defined below and shown in Figure
XI-3120-1 is used in the equations for the design of
(a) Loose Type Flanges. This type covers those designs
flanges.
in which the flange has no direct connection to the nozzle
neck, vessel, or pipe wall and designs where the method A = outside diameter of flange or, when slotted holes
of attachment is not considered to give the mechanical extend to the outside of the flange, the diameter
strength equivalent to integral attachment. Figure to the bottom of the slots
XI-3120-1 sketches (1), (1a), (2), (3), and (4) show typical A b = actual total cross‐sectional area of bolts at root of
loose type flanges and the location of the loads and mo- thread or section of least diameter under stress
ments; welds and other details of construction shall satis- A m = total required cross‐sectional area of bolts taken
fy the dimensional requirements given in the referenced as the greater of A m 1 and A m 2
sketches. A m 1 = total cross‐sectional area of bolts at root of
(b) Integral Type Flanges. This type covers designs thread or section of least diameter under stress,
where the flange is cast or forged integrally with the noz- required for the Design Conditions
zle neck, vessel, or pipe wall, butt welded thereto, or at- = W m 1 /S b
tached by other forms of arc or gas welding of such a A m 2 = total cross‐sectional area of bolts at root of
nature that the flange and nozzle neck, vessel, or pipe wall thread or section of least diameter under stress,
is considered to be the equivalent of an integral structure. required for gasket seating
In welded construction, the nozzle neck, vessel, or pipe = W m 2 /S a
wall is considered to act as a hub. Figure XI-3120-1 B = inside diameter of flange (when B is less than
sketches (5), (6), (6a), (6b), and (7) show typical integral 20g 1 it will be optional for the designer to substi-
type flanges and the location of the loads and moments; tute B 1 for B in the equation for longitudinal
welds and other details of construction shall satisfy the stress S H )
dimensional requirements given in the referenced b = effective gasket or joint contact surface seating
sketches. width (Table XI-3221.1-2)
(c) Optional Type Flanges. This type covers designs b 0 = basic gasket seating width (Table XI-3221.1-2)
where the attachment of the flange to the nozzle neck, B 1 = B + g 1 , for loose type hub flanges and also for in-
vessel, or pipe wall is such that the assembly is consid- tegral type flanges when f < 1
ered to act as a unit, which shall be calculated as an inte- = B + g 0 , for integral type flanges when f ≥ 1
gral flange, except that for simplicity the designer may C = bolt circle diameter
calculate the construction as a loose type flange provided c = basic dimension used for the minimum sizing of
none of the following values are exceeded: welds; equal to t n or t D , whichever is less
C b = effective width factor
= 0.5 for U.S. Customary calculations
= 2.52 for SI calculations

89
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure XI-3120-1
Types of Flanges

Gasket t h
tI

A W tI  tn
hG g1 hD Full Penetration Weld,
C
HG + HT go Gasket Single or Double
r
G HD
B
To be taken at mid-point of min. = 0.7 c
contact between flange and This weld may be machined to a
lap independent of gasket corner radius to suit standard
location lap joint flanges
(1) (1a)

Gasket t h

hG W
A
r go
hT hD C
g1
G HT
HG HD
B
Screwed Flange With or
Without Hub

(2)

min. = 0.7 c

1/2
t
(max.)
max. = c + 1/4 in. (c + 6 mm) min. = 0.7 c
For hub tapers 6 deg or less, use go = g1
(3) [Note (1)]
(4) [Note (1)]

Loose-Type Flanges

90
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure XI-3120-1
Types of Flanges (Cont'd)
h  1.5 go 1.5 go (min.)
t Gasket t g1 h
Gasket Slope
1:3 (max.) Weld
hG W R (6a)
A hG W A
r
r hT hD go
hT R hD C
C Uniform Thickness
g1
HD HT
HT G g1 /2
g1 /2 HG HD go h
G HG B
B 1.5 go (min.)
g1 = go Where hub slope adjacent
to flange exceeds 1:3
(5) use sketches (6a) or (6b) (6b) g1
(6)

Gasket
t h go Weld

W
A 0.25 go but not less than 1/4 in. (6 mm), the
hG
hT R hD C minimum for either leg. This weld
HG may be machined to a corner radius
HD as permitted in sketch (5) in which
HT case g1 = go
G go g1
B g1 /2
(7)

Integral-Type Flanges [Note (2)]

min. = c

min. = c min. = c
min. = c but not
Full Penetration and Backchip
less than 1/4 in. (6 mm)
max. = c + 1/4
in. (8a) (8b) (9)
(c + 6 mm) (8) min. = 0.7 c

Optional-Type Flanges [Notes (3) and (4)]

NOTES:
(1) Loadings and dimensions not shown are the same as for sketch (2).
(2) Fillet radius r to be at least 0.25 g o but not less than 3/16 in. (5 mm). Added thickness greater than 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) for raised face, tongue
and groove, “O” rings, and ring joint facings shall be in excess of the required minimum flange thickness, t ; those less than or equal to 1/16 in.
(1.5 mm) may be included in the required minimum flange thickness.
(3) These may be calculated as either loose or integral type [(c)].
(4) Loading and dimensions not shown are the same as for sketch (2) for loose type flanges or sketch (7) for integral type.

91
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

d = factor, as follows: L = factor

= for integral type flanges =

m = gasket factor obtained from Table XI-3221.1-1

= for loose type flanges M 0 = total moment acting upon the flange, for the De-
sign Conditions or gasket seating, as may apply
e = factor, as follows: (XI-3230)
= F /h 0 for integral type flanges M D = component of moment due to H D
= F L /h 0 for loose type flanges = H D hD
M G = component of moment due to H G
F = factor for integral type flanges (Figure = H G hG
XI-3240-2) M T = component of moment due to H T
f = hub stress correction factor for integral flanges = H T hT
from Figure XI-3240-6 (when greater than 1, this N = width used to determine the basic gasket seating
is the ratio of the stress in the small end of hub to width b 0 , based upon the possible contact width
the stress in the large end; for values below limit of the gasket (Table XI-3221.1-2)
of Figure use f = 1) P = Design Pressure (for flanges subject to external
F L = factor for loose type flanges (Figure XI-3240-4) pressure see XI-3260 for Class RF flanges)
G = diameter at location of gasket load reaction; ex- R = radial distance from bolt circle to point of inter-
cept as noted in sketch (1) of Figure XI-3120-1, section of hub and back of flange (integral and
G is defined as follows for Class RF flanges (see hub flanges)
Table XI-3221.1-2): = (C − B)/2 − g 1
(a) when b 0 ≤ 1/4 in. (6 mm), G is the mean dia- S a = allowable bolt stress at atmospheric temperature
meter of gasket contact face, in. (mm); (given in Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Table 3)
(b) when b 0 > 1/4 in. (6 mm), G is the outside S b = allowable bolt stress at Design Temperature (giv-
diameter of gasket contact face less 2b en in Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Table 3)
g 0 = thickness of hub at small end S f = allowable design stress for material of flange at
g 1 = thickness of hub at back of flange Design Temperature (Design Condition) or atmo-
H = total hydrostatic end force spheric temperature (gasket seating), as applic-
= 0.785G 2P able (given in Section II, Part D, Subpart 1,
h = hub length Tables 1A and 1B, as applicable)
h 0 = factor equal to S H = calculated longitudinal stress in hub
H D = hydrostatic end force on area inside of flange S n = allowable design stress for material of nozzle
= 0.785B 2P neck, vessel, or pipe wall at Design Temperature
h D = radial distance from the bolt circle to the circle (Design Condition) or atmospheric temperature
on which H D acts, as prescribed in Table (gasket seating) as applicable (given in Section
XI-3230-1 II, Part D, Subpart 1, Tables 1A and 1B, as
H G = gasket load (difference between flange design applicable)
bolt load and total hydrostatic end force) S R = calculated radial stress in flange
= W −H S T = calculated tangential stress in flange
h G = radial distance from gasket load reaction to the T = factor involving K (Figure XI-3240-1)
bolt circle t = flange thickness
= (C − G )/2 t D = two times the thickness g 0 , when the design is
H p = total joint contact surface compression load calculated as an integral flange, or two times
= 2b × 3.14G m P the thickness of shell or nozzle wall required
H T = difference between total hydrostatic end force for internal pressure when the design is calcu-
and the hydrostatic end force on area inside of lated as loose flange, but not less than 1/4 in.
flange (6 mm)
= H − HD t n = nominal thickness of shell or nozzle wall to
h T = radial distance from the bolt circle to the circle which flange or lap is attached, less corrosion
on which H T acts, as prescribed in Table allowance
XI-3230-1 U = factor involving K (Figure XI-3240-1)
K = ratio of outside diameter of flange to inside dia- V = factor for integral type flanges (Figure
meter of flange XI-3240-3)
= A /B V L = factor for loose type flanges (Figure XI-3240-5)

92
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

W = flange design bolt load for the Design Conditions multiple m of the internal pressure. Its value is a function
or gasket seating as applicable (XI-3223) of th e gaske t mat erial a nd const ruction ( Table
w = width used to determine the basic gasket seating XI-3221.1-1). The required bolt load for the Design Condi-
width b 0 , based upon the contact width between tions W m 1 is determined in accordance with eq. (1):
the flange facing and the gasket (Table
XI-3221.1-2)
ð1Þ
W m 1 = minimum required bolt load for the Design Con-
ditions (XI-3220)
W m 2 = minimum required bolt load for gasket seating
XI-3221.2 Bolt Load for Gasket Seating Condition.
(XI-3220)
Before a tight joint can be obtained, it is necessary to seat
Y = factor involving K (Figure XI-3240-1)
the gasket or joint contact surface properly by applying a
y = gasket or joint contact surface unit seating load
minimum initial load under atmospheric temperature
(Table XI-3221.1-1)
conditions without the presence of internal pressure,
Z = factor involving K (Figure XI-3240-1)
which is a function of the gasket material and the effective
XI-3200 CLASS RF FLANGE DESIGN gasket area to be seated. The minimum initial bolt load
W m 2 required for this purpose shall be determined in ac-
XI-3210 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS cordance with eq. (2):
XI-3211 Definition of Class RF Flanges
ð2Þ
Class RF flanges are circular flanges having gaskets
which are entirely within the circle enclosed by the bolt The need for providing sufficient bolt load to seat the
holes and which have no contact outside this circle. gasket or joint contact surfaces in accordance with eq.
(2) will prevail on many low pressure designs and with
XI-3212 Acceptability facings and materials that require a high seating load
and where the bolt load computed by eq. XI-3221.1(1)
The requirements for acceptability of Class RF flange
for the Design Conditions is insufficient to seat the joint.
design are given in (a) and (b).
Accordingly, it is necessary to furnish bolting and to pre-
(a) The design shall be such that the general design re-
tighten the bolts to provide a bolt load sufficient to satisfy
quirements of NC‐3100, ND‐3100, or NE‐3100, as appro-
both of these requirements, each one being individually
priate, and the specific design requirements of this
investigated. When eq. (2) governs, flange proportions
subarticle are met.
will be a function of the bolting instead of internal
(b) The designs shall be limited to the types of flanges
pressure.
defined in XI-3120.
XI-3221.3 Bolt Load When Self-Energizing Gaskets
XI-3220 BOLT LOADS AND BOLT AREAS Are Used. Bolt loads for flanges using gaskets of the self‐
energizing type differ from those shown in XI-3221.2 as
XI-3221 Determination of Bolt Loads
stipulated in (a) and (b).
In the design of a bolted flange connection, calculations (a) The required bolt load for the Design Conditions
shall be made for each of the two conditions, namely, De- W m 1 shall be sufficient to resist the hydrostatic end force
sign Loadings and gasket seating loads, and the more se- H exerted by the Design Pressure on the area bounded by
vere condition shall control. In the design of flange pairs the outside diameter of the gasket. H p is to be considered
used to contain a tubesheet of a heat exchanger, or any as zero for all self‐energizing gaskets except certain seal
similar design where the flanges and/or gaskets may configurations which generate axial loads which shall be
not be the same, loads shall be determined for the most considered.
severe condition of Design Loadings and/or gasket seat- (b) W m 2 = 0. Self‐energizing gaskets may be considered
ing loads applied to each side at the same time. This most to require an inconsequential amount of bolting force to
severe condition may be gasket seating on one flange with produce a seal. Bolting, however, shall be pretightened
Design Loadings on the other, gasket seating on each to provide a bolt load sufficient to withstand the hydro-
flange at the same time, or Design Loadings on each flange static end force H .
at the same time.
XI-3221.1 Bolt Load for Design Conditions. The re- XI-3222 Total Required and Actual Bolt Areas
quired bolt load for the Design Conditions W m 1 shall be A m and A b
sufficient to resist the hydrostatic end force H exerted The total cross‐sectional area of bolts A m required for
by the Design Pressure on the area bounded by the dia- both the Design Conditions and gasket seating is the
meter of gasket reaction and, in addition, to maintain on greater of the values for A m 1 and A m 2 , where A m 1 =
the gasket or joint contact surface a compression load W m 1 /S b and A m 2 = W m 2 /S a . A selection of bolts to be
H p which experience has shown to be sufficient to ensure used shall be made such that the actual total cross‐
a tight joint. This compression load is expressed as a sectional areas of bolts A b will not be less than A m .

93
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ð17Þ Table XI-3221.1-1

Gasket Materials and Contact Facings
Gasket Factors, m , for Operating Conditions and Minimum Design Seating Stress, y
Gasket Min. Design Facing Sketch and
Factor, Seating Stress, y, Column in Table
Gasket Material m psi (MPa) Sketches XI-3221.1-2
Self‐energizing types (0 rings, metallic, elastomer, other 0 0 (0) … …
gasket types considered as self‐sealing)
Elastomers without fabric or high percent of mineral fiber: (1a),(1b),(1c),(1d),
Below 75A Shore Durometer 0.50 0 (0) (4),(5); Column II
Below 75A Shore Durometer 1.00 200 (1.4)
Mineral fiber with suitable binder for operating conditions: (1a),(1b),(1c),(1d),
1
/8 in. (3 mm) thick 2.00 1,600 (11) (4),(5); Column II
1
/16 in. (1.5 mm) thick 2.75 3,700 (26)
1
/32 in. (0.8 mm) thick 3.50 6,500 (45)
Elastomers with cotton fabric insertion 1.25 400 (2.8) (1a),(1b),(1c),(1d),
(4),(5); Column II

Elastomers with mineral fiber fabric insertion (with or without wire reinforcement):
3‐ply 2.25 2,200 (15) …

2‐ply 2.50 2,900 (20) (1a),(1b),(1c),(1d),

(4),(5); Column II

1‐ply 2.75 3,700 (26) …

Vegetable fiber 1.75 1,100 (8) (1a),(1b),(1c),(1d),

(4),(5); Column II

Spiral‐wound metal, mineral fiber filled: (1a),(1b); Column II

Carbon 2.50 10,000 (69)
Stainless or Monel 3.00 10,000 (69)
Corrugated metal, mineral fiber inserted; or corrugated (1a),(1b); Column II
metal, jacketed mineral fiber filled:
Soft aluminum 2.50 2,900 (20)
Soft copper or brass 2.75 3,700 (26)
Iron or soft steel 3.00 4,500 (31)
Monel or 4% to 6% chrome 3.25 5,500 (38)
Stainless steels 3.50 6,500 (45)
Corrugated metal: (1a),(1b),(1c),(1d),
Soft aluminum 2.75 3,700 (26) Column II
Soft copper or brass 3.00 4,500 (31)
Iron or soft steel 3.25 5,500 (38)
Monel or 4% to 6% chrome 3.50 6,500 (45)
Stainless steels 3.75 7,600 (52)
Flat metal, jacketed mineral fiber filled: (1a), (1b),
Soft aluminum 3.25 5,500 (38) (1c) [Note (1)],
Soft copper or brass 3.50 6,500 (45) (1d) [Note (1)],
Iron or soft steel 3.75 7,600 (52) (2) [Note (1)];
Monel 3.50 8,000 (55) Column II
4‐6% chrome 3.75 9,000 (62)
Stainless steels 3.75 9,000 (62)

Grooved metal: (1a),(1b),(1c),(1d),

Soft aluminum 3.25 5,500 (38) (2),(3); Column II
Soft copper or brass 3.50 6,500 (45)
Iron or soft steel 3.75 7,600 (52)
Monel or 4‐6% chrome 3.75 9,000 (62)
Stainless steels 4.25 10,100 (70)

94
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table XI-3221.1-1
Gasket Materials and Contact Facings
Gasket Factors, m , for Operating Conditions and Minimum Design Seating Stress, y (Cont'd)
Gasket Min. Design Facing Sketch and
Factor, Seating Stress, y, Column in Table
Gasket Material m psi (MPa) Sketches XI-3221.1-2

Solid flat metal: (1a),(1b),(1c),(1d),

Soft aluminum 4.00 8,800 (61) (2),(3),(4),(5);
Soft copper or brass 4.75 13,000 (90) Column I
Iron or soft steel 5.50 18,000 (124)
Monel or 4% to 6% chrome 6.00 21,800 (150)
Stainless steels 6.50 26,000 (180)
Ring joint: (6), Column I
Iron or soft steel 5.50 18,000 (124)
Monel or 4% to 6% chrome 6.00 21,800 (150)
Stainless steels 6.50 26,000 (180)

GENERAL NOTE: This Table gives a list of many commonly used gasket materials and contact facings with suggested design values of m
and y that have generally proved satisfactory in actual service when using effective gasket seating width b given in Table XI-3221.1-2.
These values of m , b , and y are suggested only and are not mandatory. Values that are too low may result in leakage at the joint without
affecting the safety of the design. The primary proof that the values are adequate is the hydrostatic test.
NOTE:
(1) The surface of a gasket having a lap should not be against the nubbin.

ð17Þ XI-3223 Flange Design Bolt Load W consideration shall be given to any possible reduction in
The bolt loads used in the design of the flange shall be moment arm due to cupping of the flanges or due to in-
the values obtained from eqs. (3) and (4). For Design ward shifting of the line of action of the bolts as a result
Conditions, thereof.
(b) For the Design Conditions, the total flange moment
ð3Þ M 0 is the sum of the three individual moments M D , M T ,
and M G , as defined in XI-3130, and based on the flange de-
For gasket seating, sign bolt load of eq. XI-3223(3) with moment arms as giv-
en in Table XI-3230-1.
ð4Þ (c) For gasket seating, the total flange moment M 0 is
based on the flange design bolt load of eq. XI-3223(4),
In addition to the minimum requirements for safety, eq. which is opposed only by the gasket load, in which case:
(4) provides a margin against abuse of the flange from
overbolting. Since margin against such abuse is needed ð5Þ
primarily for the initial bolting up operation, which is
done at atmospheric temperature and before application
of internal pressure, the flange design is required to satis-
XI-3240 CALCULATION OF FLANGE STRESSES
fy this loading only under such conditions. Where addi-
tional safety against abuse is desired, or where it is The stresses in the flange shall be determined for both
necessary that the flange be suitable to withstand the full the Design Conditions and gasket seating, whichever con-
available bolt load A b × S a , the flange may be designed on trols, in accordance with the equations in (a) or (b).
the basis of this latter quantity. (a) For integral type flanges and all hub type flanges
Longitudinal hub stress
XI-3230 FLANGE MOMENTS
ð6Þ
(a) In the calculation of flange stresses, the moment of a
loading acting on the flange is the product of the load and Radial flange stress
its moment arm. The moment arm is determined by the
relative position of the bolt circle with respect to that of ð7Þ
the load producing the moment (Figure XI-3120-1). No

95
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table XI-3221.1-2
Effective Gasket Width
Basic Gasket Seating Width, b 0
Facing Sketch (Exaggerated) Column I Column II
(1a)

(1b)
[Note (1)]

(1c) w≤N

(1d) w≤N
[Note (1)]

1
(2) /64 in. (0.4 mm) Nubbin w≤N /2

1
(3) /64 in. (0.4 mm) Nubbin w≤N /2

(4)
[Note (1)]

(5)
[Note (1)]

(6) …

Location of Gasket Load Reaction

HG HG
G hG G hG
O.D. contact face C Gasket
b face

For bo 1/ in. (6 mm) For bo 1/ in. (6 mm)

4 4

96
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table XI-3221.1-2
Effective Gasket Width (Cont'd)
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Effective Gasket Seating Width:
b = b o when b o ≤ 1/4 in. (6 mm)
b = when b o > 1/4 in. (6 mm)
(b) The gasket factors listed only apply to flanged joints in which the gasket is contained entirely within the inner edges of bolt holes.
NOTE:
(1) Where serrations do not exceed 1/64 in. (0.4 mm) depth and 1/32 in. (0.8 mm) width spacing, sketches (1b) and (1d) shall be used.

Tangential flange stress (b) The longitudinal hub stress S H shall not be greater
than the smaller of 1.5S f or 1.5S n for integral type flanges
ð8Þ with hub welded to the neck, pipe, or vessel wall [Figure
XI-3120-1 sketches (6), (6a), and (6b)].
(b) For loose type ring flanges including optional type (c) The radial flange stress S R shall not be greater than
calculated as loose type having a rectangular cross section Sf.
(d) The tangential flange stress S T shall not be greater
than S f .
ð9Þ
(e) Also (S H + S R )/2 shall not be greater than S f and
(S H + S T )/2 shall not be greater than S f .
(f) In the case of loose type flanges with laps, as shown
in Figure XI-3120-1 sketches (1) and (1a), where the gas-
XI-3250 ALLOWABLE FLANGE DESIGN STRESSES ket is so located that the lap is subjected to shear, the
The flange stresses calculated by the equations in shearing stress shall not exceed 0.8S n for the material
XI-3240 shall not exceed the values given in (a) through of the lap, as defined in XI-3130. In the case of welded
(f). flanges, shown in Figure XI-3120-1 sketches (3), (4),
(a) The longitudinal hub stress S H shall not be greater (7), (8), (8a), and (8b), where the nozzle neck, vessel, or
than the smaller of 1.5S f or 1.5S n for optional type flanges pipe wall extends near to the flange face and may form
designed as integral [Figure XI-3120-1 sketches (8), (8a), the gasket contact face, the shearing stress carried by
(8b), and (9)], and also for integral type flanges [Figure the welds shall not exceed 0.8S n . The shearing stress shall
XI-3120-1 sketch (7)] where the neck material constitutes be calculated on the basis of W m 1 or W m 2 (as defined in
the hub of the flange. XI-3130), whichever is greater. Similar cases where flange
parts are subjected to shearing stress shall be governed
by the same requirements.
Table XI-3230-1
Moment Arms for Flange Loads
Flange Type hD hT hG XI-3260 FLANGES SUBJECT TO EXTERNAL
Integral type flanges [see
PRESSURE
Figure XI-3120-1
sketches (5), (6), (6a), R + 0.5g 1 XI-3261 Flanges for External Pressure Only ð17Þ
(6b), (7), (8), (8a), (8b),
and (9)] The design of flanges for external pressure only shall be
Loose type, except lap joint based on the equations given in XI-3240 for internal pres-
flanges [Figure XI-3120-1 sure except that for Design Conditions,
sketches (2), (3), and (4)];
and optional type flanges
[Figure XI-3120-1 ð10Þ
sketches (8), (8a), (8b),
and (9)]
Lap joint flanges [Figure for gasket seating,
XI-3120-1 sketches (1)
and (1a)]
ð11Þ

97
 Table XI-3240-1
Flange Factors in Formula Form
Integral Flange [Note (1)] Loose Hub Flange [Note (2)]
For F (Figure XI-3240-2) use: For F L (Figure XI-3240-4) use:

For V (Figure XI-3240-3) use: For V L (Figure XI-3240-5) use:

For f (Figure XI-3240-6) use: For f (Figure XI-3240-6) use:

ASME BPVC.III.A-2017
Equations

(1) A = (g 1 /g 0 ) − 1 (2) C = 43.68(h /h 0 )4

(3) C 1 = 1/3 + A /12 (4) C 2 = 5/42 + 17A /336
98

(5) C 3 = 1/210 + A/360 (6) C 4 = 11/360 + 59A /5040 + (1 + 3A)/C

(7) C 5 = 1/90 + 5A/1008 − (1 + A )3/C (8) C 6 = 1/120 + 17A /5040 + 1/C
(9) C 7 = 215/2772 + 51A /1232 + (60/7 + 225A/14 + 75A 2/7 + 5A 3/2)/C (10) C 8 = 31/6930 + 128A /45,045 + (6/7 + 15A /7 + 12A 2/7 + 5A 3/11)/C
(11) C 9 = 533/30,240 + 653A /73,920 + (1/2 + 33A/14 + 39A 2/28 + 25A 3/84)/C (12) C 1 0 = 29/3780 + 3A /704 − (1/2 + 33A/14 + 81A 2/28 + 13A 3/12)/C
2 3
(13) C 1 1 = 31/6048 + 1763A/665,280 + (1/2 + 6A /7 + 15A /28 + 5A /42)/C (14) C 1 2 = 1/2925 + 71A /300,300 + (8/35 + 18A/35 + 156A 2/385 + 6A 3/55)/C
(15) C 1 3 = 761/831,600 + 937A /1,663,200 + (1/35 + 6A/35 + 11A /70 + 3A /70)/C 2 3
(16) C 1 4 = 197/415,800 + 103A /332,640 − (1/35 + 6A/35 + 17A 2/70 + A 3/10)/C
(17) C 1 5 = 233/831,600 + 97A /554,400 + (1/35 + 3A/35 + A /14 + 2A /105)/C 2 3
(18) C 1 6 = C 1 C 7 C 1 2 + C 2 C 8 C 3 + C 3 C 8 C 2 − (C 3 2C 7 + C 8 2C 1 + C 2 2C 1 2 )
(19) C 1 7 = [C 4 C 7 C 1 2 + C 2 C 8 C 1 3 + C 3 C 8 C 9 − (C 1 3 C 7 C 3 + C 8 C 4 + C 1 2 C 2 C 9 )]/C 1 6
2
(20) C 1 8 = [C 5 C 7 C 1 2 + C 2 C 8 C 1 4 + C 3 C 8 C 1 0 − (C 1 4 C 7 C 3 + C 8 2C 5 + C 1 2 C 2 C 1 0 )]/C 1 6
(21) C 1 9 = [C 6 C 7 C 1 2 + C 2 C 8 C 1 5 + C 3 C 8 C 1 1 − (C 1 5 C 7 C 3 + C 8 2C 6 + C 1 2 C 2 C 1 1 )]/C 1 6 (22) C 2 0 = [C 1 C 9 C 1 2 + C 4 C 8 C 3 + C 3 C 1 3 C 2 − (C 3 2C 9 + C 1 3 C 8 C 1 + C 1 2 C 4 C 2 )]/C 1 6
(23) C 2 1 = [C 1 C 1 0 C 1 2 + C 5 C 8 C 3 + C 3 C 1 4 C 2 − (C 3 C 1 0 + C 1 4 C 8 C 1 + C 1 2 C 5 C 2 )]/C 1 6
2
(24) C 2 2 = [C 1 C 1 1 C 1 2 + C 6 C 8 C 3 + C 3 C 1 5 C 2 − (C 3 2C 1 1 + C 1 5 C 8 C 1 + C 1 2 C 6 C 2 )]/C 1 6
(25) C 2 3 = [C 1 C 7 C 1 3 + C 2 C 9 C 3 + C 4 C 8 C 2 − (C 3 C 7 C 4 + C 8 C 9 C 1 + C 2 C 1 3 )]/C 1 6
2
(26) C 2 4 = [C 1 C 7 C 1 4 + C 2 C 1 0 C 3 + C 5 C 8 C 2 − (C 3 C 7 C 5 + C 8 C 1 0 C 1 + C 2 2C 1 4 )]/C 1 6
(27) C 2 5 = [C 1 C 7 C 1 5 + C 2 C 1 1 C 3 + C 6 C 8 C 2 − (C 3 C 7 C 6 + C 8 C 1 1 C 1 + C 2 C 1 5 )]/C 1 6
2
(28) C 2 6 = −(C/4)1/4
(29) C 2 7 = C 2 0 −C 1 7 − 5/12 − [C 1 7 (C /4) 1/4
] (30) C 2 8 = C 2 2 − C 1 9 − 1/12 − [C 1 9 (C /4)1/4]
(31) C 2 9 = − (C /4)1/2 (32) C 3 0 = −(C/4)3/4
3/4
(33) C 3 1 = 3A /2 + C 1 7 (C/4) (34) C 3 2 = 1/2 + C 1 9 (C /4)3/4
(35) C 3 3 = 0.5C 2 6 C 3 2 + C 2 8 C 3 1 C 2 9 − (0.5C 3 0 C 2 8 + C 3 2 C 2 7 C 2 9 ) (36) C 3 4 = 1/12 + C 1 8 − C 2 1 + C 1 8 (C /4)1/4
(37) C 3 5 = −C 1 8 (C /4) 3/4
(38) C 3 6 = (C 2 8 C 3 5 C 2 9 − C 3 2 C 3 4 C 2 9 )/C 3 3
(39) C 3 7 = [0.5C 2 6 C 3 5 + C 3 4 C 3 1 C 2 9 − (0.5C 3 0 C 3 4 + C 3 5 C 2 7 C 2 9 )]/C 3 3 (40) E 1 = C 1 7 C 3 6 + C 1 8 + C 1 9 C 3 7
(41) E 2 = C 2 0 C 3 6 + C 2 1 + C 2 2 C 3 7 (42) E 3 = C 2 3 C 3 6 + C 2 4 + C 2 5 C 3 7
 Table XI-3240-1
Flange Factors in Formula Form (Cont'd)
Equations

(43) E 4 = /4 + C 3 7 /12 + C 3 6 /4 −E 3 /5 − 3E 2 /2 −E 1
1
(44) E 5 = E 1 (1/2 + A /6) + E 2 (1/4 + 11A/84) + E 3 (1/70 + A /105)
(45) E 6 = E 5 − C 3 6 ( /120 + A/36 + 3 A /C) − /40 − A /72 − C 3 7 ( /60 + A /120 + 1/C )
7 1 1

NOTES:
(1) Except for the case when g 1 = g 0 , the values used in the Integral Flange equations are determined by using Eqs. (1) through (45), which are based on the values of g 1 , g 0 , h ,
and h 0 (see XI-3130 for definitions). When g 1 = g 0 , Eqs. (1) through (45) are not required and should not be used. For this case (g 1 = g 0 ), F = 0.908920, V = 0.550103, and
f = 1.
(2) The values used in the Loose Hub Flange equations are determined by using Eqs. (1) through (5), (7), (9), (10), (12), (14), (16), (18), (20), (23), and (26), which are based on
the values of g 1 , g 0 , h , and h 0 (see XI-3130 for definitions).

ASME BPVC.III.A-2017
99
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure XI-3240-1
Values of T, U , Y , and Z (Terms Involving K)

GENERAL NOTE: The calculation of values of T , U , Y, and Z for values of K outside the boundaries of the graph is acceptable.

In eqs. (10) and (11): XI-3262 Flanges for Both External and Internal ð17Þ
Pressure
When flanges are subject at different times during ser-
vice to external or internal pressure, the design shall sa-
tisfy the external pressure design requirements given in
XI-3261 and the internal pressure design requirements
given elsewhere in this Appendix.
NOTE: The combined force of external pressure and bolt loading may
plastically deform certain gaskets to result in loss of gasket contact
pressure when the connection is depressurized. To maintain a tight
joint when the unit is repressurized, consideration should be given
See XI-3130 for definitions of other symbols. to gasket and facing details, so that excessive deformation of the gas-
When internal pressure occurs only during the re- ket will not occur. Joints subject to pressure reversals, such as in heat
quired pressure test, the design may be based on external exchanger floating heads, are in this type of service.
pressure and auxiliary devices such as clamps may be
used during the application of the required test pressure.

100
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure XI-3240-2
Values of F (Integral Flange Factors)

GENERAL NOTE: See Table XI-3240-1 for equations.

101
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure XI-3240-3
Values of V (Integral Flange Factors)

GENERAL NOTE: See Table XI-3240-1 for equations.

102
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure XI-3240-4 Figure XI-3240-5

Values of F L (Loose Hub Flange Factors) Values of V L (Loose Hub Flange Factors)

GENERAL NOTE: See Table XI-3240-1 for equations.

GENERAL NOTE: See Table XI-3240-1 for equations.

103
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure XI-3240-6
Values of f (Hub Stress Correction Factor)

104
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

MANDATORY APPENDIX XII

ARTICLE XII-1000
DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS FOR BOLTED FLANGE CONNECTIONS

XII-1100 CONSIDERATIONS conditions in general need not be as great as under Design

Conditions. On the other hand, if a stress–strain analysis
(a) The primary purpose of the rules for bolted flange of the joint is made, it may indicate that an initial bolt
connections in Mandatory Appendix XI is to ensure safety, stress still higher than 1 1/2 times the design value is
but there are certain other practical matters to be taken needed. Such an analysis is one that considers the changes
into consideration in order to obtain a serviceable design. in bolt elongation, flange deflection, and gasket load that
One of the most important of these is the proportioning of take place with the application of internal pressure, start-
the bolting, i.e., determining the number and size of the ing from the prestressed condition. In any event, it is evi-
bolts. dent that an initial bolt stress higher than the design value
(b) In the great majority of designs the practice that has may and, in some cases, must be developed in the tighten-
been used in the past should be adequate: to follow the ing operation, and it is the intent of Subsections NC, ND,
design rules in Mandatory Appendix XI and tighten the and NE that such a practice is permissible, provided it in-
bolts sufficiently to withstand the test pressure without
cludes necessary and appropriate provision to ensure
leakage. The considerations presented in the discussion
against excessive flange distortion and gross crushing of
in (c) through (m) will be important only when some un-
the gasket.
usual feature exists, such as a very large diameter, a high
Design Pressure, a high temperature, severe temperature (e) It is possible for the bolt stress to decrease after in-
gradients, an unusual gasket arrangement, and so on. itial tightening, because of slow creep or relaxation of the
(c) The maximum allowable stress values for bolting gasket, particularly in the case of the softer gasket mate-
given in Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Table 3 are design rials. This may be the cause of leakage in the hydrostatic
values to be used in determining the minimum amount test, in which case it may suffice merely to retighten the
of bolting required under the rules. However, a distinc- bolts. A decrease in bolt stress can also occur in service
tion must be kept carefully in mind between the design at elevated temperatures, as a result of creep in the bolt
value and the bolt stress that might actually exist or that or flange or gasket material, with consequent relaxation.
might be needed for conditions other than the Design When this results in leakage under service conditions, it
Pressure. The initial tightening of the bolts is a prestres- is common practice to retighten the bolts, and sometimes
sing operation, and the amount of bolt stress developed a single such operation or perhaps several repeated at
must be within proper limits to ensure, on the one hand, long intervals is sufficient to correct the condition. To
that it is adequate to provide against all conditions that avoid chronic difficulties of this nature, however, it is ad-
tend to produce a leaking joint and, on the other hand, visable when designing a joint for high temperature ser-
that it is not so excessive that yielding of the bolts or vice to give attention to the relaxation properties of the
flanges can produce relaxation that also can result in materials involved, especially for temperatures where
leakage. creep is the controlling factor in design.
(d) The first important consideration is the need for the (f) In the other direction, excessive initial bolt stress
joint to be tight in the hydrostatic test. An initial bolt can present a problem in the form of yielding in the bolt-
stress of some magnitude greater than the design value ing itself and may occur in the tightening operation to the
therefore must be provided. If it is not, further bolt strain extent of damage or even breakage. This is especially
develops during the test, which tends to part the joint and likely with bolts of small diameter and with bolt materials
thereby to decompress the gasket enough to allow leak- having a relatively low yield strength. The yield strength
age. The test pressure is usually 11/2 times the Design of mild carbon steel, annealed austenitic stainless steel,
Pressure, and on this basis it may be thought that 50% ex- and certain of the nonferrous bolting materials can easily
tra bolt stress above the design value will be sufficient. be exceeded with ordinary wrench effort in the smaller
However, this is an oversimplification because, on the bolt sizes. Even if no damage is evident, any additional
one hand, the safety factor against leakage under test load generated when internal pressure is applied can

105
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

produce further yielding with possible leakage. Such (l) Theoretically, the margin against flange yielding is
yielding can also occur when there is very little margin not as great. The design values for flange materials may
between initial bolt stress and yield strength. be as high as five‐eighths or two‐thirds of the yield
(g) An increase in bolt stress, above any that may be strength. However, the highest stress in a flange is usually
due to internal pressure, might occur in service during the bending stress in the hub or shell and is more or less
startup or other transient conditions, or perhaps even un- localized. It is too conservative to assume that local yield-
der normal service. This can happen when there is an ap- ing is followed immediately by overall yielding of the en-
preciable differential in temperature between the flanges tire flange. Even if a plastic hinge should develop, the ring
and the bolts or when the bolt material has a different portion of the flange takes up the portion of the load that
coefficient of thermal expansion than the flange material. the hub and shell refuse to carry. Yielding is far more sig-
Any increase in bolt load due to this thermal effect, super- nificant if it occurs first in the ring but the limitation in the
posed on the load already existing, can cause yielding of rules on the combined hub and ring stresses provides a
the bolt material, whereas any pronounced decrease safeguard. In this connection, reference should be made
due to such effects can result in such a loss of bolt load to Notes G10 and G8 of Section II, Part D, Subpart 1,
as to be a direct cause of leakage. In either case, retighten- Tables 1A and 1B, respectively, which provides guidance
ing of the bolts may be necessary, but it must not be for- in the case of high alloy materials to which a strain limit-
gotten that the effects of repeated retightening can be ing factor may have to be applied.
cumulative and may ultimately make the joint (m) Another very important item in bolting design is
unserviceable. the question of whether the necessary bolt stress is actu-
(h) In addition to the difficulties created by yielding of ally realized and what special means of tightening, if any,
the bolts as described above, the possibility of similar dif- must be employed. Most joints are tightened manually by
ficulties arising from yielding of the flange or gasket ma- ordinary wrenching and it is advantageous to have de-
terial, under like circumstances or from other causes, signs that require no more than this. Some pitfalls must
should also be considered. be avoided, however. The probable bolt stress developed
(i) Excessive bolt stress, whatever the reason, may manually, when using standard wrenches, is
cause the flange to yield even though the bolts may not
yield. Any resulting excessive deflection of the flange, ac- (U.S. Customary Units)
companied by permanent set, can produce a leaking joint
when other effects are superposed. It can also damage the
flange by making it more difficult to effect a tight joint
thereafter. For example, irregular permanent distortion
of the flange due to uneven bolt load around the circum- (SI Units)
ference of the joint can warp the flange face and its gasket
contact surface out of a true plane.
(j) The gasket, too, can be overloaded, even without ex-
cessive bolt stress. The full initial bolt load is imposed en- where S is the bolt stress (psi, MPa) and d is the nominal
tirely on the gasket, unless the gasket has a stop ring or diameter of the bolt (in., mm). It can be seen that smaller
the flange face detail is arranged to provide the equiva- bolts will have excessive stress unless judgment is exer-
lent. Without such means of controlling the compression cised in pulling up on them. On the other hand, it will
of the gasket, consideration must be given to the selection be impossible to develop the desired stress in very large
of gasket type, size, and material that will prevent gross bolts by ordinary hand wrenching. Impact wrenches may
crushing of the gasket. prove serviceable, but, if not, resort may be had to such
(k) From the foregoing, it is apparent that the bolt methods as preheating the bolt or using hydraulically
stress can vary over a considerable range above the de- powered bolt tensioners. With some of these methods,
sign stress value. The design stress values for bolting have control of the bolt stress is possible by means inherent
been set at a conservative value to provide a factor in the procedure, especially if effective thread lubricants
against yielding. At elevated temperatures, the design are employed, but in all cases the bolt stress can be regu-
stress values are governed by the creep rate and stress lated within reasonable tolerances by measuring the bolt
rupture strength. Any higher bolt stress existing before elongation with suitable extensometer equipment. Ordi-
creep occurs in operation will have already served its pur- narily, simple wrenching without verification of the actual
pose of seating the gasket and holding the hydrostatic test bolt stress meets all practical needs, and measured con-
pressure, all at atmospheric temperature, and is not trol of the stress is employed only when there is some
needed at the Design Pressure and Temperature. special or important reason for doing so.

106
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

MANDATORY APPENDIX XIII ð17Þ

DESIGN BASED ON STRESS ANALYSIS

ARTICLE XIII-1000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

XIII-1100 SCOPE XIII-1300 TERMS RELATING TO STRESS

ANALYSIS
This Appendix is applicable for the design of metallic
items when specifically permitted by the applicable Sec- Terms used in this Appendix relating to stress analysis
tion III Subsection. This Appendix uses Division 1 termi- are defined in (a) through (ak) below.
nology. When this Appendix is referenced by other (a) Bending Stress. Bending stress is the component of
divisions, (a) through (c) are applicable. normal stress that varies across the thickness. The varia-
(a) The terms Service Loadings versus Operating Load- tion may or may not be linear. The bending component of
ings, vessel versus containment, pressure boundary versus primary stress for piping is the stress proportional to the
containment boundary, etc. shall be considered as identi- distance from the centroid of the pipe cross section.
cal in the application of these rules for Division 3 (b) Collapse Load — Lower Bound. If, for a given load,
components. any system of stresses can be found that everywhere sa-
(b) The stress limits for Class 1 components are also ap- tisfies equilibrium, and nowhere exceeds the material
plicable for Division 5, Class A components. yield strength, the load is at or below the collapse load.
This is the lower bound theorem of limit analysis, which
(c) The stress limits for Class 2 components are also ap-
permits calculations of a lower bound to the collapse load.
plicable for Division 5, Class B components.
(c) Creep. Creep is the special case of inelasticity that
relates to the stress-induced, time-dependent deforma-
tion under load. Small time-dependent deformations
XIII-1200 DESIGN ACCEPTABILITY may occur after the removal of all applied loads.
(d) Deformation. Deformation of a component part is an
XIII-1210 REQUIREMENTS FOR DESIGN alteration of its shape or size.
ACCEPTABILITY (e) Equivalent Linear Stress. Equivalent linear stress is
The requirements for the acceptability of a design are defined as the linear stress distribution that has the same
as follows: net bending moment and net force as the actual stress
(a) The design shall be such that the stresses shall not distribution.
exceed the limits described in this Appendix. (f) Expansion Stresses. Expansion stresses are those
stresses resulting from restraint of free end displacement
(b) For configurations where compressive stresses oc-
of the piping system.
cur, in addition to the requirement in (a), the critical
(g) Fatigue Strength Reduction Factor. Fatigue strength
buckling stress shall be taken into account.
reduction factor is a stress intensification factor that ac-
(c) The requirements for material, design, fabrication, counts for the effect of a local structural discontinuity
examination, and testing of the applicable Subsection (stress concentration) on the fatigue strength. Values
shall be met. for some specific cases, based on experiment, are given
in the applicable Subsection. A theoretical stress concen-
tration factor or stress index may be used. A fatigue
XIII-1220 BASIS FOR DETERMINING STRESSES
strength reduction factor or stress index may also be de-
The theory of failure used in the rules of this Appendix termined using the procedures in Mandatory Appendix II.
is the maximum shear stress theory. The maximum shear (h) Free End Displacement. Free end displacement con-
stress at a point is equal to one‐half the difference be- sists of the relative motions that would occur between a
tween the algebraically largest and the algebraically smal- fixed attachment and connected piping if the two mem-
lest of the three principal stresses at the point. bers were separated and permitted to move.

107
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(i) Gross Structural Discontinuity. Gross structural dis- exceeds 1.1S m ). Discrete regions of local primary mem-
continuity is a geometric or material discontinuity that af- brane stress intensity, such as those resulting from con-
fects the stress or strain distribution through the entire centrated loads acting on brackets, where the
wall thickness. Gross discontinuity‐type stresses are membrane stress intensity exceeds 1.1S m , shall be spaced
those portions of the actual stress distributions that pro- so that there is no overlapping of the areas in which the
duce net bending and membrane force resultants when membrane stress intensity exceeds 1.1S m .
integrated through the wall thickness. Examples of a Examples of local primary membrane stress are the
gross structural discontinuity are head-to-shell junctions, membrane stress in a shell produced by an external load,
flange-to-shell junctions, nozzles, and junctions between stress in a shell at a permanent support or nozzle connec-
shells of different diameters or thicknesses. tion, and circumferential membrane stress at the inter-
(j) Inelasticity. Inelasticity is a general characteristic of section of a cylindrical shell with a conical shell due to
material behavior in which the material does not return internal pressure, as illustrated in Figure XIII-1300-1.
to its original shape and size after removal of all applied Local stressed area may also include areas of local wall
loads. Plasticity and creep are special cases of inelasticity. thinning. The requirements of XIII-3770 shall be applied
(k) Limit Analysis. Limit analysis is a special case of for these cases.
plastic analysis in which the material is assumed to be (o) Local Structural Discontinuity. Local structural dis-
ideally plastic (non-strain-hardening). In limit analysis, continuity is a geometric or material discontinuity that af-
the equilibrium and flow characteristics at the limit state fects the stress or strain distribution through a fractional
are used to calculate the collapse load. The two bounding part of the wall thickness. The stress distribution asso-
methods used in limit analysis are the lower bound ap- ciated with a local discontinuity causes only very local-
proach, which is associated with a statically admissible ized deformation or strain and has no significant effect
stress field, and the upper bound approach, which is asso- on the shell‐type discontinuity deformations. Examples
ciated with a kinematically admissible velocity field. For are small fillet radii, small attachments, and partial pene-
beams and frames, the term mechanism is commonly used tration welds.
in lieu of kinematically admissible velocity field.
(p) Membrane Stress. Membrane stress is the compo-
(l) Limit Analysis — Collapse Load. The methods of lim- nent of normal stress that is uniformly distributed and
it analysis are used to compute the maximum load that a equal to the average stress across the thickness of the sec-
structure assumed to be made of ideally plastic material tion under consideration.
can carry. At this load, which is termed the collapse load,
(q) Nonreversing Dynamic Loads. Nonreversing dy-
the deformations of the structure increase without bound.
namic loads (see Figure XIII-1300-2) are those loads that
(m) Load-Controlled Stress. Load-controlled stress is do not cycle about a mean value; examples include the in-
the stress resulting from application of a loading, such itial thrust force due to sudden opening or closure of
as internal pressure, inertial loads, or gravity, whose mag- valves and waterhammer resulting from entrapped water
nitude is not reduced as a result of displacement. in two phase flow systems. Reflected waves in a piping
(n) Local Primary Membrane Stress. Cases arise in system due to flow transients are classified as nonrever-
which a membrane stress produced by pressure or other sing dynamic loads.
mechanical loading and associated with a discontinuity
(r) Normal Stress. Normal stress is the component of
would, if not limited, produce excessive distortion in the
stress normal to the plane of reference. This is also re-
transfer of load to other portions of the structure. Conser-
ferred to as direct stress. Usually the distribution of nor-
vatism requires that such a stress be classified as a local
mal stress is not uniform through the thickness of a part,
primary membrane stress even though it has some char-
so this stress is considered to have two components, one
acteristics of a secondary stress.
uniformly distributed and equal to the average stress
A stressed region may be considered local if the dis- across the thickness under consideration, and the other
tance over which the membrane stress intensity exceeds varying from this average value across the thickness.
1.1S m (see XIII-2200) does not extend in the meridional
(s) Peak Stress. Peak stress is that increment of stress
(longitudinal) direction more than , where R is that is additive to the primary plus secondary stresses
the minimum midsurface radius of curvature and t is by reason of local discontinuities or local thermal stress
the minimum thickness in the region considered. Regions [see (aj)(2)] including the effects, if any, of stress concen-
of local primary stress intensity involving axisymmetric trations. The basic characteristic of a peak stress is that it
membrane stress distributions that exceed 1.1S m shall does not cause any noticeable distortion and is objection-
not be closer in the meridional (longitudinal) direction able only as a possible source of a fatigue crack or a brittle
than , where R L is defined as (R 1 + R 2 )/2 and fracture. A stress that is not highly localized falls into this
t L is defined as (t 1 + t 2 )/2 (where t 1 and t 2 are the mini- category if it is of a type that cannot cause noticeable dis-
mum thicknesses at each of the regions considered, and tortion. Examples of peak stress are:
R 1 and R 2 are the minimum midsurface radii of curvature (1) the thermal stress in the austenitic steel cladding
at these regions where the membrane stress intensity of a carbon steel part

108
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure XIII-1300-1
Example of Acceptable Local Primary Membrane Stress Due to Pressure

CL

t R
P

V1

Pressure shell meridian

V2

Allowable Stress
Intensity Limits

1.5Sm (maximum allowable, XIII-3120)

SImax
PL
Stress Intensity (Pm , PL)

1.1Sm [Note (1)]

1.0Sm

Local primary
Pm membrane stress
(PL) region

Meridional Distance

Legend:
P = pressure Sm = design stress intensity for the material at service
P L = primary local membrane stress intensity limit applies temperature
within the local region SImax = maximum stress intensity
P m = primary general membrane stress intensity limit applies t = minimum thickness in stressed region considered
outside the local region V 1 and V 2 = meridional forces
R = minimum midsurface radius of curvature

GENERAL NOTE: See XIII-1300(n) and XIII-3120 for limits.

109
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(2) certain thermal stresses that may cause fatigue (2) bending stress in the central portion of a flat head
but not distortion due to pressure
(3) the stress at a local structural discontinuity Refer to Table XIII-2600-1 for examples of primary stress.
(4) surface stresses produced by thermal shock (z) Ratcheting. Ratcheting is a progressive incremental
(t) Plastic Analysis. Plastic analysis is that method that inelastic deformation or strain that can occur in a compo-
computes the structural behavior under given loads con- nent subjected to variations of mechanical stress, thermal
sidering the plasticity characteristics of the materials, in- stress, or both.
cluding strain hardening and the stress redistribution (aa) Reversing Dynamic Loads. Reversing dynamic loads
occurring in the structure. (see Figure XIII-1300-2) are those loads that cycle about a
(u) Plastic Analysis — Collapse Load. A plastic analysis mean value; examples include building filtered and earth-
may be used to determine the collapse load for a given quake loads.
combination of loads on a given structure. The following (ab) Secondary Stress. Secondary stress is a normal
criterion for determination of the collapse load shall be stress or a shear stress developed by the constraint of ad-
used. A load–deflection or load–strain curve is plotted jacent material or by self-constraint of the structure. The
with load as the ordinate and deflection or strain as the basic characteristic of a secondary stress is that it is self-
abscissa. The angle that the linear part of the load– limiting. Local yielding and minor distortions can satisfy
deflection or load–strain curve makes with the ordinate the conditions that cause the stress to occur and failure
is called θ. A second straight line, hereafter called the col- from one application of the stress is not to be expected.
lapse limit line, is drawn through the origin so that it Examples of secondary stress are
makes an angle ϕ = tan−1 (2 tan θ ) with the ordinate.
(1) general thermal stress [see (aj)(1)]
The collapse load is the load at the intersection of the
(2) bending stress at a gross structural discontinuity
load–deflection or load–strain curve and the collapse lim-
it line (see Figure II-1430-1). If this method is used, par- Refer to Table XIII-2600-1 for examples of secondary
ticular care should be taken to ensure that the strains or stress.
deflections that are used are indicative of the load- (ac) Service Cycle. Service cycle is defined as the initia-
carrying capacity of the structure. tion and establishment of new conditions followed by a
(v) Plastic Hinge. A plastic hinge is an idealized concept return to the conditions that prevailed at the beginning
used in Limit Analysis. In a beam or a frame, a plastic of the cycle.
hinge is formed at the point where the moment, shear, (ad) Shakedown. Shakedown of a structure occurs if,
and axial force lie on the yield interaction surface. In after a few cycles of load application, ratcheting ceases.
plates and shells, a plastic hinge is formed where the gen- The subsequent structural response is elastic, or elastic–
eralized stresses lie on the yield surface. plastic, and progressive incremental inelastic deforma-
(w) Plastic Instability Load. The plastic instability load tion is absent. Elastic shakedown is the case in which
for members under predominantly tensile or compressive the subsequent response is elastic.
loading is defined as that load at which unbounded plastic (ae) Shear Stress. Shear stress is the component of
deformation can occur without an increase in load. At the stress tangent to the plane of reference.
plastic tensile instability load, the true stress in the mate- (af) Strain-Limiting Load. When a limit is placed upon a
r i al i nc r ea se s fa st er t h an st r ai n ha r de nin g c an strain, the load associated with the strain limit is called
accommodate. the strain limiting load.
(x) Plasticity. Plasticity is the special case of inelasticity (ag) Stress Cycle. Stress cycle is a condition in which the
in which the material undergoes time-independent non- alternating stress difference [see XIII-3520] goes from an
recoverable deformation. initial value through an algebraic maximum value and an
(y) Primary Stress. Primary stress is any normal stress algebraic minimum value and then returns to the initial
or shear stress developed by an imposed loading that is value. A single service cycle may result in one or more
necessary to satisfy the laws of equilibrium of external stress cycles. Dynamic effects shall also be considered
and internal forces and moments. The basic characteristic as stress cycles.
of a primary stress is that it is not self-limiting. Primary (ah) Stress Intensity. Stress intensity is defined as twice
stresses that considerably exceed the yield strength will the maximum shear stress, which is the difference be-
result in failure or, at least, in gross distortion. Primary tween the algebraically largest principal stress and the al-
membrane stress is divided into general and local cate- gebraically smallest principal stress at a given point.
gories. A general primary membrane stress is one that Tensile stresses are considered positive, and compressive
is so distributed in the structure that no redistribution stresses are considered negative. This definition of stress
of load occurs as a result of yielding. Examples of primary intensity is not related to the definition of stress intensity
stress are applied in the field of fracture mechanics.
(1) general membrane stress in a circular cylindrical (ai) Test Collapse Load. Test collapse load is the col-
shell or a spherical shell due to internal pressure or to dis- lapse load determined by tests according to the criteria
tributed loads given in II-1430.

110
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure XIII-1300-2
Examples of Reversing and Nonreversing Dynamic Loads

111
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(aj) Thermal Stress. Thermal stress is a self-balancing (-c) the equivalent linear stress produced by the
stress produced by a nonuniform distribution of tempera- radial temperature distribution in a cylindrical shell
ture or by differing thermal coefficients of expansion. (2) Local thermal stress is associated with almost
Thermal stress is developed in a solid body whenever a complete suppression of the differential expansion and
volume of material is prevented from assuming the size thus produces no significant distortion. Such stresses
and shape that it normally would under a change in tem- shall be considered only from the fatigue standpoint
perature. For the purpose of establishing allowable stres- and are therefore classified as peak stresses in Table
ses, two types of thermal stress are recognized, XIII-2600-1. In evaluating local thermal stresses the pro-
depending on the volume or area in which distortion cedures of XIII-2500(b) shall be used. Examples of local
takes place, as described in (1) and (2) below. thermal stress are
(1) General thermal stress is associated with distor- (-a) the stress in a small hot spot in a vessel wall
tion of the structure in which it occurs. If a stress of this
type, neglecting stress concentrations, exceeds twice the (-b) the difference between the actual stress and
yield strength of the material, the elastic analysis may the equivalent linear stress resulting from a radial tem-
be invalid and successive thermal cycles may produce in- perature distribution in a cylindrical shell
cremental distortion. Therefore this type is classified as (-c) the thermal stress in a cladding material that
secondary stress in Table XIII-2600-1. Examples of gener- has a coefficient of expansion different from that of the
al thermal stress are base metal
(-a) stress produced by an axial temperature dis- (ak) Total Stress. Total stress is the sum of the primary,
tribution in a cylindrical shell secondary, and peak stress contributions. Recognition of
(-b) stress produced by the temperature differ- each of the individual contributions is essential to estab-
ence between a nozzle and the shell to which it is attached lishment of appropriate stress limitations.

112
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE XIII-2000
STRESS ANALYSIS

XIII-2100 OVERVIEW is the total membrane stress that results from pressure
and mechanical loads, including gross structural disconti-
(a) A detailed stress analysis of all major structural nuity effects, rather than a stress increment. Therefore,
components shall be prepared in sufficient detail to show the P L value always includes the P m contribution.
that each of the stress limits of Articles XIII-3000 and
(d) The combining of classified stresses for comparison
XIII-4000 is satisfied when the component is subjected
to specified limits is illustrated in Figure XIII-2100-1. The
to the loadings defined in the Design Specification. As
solid lines illustrate the combination of the primary stres-
an aid to the evaluation of these stresses, equations and
ses due to the specified load combinations for comparison
methods for the solution of certain recurring problems
to the primary stress intensity limits defined for Design
have been placed in Nonmandatory Appendix A. The
Loadings, and loadings for which Level A, Level B, Level
stress index values provided in NB-3338 may also be used
C, or Level D Service Limits are specified. At each rectan-
for openings designed in accordance with NC-3230 or
gular box, the applicable sets of the six stress components
WC-3230, and NC-3259 or WC-3259.
for each load combination are combined to calculate the
(b) The loadings to be considered are those defined in
maximum stress intensity (see XIII-2300), represented
the Design Specification and include Design Loadings, Ser-
by the adjacent circle. The dashed lines identify the com-
vice Loadings, and Test Loadings. The Service Loadings
binations of primary, secondary, and peak stress used to
may be the result of the service conditions defined in
evaluate the combined effects of all the loadings for which
the Design Specification. The Design Specification desig-
Level A and B Service Limits are specified. In this case the
nates a Service Limit for each service condition or loading.
rectangular boxes represent the sets of the six stress com-
These Service Limits are identified as Level A, Level B,
ponents to be evaluated to determine the maximum range
Level C, and Level D. Acceptance limits are defined in this
of the stress differences over the life of the component
Appendix for Design Loadings, each Service Level, and
(see XIII-2400) for comparison to the specified limits
Test Loadings.
and to determine the cumulative fatigue life of the
(c) The stress limits also differ depending on the stress
component.
classification (primary, secondary, etc.) from which the
stress is derived. The six stress classifications are identi-
fied in XIII-2300, and are distinct and separate from each XIII-2200 DESIGN STRESS VALUES AND
other, even though all may exist at the same point. De-
MATERIAL PROPERTIES
tailed stress analyses often produce results that are a
combination of these classifications and it is necessary The stress intensity limits are defined in terms of the
to separate each in order to properly compare to the ap- design stress intensity and yield strength. The design
plicable stress limits. Subarticle XIII-2600 provides guid- stress intensity values S m , are given in Section II, Part
ance for selecting the appropriate stress classification. As D, Subpart 1, Tables 2A and 2B for component materials
an example, the stresses in classification Q are those parts and Table 4 for bolting materials. Values of yield strength,
of the total stress that are produced by thermal gradients, S y , are given in Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Table Y-1.
structural discontinuities, etc., and they do not include The design stress intensity and yield strength are tabu-
primary stresses that may also exist at the same point. lated at various temperatures and values for intermediate
A detailed stress analysis frequently gives the combina- temperatures may be found by interpolation. Values of
tion of primary and secondary stresses directly and, when the coefficient of thermal expansion and modulus of elas-
appropriate, this calculated value represents the total of ticity are in Section II, Part D, Subpart 2, Tables TE and
P m + P b + Q , and not Q alone. Similarly, if the stress in TM. The basis for establishing design stress intensity val-
classification F is produced by a stress concentration, ues is given in Mandatory Appendix III. The design fatigue
the quantity F is the additional stress produced by the curves used in conjunction with XIII-3500 are those in
notch over and above the nominal stress. However, P L Mandatory Appendix I.

113
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure XIII-2100-1
Stress Classification Combinations

Primary Secondary Peak

Stress
Membrane
Classification General Local Plus
Membrane Membrane Bending Expansion Bending
Symbol Pm PL Pb Pe Q F
[Note (1)] [Note (2)]
Combination
of stress
components

Pm S Pe Sr

PL S

(Pm or PL) + Pb + Pe+ Q Sr

or

(Pm or PL) + Pb (Pm or PL) + Pb + Pe + Q + F Salt

S

Legend:
Design Loadings and Loadings for which Level A, Level B, Level C, or Level
D Service Limits are specified
------- Loadings for which Level A or Level B Service Limits are specified

Combined stress components (see XIII-2300)

Calculated stress intensity subject to a limit (see XIII-2300 and XIII-2400)

S = stress intensity (see XIII-2300)

Salt = alternating stress intensity (see XIII-2400)
Sr = stress intensity range (see XIII-2400)

NOTES:
(1) The symbols P m , P L , P b , P e , Q , and F do not represent single quantities but rather sets of the six stress components σ t , σ l , σ r , τ l t , τ l r , and
τrt.
(2) The expansion stress classification is only applicable to piping.

114
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

XIII-2300 DERIVATION OF STRESS XIII-2400 DERIVATION OF STRESS

INTENSITIES DIFFERENCES FOR EVALUATION
OF CYCLIC OPERATION
This subarticle outlines the procedure for the calcula-
tion of the stress intensities that are subject to the speci- The evaluation of the primary plus secondary stresses,
fied limits. The steps in the procedure are stipulated the expansion stress in piping and the primary plus sec-
below. Membrane stress is derived from the stress com- ondary plus peak stresses requires the calculation of the
ponents averaged across the thickness of the section. cyclic stress ranges due to the loadings for which Level
The averaging shall be performed at the component level A and Level B Service Limits are specified. The determina-
in Step 2 or Step 3. tion of the stress ranges shall be made on the basis of the
Step 1. At the point on the component being investi- stresses at a point on the component using the process
gated, choose an orthogonal set of coordinates, such as defined in XIII-2410 or XIII-2420. If the specified opera-
tangential, meridional/longitudinal, and radial, and desig- tion of the component does not meet the conditions of
nate them by the subscripts t , l , and r . Then designate the XIII-3510, the ability of the component to withstand the
stress components in these directions as σ t , σ l , and σ r specified cyclic service without fatigue failure, shall be de-
for direct stresses and τ l t , τ l r , and τ r t for shear stresses. termined as provided in XIII-3520. Only the stress differ-
ences due to cyclic Level A and Level B loadings as
Step 2. Calculate the stress components for each load
specified in the Design Specification need be considered.
combination to which the part will be subjected, and as-
sign each set of six stress components to one or a group
of the following classifications. Subarticle XIII-2600 pro- XIII-2410 CONSTANT PRINCIPAL STRESS
vides guidance for selecting the appropriate stress DIRECTION
classification. For any case in which the directions of the principal
(a) g e n e r a l p r i m a r y m e m b r a n e s t r e s s , P m stresses at the point being considered do not change dur-
[XIII-1300(p) and XIII-1300(y)] ing the cycle, the steps stipulated below shall be taken to
(b) local primary membrane stress, P L [XIII-1300(n)] determine the alternating stress intensity.
(c) primary bending stress, P b [ XIII-1300(a) and Step 1. Principal Stresses. Consider the values of the
XIII-1300(y)] three principal stresses, σ 1 , σ 2 , and σ 3 , at the point being
investigated versus time for the complete stress cycle,
(d) expansion stress, P e [XIII-1300(f)], applicable only
taking into account both the applicable gross and local
to piping
structural discontinuities, and the thermal effects that
(e) secondary stress, Q [XIII-1300(ab)] vary during the cycle.
(f) peak stress, F [XIII-1300(s)] Step 2. Stress Differences. Determine the stress differ-
Step 3. For each classification, calculate the algebraic ences S 1 2 = σ 1 − σ 2 , S 2 3 = σ 2 − σ 3 , and S 3 1 = σ 3 − σ 1
sum of the σ t values that result from the different types versus time for the complete cycle. In Step 3, the symbol
of loadings and do the same for the other five stress S i j is used to represent any one of these three stress
components. differences.
Step 4. Translate the stress components for the t , l, and Step 3. Alternating Stress Intensity. Determine the ex-
r directions into principal stresses σ 1 , σ 2 , and σ 3 . In tremes of the range through which each stress difference,
many pressure component calculations, the t, l, and r di- S i j , fluctuates and find the absolute magnitude of this
rections may be so chosen that the shear stress compo- range for each S i j . Call this magnitude S r i j and let S a l t i j
nents are zero and σ 1 , σ 2 , and σ 3 are identical to σ t , = 0.5S r i j . The stress intensity range, S r , for the stress cy-
σ l , and σ r . cle is the largest S r i j . The alternating stress intensity, S a l t ,
is the largest S a l t i j value.
Step 5. Calculate the stress differences S 1 2 , S 2 3 , and
S 3 1 from the following relations:
XIII-2420 VARYING PRINCIPAL STRESS
DIRECTION
For any case in which the directions of the principal
stresses at the point being considered do change during
the stress cycle, it is necessary to use the more general
procedure described below.
Step 1. Consider the values of the six stress components
σ t , σ l , σ r , τ l t , τ l r , and τ r t , versus time for the complete
stress cycle, taking into account both the applicable gross
The stress intensity, S , is the largest absolute value of and local structural discontinuities, and the thermal ef-
S 1 2 , S 2 3 , and S 3 1 . fects that vary during the cycle.

115
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Step 2. Choose a point in time when the conditions are the elastic equations shall be used, except that the numer-
one of the extremes for the cycle (either maximum or ical value substituted for Poisson’s ratio shall be deter-
minimum, algebraically) and identify the stress compo- mined from the following expression:
nents at this time by the subscript i. In most cases, it will
be possible to choose at least one time during the cycle
when the conditions are known to be extreme. In some
cases, it may be necessary to try different points in time where
to find the one that results in the largest value of alternat-
ing stress intensity. S a = alternating stress intensity determined in
Step 3. Subtract each of the six stress components, σ t i , XIII-3520 prior to the elastic modulus adjustment
σ l i , etc., from the corresponding stress components, σ t , in XIII-3520(d)
σ l , etc., at each point in time during the cycle and call S y = yield strength of the material at the mean value of
the resulting components σ′ t , σ′ l , etc. the temperature of the cycle
Step 4. At each point in time during the cycle, calculate XIII-2600 CLASSIFICATION OF STRESSES
the principal stresses, σ′ 1 , σ′ 2 , and σ ′ 3 , derived from the
six stress components, σ ′ t , σ ′ l , etc. Note that the direc- (a) Tables XIII-2600-1 and XIII-2600-2 provide specific
tions of the principal stresses may change during the cy- examples to assist in the determination of the classifica-
cle but each principal stress retains its identity as it tion that should be assigned to a stress.
rotates. (b) There is a significant difference between the classi-
Step 5. Determine the stress differences, S ′ 1 2 = σ ′ 1 − fication of stress in a vessel and that in a pipe. In a vessel
σ′ 2 , S′ 2 3 = σ ′ 2 − σ ′ 3 , and S ′ 3 1 = σ ′ 3 − σ ′ 1 , versus time the stress due to a moment across the full section of the
for the complete cycle. The largest absolute magnitude vessel, or nozzle, is assigned a P m classification. In a pipe,
of any stress difference at any time is the stress intensity depending on the origin of the stress, a classification of
range, S r . The alternating stress intensity, S a l t is one-half P b , P e , or Q is assigned. The limit of reinforcement in
of this magnitude. the nozzle wall, as defined by the applicable Subsection,
is selected as the location to transition from the asso-
ciated vessel stress classifications and limits to the pipe
XIII-2500 APPLICATIONS OF ELASTIC stress classifications and limits. In this subarticle and
ANALYSIS FOR STRESSES Table XIII-2600-1, “within the limits of reinforcement” re-
BEYOND THE YIELD STRENGTH fers to the region between the shell and the limit of rein-
forcement in the nozzle wall; “outside the limits of
Certain of the allowable stresses permitted in the de-
reinforcement” refers to the nozzle wall between this lim-
sign criteria are such that the maximum stress calculated
it of reinforcement and the pipe-to-nozzle weld.
on an elastic basis may exceed the yield strength of the
material. The limit on primary plus secondary stress in- (c) The stress classifications for nozzles in vessels are
tensity of 3S m (see XIII-3420) has been placed at a level the same as the stress classifications for vessel shells
that ensures shakedown to elastic action after a few repe- (see Table XIII-2600-1) for stresses resulting from inter-
titions of the stress cycle except in regions containing sig- nal pressure, geometric discontinuities and temperature
nificant local structural discontinuities or local thermal differences, regardless of whether the stresses are within
stresses. These last two factors are considered only in or outside of the limits of reinforcement. Stresses due to
the performance of a fatigue evaluation. Therefore nozzle loads, also called pipe end loads, are classified as
(a) in evaluating stresses for comparison with the follows:
stress limits on other than fatigue allowables, stresses (1) Within the limits of reinforcement, stresses re-
shall be calculated on an elastic basis. sulting from any external nozzle loads (forces and mo-
(b) in evaluating stresses for comparison with fatigue ments), excluding effects of geometric discontinuities,
allowables, all stresses, except those that result from local are classified as P m .
thermal stresses [see XIII-1300(aj)(2)], shall be evaluated (2) Outside the limits of reinforcement
on an elastic basis. In evaluating local thermal stresses, (-a) stresses resulting from external nozzle axial
and shear forces and torsional moments, not including
those attributable to restrained free end displacement
of the pipe, are classified as P m
(-b) stresses resulting from external nozzle bend-
ing moments, not including those attributable to re-
strained free end displacement of the pipe, are classified
as P b
(-c) stresses resulting from the restrained free
end displacement of the pipe are classified as Q for both
membrane and bending stresses

116
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table XIII-2600-1
Classification of Stresses in Vessels for Some Typical Cases
Discontinu-
ities
Considered
Vessel Part Location Origin of Stress Type of Stress Classification Gross Local
Any Any Differential thermal Membrane and Bending Q [Note (1)] Yes No
expansion Nonlinear portion of stress F Yes Yes
distribution
Any Any Any Stress concentration F Yes Yes
Any shell or head Any section across External force or moment Membrane Pm No No
entire vessel Bending across full section P m [Note (2)] No No
Near nozzle or other External force or moment Membrane PL Yes No
opening Bending Q Yes No
Cylindrical or Any Internal pressure Membrane Pm No No
spherical shell Gradient through thickness Q No No
Junction with head or Internal pressure Membrane PL Yes No
flange Bending Q [Note (3)] Yes No
Dished, conical, or flat Crown or center Internal pressure Membrane Pm No No
head region Bending Pb No No
Knuckle or junction to Internal pressure Membrane PL Yes No
shell Bending Q [Note (3)] Yes No
Perforated head or Typical ligament in a Pressure Membrane Pm Yes No
shell uniform pattern Bending P b [Note (4)] Yes No
Isolated or atypical Pressure Membrane Q Yes No
ligament Bending F Yes No
Nozzle Any Internal pressure Membrane Pm No No
Membrane PL Yes No
Bending Q Yes No
Differential expansion Membrane and Bending Q Yes No
Within the limits of External force or moment Membrane Pm No No
reinforcement Bending across full section P m [Note (2)] No No
Membrane PL Yes No
Bending Q Yes No
Outside the limits of External force or moment not Membrane Pm No No
reinforcement due to restrained free end Bending Pb No No
displacements of attached
Membrane PL Yes No
piping
Bending Q Yes No
External force or moment due Membrane Pm No No
to restrained free end Bending Q No No
displacements of attached
Membrane PL Yes No
piping
Bending Q Yes No
Cladding Any Pressure Membrane Q No No
Thermal Gradient Bending Q No No
Differential expansion Membrane and Bending F No No

NOTES:
(1) For a radial thermal gradient, Q equals the equivalent linear stress [see XIII-1300(e)].
(2) P m includes bending across the full section averaged through the thickness.
(3) If the bending moment at the edge is required to maintain the bending stress in the middle to acceptable limits, the edge bending is clas-
sified as P b . Otherwise, it is classified as Q .
(4) P b is bending stress averaged through the width of the ligament, but not through the plate.

117
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table XIII-2600-2
Classification of Stresses in Piping, Typical Cases
Discontinuities
Considered
Piping Component Locations Origin of Stress Classification Gross Local
Pipe or tube, elbows, and Any, except crotch Internal pressure Pm No No
reducers. Intersections regions of intersections P L and Q Yes No
and branch connections,
F Yes Yes
except in crotch regions
Sustained mechanical loads, Pb No No
including weight and P L and Q Yes No
nonreversing dynamic loads
F Yes Yes
Expansion Pe Yes No
F Yes Yes
Axial thermal gradient Q Yes No
F Yes Yes
Reversing dynamic loads [Note (1)] … …
Intersections, including tees In crotch region Internal pressure, sustained P L and Q [Note (2)] Yes No
and branch connections mechanical loads, expansion, F Yes Yes
and nonreversing dynamic
loads
Axial thermal gradient Q Yes No
F Yes Yes
Reversing dynamic loads [Note (1)] … …
Bolts and flanges Any Internal pressure, gasket Pm No No
compression, and bolt load Q Yes No
F Yes Yes
Thermal gradient Q Yes No
F Yes Yes
Expansion Pe Yes No
F Yes Yes
Any Any Nonlinear radial thermal F Yes Yes
gradient
Linear radial thermal gradient F Yes No
Anchor point motions, including Q Yes No
those resulting from
earthquake

NOTES:
(1) The stress intensity resulting from this loading has special requirements that must be satisfied. For Level B, Level C, and Level D Service
Limits, these are provided in XIII-3140.
(2) Analysis is not required when reinforced in accordance with the requirements of the applicable Subsection.

118
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE XIII-3000
STRESS LIMITS FOR OTHER THAN BOLTS

XIII-3100 PRIMARY STRESS INTENSITY Averaging is to be applied to the stress components

LIMITS prior to determination of the stress intensity values.
The allowable values of this stress intensity are tabulated
(a) Design Loadings. The stress intensity limits that are in Table XIII-3110-1.
to be satisfied at the Design Temperature for the Design
Loadings stated in the Design Specification are given in XIII-3130 PRIMARY MEMBRANE (GENERAL OR
XIII-3110 through XIII-3130. LOCAL) PLUS PRIMARY BENDING
(b) Level A, Level B, Level C, and Level D Service Limits. STRESS INTENSITY
The primary stress intensity limits that must be satisfied This stress intensity is derived from (P m or P L ) + P b in
at the coincident material temperature for any Level A, Figure XIII-2100-1 and is calculated using the highest val-
Level B, Level C, or Level D loadings stated in the Design ue across the thickness of a section of the general or local
Specification are those given in XIII-3110 through primary membrane stresses plus primary bending stres-
XIII-3130. For piping, additional requirements are pro- ses produced by
vided in XIII-3140. (a) Design Pressure and other specified Design Me-
(c) The provisions of XIII-3200 may provide relief from chanical Loads
certain of these stress limits if plastic analysis techniques (b) coincident pressure and mechanical loads asso-
are applied. ciated with the Service or Operating Loadings specified
in the Design Specification, but excluding all secondary
XIII-3110 GENERAL PRIMARY MEMBRANE
and peak stresses.
STRESS INTENSITY
For solid rectangular sections, the allowable values of
This stress intensity is derived from P m in Figure this stress intensity are tabulated in Table XIII-3110-1.
XIII-2100-1 and is calculated using the average value For other than solid rectangular sections, a value of α
across the thickness of a section of the general primary times the limit on P m established in Table XIII-3110-1
stresses [see XIII-1300(y)] produced by may be used, where the factor α is defined as the ratio
(a) Design Pressure and other specified Design Me- of the load set producing a fully plastic section to the load
chanical Loads set producing initial yielding in the extreme fibers of the
(b) ) coincident pressure and mechanical loads asso- section. In the evaluation of the initial yield and fully plas-
ciated with the Service or Operating Loadings specified tic section capacities, the ratios of each individual load in
in the Design Specification, but excluding all secondary the respective load set to each other load in that load set
and peak stresses shall be the same as the respective ratios of the individual
Averaging is to be applied to the stress components loads in the specified Design Load set. The value of α shall
prior to determination of the stress intensity values. For not exceed the value calculated for bending only (P m = 0).
piping, averaging is done across the entire pipe cross sec- In no case shall the value of α exceed 1.5. The α factor is
tion. The allowable values of this stress intensity are tabu- not permitted for Level D Service Limits when inelastic
lated in Table XIII-3110-1. component analysis is used as permitted in Mandatory
Appendix XXVII. The propensity for buckling of the part
XIII-3120 LOCAL PRIMARY MEMBRANE STRESS of the section that is in compression shall be investigated.
INTENSITY For piping, primary bending stress is proportional to
This stress intensity is derived from P L in Figure the distance from the centroid of the pipe cross section.
XIII-2100-1 and is calculated using the average value
across the thickness of a section of the local primary
XIII-3140 PRIMARY STRESS LIMITS FOR PIPING
stresses [see XIII-1300(n)] produced by For Class 1 piping components operating within the
(a) Design Pressure and other specified Design Me- temperature limits of the applicable Subsection, the re-
chanical Loads quirements of XIII-3141 through XIII-3144 shall apply.
(b) coincident pressure and mechanical loads asso-
ciated with the Service or Operating Loadings specified XIII-3141 Design Limits
in the Design Specification, but excluding all secondary The stress intensity limits for Class 1 components in
and peak stresses. Table XIII-3110-1 shall be satisfied.

119
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table XIII-3110-1
Primary Stress Intensity Limits
Stress Intensity Limits [Note (1)]
Service Level C
Stress Classification Design Service Level A Service Level B the Greater of Service Level D
Class 1 Components
Pm Sm [Note (2)] 1.1S m 1.2S m or S y For components other than piping,
P m , ferritic material, pressure … … 1.1S m or 0.9S y Mandatory Appendix XXVII may be
loadings alone used

PL 1.5S m 1.65S m 1.8S m or 1.5S y

(P m or P L ) + P b [Note (3)] 1.5S m 1.65S m 1.8S m or 1.5S y
Piping [Note (4)] [Note (4)] [Note (4)] [Note (4)]
Class 2 and 3 Components
Pm Sm Sm 1.1S m 1.2S m 2S m [Note (5)]
PL 1.5S m 1.5S m 1.65S m 1.8S m 3S m [Note (5)]
(P m or P L ) + P b [Note (3)] 1.5S m 1.5S m 1.65S m 1.8S m 3S m [Note (5)]
Class SC Components
Pm Sm Sm … 1.2S m [Note (6)]
PL 1.5S m 1.5S m … 1.8S m
(P m or P L ) + P b [Note (3)] 1.5S m 1.5S m … 1.8S m

NOTES:
(1) The values of S m and S y are given by XIII-2200.
(2) There are no specific primary stress limits for Level A Service Conditions.
(3) For other than solid rectangular sections, see XIII-3130(b).
(4) Paragraph XIII-3140 provides additional requirements for piping.
(5) As an alternative, the stress limits of Mandatory Appendix XXVII may be applied.
(6) Mandatory Appendix XXVII shall be applied. As an alternative, the requirements of WC-3700 may be used to evaluate inelastic component
responses to energy-limited dynamic events.

XIII-3142 Level B Service Limits r e v er s i n g d y na m i c l o a d s a r e n o t c o n s i d e r e d in

XIII-3142(b), then they shall satisfy the requirements of
(a) For Service Loadings for which Level B Service Lim-
(b)(5) and (b)(6) below.
its are designated that do not include reversing dynamic
(b) As an alternative to (a) above, for piping fabricated
loads [see XIII-1300(aa)] or that have reversing dynamic
from material designated P-No. 1 through P-No. 9 in Sec-
loads combined with nonreversing dynamic loads [see
tion II, Part D, Subpart 1, Table 2A and limited to D o /t ≤
XIII-1300(q)], the stress intensity limits for Class 1 com-
40 for Level C Service Limits, that include reversing dy-
ponents in Table XIII-3110-1 shall be satisfied.
namic loads that are not required to be combined with
(b) For Service Loadings for which Level B Service Lim- nonreversing dynamic loads, the requirements of (1)
its are designated that include reversing dynamic loads through (6) below shall apply.
that are not required to be combined with nonreversing (1) The pressure coincident with the reversing dy-
dynamic loads, the nonreversing dynamic loads shall namic load shall not exceed the Design Pressure.
meet the requirements of (a) above. The reversing dy- (2) The requirements of XIII-3110, XIII-3120,
namic loads shall meet the requirements of XIII-3420 XIII-3130, XIII-3300, and XIII-3740 shall be satisfied for
and XIII-3520 as a unique load set. The reversing dynamic all nonreversing dynamic load combinations provided in
loads are not required to meet (a) above. the Design Specifications.
(3) The stress intensity for primary membrane plus
bending stresses, (P m or P L ) + P b , due to weight loads
XIII-3143 Level C Service Limits
shall not exceed 0.5S m .
(a) For Service Loadings for which Level C Service Lim- (4) The stress intensity for primary membrane plus
its are designated that do not include reversing dynamic bending stresses, (P m or P L ) + P b , resulting from the
loads or that have reversing dynamic loads combined combination of pressure, weight, and reversing dynamic
with nonreversing dynamic loads, the requirements of loads shall not exceed the following:
XIII-3110, XIII-3120, XIII-3130, XIII-3300, and XIII-3740 (-a) in elbows and bends: 3.1S m
shall be satisfied. If the effects of anchor motion due to (-b) in tees and branches: 3.1S m

120
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(-c) in all other components: 2.1S m distribution in unbalanced systems where only a small
(5) The stress intensity range of secondary stresses, portion of the piping undergoes plastic strain. In these
Q , resulting from anchor motion effects due to reversing cases, the weaker or higher-stressed portions will be sub-
dynamic loads shall not exceed 4.2S m . jected to strain concentration due to elastic follow-up of
(6) The use of the 4.2S m limit in (5) assumes essen- the stiffer or lower-stressed portions. Unbalance can be
tially linear behavior of the entire piping system. This as- produced by
sumption is sufficiently accurate for systems where (-a) the use of small pipe runs in series with larger
plastic straining occurs at many points or over relatively or stiffer pipe, with the small lines relatively highly
wide regions, but fails to reflect the actual strain distribu- stressed
tion in unbalanced systems where only a small portion of (-b) local reduction in size or cross section, or lo-
the piping undergoes plastic strain. In these cases, the cal use of weaker material
weaker or higher-stressed portions will be subjected to
In the case of unbalanced systems, the design shall be
strain concentration due to elastic follow-up of the stiffer
modified to eliminate the unbalance, or the range of sec-
or lower-stressed portions. Unbalance can be produced
ondary stress, Q , shall be limited to 3.0 S m .
by
(-a) the use of small pipe runs in series with larger (b) For piping systems not meeting the requirements of
or stiffer pipe, with the small lines relatively highly (a) above, or as an alternative to (a) above, the rules con-
stressed tained in Mandatory Appendix XXVII may be used in eval-
uating these Service Loadings on piping systems
(-b) local reduction in size or cross section, or lo-
independently of all other Design and Service Loadings.
cal use of weaker material
If the effects of anchor motion due to reversing dynamic
In the case of unbalanced systems, the design shall be loads are not considered in XIII-3142(b), they shall satisfy
modified to eliminate the unbalance, or the stress inten- the requirements of (a)(5) and (a)(6).
sity range of secondary stresses, Q , shall be limited to
2.1S m .
XIII-3200 APPLICATIONS OF PLASTIC
XIII-3144 Level D Service Limits ANALYSIS
(a) For piping fabricated from material designated
P-No. 1 through P-No. 9 in Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, The following subsubarticles provide guidance in the
Table 2A and limited to D o /t ≤ 40, if Level D Service Lim- application of plastic analysis to determine the collapse
its are designated, that include reversing dynamic loads load C L and achieve some relaxation of the basic primary
that are not required to be combined with nonreversing stress limits that is allowed if plastic analysis is used. The
dynamic loads, the requirements of (1) through (6) below limits on general primary membrane stress intensity, lo-
shall apply. cal primary membrane stress intensity, and primary
membrane plus primary bending stress intensity (see
(1) The pressure coincident with the reversing dy-
XIII-3130) need not be satisfied at a specific location if
namic load shall not exceed the Design Pressure.
it can be shown that the specified loadings do not exceed
(2) The requirements of Mandatory Appendix XXVII
k C L where C L is the collapse load determined using the
shall be satisfied for all nonreversing dynamic load com-
procedure defined in XIII-3210, XIII-3220, or XIII-3230
binations provided in the Design Specifications.
and the value of k is specified in Table XIII-3200-1. When
(3) The primary membrane plus bending stresses,
one of these rules is used, the effects of plastic strain con-
(P m or P L ) + P b , due to weight loads shall not exceed
centrations in localized areas of the structure, such as the
0.5S m .
points where hinges form, shall be considered. The effects
(4) The primary membrane plus bending stresses
of the concentrations of strain on the fatigue behavior,
(P m or P L ) + P b , resulting from the combination of pres-
ratcheting behavior, or buckling behavior of the structure
sure, weight, and reversing dynamic loads shall not ex-
shall be considered in the design. The design shall satisfy
ceed the following:
the minimum wall thickness requirements of the applic-
(-a) in elbows and bends: 4.5S m
able Subsection.
(-b) in tees and branches: 4.5S m
(-c) in all other components: 3.0S m
(5) The range of secondary stress, Q , resulting from XIII-3210 LIMIT ANALYSIS
anchor motion effects due to reversing dynamic loads The lower bound collapse load is determined using lim-
shall not exceed 6.0S m . it analysis. The yield strength to be used in these calcula-
(6) The use of the 6.0S m limit in (5) assumes essen- tions is 1.5S m . The use of 1.5S m for the yield strength of
tially linear behavior of the entire piping system. This as- those materials of Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Tables 2A
sumption is sufficiently accurate for systems where and 2B to which Note G7 in Table 2A or Note G1 in Table
plastic straining occurs at many points or over relatively 2B is applicable may result in small permanent strains
wide regions, but fails to reflect the actual strain during the first few cycles of loading. If these strains are

121
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

not acceptable, the yield strength to be used shall be re- where the algebraic signs of the stress differences are re-
duced according to the strain-limiting factors of Section tained in the computation. These stress differences are
II, Part D, Subpart 1, Table Y-2. the highest value of stress, neglecting local structural dis-
continuities, produced at any point across the thickness of
XIII-3220 EXPERIMENTAL ANALYSIS a section by the loadings that result from restraint of free
The collapse load is determined by application of end displacement. The expansion stress intensity range is
II-1430. the absolute value of maximum stress difference range
over the life of the component due to the specified Level
XIII-3230 PLASTIC ANALYSIS A and Level B Service conditions. The allowable value of
Plastic analysis is a method of structural analysis by the maximum expansion stress intensity range is 3S m .
which the structural behavior under given loads is com-
puted by considering the actual material stress–strain re- XIII-3420 PRIMARY PLUS SECONDARY STRESS
lationship and stress redistribution, and it may include INTENSITY RANGE
either strain hardening or change in geometry, or both. The primary plus secondary stress intensity range is
The collapse load is determined by application of derived from (P m or P L ) + P b + P e + Q in Figure
II-1430 to a load–deflection or load–strain relationship XIII-2100-1 and is determined using the methodology de-
obtained by plastic analysis. scribed in XIII-2400, where the algebraic signs of the
stress differences are retained in the computation. The
primary plus secondary stress at a point includes the gen-
XIII-3300 EXTERNAL PRESSURE eral or local primary membrane stress, plus the primary
The provisions of the applicable Subsection apply for bending stress, plus the secondary stress. These stresses
Design Loadings, and Service Loadings for which Level are produced by the specified service pressure and other
A and Level B Limits are specified. If the Design Specifica- specified mechanical loads, and by general thermal effects
tion specifies Service Loadings for which Level C Service associated with the Service Loadings. The primary plus
Limits are designated, the allowable external pressure is secondary stress intensity range is the absolute value of
120% of that permitted by the applicable Subsection for maximum stress difference range over the life of the com-
Design Loadings. ponent due to the specified Level A and Level B Service
conditions. The allowable value of the primary plus sec-
ondary stress intensity range is 3S m . This limitation on
XIII-3400 PRIMARY PLUS SECONDARY range applies to the entire history of applicable transients
STRESS LIMITS and Service Loadings, not just to the stress range result-
(a) The stress limits that are to be satisfied for the pri- ing from an individual transient. When the secondary
mary plus secondary stresses due to Service Loadings for stress is due to a temperature transient or to restraint
which Level A or Level B limits are designated in the De- of free end displacement, the value of S m shall be taken
sign Specification are given in XIII-3410 through as the average of the tabulated S m values for the highest
XIII-3430. and lowest temperatures of the metal (at the point at
(b) The provisions of XIII-3440 and XIII-3450 provide which the stresses are being analyzed) during the transi-
alternatives to the limits defined in (a). ent. When part or all of the secondary stress is due to a
mechanical load, the value of S m shall be based on the
XIII-3410 EXPANSION STRESS INTENSITY highest metal temperature during the transient.
RANGE
The expansion stress intensity range is applicable to
XIII-3430 THERMAL STRESS RATCHET
piping only and is derived from P e in Figure Under certain combinations of steady-state and cyclic
XIII-2100-1. The expansion stress intensity range is de- loadings there is a possibility of large distortions develop-
termined using the methodology described in XIII-2400, ing as the result of ratchet action; that is, the deformation

Table XIII-3200-1
Collapse Load Factors
Collapse Load Factor
Analysis Type Design Service Level A Service Level B Service Level C
Limit analysis k = 2/3 k = 2/3 k = 2/3 k = 0.8
Experimental analysis k = 2/3 k = 2/3 k = 2/3 k = 0.8
Plastic analysis k = 2/3 k = 2/3 k = 2/3 k = 0.8

122
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

increases by a nearly equal amount for each cycle. Exam- multiplied by one-half the modulus of elasticity of the ma-
ples of this phenomenon are treated in this subsubarticle terial (Section II, Part D, Subpart 2, Tables TM) at the
and in XIII-3730. mean value of the temperature of the cycle.
(a) The limiting value of the maximum cyclic thermal (c) In evaluating stresses for comparison with the re-
stress permitted in a portion of an axisymmetric shell maining stress limits, the stresses shall be calculated on
loaded by steady-state internal pressure in order to pre- an elastic basis.
vent cyclic growth in diameter is as follows. Let
XIII-3450 SIMPLIFIED ELASTIC–PLASTIC
x = maximum general membrane stress due to pressure ANALYSIS
divided by the yield strength S y or 1.5S m , whichever
The 3S m limit on the range of primary plus secondary
is greater
stress intensity (see XIII-3420) may be exceeded pro-
y ′ = maximum allowable range of thermal stress com-
vided that the requirements of (a) through (f) below are
puted on an elastic basis divided by the yield
met.
strength S y or 1.5S m , whichever is greater
(a) The range of primary plus secondary membrane
(1) Case 1. Linear variation of temperature through plus bending stress intensity, excluding thermal bending
the wall: for 0 < x < 0.5, y ′ = 1/x ; and for 0.5 < x < 1.0, stresses, shall be ≤ 3S m .
y ′ = 4 (1 − x ). (b) The value of S a used for entering the design fatigue
(2) Case 2. Parabolic constantly increasing or con- curve is multiplied by the factor K e , where
stantly decreasing variation of temperature through the
wall: for 0.615 < x < 1.0, y ′ = 5.2(1 − x ); and, approxi-
mately, for x < 0.615, y ′ = 4.65, 3.55, and 2.70 for x =
0.3, 0.4, and 0.5, respectively.
(b) Use of yield strength, S y , in the above relations in-
stead of the proportional limit allows a small amount of
growth during each cycle until strain hardening raises
the proportional limit to S y . If the yield strength of the
material is higher than 2 times the S a value for the max-
where
imum number of cycles on the applicable fatigue curve of
Mandatory Appendix I for the material, the latter value S n = range of primary plus secondary stress intensity
shall be used if there is to be a large number of cycles be-
The values of the material parameters m and n for the
cause strain softening may occur.
various classes of permitted materials are as given in
Table XIII-3450-1.
XIII-3440 SHAKEDOWN ANALYSIS (c) The rest of the fatigue evaluation stays the same as
The limits on local membrane stress intensity (see required in XIII-3500, except that the procedure of
XIII-3120), primary plus secondary stress intensity range XIII-2500 need not be used.
(see XIII-3420), thermal stress ratchet (see XIII-3430) (d) The component meets the thermal ratcheting re-
and progressive distortion of nonintegral connections quirement of XIII-3430.
(see XIII-3730) need not be satisfied at a specific location, (e) The temperature does not exceed those listed in
if, at the location, the procedures of (a) through (c) below Table XIII-3450-1 for the various classes of materials.
are used. (f) The material shall have a specified minimum yield
strength to specified minimum tensile strength ratio of
(a) In lieu of satisfying the specific requirements of
less than 0.80
XIII-3120, XIII-3420, XIII-3430, and XIII-3730 at a specific
location, the structural action shall be calculated on a
plastic basis, and the design shall be considered to be ac-
ceptable if shakedown occurs (as opposed to continuing Table XIII-3450-1
deformation). However, this shakedown requirement Values of m, n , and T m a x for Various Classes
need not be satisfied for materials having a minimum spe- of Permitted Materials
cified yield strength to specified minimum ultimate Materials m n T m a x , °F (°C)
strength ratio of less than 0.70 provided the maximum ac- Carbon steel 3.0 0.2 700 (370)
cumulated local strain at any point, as a result of cyclic op- Low alloy steel 2.0 0.2 700 (370)
eration to which plastic analysis is applied, does not Martensitic stainless steel 2.0 0.2 700 (370)
exceed 5.0%. In all cases, the deformations that occur Austenitic stainless steel 1.7 0.3 800 (425)
shall not exceed specified limits. Nickel–chromium–iron 1.7 0.3 800 (425)
Nickel–copper 1.7 0.3 800 (425)
(b) In evaluating stresses for comparison with fatigue
allowables, the numerically maximum principal total GENERAL NOTE: T m a x is the maximum metal temperature.
strain range calculated on a plastic basis shall be

123
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

XIII-3500 ANALYSIS FOR FATIGUE DUE TO evaluate the effect of alternating stresses of varying am-
CYCLIC OPERATION plitudes, a linear damage relation is assumed in
XIII-3520(e). The tests on which the design curves are
(a) Suitability for Cyclic Condition. The suitability of a based did not include tests at temperatures in the creep
component for specified Service Loadings for which Level range or in the presence of unusually corrosive environ-
A or Level B Service Limits are designated and involving ments, either of which might accelerate fatigue failure.
cyclic application of loads and thermal conditions shall Therefore, these curves are not applicable at service tem-
be determined by the methods described herein, except peratures for which creep is a significant factor. In addi-
that the suitability of high-strength bolts shall be deter- tion, the designer shall evaluate separately any effects
mined by the methods of XIII-4230(b) and the possibility on fatigue life that might result from an unusually corro-
of thermal stress ratchet shall be investigated in accor- sive environment.
dance with XIII-3430. If the specified Service Loadings
of t he c omponent meet all o f the conditions of XIII-3510 COMPONENTS NOT REQUIRING
XIII-3510, a fatigue analysis is not required, and it may FATIGUE ANALYSIS
be assumed that the limits on total stress intensities as
governed by fatigue have been satisfied by compliance An analysis for cyclic service is not required, and it may
with the applicable requirements for material, design, be assumed that the limits on total stress intensities as
fabrication, examination, and testing of the applicable governed by fatigue have been satisfied for a component
Subsection. If the Service Loadings do not meet all the by compliance with the applicable requirements for mate-
conditions of XIII-3510, a fatigue analysis shall be made rial, design, fabrication, examination, and testing of the
in accordance with XIII-3520 or a fatigue test shall be applicable Subsection, provided the loadings of the com-
made in accordance with II-1500. ponent, or portion thereof, for which Level A or Level B
(b) Total Stress Intensity. This stress intensity, (P m or Service Limits are specified meet all the conditions stipu-
P L ) + P b + P e + Q + F in Figure XIII-2100-1, is derived lated in (a) through (f) below.
from the highest value, including the effects of gross (a) Atmospheric to Service Pressure Cycle. The specified
and local structural discontinuities, at any point across number of times (including start-up and shutdown) that
the thickness of a section of the combination of all pri- the pressure will be cycled from atmospheric pressure
mary, secondary, and peak stresses produced by specified to service pressure and back to atmospheric pressure
service pressures and other mechanical loads, and by gen- does not exceed the number of cycles on the applicable fa-
eral and local thermal effects associated with the Service tigue curve of Mandatory Appendix I, corresponding to an
Loadings for which Level A or Level B Service Limits are S a value of 3 times the S m value for the material at service
designated. temperature.
(c) Conditions and Procedures. The conditions and pro- (b) Service Pressure Fluctuation. The specified full range
cedures of this subarticle are based on a comparison of to- of pressure fluctuations during operation (excluding
tal stresses with strain cycling fatigue data. The strain startup and shutdown) does not exceed the quantity 1/3
cycling fatigue data are represented by design fatigue × Design Pressure × (S a /S m ), where S a is the value ob-
strength curves in Mandatory Appendix I. These curves tained from the applicable design fatigue curve for the to-
show the allowable amplitude S a of the alternating stress tal specified number of significant pressure fluctuations
intensity component (one-half of the alternating stress in- and S m is the allowable stress intensity for the material
tensity range) plotted against the number of cycles. This at service temperature. If the total specified number of
stress intensity amplitude is calculated on the assumption significant pressure fluctuations exceeds the maximum
of elastic behavior and, hence, has the dimensions of number of cycles defined on the applicable design fatigue
stress, but it does not represent a real stress when the curve, the S a value corresponding to the maximum num-
elastic range is exceeded. The fatigue curves are obtained ber of cycles defined on the curve may be used. Significant
from uniaxial strain- cycling data in which the imposed pressure fluctuations are those for which the total excur-
strains have been multiplied by the elastic modulus and sion exceeds the quantity
a design margin has been provided so as to make the cal-
culated stress intensity amplitude and the allowable
stress intensity amplitude directly comparable. Where
necessary, the curves have been adjusted to include the where S is defined as follows:
maximum effects of mean stress, which is the condition (1) If the total specified number of service cycles is
where the stress fluctuates about a mean value that is dif- 106 cycles or less, S is the value of S a obtained from the
ferent from zero. As a consequence of this procedure, it is applicable design fatigue curve for 106 cycles.
essential that the requirements of XIII-3420 be satisfied (2) If the total specified number of service cycles ex-
at all times with transient stresses included, and that ceeds 106 cycles, S is the value of S a obtained from the ap-
the calculated value of the alternating stress intensity plicable design fatigue curve for the maximum number of
be proportional to the actual strain amplitude. To cycles defined on the curve.

124
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(c) Temperature Difference. The temperature differ- (f) Mechanical Loads. The specified full range of me-
ence, in degrees Fahrenheit (Celsius), between any two chanical loads, excluding pressure but including pipe re-
adjacent points (see NOTE) of the component does not ex- actions and support or attachment reactions, does not
ceed S a /2E α, where S a is the value obtained from the ap- result in load-controlled stresses whose range exceeds
plicable design fatigue curves for the specified number of the S a value obtained from the applicable design fatigue
start-up–shutdown cycles, α is the value of the instanta- curve of Mandatory Appendix I for the total specified
neous coefficient of thermal expansion and E is the mod- number of significant load fluctuations. If the total speci-
ulus of elasticity at the mean value of the temperatures at fied number of significant load fluctuations exceeds the
the two points as given by Section II, Part D, Subpart 2, maximum number of cycles defined on the applicable de-
Tables TE and TM. sign fatigue curve, the S a value corresponding to the max-
(d) Temperature Difference Fluctuation. The algebraic imum number of cycles defined on the curve may be used.
range of the temperature difference, in degrees Fahren- A load fluctuation shall be considered to be significant if
heit (Celsius), between any two adjacent points (see the total excursion of load stress exceeds the quantity S ,
NOTE) during operation (excluding startup and shut- where S is defined as follows:
down) does not exceed the quantity S a /2E α , where S a (1) If the total specified number of service cycles is
is the value obtained from the applicable design fatigue 106 cycles or less, S is the value of S a obtained from the
curve of Mandatory Appendix I for the total specified applicable design fatigue curve for 106 cycles.
number of significant temperature difference fluctua- (2) If the total specified number of service cycles ex-
tions, and α and E are as defined in (c). A temperature dif- ceeds 106cycles, S is the value of S a obtained from the ap-
ference fluctuation shall be considered to be significant if plicable design fatigue curve for the maximum number of
its total algebraic range exceeds the quantity S /2E α , cycles defined on the curve.
where S is defined as follows:
NOTE: Adjacent points are defined in (a), (b), and (c) below.
(1) If the total specified number of service cycles is
(a) For surface temperature differences on surfaces of revolution
106 cycles or less, S is the value of S a obtained from the in the meridional (longitudinal) direction, adjacent points are de-
applicable design fatigue curve for 106 cycles. fined as points that are less than the distance , where R is
(2) If the total specified number of service cycles ex- the radius measured normal to the surface from the axis of rotation
ceeds 106 cycles, S is the value of S a obtained from the ap- to the midwall and t is the thickness of the part at the point under
plicable design fatigue curve for the maximum number of consideration. If the product R t varies, the average value of the
cycles defined on the curve. points shall be used.
(b) For surface temperature differences on surfaces of revolution
(e) Temperature Difference — Dissimilar Materials. For in the circumferential direction and on flat parts, such as flanges
components fabricated from materials of differing moduli and flat heads, adjacent points are defined as any two points on
of elasticity or coefficients of thermal expansion, the total the same surface.
algebraic range of temperature fluctuation, in degrees (c) For through-thickness temperature differences, adjacent
Fahrenheit (Celsius), experienced by the component dur- points are defined as any two points on a line normal to any surface.
ing operation (excluding startup and shutdown) does not
exceed the magnitude S a /2(E 1 α 1 − E 2 α 2 ), where S a is
the value obtained from the applicable design fatigue XIII-3520 PROCEDURE FOR FATIGUE ANALYSIS
curve for the total specified number of significant tem-
If the specified Service Loadings for the component do
perature fluctuations, E 1 and E 2 are the moduli of elasti-
not meet the conditions of XIII-3510, the ability of the
city, and α 1 and α 2 are the values of the instantaneous
component to withstand the specified cyclic service with-
coefficients of thermal expansion at the mean tempera-
out fatigue failure shall be determined as provided in this
ture value involved for the two materials of construction
subsubarticle. The determination shall be made on the ba-
given in Section II, Part D, Subpart 2, Tables TE and TM. A
sis of the stresses at a point, and the allowable stress cy-
temperature fluctuation shall be considered to be signifi-
cles shall be adequate for the specified Service Loadings
cant if its total excursion exceeds the quantity S /2(E 1 α 1
at every point. Only the stress differences due to service
− E 2 α 2 ), where S is defined as follows:
cycles as specified in the Design Specifications need be
(1) If the total specified number of service cycles is considered. Stresses produced by any load or thermal
106 cycles or less, S is the value of S a obtained from the condition which does not vary during the cycle need not
applicable design fatigue curve for 106 cycles. be considered, since they are mean stresses and the max-
(2) If the total specified number of service cycles ex- imum possible effect of mean stress is included in the fa-
ceeds 106 cycles, S is the value of S a obtained from the ap- tigue design curves. Compliance with these requirements
plicable design fatigue curve for the maximum number of means only that the component is suitable from the
cycles defined on the curve. If the two materials used have standpoint of possible fatigue failure; complete suitability
different applicable design fatigue curves, the lower value for the specified Service Loadings is also dependent on
of S a shall be used in applying the rules of this meeting the general stress limits of XIII-3400 and any ap-
subparagraph. plicable special stress limits of XIII-3700.

125
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(a) Stress Differences. For each condition of cyclic ser- For type 1 cycle:
vice, determine the stress differences and the alternating
stress intensity, S a l t , in accordance with XIII-2400.
(b) Local Structural Discontinuities [See XIII-1300(o)].
These effects shall be evaluated for all conditions using
stress concentration factors determined from theoretical,
experimental, or photoelastic studies, or numerical stress
For type 2 cycle:
analysis techniques. [See definition of peak stress in
XIII-1300(s)]. Experimentally determined fatigue
strength reduction factors may be used when determined
in accordance with the procedures of II-1600, except for
high strength alloy steel bolting for which the require-
ments of XIII-4230(c) shall apply when using the design Step 2. For each type of stress cycle, determine the al-
fatigue curve of Figure I-9.4. Except for the case of crack- ternating stress intensity S a l t by the procedures of
like defects and specified piping geometries for which XIII-2410 or XIII-2420. Call these quantities S a l t 1 ,
specific values are given in the applicable Subsection, no S a l t 2 , S a l t 3 , …, S a l t n .
fatigue strength reduction factor greater than 5 need be Step 3. For each value S a l t 1 , S a l t 2 , S a l t 3 , …, S a l t n , use
used. the applicable design fatigue curve to determine the max-
(c) Design Fatigue Curves. Mandatory Appendix I con- imum number of repetitions that would be allowable if
tains the applicable fatigue design curves for materials this type of cycle were the only one acting. Call these val-
permitted by Section III. When more than one curve is ues N 1 , N 2 , N 3 , …, N n .
presented for a given material, the applicability of each Step 4. For each type of stress cycle, calculate the usage
is identified. Where curves for various strength levels of factors U 1 , U 2 , U 3 , …, U n , from U 1 = n 1 /N 1 , U 2 = n 2 /N 2 ,
a material are given, linear interpolation may be used U 3 = n 3 /N 3 , …, U n = n n /N n .
for intermediate strength levels of these materials. The Step 5. Calculate the cumulative usage factor U from
strength level is the specified minimum room tempera- U = U1 + U2 + U3 + … + Un.
ture value. Step 6. The cumulative usage factor U shall not exceed
(d) Effect of Elastic Modulus. Multiply S a l t (as deter- 1.0.
mined in XIII-2410 or XIII-2420) by the ratio of the mod-
ulus of elasticity given on the design fatigue curve to the
value of the modulus of elasticity used in the analysis. En- XIII-3600 TESTING LIMITS
ter the applicable design fatigue curve of Mandatory The evaluation of pressure test loadings shall be in ac-
Appendix I at this value on the ordinate axis and find cordance with (a) through (e) below, except that these
the corresponding number of cycles on the abscissa. If rules do not apply to valves.
the service cycle being considered is the only one that (a) If the calculated pressure at any point in a compo-
produces significant fluctuating stresses, this is the allow- nent, including static head, exceeds the required test
able number of cycles. pressure defined in the applicable Subsection by more
(e) Cumulative Damage. If there are two or more types than 6%, the resulting stresses shall be calculated using
of stress cycle that produce significant stresses, their cu- all the loadings that may exist during the test. The stress
mulative effect shall be evaluated as stipulated in Steps 1 allowables for this situation are given in (b) and (c)
through 6 below. below.
Step 1. Designate the specified number of times each (b) For hydrostatically tested components, the general
type of stress cycle of types 1, 2, 3, …, n , will be repeated primary membrane stress intensity, P m , shall not exceed
during the life of the component as n 1 , n 2 , n 3 , …, n n , re- 90% of the tabulated yield strength, S y , at test tempera-
spectively. In determining n 1 , n 2 , n 3 , …, n n , consideration ture. For pneumatically tested components, P m shall not
shall be given to the superposition of cycles of various ori- exceed 80% of the tabulated yield strength, S y , at test
temperature.
gins that produce a total stress difference range greater
than the stress difference ranges of the individual cycles. (c) For either hydrostatically or pneumatically tested
For example, if one type of stress cycle produces 1,000 cy- components, the primary membrane plus bending stress
cles of a stress difference variation from zero to +60,000 intensity, P m + P b , shall not exceed the applicable limits
psi and another type of stress cycle produces 10,000 cy- given in (1) or (2) below.
cles of a stress difference variation from zero to (1) For P m ≤ 0.67S y
−50,000 psi, the two types of cycle to be considered are
defined by the following parameters.

126
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(2) For 0.67S y < P m ≤ 0.90S y (b) When bearing loads are applied near free edges,
such as at a protruding ledge, the possibility of a shear
failure shall be considered. In the case of load controlled
stress only [see XIII-1300(m)] the average shear stress
S y is the tabulated yield strength at test temperature. For shall be limited to 0.6S m . In the case of load controlled
other than rectangular sections, P m + P b shall not exceed stress plus secondary stress [see XIII-1300(ab)] the aver-
a value of α × 0.9S y for hydrostatic tests or α × 0.8S y for age shear stress shall not exceed (1) or (2) below.
pneumatic tests, where the factor α is defined as the ratio (1) for materials to which Section II, Part D, Subpart
of the load set producing a fully plastic section divided by 1, Table 2A, Note G7, or Table 2B, Note G1 applies, the
the load set producing initial yielding in the extreme fi- l o w er o f 0 .5 S y a t 1 0 0 ° F ( 3 8 ° C ) a n d 0 . 6 7 5 S y a t
bers of the section. temperature
(d) The external pressure shall not exceed 135% of the (2) for all other materials, 0.5S y at temperature
value determined by the rules of the applicable subsec-
tion. Alternatively, an external hydrostatic test pressure For clad surfaces, if the configuration or thickness is such
may be applied up to a maximum of 80% of the lower that a shear failure could occur entirely within the clad
of the collapse or elastic instability pressures determined material, the allowable shear stress for the cladding shall
by analysis or experimental procedures (see XIII-3200 be determined from the properties of the equivalent
and Mandatory Appendix II) including consideration of al- wrought material. If the configuration is such that a shear
lowable tolerances. If a collapse analysis is performed, it failure could occur across a path that is partially base me-
shall be a lower bound limit analysis assuming ideally tal and partially clad material, the allowable shear stres-
elastic–plastic (non-strain hardening) material having a ses for each material shall be used when evaluating the
yield strength equal to its tabulated yield strength at test combined resistance to this type of failure.
temperature. (c) When considering bearing stresses in pins and sim-
(e) Tests, with the exception of the first 10 hydrostatic ilar members, the S y at temperature value is applicable,
tests in accordance with the applicable Subsection, the except that a value of 1.5S y may be used if no credit is giv-
first 10 pneumatic tests in accordance with the applicable en to bearing area within one pin diameter from a plate
Subsection, or any combination of 10 such tests, shall be edge.
considered in the fatigue evaluation of the component. In
this cyclic evaluation, the limits on the primary plus sec- XIII-3720 PURE SHEAR
ondary stress intensity range (see XIII-3420) may be ta- (a) The average primary shear stress across a section
ken as the larger of 3S m or 2S y when at least one loaded in pure shear, experienced as a result of Design
extreme of the stress intensity range is determined by Loadings, Test Loadings, or any Service Loadings, except
the Test Loadings. those for which Level D Limits are designated (for exam-
ple, keys, shear rings, screw threads), shall be limited to
0.6S m .
XIII-3700 SPECIAL STRESS LIMITS (b) The maximum primary shear that is experienced as
The following deviations from the basic stress limits a result of Design Loadings, Test Loadings, or any Service
are provided to cover special Service Loadings or config- Loadings (except those for which Level D Limits are de-
urations. Some of these deviations are more restrictive, signated), exclusive of stress concentration, at the periph-
and some are less restrictive, than the basic stress limits. ery of a solid circular section in torsion shall be limited to
In cases of conflict between these requirements and the 0.8S m . Primary plus secondary and peak shear stresses
basic stress limits, the rules of XIII-3700 take precedence shall be converted to stress intensities (equal to 2 times
for the particular situations to which they apply. the pure shear stress) and as such shall not exceed the ba-
sic stress limits of XIII-3420 and XIII-3500.
XIII-3710 BEARING LOADS
(a) The average bearing stress for resistance to crush- XIII-3730 PROGRESSIVE DISTORTION OF
ing under the maximum load, experienced as a result of NONINTEGRAL CONNECTIONS
Design Loadings, Test Loadings, or any Service Loadings, Screwed-on caps, screwed in plugs, shear ring closures,
except those for which Level D Limits are designated, and breech lock closures are examples of nonintegral con-
shall be limited to S y at temperature, except that when nections that are subject to failure by bell mouthing or
the distance to a free edge is larger than the distance over other types of progressive deformation. If any combina-
which the bearing load is applied, a stress of 1.5S y at tem- tion of applied loads produces yielding, such joints are
perature is permitted. For clad surfaces, the yield strength subject to ratcheting because the mating members may
of the base metal may be used if, when calculating the become loose at the end of each complete operating cycle
bearing stress, the bearing area is taken as the lesser of and start the next cycle in a new relationship with each
the actual contact area or the area of the base metal sup- other, with or without manual manipulation. Additional
porting the contact surface. distortion may occur in each cycle so that interlocking

127
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

parts, such as threads, can eventually lose engagement. XIII-3770 REQUIREMENTS FOR LOCAL THIN
Therefore, primary plus secondary stress intensities AREAS
(see XIII-3420), that result in slippage between the parts (a) A local thin area is a region on the surface of a com-
of a nonintegral connection in which disengagement ponent that has a thickness that is less than the minimum
could occur as a result of progressive distortion shall be required wall thickness required by the applicable
limited to the value S y (see Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Subsection.
Table Y-1). (b) For components under internal pressure, small or
local areas thinner than required may be acceptable, pro-
XIII-3740 TRIAXIAL STRESSES vided that the requirements of XIII-3120 are satisfied. An
area may be considered small or local if the thin area does
(a) For Design Loadings and any Service Loadings for
not extend in the meridional (longitudinal) direction
which Level A or Level B Service Limits are designated,
the algebraic sum of the three primary principal stresses, more than , where R is the minimum midsurface
(σ 1 + σ 2 + σ 3 ), shall not exceed 4S m . radius of curvature and t is the minimum thickness in the
(b) For Service Loadings for which Level C Service Lim- region considered, as illustrated in Figure XIII-3770-1.
its are designated, the algebraic sum of the three primary Regions of local thin area shall not be closer in the meri-
principal stresses, (σ 1 + σ 2 + σ 3 ), shall not exceed 4.8S m . dional direction than . No local thin area shall be
closer than to the edge of another locally stressed
XIII-3750 VESSEL NOZZLE TO PIPING area in a shell described in XIII-1300(n).
TRANSITION (c) The transition between the local thin area and the
thicker surface shall be gradual, as indicated in Figure
(a) Beyond the limit of reinforcement in the wall of a XIII-3770-1. Sharp reentrant angles and abrupt changes
vessel nozzle, the 3S m limit on the range of primary plus in slope in the transition region shall be avoided.
secondary stress intensity may be exceeded as provided
in XIII-3450, except that in the evaluation of
XIII-3450(a), stresses from restrained free end displace-
ments of the attached pipe may also be excluded.
(b) Beyond the limit of reinforcement in the wall of a
vessel nozzle, the range of membrane plus bending stress
intensity attributable solely to the restrained free end dis-
placements of the attached pipe shall be ≤ 3S m .
(c) A vessel nozzle, outside the reinforcement limit,
Figure XIII-3770-1
shall not be thinner than the larger of the pipe thickness
Local Thin Area in a Cylindrical Shell
or the quantity t p (S m p /S m n ), where t p is the nominal
thickness of the mating pipe, S m p is the allowable stress
intensity value for the pipe material, and S m n is the allow-
able stress intensity value for the nozzle material.
tmin

XIII-3760 REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIALLY

DESIGNED WELDED SEALS
Gradual
(a) Welded seals, such as omega and canopy seals, shall slope
be designed to meet the pressure-induced general pri- t [Note (1)]
mary membrane stress intensity limits specified in this Rt
Appendix. Note that the general primary membrane
Reduced wall
stress intensity varies around the toroidal cross section. may be on
(b) All other membrane and bending stress intensities O.D. or I.D.
developed in the welded seals may be considered as sec-
ondary stress intensities. The range of these stress inten-
sities combined with the general primary membrane
stress intensity may exceed the primary plus secondary R
stress intensity limit of 3S m , if they are analyzed in accor-
dance with XIII-3450 as modified in (1) and (2) below.
(1) In lieu of XIII-3450(a), the range of the combined
primary plus secondary membrane stress intensities shall NOTE:
be ≤3S m . (1) Abrupt transitions shall be avoided; a minimum taper of 3:1 is
(2) XIII-3450(d) need not apply. recommended.

128
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

XIII-3780 FILLET WELDS differences between the component and the attachment,
and expansion or contraction of the component produced
Fillet welds shall be used within the requirements of
the applicable Subsection. When fillet welds are used by internal or external pressure.
for attachment to a Class 2 vessel or a Class SC contain-
ment, and a fatigue analysis is required, the requirements XIII-3800 DEFORMATION LIMITS
of (a) and (b) shall apply.
(a) Stress limits for the weld shall be one-half of the Any deformation limits prescribed by the Design Speci-
stress limits of XIII-3100 and XIII-3420. fications shall be satisfied.
(b) The fatigue analysis shall be in accordance with
XIII-3520 using a fatigue strength reduction factor of 4.
The evaluation shall include consideration of temperature

129
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE XIII-4000
STRESS LIMITS FOR BOLTS

XIII-4100 DESIGN CONDITIONS limited to this value when the bolts are tightened by
methods other than heaters, stretchers, or other means
(a) For Class 1 components, the number and cross sec- that minimize residual torsion.
tional area of bolts required to resist the Design Pressure
shall be determined in accordance with the procedures of
Nonmandatory Appendix E, using the larger of the bolt XIII-4230 FATIGUE ANALYSIS OF BOLTS
loads given by the equations of Nonmandatory Appendix
E, as a Design Mechanical Load. The allowable bolt design Unless the components on which they are installed
stresses shall be the values given in Section II, Part D, Sub- meet all the conditions of XIII-3510 and thus require no
part 1, Table 4 for bolting material. fatigue analysis, the suitability of bolts for cyclic service
(b) For Class 2 and 3 components, and Class SC storage shall be determined in accordance with the procedures
containments, the number and cross-sectional area of of (a) through (e) below.
bolts required to resist internal pressure shall be deter- (a) Bolting Having Less Than 100.0 ksi (689 MPa) Ten-
mined in accordance with the procedures of Mandatory sile Strength. Bolts made of material that has specified
Appendix XI. The allowable bolt design stresses, as used minimum tensile strength of less than 100.0 ksi (689
in the equations of Mandatory Appendix XI, shall be the MPa) shall be evaluated for cyclic service by the methods
values given in Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Table 4 for of XIII-3520, using the applicable design fatigue curve of
bolting material. Mandatory Appendix I and an appropriate fatigue
(c) When sealing is effected by a seal weld instead of a strength reduction factor [see (c)].
gasket, the gasket factor, m , and the minimum design (b) High-Strength Alloy Steel Bolting. High strength al-
seating stress, y , may be taken as zero. loy steel bolts and studs may be evaluated for cyclic ser-
(d) When gaskets are used for preservice testing only, vice by the methods of XIII-3520 using the design fatigue
the design is satisfactory if the above requirements are curve of Figure I-9.4, provided the following require-
satisfied for m = y = 0, and the requirements of ments are met:
XIII-4200 are satisfied when the appropriate m and y fac- (1) The maximum value of the service stress (see
tors are used for the test gasket. XIII-4220) at the periphery of the bolt cross section, re-
sulting from direct tension plus bending and neglecting
stress concentration, shall not exceed 0.9S y if the higher
XIII-4200 LEVEL A AND LEVEL B SERVICE of the two fatigue design curves given in Figure I-9.4 is
LIMITS used. The 2/3S y limit for direct tension is unchanged.
Actual service stresses in bolts, such as those produced (2) Threads shall be of a Vee-type having a minimum
by the combination of preload, pressure, and differential thread root radius no smaller than 0.003 in. (0.08 mm).
thermal expansion, may be higher than the values given (3) Fillet radii at the end of the shank shall be such
in Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Table 4. that the ratio of fillet radius to shank diameter is not less
than 0.060.
XIII-4210 AVERAGE STRESS (c) F a t i g u e S t r e n g t h R e d u c t i o n F a c t o r [ S e e
The maximum value of service stress, averaged across XIII-1300(g)]. Unless it can be shown by analysis or tests
the bolt cross section and neglecting stress concentra- that a lower value is appropriate, the fatigue strength re-
tions, shall not exceed two-thirds of the yield strength val- duction factor used in the fatigue evaluation of threaded
ues, S y , of Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Table Y-1. members shall not be less than 4.0. However, when apply-
ing the rules of (b) for high-strength alloy steel bolts, the
XIII-4220 MAXIMUM STRESS value used shall not be less than 4.0.
The maximum value of service stress, except as re- (d) Effect of Elastic Modulus. Multiply S a l t (as deter-
stricted by XIII-4230(b), at the periphery of the bolt cross mined in XIII-2410 or XIII-2420) by the ratio of the mod-
section resulting from direct tension plus bending and ne- ulus of elasticity given on the design fatigue curve to the
glecting stress concentrations shall not exceed the yield value of the modulus of elasticity used in the analysis. En-
strength values, S y , of Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Table ter the applicable design fatigue curve at this value on the
Y-1. Stress intensity, rather than maximum stress, shall be ordinate axis and find the corresponding number of

130
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

cycles on the abscissa. If the service cycle being consid- XIII-4400 LEVEL D SERVICE LIMITS
ered is the only one that produces significant fluctuating
stresses, this is the allowable number of cycles. If the Design Specifications specify any Service Load-
(e) Cumulative Damage. The bolts shall be acceptable ings for which Level D Limits are designated, the rules
for the specified cyclic application of loads and thermal contained in Mandatory Appendix XXVII shall be used in
stresses, provided the cumulative usage factor, U , as de- evaluating these loadings independently of all other De-
termined in XIII-3520(e), does not exceed 1.0. sign and Service Loadings.

XIII-4300 LEVEL C SERVICE LIMITS

The stress limits of XIII-4210 and XIII-4220 apply.

131
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ð17Þ MANDATORY APPENDIX XIV

DELETED

132
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

MANDATORY APPENDIX XVIII

ARTICLE XVIII-1000
CAPACITY CONVERSIONS FOR PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES

XVIII-1100 PROCEDURE FOR CONVERSION (b) Rated Air Capacity

ð17Þ XVIII-1110 EQUATIONS FOR CONVERSION
(COMPRESSIBLE FLUIDS)
The capacity of a relief valve in terms of a gas or vapor This value for K A is then substituted in the above equa-
other than the medium for which the valve was officially tion to determine the capacity of the safety valve in terms
rated shall be determined by application of the following of the new gas or vapor.
equations: For superheated steam:
For dry saturated steam: For superheated steam the value of W s shall be multi-
For pressures up to 1,500 psig (10.3 MPa) plied by the appropriate superheat correction factor, K s h ,
of Table XVIII-1110-1 (or Table XVIII-1110-1M for SI
ð1Þ
calculations).
For wet saturated steam:
where
For wet saturated steam with a quality (dryness frac-
C N = 51.5 (5.25) tion) of 0.90 or greater, the value of W s shall be corrected
by dividing by the quality of the steam used for testing.
For pressures over 1,500 psig (10.3 MPa) and up to
3,200 psig (22 MPa), the value of W s , calculated by the For air:
above equation, shall be multiplied by the following fac- ð2Þ
tor, F N :
where
(U.S. Customary Units)
C = 356 (27.03)
M = 28.97 mol. wt.
T = 520 (288) when W a is the rated capacity

(SI Units) For any gas or vapor (other than steam):

ð3Þ

Knowing the rated capacity of a pressure relief valve where

which is stamped on the valve, it is possible to determine
A = actual discharge area of the pressure relief valve,
the overall value of K A in either of the following equa-
in.2 (mm2)
tions in cases where the value of these individual terms
C = constant for gas or vapor which is a function of the
is not known:
ratio of specific heats, k = cp/cv (Figure
(a) Rated Steam Capacity XVIII-1110-1)
For pressures up to 1,500 psig (10.3 MPa) K = coefficient of discharge
M = molecular weight
P = (set pressure + overpressure) plus atmospheric
For pressures over 1,500 psig (10.3 MPa) to 3,200 psig pressure, psia (MPaabs)
(22 MPa) T = absolute temperature at inlet (°F plus 460) (K)
W = flow of any gas or vapor, lb/hr (kg/h)
W a = rated capacity, converted to lb/hr (kg/h) of air at
60°F (15°C) inlet temperature

133
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table XVIII-1110-1
Superheat Correction Factor, K s h
Flowing Superheat Correction Factor, K s h , Total Temperature, °F, of Superheated Steam
Pressure,
psia 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800 850 900 950 1000 1050 1100 1150 1200
50 0.987 0.957 0.930 0.905 0.882 0.861 0.841 0.823 0.805 0.789 0.774 0.759 0.745 0.732 0.719 0.708 0.696
100 0.998 0.963 0.935 0.909 0.885 0.864 0.843 0.825 0.807 0.790 0.775 0.760 0.746 0.733 0.720 0.708 0.697
150 0.984 0.970 0.940 0.913 0.888 0.866 0.846 0.826 0.808 0.792 0.776 0.761 0.747 0.733 0.721 0.709 0.697
200 0.979 0.977 0.945 0.917 0.892 0.869 0.848 0.828 0.810 0.793 0.777 0.762 0.748 0.734 0.721 0.709 0.698
250 … 0.972 0.951 0.921 0.895 0.871 0.850 0.830 0.812 0.794 0.778 0.763 0.749 0.735 0.722 0.710 0.698
300 … 0.968 0.957 0.926 0.898 0.874 0.852 0.832 0.813 0.796 0.780 0.764 0.750 0.736 0.723 0.710 0.699
350 … 0.968 0.963 0.930 0.902 0.877 0.854 0.834 0.815 0.797 0.781 0.765 0.750 0.736 0.723 0.711 0.699
400 … … 0.963 0.935 0.906 0.880 0.857 0.836 0.816 0.798 0.782 0.766 0.751 0.737 0.724 0.712 0.700
450 … … 0.961 0.940 0.909 0.883 0.859 0.838 0.818 0.800 0.783 0.767 0.752 0.738 0.725 0.712 0.700
500 … … 0.961 0.946 0.914 0.886 0.862 0.840 0.820 0.801 0.784 0.768 0.753 0.739 0.725 0.713 0.701
550 … … 0.962 0.952 0.918 0.889 0.864 0.842 0.822 0.803 0.785 0.769 0.754 0.740 0.726 0.713 0.701
600 … … 0.964 0.958 0.922 0.892 0.867 0.844 0.823 0.804 0.787 0.770 0.755 0.740 0.727 0.714 0.702
650 … … 0.968 0.958 0.927 0.896 0.869 0.846 0.825 0.806 0.788 0.771 0.756 0.741 0.728 0.715 0.702
700 … … … 0.958 0.931 0.899 0.872 0.848 0.827 0.807 0.789 0.772 0.757 0.742 0.728 0.715 0.703
750 … … … 0.958 0.936 0.903 0.875 0.850 0.828 0.809 0.790 0.774 0.758 0.743 0.729 0.716 0.703
800 … … … 0.960 0.942 0.906 0.878 0.852 0.830 0.810 0.792 0.774 0.759 0.744 0.730 0.716 0.704
850 … … … 0.962 0.947 0.910 0.880 0.855 0.832 0.812 0.793 0.776 0.760 0.744 0.730 0.717 0.704
900 … … … 0.965 0.953 0.914 0.883 0.857 0.834 0.813 0.794 0.777 0.760 0.745 0.731 0.718 0.705
950 … … … 0.969 0.958 0.918 0.886 0.860 0.836 0.815 0.796 0.778 0.761 0.746 0.732 0.718 0.705
1,000 … … … 0.974 0.959 0.923 0.890 0.862 0.838 0.816 0.797 0.779 0.762 0.747 0.732 0.719 0.706
1,050 … … … … 0.960 0.927 0.893 0.864 0.840 0.818 0.798 0.780 0.763 0.748 0.733 0.719 0.707
1,100 … … … … 0.962 0.931 0.896 0.867 0.842 0.820 0.800 0.781 0.764 0.749 0.734 0.720 0.707
1,150 … … … … 0.964 0.936 0.899 0.870 0.844 0.821 0.801 0.782 0.765 0.749 0.735 0.721 0.708
1,200 … … … … 0.966 0.941 0.903 0.872 0.846 0.823 0.802 0.784 0.766 0.750 0.735 0.721 0.708
1,250 … … … … 0.969 0.946 0.906 0.875 0.848 0.825 0.804 0.785 0.767 0.751 0.736 0.722 0.709
1,300 … … … … 0.973 0.952 0.910 0.878 0.850 0.826 0.805 0.786 0.768 0.752 0.737 0.723 0.709
1,350 … … … … 0.977 0.958 0.914 0.880 0.852 0.828 0.807 0.787 0.769 0.753 0.737 0.723 0.710
1,400 … … … … 0.982 0.963 0.918 0.883 0.854 0.830 0.808 0.788 0.770 0.754 0.738 0.724 0.710
1,450 … … … … 0.987 0.968 0.922 0.886 0.857 0.832 0.809 0.790 0.771 0.754 0.739 0.724 0.711
1,500 … … … … 0.993 0.970 0.926 0.889 0.859 0.833 0.811 0.791 0.772 0.755 0.740 0.725 0.711
1,550 … … … … … 0.972 0.930 0.892 0.861 0.835 0.812 0.792 0.773 0.756 0.740 0.726 0.712
1,600 … … … … … 0.973 0.934 0.894 0.863 0.836 0.813 0.792 0.774 0.756 0.740 0.726 0.712
1,650 … … … … … 0.973 0.936 0.895 0.863 0.836 0.812 0.791 0.772 0.755 0.739 0.724 0.710
1,700 … … … … … 0.973 0.938 0.895 0.863 0.835 0.811 0.790 0.771 0.754 0.738 0.723 0.709
1,750 … … … … … 0.974 0.940 0.896 0.862 0.835 0.810 0.789 0.770 0.752 0.736 0.721 0.707
1,800 … … … … … 0.975 0.942 0.897 0.862 0.834 0.810 0.788 0.768 0.751 0.735 0.720 0.705
1,850 … … … … … 0.976 0.944 0.897 0.862 0.833 0.809 0.787 0.767 0.749 0.733 0.718 0.704
1,900 … … … … … 0.977 0.946 0.898 0.862 0.832 0.807 0.785 0.766 0.748 0.731 0.716 0.702
1,950 … … … … … 0.979 0.949 0.898 0.861 0.832 0.806 0.784 0.764 0.746 0.729 0.714 0.700
2,000 … … … … … 0.982 0.952 0.899 0.861 0.831 0.805 0.782 0.762 0.744 0.728 0.712 0.698
2,050 … … … … … 0.985 0.954 0.899 0.860 0.830 0.804 0.781 0.761 0.742 0.726 0.710 0.696
2,100 … … … … … 0.988 0.956 0.900 0.860 0.828 0.802 0.779 0.759 0.740 0.724 0.708 0.694
2,150 … … … … … … 0.956 0.900 0.859 0.827 0.801 0.778 0.757 0.738 0.722 0.706 0.692
2,200 … … … … … … 0.955 0.901 0.859 0.826 0.799 0.776 0.755 0.736 0.720 0.704 0.690
2,250 … … … … … … 0.954 0.901 0.858 0.825 0.797 0.774 0.753 0.734 0.717 0.702 0.687
2,300 … … … … … … 0.953 0.901 0.857 0.823 0.795 0.772 0.751 0.732 0.715 0.699 0.685
2,350 … … … … … … 0.952 0.902 0.856 0.822 0.794 0.769 0.748 0.729 0.712 0.697 0.682
2,400 … … … … … … 0.952 0.902 0.855 0.820 0.791 0.767 0.746 0.727 0.710 0.694 0.679
2,450 … … … … … … 0.951 0.902 0.854 0.818 0.789 0.765 0.743 0.724 0.707 0.691 0.677
2,500 … … … … … … 0.951 0.902 0.852 0.816 0.787 0.762 0.740 0.721 0.704 0.688 0.674
2,550 … … … … … … 0.951 0.902 0.851 0.814 0.784 0.759 0.738 0.718 0.701 0.685 0.671
2,600 … … … … … … 0.951 0.903 0.849 0.812 0.782 0.756 0.735 0.715 0.698 0.682 0.664
2,650 … … … … … … 0.952 0.903 0.848 0.809 0.779 0.754 0.731 0.712 0.695 0.679 0.664
2,700 … … … … … … 0.952 0.903 0.846 0.807 0.776 0.750 0.728 0.708 0.691 0.675 0.661
2,750 … … … … … … 0.953 0.903 0.844 0.804 0.773 0.747 0.724 0.705 0.687 0.671 0.657
2,800 … … … … … … 0.956 0.903 0.842 0.801 0.769 0.743 0.721 0.701 0.684 0.668 0.653

134
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table XVIII-1110-1
Superheat Correction Factor, K s h (Cont'd)
Flowing Superheat Correction Factor, K s h , Total Temperature, °F, of Superheated Steam
Pressure,
psia 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800 850 900 950 1000 1050 1100 1150 1200
2,850 … … … … … … 0.959 0.902 0.839 0.798 0.766 0.739 0.717 0.697 0.679 0.663 0.649
2,900 … … … … … … 0.963 0.902 0.836 0.794 0.762 0.735 0.713 0.693 0.675 0.659 0.645
2,950 … … … … … … … 0.902 0.834 0.790 0.758 0.731 0.708 0.688 0.671 0.655 0.640
3,000 … … … … … … … 0.901 0.831 0.786 0.753 0.726 0.704 0.684 0.666 0.650 0.635
3,050 … … … … … … … 0.899 0.827 0.782 0.749 0.722 0.699 0.679 0.661 0.645 0.630
3,100 … … … … … … … 0.896 0.823 0.777 0.744 0.716 0.693 0.673 0.656 0.640 0.625
3,150 … … … … … … … 0.894 0.819 0.772 0.738 0.711 0.688 0.668 0.650 0.634 0.620
3,200 … … … … … … … 0.889 0.815 0.767 0.733 0.705 0.682 0.662 0.644 0.628 0.614

W s = rated capacity, lb/hr (kg/h) of steam (b) For air:

Z = ratio of deviation of the actual gas from a perfect
gas, a ratio evaluated at inlet conditions

These equations shall also be used when the required

flow of any gas or vapor is known and it is necessary to
compute the rated capacity of steam or air. Rated capacity
(lb/hr air @ 60°F @ 14.7 psia)/0.0766/60 = rated capac-
ity (scfm air) [Rated capacity (kg/h air @ 20°C @
101 kPaabs/1.204 = rated capacity (m3/h air)].
(c) Molecular weight of some of the common gases and
vapors are given in Table XVIII-1110(a)-1.
(d) In the case of hydrocarbons, the compressibility fac- XVIII-1222 Example 2
tor Z shall be included in the equation for gases and va-
pors as follows: Given: It is required to relieve 5,000 lb/hr of propane
from a pressure vessel through a pressure relief valve
set to relieve at a pressure of P s , psi, and with an inlet
ð4Þ temperature of 125°F.
Problem: What total capacity in lb/hr of steam in pres-
sure relief valves must be furnished?
Solution:
XVIII-1120 EXAMPLES (a) For propane:
XVIII-1121 Example 1
Given: A pressure relief valve bears a rated capacity of
3,020 lb/hr of saturated steam for a pressure setting of
Value of C is not definitely known. Use the conservative
200 psi.
value, C = 315:
Problem: What is the relieving capacity of that valve in
terms of air at 100°F for the same pressure setting?
Solution:
(a) For steam:
(b) For steam:

135
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table XVIII-1110-1M
Superheat Correction Factor, K s h
Flowing Superheat Correction Factor, K s h , Total Temperature,°C, of Superheated Steam
Pressure,
MPa 205 225 250 275 300 325 350 375 400 425 450 475 500 525 550 575 600 625
0.50 0.991 0.968 0.942 0.919 0.896 0.876 0.857 0.839 0.823 0.807 0.792 0.778 0.765 0.752 0.74 0.728 0.717 0.706
0.75 0.995 0.972 0.946 0.922 0.899 0.878 0.859 0.841 0.824 0.808 0.793 0.779 0.766 0.753 0.74 0.729 0.717 0.707
1.00 0.985 0.973 0.95 0.925 0.902 0.88 0.861 0.843 0.825 0.809 0.794 0.78 0.766 0.753 0.741 0.729 0.718 0.707
1.25 0.981 0.976 0.954 0.928 0.905 0.883 0.863 0.844 0.827 0.81 0.795 0.781 0.767 0.754 0.741 0.729 0.718 0.707
1.50 … … 0.957 0.932 0.907 0.885 0.865 0.846 0.828 0.812 0.796 0.782 0.768 0.755 0.742 0.73 0.718 0.708
1.75 … … 0.959 0.935 0.91 0.887 0.866 0.847 0.829 0.813 0.797 0.782 0.769 0.756 0.743 0.731 0.719 0.708
2.00 … … 0.96 0.939 0.913 0.889 0.868 0.849 0.831 0.814 0.798 0.784 0.769 0.756 0.744 0.731 0.72 0.708
2.25 … … 0.963 0.943 0.916 0.892 0.87 0.85 0.832 0.815 0.799 0.785 0.77 0.757 0.744 0.732 0.72 0.709
2.50 … … … 0.946 0.919 0.894 0.872 0.852 0.834 0.816 0.8 0.785 0.771 0.757 0.744 0.732 0.72 0.71
2.75 … … … 0.948 0.922 0.897 0.874 0.854 0.835 0.817 0.801 0.786 0.772 0.758 0.745 0.733 0.721 0.71
3.00 … … … 0.949 0.925 0.899 0.876 0.855 0.837 0.819 0.802 0.787 0.772 0.759 0.746 0.733 0.722 0.71
3.25 … … … 0.951 0.929 0.902 0.879 0.857 0.838 0.82 0.803 0.788 0.773 0.759 0.746 0.734 0.722 0.711
3.50 … … … 0.953 0.933 0.905 0.881 0.859 0.84 0.822 0.804 0.789 0.774 0.76 0.747 0.734 0.722 0.711
3.75 … … … 0.956 0.936 0.908 0.883 0.861 0.841 0.823 0.806 0.79 0.775 0.761 0.748 0.735 0.723 0.711
4.00 … … … 0.959 0.94 0.91 0.885 0.863 0.842 0.824 0.807 0.791 0.776 0.762 0.748 0.735 0.723 0.712
4.25 … … … 0.961 0.943 0.913 0.887 0.864 0.844 0.825 0.808 0.792 0.776 0.762 0.749 0.736 0.724 0.713
4.50 … … … … 0.944 0.917 0.89 0.866 0.845 0.826 0.809 0.793 0.777 0.763 0.749 0.737 0.725 0.713
4.75 … … … … 0.946 0.919 0.892 0.868 0.847 0.828 0.81 0.793 0.778 0.764 0.75 0.737 0.725 0.713
5.00 … … … … 0.947 0.922 0.894 0.87 0.848 0.829 0.811 0.794 0.779 0.765 0.751 0.738 0.725 0.714
5.25 … … … … 0.949 0.926 0.897 0.872 0.85 0.83 0.812 0.795 0.78 0.765 0.752 0.738 0.726 0.714
5.50 … … … … 0.952 0.93 0.899 0.874 0.851 0.831 0.813 0.797 0.78 0.766 0.752 0.739 0.727 0.714
5.75 … … … … 0.954 0.933 0.902 0.876 0.853 0.833 0.815 0.798 0.782 0.767 0.753 0.739 0.727 0.715
6.00 … … … … 0.957 0.937 0.904 0.878 0.855 0.834 0.816 0.798 0.783 0.768 0.753 0.74 0.727 0.716
6.25 … … … … 0.96 0.94 0.907 0.88 0.856 0.836 0.817 0.799 0.783 0.768 0.754 0.74 0.728 0.716
6.50 … … … … 0.964 0.944 0.91 0.882 0.859 0.837 0.818 0.801 0.784 0.769 0.754 0.741 0.729 0.716
6.75 … … … … 0.966 0.946 0.913 0.885 0.86 0.839 0.819 0.802 0.785 0.769 0.755 0.742 0.729 0.717
7.00 … … … … … 0.947 0.916 0.887 0.862 0.84 0.82 0.802 0.786 0.77 0.756 0.742 0.729 0.717
7.25 … … … … … 0.949 0.919 0.889 0.863 0.842 0.822 0.803 0.787 0.771 0.756 0.743 0.73 0.717
7.50 … … … … … 0.951 0.922 0.891 0.865 0.843 0.823 0.805 0.788 0.772 0.757 0.744 0.73 0.718
7.75 … … … … … 0.953 0.925 0.893 0.867 0.844 0.824 0.806 0.788 0.772 0.758 0.744 0.731 0.719
8.00 … … … … … 0.955 0.928 0.896 0.869 0.846 0.825 0.806 0.789 0.773 0.758 0.744 0.732 0.719
8.25 … … … … … 0.957 0.932 0.898 0.871 0.847 0.827 0.807 0.79 0.774 0.759 0.745 0.732 0.719
8.50 … … … … … 0.96 0.935 0.901 0.873 0.849 0.828 0.809 0.791 0.775 0.76 0.746 0.732 0.72
8.75 … … … … … 0.963 0.939 0.903 0.875 0.85 0.829 0.81 0.792 0.776 0.76 0.746 0.733 0.721
9.00 … … … … … 0.966 0.943 0.906 0.877 0.852 0.83 0.811 0.793 0.776 0.761 0.747 0.734 0.721
9.25 … … … … … 0.97 0.947 0.909 0.879 0.853 0.832 0.812 0.794 0.777 0.762 0.747 0.734 0.721
9.50 … … … … … 0.973 0.95 0.911 0.881 0.855 0.833 0.813 0.795 0.778 0.763 0.748 0.734 0.722
9.75 … … … … … 0.977 0.954 0.914 0.883 0.857 0.834 0.814 0.796 0.779 0.763 0.749 0.735 0.722
10.00 … … … … … 0.981 0.957 0.917 0.885 0.859 0.836 0.815 0.797 0.78 0.764 0.749 0.735 0.722
10.25 … … … … … 0.984 0.959 0.92 0.887 0.86 0.837 0.816 0.798 0.78 0.764 0.75 0.736 0.723
10.50 … … … … … … 0.961 0.923 0.889 0.862 0.838 0.817 0.799 0.781 0.765 0.75 0.737 0.723
10.75 … … … … … … 0.962 0.925 0.891 0.863 0.839 0.818 0.799 0.782 0.766 0.751 0.737 0.724
11.00 … … … … … … 0.963 0.928 0.893 0.865 0.84 0.819 0.8 0.782 0.766 0.751 0.737 0.724
11.25 … … … … … … 0.964 0.93 0.893 0.865 0.84 0.819 0.799 0.781 0.765 0.75 0.736 0.723
11.50 … … … … … … 0.964 0.931 0.894 0.865 0.84 0.818 0.798 0.78 0.764 0.749 0.735 0.722
11.75 … … … … … … 0.965 0.932 0.894 0.865 0.839 0.817 0.797 0.78 0.763 0.748 0.734 0.721
12.00 … … … … … … 0.966 0.933 0.894 0.864 0.839 0.817 0.797 0.779 0.762 0.747 0.733 0.719
12.25 … … … … … … 0.967 0.935 0.895 0.864 0.839 0.816 0.796 0.778 0.761 0.746 0.732 0.718
12.50 … … … … … … 0.967 0.936 0.896 0.864 0.838 0.816 0.796 0.777 0.76 0.745 0.731 0.717
12.75 … … … … … … 0.968 0.937 0.896 0.864 0.838 0.815 0.795 0.776 0.759 0.744 0.729 0.716
13.00 … … … … … … 0.969 0.939 0.896 0.864 0.837 0.814 0.794 0.775 0.758 0.743 0.728 0.715
13.25 … … … … … … 0.971 0.94 0.897 0.864 0.837 0.813 0.792 0.774 0.757 0.741 0.727 0.713
13.50 … … … … … … 0.972 0.942 0.897 0.863 0.837 0.813 0.792 0.773 0.756 0.74 0.725 0.712
14.00 … … … … … … 0.976 0.946 0.897 0.863 0.835 0.811 0.79 0.771 0.753 0.737 0.723 0.709
14.25 … … … … … … 0.978 0.947 0.898 0.862 0.834 0.81 0.789 0.77 0.752 0.736 0.721 0.707
14.50 … … … … … … … 0.948 0.898 0.862 0.833 0.809 0.787 0.768 0.751 0.734 0.72 0.706

136
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table XVIII-1110-1M
Superheat Correction Factor, K s h (Cont'd)
Flowing Superheat Correction Factor, K s h , Total Temperature,°C, of Superheated Steam
Pressure,
MPa 205 225 250 275 300 325 350 375 400 425 450 475 500 525 550 575 600 625
14.75 … … … … … … … 0.948 0.898 0.862 0.832 0.808 0.786 0.767 0.749 0.733 0.719 0.704
15.00 … … … … … … … 0.948 0.899 0.861 0.832 0.807 0.785 0.766 0.748 0.732 0.717 0.703
15.25 … … … … … … … 0.947 0.899 0.861 0.831 0.806 0.784 0.764 0.746 0.73 0.716 0.702
15.50 … … … … … … … 0.947 0.899 0.861 0.83 0.804 0.782 0.763 0.745 0.728 0.714 0.7
15.75 … … … … … … … 0.946 0.899 0.86 0.829 0.803 0.781 0.761 0.743 0.727 0.712 0.698
16.00 … … … … … … … 0.945 0.9 0.859 0.828 0.802 0.779 0.759 0.741 0.725 0.71 0.696
16.25 … … … … … … … 0.945 0.9 0.859 0.827 0.801 0.778 0.757 0.739 0.723 0.708 0.694
16.50 … … … … … … … 0.945 0.9 0.858 0.826 0.799 0.776 0.756 0.738 0.721 0.706 0.692
16.75 … … … … … … … 0.944 0.9 0.857 0.825 0.797 0.774 0.754 0.736 0.719 0.704 0.69
17.00 … … … … … … … 0.944 0.9 0.856 0.823 0.796 0.773 0.752 0.734 0.717 0.702 0.688
17.25 … … … … … … … 0.944 0.9 0.855 0.822 0.794 0.771 0.75 0.732 0.715 0.7 0.686
17.50 … … … … … … … 0.944 0.9 0.854 0.82 0.792 0.769 0.748 0.73 0.713 0.698 0.684
17.75 … … … … … … … 0.944 0.9 0.853 0.819 0.791 0.767 0.746 0.728 0.711 0.696 0.681
18.00 … … … … … … … 0.944 0.901 0.852 0.817 0.789 0.765 0.744 0.725 0.709 0.694 0.679
18.25 … … … … … … … 0.945 0.901 0.851 0.815 0.787 0.763 0.742 0.723 0.706 0.691 0.677
18.50 … … … … … … … 0.945 0.901 0.85 0.814 0.785 0.761 0.739 0.72 0.704 0.689 0.674
18.75 … … … … … … … 0.945 0.901 0.849 0.812 0.783 0.758 0.737 0.718 0.701 0.686 0.671
19.00 … … … … … … … 0.946 0.901 0.847 0.81 0.781 0.756 0.734 0.715 0.698 0.683 0.669
19.25 … … … … … … … 0.948 0.901 0.846 0.808 0.778 0.753 0.732 0.713 0.696 0.681 0.666
19.50 … … … … … … … 0.95 0.9 0.844 0.806 0.776 0.75 0.729 0.71 0.693 0.677 0.663
19.75 … … … … … … … 0.952 0.899 0.842 0.803 0.773 0.748 0.726 0.707 0.69 0.674 0.66
20.00 … … … … … … … … 0.899 0.84 0.801 0.77 0.745 0.723 0.704 0.687 0.671 0.657
20.25 … … … … … … … … 0.899 0.839 0.798 0.767 0.742 0.72 0.701 0.683 0.668 0.654
20.50 … … … … … … … … 0.899 0.837 0.795 0.764 0.738 0.717 0.697 0.68 0.665 0.651
20.75 … … … … … … … … 0.898 0.834 0.792 0.761 0.735 0.713 0.694 0.677 0.661 0.647
21.00 … … … … … … … … 0.896 0.832 0.79 0.758 0.732 0.71 0.691 0.673 0.658 0.643
21.25 … … … … … … … … 0.894 0.829 0.786 0.754 0.728 0.706 0.686 0.669 0.654 0.64
21.50 … … … … … … … … 0.892 0.826 0.783 0.75 0.724 0.702 0.682 0.665 0.65 0.636
21.75 … … … … … … … … 0.891 0.823 0.779 0.746 0.72 0.698 0.679 0.661 0.646 0.631
22.00 … … … … … … … … 0.887 0.82 0.776 0.743 0.716 0.694 0.674 0.657 0.641 0.627

XVIII-1123 Example 3 (b) For steam:

Given: It is required to relieve 1,000 lb/hr of ammonia

from a pressure vessel at 150°F.
Problem: What is the required total capacity in lb/hr of
steam at the same pressure setting?
Solution: XVIII-1124 Example 4
(a) For ammonia:
Given: A safety valve having a certified rating of
8,000 lb/hr of steam for a pressure setting of 2,000 psi.
Problem: Find the relieving capacity under the follow-
ing conditions:
Manufacturer and Owner agree to use k = 1.33. From • Steam quality (dryness fraction) of 0.93
Figure XVIII-1110-1, C = 350: • Superheat of 100°F (total temperature of 737°F)
Solution:
(a) The wet saturated capacity:

137
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure XVIII-1110-1
Constant C for Gas or Vapor Related to Ratio of Specific Heats (k = c p /cv)

(b) The superheat capacity: XVIII-1140 SATURATED WATER CAPACITY

(a) Because the saturated water capacity is configura-
tion sensitive, the following applies only to those safety
valves that have a nozzle type construction (throat to inlet
diameter ratio of 0.25 to 0.80 with a continuously con-
NOTE: K s h interpolated from Table XVIII-1110-1 for flowing toured change and have exhibited a coefficient K D in ex-
conditions. cess of 0.90). No saturated water rating shall apply to
other types of construction.
NOTE: The manufacturer, user, and Inspector are all cautioned that
for the following rating to apply, the valve shall be continuously sub-
XVIII-1130 THEORETICAL FLOW jected to saturated water. If, after initial relief, the flow medium
changes to quality steam, the valve shall be rated as per saturated
The theoretical flow for use in the establishment of the
steam. Valves installed on vessels or lines containing steam‐water
coefficient of discharge shall be calculated using eqs. mixture shall be rated on saturated steam.
XVIII-1110(1) through XVIII-1110(d)(4) with K being
deleted. (b) To determine the saturated water capacity of a
valve currently rated and meeting the requirements of
(a) above, refer to Figure XVIII-1140-1. Enter the graph
at the set pressure of the valve, move upward to the satu-
Table XVIII-1110(a)-1 rated water line, and read horizontally the relieving ca-
Molecular Weights of Gases and Vapors pacity. This capacity is the theoretical, isentropic value
Molecular Molecular
arrived at by assuming equilibrium flow and calculated
Gas or Vapor Weight Gas or Vapor Weight values for the critical pressure ratio.
Air 28.97 Freon 22 86.48
Acetylene 26.04 Freon 114 170.90
Ammonia 17.03 Hydrogen 2.02
Butane 58.12 Hydrogen sulfide 34.08
Carbon dioxide 44.01 Methane 16.04
Chlorine 70.91 Methyl chloride 50.48
Ethane 30.07 Nitrogen 28.02
Ethylene 28.05 Oxygen 32.00
Freon 11 137.371 Propane 44.09
Freon 12 120.9 Sulfur dioxide 64.06

138
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure XVIII-1110-1M
Constant C for Gas or Vapor Related to Ratio of Specific Heats (k = c p /cv)

32

31
Constant Constant Constant
k C k C k C
30
1.001 23.95 1.26 26.05 1.52 27.80
29 1.02 24.12 1.28 26.20 1.54 27.93
1.04 24.30 1.30 26.34 1.56 28.05
Constant, C

1.06 24.47 1.32 26.49 1.58 28.17

28 1.08 24.64 1.34 26.63 1.60 28.29
1.10 24.81 1.36 26.76 1.62 28.40
1.12 24.97 1.38 26.90 1.64 28.52
27 1.14 25.13 1.40 27.03 1.66 28.63
1.16 25.29 1.42 27.17 1.68 28.74
1.18 25.45 1.44 27.30 1.70 28.86
Flow Formula Calculations 1.20 25.60 1.46 27.43 2.00 30.39
26
1.22 25.76 1.48 27.55 2.20 31.29
W  K (CAP M /T ) 1.24 25.91 1.50 27.68 ... ...
25 k 1
C  39.48 k 2
k 1
k
1

24
1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2
k

Figure XVIII-1140-1
Flow Capacity Curve for Rating Nozzle Type Safety Valves on Saturated Water (Based on 10%
Overpressure)

139
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure XVIII-1140-1M
Flow Capacity Curve for Rating Nozzle Type Safety Valves on Saturated Water (Based on 10%
Overpressure)

20

18

16

14
Flow Capacity × 10 –7, kg/hr/m2

12

Saturated water
10

0
0 5 10 15 20 25

Set Pressure, MPa

140
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ð17Þ XVIII-1150 EQUATIONS FOR CONVERSION XVIII-1160 EXAMPLE

(INCOMPRESSIBLE FLUIDS) Given: Pressure relief valve bearing a certified rating of
The capacity of a pressure relief valve in terms of a non- 1,500 gpm water @ 70°F with a set pressure of 120 psig.
flashing liquid other than the medium for which the valve Problem: Find the flow capacity of this pressure relief
was officially rated shall be determined by application of valve in gpm of kerosene (G = 0.82) at the same pressure
the following equation: rating.
Solution:
(a) For water at 70°F:

where
A = actual discharge area of valve, in.2 (mm2)
C = 2,407 (5.092)
K = coefficient of discharge
P = (set pressure × 1.10) plus atmospheric pressure,
psia (MPaabs) (b) For kerosene:
Pd = pressure at discharge from valve, psia (MPaabs)
W = density of liquid at value inlet conditions, lb/ft3
(kg/m3)
Wt = rated capacity, lb/hr (kg/h) of any liquid
WW = rated capacity, lb/hr (kg/h) water @ 70°F
Knowing the rated capacity of a pressure relief valve
stamped with a liquid capacity, it is possible to determine
the overall value of K A in the following equation where
the value of the individual terms is not known:

141
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

MANDATORY APPENDIX XIX

ARTICLE XIX-1000
INTEGRAL FLAT HEAD WITH A LARGE OPENING

XIX-1100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS XIX-1120 NOMENCLATURE

XIX-1110 SCOPE (a) Except as given below, the symbols used in the
equations of XIX-1200 are defined in XI-3130:
(a) Rules of this Appendix apply to flat heads which
have a single, circular, centrally located opening that ex- A = outside diameter of flat head and shell
ceeds one‐half of the head diameter and have a shell/head B n = diameter of central opening (for nozzle, this is in-
juncture which is integrally formed or integrally attached side diameter and for opening without a nozzle,
with a full penetration weld similar to those shown in diameter of the opening)
Figure XIX-1110-1. Heads of this type shall be designed B s = inside diameter of shell (measured below tapered
according to the rules which follow and related parts of hub if one exists)
Mandatory Appendix XI. M H = moment acting at shell/head junction
(b) A general arrangement of an integral flat head with P = internal design pressure
and without a nozzle attached at the central opening is t = flat head nominal thickness
shown in Figure XIX-1110-2.

Figure XIX-1110-1
Applicable Configurations of Flat Heads

142
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure XIX-1110-2
Integral Flat Head With Large Central Opening

B 1 , g 0 , g 1 , h 0 , F , V, and f are defined in XI-3130. These (b) Calculate ( E θ ) * as follows:

terms may refer to either the shell/flat head juncture or (1) for integrally attached nozzle:
to the flat head/central opening juncture and depend
upon details of those junctures.

XIX-1200 DESIGN PROCEDURE

(a) Disregard the shell attached to the outside diameter (2) for an opening without a nozzle:
of the flat head and then analyze the flat head with a cen-
tral opening (with or without nozzle) in accordance with
these rules.
(1) Calculate the operating moment, M 0 , according to
where g 0 , g 1 , B 1 , V , f , h 0 , and B n all pertain to the flat
XI-3230 (there is no M 0 for gasket seating to be consid-
head/opening as described in (a).
ered). The equations in Mandatory Appendix XI for loads
(XI-3130) and moment arms (Table XI-3230-1) shall be (c) Calculate ( E θ ) */M 0 .
used directly with the following designations and terms (d) Calculate M H :
substituted for terms in Mandatory Appendix XI. Let
C = G = inside diameter of shell B s
B = B n , where B n is as shown in Figure XIX-1110-2 de-
pending on the presence of an integral nozzle or
opening without a nozzle
(2) With K = A /B n , use XI-3240 to calculate stresses. where h 0 , V , g 0 , B 1 , and F refer to the shell attached to
Designate the calculated stresses S H *, S R *, and S T *. the outside diameter of the flat head.

143
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(e) Calculate X 1 :

(g) Calculate stresses at opening/head juncture as

where F and h 0 refer to the shell. follows:
(f) Calculate stresses at head/shell juncture as follows. (1) For longitudinal hub stress in central opening:
(1) For longitudinal hub stress in shell:

(2) For radial stress at central opening:

where h 0 , f , g 0 , g 1 , B s , and V refer to the shell.

(2) For radial stress at outside diameter: (3) For tangential stress at diameter of central
opening:

where B s , F , and h 0 refer to the shell.

where F , B s , and h 0 refer to the shell, and
(3) For tangential stress at outside diameter:

(h) The preceding calculated stresses shall meet the al-

where B s , F , and h 0 refer to the shell, and lowable stresses in XI-3250.

144
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

MANDATORY APPENDIX XXI

ADHESIVE ATTACHMENT OF NAMEPLATES

ARTICLE XXI-1000
REQUIREMENTS

XXI-1100 INTRODUCTION (2) the qualified temperature range [the cold box test
temperature shall be −40°F (−40°C) for all applications]
XXI-1110 SCOPE (3) materials of nameplate and item when the mean
This Appendix provides minimum requirements for the coefficient of expansion at design temperature of one ma-
use of adhesive systems for the attachment of nameplates, terial is less than 85% of that for the other material
limited to (4) finish of the nameplate and item surfaces to
(a) the use of pressure sensitive acrylic adhesives that which the nameplate is to be attached
have been preapplied by the nameplate manufacturer to (5) the nominal thickness and modulus of elasticity
a normal thickness of at least 0.005 in. (0.13 mm) and that at application temperature of the nameplate when name-
are protected with a moisture stable liner plate preforming is employed. A change of more than 25%
(b) use on items with Design Temperatures within the in the quantity [(nameplate nominal thickness)2 × name-
range of −40°F to 300°F (−40°C to 150°C), inclusive plate modulus of elasticity at application temperature]
(c) application to clean, bare metal surfaces, with re- will require requalification
moval of antiweld spatter compound which may contain (6) the qualified range of preformed nameplate and
silicone companion item contour combinations when preforming
(d) nameplate nominal thickness not less than 0.020 in. is employed
(0.5 mm) (7) cleaning requirements for the item prior to at-
(e) use of prequalified application procedures as out- tachment of the nameplate
lined in this Article (8) application temperature range and application
(f) use of the preapplied adhesive within an interval of pressure technique
2 yr after adhesive application (9) application steps and safeguards
(c) Each procedure used for nameplate attachment by
XXI-1120 NAMEPLATE APPLICATION pressure sensitive acrylic adhesive systems shall be qual-
PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION ified for outdoor exposure in accordance with Standard
(a) The Certificate Holder’s Quality Assurance Manual UL‐969‐82, Marking and Labeling Systems, with the fol-
shall require that written procedures, acceptable to the lowing additional requirements.
Authorized Inspection Agency, for the application of ad- (1) Width of nameplate test strip shall not be less
hesive backed nameplates shall be prepared and than 1 in. (25 mm).
qualified. (2) Nameplates shall have an average adhesion of not
(b) The application procedure qualification shall in- less than 8 lb/in. (55 kPa) of width after all exposure con-
clude the following essential variable, using the adhesive ditions, including low temperature.
and nameplate manufacturers’ recommendations where (d) A n y c h a n g e i n ( b ) a b o v e s h a l l r e q u i r e
applicable: requalification.
(1) description of the pressure sensitive acrylic adhe- (e) Each package of nameplates shall be identified with
sive system employed, including generic composition the adhesive application date.

145
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

MANDATORY APPENDIX XXII

ARTICLE XXII-1000
RULES FOR REINFORCEMENT OF CONE-TO-CYLINDER
JUNCTION UNDER EXTERNAL PRESSURE

D L = outside diameter of large end of conical section un-

XXII-1100 INTRODUCTION der consideration
XXII-1110 SCOPE D o = outside diameter of cylindrical shell (In conical
shell calculations, the value of D s and D L should
(a) The equations of this Appendix provide for the de-
be used in calculations in place of D o depending
sign of reinforcement, if needed, at the cone‐to‐cylinder
on whether the small end D s , or large end D L , is
junctions for reducer sections and conical heads where
being examined.)
all the elements have a common axis and the half‐apex an-
D s = outside diameter at small end of conical section
gle α ≤ 60 deg. Subparagraph XXII-1300(d) provides for
under consideration
special analysis in the design of cone‐to‐cylinder intersec-
E = lowest efficiency of the longitudinal joint in the
tions with or without reinforcing rings where α is greater
shell or head or of the joint in the reducer; E = 1
than 60 deg.
for butt welds in compression
(b) In the design of reinforcement for a cone‐to‐
E c = modulus of elasticity of cone material
cylinder juncture, the requirements of ND‐3336 shall be
E R = modulus of elasticity of reinforcing material
met.
E s = modulus of elasticity of shell material
E x = E c , E R , or E s
f 1 = axial load at large end (excluding pressure P ),
XXII-1200 NOMENCLATURE lb/in. (N/mm)
The nomenclature given below is used in the equations f 2 = axial load at small end (excluding pressure P ),
of the following subparagraphs: lb/in. (N/mm)
I s = required moment of inertia of the stiffening ring
A = factor determined from the applicable chart in Sec- cross section about its neutral axis parallel to the
tion II, Part D, Subpart 3 for the material used in axis of the shell
the stiffening ring, corresponding to the factor B , I s ′ = required moment of inertia of the combined ring‐
below, and the design temperature for the shell shell‐cone cross section about its neutral axis par-
under consideration allel to the axis of the shell, in.4 (mm4). The width
A e = effective area of reinforcement due to excess metal of shell which is taken as contributing to the mo-
thickness ment of inertia of the combined section shall not
A r L = required area of reinforcement at large end
be greater than and shall be taken as ly-
A r S = required area of reinforcement at small end
A s = cross‐sectional area of the stiffening ring ing one‐half on each side of the centroid of the
A T = equivalent area of cylinder, cone, and stiffening ring. Portions of the shell plate shall not be consid-
ring ered as contributing area to more than one stiffen-
where ing ring. If the stiffeners should be so located that
the maximum permissible effective shell sections
overlap on either or both sides of a stiffener, the
effective shell section for that stiffener shall be
shortened by one‐half of each overlap.

B = factor determined from the applicable chart in Sec-

tion II, Part D, Subpart 3 for the material used for L = axial length of cone
the stiffening

146
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

L c = length of cone between stiffening rings measured Δ = value to indicate need for reinforcement at cone‐
along surface of cone. For cones without inter- to‐cylinder intersection having a half‐apex angle
mediate stiffeners, α ≤ 60 deg. When Δ ≥ α , no reinforcement is re-
quired at the junction (see Table XXII-1200-1).
XXII-1300 DESIGN PRESSURE
L L = design length of a vessel section taken as the lar-
(a) Reinforcement shall be provided at the junction of
gest of the following:
the cone with the large cylinder for conical heads and re-
(a) the center‐to‐center distance between the
ducers without knuckles when the value of Δ obtained
cone‐to‐large‐shell junction and an adjacent stif-
from Table XXII-1200-1 using the appropriate ratio
fening ring on the large shell;
P /S ′ E , is less than α . Interpolation may be made in the
(b) the distance between the cone‐to‐large‐shell
Table.
junction and one‐third the depth of head on the
other end of the large shell if no other stiffening The cross‐sectional area of the reinforcement ring shall
rings are used. be at least equal to that indicated by the following
L s = design length of a vessel section taken as the lar- equation:
gest of the following:
(a) the center‐to‐center distance between the ð1Þ
cone‐to‐small‐shell junction and an adjacent stif-
fening ring on the small shell;
(b) the distance between the cone‐to‐small‐shell When the thickness, less corrosion allowance, of both
junction and one‐third the depth of the head on the reducer and cylinder exceeds that required by the ap-
the other end of the small shell if no other stiffen- plicable design equations, the minimum excess thickness
ing rings are used. may be considered to contribute to the required rein-
P = external design pressure forcement ring in accordance with the following equation:

QL = ; axial compressive force at large end due ð2Þ

to pressure and f 1 , lb/in. (N/mm)

Any additional area of reinforcement which is required
Qs = ; axial compressive force at small end due shall be situated within a distance of from the junc-
to pressure and f 2 , lb/in. (N/mm) tion of the reducer and the cylinder. The centroid of the
R L = inside radius of large cylinder added area shall be within a distance of from
R s = inside radius of small cylinder the junction.
S′ = the lesser of twice the allowable stress at design
The reinforcement ring at the cone‐to‐cylinder junction
metal temperature from Section II, Part D, Subpart
shall also be considered as a stiffening ring. The required
1, Tables 1A and 1B or 0.9 times the tabulated
moment of inertia of a circumferential stiffening ring
yield strength at design metal temperature from
cross section shall not be less than that determined by
Section II, Part D, Subpart 2, Tables Y‐1 and Y‐2
the following equation:
S R = allowable stress of reinforcing material
S s = allowable stress of shell
T = minimum required thickness of cylinder at cone‐
to‐cylinder junction, exclusive of corrosion allow-
ance (see ND‐3133.3)
T c = nominal thickness of cone at cone‐to‐cylinder
junction, exclusive of corrosion allowance (see Table XXII-1200-1
ND‐3121) Values of Δ for Junctions at the Large
T L = the smaller of (T s − T ) or (T c − T r ) Cylinder for α ≤ 60 deg
T r = minimum required thickness of cone at cone‐to‐
cylinder junction, exclusive of corrosion allowance P/S ′ E 0 0.002 0.005 0.010 0.02
Δ , deg 0 5 7 10 15
T s = nominal thickness of cylinder at cone‐to‐cylinder
junction, exclusive of corrosion allowance (see P/S ′ E 0.04 0.08 0.10 0.125 0.15
ND‐3121) Δ , deg 21 29 33 37 40
α = one‐half the included (apex) angle of the cone at P/S ′ E 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.35
the centerline of the head Δ , deg 47 52 57 60 [Note (1)]

NOTE:
(1) Δ = 60 deg for greater values of P /S′ E.

147
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

The required moment of inertia of the combined ring‐ (b) Reinforcement shall be provided at the junction of
shell‐core cross section shall not be less than that deter- the conical shell of a reducer without a flare and the small
mined by the following equation: cylinder. The cross‐sectional area of the reinforcement
ring shall be at least equal to that indicated by the follow-
ing formula:

ð3Þ
The moment of inertia for a stiffening ring at the large
end shall be determined by the following procedure:
Step 1. Assuming that the shell has been designed and When the thickness, less corrosion allowance, of either
D L , L L , and T are known, select a member to be used the reducer or cylinder exceeds that required by the ap-
for the stiffening ring and determine cross‐sectional area plicable design formula, the thickness may be considered
A T L . Then calculate factor B using the following equation: to contribute to the required reinforcement ring in accor-
dance with the following formula:

ð4Þ

Any additional area of reinforcement which is required

where
shall be situated within a distance of from the junc-
F L = PM + f 1 tan α
tion, and the centroid of the added area shall be within a
M = distance of from the junction.
The reinforcement ring at the cone‐to‐cylinder junction
A T L was defined previously. shall also be considered as a stiffening ring. The required
Step 2. Enter the right‐hand side of the applicable mate- moment of inertia of a circumferential stiffening ring
rial chart in Section II, Part D, Subpart 3 for the material cross section shall not be less than that determined by
under consideration at the value of B determined by Step the following equation:
1. If different materials are used for the shell and stiffen-
ing ring, use the material chart resulting in the larger val-
ue of A in Step 4, below.
Step 3. Move horizontally to the left to the material/ The required moment of inertia of the combined ring‐
temperature line for the design metal temperature. For shell‐cone cross section shall not be less than that deter-
values of B falling below the left end of the material/tem- mined by the following equation:
perature line, see Step 5.
Step 4. Move vertically to the bottom of the chart and
read the value of A.
Step 5. For value of B falling below the left end of the
material/temperature line for the design temperature, The moment of inertia for a stiffening ring at the small
the value of A can be calculated using the formula end shall be determined by the following procedure.
A = 2B /E x . Step 1. Assuming that the shell has been designed and
Step 6. Compute the value of the required moment of D s , L s , and T are known, select a member to be used
inertia from the equations for I s or I s ′ above. for the stiffening ring and determine cross‐sectional area
Step 7. Calculate the available moment of inertia of the A T s . Then calculate factor B using the following equation:
stiffening ring using the section corresponding to that
used in Step 6.
Step 8. If the required moment of inertia is greater than
the moment of inertia for the section selected in Step 1, a
new section with a larger moment of inertia must be se- where
lected and a new moment of inertia determined. If the re-
quired moment of inertia is smaller than the moment of F s = PN + f 2 tan α
inertia of the section selected in Step 1, that section is
satisfactory. N =
The requirements of ND‐4430 are to be met in attach-
ing stiffening rings to the shell. A T s was defined previously.

148
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Step 2. Enter the right‐hand side of the applicable mate- selected and a new moment of inertia determined. If the
rial chart in Section II, Part D, Subpart 3 for the material required moment of inertia is smaller than the moment
under consideration at the value of B determined by Step of inertia for the section selected in Step 1, that section
1. If different materials are used for the shell and stiffen- is satisfactory.
ing ring, use the material chart resulting in the larger val- The requirements of ND‐4430 are to be met in attach-
ue of A in Step 4, below. ing stiffening rings to the shell.
Step 3. Move horizontally to the left to the material/ (c) Reducers, such as those made up of two or more
temperature line for the design metal temperature. For conical frustums having different slopes, may be designed
values of B falling below the left end of the material/tem- in accordance with (d) below.
perature line, see Step 5. (d) As an alternative to the rules provided in the pre-
Step 4. Move vertically to the bottom of the chart and ceding (a) and (b) and when half the apex angle is greater
read the value of A. than 60 deg, the design may be based on special analysis
Step 5. For values of B falling below the left end of the such as numerical methods or the beam‐on‐elastic‐
material/temperature line for the design temperature, foundation analysis of Timoshenko, Hetenyi, or Watts
the value of A can be calculated using the formula and Lang. The stresses at the junction shall meet all of
A = 2B /E x . the allowable stress limits of this Division. The effect of
Step 6. Compute the value of the required moment of shell and cone buckling on the required area and moment
inertia from the equations for I s or I s ′ above. of inertia at the joint shall also be considered in the anal-
Step 7. Calculate the available moment of inertia of the ysis. The theoretical buckling pressure of the junction
stiffening ring using the section corresponding to that shall be at least 3.3 times the allowable external design
used in Step 6. pressure of the junction.
Step 8. If the required moment of inertia is greater than
the moment of inertia for the section selected in Step 1, a
new section with a larger moment of inertia must be

149
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ð17Þ MANDATORY APPENDIX XXIII

QUALIFICATIONS AND DUTIES OF CERTIFYING ENGINEERS
PERFORMING CERTIFICATION ACTIVITIES

ARTICLE XXIII-1000
QUALIFICATIONS AND DUTIES

ð17Þ XXIII-1100 SCOPE (-b) certification of the Design Report on behalf of

the N Certificate Holder
This Appendix presents minimum requirements for the
(-c) certification of the Overpressure Protection
qualification of personnel engaged in the certification ac-
Report on behalf of the Owner
tivities. The personnel addressed are those who perform
(-d) certification of the Load Capacity Data Sheet
the following certifications:
on behalf of the N Certificate Holder
(a) for Division 1
Also provided are the duties of these personnel in the
(1) certification of the Design Specification on behalf
performance of the activities described above.
of the Owner
(2) certification of the Design Report on behalf of the
N Certificate Holder
(3) certification of the Overpressure Protection Re- XXIII-1200 QUALIFICATIONS ð17Þ
port on behalf of the Owner XXIII-1210 GENERAL
(4) certification of the Load Capacity Data Sheet on
(a) One or more Certifying Engineers shall be selected
behalf of the N Certificate Holder
by the Owner or his designee, Designer, N Certificate
(b) for Division 2
Holder, NS Certificate Holder, or N3 Certificate Holder,
(1) certification of the Design Specification on behalf as applicable, to perform, on their behalf, Code certifica-
of the Owner tion activities in the appropriate specialty field(s).
(2) certification of the Construction Specification, De-
(b) The Certifying Engineer shall meet the require-
sign Drawings, and Design Report on behalf of the
ments of this Appendix, and be evaluated, qualified, and
Designer
verified by the Owner or his designee, Designer, N Certi-
(c) for Division 3 ficate Holder, NS Certificate Holder, or N3 Certificate
(1) certification of the Design Specification on behalf Holder, as applicable, responsible for the activity being
of the N3 Certificate Holder certified or reviewed.
(2) certification of the Design Report on behalf of the (c) Requirements for demonstrating Certifying Engi-
N3 Certificate Holder neer qualifications are contained in Supplements 1 and
(3) certification of the Fabrication Specification on 2 of this Appendix.
behalf of the N3 Certificate Holder (d) A record of the qualifications of the Certifying Engi-
(d) for Division 4 — in the course of preparation neer shall be maintained by the responsible qualifying or-
(e) for Division 5 ganization as a nonpermanent record in accordance with
(1) for Class A nonmetallic core support structures Table NCA-4134.17-2.
(-a) certification of the Design Specification on be-
half of the Owner
XXIII-1220 QUALIFICATION AND EXPERIENCE
(-b) certification of the Construction Specification,
Design Drawings, and Design Report on behalf of the XXIII-1121 Initial Qualification
Designer The Certifying Engineer shall attest in writing that he
(2) for all other components and supports understands and meets the requirements of the ASME
(-a) certification of the Design Specification on be- Code of Ethics and shall meet the requirements of either
half of the Owner XXIII-1222 or XXIII-1223.

150
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

XXIII-1222 Initial Qualification of a Registered XXIII-1230 CERTIFIER OF THE DESIGN

Professional Engineer SPECIFICATION FOR ALL DIVISIONS
The Certifying Engineer shall meet the following: To qualify as certifier of the Design Specification, the
(a) The Certifying Engineer shall be a Registered Pro- Certifying Engineer shall be experienced in the applicable
fessional Engineer in at least one state of the United States field of design and related nuclear facility requirements,
or province of Canada. and in the application of the requirements of the Code re-
(b) The Certifying Engineer shall have 4 yr of varied ap- lating to the construction of nuclear facility items. This ex-
plication experience, at least 2 of which have been in each perience shall indicate that the Certifying Engineer has
specialty field for which he performs certifying or review sufficient knowledge of anticipated plant and system op-
activities as delineated in XXIII-1230 through XXIII-1270. erating and test conditions (Divisions 1, 2, and 5) or con-
tainment systems operating and test conditions (Division
3) and their relationship to Code design criteria pertinent
XXIII-1223 Initial Qualification of a Chartered, to the applicable Code item. In addition, he shall be
Registered, or Licensed Engineer knowledgeable of the specific Code requirements pertain-
ing to his specialty field. Requirements prescribing the
The Certifying Engineer shall meet the following: degree of knowledge appropriate for preparation of the
(a) The Certifying Engineer shall be a Chartered, Regis- Design Specification are contained in Supplement 2, Table
tered, or Licensed Engineer within either the jurisdiction S2-1.
where the design activity takes place or the jurisdiction of
The following paragraphs provide additional Division-
the regulatory authority issuing the license for the facility.
specific requirements necessary to establish the proper
(b) The Certifying Engineer shall be chartered, regis- qualifications needed to certify Section III Design
tered, or licensed in accordance with one of the following: Specifications.
(1) International Register of Professional Engineers
(IPEA) by an Authorized Member of the IPEA
(2) Chartered, Registered or Licensed by a country or XXIII-1231 Certifier of the Design Specification
entity recognized by the Washington Accord: 1989 for Divisions 1, 2, and 5
(c) The Certifying Engineer shall have 4 yr of varied ap-
plication experience, at least 2 of which have been in each The Certifying Engineer certifying on behalf of the
specialty field for which he performs certifying or review Owner or his designee shall be experienced in the applic-
activities as delineated in XXIII-1230 through XXIII-1270. able field of design and related nuclear facility require-
ments and in the application of the requirements of the
Code relating to the construction of nuclear facility items.
XXIII-1224 Maintenance For Division 5 applications, the Certifying Engineer
shall also be knowledgeable of the additional Design Spec-
(a) The Certifying Engineer shall keep current his
ification requirements necessary for proper elevated tem-
knowledge of Code requirements and continue his profes-
perature design associated with high temperature
sional development in his specialty field through personal
reactors. Unique issues are also associated with the prop-
study and experience, or by attendance at appropriate
er design and construction requirements for Division 5
courses, seminars, Society meetings, and technical com-
mittee meetings. A record of such activity shall be in- nonmetallic core support structures.
cluded in the qualification records of the Certifying
Engineer submitted to the Owner or his designee, De-
signer, or Certificate Holder for review. XXIII-1232 Certifier of the Design Specification
(b) The Certifying Engineer shall keep current any pro- for Division 3
fessional charters, registrations, or licenses used as the The Certifying Engineer certifying on behalf of the N3
basis for qualification. Certificate Holder shall be experienced in the applicable
(c) The Owner or his designee, Designer, or Certificate field of Division 3 storage and transportation contain-
Holder, as applicable, shall verify the qualifications of the ment and associated internal support structure (basket)
Certifying Engineer at least once every 3 yr to ensure that design requirements.
the qualifications have been maintained. A continuing re-
cord of all such activity shall be included in the qualifica-
tion records of the Certifying Engineer.
XXIII-1233 Certifier of the Design Specification
(d) Certifying Engineer qualification records shall be for Division 4
maintained and documented as required by Supplement
1 of this Appendix. In the course of preparation.

151
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

XXIII-1240 CERTIFIER OF THE LOAD CAPACITY XXIII-1300 DUTIES ð17Þ

DATA SHEET FOR DIVISIONS 1 AND 5
AND THE DESIGN REPORT FOR XXIII-1310 GENERAL
DIVISIONS 1, 3, AND 5 (EXCLUDING The certification activities covered in this Appendix
NONMETALLIC CORE SUPPORT may be performed only if the Certifying Engineer has as-
STRUCTURES) sured himself that he is qualified to do so by virtue of a
To qualify as certifier of the Load Capacity Data Sheet self‐review establishing that his qualifications meet those
or Design Report, the Certifying Engineer shall be experi- required by this Appendix. He shall be familiar with the
enced in the applicable field of design and analysis and in Quality Assurance requirements of the organization re-
the application of the requirements of the Code. In sponsible for providing the document as these require-
addition, he shall be knowledgeable of the specific Code ments relate to his work. For certification activities, the
requirements pertaining to his specialty field. Require- document being certified must have been reviewed in de-
ments prescribing the degree of knowledge appropriate tail by the Certifying Engineer, or prepared by him or pre-
for preparation of the Design Report and the Load Capac- pared under his responsible direction. The Certifying
ity Data Sheet are contained in Supplement 2, Tables S2-2 Engineer shall include the appropriate Certification
and S2-3, respectively. Statement 1 in compliance with Supplement 3 of this
Appendix (e.g., Design Specification, Design Report) at-
XXIII-1250 CERTIFIER OF THE FABRICATION testing to compliance with the applicable requirements
SPECIFICATION FOR DIVISION 3 of the Code. The signature of the Certifying Engineer, in-
cluded in the appropriate Certification Statement, is evi-
To qualify as certifier of the Fabrication Specification dence that the requirements of XXIII-1310 have been met.
on behalf of the N3 Certificate Holder, the Certifying Engi-
neer shall be experienced in the applicable field of design,
analysis, fabrication, and the application of Division 3 re- XXIII-1320 CERTIFICATION OF THE DESIGN
quirements. Requirements prescribing degree of knowl- SPECIFICATION
edge appropriate for the preparation of the Fabrication It is the responsibility of the Certifying Engineer certi-
Specification are contained in Supplement 2, Table S2-4. fying, on behalf of the Owner or his designee, the Owner's
Design Specification (Divisions 1, 2, and 5) or the N3 Cer-
XXIII-1260 CERTIFIER OF THE OVERPRESSURE tificate Holder’s Design Specification (Division 3) to as-
PROTECTION REPORT FOR sure that the Design Specification is correct, complete,
DIVISIONS 1, 2, AND 5 and in compliance with the requirements of the applic-
To qualify as certifier of the Overpressure Protection able Edition and Addenda of the Code. As a minimum,
Report on behalf of the Owner or his designee, the Certi- the certifier of the Design Specification shall assure that
fying Engineer shall be experienced in nuclear facility sys- (a) the function of the item is properly specified
tems design, and in facility operation and safety control. (b) the design requirements, including identification of
In addition, he shall be knowledgeable of the specific Code the item Design and Service Loadings or Operating Condi-
requirements pertaining to his specialty field. Require- tions and their combinations and associated Limits, are
ments prescribing the degree of knowledge appropriate properly specified
for preparation of the Report on Overpressure Protection
(c) the proper environmental conditions, including cor-
are contained in Supplement 2, Table S2-5.
rosion, erosion, and radiation, are specified
XXIII-1270 CERTIFIER OF THE CONSTRUCTION (d) the Code classification is properly specified
SPECIFICATION, DESIGN DRAWING, (e) the definition of the specific boundaries and load
AND DESIGN REPORT FOR DIVISION conditions on these boundaries for each item is specified,
2 AND FOR DIVISION 5 and that the boundaries and associated load conditions
NONMETALLIC CORE SUPPORT between adjacent components and structure are compati-
STRUCTURES ble with the overall system design
(f) the specified materials for items covered by the
To qualify as certifier of the Construction Specification,
Code are permitted by the Code for the applicable item
Design Drawings, or Design Report, the Certifying Engi-
neer shall be experienced in the applicable field of design (g) all requirements with regard to impact testing are
and analysis and in the application of the requirements of specified
the Code. In addition, he shall be knowledgeable of the (h) any restrictions on or additional requirements for
specific Code requirements pertaining to his specialty heat treating are specified
field. Requirements prescribing the degree of knowledge (i) any restrictions on cladding materials are specified
appropriate for preparation of the Construction Specifica- (j) any reduction to design stress intensity values, al-
tion, Design Drawings, and Design Report are contained lowable stress, or fatigue curves necessitated by the given
in Supplement 2, Table S2-6. environmental conditions are specified

152
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(k) the necessary information concerning the load car- XXIII-1340 CERTIFICATION OF THE
rying capacity of structures supporting Code items is OVERPRESSURE PROTECTION
given REPORT FOR DIVISIONS 1, 2, AND 5
(l) when operability of a component is a requirement,
It is the responsibility of the Certifying Engineer certi-
the Design Specification shall make reference to other
fying, on behalf of the Owner or his designee, the Over-
appropriate documents that specify the operating
pressure Protection Report to assure that the report has
requirements
been reconciled with the system requirements and with
(m) the overpressure protection requirements are
the requirements of the applicable Subsection of the Code.
specified
(n) the Code Edition, Addenda, and Code Cases to be XXIII-1350 CERTIFICATION OF THE LOAD
used for construction are specified CAPACITY DATA SHEET FOR
XXIII-1330 CERTIFICATION OF THE DESIGN DIVISIONS 1 AND 5
REPORT FOR DIVISIONS 1, 3, AND 5 It is the responsibility of the Certifying Engineer certi-
(EXCLUDING NONMETALLIC CORE fying the Load Capacity Data Sheet on behalf of the N Cer-
SUPPORT STRUCTURES) tificate Holder to determine that the load capacity of the
It is the responsibility of the Certifying Engineer certi- component or piping support is rated in accordance with
fying, on behalf of the Certificate Holder, the Design Re- Subsection NF of the Code. He shall assure that the design
port to assure that the design of the item complies with of the component or piping support complies with the re-
the requirements of the applicable Edition and Addenda quirements of the applicable Edition and Addenda of the
of the Code for the Design, Service Loadings or Operating Code for the Design, Service, and Test Loadings specified
Conditions, and Test Loadings that have been specified in in the Design Specification. In addition, his duties shall in-
the Design Specification. As a minimum, the certifier of clude the requirements of XXIII-1330(a) through
the Design Report shall assure that XXIII-1330(i) for the data substantiating the Load Capac-
(a) the Design Report reflects the design as shown by ity Data Sheet.
the drawings used for construction and that all modifica-
tions to the drawings and construction deviations have
XXIII-1360 CERTIFICATION OF THE
been reconciled with the Design Report
CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION,
(b) the design as shown by the drawings is in accor-
DESIGN DRAWINGS, OR DESIGN
dance with the requirements of the Code
REPORT FOR DIVISION 2 AND FOR
(c) the Design Report is in accordance with the require-
DIVISION 5 NONMETALLIC CORE
ments of the Code
SUPPORT STRUCTURES
(d) materials specified for Code items are permitted by It is the responsibility of the Certifying Engineer certi-
the Code, and that any reduction of material impact prop- fying the Construction Specification, Design Drawings,
erties from heat treatments, welding, and forming have or Design Report on behalf of the Designer for Division
been taken into account 2 to assure that each of the above principal Code docu-
(e) the Design Report is based on the Design, Service ments is correct, complete, and in accordance with the
Loadings or Operating Conditions, and Test Loadings sta- Design Specification and Section III, Division 2. As a mini-
ted in the Design Specification mum, the certifier of each of the principal Code docu-
(f) the specified requirements for protection against ments shall assure
nonductile fracture are specified (a) for Division 2:
(g) all special nondestructive examinations required to (1) that the Design Drawings contain
validate unique features have been specified in appropri- (-a) concrete and steel liner thicknesses
ate documents/drawings (-b) size and location of reinforcing steel, prestres-
(h) the specified test pressure and temperature are in sing tendons, and penetrations
compliance with Code requirements (-c) the latest revisions to reflect any change in
(i) adequate analytical techniques have been employed design
to assess the structural adequacy of the item of concern (2) that the Design Report includes, as a minimum,
for the Design, Service Loadings or Operating Conditions, the requirements of XXIII-1330(a) through
and Test Loadings specified XXIII-1330(i), as applicable
(3) that the Construction Specification has provided
the following in accordance with the Code:
(-a) material specifications
(-b) material shipping, handling, and storage
requirements
(-c) requirements for personnel or equipment
qualification

153
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(-d) material or part examination and testing (-j) construction surveillance to be performed by
requirements the Designer as required by the Design Specification
(-e) acceptance and leakage testing requirements (-k) construction documents that require review
(-f) requirements for shop drawings by the Designer and those that require both review and
(-g) requirements for batching, mixing, placing, approval by the Designer
and curing of concrete
(-h) requirements for the fabrication and installa- XXIII-1370 CERTIFICATION OF THE
tion of the prestressing system, reinforcing steel, and FABRICATION SPECIFICATION FOR
embedments DIVISION 3
(-i) identification of parts requiring a Code stamp It is the responsibility of the Certifying Engineer certi-
(-j) design life for parts and materials where neces- fying the Fabrication Specification on behalf of the N3
sary to establish compliance with the Design Specification Certificate Holder for Division 3 to assure that the Fabri-
(-k) construction surveillance to be performed by cation Specification is correct, complete, and in accor-
the Designer as required by the Design Specification dance with the Design Specification, Design Output
(-l) the latest revisions to reflect any change in Documents, and Section III, Division 3. The certifier of
design the Fabrication Specification shall assure that it contains
(b) for Division 5: sufficient detail to provide a complete basis for
(1) that the Design Drawings contain fabrication.
(-a) all details necessary to construct the item in As a minimum, the Fabrication Specification shall con-
accordance with the requirements of the Design Specifica- tain the following:
tion, Construction Specification, and appropriate Division (a) material specifications
5 Code rules (b) m a t e r i a l s h i p p i n g , h a n d l i n g , a n d s t o r a g e
(-b) the latest revisions to reflect any change in requirements
design (c) r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r p e r s o n n e l o r e q u i p m e n t
(2) that the Design Report includes, as a minimum, qualification
the requirements of XXIII-1330(a) through (d) weld joint design requirements
XXIII-1330(i), as applicable (e) fabrication dimensions and tolerances
(3) that the Construction Specification has provided (f) identification of Code boundaries
the following, as a minimum, in accordance with the Code: (g) identification of parts requiring a Code stamp
(-a) material specifications (h) m a t e r i a l o r p a r t e x a m i n a t i o n a n d t e s t i n g
(-b) material shipping, handling, and storage requirements
requirements (i) acceptance and leakage testing requirements
(-c) inspection requirements (j) requirements for shop drawings
(-d) appropriate Code references (k) design life for parts and materials where necessary
(-e) requirements for personnel or equipment to establish compliance with the Design Specification
qualification (l) fabrication surveillance to be performed by the N3
(-f) material or item examination and testing Certificate Holder as required by the Design Specification
requirements (m) the latest revisions to reflect any change in design
(-g) acceptance testing requirements (n) requirements for as‐built documentation
(-h) requirements for shop and field drawings (o) a listing of design drawings (by inclusion or
(-i) identification of items reference)

154
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

MANDATORY APPENDIX XXIII

SUPPLEMENTS

ð17Þ SUPPLEMENT 1 MANDATORY requirements to an equivalent extent, but not necessarily

REQUIREMENTS FOR including Certification. Alternatively, he may have done
DEMONSTRATING two or more of the following:
CERTIFYING ENGINEER (1) taught or attended an appropriate course or
QUALIFICATIONS training program
(2) taught or attended an appropriate seminar
This Supplement provides requirements for demon- (3) attended an ASME or ASME/ACI Code meeting
strating that the qualification of personnel engaged in cer- (4) attended a technical society meeting related to
tification activities have been met. The Owner or his his specialty field
designee, Designer, N Certificate Holder, or N3 Certificate (d) The Certifying Engineer’s participation in these ac-
Holder, as applicable, responsible for the activity being tivities shall be documented in appropriate records that,
certified should establish procedures or instructions for as a minimum, include
evaluating, verifying, and documenting the qualifications (1) Certifying Engineer’s identification
of the Certifying Engineer engaged in certifying activities (2) description of Code activities performed
as required by this Appendix. The qualification records of (3) course or training program description, duration,
each Certifying Engineer shall be considered nonperma- and date completed
nent and shall be retained as required by Table (4) seminar description, duration, and date attended
NCA-4134.17-2.
(5) ASME or ASME/ACI Code meeting(s) and date(s)
attended
1.1 CERTIFYING ENGINEER (6) technical society meeting(s) and date(s) attended
(7) the Certifying Engineer’s function (i.e., attendee,
The Certifying Engineer’s qualifications for the require-
member, speaker, chairman, etc.) indicating the nature
ments of XXIII-1220 shall be demonstrated as described
of his participation
in 1.1.1 and 1.1.2.
1.1.2 Chartered, Registered, or Licensed Engineer.
1.1.1 Registered Professional Engineer. The qualifi-
The qualification requirements for the Chartered, Regis-
cation requirements for the Certifying Engineer who is a
tered, or Licensed Engineer shall be in accordance with
Registered Professional Engineer shall be in accordance
the requirements of XXIII-1223 and shall, as a minimum,
with the requirements of XXIII-1222 and shall, as a mini-
be demonstrated as follows:
mum, be demonstrated as follows:
(a) an Engineer chartered, registered, or licensed by a
(a) PE registration in one or more states of the United jurisdictional authority responsible for this function, shall
States or provinces of Canada shall be documented on re- be documented on records that, as a minimum, include
cords that, as a minimum, include
(1) Engineer’s identification
(1) PE’s identification (2) jurisdiction of charter, registration, or license
(2) state or province of registration (3) evidence of charter, registration, or license, such
(3) registration number as a certificate number
(4) expiration date (4) expiration date of charter, registration, or license
(b) The 4 yr of varied application experience, including (b) The 4 yr of varied application experience, including
2 yr in his specialty field(s), should be documented in a 2 yr in his specialty field(s), shall be documented in a re-
resume describing the Certifying Engineer's Code experi- sume describing the Certifying Engineer’s Code experi-
ence, including places and dates. ence, including places and dates.
(c) In order for the Certifying Engineer to keep current (c) In order for the Certifying Engineer to keep current
his knowledge of the Code requirements and to continue his knowledge of the Code requirements and to continue
his professional development in his specialty field(s), as his professional development in his specialty field(s), as
required by this Appendix, he shall, in the 36‐month per- required by this Appendix, he shall, in the 36‐month per-
iod preceding the date of qualification, have performed iod preceding the date of qualification, have performed
Code activities requiring certification in his specialty Code activities requiring certification in his specialty
field(s), or have been engaged in the application of Code field(s), or have been engaged in the application of Code

155
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

requirements to an equivalent extent, but not necessarily in‐house courses or courses presented by others. Training
including Certification. Alternatively, he may have com- shall be documented on appropriate records that, as a
pleted two or more of the following: minimum, include
(1) taught or attended an appropriate course or (1) attendee’s identification
training program (2) instructor’s name and affiliation
(2) taught or attended an appropriate seminar (3) outline or description of course or seminar
(3) attended an ASME or ASME/ACI Code meeting (4) date and duration of course or seminar
(4) attended a technical society meeting related to
(d) Written examination of the Certifying Engineer in
his specialty field
his specialty field(s), to verify his knowledge of the Code
(d) The Certifying Engineer’s participation in these ac-
as required by this Appendix. The examination shall be
tivities shall be documented in appropriate records that,
developed and/or administered either in‐house or by
as a minimum, include
others. As a minimum, the examination shall cover the
(1) Certifying Engineer’s identification
general and working knowledge specified in Supplement
(2) description of Code activities performed 2, as applicable. The exam shall consist of at least 20 ques-
(3) course or training program description, duration, tions. Examinations shall be documented on appropriate
and date completed records that, as a minimum, include
(4) seminar description, duration, and date attended
(1) attendee’s identification
(5) ASME or ASME/ACI Code meeting(s) and date(s)
(2) examiner’s name and affiliation
attended
(6) technical society meeting(s) and date(s) attended (3) outline or description of examination
(7) the Certifying Engineer’s function (i.e., attendee, (4) date and results of the examination
member, speaker, chairman, etc.) indicating the nature
of his participation. Supplement 2 provides requirements
regarding knowledge of the Code that the Certifying Engi- SUPPLEMENT 2 MANDATORY ð17Þ
neer should have in each specialty field. REQUIREMENTS FOR
ESTABLISHING ASME CODE
1.2 CODE KNOWLEDGE KNOWLEDGE
Supplement 2 describes knowledge of the Code that the
Certifying Engineer shall have in each specialty field. The This Supplement provides requirements for establish-
Certifying Engineer’s qualifications regarding knowledge ing the degree of Code knowledge required by the Certify-
of the Code shall be verified and documented by one, or ing Engineer in his specialty field. In the paragraphs that
more, of (a), (b), (c), or (d). follow, the degree of knowledge required by the Certify-
(a) The Owner or his designee, Designer, N Certificate ing Engineer of the requirements of the Code pertaining
Holder, or N3 Certificate Holder, as applicable, upon re- to his specialty field is indicated by the terminology “gen-
view of the experience record of the Certifying Engineer, eral knowledge” and “working knowledge.”
declares in writing that As used in this Supplement, “general knowledge” sig-
(1) the Certifying Engineer’s knowledge of the Code nifies having sufficient acquaintance with the Code to be
in his specialty field meets the requirements, and conversant with other persons involved in its applica-
(2) the Certifying Engineer’s experience record re- tions, and to make prudent judgments in the application
flects successful performance of the applicable Code ac- of Code requirements.
tivities in connection with the construction of ASME As used in this Supplement, “working knowledge” sig-
Code items. nifies understanding by prior customary involvement in
(b) Another Certifying Engineer previously qualified to a specialty field of the Code requirements and of the prin-
this Appendix, designated by the Owner or his designee, ciples on which the Code rules are based, to the extent
Designer, N Certificate Holder, or N3 Certificate Holder, that the Certifying Engineer may apply or direct others
as applicable, and familiar with the requirements of the in the application of the requirements.
Code, after reviewing the qualifications of the Certifying In this sense, “working knowledge” implies a more
Engineer to be qualified, attests in writing that the Certi- thorough understanding of the Code requirements and
fying Engineer’s knowledge of the Code in his specialty the ability to apply them than does “general knowledge”
field(s) meets the requirements of this Appendix. of the Code.
(c) Attendance of the Certifying Engineer at appropri- The degree of knowledge in the various areas of the
ate courses or seminars that provide instruction in the Code cited in Tables S2-1 through S2-6 is based upon
Code for his specialty field(s) to import knowledge of the more common Code items and activities. There may
the Code required by this Appendix. Training shall be be special items or activities for which the degree of
scheduled as required by this Appendix, at a frequency knowledge in a specific Code area must be more detailed
consistent with significant changes to the Code in his spe- than shown in the applicable table, or may require knowl-
cialty field(s). Training may be accomplished by attending edge of specific Code areas that are not cited.

156
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

In the following tables, the degree of knowledge re-

quired by the Certifying Engineer of the various require-
ments of the Code pertinent to his specialty field is
indicated by the letter G for “general knowledge” and
the letter W for “working knowledge.”

Table S2-1
Design Specification — Divisions 1 Through 3 and 5
Division 5
Division 1 Division 2 Division 3 Nonmetallic CSS Remaining Division 5
NCA-1000 W NCA-1000 W WA-1000 W HAB-1000 W HAA-NCA-1000 W
[Note (1)]
NCA-2000 W NCA-2000 W WA-2000 W HAB-2000 W HAA-NCA-2000 W
NCA- 3100 W NCA-3100 W WA-3100 W HAB-3000 W NCA-3100 W
NCA-3200 W NCA-3200 W WA-3300 W HAB-4000 G NCA-3200 W
NCA-3300 W [Note (2)] NCA-3300 W [Note (2)] WA-3400 W HAB-5000 G NCA-3300 W [Note (2)]
NCA-3400 W [Note (2)] NCA-3400 W [Note (2)] WA-3800 G HAB-7000 G NCA-3400 W [Note (2)]
NCA-3500 W [Note (2)] NCA-3500 W [Note (2)] WA-4000 W HAB-8000 G NCA-3500 W [Note (2)]
NCA-3600 W NCA-3600 W WA-5000 G … … NCA-3600 W
NCA-3700 G NCA-3700 G WA-7000 G HHA-1000 W NCA-3700 G
NCA-3800 G NCA-3800 G WA-8000 W HHA-2000 G NCA-3800 G
NCA-3900 G [Note (2)] NCA-3900 G [Note (2)] … … HHA-3000 G NCA-3900 G [Note (2)]
NCA-4000 G NCA-4000 G WX-1000 W HHA-4000 G NCA-4000 G
NCA-5000 G NCA-5000 G WX-2000 G HHA-5000 G NCA-5000 G
NCA-6000 G NCA-6000 G WX-3000 W … … NCA-6000 G
NCA-7000 G NCA-7000 W WX-4000 G … … HAA-NCA-7000 G
NCA-8000 G NCA-8000 G WX-5000 G … … HAA-NCA-8000 G
WX-6000 W … … … …

NX-1000 W CC-1000 W … … … … HX-1000 W

NX-2100 G CC-2000 G … … … … HX-2000 G
NX-2300 G CC-3000 G … … … … HX-3000 G [Note (2)]
NX-2500 G CC-4000 G … … … … HX-4000 G
NX-2600 G CC-5000 G … … … … HX-5000 G
NX-3100 G CC-6000 G … … … … HX-6000 W [Note (2)]
NX-3200 G … … … … … … … …
NX-3300 G [Note (2)] … … … … … … HFA-HG-1000 W [Notes (2), (3)]
NX-3400 G [Note (2)] … … … … … … NF-HG-2000 G [Notes (2), (3)]
NX-3500 G [Note (2)] … … … … … … NF-HG-3000 G [Notes (2), (3)]
NX-3600 G [Note (2)] … … … … … … NF-HG-4000 G [Notes (2), (3)]
NX-3700 G [Note (2)] … … … … … … NF-HG-5000 G [Notes (2), (3)]
NX-3800 G [Note (2)] … … … … … … … …
NX-3900 G [Note (2)] … … … … … … … …
NX-4100 G … … … … … … … …
NX-4210 G … … … … … … … …
NX-4220 G … … … … … … … …
NX-4240 G … … … … … … … …
NX-4620 G … … … … … … … …
NX-5100 G … … … … … … … …
NX-5200 G … … … … … … … …
NX-6000 W [Note (2)] … … … … … … … …

157
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table S2-1
Design Specification — Divisions 1 Through 3 and 5 (Cont'd)
Division 5
Division 1 Division 2 Division 3 Nonmetallic CSS Remaining Division 5

NF-NG-1000 W [Note (2)] … … … … … … … …

NF-NG-2100 G [Note (2)] … … … … … … … …
NF-NG-2300 G [Note (2)] … … … … … … … …
NF-NG-3000 G [Note (2)] … … … … … … … …
NF-NG-4100 G [Note (2)] … … … … … … … …
NF-NG-4200 G [Note (2)] … … … … … … … …
NF-NG-5000 G [Note (2)] … … … … … … … …

Legend:
CSS = Core Support Structures NX = NB/NC/ND/NE, as applicable
G = General Knowledge W = Working Knowledge
HX = HB/HC, as applicable (including Subparts A and B), as well as WX = WB/WC/WD, as applicable
references to Subsections NB and NC rules, respectively

NOTES:
(1) Subsection HA, Subpart A references Subsection NCA for general requirements.
(2) As applicable.
(3) Subsections HF and HG (Subparts A and B) rules as well as references to Subsections NF and NG rules, respectively.

Table S2-2
Design Report — Divisions 1, 3, and 5 (Excluding Nonmetallic CSS)
Division 1 Division 3 Division 5
NCA-1000 G WA-1000 G HAA-NCA-1000 G
[Note (1)]
NCA-2000 G WA-2000 G HAA-NCA-2000 G
NCA-3100 G WA-3100 W NCA-3100 G
NCA-3200 G WA-3300 W NCA-3200 G
NCA-3300 W [Note (2)] WA-3400 G NCA-3300 W [Note (2)]
NCA-3400 W [Note (2)] WA-3800 W NCA-3400 W [Note (2)]
NCA-3500 W [Note (2)] WA-4000 W NCA-3500 W [Note (2)]
NCA-3600 G WA-5000 G NCA-3600 G
NCA-3700 G WA-7000 G NCA-3700 G
NCA-3800 G WA-8000 G NCA-3800 G
NCA-3900 G … … NCA-3900 G
NCA-4000 G WX-1000 W NCA-4000 G
NCA-7000 G WX-2000 W HAA-NCA-7000 G
NCA-8000 G WX-3000 W HAA-NCA-8000 G
WX-4000 G … …
NX-1000 W WX-5000 G HX-1000 W
NX-2100 W WX-6000 W HX-2000 W
NX-2300 W … … HX-3000 W [Note (2)]
NX-2500 W [Note (2)] … … HX-4000 G
NX-2600 G … … HX-5000 G
NX-3100 W … … HX-6000 G
NX-3200 W [Note (2)] … … … …
NX-3300 W [Note (2)] … … HFA-HG-1000 W [Notes (2), (3)]

158
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table S2-2
Design Report — Divisions 1, 3, and 5 (Excluding Nonmetallic CSS) (Cont'd)
Division 1 Division 3 Division 5
NX-3400 W … … NF-HG-2000 W [Notes (2), (3)]
NX-3500 W [Note (2)] … … NF-HG-3000 W [Notes (2), (3)]
NX-3600 W [Note (2)] … … NF-HG-4000 G [Notes (2), (3)]
NX-3700 W [Note (2)] … … NF-HG-5000 G [Notes (2), (3)]
NX-3800 W [Note (2)] … … … …
NX-3900 W [Note (2)] … … … …
NX-4100 G … … … …
NX-4210 G … … … …
NX-4220 G … … … …
NX-4240 G … … … …
NX-4620 G … … … …
NX-5100 G … … … …
NX-5200 G … … … …
NX-6000 G … … … …
NF-NG-1000 W [Note (2)] … … … …
NF-NG-2100 W [Note (2)] … … … …
NF-NG-2300 W [Note (2)] … … … ...
NF-NG-3000 W [Note (2)] … … … …
NF-NG-4100 G [Note (2)] … … … …
NF-NG-4200 G [Note (2)] … … … …
NF-NG-5000 G [Note (2)] … … … …

Legend:
CSS = Core Support Structures NX = NB/NC/ND/NE, as applicable
G = General Knowledge W = Working Knowledge
HX = HB/HC, as applicable (including Subparts A and B), as WX = WB/WC/WD, as applicable
well as references to Subsections NB and NC rules,
respectively

NOTES:
(1) Subsection HA, Subpart A references Subsection NCA for general requirements.
(2) As applicable.
(3) Subsections HF and HG (Subparts A and B) rules as well as references to Subsections NF and NG rules, respectively.

Table S2-3 ð17Þ

Load Capacity Data Sheet — Divisions 1 and 5
Division 1 Division 5
NCA All G HAA-NCA All [Note (1)] G
NCA-1250 W NCA-1250 W
NCA-2140 W NCA-2140 W
NCA-3550 W NCA-3550 W

NF All G HFA-NF All [Note (2)] G

NF-3100 W NF-3100 W
NF-3200 W NF-3200 W
NF-3300 W [Note (3)] NF-3300 W [Note (3)]
NF-3400 W NF-3400 W
NF-3500 W [Note (3)] NF-3500 W [Note (3)]

159
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table S2-3
Load Capacity Data Sheet — Divisions 1 and 5 (Cont'd)
Division 1 Division 5
NF-3600 W [Note (3)] NF-3600 W [Note (3)]

Mandatory Appendix I G Mandatory Appendix I G

Mandatory Appendix II G [Note (3)] Mandatory Appendix II G [Note (3)]
II-1220 W [Note (3)] II-1220 W [Note (3)]
II-1430 W [Note (3)] II-1430 W [Note (3)]
F-1321 W F-1321 W [Note (3)]
F-1370 W F-1370 W [Note (3)]

Legend:
G = General Knowledge W = Working Knowledge

NOTES:
(1) Subsection HA, Subpart A references Subsection NCA for general requirements.
(2) Subsection HF, Subpart A references Subsection NF for rules.
(3) As applicable.

Table S2-4
Fabrication Specification — Division 3
Division 3
WA-1000 W
WA-2000 W
WA-3100 W
WA-3300 W
WA-3400 W
WA-3800 W
WA-4000 W
WA-5000 G
WA-7000 G
WA-8000 W

WX-1000 W
WX-2000 W
WX-3000 W
WX-4000 W
WX-5000 W
WX-6000 W

Legend:
G = General Knowledge WX = WB/WC/WD, as
W = Working Knowledge applicable

160
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table S2-5
Overpressure Protection Report — Divisions 1, 2, and 5
Division 1 Division 2 Division 5
NCA-1000 G NCA-1000 G HAA-NCA-1000 G
[Note (1)]
NCA-2000 W NCA-2000 W HAA-NCA-2000 W
NCA-3100 G NCA-3100 G NCA-3100 G
NCA-3200 G NCA-3200 G NCA-3200 G
NCA-3500 G NCA-3500 G NCA-3500 G
NCA-3600 G NCA-3600 G NCA-3600 G
NCA-4000 G NCA-4000 G NCA-4000 G
NCA-7000 G NCA-7000 G HAA-NCA-7000 G

NX-1000 G CC-1000 G HX-1000 G

NX-3110 W CC-3100 G HX-3110 W
NX-3220 G CC-3200 W HX-3200 G
NX-3230 G CC-6100 G HX-3300 G
NX-3414 G CC-6211 G HX-3400 G
NX-3521 G CC-7000 W HX-3500 G
NX-3621 G … … HX-3600 G
NX-6200 G … … HX-6000 G
NX-6300 G … … HX-7000 W
NX-7000 W … … … …

Legend:
G = General Knowledge NX = NB/NC/ND/NE, as applicable
HX = HB/HC, as applicable (including Subparts A and B), as W = Working Knowledge
well as references to Subsections NB and NC rules,
respectively

NOTE:
(1) Subsection HA, Subpart A references Subsection NCA for general requirements.

Table S2-6
Construction Specification, Design Drawings, and Design Report — Divisions 2 and 5
(Nonmetallic CSS)
Division 2 Division 5
Article/ Construction Design Article/ Construction Design
Subarticle Specification Drawings Design Report Subarticle Specification Drawings Design Report
NCA-1000 W W W HAB-1000 W W W
NCA-2000 W W W HAB-2000 W W W
NCA-3100 W W W HAB-3000 W W W
NCA-3200 W W W HAB-4000 W G W
NCA-3300 W W W HAB-5000 G G G
NCA-3400 W W W HAB-7000 G G G
NCA-3500 G G G HAB-8000 G G G
NCA-3600 G G G … … … …
NCA-3700 G G G HHA-1000 W W W
NCA-3800 W G G HHA-2000 W G W
NCA-3900 W G G HHA-3000 W W W

161
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table S2-6
Construction Specification, Design Drawings, and Design Report — Divisions 2 and 5
(Nonmetallic CSS) (Cont'd)
Division 2 Division 5
Article/ Construction Design Article/ Construction Design
Subarticle Specification Drawings Design Report Subarticle Specification Drawings Design Report
NCA-4000 W G W HHA-4000 W W W
NCA-5000 G G G HHA-5000 W W W
NCA-7000 W W W HHA-8000 W G G
NCA-8000 G G G … … … …

CC-1000 W W W … … … …
CC-2000 W G W … … … …
CC-3100 W W W … … … …
CC-3200 G G W … … … …
CC-3300 G W W … … … …
CC-3400 G W W … … … …
CC-3500 W W W … … … …
CC-3600 W W W … … … …
CC-3700 W W W … … … …
CC-3800 W W W … … … …
CC-4100 W W W … … … …
CC-4200 W W G … … … …
CC-4300 W W G … … … …
CC-4400 W W G … … … …
CC-4500 W W G … … … …
CC-5000 W W W … … … …
CC-6000 W G G … … ... …
CC-7000 W G G … … … …
CC-8000 W G G … … … …

Legend:
CSS = Core Support Structures W = Working Knowledge
G = General Knowledge

162
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ð17Þ SUPPLEMENT 3 MANDATORY (b) signature of the Certifying Engineer

CERTIFICATION (c) date of signature
REQUIREMENTS (d) stamp or seal of the Certifying Engineer, applied, if
required, by the issuing entity
This Supplement provides the minimum requirements (e) registration number or identification of the Certify-
for Certification Statements1 for any Design Specification, ing Engineer
Design Report, Overpressure Protection Report, Con- (f) entity issuing the certification, registration, or li-
struction Specification, or Fabrication Specification, certi- cense of the Certifying Engineer
fied by a Certifying Engineer under the provisions of (g) Applicable ASME Edition and, if applicable,
Section III. Addenda
(h) document type and unique identifier, including re-
3.1 MINIMUM CERTIFICATION STATEMENT1 vision being certified
REQUIREMENTS
Certification Statements1 for any Design Specification,
Design Report, Overpressure Protection Report, Con-
struction Specification, or Fabrication Specification, certi-
fied by a Certifying Engineer under the provisions of
Section III, shall include the following information as a
minimum:
(a) identification of the Certifying Engineer

163
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ð17Þ SUPPLEMENT 4 NONMANDATORY SAMPLE STATEMENTS

Form S4-1
Design Specification (Div. 1, 2, and 5)
CERTIFICATION

I, the undersigned, being a Certifying Engineer competent in the applicable field of design and
related nuclear facility requirements relative to this Design Specification, certify that to the best
of my knowledge and belief it is correct and complete with respect to the Design and Service
Conditions given and provides a complete basis for construction in accordance with NCA-3250
and other applicable requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III,
Division , Edition with Addenda (if applicable) up to and including
.
The Specification and Revision being certified is:

Certified by Certifying Engineer

Registration No. Registration Entity
Date

Form S4-2
Design Report
1
CERTIFICATION

I, the undersigned, being a Certifying Engineer competent in the applicable field of design
and using the certified Design Specification and the drawings identified below as a basis for
design, do hereby certify that to the best of my knowledge and belief the Design Report is
complete and accurate and complies with the design requirements of the ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code, Section III, Division , Edition with Addenda (if applicable)
up to and including .

Design Specification and Revision:

Drawings and Revision:

Design Report and Revision:

Certified by Certifying Engineer

Registration No. Registration Entity
Date

1
Similar statement may also be used for certification of Load Capacity Data Sheet when supplied in lieu of
Design Report (NCA-3551).

164
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Form S4-3
Overpressure Protection Report (Div. 1, 2, and 5)
CERTIFICATION

I, the undersigned, being a Certifying Engineer competent in the applicable field of design and
overpressure protection requirements, do hereby certify that to the best of my knowledge and belief
the Overpressure Protection Report complies with the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code, Section III, Division , Edition with Addenda (if applicable) up to and
including .

Overpressure Protection Report and Revision:

Design Specification and Revision:

Certified by Certifying Engineer

Registration No. Registration Entity
Date

Form S4-4
Design Specification (Div. 3)
CERTIFICATION

I, the undersigned, being a Certifying Engineer competent in the applicable field of Division 3
design requirements relative to this Design Specification, certify that to the best of my
knowledge and belief it is correct and complete with respect to the Design and Operating
Conditions given and provides a complete basis for construction in accordance with WA-3351
and other applicable requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III,
Division 3, Edition with Addenda (if applicable) up to and including .

The Specification and Revision being certified is:

Certified by Certifying Engineer

Registration No. Registration Entity
Date

165
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Form S4-5
Fabrication Specification (Div. 3)
CERTIFICATION

I, the undersigned, being a Certifying Engineer competent in the applicable field of Division 3
fabrication requirements relative to this Fabrication Specification, certify that to the best of my
knowledge and belief it is correct and complete with respect to the Design and Operating
Conditions given and provides a complete basis for construction in accordance with WA-3361
and other applicable requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III,
Division 3, Edition with Addenda (if applicable) up to and including .

Design Specification and Revision:

Fabrication Specification and Revision:

Certified by Certifying Engineer

Registration No. Registration Entity
Date

Form S4-6
Construction Specification (Div. 2)
CERTIFICATION

I, the undersigned, being a Certifying Engineer competent in the applicable field of Division 2
construction requirements relative to this Construction Specification, certify that to the best of
my knowledge and belief it is correct and complete with respect to the Design and Operating
Conditions given and provides a complete basis for construction in accordance with NCA-3360
and other applicable requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III,
Division 2, Edition with Addenda (if applicable) up to and including .

Design Specification and Revision:

Construction Specification and Revision:

Certified by Certifying Engineer

Registration No. Registration Entity
Date

166
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

MANDATORY APPENDIX XXIV

STANDARD UNITS FOR USE IN EQUATIONS

Table XXIV-1000
Standard Units for Use in Equations
Quantity U.S. Customary Units SI Units
Linear dimensions (e.g., length, height, thickness, radius, diameter) inches (in.) millimeters (mm)
Area square inches (in.2) square millimeters (mm2)
Volume cubic inches (in.3) cubic millimeters (mm3)
Section modulus cubic inches (in.3) cubic millimeters (mm3)
Moment of inertia of section inches4 (in.4) millimeters4 (mm4)
Mass (weight) pounds mass (lbm) kilograms (kg)
Force (load) pounds force (lbf) newtons (N)
Bending moment inch‐pounds (in.-lb) newton‐millimeters (N·mm)
Pressure, stress, stress intensity, and modulus of elasticity pounds per square inch (psi) megapascals (MPa)
Energy (e.g., Charpy impact values) foot‐pounds (ft-lb) joules (J)
Temperature degrees Fahrenheit (°F) degrees Celsius (°C)
Absolute temperature Rankine (°R) kelvin (K)
Fracture toughness ksi square root inches ( ) MPa square root meters ( )
Angle degrees or radians degrees or radians
Boiler capacity Btu/hr watts (W)

167
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

MANDATORY APPENDIX XXV

ASME-PROVIDED MATERIAL STRESS–STRAIN DATA

ARTICLE XXV-1000
INTRODUCTION

XXV-1100 STRESS–STRAIN DATA exceedance probability) associated with the strain-based

acceptance criteria of Nonmandatory Appendix FF are
It is recognized that ASME-specified material property still under development. Until these data become avail-
data would make implementation of the strain-based ac- able, the user shall develop the necessary material data
ceptance criteria easier for many users. However, at this based on tensile testing (see Nonmandatory Appendix
time, the ASME true stress–strain curves (reflecting mini- EE, EE-1222), and their use shall be justified in the final
mum yield and ultimate tensile strength values) and the Design Report.
true uniform and fracture strain limits (reflecting a 98%

168
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

MANDATORY APPENDIX XXVI

RULES FOR CONSTRUCTION OF CLASS 3 BURIED
POLYETHYLENE PRESSURE PIPING

ARTICLE XXVI-1000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

XXVI-1100 SCOPE (c) A Certificate Holder may furnish material when sta-
ted in the scope of his certificate. In this case, a Quality
(a) This Appendix contains rules for the construction of System Certificate is not required, nor is the user of the
Class 3 polyethylene pressure piping systems. The scope material required to survey, qualify, or audit such a Certi-
is limited to buried portions of Class 3 service water or ficate Holder.
buried portions of Class 3 cooling water systems, consist-
(d) The Certificate Holder shall be responsible for sur-
ing of PE4710 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) materi-
veying, qualification, and auditing of the Polyethylene Ma-
als at maximum Design and Service Levels A, B, and C
terial Organization in accordance with NCA-3970.
temperatures of 140°F (60°C), and a maximum tempera-
(e) The survey and audit of the Polyethylene Material
ture of 176°F (80°C) for Service Level D, with tempera-
Organization shall establish that the Quality System Pro-
tures not exceeding those for which allowable stresses
gram conforms to the Certificate Holder’s quality pro-
are provided in this Appendix.
gram requirements.
(b) Terms relating to polyethylene as used in this
(f) Satisfactory completion of the survey and audit
Appendix are defined in Article XXVI-9000.
shall allow the Polyethylene Material Organization to sup-
(c) All applicable requirements of Subsection ND shall
ply material to the Certificate Holder for a period of 3 yr.
be met unless modified by this Appendix.
After the 3-yr period, an audit shall be performed to en-
sure continued program maintenance.
XXVI-1200 QUALIFICATION OF (g) The Certificate Holder shall perform any of the func-
POLYETHYLENE MATERIAL tions specified by his respective Quality Assurance Pro-
ORGANIZATIONS gram that are not performed by the Polyethylene
Material Organization. It may elect to perform any other
The polyethylene material shall be procured in accor- quality program functions, which would normally be the
dance with the requirements of NCA-3970 and this responsibility of the Polyethylene Material Organization.
Appendix. These functions shall be clearly defined in the Certificate
Holder’s Quality Assurance Program.
(h) The Certificate Holder shall make all necessary pro-
XXVI-1300 CERTIFICATE HOLDER
visions so that his Authorized Inspection Agency can per-
RESPONSIBILITIES form the inspections necessary to comply with this
(a) The Certificate Holder shall comply with the re- Appendix.
quirements of NCA-3970. (i) In accordance with NCA-8120(b), a Certificate of
(b) The responsible Certificate Holder shall assure that Authorization may be issued by the Society to an organi-
the material complies with the Design Specification and zation certifying joining by fusing in accordance with this
this Appendix. Appendix.

169
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE XXVI-2000
MATERIALS

XXVI-2100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR XXVI-2220 SPECIFIC COMPOUND

MATERIALS REQUIREMENTS
ð17Þ XXVI-2110 SCOPE XXVI-2221 Requirements for Certification of
Polyethylene Compound
All polyethylene material shall conform to the require-
ments of this Article. (a) General
(a) Polyethylene material shall be selected from speci- (1) Polyethylene compound shall comply with, and
fications listed in Supplement XXVI-I and shall be be certified in accordance with, this Article and Table
PE4710 HDPE with material properties as specified in XXVI-2221-1.
XXVI-2200. (2) The required value for each property shall be as
(b) All metallic pressure boundary materials shall con- specified in Table XXVI-2221-1.
form to the requirements of Article ND-2000. (3) The standard for determining the required value
for properties shall be as specified in Table XXVI-2221-1.
XXVI-2120 DETERIORATION OF MATERIAL IN
(4) The test method for determination of the re-
SERVICE
quired value for the physical property shall be as speci-
Consideration of deterioration of material during ser- fied in Table XXVI-2221-1.
vice is generally outside the scope of this Appendix. It (b) Polyethylene compound used for the manufacture
shall be the responsibility of the Certificate Holder to se- of polyethylene material shall meet the requirements of
lect material suitable for the conditions stated in the De- the polyethylene compound manufacturer and Table
sign Specifications, with specific attention being given to XXVI-2221-1.
the effects of service conditions on the properties of the (c) Polyethylene compound shall be black except as
material. provided in XXVI-2231(b).
(d) Polyethylene compound is the combination of nat-
XXVI-2200 POLYETHYLENE COMPOUND ural compound and pigment concentrate compound as
AND MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS follows:
(1) When polyethylene compound is combined by
XXVI-2210 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS the Polyethylene Compound Manufacturer, polyethylene
(a) Natural compound, pigment concentrate com- compound is the polyethylene source material.
pound, and polyethylene compound and material shall (2) When polyethylene compound is combined by
conform to the requirements of this Article. the Polyethylene Material Manufacturer, natural com-
(b) Conformance with ASTM Standards referenced in pound and pigment concentrate compound are the poly-
Supplement XXVI-I and herein shall be limited as speci- ethylene source materials.
fied in this Article. In the event of conflict between a refer- (3) When polyethylene compound is combined by
enced standard and this Article, the requirements of this the Polyethylene Material Manufacturer, the Natural
Article shall take precedence. Compound Manufacturer shall provide the Polyethylene
(c) Natural compound, pigment concentrate com- Material Manufacturer with a formulation that specifies
pound, and polyethylene compound and material shall the weight ratio (proportions) of natural and pigment
be marked in accordance with the marking requirements concentrate compound and with processing equipment
in Article XXVI-8000 and the applicable ASTM Standard. setting recommendations that produce polyethylene com-
pound in accordance with Table XXVI-2221-1.
(e) Polyethylene compound shall have an independent
listing that is published in PPI TR-4, Table I.A.13. The in-
dependent listing shall identify the following:
(1) a standard grade hydrostatic design basis (HDB)
rating of at least 1,600 psi (11.03 MPa) at 73°F (23°C)
(2) a standard grade HDB rating of at least 1,000 psi
(6.90 MPa) at 140°F (60°C)

170
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table XXVI-2221-1
Certification Requirements for Polyethylene Compound
No. Property, Units Required Value Requirement Standard Test Method
1 Density, g/cm3 0.956 to 0.968 with 2 to 3 wt.% ASTM D3350 ASTM D1505, ASTM D792, or
carbon black ASTM D4883
0.947 to 0.955 without carbon
black or pigment
2 High load melt flow rate, g/10 min. 4 to 20 Polyethylene Compound ASTM D1238, Condition 190/21.6
Manufacturer Quality
Program
3 Carbon black, wt.% 2 to 3 ASTM D3350 ASTM D4218 or ASTM D1603
4 Slow crack growth resistance (parent >2,000 ASTM D3350 ASTM F1473 at 2.4 MPa and 80°C in
material), hr air
5 Thermal stability, °F (°C) >428 (>220) ASTM D3350 ASTM D3350
6 Tensile strength at yield, psi (MPa) ≥3,500 (≥24.14) ASTM D3350 ASTM D638, Type IV at 50 mm/min.
(2 in./min.)
7 Tensile elongation at break, % ≥400 ASTM D3350 ASTM D638, Type IV at 50 mm/min.
(2 in./min.)
8 HDB at 73°F (23°C), psi (MPa) 1,600 (11.03) ASTM D2837, PPI TR-3, and ASTM D2837, PPI TR-3, and
PPI TR-4 PPI TR-4
9 HDB at 140°F (60°C), psi (MPa) 1,000 (6.90) ASTM D2837, PPI TR-3, and ASTM D2837, PPI TR-3, and
PPI TR-4 PPI TR-4
10 HDS for water at 73°F (23°C), psi 1,000 (6.90) ASTM D2837, PPI TR-3, and ASTM D2837, PPI TR-3, and
(MPa) PPI TR-4 PPI TR-4
11 Thermoplastic pipe materials PE4710 Listed in PPI TR-4 N/A
designation code

GENERAL NOTE: Only SI units are provided in Table XXVI-2221-1 when the applicable ASTM Standards do not provide U.S. Customary
units.

(3) a hydrostatic design stress (HDS) rating of at (g) The Certificate of Analysis (C of A) Report shall
least 1,000 psi (6.90 MPa) for water at 73°F (23°C) identify the trade name or designation assigned to the
(4) standard grade HDB ratings and HDS ratings shall polyethylene compound by the Polyethylene Compound
be determined in accordance with PPI TR-3, Parts A, D, Manufacturer that is published in PPI TR-4.
and F (h) The Certified Polyethylene Test Report (CPTR) shall
(5) a material designation of PE4710 in accordance identify the trade name for the polyethylene compound
with PPI TR-4, Table I.A.13 assigned by the Polyethylene Material Manufacturer that
(6) the unique trade name or designation for the is published in PPI TR-4, Table I.A.13, and shall identify
compound the following:
(7) t h e P o l y e t h y l e n e N a t u r a l C o m p o u n d (1) the C of A Report trade names for the natural
Manufacturer compound and the pigment concentrate compound, or
(f) The Polyethylene Material Manufacturer of poly- (2) the C of A Report trade name for the polyethylene
ethylene pipe shall have a dependent listing for black compound
polyethylene compound that is published in PPI TR-4, (i) If specified, color polyethylene compound shall con-
Table I.A.13. The dependent listing shall identify the tain color and ultraviolet (UV) stabilization in accordance
following: with ASTM D3350 Code E. Color polyethylene compound
(1) a standard grade HDB rating of at least 1,600 psi color and UV stabilization duration requirements shall be
(11.03 MPa) at 73°F (23°C) specified in the Design Specification. Per XXVI-2231(b),
color polyethylene compound shall be used only for op-
(2) a standard grade HDB rating of at least 1,000 psi
tional color stripes on polyethylene material in the pipe
(6.90 MPa) at 140°F (60°C)
product form.
(3) a HDS rating of at least 1,000 psi (6.90 MPa) for
water at 73°F (23°C)
(4) standard grade HDB and HDS ratings in accor- XXVI-2222 Natural Compound
dance with PPI TR-3, Parts A, D, and F (a) Natural compound shall meet requirements speci-
(5) a unique trade name or designation to the poly- fied by the Natural Compound Manufacturer.
ethylene compound that is published in PPI TR-4, Table (b) Natural compound shall be combined with pigment
I.A.13 concentrate compound in accordance with XXVI-2221(d).

171
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(c) The Natural Compound Manufacturer shall assign a stripes shall not project above the pipe outside surface
unique trade name or designation to the natural and shall not be covered in whole or in part by black pipe
compound. material.
(2) Where natural compound and pigment concen-
XXVI-2223 Pigment Concentrate Compound trate compound are combined by the Polyethylene
Material Manufacturer, the Polyethylene Material Manu-
(a) Black pigment concentrate compound shall meet re- facturer shall use the same natural compound with black
quirements specified by the Natural Compound pigment concentrate compound and with color pigment
Manufacturer. concentrate compound if optional color stripes are coex-
(b) Black pigment concentrate compound shall be com- truded into the pipe outside surface.
bined with natural compound in accordance with (3) Where black polyethylene compound and color
XXVI-2221(d)(3). polyethylene compound are used to extrude pipe with op-
(c) The Pigment Concentrate Compound Manufacturer tional color stripes, coextruded into the outside surface,
shall assign a unique trade name or designation to the the black polyethylene compound and color polyethylene
pigment concentrate compound. compound shall use the same natural compound.
(d) Color pigment concentrate compound shall be in ac- (c) Pipe print line marking shall be applied in accor-
cordance with XXVI-2231(b). dance with ASTM D3035 or ASTM F714 during extrusion
using heated indentation.
ð17Þ XXVI-2230 SPECIFIC MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS (d) Prior to shipment of the pipe, testing for fusibility of
the material shall be performed in accordance with
(a) This subsubarticle identifies and provides the spe- XXVI-2300, unless the Certificate Holder elects to perform
cific requirements applicable to the various product the testing.
forms permitted by this Appendix.
(b) All fabrications produced by fusing shall be pro-
duced by a Certificate Holder, using fusing procedures XXVI-2232 Polyethylene Material — Flange ð17Þ

and fusing machine operators trained and qualified in ac- Adapter

cordance with Section IX and Article XXVI-4000. (a) Flange adapters shall be fabricated from pipe by
(c) All fused joints shall be examined in accordance machining or by a molding process using polyethylene
with Article XXVI-5000. materials meeting the requirements of XXVI-2200.
(d) If a molding process is used, the Product Manufac- (b) The configuration shall be in accordance with
turer shall certify that the material has been volumetri- XXVI-4520.
cally examined to ensure that the material meets the (c) The pressure rating, PR, shall be determined in ac-
workmanship standards of ASTM D3261 or ASTM cordance with XXVI-3132.
F1055, as applicable. The Certificate Holder shall review (d) The dimensions and surface appearance shall be
and approve the examination technique used by the Pro- verified and the pressure rating shall be confirmed by
duct Manufacturer (e.g., radiography, ultrasonics, etc.). testing in accordance with ASTM D3261 or ASTM F2206.
(e) Molded flange adapters shall be certified as meeting
ð17Þ XXVI-2231 Polyethylene Material — Pipe the requirements of XXVI-2230(d).
(f) Prior to shipment of flange adapters, testing for fu-
(a) Polyethylene pipe shall be manufactured in accor-
sibility of the material shall be performed in accordance
dance with this Appendix and ASTM D3035 for sizes
with XXVI-2300, unless the Certificate Holder elects to
smaller than IPS 32 (DN 80) or ASTM F714 for sizes IPS 3
perform the testing.
(DN 80) and larger. Elevated temperature sustained pres-
sure test per ASTM D3035 or ASTM F714 shall be success- XXVI-2232.1 Polyethylene Material — Machined
fully completed at least every 6 months by the pipe Flange Adapter. The polyethylene material used to fabri-
manufacturer during manufacture of pipe supplied in ac- cate flange adapters that are machined from pipe shall
cordance with these requirements. meet the requirements of XXVI-2231.
(b) Pipe shall be black and manufactured by extrusion. XXVI-2232.2 Polyethylene Material — Molded
With the exception of optional color stripes per this sub- Flange Adapter. The polyethylene compound used to
article, black pipe shall contain 2 wt% to 3 wt% carbon manufacture molded flange adapters shall meet the re-
black that is well dispersed through the pipe wall. Sam- quirements of XXVI-2221.
ples shall be taken from pipe and tested in accordance
with ASTM D1603 or ASTM D4218.
(1) Optional color stripes that are coextruded into
XXVI-2233 Polyethylene Material — Mitered ð17Þ

the pipe outside surface are acceptable. The depth of op-

Elbows
tional color stripes into the pipe outside surface shall not (a) The polyethylene material used for mitered elbows
infringe upon minimum wall thickness, t D e s i g n . Color shall be pipe meeting the requirements of XXVI-2231.

172
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(b) The configuration of the mitered elbow shall meet (b) The material used to fabricate reducers that are ma-
the dimensional requirements of the specifications listed chined from pipe shall meet the requirements of
in Supplement XXVI-I and the additional requirements of XXVI-2231.
XXVI-3132.1. (c) The polyethylene compound used to manufacture
(c) Prior to shipment of mitered elbows, testing for fu- molded reducers shall meet the requirements of
sibility of the material shall be performed in accordance XXVI-2221.
with XXVI-2300, unless the Certificate Holder elects to (d) Molded monolithic reducers shall be certified as
perform the testing. meeting the requirements of XXVI-2230(d).
(d) The Data Report Form NM(PE)-2 (Supplement (e) The pressure rating shall be equal to or greater than
XXVI-III) shall be used for this product form. the Design Pressure. The dimensions and surface appear-
ance shall be verified and the pressure rating shall be con-
ð17Þ XXVI-2234 Polyethylene Material — Thrust firmed by testing in accordance with ASTM D3261 or
Collar ASTM F2206.
(a) The configuration shall meet the dimensional re- (f) Prior to shipment, testing for the fusibility of the
quirements of Figure XXVI-2234-1. material shall be performed in accordance with
(b) The Dimension Ratio (DR) shall be equal to or less XXVI-2300, unless the Certificate Holder elects to perform
than that of the attached straight pipe and shall be de- the testing.
signed for joining by fusion to the piping.
(c) The pressure rating shall be equal to or greater than XXVI-2236 Polyethylene Material — ð17Þ
the system Design Pressure. The dimensions and surface Electrofusion Fittings
appearance shall be verified and the pressure rating shall
Machined or molded electrofusion fittings shall be per-
be confirmed by testing in accordance with ASTM D3261
mitted and shall comply with the following requirements:
or ASTM F2206.
(a) The configuration shall meet the dimensional re-
(d) Fabrication fusing shall meet the requirements of
quirements of ASTM F1055 as listed in Supplement
Article XXVI-4000.
XXVI-I.
(e) Prior to shipment of thrust collars, testing for fusi-
(b) The material used to fabricate electrofusion fittings
bility of the material shall be performed in accordance
that are machined from pipe shall meet the requirements
with XXVI-2300, unless the Certificate Holder elects to
of XXVI-2231.
perform the testing.
(c) The polyethylene compound used to manufacture
(f) The Data Report Form NM(PE)-2 (Supplement
molded electrofusion fittings shall meet the requirements
XXVI-III) shall be used for thrust collars fabricated by
of XXVI-2221.
fusing.
(d) Injection-molded fittings shall be certified as meet-
XXVI-2234.1 Polyethylene Material — Fabricated ing the requirements of XXVI-2230(d).
Thrust Collars. The polyethylene pipe material used to (e) The pressure rating shall be equal to or greater than
fabricate thrust collars by fusing shall meet the require- the system Design Pressure. The dimensions and surface
ments of XXVI-2231. appearance shall be verified and the pressure rating shall
XXVI-2234.2 Polyethylene Material — Machined be confirmed by testing in accordance with ASTM F1055.
Thrust Collars. The polyethylene pipe material used to
fabricate thrust collars by machining shall meet the re- XXVI-2237 Polyethylene Material — Fabricated ð17Þ
quirements of XXVI-2231. Fittings (Other)
XXVI-2234.3 Polyethylene Material —Molded Fabricated equal outlet mitered tees, equal outlet mi-
Thrust Collars. tered lateral wyes, and concentric fabricated reducers
(a) The polyethylene compound used to manufacture shall be permitted and shall be in accordance with the fol-
molded thrust collars shall meet the requirements of lowing requirements:
XXVI-2221. (a) The fitting shall be fabricated from polyethylene
(b) Molded thrust collars shall be certified by the man- pipe with the same or lower DR than the attached pipe
ufacturer as meeting the requirements of XXVI-2230(d). and shall meet the requirements of XXVI-2231.
(b) The configuration shall meet the dimensional re-
ð17Þ XXVI-2235 Polyethylene Material — Concentric quirements of the specifications listed in Supplement
Monolithic Reducers XXVI-I.
Machined or molded concentric monolithic reducers (c) The pressure rating shall be equal to or greater than
shall be permitted and shall comply with the following the system Design Pressure. The dimensions and surface
requirements: appearance shall be verified and the pressure rating shall
(a) The configuration shall meet the dimensional re- be confirmed by testing in accordance with ASTM F2206.
quirements of the specifications listed in Supplement (d) All fabrication fusing shall meet the requirements of
XXVI-I. Article XXVI-4000.

173
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ð17Þ Figure XXVI-2234-1

Thrust Collars

174
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure XXVI-2234-1
Thrust Collars (Cont'd)

r 3 ′min in. (mm) IPS (DN)

1
/8 (3) ≤11/4 (32)
3
/16 (5) 11/2 (38)
1
/4 (6) 2 to 3 (50 to 75)
3
/8 (10) 4 to 12 (100 to 300)
1
/2 (13) 14 to 42 (360 to 1,070)
3
/4 (19) 48 to 65 (1,200 to 1,650)

GENERAL NOTE: h hub (minimum) = 0.5t ′; h hub (maximum) = 0.8t ′; w m i n = 1t ′ .

(e) Prior to shipment, testing for fusibility of the mate- XXVI-2300 POLYETHYLENE MATERIAL
rial shall be performed in accordance with XXVI-2300, un- FUSING VERIFICATION TESTING
less the Certificate Holder elects to perform the testing.
XXVI-2310 GENERAL ð17Þ
(f) The Data Report Form NM(PE)-2 (Supplement
XXVI-III) shall be used for these product forms. (a) All polyethylene material product forms shall be
tested for compliance with the Standard Fusing Proce-
dure Specification (SFPS) of Section IX, QF-220, and as
ð17Þ XXVI-2238 Polyethylene Material — Molded specified herein.
Fittings (Other) (b) The polyethylene materials tested shall be from the
Injection molded fittings shall be permitted and shall be same Polyethylene Material Manufacturer’s manufactur-
in accordance with the following requirements: ing facility using the same method of manufacture as
(a) The polyethylene compound shall meet the require- the polyethylene materials to be used in production.
ments of XXVI-2221. (c) Joint fusibility testing shall include each lot of poly-
ethylene source material to be used in production sup-
(b) The configuration shall meet the dimensional re-
plied by the same or different polyethylene Material
quirements of the specifications listed in Supplement
Manufacturers in all combinations of suppliers and in
XXVI-I.
all diameters and thicknesses to be fused in production.
(c) The fittings shall be certified as meeting the re- (d) All butt-joint testing shall use the same fusing ma-
quirements of XXVI-2230(d). chine make and carriage model to be used for joining
(d) The pressure rating shall be equal to or greater than the materials in production [see XXVI-4321(c)].
the system Design Pressure. The dimensions and surface (e) Joint fusibility testing shall be performed by the
appearance shall be verified and the pressure rating shall Polyethylene Material Manufacturer unless the Owner
be confirmed by testing in accordance with ASTM D3261. or his designee elects to perform the testing.
(e) Prior to shipment of the pipe, testing for fusibility of
the material shall be performed in accordance with
XXVI-2300, unless the Certificate Holder elects to perform
the testing.

175
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(f) All electrofusion testing shall use the same fitting (b) For pipe and fitting specimens IPS 4 (DN 100) and
manufacturer's design and qualified procedure and the larger, no fewer than four specimens shall be removed
same make and model of electrofusion control box to be from fused pipe test coupons at intervals approximately
used in production. 90 deg apart.
(g) Fusibility testing results shall be included with the
CPTR. XXVI-2332 Electrofusion Joints
ð17Þ XXVI-2320 FUSING PARAMETERS FOR TESTING Each completed electrofusion test assembly shall be
tested as follows:
XXVI-2321 Butt-Fusing Verification (a) For pipe and fitting specimens smaller than IPS 12
One joint shall be made at each of the following condi- (DN 300), the assembly shall be tested by crush test in ac-
tions to verify fusibility at the pressure/temperature ex- cordance with Section IX, QF-145.1, and shall meet the ac-
tremes of the fusing procedure: ceptance criteria of Section IX, QF-145.1.4.
(a) interfacial pressure of 90 psi (620 kPa) minimum (b) For pipe and fitting specimens IPS 12 (DN 300) and
and heater temperature of 450°F (232°C) minimum; heat- larger, the assembly shall be tested either by crush test in
er removal (dwell) time kept to a minimum, not to exceed accordance with (a) or by electrofusion bend test in ac-
the specified maximum cordance with Section IX, QF-143.3, and shall meet the ac-
(b) interfacial pressure of 60 psi (410 kPa) maximum ceptance criteria of Section IX, QF-143.3.4.
and heater temperature of 450°F (232°C) minimum; heat-
er removal (dwell) time kept to a minimum, not to exceed
the specified maximum XXVI-2400 REPAIR OF MATERIAL ð17Þ
(c) interfacial pressure of 90 psi (620 kPa) minimum
and heater temperature of 400°F (204°C) maximum; Repair of polyethylene pipe and fittings shall not be
heater removal (dwell) time at the maximum permitted permitted. Gouges, cuts, and similar surface conditions
(d) interfacial pressure of 60 psi (410 kPa) maximum are not permitted on molded fittings. Polyethylene pipe
and heater temperature of 400°F (204°C) maximum; or fittings fabricated from pipe with gouges, cuts, or other
heater removal (dwell) time at the maximum permitted surface conditions that exceed the following require-
ments shall be rejected and scrapped:
XXVI-2322 Electrofusion Verification (a) For pipe IPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller in nominal dia-
meter, any indentation greater than 5% of t f a b m i n or any
One joint shall be made for electrofusion verification
indentation resulting in a wall thickness of less than
testing of electrofusion socket and saddle fittings as
t f a b m i n shall be unacceptable.
follows:
(a) The pipe used for testing shall be the same PE des- (b) For pipe larger than IPS 4 (DN 100) in nominal dia-
ignation, cell classification, size, and DR as the pipe to be meter, any indentation greater than 0.040 in. (1.0 mm) or
connected, and when practicable, from the same manufac- any indentation resulting in a wall thickness of less than
turing facility and resin lot. t f a b m i n shall be unacceptable.
(b) The electrofusion fitting(s) shall be the same size
and from the same manufacturing facility and production
lot as those to be installed. XXVI-2500 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR
(c) Verification testing shall be performed on test pipe QUALITY TESTING AND
at a temperature within the qualification range of the DOCUMENTATION
electrofusion fitting. (a) Through his Quality Systems Program, the Poly-
(d) Electrofusion installations that exceed the align- ethylene Source Material Manufacturer shall ensure that
ment, ovality, clearance, or contact tolerances of the fit- polyethylene compound is certified in accordance with
ting qualification shall require that the fusing procedure XXVI-2221.
be requalified and that the verification test be performed
(b) Acceptance of individual lots of polyethylene source
with base pipe simulating the actual out-of-tolerance
material shall be in accordance with XXVI-2510.
conditions.

ð17Þ XXVI-2330 TESTING XXVI-2510 CERTIFICATE OF ANALYSIS (C OF A)

REPORT
XXVI-2331 Butt-Fused Joints
The following paragraphs contain requirements for the
Testing of butt-fused joints shall be in accordance with
C of A Report and related traceability documentation.
Section IX, QF-144, as follows:
(a) For pipe and fitting specimens smaller than IPS 4
(DN 100), no fewer than two specimens shall be removed XXVI-2511 Polyethylene Compound
from fused pipe test coupons at intervals of approxi- (a) Polyethylene compound shall be qualified per
mately 180 deg apart. XXVI-2221.

176
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(b) The Polyethylene Compound Manufacturer shall (b) The C of A Report shall include the certified test re-
test polyethylene compound in accordance with Table sults in accordance with Table XXVI-2512-1.
XXVI-2511-1 and shall provide a C of A Report and related (c) The C of A Report and related traceability documen-
traceability documentation to the purchaser of the lot. tation shall include the following information:
(c) The C of A Report shall include the certified test re- (1) the name of the Natural Compound Manufacturer
sults in accordance with Table XXVI-2511-1. (2) the manufacturing location
(d) The C of A Report and related traceability documen- (3) an identification code that is unique and trace-
tation shall include the following information: able to the specific lot
(1) the name of the Polyethylene Comp ound (4) the Natural Compound Manufacturer’s trade
Manufacturer name for the natural compound
(2) the manufacturing location (5) the shipping method or type of container(s) for
(3) an identification code that is unique and trace- the lot, such as railcar or boxes, and additional informa-
able to the specific lot tion, such as a railcar number if shipped by rail or the
(4) the Polyethylene Compound Manufacturer’s name of the commercial carrier and number of boxes if
trade name for the polyethylene compound as published shipped by commercial carrier
in PPI TR-4 (6) the lot weight of natural compound
(5) the shipping method or type of container(s) for (7) the date of shipment
the lot, such as railcar or boxes, and additional informa- (8) other information that identifies the purchaser
tion, such as a railcar number if shipped by rail or the (customer), purchaser order, purchaser contact, delivery
name of the commercial carrier and number of boxes if location, and contact information for the Natural Com-
shipped by commercial carrier pound Manufacturer
(9) if applicable, the Quality System Program state-
(6) the lot weight of polyethylene compound
ment information per NCA-3974.4
(7) the date of shipment
(8) other information that identifies the purchaser XXVI-2513 Pigment Concentrate Compound
(customer), purchaser order, purchaser contact, purcha-
ser delivery location, and contact information for the (a) The Pigment Concentrate Compound Manufacturer
Polyethylene Compound Manufacturer shall test pigment concentrate compound in accordance
(9) if applicable, the Quality System Program state- with Table XXVI-2513-1. The Pigment Concentrate Com-
ment information per NCA-3974.4 pound Manufacturer shall provide a C of A Report and re-
lated traceability documentation to the purchaser of the
lot.
XXVI-2512 Natural Compound (b) The C of A Report shall include the certified test re-
(a) The Natural Compound Manufacturer shall test nat- sults for the lot in accordance with Table XXVI-2513-1.
ural compound in accordance with Table XXVI-2512-1. (c) The C of A Report or related traceability documen-
The Natural Compound Manufacturer shall provide a C tation shall include the following information:
of A Report and related traceability documentation to (1) the name of the Pigment Concentrate Compound
the purchaser of the lot. Manufacturer

Table XXVI-2511-1 ð17Þ

Minimum Quality Testing Requirements for Polyethylene Compound Lots
C of A Reports
No. Test Test Standard Test Frequency Test Timing Test Results
1 High load melt flow rate, ASTM D1238 and Table Once per lot Before lot shipment Yes
Condition 190/21.6, g/10 min. XXVI-2221-1
2 Density ASTM D792, ASTM D1505, or Once per lot Before lot shipment Yes
ASTM D4883 and Table
XXVI-2221-1
3 Slow crack growth resistance, hr ASTM F1473 and Table Once per lot Before lot shipment Yes
XXVI-2221-1
4 Tensile strength at yield and ASTM D638 and Table Once per lot Before lot shipment Yes
tensile elongation at break XXVI-2221-1
5 Thermal stability ASTM D3350 and Table Once per lot Before lot shipment Yes
XXVI-2221-1
6 Carbon black content ASTM D1603 or ASTM D4218 and Once per lot Before lot shipment Yes
Table XXVI-2221-1

177
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ð17Þ Table XXVI-2512-1

Minimum Quality Testing Requirements for Natural Compound Lots
C of A Reports
No. Test Test Standard Test Frequency Test Timing Test Results
1 High load melt flow rate, ASTM D1238 Once per lot Before lot shipment Yes
Condition 190/21.6, g/10 min.
2 Density ASTM D792, ASTM D1505, or Once per lot Before lot shipment Yes
ASTM D4883 and Table
XXVI-2221-1
3 Slow crack growth resistance ASTM F1473 and Table Once per lot Before lot shipment Yes
(parent material), hr XXVI-2221-1
4 Tensile strength at yield and ASTM D638 Once per lot Before lot shipment Yes
tensile elongation at break
5 Thermal stability ASTM D3350 Once per lot Before shipment Yes

(2) the manufacturing location (2) shall not use the material when certification test-
(3) an identification code that is unique and trace- ing does not verify C of A Report values
able to the specific lot (3) sha ll t est pipe in a cco rdanc e with Table
(4) the Pigment Concentrate Compound Manufac- XXVI-2520(a)-2 and shall provide a CPTR and the Com-
turer’s trade name for the pigment concentrate pound C of A Report(s) to the purchaser
compound (b) The CPTR shall include the following per lot:
(5) the shipping method or type of container(s) for (1) certified test results for the lot in accordance with
the lot, such as railcar or boxes, and additional informa- Tables XXVI-2520(a)-1 and XXVI-2520(a)-2
tion, such as a railcar number if shipped by rail or the (2) t h e n a m e o f t h e P o l y e t h y l e n e M a t e r i a l
name of the commercial carrier and number of boxes if Manufacturer
shipped by commercial carrier (3) the manufacturing location
(6) the lot weight of pigment concentrate compound (4) an identification code that is unique and trace-
(7) the date of shipment able to the specific lot
(8) other information that identifies the purchaser (5) the ASTM Standard for pipe manufacture
(customer), purchaser order, purchaser contact, delivery (6) the specification for the polyethylene compound
location, and contact information for the Pigment Concen- (7) the shipping method and the name of the com-
trate Compound Manufacturer mercial carrier
(9) if applicable, the Quality System Program state- (8) the lot length
ment information per NCA-3974.4 (9) the date of shipment
(10) other information that identifies the purchaser
XXVI-2520 CPTR FOR POLYETHYLENE (customer), purchaser order, purchaser contact, delivery
MATERIAL — PIPE location, and contact information for the Polyethylene
Material Manufacturer
(a) The Polyethylene Material Manufacturer — Pipe:
(1) shall certify the C of A Report values by testing a
sample from the polyethylene source material lot in ac-
cordance with Table XXVI-2520(a)-1

Table XXVI-2513-1
Testing Requirements for Pigment Concentrate Compound Lots
C of A Reports
No. Test Test Standard Test Frequency Test Timing Test Results
1 Carbon black content ASTM D1603 or Every 24 hr during lot Every 24 hr after acceptable product Yes
(black only) ASTM D4218 production has been produced for given
production lot
2 Color and UV stabilizer ASTM D3350 Every 24 hr during lot Every 24 hr after acceptable product Yes
(color only) production has been produced for given
production lot

178
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table XXVI-2520(a)-1 ð17Þ

Minimum Quality Testing Requirements for Polyethylene Source Material
CPTR Reports
No. Test Test Standard Test Frequency Test Results
1 High load melt flow rate, Condition ASTM D1238 Once per lot upon receipt at the Yes
190/21.6, g/10 min. [Note (1)] processing facility
2 Density [Note (1)] ASTM D792 or ASTM D1505 and Once per lot upon receipt at the Yes
Table XXVI-2221-1 processing facility
3 Carbon black concentration ASTM D1603 or ASTM D4218 Once per lot upon receipt at the Yes
percentage for black polyethylene processing facility
compound or black pigment
concentrate compound [Note (2)]
4 Slow crack growth resistance, hr Greater than 2,000 hr per ASTM Once per lot prior to shipment of Yes
[Note (1)], [Note (3)] F1473 completed on a polyethylene material
compression molded plaque at
2.4 MPa and 80°C in air per Table
XXVI-2221-1
5 Thermal stability [Note (1)], [Note Greater than 428°F (220°C) ASTM Once per lot prior to shipment of Yes
(3)] D3350 and Table XXVI-2221-1 polyethylene material

NOTES:
(1) When natural compound and black pigment concentrate compound are the polyethylene source materials, the high low melt flow,
density, slow crack growth resistance, and thermal stability tests apply to the natural compound.
(2) When natural compound and black pigment concentrate compound are the polyethylene source materials, the carbon black con-
centration test applies to the black pigment concentrate compound to confirm that the weight percent of the compounded resin
will meet the requirements of Table XXVI-2221-1.
(3) In no case shall any individual test result, used to establish this value in accordance with the reference industry standards, be less
than the minimum required value listed in this Table.

Table XXVI-2520(a)-2 ð17Þ

Minimum Quality Testing Requirements for Polyethylene Material — Pipe
CPTR
Reports
Manufacturing Standard/ Test
No. Test/Requirement Acceptance Criteria Test Method Test Frequency Results
1 Workmanship <3 in. IPS (DN 80) ASTM D3035; N/A Hourly or once per length, whichever Yes
≥3 in. IPS (DN 80) ASTM F714 is less frequent during ongoing
production
2 Outside diameter <3 in. IPS (DN 80) ASTM D3035; ASTM D2122 Hourly or once per length, whichever Yes
≥3 in. IPS (DN 80) ASTM F714 [Note (1)] is less frequent during ongoing
production
3 Toe-in <3 in. IPS (DN 80) ASTM D3035; ASTM D2122 Once per shift during ongoing Yes
≥3 in. IPS (DN 80) ASTM F714 [Note (1)] production
4 Wall thickness <3 in. IPS (DN 80) ASTM D3035; ASTM D2122 Hourly or once per length, whichever Yes
≥3 in. IPS (DN 80) ASTM F714 [Note (1)] is less frequent during ongoing
production
5 Short-term strength <3 in. IPS (DN 80) ASTM D3035; ASTM D1598, At the beginning of production and Yes
≥3 in. IPS (DN 80) ASTM F714 ASTM D1599, or weekly thereafter during ongoing
ASTM D2290 production
6 Carbon black content XXVI-2231(b) ASTM D1603 or At the beginning of production and Yes
ASTM D4218 weekly thereafter during ongoing
production

NOTE:
(1) Sample conditioning must be as specified in ASTM D3035 or ASTM F714.

179
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(11) a certification that the polyethylene material (1) certified test results for the lot in accordance with
was made from only virgin polyethylene source material XXVI-2520(a)
and that no scrap or reground polyethylene material (2) t h e n a m e o f t h e P o l y e t h y l e n e M a t e r i a l
was used (see NCA-3974.3) Manufacturer
(12) certification of slow crack growth resistance (3) the manufacturing location
(greater than 2,000 hr per ASTM F1473 completed on a (4) an identification code that is unique and trace-
compression molded plaque at 2.4 MPa and 80°C in air able to the specific lot
per Table XXVI-2221-1 for the polyethylene compound) (5) the specification for the polyethylene compound
(13) results of fusibility testing performed in accor- (6) the shipping method and name of the commercial
dance with XXVI-2300 carrier
(14) the Quality System Program statement informa- (7) the lot quantity in pieces
tion per NCA-3974.4 (8) the date of shipment
(9) other information that identifies the purchaser
ð17Þ XXVI-2530 MINIMUM QUALITY TESTING (customer), purchaser order, purchaser contact delivery
REQUIREMENTS FOR location, and contact information for the polyethylene
POLYETHYLENE MATERIAL — material manufacturer
MOLDED PRODUCTS (10) a certification that the polyethylene material
(a) The Polyethylene Material Manufacturer — Molded was made from only virgin polyethylene material and that
Products: no scrap or regrind polyethylene material was used (see
(1) shall certify the C of A Report values by testing a NCA-3974.3)
sample from the polyethylene source material lot in ac- (11) a certification that the flange adapter meets the
cordance with Table XXVI-2512-1 requirements of XXVI-2230(d)]
(2) shall not use the polyethylene source material (12) certification of slow crack growth resistance
when certification testing does not verify the C of A Re- (greater than 2,000 hr per ASTM F1473 completed on a
port values compression molded plaque at 2.4 MPa and 80°C in air
(3) shall examine the molded product in accordance per Table XXVI-2221-1 for the polyethylene compound)
with the fabricator procedure to determine it meets the (13) results of fusibility testing performed in accor-
requirements of XXVI-2230(d) and shall provide a CPTR dance with XXVI-2300
and the Compound C of A Report(s) to the purchaser (14) the Quality System Program statement informa-
(b) The CPTR shall include the following per lot: tion per NCA-3974.4

180
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE XXVI-3000
DESIGN

DR = dimension ratio of pipe = average outside

ð17Þ XXVI-3100 SCOPE diameter of the pipe divided by the mini-
The design rules of this Article are limited to buried mum fabricated wall thickness =
polyethylene piping systems constructed of straight pipe, D/t f a b m i n
the piping items listed in XXVI-2200, fusion joints, elec- E p i p e = modulus of elasticity of pipe per Table
trofusion joints, metal-to-polyethylene flanged connec- XXVI-3210-3 or Table XXVI-3210-3M,
tions, and polyethylene-to-polyethylene flanged psi (MPa)
connections. The maximum Design Temperature and Ser- E′ = modulus of soil reaction, psi (MPa) (data
vice Level A, B, or C temperatures shall be 140°F (60°C), is site specific)
and the maximum Service Level D temperature shall be E′ N = modulus of soil reaction of native soil
176°F (80°C). Temperatures shall not exceed those tem- around trench, psi (MPa) (data is site
peratures for which allowable stresses are provided in specific)
this Article. Polyethylene piping shall be permitted only F a = axial force due to the specified Design,
for buried Class 3 service water or buried Class 3 cooling Service Level A, B, C, or D applied me-
water systems. chanical loads, lb (N)
F a C = axial force range due to thermal expan-
sion, contraction, and/or the restraint
ð17Þ XXVI-3110 NOMENCLATURE of free end displacement, lb (N)
F a D = axial force due to the nonrepeated an-
A = cross-sectional area of pipe at the pipe chor motion, lb (N)
section where the evaluation is con- F a E = axial force range due to the combined ef-
ducted, in.2 (mm2) fects of seismic wave passage, seismic
a = difference in thickness between pipe soil movement, and building seismic an-
walls at a tapered transition joint, in. chor motion effects, lb (N)
(mm) F A l t = equivalent maximum axial force range
A b = tensile stress area of flanged joint bolt due to thermal expansion and contrac-
per ASME B1.1, in.2 (mm2) tion and/or the restraint of free end dis-
A s = shear area of thrust collar at the section placement, lb (N)
where the evaluation is conducted, in.2 F b = axial load per flanged joint bolt, lb (N)
(mm2) F C = axial force due to fully constrained ther-
b = total length of taper at a tapered transi- mal contraction, lb (N)
tion joint, in. (mm) F E = axial force due to fully constrained ther-
B d = trench width, ft (m) mal expansion, lb (N)
B 1 = stress index, Table XXVI-3311-1 FS = s o i l s u p p o r t f a c t o r , p e r T a b l e
B 2 = stress index, Table XXVI-3311-1 XXVI-3210-2
B ′ = burial factor f o = ovality correction factor, per Table
c = the sum of mechanical allowances, instal- XXVI-3221.2-1
lation allowance, erosion allowance, and g = acceleration due to gravity, ft/sec 2
other degradation allowance, in. (mm) (m/s2)
c′ = length of counterbore at a tapered transi- GSR = Geometric Shape Rating
tion joint, in. (mm) H = height of ground cover, ft (m)
D = average outside diameter of pipe in ac- H g w = height of groundwater above top of the
cordance with ASTM F714 or ASTM pipe, ft (m)
D3035, in. (mm) h h u b = thickness of thrust collar hub, in. (mm)
D i = inside diameter of run pipe, in. (mm) I = moment of inertia, in.4 (mm4)
d i = inside diameter of branch pipe, in. (mm) i = stress intensification factor, per Table
D o = outside diameter of run pipe, in. (mm) XXVI-3311-1
d o = outside diameter of branch pipe, in. K = bedding factor
(mm)

181
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

K ′ = Design and Service Level longitudinal S A = allowable secondary stress range value
stress factor from Table XXVI-3223-1 as defined in XXVI-3133 and given in
L = deflection lag factor Table XXVI-3133-1 or Table
M = resultant bending moment due to the XXVI-3133-1M, psi (MPa)
specified Design, Service Level A, B, C, S b = allowable flanged joint bolt stress per
or D applied mechanical loads, in.-lb Section II, Part D, Table 3, psi (MPa)
(N⋅mm) S c o m p = allowable sidewall compression stress
M C = resultant moment range due to thermal per Table XXVI-3220-1 or Table
expansion, contraction, and/or the re- XXVI-3220-1M, psi (MPa)
straint of free end displacement, in.-lb T = temperature, °F (°C)
(N⋅mm) T D = Design Temperature, °F (°C)
M D = resultant moment due to the nonre- T g r o u n d = temperature of soil around pipe, °F (°C)
peated anchor motion, in.-lb (N⋅mm) T w a t e r = temperature of water running through
M E = resultant moment range due to the com- pipe, °F (°C)
bined effects of seismic wave passage, t = t f a b m i n , in. (mm)
seismic soil movement, and building seis- t D e s i g n = minimum required wall thickness, in.
mic anchor motion effects, in.-lb (N⋅mm) (mm)
N = number of equivalent full range tempera- t e l b o w = minimum gore (mitered segment) wall
ture cycles thickness for fabricated elbows
n b = number of bolts per flanged joint t f a b m i n = minimum fabricated wall thickness in ac-
P = internal design gage pressure, plus pres- cordance with ASTM D3035 or F714
sure spikes due to transient events, psig (called minimum wall thickness in Table
(MPa gage) 9 of ASTM F714), in. (mm)
P a = Design or Service Level A, B, C, or D pres- t m i n = minimum wall thickness for pressure, in.
sure, psig (MPa gage) (mm)
P D = piping system internal Design Pressure t ′ = wall thickness of thrust collar pipe sec-
at the specified Design Temperature, tion, in. (mm)
T D , both being specified in the piping De- w = width of thrust collar hub, in. (mm)
sign Specification, not including the con- W i = total flanged joint design bolt load for in-
sideration of pressure spikes due to itial seating, lb (N)
transients, psig (MPa gage) W P = weight of empty pipe per unit length,
P E = vertical soil pressure due to earth loads, lb/ft (kg/m)
lb/ft2 (MPa) W w = weight of water displaced by pipe, per
P g w = pressure due to groundwater above the unit length, lb/ft (kg/m)
top of the pipe, lb/ft2 (MPa) Z = section modulus of pipe cross section at
P h y d r o = external hydrostatic pressure, equal to the pipe section where the moment is
earth plus groundwater pressure plus calculated (determined in XXVI-3230),
surcharge load, psi (MPa) in.3 (mm3)
P L = vertical soil pressure due to surcharge Z b = branch pipe section modulus (deter-
loads, lb/ft2 (MPa) mined in XXVI-3230), in.3 (mm3)
P m = mitered elbow pressure rating, psig Z r = run pipe section modulus (determined in
(MPa gage) XXVI-3230), in.3 (mm3)
PR = fitting pressure rating, psig (MPa gage) α = coefficient of thermal expansion of pipe,
R = buoyancy reduction factor 1/°F (1/°C)
r 1 ′ = radius of curvature at the beginning of a ΔP = differential pressure due to negative in-
tapered transition joint, in. (mm) ternal pressure of pipe, psi (MPa)
r 2 ′ = radius of curvature at the end of a ta- ΔT = T w a t e r − T g r o u n d , °F (°C)
pered transition joint, in. (mm) ΔT e q = equivalent temperature rise, °F (°C)
r 3 ′ = radius of curvature at the thrust collar (ε a )Earthquake = strain in the pipe from earthquake wave
hub, in. (mm) computer analysis
S = allowable stress, per Table ε s o i l = maximum soil strain due to seismic wave
XXVI-3131-1(a) or Table passage
XXVI-3131-1M(a) and Table ν = Poisson’s ratio
XXVI-3131-1(b), psi (MPa) Ω = change in diameter as a percentage of the
original diameter, commonly called the
change in ring diameter

182
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Ω m a x = maximum allowable change in diameter (e) Permanent ground movement and soil settlement
as a percentage of the original diameter, for design as nonrepeated anchor movements in accor-
commonly called the change in ring dia- dance with XXVI-3300.
meter, per Table XXVI-3210-1 (f) Seismic wave passage and seismic soil movement,
ρ d r y = density of dry soil, lb/ft3 (kg/m3) building anchor motions, and number of seismic cycles
ρ s a t u r a t e d = density of saturated soil, lb/ft3 (kg/m3) for seismic design in accordance with XXVI-3400.
σ A l t = tensile stress range in the pipe due to the (g) Ground movement caused by frost heave for design
range of thermal expansion and contrac- for expansion and contraction in accordance with
tion and/or the restraint of free end dis- XXVI-3311.
placement, psi (MPa)
σ b = tensile stress in the flanged joint bolt, psi XXVI-3131 Pressure Design of Pipe
(MPa)
XXVI-3131.1 Minimum Required Wall Thickness.
σ E = tensile stress in the pipe due to an earth-
The minimum required wall thickness of straight sections
quake, psi (MPa)
of pipe for pressure design shall be determined by the
σ s w = circumferential compressive stress in the
following:
sidewalls of pipe, psi (MPa)
σ r c = tensile stress in the pipe due to fully con-
strained contraction, psi (MPa)
σ r e = tensile stress in the pipe due to fully con- The value of c shall include an allowance for anticipated
strained expansion, psi (MPa) surface damage during installation.
τ A l t = shear stress range in the thrust collar
due to the range of thermal expansion
and contraction and/or the restraint of
free end displacement, psi (MPa) The value of t f a b min shall be greater than or equal to
XXVI-3120 DESIGN LIFE tDesign.

(a) The Design Specification shall specify the design life XXVI-3131.2 Allowable Service Level Spikes Due to
of the system. Transient Pressures. The sum of the maximum antici-
(b) The duration of load shall be specified for each load pated operating pressure plus the maximum anticipated
case, and the polyethylene pipe physical and mechanical Service Level B pressure spikes due to transients shall
properties shall be based on the duration of load. be no greater than 1.2 times the piping system Design
Pressure, P D . The sum of the maximum anticipated oper-
ating pressure plus the maximum anticipated Service Lev-
XXVI-3125 Examination Access
el C or D pressure spikes due to transients shall be no
Accessibility to permit the examinations required by greater than 2 times the piping system Design Pressure,
the Edition and Addenda of Section XI as specified in PD.
the Design Specification for the piping system shall be
provided in the design of the piping system. XXVI-3132 Pressure Design of Joints and Fittings ð17Þ
(a) Polyethylene pipe shall be joined using the butt fu-
XXVI-3130 DESIGN AND SERVICE LOADINGS sion process or by electrofusion. All connections to metal-
Design loads shall be as defined in ND-3112.1 through lic piping shall be flanged joints. Electrofusion fittings
ND-3112.3. Loads applied to buried polyethylene pipe shall be joined to polyethylene pipe using the electrofu-
shall be defined in the Design Specification and shall in- sion process.
clude, as a minimum, the following: (b) The design of piping items permitted in XXVI-2200
(a) Maximum internal Design Pressure, P D , for pres- shall ensure these items have the capacity to withstand a
sure des ign in acc ordanc e w it h X XVI-313 1 a n d pressure greater than or equal to the Design Pressure, P D ,
XXVI-3132 and, if applicable, maximum negative internal of the attached pipe.
pressure for evaluation in accordance with XXVI-3221.2. (c) The design of pipe fittings other than electrofusion
(b) Maximum and minimum temperature, T , and the fittings shall ensure the fitting has the capacity to with-
number of equivalent full range temperature cycles (N) stand a pressure greater than or equal to the Design Pres-
for the selection of allowable stress and design for tem- sure, P D , of the attached pipe. The pressure rating (PR) of
perature effects in accordance with XXVI-3300. the fitting shall be determined as follows:
(c) Vertical soil pressure, P E , due to saturated soil,
buoyancy, and flotation for the designs in accordance
with XXVI-3200.
(d) Vertical pressure due to surcharge loads, P L , for the where GSR is the geometric shape rating per Table
design in accordance with XXVI-3200. XXVI-3132-1

183
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(d) Flanged connections shall include a metallic backup (c) The maximum number of permitted equivalent full
ring and shall provide a leak tight joint up to and includ- range temperature cycles, N , is 100,000.
ing the piping hydrostatic test pressure. In addition, the (d) The number of equivalent full range temperature
maximum surge pressure per XXVI-3131.2 shall not cause cycles, N, is determined as follows:
permanent deformation of the pipe.
(e) The design of electrofusion fittings shall ensure the
fitting has the capacity to withstand a pressure greater
than or equal to the Design Pressure, P D , of the attached
pipe. The pressure rating of the fitting shall be deter-
mined by testing as required by XXVI-2236. where
ð17Þ XXVI-3132.1 Pressure Design of Miter Elbows. ΔT E = maximum temperature change ex-
(a) The design pressure rating of the mitered elbow, perienced by the pipe, °F (°C)
P m , shall be calculated as the lesser of eqs. (1) and (2) N E = number of cycles at maximum tem-
(see Figure XXVI-3132-1). perature change, ΔT E
N 1 , N 2 , … N n = number of cycles at lesser tempera-
ture changes, ΔT 1 , ΔT 2 , … ΔT n
ð1Þ ΔT 1 , ΔT 2 , … ΔT n = the lesser temperature changes ex-
perienced by the pipe, F (°C)
or XXVI-3134 Flange Connection Consideration ð17Þ

(a) Flanged connections are permitted only for the join-

ð2Þ
ing of polyethylene pipe to steel piping or for joining poly-
ethylene to polyethylene. See Figure XXVI-4520-1 for a
(b) P m shall be greater than or equal to P D . Alterna- typical flange configuration.
tively, the mitered elbow shall be at least one standard di-
(b) Flange installation shall meet the requirements of
mension ratio (SDR) lower than that of the attached
XXVI-4520.
straight pipe. The maximum DR permitted for mitered el-
bow segments is 13.5. (c) Steel flanges attached to the steel mating pipe shall
(c) The minimum fabricated wall thickness of the rein- conform to the requirement standards listed in Table
forced sections of the mitered elbow, t e l b o w , shall be NCA-7100-1 and shall be used within the limits of
≥1.25 t f a b m i n of the attached straight pipe. The addi- pressure–temperature ratings specified in such
tional wall thickness shall be provided by enlarging the standards.
pipe O.D. while maintaining the pipeline I.D. or by redu- (d) Polyethylene flange connections shall be in compli-
cing the pipe I.D. while maintaining the pipeline O.D. ance with XXVI-2220 and shall be butt-fused to the at-
(d) The fabrication tolerance of the fitting angular di- tached polyethylene piping. Polyethylene flange
rection shall be ±3 deg. Mitered joints of 3 deg or less (an- adapters shall be connected to the steel using a steel back-
gle α e l b in Figure XXVI-3132-1) do not require redesign up ring having, at a minimum, the same pressure rating as
consideration as mitered elbows. the mating steel flange.
(e) Mitered elbows shall comply with the requirements (e) Gasket material, if used, shall be selected to be con-
of ND-3644 with the following exceptions: sistent and compatible with the service requirements of
(1) Wall thickness shall be determined as outlined in the piping system.
(c). (f) Flanged joints shall be pressure tested in accor-
(2) ND-3644(e) shall be replaced with butt fusion dance with Article XXVI-6000 prior to the piping system
joints in accordance with this Appendix. being placed in service.
(g) Flanged joints shall use bolts made of a material
XXVI-3133 Allowable Stress Range for listed in Section II, Part D, Table 3 and of a size and
Secondary Stress strength that conforms to the requirement standards
The allowable secondary stress range, S A , is given in listed in Table NCA-7100-1. The tensile stress in the bolts,
Table XXVI-3133-1 or Table XXVI-3133-1M. σ b , shall not exceed S b per Section II, Part D, Table 3.
(a) The S A value shall be based on the higher of the De-
sign Temperature or the maximum Service Level A or B
temperature.
(b) The S A shall be selected based on where
(1) the total number of temperature cycles, or
(2) the number of equivalent full range temperature Fb =
cycles, N , as determined in (d).

184
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ð17Þ XXVI-3135 Electrofusion Saddle Fittings XXVI-3221 External Pressure

For electrofusion saddle fittings, the ratio d o /D o shall XXVI-3221.1 Buckling Due to External Pressure. The
not be greater than 0.6 per Table XXVI-3311-1, where following shall be met to ensure the pipe does not fail due
d o and D o are defined in XXVI-3110. to the effects of applied external pressure and possible
negative internal pressure:
(a) When the depth of cover is greater than 4 ft
(1.25 m) or one pipe diameter, whichever is larger, the ex-
XXVI-3200 SOIL AND SURCHARGE LOADS ternal pressure from groundwater (flooding), earth loads,
surcharge loads, and air pressure (due to negative inter-
ð17Þ XXVI-3210 RING DEFLECTION nal pressure at minimum internal gage pressure) on a
buried polyethylene pipe shall not cause the pipe to
The soil and surcharge loads on a buried polyethylene
buckle. The following equation shall be met:
pipe shall not result in a pipe diameter ring deflection, Ω,
beyond the limit of Ω m a x per Table XXVI-3210-1.
(U.S. Customary Units)

(U.S. Customary Units)

(SI Units)

(SI Units)

In addition, the requirements of XXVI-3221.2 shall also be

met.
(b) When the depth of cover is less than 4 ft (1.25 m) or
(U.S. Customary Units) one pipe diameter (whichever is larger), the pipe must
withstand the combined external pressure of ground-
water (flooding), earth, surcharge, and air without credit
for the surrounding soil. In this case, the following equa-
tion shall be met:
(SI Units)
(U.S. Customary Units)

E p i p e must be taken at the maximum life specified in the

Design Specification, K = 0.1, and L = 1.25 to 1.5 or 1.0 if
using soil prism pressure.
(SI Units)

XXVI-3220 COMPRESSION OF SIDEWALLS

The circumferential compressive stress in the side-
walls, σ s w , due to soil and surcharge loads shall not ex- ν = 0.45 for all loads
ceed S c o m p per Table XXVI-3220-1 or Table
In this case, the requirements of XXVI-3221.2 do not
XXVI-3220-1M.
need to be met.
The buoyancy reduction, R, and burial, B′ , factors are
(U.S. Customary Units)

(SI Units) (U.S. Customary Units)

185
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

XXVI-3230 DETERMINATION OF SECTION ð17Þ

(SI Units) MODULUS
(a) For intersections, the section modulus used to de-
termine stresses shall be the effective section modulus

XXVI-3221.2 Effects of Negative Internal Pressure.

When the depth of cover is greater than 4 ft (1.25 m) or
one pipe diameter (whichever is larger), the pipe must
withstand the external air pressure resulting from nega- and
tive internal pressure at the design minimum internal
gage pressure without credit for the surrounding soil.
This shall be ensured by meeting the following equation:

(b) For components and joints other than intersections,

the section modulus used to determine stresses shall be
ν is defined in XXVI-3221.1. the classic section modulus

XXVI-3222 Flotation
Buried polyethylene pipe shall have sufficient cover or
be anchored to the ground to prevent flotation by ground-
water. To ensure this occurs, the following relationship
shall be satisfied:
XXVI-3300 TEMPERATURE DESIGN
XXVI-3310 MINIMUM TEMPERATURE
(U.S. Customary Units)
The polyethylene material shall not be used at a tem-
peratures below the manufacturer’s limit, but in no case
shall the temperature be less than −50°F (−45°C).
(SI Units)

XXVI-3311 Design for Expansion and Contraction

XXVI-3311.1 Fully Constrained Thermal Contrac-
XXVI-3223 Longitudinal Stress Design tion. The stress resulting from the assumption of fully
constrained thermal contraction of the buried pipe when
XXVI-3223.1 Longitudinal Applied Mechanical
T w a t e r < T g r o u n d , increased by the stress due to axial
Loads. Longitudinal stresses due to axial forces and bend-
contraction from Poisson’s effect, shall be determined as
ing moments resulting from applied mechanical loads
follows:
shall not exceed K ′ × S
where

XXVI-3311.2 Fully Constrained Thermal Expansion.

The value of K ′ is given in Table XXVI-3223-1. The val- The stress resulting from the assumption of fully con-
ues of B 1 , B 2 are given in Table XXVI-3311-1, and S is per strained thermal expansion of the buried pipe when
Table XXVI-3131-1(a) or Table XXVI-3131-1M(a) and T w a t e r > T g r o u n d shall be determined as follows:
Table XXVI-3131-1(b).
XXVI-3223.2 Short Duration Longitudinal Applied
Mechanical Loads. For the assessment of short duration
loads (less than 5 min), the allowable stress, S, may be re- XXVI-3311.3 Combined Thermal Expansion and
placed by one of the following alternatives: Contraction Stress. The combined thermal expansion
(a) 40% of the material actual tensile strength at yield and contraction stress shall be
determined in accordance with ASTM D638 at tempera-
ture coincident with the load under consideration, or
(b) the values in Table XXVI-3223-2 S A is per XXVI-3133.

186
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

XXVI-3311.4 Alternative Thermal Expansion or calculate pipe expansion and contraction stresses, the
C o n t r a c t i o n Ev a l u a t i o n . A s a n a l t e r n a t i v e t o shear stress in the thrust collar shall satisfy the following
XXVI-3311.1 and XXVI-3311.2, the soil stiffness may be equations:
accounted for to calculate pipe expansion and contraction
stresses. The stresses shall satisfy the following equation:

S A is per Table XXVI-3133-1 or Table XXVI-3133-1M.

S A is per XXVI-3133.

XXVI-3312 Nonrepeated Anchor Movements

The effects of any single nonrepeated anchor move- XXVI-3314 Design of Flange Joints ð17Þ
ments shall meet the requirements of the following The bolts on any polyethylene-to-steel flange joints or
equation: polyethylene-to-polyethylene flange joints shall meet
the requirements of XXVI-3134 and be installed to the re-
quirements of XXVI-4520. The piping stresses at the pipe-
to-pipe flange adapter fusion joint shall be designed to the
S is per Table XXVI-3131-1(a) or Table XXVI-3131-1M(a)
requirements of XXVI-3200, XXVI-3300, and XXVI-3400.
and Table XXVI-3131-1(b).

XXVI-3313 Design of Thrust Collars

XXVI-3400 SEISMIC DESIGN
XXVI-3313.1 Fully Constrained Thermal Expansion
and Contraction Evaluation. The resulting range of shear XXVI-3410 SEISMIC-INDUCED STRESSES
stress in the thrust collar resulting from the assumption The stresses in the buried polyethylene piping system
of fully constrained thermal expansion and contraction due to soil strains caused by seismic wave passage, seis-
of the buried pipe shall be limited to the following: mic soil movement, and building seismic anchor motion
effects, where applicable, shall be evaluated. The stresses
shall satisfy the following equation:

S A is per XXVI-3133.
Seismic wave passage, seismic soil movement, and
building seismic anchor motion loads shall be combined
S A is per Table XXVI-3133-1 or Table XXVI-3133-1M.
by square root sum of the squares.
XXVI-3313.2 Alternative Thermal Expansion and Supplement XXVI-C provides an alternative method for
C o n t r a c t i o n Ev a l u a t i o n . A s a n a l t e r n a t i v e t o the analysis of seismic wave passage, seismic soil move-
XXVI-3313.1, if the soil stiffness is accounted for to ment, and building seismic anchor motion effects.

187
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table XXVI-3131-1(a)
Long-Term Allowable Stress, S, for Polyethylene, psi
Temperature, °F ≤50 yr Temperature, °F ≤50 yr Temperature, °F ≤50 yr
≤73 800 96 689 119 587
74 795 97 684 120 582
75 790 98 680 121 578
76 785 99 675 122 574
77 780 100 670 123 570
78 775 101 666 124 565
79 770 102 661 125 561
80 765 103 657 126 557
81 760 104 652 127 553
82 755 105 648 128 549
83 751 106 643 129 545
84 746 107 639 130 540
85 741 108 634 131 536
86 736 109 630 132 532
87 731 110 626 133 528
88 726 111 621 134 524
89 722 112 617 135 520
90 717 113 612 136 516
91 712 114 608 137 512
92 708 115 604 138 508
93 703 116 599 139 504
94 698 117 595 140 500
95 694 118 591 … …

GENERAL NOTE: The stresses listed in Tables XXVI-3131-1(a) and XXVI-3131-1(b) support a 50-yr operating life; stresses for
operating lives longer than 50 yr are under development.

Table XXVI-3131-1M(a)
Long-Term Allowable Stress, S , for Polyethylene, MPa
Temperature, °C ≤50 yr Temperature, °C ≤50 yr Temperature, °C ≤50 yr
≤23 5.52 36 4.73 49 4.01
24 5.45 37 4.68 50 3.96
25 5.39 38 4.62 51 3.91
26 5.33 39 4.56 52 3.85
27 5.27 40 4.50 53 3.80
28 5.21 41 4.45 54 3.75
29 5.15 42 4.39 55 3.70
30 5.09 43 4.34 56 3.65
31 5.03 44 4.28 57 3.60
32 4.97 45 4.23 58 3.55
33 4.91 46 4.17 59 3.50
34 4.85 47 4.12 60 3.45
35 4.79 48 4.07 … …

188
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table XXVI-3131-1(b)
Elevated Temperature Allowable Stress, S , for Polyethylene, psi (MPa)
≤0.3 yr
Temperature, °F (°C) psi MPa
≤176 (≤80) 341 2.35

GENERAL NOTE: This allowable stress value is lim-

ited to one occurrence during the design life of the
system.

Table XXVI-3132-1
Geometric Shape Ratings (GSR)
Fitting Description GSR
Straight pipe 1.0
Molded flange adapters 1.0
Machined flange adapters 1.0
Molded fittings with reinforced body 1.0
Mitered (from one to five segments) DR 5.6 to DR 9 0.80
Mitered (from one to five segments) DR 9.5 to DR 13.5 (segments less than or equal to 0.75 [Note (1)]
22.5-deg directional changes per fusion)
Concentric conical monolithic reducer (machined or molded) 1.0
Thrust collar (machined or molded) 1.0
Molded tees equal outlet with reinforced body 1.0
Fabricated tees equal outlet (two DR less than pipe) DR 5 to DR 9 0.65

NOTE:
(1) Alternatively, the GSR factor may be determined by dividing the pressure rating determined by calculation or testing by the pressure
rating of the pipe used to make the fitting.

Figure XXVI-3132-1 ð17Þ

Nomenclature for Mitered Elbows

189
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ð17Þ Table XXVI-3133-1

S A , Allowable Secondary Stress Limit, psi
The Higher of Design Temperature, the Maximum Service Level A
Number of Equivalent Full-Range Temperature, or the Maximum Service Level B Temperature, °F
Temperature Cycles, N ≤70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140
N ≤ 1,000 3,930 3,770 3,610 3,440 3,280 3,110 2,930 2,760
1,000 < N ≤ 10,000 2,600 2,500 2,400 2,300 2,190 2,084 1,980 1,860
10,000 < N ≤ 25,000 2,200 2,120 2,040 1,950 1,870 1,780 1,690 1,590
25,000 < N ≤ 50,000 1,950 1,880 1,800 1,730 1,650 1,580 1,500 1,420
50,000 < N ≤ 75,000 1,830 1,770 1,700 1,630 1,540 1,470 1,400 1,320
N E > 75,000 1,720 1,660 1,600 1,530 1,470 1,400 1,330 1,260

GENERAL NOTE: Linear Interpolation of stress between temperatures is permitted.

Table XXVI-3133-1M
S A , Allowable Secondary Stress Limit, MPa
The Higher of Design Temperature, the Maximum Service Level A
Number of Equivalent Full-Range Temperature, or the Maximum Service Level B Temperature, °C
Temperature Cycles, N ≤20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
N ≤ 1 000 27.3 26.3 25.3 24.3 23.3 22.2 21.2 20.1 19.0
1 000 < N ≤ 10 000 18.0 17.4 16.8 16.2 15.5 14.9 14.2 13.5 12.8
10 000 < N ≤ 25 000 15.3 14.8 14.3 13.8 13.2 12.7 12.1 11.6 11.0
25 000 < N ≤ 50 000 13.5 13.1 12.6 12.2 11.7 11.2 10.8 10.3 9.8
50 000 < N ≤ 75 000 12.7 12.3 11.9 11.5 10.9 10.5 10.0 9.6 9.1
N E > 75 000 11.9 11.5 11.2 10.8 10.4 10.0 9.6 9.1 8.7

GENERAL NOTE: Linear Interpolation of stress between temperatures is permitted.

ð17Þ Table XXVI-3210-1

Maximum Allowable Ring Deflection, Ω m a x
DR Ωmax, %
13.5 6.0
11 5.0
9 4.0
7.3 3.0

GENERAL NOTE: Linear interpolation of allowable ring deflec-

tion between DR 7.3 and DR 13.5 is permitted. For DR less than
7.3, use Ω m a x = 3.0%.

190
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table XXVI-3210-2
Soil Support Factor, F S
(12B d )/D , in./in., or (1,000B d )/D , mm/mm
E′ N /E′ 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0
0.1 0.15 0.30 0.60 0.80 0.90 1.00
0.2 0.30 0.45 0.70 0.85 0.92 1.00
0.4 0.50 0.60 0.80 0.90 0.95 1.00
0.6 0.70 0.80 0.90 0.95 1.00 1.00
0.8 0.85 0.90 0.95 0.98 1.00 1.00
1.0 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
1.5 1.30 1.15 1.10 1.05 1.00 1.00
2.0 1.50 1.30 1.15 1.10 1.05 1.00
3.0 1.75 1.45 1.30 1.20 1.08 1.00
5.0 2.00 1.60 1.40 1.25 1.10 1.00

Table XXVI-3210-3
Modulus of Elasticity of Polyethylene Pipe, E p i p e , psi
Load Temperature, °F
Duration ≤73 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 176
0.5 hr 82,000 76,300 67,200 59,900 52,500 47,600 41,000 35,300 18,000
1 hr 78,000 72,500 64,000 56,900 49,900 45,200 39,000 33,500 17,200
10 hr 65,000 60,500 53,300 47,500 41,600 37,700 32,500 28,000 14,200
24 hr 60,000 55,800 49,200 43,800 38,400 34,800 30,000 25,800 13,200
100 hr 55,000 51,200 45,100 40,200 35,200 31,900 27,500 23,700 12,100
1,000 hr 46,000 42,800 37,700 33,600 29,400 26,700 23,000 19,800 10,100
1 yr 40,000 37,200 32,800 29,200 25,600 23,200 20,000 17,200 8,800
10 yr 34,000 31,600 27,900 24,800 21,800 19,700 17,000 14,600 N/A
50 yr 29,000 27,000 23,800 21,200 18,600 16,800 14,500 12,500 N/A

Table XXVI-3210-3M
Modulus of Elasticity of Polyethylene Pipe, E p i p e , MPa
Load Temperature, °C
Duration ≤23 27 32 38 43 49 54 60 80
0.5 h 566 526 463 413 362 328 283 243 124
1h 538 519 441 392 344 312 269 231 118
10 h 449 417 368 328 287 260 224 193 99
24 h 414 385 339 302 265 240 207 178 91
100 h 379 353 311 277 243 220 190 163 83
1 000 h 317 295 260 232 203 184 159 137 70
1y 276 257 226 201 177 160 138 117 61
10 y 234 218 192 171 150 136 117 101 N/A
50 y 200 186 164 146 128 116 100 86 N/A

191
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ð17Þ Table XXVI-3220-1

Allowable Sidewall Compression Stress, S c o m p (psi)
Temperature, °F Scomp
≤40 1,421
73 1,124
140 631
160 495
180 330

ð17Þ Table XXVI-3220-1M

Allowable Sidewall Compression Stress, S c o m p (MPa)
Temperature, °C Scomp
≤4 9.80
23 7.75
60 4.35
71 3.41
82 2.28

Table XXVI-3221.2-1
Ovality Correction Factor, f O
Ovality, % Ovality Correction Factor
1 0.91
2 0.84
3 0.76
5 0.64
6 0.59

Table XXVI-3223-1
Design and Service Level Longitudinal Stress Factor, K ′
Service Level Design A B C D
K′ 1.0 1.0 1.1 1.33 1.33

Table XXVI-3223-2
Short Duration (5 min) Allowable Longitudinal Tensile Stress
Temp, °F (°C) S , psi (MPa)
≤70 (≤21) 1 200 (8.3)
100 (38) 940 (6.5)
120 (49) 770 (5.3)
140 (60) 630 (4.3)
176 (80) 400 (2.7)

192
ð17Þ Table XXVI-3311-1
Stress Indices, Flexibility, and Stress Intensification Factors for PE Piping Components
Primary Stress Index
Description B1 B2 Flexibility Characteristic, h Flexibility Factor, k Stress Intensification Factor, i Illustration
Straight pipe 0.5 1.0 N/A 1.0 1.0 N/A
Butt fusion joint 0.5 1.0 N/A 1.0 1.0 N/A
Molded elbow 0.69 [Note (1)] TBD
tn
r

Mitered elbow 0.69 [Note (1)] In-plane loading: θ S/2

s ≥ r (1 + tan θ)

S
tn
[Note (2)], [Note (3)] r

ASME BPVC.III.A-2017
s cot θ
R=
193

Equal outlet molded tee [Note (5)] [Note (5)] 1.0

[Note (4)] r
D tn

Equal outlet mitered tee 1.0 B 2 b = 0.75i b 1.0

≥ 1.0
r
B 2 r = 0.75i r D tn
≥ 1.0
 Table XXVI-3311-1
Stress Indices, Flexibility, and Stress Intensification Factors for PE Piping Components (Cont'd)
Primary Stress Index
Description B1 B2 Flexibility Characteristic, h Flexibility Factor, k Stress Intensification Factor, i Illustration

Concentric monolithic [Note (5)] [Note (5)] N/A 1.0

reducers t1
t2
D1 D2

Concentric fabricated [Note (5)] [Note (5)] N/A 1.0

reducers t1
t2
D1 D2

ASME BPVC.III.A-2017
Fabricated, machined, or 0.5 B 2 = 0.75i ≥ N/A 1.0
molded thrust collar 1.0
t2
194

D2 D1

Machined or molded metallic 0.5 1.0 N/A 1.0 1.0 See Figure XXVI-4520-1
to PE bolted flange
connection

Electrofusion coupling 0.75 1.0 N/A 1.0 1.0

 Table XXVI-3311-1
Stress Indices, Flexibility, and Stress Intensification Factors for PE Piping Components (Cont'd)
Primary Stress Index
Description B1 B2 Flexibility Characteristic, h Flexibility Factor, k Stress Intensification Factor, i Illustration

Electrofusion saddle fitting 0.75 1.0 N/A 1.0 1.0

HDPE-to-HDPE bolted flange 0.50 1.0 N/A 1.0 1.0 See Figure XXVI-4520-2

ASME BPVC.III.A-2017
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) The following nomenclature applies to this Table only for use in determining stress indices, stress intensification factors, and flexibility factors:
D 1 = nominal outside diameter of the larger side of a concentric fabricated reducer or the diameter of the thrust collar
195

D 2 = nominal outside diameter of the smaller side of a concentric fabricated reducer or the nominal pipe diameter of a thrust collar
DR = Pipe Dimension Ratio = D o /t n
R = nominal bend radius of elbow or pipe bend, in. (mm)
r = mean radius of pipe, in. (mm) (matching pipe for elbows and tees)
s = miter spacing at centerline, in. (mm)
t 2 = nominal thickness of the smaller side of a concentric fabricated reducer or nominal pipe thickness of a thrust collar
t n = nominal wall thickness of pipe, t f a b m i n , in. (mm) (matching pipe for elbows and tees)
t r = nominal wall thickness of run pipe, t f a b m i n , in. (mm)
θ = one-half angle between adjacent miter axes, deg
(b) The stress indices, i, and the flexibility factors, k, shall not be taken as less than 1.0. They are applicable to moments in any plane for fittings except as noted.
(c) All abutting piping fittings of differing DRs shall meet XXVI-4231.
NOTES:
(1) The B 2 stress indices for mitered bends and molded elbows are dependent upon the DR and shall be as follows:
(a) 1.38 for DR 7/7.3
(b) 1.64 for DR 9
(c) 1.91 for DR 11
(d) 2.21 for DR 13.5
(e) Linear interpolation of stress indices between DR 7.3 and DR 13.5 values is permitted.
(2) One-half miter angle, θ , is limited to ≤11.25 deg.
(3) The flexibility factor, k, is only applicable for in-plane bending moment loading.
(4) The tee thickness, t n , has to be 1.4 times the pipe thickness, T r (1.4T r ).
(5) Indices in development. In the interim, a value of 0.75i > 1.0 may be used for B 2 , and a value of B 1 = 0.75 may be used.
(6) The ratio of d o /D o has to be less than 0.6. D o and d o are defined in XXVI-3110.
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE XXVI-4000
FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION

XXVI-4100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS appropriate Data Report in accordance with Article

XXVI-8000, that the material used complies with the re-
ð17Þ XXVI-4110 INTRODUCTION quirements of Article XXVI-2000 and that the fabrication
(a) Fabrication and installation shall be in accordance or installation complies with the requirements of this
with the rules of this Article and shall use polyethylene Article.
materials that comply with the requirements of Article
XXVI-4121.1 Certification of Treatments, Tests, and
XXVI-2000. Methods of fabrication and installation shall
Examinations. If a Certificate Holder or his Subcontractor
be by thermal butt-fusion, electrofusion, and flanged
performs treatments, tests, repairs, or examinations re-
joints. Use of threaded or adhesive joints with polyethy-
quired by other Articles of this Appendix, the Certificate
lene material shall not be permitted.
Holder shall certify that this requirement has been ful-
(b) Only the thermal fusion circumferential butt joints
filled (NCA-3974). Reports of all required treatments
and miter joints, and electrofusion socket or saddle joints
and results of all required tests, repairs, and examinations
may be used for pressure boundary fusion joints (see
performed shall be available to the Inspector.
Figures XXVI-4110-1 and XXVI-4110-2).
(c) Only saddle-type electrofusion branch connections XXVI-4121.2 Repetition of Visual Examination of
shall be permitted in polyethylene material. Surfaces after Material Removal. If, during the fabrica-
(d) Hereinafter, all requirements specified in this tion or installation of a pressure-retaining item, new sur-
Article shall apply to fabrication and installation of poly- faces result, the Certificate Holder shall reexamine the
ethylene material. surface of the material in accordance with XXVI-4130
when the original surface was required to be visually ex-
XXVI-4120 CERTIFICATION OF MATERIAL, amined in accordance with XXVI-4130.
FABRICATION, AND INSTALLATION
BY CERTIFICATE HOLDER XXVI-4122 Material Identification
XXVI-4121 Means of Certification (a) Material for pressure-retaining items shall have
The Certificate Holder for an item shall certify, by appli- identification markings that will remain distinguishable
cation of the appropriate Certification Mark including until the item is assembled or installed. If the original
Designator, if applicable, and completion of the identification markings are cut off or the material is

Figure XXVI-4110-1
Thermal Fusion Butt Joint

196
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure XXVI-4110-2 ð17Þ

Electrofusion Joint

Electrofusion socket

Fusion zone
= coil width
Electric coil

Pipe

Electrofusion saddle

Fusion zone
= coil width

••• ••••
••• ••

divided, the same marks shall either be transferred to the XXVI-4123 Examinations
items cut or a coded marking shall be used to ensure iden-
tification of each piece of material during subsequent fab- Visual examination activities that are not specified for
rication or installation. In either case, an as‐built sketch or examination by XXVI-4130 or Article XXVI-5000, and
a tabulation of materials shall be prepared identifying are performed solely to verify compliance with require-
each piece of material with the CPTRs and C of A Reports, ments of Article XXVI-4000, may be performed by the per-
where applicable, and the coded marking. Studs, bolts, sons who perform or supervise the work. These visual
nuts, flange rings, and other metallic items shall be iden- examinations are not required to be performed by per-
tified and certified as required by Article ND-4000. sonnel and procedures qualified in accordance with the
(b) Material from which the identification marking is Manufacturer’s Quality Assurance Program (XXVI-2500)
lost shall be treated as nonconforming material until ap- or to XXVI-5500 unless so specified.
propriate verifications are performed and documented
to ensure proper material identification. Positive identifi-
XXVI-4130 REPAIR OF MATERIAL ð17Þ
cation shall be made through appropriate evidence, and
the material may then be marked; otherwise, it shall be All polyethylene material shall be inspected upon re-
scrapped. ceipt. Any material not meeting the surface acceptance
XXVI-4122.1 Marking Material. Material shall be criteria of XXVI-2400 shall either be scrapped or repaired
marked in accordance with Article XXVI-8000, as follows: in accordance with this paragraph. All polyethylene mate-
(a) No indentation stamping is allowed on the poly- rial external surfaces shall be given an additional visual
ethylene surface; all marking shall be performed with a examination prior to installation.
metallic paint marker or stenciling marker. (a) For pipe IPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller, any indenta-
(b) The Polyethylene Material Manufacturer is per- tion greater than 5% of t f a b m i n shall be unacceptable. In-
mitted to apply the standard print line identifier to his dentations of 5% or less of t f a b m i n shall be acceptable
piping product using a thermal process in accordance provided that the remaining wall thickness is greater than
with XXVI-2231(c). tDesign.

197
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(b) For pipe larger than IPS 4 (DN 100), any indentation XXVI-4212 Forming and Bending Processes ð17Þ
greater than 0.040 in. (1.0 mm) shall be unacceptable. In-
The material shall not be cold, hot formed, or bent ex-
dentations of 0.040 in. (1.0 mm) or less shall be accept-
cept as follows:
able provided that the remaining pipe wall thickness is
(a) During installation, a pipe radius of curvature great-
greater than t D e s i g n .
er than or equal to 30 times the outside diameter is per-
(c) Modified fittings shall satisfy the requirements of mitted for piping with DR 9 through 13.5, except as
XXVI-4131.3. restricted by (b).
(b) During installation, a pipe radius of curvature for
XXVI-4131 Elimination of Surface Defects pipe with a DR 14 or higher and all pipe within two out-
side diameters of a flange connection, mitered elbow
Pipe surface gouges or cuts greater than 5% of t f a b m i n (measured from the pipe to fitting fused joint), or electro-
in pipe IPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller and greater than fusion joint, including saddle joints, shall not have a ra-
0.040 in. (1 mm) in pipe greater than IPS 4 (DN 100) shall dius of curvature less than 100 pipe outside diameters.
be removed by the Certificate Holder by grinding or ma-
chining in accordance with the following requirements: XXVI-4213 Minimum Thickness of Fabricated
(a) The cavity has a minimum taper of 3:1 (half-width Items
of the overall area to depth) without any sharp edges.
If any operation reduces the thickness below the mini-
(b) The remaining wall thickness is in excess of t D e s i g n . mum required to satisfy the rules of Article XXVI-3000
(c) As an alternative to (a) and (b), the damaged por- and XXVI-4130, the material shall be scrapped.
tion may be removed and discarded.
ð17Þ XXVI-4131.1 Additional Requirements — Flange XXVI-4230 FITTING AND ALIGNING
Adapters. XXVI-4231 Fitting and Aligning Methods ð17Þ
(a) Damage in the pipe section shall be repaired in ac- Items to be joined shall be fitted, faced, aligned, and re-
cordance with the requirements of XXVI-4131. tained in position during the fusing operation using ap-
(b) Damage in the transition between the pipe and hub propriate fusing machines or fixtures.
sections shall require flange adapter replacement (a) Items of different outside diameters shall not be
(c) Damage in the flange face (hub) shall be repaired by butt-fused together except as provided in (c).
machining only if, after the repair, the minimum hub di- (b) The alignment surface mismatch shall be less than
mensional requirements of ASTM F2880 are met. 10% t f a b m i n of the items being butt-fused.
(c) For butt-fusing of items with different DRs, the item
XXVI-4131.2 Additional Requirements — Thrust
with the smaller DR shall be counterbored and tapered to
Collars. If the damaged area is in the transition between
equal the wall thickness, or its outside diameter shall be
the pipe and hub sections, the entire thrust collar section
machined and tapered to equal the wall thickness of the
shall be replaced.
item with the larger DR and shall comply with Figure
ð17Þ XXVI-4131.3 Additional Requirements — Other XXVI-4230-1, illustration (a) or illustration (b).
Manufactured Fittings. Fitting surface gouges or cuts (d) Pipe that exceeds the specified tolerances for align-
shall be removed by the Certificate Holder by grinding ment, ovality, clearance, or contact shall be reformed in
or machini ng i n a ccordance w ith the following the area of the electrofusion fitting to within the specified
requirements: tolerances by use of mechanical devices.
(a) The cavity has a minimum taper of 3:1 (half-width
of the overall area to depth) without any sharp edges. XXVI-4240 JOINT END TRANSITIONS ð17Þ

(b) The remaining wall thickness meets or exceeds the The butt-fusion joint end transitions of items shall pro-
manufacturer’s specified minimum wall thickness. vide a gradual change in thickness from the item to the
(c) As an alternative to (a) and (b), the fitting shall be adjoining items and shall comply with XXVI-4231(c) and
discarded. Figure XXVI-4230-1.

XXVI-4300 FUSING QUALIFICATIONS

XXVI-4200 FORMING, FITTING, AND
ALIGNING XXVI-4310 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
XXVI-4311 Types of Processes Permitted
XXVI-4210 CUTTING, FORMING, AND BENDING
Only those fusing processes that are capable of produ-
XXVI-4211 Cutting
cing fused joints in accordance with fusing procedure spe-
Material shall be cut to shape and size by mechanical cifications qualified in accordance with Section IX and
methods. tested in accordance with XXVI-2300 of this Appendix

198
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure XXVI-4230-1 ð17Þ

Tapered Transition Joint

Component of Component of
lower DR higher DR

r2 r1 a

CL

(a) Reinforcement on Inside Diameter

199
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure XXVI-4230-1
Tapered Transition Joint (Cont'd)
b

r2 r1 a

Component of Component of CL
lower DR higher DR

r2 r1 a

(b) Reinforcement on Outside Diameter

GENERAL NOTE:
c′ m i n = 2.5t ′
c′ = values are after facing

r 1 ′min = 0.05t ′
r 2 ′min = 0.05t ′
t = wall thickness of thinner component; t ≥ t fab min of thinner component

200
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

may be used for fusing pressure-retaining material. Any installation. Butt-fusing machines to be used at angles ex-
process used shall be such that the records required by ceeding 20-deg slope shall be tested at the maximum
XXVI-4320 can be prepared. slope and maximum estimated drag to be applied. The
tested machine and electrofusion control box make(s)
ð17Þ XXVI-4312 Fusing Operator Training and model(s) shall be documented on the fusing proce-
(a) The fusing operator shall receive the following dure specification.
minimum training:
(1) The fusing machine operator shall receive a mini- XXVI-4322 Maintenance and Certification of ð17Þ
mum of 24 hr of training, covering the principles of the fu- Records
sion process and the operation of the fusing equipment.
Supplement XXVI-A provides guidance for this training. The Certificate Holder shall maintain records of quali-
(2) The electrofusion fusing operator shall receive a fied fusing procedures and the fusing operators qualified
minimum of 8 hr of training [16 hr for IPS 14 (DN 350) by him, showing the date and results of testing and the
or larger] on the principles of electrofusion, power identification mark assigned to each fusing operator.
sources, material preparation and installation, and pro- These records shall be reviewed, verified, and certified
cess control, including hands-on experience. Supplement by the Certificate Holder by signature or some other
XXVI-D provides guidance for this training. method of control in accordance with the Certificate
(b) There shall be a two-part test at the end of this Holder’s Quality Assurance Program and shall be avail-
training: able to the Inspector.
(1) The written theoretical knowledge part of the XXVI-4322.1 Identification of Joints by Fusing Op- ð17Þ
test shall cover such topics as safety, fundamentals of erator. Each fusing operator shall apply the identification
the fusing process, and recognition of typical joint mark assigned to him by the Certificate Holder adjacent to
imperfections. all permanent fused joints or series of joints on which he
(2) The practical knowledge portion shall include fuses. The marking shall be 1 ft (0.3 m) or less from the
hands-on training using equipment make and models to joint and shall be done with permanent metallic paint
be used in production. marker or stenciling marker. As an alternative, the Certi-
(c) Successful completion of this training shall be docu- ficate Holder shall keep a record of permanent fused
mented on the performance qualification record. joints in each item and of the fusing operators used in fus-
(d) Performance qualification testing shall be per- ing each of the joints.
formed and documented in accordance with Section IX
and this Article. Performance qualification testing may
be performed in conjunction with the fusing verification XXVI-4323 Fusing Prior to Qualification ð17Þ
testing of XXVI-2300. No fusing shall be performed until after the fusing pro-
cedure specification which is to be used has been quali-
XXVI-4320 FUSING QUALIFICATIONS, RECORDS, fied. Only fusing procedures and operators qualified in
AND IDENTIFYING STAMPS accordance with this Article and Section IX shall be used.
ð17Þ XXVI-4321 Required Qualifications Only fusing machines and electrofusion control box mod-
els tested in accordance with XXVI-2300 shall be used for
(a) The Certificate Holder shall be responsible for the
production.
fusing done by his organization and shall establish the
procedure and conduct the tests required by this Article
and Section IX, in order to qualify both the fusing proce- XXVI-4324 Transferring Qualifications
dures and the performance of fusing operators who apply
these procedures. Only fusing procedures tested in accor- The fusing procedure qualifications or performance
dance with XXVI-2300 shall be used. qualification tests for fusing operators conducted by one
(b) Procedures and fusing operators used to join pres- Certificate Holder shall not qualify fusing procedures or
sure parts shall also meet the training, testing, and quali- fusing operators to fuse for any other Certificate Holder.
fication requirements of this Article. Mitered joints shall
be fused using procedures and personnel qualified for XXVI-4330 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR
butt-fused joints in accordance with Section IX and this FUSING PROCEDURE
Article. QUALIFICATION TESTS
(c) The make and model of each butt-fusing machine
XXVI-4331 Conformance to Section IX
carriage and of each electrofusion control box to be used
in production shall be performance tested on all dia- All fusing procedure qualification tests shall be in ac-
meters and thicknesses to be fused in accordance with cordance with the requirements of Section IX as supple-
XXVI-2300. The testing — or applicable portions thereof mented or modified by the requirements of this
— may be performed by the Certificate Holder prior to Appendix, including the testing required by XXVI-2300.

201
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ð17Þ XXVI-4332 Preparation of Test Coupons and XXVI-4400 RULES GOVERNING MAKING,
Specimens EXAMINING, AND REPAIRING
Removal of test specimens from the fusion test coupon FUSED JOINTS
and the dimensions of specimens for procedure qualifica- XXVI-4410 PRECAUTIONS TO BE TAKEN BEFORE
tion and for the testing required by XXVI-2300 shall con- FUSING
form to the requirements of Section IX.
XXVI-4411 Identification, Storage, and Handling
ð17Þ XXVI-4333 Performance of Testing of Materials
Testing shall conform to the requirements of Section IX The Certificate Holder shall be responsible for control
and the additional requirements of XXVI-2300, except of the materials that are used in the fabrication and instal-
that elevated temperature sustained pressure tests for lation of components (see XXVI-4120). Suitable identifica-
pipe shall be performed in accordance with ASTM tion, storage, and handling of material shall be
D3035 or ASTM F714. maintained.

XXVI-4340 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR

XXVI-4412 Cleanliness and Protection of Fusing ð17Þ
PERFORMANCE QUALIFICATION
Surfaces
TESTS
XXVI-4341 Conformance to Section IX (a) Precautions shall be taken to prevent contamina-
tion of the joint during the fusion process.
All fusing operator performance qualification tests (1) The surfaces of the heater used for fusing and the
shall be in accordance with Section IX, as supplemented surfaces of piping coming into contact with heaters or
or modified by the requirements of this Article, using fus- heating coils shall be free of scale, rust, oil, grease, dust,
ing procedures qualified in accordance with this Article fine particulate, and other deleterious material. Pipe sur-
and tested in accordance with XXVI-2300. faces outside the fusion zone that will come into contact
with electrofusion heating elements during installation
ð17Þ XXVI-4342 Additional Requirements
shall be cleaned with 91% minimum isopropyl solution,
(a) The minimum butt-fusion pipe size shall be IPS 8 or as specified by the electrofusion procedure prior to
(DN 200) DR 11. such contact.
(b) A data acquisition device shall be attached to the (2) The joint shall be protected from deleterious con-
fusing machine or control box for recording the data con- tamination and from rain, snow, dust, fine particulate, and
cerning the joint required by Section IX, QF-131. wind during fusing operations. Fusing shall not be per-
(c) The visual examination required by Section IX, formed on wet surfaces or surfaces containing dust or fine
QF-305, shall be performed over the entire inside and particulate.
outside surfaces of the coupon. (b) Butt-fusing shall not be performed at ambient tem-
(d) Bend specimens shall be tested in accordance with peratures less than 50°F (10°C) or greater than 125°F
Section IX, QF-143. The specimens shall not crack or sepa- (52°C), unless an environmental enclosure is used to con-
rate in the fused joint. trol work area temperature between 50°F (10°C) and
(e) As an alternative to the bend testing of butt-fusion 125°F (52°C). For ambient fusing temperatures between
specimens prescribed in Section IX, High-Speed Tensile 100°F (38°C) and 125°F (52°C), minimum cooling time
Impact Testing may be performed in accordance with Sec- shall be 13 min/in. of thickness.
tion IX. No fewer than four specimens shall be removed
from fused pipe test coupons at intervals approximately
90 deg apart. XXVI-4420 RULES FOR MAKING FUSED JOINTS
XXVI-4421 Butt-Fusing Heating Cycle ð17Þ

(a) Immediately prior to inserting the heater plate be-

tween the faced ends to be joined, the temperature shall
be verified to be within the required range by measuring
at four locations approximately 90 deg apart in the fusing
zone, on both sides of the heater plate.
(b) Care shall be taken upon heater removal to ensure
uniform flat heated surfaces on both pipe ends of the joint
prior to fusing together.

XXVI-4422 Surfaces of Butt-Fused Joints ð17Þ

Fused beads shall remain intact after completion of

fusing.

202
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(a) When required, fused beads may be removed but XXVI-4452 Elimination of Surface Defects ð17Þ
only after the visual inspection required by
Surface defects may be removed by grinding or machin-
XXVI-5210(c) is completed and documented. The entire
ing in accordance with the requirements of XXVI-4131.
surface at the removed bead locations shall be inspected
The removal area shall be reinspected and shall meet
and shall meet the acceptance criteria of XXVI-5325.
the acceptance criteria of XXVI-5325.
(b) The finished joint shall be suitable for required vi-
sual and volumetric examinations.
XXVI-4500 MECHANICAL JOINTS
ð17Þ XXVI-4423 Butt-Fused Joint Transitions XXVI-4510 BOLTING AND THREADING
When items of different diameters are fused together, XXVI-4511 Thread Engagement
there shall be a gradual transition between the two sur- The threads of all bolts or studs shall be engaged in ac-
faces in accordance with XXVI-4231(c). cordance with the design. Flange bolting shall be engaged
as required by XXVI-4520.
ð17Þ XXVI-4440 FUSING DATA ACQUISITION
RECORDER XXVI-4512 Thread Lubricants
Any lubricant or compound used in threaded joints
The fusing machine and electrofusion control box shall
shall be suitable for the service conditions and shall not
have a data acquisition recorder for each joint fused in ac-
react unfavorably with either the service fluid, polyethy-
cordance with this Article. The data acquisition record
lene material, or any other material in the system.
produced by the device shall include the information spe-
cified in Section IX. In addition, job information related to
the joints, such as job number, joint number, fusing ma- XXVI-4520 FLANGED JOINTS ð17Þ
chine operator, date, and time, shall be recorded. The data (a) Only flanged connections are permitted for joining
acquisition device shall be capable of a minimum of 1 day of polyethylene pipe to metallic pipe or metallic piping
of butt fusion joint information and capable of download- items. Flanged connections are permitted for joining poly-
ing this information as a permanent record. ethylene pipe. The polyethylene flange connection shall
(a) Failure of a recorder to operate properly during the be constructed using a polyethylene flange adapter hav-
fusion process shall cause removal and replacement of ing a DR ratio equal to the attached polyethylene pipe
the fused joint. and joined by fusion to the attached pipe.
(b) The data acquisition records shall be compared (b) The polyethylene flange adapter shall be connected
with the fusing procedure specification to ensure that to the metal flange using a metallic backing ring. The
the proper fusing parameters and procedures were fol- backing ring shall have a pressure rating equal to or
lowed. If any parameter is outside the specified range, greater than the metal flange.
the fused joint shall be removed and replaced in compli- (c) Before tightening, flange faces shall be parallel
ance with the fusing procedure specification, or the item within 1/16 in./ft (5.3 mm/m) measured across any dia-
shall be scrapped. meter, and flange bolt holes shall be aligned within
1
(c) Verification of fusing parameters and variables not /8 in. (3.2 mm) maximum offset. Damage to the gasket
included in the data acquisition record shall be documen- seating surface on the polyethylene flange that would pre-
ted in accordance with the Certificate Holder’s Quality As- vent the gasket from sealing shall be evaluated per
surance Program. XXVI-4131.1(c). Use of a gasket is optional.
(d) The flange shall be joined using bolts of a size and
strength that conforms to the requirements of the stan-
XXVI-4450 REPAIR OF FUSED JOINTS dards listed in Table NCA-7100-1, as applicable. Bolts or
ð17Þ XXVI-4451 General Requirements studs should extend completely through their nuts. Any
bolts or studs which fail to do so are considered accepta-
(a) Defects in fused joints detected by the examinations bly engaged if the lack of complete engagement is not
required by Article XXVI-5000, or by the testing of Article more than one thread. Flat washers shall be used under
XXVI-6000, shall cause rejection of the joint. Repair of a bolt heads and nuts.
fused joint shall not be permitted. All unacceptable joints (e) In assembling flanged joints, the gasket, if used,
shall be removed and replaced. shall be uniformly compressed to the proper design load-
(b) Butt-fusion beads are not required to remain intact. ing. Special care shall be used in assembling flanged joints
Damaged fusion beads shall be evaluated to verify no in- in which the flanges have widely differing mechanical
fringement upon the fusion joint or adjacent base materi- properties. Tightening shall be done in accordance with
al. Damaged portions of fusion beads shall be removed if XXVI-4521. If used, no more than one gasket shall be be-
necessary to perform this evaluation. tween contact faces in assembling a flanged joint. The

203
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

gasket material shall be selected to be consistent and XXVI-4521.1 PE-to-PE Flange Joints.
compatible with the service requirements of the piping (a) Bolts shall be tightened to a torque value calculated
system. in XXVI-4521. After 24 hr, the bolts shall be retightened to
(f) See Figures XXVI-4520-1 and XXVI-4520-2 for typi- the seating torque value. The bolts shall be tightened in
cal flange configurations. accordance with (b) and (c). The torque shall be applied
in increments as shown in Table XXVI-4521.1-1.
ð17Þ XXVI-4521 Bolt Torque (b) The bolts are to be tightened in the following se-
quence. A bolt is selected and tightened, then the bolt
Flange joints shall be constructed to the requirements 180 deg opposite the first bolt is tightened. Next the bolt
of XXVI-3134. The applied torques values for flange bolts 90 deg clockwise from the first bolt is tightened and then
shall be determined as follows: the bolt 180 deg opposite it. The four-bolt pattern is in-
dexed one bolt clockwise from the first bolt, and the pat-
(U.S. Customary Units) tern is repeated. Refer to PPI TN-38.
(c) Once the requirements of (a) and (b) are met, tor-
que does not require future verification.
XXVI-4521.2 PE-to-Steel Flange Joints.
(SI Units) (a) Bolts shall be tightened to a seating torque value
calculated in XXVI-4521. After 4 hr, the bolts shall be re-
tightened to the seating torque value. If necessary, the
bolts may be tightened one additional time after 2 hr.
where The bolts shall be tightened in accordance with (b) and
(c). The torque shall be applied in increments as shown
A f = flange adapter contact area, in.2 (mm2) in Table XXVI-4521.1-1.
d b o l t = nominal bolt diameter, in. (mm) (b) The bolts are to be tightened in the following se-
K = nut factor for flanged bolting accounting for fric- quence. A bolt is selected and tightened, then the bolt
tion, material, lubricants, and coatings 180 deg opposite the first bolt is tightened. Next the bolt
n b = number of bolts 90 deg clockwise from the first bolt is tightened and then
S s = seating stress, psi (MPa). For PE to PE, the re- the bolt 180 deg opposite it. The four-bolt pattern is in-
quired seating stress is 1,800 + 200/−0 psi dexed one bolt clockwise from the first bolt, and the pat-
(12.4 + 1.4/−0 MPa). For PE to steel, the required tern is repeated. Refer to PPI TN-38.
seating stress is 2,000 + 200/−0 psi (13.8 + 1.4/ (c) Once the requirements of (a) and (b) are met, tor-
−0 MPa). que does not require future verification.
T b o l t = bolt torque, ft-lb (N·m)
The value of K shall be provided in the Design Report
along with the basis of how it was determined. The toler-
ance of the bolt torque shall be determined in accordance
with the allowable variation in seating stress.

Figure XXVI-4520-1
Transition Flange Arrangement

Washers Metallic backing ring

Metallic flange Bolting

PE flange adapter
Metallic pipe Fusion joint

Gasket (optional)
CL pipe

Metallic piping PE piping

204
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure XXVI-4520-2 ð17Þ

Transition Flange Arrangement (HDPE to HDPE)

Metallic backing ring Washer

Bolting

PE flange adapter

Fusion joint

Gasket (optional)
CL Pipe

XXVI-4600 PIPE SUPPORTS (b) Valves and equipment that would transmit exces-
sive loads to the piping shall be independently supported
All installed supports for polyethylene piping shall to prevent such loads.
meet the requirements of Subsection NF and the
following:
(a) Piping shall be supported, guided, and anchored in XXVI-4700 THRUST COLLARS USING
such a manner as to prevent damage thereto. Point loads
POLYETHYLENE MATERIAL
and narrow areas of contact between piping and supports
shall be avoided. Suitable padding shall be placed be- Thrust collars shall be joined by butt fusion to the at-
tween piping and supports where damage to piping tached piping. Thrust collars shall comply with Figure
may occur. XXVI-2234-1.

ð17Þ XXVI-4521.1-1
Torque Increments for Flanged Joints
Increment Torque Range, % of Target
1 20–30
2 45–55
3 70–80
4 100–110

205
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE XXVI-5000
EXAMINATION

XXVI-5100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR The volumetric examination procedure shall

EXAMINATION (1) Contain a statement of scope that specifically de-
fines the limits of procedure applicability (e.g., minimum
XXVI-5110 PROCEDURES, QUALIFICATION, AND and maximum thickness, minimum and maximum dia-
EVALUATION meter, scanning access).
ð17Þ XXVI-5111 General Requirements (2) Specify which parameters are considered essen-
(a) Nondestructive examinations shall be conducted in tial variables. The procedure shall specify a single value
accordance with the examination methods of Section V, or a range of values for the essential variables.
except as modified by the requirements of this Article. (3) List the examination equipment, including equip-
ment manufacturer and model or series.
(b) Visual examinations shall be conducted in accor-
dance with Section V, Article 9. (4) Define the scanning requirements, such as beam
angles and beam directions for ultrasonic, transceiver fre-
(c) Ultrasonic examination shall be in accordance with
quencies for microwave, scan patterns, maximum scan
Section V, Article 4 and Supplement XXVI-IIA. In cases of
speed, extent of scanning, and access requirements.
conflict, Supplement XXVI-IIA shall govern.
(5) Contain a description of the calibration method
(d) Microwave examination shall be in accordance with
(e.g., actions required to ensure that the sensitivity and
Supplement XXVI-IIB.
accuracy of the signal amplitude and time outputs of the
(e) The Certificate Holder shall be responsible for re- examination system, whether displayed, recorded, or
viewing procedure and demonstration results to validate automatically processed, are repeated from examination
that the range of the essential variables of the procedure to examination).
were included in the demonstration. (6) Contain techniques for data interpretation and
plotting.
XXVI-5112 NDE Procedures
XXVI-5114 Qualification of Volumetric ð17Þ
All nondestructive examinations performed under this
Article shall be performed in accordance with detailed Examination Procedures
procedures, which have been proven by actual demon- (a) The volumetric examination procedure shall be
stration to the satisfaction of the Inspector in accordance qualified, and demonstrated to the satisfaction of the In-
with Section V, Article 13 and XXVI-5114. Procedures, re- spector, using specimens conforming to the following
cords of demonstration of procedure capability, and per- requirements:
sonnel qualification shall be available to the Inspector on (1) The specimens shall be fabricated from the same
request. polyethylene material (PE4710) being installed.
(2) The demonstration specimen(s) for examination
ð17Þ XXVI-5113 Volumetric Examination Procedures of butt-fusion joints shall include the same size and type
of joint to be examined (i.e., butt joint). The demonstra-
(a) The volumetric examination shall include the joint tion specimens for examination of electrofusion fittings
volume and includes the joint-to-base material interface shall be of the same manufacturer as the fittings to be in-
and 1/4 in. (6 mm) from the joint centerline into the joint stalled, and shall be the same size and type as the joint/
base material (see Figure XXVI-5220-1) for butt-fusion fitting(s) to be installed.
joints, and the fusion zone for electrofusion joints and (3) The demonstration specimen scanning and joint
saddle joints (see Figure XXVI-5220-2). surfaces shall be representative of the production sur-
(b) The volumetric examination shall be performed faces to be examined as specified in the volumetric exam-
using recorded-data (e.g., encoded with position and am- ination procedure.
plitude) examination techniques that are repeatable. (4) The demonstration specimens shall include rele-
(c) A volumetric examination procedure shall be devel- vant actual or simulated fabrication-type flaws (e.g., lack
oped in accordance with the format in Supplement of fusion, inclusions, contaminates, voids, and, for electro-
XXVI-IIA or Supplement XXVI-IIB, as applicable, and qual- fusion fittings, inadequate piping insertion) consistent
ified by performance demonstration per XXVI-5114. with the type of production joint to be examined.

206
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(5) The demonstration set shall include specimens (c) fusion joints, including review and verification of fu-
with the following types of flaws: sion data for the joint in accordance with XXVI-4440.
(-a) for butt-fusion: through-wall planar flaw sizes (d) accessible external surfaces after placement in the
including the smallest flaw size of 0.040 in. (1 mm) or trench, for visual evidence of flaws imposed during fabri-
≤ t d e s i g n (not to exceed t a c t u a l − t d e s i g n ), whichever is cation and installation.
larger, and the largest flaw size between 30% and 90%
of the thickness XXVI-5220 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION ð17Þ
(-b) for electrofusion: insufficient piping insertion
depth of between 75% and 85%, exposing at least 10% of All fused joints in pipe 4-in. (100-mm) O.D. or greater
the fusion coil width, and fusion zone flaws with the smal- shall be volumetrically examined.
lest individual flaw size of 5% of fusion zone length, (a) The examination volume for a butt-fused joint shall
whichever is larger with twice the length in the circumfer- include essentially 100% of the area of interest shown in
ential direction, and maximum flaw size of between 30% Figure XXVI-5220-1.
and 90% of the fusion zone length (Figure XXVI-5220-2, (b) The examination volume for an electrofusion joint
dimension A–D) shall include essentially 100% of the accessible area of in-
(b) The demonstration set shall include at least the terest shown in Figure XXVI-5220-2. Any limitations shall
following: be documented in the examination record and evaluated
(1) for butt-fusion: one of each minimum and maxi- per XXVI-5330(b).
mum flaw size at each of the following locations: I.D. (c) Each joint shall also be examined 360 deg using the
surface-connected, O.D. surface-connected, and em- techniques demonstrated in XXVI-5114.
bedded flaw. All flaws shall be separated by a minimum
of 1 in. (25 mm).
(2) for electrofusion: incomplete pipe insertion (ex- XXVI-5300 ACCEPTANCE STANDARDS
cept for saddle joints); and in the fusion zone one of each
minimum and maximum flaw size at a location above and XXVI-5310 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
below the coils. All flaws shall be separated by a minimum Unacceptable fusion joints shall be removed. Repair of
of 1 in. (25 mm). unacceptable joints shall not be permitted.
(c) The demonstration shall be considered acceptable if
100% of the above flaws are identified.
XXVI-5320 VISUAL EXAMINATION ACCEPTANCE
XXVI-5120 TIME OF EXAMINATION OF CRITERIA OF EXTERNAL SURFACES
COMPLETED FUSED JOINTS XXVI-5321 Butt-Fused Joints ð17Þ
Nondestructive examination of fused joints shall be Joints shall meet the following:
conducted (a) Butt-fused joints shall exhibit proper fusion bead
(a) after the completion of the cooling period configuration. Supplement XXVI-B depicts unacceptable
(b) before the joint becomes inaccessible in the burial thermally fused bead configurations.
trench (b) There shall be no visible evidence of cracks in the
cleavage or incomplete fusion as evidenced by cleavage
XXVI-5200 EXAMINATIONS extending beneath the O.D. surface of the piping. The clea-
vage between fusion beads shall not extend to or below
ð17Þ XXVI-5210 VISUAL EXAMINATION the O.D. pipe surface (see Figure XXVI-5321-1). When
Visual examinations shall be performed on the cleavage depth cannot be visually verified, pit or depth
following: gages shall be used to verify compliance or else the joint
(a) external pipe surfaces and accessible surfaces of fit- shall be rejected.
tings, during receipt inspection, for visual evidence of (c) Fused joints, except for miter joints, shall not be vi-
flaws imposed during packaging, transport, and handling. sually angled or offset by 3 deg or more. The ovality offset
(b) pipe surfaces prepared for electrofusion, to verify shall be less than 10% t f a b m i n of the fused items.
conformance with the procedure surface preparation re- (d) The data acquisition record for the fused joint shall
quirements. Pipe diameter and ovality shall be measured be compared with the fusing procedure specification to
and verified prior to insertion into the electrofusion sock- verify parameters and procedures were followed in fus-
et fitting, and fit-up gap requirements shall be verified. ing the joint.

207
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure XXVI-5220-1
Fusion Pipe Joint Examination Volume

A B

¼ in. (6 mm) from centerline ¼ in. (6 mm) from centerline

D C

Examination volume
A-B-C-D

ð17Þ Figure XXVI-5220-2

Electrofusion Joint Examination Volume

360 deg
around axis
tpipe A D
Coil Fusion zone =
coil width D

C
RRR W W W W W W RRRRRR
RRR
B A
Fusion 1/4 in. from
zone surface of coil C
B

Annular space Maximum

insertion depth

Examination volume A-B-C-D

(a) Socket Fusion (b) Saddle Fusion

208
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure XXVI-5321-1
Polyethylene Pipe Butt Fusion Joint O.D. Bead (Cross-Section View)

(a) Visually Acceptable (b) Visually Acceptable

(Uniform bead around pipe) (Nonuniform bead
around pipe)

Cleavage tip shall not

meet or extend
below pipe surface

(c) Visually Acceptable (d) Visually Unacceptable

(Nonuniform bead around (Nonuniform/uniform bead
pipe localized diameter around pipe – V-Groove
mismatch less than 10% too deep at pipe-tangent)
of the wall)

ð17Þ XXVI-5322 Electrofusion Joints XXVI-5330 VOLUMETRIC EXAMINATION ð17Þ

Joints shall meet the following: ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
(a) There shall be no visible evidence on external and (a) Any indication of a flaw not attributable to config-
accessible internal surfaces of cracks, melt protrusion uration that is identified in the examination volume
caused by overheating, fitting malfunction, or incomplete shown in Figure XXVI-5220-1 or Figure XXVI-5220-2 shall
fusion. cause the fused joint to be rejected except as provided in
(b) Maximum fit-up gap, misalignment, and out- (b).
of-roundness shall be within the limits of the electrofu- (b) For electrofusion joints, voids are permitted in the
sion procedure. annular space outside of the fusion zone. Voids are per-
(c) The data acquisition record for the electrofusion mitted within the fusion zone only as follows:
joint shall be reviewed and compared to the electrofusion (1) The cross-sectional width of individual voids
procedure to verify observance of the specified variables measured in a plane perpendicular to the coil wire shall
applied when completing the fused test joint. not exceed 10% of the fusion zone length [Figure
XXVI-5220-2, illustrations (a) and (b), dimension A–D].
ð17Þ XXVI-5325 Material Surfaces (2) The cross-sectional widths of multiple voids shall
Surfaces of all material shall meet the requirements of be taken as 0.75 times the cross-sectional leg of the
XXVI-4131. square or rectangle that contains the detected area of
those flaws that either overlap or are within a distance
of S of 1 in. (25 mm) of one another as shown in Figure
XXVI-5330-1.
(3) Areas unable to be interrogated shall be treated
as flaws.

209
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ð17Þ Figure XXVI-5330-1

Laminar Flaws

210
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

XXVI-5400 QUALIFICATION AND III for Visual Examination (in accordance with ND-5520)
CERTIFICATION OF NDE or their designee. The practical examination results shall
PERSONNEL be documented on a qualification record.

ð17Þ XXVI-5410 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS XXVI-5422 Volumetric Examination ð17Þ

(a) Organizations performing nondestructive examina- (a) Personnel performing volumetric examinations re-
tions shall use personnel qualified in accordance with quired by this Appendix shall be qualified in accordance
XXVI-5420. When these services are subcontracted by with XXVI-5410(b).
the Certificate Holder, he shall verify the qualification of (b) Volumetric examination personnel shall demon-
personnel to the requirements of XXVI-5420. All nondes- strate their capability to detect flaws by performance de-
tructive examinations shall be performed and the results monstration using the qualified procedure in accordance
evaluated by qualified nondestructive examination with the following requirements:
personnel. (1) The demonstration specimens shall be in accor-
(b) Personnel performing nondestructive examinations dance with XXVI-5114(a).
required by this Article shall be qualified in accordance (2) The demonstration specimen set shall, as a mini-
with ND-5521, as applicable for the examination method, mum, contain flaws meeting the requirements of
in addition to the requirements herein. XXVI-5114(b).
(c) The Certificate Holder shall be responsible for re-
XXVI-5420 PERSONNEL QUALIFICATION viewing the procedure and demonstration results to vali-
REQUIREMENTS date that the range of the essential variables of the
ð17Þ XXVI-5421 Visual Examination procedure were included in the demonstration.
(d) This examination shall be administered by a Level
(a) Personnel performing visual examinations on mate-
III for volumetric examination (in accordance with
rial receipt and of completed fused joints shall be quali-
ND-5520) or designee. The practical examination results
fied in accordance with XXVI-5410(b) and trained in
shall be documented on a qualification record.
accordance with (b).
(b) All personnel performing visual examinations re- XXVI-5423 Certification of Personnel
quired by this Article shall receive the following training,
which shall be documented on a qualification record: Certification of NDE personnel shall be in accordance
(1) For butt-fused piping, they shall receive the same with ND-5522.
training as required for the fusing machine operator as
XXVI-5424 Verification of NDE Personnel
described in Supplement XXVI-A. This training shall in-
Certification
clude the use of a fusing machine to make a fused joint.
This joint is not required to be tested for qualification. Verification of NDE personnel shall be in accordance
(2) For electrofusion joints, they shall receive the with ND-5523.
same training as required for the fusing operator as de-
scribed in Supplement XXVI-D. This training shall include
XXVI-5500 RECORDS
set-up and witnessing, but need not include performance,
of the electrofusion process. The following NDE records shall be retained by the Cer-
(c) All personnel performing visual examinations re- tificate Holder and provided to the Owner upon comple-
quired by this Appendix shall be given a practical exami- tion of construction:
nation of physical samples of visually acceptable and (a) all NDE procedure qualification records
unacceptable fused joints. A sample set including flaws re- (b) visual NDE personnel qualification records and
presentative of unacceptable conditions (e.g., Figure certifications
XXVI-5321-1, Supplement XXVI-B) shall be used. The vi- (c) volumetric NDE personnel qualification records
sual examination procedure shall be used, and a passing identified in SNT-TC-1A, para. 9.4 including certifications
grade of 80% detection of the intended flaws within the (d) all visual NDE examination records and results
demonstration set is required. The practical examination (e) all volumetric NDE examination records and results,
shall be administered by an individual qualified to Level including encoded data

211
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE XXVI-6000
TESTING

XXVI-6100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS XXVI-6120 PREPARATION FOR TESTING

XXVI-6110 PRESSURE TESTING XXVI-6121 Exposure of the Piping ð17Þ

ð17Þ XXVI-6111 Scope of Pressure Testing All pressure-retaining portions of the piping system, in-
cluding the fused joints, shall be uninsulated and exposed
All pressure-retaining portions of completed piping (not buried) for inspection during the test.
systems not exempted by ND-6111 shall be pressure
tested except as specified below. Portions of piping sys-
tems that are exempt shall be identified in the Design
XXVI-6122 Restraint or Isolation of Expansion
Specification and Data Report Form. The Design Specifica-
Joints
tion shall be available to the Inspector when the balance Expansion joints shall be provided with temporary re-
of the system is hydrostatically tested. straints, if required, for the additional pressure load un-
der test.
XXVI-6112 Pneumatic Testing
A pneumatic test shall not be permitted.
XXVI-6123 Isolation of Equipment Not Subjected
to Pressure Test
XXVI-6113 Witnessing of Pressure Tests Equipment that is not to be subjected to the pressure
test shall be either disconnected from the piping subas-
Pressure testing shall be performed in the presence of sembly or system or isolated during the test by a blind
the Inspector. flange or similar means. Valves may be used for isolation.

XXVI-6114 Time of Pressure Testing XXVI-6124 Treatment of Flanged Joints

ð17Þ XXVI-6114.1 Piping System Pressure Test. The Containing Blanks
pressure-retaining portion of the system shall be pres-
Flanged joints at which blanks are inserted to isolate
sure tested prior to initial operation. The pressure test
other equipment during the test shall not be required to
may be performed progressively on installed portions of
be retested.
the system, which may then be buried, provided this is
documented in the Certificate Holder's Quality Assurance
Program and is acceptable to the Inspector. XXVI-6125 Precautions Against Test Medium
Expansion
XXVI-6114.2 Piping Subassembly Pressure Test.
If a pressure test is to be maintained for a period of
Piping subassemblies may be tested provided
time and the test medium in the system fluid is subject
(a) the test pressure is in accordance with the require-
to thermal expansion, precautions shall be taken to avoid
ments of XXVI-6221(a)
excessive test pressure.
(b) the pressure test is performed in a manner that, in
the subassembly under test, will simulate the loadings
present when the completed piping system is installed XXVI-6126 Check of Test Equipment Before
and pressurized Applying Pressure
(c) each piping subassembly pressure test is performed The test equipment shall be examined before pressure
by a Certificate Holder and performed in the presence of is applied to ensure that it is tight and that all low-
the Inspector pressure filling lines and other items that should not be
subjected to the test pressure have been disconnected
XXVI-6115 Machining After Pressure Test or isolated.
Provided there is no infringement on t D e s i g n , removal
of an additional amount of material less than or equal to
XXVI-6200 HYDROSTATIC TESTS
5% of t f a b m i n in pipe IPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller and less
than or equal to 0.040 in. (1.0 mm) in pipe greater than The requirements of this subarticle apply to all piping
IPS 4 (DN 100) shall be permitted after pressure test. systems or piping subassemblies.

212
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

XXVI-6210 HYDROSTATIC TEST PROCEDURE XXVI-6224 Examination for Leakage After ð17Þ
XXVI-6211 Venting During Fill Operation Application of Pressure
Following the application of the hydrostatic test pres-
The piping subassembly or piping system in which the
sure for the required time in accordance with
test is to be conducted shall be vented during the filling
XXVI-6223(a), and upon reduction in test pressure in
operation to minimize air pocketing.
XXVI-6223(b), examination for leakage shall be
performed.
XXVI-6212 Test Medium and Test Temperature (a) All external pressure-retaining surfaces of the pip-
ing system and all fusion joints shall be examined for leak-
(a) Water shall be used for the hydrostatic test.
age while at the hydrostatic test pressure.
(b) The test shall be conducted at an ambient tempera- (b) There shall be no leakage at fused joints or through
ture that is within the temperature limits of the system the pressure boundary except as permitted in (c).
design. The test pressure shall not be applied until the (c) Leakage of temporary gaskets and seals, installed
piping and pressurizing fluid are at approximately the for the purpose of conducting the hydrostatic test that
same temperature. will later be replaced, may be permitted unless the leak-
age exceeds the capacity to maintain system test pressure
XXVI-6220 HYDROSTATIC TEST PRESSURE during the required examination. Other leaks, such as
REQUIREMENTS from permanent seals, seats, and gasketed joints may be
permitted when specifically allowed by the Design Speci-
XXVI-6221 Minimum Hydrostatic Test Pressure fications. Leakage from temporary seals or leakage per-
(a) The system shall be hydrostatically tested at no less mitted by the Design Specification shall be directed
than 1.5 times the Design Pressure + 10 psi (70 KPa) for 4 away from the surface of the piping to avoid masking
hr prior to leakage inspection. leaks from other portions of the piping system.
(b) Valves shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance (d) The examination shall be witnessed by the
with the rules of ND-3500. Inspector.
(c) As an alternative to (a), piping between the dis-
charge side of a centrifugal pump and the first shutoff
valve may be hydrostatically tested at the shutoff head
XXVI-6300 PRESSURE TEST GAGES
of the pump. The pressure shall be maintained for a suffi- XXVI-6310 REQUIREMENTS FOR PRESSURE
cient time to permit examination of all fused joints. TEST GAGES
XXVI-6311 Types of Gages to Be Used and Their
XXVI-6222 Maximum Permissible Pressure Location
When pressure testing a system, the induced stresses Pressure test gages used in pressure testing shall be in-
shall not exceed the minimum specified Hydrostatic De- dicating pressure gages and shall be connected directly to
sign Basis (HDB) for any item in the system. the piping. If the indicating gage is not readily visible to
the operator controlling the pressure applied, an addi-
tional indicating gage shall be provided where it will be
ð17Þ XXVI-6223 Hydrostatic Test Pressurization and visible to the operator throughout the duration of the test.
Holding Time For systems with a large volumetric content, it is recom-
mended that a recording gage be used in addition to the
(a) The pressure in the test section shall be gradually
indicating gage.
increased at a rate not to exceed 20 psig/min (140 KPa
gage/min). Pressure shall be held at the test pressure
XXVI-6312 Range of Indicating Pressure Gages
for 4 hr, during which time make-up water may be added
to maintain pressure due to initial expansion. (a) Analog-type indicating pressure gages used in test-
(b) After the 4-hr hold time, the test pressure shall be ing shall be graduated over a range no less than 1.5 times
reduced by 10 psig (70 KPa), and make-up water may nor more than four times the test pressure.
no longer be added to maintain pressure. The system (b) Digital-type pressure gages may be used without
pressure shall then be monitored for at least 1 hr, during range restriction provided the combined error due to ca-
which time there shall be no reduction in pressure great- libration and readability does not exceed 1% of the test
er than 5% of the test pressure. pressure.
(c) The total elevated test time greater than normal op-
erating pressure, including initial expansion and time at XXVI-6313 Calibration of Pressure Gages
test pressure, shall not exceed 8 hr. If the pressure test (a) All test gages shall be calibrated against a standard
is not completed in that time, the section shall be depres- dead weight tester or a calibrated master gage. The test
surized and not repressurized for at least 8 hr. gages shall be calibrated before each test or series of tests.

213
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

A series of tests is that group of tests, using the same pres- (b) The test gages shall be postcalibrated or verified
sure test gage or gages, which is conducted within a per- against a standard dead weight tester or a calibrated mas-
iod not exceeding 2 weeks. ter gage after each successful test or series of tests and
prior to placing the system in service.

214
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE XXVI-7000
OVERPRESSURE PROTECTION

The requirements of Article ND-7000 shall be met.

215
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE XXVI-8000
NAMEPLATES, STAMPING, AND REPORTS

XXVI-8100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (b) No indentation stamping is allowed on the poly-

ethylene surface, and all marking shall be performed with
XXVI-8110 SCOPE a metallic paint marker or stenciling marker.
The requirements for nameplates, stamping with the (c) The Polyethylene Material Manufacturer is per-
Certification Mark and Designator, and reports for com- mitted to apply the standard print line identifier to his
ponents constructed in accordance with this Appendix piping product using a thermal process.
shall be in accordance with Article NCA-8000 with the fol- (d) Fittings fabricated using fusing shall be furnished
lowing exceptions: with Data Report Form NM(PE)-2 as required by
(a) The attachment of nameplates shall be performed XXVI-2230.
using an adhesive or corrosion resistance wire that is
compatible with and will not degrade the polyethylene
material.

216
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE XXVI-9000
GLOSSARY

ð17Þ XXVI-9100 GLOSSARY (b) Polyethylene Material documented on the Certified

Polyethylene Test Report (CPTR).
Refer to Section IX, QG-109, for definitions applicable to
the fusing process. All other definitions shall be as given modulus of soil reaction, E ′: the soil reaction modulus is a
in Article NCA-9000 with the following additions: proportionality constant that represents the embedment
soil’s resistance to ring deflection of pipe due to earth
Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB): one of a series of estab- pressure. E′ has been determined empirically from field
lished stress values for a compound. deflection measurements by substituting site parameters
Hydrostatic Design Stress (HDS): the estimated maximum (e.g., depth of cover, soil weight) into Spangler’s equation
tensile stress the material is capable of withstanding con- and “back calculating” E′.
tinuously with a high degree of certainty that failure of polyethylene (PE): a polyolefin composed of polymers of
the pipe will not occur. This stress is circumferential ethylene. It is normally a translucent, tough, waxy solid
when internal hydrostatic water pressure is applied. that is unaffected by water and a large range of chemicals.
lot: the quantity of There are three general classifications: low density, medi-
(a) Polyethylene Source Material documented on the um density, and high density.
Certificate of Analysis (C of A) and related traceability
documentation.

217
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

MANDATORY APPENDIX XXVI

SUPPLEMENTS

SUPPLEMENT XXVI-I POLYETHYLENE

STANDARDS AND
SPECIFICATIONS
XXVI-I-100 ACCEPTABLE POLYETHYLENE (PE)
STANDARDS
The PE material standards listed in Table XXVI-I-100-1
are acceptable to the extent invoked by Mandatory
Appendix XXVI.

ð17Þ Table XXVI-I-100-1

PE Standards and Specifications Referenced in Text
Standard Subject Edition
ASTM Standards
D638 Tensile Properties of Plastics 2010
D792 Density and Specific Gravity (Relative Density) of Plastics 2008
D1238 Melt Flow Rates of Thermoplastics 2010
D1505 Density of Plastics 2010
D1598 Standard Test Method for Time-to-Failure of Plastic Pipe Under Constant 2009
Internal Pressure
D1599 Short-Time Hydraulic Pressure R2005
D1603 Carbon Black Content of Olefin Plastics 2012
D2122 Determining Dimensions of Thermoplastic Pipe R2010
D2290 Apparent Hoop Tensile Strength 2012
D2837 Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis 2011
D3035 Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR-PR) Based on 2012e1
Controlled Outside Diameter
D3261 Standard Specification for Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Fittings 2012
for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Tubing
D3350 Specification for Plastic Pipe and Fitting Material 2012
D4218 Determining Carbon Black Content in PE Compounds R2008
D4883 Density Measurement Using Ultrasound 2008
F714 Specification for Polyethylene Pipe Based on Outside Diameter 2010
F1055 Electrofusion Type Polyethylene Fittings for Outside Diameter Controlled PE 2013
Pipe and Tubing
F1473 Notch Tensile Test for Slow Crack Growth 2011
F2206 Specification for Fabricated Fittings 2011
F2880 Lap-Joint Type Flange Adapters (applies only to flange adapter hub 2011a
dimensional requirements)
PPI Documents
PPI TN-38 Bolt Torque for Polyethylene Flanged Joints 2011
PPI TR-3 Developing Hydrostatic Design, Pressure Design, and Strength Design Bases 2010a
and Minimum Required Strength Ratings
PPI TR-4 Listing of Hydrostatic Design, Pressure Design, and Strength Design Bases and Latest version
Minimum Required Strength Ratings. (The latest listing of products in Table
I-A.13-PE4710 Materials may be used for PE4710 HDB and HDS equal to
1,600 psi and 1,000 psi, respectively.)

218
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ð17Þ SUPPLEMENT XXVI-IIA PART A: (b) The instrument shall be capable of operation at fre-
ULTRASONIC quencies over the range of at least 1 MHz to 7 MHz and
EXAMINATION OF shall be equipped with a stepped gain control in units
HIGH DENSITY of 2 dB or less and a maximum gain of at least 60 dB.
The instrument shall have a minimum of 32 channels.
POLYETHYLENE
(c) The digitization rate of the instrument shall be at
XXVI-IIA-400 least five times the search unit center frequency.
NOTE: Paragraph numbers relate to the applicable paragraphs of
(d) Compression setting shall be not greater than that
ASME Section V, Article 4, similar to existing Mandatory Appendices used during qualification of the procedure.
of that Article. Skipped and omitted numbers indicate no change to XXVI-IIA-431.2 Data Display and Recording. When
the corresponding paragraphs in Article 4.
performing TOFD, the requirements of Section V, Article
4, Mandatory Appendix III, III-431.2 shall apply. When
XXVI-IIA-410 Scope performing PA ultrasonic examination, the following shall
apply:
This Supplement describes the requirements for exam-
(a) The instrument shall be able to select an appropri-
ination of butt fusion joints in HDPE using Phased Array
ate portion of the time base within which A-scans are
(PA) or time of flight diffraction (TOFD) ultrasonic
digitized.
techniques.
(b) The instrument shall be able to display A-, B-, C-, D-,
and S-scans in a color palette able to differentiate be-
XXVI-IIA-420 General tween different amplitude levels.
The requirements of Section V, Article 4, including Man- (c) The equipment shall permit storage of all A-scan
datory Appendix III or Mandatory Appendix V of that waveform data, with a range defined by gates, including
Article, as applicable, shall apply except as modified amplitude and time-base details.
herein. (d) The equipment shall also store positional informa-
tion indicating the relative position of the waveform with
XXVI-IIA-421 respect to adjacent waveform(s), i.e., encoded position.
XXVI-IIA-421.1 Procedure Qualification. The re-
XXVI-IIA-432 Search Units
quirements of Table XXVI-IIA-421, plus Section V, Article
4, Table T-421 and either Section V, Article 4, Mandatory The requirements of Section V, Article 4, T-432-1, and
Appendix III, Table III-422 or Section V, Article 4, Manda- Section V, Article 4, Mandatory Appendix III, III-432.1
tory Appendix V, Table V-421, as applicable, shall apply. shall apply. In addition, when using PA ultrasonic exami-
nation, the following shall apply:
XXVI-IIA-422 Scan Plan (a) The nominal frequency shall be from 1 MHz to
7 MHz, unless variables, such as production crystalline
A scan plan (documented examination strategy) shall microstructure, require the use of other frequencies to
be provided showing search unit placement and move- ensure adequate penetration or better resolution.
ment that provides a standardized and repeatable meth-
(b) Longitudinal wave mode shall be used.
odology for the examination. In addition to the
(c) The number of elements used shall be between 32
information in Section V, Article 4, Table T-421, and, as
and 128.
applicable, Section V, Article 4, Mandatory Appendix III,
Table III-422 or Section V, Article 4, Mandatory Appendix (d) Search units with angled wedges may be used to aid
V, Table V-421, the scan plan shall include beam angles coupling of the ultrasound into the inspection area.
and directions with respect to the weld axis reference
point, weld joint geometry, and examination areas or XXVI-IIA-433 Couplant
zones. XXVI-IIA-433.2 Control of Contaminants. Couplants
used on HDPE shall not contain oxidizers, grease, and mo-
tor oils.
XXVI-IIA-430 Equipment
XXVI-IIA-431 Instrument Requirements XXVI-IIA-434 Calibration Blocks

XXVI-IIA-431.1 Instrument. The requirements of XXVI-IIA-434.1 General.

Section V, Article 4, T-431, and Section V, Article 4, Man- XXVI-IIA-434.1.1 Reflectors. The reference reflec-
datory Appendix III, III-431.1 shall apply. In addition, tor shall be a maximum diameter of 0.08 in. (2 mm).
when using PA ultrasonic examination, the following shall XXVI-IIA-434.1.2 Material. The block shall be fab-
apply: ricated from pipe of the same pipe material designation as
(a) An ultrasonic array controller shall be used. the pipe material to be used in production.

219
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ð17Þ Table XXVI-IIA-421

Requirements of an Ultrasonic Examination Procedure for HDPE Techniques
Requirement (as Applicable) Essential Variable Nonessential Variable
Scan plan X …
Examination technique(s) X …
Computer software and revision X …
Scanning technique (automated vs. semiautomated, manual) … X
Flaw characterization methodology X …
Flaw sizing (length) methodology X …
Scanner (Mfg. and Model) and adhering … X
and guiding mechanism
Search unit mechanical fixturing device X …

XXVI-IIA-434.1.3 Quality. In addition to the re- XXVI-IIA-467 Calibration Confirmation

quirements of Section V, Article 4, T-434.1.3, areas that XXVI-IIA-467.1 System Changes. When any part of
contain indications that are not attributable to geometry the examination system is changed, a calibration check
are unacceptable, regardless of amplitude. shall be made on the calibration block to verify that dis-
tance range point and sensitivity setting(s) of the calibra-
XXVI-IIA-434.3 Piping Calibration Blocks. The cali-
tion reflector with the longest sound path used in the
bration block as a minimum shall contain side-drilled
calibration satisfy the requirements of XXVI-IIA-467.3.
holes (SDH) and shall be at least as thick as the compo-
nent under examination. Alternative calibration block de- XXVI-IIA-467.2 Calibration Checks. A calibration
signs may be utilized provided the calibration is check on at least one of the reflectors in the calibration
demonstrated as required in XXVI-IIA-421.1. The block block or a check using a simulator shall be performed at
size and reflector locations shall allow for calibration of the completion of each examination or series of similar
the beam angles used that cover the volume of interest. examinations and when examination personnel (except
for automated equipment) are changed. The distance
range and sensitivity values recorded shall satisfy the re-
XXVI-IIA-460 Calibration quirements of XXVI-IIA-467.3.
XXVI-IIA-462 XXVI-IIA-467.2.1 Temperature Variations. If dur-
ing the course of the examination, the temperature be-
XXVI-IIA-462.6 Temperature.
tween the most recent calibration and component
XXVI-IIA-462.6.1 The temperature differential be- temperature exceeds ±18°F (10°C), calibration is
tween the calibration block and examination surface shall required.
be within 18°F (10°C).
NOTE: Interim calibration checks between the required initial cali-
bration and final calibration check may be performed. The decision
to perform interim calibration checks should be based on ultrasonic
XXVI-IIA-464 Calibration for Piping instrument stability (analog vs. digital), the risk of having to conduct
reexaminations, and the benefit of not performing interim calibra-
XXVI-IIA-464.1 System Calibration for Distance tion checks.
Amplitude Techniques.
XXVI-IIA-464.1.1 Calibration Block(s). Calibra- XXVI-IIA-467.3 Confirmation Acceptance Values.
tions shall be performed utilizing the calibration block re- XXVI-IIA-467.3.1 Distance Range Points. If the
ferenced in XXVI-IIA-434.3. distance range point for the deepest reflector used in
the calibration has moved by more than 10% of the dis-
XXVI-IIA-464.1.2 Straight Beam Calibration. Not tance reading or 5% of full sweep, whichever is greater,
required. correct the distance range calibration, and note the cor-
rection in the examination record. All recorded indica-
XXVI-IIA-464.2 System Calibration for Nondistance
tions since the last valid calibration or calibration check
Amplitude Techniques. Calibrations include all those ac-
shall be reexamined and their values shall be changed
tions required to ensure that the sensitivity and accuracy
on the data sheets or rerecorded.
of the signal amplitude and time outputs of the examina-
tion system (whether displayed, recorded, or automati- XXVI-IIA-467.3.2 Sensitivity Settings. If any sen-
cally processed) are repeated from examination to sitivity setting for the deepest reflector used in the cali-
examination. Calibration shall be by use of the calibration bration has changed by 4 dB or less, compensate for the
block specified in XXVI-IIA-434.3. difference when performing the data analysis, and note

220
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

the correction in the examination record. If the sensitivity XXVI-IIB-421.2 Procedure Qualification. The re-
setting has changed by more than 4 dB, the examination quirements of Table XXVI-IIB-421.1-1 shall apply to qua-
shall be repeated. lification of microwave examination procedures.

XXVI-IIA-470 Examination XXVI-IIB-422 Scan Plan

XXVI-IIA-471 General Examination Requirements
A scan plan (documented examination strategy) shall
XXVI-IIA-471.1 Examination Coverage. The exami- be provided showing microwave probe placement and
nation area of interest is shown in Figure XXVI-5220-1. movement that provide a standardized and repeatable
methodology for the examination. The scan plan shall in-
XXVI-IIA-471.6 Recording clude probe waveguide orientation and directions with
A-scan data shall be recorded for the area of interest in respect to the weld axis reference point, weld joint geo-
a form consistent with the procedure qualification and in metry, and examination areas or zones.
recording increments of a maximum of
(a) 0.04 in. (1 mm) for material ˂3 in. (75 mm) thick XXVI-IIB-430 Equipment
(b) 0.08 in. (2 mm) for material ≥3 in. (75 mm) thick
XXVI-IIB-431 Instrument Requirements
XXVI-IIA-490 Documentation XXVI-IIB-431.1 Instrument. When using microwave
examination, the following shall apply:
XXVI-IIA-492 Examination Records
(a) A microwave electronics module shall be used.
For each examination, the required information of Sec- (b) The instrument shall have a minimum of two
tion V, Article 4, T-492, and either Section V, Article 4, channels.
Mandatory Appendix III, III-492 or Section V, Article 4,
(c) The instrument signal input range shall be capable
Mandatory Appendix V, V-492, as applicable, shall be re-
of monitoring probe signals without clipping with a
corded. A-scan recorded data shall be retained in accor-
signal-to-noise ratio (signal voltage peak–peak/noise vol-
dance with XXVI-5500.
tage peak–peak) greater than 3:1.
(d) Data compression setting shall be not greater than
that used during qualification of the procedure.
ð17Þ SUPPLEMENT XXVI-IIB PART B:
MICROWAVE
EXAMINATION OF
Table XXVI-IIB-421.1-1
HIGH DENSITY Requirements of a Microwave Examination
POLYETHYLENE Procedure for HDPE Techniques
XXVI-IIB-400 Nonessen-
Essential tial
NOTE: Paragraph numbers relate to the applicable paragraphs of
Requirement (as Applicable) Variable Variable
ASME Section V, Article 4, similar to existing Mandatory Appendices
of that Article. Skipped and omitted numbers indicate no change to Fusion joint configuration to be examined, X …
the corresponding paragraphs in Article 4. including thickness dimensions and base
material product form (pipe, fitting, etc.)
Surface(s) from which the examination shall be X …
XXVI-IIB-410 Scope performed
Angle(s) and mode(s) of waveguide orientation X …
This Supplement describes the requirements for exam- Probe type(s), frequency(ies), element size(s)/ X …
ination of electrofusion coupling and saddle joints in high shape(s), including minimum warm-up times
density polyethylene (HDPE) using encoded microwave Special probe accessories, nose caps, etc., when X …
techniques. used
Distance from end of antenna to pipe fitting X …
surface (standoff)
XXVI-IIB-420 General Microwave electronics module(s) X …
The requirements of this Supplement shall apply to mi- Directions and extent of scanning X …
Scan plan X …
crowave examination procedures.
Examination technique(s) X …
Scanning technique (automated vs. X …
XXVI-IIB-421 Written Procedure Requirements semiautomated, manual)
Flaw characterization methodology … X
XXVI-IIB-421.1 Requirements. Microwave examina-
Flaw sizing (length) methodology X …
tion shall be performed in accordance with a written pro- Computer software and revision X …
cedure that shall, as a minimum, contain the
requirements listed in Table XXVI-IIB-421.1-1.

221
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

XXVI-IIB-431.2 Data Display and Recording. XXVI-IIB-450 Technique

(a) The instrument shall be able to display all channels Microwave probes shall be maintained normal to the
in a color or gray scale palette able to differentiate be- part being inspected. The probe housing may remain in
tween different amplitude levels. contact with the material under inspection, at a constant
(b) The equipment shall permit storage of all scan wa- distance from the surface, or in a plane essentially parallel
veform data images. to the body of the part under inspection while data is
(c) The equipment shall also store positional informa- being collected. Adjustable nose caps may be used to op-
tion indicating the relative position of the waveform with timize standoff.
respect to adjacent waveform(s), i.e., encoded position. Probes shall be allowed a minimum of a 10-min warm-
up period.
XXVI-IIB-432 Microwave Probes
XXVI-IIB-460 Calibration
The nominal frequency shall be 10 GHz to 35 GHz un-
less variables, such as production crystalline microstruc- XXVI-IIB-461 Instrument Checks
ture, require the use of other frequencies to ensure Prior to use, the full microwave system shall be checked
adequate penetration or better resolution. for appropriate response to simulated stimuli or defect.
The description of the instrument check method shall
XXVI-IIB-434 Calibration Blocks be recorded in the procedure and shall produce a resul-
tant signal in all channels of information. The instrument
XXVI-IIB-434.1 General. check shall be performed at the expected instrument set-
XXVI-IIB-434.1.1 Reflectors. The reference reflec- tings for the inspection. The result of the instrument
tor shall be a back-drilled hole with a diameter between check shall be recorded as part of the procedure.
0.04 in. (1 mm) and 0.08 in. (2 mm).
XXVI-IIB-434.1.2 Material. The block shall be fab- XXVI-IIB-462 General Calibration Requirements
ricated from pipe of the same pipe material designation as Performance of the examination equipment shall be
the pipe material to be used in production. Surfaces to be verified by the use of the reference specimen as described
inspected shall be clean and free of any dirt, grease, oil, herein.
moisture, or other contaminants. Mechanical devices such
as flapper wheels, grinders, and sanders shall not be used XXVI-IIB-462.1 Microwave System.
to clean HDPE surfaces. (a) Calibrations shall include the complete microwave
system and shall be performed prior to use of the system
XXVI-IIB-434.1.3 Quality. Areas that contain indi- in the thickness range under examination
cations that are not attributable to geometry are unaccep- (b) Calibrations shall be performed as specified in the
table, regardless of amplitude. written procedure
XXVI-IIB-434.2 Piping Calibration Blocks. The cali- (1) at the beginning of each production run of a given
bration block shall contain, as a minimum, flat bottom diameter and thickness of a given material
holes (FBH) and shall be at least as thick as the compo- (2) at the end of the production run
nent under examination. For curvature of the block, see (3) at any time that malfunctioning is suspected
XXVI-5114. Alternative calibration block designs may be (c) If, during calibration or verification, it is determined
utilized provided the calibration is demonstrated as re- that the examination equipment is not functioning prop-
quired in XXVI-IIB-421.1. The block size and reflector lo- erly, all of the product tested since the last calibration
cations shall allow for clear identification of the individual or verification shall be reexamined.
indications.
XXVI-IIB-462.2 Calibration Surface. Calibrations
shall be performed from the surface in the same geometry
XXVI-IIB-440 Miscellaneous Requirements and corresponding to the surface of the component from
XXVI-IIB-441 Identification of Joint Examination which the examination will be performed.
Areas XXVI-IIB-462.4 Contact Geometry. The same con-
(a) Joint Locations. Joint locations and their identifica- tact geometry to be used during the examination shall
tion shall be recorded on a joint map or in an identifica- be used for calibration, including the same standoff dis-
tion plan. tance of the antenna to the part surface.
(b) Marking. If joints are to be permanently marked, XXVI-IIB-462.5 Instrument Controls. Any control
marking shall be in accordance with XXVI-4122.1. that affects instrument linearity (e.g., instrument null
(c) Reference System. Each weld shall be located and and gain settings) shall be in the same position for cali-
identified by a system of reference points explained in bration, calibration checks, instrument linearity checks,
the scan plan. and examination.

222
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

XXVI-IIB-462.6 Temperature. Temperature differ- XXVI-IIB-471.6 Recording. Scan image data shall be
ence between the calibration block and the item being in- recorded for the area of interest in a form consistent with
spected is not required to be monitored or recorded. the procedure qualification, and in recording increments
of a maximum of
XXVI-IIB-464 Calibration for Piping and Fittings
(a) 0.04 in. (1 mm) for material ≤3 in. (75 mm) thick
XXVI-IIB-464.1 System Calibration for Microwave (b) 0.08 in. (2 mm) for material >3 in. (75 mm) thick
Techniques.
XXVI-IIB-464.1.1 Calibration Block(s). Calibra-
tions shall be performed using the calibration block refer- XXVI-IIB-490 Documentation
enced in XXVI-IIB-434.2.
XXVI-IIB-492 Examination Records
XXVI-IIB-467 Calibration Confirmation For each examination, the following information shall
XXVI-IIB-467.1 System Changes. When any part of be recorded:
the examination system is changed, a calibration check (a) procedure identification and revision
shall be made on the calibration block to verify that probe (b) microwave instrument identification (including
sensitivity setting(s) of the calibration reflector used in manufacturer's serial number)
the calibration satisfy the requirements of
(c) probe type(s), frequency(ies), element size(s)/
XXVI-IIB-467.3.
shape(s) used
XXVI-IIB-467.2 Calibration Checks. A calibration (d) angle and mode of waveguide orientation used
check on at least one of the defects/reflectors in the cali-
(e) microwave electronics module
bration block or a check using a simulator shall be per-
formed at the completion of each examination or series (f) special accessories (probe accessories, nose caps,
of similar examinations. A calibration check shall be per- etc.), when used
formed when examination personnel are changed, except (g) computerized program identification and revision,
when automated equipment is used. The probe sensitivity when used
values recorded shall satisfy the requirements of (h) calibration block identification
XXVI-IIB-467.3. (i) instrument reference level gain and, if used, damp-
NOTE: Interim calibration checks between the required initial cali- ing and reject setting(s)
bration and the final calibration check may be performed. The deci- (j) calibration data, including reference reflector(s), in-
sion to perform interim calibration checks should be based on
dication amplitude(s), and distance reading(s)
microwave instrument stability, reduced potential for having to con-
duct reexaminations, and the benefit of not performing interim cali- (k) identification and location of weld or volume
bration checks. scanned
(l) surface(s) from which examination was conducted,
XXVI-IIB-467.3 Confirmation Acceptance Values.
including surface condition
XXVI-IIB-467.3.1 Sensitivity Settings. If any sensi-
tivity setting for the deepest defect/reflector used in the (m) map or record of rejectable indications detected or
calibration has changed by 10% or less, compensate for areas cleared
the difference when performing the data analysis, and (n) areas of restricted access or inaccessible volumes
note the correction in the examination record. If the sen- (o) examination personnel identity, and qualification
sitivity setting has changed by more than 10%, the exam- level
ination shall be repeated. (p) date of examination
XXVI-IIB-470 Examination Items (b) through (j) may be included in a separate ca-
libration record provided the calibration record identifi-
XXVI-IIB-471 General Examination Requirements cation is included in the examination record. Scan image
XXVI-IIB-471.1 Examination Coverage. The exami- recorded data shall be retained in accordance with
nation area of interest is shown in Figure XXVI-5220-2. XXVI-5500.

223
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

SUPPLEMENT XXVI-III DATA REPORT FORM

FORM NM(PE)-2 DATA REPORT FOR NONMETALLIC BATCH-PRODUCED PRODUCTS REQUIRING FUSING
As Required by the Provisions of the ASME Section III, Mandatory Appendix XXVI

1. Manufactured by
(name and address of manufacturer of nonmetallic products)

2. Manufactured for
(name and address of purchaser)

3. (a) Identification–Certificate Holder’s Serial No.

(Lot No., Batch No., etc.) (print string)

(National Bd. No.) (year of manufacturing)

(b) Owner

4. Manufactured according to Material Spec. Purchase Order No.

(ASTM)

5. Remarks
(brief description of fabrication)

CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE

We certify that the statements made in this report are correct and that the products defined in this report conform to
the requirements of the ASME Material specification listed above on line 4. The Certified Material Batch Reports were
provided for the material covered by this report.
Certificate of Authorization (NA if Owner) No. to use the Symbol expires
(Date)

Date Name Signed

(Certificate Holder) (authorized representative)

CERTIFICATE OF INSPECTION

I, the undersigned, holding a valid commission issued by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors
employed by
of have inspected the products described in this Partial Data Report
in accordance with the ASME Section III, Mandatory Appendix XXVI. By signing this certificate neither the Inspector
nor his employer makes any warranty, expressed or implied, concerning the products described in this Partial Data
Report. Furthermore, neither the Inspector nor his employer shall be liable in any manner for any personal injury or
property damage or a loss of any kind arising from or connected with this inspection.

Date Signed Commission

(Authorized Nuclear Inspector) (National Bd. No. and Endorsement)

GENERAL NOTE: Supplemental sheets in form of lists, sletches or drawings may be used provided (1) size is 81/2  11 in. (2) information on items 1 – 4 on this
Data Report is included on each sheet, and (3) each sheet is numbered and number of sheets is recorded at the top of this form.

(07/15)

224
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX XXVI

SUPPLEMENTS

SUPPLEMENT XXVI-A FUSING MACHINE (b) The course will be delivered by a competent quali-
OPERATOR fied trainer with a minimum of 3 yr of experience in the
QUALIFICATION butt fusion processes and who has mastered the techni-
TRAINING ques involved.
(c) The trainer should have a range of fusing machines
XXVI-A-100 SCOPE representative of the equipment encountered on work-
(a) The major portion of the quality of polyethylene sites for installing pipes, in order for the trainee fusing
piping is determined by the skills of the fusing machine operator to become acquainted with the fusing equip-
operators. When installing polyethylene piping, the qual- ment commonly used. The trainee fusing operator may
ity of the fusion joints is essential for the piping system. be trained on one of these fusing machines or on a ma-
(b) It is important that the fusing machine operators chine from his own company if accepted by the training
are trained and competent in the fusing technology em- center. The fusing equipment must comply with the fus-
ployed in constructing polyethylene piping systems. Con- ing machine manufacturer’s specifications or ISO
tinued competence of the fusing operator is covered by 12176-1 (see Table XXVI-A-110-1).
periodic retraining and reassessment.
(c) This document gives guidance for the training, as-
sessment, and approval of fusing operators to establish XXVI-A-220 Operator Assessment
and maintain competency in construction of polyethylene The trainee fusing operator who has followed a training
piping for pressure applications. The fusion joining tech- course as described above should then pass a theoretical
nique covered by this Appendix is thermal butt fusion. and practical assessment in order to be qualified as a fus-
This Appendix covers both the theoretical and practical ing operator for polyethylene systems. The assessor
knowledge necessary to ensure high-quality fusion joints. should not be the trainer but should have the same as-
sessment qualifications as the trainer shown above.
XXVI-A-110 References
The fusion standards in this Appendix are listed in
Table XXVI-A-110-1. XXVI-A-230 Training Curriculum
(a) The training course should be comprised of any
XXVI-A-200 TRAINING
combination of fusing packages based on the require-
XXVI-A-210 Training Course ments of utility or pipeline operators. These packages
(a) The course should cover all aspects of the butt fu- may be given as individual modules or combined to suit
sion process, including safety, machine evaluation and requirements. The course shall include safety training re-
maintenance, machine operation, fusing procedure speci- lated to the fusing process and equipment.
fication guidelines, pressure and temperature setting, (b) All consumables and tools necessary for the training
data log device operation and set-up, in-ditch fusing tech- package should be available during the training session.
niques, visual examination guidance, and data log record The pipes and fittings to be used shall conform to the
evaluation. The minimum course duration is 24 hr. ASTM product forms permitted by this Appendix.

225
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(c) The lessons should be designed so that the trainee (3) The trainee should start by making a butt joint
fusing operator learns to master the fusing technique between two pipes and should then learn to make butt fu-
and attains a good working knowledge of the piping sys- sion joints with pipes and fittings, such as tees, reducers,
tem materials and practical problems encountered when etc.
fusing pipe in the field. The fusing operator should receive (4) The trainee should learn how to detect and avoid
a written manual covering all the elements dealt with in typical fusion defects.
the training. (5) The trainee should learn how to assess the qual-
(d) The theoretical course should deal with general in- ity of a butt fusion joint by doing a visual examination of
formation in connection with raw materials, pipes and fit- the butt fusion joint and comparing it with the visual
tings, and also with theoretical knowledge about guidelines published in the pipe manufacturer’s heat fu-
preparation, tools and devices, joining components, dif- sion joining procedure booklet. The trainee should also
ferent materials, different diameter ratios, and correct compare the data log record with the fusing procedure
and incorrect parameters. The safety course should in- specification to ensure the proper parameters and proce-
clude information concerning the fusing process, such dures were followed in the butt fusion process.
as protective clothing, general safety, regulations for elec-
trical equipment, handling heater plates, etc. Areas of XXVI-A-300 ASSESSMENT AND TESTING
study should include but not be limited to the following: (a) The training program should end with a theoretical
(1) Butt fusion joining. and practical examination (test piece).
(-a) principles of fusion (b) The content of the theoretical examination shall
(-b) straight/coiled pipes, service lines, main lines, consist of no fewer than 20 multiple choice questions
etc. about the butt fusion process, fusing machine operation,
(-c) components: pipes, flange adapters, saddle pipe, quality examination, safety, etc., within a set period
fittings, other fittings of time. A score of 80% or better is considered passing on
(-d) butt fusing equipment: manual, semiauto- this examination. Questions to be included but not limited
matic, and automatic machines to are
(-e) joint preparation: cleaning, rounding, align- (1) How do you calculate the fusing machine gage
ment, facing, etc. pressure?
(2) What is the proper heater surface temperature
(-f) butt fusion cycle: diagram showing pressure,
range from the fusing procedure specification?
time, and temperature relationships
(3) What is the proper butt fusion interfacial pres-
(-g) failure modes: understanding and avoiding
sure range from the fusing procedure specification?
possible mistakes
(4) How do you calculate the drag pressure?
(-h) test methods: visual examination; high-speed, (5) How do you know when to remove the heater in
tensile-impact test; bending test; hydrostatic test; data log the heating cycle?
recording/evaluation; etc. (6) How long do you leave the pipe ends together un-
(2) The trainee fusing operator should be familiar der pressure in the cooling cycle?
with the butt fusion joining technique and fusing proce- (7) What is the difference between IPS pipe and DIPS
dure specification by making a sufficient number of butt pipe?
fusion joints. In some cases, the fusing technique may (8) How do I determine the hydraulic fusing ma-
vary slightly according to diameter, material, or other fac- chine’s total effective piston area?
tors. In such cases, the trainee fusing operator should also (9) How is the total effective piston area of the fusing
be made familiar with the various techniques. machine used to determine the fusing machine’s gage
pressure for a specific pipe?
(10) How do you adjust the machine to improve the
Table XXVI-A-110-1 alignment of the pipe after facing?
Fusion Standards and Specifications (11) How much material should be removed from the
Referenced in Text pipe ends in the facing operation?
Standard Subject Edition (12) How do you determine if the fusing machine
ASTM F2620 Heat Fusion Joining of PE Pipe and Fittings 2009
conforms to the equipment manufacturer’s
(for reference only) specifications?
ISO 12176-1 Plastic Pipe and Fittings — Equipment for 2006 (13) How do you align the pipe in the butt fusing
Fusion Joining machine?
ISO TR 19480 Guidance for Training and Assessment of 2005 (14) Can you butt fuse pipe in a ditch?
Fusion Operators
(15) What is interfacial pressure?
PPI TR-33 Generic Butt Fusion Procedure (for reference 2012
only)
(c) The practical examination will require the trainee
fusing operator to make a fusion joint with a hydraulic
butt fusing machine with a minimum pipe size of IPS 8

226
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(DN 200) DR 11. A data acquisition device must be at- (d) Trainees who pass the theoretical and practical ex-
tached to the fusing machine and the data concerning amination shall be documented on a training record. The
the joint entered. The data log device shall be used to re- record should state the technique or techniques and fus-
cord the joint made by the trainee. The assessor shall ob- ing machines that were used. If the fused specimens are
serve the butt fusion joint and note if the proper fusing used for fusing operator qualification, they shall be tested
procedure specification was followed. After the joint is in accordance with XXVI-4300.
complete, the data log record shall be reviewed by the as-
sessor and compared with the FPS to ensure the proper XXVI-A-400 REASSESSMENT
procedures were followed. The assessor will then conduct If the trainee fails one of the examinations, he should
a visual examination of the joint to make sure it satisfies retake it after a period not shorter than 1 week. If the trai-
the visual acceptance criteria per Figure XXVI-5321-1. nee fails the examination for the second time, the trainee
should repeat the training course before taking the test
again.
If the trainee fails fusing operator qualification testing,
retesting shall be performed as permitted by Section IX.

227
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

SUPPLEMENT XXVI-B UNACCEPTABLE FUSION BEAD CONFIGURATIONS

Figure XXVI-B-1
Unacceptable Fusion Bead Configurations

Insufficient fusion
pressure – “V”-
shaped melt
appearance

Melt bead too

small for 2 in. Inadequate roll
and larger mains back of bead

(a) Butt Fusion of Pipe (b) Butt Fusion of Pipe

(Unacceptable appearance – insufficient melt) (Unacceptable appearance – inadequate roll back)

Inadequate “High-low”
roll back condition
of bead Excessive melt, improper
due to improper alignment and/or
alignment excessive pressure

(c) Butt Fusion of Pipe (d) Butt Fusion of Pipe

(Unacceptable appearance – improper alignment) (Unacceptable appearance)

Unbonded area in
joint of cut strap

No melt bead
caused by
incomplete
face off

(e) Butt Fusion of Pipe (f) Butt Fusion of Pipe

(Unacceptable appearance – incomplete face off) (Unacceptable appearance – incomplete face off)

228
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

SUPPLEMENT XXVI-C ALTERNATIVE This strain, (ε a )Earthquake, shall be limited to the values
SEISMIC ANALYSIS listed in Table XXVI-C-100-1, where K ′ is defined in Table
METHOD XXVI-3223-1.

XXVI-C-100 QUALIFICATION BY ANALYSIS

The buried pipe may be qualified by analysis for the ef- SUPPLEMENT XXVI-D ELECTROFUSION ð17Þ
fects of seismic wave passage and any seismically induced OPERATOR
permanent or temporary movements, following the meth- QUALIFICATION
od provided in this Supplement. TRAINING
Step 1. The strains from seismic wave passage and seis-
XXVI-D-100 SCOPE
mically induced permanent or temporary movements, if
any, shall be obtained by a plant-specific geotechnical civil (a) The major portion of the quality of PE piping sys-
investigation. tems is determined by the skills of the electrofusion
Step 2. The soil strains shall be converted into an (EF) operators. When installing PE piping, the quality of
equivalent temperature rise of the buried pipe, as follows: the EF joints is essential for the piping system.
(b) It is important that the EF operators are trained and
competent in the EF technology employed in constructing
PE piping systems. Continued competence of the
EF operator is covered by periodic retraining and
Step 3. The pipe-soil system shall be modeled as a pip-
reassessment.
ing system constrained by soil springs.
(c) This Supplement provides guidance for the training,
(a) The pipe model shall consider two cases: short-
assessment, and approval of EF operators in order to es-
term modulus (<10 hr, Table XXVI-3210-3 or Table
tablish and maintain competency in construction of PE
XXVI-3210-3M) for wave passage and long-term modulus
piping systems for pressure applications. The fusion join-
based on system design life.
ing technique covered by this Supplement is electrofu-
(b) The soil model shall have at least a bilinear stiffness sion. This Supplement covers both the theoretical and
and shall consider two cases: upper and lower bounds of practical knowledge necessary to ensure high-quality EF
soil stiffness. joints.
For guidance on modeling pipe-soil interaction, refer to
ASCE, Guidelines for the Seismic Design of Oil and Gas
XXVI-D-110 References
Pipeline Systems, 1984; ASCE 4, Seismic Analysis of
Safety-Related Nuclear Structures and Commentary; or (a) PPI TN-34 (2009), Installation Guidelines for Elec-
American Lifelines Alliance, Guidelines for the Design of trofusion Couplings 14” and Larger
Buried Steel Pipes, July 2001, with February 2005 (b) ASTM F1290 (2013), Standard Practice for Electro-
addendum. fusion Joining Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings
Step 4. The equivalent change of temperature, ΔT e q ,
shall be applied to the pipe-soil model to obtain forces XXVI-D-200 TRAINING
and moments throughout the system.
XXVI-D-210 Training Course
Step 5. The anticipated building seismic anchor move-
ments, if any, shall be applied to the pipe-soil model to ob- (a) A trainee EF operator for PE systems should follow
tain forces and moments throughout the system. a training course to obtain an EF operator certificate for
PE pipes. The course should cover all aspects of the EF
Step 6. The anticipated seismic movements, if any, shall
process, including safety, equipment and coupling evalua-
be applied to the pipe-soil model to obtain forces and mo-
tion and maintenance, FPS guidelines, visual examination
ments throughout the system.
guidance, and data log record retrieval and evaluation.
Step 7. The results of Steps 4 through 6 shall be com- The minimum course duration is 8 hr (16 hr for fittings
bined by SRSS at each point along the piping system to ob- ≥ 14 IPS pipe size).
tain resultant forces and moments.
Step 8. The resultant forces and moments shall be eval-
uated as follows:
Table XXVI-C-100-1
(a) The stresses in pipe, fittings, and fused joints shall Seismic Strain Limits
comply with the requirements of XXVI-3410.
DR Allowable Strain
(b) Alternatively, the seismic-induced strain shall be
DR ≤ 13.5 0.025 × K′
determined as follows:
13.5 < DR ≤ 21 0.020 × K′
DR > 21 0.017 × K′

229
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(b) The course will be delivered by a competent quali- (-f) failure modes: understanding and avoiding
fied trainer who has a minimum of 3 yr of experience in possible causes of EF cycle and joint failure
the EF process and who has mastered the techniques (-g) test methods: visual examination, destructive
involved. tests, hydrostatic test, data log recording and evaluation,
(c) The trainer should have an EF control box and a etc.
range of couplings and tools representative of the equip- (2) The trainee EF operator should become familiar
ment encountered on worksites for installing pipes, to en- with the EF joining technique and procedure (FPS) by
able the trainee EF operator to become acquainted with making a sufficient number of EF joints. In some cases,
the equipment commonly used. The EF control boxes the EF technique may vary slightly according to diameter,
and couplings must comply with the requirements of this material, coupling manufacturer, or other factors. In such
Appendix and the manufacturer’s specifications. cases, the trainee EF operator should also be made famil-
iar with the various techniques.
XXVI-D-220 Operator Assessment (3) The trainee should start by making an EF joint
The trainee EF operator who has followed a training with pipe, and should then learn to make EF joints with
course as described herein should then pass a theoretical fittings such as tees and reducers, as applicable to the
and practical assessment to be qualified as an EF operator work to be performed.
for PE systems. The assessor should not be the trainer but (4) The trainee should learn how to detect and avoid
should have the same assessment qualifications as the typical EF problem areas.
trainer, as described in XXVI-D-210(b) and (5) The trainee should learn how to assess the qual-
XXVI-D-210(c). ity of an EF joint by doing a visual examination of the EF
joint and comparing it to the visual guidelines published
XXVI-D-230 Training Curriculum in the EF manufacturer’s joining procedure booklet and
(a) The training course should comprise any combina- PPI TN-34. The trainee should also review the data log re-
tion of EF packages based on the requirements of utility cord to ensure the manufacturer’s procedures were fol-
or pipeline operators. These packages may be given as in- lowed in the EF process.
dividual modules or combined to suit requirements. The
course should include safety training related to the EF
XXVI-D-300 ASSESSMENT AND TESTING
process and equipment. (a) The training program should end with a theoretical
(b) All consumables and tools necessary for the training and practical examination (test piece).
package should be available during the training session. (b) The content of the theoretical examination shall
The pipes and fittings to be used should conform to the consist of not less than twenty multiple choice questions
ASTM product forms permitted by this Appendix. about the EF process, control box operation, pipe, quality
(c) The lessons should be designed so that the trainee examination, safety, etc., to be answered within a set per-
EF operator learns to master the fusion technique and at- iod of time. A score of 80% or better is considered passing
tains a good working knowledge of the piping system ma- on this examination. Questions should include, but not be
terials and practical problems encountered when limited to, the following:
electrofusing pipe in the field. The EF operator should re- (1) What do you do to prepare the pipe before cut-
ceive a written manual covering all the elements dealt ting and scraping?
with in the training. (2) How do you check for pipe ovality?
(d) The theoretical course should deal with general in- (3) How do you cut the end of the pipe?
formation in connection with raw materials and pipes and (4) How close to perpendicular should the cut be?
fittings, and also with theoretical knowledge about pre- (5) How long do you leave the pipe ends together un-
paration, tools and devices, joining components, different der pressure in the cooling cycle?
materials, different diameter ratios, and correct and in- (6) What is the difference between IPS pipe and DIPS
correct parameters. The safety course should include in- pipe?
formation concerning the EF process, such as protective (7) How do you prepare the EF coupling before
clothing, general safety, and regulations for electrical joining?
equipment. Areas of study should include, but not be lim- (8) Why is the pipe scraped before installing the EF
ited to, the following: coupling?
(1) EF joining (9) What happens if the scraping operation is not
(-a) principles of EF performed or is done without care?
(-b) pipes, service lines, main lines, etc. (10) How much pipe material should be removed
(-c) components: pipes, flange adapters, and other during scraping?
fittings permitted by this Appendix (11) How do you know how much pipe material was
(-d) joint preparation: cleaning, rounding, scrap- removed?
ing, measuring for ovality (12) How do you determine if the EF machine con-
(-e) EF cycle: fusion, clamping, and cooling forms to the equipment manufacturer’s specifications?

230
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(13) How do you align the pipe ends and the EF visual examination of the joint to make sure it satisfies the
coupling? PE Material Manufacturer’s recommend visual guidance
(14) How do you record information in the control criteria.
box? (d) If a data acquisition device is not available, the as-
(15) How do you know if you are ready to start the EF sessor should manually record the EF steps used in the
process by pushing the button on the control box? EF process. This should be compared with the FPS to en-
(16) How do you know if the joint was successfully sure they agree.
made? (e) Trainee EF operators who pass the theoretical and
(17) How do you download the EF joint information practical examination receive an EF operator certificate
to a computer? bearing the logo of the assessment center awarding the
(c) The practical examination should require the trai- approval. The EF operator certificate should state the
nee EF operator to make an EF joint with a certain EF technique or techniques and EF equipment for which
manufacturer’s coupling with a minimum pipe size of the operator is qualified.
6 in. IPS (DN 150) DR 11. A data acquisition device should
be operational in the control box and the data concerning
the joint entered. The data acquisition device should be
XXVI-D-400 REASSESSMENT
used to record the joint made by the trainee. The assessor
should observe the EF joint and note if the proper proce- If the trainee fails one of the examinations, the trainee
dure (FPS) was followed. After the joint is complete, the should retake it after a period not shorter than 1 week. If
data acquisition record should be reviewed by the asses- the trainee fails the examination for the second time, the
sor and compared to the FPS to ensure the proper proce- trainee should repeat the training course before taking
dures were followed. The assessor should then conduct a the test again.

231
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ð17Þ MANDATORY APPENDIX XXVII

DESIGN BY ANALYSIS FOR SERVICE LEVEL D

ARTICLE XXVII-1000
INTRODUCTION

XXVII-1100 SCOPE (c) The limits and rules of this Appendix are not re-
quired for the portion of a component in which a failure
This Appendix provides design by analysis rules to has been postulated.
evaluate components subjected to loads for which Level
D Service Limits are specified.

XXVII-1200 APPLICABILITY XXVII-1400 TERMS RELATED TO ANALYSIS

(a) This Appendix applies when specifically referenced Terms specific to this Appendix are defined below.
by the design rules provided in any Division of Section III. Common design by analysis terms are provided in the de-
The rules in this Appendix may be modified or limited by sign rules referencing this Appendix (e.g., NB-3200).
the referencing design rules.
(a) System Analysis. System analysis is performed to de-
(b) In addition to the limits given in this Appendix, any
termine loads acting on components that are part of a sys-
Level D limits provided in the Design Specification shall
tem. A system is an assemblage of components, supports,
be satisfied.
and other interconnected structures. The system analysis
(c) The rules in this Appendix are written in terms of
is generally dynamic due to the nature of the loads.
design stress intensity, S m . The design rules referencing
this Appendix shall specify whether an allowable stress (b) Component Analysis. Component analysis is the cal-
other than design stress intensity, S m , is to be used. culation of stresses, strains, deformations, and collapse
loads in a component to determine compliance with the
rules listed herein.
XXVII-1300 INTENT OF LEVEL D SERVICE (c) Elastic Analysis. Elastic analysis is based on the as-
LIMITS sumption of a linear relationship between stress and
(a) The Level D design rules in this Appendix are pro- strain. Consideration of gaps between parts of the struc-
vided to limit the consequences of the loads for which ture may cause the relationship between loads and defor-
Level D Service Limits are specified in the Design Specifi- mations to be nonlinear.
cation. They are intended to ensure that violation of the (d) Inelastic Analysis. Inelastic analysis is a class of
pressure-retaining boundary will not occur, but are not methods that computes structural behavior considering
intended to ensure component operability and functional- nonlinear material behavior in the relationship between
ity either during or following the specified event. stresses and strains. Inelastic analysis as applied in this
(b) Given the intent of the Level D design rules, only Appendix shall not be considered to include the time-
limits on primary stresses are prescribed. Self-limiting dependent effects of creep unless required by the design
or secondary and peak stresses resulting from loads for rules or Design Specification invoking this Appendix. Ex-
which Level D Service Limits are specified need not be amples of inelastic analyses permitted by this Appendix
considered, unless required by the Design Specification are plastic analysis, collapse load analysis, and plastic in-
or the referencing design rules. stability analysis.

232
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE XXVII-2000
METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS FOR ANALYSES

XXVII-2100 INTRODUCTION XXVII-2310 ELASTIC COMPONENT ANALYSIS

For components that are part of a system (e.g., valve in (a) An elastic component analysis may be performed
a piping system), a system analysis shall be used to deter- with loads determined from either an elastic system anal-
mine the loads on the component and a component anal- ysis or an inelastic system analysis.
ysis shall be used to determine the stresses and strains (b) The stresses on a bolted joint shall be based on an
within the component. When components are not part elastic component analysis. However, stresses in other
of a system, only a component analysis is required. portions of the component need not be calculated on an
The stresses, strains, deformations, and collapse loads elastic basis.
determined by the component analysis are compared to
the acceptance criteria provided herein. XXVII-2320 INELASTIC COMPONENT ANALYSIS
An inelastic component analysis may be performed
with loads determined from either an elastic system anal-
XXVII-2200 SYSTEM ANALYSIS ysis or an inelastic system analysis. In addition, the fol-
lowing requirements apply:
A system analysis, when required, shall be performed
(a) Geometric nonlinearities shall be included, if
to determine loads on a component.
applicable.
(a) A system analysis may be performed using either
(b) If an elastic system analysis and an inelastic compo-
elastic analysis methods or inelastic analysis methods,
nent analysis are used together, a reevaluation of the elas-
unless prohibited by the Design Specification or the de-
tic system analysis shall be performed. The reevaluation
sign rules referencing this Appendix.
shall ensure the loads have not been significantly altered
(b) A system analysis shall consider applicable dynamic due to load redistributions, stress redistributions, and
effects. changes in geometry of the system or component. Condi-
(c) Geometric nonlinearities shall be included, if tions where an elastic system analysis may be used with
applicable. an inelastic component analysis include, but are not lim-
(d) If all loads on a component are determined inde- ited to, the following:
pendent of system behavior (e.g., pressure only or a free- (1) The plastic deformation is highly localized.
standing containment), then a system analysis is not (2) The changes in geometry are not significant.
required. (3) Bounding solutions are established such that they
(e) The Design Specification for the components shall conservatively account for redistribution of loads and
indicate what type of system analysis is used to derive stresses due to plasticity.
the loads specified in the Design Specification.

XXVII-2400 MATERIAL PROPERTIES

XXVII-2300 COMPONENT ANALYSIS
(a) For system and component analyses, the mechani-
A component analysis shall be performed to determine cal and physical properties shall be taken from Section
the stresses, strains, deformations, and collapse loads II, Part D, Subparts 1 and 2 at the temperature coincident
within the component. with the loading under consideration.
(a) A component analysis may be performed using (b) When the allowable stresses in this Appendix are
either elastic analysis methods or inelastic analysis meth- determined, the following shall apply:
ods, unless prohibited by this Appendix, the Design Spec- (1) The design stress intensity, S m ; the yield
ification, or the design rules referencing this Appendix. strength, S y ; and the ultimate tensile strength, S u , shall
(b) A component analysis shall consider applicable dy- be based on material properties given in Section II, Part
namic effects within the component. D, Subpart 1, at temperature.
(c) Loads applied in the component analysis shall in- (2) If the materials of construction are from an ap-
clude those determined by a system analysis, if applicable, proved Code Case, the material properties from the Code
and additional loads, as applicable. Case shall be used.

233
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(3) If S u values at temperature are not tabulated in curve to include strain-rate effects resulting from dy-
the Code, the values used shall be included and justified namic behavior. However, the allowables shall be selected
in the Design Report. in accordance with (b).
(c) The stress allowables given in this Appendix are (e) When inelastic analysis is used, either the maximum
based on an engineering stress–strain curve. If another shear stress theory (Tresca) or the strain energy distor-
type of stress–strain curve (e.g., true stress–strain or tion theory (von Mises) shall be used.
Kirchoff stress–strain) is used, the results from the anal- (f) The strain allowables given in XXVII-3340 shall be
ysis shall be converted to engineering stress values. based on true stress–strain curves at temperature. It is
(d) When performing inelastic analysis, the stress– permissible to adjust these true stress–strain curves to in-
strain curve used shall be included and justified in the De- clude strain rate effects.
sign Report. It is permissible to adjust the stress–strain

234
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE XXVII-3000
COMPONENT ACCEPTABILITY

XXVII-3100 INTRODUCTION (b) A collapse load analysis may be performed in accor-

dance with XXVII-3320. If an elastic system analysis is
Acceptability of components shall be demonstrated performed to determine the load on the component, the
using any one of the following methods: requirements of XXVII-2320(b) apply.
(a) elastic analysis (XXVII-3200)
(b) inelastic analyses (XXVII-3300)
(1) plastic analysis (XXVII-3310) XXVII-3300 INELASTIC ANALYSES
(2) collapse load analysis (XXVII-3320)
When the component is evaluated on an inelastic basis,
(3) plastic instability analysis (XXVII-3330)
the primary stress limits in XXVII-3310 through
(4) strain criteria (XXVII-3340) XXVII-3340 shall apply.
The limits for compressive stresses (XXVII-3400), bear-
ing and shear stresses (XXVII-3500), and bolted joints XXVII-3310 PLASTIC ANALYSIS
(XXVII-3600) shall also be satisfied as applicable.
XXVII-3311 General Primary Membrane Stress
Intensity
XXVII-3200 ELASTIC ANALYSIS The general primary membrane stress intensity, P m ,
shall not exceed the greater of 0.7S u and [S y + ( 1/3 )
When the component is evaluated on an elastic basis, (S u − S y )] for austenitic steel, high-nickel alloy, and
the primary stress limits in XXVII-3210 through copper–nickel alloy materials included in Section II, Part
XXVII-3230 shall apply. D, Subpart 1, Table 2A and all materials included in Sec-
tion II, Part D, Subpart 1, Table 2B, or 0.7S u for ferritic
XXVII-3210 GENERAL PRIMARY MEMBRANE steel materials included in Section II, Part D, Subpart 1,
STRESS INTENSITY Table 2A.
The general primary membrane stress intensity, P m ,
shall not exceed the lesser of 2.4S m and 0.7S u for auste- XXVII-3312 Maximum Primary Stress Intensity
nitic steel, high-nickel alloy, and copper–nickel alloy ma- The maximum primary stress intensity at any location
terials included in Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Table 2A shall not exceed 0.90S u .
and all materials included in Section II, Part D, Subpart
1, Table 2B, or 0.7S u for ferritic steel materials included XXVII-3320 COLLAPSE LOAD ANALYSIS
in Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Table 2A.
When the component is evaluated using a collapse load
analysis, the static or equivalent static loads shall not ex-
XXVII-3220 LOCAL PRIMARY MEMBRANE ceed 90% of the limit analysis collapse load using a yield
STRESS INTENSITY stress that is the lesser of 2.3S m and 0.7S u , or 100% of the
The local primary membrane stress intensity, P L , shall plastic analysis collapse load or test collapse load.
not exceed 150% of the limit for general primary mem-
brane stress intensity, P m . XXVII-3330 PLASTIC INSTABILITY LOAD
ANALYSIS
XXVII-3230 PRIMARY MEMBRANE PLUS When the component is evaluated using a plastic in-
PRIMARY BENDING STRESS stability load analysis, the applied load shall not exceed
INTENSITY 0.7P I , where P I is the plastic instability load determined
by plastic analysis or experimental analysis.
The primary membrane (general or local) plus primary
bending stress intensity, (P m or P L ) + P b , shall be limited
in accordance with one of the following provisions: XXVII-3340 STRAIN CRITERIA
(a) Stress intensity, (P m or P L ) + P b , shall not exceed This paragraph is under development. If strain criteria
150% of the limit for general primary membrane stress are provided in referencing design rules, they may be
intensity, P m , or, applied.

235
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

XXVII-3400 COMPRESSIVE STRESSES XXVII-3610 TENSILE STRESS

Components subjected to compressive loads shall be (a) The bolt load shall be the sum of the external load
evaluated against buckling limits. The load (or stress) de- and any bolt tension resulting from prying action pro-
termined by (a) or (b) below shall be compared to the ap- duced by deformation of the connected parts.
plied compressive load (or stress) on the component. (b) For bolts or threaded parts, the average tensile
The maximum compressive load (or stress) shall be stress computed on the basis of the available tensile
limited to a value established by (a) or (b). stress area shall not exceed the lesser of 0.7S u and S y .
(a) two-thirds of the value of buckling load (or stress) (c) In addition, for bolts or threaded parts having an ul-
determined by one of the following methods: timate tensile strength greater than or equal to 100 ksi
(1) comprehensive inelastic component analysis that (700 MPa) at temperature, the maximum value of the
considers effects such as geometric imperfections (e.g., stress at the periphery of the bolt cross section resulting
ovality, notches), deformations due to existing loading from direct tension plus bending and excluding stress
conditions, nonlinearities, large deformations, residual concentrations shall not exceed S u .
stresses, and inertial forces
(2) tests of physical models under conditions of re- XXVII-3620 SHEAR STRESS
straint and loading the same as those to which the config- (a) The average bolt shear stress, based on the avail-
uration is expected to be subjected able shear stress area, shall not exceed the lesser of
(b) a value equal to 150% of the limit established by the 0.42S u and 0.6S y .
referencing design rules for compression (e.g., NB–3133), (b) For preloaded joints that rely on friction to transfer
except that the pressure is permitted to be 250% of the the shear load, shear stresses in the bolt do not need to be
given value when the ovality is limited to 1% or less evaluated if the minimum friction force exceeds the shear
force. The preload and friction evaluation shall consider
any reduction in joint clamping force by any direct ten-
XXVII-3500 BEARING AND SHEAR STRESSES sion load on the joint.
Bearing and shear stress limits are applicable to stres-
ses based on either an elastic or inelastic component XXVII-3630 COMBINED TENSILE AND SHEAR
analysis. Bolted joints subjected to combined shear and tension
shall be so proportioned that the shear and the tensile
XXVII-3510 BEARING STRESS stresses satisfy the following equation:
Except for bolted joints, bearing stresses need not be
evaluated for loads for which Level D Service Limits are
specified.

XXVII-3520 SHEAR STRESS where

The shear stress is limited as follows: f t = computed tensile stress

(a) The average primary shear stress across a section F t b = allowable tensile stress at temperature per
loaded in pure shear shall not exceed 0.42S u . XXVII-3610
(b) For partial penetration welds and fillet welds, the f v = computed shear stress
shear stress on the throat area of the weld shall not ex- F v b = allowable shear stress at temperature per
ceed 0.42S u . XXVII-3620
XXVII-3640 BEARING STRESS
Bearing shall be evaluated for bolted joints when the
XXVII-3600 BOLTED JOINTS
shear load is carried by the bolts. The allowable bearing
The bolted joint stress limits are applicable only to stress at each bolt shall not exceed 2.0S y . The bearing
stresses based on an elastic component analysis. stress shall be based on the projected area of each bolt.

236
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

NONMANDATORY APPENDICES

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX A

ARTICLE A-1000
STRESS ANALYSIS METHODS

A-1100 INTRODUCTION (b) The methods presented here are not intended to ex-
clude others such as computer programs working directly
A-1110 SCOPE with shell equations or finite element breakdowns of the
(a) The Articles of this Appendix illustrate some accept- component under investigation.
able methods of analysis to determine the stresses and
stress intensities required to ensure the adequacy of a de-
sign as defined in NB‐3200.

237
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE A-2000
ANALYSIS OF CYLINDRICAL SHELLS

B22 = B 2 2 (β L)
A-2100 INTRODUCTION = (sinh 2β L + sin 2β L )/2(sinh2 β L − sin2 β L)
A-2110 SCOPE D = E t 3/12(1 − v 2), in.-lb (N·mm)
E = modulus of elasticity
(a) In this Article equations are given for stress and de-
f1 (βx) = e −β x cos β x
formations in cylindrical shells subjected to internal pres-
f2 (βx) = e −β x (cos β x − sin β x)
sure only. Refer to NB‐3133.3 for cylindrical shells
f3 (βx) = e −β x (cos β x + sin β x)
subjected to external pressure.
f4 (βx) = e −β x sin β x
(b) Equations are given for bending analysis for uni-
F11 (βx) = (cosh β x sin β x − sinh β x cos β x )/2
formly distributed edge loads.
F12 (βx) = sinh β x sin β x
A-2120 SIGN CONVENTION AND F13 (βx) = (cosh β x sin β x + sinh β x cos β x )/2
NOMENCLATURE F14 (βx) = cosh β x cos β x
G11 = G 1 1 (β L)
The sign convention arbitrarily chosen for the analysis = −(cosh β L sin β L − sinh β L cos β L )/(sinh2
of cylindrical shells in this Article is as indicated in Figure β L − sin2 β L)
A-2120-1. Positive directions assumed for pertinent G12 = G 1 2 (β L)
quantities are indicated. = −2 sinh β L sin β L/(sinh2 β L − sin2 β L)
The symbols and sign convention adopted in this G 22 = G 2 2 (β L)
Article for the analysis of cylindrical shells are defined = −2 (cosh β L sin β L + sinh β L cos β L )/sinh2
as follows: β L − sin2 β L)
B11 = B 1 1 (β L) L = length cylinder used as subscript to denote
= (sinh 2β L − sin 2β L )/2(sinh2 β L − sin2 β L) evaluation of a quantity at end of cylinder re-
B12 = B 1 2 (β L) moved from reference end
= (cosh 2β L − cos 2β L)/2(sinh2 β L − sin2 β L ) M = longitudinal bending moment per unit length
of circumference, in.-lb/in. (N·mm/mm)
o = used as subscript to denote evaluation of a
Figure A-2120-1 quantity at reference end of cylinder, x = 0
p = internal pressure
Q = radial shearing forces per unit length of cir-
cumference, lb/in. (N·mm)
R = inside radius
S = stress intensity
t = thickness of cylinder
w = radial displacement of cylinder wall, in. (mm)
x = axial distance measured from the reference
end of cylinder
Y = ratio of outside radius to inside radius
Z = ratio of outside radius to an intermediate
radius
[3(1 − v 2)/(R + t /2)2t 2] /4, in.−1 (mm−1)
1
β =
θ = rotation of cylinder wall, rad
= dw /dx
ν = Poisson’s ratio
σl = longitudinal (meridional) stress component
σr = radial stress component
σt = tangential (circumferential) stress
component

238
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

A-2200 STRESS INTENSITIES, A-2230 BENDING ANALYSIS FOR UNIFORMLY

DISPLACEMENTS, BENDING DISTRIBUTED EDGE LOADS
MOMENTS, AND LIMITING VALUES A-2231 Behavior of Shells Subjected to Bending
A-2210 PRINCIPAL STRESSES AND STRESS Moments
INTENSITIES DUE TO INTERNAL The equations in this subarticle describe the behavior
PRESSURE of cylindrical shells when subjected to the action of bend-
A-2211 Loading Effects Considered ing moments, M , in.-lb/in. (N·mm/mm) of circumference,
and radial shearing forces, Q , lb/in. (N·mm) of circumfer-
In this subarticle equations are given for principal ence, uniformly distributed at the edges and acting at the
stresses and stress intensities resulting from uniformly mean radius of the shell. The behavior of shells due to all
distributed internal pressure in cylindrical shells. The ef- other loadings must be evaluated independently and com-
fects of discontinuities in geometry and loading are not bined by superposition.
included and should be evaluated independently. The
stresses resulting from all effects shall be combined by
superposition. A-2240 DISPLACEMENTS, BENDING MOMENTS,
AND SHEARING FORCES IN TERMS OF
A-2212 Principal Stresses CONDITIONS AT REFERENCE EDGE
The principal stresses developed at any point in the (x = 0)
wall of a cylindrical shell due to internal pressure are giv- A-2241 Equations for Conditions of Any Axial
en by the following equations: Location
ð1Þ The radial displacement, w (x ), the angular displace-
ment or rotation, θ (x ), the bending moments, M (x ), and
the radial shearing forces, Q (x ) at any axial location of
ð2Þ the cylinder are given by the following equations in terms
of w o , θ o , M o , and Q o .
ð3Þ
ð6Þ

A-2220 STRESS INTENSITIES

A-2221 General Primary Membrane Stress
Intensity
The general primary membrane stress intensity devel- ð7Þ
oped in a cylindrical shell as a result of internal pressure
is given by the equation:

ð4Þ

ð8Þ
A-2222 Maximum Value of Primary Plus
Secondary Stress Intensity
The maximum value of the primary plus secondary
stress intensity in a cylindrical shell as a result of internal
pressure occurs at the inside surface and is given by the
ð9Þ
equation:

ð5Þ

A-2223 Values of Radial Stress Used A-2242 Equations When Cylinder Length ≥ 3/β
Note that in evaluating the general primary membrane In the case of cylinders of sufficient length, the equa-
stress intensity, the average value of the radial stress has tions in A-2241 reduce to those given below. These equa-
been taken as −p /2. This has been done to obtain a result tions may be used for cylinders characterized by lengths
consistent with burst pressure analyses. On the other not less than 3/β . The combined effects of loadings at
hand, the radial stress value used in A-2222 is −p , the val- the two edges may be evaluated by applying the equa-
ue at the inner surface, since the purpose of that quantity tions to the loadings at each edge, separately, and super-
is to control local behavior. posing the results.

239
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(a) Thus, for cylindrical shells of sufficient length, the

ð10Þ loading conditions prescribed at one edge do not influ-
ence the displacements at the other edge.
(b) In the case of cylindrical shells characterized by
lengths not less than 3/β , the influence functions B and
ð11Þ
G , are sufficiently close to the limiting values so that the
limiting values may be used in the equations in A-2243
without significant error.

ð12Þ A-2252 Limiting Values of Influence Functions

for Short Cylinders
In the case of sufficiently short cylinders, the influence
functions B and G, appearing in the equations in A-2243,
are, to a first approximation, given by the following
ð13Þ
expressions:

A-2243 Edge Displacements and Rotations in

Terms of Edge Loads
The radial displacement w o and w L and rotations θ o
and −θ L , developed at the edges of a cylindrical shell sus-
taining the action of edge loads Q o , M o , Q L , and M L , are
given by the following equations:

ð14Þ
Introducing these expressions for the influence func-
tions B and G into the equations in A-2243 yields expres-
sions identical to those obtained by the application of ring
theory. Accordingly, the resultant expressions are subject
ð15Þ to all of the limitations inherent in the ring theory, includ-
ing the limitations due to the assumption that the entire
cross‐sectional area of the ring t × L rotates about its cen-
troid without distortion. Nevertheless, in the analysis of
ð16Þ very short cylindrical shells characterized by lengths
not greater than 1/2β , the expressions may be used with-
out introducing significant error.

A-2260 PRINCIPAL STRESSES DUE TO BENDING

ð17Þ The principal stresses developed at the surfaces of a cy-
lindrical shell at any axial location x due to uniformly dis-
tributed edge loads (Figure A-2120-1) are given by the
equations:
A-2250 LIMITING VALUE OF FUNCTIONS
A-2251 General Limiting Values of Influence ð18Þ
Functions
The influence functions B and G, appearing in the equa- ð19Þ
tions in A-2243, rapidly approach limiting values as the
length L of the cylinder increases. The limiting values are ð20Þ

In these equations, where terms are preceded by a dou-

ble sign ±, the upper sign refers to the inside surface of the
cylinder and the lower sign refers to the outside surface.

240
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE A-3000
ANALYSIS OF SPHERICAL SHELLS

A-3100 INTRODUCTION
A-3110 SCOPE
(a) In this Article equations are given for stresses and deformations in spherical shells subjected to internal or exter-
nal pressure.
(b) Equations are also given for bending analysis of partial spherical shells under the action of uniformly distributed
edge forces and moments.

A-3120 NOMENCLATURE AND SIGN CONVENTION

(a) The symbols and sign convention adopted in this Article are defined as follows:

Ao =
B ( α) = [(1 + ν 2) (K 1 + K 2 ) − 2K 2 ]
C ( α) =
D = E t 3 / 12(1 − ν 2), flexural rigidity, in.-lb (N·mm)
E = modulus of elasticity
F ( α) =
H = force per unit length of circumference, perpendicular to centerline of sphere, lb/in. (N·mm)
K1 = 1 − [(1 −2ν) / 2λ] cot (ϕ o − α)
k1 = 1 − [(1 −2ν) / 2λ] cot ϕ o
K2 = 1 − [(1 + 2ν ) / 2λ ] cot (ϕ o − α )
k2 = 1 − [(1 + 2ν ) / 2λ ] cot ϕ o
l = used as a subscript to denote meridional direction
M = meridional bending moment per unit length of circumference, in.-lb/in. (N·mm/mm)
N = membrane force, lb/in. (N·mm)
o = used as a subscript to denote a quantity at the reference edge of sphere
p = uniform pressure internal or external
Q = radial shearing force per unit of circumference, lb/in. (N·mm)
R = inside radius
Rm = radius of midsurface of spherical shell
S = stress intensity
t = thickness of spherical shell
= used as a subscript to denote circumferential direction
U = ratio of inside radius to an intermediate radius
w = radial displacement of midsurface, in. (mm)
Y = ratio of outside radius to inside radius
Z = ratio of outside radius to an intermediate radius
α = meridional angle measured from the reference edge, rad
[3(1 − ν 2) / R m 2t 2] /4, in.−1 (mm−1)
1
β =
γo = tan−1 (−k 1 )
δ = lateral displacement of midsurface, perpendicular to centerline of spherical shell, in. (mm)
θ = rotation of midsurface, rad
λ = βRm
ν = Poisson’s ratio
σl = longitudinal (meridional) stress component
σr = radial stress component

241
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

σt = tangential (circumferential) stress component

χ = length of arc for angle α, measured from reference edge of hemisphere
ϕ = meridional angle measured from centerline of sphere, deg
ϕL = meridional angle of second edge, deg
= πR m α/ 180
ϕo = meridional angle of reference edge where loading is applied, deg
(b) The sign convention is listed below and shown in Figure A-3120-1 by the positive directions of the pertinent
quantities:

Sign Convention
(p ) pressure, positive radially outward
(δ ) lateral displacement, perpendicular to λ of sphere,
positive outward
(θ) rotation, positive when accompanied by an increase
in the radius or curvature, as caused by a positive
moment
(M ), (M o ) moment, positive when causing tension on the
inside surface
(H ), (H o ) force perpendicular to λ, positive outward
(N t ), (N l ) membrane force, positive when causing tension

A-3200 STRESS INTENSITIES, BENDING ANALYSIS, DISPLACEMENTS, AND EDGE LOADS

A-3210 PRINCIPAL STRESSES AND STRESS INTENSITIES RESULTING FROM INTERNAL OR EXTERNAL
PRESSURE
In this subarticle equations are given for principal stresses and stress intensities resulting from uniformly distributed
internal or external pressure in complete or partial spherical shells. The effects of discontinuities in geometry and load-
ing are not included and should be evaluated independently. The stresses resulting from all effects must be combined by
superposition.

A-3220 PRINCIPAL STRESSES AND STRESS INTENSITIES

A-3221 Principal Stresses Resulting From Internal Pressure
The principal stresses at any point in the wall of a spherical shell as a result of internal pressure are given by the fol-
lowing equations:

ð1Þ

ð2Þ

ð3Þ

A-3222 Stress Intensities Resulting From Internal Pressure

A-3222.1 General Primary Membrane Stress Intensity. The general primary stress intensity in a spherical shell as a
result of internal pressure is given by the following equation:

ð4Þ

A-3222.2 Maximum Value of Primary Plus Secondary Stress Intensity. The maximum value of the primary plus
secondary stress intensity in a spherical shell as a result of internal pressure occurs at the inside surface and is given
by the equation:

ð5Þ

242
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure A-3120-1

CL

Rm
MO
R
HO 


O


(a) Spherical Segment, for Values of O:

162/  O  180 deg
162/

CL

Rm

R
X O

HO
MO



(b) Hemisphere for O  90 deg

CL

O
ᐉ


HO
MO



(c) Frustum, for Values of O:

O  180 deg
162/ and | O
 ᐉ| 180/

243
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

A-3223 Principal Stresses Resulting From External Pressure

The principal stresses at any point in the wall of a spherical shell resulting from external pressure are given by the
following equations:

ð6Þ

ð7Þ

ð8Þ

A-3224 Stress Intensities Resulting From External Pressure

A-3224.1 General Primary Membrane Stress Intensity. The general primary membrane stress intensity in a sphe-
rical shell as a result of external pressure is given by the equation:

ð9Þ

A-3224.2 Maximum Value of Primary Plus Secondary Stress Intensity. The maximum value of the primary plus
secondary stress intensity in a spherical shell as a result of external pressure occurs at the inside surface and is given
by the equation:

ð10Þ

NOTE: The equations in A-3223 and A-3224 may be used only if the applied external pressure is less than the critical pressure which would
cause instability of the spherical shell. The value of the critical pressure must be evaluated in accordance with the rules given in NB‐3133.4.

A-3230 BENDING ANALYSIS FOR UNIFORMLY DISTRIBUTED EDGE LOADS

A-3231 Scope and Limitations of Equations Given
(a) The equations in A-3230 describe the behavior of partial spherical shells of the types shown in Figure A-3120-1
when subjected to the action of meridional bending moments M o , in.-lb/in. (N·mm/mm) of circumference, and forces
H o , lb/in. (N·mm) of circumference, uniformly distributed at the reference edge and acting at the mean radius of the
shell. The effects of all other loading must be evaluated independently and combined by superposition.
(b) The equations listed in this paragraph become less accurate and should be used with caution when Rm/t is less
than 10 or the opening angle limitations shown in Figure A-3120-1 are exceeded.

A-3232 Displacement, Rotation, Moment, and Membrane Force in Terms of Loading Conditions at
Reference Edge
The displacement δ , the rotation θ , the bending moments Ml, Mt, and the membrane forces Nl, Nt at any location of
sphere are given in terms of the edge loads M o and H o by the following equations:

ð11Þ

ð12Þ

ð13Þ

244
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ð14Þ

ð15Þ

ð16Þ

A-3233 Displacement and Rotation of Reference Edge in Terms of Loading Conditions at Reference Edge
A-3233.1 At Reference Edge Where α = 0 and ϕ = ϕ o . The equations for the displacement and rotation (A-3232)
simplify to eqs. (17) and (18).

ð17Þ

ð18Þ

A-3233.2 When Shell Is a Full Hemisphere. In the case where the shell under consideration is a full hemisphere,
eqs. A-3233.1(17) and A-3233.1(18) reduce to the following:

ð19Þ

ð20Þ

A-3234 Principal Stresses in Spherical Shells Resulting From Edge Loads

The principal stresses at the inside and outside surfaces of a spherical shell at any location, resulting from edge loads
M o and H o , are given by eqs. (21), (22), and (23).

ð21Þ

ð22Þ

ð23Þ

In these equations, where terms are preceded by a double sign ±, the upper sign refers to the inside surface of the shell
and the lower sign refers to the outside surface.

245
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

A-3240 ALTERNATIVE BENDING ANALYSIS OF A HEMISPHERICAL SHELL SUBJECTED TO UNIFORMLY

DISTRIBUTED EDGE LOADS
A-3241 Nature of Equations Given
If a less exacting but more expedient analysis of hemispherical shells is required, equations derived for cylindrical
shells may be used in a modified form. The equations in A-3242 describe the behavior of a hemispherical shell as ap-
proximated by a cylindrical shell of the same radius and thickness when subjected to the action of uniformly distributed
edge loads M o and H o at α = 0, x = 0, and ϕ o = 90 deg.

A-3242 Displacement, Rotation, Moment, and Shear Forces in Terms of Loading Conditions at Edge

ð24Þ

ð25Þ

ð26Þ

ð27Þ

ð28Þ

ð29Þ

where f 1 , f 2 , f 3 , and f 4 are defined in Article A-2000, and

A-3243 Principal Stresses in Hemispherical Shell Due to Edge Loads

The principal stresses in a hemispherical shell due to edge loads M o and H o , at the inside and outside surfaces of a
hemispherical shell at any meridional location, are given by eqs. (30), (31), and (32).

ð30Þ

ð31Þ

ð32Þ

In these equations, where terms are preceded by a double sign ±, the upper sign refers to the inside surface of the
hemisphere and the lower sign refers to the outside surface.

246
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE A-4000
DESIGN CRITERIA AND EQUATIONS FOR TORISPHERICAL AND
ELLIPSOIDAL HEADS

A-4100 INTRODUCTION A-4140 MATHEMATICAL EXPRESSIONS FOR

CURVES IN FIGURE NC-3224.6-1
A-4110 SCOPE
The equation for computing A for given set of para-
The equations defining the curves in Figure
meters r/D and P /S is as follows:
NC‐3224.6‐1 are summarized in this Article. The analysis
is for pressure on the concave portion of the head and
does not include effects of thermal gradients and loadings ð1Þ
other than pressure.

A-4120 NOMENCLATURE where

The nomenclature adopted in this Article is defined as
ð2Þ
follows:
D = inside diameter of a head skirt, or inside length of ð3Þ
the major axis of an ellipsoidal head
L = inside crown radius of torispherical head Constants a 1 through c 3 are given in A-4141 for natur-
P = internal design pressure al logarithms and in A-4142 for common base logarithms.
r = inside knuckle radius of torispherical head
S = membrane stress intensity limit from Section II, Part
A-4141 Natural Logarithms
D, Subpart 1, Tables 2A and 2B multiplied by the
stress intensity factors in Table NC‐3217‐1, psi
(kPa) ð4Þ
t = minimum required thickness of head
ð5Þ
A-4130 METHOD USED TO DETERMINE DESIGN
PRESSURE and
The maximum internal pressure capacity or required
thickness of a torispherical and ellipsoidal pressure ves-
sel head is determined from the controlling criterion of
primary membrane stress, elastic–plastic collapse load,
buckling collapse, and fatigue. For thick heads, where
P /S > 0.08 (approximately t /L = 0.04 to 0.05), primary
membrane stress dominates. For thin heads, where
t /L > 0.002, buckling collapse is the limiting condition.
For the intermediate thickness heads, where
t /L > 0.002 up to t/L , where P /S < 0.08 (approximately
t /L = 0.04 to 0.05), elastic–plastic collapse pressure and
fatigue due to pressurization cycles are the determining
conditions. At the present time, only design of the inter-
mediate thickness heads is considered in this Division.

247
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

A-4142 Common Base Logarithms A-4150 SAMPLE PROBLEM

Consider a torispherical head having the parameters
ð6Þ L = 84 in.; D = 90 in.; r = 5.5 in.; P = 200 psi; and for ma-
terial SA-515 Grade 70, S = 23,300 psi. With these data
ð7Þ and using eq. A-4140(1) and the common logarithms
and constants of A-4142:
and

and

Solving eq. A-4140(1):

Direct reading of Figure NC‐3224.6‐1 gives the

following:

248
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE A-5000
ANALYSIS OF FLAT CIRCULAR HEADS

A-5100 INTRODUCTION A-5200 LOADS, DISPLACEMENTS, AND

A-5110 SCOPE GEOMETRY CONSTANTS
(a) In this Article equations are given for stresses and A-5210 PRESSURE AND EDGE LOADS ON
displacements in flat circular plates used as heads for CIRCULAR FLAT PLATES
pressure vessels. A-5211 Values for Which Equations Are Given
(b) Equations are also given for stresses and displace-
ments in these heads due to forces and edge moments In this subarticle equations are given for the principal
uniformly distributed along the outer edge, and uniformly stress and the deformations of flat plates under axisym-
distributed over a circle on one face. The radius of this cir- metric loading conditions.
cle is intended to match the mean radius of an adjoining
element, such as a cylinder, cone, or spherical segment.
A-5212 Pressure Loads on Simply Supported Flat
A-5120 NOMENCLATURE AND SIGN Plates
CONVENTION The principal stresses and deformations for a flat plate,
The symbols and sign conventions adopted in this simply supported at its periphery and loaded in the man-
Article are defined as follows: ner shown on Figure A-5212-1 are given for a radial loca-
tion r at any point x in the cross section by eqs. (1)
E = elastic modulus through (6).
F = geometry constant, given in Table A-5240-1
Radial bending stress:
ln = loge
M = radial bending moment, in.-lb/in. (N·mm/mm) of
circumference ð1Þ
p = pressure
Q = radial force, lb/in. (N/mm) of circumference Tangential bending stress:
R = outside radius of plate
r = radial distance from center of plate ð2Þ
t = thickness of plate
ts = thickness of connecting shell at the head junction
w = radial displacement Longitudinal stress:
x = longitudinal distance from midplane of plate
ð3Þ
θ = rotation, rad
ν = Poisson’s ratio
σl = longitudinal (axial) stress
σr = radial stress Figure A-5120-1
σt = tangential (circumferential) stress
Tensile stresses are positive. The positive directions of
the coordinates, radial forces, moments, and displace-
ments are shown in Figure A-5120-1. The pressure is as-
sumed to act on the surface where x = t /2.

249
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure A-5212-1 any point x in the cross section by the following equa-
tions:
Radial and tangential stresses:

ð7Þ

Rotation of the midplane:

ð8Þ

Radial displacement:

ð9Þ

A-5220 FLAT PLATE PRESSURE VESSEL HEADS

Rotation of the midplane: A-5221 Methods of Attachment
Flat plates used as pressure vessel heads are attached
ð4Þ to a vessel shell in the manner shown by the typical exam-
ples in Figure A-5221-1. Since the support conditions at
Rotation of the midplane at the outer edge: the edge of the plate depend upon the flexibility of the ad-
joining shell, the stress distribution in the plate is influ-
ð5Þ enced by the thickness and geometry. The structure
formed by the head and the shell may be analyzed accord-
Radial displacement: ing to the principles of discontinuity analysis described in
Article A-6000. In the following paragraph, equations are
ð6Þ given for the quantities necessary to perform a disconti-
nuity analysis.
A-5213 Edge Loads on Flat Plates A-5222 Displacements and Principal Stresses in
The principal stresses and deformations of a flat plate a Flat Head
subjected to uniformly distributed edge loads, as shown The head is assumed to be separated from the adjoining
on Figure A-5213-1 are given for radial location r at shell element and under the action of the pressure load.
Figure A-5222-1 illustrates this condition. The effects of
the adjacent shell are represented by the pressure

Figure A-5213-1

250
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure A-5221-1
ð10Þ

ð11Þ

A-5223.2 Displacements Due to Radial Force and

Moment. The rotational displacements θ and the radial
displacement w of point a , due to a uniformly distributed
radial force Q and moment M acting at point a , are given
by eqs. (12) and (13).

ð12Þ

ð13Þ
reaction force, the discontinuity force Q , and the disconti-
nuity moment M . These act at the assumed junction point
a . The pressure acts on the left‐hand face over a circular
area defined by the inside radius of the adjacent shell. The
support point lies on this same face at the midradius of A-5224 Principal Stresses in a Flat Head
the adjacent shell. The equations in this paragraph are When the values of the discontinuity force Q and the
given in terms of the head dimensions R and t and multi- moment M have been determined by a discontinuity anal-
plying factors F 1 to F 4 . These factors reflect the extent of ysis, the principal stresses in a flat plate can be calculated
the pressure area and the location of the junction point. in the following subparagraphs.
The numerical values for F 1 to F 4 are given in Table
A-5240-1. These are functions of the ratio of the shell A-5224.1 Radial Stress Due to Pressure. For a plate
thickness t s to the head radius R . simply supported at point a , the radial stress σ r for a ra-
dial location r less than (R − t s ) at any point x , due to
pressure p acting over the area defined by the radius
A-5223 Displacements of a Flat Head (R − t s ), is given by the following equation:

A-5223.1 Displacements Due to Pressure. For a ð14Þ

plate simply supported at a point a , the rotational dis-
placement θ p and the radial displacement w p of point
a , due to pressure p acting over the area defined by the A-5224.2 Tangential and Axial Stresses Due to
radius (R − t s ), are given by eqs. (10) and (11). Pressure. For these same conditions, the tangential stress
σ t and the axial stress σ l are given by eqs. (15) and (16).
Figure A-5222-1
ð15Þ

ð16Þ

A-5224.3 Radial and Tangential Stresses Due to Ra-

dial Force and Moment. The radial stress σ r and the tan-
gential stress σ t for any radial location at any point x in
the cross section, due to uniformly distributed radial
force Q and a uniformly distributed moment M acting at
point a , are given by the equation:

ð17Þ

251
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

A-5240 GEOMETRY CONSTANTS

The geometry constants F 1 through F 4 are functions of
Poisson’s ratio and t s /R . These are given in eqs. (18)
through (21).

ð18Þ

ð19Þ

ð20Þ

ð21Þ

In these equations

Table A-5240-1 lists these functions for various values

of t s /R . These tabular values have been computed using
0.3 for Poisson’s ratio.

ð17Þ A-5250 STRESS INTENSITIES IN A FLAT PLATE

The principal stresses due to pressure p , discontinuity
force Q , discontinuity moment M , and other coincident
loadings should be combined algebraically and the stress
differences determined according to the procedures of
XIII-2300. The calculated stress intensity values should
not exceed the stress limits given in Article XIII-3000.

Table A-5240-1

t s /R F1 F2 F3 F4
0.00 1.0500 2.4750 4.2000 1.0000
0.02 1.0112 2.4149 4.1290 0.9930
0.04 0.9729 2.3546 4.0589 0.9861
0.06 0.9349 2.2943 3.9897 0.9793
0.08 0.8974 2.2338 3.9213 0.9725
0.10 0.8604 2.1734 3.8538 0.9658
0.12 0.8238 2.1129 3.7871 0.9592
0.14 0.7878 2.0524 3.7213 0.9527
0.16 0.7523 1.9919 3.6562 0.9462
0.18 0.7173 1.9315 3.5920 0.9398
0.20 0.6830 1.8712 3.5286 0.9335

252
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE A-6000
DISCONTINUITY STRESSES

A-6100 INTRODUCTION elements deformations, which in general are not equal

at the adjoining edges. The deformations at an element
ð17Þ A-6110 SCOPE edge are defined as:
(a) Pressure vessels usually contain regions where (1) radial displacement
abrupt changes in geometry, material, or loading occur. (2) rotation of the meridian tangent
These regions are known as discontinuity areas and the A redundant moment and shear force must generally
stresses associated with them are known as discontinuity exist on the edges of the elements, in order to have com-
stresses. The discontinuity stresses are required to satisfy patibility of deformations, and restore continuity in the
the compatibility of deformations of these regions. structure.
(b) This Article describes a general procedure for ana- (b) At each juncture discontinuity, two equations can
lyzing the discontinuity stresses. A numerical example is be written which express the equality of the combined de-
included to illustrate the procedure. formations due to all the applied loads and the redundant
(c) To determine the principal stresses at a discontinu- forces and moments. One equation will express the equal-
ity, it is necessary to evaluate the stresses caused by ity of rotation, the other equation the equality of displace-
(1) pressure; ment of the adjacent elements. The resulting system of
(2) mechanical loads; simultaneous equations can be solved to obtain the re-
(3) thermal loads; and dundant moment and shear force at each juncture.
(4) discontinuity loads. The stress intensities are
then obtained by superposition of the stresses according A-6220 PROCEDURE
to the rules given in Article XIII-3000.
A-6221 Basic Steps

A-6120 INFORMATION REQUIRED The basic steps to follow for determining the redundant
shear and moment that may exist at a pressure vessel dis-
In order to perform a discontinuity analysis, the follow- continuity are given in (a) through (f).
ing information must be known: (a) Separate the vessel into individual shell elements at
(a) the dimensions of the vessel; locations of discontinuity.
(b) the material properties (E , α , ν ) of the component (b) Calculate the edge deformations of each element,
parts of the vessel (A-7120); caused by a unit shear force and a unit moment at each
(c) mechanical loads, such as pressure, dead weight, edge. These values are known as influence coefficients.
bolt loads, and pipe loads; The deformations due to local flexibilities may be consid-
(d) temperature distribution in the component parts. ered in the calculation of these influence coefficients.
(c) Calculate the edge deformations of each element,
caused by loads other than redundant loads.
A-6200 METHOD OF AND PROCEDURE FOR (d) Calculate the edge deformations of each element,
DISCONTINUITY ANALYSIS caused by the temperature distributions.
(e) At each juncture of two elements equate the total
A-6210 METHOD radial displacements and the total rotations of each
(a) The analysis of a pressure vessel containing discon- element.
tinuity areas can be performed in a standard manner sim- (f) Solve the final system of simultaneous equations for
ilar to the analysis of any statically indeterminate the redundant shears and moments.
structure. The analysis is initiated by separating the ves-
sel into shell elements of simple geometry, such as rings
A-6222 Stresses
and cylinders, of which the structural behavior is known.
The pressure, mechanical, and thermal loads acting on the When the values of the redundant shear forces and mo-
structure are applied to the shell elements with a system ments have been determined, the stresses resulting from
of forces required to maintain the static equilibrium of the redundant loadings may be computed by conven-
each element. These loads and forces cause individual tional methods. The final stresses for each element are

253
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

determined by combining these stresses with the stresses A-6233 Solution ð17Þ
which would exist in the individual shell elements of Step 1. Separate the vessel at locations of discontinuity
A-6233, Step 1. into individual elements.
A-6230 EXAMPLE ILLUSTRATING APPLICATION Step 2. Calculate the influence coefficients.
OF A-6221 (a) Element A, Hemispherical Head. From A-3233.2, the
lateral displacement and rotation at juncture O due to
A-6231 Given edge loads Q o and M o are given as:
A pressure vessel as shown in Figure A-6230-1. It is
constructed of SA-533, Grade B, Class 1 steel and sub-
jected to an internal pressure of 950 psi at 300°F. The ves-
sel consists of the following:
(a) a hemispherical head with:
inside radius R = 30 in.
thickness t = 1.375 in. NOTE: For this case of a hemispherical shell the lateral force H on the
hemispherical head and the radial force Q on the cylindrical shell are
equal. Similarly the lateral displacement δ and the radial displace-
(b) a cylindrical shell with: ment w are equal.
inside radius R = 30 in. Substituting the given dimensions and material proper-
thickness t = 1.375 in. ties gives:
length L = 10 in.

(c) a flat head with:

outside radius R = 31.375 in.
thickness t = 6 in. (b) Element B, Cylindrical Shell (See Figure A-6230-2).
From A-2243, the radial displacements and rotations at
The material properties assumed are: the edges O and L due to edge loadings Q o , M o , Q L , and
M L are given as follows:

A-6232 Required
To calculate the discontinuity stresses at the locations
of structural discontinuity.

Figure A-6230-1

254
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Substituting given dimensions and material properties Step 3. Calculate the edge deformations due to the in-
gives: ternal pressure.
(a) Element A, H emisphe rical Shell (see Figure
A-6230-3). The lateral displacement of point O at the mid-
surface (r = R m ) of a hemispherical shell subjected to in-
ternal pressure is given by the expression:

Substituting the dimensions, pressure, and material prop-

erties gives:

(c) Element C, Flat Head. From A-5223.2, the radial dis-

NOTE: An alternative expression may be used for the displacement
placement and rotation at juncture L due to edge loadings of a thin hemispherical shell:
Q L and M L are given as follows:

There is no rotation resulting from the internal pressure

and membrane forces as shown:

Substituting given dimensions and material properties (b) Element B, Cylindrical Shell (see Figure A-6230-4).
gives: The radial displacement of the midsurface of a closed
end cylindrical shell subjected to internal pressure is giv-
en by the expression:

Figure A-6230-2

Juncture O 10 in. Juncture L

1.375 in. MO QL
QO ML ML
MO
Element A

QL
QO
6 in.
Rm

Rm  30.688 in.

Element B 1.375 in.

R  31.375 in.
3
0.6

Element C
88

 0  90 deg
in.

255
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Substituting the dimensions, pressure, and material prop-

Figure A-6230-4
erties gives:

NOTE: An alternative expression may be used for displacement of a

thin cylindrical shell:

There is no rotation resulting from internal pressure and

the membrane forces as shown:

(c) Element C, Flat Head (See Figure A-6230-5). The ro-

tation of a flat head at point L due to internal pressure is
given by eq. A-5223.1(10): Step 5. Equate the total lateral displacements and rota-
tions of adjacent elements at each juncture.
(a) Juncture O

Substituting the dimensions, pressure, and material prop-

erties gives: ð1Þ

The radial displacement at juncture L is given by eq.

A-5223.1(11):

Step 4. Calculate the free deformations of the edges of

each element caused by temperature distributions.
In this example all parts of the vessel are at the same
Figure A-6230-5
temperature and are of the same material; therefore, tem-
perature deformations need not be considered.

Figure A-6230-3

256
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

NOTE: A negative sign indicates that the actual direction of the load-
ing is opposite to that chosen in Step 1.

Step 7. Compute the discontinuity stresses at each junc-

ð2Þ
ture due to the redundants Q o , M o , Q L , and M L . To illus-
trate the procedure, these stresses will be computed in
the cylindrical shell element B at both junctures O and
L. From A-2260:
(b) Juncture L

ð3Þ
(a) Juncture O. At juncture O, M(x ) = M o and w(x ) = w o .
NOTE: When computing σ t (x ) only the radial displacement due to
the redundant shear forces and moments should be used. The free
displacements from Steps 3 and 4 should not be included.

ð4Þ

Combining like terms and multiplying through by 106

results in the following system of simultaneous equations
which express compatibility at the junctures:

(1) Inside surface:

ð5Þ

ð6Þ

ð7Þ
(2) Outside surface:

ð8Þ

Step 6. Solve the above equation for Q o , M o , Q L , and

M L . The results are:

(b) Juncture L. At juncture L, M(x ) = M L and w (x ) = w L .

257
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(a) Juncture O
(1) Inside surface:

(1) Inside surface:

The stresses due to the redundant shear forces and

moments were computed in Step 7 as:

(2) Outside surface:

The total stresses are:

(2) Outside surface:

NOTE: E = 29 × 106 psi.

(c) The discontinuity stresses in the hemispherical

shell may be computed by using the expressions given
in A-3232 and A-3234.
The stresses due to the redundant shear forces and
(d) The discontinuity stresses in the flat head may be moments were computed as:
computed using the expressions given in A-5224.
Step 8. Compute the total stresses. The total stresses
may be computed in any element at any juncture by com-
bining the stresses due to the redundant shear forces and
moments as computed in Step 7, with the stresses result-
ing from all other loadings. In this case the stresses in the
cylindrical shell, hemispherical shell, and flat head due to The total stresses are:
internal pressure may be computed by the expressions
given in A-2212, A-3221, and A-5224, respectively. To il-
lustrate the procedure the total stresses in the cylindrical
shell at junctures O and L will be computed. The stresses
in the cylindrical shell due to internal pressure may be
computed from eqs. A-2212(1), A-2212(2), and
(b) Juncture L
A-2212(3):
(1) Inside Surface. The stresses due to the internal
pressure are the same as at juncture O:

258
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

The stresses due to the redundant shear forces and The stresses due to redundant shear forces and mo-
moments were computed as: ments were computed as:

The total stresses are:

The total stresses are:

Step 9. See below.

(a) When evaluating the stresses in accordance with
(2) Outside Surface. The stresses due to the internal XIII-3400, the stress intensities at each location should
pressure are the same as at juncture O: be computed from the total principal stresses determined
in Step 8.
(b) When evaluating the stresses in accordance with
XIII-3500(b), it is necessary to consider the influence of
local stress concentrations upon the principal stresses de-
termined in Step 8 before computing the stress
intensities.

259
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE A-7000
THERMAL STRESSES

A-7100 INTRODUCTION range is ambient, the instantaneous value of α for the

average temperature coincides with the mean coefficient
A-7110 OCCURRENCE OF THERMAL STRESSES of thermal expansion.
AND DISPLACEMENTS
(c) During transient conditions, the temperature distri-
(a) Thermal stresses occur in a system, or part of a sys- bution and thermal stresses vary with time. The analysis,
tem, when thermal displacements (expansions or con- therefore, requires consideration of the thermal stresses
tractions) which would otherwise freely occur are as a function of time during the transient.
partially or completely restrained.
(b) Thermal displacements may be induced by tem-
perature distributions caused by heat transfer and inter- A-7130 METHOD OF CALCULATION
nal heat generation. If closed form expressions for the thermal stresses are
A-7120 INFORMATION NECESSARY TO not available, the procedure of (a) through (e) below may
CALCULATE THERMAL STRESSES be used for computing the thermal stress for a specified
time θ .
(a) In order to calculate thermal stresses, the informa- (a) Express the temperature distribution T for each
tion stipulated in (1), (2), and (3) below must usually be component as a function of the space coordinates t , l ,
known for each member comprising the system: and r.
(1) the dimensions;
(b) Divide the system, which may be of irregular shape
(2) the temperature distribution T as a function of a
or of complex geometry, into free bodies of simple shape,
suitable coordinate system;
such as rings, cylinders, and spherical shells.
(3) the material properties: modulus of elasticity E ,
Poisson’s ratio ν , and coefficient of thermal expansion (c) Calculate the free body stresses and deformations
α, where E and α are temperature-dependent quantities for each component resulting from the temperature
(Section II, Part D, Subpart 2, Tables TE and TM provide distribution.
these values). (d) Calculate the discontinuity thermal stresses by
(b) Frequently, it is accurate enough to consider E and means of discontinuity analysis as described in Article
α for each material as constant at their instantaneous val- A-6000.
ues for the average temperature of the temperature range (e) Superimpose the stresses determined in (c) and (d)
under consideration. If the lower limit of the temperature above to obtain the combined thermal stresses.

260
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE A-8000
STRESSES IN PERFORATED FLAT PLATES

ln = loge
A-8100 INTRODUCTION M = radial moment acting at edge of plate, in.-lb/in.
A-8110 SCOPE (N·mm/mm) of circumference
P = nominal distance between hole centerlines,
(a) This Article contains a method of analysis for flat
pitch
perforated plates when subjected to directly applied
p 1 , p 2 = pressures acting on surfaces of the plate
loads or loadings resulting from structural interaction
p i = pressure inside tubes
with adjacent members. This method applies to perfo-
p s = pressure on surface where stress is computed,
rated plates which satisfy the conditions of (1) through
p 1 or p 2
(5).
Q = radial force acting at edge of plate, lb/in.
(1) The holes are in an array of equilateral triangles.
(N/mm) of circumference
(2) The holes are circular.
r = designation of radial location in plate
(3) There are 19 or more holes. R* = the effective radius of the perforated plate
(4) The ligament efficiency is greater than 5% = r o + 1/4 (P − h)
(η ≥ 0.05). r o = radial distance from center of plate to center of
(5) The plate is thicker than twice the hole pitch outermost hole
(t /P ≥ 2). If only in‐plane loads or thermal skin stresses S = stress intensity (A-8142)
are considered, this limitation does not apply. t = thickness of plate exclusive of cladding or cor-
(b) Credit may be taken for the stiffening effect of the rosion allowance
tubes in the perforations. The extent to which the tubes T m = mean temperature averaged through the thick-
stiffen the perforated plate depends on the materials, ness of the plate
the manufacturing processes, operating conditions, and T s = temperature of the surface of the plate
degree of corrosion. This stiffening effect may be included t t = tube wall thickness
in the calculations by including part or all of the tube W = total ring load acting on plate (Figure
walls in the ligament efficiency used to obtain the effec- A-8132.2-1), lb (N)
tive elastic constants of the plate. Such stiffening may w = radial displacement of plate edge
either increase or decrease stresses in the plate itself x = axis of symmetry of hole pattern through the
and in the attached shells. smaller ligament thickness (Figures A-8142-3
(c) Credit may be taken for the staying action of the through A-8142-5)
tubes where applicable. Y = stress multiplier for peak ligament stresses
(Figure A-8142-1)
A-8120 NOMENCLATURE y = axis of symmetry of hole pattern, perpendicular
to x axis
c = radius of ring load (Figure A-8132.2-1) Δp = differential pressure across the plate
E = Young’s modulus for plate material α = coefficient of thermal expansion, in./in.-°F
E * = effective Young’s modulus for perforated plate (mm/mm-°C)
(Figure A-8131-1) β = biaxiality ratio (σ r /σ θ or σ θ /σ r ) or (σ 1 /σ 2 or
E t = Young’s modulus for tube material σ 2 /σ 1 ), where −1 ≤ β ≤ 1
h = nominal width of ligament at the minimum η = ligament efficiency
cross section = h /P
K = stress multiplier for stresses averaged across θ = rotation of plate edge, rad
the width of the ligament but not through the ν = Poisson’s ratio
thickness (Figure A-8142-1) ν* = effective Poisson’s ratio for perforated plate
K m = ratio of peak stress in reduced ligament to the (Figure A-8131-1)
peak stress in normal ligament ρ = radius of holes in the plate
K r = stress multiplier for circumferential stress in σ 1 , σ 2 = principal stress in the plane of the equivalent
the plate rim (Figure A-8142-6) solid plate (A-8142.2)
K s k i n = stress multiplier for thermal skin stress (Figure σ a v e = larger absolute value of σ r or σ θ [A-8142.1(b)]
A-8153-1)

261
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

σr = radial stresses in the equivalent solid plate (d) The region of the perforated plate outside the effec-
σrim = nominal circumferential stress in solid rim tive radius R * is called the plate rim. This unperforated
σskin = thermal skin stress portion of the plate may be considered as a separate con-
σθ = tangential stress in the equivalent solid plate necting member, a ring or cylinder, and the structure may
= radial stress averaged through the depth of the be analyzed in accordance with the procedures of Article
equivalent solid plate A-6000.

A-8130 ANALYSIS OF CIRCULAR PERFORATED

AREA A-8132 Analysis of Equivalent Solid Plate
In the following subparagraphs, equations are given for
A-8131 Procedure the nominal stresses and edge displacements for the
(a) The analysis method for perforated plates pre- equivalent solid circular plate under various axisym-
sented in this Article utilizes the concept of the equivalent metric load conditions.
solid plate. In this method, the perforated plate is re- A-8132.1 Edge Loads (see Figure A-8132.1-1).
placed by a solid plate which is geometrically similar to
(a) Stresses at any location on the surface of the equiva-
the perforated plate but has modified values of the elastic
lent solid plate.
constants.
(b) The elastic modulus E and Poisson’s ratio ν are re- ð1Þ
placed by the effective elastic modulus E * and effective
Poisson’s ratio ν * of the perforated plate, and conven-
tional equations for plates are used to determine the de- When double signs are used, the upper sign applies to
formations and nominal stresses for the equivalent solid the top surface as shown in Figure A-8132.1-1.
plate. The deformations so computed may be used di- (b) Edge displacements of midplane at R* :
rectly in evaluating interaction effects. The actual values
of the stress intensities in the perforated plate are deter- ð2Þ
mined by applying multiplying factors to the nominal
stresses computed for the equivalent solid plate.
(c) The effective elastic constants are functions of the ð3Þ
ligament efficiency η . The values are given in Figure
A-8131-1 for the range of 0.05 ≤ η ≤ 1.0 in the form of
ν* vs. η for a material with ν = 0.3, and E * /E vs. η . The A-8132.2 Ring Loads Transverse to the Plane of the
stress multipliers are given in Figures A-8142-1 through Plate (See Figure A-8132.2-1).
A-8142-6. The Y factors presented in Figures A-8142-3 (a) Stresses at any radial location r on the surfaces of
and A-8142-4 represent the largest values occurring the equivalent solid plate: for r ≤ c ,
through the thickness at the given angular position.

Figure A-8120-1 ð4Þ

for r > c,

ð5Þ

ð6Þ

262
ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure A-8131-1

263
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

A-8132.4 Pressure in Tubes or Perforations (See

Figure A-8132.1-1
Figure A-8132.4-1).
(a) Stresses at any location in the equivalent solid plate:

ð13Þ

(b) Edge displacements of midplane at r = R *:

ð14Þ

where E */E and v * should be evaluated for the ligament

(b) Edge displacements of midplane at r = R *:
efficiency:
ð7Þ
ð15Þ

ð8Þ using Figure A-8131-1;

A-8132.3 Uniformly Distributed Pressure Loads

(See Figure A-8132.3-1). A-8140 STRESS INTENSITIES AND STRESS
(a) Stresses at any location r on the surfaces of the LIMITS FOR PERFORATED PLATES
equivalent solid plate:
A-8141 Equations for Stress Intensities
In A-8140 equations are given for the stress intensities
ð9Þ in a perforated plate using the stresses determined for the
equivalent solid plate.

ð10Þ A-8142 Typical Ligaments in a Uniform Pattern

A-8142.1 Mechanical and Pressure Loads on Circu- ð17Þ
lar Plates.
(b) Edge displacement of midplane at r = R *: (a) The stress intensity based on stresses averaged
across the minimum ligament width and through the
ð11Þ thicknesses of the plate is limited according to XIII-3110
and is computed from the larger of:

ð16Þ
ð12Þ

Figure A-8132.2-1 Figure A-8132.3-1

264
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

A-8142.2 Combined Mechanical and Thermal Ef- ð17Þ

Figure A-8132.4-1
fects.
(a) The range of the stress intensity based on stresses
averaged across the minimum ligament width but not
through the thickness of the plate is limited according
to XIII-3400 and is computed from

ð19Þ

where
K = stress multiplier from Figure A-8142-1
σ 1 = larger absolute value of σ r or σ θ , psi (MPa), caused
by mechanical loading or structural interaction
with adjacent members, computed as the sum of
the surface stresses in the equivalent solid plate
or using the applicable equations in A-8130 and
A-8150
The effects of temperature are included in the consid-
eration of the structural interaction with adjacent
ð17Þ members.
(b) The peak stress intensity due to all loadings is lim-
ited by cumulative fatigue considerations as described in
XIII-3500 and is given by

where only the positive root is used. The first term under ð20Þ
the radical reflects the effect of the transverse shear
stress due to the mechanical and pressure loads. It is a
maximum in the outermost ligament of the perforated re-
gion, but it may be determined for any radius, larger than Figure A-8142-1
c, by substituting r for R* in the expression. For r < c, the
W /πt R* term should be omitted. is the stress resulting
from applied in‐plane loading averaged through the thick-
ness of the equivalent solid plate. It includes the stresses
due to pressure in the tubes or perforations given in
A-8132.4. No bending stresses are included.
(b) The stress intensity based on stresses averaged
across the minimum ligament width but not through the
thickness of the plate is limited according to XIII-3130
and is computed from

ð18Þ

where
K = stress multiplier from Figure A-8142-1
σ ave = larger value of σ r or σ θ , psi (MPa), caused by me-
chanical loading and structural interaction with
adjacent members, computed as the sum of the
surface stresses in the equivalent solid plate,
using the applicable equations in A-8130
However, supporting interactions from adjacent mem-
bers may only be considered if the primary plus second-
ary stresses in such members are limited to 1.5S m .
Effects of temperature are not included.

265
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

where Equation (20) will give the maximum stress intensity

for any loading system. Equation (20) is not adequate
p s = pressure on the surface where the stress is being
for more complex cyclic histories where the angular or-
computed, psi (MPa)
ientation of the maximum stress intensity varies during
Y m a x = stress multiplier given in Figure A-8142-2 as a
the cycle. In such cases, it is necessary to compute the
function of the biaxiality ratio β = σ 2 /σ 1
stress history at each angular orientation ϕ using eq. (21)
σ 1 = principal stress being the largest absolute value
in the plane of the equivalent solid plate, psi ð21Þ
(MPa)
σ 2 = principal stress having the smallest absolute val-
where
ue in the plane of the equivalent solid plate, psi
(MPa) (Equivalent solid plate stresses due to var- Sϕ = peak stress intensity at the angular orientation
ious loads shall be superimposed in order to ob- ϕ
tain σ 1 and σ 2 before any multipliers are Y 1 , Y 2 = stress multipliers in Figures A-8142-3 through
applied, and the signs of σ 1 and σ 2 should be A-8142-5 for various orientations of the princi-
maintained.) pal stresses σ 1 and σ 2 computed for the
equivalent solid plate
The solid curves in Figure A-8142-2 give the maximum
stress multipliers for the worst angular orientation of σ 1 Note that these figures give stress multipliers for parti-
and σ 2 with respect to the axes of symmetry x and y of cular angular orientation only. The graph for the angular
the hole pattern. In some cases, the worst orientation orientation closest to the actual angular orientation
may not exist anywhere in the plate, and the use of lower should be used. This is sufficiently accurate since the max-
stress multipliers is justified. An important case concerns imum possible difference between the actual orientation
the thermal stress produced by a temperature gradient and the nearest orientation given in Figures A-8142-3
across the diametral lane in a perforated plate. Such a gra- through A-8142-5 is only 7.5 deg. Examples for the com-
dient causes a uniaxial stress oriented parallel to the dia- putation of Sϕ are given as follows.
metral lane. If the diametral lane is parallel to the y axis as Example 1
shown in Figure A-8142-3, the stress multiplier given by
the dashed line in Figure A-8142-2 may be used. The combined stresses in the equivalent solid plate for
a perforated plate of 0.05 ligament efficiency were com-
puted at a point as:
Figure A-8142-2

and σ r is rotated 12 deg, measured from the y axis of the

hole pattern. To determine the value of σϕ at 40 deg from
the y axis, use the following procedure: let σ 1 = σ r ,
σ 2 = σ θ . Since the angular orientation of 12 deg is closest
to 15 deg, use Figure A-8142-5 for the stress multipliers.
Read at ϕ = 40 deg on Scale A: Y 1 = +1.65; on Scale B:
Y 2 = −0.70. Then from eq. (21), the peak stress intensity
is computed as

266
ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure A-8142-3

267
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Example 2 A-8150 THERMAL SKIN EFFECT

For the same plate as above at another point, the direc- A-8151 General Considerations
tion of σ r coincides with the x axis. Let σ r = σ 2 , σ θ = σ 1 . In certain cases, the temperature gradient through the
Read at ϕ = 40 deg from Figure A-8142-3, Y 1 = + 2.75 thickness of a perforated plate can be closely approxi-
and from Figure A-8142-4, Y 2 = –1.80. Then mated by a step change in the metal temperature near
the surface of the plate. In such a case, significant thermal
stresses develop only in the skin layer of the plate at the
surface where the temperature change occurs and the
thermal stresses in the remainder of the plate are
negligible.
(c) The peak stress intensity at the outermost hole is
computed from A-8152 Maximum Thermal Skin Stress
ð22Þ The maximum thermal skin stress on the surface of a
perforated plate can be computed from the relation:
where
ð23Þ
K r = a stress multiplier from Figure A-8142-6
σ r i m = the nominal circumferential stress in the rim, psi
(MPa) where
The stresses given by eqs. (b)(20) and (b)(21) and by E , α, ν = modified material properties
eq. (22) are limited by cumulative fatigue considerations, h = ligament width
as described in XIII-3500. P = pitch, in. (mm)
Tm = mean temperature of the plate
Ts = temperature of the plate at the surface under
A-8143 Irregular Ligament Patterns or Thin consideration
Ligaments in a Nominally Uniform Ymax = stress multiplier from Figure A-8142-2, for
Pattern β = +1

For irregular ligament patterns or thin ligaments in a A-8153 Peak Stress Intensities When Thermal
nominally uniform pattern, the stresses are determined Skin Stresses Are Included
as given in the following subparagraphs. (a) When thermal skin stresses are to be combined
with other stresses to obtain the peak stress intensity,
ð17Þ A-8143.1 Average Stress Intensity. The stress inten- eq. A-8152(23) may not be used. In such a case the ther-
sity based upon the ligament stresses averaged across the mal stresses at any location on the surface of the equiva-
ligament width and through the plate thickness due to lent solid plate are given by:
pressure plus other mechanical loads is limited to 3.0S m
in accordance with Table XIII-2600-1. The appropriate
ð24Þ
value is computed according to A-8142.1(a), where h a
(the actual width of the thin ligament) is used in place
of the nominal width h. where

A-8143.2 Peak Stress Intensity. The peak stress in- E , ν = unmodified material properties (since K s k i n in-
tensity in the thin ligament due to mechanical loading cludes the consideration for E * and ν* )
and structural interaction with adjacent members, includ- K s k i n = stress ratio from Figure A-8153-1
ing thermal effects, is limited by cumulative fatigue con- T m = mean temperature of the plate
siderations. This peak stress intensity is computed by T s = surface temperature of the plate
multiplying the peak stress intensity for a nominal thick- (b) The equivalent solid plate stresses given by eq. (24)
ness ligament by the K m value given in Figure A-8143.2-1. can then be combined with other solid plate stresses and
(a) The peak stress intensity in the nominal ligament is the method given in A-8142.2(b) can be used to obtain
calculated as indicated in A-8142.2(b). the peak stress intensity.

268
ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure A-8142-4

269
ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure A-8142-5

270
ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure A-8142-6

271
ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure A-8143.2-1

272
ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure A-8153-1

273
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE A-9000
INTERACTION METHOD

f u k = linearized ultimate bending stress for section fac-

A-9100 INTRODUCTION tor K
A-9110 SCOPE f y k = linearized yield bending stress for section factor K
I = moment of inertia
(a) This Article contains a method for evaluating the
K = section factor
adequacy of linear structural elements under combined
M = allowable bending moment
loads, without determining principal stresses, by use of
m = applied moment
the stress ratio/interaction curve method. By using an in-
n = interaction exponent
teraction formula for combined stress states the ability of
P = axial load
a linear structural element to withstand combined loads
Q m = first moment of the area between the neutral axis
can then be determined provided the strength of the ele-
ment under each individual load is known. The method and outer fiber
can be applied to elastic and inelastic problems, including
elastic and inelastic stability, and is useful when an exact =
stress analysis is not practical.
(b) A general interaction formula for three states of
stress is given by the following: R = ratio of an individual stress or load to its allowable
S = stress
ð1Þ So = trapezoidal intercept stress
U = stress field utilization factor
where R 1 , R 2 , and R 3 are ratios of either individual stres- x = centroidal axis, x direction
ses, stress resultants, or loads to their respective allow- x′ = principal axis, x ′ direction
ables; and the exponents p , q , r , and s constitute the y = centroidal axis, y direction
interaction relationship. These exponents are based upon yp = distance from principal axis to intermediate fiber
experimental and/or theoretical considerations. Gener- y′ = principal axis, y ′ direction
ally speaking, such an interaction is set up for each indi- γ = plasticity factor
vidual element in a structure (each beam, column, etc.), ϕ = angle between centroidal and principal axis, deg.
and each element will have its own set of exponents for
the loads to which it is subjected. (b) Indices used with the symbols in this Article
(c) For elastic analysis of compact structures (those in
which buckling need not be considered), interaction al = allowable
methods can be used to determine the yield surface. How- ap = apparent
ever, classical strength of material methods can also be b = bending
used to obtain principal stresses, hence an interaction bc = buckling
method is not of importance. For ultimate strength, an ex- c = compression
act stress analysis is frequently impractical and interac- pl = proportional limit
tion methods provide a useful alternative. In addition, s = shear
for structures subject to more than one type of load which t = tension
can cause instability (e.g., torsional and axial buckling of to = torsion
thin‐walled tubes or pipes), interaction methods can u = ultimate
again be used. y = yield
1, 2 = locations across a section
A-9120 NOMENCLATURE
(a) Definitions of the symbols used in this Article A-9200 INTERACTION EQUATIONS
A = cross‐sectional area A-9210 SCOPE
c = distance from neutral axis to outermost fiber
e = strain (a) This subarticle provides interaction equations
f a p = linearized allowable bending stress (apparent based on experimental data for a number of common
stress) structural shapes.

274
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(b) Allowable loads and stresses for the interaction A-9311 Material Properties
equations presented herein shall be determined in accor-
dance with A-9300. The material properties used in developing the allow-
able component or support loads or stresses shall be
(c) Interaction equations for combinations of loads
based on Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, and included and
other than those specified herein may be used, provided
justified in the Design Report.
they are developed in accordance with the rules of
A-9400.
(d) Interaction equations, which may be used for com-
A-9312 Strain Rate Effects
mon beam shapes subject to various combinations of
loads, are presented in Table A-9210(d)-1. As an alterna- Strain rate effects on material properties may be con-
tive to some of the interaction equations given in Table sidered if justified in the Design Report.
A-9210(d)-1, the curve in Figure A-9210(d)-1 may be
used.
(e) All structural shapes subject to buckling shall be A-9313 Temperature Effects
governed by the requirements of NF‐3300.
Temperature effects on the allowable component or
(f) Interaction equations which may be used for thin‐
support loads or stresses shall be considered and justified
and thick‐walled tubes and pipes, subject to various com-
in the Design Report.
binations of loads, are presented in Table A‐9210(f)‐1 (in
the course of preparation).
(g) Interaction equations which may be used for flat, A-9314 Allowable Load
unperforated plates, subject to various combinations of
loads, are presented in Table A‐9210(g)‐1 (in the course The allowable load of a component or support is de-
of preparation). fined as the lesser of (a) through (d).
(a) The load at which the most severely stressed fiber
reaches the allowable stress defined in F-1331.2 or
A-9300 ALLOWABLE LOADS AND STRESSES F-1341.5, as appropriate.
A-9310 SCOPE (b) The load at which either strain or deformation ex-
This subarticle provides criteria for determining the al- ceeds the limits provided by the component or support
lowable loads for components or supports subject to the Design Specification.
application of one or more loads. The allowable loads (c) The load at which loss of component or support
are to be based on the allowable stresses set forth in function occurs, as defined by the component or support
F-1331.2 or F-1341.5, as appropriate, for either elastic Design Specification.
or plastic system analysis. (d) The allowable buckling load as defined in F-1334.3.

Figure A-9210(d)-1
Interaction Curve for Beams Subject to Bending and Shear or to Bending, Shear, and Direct Loads

275
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table A-9210(d)-1
Interaction Equations for Common Beam Shapes
Interaction Equation [Note (1)] and
Type of Load [Note (2)] Remarks
Simple bending Rb < 1 R b = m /M
Complex bending Rbx′ + Rby′ < 1 R b x ′ = m x ′/M x ′, etc.
Simple shear Rs < 1 R s = S s /S s a l
R s x ′ = S s x ′/S s a l ′ etc.; S s x ′ and S s y ′ are maximum shear
Complex shear
stresses

Simple bending plus shear [Note (3)]

Complex bending plus shear [Note (1)]

Simple or complex bending plus tension R b ′ + R t n < 1 R t = P t /P t a l ; to determine n use A-9532

Simple or complex bending, tension, and
[Note (3)]; to determine n use A-9532; see A-9533
shear
Simple or complex bending and
Rb′ + Rc < 1 [Note (3)] and [Note (4)]; R c = P c /P c a l
compression
Simple or complex bending,
[Note (3)] and [Note (4)]; see A-9535
compression, and shear

NOTES:
(1) Allowable loads for use in interaction equations should be based on allowable stresses as defined in A-9300.
(2) All interaction ratios R i are positive by definition.
(3) As an alternate to the given interaction equation, the curve of Figure A-9210(d)-1 may be used.
(4) Amplification of bending moment by axial load shall be taken into account.

A-9320 METHOD A-9420 METHOD

(a) The allowable load of a component or support un- Any new interaction equations to be used shall be in-
der the application of a single load may be determined cluded and justified in the Design Report. They may be
by experimental or analytical methods or both. The allow- justified by one of the following:
able loads of a component or support thus determined are (a) common appearance in appropriate technical litera-
to be modified by the effects discussed in A-9312 and ture or in industry codes or standards;
A-9313 for use in the interaction equations of A-9200. (b) experimental development which includes a varia-
(b) An acceptable method of determining the allowable tion of all types of loads or stresses that appear in the in-
loads of beam shapes in pure bending or in bending in teraction equations. Such a load or stress variance shall
combination with direct loads and shear is the apparent bound the loads or stresses to which the component is
stress method provided in A-9500. subjected;
(c) theoretical development which includes testing to
(c) An acceptable method of determining the allowable
verify the interaction equations developed.
loads of pipes and tubes in pure bending or in bending in
combination with direct loads and shear is provided in
A‐9600 (in the course of preparation).
A-9500 DETERMINATION OF ALLOWABLE
BENDING STRENGTH OF BEAMS BY
THE APPARENT STRESS METHOD
A-9400 NEW INTERACTION EQUATIONS A-9510 SCOPE
A-9410 SCOPE (a) This subarticle provides a method to calculate the
strength of beams in the plastic range under pure bending
Interaction equations other than those provided in or under bending combined with direct loads and shear. It
A-9200 may be used for the analysis of components or is based on the work of Cozzone4, 5 and utilizes a fictitious
supports, provided they are developed in accordance with stress called an apparent stress. This method shall not be
the rules of this Section. used for the analysis of thin‐walled tubes or pipes.

276
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(b) The conventional beam theory, based on the as- (2) Using the value of S a l set forth in F-1331.2 or
sumption that a plane section before bending remains F-1334.7, as appropriate, determine the value of f a p for
plane after bending, gives a linear distribution of strain the proper K .
and stress in the elastic range up to the proportional limit. (3) Multiply f a p from the preceding (2) by I /c to ob-
Beyond the proportional limit, however, although the tain the allowable moment M.
strain distribution is assumed to remain linear, the stress
distribution corresponds with the stress–strain relation- A-9522 Simple Bending — Unsymmetrical
ship for the material. An approximation of this distribu- Section
tion has been obtained, which enables the prediction of (a) Use the following method when the resultant ap-
the effects of shape and material properties on bending plied moment vector is parallel to a principal axis which
in the plastic range. This method has the advantage that is not an axis of symmetry.
strain hardening may be taken into account.
(c) The methods provided herein may also be used for
the analysis of beams with cutouts or notches, provided
that the geometric properties are based on the net area
at the cutout or notch.
(d) The effect of cyclic loading should be evaluated in-
dependently, where appropriate.

A-9520 SIMPLE BENDING

A-9521 Simple Bending — Symmetrical Sections (1) Break the section down into the two parts on
(a) The method given below may be used when the re- either side of the principal axis. For each part, compute
sultant applied moment vector is parallel to a principal Q m , I, and I/c about the principal axis of the original com-
axis which is also an axis of symmetry. plete section.
(2) Compute K = Q m /(I /c) for each part. In utilizing
the K value for each part, computed as above, it will be the
same as for a symmetrical section composed of the given
part and its reflection about the principal axis of the ori-
ginal section.
(b) The section factor K is given by the formula
(b) The allowable bending moment shall be determined
K = 2Q m /(I /c ). If K > 2.0, use K = 2.0. Section factors
as given in (1) through (4) below.
are given in Table A-9521(b)-1 for common structural
(1) Use the method given in A-9521(c) and the K val-
shapes.
ue of the part with the larger c to obtain an f a p value for
(c) The allowable bending moment shall be determined
this part.
as given in (1) through (3).
(2) Determine the strain e a p associated with S a l
(1) Using the method outlined in A-9540, derive the
from the engineering stress–strain curve.
relationship between the allowable stress S a l and the lin-
(3) Obtain the allowable maximum strain e 1 in the
earized allowable stress f a p for the proper section factor
part having the smaller c by the following equation:
K . An example calculation for SA-672 A50 material at
600°F is provided in A-9542, with the resulting relation-
ship shown in Figure A-9542-1.

Table A-9521(b)-1

277
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Enter this strain e 1 on the stress–strain curve and (c) Using the y ′ axis as a reference, determine the al-
obtain the corresponding stress from the stress–strain lowable moment M y ′ as described under simple bending
curve. Use this stress value as the allowable stress S a l (A-9521 and A-9522).
and, with the K value for the part with the smaller c , (d) For use in the interaction equations of A-9210, mo-
use the method of A-9521(c) to obtain f a p for this part. ments in the global axis shall be resolved into moments
(4) Multiply the f a p value for each part by I/c of each about the principal axes by use of the following
part and add the two to obtain the total allowable mo- relationships:
ment M .

A-9523 Complex Bending — Symmetrical and

Unsymmetrical Sections
This condition occurs when the resultant applied mo-
ment vector is not parallel to a principal axis. A-9530 BENDING COMBINED WITH A STRESS
A-9523.1 Sign Convention and Nomenclature. In FIELD
Figure A-9523.1-1, let x and y represent two mutually A-9531 Interaction — Simple or Complex
perpendicular centroidal axes, and let x ′ and y ′ represent Bending and Shear
the principal axes.
The maximum shear stress in a beam usually occurs at
A-9523.2 Resolution of Complex Bending Into Sim- the principal (neutral) axis where the bending stress is
ple Bending. Any case of complex bending may be re- zero. The maximum bending stress occurs at an extreme
solved into two cases of simple bending about the fiber where the shear stress is usually zero.
principal axes of the section. The principal axes are de- (a) In the elastic range, the distribution of shear and
fined as mutually perpendicular centroidal axes about bending stresses (see Figure A-9531-1) is usually such
which the moments of inertia are a maximum and mini- that the most critical point in the section is at either the
mum, respectively, and about which the product moment principal axis or the extreme fiber. This is true on a rec-
of inertia is zero. The procedure is given in (a) through tangular section since the shear distribution across the
(d) below. section is parabolic and the bending distribution is linear.
(a) Determine the principal axes x′ and y′ . If they can- If the shear distribution has been elliptical, every point in
not be determined by inspection, obtain I x , I y , and I x y the cross section will be equally critical in combined
about any arbitrary pair of centroidal axes. stress based on circular interaction.
(b) In the plastic range, however, the distribution of the
shear stress as well as the bending stress differs from that
in the elastic range. This results in intermediate points
(b) Using the x ′ axis as a reference, determine the al-
which frequently become more critical in combined stress
lowable moment M x ′ as described under simple bending
than either the shear stress at the principal axis or the
(A-9521 and A-9522).
bending stress at the extreme fiber.
(c) To find the most critical point would require the cal-
culation of combined stresses at a series of points across
Figure A-9523.1-1
the section. This procedure would not only be laborious
Sign Convention and Nomenclature
but probably incorrect in the conservative direction, since
there would undoubtedly be some redistribution of stress

Figure A-9531-1
Bending and Shear Stresses

GENERAL NOTE: Moment vectors are designated by double-headed

arrows and are to be interpreted by the left-hand rule: point left
thumb in direction of vector and natural curl of fingers will designate
the direction of moment.

278
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

away from the most critical point, although the exact nat- A-9534 Interaction — Simple or Complex
ure of this redistribution appears to be extremely difficult Bending and Compression
to determine. Therefore, the procedure of (1) through (4)
(a) When compression acts in addition to simple or
below shall be used.
complex bending, the applied moment m shall take into
(1) The method used to determine the shear flows
account the additional bending caused by the compres-
for simple or complex bending shall be included and jus-
sive load.
tified in the Design Report.
(2) For complex bending, the maximum principal (b) The allowable moments for simple or complex
shear stresses S s x ′ and S s y ′ shall be determined for use bending shall be determined from A-9520, as
in the interaction equations of A-9210. appropriate.
(3) For simple or complex bending, the allowable (c) The allowable compressive load P c a l shall be taken
shear stress S s a l shall be taken as 0.6S t a l . as the lesser of A S a l and the allowable buckling load
(4) The allowable moments shall be determined as in F-1334.3.
A-9521 or A-9522, as appropriate.

A-9532 Interaction — Simple or Complex A-9535 Interaction — Simple or Complex

Bending and Tension Bending, Compression, and Shear
(a) The allowable moments for simple or complex When bending acts in addition to compression and
bending shall be determined from A-9521 or A-9522, as shear, the following procedure may be used to determine
appropriate. the interaction relationships for use in A-9210.
(b) The allowable tensile load P a l shall be taken as (a) Follow the procedure in A-9534 to obtain the ap-
AS a l . plied and allowable moments and the allowable compres-
(c) The interaction exponent n for use in the interac- sive load.
tion equations of A-9210(d) shall be determined from (b) Obtain the bending‐compression utilization factor
(1) through (3) below. Ubc = Rb + Rc.
(1) Determine Ac/2Q m for use in obtaining the inter- (c) U b c may be used in Figure A-9210(d)-1 by replace-
action exponent. If the section is unsymmetrical, take c ment of U b t by U b c .
for the side for which axial and bending stresses are of op-
posite sign. For complex bending, obtain both A c /2c x ′
and Ac/2c x ′ . In obtaining Ac/2c x ′ if the section is unsym- A-9540 PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINATION OF
metrical about the x ′ axis, take c x ′ for the side for which ALLOWABLE BENDING STRESS
axial stress and stress due to m x ′ are of opposite sign. Ob- A-9541 Derivation of Linearized Allowable
tain Ac /2c y ′ in the same manner. Bending Stress for Any Material
(2) The material plasticity factor for use in obtaining
the interaction exponent is γ = 0.90 for all materials. A fictitious bending stress, called the linearized allow-
(3) Using A c/2Q m determined above in (1) and γ de- able bending stress f a p , may be used for establishing
termined above in (2), obtain n from Figure the bending strength of a material. This method assumes
A-9532(c)(3)-1. To determine the interaction exponent that in the plastic region the nonlinear stress–strain rela-
for complex bending, obtain both n x ′ and n y ′ from Figure tionship for a particular section and material can be ap-
A-9532(c)(3)-1 and determine a combined n using proximated by a trapezoidal shape as shown in Figure
n = (n x ′ R b x ′ + n y ′ R b y ′)/R b . A-9541-1.
The stress S o is a fictitious stress which is assumed to
A-9533 Interaction — Simple or Complex exist at the neutral axis or at zero strain. The value of S o is
Bending, Tension, and Shear determined by requiring that the internal moment of the
When bending acts in addition to tension and shear, al- engineering stress–strain curve must equal the internal
lowables shall be determined as provided in (a) through moment of the assumed trapezoidal shape. Thus, the total
(c) below. moment capacity of a symmetrical section may be ex-
(a) Follow the procedure outlined in A-9531 and pressed as follows:
A-9532 to obtain S s a l , P a l , M x ′, M y ′, and n.
(b) Plot the curve of R b + R t n = 1 [Figure A-9533(b)-1]
and the intersection of R b and R t . Call this point A. Obtain
and .
ð2Þ
(c) Obtain the bending‐tension utilization factor for use
in Figure A-9210(d)-1:

279
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure A-9532(c)(3)-1
Interaction Exponent

Thus, the linearized allowable stress for any section allowable moment, determined either by test or an exact
factor K becomes stress analysis, that corresponds to a known value of K .
Such effort would negate the advantage of this method.
ð3Þ On the other hand, the values of S o u and S o y have been
calculated for about 50 materials 6 and are shown in
and the moment capacity of the section is as follows: Figure A-9541-2. These curves may be utilized for the car-
ð4Þ
bon, low, and high alloy steels given in Section II, Part D,
Subpart 1. The corresponding values of f u 1 . 5 and f y 1 . 5
An alternate method of determining f a p for any section are shown in Figure A-9541-3.
factor is to express it in terms of the linearized allowable Once f u k and f y k are determined from Figure A-9541-3
bending stress for a 1.5 stress factor: and eqs. (6) through (9), f a p for any value of the allowable
stress S a l may be determined as shown in (a) through (c)
ð5Þ below.
(a) For S a l ≤ S p l , where S p l is the proportional limit
When the allowable stress S a l is equal to the ultimate stress (Figure A-9541-4),
stress S u , eqs. (3) and (5) become
ð10Þ
ð6Þ
(b) For S p l ≤ S a l ≤ S y ,
ð7Þ
ð11Þ
When the allowable stress S a l is equal to the yield
stress S y , eqs. (3) and (5) become where

ð8Þ ð12Þ

(c) For S y < S a l ≤ S u ,

ð9Þ
ð13Þ
where S o u and S o y are the trapezoidal intercept stresses
corresponding to S u and S y . where
In order to calculate the allowable moment of a given
beam cross section by the use of eqs. (3) and (4), the in- ð14Þ
tercept stress S o must first be determined using the

280
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure A-9533(b)-1
Interaction Curve for Bending and Tension

A-9542 Example Illustrating the Derivation of

Figure A-9541-1 Linearized Allowable Bending Stress for
Trapezoidal Stress–Strain Relationship SA-672 A50 Material at 600°F
The values of S y and S u are given
S u = 50.0 ksi ultimate tensile strength at 600°F (Section
II, Part D, Subpart 1, Table U)
S y = 20.0 ksi yield strength at 600°F (Section II, Part D,
Subpart 1, Table Y‐1)
The following values of S o y and S o u are found from
Figure A-9541-2:

281
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure A-9541-2
Ultimate and Yield Trapezoidal Intercept Stresses

200

Ultimate Trapezoidal Intercept Stress, Sou, ksi

Yield Trapezoidal Intercept Stress, Soy, ksi
150
Ultimate
stress
100
80

60

40

30
Yield
20 stress

15

10
10 15 20 30 40 60 80 100 200 400
Ultimate Stress, Su, ksi
Yield Stress, Sy, ksi

Figure A-9541-3
Linearized Ultimate and Yield Bending Stresses for Rectangular Section

600
Linearized Ultimate Bending Stress, fu1.5 for K  1.5, ksi

400
Linearized Yield Bending Stress, fy1.5 for K  1.5, ksi

Ultimate
300 stress

200

150

100
80

60
Yield
stress
40

30

20

15

10
10 15 20 30 40 60 80 100 200 400
Ultimate Stress, Su, ksi
Yield Stress, Sy, ksi

282
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure A-9541-4
Proportional Limit as a Function of Yield Stress

Using eqs. A-9541(6) and A-9541(8), Using eqs. A-9541(7) and A-9541(9), the value of f u k
and f y k , for any K , is determined. For example, if
K = 1.9, 1.7, 1.3, and 1.1, then

or, using Figure A-9541-3,

From Figure A-9541-4, S p 1 = 13.0 ksi. Using the above

data, Figure A-9542-1 may be obtained for K = 1.9, 1.5,
and 1.1.

283
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure A-9542-1
Linearized Bending Stress Versus Allowable Stress for SA-672 A50 Material at 600°F (316°C)

90
K  1.9

80

K  1.5
70
Linearized Bending Stress, fap, ksi

60
K  1.1
50

40

30

20

10

10 20 30 40 50

Spl 1.2 Sy Su

Allowable Stress, Sal, ksi

From F-1334.1, the allowable stress is the lesser of From eq. A-9541(c)(14), with K = 1.5,
1.2S y and 0.7S u :

From eq. A-9541(c)(13),

Therefore, S a l = 24.0 ksi and

Alternatively, from Figure A-9542-1, f a p = 31.5 ksi.

284
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX B
OWNER’S DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS

ARTICLE B-1000
INTRODUCTION AND SCOPE

B-1100 INTRODUCTION (b) Specific Requirements applicable to each component

(Article B-3000 through Article B-10000, inclusive)
B-1110 OBJECTIVE (c) Included in both the Generic and Specific Require-
(a) The objective of this Appendix is to provide a guide ments are those considerations outside the scope of this
for the preparation of the Design Specification required Section (operability 7 and regulatory 8 requirements)
by Division 1 of this Section. The writer of the Design which have an effect on construction but which are not re-
Specification is not restricted as to what can be included quired by this Section to be a part of the certified Design
therein except that, as a minimum, the information re- Specification.
quired by this Section must be included. Additional, but B-1120.2 Nomenclature, Definitions, and Symbols.
not less restrictive, requirements which modify the rules Nomenclature, definitions, and symbols should be in
of this Section to make them complete for a specific com- agreement with those established in the applicable
ponent or to provide more specific or restrictive require- Article. Should a conflict exist between Articles, the De-
ments should be identified. sign Specification should be clear as to what is intended
(b) It is recognized that in order to prepare a document in each case.
that provides a complete basis for construction of an item
for a nuclear facility, a number of considerations outside
the scope of this Section may need to be addressed. Some B-1200 SCOPE OF CERTIFIED DESIGN
of these which are addressed in this Appendix are SPECIFICATION
(1) load combinations
(2) operability The certified Design Specification should contain in suf-
(3) regulatory requirements ficient detail the information which this Section requires
The additional guidance provided in this Appendix for to be provided. Operability 7 and regulatory 8 require-
these considerations is not required by this Section, is ments which are beyond the jurisdiction of this Section
not a part of the certification process, and should not be are not covered by the Code required certification of the
interpreted as extending the duties of the Inspector. Design Specification (NCA‐3252).

B-1120 FORMAT
B-1120.1 General. Design Specifications should be as
uniform throughout the nuclear industry as is reasonably
attainable. The format of this Appendix is presented as a
guide to uniformity and is divided into major categories
as follows:
(a) Generic Requirements applicable to all components
(Article B-2000)

285
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE B-2000
GENERIC REQUIREMENTS

B-2100 CERTIFIED DESIGN SPECIFICATION B-2110.7 Review of Design Report. NCA‐3260 pro-
REQUIREMENTS vides the requirements for Owner’s review of the Design
Report.
The information in this Article addresses those por-
tions of the certified Design Specification which are gen- B-2111 Classification
eric in nature and therefore applicable to the
B-2111.1 Responsibility. NCA‐2110(d) provides the
construction of all Section III items.
requirements for classification of equipment.
B-2111.2 Multiple Code Class Components.
B-2110 GENERAL NCA‐2133 provides the requirements for multiple Code
B-2110.1 Contents of the Certified Design Specifica- Class components.
tion.
B-2111.3 Optional Use of Code Classes. NCA‐2134
(a) NCA‐3252 provides the minimum requirements for provides the requirements for optional use of Code
the contents of the certified Design Specification. Classes.
(b) With respect to NCA‐3252(a), it is important to re-
cognize that the boundary defines an interface between B-2111.4 Special Requirements. NCA‐2160 provides
two items that are dependent on each other for the trans- the requirements for contractual arrangements that are
mittal of loads. In order to properly design the item on beyond the scope of this Section.
either side of the boundary, the effect of the attached item
B-2112 Design Basis and Service Limits
is required. The effect may be furnished directly by sup-
plying the forces and moments that are transmitted B-2112.1 Plant and System Service Conditions. The
across the boundary or, alternatively, by providing suffi- definition of plant and system service conditions, and the
cient information to enable the designer to determine determination of their significance to the design and op-
the interaction across the boundary. This Section pro- erability of components and supports of a nuclear facility,
vides rules to accomplish this in NCA‐3254. may be derived from systems safety criteria documents
(c) Any Code Cases applicable to the construction of an for specific types of nuclear facilities and may be found
item should be included in the Design Specification. in the requirements of regulatory and enforcement autho-
rities having jurisdiction at the site [NCA‐2141(b)].
B-2110.2 Certification. NCA‐3255 provides the re-
quirements for certification of the Design Specification. B-2112.2 Design Loadings. The Design Specification
The required certification is not applicable to supplemen- shall include the Design Pressure [NCA‐2142.1(a)], the
tary, regulatory, or operability requirements which are Design Temperature [NCA‐2142.1(b)], and the Design
outside of the scope of this Section. Mechanical Loads [NCA‐2142.1(c)].
B-2112.3 Establishment of Component and Support
B-2110.3 Permanent Records. NCA‐4134.17 pro-
Design and Service Limits.
vides the requirements for the continued maintenance
(a) For Class 1, MC, and CS components, and for Class 2
and retention location for permanent records.
and 3 piping and its supports, Design and Service Loads
B-2110.4 Handling, Storage, and Shipping. The De- should be specified and appropriate Service Limits desig-
sign Specification should include any special measures nated [NCA‐2142(a)].
to control handling, storage, and shipping of the compo- (b) For Class 2 and 3 components and supports, other
nent (NCA‐4134.13). than piping and its supports, two options are available
as follows:
B-2110.5 Identification of Regulatory and Enforce-
(1) Design and Service Loads may be specified and
ment Authorities. The Design Specification should in-
appropriate Service Limits designated.
clude identification of regulatory and enforcement
(2) Service Loadings are not required to be identified
authorities at locations of component installation with
when the Design Pressure, Design Temperature, and De-
whom Data Reports must be filed.
sign Mechanical Loads result in stresses that are at least
B-2110.6 Filing. NCA‐3256 provides the require- as high, relative to allowable values, as any which may oc-
ments for filing of the Design Specification. cur for any Service Loading [NCA‐2142(a)].

286
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

B-2112.4 Test Loadings. NCA‐2142.3 provides the B-2122.3 Design Mechanical Loads.
rules for consideration of Test Loadings. (a) The specified Design Mechanical Loads should be
selected so that when combined with the effects of Design
B-2113 N Certificate Holder’s Responsibilities Pressure, they represent the most severe coincident load-
ings for which the Level A Service Limits on primary
B-2113.1 Manufacturers of Small Pumps and Valves stress are applicable.
and of Standard Supports. Manufacturers of small pumps
(b) The determination of most severe coincident load-
and valves [NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller] and standard
ings may result in specification of pairs of Design Condi-
supports (including snubbers) who elect to provide their
tions since the one most severe combination may not be
own Design Specification are responsible for compliance
readily predicted. The specification may specify the max-
with the requirements of NCA‐3252.
imum Design Mechanical Load for any situation which,
B-2113.2 Compliance With N Certificate Holder’s when taken with the Design Pressure, would result in
Responsibilities. When the completed Code item involves the worst combination of Design Conditions even though
work by more than one organization, the Design Specifi- they may not be coincident.
cation shall be provided to the organization having over- (c) The Design Mechanical Loads that are considered
all responsibility. are somewhat dependent on the component, its location,
its attachment to other components, and for a Class 2 or 3
B-2120 DESIGN component, whether Service Loadings are to be specified
(refer to B-2112.3 and NCA‐2142).
B-2121 Loadings
The Owner or Owner’s designee shall identify the load- B-2123 Service Loads
ings and designate the appropriate Design and Service In order to properly specify Service Limits for the var-
Limits for each component or support. The loadings that ious types of loadings, the Owner or Owner’s designee
should be taken into account in designing a component should recognize the basis for the establishment of those
include, but are not limited to, the following: Limits. These are given in NCA‐2142.2.
(a) internal and external pressure, including static head
(b) weight of the component and normal contents un- B-2123.1 Service Limits A and B. ð17Þ
der service and test conditions (a) For Class 1, MC, and CS components and for Class 2
(c) superimposed loads, such as other components, op- vessels designed to NC‐3200, Service Limits A and B are
erating equipment, insulation, or corrosion resistant or provided in order to evaluate the effect of system operat-
erosion resistant linings and piping ing loads on the fatigue life of the component. For a fati-
gue analysis the loads applicable to the component
(d) vibrations and earthquake loads
being considered should be described in terms of quanti-
(e) reactions of supporting lugs, rings, saddles, or other
ties that the designer may use XIII-3520. The variation
types of supports
with respect to time of pressure, temperature, flow rate,
(f) temperature effects etc., as well as the number of times these changes occur
(g) restrained thermal expansion in the life of the component, is needed. In this regard, a
(h) anchor and support movement effects service cycle is defined in XIII-1300(ac) as: “... the initia-
(i) environmental loads, such as wind and snow tion and establishment of new conditions followed by a
(j) dynamic effects of fluid flow return to the conditions which prevailed at the beginning
of the cycle.” Thus, as an example, the conditions asso-
B-2122 Design Loads ciated with plant startup do not constitute a service cycle.
Startup and shutdown together constitute a service cycle,
B-2122.1 Design Pressure. NCA‐2142.1(a) and NB/ and if there are n 1 startups in the Design Specification,
NC/ND/NE‐3112.1 provide the required definitions for there should be the same number of shutdowns.
Design Pressure. (b) Figure B-2123-1 is an illustration of the time‐
B-2122.2 Design Temperature. NB/NC/ND/NE/NF/ dependent load information which the designer needs.
NG‐3112 and NCA‐2142.1(b) provide the requirements (Note that it provides only the startup portion of a service
for Design Temperature. The Design Temperature shall cycle.)
be used in computations involving the Design Pressure (c) Refer to B-6124 for the Class 2 and 3 piping
and coincidental Design Mechanical Loads. The actual me- requirements.
tal temperature at the point under consideration shall be (d) For all other Class 2 and 3 components and sup-
used in all computations where the use of the actual ser- ports, including piping supports, it is not necessary to de-
vice pressure is required. Where a component is heated fine each service cycle in detail since no fatigue analysis is
by tracing, induction coils, jacketing, or by internal heat required. It is important for the designer to know the
generation, the effect of such heating shall be incorpo- maximum loading condition on the component for these
rated in the establishment of the Design Temperature. Service Limits.

287
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure B-2123-1
Time-Dependent Load Information

3000 600 (316) 60,000

re
tu
ra

re
pe
2500 500 (260)

tu
50,000

em

ra
pe
tT

m
tle

Te
Ou

t
le
In
2000 400 (204)
Coolant Bulk Temperature, °F (°C)

40,000

Total Coolant Flow, gph

Coolant Pressure, psig

1500 300 (149) 30,000

Flow

Power
1000 200 (93) 20,000 100
re

Reactor Power, %
su
es
Pr

500 100 (38) 10,000 50

0 0 (32) 0 0
0 1 2 3 4 5
Time, hr
1 gph = 3.8 × 10
3 m3/h
1 psi = 6.895 kPa

B-2123.2 Service Limit C. Service Limit C is provided pressure-retaining function, are not objectionable. Since
in order to evaluate the effect of plant operating loads on the occurrence of stress associated with this Limit may
the structural integrity of a component for situations require removal of the component from service, the Own-
which are not anticipated to occur for a sufficient number er should review the selection of this Limit for compatibil-
of times to affect fatigue life and for which large deforma- ity with established system safety criteria.
tions in areas of structural discontinuities are not objec-
tionable. Since the occurrence of stress associated with B-2124 Test Loads
this Limit may result in removal of the component from Loads due to tests beyond those allowed by this Section
service for inspection or repair, the Owner should review should be classified in the appropriate Service Limit in ac-
the selection of this Limit for compatibility with estab- cordance with NCA‐2142.3(b) [NCA‐2142.4(d)(2)].
lished system safety criteria. Refer to NB‐3113(b) for
the limit of number of cycles. B-2125 Load Combinations
B-2123.3 Service Limit D. Service Limit D is provided In order to provide a complete definition of service
in order to evaluate the effect of plant operating loads on loads, the combination of specific events must be consid-
the structural integrity of a component for situations in ered. Since these combinations are a function of specific
which gross general deformations, loss of dimensional systems which make up a part of a specific type nuclear
stability, and damage requiring repair, excluding loss of facility, this Section does not directly address this other

288
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

than to provide different Stress Limits for various load- B-2140 FABRICATION
ings. Specific guidance is provided in the approved Safety The Design Specification should specify any unusual re-
Analysis Report (SAR) for the plant. strictions on fabrication processes or techniques that
would be deleterious to the suitability of the component
B-2126 Deformation Limits in the expected service environment.
The Code does not provide specific deformation limits B-2150 TESTING
other than those that would be associated with a given al-
lowable stress. If control of deformation is a requirement,
B-2151 Pneumatic Test
the deformation limits should be provided. The Design Specification should identify if a pneumatic
test should be used in lieu of hydrostatic testing for those
components and appurtenances required to be pressure
B-2130 MATERIALS tested in accordance with the rules of this Section (NB/
B-2131 General Requirements NC/ND/NE‐6111, NB/NC/ND/NE‐6112).
The Design Specification should provide information B-2152 Restriction on Testing
relative to materials as listed in (a) through (i).
(a) any hydrostatic testing or service temperature Any restrictions on the use of the test fluid should be
limits provided (NB/NC/ND/NE‐6112). When selecting a fluid
for the test, it should be determined that the test fluid
(b) any reductions to design stress intensity values, al-
does not have deleterious effects and that the test fluid
lowable stress, or fatigue curves necessitated by environ-
may be safely used at the pressure and temperature spe-
mental conditions
cified for the test.
(c) any restrictions on cladding materials
(d) materials which are acceptable from the stand- B-2153 Bellows Type Expansion Joints
points of environment and location
Any requirements that supplement hydrostatic or
(e) any restrictions on heat treating pneumatic testing of bellows type expansion joints should
(f) any requirements with respect to cleanliness be included.
(g) impact test requirements (B-2132)
(h) any corrosion or erosion allowances B-2154 Leak Tightness
(i) postweld heat treatment times applied to the mate- Leak tightness requirements for areas, such as perma-
rial or item after it is completed must be specified (NB/ nent seals, seats, and gasketed joints for pressure‐
NC/ND/NE/NF/NG‐4622) retaining components or appurtenances, should be in-
cluded (NB/NC/ND/NE‐6224).
B-2132 Impact Tests B-2155 Additional Testing
For those cases where impact testing is optional, the If testing in addition to pressure testing is required, the
Design Specification should state whether or not impact loads due to such testing should be classified in accor-
testing of the pressure-retaining material of the compo- dance with NCA‐2142.3(b).
nent or the support material is required. The test tem-
perature should be specified and the tests become part B-2160 OVERPRESSURE PROTECTION
of the appropriate Subsection. B-2161 General Requirements
B-2161.1 Scope. For steady state or transient condi-
B-2133 Fracture Mechanics Data tions of pressure and coincident temperature that are in
When the methods of Nonmandatory Appendix G are to excess of design or service loadings and their combina-
be used to provide protection against nonductile fracture tions and associated limits specified in the Design Specifi-
for materials that have specified minimum yield strengths cations, system overpressure protection is required for
at room temperature greater than 50 ksi (345 MPa) but vessels, piping, pumps, and valves in service and sub-
not exceeding 90 ksi (620 MPa), the Design Specification jected to the consequences of the application of these con-
shall include additional fracture mechanics data for base ditions (refer to NB/NC/ND/NE‐7110).
metal, weld metal, and heat‐affected zone that are re- B-2161.2 Integrated Overpressure Protection. It
quired to use Figure G-2210-1 in accordance with should be recognized that the overpressure protection
G-2110(b). Where these materials of higher yield of pressure-retaining components in a system require
strengths are to be used in conditions where radiation consideration of the pressure transients which may be
may affect the material properties, the effect of radiation imposed on the systems during all service loadings and
on the K l c curve shall be determined for the material testing conditions described in the component Design
prior to its use in construction. Specifications (refer to NB/NC/ND/NE‐7120).

289
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

B-2162 Design Secondary Pressure (e) accumulation

The design secondary pressure shall be specified in the (f) blowdown
Design Specification [refer to NB‐7111(d) and NC/ (g) static and dynamic back pressure, minimum and
ND‐7112]. maximum
(h) response time (maximum time delay between at-
ð17Þ B-2163 Maximum Anticipated Pressure and tainment of set pressure or reception of the energizing
Temperature signal by the solenoid and valve lift)
The Design Specification should identify the maximum
anticipated pressure and coincident temperature among B-2166 Rupture Disk Devices
any systems components under the operating conditions Rupture disk device burst pressure tolerance and man-
of the system as a consequence of any transients occur- ufacturing design range should be specified in the Design
ring either within the system or in associated systems Specification.
which may affect the system for which overpressure pro-
tection is intended (refer to NB/NC/ND‐7300). Service
conditions such as at startup and shutdown may require B-2200 OPERABILITY
protection against nonductile failure [NB-3210(d)] at B-2210 INTRODUCTION
pressures lower than the component design pressure.
Operability requirements are outside the scope of this
B-2164 Pressure Relief Valve Operating Section [NCA‐2142(b)]; however, the Owner or Owner’s
Requirements designee is required to identify any such requirements
B-2164.1 Blowdown Requirements. The Design in the Design Specifications (NCA‐3252).
Specification may specify blowdown requirements with
a greater tolerance than the values stated in NB/NC/ B-2220 ACTIVE PUMPS OR VALVES
ND‐7500. The Design Specification should indicate if the specified
B-2164.2 Popping Point Tolerance. The Design pump or valve must perform a mechanical motion during
Specification may specify a popping point tolerance great- the course of accomplishing a system safety function dur-
er than the value stated in NB/NC/ND‐7500. ing or following the specified plant event. Such a pump or
valve is designated as an active component.
B-2165 Pressure Relief Valve Operating
Characteristics (Refer to ANSI N278.1)
B-2300 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
As applicable, the following pressure relief valve oper-
ating characteristics should be specified in the Design In the process of preparing a Design Specification, it is
Specification when overpressure protection is dependent important to refer to and rely on the requirements con-
upon these factors: tained in SAR documents since they provide the basis
(a) set pressure for complying with existing regulatory requirements.
(b) set pressure range Conflicts between a Design Specification and the SAR
(c) set pressure tolerance could lead to construction of items not in compliance with
(d) discharge capacity with due allowance for the effect the license requirements. A reference list of regulatory
of the back pressure on the capacity documents is available at http://www.nrc.gov/.

290
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE B-3000
SPECIFIC VESSEL REQUIREMENTS

B-3100 CERTIFIED DESIGN SPECIFICATION

REQUIREMENTS
The Design Specification for vessels should include re-
quirements indicated in Article B-2000, Generic
Requirements.

291
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE B-4000
SPECIFIC PUMP REQUIREMENTS

B-4100 CERTIFIED DESIGN SPECIFICATION B-4230 QUALIFICATION

REQUIREMENTS B-4231 Methods
In addition to the Design Specification requirements in- The method of pump qualification, if any, for functional
dicated in Article B-2000, Generic Requirements, the De- operability should be defined in the Design Specification.
sign Specification for pumps should include the other Qualification by analysis, test, or combinations thereof
requirements of B-4110 and B-4120. should be specified. Available codes or standards which
cover these areas should be referred to and used to the
B-4110 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS maximum extent possible.

Covered by B-2110. B-4232 Analysis

Acceptable methods of analysis should be identified.
B-4120 DESIGN The following areas, as a minimum, should be addressed:
B-4121 Loads From Connected Piping (a) required analysis;
(b) load combinations, including deadweight, thermal
The forces and moments produced by the connected
loads, nozzle loads, seismic loads, etc.;
piping on each pump inlet and outlet should be included
(c) allowable stres s es for the various loa di ng
(NB/NC/ND‐3415).
conditions.

B-4122 Earthquake Loadings B-4233 Testing

NB/NC/ND‐3417 provide the requirements for consid- Acceptable methods of testing should be identified. The
eration of earthquake loading. following areas, as a minimum, should be addressed:
(a) required tests and test sequences
(b) imposed loads and pump function during tests
B-4200 OPERABILITY REQUIREMENTS FOR (c) acceptance criteria
PUMPS
B-4240 FUNCTIONAL OPERABILITY
B-4210 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PRODUCTION TESTS
B-4211 Applicability Any special functional operability tests to be conducted
The inclusion of functional operability requirements in on production pumps should be specified in the Design
the Design Specifications should be based on the func- Specification.
tional requirements of the pump being specified. These
requirements should be specified only if the pumps are B-4250 DOCUMENTATION
considered to be active pumps. Documentation requirements for functional qualifica-
tion or production tests should be specified.
B-4220 DESIGN
The Design Specification should include all applicable
B-4300 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
and pertinent information considered important to the
functional operability of the pump. Regulatory requirements are covered in B-2300.

292
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE B-5000
SPECIFIC VALVE REQUIREMENTS

B-5100 CERTIFIED DESIGN SPECIFICATION B-5123 Class 3 Valves

REQUIREMENTS B-5123.1 Alternative Rules. The Design Specification
In addition to the Design Specification requirements in- shall specify whether the alternative rules of ND‐3513 are
dicated in Article B-2000, Generic Requirements, the De- permitted to be used.
sign Specification for valves should include the other B-5123.2 Hydrostatic Tests. ND‐3514 provides the
requirements of B-5110 and B-5120. requirements concerning alternative test pressures, seat
leakages, and test durations.
B-5110 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Covered by B-2110.
B-5200 OPERABILITY REQUIREMENTS FOR
B-5120 DESIGN VALVES
B-5121 Class 1 Valves B-5210 INTRODUCTION
B-5121.1 Pipe Reactions for Valves Designed to Al- Operability requirements are outside the scope of this
ternative Design Rules. NB‐3512.2 provides the require- Section (NCA‐2142); however, the Owner or Owner’s de-
ments concerning pipe reactions. signee is required to identify any valve operability re-
B-5121.2 Earthquake Loadings. NB‐3524 provides quirements in the Design Specification [NB‐3526(b) and
the requirements concerning earthquake loadings. NB‐3527].
B-5121.3 Level C Service Limits. NB‐3526 provides
the requirements concerning valve function during load- B-5220 DESIGN
ing for which Level C Service Limits are specified. The Design Specification should include all applicable
B-5121.4 Pipe Reaction Stress. NB‐3526.2 provides and pertinent information required. A document pertain-
the requirements concerning pipe reaction stress compu- ing to this information is ANSI N278.1. Additional infor-
tation for Level C Service Limits. mation not covered in ANSI N278.1, but considered
important to the functional operability of the valve should
B-5121.5 Level D Service Limits. NB‐3527 provides also be included. NB‐3524, NC‐3520, and ND‐3520 pro-
the requirements concerning valve function during load- vide guidance for analysis of valves with extended
ings for which Level D Service Limits are specified. masses.
B-5121.6 Hydrostatic Tests. NB‐3531.2(c) provides
the requirements concerning alternative test pressures, B-5230 QUALIFICATION
seat leakages, and test durations. B-5231 Methods
B-5121.7 Body Contours at Weld Ends. NB‐3544.8 The method of valve qualification, if any, for functional
provides the requirements concerning alternative body operability should be defined in the Design Specification.
contours at weld ends of valves. Qualification by analysis, test, or combinations thereof
B-5121.8 Bypass Piping. The Design Specification should be specified. Available Codes or Standards which
shall state which organization is responsible for the by- cover these areas should be referenced and used to the
pass piping design, if the responsible organization is not maximum extent possible.
the piping system designer [NB‐3546.3(b)].
B-5232 Analysis
B-5122 Class 2 Valves
Acceptable methods of analysis should be identified.
B-5122.1 Alternative Rules. The Design Specification The following areas, as a minimum, should be addressed:
shall specify whether the alternative rules of NC‐3513 are (a) required analysis
permitted to be used. (b) load combinations, including seismic, end loads,
B-5122.2 Hydrostatic Tests. NC‐3514 provides the mechanical loads, etc.
requirements concerning alternative test pressures, seat (c) allowable s tresses f or the various loadi ng
leakages, and test durations. conditions

293
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

B-5233 Testing B-5250 DOCUMENTATION

Acceptable methods of testing shall be identified. The Documentation requirements for functional qualifica-
following areas, as a minimum, should be addressed: tion or production tests or both should be specified in
(a) required tests and test sequence the Design Specification.
(b) imposed loads and valve function during tests
(c) acceptance criteria Y
B-5300 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
B-5240 FUNCTIONAL OPERABILITY Regulatory requirements are covered in B-2300.
PRODUCTION TESTS
Any special functional operability tests to be conducted
on production valves shall be specified in the Design
Specification.

294
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE B-6000
SPECIFIC PIPING REQUIREMENTS

B-6100 CERTIFIED DESIGN SPECIFICATION B-6123 Peak Pressure

REQUIREMENTS In categorizing Service Loadings into appropriate Ser-
In addition to the Design Specification requirements in- vice Limits, the Design Specification should include the
dicated in Article B-2000, Generic Requirements, the De- peak pressure.
sign Specification for piping should include the other
requirements of B-6110 and B-6120. B-6124 Fatigue Consideration for Class 2 and 3
Piping
B-6110 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Covered by B-2110. For Class 2 and 3 piping, it is not necessary to define
each service cycle in detail. However, the maximum range
B-6120 DESIGN of conditions and the total number of occurrences of all
service cycles to which the piping system will be sub-
B-6121 Seismic
jected shall be identified [NC/ND‐3611.2(e)]. For exam-
For piping, the loadings, movements, anchor motions, ple, the minimum temperature conditions could be 40°F
and number of cycles due to seismic events should be giv- (5°C) while the maximum is 456°F (235°C). If all other
en. The associated Service Loadings which occur with, or service cycles did not impose a temperature condition
as a result of, the specified seismic events should be less than the minimum or greater than the maximum, it
stated. is not required to be specified, unless the total number
of occurrences of all service cycles exceeds 7,000. In this
B-6122 Other Dynamic Loads case, the range of temperature and the number of occur-
Dynamic loadings, such as those resulting from sudden rences for each service cycle shall be specified. In deter-
valve or pump operation, should be given. As a minimum, mining the total number of service cycles, all service
the information needed to determine this loading should cycles shall be considered including those that impose a
be given (such as pressures, temperatures, flow rates, temperature condition less than the maximum range of
valve operating times). temperature.

295
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE B-7000
SPECIFIC CONTAINMENT REQUIREMENTS

B-7100 CERTIFIED DESIGN SPECIFICATION B-7122 Design Temperature

REQUIREMENTS NE‐3112.2 provides the requirements concerning spec-
In addition to the Design Specification requirements in- ification of Design Temperature.
dicated in Article B-2000, Generic Requirements, the De-
sign Specification for containment should include the B-7123 Design Mechanical Loads
other requirements of B-7110 and B-7120.
NE‐3112.3 provides the requirements concerning spec-
B-7110 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ification of Design Mechanical Loads.
Covered by B-2110.
B-7124 Service Conditions
B-7120 DESIGN
NE‐3113 provides the requirements concerning specifi-
B-7121 Design Pressure cation of Level A, B, C, and D Service Conditions which sa-
NE‐3112.1 provides the requirements concerning spec- tisfy the Generic Requirements for Service Limits in
ification of Design Pressure. NCA‐2142.

296
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE B-8000
SPECIFIC SUPPORT REQUIREMENTS

B-8100 CERTIFIED DESIGN SPECIFICATION B-8130 MATERIALS

REQUIREMENTS Requirements for items, such as gaskets, seals, springs,
In addition to the Design Specification requirements in- compression spring endplates, bearings, retaining rings,
dicated in Article B-2000, Generic Requirements, the De- washers, wear shoes, hydraulic fluids, etc., should be sta-
sign Specification for supports should include the other ted in the Design Specification. Such items should be
requirements of B-8110, B-8120, and B-8130. made of materials that are not injuriously affected by
the fluid, temperature, or irradiation conditions to which
B-8110 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS the item will be subjected (NF‐2121).
In addition to the general requirements of B-2110, the
information required by NF‐1110 for intervening ele- B-8300 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
ments in the support load path should be included in
the Design Specification for the supported component. Regulatory requirements are covered in B-2300.

B-8120 DESIGN
B-8121 Standard Supports
NF‐3400 provides the requirements for standard
supports.

297
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE B-9000
SPECIFIC CORE SUPPORT STRUCTURES REQUIREMENTS

B-9100 CERTIFIED DESIGN SPECIFICATION (c) superimposed loads, such as those due to other
REQUIREMENTS structures, the reactor core, steam separating equipment,
flow distributors and baffles, thermal shields, and safety
In addition to the Design Specification requirements in- equipment
dicated in Article B-2000, Generic Requirements, the De- (d) earthquake loads or other loads which result from
sign Specification for core support structures should motion of the reactor vessel
include the other requirements of B-9110, B-9120,
(e) reactions from the support or restraints, or both
B-9130, and B-9140.
(f) loads due to temperature effects, such as thermal
gradients and differential expansion
B-9110 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (g) loads resulting from the impingement or flow of re-
(a) All information and requirements contained in the actor coolant or other contained or surrounding fluids
specifications which are beyond the jurisdiction of Sub- (h) transient pressure difference loads, such as those
section NG should be so identified. which would result from rupture of the main coolant pipe
(b) The Design Specifications should stipulate any spe- (i) vibratory loads
cific additional core support structure requirements (j) reaction loads from control rods
which the Owner intends to be incorporated in the specif- (k) handling loads experienced in preparation for or
ic structures covered by the Design Specifications or any during refueling or inservice inspection
additional requirements intended to be more specific or
more restrictive than the minimum requirements of this
Section. B-9122 Loading Combinations
(c) Where additional terms, definitions, or expressions The loadings to be simultaneously considered and the
are required, they should be clearly defined and explained applicable Service Limits should be specified (NG‐3112).
and adequately referenced.
(d) Identification of the core support structure is re- B-9123 Deformation Limits
quired as determined by their function and operating re-
quirements (Structures whose purpose is only to limit the In addition to Service Limits given in Subsection NG,
motion of the core following the postulated occurrence of static and dynamic deformation limits should be specified
a failure in the structure normally supporting the core are to ensure the performance of all safety related functions
not considered core support structures. They are nor- of the core support structure. These limits are to be those
mally designed to meet deformation limits for this postu- that cause loss of function and are not intended to include
lated condition and are not intended to meet the stress a margin of safety (NG‐3220).
limits of NG‐3200.) (NG‐1121).
(e) Delineation of those internal structures which are B-9124 Reinforcement for Openings
required to be analyzed in order to ensure the structural
The Design Specification should stipulate if the rules for
integrity of the mating core support structures
reinforcing applicable to Class 1 vessels may be used for
(NG‐1122).
core support structures (NB‐3132).
(f) The boundaries of the core support structures and
their relationship to the support and restraint of the core
shall be clearly defined through the use of dimensions, de- B-9130 MATERIALS
scriptions, or drawings (NG‐1120). The Design Specifications should provide any special
requirements for materials and testing specifically applic-
B-9120 DESIGN able to the core support structures. The Owner is respon-
B-9121 Loading Conditions sible for selecting materials suitable for the conditions
stated at the Design Specification with specific attention
The following should be specified: being given to the effects of service conditions upon the
(a) pressure differences due to coolant flow properties of the materials (NB‐2160). The requirements
(b) weight of the core support structure for impact testing shall be specified [NG‐2311(a)].

298
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

B-9140 FABRICATION
The extent or removal of additional material by me-
chanical means when P‐No. 8 material is prepared by
thermal cutting methods should be specified (NG‐4211.7).

299
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE B-10000
SPECIFIC PARTS AND MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS REQUIREMENTS

B-10100 CERTIFIED DESIGN SPECIFICATION B-10112 Appurtenances

REQUIREMENTS NCA‐1260 provides the requirements for
appurtenances.
In addition to the Design Specification requirements in-
dicated in Article B-2000, Generic Requirements, the De- B-10113 Control Rod Drive Housings
sign Specification for parts and miscellaneous items
should include the other requirements of B-10110. NCA‐1271 provides the requirements for control rod
drive housings.

B-10114 Heater Elements

B-10110 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
NCA‐1272 provides the requirements for heater
The following general requirements should be consid- elements.
ered when preparing a Design Specification for parts
and miscellaneous items. B-10115 Fluid Conditioner Devices
NCA‐1273 provides the requirements for fluid condi-
tioner devices.
B-10111 Parts
The Design Specification for components or supports B-10116 Rupture Disc Devices
should apply to the parts of such components or supports NCA‐1275 provides the requirements for rupture disk
(NCA‐1231). devices.

300
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX C

ARTICLE C-1000
CERTIFICATE HOLDER’S DESIGN REPORT

C-1100 INTRODUCTION choice of analytical methods or computational techniques

used for obtaining the values and results required for the
C-1110 OBJECTIVE Design Report.
The objective of this Appendix is to provide a guide for
use by Certificate Holders in the preparation of Design Re- C-1132 Presentation of Analysis
ports required by NCA‐3551.1. Desirably, such Design Re-
The analysis in the Design Report should be in three
ports should be uniform as to format for all of the nuclear
sections: Thermal Analysis, Structural Analysis, and Fati-
industry. Such uniformity is helpful in making for easier
gue Evaluation. The desiderata listed in (a) through (j)
review by the Owner (NCA‐3260), Inspectors, regulatory
should be adhered to.
agencies, or independent groups. For NF supports de-
(a) Pages and figures in each section of the Report
signed by load rating (NF‐3280), the preparation of a load
should be consecutively numbered
capacity data sheet in accordance with NCA‐3551.2 fulfills
(b) Reference data taken from other parts of the calcu-
the requirements for preparation of a Design Report. The
lations should have the proper page number and section
contents of this Appendix constitute only suggestions and
of the Report listed
are nonmandatory.
(c) A general description of the method of analysis
should be given
C-1120 BASIS (d) All reference sources should be listed
In order to meet the requirements of NCA‐3551, the De- (e) All computer programs should be properly identi-
sign Report should be based upon analysis or testing ade- fied and described
quate to demonstrate the validity of the structural design (f) Stresses should be tabulated for each area of
to sustain and meet in every respect the requirements investigation
and provisions of the relevant certified Design Specifica- (g) Areas which have the most severe stress condition
tions and the requirements of this Section; the Report for design conditions or for any specified transient should
should include, as a minimum, the results, conclusions, be listed in the Report, along with the stress values in
and other considerations which show that the structural these areas
design meets these requirements. (h) Results should be summarized and a general sum-
mary of all stresses should be made in each section of
the Report
C-1130 FORMAT (i) Drawings and sketches necessary for an under-
C-1131 General Requirements standing of the analysis should be part of the Report
(j) The Report should include copies of sufficient com-
Since a major purpose of the Design Report is to facil-
puter printouts to justify the governing stress values used
itate an independent review of its content, it is important
in the Design Report and enable independent review. Co-
that it be simple to follow and free from ambiguity. No-
pies of any manual calculations prepared which establish
menclature, definitions, and symbols used should be in
the final design should also be included.
agreement with those established in Subsection NB for
Class 1 components, in Subsection NE for Class MC ves-
sels, in Subsection NF for supports, in Subsection NG for C-1140 BASIC INFORMATION
Class CS core support structures, and in Subsection NC It should be noted that the references in this Appendix
for vessels designed in accordance with NC‐3200. Where to basic information which is to be obtained from the cer-
additional terms, definitions, or expressions are required, tified Design Specifications (NCA‐3250) are predicated on
they should be clearly defined and explained and ade- the requirement of NCA‐3252 that such information be
quately referenced. It is not the intention to limit the provided.

301
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

C-1150 DISTRIBUTION OF COPIES OF DESIGN C-1240 GEOMETRIES FROM STRESS

REPORT INVESTIGATION POINT OF VIEW
Copies of the completed certified Design Report The final breakdown of the geometries, which will cor-
(NCA‐3355) should be made available for the Owner’s re- respond to the method of stress calculation, should be in-
view, certification, and distribution as required by dicated in the calculations. Typical areas listed in C-1230
NCA‐3556, NCA‐3260, and NCA‐3270. The Certificate which are applicable to the component under considera-
Holder shall also make a copy available to the Inspector tion should be included.
(NCA‐3557).
C-1250 TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENT DATA FOR
EACH THERMAL GEOMETRY AND
TRANSIENT
C-1200 THERMAL ANALYSIS The Certificate Holder should specify values for all
C-1210 DESCRIPTIONS OF OPERATING CYCLES parameters, such as coefficients for water and air, which
are required for thermal calculations. References to
Data for the various transients and operating cycles sources should be given for all such data used.
should be obtained from the certified Design Specifica-
tions. Typical cycles which should be considered are re- C-1260 TEMPERATURE DISTRIBUTION FOR
ferenced in Nonmandatory Appendix B. EACH GEOMETRY
The temperature profile of the applicable areas listed
under C-1230 should be calculated and the temperature
C-1220 STEADY STATE CONDITION values attached to the calculations. The temperature dis-
The steady state condition to provide a thermal equili- tributions should be based on two or three dimensional
brium condition for normal operating transients should heat transfer calculations. For calculating through wall
be obtained from the certified Design Specifications. (radial) temperature distributions to obtain values of
ΔT 1 and ΔT 2 (NB‐3650), one‐dimensional heat transfer
calculations are acceptable.
C-1230 GEOMETRY FROM TEMPERATURE
DISTRIBUTION POINT OF VIEW C-1270 THERMAL GRADIENTS
Individual transients should be investigated separately
The geometrical structure of the component should be
for each area. The longitudinal, radial, and circumferential
divided into suitable areas for thermal analysis. Sketches
gradients should be plotted separately. The temperature
of the thermal model should be included in the Report.
gradients used in the stress calculations should be
The areas listed in (a) through (m) are typical of those
plotted.
that should be investigated.
(a) nozzle junctions in the component wall
(b) stud bolts C-1300 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS
(c) cylinder junction with cylinder flange C-1310 IMPORTANT THERMAL AND
(d) point of support attachment MECHANICAL LOADING ON COMPONENT
(e) cylinder junction with head STRUCTURE
(f) junction of component wall and internal baffles, C-1311 Mechanical Loading
tubesheets, and attachments The mechanical loads used in the Design Report to cal-
(g) tube‐to‐tubesheet junction for heat exchangers culate primary stresses should be obtained directly from
(h) heater penetrations to component junction for the Design Specification (such as Design Pressure and
pressurizer Temperature) or from information contained in the De-
sign Specification (such as seismic spectra, valve opening
(i) junction area between component supports and
and/or closing times, etc.).
building structure
(j) external attachments C-1312 Thermal and Mechanical Loading
(k) changes in thickness within a component (such as a Specific reference should be made to the thermal tran-
reducer, brand connection, component support, etc.) or sients and resulting gradients which are to be used for the
across a welded joint (such as a socket weld, butt weld Design Report. The internal pressure and external loads
of different thickness, etc.) to be used should be in accordance with the time and
(l) instrument penetrations to component junction thermal condition analyzed. Values for external nozzle
(such as thermowells, flow devices, etc.) loads should include sign convention of the loadings
(m) core barrel and core support plate and be referenced specifically to the geometries.

302
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

C-1320 METHODS OF CALCULATIONS C-1420 LOCATIONS OF STRESS

The Certificate Holder should submit a short descrip- CONCENTRATIONS
tion of the calculation methods used in connection with Stress concentration should be investigated at any geo-
the stress analysis. All computer programs used in mak- metrical changes in the structure, such as difference in
ing calculations should be verified by comparing the pro- wall thickness, joints and corners, and junctions of dis-
gram with the results of an appropriate analytical or similar metals. A list of the locations subject to fatigue
experimental solution. The basic theories on which the evaluation should be included in the Report. For piping,
calculations are based and the assumptions should also K indices are given for standard piping components in
be included. NB‐3600 which represent elastic stress concentration
factors.
C-1330 PRINCIPAL STRESSES FOR EACH
GEOMETRY
In calculating stress components, the requirements of C-1430 FATIGUE STRENGTH REDUCTION
NB‐3200, NC‐3200, NE‐3200, NF‐3220, NF‐3230, or FACTORS AS FUNCTION OF LOCATIONS
NG‐3200 should be followed. The following are typical AND TYPES OF STRESS
of stress components that should be considered:
(a) Mechanical stresses generated by Fatigue strength reduction factors should be numeri-
(1) pressure load cally listed for the stresses where they are to be applied.
(2) deadweight load The references and methods of finding the fatigue
(3) piping load strength reduction factors should be included in the
(4) externally applied load Report.
(5) seismic loads
(6) dynamic loads
(b) Thermal stresses generated by
C-1440 PROPER STRESS CONCENTRATION OR
(1) radial gradient
FATIGUE STRENGTH REDUCTION
– thermal stress
FACTOR APPLICATION TO STRESSES
– thermal discontinuity stress The numerical value of the individual stress compo-
(2) longitudinal gradient nents should be listed with and without the stress concen-
– thermal stress tration or fatigue strength reduction factor applied.
– thermal discontinuity stress Factors should be applied to each individual stress com-
ponent and not applied to the total stress at a point or
ð17Þ C-1340 ALLOWABLE LIMITS to the stress intensity.
Each individual stress component and combination of
the stress components should satisfy the requirements
of Article XIII-3000, NC‐3220, NE‐3220, NF‐3220, C-1450 COMBINED STRESSES AND ALLOWABLE
NF‐3230, or NG‐3220. NUMBER OF CYCLES
Where the rules do not specifically control this, as they
C-1400 FATIGUE EVALUATION do in NB‐3500 and NB‐3600, methods of combining stres-
ses, determining principal stresses, determining alternat-
C-1410 SCOPE OF FATIGUE EVALUATION ing stress intensity, and determining cumulative damage
Fatigue evaluation when required should include the effects and allowable number of cycles should be shown
considerations and investigations described in this in the Report. These results should be reconciled with
subarticle. the required values.

303
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX D
PREHEAT GUIDELINES

ARTICLE D-1000
GUIDELINES

D-1100 INTRODUCTION maintain the preheat temperature or to heat the joint to

the postweld heat treatment temperature before allowing
D-1110 SCOPE it to cool to ambient temperature.
The preheat temperatures given herein are a general (b) The preheat temperature may be checked by suit-
guide for the materials listed in P‐Numbers of Section able methods, such as temperature‐indicating crayons
IX. Specific rules for preheating are not given since the or thermocouple pyrometers, to ensure that the required
need for preheat and the minimum preheat temperatures preheat temperature is maintained during the welding
vary and are dependent on a number of factors, such as operation. The Certificate Holder should be cautious in
chemical analysis, degree of restraint, physical properties, the use of temperature‐indicating crayons and pellets be-
and thickness. Preheat requirements for different materi- cause some metals may be severely attacked by the che-
als of the same P‐Number may be more or less restrictive micals in crayons or pellets at elevated temperatures.
depending upon the specific circumstances associated
with making a particular weld. The welding procedure
specification for the material being welded shall specify D-1200 FERROUS MATERIALS
the minimum preheating requirements under the welding D-1210 PREHEAT TEMPERATURES
procedure qualification requirements of Section IX.
Suggested minimum preheat temperatures are given in
D-1120 TEMPERATURE MAINTENANCE Table D-1210-1.
(a) Difficulty may be experienced with certain materi-
als if the temperature is allowed to fall below the preheat
temperature between passes. It may be desirable to

304
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table D-1210-1
Suggested Minimum Preheat Temperatures
Base Metal Thickness, T , in. (mm) Nominal Thickness, t , in. (mm) Minimum Preheat,
P-No. and/or Other Description [Note (1)] Carbon, % °F (°C)
1 Gr. 1 and T ≤ 11/2 (38) t ≤ 11/4 (32) ≤ 0.30 50 (10)
Gr. 2 T ≤ 11/2 (38) t ≤ 3/4 (19) > 0.30 50 (10)
T ≤ 11/2 (38) t > 11/4 (32) and ≤ 11/2 (38) ≤ 0.30 200 (95)
T ≤ 1 /2 (38)
1
t > /4 (19) and ≤ 1 /2 (38)
3 1
> 0.30 200 (95)
T > 11/2 (38) t ≤ 3/4 (19) … 200 (95)
T > 11/2 (38) t > 3/4 (19) … 250 (120)
1 Gr. 3, 3 Gr. 3 Material with maximum tensile strength … 250 (120)
greater than 70 ksi (485 MPa)
T unlimited t > 5/8 (16) … 250 (120)
T unlimited t < 5/8 (16) … 50 (10)
4 Material with specified minimum tensile … … 300 (150)
strength greater than 60 ksi (415 MPa)
T unlimited t > 1/2 (13) … 300 (150)
T unlimited t ≤ 1/2 (13) … 250 (120)
5A, 5B, 5C Material with specified minimum tensile … … 400 (205)
strength greater than 60 ksi (415 MPa)
T unlimited with Cr > 6.0% t > 1/2 (13) … 400 (205)
T unlimited with Cr ≤ 6.0% t > 1/2 (13) … 300 (150)
T unlimited t ≤ /2 (13)
1
… 300 (150)
6 Type 410S welded with A-No. 8, A-No. 9 or t ≤ 3/8 (10) ≤ 0.08 Follow Material
F-No. 43 filler metals Manufacturer’s
recommendations
All other materials … … 400 (205)
7 All materials … … Follow Material
Manufacturer’s
recommendations
8 All materials … … Follow Material
Manufacturer’s
recommendations
9A Gr. 1 and All welds provided the procedure t ≤ 5/8 (16) … 200 (95)
9B Gr. 1 qualification is made in equal or greater
thickness than production weld and need
not exceed 11/2 in. (38 mm)
Attachment welds joining t ≤ 1/2 (13) … 200 (95)
nonpressure-retaining material to
pressure-retaining materials over 5/8 in.
(16 mm)
Circumferential butt weld in pipe NPS 4 t ≤ 1/2 (13) ≤ 0.15 250 (120)
(DN 100) or less, and tubes with nominal
O.D. 4.5 in. (114 mm) or less and
attachment welds
Socket welds in pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) or less t ≤ 1/2 (13) ≤ 0.15 250 (120)
and tubes with nominal O.D. 23/8 in.
(60 mm) or less
All other materials … … 300 (150)
10A Gr. 1 All materials … … 200 (95)

305
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table D-1210-1
Suggested Minimum Preheat Temperatures (Cont'd)
Base Metal Thickness, T , in. (mm) Nominal Thickness, t, in. (mm) Minimum Preheat,
P-No. and/or Other Description [Note (1)] Carbon, % °F (°C)
10C Gr. 1 T ≤ 11/2 (38) t ≤ 11/4 (32) ≤ 0.30 Follow Material
Manufacturer’s
recommendations
T ≤ 11/2 (38) t ≤ 3/4 (19) > 0.30 Follow Material
Manufacturer’s
recommendations
T ≤ 11/2 (38) t > 11/4 (32) and t ≤ 11/2 (38) ≤ 0.30 200 (95)
T ≤ 1 /2 (38)
1
t > 3/4 (19) and t ≤ 11/2 (38) > 0.30 200 (95)
T > 11/2 (38) t ≤ 3/4 (19) … 200 (95)
T > 11/2 (38) t > 3/4 (19) … 250 (120)
10H All materials … … Follow Material
Manufacturer’s
recommendations
10I Gr. 1 T ≤ 1/2 (13) t ≤ 1/2 (13) … Follow Material
Manufacturer’s
recommendations
T > 1/2 (13) … … 300 (150)
10K All materials … … Follow Material
Manufacturer’s
recommendations
11A Gr. 1 T ≤ 1/2 (13) t ≤ 1/2 (13) … Follow Material
Manufacturer’s
recommendations
T >1/2 (13) … … 250 (120)
11A Gr. 4 All materials … … 250 (120)
11A Gr. 5 All materials … … Follow Material
Manufacturer’s
recommendations
11B Gr. 1, Gr. 2, All materials … … Follow Material
Gr. 3, Gr. 4, Gr. Manufacturer’s
8 recommendations
15E All materials … … 400 (205)

GENERAL NOTE: Minimum preheat temperature requirements in the respective Subsections and Divisions take precedence over
Table D-1210-1.
NOTE:
(1) Nominal thickness, t , for PWHT exemptions is defined in the respective Subsections and Divisions.

306
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX E ð17Þ

MINIMUM BOLT CROSS-SECTIONAL AREA

ARTICLE E-1000
INTRODUCTION AND SCOPE

G = diameter at location of gasket load reaction. G is

E-1100 INTRODUCTION defined as follows (Table XI-3221.1-2): when
b o ≤ 1/4 in. (6 mm), G is the mean diameter of gas-
E-1110 SCOPE ket contact face; when b o > 1/4 in. (6 mm), G is the
This Article provides specific methods for the determi- outside diameter of gasket contact face less 2b .
H = total hydrostatic end force
nation of the minimum bolt cross‐sectional area based on
= 0.785G 2 P
Article XIII-4000. Stresses in the bolts during service
m = gasket factor obtained from Table XI-3221.1-1
must also satisfy the requirements of the Subsection in-
N = width used to determine the basic gasket seating
voking this Appendix, if any such requirements exist. Such
width, b o , based upon the contact width of the
requirements should be consistent with the requirements gasket (Table XI-3221.1-2)
of XIII-4220 and XIII-4230. If they are not consistent, ap- P = Design Pressure
plicability of this Appendix must be justified in the Design S a = allowable bolt stress at atmospheric temperature
Report for the component(s) to which it is applied. Eva- (Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Table 4)
luation of service bolt stresses requires analysis in addi- S b = allowable bolt stress at Design Temperature
tion to that described by this Article, generally involving (Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Table 4)
the performance of a discontinuity analysis in accordance T = thickness used to determine the basic gasket
with the principles described in Article A-6000. seating width, b o (Table XI-3221.1-2)
W m 1 = minimum required bolt load for the Design Pres-
sure (E-1210)
E-1120 NOMENCLATURE W m 2 = minimum required bolt load for gasket seating
(E-1210)
The nomenclature defined below is used in the equa- w = width used to determine the basic gasket seating
tions of this Article. width b o , based upon the contact width between
the flange facing and the gasket (Table
A b = actual total cross‐sectional area of bolts at root of
XI-3221.1-2)
thread or section of least diameter under stress
y = minimum design seating stress
A m = total design cross‐sectional area of bolts, taken as
the greater of A m 1 and A m 2 E-1200 DESIGN CROSS-SECTIONAL AREA
A m 1 = total cross‐sectional area of bolts at root of
thread or section of least diameter under stress, E-1210 BOLT LOADS
required for the Design Conditions
= W m 1 /S b (a) Design Bolt Loads. The flange bolt loads used in cal-
A m 2 = total cross‐sectional area of bolts at root of culating the design cross‐sectional area of bolts shall be
thread or section of least diameter under stress, determined as stipulated in (1) and (2).
required for gasket seating (1) The design bolt load for the Design Pressure W m 1
= W m 2 /S a shall be sufficient to resist the hydrostatic end force H , ex-
b = effective gasket or joint contact surface seating erted by the Design Pressure on the area bounded by the
width (Tables XI-3221.1-1 and XI-3221.1-2) diameter of gasket reaction, and, in addition, to maintain
b o = basic gasket seating width (Table XI-3221.1-2) on the gasket or joint contact surface a compression load
C b = effective width factor H p , which experience has shown to be sufficient to ensure
= 0.5 for U.S. Customary calculations a tight joint. This compression load is expressed as a mul-
= 2.5 for SI calculations tiple m of the internal pressure. Its value is a function of

307
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

the gasket material and construction (Tables XI-3221.1-1 (b) Minimum Required and Actual Bolt Areas Am and Ab.
and XI-3221.1-2). The design bolt load for the Design The minimum cross‐sectional area of bolts A m required
Pressure W m 1 is determined in accordance with eq. (1). for both the Design Pressure and gasket seating is the
greater of the values for A m 1 and A m 2 , where A m 1 =
W m 1 /S b and A m 2 = W m 2 /S a . A selection of bolts to be
ð1Þ
used shall be made such that the actual total cross‐
sectional area of bolts A b will not be less than A m (Article
(2) Before a tight joint can be obtained it is necessary XIII-4000).
to seat the gasket or joint contact surface properly by ap- (c) Bolt Loads for Flanges Using Gaskets of the Self‐
plying a minimum initial load, under atmospheric tem- Energizing Type
perature conditions without the presence of internal (1) The design bolt load for the Design Pressure W m 1
pressure, which is a function of the gasket material and shall be sufficient to resist the hydrostatic end force H , ex-
the effective gasket area to be seated. The minimum initial erted by the maximum allowable working pressure on the
bolt load W m 2 , required for this purpose, shall be deter- area bounded by the outside diameter of the gasket. H p is
mined in accordance with eq. (2). to be considered as 0 for all self‐energizing gaskets, ex-
cept certain seal configurations that generate axial gasket
ð2Þ loads which shall be considered.
The need for providing sufficient bolt load to seat the (2) W m 2 = 0.
gasket or joint contact surfaces in accordance with eq. (2) Self‐energizing gaskets are considered to be those
will prevail on many low pressure designs and with fa- that require only an inconsequential amount of bolt force
cings and materials that require a high seating load, and to produce an initial seal. The bolting, however, may have
where the bolt load, computed by (1), eq. (1) for the De- to be sufficiently pretightened to prevent extrusion of the
sign Pressure, is insufficient to seat the joint. Accordingly, gasket, to prevent cyclic fatigue of the bolts, or to resist
it is necessary to furnish bolting and to pretighten the any external loads or moments that may be imposed on
bolts sufficiently to satisfy both of these requirements, the joint.
each one being individually investigated. When eq. (2)
governs, flange proportions will be a function of the bolt-
ing instead of internal pressure.

308
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX F

ARTICLE F-1000
RULES FOR EVALUATION OF SERVICE LOADINGS WITH LEVEL D
SERVICE LIMITS

F-1100 INTRODUCTION (4) F-1430, Piping

(5) F-1440, Core Support Structures
F-1110 SCOPE (c) Only limits on primary stresses are prescribed. Un-
This Appendix provides rules and service limits which less specifically required by this Appendix, self‐relieving
may be used by Owners and N‐Type Certificate Holders stresses resulting from loads for which Level D Service
for evaluating components and supports subjected to Limits are specified need not be considered.
loads for which Level D Service Limits are specified by (d) When compressive stresses are present the stability
the Design Specification (NCA‐3250). of the component or component support shall be
considered.
(e) Potential for unstable crack growth shall also be
F-1200 INTENT OF LEVEL D SERVICE LIMITS considered.
(a) The Level D Service Limits and design rules con-
tained in F-1300 are provided for limiting the conse- F-1320 DESIGN BY ANALYSIS
quences of the specified event. They are intended F-1321 Terms Related to Analysis ð17Þ
(NCA‐2142) to assure that violation of the pressure- Terms used in this paragraph relating to analysis are
retaining boundary will not occur, but are not intended defined in the following subparagraphs. Additional defini-
to assure operability of components either during or fol- tions are given in XIII-1300.
lowing the specified event.
(b) The limits and rules specified for core support F-1321.1 System Analysis. System analysis is per-
structures are intended to assure maintenance of struc- formed to determine loads on components and supports.
tural integrity but not to prevent leakage. A system is an assemblage of components, supports, and
(c) The limits and rules of this Appendix need not be other interconnected structures. The system analysis is
applied to that portion of a component or support in generally dynamic due to the nature of the loads.
which a failure has been postulated. F-1321.2 Component and Support Analysis. Compo-
(d) Table F-1200-1 provides references for component nent analysis is the calculation of stresses and displace-
and support elastic system analysis acceptance criteria. ments in a component or support to determine
compliance with the service limits listed herein. Loads ap-
plied in the component analysis and support analysis
F-1300 LEVEL D SERVICE LIMITS AND shall include those determined in a system analysis plus
DESIGN RULES additional loads as applicable.
F-1310 GENERAL F-1321.3 Elastic Analysis. Elastic analysis is based
(a) These limits and design rules are provided to limit on the assumption of a linear relationship between stress
the consequences of loads for which Level D Service Lim- and strain. Consideration of gaps between parts of the
its are specified in the Design Specification. structure may cause the relationship between loads and
(b) The contents of F-1320 provide general procedures deformations to be nonlinear.
which are applicable to all components and supports. Spe- F-1321.4 Inelastic Analysis. Inelastic analysis is a ð17Þ
cific procedures, which may be used as alternatives to the class of methods which computes structural behavior
procedures of F-1320, are provided as follows: considering nonlinearities in the relationship between
(1) F-1400, Vessels stresses and strains. Inelastic analysis as applied in this
(2) F-1410, Pumps Appendix shall not be considered to include the time-
(3) F-1420, Valves dependent effects of creep.

309
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table F-1200-1
Level D Service Limits — Components and Supports Elastic System Analysis Acceptance Criteria
Primary Alternative Criteria
Membrane
and Bending Compressive Interaction Plastic
System Stress Bearing Stress Shear Loads Method Load Rating Analysis
Components F-1331.1 F-1331.3, F-1331.1(d) F-1331.5 F-1331.2 … F-1340
[Note (1)] F-1336 [Note (2)] [Note (3)]
Plate and Shell Type F-1332.1, F-1332.3, F-1332.4 F-1331.5(a) … F-1332.7 F-1340
Supports F-1332.2 F-1336 [Note (5)] [Note (3)]
[Note (4)]
Linear Type Supports F-1334.1, F-1334.10, F-1334.2 F-1334.3, F-1334.7 F-1332.7 F-1340
[Note (4)], [Note (6)] F-1334.4 F-1336 F-1334.5 [Note (8)] [Note (9)] [Note (3)]
[Note (7)]
Bolted Joints F-1335.1 F-1335.2 F-1335.2, … … … …
[Note (10)], F-1335.3
[Note (11)]

GENERAL NOTE: The following Design Rules shall be followed.

(1) Level D self‐relieving stresses need not be considered unless as specified within a specific section of Nonmandatory Appendix F.
(2) In addition to consideration of primary stresses, stability of the component or support shall be considered when compressive
stresses are present.
(3) Potential for unstable crack growth shall be considered.
(4) Allowables shall be adjusted to reflect any different material behavior from that which the allowables are based. See F-1322.3.
(5) Geometric nonlinearities shall be considered when appropriate.
(6) Design specification requirements shall be satisfied in addition to those given in Nonmandatory Appendix F.
NOTES:
(1) For Vessels and Pumps, the design rules given in F-1330 and F-1340 shall be used; for Valves, as an alternative to the procedures
of F-1300, F-1420 can be used; for Piping, as an alternative to the procedures of F-1331, F-1430 can be used. For Core Support
Structures, the procedures of F-1300 may be used except as stipulated in F-1440.
(2) As an alternative to the requirements of F-1331.1, the interaction method may be used following F-1331.2 and the procedures
given in Article A-9000.
(3) Per F-1322, if elastic system analysis is used, the components and supports may be designed alternatively on the acceptance cri-
teria of F-1340 provided a reevaluation of the system analysis is performed to determine that it has not been significantly inva-
lidated due to load and stress redistribution and changes in geometry. See F-1322.1 for further discussion.
(4) Stresses resulting from constraint of free end displacements and anchor point motion shall be considered primary stresses.
Neither peak stresses nor stresses resulting from thermal expansion within the support need be evaluated.
(5) As an alternative to F-1332.1 through F-1332.6 requirements.
(6) Per F-1334, the allowable stress presented in NF‐3320 for Level A Service Condition may be increased using the following factors:
the smaller of 2 or 1.167 S u / S y if S u > 1.2 Sy . Note that members must be checked for local and general instability.
(7) As an alternative to the requirements in F-1334.4, a collapse load analysis is acceptable following F-1334.6.
(8) As an alternative to the requirements of F-1334.1 through F-1334.5, the interaction method may be used following F-1334.7 and
the procedures given in Article A-9000.
(9) As an alternative to the requirements of F-1334.1 through F-1334.5, F-1332.7 may be used.
(10) Threaded structural fasteners used in core support structures shall be evaluated using the rules of F-1440.
(11) Minimum edge distance shall meet the requirements of F-1335.4.

310
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(a) Limit Analysis. Limit analysis is that method which (b) If elastic system analysis is used, the components
computes the maximum load or combination of loads a and supports may be designed based alternatively on
structure made of ideally plastic (nonstrain‐hardening) the acceptance criteria of F-1340 provided a reevaluation
material can carry. Limit analysis for components is de- of the system analysis is performed to determine that it
scribed in XIII-1300(b), XIII-1300(k), and XIII-1300(l) has not been significantly invalidated due to load and
and for linear supports in NF‐3340. stress redistribution and changes in geometry. Some of
(b) Plastic Analysis. Plastic analysis is defined in the conditions under which this analysis combination
XIII-1300(t). may be acceptable are
F-1321.5 Interaction Method. Interaction method (1) the plastic deformation is highly localized or
(formerly Stress Ratio Method) is a method used to eval- (2) the changes in geometry are not significant
uate the adequacy of structures under combined loads. This combination may also be considered valid if
Procedures for the method are described in Article bounding solutions are established which conservatively
A-9000. account for redistribution of loads and stresses due to
plasticity.
ð17Þ F-1321.6 Collapse. Collapse of a structure occurs (c) If all loads on a component or support are deter-
upon formation of an unstable mechanism of plastic mined independently from system behavior (e.g., speci-
hinges under a given combination of loads. The collapse fied pressures), then the component or support may be
load is defined as follows: designed based on acceptance criteria in either F-1330
(a) limit analysis collapse load is defined in XIII-1300(l) or F-1340.
(b) test collapse load is defined as that load determined (d) The Design Specification for the components and
by test according to the criteria given in II-1430 supports shall indicate what type of system analysis (if
(c) plastic analysis collapse load is defined as that load any) has been used to derive the specified loads.
determined by plastic analysis according to the criteria
given in II-1430 F-1322.2 Dynamic Effects. Postulated events for
which Level D Service Limits are specified are generally
ð17Þ F-1321.7 Plastic Instability Load. Plastic instability dynamic in nature. The determination of loads for compo-
load is defined in XIII-1300(w). nents and supports shall account for dynamic amplifica-
F-1321.8 Experimental Stress Analysis. Experimen- tion of structural response, both in the component and
tal stress analysis is a method for evaluation of structural in the system.
behavior, based on direct measurement of response of
F-1322.3 Material Behavior.
test specimens, where the configuration of the model
(a) The mechanical and physical properties shall be ta-
and the applied loads are representative of the compo-
ken from Section II, Part D, Subparts 1 and 2 at the actual
nent or support under consideration. Response para-
temperature of the material. The allowable stresses shall
meters measured are selected to provide data
be based on material properties given in Section II, Part D,
appropriate to the acceptance criteria applied. Experi-
Subpart 1 at temperature. If S u values at temperature are
mental methods are provided for in Mandatory Appendix
not tabulated in Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Table U,9 the
II.
value used shall be included and justified in the Design
ð17Þ F-1321.9 Primary Stress Intensities. The definitions Report.
of general primary membrane stress intensity, designated (b) The stress and strain allowables given in this
as P m ; local primary membrane stress intensity, desig- Appendix are based on an engineering stress–strain
nated as P L ; and primary bending stress intensity, desig- curve. If another type of stress–strain curve (e.g., true
nated as P b , are provided in XIII-3100. stress–strain or Kirchoff stress–strain) is used, the results
from the analysis or the allowables given in this Appendix
F-1322 Methods and Requirements for Analysis shall be appropriately transformed.
The following requirements shall be satisfied in the (c) When performing plastic analysis, the stress–strain
evaluation of components or supports under the loads curve used shall be included and justified in the Design
or load combinations for which Level D Service Limits Report. It is permissible to adjust the stress–strain curve
are specified. to include strain rate effects resulting from dynamic beha-
F-1322.1 Analysis Combinations. vior. However, the allowables shall be selected in accor-
(a) System analysis may be performed by elastic analy- dance with the preceding (a).
sis methods as defined in F-1321.3 or by plastic analysis (d) The yield criteria and associated flow rule used in
methods as defined in F-1321.4(b). If elastic system anal- the inelastic analysis may be either those associated with
ysis is used, the components and supports shall be de- the maximum shear stress theory (Tresca) or the strain
signed to meet the acceptance criteria in F-1330. If energy distortion theory (Von Mises).
plastic system analysis is used, the components and sup- F-1322.4 Geometric Nonlinearities. Geometric nonli-
ports may be designed based on the acceptance criteria in nearities may be produced by relatively large deforma-
F-1340. tions and/or rotations and by gaps between parts of the

311
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

structure. Analyses performed for derivation of loads and F-1331.5 Requirements for Compressive Loads.
for evaluation of acceptability of components and sup- Components subjected to compressive loads shall be eval-
ports shall consider geometric nonlinearities if uated against buckling limits. Maximum compressive load
appropriate. (or stress) shall be limited to a value established by (a),
(b), or (c).
F-1322.5 Strain and/or Deformation Limits. In addi-
(a) Two‐thirds of the value of buckling load (or stress)
tion to the limits given in this Appendix, the strain or de-
determined by one of the following methods:
formation limits (if any) provided in the Design
(1) comprehensive analysis which considers effects
Specification shall be satisfied.
such as geometric imperfections, deformations due to ex-
isting loading conditions, nonlinearities, large deforma-
F-1330 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA USING ELASTIC tions, residual stresses, and inertial forces
SYSTEM ANALYSIS (2) tests of physical models under conditions of re-
straint and loading the same as those to which the config-
The acceptance criteria in this Section shall be applied uration is expected to be subjected
when elastic system analysis is used to determine loads (b) a value equal to 150% of the limit established by the
on components and supports. These criteria are subject rules of NB‐3133, except that the pressure is permitted to
to the restrictions on methods of evaluation stated in be 250% of the given value when the ovality is limited to
F-1322. 1% or less
(c) a value determined in accordance with the proce-
F-1331 Criteria for Components dures contained in Code Case N‐284 for metal contain-
ment shell buckling design methods using a factor of
F-1331.1 Elastic Analysis. safety of 1.34
(a) The general primary membrane stress intensity P m
shall not exceed the lesser of 2.4S m and 0.7S u for auste- F-1332 Criteria for Plate and Shell Type Supports
nitic steel, high‐nickel alloy, and copper‐nickel alloy mate-
The criteria presented in this paragraph pertain to pri-
rials included in Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Tables 2A
mary stresses only. Stresses resulting from constraint of
and 2B, or 0.7S u for ferritic steel materials included in
free end displacement and anchor point motion
Table 2A.
(NF‐3121.12 and NF‐3121.13) shall be considered pri-
(b) The local primary membrane stress intensity P L
mary stresses in the evaluation. Neither peak stresses
shall not exceed 150% of the limit for general primary nor stresses resulting from thermal expansion within
membrane stress intensity P m . the support need be evaluated.
(c) The primary membrane (general or local) plus pri-
mary bending stress intensity P L + P b shall be limited in F-1332.1 Primary Membrane Stress Intensity and
accordance with one of the following provisions: Primary Membrane Stress Limit.
(a) For Class 1 supports, the general primary mem-
(1) stress intensity P L + P b shall not exceed 150% of
brane stress intensity P m is limited to the greater of
the limit for general primary membrane stress intensity
1.2S y and 1.5S m , but may not exceed 0.7S u .
Pm
(b) For Class 2, 3, and MC supports, the general mem-
(2) static or equivalent static loads shall not exceed
brane principal stress is limited to the greater of 1.2S y
90% of the limit analysis collapse load using a yield stress
and 1.5S, but may not exceed 0.7S u .
which is the lesser of 2.3S m and 0.7S u , or 100% of the
plastic analysis collapse load or test collapse load F-1332.2 Primary Membrane Plus Bending Stress
(F-1321.6) Intensity and Primary Membrane Plus Bending Stress
(d) The average primary shear stress across a section Limit.
loaded in pure shear shall not exceed 0.42S u . (a) For Class 1 supports, the general primary mem-
brane plus primary bending stress intensity, Pm + Pb, shall
F-1331.2 Interaction Method. As an alternative to the be limited in accordance with one of the following
requirements of F-1331.1 above, acceptability of indivi- provisions:
dual members of components may be demonstrated using (1) 150% of the limit for general primary stress in-
the interaction method. Procedures for interaction meth- tensity P m
od analysis are given in Article A-9000. The allowable (2) static or equivalent static loads not exceeding
stress S a l shall not exceed the lesser of 2.4S m and 0.7S u . 90% of the limit analysis collapse load (F-1321.6) using
a yield strength which is the lesser of 1.2S y and 0.7S u ,
F-1331.3 Bearing Stresses. Except for pinned and
or 100% of the plastic analysis collapse load or test col-
bolted joints, bearing stresses need not be evaluated for
lapse load (F-1321.6)
loads for which Level D Service Limits are specified.
(b) For Class 2, 3, and MC supports, the local membrane
F-1331.4 Stress Limits for Bolts. Bolts shall be eval- plus bending principal stress is limited to the 150% of the
uated in accordance with the rules of F-1335. general membrane stress limit.

312
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

F-1332.3 Bearing Stress. Except for pinned and or 1.167S u /S y if S u > 1.2S y , or 1.4 if S u ≤ 1.2S y , where
bolted joints, bearing stresses need not be evaluated for S y is the yield strength, ksi (MPa), and S u is the ultimate
loads for which Level D Service Limits are specified. tensile strength, ksi (MPa), both at temperature. In addi-
F-1332.4 Pure Shear. The average primary shear tion, members must be checked for local and general
across a section loaded in pure shear shall not exceed instability.
0.42S u . F-1334.1 Stresses in Tension. The tensile stress on
F-1332.5 Requirements for Compressive Stresses. the net section, except at pin holes and in the through‐
Plate and shell type supports subject to compressive plate thickness direction, shall not exceed the lesser of
stresses shall be evaluated in accordance with the rules 1.2S y and 0.7S u .
of F-1331.5(a). F-1334.2 Stresses in Shear. The shear stress on the
F-1332.6 Stress Limits for Bolts. Bolts shall be eval- gross section shall not exceed the lesser of 0.72S y and
uated in accordance with the rules of F-1335. 0.42S u . Gross section shall be determined in accordance
with NF‐3322.1(b).
ð17Þ F-1332.7 Load Rating. As an alternative to the re-
quirements of F-1332.1 through F-1332.6 above, plate F-1334.3 Axial Compression. Maximum load in axi-
and shell type supports may be qualified to Service Level ally loaded compression members shall be limited in ac-
D Limits using the procedure for load rating (NF‐3282). cordance with either (a) or (b).
The load rating for Level D Service Loadings shall be de- (a) Two‐thirds of the buckling load, as determined by
termined by the following equation: one of the following methods:
(1) comprehensive stability analysis which considers
effects such as large deformations, deformations due to
existing loading conditions, material nonlinearities, local
buckling, out‐of‐straightness and other tolerances, load
but not more than eccentricity, end conditions, residual stresses and inertia
loads (for dynamic loading)
where (2) testing of a full‐scale prototype under conditions
F a l l = allowable stress value (NF-3382.1) of support and loading the same as those to which the ac-
S u = tensile strength of the support material at tual compression member is expected to be subjected
temperature (b) the maximum allowable load for ferritic steels shall
S u * = tensile strength of the support material at test be determined in accordance with the following provided
temperature that the initial out‐of‐straightness does not exceed 1/1000
T L = support test load equal to or less than the load un- of the unsupported length. Effects of deformations due
der which the support fails to perform its specified to existing loads shall also be considered.
support function (1) Except as noted in (2), the following rules shall be
applied:
but For 0 ≤ λ ≤ 1

F-1333 Criteria for Standard Supports For

Criteria in F-1332 or F-1334 shall be applied according
to whether standard supports are plate and shell or linear
type supports.
For
F-1334 Criteria for Linear Type Supports
The criteria presented in this paragraph pertain to pri-
mary stresses only. Stresses resulting from constraint of
free end displacement and anchor point motion
(NF‐3121.12 or NF‐3121.13) shall be considered primary where
stresses in the evaluation. Ag = area of gross section
Neither peak stresses nor stresses resulting from ther- E = modulus of elasticity
mal expansion within the support need be evaluated. K = effective length factor
Unless otherwise specified, the allowable stresses pre- L = unbraced length
sented (NF‐3320) for Level A Service Condition may be P = maximum allowable load
increased using the following factors: the smaller of 2 Py = SyAg

313
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

r = radius of gyration (a) F a = P /A g where P shall be determined in accor-

dance with F-1334.3.
λ = (b) The value of F ′ e shall be taken as

(2) For nonstress‐relieved heavy structural shapes

[web or flange thickness greater than 1 in. (25 mm)] or
for nonstress‐relieved built‐up members using universal
mill plate, the following rules shall be applied: with terms as defined in NF‐3313.1.
For 0 < λ < 1 (c) F b shall be determined using F-1334.4(b) or
F-1334.4(c) as appropriate.
(d) In NF-3322.1(e)(1), eq. (21), replace 0.6S y with the
smaller of 1.2S y or 0.7S u .
F-1334.6 Collapse Load Analysis. As an alternative ð17Þ
For to the requirements in F-1334.4 above, acceptability of
linear type supports may be established using one of
the following methods:
(a) using lower bound limit analysis given in NF‐3340,
static or equivalent static loads shall not exceed 90% of
For the limit analysis collapse load using a yield stress which
is the greater of 1.2S y and 1.5S m , but not larger than
0.7S u
(b) 100% of the plastic analysis collapse load
(c) 100% of the test collapse load (F-1321.6)
F-1334.4 Combined Axial Tension and Bending.
(a) For members subject to both axial tension and F-1334.7 Interaction Method. As an alternative to
bending stresses, the following equation shall be satisfied: the requirements of F-1334.1 through F-1334.5 above, ac-
ceptability for individual structural members of linear
type supports may be demonstrated using the interaction
method. Procedures for interaction method analysis are
given in Article A-9000. The allowable stress S a l shall
where not exceed the greater of 1.2S y and 1.5S m , but not larger
than 0.7S u .
F a = smaller of 1.2S y or 0.7S u
F-1334.8 Load Rating. As an alternative to the re-
(b) For members qualifying as compact sections under quirements of F-1334.1 through F-1334.5 above, linear
criteria of NF‐3322.1(d)(1), the maximum bending stress type supports may be qualified to Service Level D Limits
shall be given by using load rating criteria given in F-1332.7.
F-1334.9 Stress Limits for Bolts. Bolts shall be eval-
uated in accordance with the rules of F-1335.
where F-1334.10 Bearing Stresses. Except for pinned and
bolted joints, bearing stresses need not be evaluated for
f = plastic shape factor for the cross section loads for which Level D Service Limits are specified.
(c) If members do not meet the compact section re-
quirements, they shall be designed using one of two meth- F-1335 Requirements for Bolted Joints
ods below to determine F b for use in the preceding (a) The requirements provided in this Section shall be
equation. applied to components and supports. Threaded structural
(1) Allowable values for F b given in NF‐3322.1(d)(2) fasteners used in core support structures shall be evalu-
may be increased by a factor of 1.11 (to maintain a nom- ated using the rules of F-1440.
inal factor of safety of 1.5 against instability). (b) Allowable stresses for bolts are given in the para-
(2) Rigorous analysis of member stability may be graphs below. These allowable stresses are only applic-
used to determine critical bending stress. A factor of able if the bolt stresses are calculated using elastic
safety of 1.5 shall be used in determining allowable design methods.
bending stress. F-1335.1 Allowable Tensile Stress. The average ten-
ð17Þ F-1334.5 Combined Axial Compression and Bend- sile stress computed on the basis of the available tensile
ing. Members subject to combined axial compression stress area shall not exceed the smaller of 0.7S u and S y .
and bending shall satisfy NF‐3322.1(e)(1) eqs. (20), When high strength bolts or threaded parts having an ul-
(21), and (22) with allowable stresses defined as follows. timate tensile strength greater than 100 ksi (700 MPa) at

314
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

operating temperature are used in component applica- F-1336 Requirements for Pinned Joints
tions, the maximum value of the stress at the periphery
Except for bearing, pinned joints shall be evaluated in
of the bolt cross section resulting from direct tension plus
accordance with the acceptance criteria of F-1331. The al-
bending and excluding stress concentrations shall not ex-
lowable bearing stress shall be 2.1S u .
ceed S u . The bolt load shall be the sum of the external
load and any bolt tension resulting from prying action
produced by deformation of the connected parts. F-1337 Requirement for Support Fillet Welds
For supports, the allowable stresses for fillet welds
F-1335.2 Allowable Shear Stress. shall be 1.7 times the limits for the Design Loading as de-
(a) For bearing type joints, the average bolt shear scribed in NF-3324.5.
stress expressed in terms of available shear stress area
shall not exceed the smaller of 0.42S u and 0.6S y . F-1340 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA USING PLASTIC
(b) Friction type joints shall be evaluated using the SYSTEM ANALYSIS
rules of NF‐3324.6(a)(3)(-b).
The acceptance criteria in this section may be applied
F-1335.3 Combined Tensile and Shear Stress. provided the system analysis considers effects of material
nonlinear behavior. The criteria are subject to the restric-
(a) Bolts subjected to combined shear and tension in
tions on methods of evaluation stated in F-1322.
bearing type joints shall be so proportioned that the shear
and the tensile stresses satisfy the following equation:
F-1341 Criteria for Components
Acceptability of components may be demonstrated
using any one of the following methods:
(a) elastic analysis
(b) plastic analysis
where (c) collapse load analysis
(d) plastic instability analysis
f t = computed tensile stress
(e) interaction method
f v = computed shear stress
F t b = allowable tensile stress at temperature per The primary stress limits for these alternative methods
F-1335.1 are given in F-1341.1 through F-1341.5. The other limits
F v b = allowable shear stress at temperature per given in F-1341.6 and F-1341.7 shall also be satisfied as
F-1335.2(a) applicable.

(b) In friction type joints, the joint clamping force will F-1341.1 Elastic Analysis. Where the component is
be reduced by any direct tension load on the joint. There- evaluated on an elastic basis, the following primary stress
fore, the bolt clamping force used to calculate the allow- limits shall be applied.
able shear load in NF‐3324.6(a)(3)(-b) shall be reduced (a) The general primary membrane stress intensity P m
by an equivalent amount. shall not exceed the lesser of 2.4S m and 0.7S u for auste-
nitic steel, high‐nickel alloy, and copper‐nickel alloy mate-
F-1335.4 Minimum Edge Distance in Line of Load. In rials included in Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Tables 2A
both bearing and friction type joints, the minimum dis- and 2B, or 0.7S u for ferritic steel materials included in
tance from the center of the end bolt to that edge of the Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Table 2A.
connected part toward which the load is directed shall sa- (b) The local primary membrane stress intensity P L
tisfy (a) and (b): shall not exceed 150% of the limit for general primary
(a) L/d ≥ [0.5 + 1.2 (f p /S u )] membrane stress intensity P m .
(c) The primary membrane (general or local) plus pri-
(b) f p /S u ≤ 2.1
mary bending stress intensity, P L + P B , shall not exceed
where 150% of the limit for general primary membrane stress
intensity P m .
d = nominal diameter of bolt
(d) The average primary shear across a section loaded
f p = nominal bearing stress
in pure shear shall not exceed 0.42S u .
= P /dt
L = distance from center of bolt hole to edge of con- F-1341.2 Plastic Analysis. Where the component is
nected part evaluated on a plastic basis the following primary stress
P = bearing load transmitted by the fastener limits shall be applied.
S u = t e n s i l e s t r e n g t h o f t h e c o n n e c t e d p ar t s a t (a) The general primary membrane stress intensity P m
temperature shall not exceed 0.7S u for ferritic steel materials included
t = thickness of the connected part in Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Table 2A and the greater of

315
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

0.7S u and S y + 1/3 (S u − S y ) for austenitic steel, high‐nickel (c) As an alternative to the requirements of (b) above,
alloy, and copper‐nickel alloy materials included in Sec- plate and shell type supports may be qualified to Service
tion II, Part D, Subpart 1, Tables 2A and 2B. Level D Limits using the procedure for load rating
(b) The maximum primary stress intensity at any loca- (NF‐3282). The load rating for Level D Service Loadings
tion shall not exceed 0.90S u . shall be determined by the following equation:
(c) The average primary shear across a section loaded
in pure shear shall not exceed 0.42S u .
F-1341.3 Collapse Load. Static or equivalent static
loads shall not exceed 90% of the limit analysis collapse
where
load using a yield stress which is the lesser of 2.3S m
and 0.7S u , or 100% of the plastic analysis collapse load S u = tensile strength of the support material at
or test collapse load (F-1321.6). temperature
S u * = tensile strength of the support material at test
ð17Þ F-1341.4 Plastic Instability Load. The plastic in-
temperature
stability load (F-1321.7) is designated P I and may be de-
T L = support test load equal to or less than the load un-
termined by one of the following methods:
der which the support fails to perform its specified
(a) plastic analysis [XIII-1300(t)]
support function
(b) experimental analysis (F-1321.8)
The applied load shall not exceed 0.7P I . but
F-1341.5 Interaction Method. Acceptability for indi-
vidual members of components may be demonstrated
using the interaction method. Procedures for interaction
method analysis are given in Article A-9000. The allow-
able stress S a l shall not exceed 0.7S u . F-1343 Criteria for Standard Supports
F-1341.6 Bearing Stresses. Except for pinned and The rules of F-1342 or F-1344 shall be applied accord-
bolted joints, bearing stresses need not be evaluated for ing to whether standard supports are plate and shell or
loads for which Level D Service Limits are specified. linear type supports.
F-1341.7 Stress Limits for Bolts. Bolts shall be eval-
uated in accordance with the rules of F-1335. F-1344 Criteria for Linear Type Supports
F-1341.8 Requirements for Compressive Loads. The criteria presented in this paragraph pertain to pri-
Components subjected to compressive loads shall be eval- mary stresses only. Stresses resulting from constraint of
uated in accordance with the rules of F-1331.5. free end displacement and anchor point motion
(NF‐3121.12 and NF‐3121.13) shall be considered pri-
F-1342 Criteria for Plate and Shell Type mary stresses in the evaluation. Neither peak stresses
Supports nor stresses resulting from thermal expansion within
(a) The criteria presented in this paragraph pertain to the support need be evaluated.
primary stresses only. Stresses resulting from constraint Acceptability of linear type supports may be demon-
of free end displacement and anchor point motion strated using any one of the following methods:
(NF‐3121.12 and NF‐3121.13) shall be considered as pri- (a) elastic analysis
mary stresses in the evaluation. Neither peak stresses nor (b) plastic analysis
stresses resulting from thermal expansion within the sup- (c) collapse load analysis
port need be evaluated. (d) plastic instability analysis
(b) The allowable stresses for plate and shell type sup- (e) interaction method
ports shall be per F-1341, with material properties pro- The primary stress limits for these alternative methods
vided by the applicable tables of Section II, Part D per are given in F-1344.1 through F-1344.5. The other limits
Table NF‐2121(a)‐1. given in F-1344.6 and F-1344.7 shall also be satisfied as
applicable.
F-1344.1 Elastic Analysis. The criteria provided in
F-1334 through F-1334.5 shall be applied.
F-1344.2 Plastic Analysis. The criteria provided in
F-1341.2 shall be applied. In addition, members shall be
checked for local and general instability following the re-
quirements given in F-1334.3.
F-1344.3 Collapse Load Analysis. The criteria pro-
vided in F-1334.6 shall be applied.

316
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

F-1344.4 Plastic Instability Analysis. The plastic in- P e s = primary stress in crotch region of valve body
stability load (F-1321.7) is designated P I and may be de- caused by piping loads for which Level D Service
termined by one of the following methods: Limits are specified; includes combined axial,
(a) plastic analysis [F-1321.4(b)]; bending, and torsion
(b) experimental analysis (F-1321.8). Q p = as defined in NB‐3545.2
The applied load shall not exceed 0.7P I .
F-1344.5 Interaction Method. Acceptability for indi- The allowable value of this stress intensity is the lesser
vidual structural members of linear type supports may be of 3.6S m and 1.05S u for materials in Section II, Part D,
demonstrated using interaction method analysis. Proce- Subpart 1, Tables 2A and 2B, or 1.05S u for materials in
dures for interaction method analysis are given in Article Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Table 2A.
A-9000. The allowable stress S a l shall not exceed 0.7S u .
F-1344.6 Stress Limits for Bolts. Bolts shall be eval-
uated in accordance with the rules of F-1335. F-1430 PIPING
F-1344.7 Bearing Stresses. Except for pinned and As an alternative to the procedures of F-1331, the cri-
bolted joints, bearing stresses need not be evaluated for teria of NB‐3656 for Class 1, or NC/ND‐3655 for Class 2
loads for which Level D Service Limits are specified. and 3 piping may be used.
F-1345 Requirement for Support Fillet Welds
Fillet welds for supports shall be evaluated in accor-
F-1440 CORE SUPPORT STRUCTURES
dance with the rules of F-1337.
The procedures of F-1300 may be used except as stipu-
lated in (a) through (d) below.
F-1400 VESSELS
(a) The specified dynamic or equivalent static loads
The design rules given in F-1330 and F-1340 shall be shall not exceed 80% of the ultimate collapse load as ob-
used for evaluation of vessels for loads for which Service tained from test P t , where P t is defined as the load at
Level D Limits are specified. which the horizontal tangent to the load deformation
curve occurs, or 80% of a load combination used in the
F-1410 PUMPS test of a prototype or model. In using this method, ac-
The design rules given in F-1330 and F-1340 shall be count shall be taken of the size effect and dimensional tol-
used for evaluation of pumps for loads for which Service erances as well as differences which may exist in the
Level D Limits are specified. ultimate strength or other governing material properties
of the actual part and the tested parts to assure that the
F-1420 VALVES loads obtained from the test are a conservative represen-
As an alternative to the procedures of F-1300, the cri- tation of the load carrying capability of the actual compo-
teria of both (a) and (b) may be used. nent under postulated loading conditions for which Level
(a) The maximum internal pressure shall not exceed D Service Limits apply.
the lesser of 2.0 times the Design Pressure and the rated (b) For core support structures, component inelastic
pressure at the temperature for which Service Level D analysis may be combined with elastic system analysis
Limits are specified. (F-1331). For this analysis, the maximum stress limit shall
(b) Calculate the valve crotch (Figure NB‐3545.2‐1, Sec- be 0.67S u for primary membrane stress intensity, and
tion A‐A) stress intensity S n due to all applicable loads shall be equal to the greater of 0.67S u t and
S y + 1/3 (S u t − S y ), but not to exceed 0.9S u for maximum
primary stress intensity, where S u t is defined as the value
or of ultimate stress obtained from the true stress–strain
curve. In this case, the elastic system analysis shall be
checked, accounting for component plastic deformation.
(c) The stress limits for high strength threaded struc-
where tural fasteners with specified minimum tensile strength
n = 1.3 for ferritic steel materials in Section II, Part D, greater than or equal to 100 ksi (690 MPa) are as given
Subpart 1, Table 2A in (1) through (3) below. S m is as tabulated in Section
= 1.5 for austenitic steel, high‐nickel alloy, and II, Part D, Subpart 1, Tables 2A and 2B.
copper‐nickel alloy materials in Section II, Part D, (1) For component elastic analysis, combined with
Subpart 1, Tables 2A and 2B either elastic or inelastic system analysis, P m shall not ex-
P e b = as defined in NB‐3545.2(b) ceed 2S m , and P m + P b shall not exceed 3S m .

317
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(2) For component plastic analysis, combined with the shape factor is less than or equal to 1.5, with S y equal
either elastic or inelastic system analysis, P m shall not ex- to 1.5S m , where L L is defined in Figure NG‐3224‐1, Note
ceed 2S m , and maximum primary stress intensity shall (6).
not exceed the larger of 0.67S u t and S y + 1/3 (S u t − S y ), (d) The stress limits for threaded structural fasteners
but not to exceed 0.9S u where S u t is defined as the value with specified minimum tensile strength less than
of ultimate stress obtained from the true stress–strain 100 ksi (690 MPa) shall be determined in accordance
curve. with F-1331 or F-1341, as appropriate. The requirements
(3) For component limit analysis, combined with of F-1331.4 and F-1341.7 do not apply.
either elastic or inelastic system analysis, P m shall not ex-
ceed 1.33L L , and P m + P b shall not exceed 1.33L L , where

318
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX G
FRACTURE TOUGHNESS CRITERIA FOR PROTECTION AGAINST
FAILURE

ARTICLE G-1000
INTRODUCTION

This Appendix presents a procedure for obtaining the factor10 K I is produced by each of the specified loadings
allowable loadings for ferritic pressure‐retaining materi- as calculated and the summation of the K I values is com-
als in components. This procedure is based on the princi- pared to a reference value K I c which is the highest critical
ples of linear elastic fracture mechanics. At each location value of K I that can be ensured for the material and tem-
being investigated a maximum postulated flaw is as- perature involved. Different procedures are recommend-
sumed. At the same location the mode I stress intensity ed for different components and operating conditions.

319
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE G-2000
VESSELS

G-2100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS radiation may affect the material properties, the effect
of radiation on the K I c curve shall be determined for
G-2110 REFERENCE CRITICAL STRESS the material. This information shall be included in the De-
INTENSITY FACTOR sign Specification.
(a) Figure G-2210-1 is a curve showing the relationship
that can be conservatively expected between the critical, G-2120 MAXIMUM POSTULATED DEFECTS
or reference, stress intensity factor K I c , ,
The postulated defects used in this recommended pro-
and a temperature which is related to the refer- cedure are sharp, surface defects normal to the direction
ence nil‐ductility temperature R T N D T determined in of maximum stress. For section thicknesses of 4 in.
NB‐2331. This curve is based on the lower bound of static to 12 in. (100 mm to 300 mm), the postulated defects
critical K I values measured as a function of temperature have a depth of one‐fourth of the section thickness and
on specimens of SA-533 Type B Class 1, and SA-508 Grade a length of 11/2 times the section thickness. Defects are
1, SA-508 Grade 2 Class 1, and SA-508 Grade 3 Class 1 postulated at both the inside and outside surfaces. For
steel. No available data points for static fracture tough- sections greater than 12 in. (300 mm) thick, the postu-
ness tests fall below the curve. An analytical approxima- lated defect for the 12 in. (300 mm) section is used. For
tion to the curve is: sections less than 4 in. (100 mm) thick, the 1 in.
(25 mm) deep defect is conservatively postulated. Smaller
(U.S. Customary Units) defect sizes11 may be used on an individual case basis if a
smaller size of maximum postulated defect can be en-
sured. Due to the safety factors recommended here, the
prevention of nonductile fracture is ensured for some of
(SI Units) the most important situations even if the defects were
to be about twice as large in linear dimensions as this pos-
tulated maximum defect.
Unless higher K I c values can be justified for the particular
material and circumstances being considered, Figure
G-2210-1 may be used for ferritic steels which meet the G-2200 LEVEL A AND B SERVICE LIMITS
requirements of NB‐2331 and which have a specified G-2210 SHELLS AND HEADS REMOTE FROM
minimum yield strength at room temperature of 50 ksi DISCONTINUITIES
(350 MPa) or less.
G-2211 Recommendations
(b) For materials which have specified minimum yield
strengths at room temperature greater than 50 ksi The assumptions of this subarticle are recommended
(350 MPa) but not exceeding 90 ksi (620 MPa), Figure for shell and head regions during Level A and B Service
G-2210-1 may be used provided fracture mechanics data Limits.
are obtained on at least three heats of the material on a
sufficient number of specimens to cover the temperature G-2212 Material Fracture Toughness
range of interest, including the weld metal and
The reference critical stress intensity factors for mate-
heat‐affected zone, and provided that the data are equal
rial K I c values of Figure G-2210-1 are recommended.
to or above the curve of Figure G-2210-1. These data shall
be included in the Design Specification. Where these ma-
terials of higher yield strengths (specified minimum yield G-2213 Maximum Postulated Defects
strength greater than 50 ksi (350 MPa) but not exceeding The recommended maximum postulated defects are
90 ksi (620 MPa) are to be used in conditions where described in G-2120.

320
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure G-2210-1

220

200

180

160
KIc
Fracture Toughness KIc, ksi 
in.

140

120

100

80

60

40
RTNDT
20

0
-100 -80 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
(T-RTNDT), ºF

G-2214 Calculated Stress Intensity Factors

(SI Units)
G-2214.1 Membrane Tension. The K I corresponding
to membrane tension for the postulated axial defect of
G-2120 is K I m = M m × (P R i /t ), where M m for an inside
axial surface flaw is given by

(U.S. Customary Units) where

p = internal pressure, ksi (MPa)
R i = vessel inner radius, in. (mm)
t = vessel wall thickness, in. (mm)
The K I corresponding to membrane tension for the
p o s t u l a t e d c i r c u m f e r e n t i a l d e f ec t o f G - 2 1 2 0 is
(SI Units)
K I m = M m × (p R i /t ), where M m , for an inside or an out-
side circumferential surface defect is given by

(U.S. Customary Units)

Similarly, M m for an outside axial surface flaw is given by

(U.S. Customary Units)

321
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure G-2210-1M

240

220

200

180
Fracture Toughness KIc, MPa 
m

KIc
160

140

120

100

80

60

40
RTNDT
20

0
-75 -50 -25 0 25 50 75 100
(T-RTNDT), ºC

thickness in in. (mm), and K I t is in

(SI Units)
or, for a postulated axial or circumferential outside sur-
face defect

(U.S. Customary Units)

G-2214.2 Bending Stress. The K I corresponding to

bending stress for the postulated axial or circumferential
defect of G-2120 is K I b = M b × maximum bending stress,
(SI Units)
where M b is two‐thirds of the M m for the axial defect.

G-2214.3 Radial Thermal Gradient. The maximum

K I produced by a radial thermal gradient for a postulated
axial or circumferential inside surface defect of G-2120 is where H U is the heatup rate in °F/hr (°C/h).
The through‐wall temperature difference associated
(U.S. Customary Units)
with the maximum thermal K I can be determined from
Figure G-2214-1. The temperature at any radial distance
from the vessel surface can be determined from Figure
G-2214-2 for the maximum thermal K I .
(SI Units) (a) The maximum thermal K I and the temperature re-
lationship in Figure G-2214-1 are applicable only for the
conditions in (1) and (2).
(1) An assumed shape of the temperature gradient is
where C R is the cooldown rate in °F/hr (°C/h), t is the approximately as shown in Figure G-2214-2.

322
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure G-2214-1

Tw = KIt /Mt, where

Tw = temperature difference through the wall ºF
KIt = stress intensity factor, ksi 
in.

0.5

Curve for  = 0.7 X 10-5 in./in./°F, E = 29.2 X 106 psi,  = 0.3

0.4

Crack Depth = Wall Thickness/4

in. /ºF)
Mt (ksi 

0.3

Crack Depth = Wall Thickness/8

0.2

0.1

0.0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Wall Thickness, in.

(2) The temperature change starts from a steady

state condition and has a rate, associated with startup (U.S. Customary Units)
and shutdown, less than about 100°F/hr (56°C/h). The
results would be overly conservative if applied to rapid
temperature changes.
(b) Alternatively, the K I for radial thermal gradient can (SI Units)
be calculated for any thermal stress distribution at any
specified time during cooldown for a 1/4‐thickness axial
or circumferential surface defect.
For an inside surface defect during cooldown For an outside surface defect during heatup

(U.S. Customary Units)

323
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure G-2214-1M

1.0

Tw = KIt /Mt, where

Tw = temperature difference through the wall ºC
0.9 KIt = stress intensity factor, MPa 
m

0.8

Curve for  = 1.26 X 10-5 mm/mm/°C, E = 201 X 103 MPa,  = 0.3

0.7

Crack Depth = Wall Thickness/4

0.6
m /ºC)
Mt (MPa 

0.5

Crack Depth = Wall Thickness/8

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.0
0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 275 300

Wall Thickness, mm

(c) For the startup condition, the allowable pressure vs.

(SI Units) temperature relationship is the minimum pressure at any
temperature, determined from the following:
(1) the calculated steady state results for the
The coefficients C 0 , C 1 , C 2 , and C 3 are determined from 1
/4‐thickness inside surface defect,
the thermal stress distribution at any specified time dur- (2) the calculated steady state results for the
ing the heatup or cooldown using 1
/4‐thickness outside surface defect, and
(3) the calculated results for the maximum allowable
heatup rate using a 1/4‐thickness outside surface defect.

where x is a dummy variable that represents the radial

distance, in. (mm), from the appropriate (i.e., inside or
outside) surface and a is the maximum crack depth, in.
(mm).

324
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure G-2214-2

G-2215 Allowable Pressure (3) calculate the K I c toughness for all vessel beltline
materials from G-2212 using temperatures and R T N D T
The equations given in this subarticle provide the basis values for the corresponding locations of interest; and
for determination of the allowable pressure at any tem-
(4) calculate the pressure as a function of coolant in-
perature at the depth of the postulated defect during Ser-
let temperature for each material and location. The allow-
vice Conditions for which Level A and B Service Limits are
able pressure–temperature relationship is the minimum
specified. In addition to the conservatism of these as-
pressure at any temperature determined from
sumptions, it is recommended that a factor of 2 be applied
to the calculated K I values produced by primary stresses. (-a) the calculated steady‐state (K I t = 0) results
In shell and head regions remote from discontinuities, the for the 1/4‐thickness inside surface postulated defects
only significant loadings are general primary membrane using the equation
stress due to pressure, and thermal stress due to thermal
gradient through the thickness during startup and shut-
down. Therefore, the requirement to be satisfied and
from which the allowable pressure for any assumed rate (-b) the calculated results from all vessel beltline
of temperature change can be determined is: materials for the heatup stress intensity factors using
the corresponding 1/4‐thickness outside‐surface postu-
ð1Þ lated defects and the equation

throughout the life of the component at each temperature

with K I m from G-2214.1, K I t from G-2214.3, and K I c from
Figure G-2210-1.
(b) For the cooldown condition,
The allowable pressure at any temperature shall be de- (1) consider postulated defects in accordance with
termined as follows. G-2120;
(a) For the startup condition, (2) perform calculations for thermal stress intensity
(1) consider postulated defects in accordance with factors due to the specified range of cooldown rates from
G-2120; G-2214.3;
(2) perform calculations for thermal stress intensity (3) calculate the K I c toughness for all vessel beltline
factors due to the specified range of heat‐up rates from materials from G-2212 using temperatures and R T N D T
G-2214.3; values for the corresponding location of interest; and

325
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(4) calculate the pressure as a function of coolant in- least the initial R T N D T temperature for the material in
let temperature for each material and location using the the stressed regions plus any effects of irradiation at
equation the stressed regions.
(d) Thermal stresses shall be considered as secondary
except as provided in XIII-1300(aj)(2). The K I of
G-2214.3(b) is recommended for the evaluation of ther-
The allowable pressure–temperature relationship is mal stress.
the minimum pressure at any temperature, determined
from all vessel beltline materials for the cooldown stress
G-2223 Toughness Requirements for Nozzles
intensity factors using the corresponding 1/4‐thickness (a) A quantitative evaluation of the fracture toughness
inside‐surface postulated defects. requirements for nozzles is not feasible at this time, but
Those plants having low temperature overpressure preliminary data indicate that the design defect size for
protection (LTOP) systems can use the following load nozzles, considering the combined effects of internal
and temperature conditions to provide protection against pressure, external loading and thermal stresses, may be
failure during reactor start‐up and shutdown operation a fraction of that postulated for the vessel shell. Nondes-
due to low temperature overpressure events that have tructive examination methods shall be sufficiently reli-
been classified as Service Level A or B events. LTOP sys- able and sensitive to detect these smaller defects.
tems shall be effective at coolant temperatures less than (b) WRCB 175 provides an approximate method in
200°F (95°C) or at coolant temperatures corresponding paragraph 5C(2) for analyzing the inside corner of a noz-
to a reactor vessel metal temperature less than zle and cylindrical shell for elastic stresses due to internal
R T N D T + 50°F (28°C), whichever is greater.12, 13 LTOP pressure stress.
systems shall limit the maximum pressure in the vessel (c) Fracture toughness analysis to demonstrate protec-
to 100% of the pressure determined to satisfy eq. (1). tion against nonductile failure is not required for portions
of nozzles and appurtenances having a thickness of 2.5 in.
G-2220 NOZZLES, FLANGES, AND SHELL (63 mm) or less, provided the lowest service temperature
REGIONS NEAR GEOMETRIC is not lower than R T N D T plus 60°F (33°C).
DISCONTINUITIES
G-2221 General Requirements G-2300 LEVEL C AND D SERVICE LIMITS
The same general procedure as was used for the shell G-2310 RECOMMENDATIONS
and head regions in G-2210 may be used for areas where
more complicated stress distributions occur, but certain The possible combinations of loadings, defect sizes, and
modifications of the procedures for determining allow- material properties which may be encountered during
able applied loads shall be followed in order to meet spe- Level C and D Service Limits are too diverse to allow
cial situations, as stipulated in G-2222 and G-2223. the application of definitive rules, and it is recommended
that each situation be studied on an individual case basis.
The principles given in this Appendix may be applied,
ð17Þ G-2222 Consideration of Membrane and Bending where applicable, with any postulated loadings, defect
Stresses sizes, and material toughness which can be justified for
(a) Equation G-2215(1) requires modification to in- the situation involved.
clude the bending stresses which may be important con-
tributors to the calculated K I value at a point near a flange
or nozzle. The terms whose sum must be < K I c for Level A G-2400 HYDROSTATIC TEST TEMPERATURE
and B Service Limits are: (a) For system and component hydrostatic tests per-
(1) 2K I m from G-2214.1 for primary membrane formed prior to loading fuel in the reactor vessel, it is rec-
stress; ommended that hydrostatic tests be performed at a
(2) 2K I b from G-2214.2 for primary bending stress; temperature not lower than R T N D T plus 60°F (33°C).
(3) K I m from G-2214.1 for secondary membrane The 60°F (33°C) margin is intended to provide protection
stress; against nonductile failure at the test pressure.
(4) K I b from G-2214.2 for secondary bending stress. (b) For system and component hydrostatic tests per-
(b) For purposes of this evaluation, stresses which re- formed subsequent to loading fuel in the reactor vessel,
sult from bolt preloading shall be considered as primary. the minimum test temperature should be determined by
(c) It is recommended that when the flange and adja- evaluating K I . The terms given in (1) through (4) should
cent shell region are stressed by the full intended bolt be summed in determining K I :
preload and by pressure not exceeding 20% of the preo- (1) 1.5K I m from G-2214.1 for primary membrane
perational system hydrostatic test pressure, minimum stress
metal temperature in the stressed region should be at (2) 1.5K I b from G-2214.2 for primary bending stress

326
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(3) K I m from G-2214.1 for secondary membrane (c) The system hydrostatic test to satisfy (a) or (b)
stress should be performed at a temperature not lower than
(4) K I b from G-2214.2 for secondary bending stress the highest required temperature for any component in
K I , calculated by summing the four values given in (1) the system.
through (4), shall not exceed the applicable K I c value.

327
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE G-3000
PIPING, PUMPS, AND VALVES

G-3100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS nonductile failure under the loadings and with the defect
sizes encountered under Level A and B Service Limits and
In the case of the materials other than bolting used for testing conditions. Level C and D Service Limits should be
piping, pumps, and valves for which impact tests are re- evaluated on an individual case basis (G-2300).
quired (NB‐2311), the tests and acceptance standards of
this Section are considered to be adequate to prevent

328
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE G-4000
BOLTING

G-4100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS evaluated on an individual case basis (G-2300). Welding

Research Council Bulletin 175 (WRCB 175), “PVRC Rec-
In the case of bolting materials for which impact tests ommendations on Toughness Requirements for Ferritic
are required, the tests and acceptance standards of this Materials,” provides procedures in paragraph 7 for evalu-
Section are considered to be adequate to prevent nonduc- ating various defect sizes and associated toughness levels
tile failure under the loadings and with the defect sizes in bolting materials.
encountered under Level A and B Service Limits and test-
ing conditions. Level C and D Service Limits should be

329
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX L
CLASS FF FLANGE DESIGN FOR CLASS 2 AND 3 COMPONENTS
AND CLASS MC VESSELS

ARTICLE L-1000
CLASS FF FLANGES — INTRODUCTION

L-1100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS L-1120 DEFINITION OF CLASS FF FLANGES

L-1110 ACCEPTABILITY Class FF flanges are circular flanges having flat faces
which are either bolted directly together or are separated
The requirements for acceptability of Class FF flange by a metal spacer such that there is metal to metal contact
design are that the general design requirements of Sub- between the flange faces and the metal spacer initially or
section NC, ND, or NE and the specific requirements of after the flanges have been bolted up.
this Appendix are met.

330
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE L-2000
CLASS FF FLANGES — MATERIALS

L-2100 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

The rules of Article XI-2000 apply.

331
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE L-3000
CLASS FF FLANGES — DESIGN

L-3100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS point and that thereafter the two stresses are essentially
the same. This is a desirable characteristic of Nonmanda-
L-3110 SCOPE
tory Appendix L flanges; it means that if the assembly
The rules in this Appendix apply to circular, bolted stress (prestress) in the bolts is close to the operating de-
flanged connections where the assemblage is comprised sign stress σ b , then subsequent applications of pressure
of identical or nonidentical flange pairs, and where the loadings ranging from zero to full load will have no signif-
flanges are flat faced and are in uniform metal‐to‐metal icant effect on the actual operating stress in the bolts.
contact across their entire face during assembly before
Unlike Mandatory Appendix XI flanges and their bolts
the bolts are tightened or after a small amount of preload
which are stressed during assembly (although some read-
is applied to compress a gasket. The rules also apply when
justment in the stresses may occur during pressuriza-
a pair of identical flat faced flanges is separated by a metal
spacer. The rules are not intended for cases where the tion), Nonmandatory Appendix L flanges become
faces are intentionally made nonparallel to each other stressed during pressurization; however, the effect of
such that initial contact is at the bore. pressurization on the operating stress in the bolts de-
Construction details for attachment and configuration pends upon the extent to which the bolts are stressed dur-
of the flange are not covered in this Appendix. Minimum ing assembly.
weld sizes and geometric limitations given in Figure
XI-3120-1 and Figure NC‐4243‐2, Figure ND‐4243‐1, or
Figure NE‐4243‐1, as applicable, apply to Nonmandatory L-3140 ANALYTICAL APPROACHES
Appendix L flanges. Similarly, when applying the rules of
this Appendix, use of the graphs in Mandatory Appendix In the case of identical flange pairs, the analytical pro-
XI for obtaining applicable design parameters is neces- cedure described in this Appendix considers the flanges
sary; namely, Figures XI-3240-1 through XI-3240-6. to be continuous, annular plates whose flexural character-
istics can be approximated by beam theory by consider-
L-3120 ASSUMPTIONS AND LIMITATIONS OF ing the flanges to be comprised of a series of discrete,
RULES radial beams. For nonidentical flange pairs, beam theory
It is assumed that a self‐sealing gasket is used approxi- is supplemented by the theory of rigid body rotation so
mately in‐line with the wall of attached pipe or vessel. The as to preserve equilibrium of moments and forces. Mo-
rules provide for hydrostatic end loads only and assume ments associated with beam theory are designated as ba-
that the gasket seating loads are small and may in most lanced moments, whereas moments used when the theory
cases be neglected. It is also assumed that the seal gener- of rigid body rotations is applied are designated as unba-
ates a negligible axial load under operating conditions. If lanced moments. Balanced and unbalanced moments are
such is not the case, allowance shall be made for a gasket designated M b and M u , respectively. When no subscript
load H G dependent on the size and configuration of the appears, a balanced moment is intended, i.e., in the equa-
seal and design pressure. Proper allowance shall be made tions for the analysis of identical flange pairs (L-3242).
if connections are subject to external forces other than ex-
ternal pressure.
L-3150 REDUCTION IN CONTACT FORCES
L-3130 FATIGUE CONSIDERATIONS
As with flanges with ring type gaskets, the stress in the A reduction in flange‐to‐flange contact forces beyond
bolts may vary appreciably with pressure. There is an ad- the bolt circle occurs when the flanges are stiff with re-
ditional bolt stress generated due to a prying effect result- spect to the bolting and, in the extreme, flange separation
ing from the flanges interacting beyond the bolt circle. As occurs. The rules in this Appendix provide little insight
a result, fatigue of the bolts and other parts comprising into the problem except when the reduction in the contact
the flanged connection may require consideration and force is due to the flange–hub interaction moment. The
adequate pretensioning of the bolts may be necessary. It problem is considered to be of little practical significance
is important to note that the operating bolt stress is rela- when the nuts are tightened during assembly using ordin-
tively insensitive to changes in prestress up to a certain ary wrenching techniques.

332
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

L-3160 TANGENTIAL CONTACT BETWEEN A m = total required cross‐sectional area of bolts, ta-
FLANGES OUTSIDE THE BOLT CIRCLE ken as the greater of A m 1 and A m 2
The design procedure is based on the assumption that A m 1 = total cross‐sectional area of bolts at root of
the flanges are in tangential contact at their outside dia- thread or section of least diameter under stress,
meter or at some lesser distance h C from the bolt circle. required for the operating conditions
[See L-3221(b) and L-3260 when h C < h C m a x for addi- = W m 1 /S b
tional requirements.] The diameter of the circle where A m 2 = total cross‐sectional area of bolts at root of
the flanges are in tangential contact is a design variable; thread or section of least diameter under stress,
the smaller the diameter of the contact circle C + 2h C , required for gasket seating, in.2 (mm2)
the greater the required prestress in the bolts, the higher = W m 2 /S a
the ratio of prestress to operating bolt stress, S i /σ b , and = bolt hole aspect ratio used in calculating bolt
the smaller the flange separation at the gasket. The re- hole flexibility factor r B
quirement of tangential contact, even when it is assumed =
to occur at the outside diameter (C + 2h C m a x ) of the
flanges, automatically yields a high ratio of S i /σ b which B = inside diameter of flange. When B is less than
means that the possibility of flange separation or an ap- 20g 1 , it will be optional for the designer to sub-
preciable decrease in the flange‐to‐flange contact forces stitute B 1 for B in the formula for longitudinal
is no longer a problem even when the flanges are stiff stress S H .
with respect to the bolts. b = effective gasket or joint‐contact‐surface seating
width (Tables XI-3221.1-1 and XI-3221.1-2)
L-3170 RELATIVE STIFFNESS OF FLANGES AND b 0 = basic gasket seating width (from Table
BOLTS XI-3221.1-2)
The equation for the calculated strain length l of the B 1 = B + g 1 for loose type flanges and for integral
bolts is generally applicable. However, variations in the type flanges that have calculated values h /h 0
thickness of material actually clamped by each bolt, such and g 1 /g 0 which would indicate an f value of
as sleeves, collars, or multiple washers placed between a less than 1.0, although the minimum value of f
flange and the bolt heads or nuts, or by counterboring, permitted is 1.0
must be considered in establishing a value of l for use = B + g 0 for integral type flanges when f is equal
in the design equations. A large increase in l may cause to or greater than one
the flanges to become abnormally stiff with respect to = B for Category 3 (loose type) flanges
such bolts and the provision of tangential contact may C = bolt circle diameter
not yield a sufficiently high value of the ratio S i /σ b unless c = basic dimension used for the minimum sizing of
h C is reduced to cause an increase in the ratio. welds equal to t n or t i , whichever is less
C 1 = factor
L-3180 COMBINED STRESSES
Most of the calculated stresses are bending only, so that = (1)
tensile and compressive stresses of the same magnitude
occur on opposite surfaces at the point under considera-
tion. However, when a membrane stress occurs in con- C 2 = factor
junction with a bending stress, the combined stress
= (2)
represents the maximum absolute value at the point
and may be tension or compression [denoted by a minus C 3 = factor
(−) sign].

L-3190 NOTATION = (3)

ð17Þ L-3191 Symbols
The symbols described below are used in the equations
C 4 = factor
for the design of flanges.
= (4)
A = outside diameter of flange
a = shape factor NOTE: C 3 = C 4 = 0 when F 1 ′ = 0.
= (A + C)/2B 1
D = diameter of bolt hole
A b = cross‐sectional area of the bolts using the root
diameter of the thread or least diameter of un-
threaded portion, if less

333
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

d = factor h C m a x = radial distance from bolt circle to outer edge of

flange or spacer, whichever is less
= for loose type flanges H D = hydrostatic end force on area inside of flange
= 0.785 B 2P
= for integral type flanges h D = radial distance from the bolt circle, to the circle
d b = nominal diameter of bolt on which H D acts, as prescribed in Table
E = modulus of elasticity of flange material, cor- XI-3230-1
rected for operating temperature (see Section H G = gasket load due to seating pressure, plus axial
II, Part D, Subpart 2, Tables TM) force generated by self‐sealing of gasket
e = factor h G = radial distance from gasket load reaction to the
bolt circle
= for integral type flanges
=
= for loose type flanges H p = total joint‐contact‐surface compression load
= 2b × 3.14 G m P
EI* = factor
H T = difference between total hydrostatic end force
= EItI3
and the hydrostatic end force on area inside
EII* = factor
of flange
= EIItII3
= H −H D
F = factor for integral type flanges (from Figure
h T = radial distance from the bolt circle to the circle
XI-3240-2)
on which H T acts as prescribed in Table
f = hub stress correction factor for integral flanges
XI-3230-1
from Figure XI-3240-6. (When greater than 1,
this is the ratio of the stress in the small end JP =
of hub to the stress in the large end.) (For val-
ues below limit of the figure, use f = 1.)
F L = factor for loose type flanges (from Figure JS =
XI-3240-4)
K = ratio of outside diameter of flange to inside dia-
F′ = (5a) meter of flange
= A/B
L = factor
= (5b)
=
= (5c)
l = calculated strain length of bolt
= 2t + t s + ( 1/2 d b for each threaded end for a
FI′ = (6a)
Group 1 assembly)
= t I + t I I + ( 1/2 d b for each threaded end for a
= (6b) Group 3 assembly)
m = gasket factor; obtain from Table XI-3221.1-1
(see XI-3221.1)
= (6c)
M b = balanced moment acting at diameter B 1 of
G = diameter at location of gasket load reaction
flange
= mean diameter of gasket
M D = component of moment due to H D
g0 = thickness of hub at small end
= HDhD
g1 = thickness of hub at back of flange
M G = component of moment due to H G
H = total hydrostatic end force
= HGhG
= 0.785 G 2P
M H = moment acting on end of hub, pipe, or shell, at
h = hub length
its junction with back face of flange ring
h0 = factor
M P = moment due to H D , H T , H G
= = HDhD + HThT + HGhG
H C = contact force between mating flanges M S = total moment on flange ring due to continuity
h C = radial distance from bolt circle to flange‐spacer with hub, pipe, or shell
or flange–flange bearing circle where tangential = M H + Qt /2 where
contact occurs. Tangential contact exists from M T = component of moment due to H T
the selected value of h C to h C m a x = HThT

334
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

M u = unbalanced moment acting at diameter B 1 of t i = two times the thickness g 0 , when the design is
flange calculated as an integral flange or two times the
N = width used to determine the basic gasket seat- thickness of shell or nozzle wall required for in-
ing with b 0 , based upon the possible contact ternal pressure, when the design is calculated
width of the gasket (see Table XI-3221.1-2) as a loose flange, but not less than 1/4 in. (6 mm)
n = number of bolts t n = nominal thickness of shell or nozzle wall to
P = design pressure which flange or lap is attached
Q = shear force between flange ring and end of hub, t s = thickness of spacer
pipe, or shell, positive as indicated in Figure U = factor involving K (from Figure XI-3240-1)
L-3191-2 sketch (b) V = factor for integral type flanges (from Figure
R = radial distance from bolt circle to point of inter- XI-3240-3)
section of hub and back of flange. For integral V L = factor for loose type flanges (from Figure
and hub flanges, XI-3240-5)
W = flange design bolt load, for the operating condi-
= tions or gasket seating, as may apply, lb (kN)
(see L-3220)
rB = w = width used to determine the basic gasket seat-
ing width b 0 , based upon the contact width be-
tween the flange facing and the gasket (see
= (see Figure L-3191-1 for a curve of nr B vs .
In the above equation for r B , tan−1 must be ex- Table XI-3221.1-2)
pressed in radians.) W m 1 = minimum required bolt load for the operating
rE = elasticity factor conditions (see L-3220)
= modulus of elasticity of flange material divided X = factor
by modulus of elasticity of bolting material, cor- = E I */(E I * + E I I *)
rected for operating temperature (see Section Y = factor involving K (from Figure XI-3240-1)
II, Part D, Subpart 2, Tables TM) y = gasket or joint‐contact‐surface unit seating load
rS = initial bolt stress factor (Table XI-3221.1-1)
= 1 − S i /σ b Z = factor involving K (from Figure XI-3240-1)
Sa = allowable bolt stress at atmospheric tempera- β = shape factor for full face metal‐to‐metal contact
ture (given in Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Table flanges
3) = (C + B 1 )/2B 1
Sb = allowable bolt stress at design temperature θ A = slope of flange face at outside diameter, rad
(given in Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Table 3) θ B = slope of flange face at inside diameter, rad
Sf = allowable design stress for material of flange at θ r b = change in slope which flange pair undergoes
design temperature (operating condition) or at- due to an unbalanced moment, rad
mospheric temperature (gasket seating), as L-3192 Subscripts
may apply (given in Section II, Part D, Subpart
Subscripts I and II where noted are used to distinguish
1, Tables 1A and 1B)
between the flanges in a nonidentical flange pair (Group 2
SH = calculated longitudinal stress in hub
or 3 assemblies). B 1 without a subscript always refers to
Si = initial bolt stress (always less than S b )
Flange I (the nonreducing flange) in a Group 2 or 3
Sn = allowable design stress for material of nozzle
assembly.
neck, vessel or pipe wall, at design temperature
(operating condition) or atmospheric tempera- L-3193 Based on Nonreducing Flange
ture (gasket seating), as may apply (given in
Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Tables 1A and 1B) Unless otherwise noted, B 1 , J S , J P , and F I ′ [equations
SR = calculated radial stress in flange L-3191(6a), L-3191(6b), and L-3191(6c) and M P are
ST = calculated tangential stress in flange based on the dimensions of the nonreducing flange
T = factor involving K (from Figure XI-3240-1) (Flange I) in a Group 2 or 3 assembly.
t = thickness of the flange under consideration (t , L-3194 Logarithms
t I , or t I I , as applicable)
= flange thickness of an identical flange pair in a All logarithms are to base 10.
Group 1 assembly
tI = thickness of the nonreducing flange in a Group
3 assembly (see L-3231)
tII = thickness of the reducer or flat circular head in
a Group 3 assembly (see L-3231)

335
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure L-3191-1
Bolt Hole Flexibility Factor

L-3200 DESIGN OF FLANGES AND BOLTING

L-3210 ESTIMATING FLANGE THICKNESSES AND ð9Þ

BOLTING

L-3211 Equations for Trial Flange Thickness and

Bolting
ð10Þ
The following simple equations are offered for calculat-
ing approximate values of t, t I , t I I , and A b before applying
the rules in L-3220 through L-3260. The equations are
not intended to replace the rules; however, they should
significantly reduce the amount of work required to ð11Þ
achieve a suitable design. Since the flanges are in metal‐
to‐metal contact and interact, the stresses in one flange
are influenced by the stiffness of the mating flange and
theoretically an unlimited number of designs can be ð12Þ
found which satisfy the rules. In practice, however, eco-
nomics, engineering judgment, and dimensional con-
straints will show which is the “best” design. It should where
be noted that the equations in Table L-3212-1 assume
that both flanges comprising an assembly have essentially H1 = 0.785B I I 2P
the same modulus of elasticity and allowable stress. H2 = 0.785 (G 2 − B I I 2)P
l1 = (C − B I I )/2
l2 = (C − G)/2 + (G − B I I )/4
ð7Þ
tg = smaller of t c or t f
L-3212 Trial Values of t , t I , t I I , and A b
The simple equations given in Table L-3212-1 should
yield relatively good trial values of t , t I , t I I , and A b but
ð8Þ
they do not assure that the “first trial design” will meet
the requirements of L-3240 through L-3250. As a result,

336
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure L-3191-2
Flange Dimensions and Forces

337
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

it becomes necessary to select new trial values and reana- (e) When the longitudinal stress in the hub of the non-
lyze. In order to assist the designer in selecting the second reducing flange of a Group 2 or Group 3 assembly is low
trial values, the following comments concerning the beha- compared to the allowable stress and the radial stress at
vior of different groups of Class FF flanges are offered. the bolt circle is excessive, increasing S H by making the
(a) The hub of a Category 1 or 2 flange of a Group 1 as- hub smaller (more flexible) will often reduce the radial
sembly reduces the radial stress at the bolt circle (due to a stress at the bolt circle to S f . If it does not, an increase
negative hub–flange interaction moment) and the longitu- in t I is indicated.
dinal hub stress. As a result, a pair of Category 1 or Cate-
gory 2 flanges will be thinner than a pair of identical
Category 3 flanges. L-3220 BOLT LOADS
(b) Increasing the thickness of the reducing flange of a
L-3221 Required Bolt Load
Group 3 assembly, when the nonreducing flange is Cate-
gories 1 and 2, generally reduces the significant stresses The flange bolt load used in calculating the required
in both flanges comprising the assembly. When the stress cross‐sectional area of bolts shall be determined as
in Flange I (nonreducing) is excessive, increasing t I will follows.
generally be more effective in reducing the stresses; how- (a) The required bolt load for the operating condition
ever, a nominal increase of the stresses in Flange II will W m 1 shall be sufficient to resist the sum of the hydro-
occur due to the additional restraint provided by increas- static end force H exerted by the maximum allowable
ing t I . When the stress in Flange I is excessive and only working pressure on the area bounded by the diameter
marginally acceptable in Flange II, both t I and t I I should of the gasket reaction, and the contact force H C exerted
be increased with the emphasis placed on t I . by the mating flange on the annular area where the flange
(c) A Category 3 reducing flange bolted to a Category 1 faces are in contact. To this shall be added the gasket load
or 2 nonreducing flange produces a large overturning mo- H G for those designs where gasket seating requirements
ment which tends to rotate Flange I in a negative direc- are significant.
tion. As a result, the radial stress at the bolt circle in
(b) Before the contact force H C can be determined, it is
Flange I will often be excessive due to a large, positive
necessary to obtain a value for its moment arm h C . Due to
hub–flange interaction moment. As a result, it is usually
the interaction between bolt elongation and flange deflec-
necessary to increase t I so that t I = t I I . The same problem
tion, h C involves the flange thickness t , operating bolt
does not occur when Flange I is Category 3 since there ex-
stress σ b , initial bolt prestress factor r s , and calculated
ists no hub–flange interaction moment. When Flange I is
strain length l, elasticity factor r E , and total moment load-
an optional type treated as a loose type (Category 3), a
ing on the flange. This Article is based on starting a design
hub–flange interaction moment actually exists but is dis-
by assuming a value for h C and then calculating the value
regarded in the analysis by assigning the flange to Catego-
of the initial bolt stress S i which satisfies the assumption.
ry 3.
(d) When the longitudinal hub stress of a Category 1 or Although the distance h C from the bolt circle to the
2 flange is excessive, it can be reduced by increasing the flange‐to‐flange contact circle is a design variable, for
size of the hub, or g 0 when g 1 = g 0 ; however, this will the purpose of this Article the use of
cause an increase in the radial stress at the flange–hub
junction. When S H is excessive and S R is marginally ac-
ceptable, an increase in the thickness of the flange is indi- to optimize stresses is considered to be a special situation
cated in which case it may or may not be necessary to requiring controlled bolt tightening and verification (see
alter the size of the hub. L-3260). Except in special instances, setting h C equal to

Table L-3212-1
Trial Flange Thickness and Area of Bolting for Various Groups of Assemblies and Flange Categories
Group Category of Flanges Suggested Trial Values
(Assembly) Nonreducing Reducing t or t I tII Ab
1 1 or 2 … 0.9t a … 0.9A b ′
3 … ta … Ab′
2 1 or 2 1 or 2 ta te Ab′
3 3 1.1t a 1.1t c 1.1A b ′
3 1 or 2 ta tc Ab′
1 or 2 3 1.1t g 1.1t g A b ′*
3 1, 2, or 3 … 1.1t a 1.1t c 1.05A b ′

338
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

h C m a x should be satisfactory. It is inherent in the compu-

Figure L-3230-1
tational process that the flanges will be in tangential con-
Group 1 Flange Assembly (Identical Flange
tact between the selected bearing circle
Pairs)

and the outside diameter of the flanges

(c) The hub–flange interaction moment M S , which acts

on the flange, is expressed by equations L-3242(13),
L-3244(a)(25), and L-3244(a)(26); for Category 3 flanges

The contact force H C is determined by equation

L-3242(15) or equation L-3244(a)(33).
(d) The required bolt load for operating conditions is
determined in accordance with the following equation:

L-3222 Total Required and Actual Bolt Areas,

and Flange Design Bolt Load
The total required cross‐sectional area of bolts A m
equals W m 1 /S b . A selection of bolts to be used shall be
made such that the actual total cross‐sectional area of
bolts A b will not be less than A m . The flange design bolt
load W shall be taken equal to W m 1 .

L-3230 CLASSIFICATION OF ASSEMBLIES AND

CATEGORIZATION OF INDIVIDUAL
FLANGES
It is necessary to classify the different types of flanged
assemblies and to further categorize each flange which
comprises the assembly under consideration.

L-3231 Classification of a Class FF Flange

GENERAL NOTES:
Assembly
(a) Category 1 flanges illustrated in sketch (a) and (b); Category 2
Since the flanges comprising an assembly are in contact flanges illustrated in sketch (c).
(b) Permitted weld details are in accordance with Figures
outside the bolt circle, the behavior of one flange is influ-
XI-3120-1 and NC‐4243‐2, ND‐4243‐1, or NE‐4243‐1, as
enced by the stiffness of the other. For the purpose of applicable.
computation it is helpful to classify an assembly consist-
ing of different types of flanges according to the way
the flanges influence the deformation of the assembly. NOTES:
(1) Where the flanges are identical dimensionally and have the
ð17Þ L-3231.1 Group 1 Assembly. A pair of flanges which same elastic modules, E , but have different allowable stresses, S f ,
are bolted together and which are nominally identical the assembly may be analyzed as a Group 1 assembly, provided
with respect to shape, dimensions, physical properties, the calculated stresses are evaluated against the lower allowable
and allowable stresses except that one flange of the pair stress.
may contain a gasket groove. (A Group 1 assembly is also (2) A Class FF flange bolted to a rigid foundation may be analyzed
referred to as an identical flange pair.) Figure L-3230-1 il- as a Group 1 assembly by substituting 2I for I in eq. L-3242(18).
lustrates configuration of a Group 1 assembly.

339
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

L-3231.2 Group 2 Assembly. Any assemblage which

Figure L-3230-3
does not fit the description of Group 1 where, in the case
Group 3 Flange Assembly
of reducers, the inside diameter of the reducing flange ex-
ceeds one‐half of the bolt circle diameter. Figure
L-3230-2 illustrates configuration of a Group 2 assembly.
L-3231.3 Group 3 Assembly. Any assemblage con-
sisting of a reducer or a flat circular head without an
opening or with a central, reinforced opening provided
the diameter of the opening in the reducing flange or flat
cover is less than one‐half of the bolt circle diameter. In
the analysis the reducing flange is considered to be the

Figure L-3230-2
Group 2 Flange Assembly

GENERAL NOTE: Category I flange illustrated. Categories II and III

permitted.
NOTES:
(1) B I I ≤ C/2.
(2) Permitted weld details are in accordance with Figures XI-3120-1
and NC‐3225‐3.
(3) See L-3192 and L-3193.

equivalent of a flat circular head without an opening.

Figure L-3230-3 illustrates configuration of a Group 3
assembly.

L-3232 Categorization of a Class FF Flange

In addition to classifying an assembly, the individual
flanges (except the reducing flange or flat circular head)
must be categorized for the purpose of computation as
loose type, integral type, or optional type. This can be
done using XI-3120; Figure XI-3120-1 is suitable by con-
sidering the flanges as flat faced (as a result of removing
the raised gasket surface by machining and recessing the
gasket in a groove) and by adding a flange‐to‐flange con-
tact force H C at some distance h C outside the bolt circle.
Since certain design options exist depending upon the cat-
egory of the flange, the following categories include both
GENERAL NOTES: the type of flange and the various design options.
(a) Category 1 flanges illustrated. Categories II and III permitted. (a) Category 1 Flange. An integral flange or an optional
(b) For purposes of analysis of Flange II by method L-3243(a), as- flange calculated as an integral flange.
sume A I I = G I I = B 1
(c) Permitted weld details are in accordance with Figures (b) Category 2 Flange. A loose type flange with a hub
XI-3120-1 and NC‐4243‐2, ND‐4243‐1 or NE‐4243‐1, as where credit is taken for the strengthening effect of the
applicable. hub.
NOTES: (c) Category 3 Flange. A loose type flange with a hub
(1) B I I > C/2. where no credit is taken for the strengthening effect of
(2) See L-3192 and L-3193. the hub, a loose type flange without a hub, or an optional‐

340
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

type flange calculated as a loose type without a hub. Sub-

Table L-3240-1
stitute B for B 1 in the applicable equation for this catego-
Summary of Applicable Equations for
ry of flange.
Different Groups of Assemblies and Different
Categories of Flanges
L-3240 FLANGE ANALYSIS Category
L-3241 General Method Group [Note (1)] Applicable Formulas
1 1 L-3191(5a), L-3242(13) – L-3242(19),
(a) In order to calculate the stresses in the flanges and L-3242(20a), L-3242(21a), L-3242(22a)
bolts of a flanged assembly, classify the assemblage in ac-
1 2 L-3191(5b), L-3242(13) – L-3242(19),
cordance with L-3231 and then categorize each flange per L-3242(20b), L-3242(21b), L-3242(22b)
L-3232.
1 3 L-3191(5c), L-3242(13) – L-3242(19),
(b) The method of analyzing various groups and cate- L-3242(20c), L-3242(21c), L-3242(22c)
gories of flanges is basically the same. Although many 2 All See L-3243
equations appear to be identical, subtle differences do ex-
3 1 L-3191(1) – L-3191(4), L-3191(6a),
ist and care must be exercised in the analysis. To mini- L-3244(a)(23) – L-3244(a)(37),
mize the need for numerous footnotes and repetitive L-3244(a)(38a), L-3244(a)(39a),
statements throughout the text, the equations to be used L-3244(a)(40a), L-3244(a)(41) –
in analyzing the various groups of assemblies and cate- L-3244(a)(44)
gories of flanges are given in Table L-3240-1. In general, 3 2 L-3191(1) – L-3191(4), L-3191(6a),
the terms should be calculated in the same order as they L-3244(a)(23) – L-3244(a)(37),
are listed in the table. It is important to refer to the table L-3244(a)(38b), L-3244(a)(39b),
before starting an analysis since only a limited number of L-3244(a)(40b), L-3244(a)(41) –
L-3244(a)(44)
the equations contained in this Article are used in the de-
3 3 L-3191(1) – L-3191(4), L-3191(6a),
sign of a particular pair of flanges. Some of the numbered
L-3244(a)(23) – L-3244(a)(37),
equations appear in L-3191 along with general purpose, L-3244(a)(38c), L-3244(a)(39c),
unnumbered expressions. L-3244(a)(40c), L-3244(a)(41) –
(c) Subscripts I and II refer to the nonreducing flange L-3244(a)(44)
and the reducer (or flat circular head), respectively, of a
Group 3 assembly and of a Group 2 assembly designed NOTE:
(1) Of the nonreducing flange in a Group 2 or Group 3 assembly.
using the method of L-3243(a).

L-3242 Analysis of a Group 1 Assembly

The following equations are used for the analysis of ð18Þ
Category 1, 2, and 3 flanges of a Group 1 assembly in ac-
cordance with Table L-3240-1.
Flange Moment Due to Flange–Hub Interaction Radial Flange Stress at Bolt Circle

ð13Þ ð19Þ

Slope of Flange at Inside Diameter Times E

Radial Flange Stress at Inside Diameter

ð14Þ
ð20aÞ

Contact Force Between Flanges at h C

ð15Þ ð20bÞ

Bolt Load at Operating Conditions

ð20cÞ
ð16Þ

Operating Bolt Stress Tangential Flange Stress at Inside Diameter

ð17Þ
ð21aÞ
Design Prestress in Bolts

341
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(4) The rules in L-3244 and the summary of Table

ð21bÞ L-3240-1 for the analysis of a Group 3 assembly apply
to the analysis of a Group 2 assembly with the following
additions and substitutions:
C 5 and C 6 and all the symbols in equations in (-a)
ð21cÞ and (-b) below pertain only to the centrally located Man-
datory Appendix XI flange [nozzle plus the associated cov-
Longitudinal Hub Stress er of thickness t I I to diameter B 1 defined in (1) above].
All terms in equations in (-c) and (-d) below, except C 5
ð22aÞ and C 6 , refer to the nonreducing flange (Flange I). C 1
and C 2 of equations in (-c) and (-d) below replace C 1
and C 2 of eqs. L-3191(1) and L-3191(2).
(-a) Let
ð22bÞ

(-b) Let
ð22cÞ

ð17Þ L-3243 Analysis of a Group 2 Assembly

(a) The assembly may be analyzed using a variation of for Category 3 flanges [see (2)]. Let
the analysis for a Group 3 assembly (L-3244) that ac-
counts for the interaction of nonidentical flanges and
the stiffening effect of an integral nozzle or hub centrally
located in the reducing flange.
for Category 1 or 2 flanges [see (2)].
(1) The central nozzle of Flange II with diameter B I I
shall be assumed for analysis purposes as an Mandatory (-c) Let
Appendix XI flange with outside diameter A , bolt circle
C , and gasket circle G all equal to B 1 of Flange I. See
Figure L-3230-2. (-d) Let
(2) In addition it is necessary to categorize the cen-
trally located Mandatory Appendix XI flange (nozzle plus
the associated over plate to diameter B 1 ) as a Category 1,
2, or 3 flange in accordance with L-3232. (-e) Replace eq. L-3244(a)(32) with:
(3) The moment due to pressure shall be designated
M p ′ where

(-f) Delete eq. L-3244(a)(44). Subparagraphs (1),

(2), and (3) above apply only for calculating C 5 (M p ′)
and C 6 , and subsequently when using (5) below for calcu-
lating the stresses in and adjacent to the nozzle in Flange
II.
For Category 1, 2, or 3 flanges [see (2) above], (5) Stresses in the centrally located nozzle of Flange
II shall be calculated in accordance with the following
equations after M S I I has been found using (4) above. All
terms, such as e, Y, and Z , apply to the centrally located
For Category 1 or 2 flanges [see (2) above], Mandatory Appendix XI flange as defined in (1) and (2)
above.
For Category 1 or 2 flanges [(2) above]:
Longitudinal Hub Stress
For Category 3 flanges [see (2) above],

342
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Radial Flange Stress Adjacent to Central Nozzle

ð26Þ

Unbalanced Flange Moment at Diameter B 1

ð27Þ
Tangential Flange Stress Adjacent to Central Nozzle

ð28Þ

Balanced Flange Moment at Diameter B 1

For Category 3 Flanges [(2) above]: ð29Þ
Tangential Flange Stress Adjacent to Central Nozzle
ð30Þ

Slope of Flange at Diameter B 1 Times E

Radial and Longitudinal Hub Stress

ð31Þ

ð32Þ
(6) The stresses in Flange I and the remaining stres-
ses in Flange II shall be calculated in accordance with
Contact Force Between Flanges at h C
L-3244 except as modified by (4).
(b) As an alternative to the method in (a) above and at ð33Þ
the option of the designer, the assembly may be analyzed
as if it is one flange of an identical pair in a Group 1 as- Bolt Load at Operating Conditions
sembly using the procedure in L-3242. All stresses shall
ð34Þ
satisfy L-3250. The same value of h C shall be used in both
calculations and the strain length l of the bolts shall be Operating Bolt Stress
based on the thickness of the flange under consideration.
This method is more conservative and more bolting may ð35Þ
be required than the method in (a) above.
Design Prestress in Bolts
(c) The central nozzle or opening in Flange II of a Group
2 assembly determined by the rules in (a) or (b) above
meets the general requirements of this Division and of ð36Þ
this Article. The rules for determining thickness and rein-
forcing requirements of NC‐3225, NC‐3325, ND‐3325, and Radial Stress in Flange I at Bolt Circle
NE‐3325, and NC‐3233, NC‐3333, ND‐3333, and NE‐3333,
respectively, are not applicable.
ð37Þ

L-3244 Analysis of a Group 3 Assembly

Radial Stress in Flange I at Inside Diameter
(a) The following equations are used for the analysis of
Category 1, 2, and 3 nonreducing flanges and the reducer ð38aÞ
(or flat circular head) of a Group 3 assembly:
Rigid Body Rotation of Flanges Times E*

ð38bÞ
ð23Þ

ð38cÞ
ð24Þ
Tangential Stress in Flange I at Inside Diameter
Total Flange Moment at Diameter B 1
ð39aÞ
ð25Þ

343
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(1) longitudinal hub stress S H not greater than the

ð39bÞ smaller of 1.5 S f or 1.5 S n for Category 1 flanges where
the pipe or shell constitutes the hub
(2) longitudinal hub stress S H not greater than the
smaller of 1.5 S f or 2.5 S n for integral flanges (Category
ð39cÞ
1) similar to the Mandatory Appendix XI flanges shown
as Figure XI-3120-1, sketches (6), (6a), and (6b)
Longitudinal Hub Stress in Flange I (c) radial stress S R not greater than S f
(d) tangential stress S T not greater than S f
ð40aÞ (e) a ls o , ( S H + S R ) / 2 n o t g r e a t e r t h a n S f a n d
(S H + S T )/2 not greater than S f
(f) S R and S T at the center of the reducing flange in a
Group 3 assembly [see eq. L-3244(a)(44)] shall not ex-
ð40bÞ
ceed S f
NOTE: The symbols for the various stresses in the case of a Group 3
assembly also carry the subscript I or II. For example, S H I represents
ð40cÞ
the longitudinal hub stress in Flange I of the Group 3 assembly.
Radial Stress in Flange II at Bolt Circle
L-3260 PRESTRESSING THE BOLTS
ð41Þ
The design rules of this Article provide for tangential
contact between the flanges at h C m a x or some lesser val-
Radial Stress in Flange II at Diameter B 1 ue h C beyond the bolt circle. As in the case of Mandatory
Appendix XI flanges, a Class FF flange must be designed
ð42Þ so that the calculated value of the operating bolt stress
σ b does not exceed S b . Also, as in the case of Mandatory
Tangential Stress in Flange II at Diameter B 1 Appendix XI flanges, ordinary wrenching techniques
without verification of the actual initial bolt stress (as-
ð43Þ sembly stress) is considered to meet all practical needs
with control and verification reserved for special applica-
Radial and Tangential Stress at Center of Flange II tions. For the purposes of this Article, the use of h C <
h C m a x to optimize stresses is considered to be a special
application unless it is also shown that all of the require-
ð44Þ ments of this Article are also satisfied when h C = h C m a x .

(b) The thickness of Flange II of a Group 3 assembly de- L-3270 REFERENCES

termined by the above rules shall be used in lieu of the
thickness that is determined by NC‐3225, NC‐3325, Additional guidance on the design of flat faced metal‐
ND‐3325, and NE‐3325. However, any centrally located to‐metal contact flanges can be found in the following
opening in Flange II shall be reinforced to meet the rules references:
of Mandatory Appendix XIX. (a) Schneider, R. W., and Waters, E. O., The Background
of ASME Code Case 1828: A Simplified Model of Analyzing
ð17Þ L-3250 ALLOWABLE FLANGE DESIGN STRESSES Part B Flanges, Journal of Pressure Vessel Technology,
The stresses calculated by the above equations, ASME, Vol. 100, No. 2, May 1978, pp. 215–219;
whether tensile or compressive (−), shall not exceed the (b) Schneider, R. W., and Waters, E. O., The Application
following values for all groups of assemblies: of ASME Code Case 1828, Journal of Pressure Vessel Tech-
(a) operating bolt stress σ b not greater than S b for the nology, ASME, Vol. 101, No. 1, February 1979, pp. 87–94.
design value of S i It should be noted that the rules in Nonmandatory
(b) longitudinal hub stress S H not greater than S f for Appendix L were formerly contained in Code Case 1828,
Category 1 and 2 cast iron flanges except as otherwise A Simplified Method for Analyzing Flat Face Flanges with
limited by (1) and (2) below and not greater than 1.5 S f Metal‐to‐Metal Contact Outside the Bolt Circle/ Section
for materials other than cast iron VIII, Division 1.

344
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX M
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR CONTROL OF WELDING, POSTWELD
HEAT TREATMENT, AND NONDESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION OF
WELDS

ARTICLE M-1000
RECOMMENDATIONS

M-1100 INTRODUCTION (b) method of weld joint preparation

(c) cleaning requirements prior to welding
M-1110 SCOPE
(d) purge requirements in addition to Section IX,
This Appendix provides recommendations for control QW-408.5, such as oxygen content, volume changes, or
of welding, postweld heat treatment, and nondestructive time of purging prior to welding, and minimum thickness
examination of welds. The purpose of this Appendix is of deposited metal prior to removal or purge
to identify the areas that should be controlled. It should (e) cleaning and examination requirements between
not be construed that this Appendix describes the only weld passes
controls that are necessary. Other controls may be neces-
(f) instructions for measuring preheat and interpass
sary depending on the specific application.
temperatures
(g) preheat temperature control
M-1120 APPLICABILITY
(h) interpass temperature control
The recommendations contained in this Appendix may (i) temperature maintenance and control after welding
be included in procedures, instructions, specifications,
(j) welding current and voltage control including
process sheets, shop travelers, checklists, drawings, or
method and frequency of measurement
other documents that are part of the Quality Assurance
(k) welding technique including, as applicable, method
or Control Program.
of starts and stops, method of arc initiation, and weave or
stringer bead
M-1200 WELDING PROCEDURE
SPECIFICATIONS M-1212 Format of Welding Procedure
Specification
M-1210 RESPONSIBILITY FOR PREPARATION
Welding Procedure Specifications may consist of a sin-
The responsibility for preparing and approving the
gle document. Alternatively, there may be a general Weld-
Welding Procedure Specification, and the method of
ing Procedure Specification that applies to and is
handling revisions should be defined in the Quality Assur-
referenced by a number of detailed Welding Procedure
ance or Control Program.
Specifications. The general Welding Procedure Specifica-
tion may also reference other specifications to define
M-1211 Content Requirements
other requirements such as welding filler materials, pur-
Section IX identifies the essential and also the nones- ging, and postweld heat treatment.
sential variables required to be included in a Welding Pro-
cedure Specification. Supplementary information that
should be provided, as applicable, is listed in (a) through M-1213 Application of Welding Procedures
(k) below. This information may be provided in other spe- Selection of qualified welding procedures should be
cifications, drawings, or documents that are referenced in based on the essential variables applicable for the pro-
or used in conjunction with the Welding Procedure Spec- duction weld. Any additional requirements of the Design
ification, as described in M-1213. Specification, such as component classification, applicable
(a) weld joint design, including fit‐up Code edition and addenda, fracture toughness

345
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

requirements, and manufacturing considerations, should M-1520 VERIFICATION OF APPLICABILITY

be evaluated in the selection of welding procedures for
Prior to assignment of nondestructive examination pro-
specific weld joints.
cedures to specific weld joints, a review should be made
of the Code classification of the component and the Code
edition and addenda to ensure that the type of examina-
M-1300 WELDING PERFORMANCE tion, procedure and acceptance standards, frequency,
QUALIFICATION AND ASSIGNMENT and time of examination are all correct for the application.

It is necessary that a system be established to ensure

that properly qualified welders and welding operators M-1600 POSTWELD HEAT TREATMENT
are used for specific weld joints. The system should in- A system should be established and maintained that is
clude confirmation that the welder and welding operator capable of meeting PWHT requirements for heating and
qualifications are up to date and valid for the application. cooling rates, metal temperature, metal temperature uni-
formity, and temperature control. The location of thermo-
couples, furnace loading to prevent direct impingement of
flame on parts or components, and the furnace atmo-
M-1400 CONTROL OF WELDING
sphere should be considered in establishing procedures.
A system should be established and maintained that is
capable of
M-1700 EXAMINATION AND DIMENSIONAL
(a) maintaining the identification of acceptable elec-
INSPECTION
trodes, filler metal, consumable inserts, and fluxes until
consumed, and Examinations and dimensional inspections should be
(b) minimizing moisture absorption of coated elec- made to provide assurance that the requirements of this
trodes and of fluxes Section are met and that welding conforms with the pro-
The system should include requirements for receiving cedures, specifications, and drawings. As applicable, con-
inspection, storage, handling, use of holding ovens, con- sideration should be given to (a) and (b).
trol of exposure time at ambient temperature, and (a) Before welding
reconditioning. (1) material identification
(2) weld preparation surfaces
(3) cleanliness
(4) root opening
M-1500 NONDESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION (5) offset
OF WELDS (6) alignment
(7) socket engagement on socket welds
M-1510 RESPONSIBILITY FOR PREPARATION (b) After welding
Nondestructive examination procedures should be pre- (1) cracks or linear indications
pared in accordance with the requirements of the particu- (2) rounded indications
lar Article of this Section used in fabrication, including (3) overlap
acceptance standards. The responsibility for preparation (4) undercut
and approval of procedures and the method of handling (5) lack of required penetration
revisions should be defined in the Quality Assurance or (6) surface finish
Control Program. (7) weld profile

346
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX N ð17Þ

DYNAMIC ANALYSIS METHODS

ARTICLE N-1000
GENERAL

N-1100 INTRODUCTION AND SCOPE (c) The Operating Basis Earthquake (OBE) is that earth-
quake which, considering the regional and local geology
Section III does not require dynamic analysis. However, and seismology and specific characteristics of local sub-
the design of nuclear components requires consideration surface material, could reasonably be expected to affect
of the seismic and other dynamic inputs. Component de- the plant site during the operating life of the plant.
sign may be based on the use of static forces resulting
(d) The response spectrum is defined as a plot of the
from equivalent earthquake acceleration acting at the
centers of gravity of the extended masses, or a dynamic maximum response (acceleration, velocity, or displace-
system analysis may be used to show how seismic loading ment) of a family of idealized linear single‐degree‐
is transmitted from the defined ground motions to all of‐freedom damped oscillators as a function of natural
parts of the buildings, structures, equipment, and compo- frequencies (or periods) of the oscillators to a specified
nents. N-1100 through N-1200 of this Appendix are pre- vibratory motion input at their supports.
sented to illustrate one or more acceptable steps for (e) The design ground response spectrum is a smooth
seismic dynamic analysis. It is not intended that these response spectrum obtained by analyzing, evaluating,
steps are the only acceptable ones, since the seismic dy- and statistically combining a number of individual re-
namic analysis involves a series of steps, and some of sponse spectra derived from the records of significant
these steps have acceptable alternative methods. Dy- past earthquakes.
namic analysis in general uses techniques which are illu- (f) The maximum (peak) ground acceleration (for a giv-
strated in seismic analysis. Those technical areas of
en site) is defined as that value of the acceleration which
dynamic analysis used in nuclear component design
corresponds to zero period in the design response spectra
which are not specifically illustrated by seismic analysis
for that site. At zero period the design response spectra
are included in N-1300 through N-1700.
acceleration is identical for all damping values and is
equal to the maximum (peak) ground acceleration speci-
fied for that site.
N-1110 DEFINITIONS AND NOTATIONS
(g) Normal mode — time history methods use the nor-
(a) The magnitude of an earthquake is a measure of the mal mode theory and a time history of the input motion.
size of an earthquake and is related to the energy released When normal mode theory is used, the maximum re-
in the form of seismic waves. Magnitude means the nu- sponse is determined by obtaining the combined re-
merical value on a Richter scale. The intensity of an earth- sponse of all individual modes at a particular time.
quake is a measure of its effects on man, on man‐built
(h) Direct integration — time history methods use nu-
structures, and on the earth’s surface at a particular loca-
merical step‐by‐step integration of the equations of mo-
tion. Intensity is measured by the numerical value of the
tion of a time history of the input motion.
modified Mercalli scale.
(i) Equivalent statical methods means the use of a sta-
(b) The Safe Shutdown Earthquake (SSE) is that earth-
tical loading coefficient which gives a definite upper limit
quake which is based upon an evaluation of the maximum
to the response.
earthquake potential considering the regional and local
geology and seismology and specific characteristics of lo- (j) Coupled structures and plant equipment include
cal subsurface material. It is that earthquake which pro- those structures and plant equipment which, because of
duces the maximum vibratory ground motion for which their mass and stiffness properties, significantly influence
those structures, systems, and components important to the dynamic response of each other and must be consid-
safety are designed to remain functional. ered together in a dynamic analysis.

347
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(k) Uncoupled structures and plant equipment include earthquakes. There are no single recorded earthquake
those structures and plant equipment which, because of ground motions which have such uniform frequency dis-
their mass and stiffness properties, do not significantly in- tribution. However, it is often necessary to generate a
fluence the dynamic response of each other and can be spectrum‐consistent time history motion whose response
considered in separate dynamic analysis. spectrum matches the design response spectrum for a
(l) Seismic systems are all those structures for which given damping value. The purpose of developing such a
loads induced by earthquake should be considered. spectrum‐consistent time history motion is to provide
(m) Rigid range is used to describe those frequencies of the analyst with an acceptable basis for generating floor
structures, systems, or components whose natural fre- (in structure) response spectra and performing time his-
quencies are greater than some value at which dynamic tory analysis of systems and components.
response acceleration is essentially the same as the im- Several acceptable approaches are presented below.
pact acceleration. For example, a response to the seismic
(a) Modified Earthquake Records. An acceptable ap-
design response spectra of Figures N-1211(a)-1 and
N-1211(b)-1 has unity amplification of acceleration above proach is to modify the components of past earthquake
33 Hz. records using spectral raising and suppressing techniques
(n) Spectrum consistent time history is a time history (refs. [71] and [72]).
which is artificially generated to essentially envelop a giv- Spectral raising is accomplished by adding to the origi-
en design response spectrum. nal time history a harmonic function at the frequency of
interest with a phase angle such that the response spec-
tral value at this frequency will be increased to a desired
N-1200 SEISMIC ANALYSIS amount; the time when the maximum vibratory motion
N-1210 EARTHQUAKE DESCRIPTION occurred will be the same. In this way, the spectral char-
acteristics of the modified time history will be similar to
N-1211 Ground Response Spectrum the original earthquake records. Consequently, statistical
(a) The horizontal component ground design response characteristics of past time history motions can be main-
spectra of the Safe Shutdown Earthquake (SSE) or the Op- tained as discussed in N-1213.
erating Basis Earthquake (OBE) on sites underlain by When the time history response spectrum is higher
rock or by soil may be linearly scaled from Figure than the design response spectrum at a frequency, spec-
N-1211(a)-1 in proportion to the maximum horizontal tral suppressing can be carried out by passing the time
ground acceleration specified for the earthquake chosen. history through a linearly damped oscillator connected
[Figure N-1211(a)-1 corresponds to a maximum horizon- in series with a second damper. This damping arrange-
tal ground acceleration of 1.0g and accompanying dis- ment will reduce the response spectral value, locally at
placement o f 36 in. (915 mm).] The applicable the natural frequency of the oscillator, to the desired
multiplication factors and control points are given in amount.
Table N-1211(a)-1. For damping ratios not included in
This usually requires an iterative procedure. A repeti-
Figure N-1211(a)-1 or Table N-1211(a)-1, a linear inter-
tious application of the raising and suppressing techni-
polation may be used.
ques may be used to arrive at a time history motion
(b) The vertical component ground design response
whose response spectrum is sufficiently close to the de-
spectra of the SSE or the OBE on sites underlain by rock
sign spectrum.
or by soil may be linearly scaled from Figure
N-1211(b)-1 in proportion to the maximum horizontal (b) Synthesized Time History Motions. Several methods
ground acceleration specified for the earthquake chosen. may be used to generate time history motions without
[Figure N-1211(b)-1 is based on a maximum horizontal the direct use of an actual earthquake record. One method
ground acceleration of 1.0g and accompanying displace- uses power spectral density functions to generate the
ment of 36 in. (915 mm).] The applicable multiplication time history motions. Power spectral density (PSD) func-
factors and control points are given in Table tions may be calculated for the strong motion portion of
N-1211(b)-1. For damping ratios not included in Figure actual earthquake records by assuming that the strong
N-1211(b)-1 or Table N-1211(b)-1, a linear interpolation motion portion is stationary and Gaussian. This (PSD)
may be used. function may then be used to produce a sample of a
pseudo‐earthquake ensemble by filtering a white noise
N-1212 Time History record with unit power density through a linear damped
N-1212.1 Frequency Content of Time History. The system (ref. [73]).
design ground response spectra used in the earthquake A second procedure which may be used is to pass Gaus-
resistance design, such as those illustrated in Figures sian shot noise through selected filters (ref. [74]). This
N-1211(a)-1 and N-1211(b)-1 for the design of nuclear method may produce acceptable results if used in con-
power plant facilities, are generally based on multi‐ junction with the spectral raising and suppressing techni-
component time history motions from a number of major ques described earlier.

348
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure N-1211(a)-1
Horizontal Design Response Spectra Scaled to 1g Horizontal Ground Acceleration

349
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table N-1211(a)-1
Horizontal Design Response Spectra Relative Values of Spectrum Amplification Factors for Control
Points
Amplification Factors for Control Points
Percent of
Critical Acceleration [Note (1)], [Note (2)] Displacement [Note (1)], [Note (2)]
Damping A (33 Hz) B (9 Hz) C (2.5 Hz) D (0.25 Hz)
0.5 1.0 4.96 5.95 3.20
2.0 1.0 3.54 4.25 2.50
5.0 1.0 2.61 3.13 2.05
7.0 1.0 2.27 2.72 1.88
10.0 1.0 1.90 2.28 1.70

NOTES:
(1) Maximum ground displacement is taken proportional to maximum ground acceleration and is 36 in. (915 mm) for
ground acceleration of 1.0g.
(2) Acceleration and displacement amplification factors are taken from recommendations given in ref. [1] and discussed
in refs. [2] and [3].

Another acceptable procedure involves the superposi- (c) The earthquakes used in producing the recom-
tion of continuous waves with the assumption that earth- mended response spectra [Figures N-1211(a)-1 and
quake motion is stationary for the strong motion portion N-1211(b)-1] occurred almost exclusively in the Califor-
of the total time duration. The earthquake is character- nia area originating along the Circum-Pacific Belt. They
ized as the product of a normalized stationary process are referred to as type 2 earthquakes in ref. [51]. These
and a scaling factor that establishes the magnitude of type 2 earthquakes are associated with moderate dis-
the motion and its envelope shape which consists of three tances from the focus and occur only on firm ground.
distinct parts: the buildup, the flat or stationary portion, They last for only a moderate time. The type 2 earth-
and the motion decay. The random process is represented quakes are unlike those referred to as type 3 which occur
by a finite number of superimposed sine waves with dis- on soft soil such as the Mexico City earthquakes of July 6,
tinct periods and randomly selected phase angles (ref. 1964, and which have a much longer duration.
[30]). (d) Maximum accelerations of type 2 earthquakes gen-
Synthesized time history motions for the three perpen- erally occur in the first 10 sec of strong shaking. For in-
dicular directions of an earthquake may not have time stance, the north–south component acceleration
phase relationships similar to those of past earthquake recorded at the El Centro earthquake, May 18, 1940,
records. The procedures of N-1213.1 may be used to shows that the maximum horizontal ground acceleration
check that time phasing is acceptable. of 0.33 g occurs at about 2 sec after the instrument
N-1212.2 Duration of Time History. started recording.
(a) It has been observed (ref. [51]) that the earthquake (e) Time history analysis is necessary to qualify sys-
duration effect on the response spectrum shape is small tems and components which exhibit highly nonlinear
for periods shorter than 0.5 sec, which is the period range characteristics, such as the opening and closing of large
significant for nuclear power plant structures, systems gaps between members. Long seismic inputs can waste
and components. computation resources. Duration of the artificial time his-
(b) Although actual long duration earthquakes tend to tories should be sufficient to allow the structure enough
excite a much wider range of frequencies, this effect is in- time to achieve its maximum response. For developing re-
cluded in the nuclear power plant design by using the sponse spectra, the input time history used should be cho-
smoothed, envelope type of design response spectra. sen long enough so that the resultant response spectra do
The use of a design response spectrum in qualifying struc- not significantly change if the time history is increased.
tures and components dictates that only maximum re- For developing spectrum‐consistent time histories, the
sponse amplitudes, be it displacement or stresses, are resultant time history should be long enough so that
computed. The duration of ground motions, which is an further increases in its length will not produce signifi-
influence in prolonging large amplitude structural re- cantly different response spectra.
sponse, may be important when fatigue life of the struc- (f) Generally the minimum duration of the strong seis-
tures and components is considered. The fatigue effect mic motion required may be taken as 6 sec for Code com-
is discussed in N-1214. ponents. If this minimum 6 sec strong motion duration is
used, then a buildup duration of about 4 sec is recom-
mended to precede the strong motion. The buildup region
may be taken as the time duration from where motion is

350
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure N-1211(b)-1
Vertical Design Response Spectra Scaled to 1g Horizontal Ground Acceleration

zero to the time where stationarity or strong motion be- N-1213 Directional and Time Phase
gins. In cases where it is uncertain as to the minimum Considerations
strong motion duration required to produce maximum
Three orthogonal components of earthquake excita-
structural response, the analysis may be extended to long-
tions are normally considered for nuclear power plant de-
er strong motion durations such as 10 sec in order to eval-
sign. Rotational ground motion in the three directions,
uate whether significant response increases occur above
however, may be neglected. The triaxial input excitations
those of the 6 sec duration. The method in ref. [71] may
are characterized by the relative magnitudes of the peak
be used when required to include shorter or longer peri-
accelerations of the three excitations, and the relative val-
ods of vibratory energy in an artificial time history.
ues of the response spectra over the frequency range of
interest (N-1211). Time histories which are consistent
with the design response spectra may be developed
through methods discussed in N-1212 and which essen-
tially envelop the design response spectra. Since these

351
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table N-1211(b)-1
Vertical Design Response Spectra Relative Values of Spectrum Amplification Factors for Control
Points
Amplification Factors for Control Points
Percent
of Critical Acceleration [Note (1)], [Note (2)] Displacement [Note (1)], [Note (2)]
Damping A (33 Hz) B (9 Hz) C (3.5 Hz) D (0.25 Hz)
0.5 1.0 4.96 5.67 2.13
2.0 1.0 3.54 4.05 1.67
5.0 1.0 2.61 2.98 1.37
7.0 1.0 2.27 2.59 1.25
10.0 1.0 1.90 2.17 1.13

NOTES:
(1) Maximum ground displacement is taken proportional to maximum ground acceleration and is 36 in. (915 mm) for
ground acceleration of 1.0g .
(2) Acceleration amplification factors for the vertical design response spectra are equal to those for horizontal design
response spectra at a given frequency, whereas displacement amplification factors are 2/3 those for horizontal design
response spectra. These ratios between the amplification factors for the two design response spectra are in agree-
ment with those recommended in ref. [1] and discussed in refs. [2] and [3].

artificial time histories may not have time phase relation- N-1222 Time History Method
ships similar to those of past earthquake records, the pro-
cedures of N-1213.1 may be used to check that time (a) The structural system to be analyzed can be gener-
phasing is acceptable. ally classified into two forms, linear and nonlinear. In the
linear system the structure is idealized in such a way that
N-1213.1 Time Phase Relationships. The peak accel- the responses and motion retain a linear relation with the
eration of the three orthogonal synthetic time histories applied loads. A nonlinear structural dynamic system may
generally need not occur at the same time. In order to sti- be caused by either a material nonlinearity (i.e., a non-
mulate natural earthquake occurrences, the correlation of linear stress–strain relationship of the material), a geo-
the synthesized time histories may be evaluated by calcu- metrical nonlinearity (an excessive deformation, a
lating the cross correlation coefficients and the coherence support gap, etc. which significantly changes the geome-
functions (refs. [4], [5], and [6]). The artificially generated try of the system), or a mixture of the two.
time histories are acceptable if both their cross correla-
(b) Dynamic analysis for either a linear or nonlinear
tion coefficients and their coherence functions are ap-
system is based on the solution of a set of simultaneous,
proximately equal to the respective functions for past
differential equations of motion with given initial and
earthquake records. An absolute value of the correlation
boundary conditions. Acceptable methods are presented
coefficient less than 0.16 is acceptable. For the coherence
for solution to linear and nonlinear equations in N-1222.
function the numerical values ranging between 0.0 and
0.3 with an average of approximately 0.2 are acceptable. N-1222.1 Linear.
N-1214 Cyclic Criteria (a) The response of a multi‐degree‐of‐freedom linear
structural system is described by the differential equation
(a) An acceptable cyclical load basis for fatigue analysis of motion expressed in matrix form
of earthquake loading of equipment and components is
10 equivalent maximum stress cycles per earthquake.
ð1Þ
(b) The equivalent maximum stress cycle is defined as
the full range including plus or minus seismic load calcu-
lated by equivalent static or response spectrum modal where
analysis techniques.
(c) The total usage factor contribution is based upon C = matrix of viscous damping coefficients
the number of earthquakes considered for the f = force vector and function of time representing ex-
component. ternal loading at mass points
K = stiffness matrix for the mass points of the linear
N-1220 METHODS OF DYNAMIC ANALYSIS elastic structure
M = mass matrix
N-1221 Modeling Techniques for Dynamic x = displacement vector
Analysis x ′ = velocity vector
In the course of preparation. x″ = acceleration vector

352
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure N-1211(a)-1M
Horizontal Design Response Spectra Scaled to 1g Horizontal Ground Acceleration

20,000
Damping factor, %
0.5
10,000 2
0
,00 D
5
10 7 Ac
00 10 ce
C
5000 50 le
ra
tio 20
n, 0
00 g
20
10
0
00

B
10

2000 50
0
50

m
m M 20
0 d ax
0

0
20

9 n im
1000
n t = rou um 10
e g
Velocity, mm/sec

m ax.
0

G
10

e ro
ac m n un
pl g io m d 5
is 1.0 rat m
50

, Ac
500 D r le nt ce
fo ce m
e le
ac e ra
ac tio 2
pl
20

n
is
D 1g
10

200 0.
5
5

A
0.
2
2

100
0.
1
1

0.
5

05
0.

50
0.
02
2
0.

0.
01
1
0.

20
0.
00
05

5
0.

10
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50 100
Frequency, Hz

353
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure N-1211(b)-1M
Vertical Design Response Spectra Scaled to 1g Horizontal Ground Acceleration

20,000

10,000 Damping factor, %

0
,00 0.5
10
2
00
5000 50 5
D 7 C
00 10
20
00
10

2000
B
0
50

m
m
00
0

d
20

1000 9 un
t = r o
en . g
Velocity, mm/sec

m ax
10

e
ac m n m Ac
pl g io
is 1.0 rat ,m ce
50

D r le t le
500
fo ce en ra
m M tio
ac ce ax n,
20
a
pl im
20

g
is um
D 10
G
ro
10

un
200 d
Ac 5
5

ce
le
ra A
tio 2
n
2

100
1g
1

0. 0.
5
5

05
0.

50
0.
2
2
0.

0.
1
1
0.

20
0.
05
05
0.

10
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50 100
Frequency, Hz

354
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

In all typical linear matrix formulations, matrices M , C , corresponding mode. The total response of the structure
and K are symmetric. is therefore the result of combining the responses of all
(b) For a seismic analysis where ground motion is the its component modes.
source of excitation, f in eq. (a)(1) can be replaced by −[M] The equations of motion for a linear system may be un-
{Z″ }, where Z″ is the acceleration of ground motion in the coupled by means of a transformation to a system of nor-
same direction of x which is the relative displacement mal coordinates provided that the damping matrix C is a
with respect to the ground motion. For systems excited linear combination of M and K matrices.
at multiple support locations, further modification of
the force vector is necessary (see N-1228). N-1222.1.1.2 Complex Frequency Response
(c) The differential equation of motion may be solved Method. As an alternative approach to the method of
either analytically or numerically. A rigorous analytical modal analysis described above, the complex frequency
solution of the simultaneous linear differential equations response method may be used to determine dynamic re-
is often impractical and unnecessary. Simplification of the sponse of the system represented by eq. N-1222.1(a)(1).
damping matrix may be made to facilitate computations. The complex frequency response method requires that
(d) For example, in the special case of proportional the complex frequency responses of the system be deter-
damping (i.e., when the damping matrix is reduced to a mined first and the seismic excitations be transformed
linear combination of the mass and stiffness matrices), into its frequency domain. The time histories of the re-
the classical method of modal analysis may be applied sponse may then be found by inverting the response
since eq. (a)(1) can be decoupled. transforms.
(e) See N-1230 for acceptable treatments of damping. A Corresponding to every normal coordinate η r of eq.
numerical solution using step‐by‐step integration method N-1222.1.1.1(4), a pair of Fourier transforms may be
may be applied to a set of coupled as well as uncoupled found:
differential equations. The direct integration method does
not require the process of uncoupling modes; therefore,
no calculation of natural frequencies and mode shapes
ð5Þ
is necessary. The direct integration method permits the
handling of proportional damping where this treatment
is required.
N-1222.1.1 Method of Modal Superposition where
(Ref. [8]). f r (t) = {ϕ r }T{f(t ) }
N-1222.1.1.1 Modal Analysis. The method of
modal analysis usually assumes that a modal matrix be The Fourier transforms of the excitation and response
defined such that are related according to

ð6Þ

ð2Þ and

ð7Þ
where the right‐hand sides are diagonal matrices, ϕ is the
modal matrix, ω is the natural frequency of the structure,
and ξ is the modal fraction of critical damping. This for- The r th mode response is given by evaluating the Fourier
mation uses damping matrices that are proportional. integral:
Let {η } be the normal coordinates such that the dis-
placement {x } can be defined by the transformation ð8Þ

ð3Þ
and the time history response of the system in the physi-
Equation N-1222.1(a)(1) can be written by means of this cal coordinate is given by
transformation as
ð9Þ
ð4Þ

which represents a decoupled system of individual modal Standard fast Fourier transform techniques are available
equations. Response in each mode may be obtained by for expedient evaluation of Q r (ω ) and η r (t ) of eqs. (6)
solving the differential equations individually for the and (8), respectively (ref. [9]).

355
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

N-1222.1.2 Method of Direct Integration. (c) The differential equation of motion for nonlinear
(a) This is a numerical method directly applied to the problems is
solution of the differential equations of motion of linear
structural system, eq. N-1222.1(a)(1), in a step‐by‐step ð11Þ
manner. No uncoupling procedure is necessary to com-
pute the responses. The damping matrix need not be
where
proportional.
(b) There are many acceptable schemes available for Ct = damping
numerical integration of the equations of motion such Kt = stiffness matrices
as Newmark β ‐method (ref. [10]), Houbolt method (ref. Mt = time‐dependent mass
[11]), and Wilson θ ‐method (ref. [12]). Pt = force arrays
U = displacement
(c) Using the matrix formulation by Chan, Cox, and Ben-
U′ = velocity
field (ref. [13]) and Newmark β ‐method, eq.
U″ = acceleration
N-1222.1(a)(1) may be transformed into a finite differ-
ence equation in recurrence form involving displacement: The left‐hand side of eq. (11) may be made linear by
introducing

ð10Þ

ð12Þ

where
[B ] 2[M ] − (1 −2β )h 2[K ]
=
[D ] [M ] + (h/2)[C] + βh 2[K ]
= where
[F ] [M ] − (h/2)[C] + βh 2[K ]
= C = proportional damping
h =
length of the time interval used in the direct inte- Cnl = damping
gration procedure K = stiffness matrices
n = the number of time intervals lapsed Knl = stiffness matrices
β = parameter of Newmark β ‐method in reflecting the M = time‐independent mass
type of acceleration function assumed between Mnl = time‐dependent mass
two time stations and numerical stability of the
procedure As an example, the compressible fluid flow in a pipe or a
moving mass acting on a structure contributes to [M n l ]
(d) The dynamic responses of a structure at any instant and the closing and opening of gaps contribute to [C n l ]
of time may be calculated from the time history of excita- and [K n l ]. Substituting eq. (12) into eq. N-1222.1(a)(1)
tions and the previous structural responses. yields
(e) The direction integration method has the advantage
of simplicity in computation and elimination of the eigen- ð13Þ
value problem. This method may also be extended to deal
with the nonlinear problems.
where
N-1222.2 Nonlinear.
{F } = {P t } − [M n l ]{U″} − [C n l ]{U ′} − [K n l ]{U }
(a) The linear time history analysis discussed in
N-1222.1 is based on the assumptions that external forces Time history methods to solve eq. (11) or (13) fall into
are independent of the displacement and velocity, the two major categories: (1) mode superposition, and (2) di-
stress–strain relationship is linear, and the strain– rect integration.
displacement relationship is linear. Many problems of
N-1222.2.1 Mode Superposition.
practical consequences exist for which these assumptions
are not valid. Some acceptable numerical methods to ana- (a) The use of normal modes for linear time history
lyze such nonlinear problems are discussed below. method is discussed in N-1222.1. Mode superposition
(b) The following nonlinearities may be introduced into techniques may also be used for the nonlinear problems
the system: (refs. [14], [15], and [16]). A problem of a pendulum hav-
ing a large amplitude is discussed in ref. [14]. Reference
(1) material nonlinearities (plasticity);
[15] presents an analysis of a structure including the fol-
(2) geometric nonlinearities (large displacement); lowing nonlinear characteristics: variable‐stiffness ele-
(3) combination of material and geometric nonlinea- ments, contact (compression only) elements, time‐
rities (impact and friction). varying boundary conditions, and nonmodal and

356
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

nonlinear damping elements. A ring problem involving applied to eq. N-1222.2(c)(13), the time‐independent ma-
large geometric nonlinearities and plastic strains is dis- trices may be calculated once at the beginning of the nu-
cussed in ref. [16]. merical solution and the time‐dependent force array is
(b) Let {ϕ i } and {ω i } be the ith orthonormal eigenvec- calculated at each time step. These methods are classified
tor and natural frequency, respectively: into two groups: explicit schemes and implicit schemes.
The explicit schemes are hampered by both numerical in-
ð14Þ stability and convergence problems while the implicit
schemes suffer only from convergence problems. These
A transformation schemes are discussed in N-1222.2.2.1 and N-1222.2.2.2.
ð15Þ N-1222.2.2.1 Explicit Schemes. These schemes
convert the differential equations of motion to a set of lin-
is introduced in eq. N-1222.2(c)(13). The resulting un- ear algebraic equations with unknown state variables (at
coupled equation is as follows: the present time) which are independent of one another.
Acceptable explicit schemes include: Runge–Kutta meth-
ð16Þ od (ref. [17]), predictor–corrector method (ref. [17]),
Nordsieck integration method (ref. [18]), and central dif-
where ference method (ref. [19]).
As the above methods are conditionally stable, they
I = identity matrix have a disadvantage of requiring small time step sizes.
= [ϕ]T[M][ϕ ] The first three methods can be made to operate with
P = generalized force the variable time step, while the fourth one is a constant
= [ϕ]T{F } time‐step procedure. Garnet and Armen (ref. [20]) de-
q = generalized displacement vector monstrate a one dimensional wave propagation problem
ξj = jth modal damping ratio solution with the aid of a predictor–corrector method, i.e.,
ωj = jth natural frequency the modified Adams method. In ref. [21] the Nordsieck in-
ϕ = set of significant eigenvectors tegration scheme is demonstrated to solve nonlinear vi-
(c) Eq. (b)(16) may be solved by either explicit numer- bration problems in reactor components. Wu and
ical integration schemes such as the fourth order Runge– Witmer (ref. [22]) analyzed the problem of large transient
Kutta method (ref. [17]), Hamming’s predictor–corrector elastic–plastic deformation of structures using the central
method (ref. [17]), or by the analytical integration scheme difference method.
(ref. [14]). These numerical methods are conditionally N-1222.2.2.2 Implicit Schemes. These schemes
stable and available as library programs equipped with convert the differential equations of motion to a set of lin-
an automatic time step adjustment feature. These meth- ear simultaneous algebraic equations and require a ma-
ods provide a stable solution if the integration time step trix inversion to step the solution forward. Acceptable
is appreciably smaller than the smallest period associated implicit schemes include: Newmark’s generalized accel-
with eq. (b)(16). In the analytical integration method, the eration method, Wilson’s θ method, Nastran’s integration
force vector F is approximated over the time step Δt. This method, and Houbolt’s method.
allows for Duhamel integral type solutions for eq. (b)(16). (a) Acceptable implicit schemes:
(d) The generalized forces in eq. (b)(16) are updated at (1) Newmark’s Generalized Acceleration Method
each time increment. If the initial stiffness matrix has a (Refs. [10] and [23]). The nodal point velocities and dis-
relatively large bandwidth and a large number of eigen- placements are given by the following equations:
vectors are not required for the analysis, it is likely that
the mode superposition approach will be quite economic- ð17Þ
al as compared with the direct integration procedures
discussed in N-1222.2.2. In cases where the applied load
distribution is extremely complex or its time variation and
contains significant high frequency components, or both,
it is necessary to include many modes to obtain adequate
ð18Þ
accuracy by mode superposition. In these cases the direct
integration procedure may be more efficient. This proce-
dure is discussed in N-1222.2.2.
N-1222.2.2 Direct Integration. Direct numerical
integration methods can be applied to eq.
N-1222.2(c)(11) or eq. N-1222.2(c)(13). When applied
to eq. N-1222.2(c)(11), the calculation of time‐dependent
matrices is necessary at each integration time step. When

357
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Equations ( 17) and (18 ) are substituted in eq. The last two equations are obtained from eq. (1)(18) with
N-1222.2(c)(13), which is expressed at the present time the value of β and γ specified above. This method is un-
point (n + 1). This gives the following: conditionally stable for θ > 1.37 (ref. [12]); for θ = 1.4,
the numerical damping is less than 1% provided 22 steps
are taken within the natural period of the mode of inter-
est (ref. [25]).
(3) Nastran’s Integration Method (ref. [26]). In this
ð19Þ method the acceleration and velocity are expressed in
central finite difference form. They are expressed as
follows:

This set of algebraic simultaneous equations in the un-

known accelerations is solved and used with eqs. (17)
and (18) to obtain the velocity and displacement at the ð21Þ
present time. The parameter γ in eq. (19) is a damping
parameter. Artificial positive damping is introduced if
γ > 0.5 and artificial negative damping if γ < 0.5. For linear
problems, the method is unconditionally stable if The displacement and the forcing function are expressed
β > (2γ + 1)2/16 (ref. [12]). For γ = 1/2, β > 1/4 gives uncon- as the weighted average of the corresponding magnitudes
ditional stability. For systems with nonlinearities or non- at the three successive time points n − 1, n, n + 1. Substi-
proportional damping or both, there is no analytical tution of these expressions in eq. N-1222.2(c)(13) ex-
expression available for unconditional stability. So to pro- pressed at time point n gives:
vide a margin of stability for these systems β > 1/4 is con-
sidered for γ = 1/2. The value of γ slightly larger than 0.5
damp out the highest (and least important) modes while
preserving the lower ones. The Newmark method for
γ = 1/2 (no numerical damping) and β = 1/6 (linear accel-
eration) is conditionally stable. The Wilson modified
method (to make it unconditionally stable) is discussed
next. ð22Þ
(2) Wilson’s θ Method (ref. [12]). To obtain the solu-
tion at the present time (n + 1), this method assumes that
the acceleration varies linearly over the time interval
τ = θ Δt , where θ > 1.0. With the aid of eq. (1)(19),
β = 1/6 and γ = 1/2, solution at time point (n + θ ) is ob-
tained. Then the acceleration, velocity, and displacement
at the time point n + 1 are given by the following This set of algebraic simultaneous equations in the un-
expressions: known displacements is solved and used to find velocity
and acceleration.
This scheme is a special form of the Newmark meth-
od, eq. (1)(18) for β = 1/3 and γ = 1/2 (ref. [13]). The value
β = 1/3 provided some margin of stability and for γ = 1/2,
the artificial damping is zero. Note that the load vector
ð20Þ F is averaged over three adjacent time steps in the same
manner that K is averaged. This is done in order to pro-
vide statically correct solutions for massless degrees of
freedom.
(4) Houbolt’s Method (ref. [11]). In this method a
third‐order interpolating polynomial which fits the
known displacements at the three previous time points

358
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

and the unknown displacement at the present time point (c) Convergence. For nonlinear systems, the following
is formulated. The expressions for acceleration and velo- two steps are recommended to ensure convergence of
city are given as follows: the solution to the proper value.
(1) Iterative schemes, based on the residual force ar-
ray derived from the equation of motion at the present
time point n + 1 may be used to obtain convergence. This
residual, obtained by transferring all the terms in eq.
ð23Þ N-1222.2(c)(13) to the right‐hand side, is a measure of
how well the dynamic equilibrium is satisfied at the pres-
ent time point n + 1. The time‐dependent matrices and
force arrays, in eqs. N-1222.2(c)(11) and
The eqs. (23) are substituted in eq. N-1222.2(c)(13) N-1222.2(c)(13), respectively, are modified based on
which is expressed at the present time point n + 1. This the calculated solution at time point n + 1 and the itera-
gives: tive scheme is continued until the dynamic equilibrium
is satisfied to a prescribed tolerance. References [25],
[28], and [29] discuss this approach to improve efficiency
in nonlinear solutions.
(2) Successive computation of the time history, em-
ploying successively smaller values of the integration
time step, may also be used to ascertain convergence.
In the wave propagation problems, the response may
contain the spurious oscillations (refs. [20] and [25]),
which are due to the finite element discretization, and
This set of algebraic simultaneous equations in the un- are not eliminated by reducing the time step Δt . These os-
known displacements is solved and used to find velocity cillations may often be reduced by employing more uni-
and acceleration. form element size.
This method is unconditionally stable for linear prob- (d) General Remarks. No best choice of numerical meth-
lems and introduced artificial damping (the amount of od has been identified for nonlinear problems. Discus-
such damping increases with the ratio of time step to nat- sions which are helpful to indicate the advantages and
ural period of the system). The artificial damping is less limitations of these previously discussed methods are
than 1% provided 50 time steps are taken within the nat- contained in refs. [13], [20], [22], [23], and [27].
ural period of the mode of interest (ref. [12]). Thus, the Experience obtained from the solution of actual prob-
Houbolt method effectively removes higher mode re- lems is the most reliable indicator of which of the differ-
sponse from the system. ent integration schemes is superior for a particular
(b) Approximation of Load Vectors. All four direct inte- problem. Experience and checks of methods adopted for
gration methods discussed in the previous section require a similar type of physical problem where a correct solu-
that the forces at the time point n + 1 be known in order tion is available is recommended to establish validity
to calculate the displacements at that time. These loads, for a particular nonlinear method.
because of the presence of the nonlinear terms, are a N-1222.3 Time History Broadening. To account for
function of the displacements which are to be calculated. the effect of possible frequency variation of the structure,
So, it is not possible to evaluate these terms exactly. These the same time history data may be used with at least three
forces may be approximated with the aid of the first‐order different scaled time intervals: Δt (the reference interval)
Taylor series expansion about the motion at time point n and (1 ± Δf j /f j )Δt, for the analysis of equipment, where f j
as follows: is the fundamental structural frequency and Δf j is a para-
meter defining the frequency variation due to uncertain-
ties. This variation of the time scale interval has a
similar effect to widening the spectral peak when gener-
ating the smoothed response spectrum. If one of the
equipment frequencies f e is within the range f j ± Δf j , it
is recommended that the time history also be used with
This expression has an inherent error of order (Δt ) 2
additional scaled time intervals of [1 ± (f e − f j )/f j ]Δt.
which is the same as the Houbolt and Nastran method
(ref. [27]). This expression corresponds to a linear extra-
polation of the loads at the two previous time increments N-1223 Response Spectrum Method
which is equivalent to a numerical differentiation. This in- N-1223.1 Modal Combination. In the response spec-
troduces round-off error (noise) which will set a low trum method, the peak values of particular responses of
bound on the integration time step. interest (displacement, acceleration, shear, moment,

359
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

etc.) are determined for each mode. The total response (d) The following general procedure should be used to
may be obtained by combining the peak modal responses combine the seismic responses due to triaxial excitation:
by the square root of sum of squares (SRSS) method.
Mathematically this is expressed as follows:
ð25Þ

ð24Þ
where

where R i j = seismic response of interest for design (strain, dis-

placement, stress, moment, shear, etc.) obtained
R = the total response of interest (strain, displacement, by the SRSS rule to account for the nonsimulta-
stress, moment, shear, etc.) based on the SRSS neous occurrences of R i j k
method of combining the individual peak modal R i j k = maximum, co‐directional seismic response of in-
responses terest (strain, displacement, stress, moment,
R k = the peak response of interest due to the k th mode shear, etc.) associated with coordinates i and j
n = the number of significant modes due to earthquake excitation in the k th direction
The above method may be used to determine the parti- N-1224 Component or Equipment Testing
cular response for all significant modes regardless of fre-
quency spacing. In the course of preparation.
N-1223.2 Combination of Effects Due to Triaxial Ex-
citation. N-1225 Simplified Dynamic Analysis
(a) In the response spectrum method of analysis, the N-1225.1 Seismic Load Coefficient Method for Pip-
natural frequencies, mode shapes, and the load for each ing System Analysis.
mode are first determined. The load for each mode for N-1225.1.1 Simplified Seismic Load Coefficient
unit generalized response is the product of the stress ma- Method Using Floor or Amplified Response Spectra as
trix, the mode shapes, and the mode participation factors. the Seismic Design Basis Input.
When this product is multiplied by the generalized re- (a) Piping System Loads. A simplified seismic load coef-
sponse determined from the spectrum curves, the load ficient method for earthquake resistant design for equiva-
for each natural mode results. lent seismic inertia induced resultant piping stresses,
(b) The following assumptions may be used in combin- displacements, loads, and support reaction loads may be
ing the loads of each natural mode and for each direction. used to describe the earthquake input with a format as
(1) The peak responses of the different modes due to follows:
any one excitation do not occur at the same time.
(2) The peak generalized responses due to the three ð26Þ
different earthquake excitations for the same mode do
not occur at the same time. ð27Þ
(3) The peak stresses due to different modes and due
to different excitations generally do not occur at the same where
location on the structure nor at the same angular
orientation. F p h i = equivalent static inertia force applied to the pip-
(c) These assumptions are consistent with the use of ing and piping components in the i th horizontal
the SRSS method to compute the resultant responses. It direction as defined in N-1225.2
is necessary to use the SRSS method only on scalar com- F p v = equivalent static inertia force applied to the pip-
ponents because the SRSS of components orthogonal to ing and piping components in the vertical direc-
each other results in magnitudes equivalent to vector tion as defined in N-1225.2
sums thus implying simultaneous occurrence. K h i = the load coefficient applied to the piping and pip-
ing components in the i th horizontal direction.
The value of K h i shall be determined as follows:
For Soil Sites: V s < 3500 ft/sec (1100 m/s)
K h i = 1.0; l h i < 3.5 l v
K h i = 0.65; 3.5l v ≤ l h i ≤ 5.0lv =
K h i = 0.4; l h i > 5.0 l v
For Rock Sites: V s > 3500 ft/sec (1100 m/s)
K h i = 1.0; l h i < 2.5 l v
K h i = 0.6; 2.51l v ≤ l h i ≤ 4.0l v

360
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

and vertical support design load is required. This mini-

K h i = 0.4; l h i > 4.0 l v
mum design load is a function of pipe size and shall be de-
Piping systems with l h i in more than one of the termined as follows:
categories listed above shall use the highest K h i
value applied to two lateral support spans on
either side of the span requiring the highest K h i ð28Þ
value.
K v = the load coefficient applied to the piping in the
vertical direction. The value of K v shall be deter-
mined as follows:
For Soil Sites: V s < 3500 ft/sec (1100 m/s) ð29Þ
K v = 0.75; l h i < 4.0l v
K v = 1.0; l h i ≥ 4.0l v
For Rock Sites: V s > 3500 ft/sec (1100 m/s) where

K v = 1.0 S a m i = values that are the peak accelerations of the ap-

plicable amplified or floor response spectra in
Piping systems with l h i in more than one of these each of two orthogonal horizontal directions
categories listed above shall use the highest K v (units are g’s)
values applied to two lateral support spans on
either side of the span requiring the highest K v
value.
lhi = span in the i th direction between lateral supports
measured along the axis of the pipe. Lateral sup-
where
ports added to the piping system next to large in-
line components whose weights equal or exceed S a m i = peak acceleration of the applicable amplified or
the weight of the pipe between nominal dead floor response spectra in the vertical direction.
weight supports contained in Table NF‐3611.1,
The remaining parameters are defined as follows:
such as valves, strainers, etc., do not need to be
considered in the determination of l h i value MS L F = the Minimum Support Load Factor as defined in
lv = deadweight vertical support span from Table Table N-1225.1.1(b)-1 [MSLF has the units of ft
NF‐3611.1 for the nominal pipe size for the pip- (m)]
ing system under consideration R A m i n = Minimum Axial Seismic Support Design Load
Sami = peak acceleration of applicable amplified or floor for these axial supports not in the vertical direc-
response spectra in the ith direction (in g’s) tion. For axial supports in the vertical direction
Vs = building foundation media shear wave velocity the minimum support design load shall be de-
W = the total piping dead load (weight) which exists termined as R V m i n . [R A m i n has units of lbf (N)].
during the postulated seismic event. This in- R L m i n = Minimum Lateral Seismic Support Design Sup-
cludes piping weight, water weight and insula- port Load [R L m i n has the units of lbf (N)]
tion. The units of the term W must be R V m i n = Minimum Vertical Seismic Support Design Load
consistent with those of the term F p h i and F p v [R V m i n has the units of lbf (N)]
above. w ′ = the total piping dead load per unit length of the
When the piping system under consideration piping which exists during a seismic event. This
contains more than one pipe size K h i and K v fac- includes piping weight, water weight, insulation
tors shall be separately determined for and ap- weight, etc. [w ′ has the units of lbf/ft (N/m)].
plied to each nominal pipe size in the piping
system. In addition, if the K h i and K v values
change as a result of a pipe size change, the high-
est K h i , K v values at the point of piping size
Table N-1225.1.1(b)-1
change shall be applied to the first two lateral
Minimum Support Load Factor
support spans at the point piping size change
having the lower K h i , K v values. Nominal Pipe Size, ɸ, MSLF,
NPS (DN) ft (m)
(b) Special Considerations for Support Reactions. In ɸ ≤ 2 (50) 8.5 (2.6)
using this method to determine piping supports loads 2 (50) < ɸ ≤ 4 (100) 8.0 (2.4)
for seismic events, the specification of a minimum lateral 4 (100) < ɸ ≤ 6 (150) 7.5 (2.3)

361
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

In instances where Seismic Support Design Loads deter- (d) This method is limited to NPS 6 (DN 150) and
mined using the methodology of N‐1225.1(a) are less smaller.
than R L m i n , R A m i n , or R V m i n , the support design load
N-1225.2 Analysis Using the Seismic Load Coeffi-
shall be specified as R L m i n , R A m i n , or R V m i n , as deter-
cient Method. When seismic forces F p h i or F v are deter-
mined in this subarticle.
mined from the equations of N-1225.1.1(a), they shall be
(c) Inline Component Extended Structures. The seismic assumed as statically applied inertia loads acting along
applied accelerations at the center of gravity (cg) of inline three orthogonal axes defined relative to the piping sys-
component extended structures may be determined as tem with one of these axes being in the vertical direction.
follows: The piping system seismic analysis shall be performed in-
dependently for each direction of excitation with the
loads applied in the same sense. Resultant internal forces,
ð30Þ
moments or stresses in the piping products and piping
supports determined from seismic loads in the three di-
when the S a m i values are the peak accelerations of the ap- rections, may be combined by the square root sum of
plicable amplified or floor response spectra in each of two squares basis and will be considered as having both a
orthogonal horizontal directions. ( + ) and ( −) sign. In developing the piping system analy-
tical models for this method, consideration shall be given
ð31Þ to appropriately simulating the effects of localized con-
centrated mass effects assumed from such piping pro-
when the S a m i value is the peak of the applicable ampli- ducts as flanges, inline instrumentation, valves
fied floor response spectra in the vertical direction. (including extended structures), etc.
The seismic forces defined by the equations of
The remaining parameters are defined as follows:
N-1225.1.1(a) consider only inertia effects. They do not
av h = the total acceleration applied to the inline compo- include the effects of relative or differential motions be-
nent extended structure center of gravity (cg) in tween piping supports and motions of equipment to
the horizontal direction which the piping is attached. These effects are typically
a v v = the acceleration applied to the inline component referred to as seismic anchor motions.
extended structure center of gravity (cg) in the For this piping analysis method the piping supports
vertical direction may be assumed to be zero displacement points in the di-
rection of restraint.
The application of the eqs. (30) and (31) to determine In-
line Component Extended Structures applied accelera-
tions shall be limited to W v h 2/w ′ values less than or N-1226 Floor Spectrum Generation
equal to 185,000 ft-in.2 (36.4 × 106 m·mm2), when: (a) Nuclear facility structures are approximated by
h = height from the pipe centerline to inline compo- mathematical models to permit analysis of responses
nent extended structure center of gravity (cg) [in. due to earthquake motions. Considering the large number
(mm)] of degrees of freedom that would be necessary and the
W v = weight of the inline component extended structure possible ill‐conditioning of the resulting stiffness matrix
considered at its center of gravity (cg) location [lbf if the complete plant were idealized as a single mathema-
(N)] tical model, the plant is usually separated into several se-
w′ = is as previously defined parate subsystems for analysis purposes. There will
usually be one or more primary structural models which
For inline components when the extended structure ver- support one or more secondary systems. Also, different
tical (axial) axis does not correspond to global vertical models of the same structure may be required for differ-
axis, the method is still applicable but care must be taken ent purposes. Specifically, the dynamic model used to
to insure that S a m i and eqs. (30) and (31), when applied, generate the seismic excitation data for subsequent, sepa-
correspond to the inline component local vertical (axial) rate analyses of the secondary systems may not be suit-
and lateral axes. able for the detailed, localized stress analysis of the
This method for inline piping component extended primary structure.
structure acceleration prediction is applicable only to (b) Most equipment will have negligible interaction ef-
those inline piping components where the extended fects on the primary structure as in the case of equipment
structure of the inline component has a frequency greater with relatively small mass and high frequency, and will
than 20 Hz. The inline piping component frequency deter- only need to be included in the mass distribution of the
mination can be made by analysis, test, or judgment, and primary system model. There are, however, major equip-
when making this frequency determination, the inline ment systems, such as a reactor coolant system, whose
piping component body shall be or shall be assumed to stiffness, mass, and resulting frequency range should be
be rigidly constrained. considered for representation in the building model to

362
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

account for possible dynamic interaction effects. Some away from each other when the models are coupled.
guidelines for determining the extent of interaction are Further, it has been shown in ref. [39] that undamped
given in refs. [31] through [33]. peak amplification for singly supported equipment struc-
(c) Equipment may be analyzed by combining the com- tures cannot exceed a maximum , where J is the
plete equipment model with the support structure model modal mass for each mode of the primary structure and
and applying the proper excitation to the base of the sup- m is the mass of the supported subsystem. Since this limit
port structure. In this method no separate equipment is a function of the mass of the particular subsystem, the
support excitations need be generated because the equip- peak response may be calculated on a case‐by‐case basis.
ment will be excited directly through the structure (ref. This rule is recommended only for relatively simple
[34]). systems.
(d) For most equipment a separate analysis of the sec-
ondary system may be performed using output from the N-1226.3 Spectrum Peak Broadening.
building analysis. If building to equipment interaction is (a) To account for the effect on structural frequency
significant, then the equipment should be included in variation of the possible uncertainities in the material
the mathematical model of the structure. The representa- properties of the structure and soil, and the approxima-
tion of the equipment that is included in the building tions in the modeling techniques used in seismic analysis,
model should be adequate to consider major interaction the initially computed floor response spectra are usually
effects, but need not be as detailed as the mathematical smoothed, and peaks associated with the structural fre-
model used in a separate analysis of the equipment. quencies are widened. A recommended method of deter-
(e) For equipment which is not analyzed as part of the mining the amount of peak widening, associated with the
building structural model, the response may be obtained structural frequency, is described below.
by separate analysis using floor response spectra curves,
(b) Let f j be the j th mode structural frequency that is
time history excitations, or an appropriately defined
determined from the structure model. The variation in
power spectral density function at the support locations
the structural frequency is determined by evaluating the
of the equipment in the structure.
individual frequency variation due to the variation in each
N-1226.1 Response Spectra. parameter that is of significant effect, such as the soil
(a) Both horizontal and vertical response spectra may modulus, material density, etc. The total frequency varia-
be computed from the time history motions of the struc- tion ±Δf j is then determined by taking the SRSS of a mini-
ture at the various floors or other equipment support lo- mum variation of 0.05f j plus the individual frequency
cations of interest (ref. [35]). The spectrum ordinates variation (Δf j )n , that is
should be computed at sufficient frequency intervals to
produce complete and accurate response spectra. Spec-
trum peaks would normally be expected to occur at the
frequencies of the peaks on the ground motion spectrum
and at the natural frequencies of the supporting struc- (c) A value of 0.10f j is recommended if the actual com-
tures. In cases involving equipment mounted on equip- puted value of Δf j is less than 0.10f j . Figure N-1226-1
ment, the frequencies of all supporting structures shows a sample of such a smoothed floor spectrum curve.
should be included. Note that the broadened peak is bounded on each side by
(b) Table N-1226-1 provides some systematic methods lines which are not vertical but parallel to the lines form-
which may be used for choosing spectrum frequencies. ing the original spectrum peak.
Another acceptable method is to choose a set of frequen- (d) An alternative method for the broadening of the
cies such that each frequency is within 10% of the pre- structural peaks can be based on a probabilistic approach,
vious one and then add the natural frequencies of the as discussed in ref. [40]. In the particular case where
supporting structures to the set. there is more than one equipment or piping frequency lo-
(c) A more simplified acceptable method for construct- cated within the frequency range of a widened spectrum
ing floor response spectra from the ground spectrum is peak that is associated with a structural frequency f j , the
given in refs. [36] and [37]. floor spectrum curve may be more realistically applied in
N-1226.2 Spectral Peaks. Studies (refs. [38] and accordance with the following criterion. Based on the fact
[39]) have shown that, in general, the calculation of re- that the actual natural frequency of the structure can pos-
sponse of a piece of equipment having a frequency equal sibly assume only one single value within the frequency
to a frequency of the supporting structure will be conser- range defined by f j ± Δf j , but not a range of values, only
vative if the spectrum at the equipment support is gener- one of these equipment or piping modes can respond with
ated using a model of the supporting structure that does a magnitude indicated by the peak spectral value.
not include the equipment. This is because the exact reso- Therefore, seismic analysis of the equipment or piping
nance of an uncoupled analysis is not possible in the systems using the broadened floor design response spec-
coupled case where the resonant frequencies tend to shift tra may be accomplished by the following alternative

363
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table N-1226-1
Suggested Frequencies, Hz, for Calculation of Ground and Floor Response Spectra
Ground Spectra [Note (1)] Floor Spectra [Note (2)]
Frequency Range Increment, Hz Frequency Range Increment, Hz
0.5–3.0 0.10 0.5–1.6 0.10
3.0–3.6 0.15 1.6–2.8 0.20
3.6–5.0 0.20 2.8–4.0 0.30
5.0–8.0 0.25 4.0–9.0 0.50
8.0–15.0 0.50 9.0–16.0 1.0
15.0–18.0 1.0 16.0–22.0 2.0
18.0–22.0 2.0 22.0–34.0 3.0
22.0–34.0 3.0 … …

NOTES:
(1) Calculate response at all frequencies within the ranges shown, at the corresponding increments (results in 72
frequencies).
(2) Calculate response at all frequencies within the ranges shown, at the corresponding increments (results in 46 fre-
quencies); also calculate response at all natural frequencies of the supporting structures with the overall range.

method which can be used for equipment when analytical curves are used to define the response in the two horizon-
techniques are justified for predicting the natural tal and the vertical directions, then the shifting of the
frequencies. spectral values as defined above may be applied to these
Determine the natural frequencies (f e )n of the system three spectrum curves.
to be qualified in the broadened range of the maximum The criterion is illustrated by the following example.
spectrum acceleration peak. Figure N-1226-2, sketch (a) represents the peak broaden-
If no equipment or piping system natural frequencies ing on the floor spectrum curve associated with the j th
exist in the ±15% interval associated with the maximum mode structural frequency. Let there be two equipment
spectrum acceleration peak, then the interval associated or piping frequencies (f e )1 and (f e )2 that are within the
with the next highest spectrum acceleration peak shall frequency interval of f j ± 0.15f j , Figure N-1226-2, sketch
be selected and used in the following procedure. (b). Thus N equals two and therefore five separate floor
response spectra must be considered. The unbroadened
Consider all N natural frequencies in the interval
floor response s pectrum as indicated in Figure
N-1226-2, sketch (a) would be the first floor spectrum
considered. The unbroadened floor response spectrum
modified by shifting all of the frequencies associated with
where the spectral acceleration values by a factor of −0.15 is il-
f j = the frequency of maximum acceleration in the un- lustrated in Figure N-1226-2, sketch (c). In Figure
broadened spectra N-1226-2, sketches (d) and (e) illustrate the modifica-
n = 1 to N tions made to the unbroadened floor response spectrum
by shifting a factor of
The system shall then be evaluated by performing N + 3
separate analyses using the unbroadened floor design re-
sponse spectrum and the unbroadened spectrum modi-
fied by shifting the frequencies associated with each of
the spectral values by a factor of +0.15; −0.15, and

respectively.
Figure N-1226-2, sketch (f) illustrates the modifica-
tions made to the unbroadened floor response spectrum
where by shifting by a factor of +0.15. For this example, the five
separate seismic analyses are performed with the indivi-
n = 1 to N dually modified floor response spectrum curves.
The resultants of these separate seismic analyses shall The required resultants, stresses, support loads, accel-
then be enveloped to obtain the final resultant desired erations, moments, forces, etc., associated with each of the
(e.g., stress, support loads, acceleration, etc.) at any given five separate seismic analyses are then obtained. As any
point in the system. If three different floor spectrum of the five modified spectra has an equal probability of

364
 Figure N-1226-1
Response Spectrum Peak Broadening and Peak Amplitude

ASME BPVC.III.A-2017
365
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure N-1226-2
Use of Floor Spectra When Several Equipment Frequencies Are Within the Widened Spectral Peak

366
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure N-1226-2
Use of Floor Spectra When Several Equipment Frequencies Are Within the Widened Spectral Peak (Cont'd)

occurrence, the resultant utilized to evaluate the seismic For a structural system which is restrained in different
loadings shall be the envelope values from the five sepa- buildings, the response spectra of the restraint point
rate seismic analyses. should be enveloped.
N-1227.2 Stresses Due to Relative Seismic Support ð17Þ
Displacements.
N-1227 Multiple Input Response Spectra (a) When determining stresses the effects of relative
Analysis seismic support movements should be considered. When
If a structural system is being analyzed by the response these effects are considered significant, they may be ob-
spectra method and is supported at intermediate loca- tained by performing a static structural analysis of the
tions with different characteristic response spectra, then system including anchor movements. For structural sys-
the dynamic analysis performed should take into consid- tems with several possible combinations of anchor move-
eration the different response spectra. The effect of rela- ments, any of the following methods may be used for
tive seismic anchor displacements between the determining the stresses due to relative support
intermediate anchor points should also be considered. displacements.
(1) Stresses resulting from the differential movement
N-1227.1 Inertial Effects Due to Multiple Response of supports may be calculated for each significant mode
Spectra Input. The effect on a structural system of multi- using the modal displacement of the supports obtained
ple supports with different characteristic response spec- from the structural response calculations. The maximum
tra may be accounted for by selecting a single spectra model responses are then combined following any of
which will effectively produce the critical maximum re- the acceptable methods described in this Appendix. If
sponses due to different acceleration existing at anchor no support structure modal information is available, then
points and intermediate restraint points of the system. the absolute sum of the displacements may conserva-
This may be conservatively accomplished by enveloping tively be used.
the response spectra for the different seismic anchor
and restraint locations. Other procedures may be used,
if applicable. Acceptable alternative procedures are given
in refs. [7], [43], [44], and [45].

367
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(2) If the system is supported on independent struc- (c) Equation (b)(32) can be expanded to give
tures, then the absolute sum of displacements in each di-
rection should be used unless more detailed analyses are
used in accordance with N-1700. ð33Þ
(3) If a displacement time history of the supporting
structure is available, the procedures given in N-1228.4
may be used.
(b) Other detail considerations may be specified for dy- where
namic analysis of Section III components, and these F s = the reaction forces at the system support points
component-related rules should be considered in the dy- due to the response of the system to the motion
namic analysis. of the support structure
K = the stiffness matrix of the system model con-
densed in a manner such that only mass point ele-
N-1228 Multiple Time History Excitations ments (subscript m ) and active, nonreleased,
nondatum support elements (subscript s ) remain
For structural systems supported at several locations, in the matrix
the responses due to simultaneous excitations by differ- M m = a diagonal submatrix of the system model lumped
ent motions at each support may be determined exactly masses
by time history methods, as in N-1228.1. Having per- M s = a submatrix of inertia terms associated with the
formed a time history response analysis, reaction loads support joints of the system. For the purposes of
and motions may also be determined on a time history ba- this analysis, M s = 0 because there is no mass
sis, as in N-1228.2. Since the inertial effects may be con- lumped at support joints
sidered to produce primary stresses and the differential U m = displacement of mass point dynamic degrees of
support motions may be considered to produce second- freedom relative to the datum support in each co-
ary stresses, as in NB‐3650, the inertial effects may be de- ordinate direction
termined separately from the differential support U s = displacement of nondatum support points relative
movement effects, as in N-1228.3. to the datum support
X″ m = absolute acceleration of mass point dynamic de-
N-1228.1 Time History Response Analysis. grees of freedom of the model
(a) Several different acceptable methods have been X″ s = absolute acceleration of the system support
presented in the literature (refs. [7], [43], and [44]) for points
solving the equations of motion for a structural system
excited by multiple simultaneous forcing functions. Since (d) The time history support motions imposed at the
the basic problem to be solved must satisfy the funda- nondatum supports include only such displacements as
mental principles of dynamics, the differences between would tend to cause distortions in the system. Rigid body
the various methods are primarily in the approach of translation or rotation of the supporting structure would
the solution process. One method of solution is summar- not distort the system being analyzed; therefore, such ri-
ized here to provide insight into the basics of time history gid motions of the supporting structure are removed by
analysis for multiple excitations. computing the nondatum support relative motions as
(b) The general matrix form of the undamped coupled follows:
equations of motion may be written (refs. [7] and [45])
as follows: ð34Þ

ð32Þ
where
where X ″ represents the absolute acceleration of the R s = a matrix of three vectors representing distances
mass point dynamic degrees of freedom, and U repre- from the datum support point of the nondatum
sents those displacements of the mass and support point support points
dynamic degrees of freedom which would tend to cause U s = displacements of nondatum support points relative
distortions in the system. Rigid body translations or rota- to the datum support in each direction of excitation
tions are included in the mass acceleration terms on the X d = absolute displacements of datum supports in each
left‐hand side of the equation. Such rigid body motions direction of excitation
would not tend to distort the system and accounted for X s = absolute displacements of nondatum supports in
by defining one of the system support points to be the da- each direction of excitation
tum support, and describing the motion of all other non- θ = rigid body rotations of the supporting structure
datum supports as motions relative to the datum support. about each of the three coordinate axes

368
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(e) The first equation of the set of eq. (c)(33) yields: (j) Then making the usual assumption of proportional
damping for the modes of the supported system, the
ð35Þ equations of motion can be uncoupled and written in
the following form:

(f) A separation of variables can be achieved by defin-

ing the absolute acceleration of a mass point in terms of
acceleration relative to the datum support, such that: ð39Þ

ð36Þ

where
where
ω 2 = diagonal matrix of eigenvalues
R m = a matrix of three vectors representing distances 2ξω = diagonal matrix of modal damping terms
from the datum support point to the mass points
(k) The right‐hand side of eq. (j)(39) contains no damp-
for each of the rotational components
ing terms in a rigorous sense only if the modal damping is
X″ s d = the absolute accelerations of the datum support
proportional to stiffness. However, Ref. [46] points out
in each coordinate direction
that the contribution of these terms to earthquake forces
γ = matrix defining the direction of each respective
can be expected to be small. This term is usually neglected
translational dynamic degree of freedom
for systems exhibiting structural damping characteristics
γ i j = 1, if the ith dynamic degree of freedom is in within the range of the values in Table N-1230-1.
the direction of the j th direction of support
translation N-1228.2 Time History Reaction Analysis.
γ i j = 0, if the i th dynamic degree of freedom is (a) Having solved the dynamics problem for the time
not in the direction of the j th direction of histories of the mass point motions, the resultant reac-
support translation tions at locations throughout the system can be deter-
mined for each time step by imposing the deflections on
θ″ = rotational accelerations of the datum support
the structure in a series of statics problems; one static so-
(g) Equation (e)(35) then becomes lution for the deflected shape at each time step. Although
this approach is analytically valid, it is generally not prac-
tical because of the many thousands of solutions required
ð37Þ for the number of time steps in a typical seismic analysis.
The problem may be reduced to a single static deflection
(h) At this point it is to be noted that the equations of analysis by applying unit displacements to each mass and
motion are in a form expressing three dimensional re- support point to determine a set of influence coefficients
sponse of the system mass points due to multiple transla- for each desired reaction. The given support displace-
tional and rotational support excitations in one or more ments and computed mass point displacements at each
coordinate directions. Normally, the rotations will consist time step are multiplied by the set of influence coeffi-
of two components representing rocking about two cients to perform a complete reaction analysis of the sys-
orthogonal horizontal coordinate axes. The equations, tem at each time step.
however, are also valid for rotation about the vertical (b) The desired components of reaction (force, mo-
axes. It should be noted again that U m and U s are only ment, stress, or deflection) are computed at each time
the distortional portions of the total mass and support step as follows:
motions.
(i) The coupled equations of motion, eq. (g)(37), may ð40Þ
be solved by one of the methods of direct integration,
or, introducing the normal mode coordinate where
transformation:
C m = a matrix of mass point unit displacement influ-
ence coefficients (one column per mass point
ð38Þ and one row per reaction component)
C s = a matrix of nondatum support point unit dis-
placement influence coefficients (one column
where
per nondatum support and one row per reaction
ϕ = the matrix of eigenvectors of the supported system component)
q = the normal mode coordinate R ( t) = a vector of reaction components at time t

369
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

U m (t) = a vector mass point relative displacements at producing effects, suitable for meeting the appropriate
time t Code requirements, such as eq. (10) of NB‐3653.1 for
U s (t) = a vector of nondatum support relative displace- Class 1 piping.
ments at time t (b) Alternatively, one may break up the C terms into
(c) In a similar manner, the absolute acceleration of two terms C s 1 and C s 2 such that
any point in the system may be computed by multiplying
the mass point and support relative accelerations by the ð42Þ
influence coefficients for displacement reactions, and
adding in the datum support rigid body rotational and or
translational absolute accelerations as follows:
ð43Þ
ð41Þ
and
where
ð44Þ
C m = a matrix of mass point unit displacement influ-
ence coefficients for components of displace-
ment reactions where
C s = a matrix of nondatum support unit displace- C s 1 = a matrix of influence coefficients due to holding
ment influence coefficients for components of all supports fixed and applying the set of forces
displacement reactions to all mass points which would be required to
R p = a matrix containing distances to the reaction hold the mass point in place due to a unit dis-
point from the datum placement of each nondatum support in turn
R ″(t) = a vector of absolute acceleration components C s 2 = a matrix of influence coefficients to a unit dis-
at time t placement of each nondatum support in turn, al-
U ″ m (t) = a vector of mass point accelerations relative to lowing all mass points to respond freely as static
the datum at time t degrees of freedom in the structure
U ″ s (t) = a vector of nondatum support relative accel- R 1 (t) = a vector of stress reaction components at time t
erations at time t due to inertial responses
X ″ s d (t) = the translational absolute acceleration of the R 2 (t) = a vector of stress reaction components at time t
datum support at time t due to relative support motions
γ = a vector defining the direction of excitation,
where (c) The coefficients for a component of shear for a unit
displacement of a nondatum support may be visualized as
γ i j = 1, if the i th component of reaction is in shown in Figure N-1228.3-1.
the direction of jth support motion (d) The C s 1 term therefore represents inertial effect
= 0, if the ith component of reaction is not produced by the differential support motion, and the
in direction of the jth support motion C s 2 term represents the relative displacement effect of
θ ″(t) = the rotational absolute acceleration of the da- the differential support motion. The separate stresses de-
tum support at time t termined in this manner may be used to meet the appro-
priate Code requirements, such as eq. (9) of NB‐3652 for
(d) This method, therefore, permits the calculation of Class 1 piping.
any desired force or moment, or nonmass point motion
on a time history basis.
(e) The ability to calculate time history acceleration of Figure N-1228.3-1
nonmass locations in the system permits the subsequent Coefficients for a Component of Shear for a Unit
generation of response spectra at any arbitrary point in Displacement of a Nondatum Support
the system without the necessity of lumping mass at these
points.
N-1228.3 Separation of Inertial and Relative Anchor
Movement Stress Effects.
(a) The terms of the C s coefficients matrix can be found
by applying a unit displacement to each nondatum sup-
port in turn, holding all other supports and mass points
fixed, and calculating the desired reaction at a given loca-
tion. The reactions found in this manner are the combined
effect of inertial and relative displacement stress

370
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

N-1228.4 Envelope Excitations. (b) The damping force {D} represents the energy losses
(a) Where the responses are calculated using a single of the system. To evaluate these losses, the following al-
time history excitation for a multiply supported system, ternative mathematical expressions are recommended
the response spectrum of the single time history used for the vector {D}.
should envelop the spectra for the individual support mo- (1) Viscous damping:
tions. The secondary stress effects of differential support
ð46Þ
motions may then be determined by a separate static
analysis where either where [C] is a viscous damping matrix. The damping force
(1) the set of maximum displacements over all time is proportional to the velocity.
for each support are applied simultaneously in a single (2) Hysteretic damping:
analysis, or
ð47Þ
(2) the displacements of each support are applied to
perform an analysis for each time step, accounting for where v represents the structural damping factor (ref.
sign. [47]). This damping is also called complex damping. The
(b) Where the maximum displacements over all time damping force is proportional to the amplitude of the dis-
are used in a single analysis, then placement and opposite in direction to the velocity:
(1) for systems supported at multiple locations on
the same floor/wall where one flexural mode dominates, ð48Þ
the relative displacement set for the dominant mode may
where g is a damping coefficient (ref. [48]). This damping
be used, where justified
is also called the Reid’s damping. The damping force is
(2) for systems supported at multiple locations on proportional to the resisting force due to deformation
different floor/walls or on different structures where dif- and in the opposite direction of the velocity in harmonic
ferent flexural modes can dominate, the displacement motion.
may be applied statically as prescribed in N-1227 (3) Coulomb damping:
(c) Note that, in general, different support displace-
ment sets may be required to obtain conservative second- ð49Þ
ary stress effect at different locations within a system,
depending on the complexity of a given system. where μ is the coefficient of friction and N is the normal
force vector. The sign is chosen to be opposite the velo-
city. The damping force is due to friction and proportional
to the normal force.
N-1230 DAMPING (4) General dashpot damping:
N-1231 Damping Values
ð50Þ
(a) Motions in a structural system will dissipate energy
from the system. The phenomenon of this kind of energy
where α is a damping constant and n is an integer. This
loss is called damping. In a structural system, sources of
damping force is due to the turbulence and the dashpot
energy loss may be due to: a structural damping, which
geometry.
is caused by internal friction within the material or at
(c) These expressions permit the simulation of the en-
connections between elements of a structural system; a
ergy loss for a particular problem. It is extremely difficult
viscous damping, which is caused by motions in a fluid;
to give an accurate analytical expression for the different
Coulomb damping which results from the sliding friction
forms of damping in complex structural systems. The ana-
motion of a body on another surface. The following equa-
lyst may select a simple expression, such as viscous or
tion of motion is generally used for structural systems
hysteretic damping, to solve the problem by assuming
and components
that the energy losses are equivalent; i.e., viscous damped
ð45Þ system introduced in the analysis will have the same en-
ergy loss per cycle as the real structure.
(d) To establish an equivalent viscous damping matrix
where
[C] for the system, experimental data is usually required.
D = damping force vector Important experimental results, which indicate that en-
F = force vector ergy losses increase with stress or displacement ampli-
K = stiffness matrix tude, or both, have been compiled in existing literature
M = mass matrix (refs. [49] and [50]). The incorporation of this behavior
X = displacement vector to the equivalent viscous damping in the transient analy-
X′ = velocity vector sis will usually lead to an expression of the damping force
X″ = acceleration vector which will make the equations of motion nonlinear. To

371
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

avoid this inconvenience, conservative modal damping ω 2 = diagonal matrix

values may be used for nuclear systems and structures ω i = circular frequencies
for OBE and SSE condition loads, respectively. Table
(b) If the matrix [C ] in eq. (a)(51) can be diagonalized
N-1230-1 shows the modal damping values recommend-
by the undamped normal modes (i.e., [ϕ]T[C][ϕ] is a diag-
ed. Damping values higher than the ones given in Table
onal matrix), then the damping matrix [C ] is called the
N-1230-1 may be used in a dynamic analysis if the basis
proportional damping matrix; otherwise, it is called the
is justified.
nonproportional damping matrix.
(e) Methods of incorporating the damping in structural
(c) Reference [52] has illustrated that the matrix [C ]
dynamics are usually dependent on the mathematical
can be diagonalized when it is a linear combination of
convenience. The energy loss per cycle is simulated by a
[M ] and [K ] matrices. Caughey (ref. [53]) has derived
convenient mathematical scheme; frequently viscous
more general conditions under which the matrix [C ] can
damping expressions are adopted in the analysis. In
be diagonalized.
N-1232 and N-1233, methods of proportional and non-
(d) For proportional damping the equations of motion
proportional dampings are discussed and the physical in-
may be uncoupled into a set of independent one degree
terpretations associated with each method is also
of freedom systems. In this case, the damping ratio asso-
examined.
ciated with the different modes can be determined.
(e) Among the category of proportional dampings, two
N-1232 Proportional Damping types of damping matrix [C ] are commonly adopted;
(a) Consider a viscously damped system of the follow- namely, the mass and stiffness damping and the orthogo-
ing form: nal modal damping. Both types of damping are discussed
in N-1232.1 and N-1232.2.
ð51Þ
N-1232.1 Mass and Stiffness Damping (Ref. [53]).
Let [ϕ ] be the modal matrix of the undamped system of (a) In this damping, the matrix [C ] is assumed to be
proportional either to the mass matrix [M] or to the stiff-
ð52Þ ness matrix [K] or to a linear combination of the two. That
is, it can be written as follows:
such that
ð54Þ
ð53Þ
where
and
α and β = two real constants
α[ M] = mass damping
β [K ] = stiffness damping
where (b) In using the mass and stiffness damping, damping
[ϕ ] T = transpose of the matrix [ϕ] values of the entire system are determined by the two
I = identity matrix constants α and β . To determine the value of α and β ,
one can control the damping ratios for two frequencies.
(c) Let ω r and ω s be the two frequencies that we want
Table N-1230-1 to have a damping ratio of ξ r and ξ s , respectively. Then α
Damping Values and β may be determined (ref. [54]) as follows:
Percent of Critical Damping
Earthquake Magnitude ð55Þ
Structure or Operating Basis Safe Shutdown
Component Earthquake Earthquake
Equipment 2 3 Then, for an arbitrary frequency ω i the damping ratio
Piping systems 5 5 ξ i can be computed by eliminating α and β and is given
Welded steel as:
structures 2 4
Bolted steel
structures 4 7
Prestressed concrete
ð56Þ
structures 2 5
Reinforced concrete
structures 4 7

where

372
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ð57Þ

is due to mass damping and where the second term in eq. (57) is added to account for
the damping. The damping ratio for each frequency is free
to be determined by the analyst without any mathemati-
cal restriction. The damping ratio assigned to one mode
will have no effect on the damping ratios of the others;
is due to stiffness damping. the modes are orthogonal. These ratios can be obtained
(d) The application of the mass and stiffness damping from the experimental results. This method is used often
concept is illustrated by a following numerical example. in solving viscously damped systems. The example prob-
Consider a structural system with frequencies of f n = n lems for the various damping methods discussed here are
Hz for n = 1, 2,..., 25. For a damping ratio of given in ref. [55].
ξ 1 0 = 0.05 = ξ 2 0 at frequencies f 1 0 = 10 Hz and
f 2 0 = 20 Hz and by using eq. (c)(56), the damping ratios
for the other modes may be computed. For example, at N-1233 Nonproportional Damping
the frequencies of 5, 15, and 25 Hz, the corresponding In the foregoing discussion of the proportional damp-
damping ratios are ξ 5 = 0.075, ξ 1 5 = 0.047, and ing (N-1232), the damping of a structural system was as-
ξ 2 5 = 0.055. sumed to have a form that couplings do not exist between
(e) It should be noted that in eq. (c)(56), the damping the classical modes of vibrations; i.e., the mode shapes ob-
ratio is the sum of the contributions due to the mass tained from the solution of a free vibration of the un-
and stiffness damping. Using mass damping α ≠ 0, damped system. This approach is appropriate for the
β ≠ 0, the damping ratio will decrease with increase of correlation of test data for a structural system composed
the frequency. On the other hand, using stiffness damping of a single material, or damping mechanism which is
α = 0, β ≠ 0, the damping ratio will increase with the in- homogeneous throughout the system. However, for a sys-
crease of the frequency. tem which is composed of different materials, such as a
(f) Mass damping introduces the damping forces that reactor coolant loops, containment building, and soil
are proportional to the velocities of each mass point in foundation, the damping mechanism of one type of mate-
the system. Mass damping may be used to represent the rial may be considerably different from the other. In order
energy loss due to impact and friction. Stiffness damping to have a better simulation of the damping, it is useful to
introduces the damping forces that are proportional to construct a damping matrix which reflects the material
the time rate of deformation. Stiffness damping can be composition rather than the mathematical convenience
used to represent the structural damping. While the mass (refs. [56] and [57]). The damping matrix so constructed
damping introduces the damping forces due to the rigid will no longer be diagonalized by the classical modes. The
body motion (displacements without deformations) of term nonproportional damping is used for this type of
the system, the stiffness damping does not. damping. In nonproportional damping, the matrices [M],
[K ], and [C ] are used to solve the complex frequencies
(g) In seismic analysis of a structural system, the equa-
and mode shapes. From the complex frequencies, damp-
tion of motion is generally formulated in terms of the dis-
ing ratios associated with each mode can readily be com-
placements with respect to the base. If the damping ratios
puted. Unlike proportional damping, the matrix [C ] of a
are established for the two significant frequencies, the
nonproportional damping system cannot be formulated
mass and stiffness dampings may be adopted. The damp-
simply by specifying a set of damping ratios, unless a
ing ratios for the other frequencies are computed with the
mathematical process of successive approximations is
aid of eq. (c)(56). If only stiffness damping is used, and for
performed. Due to the mathematical complexity involved
the significant frequency Ωr the established damping ra-
in the complex frequencies and mode shapes solution, the
tio is ξ r , then
process of assigning a set of damping ratios with respect
to the complex modes becomes impractical. For certain
types of structures such as reactor coolant loops, the sys-
tem exhibits a pronounced modal behavior (ref. [58]). In-
where ξ i is the damping ratio for the modal frequency ω i . stead of using a set of damping ratios based on the
complex frequencies and modes, the classical modes
N-1232.2 Orthogonal Modal Damping (Ref. [54]). In and frequencies may be used to avoid the mathematical
the orthogonal modal damping method, the damping ma- complexity. N-1233.1 and N-1233.2 describe acceptable
trix [C] in eq. N-1232(a)(51) is not formulated in advance. methods for the formulation of a nonproportional damp-
After solving the eigenvalue problem, the system or un- ing matrix for a structural system which is composed of
coupled equations are assumed to have the form different materials.

373
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

N-1233.1 Composite Mass Damping and Stiffness (f) Let {ϕ} be the modal matrix of the undamped sys-
Damping. tem of eq. (d)(59) and {ϕ j } be the j th modal vector. With
(a) In the proportional damping, eq. N-1232(a)(51), the aid of the orthogonality conditions, the equation of
the system damping matrix is assumed to be a linear com- motion for the j th mode can be written in the following
bination of the system mass and stiffness matrices, with- form:
out any distinction of the material damping property.
Different sets of proportional constants for mass and stiff-
ness may be assumed to formulate a system damping ma-
ð60Þ
trix. Using the concept of mass and stiffness damping, the
energy dissipation function D for the system can be writ-
ten as follows:
where q ″ j is the j th generalized coordinate. The second
ð58Þ term on the left‐hand side of eq. (60) contains the cou-
pling terms. If these coupling terms are neglected, eq.
(60) reduces to the following equation:
where
[ K] i = stiffness matrix of subsystem i
[M] i = mass matrix of subsystem i ð61Þ
nc = number of subsystems
αi = mass proportional constant of subsystem i
βi = stiffness proportional constant of subsystem i
or

For the systems with constant damping values, α i and β i

are the same for all elements. However, when the system
is composite, which consists of subsystems with different
damping values, α i and β i are different for different sub-
systems but constant within each subsystem. These con- ð62Þ
stants may be established for each subsystem as
discussed in N-1232.1.
(b) This decomposition to allow different damping con-
stants α i and β i to be used for each different subsystem
may be based on the damping values recommended in
Table N-1230-1. Consequently, the effective damping for the jth mode is as
(c) To determine the constants α i and β i , the frequen- follows:
cies and modes of the free undamped vibration of the ith
subsystem are used as a basis. The mathematical process
involved is similar to the one of stiffness and mass damp- ð63Þ
ing described in N-1232.1 except the constants α i and β i
are different for each material or subsystem.
(d) Using eq. (a)(58), the equation of motion of a vis-
or
cously damped system has the following form:

ð59Þ
ð64Þ

(e) Equation (d)(59) may be integrated directly to ob-

tain the response. If normal mode method is used, eq.
(d)(59) may be solved by neglecting the modal coupling (g) Equation (f)(63) can be greatly simplified if either
effect to decouple the equations of motions on the normal α i or β i is assumed to be zero. This assumption may be
mode basis. used in the structural analysis for seismic loads where

374
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

damping is generally assumed proportional either to the is represented by its modal mass, damping, and stiffness
kinetic energy distribution of the subsystems or to the matrices. As each subsystem has a proportional damping,
strain energy stored. the associated modal damping matrix is formulated with-
(h) Once the damping ratio ξ j is known, the analysis can out any approximation. The modal matrices of all the
be carried out using a time history or response spectrum subsystems are assembled and the displacement compat-
technique. ibility at subsystem interfaces are satisfied. The resulting
N-1233.2 Subregional Modal Damping. equations of motion are solved and with the aid of a trans-
(a) In dynamic analysis of soil–structure interaction, formation matrix, actual response is obtained. References
the modal damping value of the soil is often higher than [57], [64], and [65] give the details of the application of
that of the superstructure. In addition, the modal damping this method.
values of the various subsystems, building, loop, etc., of (d) The total damping matrix developed by the preced-
the superstructure may be different. There are several ac- ing methods represents the viscous damping. An accept-
ceptable approximate methods to simulate this subregio- able alternative formulation for damping, derived in ref.
nal modal damping characteristic. These methods are [66], is an equivalent modal damping ratio which repre-
briefly discussed here. One method from ref. [15] is to re- sents the viscous damping in the swaying spring and
late composite damping to absolute displacement eq. the hysteretic damping in the rest of the soil-structure
(65), while another method (ref. [59]) is to relate it to rel- system (the superstructure and the rocking spring).
ative displacement eq. (66):

N-1234 Linear Hysteretic Damping

ð65Þ
(a) In this paragraph the linear hysteretic damping of
the Reid’s model (ref. [48]) will be discussed. This non-
linear model leads to well posed mathematical problems
for transient and steady‐state oscillations of all kinds. The
damping forces of the Reid’s model are assumed to be
ð66Þ
proportional to the internal forces of the structure but
in phase with the associated velocities. By using the Reid’s
damping model, the equation of motion [eq.
where N-1231(a)(45)] becomes:
[K] = total system stiffness matrix
[K ] i = stiffness matrix of ith subsystem
[M ] = total system mass matrix ð67Þ
[M ] i = mass matrix of ith subsystem
nc = number of subsystems
{ϕj} = j th eigenvector
βi = % critical damping associated with i th subsystem where
ξj = % critical damping for jth mode a b s [K ] { X} = the absolute value of each component
(b) Another acceptable approximate method employs g = damping coefficient
mass and stiffness damping for each subsystem. sg n { X′ } = the algebraic sign of the velocity {X ′}
This method calculates coefficients α and β , eq.
N-1232.1(c)(55), for a subsystem such that its modal (b) The Reid’s damping model has the following charac-
damping is simulated in the frequency range of interest. teristics (ref. [67]):
The damping matrices of all the subsystems are as-
(1) the energy loss per cycle in a harmonic motion is
sembled to formulate a total system damping matrix. An-
proportional to the coefficient g and square of the ampli-
other acceptable approach to generate a total damping
tude of displacement and independent of the frequency;
matrix is discussed in ref. [62].
(c) All the methods discussed above are approximate. (2) for light damping (g 2 ≪ 1) the Reid’s damping
More accurate techniques are also acceptable. A more rig- model will be equivalent to the classical modal damping
orous method to formulate a damping matrix for a total with a damping ratio of ξ = g /π for each mode of
system is based on the modal synthesis procedure. This vibration.
procedure is explained by Hurty (ref. [56]). Various inves- (c) Similar to the case of composite mass damping and
tigators have developed another method (ref. [63]) mod- stiffness damping, the damping coefficient g in eq. (a)(67)
ifying this procedure. In this procedure, the total system may also be considered as the elemental basis for a struc-
having nonproportional damping is divided into subsys- tural system which is composed of materials with differ-
tems, each having proportional damping. Each subsystem ent damping values.

375
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

N-1300 FLOW-INDUCED VIBRATION OF structure coupling forces are induced by structural mo-
TUBES AND TUBE BANKS tion, and they occur in both flowing and nonflowing
fluids.
N-1310 INTRODUCTION AND SCOPE
(b) Added mass and added damping have been success-
The flow‐induced vibration (FIV) potential of struc- fully used to characterize the fluid‐structure coupling
tures has been known for a long time (refs. [79] through forces created by the motion of a structure in a nonflow-
[84]). FIV analyses are required to determine the ade- ing fluid (refs. [87] through [93]). Added mass and added
quacy of a design, or in areas of uncertainty, to be aware damping increase the effective mass and damping of a
of the need for experimental verification (refs. [85] and structure vibrating in a fluid. In addition, the presence
[86]) if high reliability of the component is a necessity. of a dense fluid between otherwise unconnected, adjacent
FIV may be due to any one of several excitation mechan- structures can couple their vibrations and result in signif-
isms because power systems include many types of flex- icantly different natural frequencies, mode shapes, and
ible components subject to a variety of fluid flows, such damping from those obtained in a vacuum. For a low den-
as pipe, channel, and jet flows followed by mixing in ple- sity fluid (e.g., air); the added mass is often negligible.
nums and heat exchangers. Since a single component is
Added mass is a function of the geometry of the structural
often subjected to different turbulent flows from several
surface exposed to fluid and the presence of adjacent
directions because of the influence of adjacent structures
structures, if any. Table N-1311-1 gives equations for
and boundaries, FIV analyses for more than one excitation
added mass for two‐dimensional sections and rigid
mechanism is not unusual.
bodies in two‐dimensional motion. These equations were
The quantitative data and correlations available to per-
determined from exact solution of inviscid potential flow
form FIV analyses are unique to the flow geometry cre-
with a moving structural boundary. See N-1400 for dy-
ated by each component. More quantitative information
namics of coupled fluid shells.
and design methods are available for some components
than others. In particular, the circular cylinder has been (c) In a weakly coupled fluid‐structure system, the FIV
studied most. N-1320 through N-1340 of this Appendix excitation mechanism causes small structural motion
are presented to illustrate one or more acceptable steps and the fluid forces induced by the structural motion
for the FIV analysis of arrays of cylinders subject to the can be linearly superimposed onto the fluid excitation
three most significant excitation mechanisms. The gener- forces which are largely independent of the structural
al methods employed are applicable to other types of motion. The fluid‐structure coupling forces can be ex-
components, but the data are specifically for single cylin- pressed to a first order of approximation in terms of
ders and cylindrical arrays. Because of the large number added mass, stiffness, and damping matrices. The fluid ex-
of FIV mechanisms, the methodology of analysis is refer- citation forces can be determined separately from the
enced, but enough information is given to understand a coupling forces either by analysis or by model tests with
mechanism and make design calculations. Because of only the hydraulics simulated.
the developing nature of the subject, more than one set Examples of FIV excitation mechanisms producing
of design data or methods may be recommended with weakly coupled fluid‐structure systems are incident flow
the implication to the designer to use either the more ap- turbulence and turbulent boundary layers over rods,
propriate or the more conservative predictions. plates, and shells (refs. [81] and [82]); some wake flows
Semiempirical correlations based on experimental produced by flow across bluff bodies; and many sources
data, but guided by the equations of motion, often form of acoustic noise (refs. [80] and [95]). In these cases,
the basis of a design method. The state‐of‐the‐art regard- the fluid excitation energy is generated at some point in
ing description of the FIV mechanisms is that many math- the fluid circuit and the structure is the recipient of the
ematical models have been proposed for fluid‐structure energy. The forces due to flow turbulence and attached
coupling forces, but general agreement on the physics of boundary layers typically are broadband random, while
many of the phenomena has not been attained, although
separated wake flows that roll into periodically shed vor-
models simulating the behavior may be available.
tices can produce very discrete frequency forces (refs.
[82], [87], and [97]).
N-1311 Definitions (d) In a strongly coupled fluid‐structure system, the FIV
In this section some commonly used terminologies in excitation mechanism causes the structural motion to be-
flow‐induced vibration analysis are defined and briefly come large enough to change the flow field; some of the
described. fluid forces amplify, rather than inhibit, the structural mo-
(a) Fluid forces can be defined into two broad cate- tion that produced them. Clearly distinguishing between
gories to describe FIV excitation mechanisms (refs. [79] fluid‐structure coupling forces and fluid excitation forces
through [83]). Fluid excitation forces are created by the is difficult in strongly coupled fluid‐structure systems. In
incident flow on a structure, and they would occur, in general, the coupling forces are highly nonlinear func-
some form, even without structural motion. Fluid‐ tions of structural motion and flow velocity.

376
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table N-1311-1
Added Mass for Lateral Acceleration of Structures in a Fluid Reservoir
Geometry Added Mass for Lateral Acceleration (Acceleration left to right) [Note (1)]
1. Circular Section
a
ρ πa 2b [159]

2. Elliptical Section

2a ρ πa 2b [159]

3. Square Section
2a
1.51ρ πa 2b [159]
2a

4. Rectangular Section k ρ πa 2b [159]

a/d k
0.1 2.23
0.2 1.98
2a 0.5 1.70
2.0 1.36
2d 5 1.21
k = 1 for d < < a
5. Sphere

2a /3ρ πa 3 [159]
2

6. Cube
a
0.7ρ a 3 [159]

a a

7. Cylinder Section in an Array of

Fixed Cylinders

D
P
where

D e /D = (1 + 0.5 P /D)P /D

Approximate solution from ref. [160].

See refs. [161] and [162] for arrays of flexible cylinders.
8. Circular Section With a Fluid
Filled Annulus , inner cylinder
R2

R1
, outer cylinder

[163] See N-1451.1.

GENERAL NOTES:
(a) b = length of section; ρ = fluid mass density. (refs. [159], [160], [161], [162], and [163].)
(b) See N-1400 for finite length shells.
NOTE:
(1) The bracketed numbers refer to the references list following this Appendix.

377
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(e) Fluid‐elastic instability of closely packed heat ex- of nickel, copper, and steel is low, less than 0.1% critical
changer tube bundles (refs. [80], [81], [82], and [88]) is damping. Damping at joints and supports dominates the
an example of a strongly coupled fluid‐structure system. damping of tubes that are supported by passing through
The motion of each tube affects the fluid forces and the oversized holes in support baffles. Table N-1311-2 gives
motion of the other tubes to produce self‐excitation. general guidelines for damping in flow‐induced vibration.
The occurrence of the instability has been interpreted Testing is required to establish more precise estimates of
as due to adverse changes in the structural mass, damp- damping for specific designs.
ing, and fluid‐structure coupling force (ref. [88]). How-
ever, most of the expressions for predicting the onset of N-1312 Nomenclature
instability are based on compilations of direct measure-
ments of the critical velocities at the onset of instability. Cn = reduced damping in nth mode
(f) Cross flow is a flow perpendicular to the structural CL = lift coefficient
longitudinal axis. Cross flow is one example where an D = cylinder diameter
FIV mechanism is produced that can create either a E = Young’s modulus
weakly or a strongly coupled fluid‐structure system. Vor- F = force
tex shedding in the wake of a tube in cross flow produces fn = natural frequency of nth vibration mode, hertz
both fluid excitation forces and fluid‐structure coupling fs = frequency of periodic vortex shedding, hertz
forces that amplify structural motion. For ideal cross flow, Gf = single‐sided power spectral density of the forcing
where a long, smooth surface tube is isolated in uniform function, in (force/length)2 per Hz
(2–D) cross flow with little or no turbulence in the ap- = G f spectrum for the i th span of a multi‐span tube
proaching flow stream, very periodic, two‐dimensional
Gy = single‐sided power spectral density of response
vortices are shed. These vortices produce alternating lift
Hj = transfer function of jth vibration mode
forces normal to the tube axis and flow and are nearly
I = area moment of inertia
as large as the steady, flow direction drag forces, if the
J2 = joint acceptance
Reynolds number, based on the tube diameter, is below
= cross acceptance for the j th and k th vibration
2 × 105 (refs. [82], [87], and [89]). If the vortex shedding
modes
frequency is sufficiently different from the structural nat-
= acceptance for the ith span
ural frequencies, the alternating lift forces act as fluid ex-
citation forces only. However, if the vortex shedding
ℓ c = axial correlation length
frequency and one of the structural natural frequencies
are sufficiently close to each other and the fluid excitation
forces can produce large enough motion, then coupled = 2 r (x ′ ) d x ′ where r (x ′ ) is the correlation
fluid‐structure forces occur, which apparently further am-
plify the motion. Enough experimental data are available function and x ′ is the separation distance
to bound the fluid excitation forces, but the representa- = correlation length in the ith span
tion of the coupled fluid‐structure forces is still being re- Le = cylinder length subject to vortex shedding
searched. Most of the representations are based on highly Li = span length
phenomenological models that stimulate, to various de- m = mass per unit length
grees, a small amount of data covering only a narrow mA = added fluid mass per unit length
range of idealized conditions. mc = contained fluid mass per unit length
(g) The joint acceptance is a measure of the probability mf = cylinder displaced fluid mass/length
that a structure vibrating in one mode will remain in the Mj = modal mass
same mode when excited by a random force; the cross ac- Mn = effective modal mass/length for n th vibration
ceptance is a measure of the probability that a structure mode
vibrating in one mode will change to another mode when ms = structural mass per unit length
excited by a random force. For many applications only the mt = total mass per unit length of tube
joint acceptance is assumed to be important. When mode = mA + mc + ms
shapes are normalized to unity, the sum of the joint accep- n = vibration mode, n = 1 is fundamental mode
tances is equal to 1. (See ref. [112].) Therefore, the as- P = tube pitch
sumption that the joint acceptance is equal to 1 gives = distance between tube centers
conservative estimates of structural responses. p = pressure
(h) Damping is the result of energy dissipation during q = dynamic pressure, (1/2)ρ V 2
structural vibration. Damping limits resonant vibration Re = Reynolds number, VD/ν
amplitude and delays the onset of fluid elastic instability. Rp = Cross correlation of the pressure field
Damping is the result of material damping within a struc- S = Strouhal number, f s D/V
ture, motion of trapped fluid within joints, and impact, Sf = cross spectral density of the forcing function on a
scraping, and friction within joints. The material damping cylinder, (force/length)2 per Hz

378
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table N-1311-2
Guidelines for Damping of Flow-Induced Vibration
Critical Damping Ratio, ζ
Low Typical Design
Description of Tube Installation Fluid Surrounding Tube [Note (1)] Value High [Note (2)]
Thermowells and single span tubes supported Liquid and gas 0.0005 0.002 0.005
by welded or rolled in ends
Multispan heat exchanger tubes supported by Low density gas 0.008 0.017 0.03 [Note (3)]
passing through oversized holes in plates Water and other liquids 0.01 0.02 0.03 [Note (3)]

GENERAL NOTE: This table applies to metallic tubes with 0.5 in. (13 mm) to 2.0 in. (50 mm) outside diameter. For tubes
passing through oversized holes in support plates, this table applies to typical diametrical clearance between tube outside
diameter and tube support inside diameter of 0.010 in. (0.2 mm) to 0.030 in. (0.8 mm).
NOTES:
(1) Low value: For midspan rms vibration amplitude less than 1% of tube diameter and smaller than the diametrical clear-
ance between the tube and the support plate.
(2) High value: For midspan rms amplitudes comparable to or larger than the diametrical clearance between the tube and
the support plate. Tube wear can result.
(3) Critical damping ratios 0.03 < ζ < 0.05 can be used if justified by applicable experimental data.

Sfo = power spectral density of the forcing function shedding process have shown (refs. [94] and [95]) that
Sp = cross spectral density of the pressure field the frequency in hertz of the alternating lift force can be
Sy = power spectral density of cylinder response expressed as:
t = time
Uc = convection velocity ð68Þ
V = mean velocity
x = axial distance Some common types of bodies or structures for which
= maximum displacement in n th vibration mode vortex shedding occurs are shown in Figure N-1321-2.
= mean square response of a cylinder The following discussions are based on the circular cylin-
αn = amplification factor in nth vibration mode der; however, the concepts apply equally well to other
γn = mode shape factor in nth vibration mode bluff bodies.
Γ = coherence of forcing function on a cylinder The oscillating lift force produced on an isolated single
Γi = coherence for ith span cylinder of diameter D and length L by uniform cross flow
δm = mass‐damping parameter, 2πξ n mt/ρ D 2 can be expressed as (refs. [96] and [97]):
δn = log decrement for n th vibration mode
= 2πξ n ð69Þ
ξn = fraction of critical damping for nth mode
ρ = fluid mass density where C L , f s , and J are functions of the Reynolds number
ϕn = n th vibration mode shape R e and must be determined experimentally. In uniform
= maximum value of ϕ n cross flow, the energy of vortex shedding occurs over a
θ = angle between direction of flow and normal to very narrow frequency band with a center frequency f s ,
tube axis except over a transition band of Reynolds number
ν = kinematic viscosity (2 × 105 to 3 × 106) where the character of the frequency
ω = frequency, radian/sec content may vary from almost periodic to completely

N-1320 VORTEX SHEDDING

Figure N-1321-1
Vortices Shed From a Circular Cylinder
N-1321 Vortex Shedding From a Fixed Bluff Body
For a bluff body in uniform cross flow, the wake behind
the body is no longer regular, but contains distinct vor-
tices of the pattern shown in Figure N-1321-1 for a circu-
lar cylinder. The vortices are shed alternatively from each
side of the body in a regular manner and give rise to an
alternating lift force. Experimental studies of this vortex

379
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

cylinders. Motion of the cylinder at the frequency of vor-

Figure N-1321-2
tex shedding substantially increases the correlation
Some Typical Cross Sections of Bluff Bodies
length (refs. [82] and [87]) as discussed in N-1323 and
That Can Experience Vortex Shedding
N-1324.
Vortex shedding also induces a force in the streamwise
or drag direction. The drag force occurs at twice the vor-
tex shedding frequency for single cylinders (ref. [87]).
However, the magnitude of the oscillating drag force is ty-
pically an order of magnitude smaller than the oscillating
lift force.

N-1322 Practical Cross Flow

The case of ideal cross flow is rarely found except in the
laboratory. Many practical conditions reduce the effec-
tiveness and strength of vortex shedding as an excitation
mechanism:
(a) If the body is located in a turbulent flow, or if the
tube surface is rough, the turbulence tends to widen the
band of shedding frequencies and decrease the energy
at the dominant shedding frequency (ref. [129]).
(b) If the cylinder is inclined to the flow, the shedding
frequency can be adequately predicted by employing
the component of flow velocity normal to the cylinder axis

ð71Þ

where θ is the angle between the direction of flow and the

normal to the cylinder axis. Inclined flow tends to reduce
the magnitude of the vortex shedding forces (ref. [98]).
(c) Spanwise variations in flow velocity imply that the
vortex shedding frequency also varies in the spanwise di-
rection. This effect will generally reduce the magnitude of
the net vortex shedding excitation.
(d) There is some evidence (refs. [99] and [100]) that
vortex shedding does not occur in two‐phase flow and
that vortex shedding is only a concern in single‐phase
flows.
random. The measured Strouhal number is S ≈ 0.2 for (e) While the vortex shedding characteristics discussed
103 < R e < 2 × 105; for larger R e , experimental values above have general applicability, the effects of adjacent
of S and C L show considerable scatter. bodies have not been specifically included. Studies of
The alternating vortex fluid forces are not generally two (ref. [101]) or more circular cylinders show that vor-
correlated over the entire cylinder length L . As a conse- tex shedding does occur, but its character is very sensitive
quence, two limiting cases of the joint acceptance exist to the relative location and spacing of the cylinders. For
for a uniform rigid‐body‐mode (ref. [97]). the important case of tube arrays, the values of S , J , and
C L to be employed in eq. N-1321(69) are much more un-
certain than for single cylinders, as is evident by the con-
siderable scatter in the experimental data (refs. [100],
ð70Þ
[102], [103], [104], [105], [139], and [140]).

N-1323 Flexible Cylinders

The correlation length in the lift direction for stationary When the vortex shedding frequency f s is sufficiently
cylinders has been found to be approximately 3 to 7 dia- different from the structural natural frequencies, a condi-
meters (3D < ℓ c < 7D ), for 103 < R e < 2 × 105 (ref. [87]). tion called off‐resonance, the representation of the vortex
For larger Reynolds numbers, the correlation lengths for shedding lift force by F given in eq. N-1321(69) is valid,
stationary cylinders can be expected to be even smaller and is conservative if C L = 1 and J = 1 is chosen. This con-
because the attached boundary layer becomes fully turbu- servative representation of the force can be extended to
lent. J 2 is usually much less than 1 for long stationary nonuniform loading, and modal response can be

380
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

employed to simplify the analysis of cylinders where The consequences of synchronization are many. As the
many modes are active. Normally, off‐resonance response flow velocity is either increased or decreased so that the
is small. However, as resonance is approached, large mo- vortex shedding frequency approaches the structure fre-
tions are encountered. quency, the following will occur.
In the case of a single flexible or resiliently supported (a) The vortex shedding frequency shifts to the struc-
tube, once vibration begins the shedding frequency and tural natural frequency, i.e., it synchronizes with or
the tube natural frequency can become synchronized if “locks‐in” to the structural frequency even if the flow ve-
the two are sufficiently close. For a spring‐supported cyl- locity or the structural frequency is varied within the
inder in an air stream, it was shown (ref. [106]) that the range of sychronization as indicated in Figure N-1323-1.
velocity range over which synchronization persists de- (b) The spanwise correlation of the vortex shedding
pends upon the damping parameter, m t δ n /ρD 2. In Figure forcing function increases rapidly as structural response
N-1323-1, the shaded area is the region of synchroniza- increases.
tion. The ordinate, V /f n D, is a reduced velocity, where (c) The lift force becomes a function of structural
f n is the natural frequency of the spring‐mounted cylin- amplitude.
der. Note, in particular, that with increasing m t δ n /ρ D 2 (d) The drag force on the structure increases.
the reduced velocity range over which synchronization (e) The strength of the shed vortices increases.
persists decreases, and no synchronization occurs for m t Within the synchronization band, substantial resonant
δ n /ρ D 2 > 32. Outside the shaded area, the cylinder ex- vibration in lightly damped structures often occurs. Vi-
periences an alternating lift force at the vortex shedding bration amplitudes up to three diameters peak‐to‐peak
frequency for a stationary cylinder, as given previously have been observed in dense fluids, such as water, over
in eq. N-1321(69).

Figure N-1323-1
Synchronization of the Vortex Shedding Frequency and the Tube Natural Frequency for a Single,
Flexibly-Mounted Circular Cylinder

GENERAL NOTE: Synchronization occurs within the shaded region. (Ref. [106])

381
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

cables and tubing. The vibrations are predominantly The reduced damping C n is calculated according to
transverse to the flow and they are self‐limiting (refs.
[82], [87], and [94]).
ð76Þ
Large‐amplitude, synchronized vibrations in the drag
direction have been observed for a single cylinder in
water. These oscillations initiate at relatively low flow ve- where ξ n = δ n /2π is the fraction of critical damping mea-
locities corresponding to subharmonic frequencies of vor- sured in air and M n is the generalized mass
tex shedding, i.e., at 1/4, 1/3, or 1/2 the flow velocity required
for synchronization according to eq. N-1321(68) (refs.
ð77Þ
[107] and [108]). However, the synchronization in the
drag direction is not as strong as in the lift direction,
and usually occurs only for lightly damped structures in with ϕ n the n th mode shape function and m t (x ) is the
dense fluids (refs. [87] and [110]). Lock‐in has not been cylinder mass per unit length. The range L e in the de-
observed in two‐phase flow or deep (more than a few nominator implies that the integration is over only the re-
rows) inside a closely spaced tube bundle. gion of the cylinder length subject to lock‐in cross flow.
Note that m t is calculated according to:

ð78Þ
N-1324 Design Procedures for a Circular
Cylinder For an isolated cylinder, m A is the displaced fluid mass. If
Whenever possible, lock‐in operating conditions should sections of the cylinder are close to other bodies, then the
be avoided, but complex designs often make this impossi- possibility of increased added mass and fluid damping
ble. Thus, criteria are given for which lock‐in can be must be taken into account (refs. [81], [82], [90] to [93]).
avoided, and off‐resonance structural dynamic analysis N-1324.2 Vortex-Induced Response. Off resonance,
can be employed, as well as design procedures to calcu- the response can be calculated using standard methods
late the response during lock‐in. (ref. [96]) of fo rced ‐vibration analysis and eq .
N-1321(69) for the forcing function (refs. [82] and
N-1324.1 Avoiding Lock-In Synchronization. Lock‐in [89]). The resultant response is ordinarily small. If oper-
for a single cylinder can be avoided by one of the follow- ating conditions are such that lock‐in cannot be avoided
ing four methods (refs. [82], [106], [108], and [109]). For or suppressed, then the resonant vortex induced re-
tube arrays, only (a), (b), and (c) are applicable methods, sponse must be calculated. Three approaches for calculat-
and V must be the flow velocity in the minimum gap ing the response are recommended for three classes of
(P – D). structures and flows: single uniform cylinder in uniform
(a) If the reduced velocity for the fundamental vibra- flow, tube arrays, and nonuniform cylinders in nonuni-
tion mode (n = 1) satisfies: form flow.
(a) Uniform Structure and Flow. If a uniform cylinder is
ð72Þ subject to uniform cross flow over its span, then both the
vortex shedding frequency and the vortex force are con-
then both lift and drag direction lock‐in are avoided.
stant over the span of the cylinder. The periodic vortex in-
(b) If for a given vibration mode the reduced damping duced lift force is given by eq. N-1321(69). At lock-in, the
is large enough vortex shedding frequency equals the natural frequency
of the n th vibration mode, fs = fn, and the cylinder re-
ð73Þ
sponse is given by (refs. [82] and [89])
then lock‐in will be suppressed in that vibration mode.
(c) If for a given vibration mode ð79Þ

ð74Þ
This equation provides a conservative upper bound esti-
and mate to the amplitude of periodic vortex‐induced vibra-
tion if the lift coefficient is taken as unity, C L = 1, and
ð75Þ the vortex shedding is fully correlated along the span of
the cylinder, J = 1. Other values of C L and J may be used
then lift direction lock‐in is avoided and drag direction in circumstances where experimental data are available.
lock‐in is suppressed. However, eq. (79) with C L = 1 and J = 1 has been found
(d) If the structural natural frequency falls in the ranges to give overly conservative predictions owing to the ten-
f n < 0.7f s or f n > 1.3f s , then lock‐in in the lift direction is dency of the actual lift coefficient to decrease at vibration
avoided in the nth mode. amplitudes exceeding 0.5 diameter and the lack of perfect

382
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

spanwise correlation at lower amplitudes. To obtain less Procedures (1) through (4) are illustrated in refs. [89]
conservative predictions, three semiempirical nonlinear and [112]. For a uniform cylinder in uniform cross flow,
methods are given in Table N-1324.2(a)-1. The mode assumption (4) of complete correlation and C L = 1 gives
shape factor γ generally varies between 1.0 and 1.3 (ref. overly conservative predictions. Other values for C L
[82]) and C n is determined according to eq. may be used where experimental data are available.
N-1324.1(d)(76) using ξ n determined in air.
(b) Within Tube Arrays. Coherent vortex shedding has N-1330 FLUID-ELASTIC INSTABILITY
been found to exist only in the first few rows in arrays Many FIV mechanisms exist wherein as energy sup-
of cylinders with center‐to‐center spacing less than 2 dia- plied to the system is increased, usually as increased flow
meters, and the design procedures for a single cylinder velocity, a critical value is attained at which a large in-
are applicable using the velocity in the minimum gap crease in response occurs. Continued increases in the sup-
(P – D ). Within the array vortex shedding exists over a plied energy results in continued static or dynamic
broad range of frequencies rather than at a single distinct divergences (rapid increases) of the response. In general,
frequency. The response within the array is generally less fluid‐elastic instability is a result of strong coupling be-
than that of a comparable single cylinder. The techniques tween the structure and the fluid.
that have been developed to predict vibration within the
array are based on the theory of random vibration and N-1331 Instability of Tube Arrays in Cross Flow
are given in N-1340. Fluid flow across an array of elastic tubes can induce a
(c) Nonuniform Structures and Flow. Many cylindrical dynamic instability that can result in very large amplitude
structures have nonuniform distribution of mass and vibrations once a critical cross flow velocity is exceeded.
stiffness, and they are exposed to flow velocities that vary Often, motion is limited only by tube‐to‐tube impacting.
over the span. In this case, only a part of the span of struc- The flow of fluid over the tubes results in both fluid exci-
ture will resonate with vortex shedding and contribute to tation and fluid‐structure coupling forces on the tubes.
the excitation. The fluid‐structure coupling excitation forces fall into sev-
One method for treating nonuniform structures in non‐ eral groups
uniform flows is (a) forces that vary approximately linearly with dis-
(1) determine the natural frequencies and mode placement of a tube from its equilibrium position (dis-
shapes of the structure. placement mechanisms) (ref. [113]).
(2) determine the spanwise distribution of the flow. (b) fluctuations in the net drag forces induced by the
(3) identify portions of the structure that can reso- oscillating tube’s relative velocity with respect to the
nate with vortex shedding for each mode. This can be mean flow (fluid damping mechanism) (ref. [88]).
done by calculating the spanwise distribution of the vor- (c) combinations of the above forces that exhibit step
tex shedding frequency and estimating the potential for changes as a certain amplitude is exceeded because of
resonance by a band of plus or minus 30% from this the abrupt shift in the point of flow separation (jet switch
frequency. mechanism) (Ref. [114]). Instability may result from any
(4) Apply a lift force given by eq. N-1321(69) with or all of these fluid forces which are functions of the tube
f n = f s and C L = 1 to those segments of the span that motion.
are resonant. The general characteristics of tube vibration during in-
stability are as follows.
(d) Tube Vibration Amplitude. Once a critical cross flow
velocity is exceeded, vibration amplitude increases very
Table N-1324.2(a)-1
rapidly with flow velocity V , usually as V n where n = 4
Semiempirical Correlations for Predicting
or more, compared with an exponent in the range
Resonant Vortex-Induced Vibration
1.5 < n < 2.5 below the instability threshold. This can
Amplitude
be seen in Figure N-1331-1, which shows the response
Reference Predicted Resonant Amplitude of an array of metallic tubes to water flow. The initial
hump is attributable to vortex shedding that tends to pro-
[111] duce larger amplitudes in water flow than air flows.
(e) Vibration Behavior With Time. Often the large ampli-
tude vibrations are not steady in time, but rather beat
[82] with amplitudes rising and falling about a mean value in
a pseudorandom fashion (ref. [115]).
(f) Synchronization Between Tubes. Most often the
[110] tubes do not move as individuals, but rather move with
neighboring tubes in somewhat synchronized orbits, as
shown in Figure N-1331-2. This behavior has been ob-
served in tests both in water and air (refs. [113], [115],

383
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure N-1331-1
Response of a Tube Bank to Cross Flow (Ref. [115])

384
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

[116], and [117]), with orbit shapes ranging from near The relationship between the parameters can be inves-
circles to near straight lines. As the tubes whirl in their tigated theoretically or experimentally. One general form
oval orbits they extract energy from the fluid. The stiff- that has been used to fit experimental data is
ness mechanism requires motion of the adjacent tubes,
but the damping mechanism does not. ð80Þ
(g) Influence of Structural Variations. Restricting the
motion or introducing frequency differences between where C and the indices a and b are functions of the tube
one or more tubes often increases the critical velocity array geometry. Experimental data suggest that a and b
for instability (refs. [115], [116], and [118]). Such in- fall in the range 0.0 < a, b < 1.0 (refs. [115], [116],
creases are generally no greater than about 40%. Often [119], [138], and [139]).
the onset of instability is more gradual in a tube bank with N-1331.2 Recommended Formula. Mean values for
tube‐to‐tube frequency differences than in a bank with the onset of instability can be established by fitting semi-
identical tubes which are free to vibrate. empirical correlations to experimental data. The correla-
tion form chosen is
N-1331.1 Prediction of the Critical Velocity. Dimen-
sional analysis considerations imply that the onset of in-
stability is governed by the following dimensionless ð81Þ
groups: the mass ratio m t /ρ D 2 ; the reduced velocity
V /f D ; the damping ratio ξ n , measured in the fluid; the where
pitch to diameter ratio P /D ; the array geometry (see
Figure N-1331-3), and the Reynolds number VD/ν . In this f n = natural frequencies of the immersed tube
section, V is the flow velocity in the gaps between the V c = critical cross flow velocity
tubes, and is determined by the product of P /(P – D ) For uniform cross flow, the tubes will be stable if the re-
and the (approach) flow velocity that would occur if the presentative cross flow velocity V is less than the critical
tubes were not present. Note the added mass part of m t velocity V c . If the flow is nonuniform over the tube
may be much larger than the displaced fluid mass because
of the confining effect of adjacent tubes (refs. [81], [90],
and [92]). Also, for most cases, the flow is fully turbulent
(VD/ν > 2000) and the Reynolds number is not expected
to play a major role in the instability. In such cases, the
reduced critical velocity for the onset of instability can
be expressed as a function of the remaining nondimen-
sional parameters.

Figure N-1331-2
Tube Vibration Patterns at Fluid-Elastic Instability for a Four-Tube Row (Ref. [118])

385
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure N-1331-3
Tube Arrangements

386
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

lengths, an equivalent uniform cross flow gap velocity can All the practical features discussed above tend to raise
be defined as either the maximum cross flow velocity, or the critical flow velocity. Thus, the data base of Figure
the modal weighted velocity: N-1331-4 can be used to determine a conservative criter-
ion for avoiding fluid‐elastic instabilities of tube arrays: if
ð82Þ
the design equivalent uniform cross flow gap velocity [eq.
N-1331.2(82)] is less than the critical velocity [eq.
N-1331.2(81)] computed with the suggested design val-
where V(x ) is the cross flow velocity at each axial location ues defined by the solid line (C = 2.4, a = 0.5) in Figure
of the tube. The tubes will be stable if V e < V c for all N-1331-4 and with a damping ratio of 0.5% in gas, or
modes. 1.5% in “wet” steam or liquid, then instability is almost
The available 170 data points for onset of instability certainly not a problem, and scale model testing will not
(ref. [120]) are shown in Figure N-1331-4. In the range be necessary. Otherwise, more accurate values of C and
m (2πξ n )/ρ D 2 > 0.7, there are sufficient data to permit fit- the immersed tube’s damping ratios, or the critical velo-
ting of eq. (81) to data for each array type. The mean val- city itself, must be determined by either model testing
ues of C are or from operational experience.

Rotated Rotated
Triangle Triangle Square Square All
N-1340 TURBULENCE
Cmean 4.5 4.0 5.8 3.4 4.0 In general, the coolant flow paths and flow rates pro-
mote and maintain turbulent flows that are optimal for
purposes of heat transfer, but provide sources for struc-
tural excitation. Also, turbulence in the flow can affect
the existence and strength of other excitation mechan-
isms associated with separating boundary layer flows
(wakes), as discussed in N-1320 on vortex shedding. This
section will concentrate on turbulence as a source of fluid
Based on theory for the displacement mechanism (Ref.
excitation forces.
[113]), which is active in this parameter range, a = 0.5
was chosen in these fits. For m (2πξ n )/ρ D 2 < 0.7, where
the fluid damping mechanism is primarily active, neither N-1341 Random Excitation
the theory nor data are sufficient to establish values of C Where turbulent flow comes into contact with the sur-
and a in eq. (81). Conservative estimates of the mean val- face of a structure some of the momentum in the flow is
ues of V c /f n D for m t (2πξ n )/ρ D 2 < 0.7 can be obtained converted into fluctuating pressures. In addition to any
using eq. (81) with a = 0.5 and the mean C given in the forces produced by the mean flow component, random
table above. The use of eq. (81) with a = 0.5 and surface pressure fluctuations are produced by the turbu-
C = 3.3 has been recommended (refs. [80], [100]) for lent velocity component. The time history of the surface
the entire mass damping parameter range of Figure pressure fluctuations, like the flow turbulence, is complex
N-1331-4. and amenable to description only on a statistical basis.
N-1331.3 Suggested Inputs. Accurately predicting However, the fluctuating pressure and the resulting
the critical velocity requires scale model testing to deter- flow‐induced response usually can be regarded as ergodic
mine the value of C and the damping ratio in each appli- and analyzed with a finite‐time record not dependent
cation, because practical flow and structural geometries upon the time origin.
contain features nonexistent in the simpler, controlled For purposes of structural analysis and design, most
laboratory tests used to establish the data base of Figure useful information on the fluctuating pressures becomes
N-1331-4 (ref. [120]). Usually, industrial tube arrays available once the spatial spectral densities of the pres-
(bundles) involve multiple spans with intermediate sup- sure field, S p (x 1 , x 2 , Ω), are determined. The spectral den-
ports provided by plates with holes slightly larger than sity is the Fourier transform of the cross correlation of the
the tube diameter. Also, flow may pass around the edge pressure field
of the bundle and does not have the pure cross flow direc-
tion shown in Figure N-1331-3, even within the bundle.
Furthermore, when the vibration amplitude is small, such
as that experienced during subcritical vibration, not all
support plates are active. Damping ratios in this vibration ð83Þ
mode are typically small, from 0.1% in gas to about 1% in
steam or water. When the vibration amplitude is large, as
characterized by the onset of instability, support plate‐to‐
tube interaction greatly increases the damping ratio
which can reach 5% or more. and provides information about the average products of

387
 Figure N-1331-4
Stability Diagram

ASME BPVC.III.A-2017
388
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

components of the pressure p (x , t ) as a function of the The mode shapes ϕ j (x) satisfy the orthogonality relation
circular frequency Ω in radian/sec for every possible pair-
ing of structural points, x 1 and x 2 , including the same
ð85Þ
point. S p has units of (pressure)2 (second). The frequency
content of the spectra are band limited, from zero to a
maximum frequency determined by the turbulence where M j is the generalized mass, defined here to have
source. The magnitude of the power spectra increases the same dimensions as m t . Thus, if m t is constant,
when the energy of the turbulence at frequency Ω in- M j = m t and the orthogonality condition reduces to
creases. The size of a region of the structure over which
the pressures at different points are coherent, or has ð86Þ
some cause‐effect relationship, is interpreted as a correla-
tion length of the pressure field, or the size of the asso-
ciated turbulent eddy (ref. [82]). The transfer function for the j th mode is
Only select parts of the surface pressures are effective
in exciting dynamic structural response: those parts with ð87Þ
frequency content in narrow bands centered on the struc-
tural natural frequencies and with correlation lengths where ω j and ξ j are the modal natural frequency and
similar in size to the spatial wavelength of the associated
damping, respectively. The acceptance integral is
vibration mode (ref. [122]). The resulting structural re-
sponse occurs in the narrow frequency bands with ran-
dom amplitudes, and the widths of the frequency bands ð88Þ
are determined by the system damping. Knowledge of
the surface pressure statistics enables prediction of the where the complex coherence function is
associated structural response statistics utilizing the
probabilistic theory of structural dynamics. ð89Þ

N-1342 Structural Response of Tubes and Beams and S f is the cross spectral density of the turbulent for-
N-1342.1 Response to Homogeneous Turbulence cing function per unit length between two different points
Excitation. The assumption of a linear structure is justifi- on the cylinder’s length, x = x 1 and x = x 2 . When x 1 = x 2 = x ,
able for the small vibrations associated with the turbu- S f (x , x , ω ) = S f o (ω ) is the power spectral density (or
lence excitation of weakly coupled fluid‐structure autospectrum) that is independent of location for a homo-
systems, and the linear structural dynamic analysis theo- geneous pressure field. The joint acceptance J j j (ω ) re-
ry for arbitrary random loading of beams is highly devel- flects the relative effectiveness of the forcing function to
oped. Since the energy dissipation mechanism of excite the jth vibration mode while the cross acceptance
turbulent flow rapidly smooths disturbances caused by J j k (ω ), j ≠ k , reflects contributions due to coupling be-
the structural boundaries of and in the flow channel, the tween different modes. In general, the responses in two
statistical character of turbulent cross flow often varies different modes are dependent upon each other.
gradually over the total length of select spans of single
tubes and tube bundles, especially within the bundles. The mean square response is the most useful
Thus, in many applications, the assumption of a uniform measure for the amplitude or stress and strain design,
mean velocity and homogeneous turbulence is and is found by integration of the power spectral density
reasonable. of the response, S y (x, ω ) = S y (x , x, ω ) over the frequency
Assuming a homogeneous and ergodic pressure field, band, or
the equations of motion can be uncoupled to allow solu-
tion by modal analysis (see N-1222). The expression for
ð90Þ
the power spectral density of the cylinder response is
(ref. [123])
The distribution of the positive and negative peaks in dis-
ð84Þ
placement has been found for the fundamental mode of a
rod in parallel flow to be Gaussian (refs. [81], [82], and
[124]). Assuming a Gaussian fluctuating pressure distri-
bution, a Rayleigh distribution is expected for the abso-
lute amplitude of response (refs. [82] and [125]).
Based on physical reasoning and experimental data, the
complex coherence function of the homogeneous turbu-
lence pressure field for the tubes in cross flow has been
characterized as (refs. [122] and [126])

389
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

in eq. N-1342.1(91), and the joint acceptance integral of

eq. N-1342.1(88), with i = j = 1, reduces to (refs. [112]
ð91Þ
and [127])

ð95Þ
where l c ≪ L is the correlation length, which is a measure
of the coherence range of the turbulent pressure field; U c
The correlation length l c in most cross flows over a tube
is the convection velocity, or the velocity at which the tur-
(circular cylinder) is no more than three diameters (see
bulent eddies move with the flow; and θ is the angle be-
N-1322). Also, although eq. (95) were derived for the fun-
tween the direction of the flow and the normal to the axis
damental mode of the transverse vibrations of a rigid,
of the tube. Note that U c /sin θ is the phase velocity of the
spring‐supported cylinder, they can be used to estimate
pressure signal along the tube.
the joint acceptance of the fundamental mode of cylinders
In the case of lightly damped structures with well‐ which are simply supported or clamped at both ends. Of
separated modes, cross modal contribution to the re- course, in determining the RMS response with eq.
sponse can be ignored, and eq. (90) can be analytically N-1342.1(94), the mode shapes corresponding to the ac-
evaluated to be (refs. [112] and [125]): tual boundary conditions and normalized according to eq.
N-1342.1(86) are used. For other boundary conditions
ð92Þ and higher modes, the joint acceptance integral will have
to be evaluated either numerically (most cases) or in
In the second equality, the response is expressed in terms closed form from eq. N-1342.1(91). Since ≤ 1.0, (ref.
of the more commonly used engineering variables fre- [127]), an upper bound response estimate can be found
quency f (in Hz) and the single‐sided power spectral den- by setting all the J j j = 1.0 in eq. N-1342.1(94).
sity G as a function of f , where
The random characteristics of the forces exerted on the
tubes by the turbulent flow must be obtained from tests.
ð93Þ Two expressions for the power spectral density of the tur-
bulent force per unit length on tubes in a tube array are:

Under the same assumption of light structural damping ð96Þ

(ref. [100]) and

ð94Þ

ð97Þ
where G f (f j ) is the single‐sided power spectral density in
(force/length)2/Hz generated by the turbulent pressure (ref. [128]) where the gap velocity V g is related to the ve-
field at the natural frequency f j of the j th vibration mode. locity upstream of the tubes, V ∞ , by

N-1343 Design Procedures for Tubes and Beams ð98Þ

in Turbulent Cross Flow
The coefficient C R (f) in eq. (96) has units of sec−1∕2 and is
In most situations, the component of turbulent flow given in Figure N-1343-1 as a function of the frequency f .
normal to the axis of a cylinder is a more dominant exci- Therefore, the application of eq. (96) should be limited to
tation mechanism than the parallel component. The ex- the parameter range for which the data were taken,
ception occurs when the flow direction is parallel or namely, high turbulent water flow (1 to 2 m/sec) entering
barely inclined to the cylinder axis. Thus, cross flow anal- closely spaced heat exchanger tubes of 12 to 19 mm in
ysis using the component of flow normal to the cylinder diameter. The decrease in C R (f ) with penetration into
should always be made, supplemented by the parallel the bundle is attributed to the highly turbulent inlet flow
flow analyses of N-1345 at small angles of inclination. and possible vortex excitation observed in the first few
The theory in the subsections that follow can be applied tube rows. Data for the nondimensional lift coefficient
to one‐dimensional structures in general, but the specific C L (f ) of eq. (97) have not been obtained for as many tube
information on the statistics of the pressure field must be array configurations (refs. [141] and [142]), but use of
limited to tubes (circular cylinders) until adequate infor- this alternative expression may predict less conservative
mation is available for other beam cross sections. responses (ref. [142]).
N-1343.1 Uniform Cross Flow. In the simplest case of For an isolated tube in cross flow, which is not subject
uniform cross flow over the entire length of a lightly to conditions of lock‐in vortex shedding (see N-1323), the
damped, rigid cylinder with an evenly distributed total power spectral density G f (f ) and the correlation length
mass and spring supports at both ends, ϕ = L −1/2, θ = 0 are strong functions of the turbulence created in the

390
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure N-1343-1
Random Excitation Coefficient for Arrays in Cross Flow (Ref. [100])

incident flow stream by the upstream structures. Rela- These conditions often exist when baffles are used to
tively small amounts of turbulence can cause significant channel different density flows in the interior of the pres-
reductions in the effectiveness of vortex shedding as an sure vessels (heat exchangers, reactors, etc.). The mean
excitation mechanism, and all periodicity can be elimi- square response for such conditions can be determined
nated with sufficiently strong incident turbulence. For by simple generalizations of the results given in
given turbulence intensities and scale lengths of the inci- N-1342.1 for homogeneous turbulence excitation.
dent flow, G f (f ) is available (ref. [129]) and the correla- Since the uniform cross flow over the span of length L i
tion length l c may be approximated by the scale length is uncorrelated with the uniform cross flows over the
of the incident flow. In the absence of specific information
other spans, in eq. N-1342.1(94) can be calculated
about the incident flow, the random turbulence coeffi-
cient for the upstream tube in Figure N-1343-1 can be (ref. [127]) by summing the products of the locally de-
used to estimate G f (f ) for most isolated tubes in cross
fined spectra and joint acceptances over all the
flow because of the wide variety of incident flow condi-
tions contained in the data base. In the latter case, the ve- spans i over which there is significant cross flow. Thus,
locity used in eqs. (96) and (97) should be the free stream the mean square response becomes
velocity of the flow.
If upstream structures produce well defined vortices,
strong excitation mechanisms may be created on isolated ð99Þ
cylinders more than twenty diameters downstream (ref.
[130]). Such configurations should be avoided.
N-1343.2 Multiple Spans of Uniform Cross Flow. In where
many applications, a cylinder is subject to one or more
partial spans of uniform, but different, velocity and den-
ð100Þ
sity cross flows that are uncorrelated with each other or
with the flow over the remainder of the cylinder’s length.

391
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

are determined with eq. N-1342.1(88) using that substituting = 1.0 into eq. N-1343.2(99), for all spans
and all modes where lock‐in cannot be avoided or sup-
part of ϕ j , denoted by , that is active over the ith span pressed according to N-1324.1.
Classical vortex shedding does occur in the boundary
with length L i . As discussed in N-1343.1, if is similar to tubes. For the first two to three rows of tubes in a tube
the fundamental mode shape of a one‐span beam with bundle, vortex‐induced vibration analysis following the
simple or clamped supports at each end, then procedure outlined in N-1320 is recommended.
. The correlation lengths inside a tube bun- N-1345 Cylinders in Axial Flow
dle are smaller than that for an isolated tube, being about Turbulence generally is a much weaker excitation me-
1–2 tube diameters. After specifying and using eqs. chanism in axial flow compared with cross flow, where
the flow separates from the vibrating body. Also, axial
N-1343.1(96) and N-1343.1(97) for instance, the mean flow is a source of flow damping which increases with
square response can be determined. flow rate (refs. [81], [82], and [131]). As a result, RMS vi-
N-1343.3 Nonuniform Cross Flow. In industrial heat bration amplitudes of tubes in axial flow are typically only
exchangers, the cross flow velocities are seldom uniform a few percent of the tube diameter.
over the entire length, or even one span of the tubes. The surface pressure fluctuations that excite a tube in
While an average cross flow velocity can be used to esti- axial flow are due to many sources: local turbulence cre-
mate the force spectra in eqs. N-1343.1(96), ated by the shear flow in the developing boundary layer;
N-1343.1(97), and N-1343.1(98), when the velocity dis- free stream turbulence created by upstream disturbances
tribution is available, better estimates can be obtained (grid supports, abrupt changes in channel size, elbows,
by using mode shape‐weighted power spectral densities valves, etc.) that quickly attenuate downstream of the dis-
similar to the generalized forces used in deterministic turbance, localized acoustic noise (waves); and system
analysis (ref. [127]): acoustic noise that can propagate long distances (ref.
[136]). For pipes and single rods in annuli subject only
to fully developed flow, relatively general experimental
ð101Þ characterizations of the homogeneous pressure fields
are possible (ref. [131]), because they depend only on
for a single‐span tube of uniform mass density and the local channel geometry and the flow rates. However,
general characterizations have not been developed that
account for upstream disturbances and adjacent bodies,
ð102Þ although many specific systems have been studied (refs.
[131] through [137]). Evidently, accurate predictions
for a multi‐span of spanwise uniform mass density. These can be made when the pressure field is characterized in
the same system as the response is measured, but the pre-
estimates are not rigorously derivable, but they will lead
dictions from system to system may vary by an order of
to more accurate estimates of response, especially when
magnitude for the same axial flow velocity. Because re-
the peaks in the velocity distributions are close to the
sponse is usually much easier to measure than the pres-
antinodes of the vibration modes.
sure fluctuations necessary to characterize a pressure
N-1344 Vortex-Induced Vibrations in a Tube field, especially a nonhomogeneous one, empirical corre-
Bundle lations of response have been developed for important
component geometries (refs. [99] and [137]). The compo-
The existence of vortex shedding deep in a tube bundle nent and prototype tests upon which the correlations are
is much less clearly defined than for a single cylinder. Ex- based include all component geometries and excitation
perimental measurements involving tube bundles sources. Of course, the use of these correlations must be
showed that even if a resonance peak exists in the dy- limited to the type of components and parameter varia-
namic pressure power spectral density, it is much broad- tions for which they were developed.
er and not as well defined as in the case of a single tube.
Furthermore, these peaks are bounded by the pressure N-1345.1 Recommended Design Procedures.
power spectral density given by eq. N-1343.1(96). How- (a) When the characterization of the pressure field is
ever, if lock‐in vortex‐induced vibration occurs in a parti- available, then the response of the structure can be pre-
cular span, the forcing function and the tube mode shape dicted by the general method outlined in N-1342. But, un-
will be fully correlated and in‐phase for that span. This like cross flows, the convection velocity U c is important
and must be known in axial flow before the acceptance in-
means that the span joint acceptance = 1.0. To be con- tegral, eqs. N-1342.1(88) and N-1342.1(91), can be eval-
servative, a lock‐in vortex‐induced vibration amplitude uated. In axial flows, it is not generally true that the
deep in a multi‐span tube bundle can be calculated by larger the correlation length ℓ c , the larger the response

392
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

as in cross flows. Rather, the response is governed by the Fritz and Kiss (ref. [143]), Horvay and Bowers (ref.
matching of the structural mode shape and the phase‐ [144]), Au‐Yang (refs. [93] and [145]), Chen (refs. [90]
coherence of the pressure field (refs. [112] and [122]), and [146]), Krajcinovic (ref. [147]), and Levin and Milan
in addition to its power spectral density. (ref. [148]) conclusively showed that the coupling effect
(b) Regardless of whether a pressure field characteriza- of narrow fluid gaps on thin cylindrical shells is much
tion is available, the maximum amplitude of motion can stronger than that of infinite fluid media. Their conclu-
be estimated to within an order of magnitude using the sions are supported by laboratory tests (refs. [90] and
empirical correlation (ref. [99]) [149]). A few review papers on this topic were written
by Chen (ref. [90]), Brown (ref. [150]), and Au‐Yang
(ref. [151]).
This guide describes a simple method to account for the
ð103Þ effect of fluid‐structure interaction on the response of cy-
lindrical shells coupled by fluid gaps, using the structural
priority approach (ref. [155]). In this approach, the effect
of fluid‐structure interaction is completely accounted for
if the cylinder parameters are within the ranges covered
by the “added mass” and the “added damping” terms. The
by the correlation:
principal advantage of this method is its simplicity. Once
the added mass and the added damping terms are com-
puted, the structural response analysis can be carried
out by standard methods without any need to revise the
computer programs either for calculating the structural
response or for calculating fluid forcing function. On the
other hand this method is based on linear dynamic theory
in which the principal interest is to estimate low‐
frequency structural responses. The vibration amplitude
of the structure must be small compared with the width
of the fluid gaps in order that linear dynamic theory holds.
Internal structures of commercial nuclear reactors such
where K n is a noise factor representing a departure from as the core support structure and the thermal shield are
quiet, steady axial flows of K n = 1. Commercial systems usually restricted by limiter blocks so that their motions
are expected to be bounded by K n = 5. E is the modulus are small compared with the fluid annular gap width. In
of elasticity, I is the beam area moment of inertia, and ν flow‐induced vibration, seismic and loss‐of‐coolant ana-
is the fluid kinematic viscosity. lyses of these components, usually only the responses of
the lower few modes are of interest, and the methods de-
scribed in this guide can be applied. Structural analyses
N-1400 DYNAMICS OF COUPLED involving large displacements or in which responses to
FLUID-SHELLS the high frequency components of the forcing function
cannot be ignored, or analyses in which the principal in-
N-1410 INTRODUCTION terest is to estimate the hydraulic forcing function rather
It is well known that the motion of a solid in a heavy li- than the structural responses, should not follow the meth-
quid is different from that in a vacuum. In the case of a ods described in this guide.
sphere or a cylinder moving in an infinite fluid medium,
for example, the presence of the fluid can be accounted N-1420 NOMENCLATURE
for by simply adding to the physical mass of the solid,
the mass of fluid it displaces. Hence the term added mass, a = radius of inner cylinder or (when used as a sub-
or hydrodynamic mass, has been used to describe this script or superscript) pertaining to the inner
solid‐fluid interaction phenomenon. When the fluid is vis- cylinder
cous, then in addition to an added mass, there is an appar- b = radius of outer cylinder or (when used as a sub-
ent added damping, or hydrodynamic damping, due to the script or superscript) pertaining to the outer
viscosity of the fluid. cylinder
In the case of thin cylindrical shells vibrating with c = velocity of sound
fluids entrapped in‐between, the effect of fluid‐structure [ C] = equivalent viscous damping coefficient matrix
interaction is far more complicated. Data from pre‐ C α m = Fourier coefficient of the m th cylinder axial mode
operational tests of nuclear plants showed that the natur- onto the αth acoustic mode
al frequencies of the thermal shields of light water nuclear f = frequency in Hz
reactors were much lower than their corresponding val- {f} = reaction force due to fluid shell coupling
ues measured in‐air. Since then, theoretical studies by {f 0} = externally applied force

393
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

f m , n = natural frequency of the (m,n)th mode

H = hydrodynamic mass ð104Þ
h = Fourier component of the hydrodynamic mass
matrix element
= generalized hydrodynamic mass When viewed from the side, the deformation of the cylin-
I = modified Bessel function of first kind der consists of a number of waves distributed along the
J = Bessel function of first kind length of a generator. The number of half waves along a
K = modified Bessel function of second kind generator is denoted by m , m = 1, 2, 3,... As shown in
[K ] = stiffness matrix Figure N-1430-1, the axial wave forms depend on the
K i j = element of the stiffness matrix end conditions of the cylinder.
ℓ = length of cylindrical shell The equation of motion for the free vibration of the
m = axial modal index of the cylindrical shell shell is
n = circumferential modal index of the cylindrical
shell ð105Þ
p = pressure
q = (u, v, w), displacement vector of the shell Thus, to determine the natural frequencies, one has first
R = radial function of acoustic mode of all to calculate the modal stiffness matrix. In simple
r = radial coordinate or (used in Figure N-1451-1, cases of cylinders with simply supported or clamped
= a /b ) ends, simplified expressions for the stiffness matrix ele-
u = displacement of the shell in the axial direction ments have been derived (refs. [92] and [152]), and the
v = displacement of the shell in the tangential natural frequencies of the shell can be computed. There
direction will be three roots for each set of K i j , corresponding to
w = displacement of the shell in the normal direction three natural frequencies for each set of m ,n . Two of
x = axial coordinate these frequencies are usually much higher than the third
α = axial mode number for the acoustic mode one. These are associated with vibrations predominantly
β = circumferential mode number for the acoustic in the axial and tangential directions. The lowest fre-
mode quency, on the other hand, is associated with vibrations
predominantly in the normal direction. This is the flexural
mode and is usually the mode of interest in structural
δ 33 = matrix in the (u , v , w ) space analysis.

ϵ = α or (2α −1)/2 as defined in eq. N-1440(108)

N-1440 ACOUSTIC MODES OF A FLUID ANNULUS
θ = azimuthal coordinate
BONDED BY RIGID WALLS
= mode shape function
λ = defined in eq. N-1451.2(115) The natural frequencies associated with the (α ,β )th
μ = surface mass density of the shell mode of the fluctuation pressure distribution
ν = hysteretic damping factor; kinematic viscosity
ρ = mass density of fluid ð106Þ
ϕ = axial acoustic mode shape function
ψ = axial cylinder mode shape function inside the fluid annulus are given by the roots of the equa-
ω = angular frequency (rad/sec) tion (ref. [153])
N-1430 FREE VIBRATION OF THIN CYLINDRICAL ð107Þ
SHELL IN AIR
Figure N-1430-1 shows the vibration mode of a thin, fi- where J , Y are Bessel functions and
nite cylindrical shell. Viewed from the ends, the vibration
of the cylinder may consist of any number of waves dis- ð108Þ
tributed around the circumference. The number of cir-
cumferential waves is denoted by n , with n = 1 being
the beam mode. Throughout this write‐up, it is assumed where
that the circumferential mode shape is normalized to ϵ = α if the fluid annulus has both pressure released
unity, (p = 0) or both hard (p = max.) ends
= (2α −1)/2 if one end is pressure released and the
other end is hard

394
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure N-1430-1
Vibration Forms for Circular Cylindrical Shells

Note that acoustic modes exist in the fluid annulus only if N-1441 Frequency Equation and Mode Shape for
a Thin Fluid Annulus
For many applications, the fluid annulus is thin com-
The frequency at which, pared with its radius, so that the condition (b − a )/
a > 5 is satisfied. Under this condition, the following ap-
proximate equation for the natural frequencies holds true
is known in acoustics as the coincidence frequency. for the plane wave mode (no radial node):

395
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

The second radial mode (with one radial node) usually computed with the aid of a personal computer. In the fol-
has a lowest frequency much higher than that of the fun- lowing paragraphs, simplified expressions for computing
damental radial mode up to α = β = 5. Thus, it can be ig- h are given for several commonly encountered special
nored if only the lowest 20 or so acoustic modes are cases.
included in the analysis.
N-1451.1 Slender Cylinder Approximation. When
the conditions |ϵ πa /ℓ −ω a /c | ⪡ 1 and |ϵ πb /ℓ −ω b /c |
N-1450 FREE VIBRATION OF COUPLED ⪡ 1 are simultaneously satisfied, ref. [145] shows that:
FLUID-SHELL SYSTEMS
When the cylindrical shells bounding the fluid annulus
are flexible, then not only are the motions of the shells
coupled to the fluid, but they are coupled together by
ð112Þ
the fluid between them. It was shown that (ref. [145])
there is no cross circumferential model coupling between
the fluid and a system of two coaxial, circular cylindrical
shells. However, except in the rare case when both the
cylinder and the fluid can be represented by the same Note that the h s are independent of the axial acoustical
mode shape function, as is the case of a simply supported wave number α in this case. From N-1452.1, the general-
cylinder vibrating in a fluid annulus with open ends, there ized hydrodynamic masses per unit length for the beam
will be coupling between the axial structural and acoustic mode (n = 1) are,
modes (refs. [93] and [145]).

N-1451 The Hydrodynamic Mass Matrix

It was shown that for small motions of the shell, the
pressure induced by the structure in the fluid is propor-
tional to the normal component of the acceleration ẅ, of
shell (refs. [93], [145], and [155]):
N-1451.2 The Ripple Approximation. When the ratio
ð109Þ (b − a )/(b + a ) is small, curvature effects become unim-
portant and the annular gap can be treated as a rectangu-
The “constant” of proportionality is commonly called the lar fluid region. In this case, the expressions for the
hydrodynamic mass or added mass matrix. In general, it is hydrodynamic masses are greatly simplified to
a full matrix, the element of which is dependent on the
frequency. For two coaxial cylindrical shells coupled by ð113Þ
a fluid gap, the hydrodynamic mass matrix elements are
(refs. [93] and [145])
ð114Þ

where
ð110Þ
d = b − a and

ð115Þ

where for example, is the projection of the m th axial

N-1451.3 Incompressible Fluid Assumption. When
mode shape, ψ m of cylinder a (the inner cylinder) onto
ω/c ⪡ϵπ/ℓ, the term ω/c can be dropped from the argu-
the α th axial acoustic mode shape ϕ α of the fluid annulus:
ment of the Bessel function in eq. N-1440(107), the re-
sulting hydrodynamic masses are independent of
ð111Þ frequency. Since this condition is satisfied when c → ∞,
it is called the incompressible fluid assumption. However,
the incompressible fluid assumption must be used with
are similarly defined. h (and hence H ) are in units of caution for applications to large structures. For a struc-
mass per unit area. ture 300 in. (7.6 m) long, vibrating in water at 600°F
The general expressions for the hydrodynamic mass (315°C) (e.g., nuclear reactor internal components), the
which are valid for any boundary condition and any incompressible fluid assumption generally introduces er-
D /ℓ ratio, are quite complicated, but still can easily be rors in the hydrodynamic matrix elements of more than

396
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

10% for frequencies above 20 Hz. Thus, it should not be N-1452 Natural Frequencies of Coupled
used in analyses involving rapid transients in which high Fluid-Shells in Special Cases
frequency contributions to the response are significant.
Once the hydrodynamic mass matrix is computed, it
N-1451.4 Single Beam Mode (n = 1) in Narrow Annu- can be input into finite element computer programs to
li. When a cylinder vibrates inside a stationary, rigid cyl- calculate the natural frequencies of fluid coupled shells.
inder of slightly larger diameter, its added mass due to the First, several special cases in which simplified method
water between the two cylinders can be estimated by a of analysis can be used will be considered.
very simple equation (ref. [143]):
N-1452.1 One-Axial Mode Approximation. In many
cases of practical importance, when the D/ℓ ratio of the
ð116Þ cylinders are not very small, only the first axial mode is
important in the dynamic analysis. Under these circum-
The above equation is valid only for the beam mode stances the frequencies of two coaxial cylindrical shells
(n = 1) vibration. Figure N-1451-1 is a comparison be- coupled by a fluid gap between them can be estimated
tween eq. (116) and the exact solution and shows surpris- by solving the following simplified coupled equations
ingly good agreement between them as long as the fluid (ref. [154])
gap is small. From N-1452.1, the generalized, or effective
hydrodynamic mass per unit length of the cylinder is:
ð120Þ
ð117Þ

where [ ] is the generalized hydrodynamic mass matrix

N-1451.5 Single Cylinder Containing Fluid. The case with elements:
when there is only one cylinder containing a fluid is given
by (ref. [145]):

ð121Þ
ð118Þ

where J n , I n are Bessel and modified Bessel functions of , for example, is the generalized hydrodynamic mass
the first kind. From N-1452.1, for the beam mode of the inner cylindrical shell, expressed in terms of the hy-
(n = 1), the generalized hydrodynamic mass per unit drodynamic mass defined in eq. N-1451(110). From eq.
length of the cylinder is, (121) it can be seen that, because the hydrodynamic mass
effects exist only in the normal direction, the effectiveness
of H in reducing the natural frequencies of the shell is de-
creased by the factor 1 + n −2. For the beam mode (n = 1),
its effectiveness is reduced by a factor of 1/2. For high shell
N-1451.6 Single Cylinder in Infinite Fluid. The case modes (n ≫ 1), it is as effective as the physical mass.
where there is only one cylinder in an infinite fluid is giv- For each n, two coupled frequencies and amplitude ra-
en by tios for w a /w b can be obtained by solving the system of
eq. (120). The torsional and longitudinal modes of vibra-
tion are not affected and are not coupled by the fluid gap
in the inviscid fluid assumption. Note that [H ] is depen-
ð119Þ dent on f , and eq. (120) has to be solved by iteration ex-
cept in the incompressible fluid limit.
The above equations can be generalized to a system of
several coaxial cylindrical shells coupled by fluid gaps be-
From N-1452.1, for the beam (n = 1) mode, the general- tween them (ref. [155]). However, since the hydrody-
ized hydrodynamic mass per unit length is, namic mass is frequency dependent, many iterations
may be necessary to obtain all the coupled frequencies.
This procedure may become prohibitive when there are
more than three cylinders.

397
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure N-1451-1
Comparison of Fritz and Kiss Solution With Exact Solution

GENERAL NOTE: is the Fourier coefficient for the hydrodynamic mass surface mass density of an infinitely long cylinder.

N-1452.2 Cases When Only One Cylinder is Flexible frequency is usually referred to as the “in‐water” fre-
(ref. [156]). If only one cylinder is flexible, coupling be- quency of the shell while the higher coupled frequencies
tween cylinders can be ignored. The only parameter of in- are usually referred to as acoustic frequencies. This dis-
terest is the “in‐water” frequency of the shell, which is tinction, however, has no technical basis.
also the natural frequency of the fluid–shell system. In In the incompressible fluid limit, only the “in‐fluid” nat-
this case, the natural frequencies can be obtained by a ural frequency of the cylinder is of interest. This is given
graphical method. If one plots the two functions by

ð122Þ ð124Þ

ð123Þ

then where g 1 and g 2 intercept is a natural frequency of

the coupled fluid–shell system. The lowest coupled

398
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

N-1453 Use of Hydrodynamic Mass Matrix in The method reported in ref. [149] greatly simplifies the
Finite Element Structural Computer above computational procedure by reducing the size of
Programs the matrix, while still giving reasonable estimates of the
coupled frequencies of the fluid shell system. It consists
Closed form solutions are possible only in highly idea- of calculating the 2 × 2 “generalized” hydrodynamic mass
lized cases of perfect circular cylindrical shells with clas-
matrix, , , , and of the cylindrical
sical boundary conditions coupled by perfectly uniform
annular gaps. In many applications, even though the fluid shells a and b , and uniformly distributing these hydrody-
gaps are annular and the uncoupled fluid dynamic prob- namic masses over the cylindrical surfaces. For the off di-
lem is amenable to closed form solution, closed form so- agonal elements, , , it is assumed that coupling
lutions to the coupled fluid shell problem are not exists only for elements of the cylinders that are directly
possible because the cylindrical shells are not uniform, opposite to each other. The resulting mass matrix is tri‐
and the boundary conditions are not classically simply diagonal instead of full, and greatly simplifies the compu-
supported or clamped. Examples of this sort are common tational procedure. The tri‐diagonal hydrodynamic mass
in the nuclear industry. In these cases, the structural matrix approach yielded natural frequencies of a coupled
problem is usually solved with the help of finite element fluid‐shell system that agree quite well with those ob-
computer programs. tained from closed form solution.
The effect of fluid–structure interaction can be readily
incorporated into the finite element computer program N-1460 FORCED RESPONSE OF COUPLED-SHELL
using closed form solutions for the hydrodynamic mass SYSTEM
matrix, provided that the finite element computer pro- When the motion of the shells is small, the equation of
gram is designed to accept a full mass matrix. Many com- motion for forced response of a coupled fluid‐shell system
mercially available finite element computer programs can be written as
have this capability.
It was shown in ref. [155] that in finite element form, ð126Þ
the hydrodynamic mass matrix can be written as:
where ν is the equivalent hysteretic damping factor, f o is
the incident force acting on the shells, which is present ir-
respective of the motion of the shells. Examples of f o are
random pressure caused by turbulent boundary layers, or
transient pulses caused by shock waves impinging on the
ð125Þ shells. f is the reaction pressure induced on the shell as a
consequence of its own motion: a result of the interaction
(or coupling) between the fluid and the structure. From
eq. N-1451(109),

ð127Þ
where ΔA a , ΔA b are element surface areas. These mass
so that eq. (126) becomes,
matrices can then be input into the finite element compu-
ter program just as the physical mass, with the exception ð128Þ
that unlike the physical mass, the hydrodynamic mass,
being a pressure, is effective only in the normal direction Equation (128) is exactly the same as the equation of mo-
of the shell. Hence, the hydrodynamic mass should be as- tion in‐air with the forcing function f o . The only differ-
sociated only with the normal degree of freedom. ence is that added to the physical mass matrix [μ ] is a
In the incompressible fluid approximation where the hydrodynamic mass matrix M H , which is effective only
hydrodynamic mass matrix is independent of frequency, in the normal direction of the shells. Thus, once the hy-
solution of the coupled fluid‐shell dynamic problem is drodynamic mass matrix is computed, the dynamic prob-
straightforward. In general, however, the hydrodynamic lem can be solved routinely, by finite element structural
mass matrix is a full matrix with frequency dependent analysis computer programs or otherwise, as if there
matrix elements. Solution of the coupled fluid‐shell prob- were no coupling between the fluid and the structure.
lem involves iteration between calculation of the mass
matrix elements and the finite element computer pro- N-1470 HYDRODYNAMIC DAMPING
gram. When some of the coupled natural frequencies Just as the fluid mass adds to the effective mass of cy-
are near to the classical hard‐walled acoustic modal fre- lindrical shells, the viscosity of the entrapped fluid adds
quencies, the hydrodynamic masses become extremely to the effective damping of the coupled fluid‐shell system.
sensitive to the frequencies and solution to the coupled This hydrodynamic damping, or added damping, due to
fluid‐shell system can be difficult. coupling of a cylindrical structure and a viscous fluid,

399
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

was studied by Chen (refs. [90] and [146]), Yeh and Chen N-1700 COMBINED RESPONSES
(Ref. [157]), and Mulcahy (ref. [158]). It was shown that
the equivalent hydrodynamic modal damping ratio is de- N-1710 DYNAMIC RESPONSE COMBINATION
pendent on a dimensionless parameter, In the design of nuclear power components it is neces-
sary to consider the combined responses caused by two
or more different sources of dynamic loading. There are
ð129Þ
two situations which arise: one in which the time phase
relationship between the two or more responses is
where ν is the kinematic viscosity of the entrapped fluid. known (deterministic); and a second, where the time
The general expression for the hydrodynamic damping phase relationship is said to be random. In the first situa-
ratio, like that for the hydrodynamic mass, is quite com- tion, the response may be determined by the algebraic
plicated. Some insight, however, can be gained by study- summation method of N-1720. In the second case where
ing the special case of the beam mode (n = 1) vibration the time phase relationship is random, one of the three
of an infinitely long cylinder of radius a inside a station- methods N-1721, N-1722, or N-1723 may be used de-
ary cylinder of radius b . In this case, the equivalent hydro- pending upon satisfying the qualifying conditions con-
dynamic modal damping ratio is given by tained in N-1721, N-1722, or N-1723. The owner, either
directly or through his designee, may prescribe whether
the time phase relationship of individual load responses
ð130Þ is to be considered deterministic or random. Considera-
tion may be given to the probability of occurrence of
the associated events which cause the combined loading
where Z is a fairly complicated function of modified Bes-
in arriving at detailed procedures for combining ran-
sel functions and S . Figure N-1470-1, reproduced from
domly phased responses (see discussion in N-1725).
ref. [146], gives theoretical values of −Im(Z ) as a function
of the radius ratio b /a , for different values of S , and N-1720 ALGEBRAIC SUMMATION
shows that as S → ∞, −Im(Z ) becomes infinitesimal even
for small ratios of b /a , indicating that hydrodynamic When the time phase relationship between two or
damping is negligible for large values of S. As an example, more time history responses is known and the dynamic
for the vibration of the core support structure of a typical system is linear, the individual collinear responses may
nuclear reactor inside the reactor vessel, S ≈ 109. Thus, be algebraically added to determine the combined maxi-
the hydrodynamic damping in this case is negligible. This mum and minimum structural response. If the dynamic
conclusion, however, may not be true for the vibration of system is nonlinear, then the combination loading should
a thin rod inside a fluid‐filled jacket of slightly larger be input into the dynamic system analysis in order to de-
termine the combination response.
diameter.
Although the above example is for the beam mode vi- N-1721 Peak Combined Response
bration of an infinitely long cylinder, the same conclusion
In those cases where the dynamic system is linear and
holds true qualitatively for the shell mode vibration of fi-
where two or more responses are to be combined, the
nite cylindrical shells. This theoretical deduction is also
peaks of the individual collinear responses can always
supported by experimental observations. Damping ratios
be conservatively added to obtain the combined response
of thermal shields measured during pre‐operational tests
irrespective of whether the phase relationship of the re-
of pressurized water reactors show little difference from
sponses is undefined, deterministic, or random.
their corresponding values measured in‐air. Thus, hydro-
dynamic damping in large cylindrical structures can be N-1722 SRSS (Square Root of Sum of Squares)
ignored. Method
N-1722.1 For Responses With Nearly Equal Domi-
nant Frequencies. In those cases where the dynamic sys-
tem is linear and where (a) the time phasing of the peak
N-1500 FLUID TRANSIENT DYNAMICS individual collinear responses is random and (b) all of the
In the course of preparation. individual responses have nearly an equal dominant 14
frequency with arbitrary amplitude, the SRSS method
may be used to determine the combined design response
(refs. [68], [69], and [70]).
N-1600 MISCELLANEOUS IMPULSIVE AND N-1722.2 For Uncorrelated Dynamic Responses. The
IMPACTIVE LOADS intent of this method for combination of transient dy-
namic responses is to achieve a conditional nonexcee-
In the course of preparation. dance probability of at least 50% for the peak combined

400
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure N-1470-1
Imaginary Part of Z as a Function of b /a for Selected Value of S (Ref. [146])

401
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

response of the system, component, or element consid-

ered. That is, there is a 50% probability that the magni-
tude of the summed responses will not exceed the SRSS
value, given that the combined events have occurred. This where the definitions are the same as above, except for
goal is achieved by compliance with the following criteria the substitution of input for response.
provided that the amplitude of loads or accelerations for (c) If criteria (a) or (b) above are not met by each of
each input are conservatively represented (approxi- the responses or inputs, respectively, in the combination,
mately at the level of the 84th percentile or the mean plus this requirement is still satisfied if the effective time ra-
one standard deviation of the input amplitude). tios (T 7 5 /ΔT )e and (T 5 0 /ΔT )e for the response combi-
Criterion. Dynamic or transient responses of linear nation meet the requirements of (a) above. The effective
structures, components, and equipment arising from time ratios for the response combination are given by:
combinations of dynamic loading or motions may be com-
bined by SRSS provided that each of the dynamic inputs
or responses has a limited number of peaks of force or ac-
celeration and approximately a zero mean, and that the in-
dividual component inputs can be considered to be
relatively uncorrelated (refs. [75] to [78]). Specific criteria where i represents each individual response in the com-
for these three requirements are given below. bination and (R m )i represents the maximum amplitude
The requirement of a limited number of peaks is satis- of that response component. The effective time ratio
fied if any one of the following three criteria is met. (T 5 0 /ΔT )e is obtained by substituting 50 for 75 in the
above equation.
(a) For each response time history in the combination:
The requirement of approximately a zero mean is satis-
fied if, for the duration of strong input (or response), the
ratio of the mean to maximum input (or response) is less
than 0.20. The mean value is:

and

where μ is the mean value, R j is the response at time in-

crement j , and N is the total number of equally spaced
time increments.
where T 7 5 represents the summation of time intervals for
If this requirement is not met, responses can be divided
all peaks over which the response exceeds 75% of either
into two parts (nonzero mean part and peak response rel-
the maximum or minimum response (whichever is great-
ative to mean response) provided the response function is
er), T 5 0 represents the time over which the response ex-
not skewed from the axis of the mean μ . The nonzero
ceeds 50% of either the maximum or minimum response
mean part of response can be combined algebraically (ac-
(whichever is greater), and ΔT represents the total time
counting for the sign of the mean response) and the peak
interval over which the maximum responses are expected
responses relative to the mean responses can be com-
to occur. For the case of random relative start times, ΔT
bined SRSS if these relative responses meet the provi-
represents the time interval during which the strong re-
sions of this section.
sponses may overlap (generally taken as the time interval
from the zero crossing time just preceding the first peak The requirement of relatively uncorrelated inputs is
that exceeds 50% of the absolute maximum response to met if either of the following is satisfied:
the zero crossing time just following the last peak that ex- (1) the individual dynamic inputs or responses are
ceeds 50% of the absolute maximum response, of the from events such that their relative start times are
longer time history). The strong motion of a seismic time uncertain;
history is discussed in N-1212.2(f). In determining the (2) if the relative start times are known, then the
time T 7 5 and T 5 0 , only the durations of peaks with the coefficient of correlation must be less than 0.3.
same sign (positive or negative) are additive. These defi-
nitions are illustrated in Figure N-1722.2-1. N-1723 SRSSE (Equivalent SRSS) Method
(b) For each input‐time history in the combination:
(a) In those cases where individual linear system time
history responses have randomly defined time phase rela-
tionships and condition (b) of N-1722 is not satisfied, the
SRSSE method may be used to determine the combined
design response. As an illustration, N-1723.1 and
and N-1723.2 describe a detailed numeric procedure for

402
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure N-1722.2-1
Definition of Notation

Legend:
Rm1 = absolute maximum response
R+75 = 0.75 |R m 1 |
R−75 = −0.75 |R m 1 |
T+75 = summation of time intervals that response exceeds R + 7 5
T−75 = summation of time intervals that response exceeds R − 7 5
T75 = larger of T + 7 5 or T − 7 5
ΔT = T 1 , since T 1 > T 2

403
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

determining the combinations for the case where two in- (b) The intermediate points on the CDF are found by in-
dividual time history responses have a uniform random tegration of the distribution of the time shift τ between
time phase relationship. appropriate limits. Hence, at this point, the choice of the
(b) For the case when three or more linear time history distribution for τ enters the calculations.
responses are to be combined, the procedures of N-1724 (c) Calculation of the intermediate points on the CDF
may be used to determine the combined SRSSE design re- requires the consideration of the functional relationship
sponses (ref. [68]). between the maximum combined amplitude FF and the
time phase shift τ . For a given value of FF on Figure
N-1723.1 SRSSE Method for Two Time History Re- N-1723.1-3 (in this case FF1) there is an interval on the
sponses. A method may be constructed to obtain the τ axis (τ 2 , τ 3 ) in Figure N-1723.1-3. This same τ interval
SRSSE response combinations as given in (a), (b), and (c). (τ 2 , τ 3 ) can also be observed on the Probability Density
(a) Determine one time history as a reference function. Function for τ in Figure N-1723.1-2. The shaded area of
Bring the origin of the second function coincident with Figure N-1723.1-2 represents the probability that τ falls
the origin of the reference function. Care should be taken in the interval (τ 2 , τ 3 ). The event of τ falling in the inter-
to determine the reference function so that the time shift val (τ 2 , τ 3 ) corresponds exactly to the event that FF is
of the second function is consistent with the actual se- less than or equal to FF. Therefore, the ordinate P of
quence of events expected. The origin of the second func- Figure N-1723.1-4 corresponding to FF can be computed
tion could occur at, before, or after the origin of the as
reference function. The case where the origins are coinci-
dent will be discussed in (b) and (c). The procedure for ð131Þ
the other two cases are similar.
(b) Shift the second function in small time steps relative
and for the case where
to the reference function until the origin of the second
function goes to the end of the reference function (see ð132Þ
Figure N-1723.1-1). For each time phase difference τ , a
scan is made from the time zero to τ + T 2 , if (τ + T 2 ) ≥ T 1 , then
or from the time zero to (τ + T 2 ) < T 1 , to determine the
largest amplitude (peak) of the sum of the two functions. ð133Þ
T 1 and T 2 are the time duration of the reference function
and second function, respectively. The algebraic maxi- (d) The same procedure is followed for other levels of
mum and minimum of these peaks, Maximum Combined FF. Note that care must be exercised when integrating
Amplitude (FF), are plotted as functions of the time phase multiple valued functions to avoid a loss of information.
difference τ . The resulting function is called the Ampli- If the level of FF selected contains more than one interval
tude Phase Function (APF) which is shown in Figure of τ , all intervals must be integrated to obtain the asso-
N-1723.1-3. ciated probability. For example, in the case of FF, the in-
(c) The functional relationship between the APF and tegration limits in eq. (c)(131) would be from τ 1 to τ 4
the Probability Density Function (PDF) for the time shift and from τ 5 to τ 6 . The result of the integration is desig-
(Figure N-1723.1-2) is then used to compute the Cumula- nated P 2 and plotted in Figure N-1723.1-4.
tive Distribution Functions (CDF) of the maximum and (e) Selecting different levels of FF and repeating the
minimum combined amplitudes as detailed in above procedure, the CDF function as shown in Figure
N-1723.1.1 (Figure N-1723.1-4). The choice of the appro- N-1723.1-4 can be constructed.
priate PDF for τ should be developed on a case‐by‐case (f) This entire procedure is then repeated for the mini-
basis. The uniform PDF is frequently a reasonable as- mum APF function to find its corresponding CDF.
sumption when there is a weakly known cause and effect
between the initiation of the causative events. N-1723.1.2 Cumulative Distribution Function for
the Absolute Maximum. An alternative and more conser-
N-1723.1.1 Cumulative Distribution Function vative procedure than that given in N-1723.1.1 may also
(CDF). Both the maximum and minimum Cumulative Dis- be used to generate the CDF of combined responses. In
tribution Functions need to be constructed. this alternative procedure, instead of summing the posi-
(a) From Figure N-1723.1-3, which illustrates the max- tive and negative peaks of the response separately as in
imum APF function, it can be seen that any possible com- N-1723.1.1, the absolute value of the peak combined re-
bined amplitude FF falls between two extreme limits sponse is identified for each value of τ when generating
FFmax and FFmin. It is clear that the probability that the the APF. In this alternative procedure, a single APF is gen-
value of FF is less than FFmax is one, and the probability erated which corresponds to a combination of both posi-
that the value of FF is less than FFmin is zero. Hence, in tive or negative combined responses, whichever is
Figure N-1723.1-4, we can immediately plot these two ex- greater in absolute magnitude for each value of τ . The
treme points. procedure to construct the absolute maximum CDF is

404
ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure N-1723.1-1

Figure N-1723.1-2

405
ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure N-1723.1-3

Figure N-1723.1-4

406
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

the same as stated in N-1723.1.1, except that only one [5] Penzien, J., and Watabe, M. Characteristic of
CDF is generated for each response combination instead 3‐Dimensional Earthquake Ground Motions. Earth-
of two. quake Engineering and Structural Dynamics, Vol. 3,
3‐9, 1974.
N-1723.2 SRSSE Values. From the maximum and [6] Hadjian, A. H. On the Correlation of the Components of
minimum CDF determined in N-1723.1.1, select the val- Strong Ground Motion — Part 2. Bulletin of The Seismo-
ues for SRSSE maximum and SRSSE minimum combina- logical Society of America, Vol. 71, No. 4, pp. 1323–1331,
tions corresponding to the 50% probability levels. It Aug. 1987.
should be noted that these 50% levels are conditional [7] Kasawara, R. P., and Peck, D. A. Dynamic Analysis of
probability levels given that the causative events have oc- Structural Systems Excited at Multiple Support Loca-
curred. In order to determine total probability levels as- tions. ASCE 2nd Specialty Conference on Structural De-
sociated with the SRSSE values, it is necessary to sign of Nuclear Plant Facilities, Chicago, IL, Dec. 1973.
multiply by the corresponding simultaneous combined [8] Hurty, W. C., and Rubinstein, M. F. Dynamics of Struc-
event occurrence as illustrated in ref. [70]. tures Prentice‐Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 1964.
[9] Meek, J. W., and Veletsos, A. S. Dynamic Analysis by Ex-
N-1724 SRSSE Method for Three or More tra Fast Fourier Transform. Journal of Engineering Me-
Functions chanics Division, Vol. 98, No. EM2, pp. 367–384, ASCE,
Apr. 1972.
A Monte Carlo simulation procedure (refs. [69] and [10] Newmark, N. M. A Method of Computation for Struc-
[70]) will generally be required to generate the CDF if tural Dynamics, Journal of Engineering Mechanics Divi-
there are more than two time history response functions sion, Vol. 85, No. EM3, pp. 67–94, ASCE, July 1959.
to be combined. The SRSSE maximum, minimum, or abso- [11] Houbolt, J. C. A Recurrence‐Matrix Solution of Dy-
lute maximum values are at the same 50% probability namic Response of Elastic Aircraft. Journal of Aeronau-
levels used in N-1723.2. tical Sciences, Vol. 17, pp. 540–550, 1950.
[12] Bathe, K. J., and Wilson, E. L. Stability and Accuracy
Analysis of Direct Integration Methods. Earthquake En-
N-1725 Alternative CDF Values gineering and Structural Dynamics, Vol. 1, pp. 283–291,
The SRSSE values of N-1723.2 and N-1724 are at a con- 1973.
ditional nonexceedance probability level of 50%. That is, [13] Chan, S. P., Cox, H. L., and Benfield, W. A. Transient
there is a 50% probability that the magnitude of the Analysis of Forced Vibrations of Complex Structural‐
summed responses will not exceed the SRSSE values, giv- Mechanical Systems. Journal of the Royal Aeronautical
en that the combined events have occurred. When the Society, Vol. 66, pp. 457–460, July 1962.
peak combined response values of N-1721 are used, the [14] O’Hara, G. J., and Cunniff, P. F. Numerical Method for
100% nonexceedance values result. Since the use of Structural Shock Response. EMD2, pp. 51–82, ASCE,
either of these levels (50%, 100%) must be specified 1964.
through consideration of systems requirements and ser- [15] Riead, H. D. Nonlinear Response Using Normal
vice levels, alternative nonexceedance probability levels Modes. AIAA 12th Aerospace Sciences Meeting, Paper
between 50% and 100% may also be used. No. 74‐138, Jan. 1974.
[16] Stricklin, J. A., and Haisler, W. E. Survey of Solution
Procedures for Nonlinear Static and Dynamic Analysis.
SAE Conference on Vehicle Structural Mechanics, pp.
N-1800 REFERENCES TO NONMANDATORY 1–17, Detroit, MI, Mar. 1974.
APPENDIX N [17] Lapidus, L., and Seinfield, J. H. Numerical Solution of
[1] Newmark, N. M., Blume, J. A., and Kapus, K. K. Design Ordinary Differential Equations, Academic Press, 1971.
Response Spectra for Nuclear Power Plants. ASCE [18] Nordsieck, A. On Numerical Integration of Ordinary
Structural Engineering Meeting, San Francisco, CA, Differential Equations. Journal of Mathematics and Com-
Apr. 1973. putation, p. 22, 1962.
[2] N. M. Newmark Consulting Engineering Services. A [19] Collatz, L. The Numerical Treatment of Differential
Study of Vertical and Horizontal Earthquake Spectra. Equations, Springer, 1960.
USAEC Contract No. AT(49‐5)‐2667, WASH‐1255; Ur- [20] Garnet, H., and Armen, H. Evaluation of Numerical
bana, IL, Apr. 1973. Time Integration Methods as Applied to Elastic‐Plastic
[3] John A. Blume & Associates. Recommendations for Dynamic Problems Involving Wave Propagation. Grum-
Shape of Earthquake Response Spectra. USAEC Con- man Research Department Report, RE‐475, Mar. 1974.
tract No. AT(49‐5)3011, WASH‐1254; San Francisco, [21] Nahavandi, A. N., and Bohm, G. J. A Solution of Non-
CA, Feb. 1973. linear Vibration Problems in Reactor Components. Nu-
[4] Bendat, J. S., and Piersol, A. G. Random Data: Analysis clear Science and Engineering: 26, pp. 80–89, 1966.
and Measurement Procedures, Wiley‐Interscience, 1971.

407
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

[22] Wu, R. W. H., and Witmer, E. A. Nonlinear Transient [40] Hamilton C. W., and Hadjian, A. H. Probabilistic Fre-
Responses of Structures by the Spatial Finite‐Element quency Variations of Structure‐Soil Systems. Nuclear
Method. Vol. II, No. 8, pp. 1110–1117, AIAA, 1973. Engineering and Design: 38, pp. 303‐322, 1976.
[23] Nickell, R. E. Direct Integration Methods in Structural [41] Amin, M., Hall, W. J., Newmark, N. M., and Kassawara,
Dynamics. EM2, Vol. 99, pp. 303–317, ASCE, 1973. R. P. Earthquake Response of Multiple Connected Light
[24] Cook, R. D. Concepts and Applications of Finite Ele- Secondary Systems by Spectrum Methods. ASME First
ment Analysis, pp. 252–254, Wiley–Interscience, 1974. National Congress on Pressure Vessel and Piping Tech-
[25] Wilson, E. L., Farhoomand, I., and Bathe, K. J. Non- nology, San Francisco, CA, May 1971.
linear Dynamics Analysis of Complex Structure. Earth- [42] Tsai, N. C. Transformation of Time Axes of Accelero-
quake Engineering and Structural Dynamics, Vol. 1, pp. grams. Journal of the Engineering Mechanics Division,
241–252, 1973. Vol. 95, No. EM3, Proceedings Paper 6584,
[26] MacNeal, R. H. Nastran Theoretical Manual. NASA PY807‐812, ASCE, June 1969.
SP‐221(01), pp. 11.3‐1 — 11.3‐13, Dec. 1972. [43] Vashi, K. M. Seismic Spectral Analysis of Structural
[27] Stricklin, J. A., Martinez, J. E., Tillerson, J. R., Hon, J. H., Systems Subject to Nonuniform Excitation at Supports.
and Haisler, W. E. Nonlinear Dynamic Analysis of Shells 2nd ASCE Specialty Conference on Structural Design of
of Revolution by Matrix Displacement Method. AIAA‐7, Nuclear Power Plant Facilities, Vol. 1‐A, pp. 188-211,
Vol. 9, No. 4, pp. 629–636, 1971. New Orleans, LA, Dec. 1975.
[28] McNamara, J. F., and Marcal, P. V. Incremental Stiff- [44] Shaw, D. E. Seismic Structural Response Analysis for
ness Method for the Finite Element Analysis of the Non- Multiple Support Excitation. Proceedings of the Third In-
linear Dynamic Problem ONR Symposium: Numerical ternational Conference on Structural Mechanics in Reac-
and Computer Methods in Structural Mechanics, Urbana, tor Technology, Vol. 4, K 7/3, London, 1975.
IL, Sep. 1971. [45] Thailer. Spectral Analysis of Complex Systems Sup-
[29] Nagarajan, S., and Popov, E. P. Elastic‐Plastic Dy- ported at Several Elevations. Journal of Pressure Vessel
namic Analysis of Axisymmetric Solids. NTIS, AD Technology, pp. 162‐165, May 1976.
764244, July 1973. [46] Clough, R. W., and Pensien, J. Dynamics of Structures.
[30] Hou, S. N. Earthquake Simulation Models and Their Chapter 27‐4, McGraw‐Hill Book Co., New York, 1975.
Applications. Ph.D. Thesis, MIT, 1968. [47] Meirovitch, L. Analytical Methods in Vibrations. p.
[31] Lin, W. L., and Lin, T. H. A Discussion of Coupling and 403, MacMillan Co., New York, 1967.
Resource Effects for Integrated Systems. 3rd SMIRT [48] Reid, T. J. Free Vibration and Hysteretic Damping.
Conference, Paper K5/2, London, 1975. Journal of the Royal Aeronautical Society. Vol. 69, p.
[32] Hadjian, A. H. On the Decoupling of Secondary Sys- 283, 1956.
tems for Seismic Analysis. 6th World Conference on [49] Bohm, G. J. Damping for Dynamic Analysis of Reactor
Earthquake Engineering, Vol. 12, pp. 12‐13 — 12‐18, Coolant Loop Systems. ANS National Topic Meeting
New Delhi, Jan. 1977. Water Reactor Safety, CONF-730304 USAEC, Salt Lake
[33] Pickle, T. W., Jr. Evaluation of Nuclear System Re- City, UT, Mar. 1973.
quirements for Accommodating Seismic Effects. Nucle- [50] Hart, G. C., and Ibãnez, P. Experimental Determina-
ar Engineering and Design: 20, 1972. tion of Damping in Nuclear Power Plant Structures
[34] Fortune, H. J. Modeling Techniques and Procedures. and Equipment. Nuclear Engineering and Design: 25,
1st ASCE Specialty Conference on Structural Design of pp. 112‐125, 1973.
Nuclear Plant Facilities, Pittsburgh, PA, Apr. 1972. [51] Newmark, N. M., and Rosenblueth, E. Fundamentals
[35] Hadjian, A. H. Earthquake Forces on Equipment in of Earthquake Engineering. pp. 321‐363, Prentice‐Hall,
Nuclear Power Plants. Journal of Power Division, pp. Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 1971.
649‐665, ASCE, July 1971. [52] Rayleigh, Lord, The Theory of Sound. Vol. 1, p. 130,
[36] Biggs, J. M. Seismic Response Spectra for Equipment Dover, NY, 1945.
Design in Nuclear Power Plants. 1st SMIRT Conference, [53] Caughey, T. K. Classical Normal Modes in Damped
Paper K4/7, Berlin. Linear Dynamic Systems. Journal of Applied Mechanics:
[37] Kapur, K. K., and Shao, L. C. Generation of Seismic 27, pp. 269‐271, 1960.
Floor Response Spectra for Equipment Design. ASCE [54] Wilson, E. L., and Pensien, J. Evaluation of Orthogonal
Specialty Conference on Structural Design of Nuclear Damping Matrices. Int. J. for Numerical Methods in Eng.,
Power Plant Facilities, Chicago, IL, Dec. 1973. Vol. 4, pp. 5‐10, 1972.
[38] O’Hara, G. J. Effect Upon Shock Spectra of the Dy- [55] Yeh, G. C. K. Determination of the Damping Matrix
namic Reaction of Structures, NRL Report 5236, U.S. Dynamic Structural Analysis of Reactor Containment.
Naval Research Laboratory, Dec. 1958. Proceedings of the First International Conference on
[39] Newmark, N. M. Seismic Response of Reactor Facility Structural Mechanics in Reactor Technology.
Components, ASME Symposium on Seismic Analysis of [56] Hurty, W. C. Dynamic Analysis of Structural Systems
Pressure Vessels and Piping Components, San Francisco, Using Component Modes. J. of AIAA, Vol. 3, No. 4, Apr.
CA, May 1971. 1965.

408
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

[57] Koss, P. Element Associated Damping by Modal [74] Amin, M., and Ang, A. H. S. A Nonstationary Stochastic
Synthesis. ANS National Topic Meeting Water Reactor Model of Earthquake Motions, University of Illinois, Ci-
Safety, Salt Lake City, UT, Mar. 1973. vil Engineering Studies. Urbana, IL, 1966.
[58] Olsen, B. E., Singleton, N. R., and Bohm, G. J. Indian [75] Kennedy, R. P., and Newmark, N. M. Bases for Criteria
Point Loop Vibration Test Program SCAP 7920, Wes- for Combination of Earthquake and Other Transient Re-
tinghouse Nuclear Energy Systems, 1972. sponse by the Square‐root‐sum‐of‐the‐squares Method.
[59] Whitman, R. V., Christian, J. T., and Biggs, J. M. Para- NEDO-24010-2, General Electric Company, San Jose,
metric Analysis of Soil–Structure Interaction for a Reac- CA, Dec. 1978.
tor Building. Proceedings of the First International [76] Singh, A. K., and Subramanian, C. V. SRSS Application
Conference on Structural Mechanics in Reactor Technol- Criteria as Applied to Mark II Load Combination Cases.
ogy, pp. 257-279, Berlin, Sep. 1971. NEDO‐24010‐1, General Electric Company, San Jose,
[60] Johnson, T. E., and McCaffery, T. J. Current Techni- CA, Oct. 1978.
ques for Analyzing Structures and Equipment for Seis- [77] Kennedy, R. P., Tong, W. H., and Newmark, N. M.
mic Effects. ASCE Conference, New Orleans, LA, 1969. Study to Demonstrate the SRSS Combined Response
[61] Whitman, R. V. Soil Structure Interaction. Seismic De- Has Greater Than 84 Percent Nonexceedance Probabil-
sign for Nuclear Power Plants (Hansen, R. J., ed.), pp. ity When the Newmark–Kennedy Acceptance Criteria
241‐269, MIT Press, Cambridge, MA, 1970. Are Satisfied. NEDO‐24010‐03, General Electric Com-
[62] Wiley, J. W., Schechter, K. M., Price, D. L. Koss, P. W. pany, San Jose, CA, Aug. 1979.
Seismic Analysis and Design of the San Onofre Nuclear [78] Review of Methods and Criteria for Dynamic Combi-
Generation Station, Units 2 & 3 Containment. Electric nations in Piping Systems. NURE 6/CR‐1330, Brookha-
Power and the Civil Engineer, ASCE, 1974. ven National Laboratory, Apr. 1980.
[63] Hurty, W. C., Collins, J. D., and Hass, G. C. Dynamic [79] Chen, P. Y. (ed.) Flow‐Induced Vibration Design Guide-
Analysis of Large Structures by Modal Synthesis Tech- lines, ASME, Vol. pp. 1–52, New York, 1981.
niques. Computer and Structures, Vol. 1, 1971. [80] Paidoussis, M. P. A Review of Flow‐Induced Vibra-
[64] Pajuhesh, J., and Hadjian, A. H. Dynamic Interaction of tions in Reactors and Reactor Components. Nuclear
Components, Structure and Foundation of Nuclear Science and Engineering: 74, pp. 31–60, 1983.
Power Facilities. 4th SMIRT Conference, Paper K3/9, [81] Chen, S. S. Flow‐Induced Vibration of Circular Cylind-
San Francisco, CA, Aug. 1977. rical Structures, Hemisphere Publishing Corporation,
[65] Ibrahim, A. M., and Hadjian, A. H. The Composite Washington, DC, 1987.
Damping Matrix for Three Dimensional Soil–Structure [82] Blevins, R. D. Flow‐Induced Vibration, 2nd Ed., Van
System. 2nd ASCE Specialty Conference on Structural De- Nostrand Reinhold, New York, 1990.
sign of Nuclear Plant Facilities, New Orleans, LA, Dec. [83] Mulcahy, T. M., and Wambsganss, M. W.
1975. Flow‐Induced Vibration of Nuclear Reactor System
[66] Roesset, J. M., Whitman, R. V., Dobry, R. Modal Anal- Components, Shock Vib. Dig. 8(7), pp. 33–45 1976.
ysis for Structures with Foundation Interaction. ST3, [84] Naudascher, E., and Rockwell, D. (eds.) Practical Ex-
pp. 399‐416, ASCE, Mar. 1973. periences with Flow Induced Vibrations, Springer‐
[67] Caughey, T. K., and Vijayaraghavan, A. Free and Verlag, New York, 1980.
Forced Oscillation of a Dynamic System with Linear [85] Mulcahy, T. M. Flow‐Induced Vibration Testing Scale
Hysteretic Damping (Nonlinear Theory). Int. J. Non- Modeling Relations. Flow‐Induced Vibration Design
linear Mechanics, Vol. 5, pp. 533–555, 1970. Guidelines, pp. 111–126.
[68] Papoulis, A. Probability, Random Variables and Sto- [86] Bohm, G. J., and Tagart, S. W., Jr. Flow‐Induced Vibra-
chastic Processes. McGraw‐Hill, New York, 1965. tion in the Design of Nuclear Components.
[69] Shooman, M. L. Probabilistic Reliability: An Engineer- Flow‐Induced Vibration Design Guidelines, pp. 1–10.
ing Approach. McGraw‐Hill, New York, 1968. [87] Sarpkaya, T. Vortex‐Induced Oscillations — A Selec-
[70] Tagart, S. W., Jr., and Vagliente, V. N. Probability Eva- tive Review. Journal of Applied Mechanics, 6, pp.
luation for Dynamic Response Combinations. Proceed- 241–258 1979.
ings of the Fourth International Conference on [88] Chen, S. S. Vibration of a Group of Circular Cylinders
Structural Mechanics in Reactor Technology, San Fran- Subjected to a Fluid Flow. Flow‐Induced Vibration De-
cisco, CA, Aug. 1977. sign Guidelines, pp. 75–88.
[71] Tsai, N. C. Spectrum Compatible Motions for Design [89] Connors, H. J., Jr. Vortex Shedding Excitation and the
Purpose, Journal of the Engineering Mechanics Division, Vibration of Circular Cylinders. Flow‐Induced Vibration
Vol. 98, No. 2, pp. 345‐356, ASCE, 1972. Design Guidelines, pp. 47–74.
[72] Lin, C. W. DEBLIN2 — A Computer Code to Synthe- [90] Chen, S. S. Fluid Damping for Circular Cylindrical
size Earthquake Acceleration Time Histories. WCAP Structures. Nucl. Eng. Des. 63(1), pp. 81–109, 1981.
8867, Westinghouse Electric Corporation, Nov. 1976. [91] Mulcahy, T. M. Fluid Forces on Rods Vibrating in Fi-
[73] Housner, G. W., and Jennings, P. C. Generation of Ar- nite Length Annular Regions. Journal of Applied Me-
tificial Earthquakes. 90, EMI, pp. 113‐150, ASCE, 1964. chanics 102(2), pp. 234–240, 1980.

409
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

[92] Blevins, R. D. Equations for Natural Frequency and [109] Mulcahy, T. M. Avoidance of the Lock‐in Phenomen-
Mode Shape, Van Nostrand Reinhold Company, New on in Partial Cross Flow. J. Sound Vib. 112(3), pp.
York, 1979. Reprinted Robert E. Krieger Publishing 570–574, 1987.
Co., Malabar, FL. [110] Sarpkaya, T. Fluid Forces on Oscillating Cylinders. J.
[93] Au‐Yang, M. K. Generalized Hydrodynamic Mass for Water Way Port Coastal and Ocean Division 104, pp.
Beam Mode Vibration of Cylinders Coupled by Fluid 275–290, ASCE, 1978.
Gap. Journal of Applied Mechanics 44, pp. 172–173, [111] Griffin, O. M., Skop, R. A., and Ramberg, E. The Reso-
1977. nant, Vortex‐Excited Vibrations of Structures and Cable
[94] King, R. A Review of Vortex Shedding Research and Systems. Offshore Technology Conference, Houston, TX,
Its Application. Ocean Engineering 4, pp. 141–171, Paper No. OTC-2319, 1975.
1977. [112] Au‐Yang, M. K. Flow‐Induced Vibration — Guide-
[95] Blevins, R. D. Review of Sound Induced by Vortex lines for Design, Diagnosis, and Trouble Shooting of
Shedding from Cylinders. J. Sound Vib. 92, pp. Common Power Plant Components. Joint Flow‐Induced
455–470, 1984. Vibration Symposium, ASME Winter Annual Meeting,
[96] Den Hartog, J. P. Mechanical Vibrations, 4th Ed., New Orleans, LA, 1984; and Journal of Pressure Vessel
McGraw‐Hill, New York, p. 305, 1956. Technology 107, pp. 326–334, 1985.
[97] Keefe, R. T. An Investigation of the Fluctuating Forces [113] Connors, H. J. Fluid‐elastic Vibration of Tube Arrays
Acting on a Stationary Circular Cylinder in a Subsonic Excited by Cross Flow. Symposium on Flow‐Induced Vi-
Stream and of the Associated Sound Field. University bration in Heat Exchangers, ASME Winter Annual Meet-
of Toronto, UTIA Report No. 76, 112, 1961. ing, Dec. 1970.
[98] Ramberg, S. E. The Influence of Yaw Angle Upon the [114] Roberts, B. W. Low Frequency, Aero‐elastic Vibra-
Vortex Wakes of Stationary and Vibrating Cylinders. tions in a Cascade of Circular Cylinders. Mechanical En-
Naval Research Laboratory Memorandum Report gineering Science Monograph No. 4, 1966.
3822, Washington, DC, 1978. [115] Chen, S. S., Jendrzejczyk, J. A., and Lin, W. H. Experi-
[99] Paidoussis, M. P. Fluid‐elastic Vibration of Cylinder ments on Fluid‐elastic Instability in Tube Banks Subject
Arrays in Axial and Cross‐Flow State of the Art. to Liquid Cross Flow, Part 1: Rectangular Arrays. Ar-
Flow‐Induced Vibration Design Guidelines, pp. 11–46. gonne National Laboratory Report ANL‐CT-78-44, July
[100] Pettigrew, M. J., and Gorman, D. J. Vibration of Heat 1978.
Exchanger Tube Bundles in Liquid and Two‐Phase [116] Weaver, D. S., and Grover, L. K. Cross Flow Induced
Cross‐Flow. Flow‐Induced Vibration Design Guidelines, Vibrations in a Tube Bank. Journal of Pressure Vessel
pp. 89–110. Technology 101, 1979.
[101] Zdravkovich, M. M. Review of Flow Interference be- [117] Guerrero, H. N., et al. Flow Induced Vibrations of a
tween Two Circular Cylinders in Various Arrange- PWR Upper Guide Structure Tube Bank Model. Paper
ments. Journal of Fluids Engineering 99, pp. 618–633, presented at Topical Meeting on Nuclear Reactor Ther-
1977. mal Hydraulics, Saratoga, NY, Oct. 1980; Combustion
[102] Owen, P. R. Buffeting Excitation of Boiler Tube Vi- Engineering Technical Paper, Windsor, TIS-6297.
bration. J. Mech. Eng. Sci. 7, p. 437, 1965. [118] Southworth, D. J., and Zdravkovich, M. M. Cross
[103] Chen, Y. N. Flow‐Induced Vibration and Noise in Flow Induced Vibrations of Finite Tube Banks with In‐
Tube Bank Heat Exchangers Due to von Karman Line Arrangements. J. Mech. Eng. Sci. 17, pp. 190–198,
Streets. Journal of Engineering for Industry 90(1), pp. 1975.
135–146, 1968. [119] Paidoussis, M. P. Flow‐Induced Vibrations in Nucle-
[104] Fitz‐Hugh, J. S. Flow‐Induced Vibration in Heat Ex- ar Reactors and Heat Exchangers. In Practical Experi-
changers. International Symposium on Vibration Prob- ence with Flow Induced Vibrations (E. Naudascher and
lems in Industry, Keswick, England, Paper 427, 1973. D. Rockwell, eds.), Springer‐Verlag, New York, pp.
[105] Chen, Y. N. Fluctuating Lift Forces of the Karman 1–81, 1980.
Vortex Streets on Single Circular Cylinders and in Tube [120] Chen, S. S. Guidelines for the Instability Flow Velo-
Bundles, Part 3 — Lift Forces in Tube Bundles. Journal city of Tube Arrays in Cross Flow. J. Sound Vib. 93(1),
Engineering for Industry 94, pp. 603–628, 1972. pp. 439–455, 1984.
[106] Scruton, C. On the Wind Excited Oscillations of [121] Blevins, R. D. Discussion of Guidelines for the In-
Stacks, Towers, and Masts. National Physical Laborato- stability Flow Velocity of Tube Arrays in Cross Flow.
ry Symposium on Wind Effects on Buildings and Struc- J. Sound Vib. 97, pp. 641–644, 1984.
tures, Paper 16, pp. 798–832, 1963. [122] Au‐Yang, M. K., and Connelly, W. H. A Computerized
[107] Bishop, R. E. D., and Hassan, Y. A. The Lift and Drag Method for Flow‐induced Random Vibration Analysis
Forces on a Circular Cylinder in a Flowing Field. Proc. of Nuclear Reactor Internals. Nucl. Eng. Des. 42, pp.
Royal Soc., London, A 227, pp. 51–75, 1964. 257–263, 1977.
[108] King, R. On Vortex Excitation of Model Piles in [123] Lin, Y. K. Probabilistic Theory of Structural Dyan-
Water. J. Sound Vib. 29(2), pp. 169–188, 1973. mics, McGraw Hill, New York, 1967.

410
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

[124] Wambsganss, M. W., and Boers, B. L. Parallel‐ [139] Weaver, D. S., and Fitzpatrick, J. A. A Review of Flow
Flow‐Induced Vibration of a Cylindrical Rod. ASME Pa- Induced Vibrations in Heat Exchangers. International
per No. 68-WA/NE‐15, Dec. 1968. Conference on Flow Induced Vibrations, Bowness‐on‐
[125] Crandall, S. H., and Marks, W. D. Random Vibration Windermere, England, Paper A1, pp. 1–17, May 1987.
in Mechanical Systems, Academic Press, New York, [140] Weaver, D. S., Fitzpatrick, J. A., and ElKashlan, M.
1963. Strouhal Numbers for Heat Exchanger Tube Arrays in
[126] Corcos, G. M. The Structure of the Turbulent Pres- Cross Flow. Journal of Pressure Vessel Technology 109,
sure Field in Boundary Layer Flow. J. Fluid Mech. 13, pp. 219–223, 1987.
1964. [141] Chen, S. S., and Jendrzejczyk, J. A. Fluid Excitation
[127] Au‐Yang, M. K. Turbulent Buffeting of a Multi‐Span Forces Acting on a Square Tube Array. Journal of Fluids
Tube Bundle. Journal of Vibration, Stress and Reliability Engineering 109, pp. 415–423, 1987.
in Design, 108, pp. 150–154 1986. [142] Axisa, F., Antunes, J., Villard, B., and Wullschleger, M.
[128] Blevins, R. D., Gibert, R. J., and Villard, B. Experi- Random Excitation of Heat Exchanger Tubes by Cross
ments on Vibration of Heat Exchanger Tubes in Cross Flow. 1988 International Symposium on Flow‐Induced
Flow. Sixth International Conference on Structural Me- Vibration and Noise, ASME, Chicago, IL, Vol. 2 —
chanics in Reactor Technology, Paris, France, Paper Flow‐Induced Vibration of Cylinder Arrays in Cross Flow,
B6/9, 1981. pp. 23–47, 1988.
[129] Mulcahy, T. M. Fluid Forces on a Rigid Cylinder in [143] Fritz, R. J., and Kiss, E. The Vibration of a Cantilev-
Turbulent Cross Flow. Symposium on Flow‐Induced Vi- ered Cylinder Surrounded by An Annular Fluid. Knolls
brations, Vol. 1-Excitation and Vibration of Bluff Bodies Atomic Power Laboratory Report KAPL‐M-6539.
in Cross Flow, pp. 5–28, ASME, New York, 1984. [144] Horvay, G., and Bowers, G. Influence of Entrained
[130] Chen, S. S. A Review of Flow‐Induced Vibration of Water Mass on the Vibration Mode of a Shell. Journal
Two‐Circular Cylinders in Cross Flow. Journal of Pres- of Fluids Engineering, 1975.
sure Vessel Technology 108, pp. 382–393, 1986. [145] Au‐Yang, M. K. Free Vibration of Fluid-Coupled
[131] Chen, S. S., and Wambsganss, M. W. Parallel‐ Coaxial Cylindrical Shells of Different Lengths. Journal
Flow‐Induced Vibration of Fuel Rods. Nucl. Eng. Des. of Applied Mechanics: 43, pp. 480–484, 1976.
18, pp. 253–278, 1972. [146] Chen, S. S., Wambsganss, M. W., and Jendrzejczyk, J.
[132] Mulcahy, T. M., Wambsganss, M. W., Lin, W. H., Yeh, A. Added Mass and Damping of a Vibrating Rod in Con-
T. T., and Lawrence, W. P. Measurements of Wall Pres- fined Viscous Fluid. Journal of Applied Mechanics: 98(2),
sure Fluctuations on a Cylinder in Annular Water Flow pp. 325–329, 1976.
with Upstream Disturbances. Sixth International Con- [147] Krajcinovic, D. Vibration of Two Coaxial Cylindrical
ference on Structural Mechanics in Reactor Technology, Shells Containing Fluid. Nuclear Engineering and De-
Paris, France, Paper B6/5*, 1981. sign: 30, pp. 242–248, 1974.
[133] Gibert, R. S. Etude des fluctuations of pression dans [148] Levin, L., and Milan, D. Coupled Breathing Vibration
les circuits para courus par des fluides — Sources de of Two Thin Cylindrical Shells in a Fluid. Proceedings of
fluctuations engendrees par les singularites d’Scoule- Vibration Problems in Industry, Keswick, England, Paper
ment. Note CEA‐N 1925, 1976. 616, 1973.
[134] Mulcahy, T. M., Yeh, T. T., and Miskevics, A. J. Turbu- [149] Au‐Yang, M. K., and Skinner, D. A. Effect of Hydrody-
lence and Rod Vibrations in an Annular Region with Up- namic Mass Coupling on the Response of a Nuclear Re-
stream Disturbances. J. Sound Vib. 69(1), pp. 59–69, actor to Ground Acceleration. Proceedings of the 4th
1980. International Conference on Structural Mechanics in Re-
[135] Lin, W. H., Wambsganss, M. W., and Jendrzejczyk, J. actor Technology, Paper K 5/5.
A. Wall Pressure Fluctuations Within a Seven Rod Ar- [150] Brown, S. J. A Survey of Studies into the Hydrody-
ray. General Electric Report GEAP-24375 (DOE/ET/ namic Response of Fluid‐Coupled Cylinders. Journal of
34209-20), San Jose, CA, Nov. 1981. Pressure Vessel Technology: 104, pp. 2–19, 1982.
[136] Kadlec, J., and Ohlmer, E. On the Reproducibility of [151] Au‐Yang, M. K. Dynamics of Coupled Fluid‐
the Parallel‐Flow Induced Vibration of Fuel Pins. Nucl. Cylindrical Shells. Journal of Vibration, Stress and Relia-
Eng. Des. 17, pp. 355–360, 1971. bility in Design: 108, pp. 339–347, 1986.
[137] Wambsganss, M. W., and Mulcahy, T. M. [152] Arnold, R. H., and Warburton, G. B. 1949 Proceeding
Flow‐Induced Vibration of Nuclear Reactor Fuel. Shock Royal Society A: 197, p. 238.
Vib. Dig. 11(11), pp. 11–22, and 11(12), pp. 11–13, [153] Au‐Yang, M. K. Pump‐Induced Acoustic Pressure
1979. Distribution in An Annular Cavity Bounded by Rigid
[138] Weaver, D. S., and Yeung, H. C. The Effect of Tube Walls. Journal of Sound and Vibration: 62, pp.
Mass on the Flow Induced Response of Various Tube 577–591, 1979.
Arrays in Water. J. Sound Vib. 93(3), pp. 409–425, 1984. [154] Au‐Yang, M. K. Response of Fluid‐Elastically
Coupled Coaxial Cylindrical Shells to External Flow.
Journal of Fluids Engineering: 99, pp. 319–324, 1977.

411
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

[155] Au‐Yang, M. K., and Galford, J. E. A Structural Prior- [162] Chen, S. S. Design Guide for Calculating Hydrody-
ity Approach to Fluid‐Structure Interaction Problems. namics Mass. Argonne National Laboratory Report
Journal of Pressure Vessel Technology: 103, pp. ANL‐CT-76-45, 1976.
142–150, 1981. [163] Fritz, R. J. The Effects of Liquids on the Dynamic Mo-
[156] Au‐Yang, M. K. The Hydrodynamic Mass at Frequen- tions of Immersed Solids. Journal of Engineering for In-
cies above Coincidence. Journal of Sound Vibration: 86, dustry: 94, pp. 167–173, 1972.
pp. 288–292, 1983. [164] Chandler, C. K. Damping of Steam Generator Tubes.
[157] Yeh, T. T., and Chin, S. S. Dynamics of a Cylindrical Paper to be presented at the 2003 ASME PVP Confer-
Shell System Coupled by Viscous Fluid. Journal of ence, Cleveland, OH, July 2003.
Acoustical Society of America: 62, pp. 262–270, 1977. [165] Pettigrew, M. J., et al. Damping of Multispan Heat
[158] Mulcahy, T. M. Fluid Forces on Rods Vibrating in Fi- Exchanger Tubes, in Flow‐Induced Vibration. S. S. Chen
nite Length Annular Regions. Journal of Applied Me- (ed.), PVP‐104, pp. 97–98, ASME, New York, 1986.
chanics: 47, pp. 59–69, 1980. [166] Hadjian, A. H. and Tang, H. T. Piping System Damp-
[159] Wendel, K. Hydrodynamic Masses and Hydrody- ing Evaluations. Final report EPRI NP‐6035, Electric
namic Moments of Inertia. David Taylor Model Basin Power Research Institute, Palo Alto, CA, 1988.
Translation No. 260, 1950. [167] Blevins, R. D. Vibration of a Loosely Held Tube. Jour-
[160] Pettigrew, M. J., et al. Vibration of Tube Bundles in nal of Engineering for Industry: 97, pp. 1301–1304,
Two‐Phase Cross Flow, Part 1, 1988 International Sym- 1975.
posium on Noise and Vibration, Vol. 2, M. P. Paidoussis [168] Blevins, R. D. Vortex‐Induced Vibration and Damp-
(ed.), ASME, New York, 1988. ing of Thermowells. Journal of Fluids and Structures: 12,
[161] Paidoussis, M. P., Mavriplis, D., and Price, S. J. A pp. 427–444, 1998.
Potential‐Flow Theory for the Dynamics of Cylinder Ar- [169] Lazan, B. J. Damping of Material and Members in
rays in Cross Flow. Journal of Fluid Mechanics: 146, pp. Structural Mechanics. Pergamon Press, New York,
227–252, 1984. 1968.
[170] Au‐Yang, M. K. Flow‐Induced Vibration of Power
and Process Plant Components. ASME, New York, 2001.

412
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX O ð17Þ

RULES FOR DESIGN OF SAFETY VALVE INSTALLATIONS

ARTICLE O-1000
INTRODUCTION AND SCOPE

O-1100 SCOPE AND DEFINITIONS (1) load computation — open discharge system
(2) stress evaluation — open discharge system
O-1110 SCOPE
(3) closed discharge system
(a) The scope of Nonmandatory Appendix O is confined (4) general design considerations
to the design of Division 1, Class 1, 2, and 3, and Division
5, Subsection HC, Subpart A safety valve installations as O-1120 DEFINITIONS
defined in O-1120. The loads acting at the safety valve sta-
tion will affect the bending moments and stresses on a (a) Safety Valve. An automatic pressure-relieving de-
pressure vessel or in the complete piping system, out to vice actuated by the static pressure upstream of the valve
its anchors and/or extremities, and it is the designer’s re- and characterized by full opening pop action. It is used for
sponsibility to consider these loads. This Appendix, how- gas or vapor service.
ever, deals primarily with the safety valve installation and (b) Relief Valve. An automatic pressure-relieving device
not the complete piping system. actuated by the static pressure upstream of the valve
(b) The design of the safety valve installation requires which opens further with the increase in pressure over
that careful attention be paid to all loads acting on the the opening pressure. It is used primarily for liquid
system, the forces and bending moments in the piping service.
and piping components resulting from the loads, the load- (c) Safety Relief Valve. An automatic pressure actuated
ing and stress criteria, and general design practices. All relieving device suitable for use either as a safety valve
components in the safety valve installation must be given or relief valve, depending on application.
consideration, including the complete piping system, the (d) Power‐Actuated Pressure-Relieving Valve. A reliev-
connection to the main header, the safety valve, valve ing device whose movements to open or close are fully
and pipe flanges, the downstream discharge or vent pip- controlled by a source of power (electricity, air, steam,
ing, and the system supports. The scope of this Appendix or hydraulic). The valve may discharge to atmosphere
is intended to cover all loads on all components. or to a container at lower pressure. The conditions, and
(c) This Appendix has application to either safety, re- such effects, shall be taken into account. If the power‐
lief, or safety relief valve installations. For convenience, actuated pressure-relieving valves are also positioned in
however, the overpressure protection device is generally response to other control signals, the control impulse to
referred to as a safety valve. The loads associated with re- prevent overpressure shall be responsive only to pres-
lief or safety relief valve operation may differ significantly sure and shall override any other control function.
from those of safety valve operation, but otherwise the (e) Open Discharge Installation. An installation where
rules contained herein are equally applicable to each type the fluid is discharged directly to atmosphere or to a vent
of valve installation. pipe that is uncoupled from the safety valve. Figure
(d) Pressure relief safety valve stations require detailed O-1120(e)-1 shows a typical open discharge installation
analysis. In performing its design function the station is with an elbow installed at the valve discharge to control
subject to dynamic loading from the structural response direction of flow. Figure O-1120(e)-2 shows a typical
to both thermal and hydraulic forces and, in some in- open discharge system discharging into a vent pipe. The
stances, significant impact loading from the valve me- values for l and m in Figure O-1120(e)-2 are upper limits
chanism. The resultant loading is a mechanical load. for which the rules for open discharge systems may be
(e) This Appendix provides guidance for design and used.
analysis of the piping components of a safety valve sta- (f) Closed Discharge Installation. An installation where
tion. The guidance is presented by discussing four areas the effluent is carried to a distant spot by a discharge pipe
of consideration which is connected directly to the safety valve.

413
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure O-1120(e)-1 O-1200 METHOD OF AND PROCEDURE FOR

Application Point of Venting Force F LOAD COMPUTATION

O-1210 BASIC CONSIDERATIONS

(a) The load computation includes two thermodynamic
computations: evaluation of momentum effects and eva-
luation of pressure effects. The response computation of
the piping system includes consideration of transient, dy-
namic loading effects of the sudden opening and closing
valve action. The loads computation is combined with
other specified loads and translated to a stress computa-
tion which is then compared to the Code allowable stress
for acceptability.
(b) The basic principles of analysis of a pressure relief
valve station are generally applicable to both open and
closed discharge systems. The application of these basic
principles may be quite different.

(g) Safety Valve Installation. The safety valve installa-

tion is defined as that portion of the system shown on
Figures O-1120(e)-1 and O-1120(e)-2. It includes the O-1220 OPEN SYSTEM — DISCHARGE THRUST
run pipe or pressure vessel, the branch connection, the in- (a) The limiting dimensions for safety valve arrange-
let pipe, the valve, the discharge piping, and the vent pipe. ments are shown by Figure O-1120(e)-2. The determina-
Also included are the components used to support the tion of the reaction force F value(s) is the responsibility of
system for all static and dynamic loads. the piping system designer.
(b) The steady‐state load due to steam reaction force
from the opening and subsequent venting of the safety
valve shall include consideration of both momentum
and pressure effects and may be computed by the formula

where
ð17Þ Figure O-1120(e)-2 A = exit flow area at point e
Limiting Safety Valve Arrangements and F = reaction force
Dimensions g = gravitational constant, 32.2 lbm-ft/lbf-sec 2
(9.81 m/s)
P e = static gage pressure at point e
Vent stack V e = exit velocity at point e
W = mass flow rate (relieving capacity stamped on the
Pressure valve × 1.11 — adjust for units to be compatible,
relief/safety if necessary)
m Point “e”
valve
The reaction force F is a design mechanical load that re-
Discharge
quires structural equilibrium for system stability and is
pipe
applied as shown in Figure O-1120(e)-1.
l (c) To ensure consideration of the effects of the sud-
Steam line
(run pipe) denly applied load F , a dynamic load factor DLF, based
Branch pipe or vessel on the relief/safety valve opening time and system dy-
namic characteristics, shall be applied to the forces and
moments due to the reaction force F .
l  4.0 × discharge pipe diameter (d) Instead of a simplified dynamic analysis with the
m  6.0 × discharge pipe diameter application of the DLF a dynamic hydraulic/structural
system analysis may be performed.

414
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

O-1230 OTHER MECHANICAL LOADS not be combined. If a combination includes earthquake ef-
fects, M i shall be the greater of the resultant range of mo-
Other mechanical loads to be considered should in-
ment due to the combination of all loads considering
clude, as a minimum
one‐half the range of the earthquake or the resultant
(a) interaction loads on the run pipe when more than
range of moment due to the full range of the earthquake.
one valve releases, and
(b) the transient impacting of the valve mechanism
opening and closing, if applicable
O-1320 CLASS 2 OR CLASS 3 PIPING
(a) For Class 2 or Class 3 piping, NC-3653.1(a) eq. (9a)
O-1300 STRESS EVALUATION OPEN SYSTEM or ND-3653.1(a) eq. (9a) is to be used with M b to include
Evaluation of stresses due to the design mechanical the reaction force moment. The contribution from the re-
loads may be made by using the rules for Class 1 piping, action force F to the branch moment, as defined in
O-1310 and for Class 2 or Class 3 piping, O-1320. NC-3653.3 or ND-3653.3, shall be no less than the pro-
duct, F × nominal discharge pipe size × DLF.
O-1310 CLASS 1 PIPING (b) Note that the use of NC-3653.1(a) eqs. (9a) and (9b)
(a) Whenever any of the equations of NB‐3650 are used o r N D - 3 6 5 3 . 1 ( a ) eq s . ( 9 a ) a n d ( 9 b ) f o r b r a n c h
in the analysis of Class 1 piping systems, the value of M i connections requires a nozzle spacing, as defined by
shall include the reaction force moment. The contribution NC‐3643.3(c)(6) or ND‐3643.3(c)(6).
from the reaction force F to the branch moment M b , as
defined in NB-3683.1, shall be no less than the product
F × nominal discharge pipe size × DLF.
(b) Note that the use of the equations of NB‐3650 for O-1400 CLOSED DISCHARGE SYSTEMS —
branch connections requires a nozzle spacing as defined OPEN DISCHARGE SYSTEMS WITH
by NB-3683.8(a)(2). LONG DISCHARGE PIPES —
(c) When NB‐3650 eq. (9) is used in the analysis, the SYSTEMS WITH SLUG FLOW
value of M i shall be defined as:
(a) For closed discharge systems, open discharge sys-
M i = resultant moment due to a combination of primary tems with long discharge pipes, and systems with slug
loads. Loads to be considered include: weight; flow, the state of the art does not lend itself to a well de-
earthquake, considering only one‐half the range of fined method of load computation. For these systems the
the earthquake and excluding the effects of anchor dynamic interaction forces of the total system including
displacement due to earthquake; thrusts from relief the attached discharge piping must be considered.
and safety valve loads from pressure and flow tran- (b) When a safety valve discharge is connected to a rel-
sients; and other sustained mechanical loads. atively long run of pipe and is suddenly opened, there is a
(d) The combination of loads shall be specified in the period of transient flow until the steady‐state discharge
Design Specification. In the combination of loads, all di- condition is reached. During this transient period, the
rectional moment components in the same direction shall pressure and flow will not be uniform. When the safety
be combined before determining the resultant moment; valve is initially opened, the discharge pipe may be filled
i.e., resultant moments of loads shall not be combined. with air. If the safety valve is on a steam system, the steam
(e) When NB-3650 eq. (10) is used in the analysis, the discharge from the valve must purge the air from the pipe
value of M i shall be defined as: before steady state steam flow is established and, as the
pressure builds up at the valve outlet flange and waves
M i = resultant range of moment due to a combination of start to travel down the discharge pipe, the pressure wave
primary plus secondary loads. Loads to be consid- initially emanating from the valve will steepen as it pro-
ered include: thermal expansion; anchor movement pagates, and it may steepen into a shock wave before it
from any cause; earthquake effects; thrusts from reaches the exit.
relief and safety valve loads from pressure and flow
(c) Relief valves discharging into an enclosed piping
transients; and other mechanical loads.
system create momentary unbalanced forces which act
(f) The combination of loads shall be specified in the on the piping system during the first few milliseconds fol-
Design Specification. The earthquake loading shall be con- lowing relief valve lift. The pressure waves traveling
sidered in conjunction with the operating conditions. through the piping system following the rapid opening
Weight effects need not be considered in the range load- of the safety valve will cause bending moments in the
ing because they are noncyclic in character. In the combi- safety valve discharge piping and throughout the remain-
nation of loads, all directional moment components in the der of the piping system. In such a case, the designer must
same direction shall be combined before determining the compute the magnitude of the loads and perform appro-
resultant moment; i.e., resultant moments of loads shall priate evaluation of their effects.

415
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(d) Particular attention should be given to the large for- (h) The reaction force moment arm on the outlet piping
cing functions acting on the pipe if it contains water seals, should be minimized in accordance with the valve manu-
two phase flow, or if there is a water column in the dis- facturer’s recommendation.
charge piping. (i) The relief valve outlet piping stack clearance should
(e) The reaction force effects are dynamic in nature. A be checked for interference from thermal expansion,
time history dynamic solution, incorporating a multi‐ earthquake displacements, etc. The vent stack and valve
degree‐of‐freedom model solved for the transient hydrau- discharge piping system should be arranged such that
lic forces is considered to be a preferred method of pull out of the valve discharge pipe does not occur.
analysis. (j) Thermal expansion effects are to be considered as
they presently are defined in the Code.
(k) The force due to venting should be included in the
evaluation of the stack forces. The effects of back pressure
O-1500 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
in the discharge stack can be significant.
Reference should be made to NB/NC/ND-7000. (l) The station should be arranged such that the dis-
It is recommended that the following be included as charge piping is void of collected water. The discharge
part of the total design consideration. piping from each valve or device should be at least of
(a) Where not required by the Code, it is recommended the same size as the valve outlet.
that the header penetrations for relief valves be in accor- (m) Drains shall be provided so that condensed leak-
dance with the nozzle spacing recommendation of age, rain, or other water sources will not collect on the
NB-3683.8(a)(2). discharge side of the valve and adversely affect the reac-
tion force. Safety valves are generally provided with drain
(b) No more than one penetration should be made
plugs that can be used for a drain connection. Discharge
around the circumference of the run pipe (i.e., no two pe-
piping shall be sloped and provided with adequate drains
netrations in the same transverse plane), the spacing to
if low points are unavoidable in the layout.
be in accordance with the preceding (a).
(n) Where water seals are used ahead of the safety
(c) The stress analysis of the pipe could require addi-
valve, the total water volume in the seals should be mini-
tional thickness for membrane protection above that re-
mized. To minimize forces due to slug flow or water seal
quired by the thickness equation for pressure load only.
excursion, the number of changes of direction and the
(d) Detail design should preclude sharp notches that lengths of straight runs of piping should be limited.
may be generated by the use of saddles, gussets, ribs, etc. (o) Often safety valves are full lift, pop‐type valves and
(e) Contoured outlets are often advantageous. are essentially full flow devices with no capability for flow
(f) The direction of discharge of several pressure relief modulation. In actual pressure transients, the steam flow
valves on the same run pipe should be such as to tend to required to prevent overpressure is a varying quantity,
balance one another for all modes of operation specified from zero to the full rated capacity of the safety valves.
in the piping design specification. As a result, the valves may be required to open and close
(g) Supports may require a detailed analysis to deter- a number of times during the transient. Since each open-
mine their role in restraint as well as support. Considera- ing and closing produces a reaction force, consideration
tions should be given to the possibility that, under load, should be given to the effects of multiple valve operations
snubbing devices may permit significant deflections. on the piping system, including supports.

416
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX P

ARTICLE P-1000
CERTIFIED MATERIAL TEST REPORTS

P-1100 INTRODUCTION (h) Charpy V‐notch and drop‐weight test results re-
quired by NB/NC/ND/NE/NF/NG-2320, when this testing
The requirements for a Certified Material Test Report is required by NB/NC/ND/NE/NF/NG-2311. When Char-
(CMTR) are stated in NCA‐3860. However, the material py V‐notch impact tests are required, the report shall in-
requirements vary with the class of construction, the pro- clude the test temperature; the absorbed energy when
duct form of material, the requirements of the material required; the lateral expansion; and the location and or-
specification, and the manufacturer’s procedures. Since ientation of the specimens used. When drop‐weight tests
changes in any of these requirements may be made by Ad- are required, the report shall include the test tempera-
denda or new editions of the Code, it is important for the ture; the type, location, and orientation of the specimens
purchaser and the supplier to know the requirements of used; and the results of the tests (break or no break).
the applicable edition and Addenda, so that the reported (i) Nondestructive examinations performed and ac-
results can be compared with the requirements to deter- cepted as required by NB/NC/ND/NE/NF/NG-2500.
mine whether or not the material is in compliance with
the Code.
P-1300 INFORMATION REQUIRED UNDER
SPECIFIC CIRCUMSTANCES
P-1200 GENERAL REQUIRED INFORMATION The information given in (a) through (f) is required un-
der specific circumstances.
The items of information given in (a) through (i) below (a) Heat treatment data, as follows:
are required in the CMTRs for metallic material (as de- (1) temperatures (or temperature ranges) and times
fined by NCA‐1220 and NB/NC/ND/NE/NF/NG‐2100) at temperature used when the material specification re-
used in Section III, Division 1, construction. quires specific temperatures and times
(a) Name of certifying organization [P‐1200(j)]. (2) heat treatment conditions when no specific tem-
(b) Number and expiration date of the organization’s peratures (or temperature ranges) or times are required
Certificate of Authorization or Quality System Certificate by the material specification
(Materials). Alternatively, if the organization was quali- (3) the minimum solution annealing temperature
fied by a party other than the Society, the revision and used for austenitic stainless steels and high nickel alloys
date of the written program under which the material is (4) recorded temperature ranges and actual times at
being certified. temperature, and heating and cooling rates, for postweld
(c) Purchaser’s order or contract number. heat treatment of materials that are repaired by welding,
when postweld heat treatment is required by NB/NC/
(d) Description of the material, including specification
ND/NE/NF/NG-2500
number, grade, class, type, and nominal size, as applic-
(5) recorded temperatures and actual times at tem-
able. For pipe made to specifications which include both
perature for test coupons when required by NB/NC/
seamless and welded pipe, the report shall designate
ND/NE/NF/NG‐2210, when those paragraphs are
which type it is.
applicable
(e) Description of material identification marking. (b) Hydrostatic test pressure, when a hydrostatic test is
(f) Actual results of chemical analyses, tests, and exam- required by the material specification, or notation that
inations required by the Material Specification and this the hydrostatic test has not been performed, if it is
Section. deferred.
(g) Reports of weld repairs performed, if any, as re- (c) Ferrite Number for all A‐No. 8 welding material ex-
quired by NB/NC/ND/NE/NF/NG-2500, including radio- cept type 16‐8‐2, as required by NB/NC/ND/NE/NF/
graphic films, when radiography is required. NG‐2433.

417
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(d) The grain size, reported in accordance with ASTM P-1400 EXECUTION
E112, when a fine grain size is specified for metallic
materials. (a) All requirements of the material specification and
(e) For welding materials, in addition to applicable this Section need not be performed by the same organiza-
paragraphs above, the process, the preheat and interpass tion. In that case the certifying organization shall ensure
temperature, the type of chemical analysis (filler metal/ that each organization, providing material or services, is
undiluted deposit), the shielding gas composition, and identified on the CMTR along with the activities for which
the Ferrite Number shall be reported as required by it is responsible. Alternatively, the CMTR’s furnished by
NB/NC/ND/NE/NF/NG‐2400 and as applicable. the other organizations may be referenced on and at-
(f) A list of chemical analyses, tests, examinations, and tached to the CMTR of the organization which supplies
heat treatments required by the Material Specification the material.
that were not performed. (b) The CMTR shall include a dated statement affirming
that the contents of the report are correct and accurate.
(c) Signing or notarization of the CMTR is not required.

418
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX Q

ARTICLE Q-1000
DESIGN RULES FOR CLAMP CONNECTIONS

Q-1100 INTRODUCTION (e) The rules of this Appendix should not be construed
to prohibit the use of other types of clamp connections
Q-1110 SCOPE provided that they are designed in accordance with good
(a) The rules in Nonmandatory Appendix Q apply spe- engineering practice and the method of design is accept-
cifically to the design of clamp connections for pressure able to the Inspector. These rules shall apply only to new
vessels and vessel parts and may be used in conjunction construction.
with the applicable requirements in Subsections NC, ND, (f) Clamps designed to the rules of this Section shall be
and NE. These rules are not to be used for the determina- provided with a bolt retainer. The retainer shall be de-
tion of the thickness of supported or unsupported signed to hold the clamps together independently in case
tubesheets integral with a hub nor for the thickness of of failure of the primary bolting. An appropriate external
covers. These rules provide only for hydrostatic end loads yoke or multiple bolting is considered satisfactory for this
and gasket seating and do not consider external loads or requirement. Clamp–hub friction shall not be considered
thermal effects. as a retainer method.
(b) The design of a clamp connection involves the selec-
tion of the gasket, bolting, hub, and clamp geometry (see Q-1120 MATERIALS
Figure Q-1130-1). Bolting shall be selected to satisfy the (a) Materials used in the construction of clamp connec-
requirements of Q-1140. Connection dimensions shall tions shall comply with the requirements given in Article
be such that the stresses in the clamp and hub, calculated NC-2000, Article ND-2000, or Article NE‐2000, as
in accordance with this Appendix, do not exceed the al- applicable.
lowable stresses specified in Q-1180. All calculations shall (b) Hubs and clamps shall not be machined from plate.
be made on dimensions in the corroded condition. Calcu-
lations for both assembly and operating conditions are
Q-1130 NOTATION
required.
(c) It is recommended that either a pressure energized The symbols defined below are used in the equations
or a low seating load gasket, or both, be used to compen- for the design of clamp‐type connections (see also Figures
sate for possible nonuniformity in the gasket seating force Q-1130-1 and Q-1130-2).
distribution. Hub faces shall be designed so as to have A = outside diameter of hub
metal‐to‐metal contact outside the gasket seal diameter. A 1 = partial clamp area
This may be provided by recessing the hub faces or by = (C w − 2C t )(C t )
use of a metal spacer (see Figure Q-1130-1). The contact A 2 = partial clamp area
area shall be of sufficient cross‐sectional area to prevent = 1.571C t 2
yielding of either the hub face or spacer under both oper- A 3 = partial clamp area
ating and assembly axial loads. = (C w − C g )l c
(d) It is recognized that there are clamp designs which A b = total cross‐sectional area of bolts per clamp lug
utilize no wedging action during assembly since clamping using the root diameter of the thread or least dia-
surfaces are parallel to the hub faces. These designs meter of unthreaded portion, whichever is less.
should satisfy the bolting and corresponding clamp and Cross‐sectional area of bolt retainer shall not be
hub requirements of a clamp connection design with a to- included in calculation of this area.
tal included clamping angle of 10 deg. This will provide A c = total effective clamp cross‐sectional area
some safety against loads imposed by angular deflections = A1 + A2 + A3
of the connection faces during operation and also provide A m = total required cross‐sectional area of bolts per
some compensation against mechanical and thermal clamp lug taken as the greater of A m 1 , A m 2 , or
ratcheting. Am3

419
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

A m 1 = total cross‐sectional area of bolts per clamp lug = axial distance from the hub face to the hub
at root of thread or section of least diameter un- shoulder ring centroid
der stress, required for the operating conditions
= W m 1 /2S b =
A m 2 = total cross‐sectional area of bolts per clamp lug
at root of thread or section of least diameter un- h2 = average thickness of hub shoulder
der stress, required for gasket seating = T − (g 2 tan ϕ)/2
= W m 2 /2S a HD = hydrostatic end force on bore area
A m 3 = total cross‐sectional area of bolts per clamp lug = 0.785 B 2P
at root of thread or section of least diameter un- hD = radial distance from effective clamp–hub reac-
der stress, required for assembly conditions tion load to the circle on which H D acts
= W m 3 /2S a = [C − (B + g 1 )]/2
B = inside diameter of hub HG = difference between total effective axial clamping
b = effective gasket or joint‐contact surface seating preload and the sum of total hydrostatic end
width (see Table XI-3221.1-2) force and total joint contact surface compression
B c = radial distance from connection centerline to ef- = [1.571W /tan(ϕ + μ )] − (H + H p )
fective center of bolts hG = radial distance from effective clamp–hub reac-
b o = basic gasket or joint‐contact surface seating tion load to the circle on which H G acts (for full
width (see Table XI-3221.1-2) face contact geometries h G = 0)
C = diameter of effective clamp–hub reaction load Hm = total axial gasket seating requirements for make-
= (A + C i )/2 up (3.14b G y or the axial seating load for self‐
C g = effective clamp gap taken at clamp–hub contact energizing gaskets, if significant)
center (C ) hn = hub neck length [minimum length of h n is 0.5g 1
C i = inside diameter of clamp or 1/4 in. (6 mm), whichever is larger]
C t = effective clamp thickness ho =
C w = effective clamp width
e b = radial distance from effective center of the bolts H p = total joint‐contact surface compression load
to the centroid of the clamp body = 2b × 3.14G m P (for self‐energized gaskets, use
= B c − (C i /2) − l c − X H p = 0 or actual retaining load if significant)
f = hub stress correction factor from Figure H T = difference between total hydrostatic end force
XI-3240-6. (This is the ratio of the stress in the and hydrostatic end force on bore area
small end of the hub to the stress in the large = H – HD
end.) (For values below limit of the Figure, use h T = radial distance from effective clamp–hub reac-
f = 1.0.) tion load to the circle on which H T acts
G = diameter at location of gasket load reaction. Ex- = [C − (B + G )/2]/2
cept as noted in Figure Q-1130-1, G is defined I c = effective moment of inertia of clamp relative to
as follows (see Table XI-3221.1-2): axis of entire section
(a) when b 0 ≤ 1/4 in. (6 mm), G = mean dia-
=
meter of gasket or joint contact face
(b) when b 0 > 1/4 in. (6 mm), G = outside dia- I h = effective moment of inertia of hub shoulder ring
meter of gasket contact face less 2b relative to its neutral axis
g 0 = thickness of hub neck at small end
g 1 = thickness of hub neck at intersection with hub =
shoulder
g 2 = height of hub shoulder (g 2 shall not be larger
L a = distance from W to the point where the clamp lug
than T )
joins the clamp body
= radial distance from the hub inside diameter to
l c = effective clamp lip length
the hub shoulder ring centroid
L h = clamp lug height
l m = effective clamp lip moment arm
=
= l c − (C − C i )/2
L w = clamp lug width
H = total hydrostatic end force m = gasket factor from Table XI-3221.1-1
= 0.785 G 2P M D = component of moment due to H D
h = hub taper length = HDhD
M F = offset moment
= H D (g 1 − g o )/2

420
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

M G = component of moment due to H G W = total design bolt load required for service or as-
= HGhG sembly, as may apply
M H = reaction moment at hub neck W e = total effective axial clamping preload on one
clamp lip and hub shoulder (gasket seating or
= assembly)
= 1.571W /tan(ϕ + μ)
M O = total rotational moment on hub (see Q-1150) W m 1 = minimum required total bolt load for the service
M P = pressure moment conditions [see Q-1140(b)(1)]
W m 2 = minimum required total bolt load for gasket seat-
= 3.14 × P BT (T /2 − )
ing [see Q-1140(b)(2)]
M R = radial clamp equilibrating moment
W m 3 = minimum required total bolt load for assembly
= [see Q-1140(b)(3)]
X = radial distance from inside surface of clamp body
MT = component of moment due to H T
to the centroid of the clamp body
= H T hT
N = outside diameter of hub neck
P = Design Pressure =
Q = reaction shear force at hub neck
y = gasket or joint‐contact surface unit seating load
= (see Table XI-3221.1-1)
Z = effective clamp–hub taper angle, deg (for gasket
r = clamp body radius (shall be less than or equal to
seating and preload, Z = ϕ + μ ; for operating,
Ct)
Z = ϕ − μ ) [see Q-1140(b)(4)]
S 1 = hub longitudinal stress on outside at hub neck
α = hub–neck pipe transition taper, deg (α shall not
S 2 = maximum Laḿe hoop stress at bore for hub neck
be greater than 45 deg)
section
μ = effective friction angle, deg
S 3 = hub axial shear stress (maximum) across the hub
ϕ = clamp–hub taper angle, deg (ϕ shall not exceed
shoulder
35 deg)
S 4 = hub radial shear stress (maximum) across the
hub neck Q-1140 BOLT LOADS
S 5 = clamp longitudinal stress at clamp body inner (a) General. During assembly of the clamp connection,
diameter the design bolt load W is transferred via the clamp–hub
S 6 = clamp tangential stress at clamp body outer taper angle to an axial load (effective clamp preload
diameter W e ). In addition, the effect of friction will cause W e to
S 7 = shear stress (maximum) across clamp lips be reduced for a given W . Friction effects can be reduced
S 8 = clamp lug bending stress by lubrication or by jarring the clamps during assembly.
S 9 = effective bearing stress between clamp and hub An appropriate friction angle shall be established for both
S a = allowable bolt stress at atmospheric temperature assembly and operating conditions.
(see Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Table 3) (b) Calculations. In the design of the bolting for a clamp
S A C = allowable design stress for clamp material at (as- connection, complete calculations shall be made for three
sembly condition) atmospheric temperature (see separate and independent sets of conditions which are
Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Tables 1A and 1B) defined as follows.
S A H = allowable design stress for hub material at (as-
(1) The required bolt load for the service conditions
sembly condition) atmospheric temperature
W m 1 shall be sufficient to:
(see Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Tables 1A and
(-a) resist the hydrostatic end force H exerted by
1B)
the maximum allowable working pressure on the area
S b = allowable bolt stress at Design Temperature (see
bounded by the diameter of gasket reaction; and
Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Table 3)
(-b) maintain on the gasket or joint‐contact sur-
S O C = allowable design stress for clamp material at
face, a compression load H p which experience has shown
(service condition) Design Temperature (see
to be sufficient to ensure a tight joint.
Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Tables 1A and 1B)
The minimum operating bolt load W m 1 shall be de-
S O H = allowable design stress for hub material at (ser-
termined in accordance with eq. (1).
vice condition) Design Temperature (see Section
II, Part D, Subpart 1, Tables 1A and 1B)
ð1Þ
T = thickness of hub shoulder for design purposes.
The hub shoulder ring is the ring with cross‐ (2) Before a tight joint can be obtained, it is neces-
sectional dimensions T by (A − B)/2. sary to seat the gasket or joint‐contact surface properly
by applying a minimum initial load (under atmospheric

421
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure Q-1130-1
Typical Hub and Clamp

Hub
1/4 in. (6 mm) min. radius 1/4 in. (6 mm) min. radius

h T h T
φ φ
α α
g2 g2
A A
hn hn
g1 g1
go go

N N B
B

(a) (b)

We We hG
HG
C HG
hD C hT hD
hT
g1 = go Hp or Hm g1 = go Hp or Hm
HD HD
HT HT

G G

(c) (d)

Clamp

Bc
Neutral Axis
La Neutral Axis

Clamp Lug W /2
W/2
X
Cg We Cw
Lh Ci /2 C
r

m
eb c
Ci Ct

(e) (f)

422
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure Q-1130-2
Typical Clamp Lug Configurations

423
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

temperature conditions without the presence of internal For the service conditions, the rotational hub moment
pressure), which is a function of the gasket material and M O is the sum of six individual moments M D , M G , M T ,
the effective gasket area to be seated. The minimum initial M F , M P , and M R based on the design bolt load of
bolt load required for gasket seating W m 2 shall be deter- Q-1140(d) eq. (4) with moment arms as given in Figure
mined in accordance with eq. (2). Q-1130-1.
For assembly, the rotational hub moment M O is based
ð2Þ
on the design bolt load of Q-1140(d) eq. (5) in which case
(3) To ensure proper preloading of the clamp con-
nection against service conditions, an assembly bolt load ð6Þ
W m 3 shall be determined in accordance with eq. (3).

ð3Þ
Q-1160 CALCULATION OF HUB STRESSES
(4) In (1) eq. (1) credit for friction is allowed based
on clamp connection geometry and experience, but shall The stresses in the hub shall be determined for both the
be limited to a value in which (ϕ – μ) is equal to or greater service and the assembly conditions.
than 5 deg. In (2) eq. (2) and (3) eq. (3), friction shall be (a) The reaction moment M H and reaction shear Q as
considered and be such that μ is equal to or greater than defined in Q-1130 shall be calculated at the hub neck
5 deg. This will then satisfy the requirements of for rotational moment M O .
Q-1110(d). (b) Hub stresses are to be calculated from the following
(5) The need for providing sufficient bolt load for equations:
either gasket seating in accordance with (2) eq. (2) or as- Hub longitudinal stress
sembly in accordance with (3) eq. (3) will prevail on
many low pressure designs and with facings and materi-
als that require a high seating load where the service bolt ð7Þ
load computed by (1) eq. (1) is insufficient to properly
preload the connection.
Hub hoop stress
(c) Required Bolt Area. The total cross‐sectional area of
bolting A m required shall be the greater of the values for
service conditions A m 1 , gasket seating conditions A m 2 , or ð8Þ
assembly condition A m 3 . Bending of the bolting due to
nonparallel nut bearing surfaces shall be compensated
Hub axial shear stress
for by use of a stress correction factor in bolt area calcu-
lations or by use of spherically seated nuts and/or
washers. ð9Þ
(d) Clamp Connection Design Bolt Load W. The bolt load
used in the design of the clamp connection shall be the Hub radial shear stress
values obtained from eqs. (4) and (5).
For service conditions: ð10Þ
ð4Þ

For assembly conditions:

Q-1170 CALCULATION OF CLAMP STRESSES
ð5Þ
The stresses in the clamp shall be determined for both
the service and the assembly conditions. Clamp stresses
Q-1150 HUB MOMENTS are to be calculated from the following equations:
In the calculation of hub stresses, the moment of a load Clamp longitudinal stress
acting on the hub is the product of the load and its mo-
ment arm. The moment arm is determined by the relative
ð11Þ
position of the effective hub–clamp reaction diameter
with respect to that of the load producing the moment
[see Figure Q-1130-1, sketches (c) and (d)]. In addition Clamp tangential stress
to the load moments, additional reaction moments with
relation to the hub shoulder ring centroid are considered
ð12Þ
to compensate for hub‐to‐pipe transition, radial pressure,
and clamp radial equilibrating effects.

424
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Clamp lip shear stress

Table Q-1180-1
Allowable Design Stress for Clamp
ð13Þ Connections
Stress
Clamp lug bending stress Category Allowable Stress
S1 1.5S O H or 1.5S A H
ð14Þ S2 SOH
S3 0.8S O H or 0.8S A H
S4 0.8S O H or 0.8S A H
In addition, a bearing stress calculation is to be made
S5 1.5S O C or 1.5S A C
from eq. (15) for either the clamp or hub.
S6 1.5S O C or 1.5S A C
S7 0.8S O C or 0.8S A C
ð15Þ S8 S O C or S A C
S9 [Note (1)]

Q-1180 ALLOWABLE DESIGN STRESS FOR NOTE:

(1) 1.6 times the lower of the allowable stres-
CLAMP CONNECTIONS ses for hub material (S O H , S A H ) and
Table Q-1180-1 gives the allowable stresses that are to clamp material (S O C , S A C ).
be used with the equations of Q-1160 and Q-1170.

425
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX R
DETERMINATION OF PERMISSIBLE LOWEST SERVICE METAL
TEMPERATURE FROM T N D T FOR DIVISION 1, CLASSES 2 AND
MC; AND DIVISION 3, CLASS WC CONSTRUCTION

ARTICLE R-1000
PERMISSIBLE LOWEST SERVICE METAL TEMPERATURE

R-1100 INTRODUCTION R-1200 DETERMINATION OF PERMISSIBLE

R-1110 SCOPE LOWEST SERVICE METAL
TEMPERATURE
These rules provide the method for determining the
permissible lowest service metal temperatures for mate- The permissible lowest service metal temperature is
rials having nil‐ductility transition temperatures (T NDT) defined as:
determined in accordan c e wit h N C -23 11 (a) ( 8),
N E - 2 3 1 1 ( a ) ( 8 ) , W C - 2 3 1 1 ( a ) ( 7) o r N C - 2 33 1 ( b) ,
NE-2331(a)(2), WC-2331(a)(2), as applicable. where T N D T is determined in accordance with
NC-2311(a)(8), NE-2311(a)(8), WC-2311(a)(7) or
NC-2331(b), NE-2331(a)(2), WC-2331(a)(2), as applic-
able, and A is determined from Figure R-1200-1 for the
thickness of the material.

R-1210 MATERIAL ACCEPTABILITY

For the material to be acceptable, the permissible low-
est service metal temperature shall not be higher than the
specified lowest service metal temperature.

426
 Figure R-1200-1
Determination of Permissible Lowest Service Metal Temperature

120 (67)

Permissible Lowest Service Metal Temperature = TNDT + A

100 (56)
A = [(LST) − (TNDT)], F (C)

ASME BPVC.III.A-2017
80 (44)
427

60 (33)

40 (22)

30 (17)

20 (11)

0 (00)
5/8 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
Thickness, in.
(1 in. = 25 mm)
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX S

ARTICLE S-1000
PUMP SHAFT DESIGN METHODS

S-1100 INTRODUCTION S-1400 RESPONSIBILITY

(a) This Appendix provides guidelines for the design (a) Owner’s Responsibility. It shall be the responsibility
and evaluation of shafts for Section III nuclear pumps. of the Owner or his designee to include in the Design
They include suggestions for the loads to be considered Specification all external forces and operating conditions
and the method for arriving at a design that will sustain that may have an effect on the operability of the pump
these loads for the life of the pump. shaft.
(b) The method presented is not intended to exclude (b) Pump Designer Responsibility. It is the responsibility
other methods which may be equally satisfactory. Experi- of the pump Designer to include in the evaluation the spe-
ence and expertise will be factors in determining the best cified pump loads and identify the type and magnitude of
method. In the final analysis the skill and judgment of the the internal operating loads on the shaft assembly.
designer determine the quality of the design.

S-1500 OPERATING LOADS

S-1200 SCOPE S-1501 MAXIMUM SHAFT OPERATING LOADS
The guidelines presented are intended to cover the de- In establishing maximum shaft operating loads, the de-
sign of pump shafts, including rigid couplings, up to, but sign should take into account plant service that the pump
not including, separable parts which attach the shaft to will experience and external loads associated with these
the driver. conditions. Other forms of off‐normal operating loadings
may include inservice testing, inadvertent starting and
stopping, loss of coolant accident, etc.
S-1300 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
S-1502 THERMAL LOADS
S-1310 DESIGN METHODS
Thermal loads shall be considered as one of the internal
The design rules presented in this section are provided operating loads.
as guidance to the designer of pump shafts. Alternative
design methods may be used based on the pump manu-
facturer’s experience with pumps in similar service. S-1503 OFF-NORMAL OPERATING LOADS
The maximum steady state and transient loads will
usually occur in the pump when it is operating away from
ð17Þ S-1320 OPERATING CONDITIONS
its best efficiency point. Typically it will be the combina-
Pump shaft assemblies are subject to combinations of tion of loads producing stresses at regions of high stress
steady state and variable or transient loads. These loads concentration that may result in high cycle fatigue failures
include torsional, lateral, bending, axial, and thermal com- of shafts. The very nature of these loads makes it difficult
ponents. They may occur as a result of power input, hy- to quantify them and in some cases a bounding estimate
draulically imposed forces, static or dynamic unbalance, must be made. Examples of load sources include low flow
rotating element runout, internal misalignment, thermal recirculation, flow separation, and other hydraulic in-
distortion, system and component vibration, and reso- stabilities which cause radial and axial alternating or
nance. The operating conditions must consider all of these transient loads on the shaft. Lacking a thorough under-
loadings on the shaft. System-applied external loads such standing of these loads, conservative design practices
as seismic loads and Service Levels A, B, C, and D loads based on years of operating experience must be used to
must also be included. insure successful design of pump shafts.

428
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

S-1600 SHAFT FAILURE MODES (see Figure S-1600-1). Areas susceptible to erosion/cor-
rosion, stress corrosion cracking, thermal transients,
Shaft failures usually occur at points of high stress con- and steep temperature gradients are also possible loca-
centration or structural discontinuities. The most com- tions for shaft failure.
mon locations of shaft failures are threaded regions,
shaft grooves, shoulders, keyways, couplings, and collars

429
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure S-1600-1
Typical Centrifugal Pump Shaft Failure Locations

430
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE S-2000
DESIGN PROCEDURE

Any method of evaluation (analytical or experimental) This polished specimen test endurance limit is then fac-
which can be substantiated by data from pumps in ser- tored for the product of reduction factors that account for
vice, experiencing conditions similar to the specified op- such items as environment, reliability, size, finish, duty
erating limits, may be used. cycles, etc., which is conservatively estimated as
one-third. Consequently, this corrected material endur-
ance limit stress can be represented as:
S-2100 CRITICAL SPEEDS
The evaluation shall address both torsional and lateral,
and where applicable, axial critical speeds, shaft deflec-
tions, and stresses. Critical speeds and shaft deflections where the terms used on the chart, Figure S-2300-1, are
shall be such as to avoid any difficulties for the specified as follows:
range of the design and operating conditions. The actual
percentage difference between critical and operating K t = stress concentration factors. An initial value of 6.0
speeds shall take account of the method of determination is suggested where reasonable stress riser control
of critical speed. The percentage difference between is exercised. Higher values may be required for de-
stress allowed and calculated shall also take account of signs with severe discontinuities (e.g., small fillet
the accuracy of the design and the analysis method. radii relative to shaft diameter). Lower values
may be used if justified by design methods and/
or testing that accounts for the specific shaft dis-
S-2200 MAXIMUM TORSIONAL LOAD continuities under consideration. Notch sensitivity
values, when available, may be used. For additional
The maximum torsional load shall be defined. The max- information, see ANSI/ASME B106.1M‐1985.
imum torsional shear stress for this load (stress resulting S a = alternating axial stress
from this load without application of concentration fac- S b = alternating component of the shaft bending stress
tors) shall be based on design experience or experimental S e = material endurance limit
evidence for the particular class of pump involved. The S′ e = design endurance limit
maximum driver horsepower may determine the maxi- S s = maximum shear stress
mum torsional loading for units with short shafts (typical S s s = material allowable shear stress
of pump types A, B, and C). The motor startup torque may = S y /3 unless higher values are justified through
determine the maximum torsional load for pumps with specified shear test data
relatively long shafts (typical of type L pumps). Torsional S u = material ultimate strength at design temperature
alternating or transient loads shall be considered if S y = material yield stress at design temperature
applicable. U t = summation of usage cycles. Each usage cycle shall
be determined as the ratio of the maximum alter-
nating stress in the shaft divided by the design fa-
S-2300 SHAFT EVALUATION tigue stress of the material for that number of
The flow chart, Figure S-2300-1, outlines a procedure cycles. U t will be determined by summing all of
for evaluation of pump shafts to meet load requirements. the above ratios.
This procedure establishes a basic sizing criterion as well
as a detailed fatigue evaluation method.
S-2400 OTHER CONSIDERATIONS
The basic shaft sizing criterion is based on maximum The fatigue life of a shaft is not always the limiting fac-
shear stress and conservative cyclic loading factors. These tor in its design. The effect of misalignment and deflection
fatigue factors include an evaluation of the endurance of a shaft on the performance of support bearings, seals,
limit of the unnotched and polished test specimen reverse and couplings as well as on other key power transmission
bending test data in air (S e ), which in the absence of spe- components must also be taken into account. Shafts can
cified data can be approximated as: be strong enough to meet fatigue life requirements, yet
not stiff enough to satisfy natural frequency and opera-
tional requirements.

431
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure S-2300-1
Steps in the Design of a Pump Shaft

Establish the maximum operating loads

on the shaft

Size the pump shaft for maximum

torque and axial load

Evaluate the deflection and hydraulic shaft

requirements necessary for pump operation

Determine high stress regions of the shaft

and evaluate the required stress concentration
factors, Kt

Determine the values of Sb , St , Se , Ss , Sss

2 2
Sb + St Ss Yes
+ ≤ 1.0 END
Se Sss

No

Evaluate the stress concentration regions and

modify the configuration to reduce Kt

Yes Kt reduced

No

Break down load component into load cycles

and develop load histories

Determine the values of Sb , St , Se , Ss , and Sss

for level A + B service loads

Using available material fatigue data, define

an S-N curve

Calculate the shaft peak stress components

and develop a peak stress history

Evaluate the cumulative fatigue usage

of the shaft

Yes
Ut ≤ 1.0 END

No

REDESIGN

432
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX T

ARTICLE T-1000
RECOMMENDED TOLERANCES FOR RECONCILIATION OF PIPING
SYSTEMS

T-1100 INTRODUCTION sensitive to the tolerances were used in the original de-
sign (i.e., seismic time history analysis methods), the De-
The building structure and major components of a signer shall review the applicability of these tolerances
power plant are constructed according to rules that per- and establish more stringent guidelines if necessary.
mit varied tolerances. Since piping system installation fol- Further, this Appendix shall be restricted to piping sys-
lows construction of the building and installation of the tems analyzed using linear elastic methods.
major components, the piping systems must be permitted
to vary within the space allotted to them. In addition, a This Appendix does not relieve the Designer of respon-
large number of systems are often installed in a limited sibility for consideration of other unique situations where
space. Interferences often occur and changes within In- more restrictive tolerances may be required to satisfy the
stallation Tolerances may be used to eliminate the inter- intent of the design bases or the Code.
ference. The tolerances provided in this Appendix bridge Installation Tolerances more restrictive than the Total
the gap between the exactness associated with a design Tolerances recommended in this Appendix may be speci-
by analysis, and a practical and acceptable installation. fied. Less restrictive tolerances may be specified when en-
The basis for the tolerances and guidance in this gineering justification is provided to demonstrate that the
Appendix was developed by the PVRC Technical Commit- design requirements have been satisfied.
tee on Piping Systems.15 Additional guidance on imple- Tolerances for complete, installed piping systems are
mentation of these tolerances has been published by addressed. Tolerances provided for manufacturing or fab-
EPRI.16 ricating the individual items or subassemblies that make
up piping systems are not addressed, but the effect of
T-1110 SCOPE these tolerances on the as‐installed condition shall be
This Appendix provides recommended tolerances and within the Total Tolerance. Other design and construction
methods for satisfying the requirements of NCA‐3554, areas which may be included in reconciliation such as de-
“Modification of Documents and Reconciliation With De- sign or operating conditions, support details, and gaps are
sign Report” for piping systems designed to the rules of not addressed.
NB‐, NC‐, or ND‐3600. This Appendix provides: Tolerances for support erection, including length and
(a) identification of dimensions and weights significant orientation of individual members and pipe location on
to the piping stress analysis; and the support, are specified in Subsection NF, Appendix
(b) acceptable tolerances for these dimensions and NF-D, Tolerances.
weights such that if piping is installed within these toler-
ances, the reconciliation is accomplished.
These tolerances have been established such that their
T-1120 TERMS RELATED TO RECONCILIATION
effect on the accuracy of analysis results is minimal and is
consistent with accepted practices and the use of toler- Definitions of terms used in this Appendix are given in
ances in the Code. These tolerances are applicable to most the following paragraphs.
situations; however, specific situations where more re-
strictive tolerances may be needed are identified.
The tolerances in this Appendix are applicable to piping T-1121 Nominal Dimension
systems where conventional seismic analysis methods
were used for the original design, i.e., modal response This is the dimension which provides configuration
spectrum analysis methods. For piping systems where and/or spatial information on piping drawings within
seismic analysis methods that are significantly more specified tolerances.

433
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

T-1122 As-Analyzed Configuration dimensions since F/C dimensions are not critical to the
stress analysis. Acceptable Total Tolerances are provided
This is the configuration of piping components and sup-
in T-1200.
ports, defined by nominal sizes, weights, cross section
properties, and dimensions, which forms the basis for
the piping stress analysis. In the case of piping systems T-1130 MEASUREMENT ACCURACY
which are qualified by simplified rules, the design draw- Measurements of the as‐built configuration for use in
ings for the systems are considered as the As‐Analyzed reconciliation shall be made using methods capable of
Configuration. producing accuracy to the nearest inch for linear dimen-
sions and to the nearest 2 deg for angular dimensions
T-1123 Critical-to-Design (CTD) Dimension (Figure T-1213-1 shows examples of angular
A dimension that must be satisfied, within a specified dimensions).
tolerance, in order for the piping stress analysis to remain
valid. These dimensions define the relative configuration T-1140 EVALUATION OF OUT-OF-TOTAL
of the piping. They may also include dimensions which TOLERANCE CONDITIONS
define the global or spatial position of the piping. CTD values that exceed Total Tolerances shall be re-
Examples of CTD dimensions are: the location of a pipe corded and evaluated to assure the design bases, includ-
support relative to in‐line pipe components such as ing the applicable design code, have been satisfied. This
valves, anchors, and other supports; the orientation of evaluation may be made using engineering judgment,
the pipe support centerline relative to the pipe centerline; simplified models, or by reanalyzing the complete original
length of pipe runs; and spacing between supports. model. The objective should be to determine if the condi-
tion being evaluated had any significant effect on the re-
T-1124 Fit/Clearance (F/C) Dimension sponse of the piping systems to the design loadings. The
This is a dimension that is specified to provide reason- use of engineering judgment shall be documented with
able assurance that the piping fits into the allocated build- the technical reasoning described so that a technically
ing space. These dimensions define the global position of qualified third party reviewer will understand how the
the piping in three‐dimensional space and deviations evaluation was justified. The documentation require-
from these dimensions do not have a significant effect ments for evaluation based on engineering judgment shall
on the validity of the piping stress analysis. Examples of be consistent with other engineering calculations.
F/C dimensions are the locating dimensions of pipe cen- If it is determined that there is no significant effect,
terlines from column lines, walls, and floors. However, di- then the original analysis remains valid and the results
mensions defining clearance required to allow thermal (stress summaries, support design loads, etc.) need not
expansion or to protect critical components from adverse be revised. If changes are found to be significant, then
interaction due to dynamic (earthquake) loads are CTD the affected results shall be revised.
dimensions.

T-1125 As-Built Documents T-1200 TOTAL TOLERANCES

These are the drawings, sketches, or other documents T-1210 GENERAL
which define the as‐installed piping configuration (nom- The Total Tolerances are given for the reconciliation of
inal dimensions and tolerances) and which have been re- the piping stress analysis in terms of the maximum allow-
conciled with the stress analysis. able plus or minus departure between the as‐analyzed
(nominal) value and the as‐built value. These tolerances
T-1126 Installation Tolerance should not be used to circumvent specific requirements
This is the specified acceptable departure from nominal established by the Design or Installation Specification
piping dimensions, support locations and orientations, nor other applicable material or fabrication standards.
and component weights to be used during installation As‐built piping systems that conform with the piping
to provide for practical installation limitations. Installa- stress analysis within the Total Tolerances are acceptable
tion Tolerances for CTD dimensions shall be less than and evaluation of the as‐built condition is not required.
or equal to the corresponding Total Tolerances.
T-1211 Altering Relative Position
T-1127 Total Tolerance Tolerances shall not be applied in such a manner that
This is the maximum allowable departure between cor- would result in the alteration of the relative position of
responding as‐built and as‐analyzed CTD piping dimen- piping components and supports. For example, supports
sions, support locations and orientations, and shall not be moved across valves, tees, elbows, etc. In
component weights for the piping stress analysis to be ap- no case shall the permissible location change the direc-
plicable. The Total Tolerance is applicable only to CTD tions of a support or its function.

434
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

T-1212 Independence exceeds 1.0, in which case the maximum tolerance

The tolerances given are independent of each other and is ±2 ft 0 in. (600 mm) and the requirements of (d) shall
are not interrelated to position of adjacent items except be satisfied.
as noted in T-1211. Each tolerance may be applied inde- (c) The location of branches for the branch/run size
pendently of any other. combinations without an asterisk (*) in Table T-1222-1
(including sizes not listed in the table) have the same tol-
T-1213 Methods of Dimensioning erance as in T-1221.
Examples of angular dimensions are shown in Figure (d) For all branch/run size combinations, changes in lo-
T-1213-1. Two common methods of dimensioning piping cation of the branch connection that exceed 2 ft (600 mm)
installation are shown in Figure T-1213-2. Either method shall be approved by the Designer and should not
or some combination of these methods are usually used
(1) change the flow path defined on the piping sys-
on the Design Drawings. The chain method references a
tem diagram.
dimension to the adjacent dimensions. The common point
method references a number of dimensions to a common (2) affect system functional flow and pressure char-
base. All measurements should be rounded off to the acteristics, such as branch connections used for differen-
nearest inch for linear dimensions and the nearest tial pressure and flow measurement, for safety and relief
2 deg for angular dimensions. valves, and for core safety injection.
(3) be allowed without considering the effect of run
T-1220 PIPING CONFIGURATION TOLERANCES pipe movement on the branch pipe. (Not significant if
T-1221 Centerline Lengths the tolerances of T-1221 are satisfied.)
Centerline length to fittings, flanges, valves, and piping
specialties including branch line piping shall be within the
tolerance specified below. (Locations of branch connec- T-1223 Angular Deviation of Pipe Centerline
tions on the run pipe are not included. See T-1222.)
Angular deviation of pipe centerline from theoretical
Specified Nominal Dimension, ± Total Tolerance, centerline is limited to ±10 deg. See Figure T-1213-1,
ft (m) in. (mm) Rolled Elbows (“B°”) and Bends; Nonstandard Elbows
0 to < 5 (0 to < 1.5) 3 (75) (“C°”).
5 to < 10 (1.5 to < 3.0) 6 (150)
10 to < 15 (3.0 to < 4.5) 9 (225)
15 to < 20 (4.5 to < 6.0) 12 (300)
20 to < 25 (6.0 to < 7.5) 15 (375) T-1224 Angular Tolerance on Power Operated
25 to < 30 (7.5 to < 9.0) 18 (450) Valves
30 to < 35 (9.0 to < 10.5) 21 (525)
35 and over (10.5 and over) 24 (600) Angular tolerance on power operated valves over
NPS 2 (DN 50) (Nominal Pipe Size) is limited
to ±15 deg. See Figure T-1213-1, Valves (“D°”). For power
operated valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, the angular
NOTE: The 3 in. (75 mm) tolerance for nominal dimensions of 0 to
tolerance of ±15 deg applies only when the weight of
less than 5 ft (1.5 m) may not be applicable in all cases. For example, the valve operator equals or is less than the valve ana-
cantilevered vents and drains, relief valve inlet and outlet piping, and lyzed weight. When the weight of the valve operator ex-
instrument piping near the connection to the process piping are ceeds the valve’s analyzed weight for an NPS 2 (DN 50)
cases where more restrictive tolerances may be needed. If so, they or smaller valve, the angular tolerance is not provided
shall be specified on the design documents.
in this Appendix. There are no CTD restrictions on angu-
When common point dimensions (see Figure T-1213-2) are used, lar orientation of manually operated valves.
the tolerances along the pipe centerline are to be applied to each
pipe leg, i.e., piping between changes in direction. There may be
cases where the nominal dimensions must be determined from the
difference in common point dimensions for the ends of the pipe leg. T-1230 PIPING SUPPORT LOCATION/
ORIENTATION TOLERANCES
T-1222 Centerline Location of Branch
Connections (Relative to Run) The tolerance provided as piping support tolerances
(a) This section applies to branch connections indepen- assume the support is the specified type and rating. The
dent of the connection detail or type of fitting used. support type shall not be changed without approval of
(b) The location of branches for branch/run size combi- the Designer.
nations indicated by an asterisk (*) in Table T-1222-1 These tolerances are applicable to the reconciliation of
have no design related tolerance restrictions except when the piping stress analysis. They are not applicable for the
the stress intensification factor (SIF) on the run pipe reconciliation of the pipe support design.

435
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure T-1213-1
Illustrations of Angular Dimensions — Pipe Legs, Valves, Supports, Bends

GENERAL NOTE: B°, C °, D° , and E° indicate angular dimensions.

436
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure T-1213-2
Illustrations of Linear Dimensions

437
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table T-1222-1
Branch/Run Size Combinations
3
⁄4
(20)

1
(25)

11⁄2
(40)
Run Size — NPS (DN)
2
(50)

21⁄2 *
(65)

3 * *
(80)

4 * *
(100)

6 * * * *
(150)

8 * * * * *
(200)

10 * * * * * *
(250)

12 * * * * * *
(300)

14 * * * * * *
(350)

16 * * * * * *
(400)

18 * * * * * *
(450)

20 * * * * * *
(500)

24 * * * * * *
(600)
3
⁄4 1 11⁄2 2 21⁄2 3 4
(20) (25) (40) (50) (65) (80) (100)

Branch Size — NPS (DN)

438
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

T-1231 Location of Supports T-1234 Snubbers

Tolerances on the location of supports, anchors, and re- The location of snubbers with axis coincident to the
straints along the pipe centerline of the horizontal or ver- pipe leg centerline is not a critical dimension. However,
tical straight runs that do not contain significant snubbers with tolerances greater than those of T-1231
concentrated weight are should be approved by the Designer who must assure
they are not affected by the anticipated thermal
Pipe Size Tolerance movements.
NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller 6 in. (150 mm)
NPS 21/2 (DN 65) and larger One pipe diameter or 12 in. T-1235 Angular Orientation of Supports
(300 mm), whichever is greater
The tolerance for the angular orientation of supports
is ±5 deg [see Figure T-1213-1, Supports (“E°”)]. The an-
gular tolerance may be increased to ±10 deg if this value
T-1232 Location of the First Support on Either plus the angularity change from thermal expansion of the
Side of Spans That Contain Concentrated system does not exceed functional limitations established
Weights by the support manufacturer and the Designer assures
Tolerances on the location of the first support or re- that any increased loadings on the connection are compa-
straint on either side of spans that contain concentrated tible with the design.
weights such as valves, flanges, risers, fittings, bends, or
other concentrated loads are T-1240 WEIGHT TOLERANCES
T-1241 General
Pipe Size Tolerance
NPS 12 (DN 300) and smaller Smaller of 3 pipe diameters or
Tolerances on both uniformly distributed weights and
12 in. (300 mm) concentrated weights are included in this Appendix.
Larger than NPS 12 (DN 300) One pipe diameter These tolerances do not imply that components should
be weighed, but provide for reconciliation of weight
These tolerances may not be applicable to the first re- changes identified in the design process. As a practical
straint adjacent to a bend, which is oriented in the plane matter, the concentrated weight of items is a concern pri-
of the bend, when the piping is subjected to waterham- marily for valves and other in‐line components of signifi-
mer, steamhammer, or relief valve discharge loading. In cant weight, but particularly power operated valves.
these cases, if more restrictive tolerances are needed they Changes to the distributed weight of insulation systems
must be specified on the design documents. and other piping items should also be considered.

T-1233 Location of the First Support From T-1242 Uniformly Distributed Weight
Rotating Equipment Nozzles
The uniformly distributed weight for the piping system
Tolerances for the location of the first support or re- may vary by ±20% from the as‐analyzed weight.
straint in each direction from rotating equipment nozzles This weight tolerance may need to be reduced for pip-
are ing primarily supported by constant force supports or
springs.
Pipe Size Tolerance
NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller 3 in. (75 mm) T-1243 Concentrated Weight
NPS 21/2 (DN 65) and larger One‐half pipe diameter or 6 in.
(150 mm), whichever is greater Concentrated weights of in‐line items such as valves
may vary by the greater of ±20% of the analyzed weight
or 20 lb (9 kg).

439
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX U

ARTICLE U-1000
RULES FOR PUMP INTERNALS

U-1100 INTRODUCTION U-1220 CODE STAMPING

U-1110 SCOPE Certification Mark is not required for pump internal
items.
These rules apply to materials, fabrication and exami-
nation of internal items for Class 1, 2, and 3 pumps. Pump
internal items are those parts other than pump cases, in- U-1300 MATERIALS
lets and outlets, covers clamping rings, seal housings, re-
lated bolting and other items as covered in Subsections U-1310 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR
NB, NC, and ND. MATERIAL
U-1311 Scope of Principal Terms Employed
U-1120 CATEGORIES
The term materials as used in this Appendix applies to
Category as set forth in Table U-1600-1 is the grouping those items produced to material specifications permitted
of various pump internal items for the purpose of apply- by Section III, Division 1, and/or other material permitted
ing the rules of this Appendix. Categories for typical pump by this Appendix.
types are shown in Figures U-1500-1 through U-1500-7.
The figures are not to scale, and are not intended to con- U-1312 Permitted Material Specifications
vey any preference for pump type or design, but are pro- (a) Materials used for Category 3 and 4 items shall con-
vided as a guide to the manufacturer to identify the form to the requirements of one of the specifications for
various internal items of a pump for categorization. In de- materials given in Table U-1610-1 of this Appendix for
termining categories for items of pump types not specifi- Class 1, 2, and 3 pumps; materials listed in Section II, Part
cally illustrated, a pump or pump detail which is most D, Table 2A for Class 1 and 2 pumps; materials listed in
nearly representative shall apply. Categories 1 and 2 are Table 2A for Class 2 pumps; or materials listed in Table
pressure-retaining items presently covered by Subsec- 1A for Class 3 pumps; and to the special requirements
tions NB, NC and ND. Categories 3 through 6 are pump in- of this Appendix which apply to the item for which the
ternal items which may be constructed in accordance material is used.
with this Appendix except that Material Manufacturers (b) Category 5 and 6 items may be made from any ma-
and/or Material Suppliers for Category 3 through 6 items terial suitable for the intended service.
are not required to comply with NCA‐3800. Material (c) The Certificate Holder manufacturing pumps shall
which forms an integral welded extension to Category 1 provide a list which identifies the material used for each
material in Figure U-1500-1, items 1–5, may be classified Category 3, 4, 5, or 6 item. This list may be a bill of mate-
as Category 4 or 5 material when it serves a nonpressure‐ rials or a separate list.
retaining function and its structural effect is considered in (d) Where the tensile strength, yield strength, temper-
the design of the Category 1 material. For use in Class 1, 2, ing temperature or aging temperature listed in Table
and 3 pumps the extension material shall satisfy the re- U-1610-1 differ from the requirements of the material
quirements of NB‐2300, NC‐2300, or ND‐2300. specification, the minimum requirements listed in Table
U-1610-1 shall apply.
U-1200 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
U-1313 Special Requirements Conflicting With
U-1210 RESPONSIBILITIES AND DUTIES Permitted Material Specifications
It is the responsibility of the Certificate Holder manu- (a) Special requirements stipulated in this Appendix
facturing pumps to assign each item of a pump to the shall apply in lieu of the requirements of the material spe-
proper category and to indicate the categories in a report cifications wherever the special requirements conflict
or on a drawing. with the material specification requirements. Where the

440
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table U-1600-1
Summary of Requirements
Certified
Category No. Material Test Nondestructive Material
Typical Items & Pump Class Stress Report Report Examination Impact Testing Identif.
Category 1:
Pressure-Retaining Class X
Items (All) Subsection NB, NC, ND
Category 2:
Pressure-Retaining Class X
Bolting (All) Subsection NB, NC, ND
Shafting Category 3:
Line Shaft Couplings Class 1 — X [Note (5)] [Note X X
(7)]
Impeller Nuts or Class 2 — X — [Note (4)] X
Impeller Locking Class 3 — X — [Note (4)] [Note (1)]
Screw
Impellers Category 4:
Bearing Support Class 1 — [Note (2)] [Note [Note (6)] see — See U-1120 X
(3)] U-1120
Bearings Class 2 — [Note (2)] — See U-1120 — See U-1120 X
Journals Class 3 — [Note (2)] — See U-1120 — See U-1120 [Note (1)]
Im./Case Rings Category 5:
Keys Class 1 — [Note (2)] — See U-1120 — See U-1120 [Note (1)]
Mech. Seal (Met.) Class 2 — — — See U-1120 — See U-1120 [Note (1)]
Parts Class 3 — — — See U-1120 — See U-1120 [Note (1)]
Bolting (Internal)
Bearings
Journals
Packing Category 6:
Gaskets Class 1 — — — — —
“O” Rings Class 2 — — — — —
Carbon Class 3 — — — — —

NOTES:
(1) Quality control system.
(2) Materials Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance.
(3) Certified Material Test Reports required for impellers.
(4) When required for the pump per Design Specification.
(5) Ultrasonic Examination required for Class 1 shafting.
(6) Magnetic Particle or Liquid Penetrant Examination required for Class 1 impellers.
(7) Magnetic Particle or Liquid Penetrant Examination required for all Class 1, Category 3 items.

special requirements include an examination, test, or samples of each heat of material used, for each specified
treatment which is also required by the material specifi- heat treatment. The tensile strength and yield strength re-
cation, the examination, test, or treatment need be per- sults shall satisfy the specified values and be below the
formed only once. Any required nondestructive maximum specified values listed in Table U-1610-1.
examinations shall be performed as specified in U-1430. Where the material will be used to fabricate various item
Any examination, repair, test, or treatment required by sizes in different heat-treated thicknesses, the manufac-
the material specification or this Appendix may be per- turer shall assure himself that the heat treatment speci-
formed by the Material Manufacturer, Material Supplier, fied will be effective for the entire size range.
or the Certificate Holder manufacturing pumps. The Mate-
rial Manufacturer or Material Supplier shall obtain ap- U-1314 Certification of Materials
proval from the Certificate Holder manufacturing pumps (a) Certification by Material Manufacturer. The Material
for the weld repair of materials (see U-1440). Manufacturer shall provide a Certified Material Test Re-
(b) For materials listed in Table U-1610-1 for Category port for Category 3 items and Category 4, Class 1 impel-
3 and 4 items, the tensile test requirements of the materi- lers, including all welding and brazing materials used on
al specification may be performed on representative these items. The Material Manufacturer shall certify that

441
 Figure U-1500-1
Typical for Type A, C, E, F, and/or Some J (NB-3400) Pumps

ASME BPVC.III.A-2017
442
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure U-1500-2
Typical for Type B and D Pumps (NC-3400 and ND-3400)

443
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure U-1500-3
Typical for Type G and H Pumps (NC-3400 and ND-3400)

444
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure U-1500-4
Typical for Type K Pumps (NC-3400 and ND-3400)

445
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure U-1500-5
Typical for Type L Pumps (NC-3400 and ND-3400)

446
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure U-1500-6
Reciprocating Plunger Pump (NC-3400 and ND-3400)

447
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure U-1500-6
Reciprocating Plunger Pump (NC-3400 and ND-3400) (Cont'd)

the contents of the report are correct and accurate, and used for pumps with inlet connections 2 in. nominal pipe
that all operations performed by him or his subcontrac- size and less, and bolting 1 in. nominal diameter and less.
tors are in compliance with the requirements of the mate- Material identification including any marking code (see
rial specification and this Appendix. Alternatively, the U-1316) shall be described in the Certified Material Test
Material Manufacturer shall provide a Certified Material Report or Certificate of Compliance as applicable.
Test Report for operations he performed and at least (b) Certification by Material Supplier. The Material Sup-
one Certified Material Test Report from each of his sub- plier who completes any operation not performed by the
contractors for operations they performed. Chemical Material Manufacturer shall provide a Certified Material
analysis, tests, examinations, and heat treatments re- Test Report for all operations performed by him. This cer-
quired by the material specification that were not per- tification affirms that the contents of the report are cor-
formed shall be listed on the Certified Material Test re ct and a ccu ra te, and tha t all test re sults and
Report. A Material Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compli- operations performed by him or his subcontractors are
ance with the material specification, grade, class, and in compliance with the material specification and the ap-
heat-treated condition, as applicable, may be provided plicable material requirements of this Section as desig-
in lieu of a Certified Material Test Report for material nated by the purchaser.

448
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure U-1500-7
Typical for Type A and C Pumps (NC-3400 and ND-3400)

449
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table U-1610-1
Materials for Pump Internal Items for Class 1, 2, and 3 Pumps
Spec. No. Type or Diameter or Thickness, in.
Material Product Form (8) Grade Notes (mm)

1Cr-0.2Mo Bar, Rod A-331 4140 (2)(5) Up to 2 (50) incl.

Bar, Rod A-331 4340 (2)(5)
1Cr-0.2Mo-0.3Pb Bar, Rod A-331 41L40 (2)(5)

13Cr FFBS A-182 F6 (1)(4)(5) Up to 8 (200) incl.

Plate A-240 410, 410S (1)(4)(5) Up to 8 (200) incl.
Tube A-268 TP410 (4)(5) Up to 8 (200) incl.
Bar, Shapes A-276 403, 410 (4)(5)
Billets, Bars A-314 403, 410 (4)(5) Up to 8 (200) incl. —
Billets, Bars A-314 416, 416Se (2)(4)(5) Up to 8 (200) incl.
Castings A-217 CA15 (4)(5)
Bar, Shapes A-479 410 (4)(5) Up to 8 (200) incl.
Bars A-582 416, 416Se (2)(4)(5) Up to 8 (200) incl.
Bars A-582 403, 410 (4)(5) Up to 8 (200) incl.
Bar, Shapes A-276 414 (4)(5) Up to 8 (200) incl.
Castings A-296 CA15 (4)(5)
Castings A-296 CA40 (4)(5)
Castings A-487 CA15M (4)(5)(6)

13Cr-4Ni Castings A-296 CA6NM

Castings A-487 CA6NM

13Cr Bar, Shapes A-276 420 (2)

Bar, Shapes A-276 420 (1)2)(5)

18Cr Bar, Shapes A-276 440A (1)(2)(5)(7) Up to 8 (200) incl.

Bar, Shapes A-276 440C (1)(2)(5)(7) Up to 8 (200) incl.

13Cr Bar, Shapes A-565 615 (2)(5)(7)

Bar, Shapes A-565 616 (2)(5)(7)

17Cr-4Ni-4Cu Bar, Shapes A-564 630 (1)(2)(4)(5) 8 (200) max

Castings AMS 5355B (1)(2)(4)(5)
—
AMS 5398A (2)(4)(5)
(2)(4)
(2)(4)
15Cr-6Ni-Cu-Mo Bar, Shapes A-564 XM-25 (2)(5) 8 (200) max
Bar, Shapes A-564 XM-25 (2) 8 (200) max
Bar, Shapes A-564 XM-25 (2) 8 (200) max
25Ni-15Cr-2Ti Bolting A-453 660 (2)
25Ni-15Cr-2Ti Bar, Shapes A-638 660 (2)(5)
16Cr-12Ni-2Mo Bar, Shapes A-276 316 (5) Up to 3⁄4 (19)
3
⁄4 to 1 (19 to 25)
1 to 11⁄4 (25 to 32)
11⁄4 to 11⁄2 (32 to 38)
Phos-Bronze Bar, Rod, Shapes B-139 544 Up to 2 (50) incl.
Al-Bronze Castings B-148 955
B-148 952

Pb-Sn-Bronze Castings B-584 932

B-584 937
Cu-Sn-Pb-Zn Castings B-584 836
Ni-Cr-Fe Bar, Shapes B637-84A 718 (2)(5) 4 (100) max
Bar, Shapes B637-84A 688 Type 2 (2)(5)

450
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table U-1610-1
Materials for Pump Internal Items for Class 1, 2, and 3 Pumps (Cont'd)
Minimum
Tempering or
Tensile Strength, psi Yield Strength, Aging Temp.,
Cond. (MPa), min psi (MPa), min °F (°C) Spec No.

HT 180,000 (1241) 155,000 (1069) 800 (425) A-331

HT 178,000 (1227) 156,000 (1076) 1000 (540) A-331
HT 180,000 (1241) 155,000 (1069) 800 (425) A-331

165,000 (1138) 132,000 (910) 900 (480) A-182

136,000 (938) 112,000 (772) 1025 (550) A-240
125,000 (862) 100,000 (690) 1075 (580) A-268
— 120,000 (827) 90,000 (620) 1100 (595) A-276
116,000 (800) 92,000 (634) 1125 (605) A-314
110,000 (758) 90,000 (620) 1175 (635) A-314
100,000 (690) 80,000 (552) 1275 (690) A-217
90,000 (620) 65,000 (448) 1375 (745) A-479
A-582
A-582
A-276
A-296
A-296
A-487

110,000 (758) 80,000 (552) 1100 (595) A-296

110,000 (758) 80,000 (552) 1100 (595) A-487

A 95,000 (655) 50,000 (345) NA (NA) A-276

QT 250,000 (1724) 195,000 (1345) 750 (400) A-276

HT 285,000 (1965) 275,000 (1896) 500 (260) A-276

HT 285,000 (1965) 275,000 (1896) 600 (315) A-276

HT 140,000 (965) 110,000 (758) 1150 (620) A-565

HT 140,000 (965) 110,000 (758) 1150 (620) A-565

PH 190,000 (1310) 170,000 (1172) 900 (480) A-564

PH 155,000 (1069) 145,000 (1000) 1025 (550) AMS 5355B
— PH 145,000 (1000) 125,000 (862) 1075 (580) AMS 5398A
PH 140,000 (965) 115,000 (793) 1100 (595)
PH 135,000 (931) 105,000 (724) 1150 (620)
PH 180,000 (1241) 170,000 (1172) 900 (480) A-564
PH 125,000 (862) 75,000 (517) 1150 (620) A-564
STr 125,000 (862) 95,000 (655) NA (NA) A-564
A or B 130,000 (896) 85,000 (586) 1325 (720) A-453
1 or 2 130,000 (896) 85,000 (586) 1300 (700) A-638
B 125,000 (862) 100,000 (690) NA (NA) A-276
B 115,000 (793) 80,000 (552) NA (NA)
B 105,000 (724) 65,000 (448) NA (NA)
B 100,000 (690) 50,000 (345) NA (NA)
Hard 50,000 (345) 35,000 (241) B-139
90,000 (620) 40,000 (276) NA (NA) B-148
65,000 (448) 25,000 (172) NA (NA) B-148

30,000 (207) 14,000 (97) NA (NA) B-584

25,000 (172) 12,000 (83) NA (NA) B-584
30,000 (207) 14,000 (97) NA (NA) B-584
PH 185,000 (1276) 150,000 (1034) 1325 (720) B-637
PH 170,000 (1172) 115,000 (793) 1350 (730) B-637

451
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table U-1610-1
Materials for Pump Internal Items for Class 1, 2, and 3 Pumps (Cont'd)
Spec. No. Type or Diameter or
Material Product Form (8) Grade Notes Thickness, in. (mm)

Ni-Cu Bar, Rod B-164 400 Class A

Pipe, Tube B-165 400 Up to 5 (125)
Pipe, Tube B-165 400 (2) Over 5 (125)
FFBS AMS 4676 Alloy 500 (5) 12 (300) max
Rounds AMS 4676 Alloy 500 (5) 4 (100) max
Cr-Ni-Cu-Mo Casting A-351 CN7M

TABLE U-1610-1
MATERIALS FOR PUMP INTERNAL ITEMS FOR CLASS 1, 2, AND 3 PUMPS (CONT’D)
Tensile Minimum Tempering
Strength, psi Yield Strength, or Aging Temp.,
Cond. (MPa), min psi (MPa), min °F (°C) Spec No.

A 70,000 (483) 25,000 (172) NA B-164

A 70,000 (483) 28,000 (193) NA B-165
A 70,000 (483) 25,000 (172) NA B-165
PH 140,000 (965) 100,000 (690) AMS 4676
PH 135,000 (931) 95,000 (655) AMS 4676
SHT 62,000 (427) 25,000 (172) NA A-351

NOTES:
(1) Not to be used with Category 3 items, except for pumps with inlet piping connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and less.
(2) Welding of these materials is not permitted.
(3) Where the tensile strength, yield strength, tempering temperature, or aging temperature listed in Table U-1610-1 differ from the requirements
of the material specification, the minimum requirements listed in Table U-1610-1 shall apply. The material shall be identified with this Appendix
number in addition to the requirements for identification of para. U-1316.
(4) Cross-bracketing indicates that any of the bracketed materials may be used with any of the bracketed properties.
(5) The maximum tensile strength shall not exceed the minimum specified tensile strength listed in this Table by more than 40,000 psi (275 MPa).
(6) Welding of this material is permitted provided the carbon content is 0.25% or less.
(7) Service temperatures shall not exceed temperatures of 100°F (38°C) below the aging or tempering temperature.
(8) Material shall conform to Edition specified by N-Certificate Holder.

(c) Certified Material Test Reports or Material Manu- Certification Mark and/or code may be used which iden-
facturer or Material Supplier Certificates of Compliance tifies the material with the Materials Certification and
are not required for Category 5 and 6 items. such Certification Mark and/or code shall be explained
in the certificate (see U-1314). For identification and
U-1315 Welding and Brazing Materials marking during fabrication by the Pump Manufacturer,
see U-1420.
All welding and brazing materials used on Category 3
(b) The identification of Materials for Category 4 items
and 4 items shall meet the requirements of NB‐2400,
used for Class 1 and 2 pumps shall consist of marking or
NC‐2400, or ND‐2400, as applicable.
tagging the material or its container in accordance with
the marking requirements of the applicable material
U-1316 Material Identification specification. Category 5 items shall be identified as set
U-1316.1 Class 1 and 2 Pump Items. forth in the Manufacturer’s Quality System Program.
(a) The identification of Materials for Category 3 items (c) Materials may be marked by any method which will
used for Class 1 and 2 pumps shall consist of marking or not result in any harmful contamination or sharp discon-
tagging the material with the applicable specification tinuities. Stamping, when used, shall be done with blunt‐
number, grade, heat number or heat code, and any addi- nosed‐continuous or blunt‐nosed‐interrupted‐dot die
tional marking required to facilitate traceability of the re- stamps.
ports of the results of all tests and examinations
performed on the material, except that heat number iden-
tification is not required for pumps with inlet connections
2 in. nominal pipe size (DN 50) and less. Alternatively, a

452
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

U-1316.2 Class 3 Pump Items. The identification of U-1321.2.4 Retests. One retest at the same tem-
materials for Category 3 through 5 items used for Class perature may be conducted provided
3 pumps shall consist of marking the material or its con- (a) not more than one specimen per test is below the
tainer in accordance with the requirements of the Manu- minimum requirements, and
facturer’s Quality System Program. (b) the specimen not meeting the minimum require-
ments is not lower than 5 mils (0.13 mm) below the spe-
U-1316.3 Welding and Brazing Material Identifica-
cified requirements
tion. Welding and brazing materials shall be clearly iden-
tified by legible marking on the package or container so
that they are identifiable as acceptable material until
U-1400 FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS
the material is actually consumed in the process.
Category 3 through 5 items shall be fabricated in accor-
dance with the requirements of U-1400 and shall be man-
U-1320 FRACTURE TOUGHNESS REQUIREMENTS ufactured from materials which meet the requirements of
FOR CATEGORY 3 MATERIALS U-1300.
U-1321 Materials to Be Impact Tested
Impact tested specimens shall be representative of the U-1410 CERTIFICATION OF MATERIALS AND
final heat treatment of the finished part. FABRICATION BY PUMP
MANUFACTURER
U-1321.1 Materials for Which Impact Testing Is Re-
The pump manufacturer shall provide certification that
quired. Materials for Category 3 items for Class 1 pumps,
all treatments, tests, repairs, or examinations performed
and for Class 2 and 3 pumps when required by the Design
on pump items are in compliance with the requirements
Specification, shall be impact tested in accordance with
of this Appendix. Reports of all required treatments and
the requirements of U-1320 except that the following ma-
the results of all required tests, repairs, and examinations
terials do not require impact testing:
performed shall be maintained in accordance with
(a) all thickness of materials for pumps with a nominal NCA‐3862.1 or NCA‐4134.17.
inlet pipe size 6 in. (150 mm) diameter and smaller
(b) materials for pumps with all pipe connections of U-1420 MATERIAL IDENTIFICATION
5
/8 in. (16 mm) nominal pipe wall thickness and less
Material for Category 3 and 4 items for Class 1 and 2
(c) materials with a nominal section thickness of 5/8 in.
pumps shall carry identification markings, including heat
(16 mm) and less
treatment grade either directly on the item or on a sepa-
(d) bars with a nominal cross‐sectional area of 1 in.2 rate tag that accompanies the item, which will be main-
(650 mm2) and less tained during and after assembly.
(e) austenitic stainless steels
(f) nonferrous materials U-1430 EXAMINATION OF MATERIALS
U-1321.2 Impact Test Procedure. Bars and forgings for Category 3 pump shafting for
U-1321.2.1 Charpy V-Notch Tests. The Charpy Class 1 pumps, shall be ultrasonically examined in accor-
V‐Notch Test shall be performed in accordance with dance with NB‐2542 and NB‐2547. Materials for Class 1
SA-370. Specimens shall be in accordance with SA-370, pumps, Category 3 items and Category 4 impellers for
Figure 11, Type A. A test shall consist of a set of 3 full‐size Class 1 pumps shall be examined on all external and ac-
10 × 10 mm specimens. The test temperature and lateral cessible internal surfaces by the magnetic particle or li-
expansion shall be reported in the Certified Material Test quid penetrant method in accordance with Section V.
Report. The examination may be performed by the Material Man-
ufacturer, Material Supplier, or the pump manufacturer
U-1321.2.2 Location and Orientation of Test Spe-
(see U-1313). Acceptance standards for magnetic particle
cimens. Impact test specimens shall be removed from the
and/or liquid penetrant examination shall be as follows.
locations and orientations specified by the material spec-
(a) Only indications with major dimensions greater
ification for tensile test specimens in each product form.
than 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) shall be considered relevant.
U-1321.2.3 Test Requirements and Acceptance (b) T h e f o l l o w i n g r e l e v a n t i n d i c a t i o n s a r e
Standards. Three Charpy V‐Notch specimens shall be unacceptable:
tested at a temperature equal to or lower than the lowest (1) any linear indications greater than 1/1 6 in.
service temperature. All three specimens shall meet or ex- (1.5 mm) long for materials less than 5/8 in. (16 mm) thick;
ceed 15 mils (0.45 mm) lateral expansion. Lowest service greater than 1/8 in. (3 mm) long for materials from 5/8 in.
temperature is the minimum temperature of the fluid re- (16 mm) thick to under 2 in. (50 mm) thick; and 3/16 in.
tained by the pump. The lowest service temperature shall (5 mm) long for materials 2 in. (50 mm) thick and
be specified in the Design Specification. greater;

453
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(2) rounded indications with dimensions greater (b) If grinding or machining reduces the thickness of
than 1/8 in. (3 mm) for thicknesses less than 5/8 in. the section below the minimum required by the design,
(16 mm) and greater than 3/16 in. (5 mm) for thicknesses the item may be repaired and returned to an acceptable
5
/8 in. (16 mm) and greater; size.
(3) four or more indications greater than 1/16 in.
(1.5 mm) in a line separated by 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) or less U-1440 REPAIR BY WELDING OF CATEGORY 3, 4,
edge to edge; AND 5 PUMP ITEMS
(4) ten or more indications greater than 1/16 in. (a) Category 3, 4, and 5 items for Class 1, 2, and 3
(1.5 mm) in any 6 in.2 (4000 mm2) of area whose major pumps may be repaired by welding using the provisions
dimension is no more than 6 in. (150 mm) with the di- of Section IX for materials in Table U-1610-1 with as-
mensions taken in the most unfavorable location relative signed P‐numbers provided the requirements of the fol-
to the indications being evaluated; lowing subparagraphs are met.
(5) linear nonaxial indications. (b) Until such time as P‐numbers are assigned, welding
Materials for Category 4 and 5 items for Class 1 pumps of those materials without P‐numbers shall be separately
and for Category 3, 4, and 5 items for Class 2 and 3 pumps qualified as required by Section IX.
shall be examined in accordance with the material speci- (c) Bolts, studs, nuts, and material for which welding is
fication. When Category 4 or 5 material forms an integral prohibited by Note (2) of Table U-1610-1 shall not be re-
or welded extensions to Category 1 material (see pair welded.
U-1120), the examination required for the Category 4 or
5 portion shall be in accordance with this Appendix. In ad- U-1441 Defect Removal
dition, the requirements for the examination of the Cate-
The defect shall be removed or reduced to an accept-
gory 1 portion shall be applied for a distance of at least 2t
able size by suitable mechanical or thermal cutting or
(t is thickness of the Category 4 or 5 material) from the
gouging methods and the cavity prepared for repair.
Category 1 boundary as defined by the pump designer.
U-1442 Qualification of Welding Procedures and
U-1431 Time of Examination Welders
Magnetic particle or liquid penetrant examination shall (a) When impact tests of Category 3 items are required,
be performed in the finished conditions, after all heat the impact testing requirements of U-1321.2.3 shall be
treatment operations and postweld heat treatment, ex- met in the heat-affected zone regardless of filler metal
cept that threaded items may be examined prior to used and in the weld metal for all material except auste-
threading. Examinations shall be performed prior to any nitic and nonferrous filler metal.
coating or plating. Lapping of seating surfaces to reduce (b) Except as permitted in (c) below, the welding proce-
leakage or lapping of bearing surfaces shall not require dure and welders or welding operators shall be qualified
reexamination. in accordance with Section IX.
(c) Heat‐treated materials listed in Table U-1610-1
which are not capable of passing bend tests required by
U-1432 Elimination of Surface Defects Section IX for procedure or performance qualification
(a) Unacceptable surface defects shall be removed by may be qualified by a Fillet Weld Test in accordance with
grinding or machining, provided: Section IX, QW-180. In addition, a minimum of two cross
(1) the remaining thickness of the section is not re- sections of the qualification test plate (assembly) shall be
duced below the minimum required by the design; ground and etched with a suitable etchant and visually ex-
(2) the depression, after grinding or machining, is amined at 10× magnification. The weld metal and adja-
blended uniformly into the surrounding surface and the cent base material of the ground and etched cross
depression does not affect the function of the item; sections shall be free of cracks.
(3) after grinding or machining, the area is examined
by the method which originally disclosed the defect to as- U-1443 Blending of Repaired Areas
sure that the defect has been removed or the indication After repair, the surface shall be blended into the sur-
reduced to an acceptable size. rounding surface.

U-1444 Examination of Repair Welds

Each repair weld of materials for Category 3 items for
Class 1 pumps shall be examined by the method that orig-
inally disclosed the defect. The finished surface shall be
examined by either the magnetic particle or liquid pene-
trant method in accordance with Section V. The accep-
tance standards shall be those specified in U-1430(a)

454
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

and U-1430(b). Repair welds of materials for the other ca- U-1452 Examination of Welds
tegories shall be in accordance with the material
All welds shall be examined by the magnetic particle or
specification.
liquid penetrant method in accordance with Section V.
The time of examination shall be in accordance with
U-1445 Heat Treatment After Repair NB‐5120, NC‐5120 and ND‐5120. Acceptance standards
shall be as follows.
(a) Materials listed in Table U-1610-1 which are re-
paired by welding shall be heat treated in accordance
U-1453 Acceptance Standards
with the requirements of NB‐4600, NC‐4600, and
ND‐4600 as applicable, or as allowed by (c) below. (a) Only indications with major dimensions greater
(b) Materials listed in Table U-1610-1 which are re- than 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) shall be considered relevant.
paired by welding shall be heat treated and tempered (b) T h e f o l l o w i n g r e l e v a n t i n d i c a t i o n s a r e
or aged after repair, except as allowed by (c) below. unacceptable:
The minimum tempering or aging temperature shall be (1) any cracks or linear indications
as specified in Table U-1610-1 for the finished item. (2) rounded indications with dimensions greater
(c) Repair weld procedures for welds not exceeding the than 3/16 in. (5 mm)
lesser of 3/8 in. (10 mm) or 10% of the section thickness (3) four or more rounded indications in a line sepa-
shall be qualified by test weld specimens meeting the ten- rated by 1/16 in. (1.5 mm) or less edge to edge
sile and bend test requirements of Section IX, without (4) ten or more rounded indications in any 6 in. 2
PWHT, for the material repaired. (4 000 mm2) of surface with the major dimensions of this
area not to exceed 6 in. (150 mm), with the area taken in
the most unfavorable location relative to the indications
U-1446 Repair Weld Report being evaluated
A record shall be made of each defect repair of Category
3 items for Class 1 pumps in which the depth of the repair U-1454 Heat Treatment of Welds
cavity exceeds the lesser of 3/8 in. (10 mm) or 10% of the
(a) Postweld heat treatment of welds which join mate-
section thickness. The record shall include the location
rials listed in Table U-1610-1 shall be in accordance with
and size of the repaired cavity, the welding material, the
the postweld heat treatment requirements of NB‐4620,
welding procedure, the heat treatment, and the examina-
NC‐4620 or ND‐4620, as applicable.
tion results.
(b) Postweld heat treatment of welds which join mate-
rials listed in Table U-1610-1 shall be in accordance with
U-1450 WELDING REQUIREMENTS the postweld heat treatment requirements of NB‐4620,
NC‐4620, or ND‐4620, as applicable. Special techniques,
Except as permitted in U-1442 and U-1451, all welds
such as local postweld heat treatment, may be necessary
shall be made using qualified welding procedures and
to avoid changing the base material properties of the item
welders or welding operators in accordance with Section
in location not adjacent to the weld. A change in the spe-
IX.
cified postweld heat treatment temperature will require
requalification of the WPS in accordance with Section
U-1451 Special Fabrication Welds IX, QW‐407.1.
(c) Postweld heat treatment of welds which join mate-
Fillet welds and partial penetration welds 1/4 in. (6 mm) rials listed in Table U-1610-1 to materials listed in Section
and less in size may be made in the fabrication of pump II, Part D, Table 1A shall be in accordance with the post-
items or between pump items where either of the items weld heat treatment requirements of N B ‐4620,
is a material listed in Table U-1610-1 provided welding NC‐4620, or ND‐4620, as applicable. Special techniques,
is not prohibited by Note (2) in Table U-1610-1, and the such as local postweld heat treatment, may be necessary
procedures and welders are qualified as follows: to avoid changing the base material properties of the item
(a) a test assembly shall be made for each combination in location not adjacent to the weld. A change in the spe-
of materials to be welded. cified postweld heat treatment temperature will require
(b) the test assembly shall be a duplicate of the produc- requalification of the WPS in accordance with Section
tion weld joint or a groove butt weld 1/4 in. (6 mm) mini- IX, QW‐407.1.
mum thickness. (d) Postweld heat treatment of welds for joining mate-
(c) the test assembly shall be sectioned (a minimum of rials listed in Table U-1610-1 shall be in accordance with
four cross sections), ground, etched with a suitable etch- the heat treatment specified for the material of the fin-
ant, and visually examined at 10× magnification. All sur- ished item, i.e., the heat treatment required to obtain
faces of the weld and adjacent base material(s) shall be the tensile strength and/or yield strength listed in Table
free of cracks. U-1610-1.

455
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(e) Materials listed in Table U-1610-1 subject to mate- (f) For fillet welds and partial penetration welds 1/4 in.
rial specification heat treatment after repair welding shall (6 mm) and less in size, postweld heat treatment is
be welded to a procedure which shall demonstrate that neither required nor prohibited, provided the require-
the required strength can be met in the weld without af- ments of U-1451 are met.
fecting the properties of the base material.

456
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX W

ARTICLE W-1000
ENVIRONMENTAL EFFECTS ON COMPONENTS

W-1100 INTRODUCTION W-1120 MATERIALS

Design Specification preparers and component de- This Appendix is not intended to prescribe or prevent
signers must consider environmental degradation factors the use of any material provided there is due considera-
to eliminate, reduce, mitigate, or delay adverse environ- tion of environmental conditions, and it includes exam-
mental effects on Code components to an appropriate lev- p l e s o f m a t e r i a l s th a t a r e e x p e c te d to p e r f o r m
el by applying experience, research, and conservative acceptably in the environments to be found in new light
design principles in the design and appropriate selection water reactors (LWRs) (see refs. [18] through [21]). Ma-
of materials and manufacturing practices. Owners must terials to avoid based on their history of performance
consider environmental degradation in defining appro- are also highlighted or referenced.
priate inservice inspection, repair and replacement, and
life extension programs. W-1130 DESIGN
This Appendix is organized by degradation mechanism Design measures to cope with adverse environmental
and includes the following: conditions include
(a) the degradation mechanism description (refs. [1] (a) minimizing thermal stratification at nozzles
through [4]) (b) minimizing stagnant dead-legs, crevices, socket
(b) the materials susceptible to the degradation welds, and sharp bends
mechanism (c) designing for complete drainage, layup, and nitro-
(c) t h e d e s i g n m e a s u r e s t o a v o i d c o m p o n e n t gen purge
degradation (d) using full-penetration welds
(d) the mitigating actions, such as material changes, (e) reducing bolt yield strength [less than approxi-
stress mitigation, and coatings mately 120 ksi (827 MPa)] to reduce intergranular stress
The references cited in this Appendix cover mitigation corrosion cracking (IGSCC)
strategies for long-term operation considering the inter- (f) minimizing applied loads, peak stresses, and resi-
actions between materials, environments, stress, irradia- dual stresses
tion, etc. The Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) (g) specifying fabrication methods and controls to
Issue Management Tables and Materials Degradation Ma- minimize residual strains and stresses at wetted surfaces
trix (MDM) provide a prioritized comprehensive review
of degradation mechanisms and possible mitigation ac-
W-1140 MITIGATING ACTIONS
tions. Other technology-specific reports are listed that
supplement the EPRI and Nuclear Regulatory Commis- Environmental effect-mitigating actions may include
sion (NRC) reports. changing materials, the residual stress state, and/or the
environmental conditions; actions specific to the degrada-
tion mechanism; and the following general mitigating
W-1110 SCOPE actions:
This Appendix is intended to provide information re- (a) using appropriate welding techniques, including
lated to degradation mechanisms experienced by operat- minimizing the heat input from welding and use of pre-
ing plants but is not all inclusive. The Design Specification and postweld heating, where appropriate
for new components must include appropriate require- (b) minimizing cold work, such as that produced by
ments. Each degradation mechanism is described in brief heavy grinding, or following cold work with corrective
terms; refs. [1] through [7], [34], and [35] provide addi- procedures, such as solution heat treatment or surface
tional information that should be consulted for particular treatments (e.g., properly qualified peening)
component design problems. (c) maintaining cleanliness throughout manufacturing

457
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(d) controlling water chemistry and including additives [3] EPRI Materials Degradation Matrix, Rev. 3, EPRI
to reduce electrochemical potential (refs. [11] through 3002000628, 2013.
[18]) [4] NUREG-1801, Rev. 2, Generic Aging Lessons Learned
(e) using clean hydrostatic test fluid to prevent micro- (GALL) Final Report, 2010.
biologically influenced corrosion (MIC) and IGSCC [5] Materials Reliability Program: Pressurized Water Re-
(f) applying solution heat treatment to stainless steel actor Issue Management Tables, Rev. 3 (MRP-205),
welds EPRI 3002000634, 2013.
(g) using weld inlays, onlays, and overlays [6] BWRVIP-167NP, Rev. 3: BWR Vessel and Internals
(h) using mechanical stress improvement Project Boiling Water Reactor Issue Management
(i) using electropolishing Tables, EPRI 3002000690, 2013.
(j) using passivation or preconditioning to establish a [7] Advanced Nuclear Technology: Near-Term Deploy-
corrosion protective layer ment of Advanced Light Water Reactors, EPRI
(k) avoiding weld repairs that leave tensile stress on a 1024870, 2012.
wetted surface [8] Life Cycle Management Sourcebook for Nuclear Plant
Service Water Systems, EPRI 1008282, 2005.
[9] NUREG-1061, Vol. 3, Evaluation of Potential for Pipe
W-1150 RELATION TO SECTION XI AND PLEX
Breaks, 1984.
APPLICATIONS
[10] NUREG-0313, Rev. 2, Technical Report on Material
Consideration of damage mechanisms and the Selection and Processing Guidelines for BWR Coolant
service-related degradation of components should be Pressure Boundary Piping, 1987.
considered when establishing Section XI inservice exami- [11] PWR Primary Water Chemistry Guidelines, Vol. 1,
nation and surveillance programs and in projecting plant Rev. 4, EPRI TR-105714, 1999.
life extension limits (refs. [7] through [10]). Environmen- [12] PWR Secondary Water Chemistry Guidelines, Rev. 5,
tal conditions that exist during activities such as layup, EPRI TR-102134, 2000.
cleaning, surveillance, maintenance, and repair can affect [13] Pressurized Water Reactor Secondary Water Chem-
component integrity, service life, and plant life extension istry Guidelines, Rev. 6, EPRI 1008224, 2004.
(PLEX) (refs. [1] through [19]). This Appendix addresses [14] BWRVIP-130: BWR Vessel and Internals Project,
new component design, long-term operation (LTO), and BWR Water Chemistry Guidelines, EPRI TR-1008192,
PLEX for existing components. The GALL report (ref. 2004.
[4]) is an extensive evaluation of existing components. [15] Closed Cooling Water Chemistry Guideline (Rev. 1 to
Risk-informed inservice inspection (RI-ISI) methodology TR-107396, Closed Cooling Water Chemistry Guide-
has been developed for existing LWRs to identify high line), EPRI TR-1007820, 2004.
safety-significant inspection elements that are subject to [16] Boric Acid Corrosion Guidebook: Managing Boric
environmental degradation; this is informative for new Acid Corrosion Issues at PWR Power Stations, Rev. 1,
component design (see refs. [28] through [31]; also, see EPRI 1000975, 2001.
ref. [32] for enhanced screening criteria for crevice corro- [17] Materials Reliability Program, Reactor Vessel Head
sion). Component degradation mechanisms, mitigation, Boric Acid Corrosion Testing (MRP-165): Task 3 — Se-
and research are further described in the Issue Manage- parate Effects Testing, EPRI 1011807, 2005.
ment Tables for the respective technology (e.g., refs. [5] [18] Materials Reliability Program: Pressurized Water Re-
and [6]). Additional areas of concern may emerge in the actor Internals Inspection and Evaluation Guidelines
future, e.g., in research reports, NRC generic letters and (MPR-227-A), Technical Report, EPRI 1022863, 2005.
bulletins, and other industry event reports. It is the de- [19] EPRI Materials Management Matrix Project: Ad-
signer’s responsibility to take such new information into vanced Light Water Reactor — Boiling Water Reactor
consideration. Degradation Matrix (ALWR BWR DM), Rev. 0, EPRI
1019611, 2009.
W-1160 REFERENCES [20] EPRI Materials Management Matrix Project: KHNP
The following references apply to new component de- Advanced Pressurized Water Reactor (APR1400) Mate-
sign and may also be applicable for repair and/or replace- rials Management Tables, Rev. 0, EPRI 1024568, 2011.
ment activities performed under Section XI. Each Article [21] Fontana, M. G., and Greene, N. D. Corrosion Engineer-
in this Appendix lists additional references specifically ing, 3rd Ed., McGraw-Hill, 1986.
applicable to that degradation mechanism. These refer- [22] Uhlig, H. H. Corrosion and Corrosion Control, 3rd Ed.,
ences consist of extensive current and historical Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2011.
information. [23] ASM Handbook, Volume 13A, “Corrosion: Fundamen-
[1] NUREG/CR-6923, Expert Panel Report on Proactive tals, Testing, and Protection,” 2003; Volume 13B, “Cor-
Materials Degradation Assessment, 2007. rosion: Materials,” 2005; Volume 13C, “Corrosion:
[2] NEI 03-08, Rev. 2, Guideline for the Management of Environments and Industries,” 2006, American Society
Materials Issues, 2010. for Metals (ASM) International.

458
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

[24] Carbon Steel Handbook, EPRI 1014670, 2007. [33] Boiling Water Reactor Chemistry Performance Mon-
[25] Landrum, R. J. Fundamentals of Designing for Corro- itoring Report, 2005 Ed., EPRI 1009932, 2005.
sion Control: A Corrosion Aid for the Designer, ISBN: [34] ASME BPVC Section II, Nonmandatory Appendix A,
0915567342, NACE International, 1992. Issues Associated With Materials Used in ASME Code
[26] Meyers, M. A., and Chawla, K. K. Mechanical Metal- Construction.
lurgy: Principles and Application, 1st Ed., Prentice-Hall [35] Approaches to Ageing Management for Nuclear
Inc., 1983. Power Plants: International Generic Ageing Lessons
[27] K. R. Rao. Companion Guide to the ASME Boiler and Learned (IGALL) Final Report, IAEA-TECDOC-1736,
Pressure Vessel Code, 4th Ed., The American Society of 2014.
Mechanical Engineers (ASME), 2012.
[28] Code Case N-577-1, Risk-Informed Requirements for
Class 1, 2, or 3 Piping, Method A, Section XI, Division 1,
2000. W-1200 SECTION XI AND PLEX
[29] Code Case N-578-1, Risk-Informed Requirements for APPLICATIONS
Class 1, 2, or 3 Piping, Method B, Section XI, Division 1,
2000. Along with providing guidance and a starting point for
[30] Code Case N-560, Alternative Examination Require- ASME Section III material and design considerations to
ments for Class 1, Category B-J Piping Welds, Section minimize service degradation, this report is relevant to
XI, Division 1, 2000. ASME Section XI and plant life extension (PLEX) evalua-
[31] Code Case N-716, Alternative Piping Classification tions. Consideration of these damage mechanisms and
and Examination Requirements, Section XI, Division 1, the service degradation of components should be a part
2006. of establishing Section XI in‐service inspection (ISI) and
[32] Enhanced Crevice Corrosion Criteria in RI-ISI Evalua- surveillance programs, and in projecting plant life exten-
tions, EPRI 1011945, 2005. sion limits.

459
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE W-2000
SUMMARIES OF CORROSION DAMAGE MECHANISMS

W-2100 STRESS CORROSION CRACKING such as gaskets, lubricants, and cleaning fluids should
be controlled to given individual and combined part-per-
W-2110 GENERAL DESCRIPTION million levels, and polyvinyl chloride (PVC), Teflon, and
Stress corrosion cracking (SCC) includes intergranular, fluorosilicates should not be allowed at all (ref. [40])
transgranular, irradiation-assisted, strain-induced, and
hydrogen embrittlement mechanisms (ref. [42]). Several W-2130 MATERIALS
of these mechanisms are discussed separately in this SSC potential can be significantly reduced by selecting
Appendix. SCC can lead to leakage or component failure resistant materials known to offer corrosion resistance
in some materials in a light water reactor (LWR) environ- in a LWR environment.
ment. A combination of the following conditions is re-
quired for initiation of SCC: W-2131 Austenitic Stainless Steels
(a) a susceptible material
The austenitic stainless steels (e.g., Types 304 and 316
(b) a suitable environment
stainless steels) have proven to be resistant to SCC in
(c) a high surface tensile stress [As little as 5 ksi
PWR primary coolant but have had significant SCC prob-
(34.5 MPa) in the presence of chlorides may cause SCC
lems in BWR reactor coolant and in many aqueous envi-
of susceptible types of stainless steel.]
ronments containing chlorides and other contaminants.
SCC has been experienced in all pressurized water reac-
Analysis of SCC in austenitic stainless steel welds re-
tors (PWRs) and boiler water reactors (BWRs) (ref. [1]).
moved from BWR service has shown that cracking initi-
SCC of Alloy 600 steam generator tubing has resulted in
ates in the weld heat-affected zone (HAZ) in the base
replacement of most original steam generators in the
metal near the weld fusion line. The weld metal itself
PWR fleet (refs. [2] through [4]). Similarly, SCC of Alloy
rarely contains SCC, and cracking in the base metal out-
600 control rod drive mechanism nozzles in PWR reactor
side the HAZ has not been observed. It has been
vessel heads has resulted in augmented inspections and
replacement of reactor vessel heads. BWR austenitic
stainless steel recirculation piping and reactor vessel in-
Figure W-2120-1
ternals have been subject to SCC, which resulted in exten-
Environmental Conditions Required for SCC
sive inspections and repairs, and sometimes complete
piping replacements (refs. [5] and [6]; see also W-2500).

W-2120 PREVENTIVE MEASURES

Mechanical Susceptible Material
SCC preventive measures include the following: Loading Condition
(a) careful selection of materials that have a minimum • Operational
• Chemical composition
susceptibility to SCC in the expected service environmen- tensile stress
• Microstructure
• Residual tensile
tal conditions • Residual plastic strain
stress
(b) an understanding of the Owner-approved specifica- SCC
tions for water chemistry
(c) use of design and fabrication techniques that mini-
mize surface tensile stress or that mitigate residual
stresses
The elimination, or reduction to some threshold level,
Corrosive Environment
of one of the factors in Figure W-2120-1 eliminates SCC • pH value
(ref. [6]). See the Utilities Requirement Document for ag- • Temperature
gressive species to avoid, such as low-melting-point me- • Electrochemical potential
• Aggressive species (e.g.,
tals (lead, antimony, cadmium, indium, mercury, zinc, Cl, HBO3, lead)
bismuth, copper, and tin) and their alloys and high-sulfur
materials (with the exception of strong acid cation resin).
Impurity levels (e.g., levels of chlorine, fluorine, mercury,
arsenic, lead, sulfur, and zinc) in nonmetallic materials GENERAL NOTE: See W-3200 for irradiation effects.

460
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

concluded that the heat of welding “sensitizes” the HAZ W-2132 Stainless Steel Weld Metal
through the precipitation of chromium carbides on grain
Industry actions to prevent IGSCC in stainless steel
boundaries. (See W-2510 for more discussion on sensiti-
weld metals (typically Types 308 and 308L alloys) focus
zation of stainless steels.) Base metal that is free from car-
on controlling weld metal ferrite content. Traditionally,
bide precipitation is resistant to cracking, and weld metal
ferrite content in the weld metal, as depicted by a ferrite
has been found to be resistant as long as delta ferrite lev-
number (FN), has been restricted to values between 5 and
els exceed ∼5%.
20. The lower limit provides sufficient ferrite to avoid mi-
In the HAZ, cracking appears to follow the microstruc- crofissuring during welding, and the upper limit reduces
tural grain boundaries because precipitation of chromium the potential for thermal aging effects (ferrite decomposi-
carbides at the grain boundaries reduces the local free tion). NRC Regulatory Guide 1.31 (ref. [1]) notes certain
chromium content and, consequently, the grain boundary SFA weld filler metal specifications that do not require
corrosion resistance. This type of cracking is referred to FN determinations. A cooperative study group was
as intergranular stress corrosion cracking (IGSCC). formed by ASME, the American National Standards Insti-
The industry action to mitigate IGSCC in BWRs through tute (ANSI), and the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission
material selection has been to develop and use nuclear (NRC) to investigate controls for ferrite content in auste-
grade (NG) alloys based on the traditional Types 304, nitic stainless steel weld material to minimize IGSCC in
304L, 316, and 316L stainless steel grades. NG alloys con- weldments; the results were incorporated in the Code
tain very low carbon levels as well as controls on nitrogen and endorsed by the NRC (refs. [1] and [4]). In BWR ap-
content and other trace elements. The nitrogen content is plications, the ferrite number for ferrite in weld metals
increased to further improve IGSCC resistance and to re- is normally specified to be 8 FN minimum in Owner
cover strength lost by the reduced carbon content. ordering-data requirements; NRC guidelines have also
NG alloys successfully resist IGSCC in weld HAZs by lim- specified a minimum ferrite level of 7.5 FN for
iting the degree of carbide precipitation on grain bound- welding-resistant material (ref. [10]).
aries during welding, i.e., they are difficult to sensitize.
However, it is emphasized that fabrication techniques W-2133 Ni–Cr–Fe Alloys 600 and 690
also play a significant role in the corrosion resistance of Early on, the industry experienced widespread
these materials, as in the following examples: chloride-induced SCC and pitting in austenitic stainless
(a) Control of heat input when welding austenitic stain- steel steam generator tubes, and a move was made to
less steel is important in maintaining SCC resistance. the nickel-based alloys, which are resistant to chloride
(b) Care should be taken when performing postweld SCC. The primary alloy selected was Ni–Cr–Fe Alloy 600
heat treatment (PWHT) of low alloy steel components (Inconel® 600). Later, it was found that Alloy 600 itself
containing stainless steel parts since the specified PWHT was subject to SCC in primary coolant without contami-
temperature for many low alloy steels is within the sensi- nants (PWSCC). By the time this behavior was detected,
tization temperature range 800°F to 1,500°F (427°C to Alloy 600 and its associated weld filler materials, primar-
826°C) for austenitic stainless steels. ily Alloys 82 and 182, had been extensively applied in
steam generator tubes and other LWR components, such
(c) Solution annealing should be considered for materi-
as reactor vessel control rod drive nozzles, reactor vessel
als that are subject to high levels of cold work during
nozzle buttering for safe ends, and pressurizer heater
fabrication.
sleeves.
(d) Machining techniques can introduce high residual Material changes to prevent SCC in nickel-based Ni–
surface tensile stresses if not carefully controlled. Cr–Fe Alloy 600 occurred in two stages. Early research
The SCC resistance of austenitic stainless steels should on SCC in Alloy 600 steam generator tubes revealed that
always be confirmed by testing in accordance with cracking often initiated in the primary side of the tubes in
ASTM A262, Practice E, with Practice A screening per- areas of high residual stress, e.g., tubesheet roll transi-
mitted (ref. [45]). For temperatures below 200°F (93°C), tions, inner U-bends, and support plate dents. Laboratory
IGSCC is not a significant concern for austenitic stainless work confirmed that the cracking was PWSCC. In re-
steels in normal BWR water environments without chlor- sponse, heat treatments for Alloy 600 were developed
ides and sulfates. In the presence of chlorides or sulfates, that included a high-temperature solution anneal fol-
SCC can occur at temperatures as low as room tempera- lowed by a thermal treatment at a lower temperature.
ture. The presence of sulfates and chlorides or fluorides Use of Alloy 600 in the late 1970s and early 1980s in-
can lead to transgranular SCC in all austenitic stainless volved replacing as-produced “mill annealed” Alloy 600
steels, even in unsensitized material and in the absence components with “thermally treated” Alloy 600 compo-
of oxygen (ref. [32]). The use of low- carbon nuclear grade nents (ref. [31]).
material is not sufficient to prevent SCC in the presence of Unlike the nuclear grade stainless steels, the thermally
these contaminants. SCC mitigation is restricted to water treated Alloy 600 replacement material did not involve
purity control in this case. any significant material chemistry changes. However,

461
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

further testing showed that thermally treated Alloy 600 The presence of susceptible material in nozzle welds
was improved but not immune to PWSCC. A new alloy (primarily buttering) and piping welds has required the
was required and developed by International Nickel Co. industry to develop mitigating actions to prevent or con-
to provide a high level of PWSCC resistance. The alloy is trol PWSCC in PWRs and IGSCC in BWRs. These include
designated Alloy 690 and differs from Alloy 600 primarily externally deposited weld overlays, which replace the
in its very high chromium content (e.g., SB-166 UNS structural function of the susceptible material; internally
N06990). The nuclear power industry has generally deposited weld inlays and onlays that isolate the suscep-
adopted additional controls on the production of this ma- tible material from the corrosive environment; and var-
terial that include tighter chemistry controls and special ious stress improvement techniques, such as
solution annealing and thermal heat treatments (TT) that induction-heating stress improvement and mechanical
have been demonstrated to provide optimal PWSCC resis- stress improvement. ASME has published Code Cases
tance. Alloy 690 made to these specifications has proven for many of these techniques (refs. [42] and [43]). These
to be very resistant to PWSCC and has become the stan- mitigating actions are discussed further in W-2140 and
dard replacement for Alloy 600 in new PWR designs W-2150.
and for repairs in existing plants. There is no significant
operating history for Alloy 690 in BWR service.
The performance of Alloy 600 in BWR service has been W-2135 Other Materials
mixed. IGSCC has been observed in applications involving
crevices, such as crevices behind nozzle thermal sleeves Nickel-based Alloy X-750 is a high-strength nickel alloy
and welded crevices (including a welded sleeve on shroud frequently used for bolting, springs, and other applica-
head bolts) or cracks initiated in Alloy 182 nozzle butter- tions requiring high strength and general corrosion resis-
ing that propagate into Alloy 600. The alloy has generally tance in reactor-coolant environments. The alloy has
performed well in uncreviced applications such as core demonstrated IGSCC in BWR jet pump hold-down beams
shroud support legs. A niobium-modified Ni–Cr–Fe Alloy and some PWR bolting applications. IGSCC in this material
600 that is resistant to IGSCC has been developed for ad- has been mitigated by a combination of actions, including
vanced boiling water reactor (ABWR) core support redesign to reduce stresses, reduction of the preloads, re-
structure–support shroud service (refs. [7], [11], and finements to the solution annealing and age-hardening
[31]). heat treatments, and surface conditioning to reduce resi-
dual tensile stresses. Procurement specifications for Alloy
X-750 parts should impose the manufacturing restrictions
W-2134 Ni–Cr–Fe Weld Metals recommended in refs. [12] and [13].
Alloys 182 (covered electrode) and 82 (bare wire) weld Alloy 718 has been used in some cases as a replacement
fillers are used in Ni–Cr–Fe Alloy 600 construction and for for Alloy X-750. A single-step aging treatment appears to
buttering in bimetallic welds such as those joining low al- result in greater SCC resistance as opposed to the conven-
loy steel nozzles to stainless steel safe-ends. They have tional two-step aging normally applied to this alloy to
proven to be susceptible to IGSCC and PWSCC in LWR ser- generate higher strength. Alloy 718 with a single-step
vice. Because of its higher chromium content, Alloy 82 is aging treatment was recently added to Code Case
considered to be more resistant to SCC; advanced BWRs N-60-6 (ref. [44]) for use in core support structures and
are still using Alloy 82 (with control of stabilizing ratio) has been used at one BWR for jet pump hold-down beams.
at present. In BWRs, no Alloy 82 crack initiation has been High-strength low alloy steel (e.g., AISI 4130, AISI
experienced, but Alloy 182 cracks readily. Cracking has 4140) bolting also experienced degradation in operating
been primarily observed in full penetration nozzle-to- plants. It was first observed in nuclear service in steam
piping welds and partial penetration welded nozzles. generator manway bolting failures and equipment anchor
However, neither of these materials should be used in bolt failures in damp environments. The manway failures
new PWR applications where they will be exposed to pri- were often observed in bolts lubricated with molybde-
mary water. num disulfide. This lubricant decomposes to produce ag-
Alloys 52 and 152 filler metals were developed for use gressive sulfides in the presence of steam, which is often
with Alloy 690 and have proven to be resistant to PWSCC present due to leaking manway gaskets. More important,
in PWRs and IGSCC in BWRs. However, industry experi- bolts most susceptible to SCC were observed to be the
ence and laboratory testing have shown that these alloys hardest or strongest. It was found that bolts with a Rock-
are susceptible to hot cracking or ductility dip cracking well hardness of HRC 40 and higher were very susceptible
during welding, so improvements to these alloys continue to cracking in all environments. Consequently, refs. [20]
to be developed. Alloys 52M, 52MSS, and 152M have all and [21] require that the material tensile strength be lim-
been developed to improve weldability while maintaining ited to 150 ksi (1 034 MPa) in critical high-strength bolt-
high levels of SCC resistance. Recommendations to pre- ing. Field experience and tests have shown that this
vent hot cracking have been developed (refs. [38] and restriction greatly reduces the potential for SCC in high-
[39]). strength bolting materials. Use of martensitic stainless

462
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

steels, such as those of chromium grades from 11% to shrinkage at the joint. Residual stresses at the I.D. surface
13%, should be avoided for reactor stud-bolting applica- can be minimized by avoiding final welding steps at the
tions (ref. [21]). I.D. surface, such as an I.D. repair.
SCC has been observed in Type 416 martensitic stain- Many operating plants contain welds in piping and noz-
less steel pump shaft couplings exposed to raw-water ser- zles that are sensitized or that contain susceptible mate-
vice. The cause was the presence of sulfur inclusions in rials. In these cases, action can be taken to reduce
this resulfurized, free-machining steel. Use of free- tensile stresses on the I.D. surface of the weld, including
machining grades of martensitic stainless steels and low (a) induction heat stress improvement (IHSI) method
alloy steels should be avoided in critical applications with application of induction heat to the weld outside sur-
(refs. [16] and [21]). face while keeping the pipe filled with water (cooled). The
Finally, it should be noted that manufacturing process thermal gradient generated by induction heating causes
controls at the mill production and component fabrication compressive yielding on the outside surface and weld re-
levels are required to produce components resistant to sidual stress reversal once heating is terminated.
SCC. Many of these controls do not appear in materials (b) mechanical stress improvement process (MSIP),
specifications and must be imposed via Owner ordering which uses a hydraulic clamp to compress the pipe out-
data or Owner-generated specifications. Examples of re- side diameter (O.D.) surface near, but not on, the weld,
quired controls include leaving compressive residual stresses in the weld on the
(a) limits on welding heat input and heat treatment inside diameter (I.D.) surface.
(b) limits on cold work and cold forming in austenitic (c) structural weld overlay on the O.D. surface of the
stainless steels pipe, which induces compressive stresses on the pipe
(c) limits on pickling and intergranular attack on auste- I.D. surface. A weld inlay/overlay also provides a barrier
nitic stainless steel and nickel-based alloy surfaces to the propagation of cracks if composed of resistant weld
(d) cleanliness requirements and limits on chlorides filler (e.g., Type 308L stainless steel with controlled fer-
and low-melting-point metals in lubricants, paints, mark- rite or Alloy 52 nickel-based filler).
ing crayons, insulation, and tape adhesives (refs. [3] and (d) shot peening, laser peening, or water-jet peening, all
[4]) of which generate compressive residual stresses at the
(e) surface-finish requirements and limits on abusive component surface (ref. [36]). Water-jet- and laser-
grinding peening techniques have both been applied at commercial
LWR plants to mitigate SCC of thick-wall components.
These methods are typically applied underwater. In each
W-2140 STRESS CONTROL method, a shock pressure is produced at the treated sur-
High peak-service stresses at geometric discontinuities face resulting in a layer of compressive residual stress to a
have led to SCC failures in hold-down beams, springs, and depth of roughly at least 0.04 in. (1 mm).
bolting. High residual stress also contributes to SCC. Resi- In cases such as nozzles welded to large components
dual stresses are present in most structures as a result of (e.g., pressurizer heater sleeve welds or reactor vessel
fabrication practices (e.g., machining, forming, and weld- head control-rod-drive-mechanism nozzles) where stress
ing) and are impacted by factors such as welding pro- improvement cannot be applied, either a modification to
cesses and resulting shrinkage stresses. isolate the susceptible material from reactor coolant or
Residual stress, often combined with the sensitization component removal, redesign, and replacement are re-
of the HAZ near the weld fusion line, produces two of quired to effect a permanent solution.
the three criteria required for IGSCC in stainless steels: The expansion of tubes in the tubesheet of steam gen-
tensile stress and susceptible material. The contribution erators generates an expansion transition region in the
of the reactor coolant (aggressive environment) is dis- tube that can generate high residual stresses. The design
cussed in W-2150. As noted in W-2130, different materi- and method of expansion have a major impact on those
als are susceptible to SCC in different LWR environments, stresses. Early steam generators demonstrated extensive
so weldments susceptible to SCC in BWR environments PWSCC in the Alloy 600 tube expansion transitions be-
may not be similarly affected in PWR environments and cause the tubes were rolled into the tubesheet. This pro-
vice versa. duced a sharp transition with high tensile residual
Depending on the joint configuration, weld sequence, stresses. Expansions are currently performed hydrauli-
and weld materials, large through-wall residual stresses cally with carefully controlled transition geometries. This
may result from the welding process. In BWR piping, ten- is another example of stress mitigation through careful
sile stresses have been found to be near yield stress levels fabrication.
on the inside (I.D.) surface (ref. [9]) due to weld high re- Other fabrication activities can have a large impact on
sidual stress at the I.D. surface. Weld residual stresses can SCC. For example, significant cold work results in high re-
be minimized with proper weld joint designs (narrow sidual surface tensile stresses. For Type 304 austenitic
groove is better), low heat input, weld sequencing, and stainless steel in BWR service, cold-work levels above
sufficient filler metal feed to reduce the local diametrical ∼5% can impact SCC resistance by producing a

463
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

martensite phase transformation in the alloy that be- Platinum electrodes placed in the recirculation loop
comes sensitized at operating temperatures (no welding flow under hydrogen injection conditions achieved very
required). In addition, cold work itself has been asso- low ECP values at low feedwater hydrogen levels. For pla-
ciated with BWR IGSCC failures in Type 316 stainless tinum and other noble metals, it appeared to be sufficient
steel. Thus, cold work should be limited to less than 5% merely to reach stochiometry with the oxidizing species,
for all austenitic varieties used in BWR coolant. which required feedwater injection levels of hydrogen
Stainless steels seem to be resistant to SCC in PWR pri- in the tenths of a part per million range rather than the
mary coolant, even at high cold-work levels. In fact, 20% 1-ppm to 2-ppm levels required to markedly reduce the
cold-worked Type 316 stainless steel is the preferred ma- potential on stainless steel surfaces. This became the ba-
terial to replace Alloy X-750 bolting in PWR primary cool- sis for noble metal chemical addition chemistry now
ant service. Cold work can be limited by process controls being used in BWRs. Noble metal solutions are injected
during fabrication and by using material with maximum into the feedwater to deposit on recirculation piping sur-
hardness limited to HRB 90 or less. faces where they catalyze the hydrogen recombination re-
Grinding and machining should also be controlled. Abu- action with the oxidizing species generated in the core.
sive grinding can often be detected by surface color Noble metal chemistry achieves the required ECP to inhi-
changes, which indicate overheating. For critical surfaces, bit IGSCC while minimizing the required amount of hy-
all grinding should be followed by flapping to remove drogen injected into the feedwater. Currently, online
cold-worked surface material. For machined parts, sur- noble metal chemical injection systems are preferred
face cold work can be controlled by specifying a smooth over the batch process.
surface finish on fabrication drawings. Single-point ma- The primary coolant in PWRs contains boric acid to
chining with a sharp tool is preferred. In critical bolting, control core reactivity, ammonium or lithium hydroxide
rolled threads are preferred to machined threads because additions to control pH, and hydrogen additions to levels
rolling leaves compressive residual stresses at the thread of ∼25 cc/kg to ∼50 cc/kg with a typical operating range
root. of 30 cc/kg to 40 cc/kg to reduce the corrosion potential.
At 572oF (300oC), a neutral pHT is 5.7, and the coolant is
maintained in the mildly alkaline range (e.g., pHT 6.9 to
W-2150 ENVIRONMENT pHT 7.4), to minimize corrosion of structural materials
and deposition of corrosion products on core heat trans-
In this section, environmental effects on SCC are con- fer surfaces.
sidered along with SCC mitigation through environmental The coolant pH seems to have little impact on PWSCC in
modification. Alloy 600. The high levels of added hydrogen create very
The standard BWR coolant chemistry up through the low ECP conditions on plant surfaces (e.g., –600 mVSHE),
1980s was pure water. However, testing showed that but this also has only a moderate impact on PWSCC crack
the propensity for IGSCC in austenitic stainless steels initiation rates in Alloy 600. On the other hand, the very
was sensitive to water purity. Consequently, water purity low potential has protected sensitized stainless steel
requirements increased continuously through the decade, welds quite well over the years, which explains the excel-
and conductivity limits decreased from 2 μS/cm to lent historic performance of the austenitic stainless steels
0.2 μS/cm (2 micromhos/cm to 0.2 micromhos/cm) dur- in PWR primary systems.
ing that time (ref. [35]). Operating experience and laboratory tests on Alloy 600
Water purity, while important, was not the primary have demonstrated that PWSCC is highly temperature de-
cause of IGSCC in BWRs. Testing by General Electric in pendent. The crack initiation time is reduced sharply at
the 1980s showed that IGSCC cracking was driven by high temperatures. The behavior is of the Arrhenius type,
the electrochemical potential (ECP) of the coolant, which with activation energy of ∼50 kCal/mole. Therefore, a
in a BWR is quite high due to the radiolytic decomposition 15°F (8°C) reduction in temperature doubles the lifetime
of water in the core. This decomposition produces oxidiz- of Alloy 600 components. As a result of this finding, some
ing species, such as peroxides and dissolved oxygen. The plants in the past reduced the reactor outlet temperature
typical range in BWR water is 200 ppb to 300 ppb. Orig- to extend the life of Alloy 600 steam generator tubing and
inally, the typical value for the ECP in the recirculation other Alloy 600 components.
system was +200 mVSHE (millivolts, standard hydrogen Finally, it should be noted that certain chemical impu-
electrode). Tests demonstrated that IGSCC crack growth rities can cause SCC in reactor plant components and
rate is reduced to a manageable level over the life of the must be controlled. Chlorides, even at low levels, can ra-
plant with an ECP of –230 mVSHE or lower. It was deter- pidly crack austenitic stainless steels at reactor operating
mined that the addition of hydrogen gas to the coolant temperatures. This is true even for nuclear grade material
via feedwater injection on the order of 1 ppm to 2 ppm and other stainless materials that are not sensitized. Re-
could reduce the potential to –230 mVSHE or lower. This duced sulfur compounds, which could be produced by
practice (hydrogen water chemistry) is currently being the decomposition of ion exchange resins, can crack sen-
used by most, if not all, U.S. BWRs. sitized stainless steels and Alloy 600 in minutes, even at

464
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

room temperature. Lead and lead compounds even at low [15] Stress Corrosion Cracking Initiation Model for Stain-
levels will rapidly crack Alloy 600. For these and many less Steel and Nickel Alloys: Effects of Cold Work, EPRI
other reasons, water chemistry controls are required to 1019032, Electric Power Research Institute, 2009.
prevent SCC. [16] Smith, A. J., et al. “Thermal Treatment, Grain Bound-
ary Composition and Intergranular Attack Resistance of
W-2160 REFERENCES Alloy 690” in the Proceedings of the Fifth International
[1] NRC Regulatory Guide 1.31, Control of Ferrite Content Symposium on Environmental Degradation of Materials
in Stainless Steel Welding, Rev. 3, U.S. Nuclear Regula- in Nuclear Power Systems — Water Reactors, p. 855,
tory Commission, 1978. American Nuclear Society, 1991.
[2] NRC Regulatory Guide 1.34, Control of Electrostatic [17] Material Specification for Alloy X-750 in LWR Com-
Weld Properties, Rev. 1, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Com- ponents, EPRI NP-6202, Electric Power Research Insti-
mission, 2011. tute, Jan. 1, 1989.
[3] NRC Regulatory Guide 1.37, QA Requirements for [18] The Effect of Thermal Treatment on the Fracture
Cleaning of Fluid Systems and Associated Components, Properties of Alloy X-750 in Aqueous Environments,
Rev. 1, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, 2007. EPRI TR-102437, Electric Power Research Institute,
[4] NRC Regulatory Guide 1.36, Nonmetallic Thermal In- 1993.
sulation for Austenitic Stainless Steel, Rev. 2, U.S. Nucle- [19] Design and Manufacturing Guidelines for High
ar Regulatory Commission, 1973. Strength Components in LWRs — Alloy X-750, EPRI
[5] NRC Regulatory Guide 1.44, Control of the Processing NP-7338-L, Electric Power Research Institute, 1991.
and Use of Stainless Steel, Rev. 3, U.S. Nuclear Regula- [20] NUREG-1339, Resolution of Generic Safety Issue 29:
tory Commission, 2011. Bolting Degradation or Failure in Nuclear Power Plants,
[6] Effect of Water Chemistry on Stress Corrosion Crack- U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, June 1990.
ing (SCC) in Low Alloy Steels, EPRI 1011867, Electric [21] NRC Regulatory Guide 1.65, Materials and Inspec-
Power Research Institute, 2005. tions for Reactor Vessel Closure Studs, Rev. 1, U.S. Nu-
[7] NUREG/CR-6907, Crack Growth Rates of Nickel Alloy clear Regulatory Commission, Apr. 2010.
Welds in a PWR Environment, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory [22] Repair and Replacement Applications Center: Stress
Commission, May 2006. Corrosion Cracking in Closed Cooling Water Systems,
[8] West, E. A., Was, G. S. “IGSCC of Grain Boundary Engi- Damage Mechanism Evaluation and Proposed Re-
neered 316L and 690 in Supercritical Water,” Journal of search, EPRI 1013563, Electric Power Research Insti-
Nuclear Materials, Vol. 392, No. 2, pp. 264–271, 2009. tute, 200.
[9] NUREG-0619, BWR Feedwater Nozzle and Control [23] NUREG/CR-4667, Environmentally Assisted Crack-
Rod Drive Line Nozzle Cracking, U.S. Nuclear Regula- ing in Light Water Reactors: Annual Report, U.S. Nucle-
tory Commission, Apr. 1980. ar Regulatory Commission, 2005.
[10] NUREG-0313, Technical Report on Material Selection [24] Mitigation by Surface Stress Improvement
and Processing Guidelines for BWR Coolant Pressure (MRP-267, Rev. 1), EPRI 1025839, Electric Power Re-
Boundary Piping, Rev. 2, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Com- search Institute, 2012.
mission, Jan. 1988. [25] NUREG/CR-7030, Atmospheric Stress Corrosion
[11] ASME Code Case N-580-2, Use of Alloy 600 With Co- Cracking Susceptibility of Welded and Unwelded 304,
lumbium Added (Niobium-Modified Nickel- 304L, and 316L Austenitic Stainless Steels Commonly
Chromium-Iron Alloy 600), Section III, Division 1, Used for Dry Cask Storage Containers Exposed to Mar-
ASME, 2008. ine Environments, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commis-
[12] “Stress Corrosion Cracking of Nickel-Base Alloy sion, 2010.
Weldments,” presentation to Commission IX Interna- [26] Determination of Susceptibility of Alloy 718 to Inter-
tional Institute of Welding Annual Assembly, Nickel De- granular Stress Corrosion Cracking, EPRI TR-103290,
velopment Institute, NiDI Reprint Series No. 14017, Electric Power Research Institute, 1994.
Montreal, 1990. [27] De Curieres, I., Meunier, M.-C., and Joly, P. “Residual
[13] Materials Reliability Program: Resistance of Alloys Life Assessment of Steam Generators With Alloy
690, 52 and 152 to Primary Water Stress Corrosion 600TT Tubing: Methods and Application,” Journal of En-
Cracking (MRP-237, Rev. 1): Summary of Findings from gineering for Gas Turbines and Power, Vol. 132, No. 10,
Completed and Ongoing Test Programs Since 2004, 102902, Oct. 2010.
EPRI 1018130, Electric Power Research Institute, 2008. [28] Gooch, J. G. “Corrosion of Austenitic Stainless Steel
[14] Materials Reliability Program: Resistance to Primary Under Hot Coastal Conditions,” The Welding Institute
Water Stress Corrosion Cracking of Alloy 690 in Pres- Research Bulletin, Aug. 1979.
surized Water Reactors (MRP-258), EPRI 1019086, [29] Ray, E. A., Weir, K., Rice, C., and Damico, T. “Mechan-
Electric Power Research Institute, 2009. ical Stress Improvement Process (MSIP) Used to Pre-
vent and Mitigate Primary Water Stress Corrosion
Cracking (PWSCC) in Reactor Vessel Piping at V.C.

465
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Summer,” ASME Pressure Vessels and Piping (PVP) [45] ASTM A262, Standard Practices for Detecting Sus-
Publication, Vol. 468, Aging Management and Compo- ceptibility to Intergranular Attack in Austenitic Stain-
nent Analysis, pp. 113–121, ASME, 2003. less Steels, American Society for Testing and
[30] OE33442 — Preliminary — Unexpected Corrosion of Materials (ASTM) International, 2014.
Inconel 625 Weld Found in AL6XN Seawater Piping
(Millstone 2), http://www.inpo.org/databases/opera-
tingexperience/105138.xml.
[31] Resistance of Alloy 600 and Alloy 690 Tubing to W-2200 GENERAL CORROSION OR
Stress Corrosion Cracking in Environments With and WASTAGE
Without Lead, EPRI 1009532, Electric Power Research
Institute, 2004. W-2210 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
[32] Quantification of Yield Strength Effects on IGSCC in
Austenitic Stainless Steels and its Implication to IASCC, General corrosion is the thinning or loss (wastage) of a
EPRI 1007380, Electric Power Research Institute, 2002. metal, more or less uniformly over a reasonably large
[33] Evaluation of Fundamental Linkage Among SCC Phe- area, by corrosion in an aggressive environment. General
nomena, EPRI 1007378, Electric Power Research Insti- corrosion is most commonly observed in carbon and low
tute, 2002. alloy steels but does occur in copper-based alloys like
[34] Materials Reliability Program: Suitability of Emer- 90–10 copper–nickel used in heat exchanger tubes and
ging Technologies for Mitigation of PWSCC piping in brackish or saltwater service or the nickel–
(MRP-118), EPRI 1009500, Electric Power Research In- copper alloys (Monels®) used in bolting, valves, and com-
stitute, 2004. ponents in that service. General corrosion occurs because
[35] BWRVIP-130, BWR Vessel and Internals Project, the base metal cannot form an adherent, impervious, pro-
BWR Water Chemistry Guidelines — 2004 Revision, tective oxidized surface layer. Carbon and low alloy steels
EPRI 1008192, Electric Power Research Institute, 2004. form an iron hydroxide surface layer in water that gradu-
[36] Materials Reliability Program: Technical Basis for ally transforms to an iron oxide, either magnetite or he-
Primary Water Stress Corrosion Cracking Mitigation matite, depending on temperature and the amount of
by Surface Stress Improvement (MRP-267), Rev. 1, dissolved oxygen in the water. Both are relatively porous
EPRI 1025839, Electric Power Research Institute, 2012. and provide limited protection from further oxidation of
[37] Materials Reliability Program: Resistance of Alloys iron in the aqueous environment. Copper-based alloys
690, 152, and 52 to Primary Water Stress Corrosion form a copper carbonate or copper sulfate corrosion layer
Cracking (MRP-237, Rev. 2): Summary of Findings Be- that provides some protection from further corrosion, but
tween 2008 and 2012 From Completed and Ongoing the general corrosion rate is still significant. Similar semi-
Test Programs, EPRI 3002000190, Electric Power Re- porous oxide layers form on the nickel-copper alloys.
search Institute, 2013. General corrosion is a relatively benign form of corro-
[38] Welding and Repair Technology Center: Measures to sion if the corrosion rate is low under service conditions.
Minimize 52M Hot Cracking on Stainless Steel Base Ma- The relatively high corrosion rate of carbon steel in aera-
terials, EPRI 1025167, Electric Power Research Insti- ted water, such as might be observed in buried carbon
tute, 2012. steel service-water piping, generally requires that the
[39] Welding and Repair Technology Center: Overlay steel be coated to prevent corrosion. In this case, cathodic
Handbook: Part 1, Welding Procedures; Part 2, NDE. protection is often provided in addition to eliminate cor-
EPRI 1025161, Electric Power Research Institute, 2012. rosion reactions in breaks in the exterior coating. For
[40] Advanced Nuclear Technology Advanced Light Water other materials or environments, the corrosion rate is
Reactor Utility Requirements Document, Rev. 12, EPRI low enough that general corrosion can be accommodated
3002000507, Electric Power Research Institute, 2013. through a corrosion allowance provided by the design.
[41] NUREG/CR-6923, Expert Panel Report on Proactive This is often used for components that are in a relatively
Materials Degradation Assessment, U.S. Nuclear Regu- noncorrosive environment, such as carbon steel in deaer-
latory Commission, 2007. ated steam condensate, or for components fabricated
[42] ASME Code Case N-740-2, Full Structural Dissimilar from alloys with a low inherent general corrosion rate,
Weld Overlay for Repair or Mitigation of Class 1, 2, such as copper–nickel and nickel–copper alloys in sea-
and 3 Items, Section XI, Division 1, ASME, 2008. water service.
[43] ASME Code Case N-766, Nickel Alloy Reactor Coolant In addition to structural consequences resulting from
Inlay and Onlay for Mitigation of PWR Full Penetration metal losses, other consequences of corrosion must be
Circumferential Welds in Class 1 Items, Section XI, Divi- considered, such as the generation of corrosion products.
sion 1, ASME, 2010. For example, in raw-water systems, iron oxide corrosion
[44] ASME Code Case N-60-6, Material for Core Support products generated in carbon steel piping tend to migrate
Structures, Section III, Division 1, ASME, 2011. and deposit in low-flow areas and can plug small dia-
meter lines in branches.

466
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Corrosion products from the carbon steel condensate Carbon steel containing less than ∼0.2% chromium can
and feedwater system piping and components can result suffer rapid general corrosion under high-velocity flow
in thick deposits in the steam generators. These deposits conditions in pure, deaerated water and two-phase wet
produce crevice conditions on the tubes near the tube- steam. The phenomenon has been observed in conden-
sheet and tube support plates (TSPs) that can lead to tube sate, heater drain, and turbine extraction lines in the
pitting, denting (see W-2410), or SCC. In some systems, steam plant and is called flow-accelerated corrosion or
e.g., the primary coolant system, corrosion products are FAC. Full deoxygenation of pure water increases the rate
continuously removed by a cleanup system. This is done of FAC in plain carbon steels. See W-2800 for a discussion
to limit the buildup of deposits on core heat-transfer of FAC and oxygen controls that stabilize the insoluble he-
and critical pump and valve surfaces, maintain visibility matite film to minimize the FAC rate.
during refueling, and limit radiation levels. The low alloy Main steam and feedwater lines are fabricated from un-
steel reactor vessel, the primary heads in steam genera- clad carbon steel. While the feedwater is deaerated via
tors, the pressurizer, and the carbon steel coolant piping the condenser air ejection system, the oxygen (and perox-
are typically clad with weld-deposited, corrosion- ide) content of BWR steam is considerable because these
resistant stainless steel or nickel-chromium-iron to limit oxidizing species are produced by radiolytic decomposi-
general corrosion rates to values near zero. tion of water in the core. Consequently, the steam in a
BWR cannot really be said to be deaerated. BWR carbon
steel piping design involves the specification of a corro-
W-2220 MATERIALS sion allowance for wall thickness. Actual BWR steam line
W-2221 Carbon and Low Alloy Steel corrosion rates have been found to be significantly below
the design-basis allowable values, since the specified cor-
The free corrosion rate of carbon and low alloy steels in rosion allowance is conservatively based on a linear ex-
aerated water at ambient temperatures is ∼0.004 in./yr trapolation from the (typically higher) short-term
(∼0.1 mm/y). This rate is largely independent of the pH corrosion rates observed in tests. A typical Design Speci-
of the water. It should be noted that, in addition to general fication has a general corrosion allowance of 0.120 in.
corrosion, localized pitting can develop under deposits or (3 mm) for the main steam system.
bacterial mats. In service water systems, a typical general
corrosion allowance of 0.040 in. to 0.120 in. (1 mm to Corrosion of carbon and low alloy steel component ex-
3 mm) is applied for uncoated carbon steel piping to ac- terior surfaces may occur when PWR primary coolant
count for degradation in service (ref. [16]). The localized leaks from components at locations such as gasketed clo-
corrosion rate in the pit bottom, which is deaerated and sures. The inservice inspection plan typically includes lo-
highly acidic, can easily exceed three times the general cating leaks inside the PWR containment, which is
corrosion value (see W-2300). Service water systems inaccessible except during outages. Under normal operat-
are often treated with corrosion-inhibitor chemical addi- ing conditions, the corrosion rate of carbon and low alloy
tions that can reduce the general corrosion rate by a fac- steels would be <0.001 in./yr (<0.025 mm/y) in borated,
tor of 10. Various techniques, including chlorine additions deaerated, primary water (i.e., 2,000 ppm boron or 1.1%
and chemical cleaning, are used to control deposits that boric acid) at 572°F (300°C) (ref. [1]). However, problems
initiate pitting (see W-2300). have occurred in operating plants when borated water
leaks from the PWR reactor-coolant system onto the un-
In high-temperature, deaerated water environments
clad, external (aerated) surfaces of carbon or low alloy
such as those using condensate, feedwater, boiler water,
steel components or piping. The coolant flashes at atmo-
or primary coolant, the long-term free corrosion rate is
spheric pressure, creating highly concentrated deposits of
on the order of 0.001 in./yr (0.025 mm/y) or less. The re-
duction in rate compared with aerated water conditions boric acid (actually semisolid deposits) at the leak site
can be assigned to the lack of oxygen, which, if present, that are alternatively wetted and dried. Substantial wa-
tends to drive the corrosion reaction rate. The low corro- stage is possible within a relatively short time (refs. [1]
sion rate is also due to the presence of a dense, less and [2]). Corrosion rates as high as 1 in./yr (25 mm/y)
permeable oxide film (magnetite) that forms under deaer- have been observed. Highly reliable joint designs, better
ated conditions. The specific corrosion rate is strongly pH cladding details, frequent inspections, and system leak
dependent, and the minimum rate is observed at a pH of collection and monitoring are mitigating measures.
∼10.0. The rate increases rapidly below pH 4.0 and above For raw-water systems, general corrosion is mitigated
pH 12.0, where the magnetite film becomes chemically by coating, clad, or alternate materials, such as high-
unstable. Because of the pH effect, water chemistry addi- molybdenum stainless steels (AL6XN or 254SMO) and
tions are used, in part, to control the pH of the boiler high-density polyethylene (HDPE) pipe. HDPE is not sus-
water and, by chemical carryover with the steam, the ceptible to general corrosion. High-molybdenum stainless
pH of the condensate and feedwater. It is noted that, in steels can handle higher temperatures than can HDPE
general, pitting is not possible under deaerated pipe and are specially designed to prevent pitting in raw-
conditions. water service where common austenitic stainless steels

467
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

are typically not suitable. Other actions, such as the use of alloys are typically used in heat exchanger tubing and pip-
corrosion inhibitors, address the corrosive environment ing applications, while the Monel® alloys are used in forg-
and are discussed in W-2240. ings and fittings. The nickel–copper–aluminum K-Monel®
alloy is used for high-strength bolting and valve stems.
W-2222 Stainless Steel and Nickel– Another alloy, nickel–aluminum bronze, is a high-
Chromium–Iron Alloys strength, copper-based cast material that is sometimes
Iron- and nickel-based alloys containing more than used for heat exchanger tubesheets. The advantage of
∼12% chromium form a very adherent, dense chromium- the high copper content in these alloys is the prevention
rich oxide film in aqueous environments that protects the of microbiologically induced (or influenced) corrosion
base metal. Corrosion-resistant alloys include the iron- (MIC) on exposed surfaces in seawater service. Copper
based austenitic stainless steels (Types 304 and 316, ions are poisonous to invertebrate sea life, especially
XM19, AL6XN, and 254SMO, plus various casting alloys), shellfish like barnacles. The biocide effectiveness of these
the ferritic stainless steels (Types 405 and 430), the mar- alloys is dependent on a small amount of general corro-
tensitic stainless steels (Types 403, 410, 420, and 440), sion that produces copper ions at the surface of the
the precipitation-hardening stainless steels (17-4PH and component.
15-5PH), the age-hardening stainless steels (A286), and The copper–nickels, and, to some extent, Monel®, are
the nickel-based alloys (Alloys 600, 690, X-750, and dependent on the formation of a tight, adherent copper
718). These alloys cover a wide range of mechanical prop- carbonate (freshwater) or copper sulfate (seawater) cor-
erties, fabrication limitations (some are not weldable; rosion layer on exposed surfaces that limits general cor-
many require special heat treatments), and costs, but all rosion. (Monel ® corrosion resistance is aided by the
contain more than 12% chromium and provide a general formation of nickel oxides, as well). The corrosion
corrosion rate close to zero. For example, the corrosion rate of these alloys is very small, < 0.01 mils/yr
rate of Type 304 stainless steel after 1,000 hr of exposure (0.00025 mm/y), in clean seawater containing low sulfide
to 392°F to 662°F (200°C to 350°C) pure water is less levels. However, the corrosion film is made chemically un-
than 0.04 mils/yr (0.1 mm/y), and there is little effect stable in the presence of sulfides, which are commonly
of dissolved oxygen content, pH, or temperature on this observed in polluted waters containing organic matter.
rate. A corrosion allowance for these alloys is unneces- Film degradation can lead to high general corrosion rates,
sary except in very thin sections or in areas of critical tol- pitting, and leaks.
erances. The only environments that are sufficiently In the case of heat exchangers, keeping waterboxes
aggressive to “depassivate” the oxide film on these alloys clean and free of organic matter can help mitigate
and allow significant general corrosion are those with ex- corrosion-film degradation. Sometimes the corrosion film
tremely high or low ECPs, such as boiling concentrated ni- can be restored by the injection of iron sulfate in the cool-
tric acid used in nuclear fuel-reprocessing plants or in ing water, but this is impractical in open cooling systems.
strongly reducing sulfide environments that are found It should be noted that admiralty brass is subject to a de-
in the oil industry. None of these environments are ex- zincification corrosion mechanism in seawater that ap-
pected in nuclear power plant applications. pears to be an internal galvanic effect independent of
While these high-chromium alloys are not susceptible the corrosion film. Further, brass will suffer SCC in water
to general corrosion, they are subject to several local cor- containing ammonia, which is often present in organic de-
rosion vulnerabilities that must be recognized. For exam- cay environments.
ple, the austenitic stainless steels are subject to pitting The copper–nickel alloys, especially 90–10 copper–
and SCC in water containing chlorides, and Alloy 600 is nickel, are sensitive to excess flow velocity, which can
subject to SCC in primary water at elevated temperatures. produce high general corrosion rates even in aerated
Martensitic stainless steels have marginal resistance to water conditions. It is desirable to keep water flow velo-
off-nominal chemistry conditions and can pit or suffer cities below ∼8 ft/sec to ∼9 ft/sec ( ∼2.4 m/s to
SCC in oxygenated water. ∼2.7 m/s) to obtain acceptable general corrosion rates.
Experience has shown that the presence of copper-rich
W-2223 Brass, Copper–Nickel, and deposits on BWR fuel can lead to nodular corrosion of fuel
Nickel–Copper Alloys cladding and fuel failures. The phenomenon is called
Copper-containing alloys are often used for piping, copper-induced localized corrosion (CILC). The copper
components, and heat exchanger tubing in raw-water ser- source was observed to be the brass tubes in the conden-
vice, especially seawater or brackish water service. The ser, which were providing copper ions to the core via gen-
alloys of interest include admiralty brass (a copper–zinc eral corrosion on the steam side. It was found that the
alloy), 90–10 copper–nickel (90% copper, 10% nickel), plants with brass condenser tubes also had very low
70–30 copper–nickel (70% copper, 30% nickel), 70–30 recirculation-piping radiation levels. It appeared that
nickel–copper (Monel® 400, 70% nickel, 30% copper), the zinc ions produced by the brass tubes were displacing
and nickel–copper–aluminum (K-Monel®, 63% nickel, cobalt-60 ions in the corrosion film of the recirculation-
30% copper, 3% aluminum). The brass and copper–nickel system piping, making the ions available to the cleanup

468
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

system for removal. This discovery ultimately led to the (k) Design for layup that avoids oxygen-rich and stag-
development of batch and online zinc injections in BWRs nant environments (e.g., provide for drainage, nitrogen
to control radiation levels. blanketing, or recirculation).
While first- and second-generation nuclear power (l) Use oxygen scavenging or corrosion inhibitor chem-
plants in the United States often used brass or copper– ical addition.
nickel condenser tubes, the increased pollution over the Cathodic protection (CP) is generally required for pro-
years has led to condenser and heat exchanger tube leaks, tecting the bottom exterior of outdoor tanks (refs. [10]
which has forced many plants to retube the condenser through [12]), heat exchanger channels in raw cooling
with more corrosion-resistant materials, such as titanium water service, and buried carbon steel piping. CP is typi-
or high-molybdenum stainless steels. In addition, the use cally accompanied by an epoxy or other coating system
of copper alloys for condensers and other secondary- (refs. [7], [16], and [25]). It is customary to design sacri-
system heat exchanger tubes in PWRs has been found ficial anodes sized to provide adequate current density to
to contribute to problems such as pitting and denting in protect a surface area equal to up to 20% of the bare steel
steam generators, which has also led to the gradual elim- surface or to use impressed-current CP.
ination of copper alloy tubing from PWR secondary- The present trend in establishing an effective level of
system heat exchangers. Future plants sited on the coast external (buried) metallic surface corrosion control is
or on estuaries will have to be designed to handle still the application of a barrier coating or adhesive on the me-
higher levels of pollution than seen today, and use of high- tallic surface prior to the application of a thermal insulat-
copper alloys in PWR secondary systems is ruled out by ing material. Experience has shown that CP cannot supply
water chemistry guidelines. High-copper alloys may still enough current to protect bare or ineffectively coated me-
be used in other raw-water service, such as service water tallic surfaces under thermal insulation (ref. [6]).
systems subject to the problems and limitations discussed
in this section. Replacement alloys will include the high-
molybdenum stainless steels, HDPE, and titanium. Of W-2240 MITIGATING ACTIONS (ENVIRONMENT)
course, this means removal of the copper ions needed Mitigation of general pitting and crevice corrosion can
for sea life control. It is expected that additional efforts be achieved, at least in part, by reducing the aggressive-
to control sea life deposits will be required, possibly in- ness of the environment. Examples of mitigating actions
volving the use of biocides and frequent cleanings. for general corrosion include water chemistry controls
and the use of chlorine as hypochlorite solution to control
W-2230 DESIGN MIC and other microorganisms.
The effects of general corrosion are taken into account In closed (deaerated) systems, the primary purpose of
in the design basis with the addition of a corrosion allow- water chemistry controls is to control pH, ECP/oxygen,
ance to t m i n to account for the loss of material over the and aggressive impurities. In the primary loop of PWRs,
component service life. General corrosion can cause plug- pH is controlled through the use of ammonium or lithium
ging, leaks, or ruptures in tubes, pipes, and other relative- hydroxide additions, and oxygen is controlled by the use
ly thin sections. The reduction of cross-sectional area may of dissolved hydrogen. During refueling when the primary
lead to failure. Metal removal from valve seats may cause loop is open, oxygen is controlled through the use of hy-
leakage, and buildup of corrosion products and turbidity drazine additions. In the steam plant of PWRs, pH is con-
can lead to system flow and maintenance problems. trolled by the use of amines such as ethanolamine (ETA).
The designer can minimize the general corrosion po- Both of these increase pH and carry over with the steam
tential through the following actions (refs. [1] through to increase the condensate pH as well. In PWR steam gen-
[3]; see also W-2800): erators, sodium, chlorides, and sulfates have caused prob-
(a) Avoid crevices. lems and need to be controlled.
(b) Design tanks for easy drainage. When the steam plant is opened for maintenance, por-
(c) Design systems for cleaning and replacement of cri- tions of the system can be drained and dried with warm,
tical parts. dry air to limit corrosion. Oxygen is controlled through
(d) Avoid dissimilar metals and electrical contact be- the use of hydrazine during operation and wet layup.
tween them (galvanic cells). Proper chemistry controls in the steam plant can limit
(e) Apply cladding. iron levels in the feedwater to values less than 1 ppb,
(f) Apply coating(s). which dramatically reduces the rate of sludge input to
(g) Install galvanic protection or cathodic protection. the steam generators.
(h) Avoid excessive fluid velocities [less than 20-ft/sec In other closed-loop cooling systems, corrosion inhibi-
(6.1-m/s) bulk flow for carbon steels, and 8-ft/sec tors such as filming amines, nitrates, or molybdates are
(2.4-m/s) for 90–10 copper–nickel] and stagnant legs. used to control corrosion rates in carbon steels. Oxygen
(i) Use alternate materials such as HDPE. is controlled through the use of hydrazine. In open cool-
(j) Precondition or passivate the system to build up a ing systems, general corrosion is often controlled through
protective oxide layer. the use of corrosion inhibitors such as molybdates.

469
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Removal of the excessive buildup of corrosion products [15] Cathodic Protection System Application and Mainte-
is often required to prevent crevice corrosion and pitting nance Guide, EPRI 1011905, Electric Power Research
and improve heat transfer in heat exchangers. This can be Institute, 2005.
accomplished by mechanical means, such as water lan- [16] Service Water Piping Guideline, EPRI 1010059, Elec-
cing or brushing or by chemical cleaning. tric Power Research Institute, 2005.
BWR reactor-coolant chemistry controls are mostly in-
tended to mitigate IGSCC, not general corrosion. The high-
er oxygen levels that carry over with the steam actually W-2300 PITTING CORROSION
help reduce FAC in the carbon steel condensate and feed
systems. There is no reactor-coolant pH control in BWRs. W-2310 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Pitting corrosion is a form of localized attack, with cor-
W-2250 REFERENCES rosion limited to specific locations on the metallic surface.
[1] NUREG/CR-6875, Boric Acid Corrosion of Light Water The “holes” or pits that result can cause localized perfora-
Reactor Pressure Vessel Materials, U.S. Nuclear Regula- tions in thin-walled tubes or significant local loss of wall
tory Commission, 2005. thickness in components and pipes.
[2] NRC Generic Letter 97-001, Degradation of Control Pitting requires the presence of a susceptible material
Rod Drive Mechanism Nozzle and Other Vessel Closure and a water environment containing oxygen or other oxi-
Head Penetrations, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commis- dizing species, such as nitrates or cupric ions. Pitting cor-
sion, 1997. rosion is influenced by many different parameters,
[3] Materials Reliability Program, Reactor Vessel Head including the oxidizing species and concentration, tem-
Boric Acid Corrosion Testing: Task 3 — Separate Ef- perature, metal surface condition, and the presence of de-
fects Testing (MRP-165), EPRI 1011807, Electric Power posits. Pitting is also aggravated by the presence of
Research Institute, 2005. chlorides, since these cause very low pH levels in the bot-
[4] Welding on Materials Exposed to Boric Acid, EPRI tom of the pits, making pit growth self-propagating (auto-
1006800, Electric Power Research Institute, 2003. catalytic) and rapid (refs. [1] through [4]).
[5] NUREG/CR-6837, The Battelle Integrity of Nuclear
Piping (BINP) Program Final Report, U.S. Nuclear Reg- W-2320 MATERIALS
ulatory Commission, 2005.
Historically, pitting has been observed in power plants
[6] NUREG/CR-6876, Risk-Informed Assessment of De-
in the following general contexts:
graded Buried Piping Systems in Nuclear Power Plants,
U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, 2005. (a) internal and external pitting of carbon steel piping
[7] AWWA M58, Internal Corrosion Control in Water Dis- in raw-water service (Class 3 component cooling and con-
tribution Systems, American Water Works Association, tainment cooling systems)
2011. (b) pitting in copper–nickel and stainless steel heat ex-
[8] L. N. Moskvin, et al. “Material Analysis of Steel Corro- changer tubing on the internal (raw water) side
sion Products in Water Coolants of Thermal and Nucle- (c) pitting in BWR and PWR carbon steel containment
ar Power Plants,” Journal of Analytical Chemistry, Vol. liners and BWR carbon steel suppression chamber shells
60, No. 12, pp. 1166–1172, 2005. (torus shells)
[9] Guideline on Nuclear Safety-Related Coatings, Rev. 2 (d) secondary side pitting in Ni–Cr–Fe Alloy 600 steam
(formerly TR-109937 and 1003102), EPRI 1019157, generator tubing
Electric Power Research Institute, 2009. Pitting is commonly observed in carbon steel piping
[10] NACE SP0196, Galvanic Anode Cathodic Protection of and components in raw-water cooling systems. All the ne-
Internal Submerged Surfaces of Steel Water Storage gative factors affecting pitting exist in these systems: sus-
Tanks, NACE International, 2011. ceptible material (carbon steel), oxygen in the water,
[11] AWWA D106, Sacrificial Anode Cathodic Protection chlorides (usually) and deposits, and both silt deposits
Systems for the Interior Submerged Surfaces of Steel and biofilms (MIC). In systems with severe pitting prob-
Water Storage Tanks, American Water Works Associa- lems that cannot be solved through the use of coatings
tion, 2010. or water treatment, changing the carbon steel piping to
[12] API RP 651, Cathodic Protection of Above Ground a 6% molybdenum stainless steel (6% Mo stainless steel)
Petroleum Storage Tanks, American Petroleum Insti- or to HDPE in Class 3 systems may be required.
tute, 2007. Carbon steel containment liners in PWRs and carbon
[13] API 1631, Cathodic Protection of Underground Pet- steel containment shells in BWRs have exhibited pitting
roleum Storage Tanks and Piping Systems, American in areas wetted by leakage of reactor coolant, often at
Petroleum Institute, 1996. low points in containment. In one case, exterior pitting
[14] NACE 10A392, Effectiveness of Cathodic Protection and wastage have been observed in the containment shell
on Thermally Insulated Underground Metallic Struc- at a BWR due to leakage from fuel-pool cavity seals onto
tures, NACE International, 2006. the exterior of the containment. BWR suppression pools

470
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

are always wetted, and extensive pitting has been ob- and, for this reason, the designer should avoid the use
served in torus shells near the pool waterline and of copper alloys in the condenser and condensate and
elsewhere. feed systems in new designs.
Austenitic stainless steels that are used in raw-water
systems in applications like heat exchanger tubes and pip- W-2330 DESIGN
ing are also subject to pitting attack. The performance of Basic system design decisions directly impact the po-
the stainless steels is very sensitive to temperature and tential for pitting in piping and components. For example,
chloride levels. It has been found that the molybdenum while the use of carbon steel for the piping of an open
content of the alloy is directly related to pitting resis- cooling system would be a poor choice, carbon steel in a
tance. Plain Type 304 stainless steel, which contains no closed-system cycle where corrosion inhibitors and bio-
molybdenum, has poor pitting corrosion resistance in am- cides could be economically applied may work. Certainly,
bient temperature surface waters containing chlorides at carbon steel could be used in a completely closed system,
levels that exceed ∼100 ppm. Type 316 stainless steel, since then water impurities and oxygen could be elimi-
containing ∼2.5% molybdenum, is more pitting resistant nated, thus precluding pitting.
but still not sufficiently resistant to perform reliably in Materials choices for open cooling systems are limited
surface waters at heat exchanger tubing temperatures to the more pitting-resistant alloys or the use of coatings
∼120°F (∼49°C). Almost complete pitting resistance in to prevent general corrosion and pitting. Much care
surface waters and even seawater at typical heat exchan- should be taken to ensure heat exchanger tubing is pitting
ger temperatures is achieved by the 6% Mo stainless resistant in the planned environment, since tubes are thin
steels like AL6XN and 254SMO. Titanium is often used and easily perforated by pitting. Titanium tubes are the
for these applications and is common in steam conden- most pitting resistant, and the 6% Mo stainless steels
sers, along with the 6% Mo stainless steels. In very ag- are becoming common for pipe and heat exchanger tubes
gressive, low-pH, chloride-containing environments like in raw-water service. HDPE, which is completely pitting
those in coal plant exhaust stack scrubbers, going to resistant, is now also appearing in Class 3 system service,
9% Mo alloys or to titanium is required to prevent pitting. but general regulatory approval for its use has not been
Standardized pitting corrosion tests used for ranking given.
stainless steel and nickel alloys are defined in the ASTM Coatings have been effectively used on carbon steel
G48 test specification (ref [2]). containment and suppression chamber shells to prevent
Copper–nickel alloys (90–10 and 70–30) were com- general corrosion and pitting. Use of coatings on carbon
monly used at one time for condenser and other raw- steel pipe is common practice on the O.D. surface but is
water heat exchanger tubes. For many years, these alloys not generally recommended for long-term service on
performed adequately in heat exchanger service. But, as the I.D. surface since coatings eventually fail, and internal
discussed in W-2220, these alloys are subject to general coatings are difficult to repair or replace. Use of plastic
corrosion and pitting if sulfides are present in the cooling liners on carbon steel piping may be effective for the long
water. Sulfides are becoming more and more common in term but may not be acceptable in safety system piping
surface waters because of pollution, and the performance since liner delamination could lead to system blockage.
of the admiralty brass and copper–nickel alloys has de- The following design measures should also be consid-
graded significantly over the years. It is common practice ered to mitigate pitting:
now to replace these alloys with titanium or 6% Mo stain- (a) Avoid dead-leg, crevice, stagnant, and alternate wet-
less steels. New designs specify the more corrosion- ting and drying conditions.
resistant alloys in the first place. (b) Avoid low- or intermittent-flow conditions in small
The secondary side of the steam generator is a very lines. Continuous rapid flow is best, since this precludes
special environment. It is the sink for the various chemi- the formation of biofilms.
cal impurities that enter the steam generator via the feed- (c) Avoid rough surface finishes.
water. There they concentrate under boiling conditions (d) Where ordinary carbon steel is suitable, adding
and form iron oxide sludge piles and films on tube sur- ∼0.30 wt. % copper or using high-strength low alloy steel
faces. In the past, copper (cupric) ions from copper–nickel should reduce the pitting potential.
and brass feedwater heater and condenser tubes concen- (e) Ensure that 300-series stainless steels are procured
trated in the surface films to produce highly oxidizing with low allowable sulfur levels to reduce the amount of
conditions on the tube surface, which then led to exten- manganese sulfide inclusions in the alloy. These are sites
sive pitting of the Ni–Cr–Fe Alloy 600 tubes. Most copper for pit initiation.
alloy heat exchanger tubing in the condenser and conden- (f) Avoid the use of sensitized stainless steels in service
sate and feed systems has since been replaced with subject to pitting. This is best accomplished by using low
300-series austenitic stainless steel, titanium, or 6% Mo carbon grades, e.g., Type 316L instead of Type 316. Sensi-
stainless steel tubing. Alloy 690 is not significantly more tization dramatically reduces the resistance of stainless
resistant to this form of attack than the older Alloy 600, steels to pitting.

471
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

W-2340 MITIGATING ACTIONS contains even low levels of chlorides, negatively charged
chloride ions preferentially diffuse into the crevice to neu-
The main mitigation method for control of pitting is the
tralize the positive metal ion charge. This occurs because
use of the proper material for the service conditions, as
chloride ions have higher diffusive mobility in water than
discussed in W-2320. Other mitigating methods address
hydroxide ions. The chlorides concentrate in the crevice,
environmental conditions, including removal of oxygen
producing very acidic conditions that further accelerate
and chlorides, reduction in temperature, and use of hy-
corrosion within the crevice (refs. [1] and [2]). There
drazine during wet layup or use of dry layup during main-
are sufficient chloride levels even in tap water to produce
tenance periods. In addition, periodic cleaning for deposit
low pH levels in crevices and rapid crevice corrosion.
and sludge removal in stagnant lines can reduce the po-
tential for pitting. Classic crevice corrosion is observed in both carbon
steels and stainless steels in raw-water service. Typical
W-2350 REFERENCES crevices are poorly designed sleeves or liners or those
that form on surfaces adjacent to gaskets. The crevices
[1] Korb, L. J. Metals Handbook, Ninth Ed., Vol. 13, “Corro- created by weld backing rings are particularly bad, and
sion,” American Society for Metals (ASM) International, backing rings should not be used in piping in corrosive
1987. service.
[2] ASTM G48-11, Standard Test Methods for Pitting and There is a second form of crevice corrosion that is con-
Crevice Corrosion Resistance of Stainless Steels and Re- centration driven rather than electrochemically driven, as
lated Alloys by Use of Ferric Chloride Solution, Ameri- described above. This is boiling crevice corrosion, and it
can Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) does not require the presence of oxidizing species. Boiling
International, 2011. in occluded regions is a mechanism for creating a local-
[3 ] M a t e r i a l s D e g r a d a t i o n M a t r i x , R e v . 3 , E P R I ized aggressive environment in reactor plant components
3002000628, pp. 5–40, Electric Power Research Insti- that occurs on heat transfer surfaces such as steam gen-
tute, 2013. erator tubes, where concentrations of species change
[4] ASTM G32-10, Standard Test Method for Cavitation due to their partition between the aqueous and gaseous
Erosion Using Vibratory Apparatus, American Society (i.e., steam) phases or the evaporation of volatile species.
for Testing and Materials (ASTM) International, 2010. This concentration of acidic, alkaline, or other aggressive
non-OH– anions may be retained under specific geometri-
W-2400 CREVICE CORROSION AND cal conditions that inhibit solution redistribution.
DENTING A classic example of boiling crevice corrosion is the lo-
calized corrosion of carbon steel TSPs with drilled circu-
W-2410 GENERAL DESCRIPTION lar holes in older PWR steam generator designs.
Crevice corrosion is intense, localized corrosion on sur- Corrosion product (magnetite) buildup in the support
faces exposed to a small volume of stagnant solution, i.e., plate/tube crevice puts a compressive radial load on the
inside a crevice. The crevice must be wide enough to per- steam generator tube section in the support. Ultimately,
mit liquid entry and allow ionic diffusion in and out but the magnetite corrosion products become thick enough
narrow enough to maintain deaerated conditions inside to cause denting of the Alloy 600 tubes. Local tube stres-
the crevice. Effective crevices are typically a few thou- ses increase to beyond yield stress levels under these con-
sands of an inch wide [50 μ (1.3 mm)] or less (ref. [1]). ditions, which results in stress corrosion cracking on the
Crevice corrosion is closely related to pitting corrosion, primary and secondary sides of the tubes (ref. [4]).
and crevices can initiate pits in many cases (ref. [3]) as Trefoil- and quadrafoil-shaped holes were developed to
well as lead to SCC (ref. [2]; see the discussion in minimize local stagnation conditions. This and the later
W-2130 on Ni–Cr–Fe Alloy 600 IGSCC in BWRs). use of more corrosion-resistant alloys for support plates
Like pitting corrosion, classic crevice corrosion re- largely eliminated the potential for denting in TSPs.
quires oxidizing species to be present in solution. This For other crevice corrosion topics, see refs. [5] and [7]
is most commonly dissolved oxygen. The crevice, like a through [12].
pit, sets up a polarized corrosion cell with active metal
oxidation inside the crevice (e.g., metallic iron atoms give W-2420 MATERIALS
up electrons to form positively charged ferric ions) and Since classic crevice corrosion is so similar to pitting
the reduction of the oxidizing species on surfaces near, corrosion discussed in W-2300, the relevant materials
but outside, the crevice (e.g., oxygen combines with the discussion is the same. The presence of crevices increases
electrons released by the corroding metal atoms in the the potential for local corrosion beyond even that for pit-
crevice to produce negatively charged hydroxide ions). ting, i.e., the required molybdenum content in the austeni-
In pure water, the negatively charged hydroxide ions tic stainless steels is higher, and the sensitivity to
eventually diffuse into the crevice to neutralize the posi- temperature and chlorides is also higher. Test specifica-
tive charge of the metallic ions, maintaining overall tion ASTM G48 includes tests for sensitivity to crevice
charge neutrality. But, and this is important, if the water corrosion in the stainless steels and nickel-based alloys,

472
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

and, once test temperatures are established for the appli- W-2450 REFERENCES
cation, ASTM G48 can be used for acceptance testing for [1] “LWR Structural Materials Degradation Mechanisms
procurement. This may be required, for example, in cases — Preliminary Assessment of BWR Intervals Life Limit-
where crevices cannot be avoided, like near gaskets. The ing Concerns,” Structural Integrity Associates Draft Re-
6% Mo stainless steels and titanium have been found to port, EPRI RP2643-5, Electric Power Research Institute,
be resistant to crevice corrosion in raw-water service, Feb. 1986.
as they are to pitting. [2] Uhlig, H. H. Corrosion and Corrosion Control, Wiley &
For carbon steels in raw-water service, crevices must Sons, Inc., 2008.
simply be avoided. Weld backing rings should not be [3] Green, S. J., and Paine, J. P. N. “Steam Generator Mate-
used, and if they are, they should be removed after the rials — Experience and Prognosis,” International Sym-
welds are made. posium on Environmental Degradation of Materials in
Boiling crevice corrosion is less well studied than clas- Nuclear Power Systems Water Reactor, NACE, AIME,
sic crevice corrosion. Experience in PWR steam genera- ANS, Myrtle Beach, SC, Aug. 22–25, 1983.
tors has shown that support plates fabricated from [4] Syrett, B. C., and Coit, R. L. “Materials Degradation in
annealed ferritic (Type 405) and annealed martensitic Condensers and Feedwater Heaters,” International
(Type 403) stainless steels have sufficient corrosion resis- Symposium on Environmental Degradation of Materials
tance to prevent tube denting at support plates. in Nuclear Power Systems Water Reactor, NACE, AIME,
ANS, Myrtle Beach, SC, Aug. 22–25, 1983.
W-2430 DESIGN [5] Syrett, B. C. “Prevention of Condenser Failures — The
State of the Art,” EPRI RD-2282-SR, Electric Power Re-
Design measures to minimize crevice corrosion and search Institute, Mar. 1982.
denting include the following: [6] Copeland, J. F., and Giannuzzi, A. J. “Long-Term Integ-
(a) Design to avoid stagnant areas and for complete rity of Nuclear Power Plant Components,” EPRI Techni-
draining or recirculating-type layup. cal Report NP-3673-LD, Electric Power Research
(b) Use butt welds instead of socket welds. Institute, Oct. 1984.
(c) Avoid fillet welds that create a wetted crevice. [7] Diercks, D. R., Shack, W. J., and Muscara, J. “Overview of
(d) Avoid the use of weld backing rings. Steam Generator Tube Degradation and Integrity Is-
sues,” Nuclear Engineering and Design, Vol. 194, No. 1,
(e) Avoid the use of sleeves or liners that can form a
pp. 19–30, Nov. 1999.
tight crevice.
[8] Crevice Corrosion of Support Alloys in the Secondary
(f) Consider the use of welded instead of rolled-in Environments of Nuclear Steam Generators — Supple-
tubes in heat exchanger tubesheets (standard practice mental Report, EPRI NP-5017, Electric Power Research
in steam generators). Institute, 1987.
(g) Use minimum contact area between tubes and sup- [9] NUREG/CR-6879, Steam Generator Tube Integrity Is-
port plates. sues: Pressurization Rate Effects, Failure Maps, Leak
(h) Reduce operating temperatures, where possible. Rate Correlation Models, and Leak Rates in Restricted
(i) Maintain velocities of ∼4 ft/sec (∼1.2 m/s) or Areas, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, 2009.
greater. [10] NUREG/CR-6924, Non-Destructive and Failure Eva-
(j) Redesign safe-ends and thermal sleeves. luation of Tubing From a Retired Steam Generator,
U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, 2007.
[11] Schumerth, D. J. “Titanium Power Plant Surface Con-
W-2440 MITIGATING ACTIONS denser Tubing: 40 Years and 600 Million Feet Later,”
Mitigating actions include the following: Energy-Tech Magazine, June 2011.
(a) Flush and dry systems for controlled layup and ex- [12] Proceedings of the USNRC/EPRI/ANL Heated Crevice
tended outages. Seminar, EPRI 1009355, Office of Nuclear Regulatory
Research, Washington, D.C., and Argonne National Lab-
(b) Use heat and biocide programs to minimize slime,
oratory, Argonne, IL, 2004.
algae, bacteria, and marine growth that can form “natural”
crevices on metal surfaces.
(c) Use hydrazine or other methods to control oxygen W-2500 INTERGRANULAR CORROSION
levels during wet layup or operation.
ATTACK
(d) Maintain effective water chemistry controls,
including W-2510 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
(1) for PWRs: pH control agents for secondary water, Intergranular corrosion attack (IGA) is localized corro-
oxygen scavengers, and PWR primary hydrogen addition sion at or adjacent to grain boundaries in a corrosive en-
(2) for BWRs: hydrogen water chemistry (HWC) and vironment. It is caused by impurities in the grain
noble metal addition chemistry (NMAC) boundaries or by the enrichment or depletion of alloying

473
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

elements at grain boundaries (e.g., depletion of chromium or low carbon grades should be used when field welding
at austenitic stainless steel grain boundaries). When the is required or when shop welding without postweld solu-
grain boundary layer is anodic to the grains, the layer is tion annealing is anticipated.
preferentially attacked; when the layer is cathodic to
the grains, a narrow layer around the grains is attacked,
producing the same effective result. W-2522 Aluminum Alloys
IGA is very similar to IGSCC (see W-2100), except in Section II, Part D allows for the use of some aluminum
IGA, there is widespread grain boundary attack and grain alloys. Of particular concern are the 5000 series of alumi-
dropout, with no single crack. IGA often occurs under sim- num alloys that are allowed for Class 3 construction and
ilar conditions as SCC but without residual stresses being are known to be susceptible to IGA if continuous bands
present. This attack can lead to a significant loss of of Mg2Al3 develop in the alloy during processing (ref. [1]).
strength and ductility, leading to failure. A microstructure
highly susceptible to IGA is also likely to be susceptible to
IGSCC if high tensile stresses are applied. IGA in many W-2523 Nickel Alloys
cases occurs at tubes and tubesheets, safe-ends, thermal Alloy 600 has experienced IGA and IGSCC in PWR steam
sleeves, and crevices formed at pipe welds by incomplete generators. This has mostly occurred in steam generator
penetration. See ref. [1] for tests and practices that mea- designs where the tubing was in place during component
sure atmospheric corrosion, SCC, corrosion fatigue, and PWHT and subject to the PWHT temperature, or where
corrosion in natural waters and soil and in plant system the tubing was slow cooled after the solution anneal at
environments. the tube mill, which caused some amount of sensitization.
IGA appeared on the secondary side of tubes in crevices
and on free spans of tubes without crevices. Certain re-
W-2520 MATERIALS
duced sulfur contaminants and chlorides in secondary
W-2521 Stainless Steels water have been associated with IGA in Alloy 600.
A “sensitized” austenitic stainless steel microstructure Alloy 600 components in PWRs are being replaced by
is susceptible to IGA and IGSCC. This occurs when auste- Alloy 690. Alloy 690 is improved over Alloy 600 but is still
nitic stainless steels are heated into, or slow-cooled subject to IGA and IGSCC in sulfate-contaminated second-
through, the temperature range of ∼750°F to ∼1,500°F ary waters. Careful attention to secondary-water chemis-
(∼400°C to ∼815°C). Chromium carbides can be formed, try controls will continue to be required to prevent IGA
thus depleting the grain boundaries of chromium and de- and IGSCC in secondary-water environments.
creasing their corrosion resistance. Sensitization is often
associated with welding or subjecting stainless steel to
a component PWHT in the 1,100°F (593°C) temperature W-2530 DESIGN
range. See W-2100.
Higher carbon (∼0.04 wt. % C or above) austenitic
stainless steels have shown IGA and IGSCC when in a sus-
ceptible condition and exposed to an aggressive environ- W-2540 MITIGATING ACTIONS
ment. During welding, some areas adjacent to the weld The key to avoiding IGA in the stainless steels and
are likely to reach a temperature high and long enough nickel-based alloys is to avoid sensitization during com-
to form chromium carbides. Heat treatment above ponent manufacturing and installation and to avoid con-
1,800°F (982°C) (annealing) to redissolve the carbides taminating species, especially sulfates and reduced
and then rapid cooling to below 1,000°F (538°C) will re- sulfur species, in the water environment during opera-
move the sensitized condition. tion. Consequently, actions to reduce IGSCC apply equally
Low carbon grades (such as Types 304L and 316L) do well for the prevention of IGA, i.e., low-carbon or stabi-
not have enough carbon to easily form sufficient carbides lized grades of stainless steel should be used, along with
to cause sensitization. These grades are resistant to sensi- low-heat input welding. Component postweld heat treat-
tization during welding. ment should not be performed with critical stainless steel
Types 321 and 347 stainless steels are “stabilized” or nickel-based alloy parts subject to the PWHT
grades containing deliberate additions of titanium and temperatures.
niobium, respectively. These elements form extremely Water chemistry should be controlled in all cases for
stable carbide precipitates that can be induced during material processing, hydrostatic tests, and operation,
product manufacture by heating to elevated temperatures with the goal of controlling contaminants. Components
in the range of 1,600°F (871°C). Once stabilized by the stored or used near the seacoast should be protected
heat treatment, there is little free carbon left to produce from the salt environment or washed frequently, since
chromium carbides during later fabrication and welding airborne chlorides can cause serious IGA in sensitized
steps, thus preventing sensitization. The stabilized alloys components.

474
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

W-2550 REFERENCES MIC pitting attack on common austenitic stainless

[1] Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol. 03.02, “Corrosion steels is fast and can penetrate 0.200 in. (5 mm) in
of Metals,” American Society for Testing and Materials 2 months. The 300-series stainless steels should not be
(ASTM) International, 2012. used for construction of components or systems that sup-
[2] Smith, A. J., et al. “Thermal Treatment, Grain Boundary port MIC bacteria during normal operation.
Composition and Intergranular Attack Resistance of Al- MIC in carbon steel piping and components appears to
loy 690” in the Proceedings of the Fifth International be a result of organic, crevice-induced pitting under MIC
Symposium on Environmental Degradation of Materials deposits. Large, open-mouthed pits are often observed
in Nuclear Power Systems — Water Reactors, p. 855, beneath MIC nodules on the piping surface. There is no
American Nuclear Society, 1991. evidence that any biological chemistry is involved in the
[3] West, E. A., and Was, G. S. “IGSCC of Grain Boundary pitting; the bacterial mat appears to simply create the cre-
Engineered 316 L and 690 in Supercritical Water,” Jour- vice conditions required for pitting. Pit growth on the or-
nal of Nuclear Materials, Vol. 392, No. 2, pp 264–271, der of 0.025 in./yr (0.635 mm/y) has been observed in
2009. carbon steel piping.
[4] NUREG-0313, Technical Report on Material Selection There are bacteria that form ammonia (NH3), which
and Processing Guidelines for BWR Coolant Pressure can cause stress corrosion cracking in admiralty brass
Boundary Piping, Rev. 2, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Com- heat exchanger tubes.
mission, Jan. 1988. Equipment is particularly vulnerable in the time period
[5] Syrett, B. C. “Prevention of Condenser Failures — The between the system or component hydrostatic test and
State of the Art,” EPRI RD-2282-SR, Electric Power Re- operation. In addition, materials may be vulnerable in
search Institute, 1982. the entire construction phase and all layup periods. Some
systems, such as service water systems and tanks for
standby-type systems, are susceptible throughout plant
W-2600 MIC AND FOULING life. Typical treatments include mechanical cleaning, use
of biocides, additions to increase pH to >10 or 10.5, or
W-2610 DESCRIPTION AND EXPERIENCE procedural controls (periodic flow). Methods of detection
MIC is corrosion associated with the presence of var- include monitoring of plant parameters (e.g., service
ious bacteria and other microorganisms that promote lo- water flow and related heat exchanger performance), de-
calized corrosion of mild steels, stainless steels, and tection of small leaks (e.g., during repair activities), mea-
copper- and aluminum-based alloys. MIC generally occurs surement of total organic carbon in water chemistry, or
in stagnant or low-flow-rate untreated water in the tem- visual observation. Routine sampling of process streams
perature range of 50°F to 120°F (10°C to 50°C) and in the for microbial activity is rare and generally ineffective.
pH range of 3 to 10. MIC most often results in pitting, fol- Some systems have side-stream sampling or coupon-
lowed by excessive deposition of corrosion products, monitoring stations that can be used for monitoring (refs.
leakage, and excessive pressure drop and flow blockage. [1] through [5]).
Service water flow rates can be reduced below design
values due to fouling and partial blockage in heat exchan- W-2630 DESIGN
gers. MIC can produce sediment in standby service water The system design should eliminate stagnant areas and
basins. Slime-forming bacteria can produce biofilms, include drain and dry provisions for all pipe runs. The de-
which attract and hold suspended solids contained in sign should include provisions for periodic operation of
the water and reduce the ability of heat exchanger tubes pumps in all lines to ensure at least some periods of rapid
to transfer heat. Clams, mussels, and debris from other flow to unseat biofilms and flush corrosion product de-
shellfish have also been found to cause problems. posits. The piping system configuration should be de-
MIC and fouling are evident in closed- and open-loop signed to avoid deposits and low flow through system
cooling systems. In a closed-loop service water system, flow balancing (ref. [6]). Flush and drain connections
the water chemistry is controlled and may include inhibi- should be included in the design to facilitate routine
tors and biocides. In an open-cycle system, heat is re- cleaning (ref. [6]), including access points for drying
jected directly to a heat sink, and chemical treatments equipment and moisture-monitoring devices. In some
may not be practical. cases, it may be appropriate to reduce flow resistance
(refs. [6] and [7]) in larger diameter pipes. Intake screens
W-2620 MATERIALS of the proper size can also be employed to filter out sus-
pended solids and silt (ref. [7]).
Many materials commonly used in nuclear power
plants are susceptible to MIC. Some exotic materials are
not subject to MIC attack, including titanium, some high W-2640 MITIGATING ACTIONS
Ni–Cr–Mo alloys, Hastelloy C-276TM, other Ni–Cr–Mo al- A MIC control program acceptable to the NRC is de-
loys, and HDPE. scribed in ref. [29].

475
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

A common cause of MIC attack is contaminated hydro- [2] “Biologically Influenced Corrosion” in the Proceedings
static test water or inleakage from open systems. Equip- of the International Conference on Biologically Induced
ment is particularly vulnerable in the time period Corrosion, Gaithersburg, MD, NACE Reference Book No.
between the system or component hydrostatic test and 8, NACE International, June 1985.
operation. The source of water for use on stainless steel [3] Stocker, J. G. “Guide for the Investigation of Microbio-
should be analyzed for MIC bacteria if from a source other logically Induced Corrosion,” Materials Performance,
than clean, treated, or demineralized water. Potable Vol. 23, No. 8, pp. 48–55, 1984.
water chlorination may or may not kill MIC bacteria. It [4] Tatnall, R. E. “Fundamentals of Bacteria Induced Cor-
is recommended that hydrostatically tested systems rosion,” Materials Performance, Vol. 20, No. 9, pp.
should be blown dry or mop dried to a bone-dry condition 32–38, 1981.
within 5 days after hydrostatic testing. Also, one should [5] Kobrin, G. “Corrosion by Microbiological Organisms in
avoid contamination before and during filling. Do not Natural Waters,” Materials Performance, Vol. 16, No. 7,
use contaminated holding vessels, and do not allow exter- pp. 38–42, 1976.
nal contamination of components during handling, stor- [6] Lucina, G. J. “Sourcebook for Microbiologically Influ-
age, construction, etc. For example, water tanks and enced Corrosion in Nuclear Power Plants,” EPRI
water trucks should be treated with a biocide before NP-5580s, Electric Power Research Institute, 1988.
use. In addition, materials may be vulnerable in the entire [7] “Operating Experience Feedback Report: Service
construction phase and all layup periods (e.g., service W a t e r S y s t e m F a i l u r e s a n d D e g r a d a t i o n s ,”
water flow and related heat exchanger performance NUREG-1275, Vol. 3 (Enclosure 4 to NRC Generic Letter
testing). 89-13), U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, 1989.
Monitoring for MIC commonly involves the detection of [8] “Technical Findings Document for Generic Issue 51:
small leaks (e.g., during repair activities), measurement of Improving the Reliability of Open-Cycle Service-Water
total organic carbon in water chemistry, or visual obser- Systems,” NUREG/CR-5210, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory
vation. Routine sampling of process streams for microbial Commission, 1988.
activity is rare and generally ineffective. Some systems [9] NUREG/CR-5779, Aging of Non-Power-Cycle Heat Ex-
have side-stream sampling or coupon-monitoring sta- changers in Nuclear Power Plants, U.S. Nuclear Regula-
tions that can be used for monitoring (refs. [1] through tory Commission, 1992.
[5]). Flow-monitoring instrumentation and trending in- [10] NACE 46107, Control of Corrosion, Deposition, and
formation are other monitoring actions taken for MIC Microbiological Growth in Recirculating Water Systems
and fouling (ref. [6]). in Buildings, NACE International, 2007.
Water treatment is probably the most common mitigat- [11] NACE/EFC Joint Publication Monitoring and Adjust-
ing step for prevention and treatment of MIC. Biocides ment of Cooling Water Treatment Operating Para-
(chlorine, hypochlorite, ozone, and hydrogen peroxide), meters, NACE International, 2009.
agents to increase the pH of the system to >10 or 10.5, [12] NACE SP0106, Control of Internal Corrosion in Steel
and dispersants to break up deposits on metals are all Pipelines and Piping Systems, NACE International,
used, often in combination. Note that hypochlorite addi- 2006.
tions are often ineffective for removing thick biofilm or [13] NACE SP0169, Control of External Corrosion on Un-
nodular growths. They can also cause pitting problems derground or Submerged Metallic Piping Systems,
in stainless steels since commonly used hypochlorites NACE International, 2007.
are highly oxidizing species. [14] NACE RP0300/ISO 16784-1, Corrosion of Metals and
Mechanical cleaning is generally mandatory to remove Alloys - Corrosion and Fouling in Industrial Cooling
deposits so that the water treatment agent can get to the Water Systems — Part 1: Guidelines for Conducting Pi-
metal surface. Hydrolazing and flushing can be used to re- lot Scale Evaluation of Corrosion and Fouling Control
duce blockage (ref. [6]). Procedural and design controls Additives for Open Recirculating Cooling Water Sys-
to eliminate, or at least minimize, stagnant areas are also tems, NACE International, 2006.
commonly utilized. Valves are adjusted to increase flows [15] NACE TM0106, Detection, Testing, and Evaluation of
in some cases (ref. [6]). Key components are sometimes Microbiologically Influenced Corrosion (MIC) on Exter-
coated with cement or epoxy following thorough cleaning nal Surfaces of Buried Pipelines, NACE International,
to afford protection (ref. [1]). In severe environments, 2006.
coatings may be inadequate to protect against MIC attack. [16] NACE RP0285, Corrosion Control of Underground
Storage Tank Systems by Cathodic Protection, NACE In-
ternational, 2002.
W-2650 REFERENCES [17] Pope, D. H., Soracco, R. J., and Wilde, E. W. “Studies on
[1] A Study of Microbiologically Influenced Corrosion in Biologically Induced Corrosion in Heat Exchanger Sys-
Nuclear Power Plants and a Practical Guide for Coun- tems at the Savannah River Plant, Aiken, SC,” Materials
termeasures, EPRI NP-4582, Electric Power Research Performance, Vol. 21, No. 7, pp. 43–50, 1982.
Institute, 1986.

476
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

[18] Weber, J., and Knopf, K. “Water Treatment and Corro- primary concern in Section XI’s flaw-evaluation proce-
sion Inhibitions in Heat Transfer Systems,” Conference dures. Methods for estimating crack growth rates are giv-
Paper, Ferrara University, Italy, 1985. en in Section XI, Nonmandatory Appendix A.
[19] Little, B. J., Gerchakov, S. M., and Gerchakov, B. J. Both phases of fatigue are affected by environmental
“Method and Apparatus for Measuring Corrosion Cur- conditions that must be accommodated in the design. En-
rent Induced by Microbiological Activities” (Depart- vironmental effects on crack initiation life are covered by
ment of the Navy, Washington, DC), Report: PAT- general safety factors applied to the fatigue design curves.
APPL-7-106 281; Patent-4 789 434, 8p, Dec. 1988. Environmental effects on crack growth rate are explicitly
[20] NUREG/CR-5693, Aging Assessment of Component covered in the crack growth rate curves in Section XI; i.e.,
Cooling Water Systems in Pressurized Water Reactors, there are separate curves for air and water environments.
U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, 1992.
The Section III design basis for establishing the crack
[21] Zimmerman, C. A. “Control of Corrosion in an Aqu-
initiation life is the S–N curve, which relates cyclic stress
eous Nuclear Fuel Storage Basin,” CONF-810402-1,
amplitude to allowable number of cycles. The curve is test
OSTI ID: 6664300, Exxon Nuclear Idaho Co., Inc., 1981.
based. First, cyclic strain-controlled tests are performed
[22] Identification and Testing of Amines for Steam Gen-
to determine a raw strain-range/number-of-cycles data
erator Chemistry and Deposit Control: Part 3, “Qualifi-
set. The tests are normally performed on machined test
cation of Dodecylamine as an Amine Additive for
specimens in air and at ambient temperatures. Real com-
Steam Generator Fouling Mitigation,” EPRI 1011320,
ponents have a rough surface finish and are larger than
Electric Power Research Institute, and Atomic Energy
the test specimens; therefore, surface finish and size ef-
of Canada Ltd., Chalk River, ON, Canada, 2004.
fects must be accounted for. In addition, laboratory tests
[23] “Sulfur-Assisted Corrosion in Nuclear Disposal Sys-
have shown that LWR coolant water can have a detrimen-
tems,” European Federation of Corrosion Publication
tal effect on S–N fatigue properties, and this effect must
No. 59, Institute of Materials, Minerals, and Mining,
also be accommodated. The method chosen by ASME to
2011.
cover these effects is to apply a safety factor of 2 on cyclic
[24] NACE Standard TM0194-2004, Field Monitoring of
stress and 20 on number of cycles to failure to generate
Bacterial Growth in Oil and Gas Systems, NACE Interna-
the formal S–N curve used in the design. (Mean stress ef-
tional, 2004.
fects are covered separately and are not discussed here.)
[25] Bowman, C. F., and Guthrie, P. V. “Corrosion in Carbon
Thus, environmental fatigue effects are covered if the fac-
Steel Service Water Piping,” ASME Pressure Vessel and
tors of safety are sufficient.
Piping Conference, ASME, 1994.
[26] Bowman, C. F., and Bain, W. S. “A New Look at Design To date, there has been no documented instance of a fa-
of Raw Water Piping,” Power Engineering, Aug. 1980. tigue failure in an operating LWR plant where the pri-
[27] Bowman, C. F. “Solving Raw Water Piping Corrosion mary cause of the failure could be ascribed to a
Problems,” Power Engineering, July 1994. reduction in S–N fatigue life due to LWR coolant environ-
[28] Bowman, C. F. “In Situ Cement-Mortar Lining of mental effects. However, since laboratory tests have
Safety-Related Service Water Piping Systems,” Joint shown that a reduction in S–N life can occur under certain
Power Conference, 1994. conditions, the issue is currently being reevaluated for
[29] NRC Generic Letter 89-13, Service Water System new plant design as well as for life extension evaluations
Problems Affecting Safety-Related Equipment, U.S. Nu- in older plants (refs. [1] through [5]). Some of the meth-
clear Regulatory Commission, 1989. ods used to explicitly cover environmental effects involve
the application of an additional factor on calculated fati-
gue usage (fraction of life used).
W-2700 ENVIRONMENTAL EFFECTS ON
FATIGUE-LIFE CRACK INITIATION W-2720 MATERIALS AND CRITICAL
AND GROWTH PARAMETERS
W-2710 DESCRIPTION AND EXPERIENCE Test results show that the magnitude of the environ-
The fatigue behavior of materials under cyclic loading mental effect of LWR coolant water on S–N fatigue life
conditions consists of two parts. The first is the cyclic life is dependent on the combined effects of water chemistry
available prior to the formation of a fatigue crack. The and mechanical parameters. The main water chemistry
second phase of fatigue life is the period during which factors are temperature and dissolved oxygen content
the initiated crack grows. The fatigue life during the crack and possibly water-flow velocity. The principal mechani-
growth phase is determined by the crack growth rate and cal parameters are strain amplitude and strain rate. The
size flaw that can be tolerated. The fatigue design proce- largest environmental effects are observed in tests that
dures of Section III are based on the crack initiation life, have a combination of high temperatures (up to nominal
which is conservative since it precludes the existence of LWR coolant temperatures), high dissolved oxygen con-
a crack. Fatigue crack growth of existing flaws is a tent, large strain amplitude, and low strain rate.

477
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

The test results also indicate that the S–N life of all of For existing designs, refer to applicable Code Cases, and
the commonly used pressure boundary structural materi- consider probabilistic approaches to mitigate the need for
als is reduced to some degree for severe combinations of excessive inspections and tests where applicable and jus-
water chemistry and mechanical parameters. Materials tified (refs. [3] and [4]).
that have been tested include carbon and low alloy steels,
austenitic stainless steels, and high-nickel alloys. Some W-2750 REFERENCES
tests have been performed on carbon and low alloy steel [1] NRC Regulatory Guide 1.207, Guidelines for Evaluat-
welds, and the results indicate no greater or lesser effect ing Fatigue Analyses Incorporating the Life Reduction
than on the base metal for identical test conditions. of Metal Components Due to the Effects of the Light-
Test results for austenitic steels show that severe sen- Water Reactor Environment for New Reactors, U.S. Nu-
sitization increases sensitivity to environmental effects. clear Regulatory Commission, 2007.
There are no definitive results on heat treatment effects [2] NUREG/CR-6909, Rev. 1, Effect of LWR Coolant Envi-
for nickel alloys. Coolant-water flow rate is an additional ronments on the Fatigue Life of Reactor Materials, U.S.
parameter that is believed to be an important factor that Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Mar. 2014.
can affect the magnitude of environmental effect. In the [3] NRC Regulatory Guide 1.175, An Approach for Plant-
case of fatigue crack growth tests, high flow rates have Specific, Risk-Informed Decisionmaking: Inservice
been found to reduce or minimize the environmental ef- Testing, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, 1998.
fect. Test results to validate this effect on S–N fatigue life [4] NRC Regulatory Guide 1.178, An Approach for Plant-
are lacking, but a threshold value derived from fatigue Specific Risk-Informed Decisionmaking for Inservice
crack growth results has been assumed to also apply to Inspection of Piping, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commis-
S–N life. sion, 2003.
A summary of the environmental effects on the fatigue [5] Basis Document for Proposed Updated Reactor Water
life of various plant materials is provided in ref. [2]. Strain Rate Dependent Environmental Fatigue Design
Criteria for Nuclear Facility Components, ASME BPVC
Subgroup on Fatigue Strength, ASME, Oct. 2010.
W-2730 DESIGN [6] O’Donnell, W. J. Proposal to Upgrade Nuclear Fatigue
Analyses of the test results indicate only a moderate en- Design Criteria in ASME B&PV Code, Proposal Number
vironmental reduction in S–N life when a threshold value 14-514 to ASME Standards Technology, LLC, May 5,
for any one of the water chemistry or mechanical para- 2014.
meters is not transgressed. Careful designs that minimize [7] Ware, A. G., Morton, D. K., and Nitzel, M. E. “Application
transients that transgress these threshold values will re- of Environmentally-Corrected Fatigue Curves to Nucle-
duce the environmental effects. The same considerations ar Power Plant Components,” Fatigue and Fracture —
also apply to plant operating conditions. Reference [7] de- 1996-Vol. 1, PVP-Vol. 323, pp. 141–150, ASME, 1996.
scribes the results of applying environmentally adjusted
fatigue curves in the fatigue reevaluations of design tran-
sients in operating plants. It was concluded that when
W-2800 FLOW-ACCELERATED CORROSION
conservative assumptions were removed and the antici- W-2810 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
pated numbers of cycles were used, the cumulative usage
Flow-accelerated corrosion (FAC), or flow-assisted cor-
factor (CUF) could be reduced to below 1.0 for most com-
rosion, describes the loss of wall thickness in carbon steel
ponents using the interim environmentally adjusted fati-
and copper alloys as a result of highly turbulent single- or
gue curves in both older and newer vintage plants.
two-phase flow. Affected areas are often found at or
Reference [1] provides a methodology for incorpora- downstream of geometrical discontinuities or abrupt
tion of environmental effects on fatigue life that is cur- changes in flow direction.
rently acceptable to the NRC. An analysis methodology In nuclear power plants, FAC typically occurs in carbon
that could be implemented in future Section III design steel piping systems containing flowing water or wet
to determine adjustments for LWR environmental effects steam. Affected systems include feedwater, condensate,
has been proposed in ref. [6] and may possibly be consid- extraction steam, and feedwater heater drains. It is some-
ered for Code implementation. times found in copper-based alloys used in condensers
and heat exchangers. The rate of corrosion is influenced
by a complex interaction between a number of variables,
W-2740 MITIGATING ACTIONS
including material composition, temperature, steam qual-
For new designs, select design-basis thermal and pres- ity, pH, oxygen content, fluid velocity, and geometry (refs.
sure transients and each load-cycle or load-set pair on a [2] through [4]).
reasonable basis, appropriate materials, and geometries FAC causes a gradual thinning in a fairly localized area,
to avoid exceeding a threshold for fatigue usage (refs. and the pipe or component sometimes ruptures without
[5] and [6]). warning when the thinned wall is exposed to a pressure

478
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

transient. FAC has resulted in a number of ruptures caus- of the oxide and the rate of the corrosion reaction. The ef-
ing loss of life, injuries, and equipment damage (refs. [5] fects of changes in these parameters are interrelated and
through [8]). not linear. General trends are indicated in the following:
(a) Increasing pH from 7 to 10 decreases the solubility
of the oxide and decreases the rate of FAC. An order of
W-2820 MATERIALS
magnitude decrease in FAC rate was observed when pH
The ability of carbon steel and copper alloys to resist was increased from 8 to 9 in laboratory tests (ref. [10]).
corrosion in aqueous environments is determined largely (b) Increasing oxygen concentration above a threshold
by thickness and continuity of the oxide film on the sur- of ∼20 ppb reduces the rate of FAC. This effect plateaus
face. For carbon steel in pure, deaerated water (e.g., con- above ∼100 ppb. The exact values of the threshold and
densate or wet steam), the film is magnetite, a form of plateaus are temperature and pH dependent. Laboratory
iron oxide. The stability of the protective oxide film is a tests have shown a decrease in the rate of FAC by a factor
strong function of the base metal composition, water of 100 when oxygen concentration is increased from
chemistry (especially oxygen level), and fluid turbulence. 1 ppb to 200 ppb (refs. [4], [9], [11], and [12]).
For example, alloying elements in steel, such as chro- (c) Increasing temperature initially increases and then
mium, copper, and molybdenum, greatly increases the re- decreases the rate of FAC. This is a result of competing in-
sistance of the oxide film. Chromium has the largest effect fluences of increased reaction rates and changes in solu-
on oxide film stability, and even trace levels of chromium, bility and the oxide film structure. The temperature
on the order of 0.1%, can significantly reduce the FAC rate associated with the peak FAC rate is ∼250°F to ∼350°F
(ref. [4]). (∼120°C to ∼175°C) and can vary significantly depending
Commonly used carbon steels such as A106 Gr. B are on whether the environment is single phase (water) or
not normally procured with specified minimum chro- two phase (wet steam) and other parameters (ref. [4]).
mium content. Only carbon and manganese contents are There have been a number of cases of FAC leading to
controlled in the materials specifications for carbon pipe ruptures. These included ruptures in an elbow in a
steels. However, depending on the sources of scrap for single-phase condensate system and ruptures in heater
the melt, a range of inadvertent alloying element levels drain systems and extraction lines carrying wet steam.
could be present in any given heat of material. Examina- FAC may be due to design errors, improper selection of
tion of 38 heats of A106 Gr. B material in one survey re- materials, and unforeseen or poorly controlled operating
vealed a range in chromium concentration of 0.03% to conditions (ref. [22]).
0.28%, with a range of 0.01% to 0.06% for molybdenum
and 0.06% to 0.34% for copper. For this range of compo- W-2840 DESIGN
sitions (ref. [9]), the FAC rate was estimated to differ by a Piping and component geometry, materials, and water
factor of 16. Use of alloy steels with 1% to 2% chromium chemistry should be designed to minimize the potential
rather than plain carbon steel may reduce the FAC rate by for FAC.
a factor of 4 to a factor of 10 or more. (a) Reduce local velocities, and avoid sharp changes in
Stainless steels with 12% or greater chromium content direction, reducers, expanders, tees, and orifices that
are highly resistant to FAC. would cause turbulence and eddy in the flow. Consider
droplet impingement shields.
(b) Use a carbon steel heat or heats with chromium
W-2830 ENVIRONMENT
content >0.15 wt. % in single-phase FAC environments
In stagnant or low-flow oxygenated water environ- (e.g., feedwater and condensate piping). Special chemical
ments, carbon steel will corrode and form an oxide film analyses and selection of heats are required. Alterna-
at the interface between the water and metal. This film tively, use low alloy steel piping with controlled chro-
acts as a protective barrier against further corrosion. As mium content. The P11 or P22 alloys with 1 1/4 % and
the fluid velocity is increased, local turbulent regions 21/4% chromium, respectively, are commonly used for
are created, especially at geometric discontinuities. This FAC prevention.
increases the corrosion rate by increasing the mass trans- (c) Use P22 steel or stainless steels in severe two-phase
fer of soluble corrosion products from the vicinity of the FAC environments.
turbulence. The protective film becomes thinner or is dis- (d) Use stainless steel tubes or titanium rather than ad-
solved, allowing the base material to continue to corrode. miralty brass or copper–nickel alloys in condensers and
In either case, additional base metal is consumed in the heat exchangers.
corrosion process and the material becomes progres- (e) Use amines in PWR secondary systems to better
sively thinner in a highly localized region (ref. [4]). control pH (refs. [9] and [12]) in steam extraction lines
The adherence of the oxide film is influenced by the pH, and the condensate. The amine characteristics will deter-
oxygen level, and temperature of the water, as well as the mine the relative concentrations in the liquid and vapor
material influence previously mentioned. Changes in phases and will influence the pH in various systems
these three variables affect the solubility and structure around the steam cycle. For instance, morpholine has

479
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

better high-temperature and separation characteristics [11] Woolsey, I. S., et al. “The Influence of Oxygen and Hy-
than ammonia. In an extraction line, this would result in drazine on the Erosion-Corrosion Behavior and Elec-
a relative increase in the pH. trochemical Potentials of Carbon Steel Under Boiler
(f) Maintain feedwater oxygen levels in the range of Feedwater Coupling Analysis of Corrosion and Flow
20 ppb to 50 ppb to stabilize the hematite film. This mini- Dynamics Conditions,” Water Chemistry for Nuclear Re-
mizes the corrosion rate and potential for FAC. actor Systems 4, Paper 96, British Nuclear Energy So-
ciety (BNES), London, 1986.
W-2850 MITIGATING ACTIONS [12] Penfold, D., et al. “The Control of Erosion-Corrosion
Periodic inspection of components in susceptible sys- of Mild Steel Using an Oxygen-Ammonia- Hydrazine
tems is essential and effective. A formal ultrasonic testing Dosed Feedwater,” Nuclear Energy, Vol. 25, pp.
program is required that targets the most susceptible 257–266, Oct. 1986.
areas in the steam plant. A FAC-monitoring program is de- [13] Keller, H. “Erosion-Corrosion in Wet Steam Tur-
fined in ref. [22]. A number of predictive models are avail- bines,” VGB Kraftwerkstechnik, Vol. 54, No. 5. pp.
able to assist in the identification of components to be 292–295, 1974.
inspected. However, since it is rare that all information [14] Uchida, S., et al. “Evaluation Methods for Corrosion
is known about every component in a system, care should Damage of Components in Cooling Systems of Nuclear
be used in applying any predictive model. For example, a Power Plants by Coupling Analysis of Corrosion and
sufficient number of locations should be examined to en- Flow Dynamics (III): Evaluation of Wall Thinning Rate
sure that differences in material composition do not mask With the Coupled Model of Static Electrochemical Anal-
a potential problem. ysis and Dynamic Double Oxide Layer Analysis,” Journal
of Nuclear Science and Technology, Vol. 46, No. 1, pp.
W-2860 REFERENCES 31–40, 2009.
[1] Metals Handbook, Vol. 11, “Failure Analysis and Pre- [15] Jo, N. C., and Kang, D. G. “Prediction of the Local Areas
vention,” Ninth Ed., American Society for Metals of CANDU Feeder Pipes Highly Susceptible to Wall
(ASM) International, 1989. Thinning Due to Flow-Accelerated Corrosion,” in the
[2] Keck, R. G., and Griffith, P. “Prediction and Mitigation of 2007 Proceedings of the ASME Pressure Vessels and
Erosion-Corrosive Wear in Secondary Piping Systems Piping Conference — Fluid-Structure Interaction,
of Nuclear Power Plants,” Final Report, NUREG/ PVP-Vol. 4, pp. 579–589, ASME, 2008.
CR-5007, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Sept. [16] Uchida, S., et al. “Evaluation Methods for Corrosion
1987. Damage of Components in Cooling Systems of Nuclear
[3] Wu, P. C. “Erosion/Corrosion Induced Pipe Wall Thin- Power Plants by Coupling Analysis of Corrosion and
ning in U.S. Nuclear Power Plants,” Final Report, Flow Dynamics (II): Evaluation of Corrosive Conditions
NUREG-1344, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, in PWR Secondary Cooling System,” Journal of Nuclear
Apr. 1989. Science and Technology, Vol. 45, No. 12, pp.
[4] Cragnolino, G., Czajkowski, C., and Shack, W. J. “Review 1275–1286, 2008.
of Erosion-Corrosion in Single-Phase Flows,” Final Re- [17] Hasegawa, K., et al. “Wall Thinning Caused by Flow
port, NUREG/CR-5156, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Com- Accelerated Corrosion” in the 2007 Proceedings of
mission, 1988. the ASME Pressure Vessels and Piping Conference —
[5] Partlow, J. G. “Erosion/Corrosion-Induced Pipe Wall Materials and Fabrication, PVP-Vol. 6, p. 757, ASME,
Thinning,” Generic Letter 89-08, U.S. Nuclear Regula- 2008.
tory Commission, May 2, 1989. [18] Ryu, K. H., et al. “Screening Method for Piping Wall
[6] Virginia Power Company, “Surry Unit 2 Reactor Trip Loss by Flow Accelerated Corrosion,” Nuclear Engineer-
and Feedwater Pipe Failure Report,” Rev. 0, Jan. 12, ing and Design, Vol. 238, No. 12, pp. 3263–3268, 2008.
1987. [19] Naitoh, M., et al. “Evaluation Method for Flow Accel-
[7] INPO Significant Operating Experience Report 87-3, erated Corrosion of Components by Corrosion Analysis
“Pipe Failures in High-Energy Systems Due To Ero- Coupled with Flow Dynamics Analysis,” Heat Transfer
sion/Corrosion,” Mar. 20, 1987. Engineering, Vol. 29, No. 8, pp. 712–720, 2008.
[8] Trapp, J. “NRC Region I Augmented Inspection Team [20] Poulson, B. “Predicting Flow Accelerated Corrosion,”
Report,” 50-336/91-81, Dec. 12, 1991. from the 13th International Conference on Environ-
[9] Jonas, O. “Erosion-Corrosion of PWR Feedwater Piping mental Degradation of Materials in Nuclear Power Sys-
Survey of Experience, Design, Water Chemistry, and tems, Vol. 1, pp. 75–90, Canadian Nuclear Society, 2007.
Materials,” Final Report, NUREG/CR-5149, U.S. Nuclear [21] Kim, J. H., et al. “Flow-Accelerated Corrosion Beha-
Regulatory Commission, 1988. vior of SA106 Gr. C Weldment,” Materials and Corrosion,
[10] Bignold, G. J., et al. “Erosion-Corrosion in Nuclear Vol. 54, No. 1, pp. 23–31, 2003.
Steam Generators,” Water Chemistry for Nuclear Reac- [22] Recommendations for an Effective Flow-Accelerated
tor Systems II, Paper I, British Nuclear Energy Society Corrosion Program, NSAC-202L-R3, EPRI 1015425,
(BNES), London, 1980. Electric Power Research Institute, 2007.

480
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

[23] Effect of Redox Conditions on Flow Accelerated Cor- (f) HDPE and other plastics are surprisingly resistant
rosion: Influence of Hydrazine and Oxygen, EPRI to solid particle erosion and commonly used in coal
1002768, Electric Power Research Institute, and Elec- chutes and other abrasive services in power plants.
tricite de France, Moret Sur Loing, France, 2002. In general, some of the strongest and toughest steels,
precipitation-hardened stainless steels and nickel-based
alloys, and cobalt-based materials would be good choices
W-2900 EROSION when erosion conditions are expected. The weaker and
softer materials obviously would be expected to “wear”
W-2910 GENERAL DESCRIPTION faster.
Erosion is the mechanical abrasion by solids suspended
in a turbulent fluid or by cavitation. The eroding “parti- W-2930 ENVIRONMENT
cles” associated with cavitation erosion are small vapor Environment affects corrosion, which can be exacer-
bubbles that appear when flow is extremely turbulent. bated by erosion. Continuous removal of the protective
Bubbles form if the local fluid pressure drops to the ex- oxide film can lead to very high corrosion rates in aggres-
tent that ambient temperatures are below the boiling sive fluid environments. The potential for erosion must be
point. Cavitation erosion damage results from the large characterized considering the following:
pressure spike that results from local bubble collapse (a) water chemistry of the interacting fluid
on surfaces. Cavitation erosion is commonly observed (b) fluid velocity
on the suction side of pump impellers. (c) temperature of the fluid
Erosion can appear as grooves, gullies, waves, and (d) nature of particulate substances that might be pres-
rounded holes (“wire drawing or cutting” of valve parts) ent in the fluid
and usually exhibits a directional pattern that correlates (e) plant operating modes, including layup, start-up
with the direction of flow. The appearance of cavitation testing, and post-maintenance testing, that may differ
damage is similar to pitting. However, the pits are very from those expected during normal operation
small and closely spaced. The surface is usually consider-
ably roughened. Severe cavitation damage can completely W-2940 DESIGN
penetrate component parts.
The design considerations for coping with erosion in-
clude the following:
W-2920 MATERIALS (a) Reduce fluid design velocity.
There are no published lists of materials that are resis- (b) Where cavitation is a concern, reduce the hydrody-
tant to all aspects of erosion or erosion–corrosion. Engi- namic intensity by increasing the radius of the flow path
neering judgment must be used to select materials that or by removing surface discontinuities. Both of these
may be subjected to conditions leading to such damage parameter changes can reduce the probability of
in service. The ASM Metals Handbook (ref. [4]) does have cavitation.
a useful section titled “Damage Resistance of Metals.” (c) When fluids are known to contain particulates, baf-
Some of the more helpful points include the following: fles can be strategically placed to redirect flows to areas
(a) ASTM G32 may be used to screen materials for a less prone to damage or where damage can be better
particular service. tolerated.
(d) Specify erosion- and corrosion-resistant materials.
(b) Various materials properties, such as hardness, true
stress at fracture, strain energy to fracture, work-
hardening rate, and “ultimate resilience,” are some indica-
W-2950 MITIGATION ACTIONS
tors of resistance to erosion damage. The higher these Mitigation actions are included in refs. [12] and [13].
values for a given material, the more it will be able to re- Temporary and non-Code repairs are addressed in ref.
sist erosion. [15].
(c) Thermal treatments that increase toughness will
generally improve erosion resistance. W-2960 REFERENCES
(d) Fine grain size and fine dispersion of hard second- [1] Metals Handbook, Vol. 1, “Properties and Selection:
phase particles both enhance erosion resistance. Iron and Steel,” and Vol. 2, “Properties and Selection:
(e) Reference [4] provides a classification of 22 alloys Nonferrous Alloys and Pure Metals,” Ninth Ed., Ameri-
showing normalized erosion resistance relative to can Society for Materials (ASM) International, 1990.
18Cr–8Ni austenitic stainless steel with a diamond pyra- [2] Van Vleck, L. H. Elements of Materials Science and En-
mid hardness of 170, which is equivalent to a Brinell gineering, Sixth Ed., Prentice Hall, 1989.
hardness of 162 or a tensile strength of 79 ksi [3] Flinn, R. A., and Trojan, P. K. Engineering Materials and
(543 MPa), which is typical for Type 304 stainless steel Their Applications, Fourth Ed., J. Wiley & Sons, Inc.,
commonly used in Code construction. 1995.

481
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

[4] Metals Handbook, Vol. 10, “Failure Analysis and Pre- [10] Simons, J. W. “Managing Feedwater Heater Shell
vention,” Eighth Ed., 1986; ASM Handbook, Vol. 11, Thinning,” 10th International Conference on Nuclear
“Failure Analysis and Prevention,” 2002, American So- Engineering, Proceedings, ICONE, Vol. 1, pp. 71–75,
ciety for Metals (ASM) International. 2002.
[5] Crockett, H. M., and Horowitz, J. S. “Tackling Erosion in [11] Sato, H. “Experience of the Erosion–Corrosion Prob-
Nuclear Piping Systems” in the 2007 Proceedings of the lems in the Main Ring Cooling Water System at the
ASME Pressure Vessels and Piping Conference — Mate- KEK-PS,” in the Proceedings of the 2001 Particle Accel-
rials and Fabrication, PVP Vol. 6, pp. 759–766, ASME, erator Conference, Vol. 2, pp. 1426–1428, Institute of
2008. Electrical and Electronics Engineers, 2001.
[6] Hwang, K. M., et al. A Study on Wall Thinning Causes [12] Recommendations for an Effective Flow-Accelerated
Identified Through Experiment, Numerical Analysis Corrosion Program, EPRI NSAC-202L-R2, Electric
and Ultrasonic Test of Main Feedwater Isolation Valve, Power Research Institute, 1999.
Journal of Nuclear Science and Technology, Vol. 45, No. [13] Erosion/Corrosion in Nuclear Plant Steam Piping:
1, pp. 45–51, 2008. Causes and Inspection Program Guidelines, EPRI
[7] Feyerl, J., et al. “Erosion–Corrosion of Carbon Steels in NP-3944, Electric Power Research Institute, 1985.
a Laboratory: Three-Phase Flow,” Corrosion, Vol. 64, No. [14] Recommendations for Controlling Cavitation, Flash-
2, pp. 175–186, 2008. ing, Liquid Droplet Impingement, and Solid Particle
[8] Lee, C.-K., et al. “Pipe Corrosion Analysis by Time- Erosion in Nuclear Power Plant Piping Systems, EPRI
Frequency Distribution and Ridge Pattern,” SICE-ICASE 1011231, Electric Power Research Institute, 2004.
International Joint Conference, pp. 1570–1573, 2006. [15] NRC Generic Letter 90-05, Guidance for Performing
[9] Ilincev, G., Kárník, D., Paulovic, M., and Doubková, A. Temporary Non-Code Repair of ASME Code Class 1, 2,
“The Impact of the Composition of Structural Steels and 3 Piping, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission,
on Their Corrosion Stability in Liquid Pb–Bi at 500 1990.
and 400°C With Different Oxygen Concentrations,” Jour-
nal of Nuclear Materials, Vol. 335, No. 2 Spec. Issue, pp.
210–216, Nov. 1, 2004.

482
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE W-3000
SUMMARIES OF EMBRITTLEMENT DAMAGE MECHANISMS

W-3100 IRRADIATION-ASSISTED STRESS W-3120 MATERIALS

CORROSION CRACKING (IASCC) IASCC was first observed in Type 302 stainless steel
W-3110 GENERAL DESCRIPTION fuel cladding in the early 1960s and has since been ob-
served in other RVIs (refs. [1] and [9] through [28]).
Irradiation-assisted stress corrosion cracking (IASCC)
Types 304 and 316 stainless steels are extensively used
is an age-related degradation mechanism in materials
in PWR RVI baffle bolts and plates. Type 316 is generally
such as stainless steel and nickel-based alloys that are ex-
regarded as superior in IASCC resistance for fluences be-
posed to neutron radiation, stress, and high-temperature
low 6.7 × 1021 n/cm2 (E > 1 MeV), which may be due to a
water radiolysis (ref. [28], Nonmandatory Appendix B)
higher Ni content of ∼3% (ref. [28]). Type 348
that
(Nb-stabilized material) may reduce RIS and has outper-
(a) changes the dislocation population in the metal lat-
formed Types 304 and 316 in tests; Si and P levels did not
tice, leading to radiation-induced hardening and disloca-
seem to change IASCC test results. Based on fast breeder
tion channeling with stress at very high neutron
experience, Type 316-Ti is a possible replacement materi-
exposures
al (ref. [28], Nonmandatory Appendix B).
(b) changes the local alloy chemistry near point defect
Tests of irradiated weld material (Type 308) have
traps, especially around the grain boundaries; secondary
shown the material to have a toughness of ∼55,000 psi
effects can include precipitation of new phases or destabi-
in. 1/2 (∼60 MPa m 1/2 ) compared with ∼118,000 psi
lization of existing phases
in. 1/2 (∼130 MPa m 1/2 ) for Type 304 stainless steel.
(c) produces transmutation products, including hydro-
The weld material has also been found to have a low tear-
gen and helium
ing modulus and fracture toughness after irradiation (ref.
IASCC differs from classic intergranular stress corro-
[28], Nonmandatory Appendix B). Reference [31] states
sion cracking (IGSCC) (see W-2100) in that irradiation
that the degradation in fracture properties saturates at
has a significant impact on material susceptibility to
a critical stress intensity factor, K I c , of 63,000 psi in.1/2
cracking.
(70 MPa m1/2). Annealing of components following weld-
Radiation effects that can potentially affect susceptibil-
ing to reduce the effects of sensitization and residual
ity include radiation-induced segregation (RIS) of the ma-
stress/residual strain may reduce IASCC.
jor elements (e.g., Cr) and radiation hardening associated
with the formation of dislocation loops and voids (ref. Cast austenitic stainless steel (CASS) does not exhibit
[1]). IASCC is similar to IGSCC in that environment and IASCC. No reported failures of austenitic nickel-based al-
stress/strain state are significant factors in crack initia- loys have occurred due to IASCC (ref. [28]). Alloy X-750
tion and propagation. HTH condition may be susceptible to IASCC at fluence lev-
The IASCC phenomenon has been observed in some els greater than 1020 n/cm2 (E > 1 MeV) in a BWR envi-
boiling water reactor (BWR) in-core components that ronment (ref. [28]). Alloy 718 has an excellent record in
have been exposed to fluences above 5 × 1020 n/cm2 (E PWR service provided there are no preexisting defects.
> 1 MeV) (refs. [1], [2], and [5]). In pressurized water re- There have been a number of failures of Alloy 718 fuel as-
actor (PWR) systems, environmental cracking of irra- sembly spring hold-down bolts. These failures were not
diated stainless steels has been observed when the caused by preexisting defects but rather by a poor heat
neutron fluence was higher than 2 × 10 21 n/cm 2 (E > treat condition (ref. [29]). Data for Alloys X-750 and
1 MeV) (ref. [8]). BWR components that have experienced XM-19 materials at exposure levels up to 1 ×
IASCC include neutron source holders, control rod absor- 1021 n/cm2 (E > 1 MeV) are included in ref. [30].
ber and in-core instrument tubes, and the core shroud
(ref. [1]). PWR components that have experienced IASCC W-3130 DESIGN
have included control rods and reactor vessel internal Variations in RVI design, material composition, fabrica-
(RVI) bolting. tion methods, and operating characteristics make predic-
tion of a specific fluence threshold for IASCC difficult. The
Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) suggests using
the fluence at which cracking can be initiated at above
the yield stress of the material or at about a threshold

483
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

of 2 × 1021 n/cm2 (E > 1 MeV) for highly stressed PWR [6] Nicety, K., et al. “Stress Corrosion Crack Growth of Sen-
components, such as bolts, springs, and multipass welds sitized Type 304 Stainless Steel During High Flux
(ref. [28], Nonmandatory Appendix B). Gamma-Ray Irradiation In 288°C Water” in the Pro-
Service loads and fabrication residual stresses should ceedings of the Fifth International Symposium on Envi-
be minimized for components exposed to high fluence ronmental Degradation of Materials in Nuclear Power
levels. Factors such as sensitization, surface cold work, Systems — Water Reactors, Monterey, CA, Aug.
and crevices should also be minimized. 25–29, 1991, pp. 955–962, American Nuclear Society.
[7] Advanced Nuclear Technology, Advanced Light Water
W-3140 MITIGATING ACTIONS Reactor Utility Requirements Document, Rev. 12, EPRI
Stringent water chemistry controls can reduce the 3002000507, pp. 1–235, Electric Power Research Insti-
IASCC susceptibility of stainless steel components. IASCC tute, 2013.
susceptibility of Types 304 and 316 stainless steels de- [8] Scott, P. A. “Review of Irradiation Assisted Stress Cor-
creases with a decrease in the dissolved oxygen content rosion Cracking,” Journal of Nuclear Materials, Vol. 211,
of the water (refs. [1], [2], [6], and [7]). Controlling dis- pp. 101–122, 1994.
solved oxygen content can mitigate IASCC even in high- [9] Jiao, Z., and Was, G. S. “Localized Deformation and
fluence regions (refs. [2] and [6]). Hydrogen injection, IASCC Initiation in Austenitic Stainless Steels,” Journal
as described in W-2150, used to prevent IGSCC in BWR of Nuclear Materials, Vol. 382, No. 2–3, pp. 203–209,
recirculation piping systems may also mitigate IASCC 2008.
(ref. [1]). Mitigating measures in BWRs include hydrogen [10] Nishioka, H., Fukuya, K., Fujii, K., et al. “IASCC Initia-
water chemistry and noble metal chemical addition for tion in Highly Irradiated Stainless Steels Under Uniaxial
protection of recirculation piping and nonreplaceable in- Constant Load Conditions,” Journal of Nuclear Science
ternals (see W-2150 and refs. [2] and [7]). and Technology, Vol. 45, No. 10, pp. 1072–1077, 2008.
To minimize IASCC, Zn addition is used in normal water [11] Fukuya, K., Nishioka, H., Fujii, K., et al. “Effects of Dis-
chemistry BWR plants and is considered a potential miti- solved Hydrogen and Strain Rate on IASCC Behavior in
gating action for PWRs (ref. [1]). EPRI has issued results Highly Irradiated Stainless Steels,” Journal of Nuclear
of a research program on IASCC for reactor core internal Science and Technology, Vol. 45, No. 5, pp. 452–458,
structures fabricated from austenitic stainless steels in 2008.
both PWRs and BWRs (ref. [24]). [12] Onchi, T., Dohi, K., Soneda, N., et al. “Mechanism of Ir-
radiation Assisted Stress Corrosion Crack Initiation in
W-3150 REFERENCES Thermally Sensitized 304 Stainless Steel,” Journal of Nu-
[1] ASM Handbook, Vol. 13A, “Corrosion: Fundamentals, clear Materials, Vol. 340, No. 2–3, pp. 219–236, 2005.
Testing, and Protection,” 2003; Vol. 13B, “Corrosion: [13] Was, G. S., and Busby, J. T. “Role of Irradiated Micro-
Materials,” 2005; Vol. 13C, “Corrosion: Environments structure and Microchemistry in Irradiation-Assisted
and Industries,” 2006, American Society for Metals Stress Corrosion Cracking,” Philosophical Magazine,
(ASM) International. Vol. 85, No. 4–7, Special Issue, pp. 443-465, Feb. 2005.
[2] Indig, M. E., et al. “Investigation of Protection Potential [14] Tsukada, T., Miwa, Y., Jitsukawa, S., et al. “Effects of
Against IASCC” in the Proceedings of the Fifth Interna- Water and Irradiation Temperatures on IASCC Suscept-
tional Symposium on Environmental Degradation of ibility of Type 316 Stainless Steel,” Journal of Nuclear
Materials in Nuclear Power Systems — Water Reactors, Materials, Vol. 329, Part A, pp. 657–662, 2004.
Monterey, CA, Aug. 25–29, 1991, pp. 936–939, Ameri- [15] Fournier, L., Sencer, B. H., Was, G. S., et al. “The Influ-
can Nuclear Society. ence of Oversized Solute Additions on
[3] Jacobs, A. J., and Wozadlo, G. P. “Irradiation-Assisted Radiation-Induced Changes and Post-Irradiation Inter-
Stress Corrosion Cracking in Nuclear Power Plant granular Stress Corrosion Cracking Behavior in High-
Aging,”ASM International Conference on Nuclear Power Purity 316 Stainless Steels,” Journal of Nuclear Materi-
Plant Aging, Availability Factors and Reliability Ana- als, Vol. 321, No. 2–3, pp. 192–209, 2003.
lyses, American Society for Metals (ASM) International, [16] Busby, J. T., Was, G. S., and Kenik, E. A. “Isolating the
July 1985. Effect of Radiation-Induced Segregation in
[4] Gerber, T. L., et al. “Evaluation of BWR Top-Guide In- Irradiation-Assisted Stress Corrosion Cracking of Aus-
tegrity,” EPRI NP-4767, Electric Power Research Insti- tenitic Stainless Steels,” Journal of Nuclear Materials,
tute, Nov. 1986. Vol. 302, No. 1, pp. 20–40, 2002.
[5] Nelson, J. L., and Andresen, P. L. “Review of Current Re- [17] Chung, H. M., Strain, R. V., and Shack, W. J. “Tensile
search and Understanding of Irradiation-Assisted and Stress Corrosion Cracking Properties of Type 304
Stress Corrosion Cracking” in the Proceedings of the Stainless Steel Irradiated to a Very High Dose,” Nuclear
Fifth International Symposium on Environmental De- Engineering and Design, Vol. 208, No. 3, pp. 221–234,
gradation of Materials in Nuclear Power Systems — 2001.
Water Reactors, Monterey, CA, Aug. 25–29, 1991, pp.
10–26, American Nuclear Society.

484
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

[18] Takakura, K., et al. “Lifetime Evaluation for IASCC In- [30] BWRVIP-262NP, BWR Vessel and Internals Project,
itiation of Cold Worked 316 Stainless Steels BFB in Baseline Fracture Toughness and Crack Growth Rate
PWR Primary Water” in the Proceedings of the 13th In- Testing of Alloys X-750 and XM-19 (Idaho National Lab-
ternational Conference on Environmental Degradation oratory Phase I), EPRI 1025135, Electric Power Re-
of Materials in Nuclear Power Systems 2007, Vol. 1, search Institute, 2012.
pp. 46–59, Canadian Nuclear Society. [31] NUREG/CR-6826, Fracture Toughness and Crack
[19] Jiao, Z. “Influence of Localized Deformation on Growth Rates of Irradiated Austenitic Stainless Steels,
Irradiation-Assisted Stress Corrosion Cracking of U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, 2003.
Proton-Irradiated Austenitic Alloys,” in the Proceedings
of the 12th International Conference on Environmental
Degradation of Materials in Nuclear Power Systems —
Water Reactors, Salt Lake City, UT, The Minerals, Me- W-3200 THERMAL AGING EMBRITTLEMENT
tals, and Materials Society, pp. 379–388, 2005. W-3210 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ð17Þ
[20] NUREG/CR-6892, Irradiation-Assisted Stress Corro-
sion Cracking Behavior of Austenitic Stainless Steels Thermal aging embrittlement, sometimes known as
Applicable to LWR Core Internals, U.S. Nuclear Regula- thermal embrittlement, is a time- and temperature-
tory Commission, 2006. dependent process whereby a material undergoes micro-
[21] NUREG/CR-7018, Irradiation-Assisted Stress Corro- structure changes leading to decreased ductility and de-
sion Cracking of Austenitic Stainless Steels in BWR En- gradation of toughness and impact properties and is
vironments, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, 2010. usually accompanied by an increase in yield strength, ul-
[22] NUREG/CR-7027, Degradation of LWR Core Internal timate tensile strength, and hardness. The material also
Materials Due to Neutron Irradiation, U.S. Nuclear Reg- often exhibits increased susceptibility to SCC. Thermal
ulatory Commission, 2010. aging embrittlement is generally not expected in current
[23] Final Review of the Cooperative Irradiation-Assisted light water reactor (LWR) designs where carbon steel
Stress Corrosion Cracking Research Program, EPRI temperatures are below 700°F (371°C) and austenitic
1020986, Electric Power Research Institute, 2010. stainless steel temperatures are below 800°F (427°C).
[24] Aspects of Stress Corrosion Cracking Relevant to However, there have been some embrittlement failures
Irradiation-Assisted Stress Corrosion Cracking (IASCC), in 17-4 PH parts at current operating temperatures in
EPRI 1003421, Electric Power Research Institute, 2002. the 600°F to 620°F (316°C to 327°C) range, and at
[25] Understanding the Interaction Between Localized 700°F (371°C), some martensitic stainless steel pump,
Deformation in Materials and Environmentally Assisted valve, and CASS parts may embrittle as described in ref.
Cracking, EPRI 1011789, Electric Power Research Insti- [21]. See also XIII-3450(e) and Section III-5 for rules for
tute, 2006. elevated temperature service.
[26] Mechanics and Mechanisms of Environmentally As- Thermal embrittlement results in the loss of notch im-
sisted Cracking of Alloys 132/182 in BWR and PWR En- pact properties and fracture toughness of materials.
vironments, EPRI 1009542, Electric Power Research Long-term exposure to elevated temperatures also gener-
Institute, 2004. ally increases the susceptibility to SCC. The specific tem-
[27] Fyfitch, S., et al. “Criteria for Initiation of Irradiation peratures at which reductions can occur is material
Assisted Stress Corrosion Cracking in Stainless Steels in dependent and includes factors such as alloy type and
PWR Systems” in the Proceedings of the 14th Interna- grade, heat treatment, and fabrication procedures. The
tional Conference on Environmental Degradation of consequence of this embrittlement is an increased risk
Materials in Nuclear Power Systems — Water Reactors, of nonductile fracture. The reduction in toughness takes
American Nuclear Society, 2009. place at the exposure temperature and at temperatures
[28] Materials Reliability Program: PWR Internals Materi- below the exposure temperatures.
al Aging Degradation Mechanism Screening and Thermal embrittlement is usually accompanied by
Threshold Values (MRP-175), EPRI 1012081, Electric changes in other properties, such as yield and tensile
Power Research Institute, 2005. strength and ductility, and can occur as a result of tem-
[29] Long, C. J., and Foster, J. P. “Primary Water Stress Cor- perature only in the absence of other environmental fac-
rosion Cracking Resistance of Alloy 718 Fasteners” in tors, such as sustained or cyclic stresses and strains,
the Proceedings of the 11th International Conference neutron radiation, and aggressive chemical attack.
on Environmental Degradation of Materials in Nuclear The extent of embrittlement is measured by pre- and
Power Systems — Water Reactors, American Nuclear postexposure testing of fracture toughness stress inten-
Society, 2003. sity factor, K I c , or the J-R tearing resistance, J I c . The Char-
py impact test is often used, but fracture mechanics
toughness test data are more useful and applicable for
quantitative evaluation of embrittlement effects (refs.
[18] through [20]).

485
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

W-3220 MATERIALS AND CRITICAL can cause embrittlement due to a phenomenon termed
PARAMETERS “strain age embrittlement.” Code rules recognize this pos-
sibility and limit the amount of cold straining that can be
Austenitic materials, both stainless steels and nickel al-
performed during fabrication.
loys, suffer significant fracture toughness reductions and
increased susceptibility to IGSCC at elevated tempera- The sensitivity of austenitic stainless steels to thermal
tures and fluence levels (ref. [14]). The mechanisms of embrittlement is quite complex depending on product
thermal embrittlement include precipitation of secondary form (wrought vs. cast), alloy content, and metallurgical
phases, which increase the yield strength and lower the factors. The standard Type 300 wrought alloys, such as
fracture resistance; segregation of metalloids to grain the 304, 316, and 347 grades, are generally insensitive
boundaries, which induce intergranular fracture; pinning to embrittlement at LWR temperatures as indicated in
of dislocations by interstitial impurities, which inhibit refs. [5] and [6]. However, at higher temperatures, em-
plasticity; and the formation of brittle long-range ordered brittlement due to sigma phase can occur as described
phases. in Section II, Part D, Nonmandatory Appendix A.
Thermal embrittlement is a concern for Cast grades, weld metals, and other duplex microstruc-
(a) CASS ture grades of austenitic stainless steels may exhibit ther-
(b) martensitic and ferritic stainless steels mal embrittlement at LWR temperatures. The responsible
(c) ferritic and low alloy steels (temper embrittlement metallurgical factor is the presence of the ferrite phase in
and strain aging embrittlement) the microstructure, and the sensitivity is primarily depen-
(d) some nickel-based alloys, including Alloys 690, 152, dent on the amount of ferrite, with a secondary effect
and 52 (Embrittlement is avoidable if iron content is from carbon content and the amount of additional alloy-
∼9%.) ing elements. Precautionary guidelines defining the effect
The normal upper limit of operating service tempera- of ferrite content on thermal embrittlement in austenitic
tures for pressure boundary materials in a PWR pressur- and austenitic-ferritic stainless steels are given in Section
izer is generally ∼650°F (∼343°C). A practical aspect of II, Part D, Nonmandatory Appendix A. Additional details
identifying and quantitatively determining thermal aging about the embrittlement mechanisms, data, and analyses
effects is the long testing times required to obtain data can be found in refs. [5] through [10].
useful for assessing the effects of exposures comparable The available information indicates that the nonhar-
with typical service lives. Experimentally, exposures at d e na b l e g r a d e s o f w r o u g h t n i c k e l - a n d ni c k e l –
higher temperatures to compensate for shorter test times
chromium–iron-based alloys do not exhibit thermal em-
are often utilized, and the results are equated for long ser-
brittlement at LWR temperatures (refs. [5] and [6]). The
vice times through empirical or theoretical time–
age hardenable grades of nickel-based alloys are suscep-
temperature equivalence models.
tible to thermal embrittlement at temperatures higher
Within these experimental limitations, test results for
than the upper limit of LWR temperatures but not at
carbon and low alloy steels typically used for LWR piping
LWR temperatures.
and components have shown that exposures within the
range of LWR temperatures and service lifetime would
be expected to have only small or negligible embrittle-
ment (refs. [1] through [4]). This appears to be particu- W-3230 DESIGN
larly true of low alloy steel components that have had a
Several material selection and processing considera-
postweld heat treatment (PWHT) during fabrication.
tions can be utilized to minimize thermal embrittlement.
The inservice exposure has very little additional thermal
In the case of carbon and low alloy steels, fabrication pro-
aging effect relative to the effect of the PWHT. Exceptions
cedures that minimize embrittlement or annealing after
to this lack of embrittlement sensitivity may occur in the
weld heat-affected zone (HAZ) of the lower alloy grades of forming stainless steel may be specified. In the case of
steels and in the base materials of some grades of higher wrought austenitic stainless steel products, low carbon
strength, higher alloy content steels, such as SA-508, Class and L grades combined with low ferrite content welds
4. The increased sensitivity can be due to temper embrit- will minimize embrittlement susceptibility. Cast austeni-
tlement that can occur at temperatures beginning at tic steels having low carbon, ferrite, and molybdenum
∼600°F (∼315°C) and extending up to ∼1,000°F content consistent with strength requirements should
(∼540°C). Susceptibility to this type of embrittlement is be used to minimize embrittlement (ref. [16]). Careful
increased with the presence of impurity elements, such consideration should be given to the use of duplex micro-
as phosphorous and tin in the steel. Another exception structure wrought stainless steels to ensure that they will
to the low sensitivity to thermal embrittlement of carbon not be exposed to embrittling temperature. In particular,
and low alloy steels at LWR operating temperatures may the designer should be fully aware of the notes accompa-
occur when cold work has been introduced into the com- nying the allowable stresses in Section II, Part D citing
ponent during fabrication. Subsequent thermal exposures sensitivity to embrittlement.

486
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

W-3240 MITIGATING ACTIONS [12] NUREG/CR-5385, Initial Assessment of the Mechan-

isms and Significance of Low-Temperature Embrittle-
The principal mitigating actions are in utilizing the de-
ment of Cast Stainless Steels in LWR Systems, U.S.
sign precautions listed in W-3230. Some mitigation can
Nuclear Regulatory Commission, 1990.
be obtained in specific instances by decreasing the oper-
ating temperature of the component. Thermal embrittle- [13] NUREG/CR-6956, Nonlinear Analyses for Embedded
ment thresholds and screening criteria can be used to Cracks Under Pressurized Thermal Shock: Compari-
find alternate materials (ref. [15]). sons with FAVOR and Weibull Stress Approaches, U.S.
Nuclear Regulatory Commission, 2008.
W-3250 REFERENCES [14] BWRVIP-140, BWR Vessel and Internals Project,
Fracture Toughness and Crack Growth Program on Ir-
[1] Gulvin, T. F., et al. “The Influence of Stress Relief on the
radiated Austenitic Stainless Steel, EPRI 1008189, Elec-
Properties of C and C-Mn Pressure-Vessel Plate Steels,”
tric Power Research Institute, 2005.
Journal of the West of Scotland Iron & Steel Institute, Vol.
[15] Materials Reliability Program: PWR Internals Materi-
80, pp. 149–175, 1972–1973.
al Aging Degradation Mechanism Screening and
[2] Mimaki, H., et al. “A Material Aging Research Program
Threshold Values (MRP-175), EPRI 1012081, Electric
for PWR Plants,” Plant Systems/Components Aging
Power Research Institute, 2005.
Management, PVP Vol. 332, pp. 97–105, ASME, 1996.
[16] C. I. Grimes (NRC) letter to D. J. Walters (NEI), “Li-
[3] Logsdon, W. A. “The Influence of Long-Time Stress Re-
cense Renewal Issue No. 98-0030, Thermal Aging Em-
lief Treatments on the Dynamic Fracture Toughness
britt le me nt o f C ast Austenitic Sta inless St eel
Properties of ASME SA508 Cl 2a and ASME SA533 Gr
Components,” with attached staff evaluation of same ti-
B Cl 2 Pressure Vessel Steels,” Journal of Materials for
tle, May 19, 2000, ADAMS Ref. No. ML003717179.
Energy Systems, Vol. 3, No. 4, pp. 39–49, 1982.
[17] Evaluation of Thermal Aging Embrittlement for Cast
[4] Druce, S. G., Gage, G., and Jordan, G. “Effect of Aging on
Austenitic Stainless Steel Components, EPRI 1000976,
the Properties of Pressure Vessel Steels,” Acta Metallur-
Electric Power Research Institute, 2001.
gica, Vol. 34, No. 4, pp. 641–652, 1986.
[18] U.S. Code of Federal Regulations, 10CFR Part 50,
[5] Yukawa, S. “Effect of Long-Term Thermal Exposure on
Appendix G, “Fracture Toughness Requirements,” U.S.
the Toughness of Austenitic Steels and Nickel Alloys,”
Nuclear Regulatory Commission.
Fracture Mechanics: Applications and New Materials,
[19] U.S. Code of Federal Regulations, 10CFR Part 50,
PVP Vol. 260, pp. 115–125, ASME, 1993.
Appendix H, “Reactor Vessel Material Surveillance Pro-
[6] Yukawa, S. “Review and Evaluation of the Toughness
gram Requirements,” U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commis-
of Austenitic Steels and Nickel Alloys After Long-Term
sion.
Elevated Temperature Exposures,” Bulletin No. 378,
[20] ASTM E399, Standard Test Method for Linear-Elastic
Welding Research Council, Jan. 1993.
Plane-Strain Fracture Toughness K I c of Metallic Materi-
[7] Chung, H. M., and Chopra, O. K. “Kinetics and Mechan-
als, American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM)
ism of Thermal Aging Embrittlement of Duplex Stain-
International, 2012.
less Steels,” Environmental Degradation of Materials
[21] Materials Handbook for Nuclear Plant Pressure
in Nuclear Power Systems — Water Reactors, pp.
Boundary Applications, EPRI 3002000122, 2013.
359–370, The Metallurgical Society, 1988.
[8] Chopra, O. K. “Thermal Aging of Cast Stainless Steels in
LWR Systems: Estimation of Mechanical Properties,”
Nuclear Plant Systems/Components, Aging Manage-
ment and Life Extension, PVP Vol. 228, pp. 79–92, W-3300 IRRADIATION EMBRITTLEMENT
ASME, 1992.
[9] Tanaka, T., et al. “Thermal Aging of Cast Duplex Stain- W-3310 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
less Steels,” Structural Integrity of Pressure Vessels,
Irradiation embrittlement refers to the phenomenon of
Piping and Components — 1995, PVP Vol.-95-OAC2,
loss of ductility and fracture toughness from exposure to
ASME, 1995.
high-energy neutrons (E > 1 MeV), accompanied by an in-
[10] Suzuki, I., et al. “Long Term Thermal Aging of Cast Du-
crease in mechanical strength.
plex Stainless Steels” in the Proceedings of the Fourth
International Conference in Nuclear Engineering, Mar. Core support-structure peak fluences as high as 1 ×
1996, JSME/ASME, 1996. 1021 n/cm2 (E > 1 MeV) are reached in some cases and
[11] NUREG/CR-4513, Rev. 1, Estimation of Fracture can embrittle austenitic stainless steels and Alloy 600 ma-
Toughness of Cast Stainless Steels During Thermal terial (ref. [2]). The reactor vessel beltline fluence in a
Aging in LWR Systems, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Com- PWR is ∼9 × 1018 n/cm2 (E > 1 MeV) to ∼4 ×
mission, May 1994. 10 19 n/cm 2 (E > 1 MeV) and ∼5 × 10 18 n/cm 2 (E >
1 MeV) in a BWR (ref. [1]). Predictions of neutron irradia-
tion embrittlement in BWR pressure vessel steels are in-
cluded in ref. [57].

487
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Safe ends and other components outside the reactor material testing and properties correlations, fracture me-
vessel usually do not experience irradiation significant chanics compact tension specimens and drop-weight spe-
enough to cause problems (ref. [1]). cimens for nil-ductility transition temperature (NDTT)
Irradiation of ferritic steels can cause an increase in the determination are recommended. Fracture mechanics
ductile-brittle transition temperature (DBTT) or refer- specimens should also be included in PWR surveillance
ence temperature (R T N D T ) and a decrease in the upper programs, when possible.
shelf toughness. Austenitic materials do not exhibit a The current state-of-knowledge of neutron irradiation-
DBTT (ref. [1]). induced property changes in austenitic stainless steels,
There are special concerns regarding pressurized ther- principally solution-annealed Types 304 and 304L mate-
mal shock (PTS) of the reactor vessel when toughness is rials, cold-worked and solution-annealed Types 316 and
decreased by irradiation (ref. [3]). The influence of neu- 316L materials, and Type 308 weld metal, has been sum-
tron radiation on fatigue properties is not well defined marized by EPRI (refs. [2] and [3]).
(ref. [4]), but it can affect SCC of vessel internals (see ASTM maintains a standards and engineering digital li-
W-3100) and stress relaxation of internals discussed in brary that includes numerous papers on the effects of ra-
W-4400 (ref. [1]). diation on materials. A database is available for the
Dynamic strain aging and cyclic loading limits are af- radiation effects on high-temperature refractory materi-
fected by irradiation (ref. [20]). als for high-temperature fusion reactors (ref. [40]). The
Radiation embrittlement in metals is believed to be due effects of radiation embrittlement on vanadium have been
mainly to the following factors: studied to improve the resistance to serious radiation em-
(a) changes in flaw properties because of the interac- brittlement in refractory metals, using fabrication pro-
tion of dislocations with irradiation-produced defects cesses for microstructure control; the process is also
(b) precipitation of transmutation-produced gases and applicable to tantalum (ref. [41]). EPRI has studied ther-
irradiation-induced segregation at grain boundaries, mal aging and neutron embrittlement in CASS for BWR in-
which are potential fracture sites ternals (ref. [42]). The NRC has issued a review of
irradiation effects on LWR core internal materials (ref.
W-3320 MATERIAL CONTROL AND CRITICAL [44]). Degradation of LWR core internal materials due
PARAMETERS to neutron irradiation is discussed in ref. [43]. For details
The designer must consider the effects of irradiation on the Heavy-Section Steel Irradiation Program, see ref.
when selecting materials and the properties used in anal- [45].
ysis. The behavior of reactor vessel and internal materials Welding and fabrication critical factors for new nuclear
under neutron irradiation is well known (refs. [21] power plants have been identified; an EPRI report ad-
through [24]). Control of low alloy steel composition to dresses important welding and fabrication processes for
low levels of Cu (and P) is beneficial (ref. [1]). It is known specific materials, assesses their effects on potential de-
that Ni and Si may have an effect on irradiation embrittle- gradation mechanisms, and identifies process enhance-
ment and initial fracture toughness, and limits are in- ments that can improve long-term asset management of
cluded in specifications such as SA-508 (ref. [4]). new nuclear plant components (ref. [51]).
Material with sufficient toughness, both R T N D T and
upper shelf fracture toughness, in the unirradiated condi- W-3330 DESIGN
tion should be specified in order to tolerate a certain
amount of expected embrittlement; clean steel with ad- The reactor vessel beltline and potentially other areas
vanced melt-refining processes and a fine-grain micro- are highly irradiated and limiting in design. Reactor de-
structure is recommended. Similar guidelines apply for sign must accommodate an appropriate surveillance pro-
the reactor vessel weld metal toughness and chemical gram to monitor toughness degradation, if applicable (ref.
composition control. At times, weld metal toughness in [6]). Fluence levels should be kept as low as practical,
austenitic materials, such as stainless steel submerged especially in critical locations. Neutron shields and low-
arc welds, can be relatively low, and further degradation flux fuel-loading patterns can be employed to limit flu-
due to irradiation must be controlled (ref. [1]). ences and irradiation embrittlement (ref. [18]).
If significant irradiation embrittlement is predicted An upper limit for pressure as a function of tempera-
that could influence plant operation limits and safety ture and integrated neutron irradiation at the end of a
margins, sufficient archive material should be available service period is established to meet the fracture tough-
for further irradiation testing and monitoring to confirm ness requirements of 10CFR50, Appendix G (ref. [16]).
properties. Surveillance programs in accordance with Each reactor vessel design includes irradiation capsules
10CFR50, Appendices G and H (refs. [16] and [17]) are re- for surveillance. The capsules contain longitudinal- and
quired for the reactor vessel beltline material and should transverse-oriented base metal Charpy V-notch speci-
be considered for reactor internal materials. Test speci- mens and weld metal tension specimens (ref. [57]). These
mens for the above purposes generally include Charpy are removed and tested at various times during the life of
V-notch impact and tensile specimens. For archive the vessel (refs. [58] and [59]).

488
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

W-3340 MITIGATING ACTIONS [6] Demma, A., Carter, R., Jenssen, A., Torimaru, T, and
Gamble, R. “Fracture Toughness of Highly Irradiated
Preventive measures in materials for the reactor vessel Stainless Steels in Boiling Water Reactors” in the Pro-
include low Cu and appropriate Ni contents and high uni- ceedings of the 13th Conference on Environmental De-
rradiated toughness. If unacceptable fracture toughness gradation of Materials in Nuclear Power Systems —
reductions occur, it may be possible to reverse these by Water Reactors, Canadian Nuclear Society, 2007.
thermal annealing (refs. [9], [10], and [55]). Low-flux fuel [7] Fyfitch, S., Xu, H., Demma, A., Carter, R., Gamble, R., and
loading and neutron shields can be employed to reduce Scott, P. “Fracture Toughness of Irradiated Stainless
fluence and the resulting embrittlement of materials. Steel in Nuclear Power Systems” in the Proceedings of
Current elastic–plastic fracture mechanics methods the 14th Conference on Environmental Degradation of
should be used to assess margins against fracture for cri- Materials in Nuclear Power Systems — Water Reactors,
tical components (ref. [53]). Surveillance program results American Nuclear Society, 2009.
may be utilized to fine-tune predicted embrittlement [8] Sniegowski, J. J., and Wolfer, W. G. “On the Physical Ba-
toughness properties and establish testing and operation sis for the Swelling Resistance of Ferritic Steels” in the
limits. Available material toughness databases should be Proceedings of Topical Conference on Ferritic Alloys for
employed to check the credibility and supplement sur- Use in Nuclear Energy Technologies, J. W. Davis and D. J.
veillance results. Fracture mechanics analyses should be Michel, Eds., pp. 579–586, TMS-AIME, 1983.
used to establish and justify inservice inspection (ISI) in- [9] Garner, F. A. Chapter 6, “Irradiation Performance of
tervals in accordance with Section XI. Cladding and Structural Steels in Liquid Metal Reac-
In summary, the mitigation actions for neutron embrit- tors,” Materials Science and Technology: A Comprehen-
tlement include the following: sive Treatment, Vol. 10A, pp. 419–543, VCH
(a) design procedures, including higher temperature, Publishers, 1994.
greater vessel shielding, and careful selection of and use [10] Hamilton, M. L., Huang, F. H., Yang, W. J. S., and Gar-
of steels that are relatively insensitive to radiation ner, F. A. “Mechanical Properties and Fracture Behavior
embrittlement. of 20% Cold-Worked 316 Stainless Steel Irradiated to
Very High Exposures,” Influence of Radiation on Materi-
(b) operational procedures, including the control of
als: 13th International Symposium (Part II), ASTM
stress–temperature relationships.
STP956, F. A. Garner, N. Igata, and C. H. Henager, Jr.,
(c) use of heat treatment techniques for ductility re- Eds., pp. 245–270, American Society for Testing and
storation. Annealing, if necessary, can restore vessel life. Materials, 1987.
[11] Chung, H. M. “Assessment of Void Swelling in Auste-
nitic Stainless Steel Core Internals,” NUREG/CR-6897,
W-3350 REFERENCES U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, 2006.
[1] NUREG 0800, NRC Standard Review Plan, Section 4.2, [12] Copeland, J. F., and Giannuzzi, A. J. “Long-Term Integ-
Reactor Vessel Neutron Embrittlement Analysis, U.S. rity of Nuclear Power Plant Components,” EPRI NP-
Nuclear Regulatory Commission, 2007. 3673-LD, Electric Power Research Institute, Oct. 1984.
[2] Materials Reliability Program: A Review of Radiation [13] Kass, J. N. “Effect of Neutron Irradiation at 550°F on
Embrittlement for Stainless Steels for PWRs Reactor Component Materials for BWR/6,” General
(MRP-79), Rev. 1, EPRI 1008204, Electric Power Re- Electric, NEDO-20243, 74NED2, Class 1, Jan. 1974.
search Institute, 2004. [14] NRC Regulatory Guide 1.154, Format and Content of
[3] Materials Reliability Program: PWR Internals Plant-Specific Pressurized Thermal Shock Safety Analy-
Age-Related Material Properties, Degradation Mechan- sis Reports for Pressurized Water Reactors, U.S. Nucle-
isms, Models, and Basis Data — State of Knowledge ar Regulatory Commission, 2011.
(MRP-211), EPRI 1015013, Electric Power Research In- [15] NRC Regulatory Guide 1.99, Rev. 2, Effects of Resi-
stitute, 2007. dual Elements on Predicted Radiation Damage to Reac-
[4] Hamilton, M., Huang, F.-H., Yang, W. J. S., and Garner, F. tor Vessel Materials, U.S. N uclear Regulatory
A. “Mechanical Properties and Fracture Behavior of Commission, May 1988.
20% Cold-Worked 316 Stainless Steel Irradiated to [16] U.S. Code of Federal Regulations, 10CFR Part 50,
Very High Neutron Exposures,” Influence of Radiation Appendix G, “Fracture Toughness Requirements,” U.S.
on Material Properties: 13th International Symposium Nuclear Regulatory Commission.
(Part II), ASTM STP956, F. A. Garner, N. Igata, and C. [17] U.S. Code of Federal Regulations, 10CFR Part 50,
H. Henager, Jr., Eds., pp. 245–270, American Society of Appendix H, “Reactor Vessel Material Surveillance Pro-
Testing and Materials, 1987. gram Requirements,” U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commis-
[5] Materials Reliability Program: Fracture Toughness sion.
Testing of Decommissioned PWR Core Internals Mate- [18] Franklin, D., and Marston, T. “Investigating the Flux
rial Samples (MRP-160), EPRI 1012079, Electric Power Reduction Option in Reactor Vessel Integrity,” EPRI
Research Institute, 2005. NP-31100-SR, Electric Power Research Institute, 1983.

489
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

[19] Server, W. L., and Taboada, A. “An Approach for Esti- [32] Stahlkopf, K. E., Smith, R. E., and Marson, T. U. “Nucle-
mating Post-Anneal Reirradiation Embrittlement of Re- ar Pressure Boundary Materials Problems and Pro-
actor Vessel Steels,” Effects of Irradiation on Materials: posed Solutions,” Nuclear Engineering and Design, Vol.
17th International Symposium, pp. 496–508, 1985. 46, No. 1, pp. 65–79, Mar. 1978.
[20] Mager, T. R., and Rishel, R. D. “Development of a Gen- [33] Nikulina, A. V. “Zirconium Alloys in Nuclear Power
eric Procedure for Thermal Annealing an Embrittled Engineering,” Metal Science and Heat Treatment, Vol.
Reactor Vessel Using a Dry Annealing Method,” EPRI 46, No. 11–12, pp. 458–462, Nov./Dec. 2004.
NP-2493, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, July [34] Brumovsky, M., Kytka, M., Debarberis, L., et al. “Pre-
1982. diction of Irradiation Embrittlement in WWER-440 Re-
[21] Pavinich, W. A. “The Effect of Neutron Fluence and actor Pressure Vessel Materials,” Problems of Atomic
Temperature on the Fracture Toughness and Tensile Science and Technology, No. 6, pp.72–77, 2007.
Properties for a Linde 80 Submerged Arc Weld” in the [35] Corwin, W. R., Nanstad, R. K., et al. “Thermal Embrit-
Proceedings of the Second International Symposium tlement of Reactor Vessel Steels,” Oak Ridge National
on Environmental Degradation of Materials in Nuclear Laboratory, DOE, CONF-950804–3, 1995.
Power Systems — Water Reactors, Monterey, CA, Sept. [36] NUREG/CR-6891, Crack Growth Rates of Irradiated
9–12, 1985, pp. 485–495, American Nuclear Society. Austenitic Stainless Steel Weld Heat Affected Zone in
[22] Server, W. L., et al. “Analysis of Radiation Embrittle- BWR Environments, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commis-
ment Reference Toughness Curves,” EPRI NP-1661, sion, 2006.
Electric Power Research Institute, Jan. 1981. [37] NUREG/CR-6960, Crack Growth Rates and Fracture
[23] Hawthorne, J. R., et al. “Evaluation and Prediction of Toughness of Irradiated Austenitic Stainless Steels in
Neutron Embrittlement in Reactor Pressure Vessel Ma- BWR Environments, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commis-
terials,” EPRI NP-2782, Electric Power Research Insti- sion, 2008.
tute, Dec. 1982. [38] NUREG/CR-6965, Irradiation-Assisted Stress Corro-
[24] McConnell, P., et al. “Irradiated Nuclear Pressure Ves- sion Cracking of Austenitic Stainless Steels and Alloy
sel Steel Data Base,” EPRI NP-2428, Electric Power Re- 690 From Halden Phase-II Irradiations, U.S. Nuclear
search Institute, June 1982. Regulatory Commission, 2008.
[25] Server, W. L., and Oldfield, W. “Nuclear Pressure Ves- [39] Guionnet, C. “Radiation Embrittlement of PWR Reac-
sel Steel Data Base,” EPRI NP-933, Electric Power Re- tor Vessel Weld Metals: Nickel and Copper Synergism
search Institute, Dec. 1978. Effects,” Materials Science (B2260), ASTM Special Tech-
[26] Grossbeck, M. L. Effects of Radiation on Materials, nical Publication no. 782 pp. 392-411, 1982.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) In- [40] Zinkl, S. J. “Radiation Embrittlement Database for
ternational, 2004. High Temperature Refractory Alloys,” Metals and Cera-
[27] Bement, A. L. “Irradiation Effects on Structural Alloys mics Division, Oak Ridge National Laboratory, http://
for Nuclear Reactor Applications,” Contributed papers, www.fusion.ucla.edu/apex/meeting7/zinkle1.pdf.
ASTM Committee E-10 on Radioisotopes and Radiation [41] Kurishitaa, H., Kuwabaraa, T., Hasegawaa, M., Ko-
Effects, 1971. bayashi, S., and Nakai, K. “Microstructural Control to
[28] Amayev, A. D., Kryukov, A. M., Levit, V. I., and Sokolov, Improve the Resistance to Radiation Embrittlement in
M. A. “Radiation Stability of WWER-440 Vessel Materi- Vanadium,” Journal of Nuclear Materials, Vol. 343,
als,” Radiation Embrittlement of Nuclear Reactor Pres- Nos. 1–3, pp. 318–324, 2005.
sure Vessel Steels: An International Review, Fourth [42] BWRVIP-234NP: BWR Vessel and Internals Project
Vol., pp. 9–29, American Society for Testing and Mate- Thermal Aging and Neutron Embrittlement Evaluation
rials, 1993. of Cast Austenitic Stainless Steels for BWR Internals,
[29] Murty, K. L. “Is Neutron Radiation Exposure Always EPRI 1019060NP, Electric Power Research Institute,
Detrimental to Metals (Steels)?” Nuclear Engineering Dec. 2009.
Department, North Carolina State University, Raleigh, [43] Chopra, O. K., and Rao, A. S. “A Review of Irradiation
NC, 1984. Effects on LWR Core Internal Materials — Neutron Em-
[30] Steelea, L. E., and Potapovsa, U. “Radiation Embrittle- brittlement, Void Swelling, and Irradiation Creep,”
ment of Reactor Vessel Steels and Suggestions for Its ML102010621, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission.
Control,” Reactor Materials Branch, Metallurgy Divi- [44] NUREG/CR-7027, Chopra, O. K. Degradation of LWR
sion, Naval Research Laboratory, Washington, DC, July Core Internal Materials Due to Neutron Irradiation, Ar-
1968. gonne National Laboratory, 2010.
[31] Murty, K. L., and Seok, C.-S. “Fracture in Ferritic Reac- [45] NUREG/CR-5591, Vol. 8, No. 2, Heavy-Section Steel
tor Steel — Dynamic Strain Aging and Cyclic Loading,” Irradiation Program: Progress Report for Apr.
JOM, Vol. 53, No. 7, pp. 23–26, 2001. 1997–Mar. 1998, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission,
2000.

490
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

[46] Pelli, R., and Törrönen, K. “State-of-the-Art Review on W-3400 HYDROGEN DAMAGE
Thermal Annealing,” European Network on Ageing Ma- EMBRITTLEMENT
terials Evaluation and Studies, 1995.
[47] Primary System Corrosion Research Program: EPRI W-3410 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Materials Degradation Matrix, Rev. 2, EPRI 1020987, Hydrogen damage, or embrittlement, is a mechanical
Electric Power Research Institute, 2010. environmental failure mechanism resulting from the initi-
[48] Nikolaev, Y. A., Nikolaeva, A. V., Kryukov, A. M., Levit, al presence or absorption of excessive amounts of hydro-
V. I., and Korolyov, Y. N. “Radiation Embrittlement and gen in metallic materials, generally associated with
Thermal Annealing Behavior of Cr–Ni–Mo Reactor significant residual or applied tensile stresses. This type
Pressure Vessel Materials,” Russian Research Center of cracking is usually restricted to high-strength steels
Kurchatov Institute, IRTM ORM, May 22, 1995. and certain other high-strength alloys. Hydrogen cracking
[49] Lawless, K. R, Pavinish, W. A., and Lowe, A. L., Jr. “Mi- may occur at the tip of preexisting cracks or at subsurface
crostructural Characterization of Submerged Arc Weld sites where triaxial stresses are the highest. When the cri-
Metals,” Influence of Radiation on Material Properties: tical stress is exceeded, a crack initiates and propagates
13th International Symposium (Part II), ASTM STP956, through the region of high hydrogen concentration.
F. A. Garner, N. Igata, and C. H. Henager, Jr., Eds., pp. The following are specific types of hydrogen damage;
321–332, American Society for Testing and Materials, occurrence may be limited to certain materials or alloy
1987. systems:
[50] NUREG/CR-6964, Crack Growth Rates and Metallo- (a) cracking from hydrogen charging
graphic Examinations of Alloy 600 and Alloy 82/182 (b) hydrogen-induced blistering
From Field Components and Laboratory Materials (c) hydrogen-induced cracking from decarburization
Tested in PWR Environments, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory (d) cracking from hydrogen-induced slow strain rate
Commission, 2008. embrittlement
[51] Welding and Fabrication Critical Factors for New Nu- (e) hydrogen-induced cracking from static fatigue
clear Power Plants, EPRI 1019209, Electric Power Re- (f) cracking from hydride formation
search Institute, Dec. 2009. (g) cracking from exposure to molecular hydrogen gas
[52] U.S. Code of Federal Regulations, 10CFR50.61 Frac- (h) cracking from exposure to hydrogen sulfide (not a
ture Toughness Requirements for Protection Against factor in LWR)
Pressurized Thermal Shock Events, U.S Nuclear Regula- (i) cracking from exposure to water and dilute aqueous
tory Commission, 2012. solutions
[53] Materials Reliability Program: PWR Internals Materi- Each of the nine types of hydrogen damage is described
al Aging Degradation Mechanism Screening and in considerable detail in Volume 10 of the ASM Metals
Threshold Values (MPR-175), EPRI 1012081, Electric Handbook (ref. [1]). The role of hydrogen in various
Power Research Institute, 2006. power industry applications is also extensively described
[54] Evaluation of Neutron Irradiation Embrittlement for in a series of ten papers published in 1964 (ref. [2]).
PWR Stainless Steel Internal Component Supports, Embrittlement by hydrogen damage manifests itself as
EPRI TR-112718, Electric Power Research Institute, a decrease in tensile ductility (percent elongation and re-
1999. duction of area), a decrease in notched tensile strength,
[55] U.S. Code of Federal Regulations, 10CFR50.66, Re- and delayed failure by fracture under static loading. In
quirements for Thermal Annealing the Reactor Pres- metals that have high notch sensitivity, the extent of crack
sure Vessel, 1999. growth is usually quite small, and the probability of de-
[56] BWRVIP-147: Predictions of Neutron Irradiation Em- tecting a crack before complete failure occurs is corre-
brittlement in Boiling Water Reactor Pressure Vessel spondingly small. Delay in fracture apparently results
Steels, EPRI 1009876, Electric Power Research Insti- because of the time required for hydrogen to diffuse to
tute, 2005. a specific area near a crack nucleus until the concentra-
[57] ASTM E185, Standard Practice for Design of Surveil- tion reaches a damaging level (ref. [3]). Another mechan-
lance Programs for Light-Water Moderated Nuclear ism is the interaction between hydrogen atoms and
Power Reactor Vessels, American Society for Testing dislocations in the metal. The crack tip may be embrittled
and Materials (ASTM) International, 2010. by hydrogen atoms from the aqueous reactions.
[58] ASTM E23, Standard Test Methods for Notched Bar
Impact Testing of Metallic Materials, American Society W-3420 MATERIALS
for Testing and Materials (ASTM) International, 2012. Carbon and low alloy steels are subject to eight of the
[59] ASTM E8.E8M, Standard Test Methods for Tension hydrogen damage mechanisms described in W-3410
Testing of Metallic Materials, American Society for (not from hydriding), particularly when tensile strengths
Testing and Materials (ASTM) International, 2013. exceed ∼150 ksi (∼1 000 MPa). Failure by hydrogen dam-
age (except by blistering or decarburization) is seldom a
problem in those materials whose tensile strengths are

491
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

below 100 ksi (700 MPa). When corrosion occurs in aqu- hydrogen into the titanium tubes. The purpose of the
eous systems involving carbon steel, hydrogen is gener- cathodic protection is to protect the carbon steel or cop-
ated and may react with the carbon to form methane per alloy tubesheet, not the titanium tubes.
gas. This leads to localized decarburization with corre- The hydrogen may originate from water vapor, pickling
sponding weakening of the metal. The methane collects acids, or hydrocarbons. The amount of hydrogen ab-
at grain boundaries and other discontinuities within the sorbed depends primarily on the titanium oxide film on
metal. As the gas pressure builds at high temperature, the titanium surface, and an adherent unbroken film
small fissures are formed, eventually resulting in a can significantly retard hydrogen absorption. Hydrogen
through-wall failure (ref. [4]). In addition, there are low- can be removed from titanium alloys by vacuum
temperature mechanisms that involve collection of hy- annealing.
drogen at high-stress areas that lead to decohesion with- Hydrogen pickup by zirconium alloy fuel cladding is the
out the involvement of methane; the decohesion life-limiting phenomenon for the fuel. It is also the life-
mechanisms may be more important than the methane limiting phenomenon for zirconium alloy pressure tubes
mechanism. in CANDU pressurized heavy water reactor plants, which
Austenitic stainless steels are almost completely resis- are designed to the ASME Code. (It is deuterium in the
tant to failure by hydrogen damage. These face-centered case of CANDUs.) In both cases, the hydrogen is picked
cubic structures are relatively impermeable to the diffu- up from aqueous corrosion. Vacuum annealing is not
sion of atomic hydrogen. The resulting low hydrogen con- practical or used for either fuel cladding or pressure
tent in the metal lattice thus has little impact on the tubes.
material’s ductility.
Ferritic stainless steels, in the annealed condition, are W-3430 DESIGN LIMITATIONS
extremely resistant to hydrogen damage because of their Design issues for hydrogen embrittlement are ad-
low hardness or strength levels. When these same mate- dressed in W-3440, Mitigating Actions.
rials are hardened by cold working or when they are used
in the as-welded condition, they are susceptible to hydro-
gen damage.
W-3440 MITIGATING ACTIONS
Martensitic and precipitation-hardened steels are sus- The following actions prevent or mitigate hydrogen
ceptible to hydrogen damage. As the yield strengths in- damage embrittlement:
crease, the propensity for hydrogen-induced cracking is (a) Use alloys with a lower strength.
increased. Almost any corrosive environment capable of (b) Lower stresses by annealing (lowering the material
evolving hydrogen can cause cracking in these materials. strength), thickening the section (lower applied stress),
Heat-resisting, nickel-based alloys generally do not ex- or reducing design loads.
perience hydrogen damage. However, hydrogen-induced, (c) Eliminate sharp corners, stress raisers, and crevices
low-temperature crack propagation in Alloy X-750 is an (sites where hydrogen might be generated).
important failure mechanism. This mechanism has been (d) Temper high-strength steels or use lower strength,
studied in depth at Bettis (reports by Symons and Mills) tougher materials.
and is believed to have caused failures of X-750 control (e) Use surface treatment that results in compressive
rod guide tube alignment pins in commercial PWRs. This residual stresses (and improved resistance to hydrogen-
topic is thoroughly reviewed in the X-750 chapter in induced cracking in normally susceptible materials).
EPRI’s Materials Handbook for Nuclear Plant Pressure (f) Apply coatings on susceptible materials (if environ-
Boundary Applications (ref. [9]). mentally compatible without risk of hydrogen
There have been isolated cases with alloys such as generation).
N07718 where some damage was experienced under con-
ditions of pure hydrogen, pressure as high as 5,000 psi W-3450 REFERENCES
(35 MPa), and a temperature of 1,250°F (675°C). [1] Metals Handbook, Vol. 11, “Failure Analysis and Pre-
Aluminum alloys occasionally experience hydrogen vention,” Ninth Ed., American Society for Metals
damage, but the problems are generally traced to voids (ASM) International, 1989.
in ingots that contained hydrogen gas prior to working. [2] “Transactions of the ASME,” Journal of Engineering for
Hydrogen damage has not been considered an industrial Power, pp. 299–352, July 1964.
problem with this alloy family. [3] Uhlig, H. H. Corrosion and Corrosion Control, J. Wiley &
Titanium alloys can experience hydrogen damage (em- Sons, Inc., 2008.
brittlement) due to absorbed hydrogen. The most com- [4] Stultz, S. C., and Kitto, J. B. Steam, 40th Ed., Babcock
mon hydrogen-induced problem affecting titanium in and Wilcox, 1992.
power plants is hydrogen embrittlement and cracking of [5] NACE TM0284, Evaluation of Pipeline and Pressure
condenser tubes at the tubesheet connection due to Vessel Steels for Resistance to Hydrogen-Induced
too-strong cathodic protection that results in ingress of Cracking, NACE International, 2003.

492
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

[6] NUREG/CR-6891, Crack Growth Rates of Irradiated [8] NUREG/CR-6964, Crack Growth Rates and Metallo-
Austenitic Stainless Steel Weld Heat Affected Zone in graphic Examinations of Alloy 600 and Alloy 82/182
BWR Environments, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commis- from Field Components and Laboratory Materials
sion, 2006. Tested in PWR Environments, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory
[7] NUREG/CR-6960, Crack Growth Rates and Fracture Commission, 2008.
Toughness of Irradiated Austenitic Stainless Steels in [9] Materials Handbook for Nuclear Plant Pressure
BWR Environments, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commis- Boundary Applications, EPRI 3002000122, Electric
sion, 2008. Power Research Institute, 2013.

493
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE W-4000
SUMMARIES OF OTHER DAMAGE MECHANISMS

W-4100 FRETTING AND WEAR Corrosive wear is a form of abrasive wear in which
chemical or electrochemical reactions accelerate the me-
W-4110 GENERAL DESCRIPTION tal loss between mating surfaces where sliding occurs. In
Fretting is a wear phenomenon that occurs between this mode of wear, it is unclear whether mechanical wear
two mating surfaces. Fretting generally occurs when precedes chemical actions or vice versa.
two tight-fitting surfaces are subjected to a cyclic motion Fretting corrosion is an attack that is accelerated by the
of extremely small amplitude (as in vibration). The term relative motion of contacting surfaces. The motion be-
“fretting” covers numerous forms of deterioration, includ- tween the surfaces removes protective films and results
ing fretting corrosion, false brinelling, friction oxidation, in accelerated attack. Also, most corrosion products are
chafing fatigue, molecular attrition, and wear oxidation abrasive, and their presence increases the removal of pro-
(refs. [1] through [17]). Fundamentally, the fretting pro- tective films, resulting in direct abrasion of the metal.
cess includes the following: Fretting is, however, still encountered in bolted joints
(a) initial adhesion and flanges where there is not enough bolt tension to
(b) oscillation accompanied by the generation of debris eliminate movement in the joint. Thermal expansion with
(c) fatigue and wear in the region of contact frequent cycling can also result in fretting attack. Any
Wear is the damage to a solid surface caused by re- combination of corrosion and wear will almost always
moval or displacement of material by the mechanical ac- be worse than the action of either one separately.
tion of another solid, a liquid, or a gas (or various Surface fatigue is another mode of wear in which parti-
combinations thereof). All mechanical components that cles of metal are detached from a surface under high cyc-
undergo sliding or rolling contact are subject to some de- lic contact stresses, causing pitting and spalling.
gree of wear. Wear may range from mild polishing over a See also W-2800 and W-2900 for discussion of
long period of time to rapid and severe removal of mate- flow-accelerated corrosion and erosion, respectively.
rial with accompanying surface roughening. There are nu-
merous wear modes, and they may change in service as a W-4120 MATERIALS
component wears.
The ASM Handbook (ref. [1]) provides numerous case
The following components have experienced thinning
histories of fretting and wear failures. These failures oc-
and leaks due to wear: flux thimbles, instrument and con-
curred for a variety of reasons, including initial base me-
trol rod guide tubes, vent valve (flow-induced vibration)
tal selection, heat treatment of the material, or alteration
(ref. [14]), steam generator tubes (ref. [17]), condenser
of the surface. Surface finish can also be a factor.
tubes, moisture separator reheater tubes, and feedwater
The components subject to wear are typically austenitic
heater tubes.
stainless steels such as Types 304 and 316, nickel-based
Adhesive wear occurs generally under nonlubricated
alloys such as Alloys 600 and 690, and carbon steel and
conditions when both contacting surfaces are metallic. It
copper materials in heat exchanger tubesheets and on
is also known as scoring, galling, seizing, or scuffing. Mi-
bolted flanges or connections. Wear rates of material cou-
croscopic projections from the mating surfaces bond at
ples are found in ref. [16].
the sliding interface under very high local pressure. As
the bonds are broken, material may be torn from one sur-
W-4130 DESIGN
face, or loose particles may be formed that then attribute
to abrasive wear. Fretting and wear failures can be brought about by de-
Abrasive wear occurs when hard particles of some ori- sign factors that allow any of the following:
gin slide or roll under pressure across a surface, cutting (a) relative motion between mating surfaces
grooves in the surface. Both of the mating sliding surfaces (b) high stresses in areas that must move with respect
may wear, or the particles may become embedded in one to one another
of the surfaces, causing abrasive wear to the mating sur- (c) the entry of aggressive species into mating surfaces
face. Abrasive wear may be grinding abrasion or Many of these causative factors are described in the
low-stress scratching abrasion. case histories presented in the ASM Handbook (ref. [1]).

494
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

W-4140 MITIGATING ACTIONS [4] Hochman, R. F. “Surface Modification,” Advanced Mate-

rials and Processes, pp. 29–30, Jan. 1995.
(a) Fretting and wear can be mitigated by the following:
[5] Abbot, J. S. “Hardcoat Anodizing Low Cost Coating for
(1) selecting the best base metals
Aluminum,” Advanced Materials and Processes, pp.
(2) using suitable lubricants to lessen the effects of
29–33, Sept. 1994.
wear
[6] d’Angello, C., and El Joundi, H. “Reliable Coatings Via
(3) designing to reduce the amount of relative vibra-
Plasma Arc Spraying,” Advanced Material and Processes,
tion or motion between mating surfaces
pp. 41–44, Dec. 1988.
(4) excluding aggressive chemicals from the mating
[7] Treglio, J. R., Perry, A. J., and Stinner, R. J. “Ion Beams
surfaces
Replace Chrome Plating,” Advanced Materials and Pro-
(5) designing to lower stresses between parts that cesses, pp. 29–32, May 1995.
will be moving with respect to one another [8] Johnson, R. N. “Tribological Coatings for Liquid Metal
(6) inserting stakes or additional antivibration bars and Irradiation Environments,” Coatings and Bimetal-
to reduce the amplitude of vibration lics for Aggressive Environments, American Society for
(7) removing deposits to reduce flow channeling and Metals (ASM) International, 1984.
the high flow velocities caused by the buildup of deposits [9] Kim, K. T., Suh, J. M. “Impact of Nuclear Fuel Assembly
in heat exchangers Design on Grid-to-Rod Fretting Wear,” Journal of Nucle-
(8) redesigning tube bundles to reduce peak flow ar Science and Technology, Vol. 46, No. 2, pp. 149–157,
velocities 2009.
(9) using improved surface finishes to minimize pro- [10] Jo, J. C., and Jhung, M. J. “Flow-induced Vibration and
jections and wear Fretting-Wear Predictions of Steam Generator Helical
(b) Surfaces of normally wear-prone materials can be Tubes,” Nuclear Engineering and Design, Vol. 238, No.
altered to significantly improve wear resistance. Hard- 4, pp. 890–903, 2008.
face materials that are applied by welding, such as Stel- [11] Kim, H., Lee, Y., and Lee, K. “On the Geometry of the
lites®, Norem®, Deloro®, and Colmonoy®, are the hard- Fuel Rod Supports Concerning a Fretting Wear Failure,”
facing alloys normally used in wear surfaces in light water Nuclear Engineering and Design, Vol. 238, No. 12, pp.
reactor (LWR) pump and valve applications. Stellite and 3321–3330, 2008.
cobalt-containing materials should be minimized in appli- [12] Jeong, S., Park, J., Lee, J., and Lee, Y. “Wear Transitions
cations where wear products can be transported to the of Tube-Support Components for a Nuclear Steam Gen-
reactor core. Surfaces can also be coated with a variety erator Under Fretting Conditions,” Key Engineering Ma-
of wear-resistant materials applied by one of the follow- terials, Vol. 326–328, pp. 1263–1266, 2006.
ing methods: [13] NUREG/CR-6924, Non-Destructive and Failure Eva-
(1) chemical vapor deposition (CVD) or physical va- luation of Tubing From a Retired Steam Generator,
por deposition (PVD) (ref. [4]) U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, 2007.
(2) hardcoat anodizing (ref. [5]) [14] Steam Generator Management Program: PWR Steam
(3) plasma arc spraying (ref. [6]) Generator Tube Wear-Alloy 690/SS316, Alloy 690/Al-
(4) ion implantation (ref. [7]) loy 690, EPRI 1020642, Electric Power Research Insti-
(5) detonation-gun or electrospark processes tute, 2010.
(ref. [8]) [15] Materials Reliability Program: PWR Internals Materi-
(6) conventional hard-chrome plating al Aging Degradation Mechanism Screening and
The Steam Generator Management Program, spon- Threshold Values (MRP-175), EPRI 1012081, Electric
sored by the Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI), Power Research Institute, 2005.
has conducted a set of experiments to determine the wear [16] “Review of the Wear and Galling Characteristics of
coefficients between Alloy 690 tubing and Type 316 stain- Stainless Steels,” Committee of Stainless Steel Produ-
less steel and between Alloy 690 tubing and Alloy 690 cers, American Iron and Steel Institute, 1978.
(ref. [14]). [17] Steam Generator Reference Book, EPRI TR-103824
Revision 1, Volume 1 , Electric Power Research Insti-
W-4150 REFERENCES tute, 1994.
[1] ASM Handbook, Vol. 11, “Failure Analysis and Preven-
tion,” American Society for Metals (ASM) International,
2014.
[2] ASM Handbook, Vol. 1, “Properties and Selection: Irons, W-4200 THERMAL FATIGUE
Steels, and High-Performance Alloys,” American Society W-4210 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
for Metals (ASM) International, 2014.
[3] ASM Handbook, Vol. 2, “Properties and Selection: Non- Fatigue is the progressive and localized structural dam-
ferrous Alloys and Special-Purpose Materials,” Ameri- age that occurs when a metal component is subjected to
can Society for Metals (ASM) International, 2014. cyclic loading. Cyclic loading on a reactor pressure

495
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

boundary component occurs due to changes in mechani- piping expansion and contraction can also lead to an accu-
cal and thermal loadings, as the system goes from one mulation of thermal stress cycles, when constrained by
state to another. pipe supports, etc., and should be considered in design.
Low cycle fatigue is associated with significant plastic Thermal stratification within a pipe or in a branch pipe
strains. High cycle fatigue occurs at stresses below the with a closed end can result in temperature differences
elastic limit (refs. [1] and [2]). between the top and bottom of the pipe. Thermal stratifi-
Thermal fatigue cracking has occurred in boiling water cation can also lead to thermal fatigue.
reactor (BWR) and pressurized water reactor (PWR) In all cases, fatigue damage most often occurs at loca-
feedwater nozzles. Thermal fatigue cracks have formed tions of stress concentration, generally at locations with
in BWR feedwater nozzles due to relatively low- a change of stiffness. In high cyclic areas, weld caps pro-
temperature feedwater bypassing the thermal sleeve/ vide a stress concentration and are often removed for bet-
sparger configuration in the nozzle to mix with the higher ter stress concentration management.
temperature reactor water and cause thermal cycling at
the nozzle corner and bore locations (refs. [3] and [4]). W-4220 MATERIALS
Stainless steel cladding on the low alloy steel nozzles am-
Nonbrittle materials are selected to minimize the po-
plified this effect due to differences in the coefficient of
tential for fatigue cracking in vessels and piping compo-
thermal expansion for the two metals (ref. [4]). In many
nents. Grades of carbon steel, low alloy steel, stainless
cases, these small cracks did not penetrate the clad on
steel, and nickel-based alloys that are not notch sensitive
the reactor vessel nozzles; however, thermal stresses
mini mi ze the p otential for c rack in itiation and
due to start-up, shutdown, and scram cycles could cause
propagation.
these cracks to grow to significant depths (refs. [3] and
Fabrication practices should minimize surface rough-
[4]).
ness, notches, cold work, forming stresses, and weld resi-
PWR feedwater line cracks have occurred at the pipe-
dual stresses to reduce possible material heterogeneities
to-nozzle weld counterbore discontinuity, due to the ther-
and “mean stress” effects in fatigue. Avoid discontinuities
mal stratification of feedwater flow at low-flow condi-
or crevices, which can act to initiate fatigue cracks. In low
tions (ref. [5]). Generally, in such cases of incomplete
alloy steel, sulfur content should be controlled.
mixing or turbulent flow producing temperature changes
(and stresses), higher frequency cycling is effective at
crack initiation, as it is more of a surface effect than low- W-4230 DESIGN
frequency thermal cycling, which is more of a gross wall The fatigue–analysis design procedure for vessel, pip-
thickness effect and can grow cracks to more significant ing, and bolting is described in NB-3200, NB-3600,
depths (ref. [4]). Also, there are a high number of thermal NC-3200, and Mandatory Appendices XIII and XIV. For
cycles on PWR charging line nozzles with temperature each alternating stress intensity, S a l t , the corresponding
step changes from 100°F to 500°F (38°C to 260°C) and si- number of allowable cycles, N, is determined from the fa-
multaneous pressure transients. tigue curves for the material under consideration (Man-
Low-cycle thermal fatigue can be categorized as a ser- datory Appendix I). The number of cycles specified, n ,
ies of large temperature changes with significant plastic for the design life of the component divided by N is the
strains. High-cycle (higher frequency) fatigue is some- partial usage factor for each specified load-pair alternat-
times known as thermal shock, which is associated with ing stress. The total cumulative usage factor (CUF) is
rapid temperature changes, such as heat-up followed the sum of the partial usage factors, and this must be less
quickly by cooldown. Thermal striping is an example of than 1 according to Miner’s rule (ref. [23]). When the ma-
this phenomenon (ref. [6]). Fast breeder reactor compo- terial is exposed to an LWR environment, W-2700 also
nents are subject to thermal striping as incompletely applies.
mixed streams of sodium at different temperatures im- Design specifications must quantify the bounding ther-
pinge on a metal surface, as in a liquid sodium mixing mal, pressure, vibration, and seismic cycles, including
tee (refs. [7] and [8]). Thermal striping can also occur consideration of on–off flow cycling of feedwater during
in LWR mixing tees with hot and cold water where com- hot standby, start-up and cooldown rates, reactor scrams,
plete fluid mixing does not occur. and stratification in piping (ref. [12]). Heavy-walled
Pressurized thermal shock of PWR reactor vessels, flanges and valves may also be susceptible to such ther-
caused by the introduction of cold safety injection water mal gradients when subjected to rapid temperature
into a relatively hot reactor vessel, is a low-cycle event changes. Usually, components must be on the order of
that can cause fatigue cracking in some postulated cases at least 1-in. to 2-in. (25-mm to 50-mm) thick for through-
(refs. [9] and [10]). Large diameter steel pipe, reinforced wall stresses to be significant, but stiffening rings and
by stiffening rings and saddle supports, can be subject to saddles on piping can add constraint and cause significant
thermal fatigue due to system start-up and shutdown. thermal stresses in even thinner pipes and tees (refs. [1]
Thermal lag between the pipe and stiffeners and supports and [11]). See Nonmandatory Appendix N for cyclic cri-
can lead to constraint and cracking (ref. [11]). Normal teria for earthquakes.

496
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

W-4240 MITIGATING ACTIONS AND REMEDIES presented at the Fourth National Congress on Pressure
Vessel and Piping Technology, ASME, Portland, OR,
The rate of temperature change can often be more cri-
June 19–24, 1983, PVP Vol. 71, pp. 93–110, ASME.
tical than thickness. Thermal sleeves, spargers, and flow
[3] Szabo, B. A., et al. “An Analysis of Ductile Crack Exten-
baffles must be designed adequately to prevent bypass
sion in BWR Feedwater Nozzles,” EPRI NP-1311, Elec-
leakage of cold fluid and the mixing of hot and cold fluids
tric Power Research Institute, 1980.
at the metal walls of equipment (ref. [13]). Temperature
[4] Watanabe, H. “BWR Feedwater Nozzle/Sparger Final
gradients may be reduced by minimizing temperature dif-
Report,” NEDO 21821-A, General Electric Co., Feb. 1980.
ferences between hot and cold fluids and by mixing them
[5] Enrietto, J. F., Bamford W. H., and White D. H. “Prelim-
away from metal walls.
inary Investigation of PWR Feedwater Line Cracking,”
Low-flow conditions, where hot and cold fluids exist, International Journal of Pressure Vessels and Piping,
and sudden flow changes should be avoided to mitigate Vol. 9, pp. 421–443, 1981.
top-to-bottom flow stratification and rapid temperature [6] Bhandari, S. K. “Thermal Fatigue–Thermal Striping” in
cycling for components. Bimetallic weld joints and clad Fracture, Fatigue, and Advanced Mechanics, Proceed-
materials should be carefully analyzed for fatigue damage ings of the 1985 Pressure Vessels and Piping Confer-
when large or rapid temperature changes are anticipated. ence, PVP Vol. 98-8, p. 135, ASME, 1985.
Nozzle blend radii should be designed to reduce areas of [7] Pradel, P. “The Main Objectives of Thermal Striping
high stress, and regions of stress concentration, such as Studies in Progress for French LMFBR Thermal Hy-
notches, should be eliminated. Surface degradation dur- draulic and Design Aspects,” in Fracture, Fatigue, and
ing operation and downtime, by pitting or stress corro- Advanced Mechanics, Proceedings of the 1985 Pressure
sion cracking, should be minimized. In general, the rules Vessels and Piping Conference, PVP Vol. 98-8, p.
for mitigating fatigue, such as avoiding aggressive envi- 143–146, ASME, 1985.
ronments, stress concentrations, residual stresses, and [8] Clayton, A. M., and Irvine, N. M. “Structural Assessment
surface roughness, should be followed when possible. Techniques for Thermal Striping,” in Fracture, Fatigue,
Monitoring for thermal mixing at key locations may be and Advanced Mechanics, Proceedings of the 1985
implemented, such as with thermocouples at feedwater Pressure Vessels and Piping Conference, PVP Vol.
nozzle thermal sleeves to check for bypass leakage. Peri- 98-8, p. 147–152, ASME, 1985.
odic inspection, especially by surface methods such as li- [9] Morrow, D. L. “Component Simulations of a Pressure
q u i d p e n e t r a n t o r m a g n e t i c p a r ti c l e t e s t i n g , i s Vessel Subject to Thermal Fluxes,” Thermal and Envi-
recommended at locations where thermal fatigue is sus- ronmental Effects in Fatigue: Research-Design Inter-
pected. Quantification of cycles and loads is a key input face, presented at Fourth National Congress on
for the fracture mechanics analysis employed to evaluate Pressure Vessel and Piping Technology, ASME, Port-
fixes and predict remaining life for equipment (ref. [12]). land, OR, June 19–24, 1983, PVP Vol. 71, pp. 59–73,
In areas of high cyclic services, fillet welds should be ASME.
avoided. Additionally, in such areas, weld caps should [10] Kussmaul, K., and Sauter, A. “Application of Ductile
be removed to reduce stress concentration. Stub-in Fracture Mechanics to Large Scale Experimental Simu-
branch connections should be avoided in favor of radii lation and Analyses for Pressurized Thermal Shock Be-
at the connection. havior of LWR RPV’s,” The Mechanism of Fracture,
presented at the International Conference and Exposi-
W-4250 MEAN STRESS tion on Fatigue, Corrosion Cracking, Fracture Me-
chanics, and Failure Analysis, Dec. 2–6, 1985, Salt
Mean stress in the presence of cyclic service can greatly Lake City, UT, pp. 75–87, American Society for Metals,
reduce the cyclic life of a component. Several correlations c. 1986.
exist for correcting the number of cycles to failure in cyc- [11] O’Donnell, W. J., et al. “Low Cycle Thermal Fatigue
lic service where a mean stress is present. The two most and Fracture of Reinforced Piping,” Analyzing Failures
common are Morrow’s mean stress correction (ref. [24]) — The Problems and Solutions, presented at the Inter-
and the Smith, Topper, and Watson (SWT) correction (ref. national Conference and Exposition on Fatigue Corro-
[25]). In Mandatory Appendix I, fatigue curves are pro- sion Cracking, Fracture Mechanics, and Failure
vided that are corrected for the maximum effects of mean Analysis, Dec. 2–6, 1985, Salt Lake City, UT, pp.
stress. 227–236, American Society for Metals (ASM) Interna-
tional, c. 1986.
W-4260 REFERENCES [12] “LWR Structural Materials Degradation Mechanisms
[1] Dieter, Jr., G. E. Mechanical Metallurgy, McGraw-Hill, — Preliminary Assessment of BWR Internals Life Limit-
pp. 333–334, 1961. ing Concerns,” Structural Integrity Associates Draft Re-
[2] Sehitoglu, H., and Morrow, J-D. “Characterization of port, EPRI RP2643-5, Electric Power Research Institute,
Thermo-Mechanical Fatigue,” Thermal and Environ- 1986.
mental Effects in Fatigue: Research-Design Interface,

497
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

[13] Copeland, J. F. “Application of Fatigue Crack Growth significant plastic deformation or rupture. Experience
Models to Data for BWR Feedwater Nozzle Evalua- has shown that while expected loads have been properly
tions,” Structural Integrity Associates Report SIR- treated, dynamic loads not explicitly considered during
86-010, Progress Report, EPRI RP1325-11. design have occurred in service, causing material degra-
[14] NUREG/CR-6909, Effect of LWR Coolant Environ- dation and component failure. Examples of unexpected
ments on the Fatigue Life of Reactor Materials, Rev. 1, dynamic loads are vibration, water hammer, and unstable
U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, 2014. fluid flow (refs. [33] through [40]).
[15] NUREG/CR-4513, Estimation of Fracture Toughness
of Cast Stainless Steels During Thermal Aging in LWR W-4311 Vibration Loads
Systems, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, 1994. Vibration loads originate from fluid-flow oscillations
[16] NUREG/CR-6142, Tensile-Property Characterization and rotating equipment.
of Thermally Aged Cast Stainless Steels, U.S. Nuclear Examples of vibration-induced dynamic loading prob-
Regulatory Commission, 1994. lems that have occurred in LWRs include PWR core barrel
[17] NUREG/CR-6275, Mechanical Properties of Ther- (including thermal shield) vibration, main coolant pump
mally Aged Cast Stainless Steels From Shippingport Re- shaft cracking, pipe weld fatigue cracking, and steam gen-
actor Components, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory erator and condenser tube failures (refs. [1] through [3],
Commission, 1995. [15], [17], and [18]). Vibration loads have also caused re-
[18] NUREG/CR-6428, Effects of Thermal Aging on Frac- curring weld failures by the fatigue of small socket welds
ture Toughness and Charpy-Impact Strength of Stain- (refs. [1] and [15] through [17]). Certain piping locations,
less Steel Pipe Welds, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory such as charging lines, have been particularly susceptible
Commission, 1996. to vibration conditions (ref. [1]). In some cases, these fail-
[19] NRC Regulatory Guide 1.207, Guidelines for Evaluat- ures in pipe have been due to inadequately supported
ing Fatigue Analyses Incorporating the Life Reduction pipe (ref. [1]) or operator-induced vibratory loads. Tubes
of Metal Components Due to the Effects of the Light- in heat exchangers tend to vibrate under the influence of
Water Reactor Environment for New Reactors, U.S. Nu- cross-flow and parallel-flow velocities, possibly leading to
clear Regulatory Commission, 2007. tube or support damage (refs. [2] and [44]). When the vi-
[20] ASME Code Case N-208-1, Fatigue Analysis for Preci- bration amplitude is high enough, the tubes impact and
pitation Hardening Nickel Alloy Bolting Material to experience thinning at midspan; when the amplitude is
Specification SB-637 N07718, Section III, Division 1, lower, fretting damage can occur at support points.
Class 1 Construction, ASME, 2003. Although fatigue failure is a major concern due to vibra-
[21] ASME Code Case N-643-2, Fatigue Crack Growth Rate tion loads, simple loss of function may also occur in com-
Curves for Ferritic Steels in PWR Water Environment, ponents such as bolting and valves (ref. [1]).
Section XI, Division 1, ASME, 2004. Flow-induced vibration has been identified as the
[22] Zechmeister, M. J., Reinheimer, R. D., Jones, D. P., and source of many safety relief valve failures in high-energy
Damiani, T. M. “Thermal Fatigue Testing and Analysis of piping systems, causing leakage, chatter, premature pop-
Stainless Steel Girth Butt Weld Piping” in the Proceed- off, fretting, galling, fatigue, and possible failure to oper-
ings of the ASME 2011 Pressure Vessel and Piping Divi- ate when required (ref. [5]).
sion Conference, Baltimore, MD, July 17–21, 2011, PVP High flow rates in BWR steam lines have led in some
2011-58024, ASME. cases (e.g., Quad Cities) to acoustic resonance and exces-
[23] Miner, A. M. “Cumulative Damage in Fatigue,” ASME sive vibration in the steam dryer inside the reactor vessel,
Journal of Applied Mechanics, I2, pp. A159–A164, 1945. which in turn led to cracking and loose parts. The cause,
[24] Morrow, J. “Fatigue Properties of Metals,” Section 3.2, mitigation, and prevention have been extensively studied
Fatigue Design Handbook, Pub. No. AE-4 SAE, Society of (e.g., refs. [45] through [47]). Serious situations arise
Automotive Engineers, 1968. when the input load synchronizes or nearly synchronizes
[25] Smith, K. N., Watson, P. and Topper, T. H. “A with the natural frequency of the system, structure, or
Strain-Stress Function for Fatigue of Materials,” Journal component.
of Materials, Vol. 5, pp. 767–768, 1970.
W-4312 Water Hammer
Water hammer loads are caused by hydraulic pressure
W-4300 DYNAMIC LOADING — VIBRATION, wave effects associated with rapid changes in fluid flow.
WATER HAMMER, AND UNSTABLE These changes may be initiated by rapid valve or pump
FLUID FLOW action, particularly with large differential pressure across
the valve or high fluid-flow capacity through the pump. In
W-4310 GENERAL DESCRIPTION other cases, water hammer may be caused by rapid con-
LWR components and structures are designed to ac- densation of steam or liquid flashing to steam followed
commodate loads that are expected in service. Particular by condensation with enough liquid in the system to
attention is given to limiting the effects of fatigue and transmit the pressure wave. Unanticipated water hammer

498
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

loads have caused piping support failures, deformation of energy inlet connections (ref. [2]). For new heat exchan-
piping and internals, and valve and pump damage (ref. ger applications or operating conditions, a conservative
[4]). flow-induced vibration evaluation that includes the fol-
lowing considerations (refs. [2] and [6] through [12])
W-4313 Unstable Fluid Flow should be performed:
Unstable fluid flow has been shown to have an effect on (a) local cross-flow velocity
corrosion layers in pipelines containing gas, oil, and (b) annular clearance between tube and support
water; however, the infrequent nature of unstable fluid- (c) tube natural frequency
flow conditions in nuclear plant systems has generally
(d) tube vortex shedding
not been linked to increased corrosion.
(e) tube turbulent buffing
W-4320 MATERIALS (f) fluid elastic conditions and damping
Degradation or failure due to unexpected dynamic (g) midspan deflection limits
loads is not a material problem and is generally a design (h) any tube-bundle staking
and operational issue. Where dynamic load problems are Nonmandatory Appendix N illustrates some acceptable
expected, the inspection methods to be used are those dynamic analysis methods that can be used in nuclear
that would be used to identify fatigue, anchor and support component design.
looseness, or excessive plastic deformation.

W-4330 DESIGN
W-4332 Water Hammer
In general, dynamic load problems cannot be quantified
and identified until preoperational and operation testing Water hammer, or steam hammer, is a pressure surge
is conducted. Designing to avoid these dynamic loads or wave resulting when a liquid, gas, or mixture in motion
can be very difficult, especially for piping and instrumen- is forced to stop or change direction suddenly (momen-
tal systems due to the number of possible configurations, tum change), when there is a sudden change in density
variations in pipe size, etc. Proven geometries that have (steam quenching and collapse), or when a pump stops
not experienced dynamic load problems should be used (check valve slam). Water hammer commonly occurs
for new component design. Product development testing when a valve is opened or closed suddenly at an end of
and operational restriction considerations should be fo- a piping system, and a pressure wave propagates in the
cused on preventing the occurrence of the dynamic load. pipe. This pressure wave can cause major problems, from
Typical restrictions involve limitations on pump speed, noise and vibration to pipe collapse or rupture. It is pos-
fluid flow across tubes and other flexible structures, and sible to reduce the effects of the water hammer pulses
generation of steam pockets in typically liquid-phase with bypass/equalizing lines, accumulators, “keep-full”
systems. pumps, and other features.
As with vibration issues, water hammer problems are
W-4331 Vibration difficult to quantify and identify during initial design.
Piping system vibration issues can be reduced by the These in general arise during preoperational testing and
appropriate application of past operating experience, his- start-up and during plant operation. The most effective
torical failure data (refs. [1] and [15] through [17]), and design aid is to review industry historical experience
available test data (ref. [13]). Socket welds should be (ref. [4]) and attempt to avoid component and system
avoided in systems prone to vibration (ref. [13]) and, if configurations that have resulted in previous water ham-
needed, should use configurations that are more fatigue mer problems. Items that can be of concern include
resistant (refs. [14] and [18]). fast-acting valves, line voids due to throttling of flows,
and low and high points that can trap water, steam, or air.
Adequate piping supports or rerouting can limit piping
failures due to vibration loads (ref. [1]). Flow-induced vi- Unexpected valve leakage from normally isolated por-
bration in safety relief valves has been found to be caused tions of systems to normally cold piping can result in
by an unstable coupling of vortex shedding at the mouth steam and thermal stratification in the piping. This can
of the valve with the side-branch acoustic resonance (ref. cause loosening of pipe supports, damage to concrete an-
[5]). Thus, proper side-branch sizing and flow- chorage, and water hammer and pump steam binding
stabilization techniques to properly design the main when flow is initiated. Operational checks should be used
pipe-to-valve transition can control this problem (ref. to detect the unwanted presence of steam in piping due to
[5]). leakage and during pump tests and valve manipulations
With regard to flow-induced vibration in heat exchan- before it can cause damage (ref. [48]).
ger tubes such as condensers, typical causes of vibration Water hammer and steam hammer issues have been
problems are excessive spacing between supports and in- studied and tested (refs. [15], [16], [24] through [44],
adequate baffling for the dispersion of the flow jet at high- [48], and [49]).

499
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

W-4340 START-UP AND PREOPERATIONAL W-4352 Water Hammer

TESTING As with emergent operational vibration issues, emer-
Long-term operational issues arising from dynamic gent operational water hammer issues usually arise as a
loads can be reduced with a thorough and extensive pre- result of changes in system operational conditions, such
operational and start-up testing program. Ideally, all as changes to flow, valve settings, and pump speed, and
safety-related systems (Section III, Classes 1 through 3) modification of piping routings.
should be functionally tested for dynamic loads. Once a water hammer has occurred, the first action re-
quired is determination of the magnitude of the water
W-4341 Vibration hammer loads (refs. [24], [26] through [28], and [30]
through [32]) and evaluation of the effects of the water
Vibration testing performed during preoperational and hammer on the component and system. A determination
start-up testing of the piping system should be conducted can then be made if the component or system can be re-
in accordance with ASME OM (ref. [20]). This should in- turned to service or if repair is required. The next action
clude monitoring for steady-state and transient vibration is to identify the source of the water hammer and take the
issues. Design modifications, as necessary, should be im- actions necessary to prevent future occurrences (refs.
plemented to resolve any problems identified during [25] and [29]).
testing.
W-4360 REFERENCES
W-4342 Water Hammer [1] Murphy, G. “Survey of Operating Experience to Identify
Preoperational and start-up testing should include the Structural Degradation of Nuclear Power Plant Compo-
function testing of as many systems as is possible. This nents,” International Journal of Pressure Vessels and Pip-
testing can help detect or identify water hammer prob- ing, Vol. 22, No. 1, pp. 31–40, 1986.
lems. Review and evaluation of such water hammer [2] Nichols, J. C. “Flow Induced Vibration Problems,” Pre-
should be conducted as suggested in W-4352. vention of Condenser Failures – The State of the Art,
Syrett, B. C., Ed., EPRI RD-2282-SR, Electric Power Re-
search Institute, Mar. 1982.
W-4350 OPERATIONAL DETECTION AND [3] Weidenhamer, G. H. “Vibration Induced Failures in Nu-
MITIGATION clear Piping Systems,” in Transactions of the Seventh
Mitigating actions and remedies other than those de- International Conference on Structural Materials in Re-
sign actions and testing cited in W-4330 and W-4340 actor Technology, Aug. 22–26, 1983, Paper D1/1, Vol.
should focus on identification and elimination of those si- D., North-Holland, 1983.
tuations that can produce excessive dynamic loads. To [4] NUREG-0927, Evaluation of Water Hammer Experi-
identify these actions, plant operating experience records ence in Nuclear Power Plants, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory
must be reviewed, and analyses performed, as discussed Commission, 1984.
in W-4351 and W-4352. [5] Baldwin, R. M., and Simmons, H. R. “Flow-Induced Vi-
bration in Safety Relief Valves,” Journal of Pressure Ves-
sel Technology, Vol. 108, p. 267, Aug. 1986.
W-4351 Vibration
[6] Connors, H. J. “Fluid Elastic Vibration of Heat Exchan-
Emergent operational vibration problems arise from ger Tube Arrays,” Journal of Mechanical Design, Vol.
changes in the component configurations or operating 100, pp. 347–353, Apr. 1978.
conditions. The component configuration changes can oc- [7] Hartlen, R. T. “Wind-Tunnel Determination of Fluid
cur due to wear, degradation, or planned physical modifi- Elastic Vibration Thresholds for Typical
cations of the component. Operating condition changes Heat-Exchanger Tube Patterns,” Ontario Hydro Re-
occur when the system operational use of a component search Division Report No. 74-309-K, dated Aug. 26,
is changed. They can involve changes in flow rates, valve 1974.
settings, equipment operation speeds, etc. Identification [8] Weaver, D. S., and Grover, L. K. “Cross Flow Induced Vi-
and resolution of emergent vibration issues require con- brations in a Tube Bank,” ASME paper 78-PVP-25, pre-
tinued monitoring (refs. [21] through [23]) of plant com- sented at Joint ASME/CSME Pressure Vessel and Piping
ponents (refs. [2], [10], [11], [14], and [16]). In cases of Conference, Montreal, Canada, June 25–30, 1978.
piping failure due to vibration, sleeving or weld repairs [9] Pettigrew, M. J., Sylvestre, Y., and Campagna, A. O.
may provide an interim fix, to be followed by adding pip- “Flow Induced Vibration Analysis of Heat Exchanger
ing supports or rerouting the pipes. Corrective actions in and Steam Generator Designs,” AECL Report 5826,
heat exchangers involve additional tube support, staking Atomic Energy of Canada Ltd., Aug. 1977.
of the tube bundle, installation of additional flow- [10] Sebald, J. F., and Nobles, W. D. “Control of Tube Vibra-
dispersion baffling, and the reduction of volumetric flow tion in Steam Surface Condensers,” American Power
into the heat exchanger (ref. [2]). Conference, 1962.

500
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

[11] Feedwater Heater Workshop Proceedings, New Or- [27] Shapiro, A. H. The Dynamics and Thermodynamics of
leans, LA, Mar. 13–14, 1979, EPRI WS-78-133, Electric Compressible Fluid Flow, Vols. 1 and 2, Ronald, 1954.
Power Research Institute. [28] Wylie, E. B., and Streeter, V. L. Fluid Transients in Sys-
[12] Blevins, R. D. Flow-Induced Vibration, Van Nostrand tems, Prentice Hall, 1993.
Reinhold, c. 1990. [29] Water Hammer Prevention, Mitigation, and Accom-
[13] Adams, T. M., and Flensburg, W. C. “Comparison of modation, Vols. 1–6, EPRI 6766, Electric Power Re-
Austenitic Stainless Steel Fatigue S–N Data for Applica- search Institute, 1996.
tion to Socket Welded Piping Systems Subject to High [30] Streeter, V. L., and Lai, C. “Waterhammer Analysis In-
Cycle, Low Amplitude Loads,” presented at the 1997 cluding Fluid Friction,” Journal of the Hydraulics Divi-
Pressure Vessel and Piping Conference, Orlando, FL, sion, Vol. 88, No. HY3, American Society of Civil
July 27–31, 1997, PVP Vol. 353, ASME. Engineers, May 1962.
[14] EPRI Fatigue Management Handbook, Vol. 3, S. Gos- [31] Wylie, E. B., and Streeter, V. L. Fluid Transients,
selin, Project Manager, Electric Power Research Insti- McGraw Hill, 1978.
tute, Dec. 1994. [32] Moody, F. J. Introduction to Unsteady Thermo-Fluid
[15] Bush, S. H. “A Review of Nuclear Piping Failures and Mechanics, Wiley Interscience, 1990.
Their Use in Establishing the Reliability of Piping Sys- [33] Information Notice No. 89-80, Potential for Water
tems,” presented at the 1999 Pressure Vessel and Pip- Hammer, Thermal Stratification, and Steam Binding in
ing Conference, Boston, MA, July 1999, PVP Vol. 392, High-Pressure Coolant Injection Piping, U.S. Nuclear
ASME. Regulatory Commission, Dec. 1, 1989.
[16] Hopkins, D. N., and Benac, D. J. “Evaluation of Fatigue [34] Information Notice No. 85-76, Recent Water Hammer
Induced Field Failures of Socket-Welded Joints, in Small Events, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Sept. 19,
Bore Piping,” presented at the 1999 Pressure Vessel 1985.
and Piping Conference, Boston, MA, July 1999, PVP [35] Information Notice No. 86-01, Failure of Main Feed-
Vol. 392, ASME. water Check Valves Causes Loss of Feedwater System
[17] Cooper, G. D., and Barnes, R. W. “Failure Rules in Pip- Integrity and Water Hammer Damage, U.S. Nuclear Reg-
ing Manufactured to Different Standards,” presented for ulatory Commission, Jan. 1, 1986.
Atomic Energy Control Board, AECB Project No. [36] Information Notice No. 87-10, Potential for Water
2.275.1, Nov. 1995. Hammer During Restart of Residual Heat Removal
[18] Wachel, J. C., Morton, S. J., and Atkins, K. E. “Piping Vi- Pumps, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Feb. 2,
brations Analysis,” in the Proceedings of the 19th Tur- 1987.
bomachinery Symposium, pp. 119–134, Texas A&M [37] Information Notice No. 88-13, Water Hammer and
University, 1990. Possible Piping Damage Caused by Misapplication of
[19] Wachel, J. C. “Field Investigation of Piping System for Kerotest Packless Metal Diaphragm Globe Valves, U.S.
Vibration Induced Failures,” 1982 Pressure Vessel and Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Apr. 18, 1988.
Piping Conference, Orlando, FL, June 27–July 2, 1982, [38] NRC Bulletin 85-01, Steam Binding of Auxiliary Feed-
Vol. H00219, pp. 209–229, ASME. water Pumps, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, Oct.
[20] ASME OM-2012, Operation and Maintenance of Nu- 29, 1985.
clear Power Plants; Division 2, OM Standards; Part 3, [39] NRC Bulletin No. 88-08, Thermal Stresses in Piping
Vibration Testing of Piping Systems. Connected to Reactor Coolant Systems, June 22, 1988;
[21] ASME OM-2012, Operation and Maintenance of Nu- Supplement 1, June 24, 1988; Supplement 2, Aug. 4,
clear Power Plants; Division 3, OM Guides; Part 11, Vi- 1988; and Supplement 3, Apr. 11, 1988, U.S. Nuclear
bration Testing and Assessment of Heat Exchangers. Regulatory Commission.
[22] ASME OM-2012, Operation and Maintenance of Nu- [40] NUREG 0927, Rev. 1, Evaluation of Water Hammer
clear Power Plants; Division 3, OM Guides; Part 14, Vi- Occurrence in Nuclear Power Plants, U.S. Nuclear Reg-
bration Monitoring of Rotating Equipment in Nuclear ulatory Commission, Mar. 1984.
Power Plants. [41] Water Hammer Handbook for Nuclear Plant Engi-
[23] ASME OM-2012, Operation and Maintenance of Nu- neers and Operators, EPRI TR-106438, Electric Power
clear Power Plants; Division 3, OM Guides; Part 23, In- Research Institute, 1996.
service Monitoring of Reactor Internals Vibration in [42] Generic Letter 96-06, Waterhammer Issues Resolu-
Pressurized Water Reactor Power Plants. tion: User’s Manual, EPRI 1006456, Electric Power Re-
[24] Parmakian, J. Waterhammer Analysis, Dover Publica- search Institute, 2002.
tions, 1963. [43] Generic Letter 96-06, Waterhammer Issues Resolu-
[25] Sharp, B. B., and Sharp, D. B. Water Hammer: Practi- tion Technical Basis Report, EPRI 1003098, Electric
cal Solutions, Butterworth-Heinemann, 1995. Power Research Institute, 2002.
[26] Streeter, V. L., and Wylie, E. B. Hydraulic Transients,
McGraw-Hill, 1967.

501
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

[44] Root Cause Analysis Report for Tube Wear Identified ∼620°F (∼327°C). These temperatures are below the
in the Unit 2 and Unit 3 Steam Generators of San Onofre creep range for most Section III materials. Temperature
Nuclear Generating Station, NRC public document limits below which design for creep time dependency is
ML13065A097, U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission, not required are ∼700°F (∼370°C) for ferritic steels and
2013. 800°F (425°C) for austenitic steels and alloys (ref. [2]).
[45] Technical Assessment: Quad Cities Unit 2 Steam However, creep and creep fatigue are very important in
Dryer Failure — Determination of Root Cause and Ex- the design of components for use in nuclear power plants,
tent of Condition, Rev. 0, GENE-0000-0018-3359-NP, such as liquid metal fast breeder reactors (LMFBRs) and
ML032340379, General Electric, 2003. high-temperature gas reactors (HTGRs), where tempera-
[46] Morita, R., Takashahi S., Okuyama, K. Inada, F., Oga- tures are in the creep range.
wa. Y., and Yoshikawa, K. “Evaluation of Acoustic- and Irradiation has an effect on creep and stress relaxation
Flow-Induced Vibration of the BWR Main Steam Lines behavior for austenitic stainless steel and nickel alloys
and Dryer,” Journal of Nuclear Science and Technology, stressed at or above the yield strength and exposed to sig-
Vol. 48, No. 5, pp. 759–776, 2012. nificant irradiation [on the order of 1 × 10 21 n/cm 2
[47] ESBWR Steam Dryer Meeting with NRC, (E > 1 MeV)]. However, especially in BWRs, intergranular
ML120300012, GE Hitachi, 2012. stress corrosion cracking (IGSCC) is usually of more con-
[48] Information Notice No. 86-01, Potential for Water cern for these components than creep (ref. [3]). Some
Hammer, Thermal Stratification, and Steam Binding in typical reactor vessel components for which irradiation-
High-Pressure Coolant Injection Piping, U.S. Nuclear enhanced creep may occur are austenitic stainless steel
Regulatory Commission, 1989. components, such as reactor internals bolting, cladding
[49] Ware, A. G. “Moment Loads Induced by Pressure and of control rods, absorber rods, and neutron sources; Alloy
Momentum Forces in Piping,” Journal of Pressure Vessel X-750 components, such as springs and bolts; Alloy 718
Technology, Vol. 104, No. 4, pp. 268–271, 1982. springs; and Alloy 625 cladding of control rods (ref. [3]).
High-temperature piping is far from being passive. It is
subject to a severe ther mal range and, in high-
W-4400 CREEP temperature plants (e.g., LMFBRs and gas-cooled plants),
may operate well into the creep range. Cyclic operation of
W-4410 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
the plant subjects the piping to mechanical and thermal
“Elevated-temperature service” means service above fatigue mechanisms, and poor or defective support as-
the temperature at which creep effects become signifi- semblies can impose massive loads. Many factors need
cant. This threshold is 700°F (370°C) for many ferritic to be considered in both the design phase and the long-
materials (carbon and low alloy steel materials) and term maintenance of piping systems. While current de-
800°F (425°C) or higher for austenitic materials [the high sign codes, allied with modern computer-aided analysis,
alloy materials, such as stainless steel (ref. [14]). See Sec- provide a sound basis for piping installations, the long-
tion III, Division 5, High Temperature Reactors. term integrity of piping is a concern. There are many vari-
As temperature increases, creep failures become more ables associated with older systems, such as the residual
likely. Creep failure is primarily an intergranular fracture stresses arising from construction and repairs (loss of
phenomenon (that occurs at relatively high tempera- cold springing), variations in piping wall thickness, fric-
tures) defined as the progressive deformations of a mate- tional effects of pipe support units, operating tempera-
rial at constant stress (ref. [1]). Creep failure (fracture) is ture history, and, not least, the physical properties of
known as stress rupture and reflects the effect of tem- the pipe material and its creep behavior. It is impractical
perature on long-term, load-bearing characteristics (ref. for all the pertinent information to be available. As a re-
[1]). sult, most utilities adopt a strategy to monitor the condi-
The three stages of creep, as follows, should be consid- tion of the piping, backed up with engineering and
ered in design (ref. [1]): metallurgical assessments to provide a high degree of
(a) primary creep due to initial, transient loading confidence in the integrity of high-temperature piping
(b) secondary, or steady-state, creep, where the creep systems.
rate is measured
(c) tertiary creep, leading to instability and failure W-4420 MATERIALS
Stress relaxation is a related phenomenon in which the Selection of materials for creep-rupture resistance is
stress in a member decreases, when a constant amount of usually based upon creep test results. However, this is
deformation is applied, due to creep (ref. [1]). In this case, not always a simple matter, since it is physically difficult
stress relaxation in bolted joints and shrunk or press-fit to perform creep-rupture tests at relatively low service
components can result in leaks or loss of function (ref. temperature. At low temperatures, the stress must exceed
[1]). Creep is not generally a major consideration in the material yield strength to produce failure in a reason-
LWRs. BWRs operate at approximately 550°F (290°C), able time (ref. [2]). Thus, time–temperature parameters
and PWRs operate with hot-leg temperatures up to are employed to extrapolate results to lower

502
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

temperatures, and some uncertainty can exist (ref. [2]). repeated stress reversals that accompany start-up and
ASME Code databases and design factors account for such shutdown operations (ref. [9]). Significant stress relaxa-
uncertainties (ref. [2]). tion can cause functional problems in equipment and pos-
Environmental effects, such as carbon transport in the sible shortened fatigue life in bolts due to decreased
liquid sodium coolant of LMFBRs (ref. [5]), can be signifi- preload (ref. [4]).
cant and should be considered. Significant carburization The design must take into appropriate account all rea-
or decarburization can occur in austenitic/ferritic alloy sonably foreseeable degradation mechanisms, including
piping systems and can influence creep rupture and fati- creep and the related number of design hours at specified
gue properties (ref. [5]). The effects of helium on the temperatures. Creep is specifically included in the design
creep properties of Types 304 and 316 and other heat ex- of underground ventilated storage modules (ref. [11]).
changer alloys have been shown to be relatively small for The allowable stress values for bolting are somewhat
HTGRs (ref. [6]). lower than those for other components. Special rules ap-
Significant stress relaxation has been demonstrated in ply when temperatures are in the creep range (ref. [11]).
tests for Type 304 stainless steel, Alloy X-750, and Alloy
718 during irradiation in-pile to fluences equal to or W-4440 MITIGATING ACTIONS
greater than 5 × 1021 n/cm2 (E > 1 MeV) (ref. [4]). In Nuclear equipment, which operates at elevated tem-
these conditions, relaxation of stress ranged from 60% peratures in the creep range, must be designed in accor-
to 100%, for irradiation at 140°F to 600°F (60°C to dance with Section III, Division 5, Subsection HB,
315°C) (ref. [4]). Subpart B. Creep rupture and creep-fatigue evaluations
In addition, the cold preloaded stress of Type 304 bolts are required. In other cases not covered by the Code, pre-
was reduced from 20-ksi (140-MPa) cold preloaded diction of long-term properties may be pursued by time–
stress to 10 ksi (70 MPa) after reactor heat-up to 550°F temperature extrapolation of test data (ref. [1]). For ex-
(288°C) and irradiation at 6 × 1019 n/cm2 (E > 1 MeV) ample, Steam Turbine Rotor Analysis Program (STRAP)
(ref. [4]). is a computer program for steam turbine rotors that pre-
Creep-fatigue testing of 21/4 Cr–1Mo steel and austenitic dicts rotor lifetime based on duty cycles and ultrasonic
stainless steels for LMFBRs has shown that damage in- test (UT) results (ref. [10]). This program contains frac-
creases when creep and fatigue loadings are interspersed ture toughness, stress rupture, yield strength, and fatigue
(ref. [7]). In this case, the creep resistance is decreased by crack growth rate data for air-melted 1Cr–Mo–V forgings
imposing transient plastic strains (ref. [7]). In general, (ref. [10]).
more stable microstructures are thought to result in bet- The accurate, or conservative, prediction of creep rup-
ter long-term resistance to creep rupture (ref. [8]). Stable ture and creep-fatigue damage, and design in accordance
microstructures, such as those produced by complete an- with these concepts, is the most effective mitigating ac-
nealing or normalizing and tempering, can show lower tion or remedy. However, other parameters can also
rupture strength at short times but are more resistant affect creep and stress relaxation and should be con-
to microstructure transformations, which can degrade trolled where possible.
properties at long times. The material exhibits satisfac- Irradiation of susceptible parts and cold work, which
tory, well-characterized compatibility with sodium and can undergo stress relaxation, should be minimized,
water environments and provides adequate mechanical where practical. Bolting applications in high-radiation
properties for a 210,000-hr design life (ref. [8]). However, fields should be designed for possible reduced preload
it must be mentioned that there is a sparsity of creep- to account for stress relaxation.
rupture data at long times, and properties in this regime
are determined by extrapolation methods in most cases W-4450 REFERENCES
(ref. [2]). [1] Dieter, Jr., G. E. Mechanical Metallurgy, Third Ed., pp.
335–369, McGraw-Hill, 1986.
W-4430 DESIGN [2] Goldhoff, R. M., et al. “Development of Standard Meth-
Limitations on operation and design are specified by odology for the Correction and Extrapolation of Ele-
Section III, Division 5, Subsection HB, Subpart B for vated Temperature Creep and Rupture Data,” Vols. 1
elevated-temperature applications where creep is a sig- and 2, EPRI FP-1062, Electric Power Research Institute,
nificant factor. This subsection recognizes three creep Apr. 1979.
properties for elevated temperature design: rupture [3] Garzarolli, F., Alter, D., and Dewes, P. “Deformability of
stress, stress for 1% strain, and stress for beginning of Austenitic Stainless Steels and Ni-Base Alloys in the
tertiary creep (ref. [2]). Core of a Boiling and Pressurized Water Reactor” in
If significant creep takes place locally (due to a local hot the Proceedings of the Second International Sympo-
spot, etc.), large residual tensile stresses are frozen into sium on Environmental Degradation of Materials in Nu-
the metal after cooldown (ref. [9]). The stresses can be clear Power Systems — Water Reactors, Monterey, CA,
greater than ASME Code-allowable stresses and are most Sept. 9–12, 1985, pp. 131–138, American Nuclear So-
important in fatigue, where damage is caused by the ciety.

503
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

[4] Copeland, J. F., and Giannuzzi, A. J. “Long-Term Integ- vated Temperatures in Nuclear Power Generation,
rity of Nuclear Power Plant Components,” EPRI NP- presented at the Winter Annual Meeting of ASME,
3673-LD, Electric Power Research Institute, 1984. Houston, TX, Nov. 30–Dec. 3, 1975, pp. 55–84, ASME.
[5] Yuen, J. L., and Copeland, J. F. “Fatigue Crack Growth [9] Boumert, K. L., and Secrist, D. A. “Inelastic Analysis of a
Behavior of Stainless Steel Type 316 Plate and 16-8-2 Hot Spot on a Heavy Vessel Wall,” Analyzing Failures:
Weldments in Air and High-Carbon Liquid Sodium,” The Problems and the Solutions, International Confer-
Transactions of the ASME, Vol. 101, pp. 214–223, July ence on Fatigue, Corrosion Cracking, Fracture Me-
1979. chanics and Failure Analysis, Salt Lake City, UT, Dec.
[6] Nix, W. D., and Fuchs, K. P. “The Effects of Gaseous En- 2–6, 1985, pp. 287–297, American Society for Metals
vironments in Gas-Cooled Reactors and Solar Thermal (ASM) International, 1986.
Heat Exchangers on the Creep and Creep-Rupture [10] Brown, S. D., et al. “Steam Turbine Rotor Reliability
Properties of Heat-Resisting Metals and Alloys,” EPRI — Task Details,” EPRI NP-923, Electric Power Research
ER-415, Electric Power Research Institute, Feb. 1977. Institute, Nov. 1978.
[7] Curran, R. M., and Wundt, B. M. “Interpretive Report on [11] Hahn, B., Bühl, G., Weber, J., and Nerger, D. “In-Service
Notched and Unnotched Creep Fatigue Interspersion Condition Monitoring of Piping Systems,” OMMI, Vol. 1,
Tests in Cr–Mo–V, 21/4Cr–1Mo and Type 304 Stainless Issue 1, Apr. 2002, http://www.ommi.co.uk/PDF/
Steel,” MPC-8, Ductility and Toughness Considerations Articles/33.pdf.
in Elevated Temperature Service, presented at the Win- [12] Berton, M. N., Cabrillat, M. T., Ancelet, O., and Chapu-
ter Annual Meeting of ASME, San Francisco, CA, Dec. liot, S. “Propositions of Improvements of RCC-MR
10–15, 1978, pp. 281–314, ASME. Creep-Fatigue Rules,” PVP 2007, ASME, July 2007.
[8] Copeland, J. F., and Licina, G. J. “A Review of [13] Meyers, M. A., and Chawla, K. K. Mechanical Metal-
21⁄4Cr–1Mo Steel for LMFBR Steam Generator Applica- lurgy: Principles and Applications, Prentice-Hall, 1984.
tions,” MPC-1, Structural Materials for Service at Ele- [14] Rao, K. R. Companion Guide to Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code, Vol. 1, Fourth Ed., Chap. 12, ASME, 2012.

504
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX Y ð17Þ

EVALUATION OF THE DESIGN OF RECTANGULAR AND HOLLOW

CIRCULAR CROSS SECTION WELDED ATTACHMENTS ON PIPING

ARTICLE Y-1000 ð17Þ

INTRODUCTION AND SCOPE

Y-1100 INTRODUCTION (b) This Appendix is limited to use in Division 1, Sub-

section NB, NC, and ND, and Division 5, Subsection HB,
Y-1110 SCOPE Subpart A and Subsection HC, Subpart A piping systems.
(a) The Articles of this Appendix provide rules and ser- (c) The rules presented here are not intended to ex-
vice limits which may be used to evaluate the design of clude other methods such as finite element analyses.
both rectangular cross section and hollow circular cross
section welded attachments on pipe.

505
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE Y-2000
PROCEDURE FOR EVALUATION OF THE DESIGN OF
RECTANGULAR CROSS SECTION ATTACHMENTS ON CLASS 1
PIPING

Eα = modulus of elasticity, E, times the mean coefficient

Y-2100 INTRODUCTION of thermal expansion, α , both at room tempera-
Y-2110 SCOPE ture, psi/°F (kPa/°C)
K l = 2.0 for as‐welded full penetration welds and 1.3
This Article provides rules and service limits which
for ground fillet welds as per Figure Y-2300-1
may be used to evaluate the design of rectangular cross
L a = lesser of L 2 and T , in. (mm)
section welded attachments on Class 1 pipe under Section
L b = lesser of L 1 and T , in. (mm)
III, Division 1.
L c = lesser of L 1 and L 2 , in. (mm)
L d = greater of L 1 and L 2 , in. (mm)
M L = bending moment applied to the attachment as
Y-2200 LIMITATIONS TO APPLICABILITY shown in Figure Y-2300-1, in.-lb (kN·m)

(a) The attachment shall be welded to the pipe by a full

penetration weld (see Figure Y-2300-1).
(b) The attachment material and pipe material shall
have essentially the same moduli of elasticity and coeffi- Figure Y-2300-1
cients of thermal expansion. Nomenclature Illustration
(c) β 1 ≤ 0.5, β 2 ≤ 0.5, and the product β 1 × β 2 ≤ 0.075,
where β 1 and β 2 are defined in Y-2300. 2L2 ML
(d) The attachment is made on straight pipe, with the MT
nearest edge of the attachment weld located at a mini- Q2 Q2
2L1
mum distance of from any other weld or other dis- W
continuity; R and T are defined in Y-2300. For multiple Q1 MN
Q1
attachments located at a distance less than to each
other, the stress effects for each individual attachment (a) [Note (1)]
shall be superimposed.
(e) D o /T ≤ 100.

rf rf rf rf
Y-2300 NOMENCLATURE AND DEFINITIONS
(SEE FIGURE Y-2300-1)
T
The nomenclature defined below is used in the equa-
tions and figures of this Article.
= greater of M T /{L c Ld T[1 + (L c /L d )]} and M T /{[0.8 rf  T
+ 0.05(L d /L c )]L c 2L d }, psi (kPa)
A l = 4L 1 L 2 , in.2 (mm2) (b) [Note (2)]
B L = (2/3)C L , but not less than 1.0
B N = (2/3)C N , but not less than 1.0 NOTES:
B T = (2/3)C T , but not less than 1.0 (1) Graphic representation of L 1 , L 2 , W , M L , M N , Q 1 , Q 2 , and M T ; L 1
and L 2 are to be measured along the surface of the run pipe.
C L = 0.26 (γ )1.74 β 1 β 2 2η 4.74 ≥ 1.0 Welds or fillet radii between attachment and pipe are not to be
C N = 0.38 (γ )1.90 β 1 2β 2 η 3.40 ≥ 1.0 included.
C T = 3.82 (γ )1.64 β 1 β 2 η 1.54 ≥ 1.0 (2) Ground weld or integrally cast attachment; K l = 1.3. For as-
D o = outside diameter of pipe, in. (mm) welded or fillet radii r f ≤ T, use K l = 2.0.

506
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

M N = bending moment applied to the attachment as NB‐3650 equations. For example, in calculating S m l for
shown in Figure Y-2300-1, in.-lb (kN·m) use in NB‐3652 eq. (9), W , M L , M N , Q 1 , Q 2 , and M T are
M T = torsional moment applied to the attachment as the loads on the attachment due to mechanical loads.
shown in Figure Y-2300-1, in.-lb (kN·m) There are additional equations given in Y-2410(c) that
Q 1 = shear load applied to the attachment as shown in also must be checked for attachment stresses. These are
Figure Y-2300-1, lb (kN) based on the absolute values of maximum loads occurring
Q 2 = shear load applied to the attachment as shown in simultaneously under all service loading conditions.
Figure Y-2300-1, lb (kN)
R = mean pipe radius, in. (mm)
S m = allowable design stress intensity, psi (kPa) (lesser Y-2410 ANALYSIS OF ATTACHMENT
of attachment or pipe material)
(a) Calculate the stresses S m l , S n l , S p l , and S n l **
S y = yield strength at temperature, psi (kPa) (lesser of
attachment or pipe material)
T = nominal pipe‐wall thickness, in. (mm) ð1Þ
T t = average temperature of that portion of the attach-
ment within a distance of 2T from the surface of
the pipe, °F (°C) ð2Þ
T w = average temperature of the portion of the pipe un-
der the attachment and within a distance of
from the edge of the attachment, °F (°C) ð3Þ
W = thrust load applied to the attachment as shown in
Figure Y-2300-1, lb (kN) NOTE: For thermal transients with fluid temperature changes great-
X 1 = X 0 + log10β 1 er than 100°F (37.8°C) and rate of change greater than 10°F/min
(5.6°C/min), |T t − T w | may be conservatively taken as one‐half of
Y 1 = Y 0 + log10β 2
the difference between the initial metal temperature and the transi-
Z l L = (4/3)L 1 (L 2 )2, in.3 (mm3) ent fluid temperature during a temperature transient.
Z l N = (4/3)(L 1 )2L 2 , in.3 (mm3)
β 1 = L 1 /R , L 1 is defined in Figure Y-2300-1
β 2 = L 2 /R , L 2 is defined in Figure Y-2300-1 ð4Þ
γ = R/T
η = –(X 1 cos θ +Y 1 sin θ ) −(1/A 0 )
(X 1 sin θ −Y 1 cos θ )2 (b) The following modified Code equations shall be sa-
Load Ao θ , deg Xo Yo tisfied. All terms except attachment stresses, or where
Thrust 2.2 40 0 0.05 otherwise noted, are defined in NB‐3652 and NB‐3653.
Longitudinal moment 2.0 50 −0.45 −0.55 (1) NB-3652 eq. (9) becomes
Circumferential
moment 1.8 40 −0.75 −0.60

M L , M N , M T , Q 1 , Q 2 , and W are determined at the sur-

face of the pipe. The values of attachment loads used in
the stress evaluation (Y-2400) are based on the loads ðNB­9Þ
used in the different Code equations.
M L **, M N **, M T **, Q 1 **, Q 2 **, and W * * are absolute
values of maximum loads occurring simultaneously.

where
Y-2400 EVALUATION PROCEDURE
B 1 = 0.5
The loads on the attachment cause stresses in the pipe B 2 = 1.0 for straight pipe
wall. Equations are provided in Y-2410(a) to determine
these stresses. The attachment stresses are then added (2) NB-3653.1 eq. (10) becomes
to the piping system stresses at the attachment. The pip-
ing system stresses are determined by NB-3650 eqs. (9) ðNB­10Þ
through (14) for straight pipe. The Code equations includ-
ing the attachment stress terms are given in Y-2410(b).
where
The attachment stresses, S m l , S n l , and S p l are to be calcu-
lated for the loading conditions corresponding to the C 1 = C 2 = 1.0 for straight pipe

507
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

If S n , as calculated by eq. (NB-10), exceeds 3S m , where S n and S p are as calculated by eqs. (2)(NB-10) and
NB‐3653.6 eqs. (12) and (13) and the thermal stress (3)(NB-11) of this Article.
ratchet check of NB‐3653.7 must be satisfied; S n l need (c) In addition to the Code equations, the following
not be included in these checks. However, the value of equations shall also be satisfied:
K e shall be determined from S n , including S n l .
(3) NB-3653.2 eq. (11) becomes
ð5Þ

ð6Þ
ðNB­11Þ

where K 1 = K 2 = K 3 = 1.0 for straight pipe.

Y-2500 ANALYSIS DOCUMENTATION
(4) NB-3653.6 eq. (14) becomes:
Analyses demonstrating compliance with this Article
ðNB­14Þ shall be included in the Design Report for the piping
system.

508
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE Y-3000
PROCEDURE FOR EVALUATION OF THE DESIGN OF
RECTANGULAR CROSS SECTION ATTACHMENTS ON CLASS 2 OR
3 PIPING

C T = 3.82 (γ )1.64 β 1 β 2 η 1.54 ≥ 1.0

Y-3100 INTRODUCTION D o = outside diameter of pipe, in. (mm)
Y-3110 SCOPE K l = 2.0 for as‐welded full penetration welds and fillet
or partial penetration welds welded on four sides
This Article provides rules and service limits which
= 3.6 for fillet or partial penetration welds where
may be used to evaluate the design of rectangular cross
the attachment is welded on two or three sides
section welded attachments on Class 2 or 3 pipe under
L a = lesser of L 2 and T , in. (mm)
Section III, Division 1.
L b = lesser of L 1 and T , in. (mm)
L c = lesser of L 1 and L 2 , in. (mm)
Y-3200 LIMITATIONS TO APPLICABILITY L d = greater of L 1 and L 2 , in. (mm)
M L = bending moment applied to the attachment as
(a) The attachment shall be welded to the pipe by shown in Figure Y-3300-1, in.-lb (kN·m)
(1) a full penetration weld M N = bending moment applied to the attachment as
(2) a fillet or partial penetration weld along at least shown in Figure Y-3300-1, in.-lb (kN·m)
three sides of the attachment M T = torsional moment applied to the attachment as
(3) a fillet or partial penetration weld along the two shown in Figure Y-3300-1, in.-lb (kN·m)
long sides of the attachment, where the length of the long = greater of M T /{L c Ld T [1 + (L c /L d )]} and M T /
side is at least three times the length of the short side {[0.8 + 0.05(L d /L c )]L c 2L d }, psi (kPa)
(b) The attachment material and pipe material shall Q 1 = shear load applied to the attachment as shown in
have essentially the same moduli of elasticity and coeffi- Figure Y-3300-1, lb (kN)
cients of thermal expansion. Q 2 = shear load applied to the attachment as shown in
(c) β 1 ≤ 0.5, β 2 ≤ 0.5, and the product β 1 × β 2 ≤ 0.075, Figure Y-3300-1, lb (kN)
where β 1 and β 2 are defined in Y-3300. R = mean pipe radius, in. (mm)
(d) The attachment is made on straight pipe, with the S y = yield strength at temperature, psi (kPa) (lesser of
nearest edge of the attachment weld located at a mini- attachment material or pipe material)
mum distance of from any other weld or other dis- T = nominal pipe‐wall thickness, in. (mm)
continuity; R and T are defined in Y-3300. For multiple W = thrust load applied to the attachment as shown in
attachments located at a distance less than to each Figure Y-3300-1, lb (kN)
X 1 = X 0 + log10β 1
other, the stress effects for each individual attachment
Y 1 = Y 0 + log10β 2
shall be superimposed.
Z l L = (4/3)L 1 (L 2 )2, in.3 (mm3)
(e) D o /T ≤ 100.
Z l N = (4/3)(L 1 )2L 2 , in.3 (mm3)

Y-3300 NOMENCLATURE AND DEFINITIONS

(SEE FIGURE Y-3300-1)
Figure Y-3300-1
The following nomenclature is used in the equations
Nomenclature Illustration
and figures of this Article.
Al = 4L 1 L 2 , in.2 (mm2) 2L2 ML
Aw = total fillet weld throat area, in.2 (mm2) MT
BL = (2/3)C L , but not less than 1.0 Q2 Q2
2L1
BN = (2/3)C N , but not less than 1.0 W
BT = (2/3)C T , but not less than 1.0 MN
Q1
CL = 0.26 (γ )1.74 β 1 β 2 2η 4.74 ≥ 1.0 Q1
CN = 0.38 (γ )1.90 β 1 2β 2 η 3.40 ≥ 1.0

509
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Z w d = section modulus of fillet or partial penetration Y-3410 ANALYSIS OF ATTACHMENT WELDED TO ð17Þ
weld about the neutral axis of bending parallel PIPE WITH A FULL PENETRATION WELD
to L 1 , in.3 (mm3)
(a) Calculate the stresses S m l , S n l , S p l , and S n l **:
Z w l = section modulus of fillet or partial penetration
weld about the neutral axis of bending parallel
to L 2 , in.3 (mm3) ð1Þ
Z w t = torsional section modulus of fillet or partial pene-
tration weld for torsional loading, in.3 (mm3)
β 1 = L 1 /R , L 1 is defined in Figure Y-3300-1 ð2Þ
β 2 = L 2 /R , L 2 is defined in Figure Y-3300-1
γ = R /T
η = − (X 1 cos θ + Y 1 sin θ ) − (1/A 0 ) (X 1 sin θ − Y 1 ð3Þ
cos θ )2
Load Ao θ, deg Xo Yo
Thrust 2.2 40 0 0.05 ð4Þ
Longitudinal moment 2.0 50 −0.45 −0.55
Circumferential
moment 1.8 40 −0.75 −0.60 (b) The following modified Code equations shall be sa-
tisfied. All terms except attachment stresses, or where
otherwise noted, are defined in NC‐3652.
M L , M N , M T , Q 1 , Q 2 , and W are determined at the sur-
(1) NC‐3652 eq. (8) becomes
face of the pipe. The values of attachment loads used in
the stress evaluation (Y-3400) are based on the loads
used in the different Code equations. ðNC­8Þ
M L **, M N **, M T **, Q 1 **, Q 2 **, and W * * are absolute
values of maximum loads occurring simultaneously. where B 1 = 0.5 and B 2 = 1.0 for straight pipe.
(2) NC‐3653.1 eq. (9) becomes

Y-3400 EVALUATION PROCEDURE

ðNC­9Þ
The loads on the attachment cause stresses in the pipe
wall. Equations are provided in Y-3410(a) to determine
For Level A and B loadings, S O L ≤ 1.8S h and S O L ≤
these stresses. The attachment stresses are then added
1.5S y .
to the piping system stresses at the attachment. The pip-
ing system stresses are determined by NC‐3652 eq. (8), For Level C loadings, S O L ≤ 2.25S h and S O L ≤ 1.8S y .
NC‐3653.1 eq. (9), and NC‐3653.2 eqs. (10a), (10b), and For Level D loadings, S O L ≤ 3.0S h and S O L ≤ 2.0S y .
(11) for straight pipe. The Code equations including the (3) NC‐3653.2 eq. (10a) becomes
attachment stress terms are given in Y-3410(b). The at-
tachment stresses S m l , S n l , and S p l are to be calculated ðNC­10aÞ
for the loading conditions corresponding to NC‐3652 eq.
(8), NC‐3653.1 eq. (9), and NC‐3653.2 eqs. (10a), (10b), (4) NC‐3653.2 eq. (10b) becomes
and (11). For example, in calculating S m l for use in
NC‐3652 eq. (8), W , M L , M N , Q 1 , Q 2 , and M T are the loads ðNC­10bÞ
on the attachment due to weight and other sustained
loads. While NC is used below, the same rules apply for
(5) NC‐3653.2 eq. (11) becomes
ND piping.
There are additional equations given in Y-3410(c) for
all weld configurations and Y-3420(b) for attachments
welded with fillet or partial penetration welds that also ðNC­11Þ
must be checked for attachment stresses. These are based
on the absolute values for maximum loads occurring si-
multaneously for Level A, B, C, or D service loading In eq. (NC-11), S m l is the same as used in eq. (1)(NC-8),
conditions. and S p l is the same as used in eq. (3)(NC-10a).

510
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(c) In addition to the modified Code equations, the fol-

lowing equations shall be satisfied.
ð8Þ
ð5Þ

ð6Þ
Y-3430 DIFFERENTIAL METAL TEMPERATURE
EFFECTS
Y-3420 ANALYSIS OF ATTACHMENT WELDED TO
PIPE WITH FILLET OR PARTIAL The potential for increased stress at the attachment
PENETRATION WELDS welds, which may occur as a result of differential metal
temperatures between the attachment and the run,
(a) The requirements of Y-3410 shall be met. For at-
should be considered in the design evaluation.
tachments welded on two or three sides, the value of K 1
used in calculating S p l shall be 3.6.
(b) The following additional equations shall be
satisfied.
Y-3500 ANALYSIS DOCUMENTATION

ð7Þ
Analyses demonstrating compliance with this Article
shall be included in the Design Report for the piping
system.

511
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE Y-4000
PROCEDURE FOR EVALUATION OF THE DESIGN OF HOLLOW
CIRCULAR CROSS SECTION WELDED ATTACHMENTS ON CLASS 1
PIPING

Y-4100 INTRODUCTION multiple attachments located at a distance less than

to each other, the stress effects for each individual
Y-4110 SCOPE
attachment shall be superimposed.
This Article provides rules and service limits which
may be used to evaluate the design of hollow circular
cross section welded attachments on Class 1 pipe under
Section III, Division 1.
Y-4300 NOMENCLATURE AND DEFINITIONS
(SEE FIGURE Y-4300-1)
Y-4200 LIMITATIONS TO APPLICABILITY
The nomenclature defined below is used in the equa-
(a) The attachment shall be welded to the pipe by a full tions and figures of this Article.
penetration weld (see Figure Y-4200-1).
AT =π (r o 2 − r i 2)
(b) The attachment material and pipe material shall
BL =0.5 (C L ), but not less than 1.0
have essentially the same moduli of elasticity and coeffi-
BN =0.5 (C N ), but not less than 1.0
cients of thermal expansion.
BT =0.5 (C T ), but not less than 1.0
(c) The constants defined in Y-4300 fall within the fol-
BW =0.5 (C W ), but not less than 1.0
lowing ranges:
C =A o (2γ )n 1 β n 2 τ n 3 but not less than 1.0
(1) 4.0 ≤ γ ≤ 50.0
CT =1.0 for β ≤ 0.55
(2) 0.2 ≤ τ ≤ 1.0
=C N for β = 1.0, but not less than 1.0; C T should be
(3) 0.3 ≤ β ≤ 1.0 linearly interpolated for 0.55 < β < 1.0, but not less
(4) the axis of the attachment is perpendicular to the than 1.0
axis of the run pipe D o = outside diameter of run pipe, in. (mm)
(d) The attachment is made on straight pipe, with the d o = outside diameter of attachment, in. (mm)
nearest edge of the attachment weld located at a mini- Eα = modulus of elasticity, E, times the mean coefficient
mum distance of from any other weld or other dis- of thermal expansion, α , both at room tempera-
continuity (see Y-4300 for definitions of R and T ). For ture, psi/°F (kPa/°C)
IT =
Figure Y-4200-1 J = lesser of πr o 2T or Z T
Weld Type Illustration K T = 1.8 for full penetration welds

Attachment
Figure Y-4300-1
Nomenclature Illustration

Weld Run pipe

Attachment
ML

Q2
Q2 W

MT MN
Pipe wall
Run
Q1 Q1
Full Penetration Weld pipe

512
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

M L = bending moment applied to the attachment as M L **, M N **, M T **, Q 1 **, Q 2 **, and W * * are absolute
shown in Figure Y-4300-1, in.-lb (kN·m) values of maximum loads occurring simultaneously under
M N = bending moment applied to the attachment as all service loading conditions.
shown in Figure Y-4300-1, in.-lb (kN·m)
M T = torsional moment applied to the attachment as
shown in Figure Y-4300-1, in.-lb (kN·m) Y-4400 EVALUATION PROCEDURE
Q 1 = shear load applied to the attachment as shown in
The loads on the attachment cause stresses in the pipe
Figure Y-4300-1, lb (kN)
wall. Equations are provided in Y-4410(a) to determine
Q 2 = shear load applied to the attachment as shown in
these stresses. The attachment stresses are then added
Figure Y-4300-1, lb (kN)
to the piping system stresses at the attachment. The pip-
R = mean run pipe radius, in. (mm)
ing system stresses are determined by NB‐3652 eq. (9),
r i = attachment inside radius, in. (mm)
NB‐3653.1 eq. (10), NB‐3653.2 eq. (11), and NB‐3653.6
R o = run pipe outside radius, in. (mm)
eqs. (12), (13), and (14). The Code equations including
r o = attachment outside radius, in. (mm)
the attachment stress terms are given in Y-4410(b). The
S m = allowable design stress intensity, psi (kPa) (lesser
attachment stresses, S M T , S N T , and S P T are to be calcu-
of attachment or pipe material)
lated for the loading conditions corresponding to
S Y = yield stress at temperature, psi (kPa) (lesser of at-
NB‐3652 eq. (9), NB‐3653.1 eq. (10), NB‐3653.2 eq.
tachment or pipe material)
(11), and NB‐3653.6 eqs. (12), (13), and (14). For exam-
T = run pipe wall thickness, in. (mm)
ple, in calculating S M T for use in NB‐3652 eq. (9) for de-
t = attachment wall thickness, in. (mm)
sign conditions, W , M L , M N , Q 1 , Q 2 , and M T are the loads
T T = average temperature of that portion of the attach-
on the attachment due to design mechanical loads.
ment within a distance of 2t from the surface of the
pipe, °F (°C) There are additional equations given in Y-4410(c) that
T W = average temperature of the portion of the pipe un- also must be checked for attachment stresses. These are
based on the absolute values for maximum loads occur-
der the attachment and within a distance of
ring simultaneously under all service loading conditions.
from the edge of the attachment, °F (°C)
W = thrust load applied to the attachment as shown in
Figure Y-4300-1, lb (kN)
Y-4410 ANALYSIS OF ATTACHMENTS
Z T = I T /r o (a) Calculate the stresses S M T , S N T , S P T , and S N T **:
β = d o /D o
γ = R o /T
τ = t/T ð1Þ
The equation for C shall be used to determine C W , C L ,
and C N , based on the following table. Select the maximum
value of the pipe and the attachment equations.

Index Part β Range Ao n1 n2 n3

ð2Þ
CW Pipe 0.3–1.0 1.40 0.81 [Note (1)] 1.33
Attachment 0.3–1.0 4.00 0.55 [Note (2)] 1.00
CL Pipe 0.3–1.0 0.46 0.60 −0.04 0.86
NOTE: For thermal transients with fluid temperature changes great-
Attachment 0.3–1.0 1.10 0.23 −0.38 0.38
er than 100°F (37.8°C) and rate of change greater than 10°F/min
CN Pipe 0.3–0.55 0.51 1.01 0.79 0.89 (5.6°C/min), |T T − T W | may be conservatively taken as one‐half of
> 0.55–1.0 0.23 1.01 −0.62 0.89 the difference between the initial metal temperature and the transi-
Attachment 0.3–0.55 0.84 0.85 0.80 0.54 ent fluid temperature during a temperature transient.
> 0.55–1.0 0.44 0.85 −0.28 0.54
ð3Þ
NOTES:
3
(1) Replace β n 2 with e (-1.2β ).
(-1.35β 3)
(2) Replace β with e
n2
.

ð4Þ
M L , M N , M T , Q 1 , Q 2 , and W are determined at the sur-
face of the pipe.

513
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(b) The following modified Code equations shall be (3) NB-3653.2 eq. (11) becomes:
satisfied.
(1) NB-3652 eq. (9) becomes:

ðNB­11Þ

ðNB­9Þ

where
K 1 = K 2 = K 3 = 1.0 for straight pipe.
(4) NB-3653.6 eq. (14) becomes:
where B 1 = 0.5 and B 2 = 1.0 for straight pipe.
ðNB­14Þ
(2) NB-3653.1 eq. (10) becomes:
where S n and S P are as calculated by eqs. (2)(NB-10) and
ðNB­10Þ
(3)(NB-11) of this Article.
All terms except attachment stresses, or where
where otherwise noted, are defined in NB‐3652 and NB‐3653.
(c) In addition to the modified Code equations, the fol-
C 1 = C 2 = 1.0 for straight pipe.
lowing equations shall also be satisfied:
If S n , as calculated by eq. (NB-10), exceeds 3S m ,
NB‐3653.6 eqs. (12) and (13) and the thermal stress ð5Þ
ratchet check of NB‐3653.7 must be satisfied; S n l need
not be included in these checks. However, the value of
K e shall be determined from S n , including S n l . ð6Þ

Y-4500 ANALYSIS DOCUMENTATION

Analyses demonstrating compliance with this Article
shall be included in the Design Report for the piping
system.

514
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE Y-5000
PROCEDURE FOR EVALUATION OF THE DESIGN OF HOLLOW
CIRCULAR CROSS SECTION WELDED ATTACHMENTS ON CLASS 2
AND 3 PIPING

C = A o (2γ )n 1 β n 2 τ n 3 but not less than 1.0

Y-5100 INTRODUCTION C T = 1.0 for β ≤ 0.55
Y-5110 SCOPE = C N for β = 1.0, but not less than 1.0; C T should be
linearly interpolated for 0.55 < β < 1.0, but not
This Article provides rules and service limits which
less than 1.0
may be used to evaluate the design of hollow circular
D o = outside diameter of run pipe, in. (mm)
cross section welded attachments on Class 2 and 3 pipe
d o = outside diameter of attachment, in. (mm)
under Section III, Division 1.
IT =
Y-5200 LIMITATIONS TO APPLICABILITY J = lesser of πr o 2T or Z T
KT = 1.8 for full penetration welds
(a) The attachment shall be welded to the pipe along
= 2.0 for fillet or partial penetration welds
the entire circumference by either a full penetration weld,
ML = bending moment applied to the attachment as
a fillet weld, or a partial penetration weld.
shown in Figure Y-5300-1, in.-lb (kN·m)
(b) The attachment material and pipe material shall
MN = bending moment applied to the attachment as
have essentially the same moduli of elasticity and coeffi-
shown in Figure Y-5300-1, in.-lb (kN·m)
cients of thermal expansion.
MT = torsional moment applied to the attachment as
(c) The constants defined in Y-5300 fall within the fol-
shown in Figure Y-5300-1, in.-lb (kN·m)
lowing ranges:
Q1 = shear load applied to the attachment as shown in
(1) 4.0 ≤ γ ≤ 50.0 Figure Y-5300-1, lb (kN)
(2) 0.2 ≤ τ ≤ 1.0 Q2 = shear load applied to the attachment as shown in
(3) 0.3 ≤ β ≤ 1.0 Figure Y-5300-1, lb (kN)
(4) the axis of the attachment is perpendicular to the R = mean run pipe radius, in. (mm)
axis of the run pipe ri = attachment inside radius, in. (mm)
(d) The attachment is made on straight pipe, with the Ro = run pipe outside radius, in. (mm)
nearest edge of the attachment weld located at a mini- ro = attachment outside radius, in. (mm)
mum distance of from any other weld or other dis- SA = f (1.25S c + 0.25S h ), psi (kPa), as defined in NC/
continuity (see Y-5300 for definitions of R and T ). For ND-3611.2 (lesser of attachment or pipe material
multiple attachments located at a distance less than allowable)
to each other, the stress effects for each individual
attachment shall be superimposed.

Y-5300 NOMENCLATURE AND DEFINITIONS Figure Y-5300-1

(SEE FIGURE Y-5300-1) Nomenclature Illustration
The nomenclature defined below is used in the equa-
Run pipe
tions and figures of this Article. Attachment
ML
A T = π (r o 2 − r i 2)
A w = fillet weld or partial penetration weld throat area, Q2
Q2 W
in.2 (mm2)
B L = 0.5 (C L ), but not less than 1.0 MT MN
B N = 0.5 (C N ), but not less than 1.0
Run
B T = 0.5 (C T ), but not less than 1.0 Q1 Q1
pipe
B W = 0.5 (C W ), but not less than 1.0

515
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

S c = basic material allowable stress at ambient tem- NC‐3653.1 eq. (9), and NC‐3653.2 eqs. (10a), (10b), and
perature, psi (kPa) (lesser of attachment or pipe (11) for straight pipe. The Code equations including the
material allowable) attachment stress terms are given in Y-5410(b). The at-
S h = basic material allowable stress at maximum (hot) tachment stresses, S M T , S N T , and S P T are to be calculated
temperature, psi (kPa) (lesser of attachment or for the loading conditions corresponding to NC‐3652 eq.
pipe material allowable) (8), NC‐3653.1 eq. (9), and NC‐3653.2 eqs. (10a), (10b),
S y = yield stress at temperature, psi (kPa) (lesser of at- and (11). For example, in calculating S M T for use in
tachment or pipe material yield stress) NC‐3652 eq. (8), W , M L , M N , Q 1 , Q 2 , and M T are the loads
T = nominal run pipe wall thickness, in. (mm) on the attachment due to weight and other sustained
t = nominal attachment wall thickness, in. (mm) loads. While NC is used below, the same rules apply for
W = thrust load applied to the attachment as shown in ND piping.
Figure Y-5300-1, lb (kN) There are additional equations given in Y-5410(c) for
Z T = I T /r o all weld configurations and Y-5420(b) for fillet weld or
Z w l = section modulus of fillet weld or partial penetra- partial penetration weld attachments, that also must be
tion weld about the neutral axis normal to the checked for attachment stresses. These are based on the
run pipe centerline, in.3 (mm3) absolute values for maximum loads occurring simulta-
Z w n = section modulus of fillet weld or partial penetra- neously under all service loading conditions.
tion weld about the neutral axis of bending paral-
lel to run pipe centerline, in.3 (mm3) Y-5410 ANALYSIS OF ATTACHMENT WELDED TO ð17Þ
Z w t = torsional section modulus of fillet weld or partial PIPE WITH A FULL PENETRATION WELD
penetration weld for torsional loading, in.3 (mm3) (a) Calculate the stresses: S M T , S N T , S P T , and S N T **
β = d o /D o
γ = R o /T
τ = t/T
ð1Þ
The equation for C shall be used to determine C W , C L ,
and C N , based on the following table. Select the maximum
value of the pipe and the attachment equations.

Index Part β Range Ao n1 n2 n3

ð2Þ
CW Pipe 0.3–1.0 1.40 0.81 [Note (1)] 1.33
Attachment 0.3–1.0 4.00 0.55 [Note (2)] 1.00

CL Pipe 0.3–1.0 0.46 0.60 −0.04 0.86

Attachment 0.3–1.0 1.10 0.23 −0.38 0.38 ð3Þ
CN Pipe 0.3–0.55 0.51 1.01 0.79 0.89
> 0.55–1.0 0.23 1.01 −0.62 0.89
Attachment 0.3–0.55 0.84 0.85 0.80 0.54
ð4Þ
> 0.55–1.0 0.44 0.85 −0.28 0.54

NOTES:
3)
(1) Replace β n 2 with e (-1.2β . (b) The following modified Code equations shall be sa-
(-1.35β 3)
(2) Replace β with e
n2
.
tisfied, where all terms except attachment stresses are de-
M L , M N , M T , Q 1 , Q 2 , and W are determined at the sur- fined in NC‐3652.
face of the pipe. The values of attachment loads used in (1) NC‐3652 eq. (8) becomes
the stress evaluation (Y-5400) are based on the loads
used in the different Code equations. ðNC­8Þ
M L **, M N **, M T **, Q 1 **, Q 2 **, and W * * are absolute
values of maximum loads occurring simultaneously under
where B 1 = 0.5 and B 2 = 1.0 for straight pipe.
all service loading conditions.
(2) NC‐3653.1 eq. (9) becomes

Y-5400 EVALUATION PROCEDURE ðNC­9Þ

The loads on the attachment cause stresses in the pipe
wall. Equations are provided in Y-5410(a) to determine For Level A and B loadings, S O L ≤ 1.8S h and S O L ≤
these stresses. The attachment stresses are then added 1.5S y .
to the piping system stresses at the attachment. The pip- For Level C loadings, S O L ≤ 2.25S h and S O L ≤ 1.8S y .
ing system stresses are determined by NC‐3652 eq. (8), For Level D loadings, S O L ≤ 3.0S h and S O L ≤ 2.0S y .

516
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(3) NC‐3653.2 eq. (10a) becomes (b) The following additional requirements shall be met.

ðNC­10aÞ

(4) NC‐3653.2 eq. (10b) becomes ð7Þ

ðNC­10bÞ

(5) NC‐3653.2 eq. (11) becomes

ð8Þ
ðNC­11Þ

In eq. (NC-11), S M T is the same as used in eq.

(1)(NC-8), and S P T is the same as used in eq. (3)(NC-10a).
Y-5430 DIFFERENTIAL METAL TEMPERATURE
(c) In addition to the Code equations, the following
EFFECTS
equations shall also be satisfied. The potential for increased stress at the attachment
welds, which may occur as a result of differential metal
ð5Þ
temperatures between the attachment and the run,
should be considered in the design evaluation.
ð6Þ

Y-5420 ANALYSIS OF ATTACHMENT WELDED Y-5500 ANALYSIS DOCUMENTATION

TO PIPE WITH FILLET WELDS OR Analyses demonstrating compliance with this Article
PARTIAL PENETRATION WELDS shall be included in the Design Report for the piping
(a) The requirements of Y-5410 shall be met. system.

517
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX Z

ARTICLE Z-1000
INTERRUPTION OF CODE WORK

Z-1100 INTRODUCTION responsibility and its ANI, where applicable. When the
work is being performed at a nuclear power plant site,
Z-1110 SCOPE the memorandum shall also be approved by the Owner
The scope of this Appendix is confined to those situa- and the jurisdictional enforcement authority having juris-
tions where the Code activities of a Certificate Holder diction at the nuclear power plant site, if applicable.
are interrupted prior to completion of all Code assigned (b) The memorandum of understanding shall reference
responsibilities. When this occurs, all completed in‐ Code Data Reports for completed work. For completed in‐
process work must be clearly documented to ensure re- process work, Code Data Reports may also be used to
maining activities and Code responsibilities are readily document the status of Code activities. Additionally, the
identifiable. status of completed in‐process work may also be indi-
cated on drawings, diagrams, or other means and refer-
enced in the memorandum.
Z-1200 DEFINITIONS

interruption of Code activities: the cessation of Code work

by a Certificate Holder prior to completion of all assigned
Code responsibilities. The cessation may result from pro-
Z-1400 OTHER CONSIDERATIONS ð17Þ
ject suspension or transfer of Code responsibilities from
one Certificate Holder to another Certificate Holder. (a) If a Quality Assurance Program such as that speci-
completed in‐process work: a Code activity on an item, fied in Article NCA-4000 is used by a Certificate Holder
part, subassembly, appurtenance, component, or support during the period of interruption, a review of completed
which has been accepted by the Authorized Nuclear In- work will not be required by the Certificate Holder as-
spector (ANI) for the Certificate Holder that performed suming responsibility for completion of Code activities,
the Code activity, but which requires additional work be- or their ANI. The Certificate Holder assuming responsibil-
fore the item, part, subassembly, appurtenance, compo- ity or their ANI may require evidence that an acceptable
nent, or support can be stamped with the applicable Quality Assurance Program has been in place.
Certification Mark. Examples of completed in‐process (b) Once completed work or completed in‐process
work include design activities, an individual weld or a work is accepted by an ANI, it meets Code requirements
weld pass, heat treatment of weld joints, and examination and need not be scrutinized by another Certificate Holder
of welds or items after heat treatment. or ANI.
(c) To meet Code requirements, completed work shall
be documented on the applicable Code Data Report and
stamped as applicable.
ð17Þ Z-1300 DOCUMENTATION (d) Completion of the applicable Code Data Report and
(a) A memorandum of understanding shall be ap- application of the Certification Mark, where applicable,
proved by the parties involved which documents the sta- expressly signifies the Code status of completed work
tus of Code activities and acceptance of transfer and completed in‐process work.
responsibilities, where applicable. The memorandum (e) Where the N‐type Certificate Holder has permitted
shall be approved by the existing Certificate Holder and the Certificates to expire, and has returned the Certifica-
their ANI, or alternatively, a Certificate Holder who has tion Mark to the Society, and the Owner plans to contract
permitted its Certificate to expire and its current ANI, em- with a new Certificate Holder to complete construction of
ployed by an Authorized Inspection Agency (AIA), and the the nuclear facility, the expired Certificate Holder may ap-
Certificate Holder that will provide continuity of ply to the Society for Temporary Certificates of

518
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Authorization and such Certificates and applicable Certifi- planned scope of activities to be performed under the
cation Mark shall be issued by the Society subject to the Temporary Certificates. A complete list of all work re-
following conditions: maining to be documented and stamped shall be provided
(1) The scope of the certificates shall be limited to to the AIA prior to the completion of all work. The Regu-
the Code Edition and Addenda to which the nuclear plant latory Authority and the Jurisdictional and Enforcement
has been docketed. No new Code work may be performed Authority (if applicable) shall be notified of the comple-
under these Temporary Certificates. Repair welding of tion of these activities.
material imperfections and existing welds shall not be (7) The term of the Temporary Certificates shall be
performed. for 1 year, and may be extended once by the Society upon
(2) An AIA shall be employed to review the com- receipt of a request submitted by Certified mail for an ad-
pleted work previously performed. This AIA shall monitor ditional period not to exceed 1 year. Subsequent renewals
and verify compilation and completion of all originally re- shall be treated as renewals of active Certificates.
quired documentation such as Data Report Forms and (8) The Owner shall maintain the Owner’s Certificate
supporting Data Packages. in accordance with existing Code requirements until all
(3) The ANI shall certify all partial Data Reports and Code activity has been completed, and the N‐3 Data Re-
authorize the Temporary Certificate Holder to stamp the port Form has been completed and filed [NCA‐8180(c)].
previously completed work with the appropriate Certifi-
(9) The Temporary Certificates and Certification
cation Mark.
Mark shall be returned to the Society when all previously
(4) The Quality Assurance Program previously ac-
completed work has been documented and stamped.
cepted by the Society shall be implemented (NCA‐8140)
and any revisions to the program shall be accepted by
the AIA. All required revisions to the Quality Assurance
Manual shall be reviewed and accepted by the Authorized Z-1500 RESUMPTION OF CODE ACTIVITIES ð17Þ
Nuclear Inspector Supervisor (ANIS) prior to implemen-
tation. The revised program shall govern all activities re- Resumption of Code activities may be undertaken at
quired to document and stamp all previously completed any time by updating the original memorandum of under-
work. standing documenting the status of Code activities. The
(5) A survey or audit by the Society shall be required updated memorandum shall be approved by any new par-
for the issuance of the requested Certificates and Stamps ties involved such as the Certificate Holder assuming re-
to the Expired Certificate Holder. Code activities per- sponsibility for completion of Code activities, the
formed prior to the issuance of the Temporary Certifi- Certificate Holder’s AIA, and the organization contracting
cates shall be subject to the acceptance of the inspector for the completion of Code activities. For Code activities to
(ANI) (NCA‐8153). be performed at a nuclear plant site, the Owner and the
(6) The Owner shall apply to the Society for an Own- authority having jurisdiction at the nuclear power plant
ers Certificate (NCA‐8162), and the evaluation interview site (when applicable) shall also approve the updated
by the Society shall include a review of the Owner’s memorandum of understanding.

519
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX AA
GUIDANCE FOR THE USE OF U.S. CUSTOMARY AND SI UNITS IN
THE ASME BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE

ð17Þ ARTICLE AA-1000

SCOPE

AA-1100 USE OF UNITS IN EQUATIONS existing U.S. Customary units. For example, 3,000 psi
has an implied precision of one significant figure. There-
The equations in this Nonmandatory Appendix are suit- fore, the conversion to SI units would typically be to
able for use with either the U.S. Customary or the SI units 20 000 kPa. This is a difference of about 3% from the “ex-
provided in Mandatory Appendix XXIV, or with the units act” or soft conversion of 20 684.27 kPa. However, the
provided in the nomenclature associated with that equa- precision of the conversion was determined by the Com-
tion. It is the responsibility of the individual and organiza- mittee on a case‐by‐case basis. More significant digits
tion performing the calculations to ensure that were included in the SI equivalent if there was any ques-
appropriate units are used. Either U.S. Customary or SI tion. The values of allowable stress in Section II, Part D
units may be used as a consistent set. When necessary generally include three significant figures.
to convert from one system of units to another, the units (e) Minimum thickness and radius values that are ex-
shall be converted to at least three significant figures for pressed in fractions of an inch were generally converted
use in calculations and other aspects of construction. according to the following table:

Fraction, Proposed SI Difference,

in. Conversion, mm %
1
/32 0.8 −0.8
AA-1200 GUIDELINES USED TO DEVELOP SI 3
/64 1.2 −0.8
1
EQUIVALENTS /16 1.5 5.5
3
/32 2.5 −5.0
1
The following guidelines were used to develop SI /8 3 5.5
equivalents:
5
/32 4 −0.8
(a) SI units are placed in parentheses after the U.S. Cus-
3
/16 5 −5.0
7
/32 5.5 1.0
tomary units in the text. 1
/4 6 5.5
(b) In general, separate SI tables are provided if inter- 5
/16 8 −0.8
polation is expected. The table designation (e.g., table 3
/8 10 −5.0
number) is the same for both the U.S. Customary and SI 7
/16 11 1.0
tables, with the addition of suffix “M” to the designator 1
/2 13 −2.4
9
for the SI table, if a separate table is provided. In the text, /16 14 2.0
5
/8 16 −0.8
references to a table use only the primary table number 11
/16 17 2.6
(i.e., without the “M”). For some small tables, where inter- 3
/4 19 0.3
polation is not required, SI units are placed in parenthe- 7
/8 22 1.0
ses after the U.S. Customary unit. 1 25 1.6
(c) Separate SI versions of graphical information
(charts) are provided, except that if both axes are dimen-
sionless, a single figure (chart) is used.
(d) In most cases, conversions of units in the text were
done using hard SI conversion practices, with some soft
conversions on a case‐by‐case basis, as appropriate. This (f) For nominal sizes that are in even increments of
was implemented by rounding the SI values to the num- inches, even multiples of 25 mm were generally used. In-
ber of significant figures of implied precision in the termediate values were interpolated rather than

520
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

converting and rounding to the nearest millimeter. See Table continued

examples the following table. [Note that this table does
not apply to nominal pipe sizes (NPS), which are covered U.S. U.S.
below.] Custom- Custom-
ary SI ary SI
Size, in. Size, mm Practice Practice Practice Practice

1 25 NPS 14 DN 350 NPS 56 DN 1400

11/8 29 NPS 16 DN 400 NPS 58 DN 1450
11/4 32 NPS 18 DN 450 NPS 60 DN 1500
11/2 38
2 50
21/4 57 (h) Areas in square inches (in.2 ) were converted to
21/2 64 square millimeters (mm2) and areas in square feet (ft2)
3 75 were converted to square meters (m2). See examples in
31/2 89 the following table:
4 100
41/2 114
Area (U.S.
5 125
Customary) Area (SI)
6 150 2
8 200 1 in. 650 mm2
12 300 6 in.2 4 000 mm2
18 450 10 in.2 6 500 mm2
20 500 5 ft2 0.5 m2
24 600
36 900
40 1 000 (i) Volumes in cubic inches (in.3) were converted to cu-
54 1 350 bic millimeters (mm3 ) and volumes in cubic feet (ft 3)
60 1 500 were converted to cubic meters (m3). See examples in
72 1 800
the following table:

Volume (U.S. Customary) Volume (SI)

Size or Length,
1 in.3 16 000 mm3
ft Size or Length, m
6 in.3 100 000 mm3
3 1 10 in.3 160 000 mm3
5 1.5 5 ft3 0.14 m3
200 60

(j) Although the pressure should always be in MPa for

(g) For nominal pipe sizes, the following relationships calculations, there are cases where other units are used in
were used: the text. For example, kPa is used for small pressures.
Also, rounding was to one significant figure (two at the
U.S. U.S.
Custom- Custom- most) in most cases. See examples in the following table.
ary SI ary SI (Note that 14.7 psi converts to 101 kPa, while 15 psi con-
Practice Practice Practice Practice verts to 100 kPa. While this may seem at first glance to be
NPS 1/8 DN 6 NPS 20 DN 500 a n a n o m a l y , i t i s c o n s i s t e n t w i t h t h e ro u n d i n g
NPS 1/4 DN 8 NPS 22 DN 550 philosophy.)
NPS 3/8 DN 10 NPS 24 DN 600
NPS 1/2 DN 15 NPS 26 DN 650 Pressure (U.S. Pressure
NPS 3/4 DN 20 NPS 28 DN 700 Customary) (SI)
NPS 1 DN 25 NPS 30 DN 750 0.5 psi 3 kPa
NPS 11/4 DN 32 NPS 32 DN 800 2 psi 15 kPa
NPS 11/2 DN 40 NPS 34 DN 850 3 psi 20 kPa
NPS 2 DN 50 NPS 36 DN 900 10 psi 70 kPa
NPS 21/2 DN 65 NPS 38 DN 950 14.7 psi 101 kPa
NPS 3 DN 80 NPS 40 DN 1000 15 psi 100 kPa
NPS 31/2 DN 90 NPS 42 DN 1050 30 psi 200 kPa
NPS 4 DN 100 NPS 44 DN 1100 50 psi 350 kPa
NPS 5 DN 125 NPS 46 DN 1150 100 psi 700 kPa
NPS 6 DN 150 NPS 48 DN 1200 150 psi 1 MPa
NPS 8 DN 200 NPS 50 DN 1250 200 psi 1.5 MPa
NPS 10 DN 250 NPS 52 DN 1300 250 psi 1.7 MPa
NPS 12 DN 300 NPS 54 DN 1350 300 psi 2 MPa

521
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table continued Table continued

Pressure (U.S. Pressure Temperature, Temperature,

Customary) (SI) °F °C
350 psi 2.5 MPa 1,150 620
400 psi 3 MPa 1,200 650
500 psi 3.5 MPa 1,250 675
600 psi 4 MPa 1,800 980
1,200 psi 8 MPa 1,900 1 040
1,500 psi 10 MPa 2,000 1 095
2,050 1 120

(k) Material properties that are expressed in psi or ksi

(e.g., allowable stress, yield and tensile strength, elastic
modulus) were generally converted to MPa to three sig-
nificant figures. See example in the following table:
AA-1300 SOFT CONVERSION FACTORS
Strength (U.S. Strength
The following table of “soft” conversion factors is pro-
Customary) (SI)
vided for convenience. Multiply the U.S. Customary value
95,000 psi 655 MPa
by the factor given to obtain the SI value. Similarly, divide
the SI value by the factor given to obtain the U.S. Custom-
(l) In most cases, temperatures (e.g., for PWHT) were ary value. In most cases it is appropriate to round the an-
rounded to the nearest 5°C. Depending on the implied swer to three significant figures.
precision of the temperature, some were rounded to the
U.S.
nearest 1°C or 10°C or even 25°C. Temperatures colder Customary SI Factor Notes
than 0°F (negative values) were generally rounded to in. mm 25.4 …
the nearest 1°C. The examples in the table below were ft m 0.3048 …
created by rounding to the nearest 5°C, with one in.2 mm2 645.16 …
exception: ft2 m2 0.09290304 …
in.3 mm3 16,387.064 …
Temperature, Temperature, ft3 m3 0.02831685 …
°F °C U.S. gal. m3 0.003785412 …
70 20 U.S. gal. liters 3.785412 …
100 38 psi MPa (N/mm2) 0.0068948 Used exclusively in
120 50 equations
150 65 psi kPa 6.894757 Used only in text and
200 95 for nameplate
250 120 psi bar 0.06894757 …
300 150 ft-lb J 1.355818 …
350 175 °F °C /9 × (°F − 32)
5
Not for temperature
400 205 difference
5
450 230 °F °C /9 For temperature
500 260 differences only
5
550 290 R K /9 Absolute temperature
600 315 lbm kg 0.4535924 …
650 345 lbf N 4.448222 …
700 370 in.-lb N·mm 112.98484 Use exclusively in
750 400 equations
800 425 ft-lb N·m 1.3558181 Use only in text
850 455 1.0988434 …
900 480 Btu/hr W 0.2930711 Use for boiler rating
925 495 and heat transfer
950 510 lb/ft3 kg/m3 16.018463 …
1,000 540
1,050 565
1,100 595

522
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX BB ð17Þ

METALLIC BRAIDED FLEXIBLE HOSE

ARTICLE BB-1000
SCOPE

ð17Þ BB-1100 RULES The braided hose consists of a convoluted inner sheath
pressure boundary, with outer reinforcing braided wire
This Appendix provides the rules for the construction welded to end pieces.
of metallic braided flexible hose. This Appendix is limited
to use in Division 1, Subsections NC and ND, and Division
5, Subsection HC, Subpart A applications.

523
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE BB-2000
MATERIAL

ð17Þ BB-2100 SHEATHS, END PIECES, AND T he b r a id s h a ll b e ma d e fr o m s t a i nl e s s s t e el

BRAIDS heat‐resisting wire conforming to ASTM A580‐98. Only
wire of material types listed under SA-479 in Section II,
The inner sheath and end pieces shall be fabricated Part D, Subpart 1, Tables 1A, 1B, and 3 may be used for
from materials conforming to NC/ND‐2000. Whenever the braided sheath.
NC/ND is used for reference, the reference is NC for Class
2 and ND for Class 3.

524
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE BB-3000
DESIGN

BB-3100 DESIGN FACTORS (b) The piping system layout, anchorage, guiding, and
support shall avoid the imposition of end displacement,
(a) The design shall consider operating and design vibratory motions, or forces for the hose length, other
loads and movements including differential movement, than those for which the hose is designed.
vibration, and inertia effects when applicable.
(b) The Certificate Holder that manufactures the hose (c) The hose end on one side of the installation shall not
shall establish the pressure and temperature rating of be oriented longitudinally concentric with the other hose
the hose assembly by calculations and tests in accordance end unless the minimum design curvature between the
with the Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association Stan- hose ends recommended by the Certificate Holder that
dard (EJMA). The minimum and maximum temperatures manufactures the hose is maintained.
shall be within the limits listed in Section II, Part D. The (d) Either annealed or cold‐finished wire may be used
hose rating shall be equal to or exceed the piping system for the wire braid, but the allowable stresses shall be
design pressure and temperature. those listed in Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Tables 1A,
(c) The rating of the hose assembly shall have a mini- 1B, and 3 for the annealed or solution‐treated condition
mum design margin of 3.5 against burst and leakage. for SA-479 of the same material type as the wire being
specified.
As a minimum, the required number of strands shall be
BB-3200 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
established from the equation
(a) Braided flexible hoses with the convoluted hose ele-
ment having a length to outside diameter ratio (L /D o ) of
3 or less shall comply with all the requirements of NC/
ND‐3649 for bellows expansion joints.
(b) Braided flexible hoses with the convoluted hose ele-
ment having a length to outside diameter ratio (L /D o ) where
greater than 3 shall comply with the requirements of
A = cross‐sectional area of one wire, in.2
NC/ND‐3649 with the following exceptions:
F = end load due to pressure, lb, acting on the effective
(1) The flexible wire braid shall act as an axial re-
area of the connector
straint for the hose and vibration dampener, and provide
N = minimum number of wires
columnar stability against squirm.
S = allowable stress at the rated temperature, psi
(2) Subsections NC/ND‐3649.1(a), NC/ND‐3649.2
α = wrap angle (the acute angle supported by the
(d), and NC/ND‐3649.4(c) are not applicable.
strand and the axis of the connector), as shown in
(c) The Certificate Holder that manufactures the hose
Figure BB-3300-1
shall supply to the N‐type Certificate Holder the maxi-
mum allowable end loads, inertia loads, displacements,
minimum curvature between the hose ends, and the
spring rates for the flexible hose. The calculated loads
and displacements for the piping system shall be less than
those supplied by the Certificate Holder that manufac-
tures the hose.
where

BB-3300 SPECIAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS D i = ID of convolution, Figure BB-3300-1

D o = OD of convolution, Figure BB-3300-1
(a) Flow‐induced vibration at design flow shall be eval- P = rated pressure, psi
uated and a sleeve specified when required per NC/
ND‐3649.2(f).

525
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure BB-3300-1
Bellows Configuration and Wrap Angle, α

Bellows

d Do
Dia.

Di

526
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE BB-4000
FABRICATION

BB-4100 REQUIREMENTS (c) The end pieces, whether welded, flanged, or

threaded, shall conform to NC/ND‐3132 and NC/
(a) All wire braid strands shall be welded to the weld- ND‐3612.
ing collars of the convoluted hose connector per NC/ (d) The inner sheath shall be attached to the end pieces
ND‐4800. utilizing circumferential welds of a butt type having full
(b) All welds shall conform to NC/ND‐4800. penetration through the thickness of the inner sheath.

527
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE BB-5000
EXAMINATION

BB-5100 PROCEDURES (c) All butt welds less than NPS 4 shall be examined by
PT or MT, as applicable, in accordance with NC/
(a) Examination requirements for expansion joints in ND‐5000.
accordance with NC/ND‐5700 shall be satisfied. (d) The wire‐strand‐to‐collar welds shall be visually ex-
(b) All butt welds greater than or equal to NPS 4 shall amined to detect unconnected wires.
be examined by RT or UT, in accordance with NC/
ND‐5000.

528
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE BB-6000
TESTING

BB-6100 HYDROSTATIC AND PNEUMATIC pneumatically tested when submerged in water. The test
TESTING of hoses with inlet piping connections of NPS 4 and smal-
ler need not be witnessed by the Inspector. The Inspec-
All braided flexible hoses shall be hydrostatically tested tor’s review of the Certificate Holder’s test records will
in accordance with NC/ND‐6000, except that test pres- be his authority to sign the Data Report. Installed hose as-
sure shall be not less than 1.5 times the design pressure semblies are subject to the piping system hydrostatic test.
at room temperature, and shall be so noted on Data Re-
port Form NPP-1. Alternatively, the hose may be

529
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE BB-7000
CERTIFICATION

BB-7100 PROVISIONS (c) A single NPP-1 Data Report Form may be used for a
lot of no more than 25 hose assemblies of the same nom-
(a) The braided flexible hose shall be stamped with the inal pipe size, length, and geometry.
Certification Mark with NPT Designator in accordance (d) The N‐type Certificate Holder shall demonstrate in
with NCA‐8230. The design pressure and temperature the Design Report for the piping system that includes
shall be part of the required information per NCA‐8211. the hose, that hose assembly manufacturer’s limits are
(b) The NPP-1 Data Report shall include the pressure not exceeded.
and temperature rating, maximum allowable end loads,
inertia loads, displacement, spring loads, and other loads
specified by the design specifications.

530
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX CC
ALTERNATIVE RULES FOR LINEAR PIPING SUPPORTS

ARTICLE CC-1000
INTRODUCTION

CC-1100 INTRODUCTION identifies the loadings and combinations of loadings for

which the supports are to be designed. The Design Spec-
CC-1110 SCOPE AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ification shall contain sufficient detail to provide a com-
ð17Þ CC-1111 Scope of This Appendix plete basis for construction of the supports.
This Appendix provides alternative rules to the re- (b) The Owner or his designee shall perform a docu-
quirements of Division 1, Subsections NCA and NF, and mented review of the calculations for each support to de-
Division 5, Subsection HA and Subsection HF, Subpart A termine that all the specified loadings have been
for Linear Piping Supports that are constructed to evaluated and that the acceptance criteria provided in
ANSI/AISC N690‐1994, “Specification for the Design, Fab- this Appendix and in ANSI/AISC N690 have been consid-
rication, and Erection of Steel Safety‐Related Structures ered. The responsibility for the method of analysis and
for Nuclear Facilities,” including Supplement 2, ANSI/AISC the accuracy of the calculations remains with the
N690–1994 (R2004) S2, and the requirements of this designer.
Appendix. (c) The supports shall be constructed under a Quality
Assurance Program that meets the requirements speci-
CC-1112 General Requirements fied by the Owner.
(a) When this Appendix is used, the Owner or his de-
signee shall provide a Design Specification (NCA‐3252,
NCA‐3255) that permits the use of this Appendix and

531
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE CC-2000
MATERIALS

CC-2100 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS compression dynamic stops used as stops for seismic
and other dynamic loads that are designed primarily for
ð17Þ CC-2110 SUPPORT MATERIAL compressive loading and are not connected to the pres-
(a) Material shall conform to ANSI/AISC N690. sure boundary and do not provide support of the pressure
(b) In those instances where material may be subject to boundary. Requirements, if any, for these materials shall
lamellar tearing, such as through‐thickness transmission be stated in the Design Specification.
of tensile loads in thick plates, the Design Specification NOTE: Stops do not include snubbers (NF-3412.4).
shall include the requirement that the material be ultraso-
nically examined in accordance with ANSI/AISC N690,
Section Q1.4.
CC-2120 CERTIFICATION OF MATERIALS
(c) The requirements of ANSI/AISC N690 Section Q1.4
or Q2.2 do not apply to bearings, bushings, gaskets, hy- Copies of Certified Material Test Reports, certified re-
draulic fluids, seals, shims, slide plates, retaining rings, ports of tests made by the fabricator or a qualified testing
wear shoes, springs, washers, wire rope, spring end laboratory, or Certificates of Compliance as required by
plates, thread locking devices, cotter pins, sight glass as- ANSI/AISC N690 shall be furnished to the Owner or de-
semblies, spring hanger travel and hydro stops, name- signee for all supports provided under these
plates, nameplate attachment devices, or for requirements.

532
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE CC-3000
DESIGN

CC-3100 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS (b) As an alternative to design by analysis, Design by

Load Rating as defined in NF‐3380 and NF‐3480 may be
CC-3110 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS used.
The design requirements that shall be satisfied in the (c) Plastic design per Part 2 of ANSI/AISC N690 shall
elastic analysis for any Design and Level A through D Ser- not be used.
vice Loadings stated in the Design Specification are those
given in Table Q1.5.7.1 of ANSI/AISC N690 and the addi-
tional requirements of CC-3120, CC-3130, and CC-3140.
CC-3140 DESIGN LIMITS
CC-3120 DESIGN LOAD CONSIDERATIONS
CC-3141 Stress Limits
(a) For the design of supports, the stress caused by the
restraint of free‐end displacements of components and (a) The rules and stress limits that shall be satisfied for
piping, such as thermal expansion and relative anchor dis- any Test Loading stated in the Design Specification shall
placements, shall be considered as a primary stress. be Load Combination 1 (Table Q1.5.7.1 in ANSI/AISC
(b) The Normal, Severe, Extreme, Abnormal, Abnormal N690), multiplied by a stress limit coefficient of 1.33.
Severe, and Abnormal Extreme load categories of ANSI/ (b) The Stress Limit Coefficients in ANSI/AISC N690
AISC N690 shall be correlated to the appropriate Design shall be modified as shown in Table CC-3120-1.
and Service Loadings identified in Design Specification
as shown in Table CC-3120-1. (c) Thermal stresses within the support as defined by
NF‐3121.11 need not be evaluated.
CC-3130 SPECIAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS (d) Shear stress limit shall not exceed 0.42S u , at
(a) The stress limit coefficients in Table CC-3120-1 are temperature.
not intended for control of deformation. When required (e) To avoid column buckling, the allowable compres-
by the Design Specification, deformation control shall be sive stresses shall be limited to two‐thirds of the critical
considered separately. buckling stress.

Table CC-3120-1
Correlation of Service Loadings and Stress
Limit Coefficients
Loading Category Stress Limit Coefficient Service Level
Normal 1.0 Design and Level A
Severe 1.33 Level B
Extreme 1.5 Level C
Abnormal 1.5 Level C
Abnormal severe 1.5 Level C
Abnormal extreme 1.7 Level D

533
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE CC-4000
FABRICATION

CC-4100 FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS N‐Type Certificate Holder and the qualification is per-
formed under the QA program applicable to the
(a) The requirements for welding qualifications given certificate.
in NF‐4300 may be used for any portion of fabrication (b) Thermal cutting is prohibited on quenched and
and installation in lieu of those specified in ANSI/AISC tempered steels.
N690, provided all such welding is performed by an

534
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE CC-5000
EXAMINATION

CC-5100 EXAMINATION REQUIREMENTS CC-5120 QUALIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION

OF NONDESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION
CC-5110 REQUIRED EXAMINATION OF WELDS PERSONNEL
CC-5111 Examination of Welds on Supports for CC-5121 NDE Personnel Requirements
Class 1 Piping
All NDE personnel shall be qualified to the require-
(a) All full penetration butt-welded joints in Supports
ments of ANSI/AISC N690, and all nondestructive exami-
for Class 1 piping shall be nondestructively examined by
nations shall be supervised or performed by an AWS
radiographic or ultrasonic methods in accordance with
Certified Welding Inspector.
ANSI/AISC N690.
(b) All other welded joints in Supports for Class 1 pip- CC-5122 Alternative Rules for Nondestructive
ing shall be nondestructively examined by liquid pene- Examination Personnel
trant or magnetic particle methods in accordance with
ANSI/AISC N690. As an alternative to CC-5121, N‐Type Certificate
Holders may use NF‐5500 for personnel qualification,
provided the qualification is performed under the QA pro-
gram applicable to the certificate.

535
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ARTICLE CC-8000
NAMEPLATES, STAMPING WITH CERTIFICATION MARK, AND
DATA REPORTS

CC-8100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Nameplates, stamping with Certification Mark, and
Data Reports are not required for Linear Piping Supports
designed and constructed to the requirements of this
Appendix.

536
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX DD
POLYETHYLENE MATERIAL ORGANIZATION RESPONSIBILITIES
DIAGRAM

ARTICLE DD-1000
INTRODUCTION

DD-1100 SCOPE
This Nonmandatory Appendix contains Figure
DD-1100-1 depicting inputs and outputs that govern ac-
tivities of Polyethylene Material Organization.

537
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure DD-1100-1
Polyethylene Material Organization Responsibilities per NCA-3970

PPI TR-3 & TR-4 PPI TR-3 & TR-4 PPI TR-3 & TR-4 PPI TR-3 & TR-4
External
CC N-755 CC N-755 CC N-755 CC N-755 Inputs
Section III Material Spec. Section III Material Spec. Section III Material Spec. Section III Material Spec. External
Outputs

• Procedures for PCC or • Documentation Identifying • Documentation Identifying • Quality System Program
Documentation of PCC Acceptable PCC Acceptable PCC • NC M & T Procedure
Natural Compound • NC • NC
Tests • NC CofAs
(NC) Manufacturer • NC CofAs • NC CofAs
• NC and NC CofAs • Documentation Identifying
Acceptable PCC

PCC for Testing Pigment Concentrate • Quality System Program

PCC PCC
(If not manufactured to Compound (PCC) • PCC M & T Procedure
PCC CofAs PCC CofAs
specifications of NC Manufacturer • PCC CofAs
Manufacturer)

Polyethylene • Quality System Program

Compound (PC) • PC M & T Procedure
Manufacturer • PC
• PC CPTRs

• Quality System Program

Polyethylene Material • PM M & T Procedure
(PM) Manufacturer • PM
Polyethylene Source Material Manufacturers • PM CPTRs

GENERAL NOTES:
(a) This figure depicts the following:
(1) external inputs (top row) that govern activities of Polyethylene Material Organizations
(2) outputs from one Polyethylene Material Organization that are as follows:
(a) either inputs to other Polyethylene Material Organizations
(b) or are external outputs in the form of products or quality documentation
(b) The definitions are as follows:
(1) CofA = Certificate of Analysis
(2) CPTR = Certified Polyethylene Test Report
(3) M & T = Manufacturing & Testing
(4) Polyethylene Source Material Manufacturer = Natural Compound Manufacturer, Pigment Concentrate Compound Manufacturer, or
Polyethylene Compound Manufacturer
(c) Polyethylene material supplier and polyethylene service suppliers are not shown.

538
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX EE
STRAIN-BASED ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA DEFINITIONS AND
BACKGROUND INFORMATION

ARTICLE EE-1000
STRAIN INFORMATION

EE-1100 DEFINITIONS driving mechanism for plastic distortion is the transfor-

mation of externally supplied energy (e.g., kinetic energy
EE-1110 EQUIVALENT (TRUE) PLASTIC STRAIN in the case of impacts and drops) into plastic work, the
The equivalent (true) plastic strain is analogous to the equivalent plastic strain is intrinsically a better indication
equivalent stress ( ), which is the von Mises stress, where of the material condition than any instantaneous stress
the superscript prime indicates the deviatoric stress ten- determination.
sor ( ) with ij reflecting tensor notation In summary, the equivalent plastic strain cumulatively
combines the strain state/history into a meaningful scalar
value for comparative purposes. This value is especially
useful in reducing the voluminous strain output created
by finite element and other computer-solution methods
Similarly, the equivalent plastic strain rate ( ) is de- commonly in use today. The fact that the equivalent plas-
tic strain does not indicate whether tension or compres-
fined in terms of the plastic strain rate tensor ( )
sion has caused the strain is appropriate and consistent
with the triaxiality factor usage herein, which also conser-
vatively ignores any strengthening effects due to
compression.
The equivalent plastic strain ( ) is the integral of the
equivalent plastic strain rate over the time interval t EE-1120 QUASI-STATIC TENSILE TESTING
Stress–strain curves are usually presented as either
(a) engineering stress–strain curves, in which the origi-
nal specimen cross-sectional area is used to determine
Combining the above two equations results in the fol- stress, and the change in length divided by the original
lowing equation for the equivalent plastic strain: length determines strain, or
(b) true stress–strain curves, where the instantaneous
cross-sectional area of the specimen is used to determine
the stress and the strain.
To document a quasi-static tensile test, an engineering
Nonmandatory Appendix FF uses the above stress–strain curve is developed from the load-
definition17 of equivalent plastic strain. Equivalent plastic displacement measurements made during the test on
strain is a common variable calculated in nonlinear finite the test specimen (Figure EE-1120-1, typical for ductile
element software codes, and details on its derivation are material). The engineering stress, S , plotted on this curve
typically available in the documentation associated with is the average longitudinal stress in the tensile specimen
those codes as well as other engineering treatises on obtained by dividing the load, P, by the original specimen
strain and plasticity. cross-sectional area, A o . The engineering strain, e , plotted
The equivalent plastic strain is a cumulative, positive on the curve is the average linear strain obtained by di-
scalar quantity, nondecreasing strain measure that takes viding the change in gauge length, ΔL , of the specimen
into account the entire deformation history. Since the by the original length, L o .

539
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure EE-1120-1
Typical Engineering Tensile Stress–Strain Curve (Ref. [1])

Strain to fracture

Uniform strain
Su
E=S/e
Necking
begins
Fracture
Engineering Stress, S

B
YS (offset yield
A
strength)

Tensile
strength

Fracture
stress

ef
0 0.002
Engineering Strain, e

stress–strain curve, the total axial displacement of the test

specimen must be accurately measured, using a large dis-
placement extensometer or other appropriate means.
The engineering stress–strain curve does not give the
most accurate indication of the deformation characteris-
The elastic limit, shown as point B in Figure EE-1120-1, tics of a material because it is based on the original speci-
is the greatest stress the material can withstand without men dimensions that actually change continuously during
measurable permanent strain remaining after complete the test. Also, at the point of ultimate load, necking begins
release of load. The yield strength, shown as point YS in and the cross-sectional area of the specimen decreases ra-
Figure EE-1120-1, is the stress required to produce a pidly, and the load required to continue deformation les-
small, specified amount of inelastic deformation. The sens, as implied in Figure EE-1120-1. The average stress
usual definition of this property is the offset yield based on the original area likewise decreases, and pro-
strength determined by the stress corresponding to the duces the downturn in the engineering stress–strain
intersection of the linear elastic segment of the stress– curve beyond the point of maximum load. In reality, the
strain curve offset by a specified strain of 0.2% (e = material continues to strain-harden to fracture, so that
0.002). The tensile strength (or ultimate strength), S u , is the stress required to produce further deformation
the corresponding stress where the maximum load that should also increase. If the true stress, based on the actual
the material can withstand occurs. This also corresponds cross-sectional area of the specimen is used, the stress–
to the point where the specimen becomes unstable (onset strain curve increases continuously to fracture. If the
of necking) and necks down during the remaining course strain measurement is also based on instantaneous mea-
of the tensile test. Necking is the point of rapid, localized surement, the curve obtained is the true stress–strain
reduction of cross-sectional area of a specimen under ten- curve as illustrated in Figure EE-1120-2.
sile loading. It is disregarded in calculating engineering Up to the point of necking, the true stress, σ t , may be
stress but is taken into account in determining true stress. expressed in terms of engineering stress by
Complete fracture (failure point) of the specimen follows
necking. In order to accurately determine the complete

540
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

nominal stress is often corrected to get the true equiva-

Figure EE-1120-2
lent uniaxial stress using a Bridgman Correction factor
Comparison of Engineering and True
[2], which is dependent upon specimen geometry (cor-
Stress–Strain Curves (Ref. [1])
rected curve in Figure EE-1120-2).

EE-1130 TRUE UNIFORM STRAIN LIMIT

True stress/true strain curve
ε u n i f o r m : true uniform strain limit or the true strain just
Corrected for prior to the onset of necking in a uniaxial tensile test [the
necking true strain at the maximum load (tensile strength)] at the
coincident average through-wall temperature of the base
Stress

Engineering or weld material

stress–strain curve In a uniaxial tensile test, a specimen experiences uni-
form straining along the entire gauge (or reduced area)
length until the maximum load is reached (at the tensile
strength).
Maximum load
Fracture EE-1140 TRUE FRACTURE STRAIN LIMIT

0 Strain ε f r a c t u r e : true strain at fracture in a uniaxial tensile test

at the coincident average through-wall temperature of
the base or weld material
Up to the onset of necking, the true strain, ε t , may be Beyond the uniform strain limit, further deformation
determined from the engineering strain, by occurs in a relatively small volume of material as the spe-
cimen local cross-sectional area reduces (“necks”). Note
that even though a typical stainless steel true stress–
strain curve shows a large area under the curve from
the onset of necking to fracture, the volume of material
where “ln” is the natural log. associated with that necked region is smaller than the vol-
Beyond the point of maximum load (necking region), ume of material in the specimen’s gauge length — result-
the true strain is based on the actual current area, A , ing in only a small additional amount of energy absorbed
and is expressed as follows: (compared to the energy absorbed in the entire gauge
length volume up to the uniform strain limit) prior to
the specimen breaking. Engineering fracture strain is
and the true stress is based on the load and actual current the strain at fracture, denoted as e f in Figure EE-1120-1.
area Failure in stress-based acceptance criteria may be
based on, for example, exceeding the specified minimum
material yield strength. The acceptance criteria would
At the point of fracture, the true strain (ε t ) and true then limit the stresses to a level below the material yield
stress (σ t ) are thus expressed: strength to provide a safety margin against yielding. In
these strain-based acceptance criteria, large plastic defor-
mations are expected and allowed in the structure. The
goal of the acceptance criteria is to maintain the allowable
where leakage rate identified in the Design Specification. There-
fore, failure would be defined as plastic strain levels that
A f = the area at fracture
cause breach of the structure or through-wall crack
P f = the load at fracture
formation.
The true stress–strain curve beyond the point of onset The materials to which these strain-based acceptance
of necking (the maximum load or uniform strain limit) is criteria are limited, 304, 304L, 316, or 316L (or dual-
further complicated by the development of radial and marked 304/304L or 316/316L), are ductile austenitic
hoop stresses in the necking region. The average axial stainless steels. The potential for leakage of these stain-
or nominal stress given by σ t = P /A is not the true less steels would not be expected until the through-wall
equivalent uniaxial stress because the hoop and radial strains reach a level of significant material necking near
stresses are not zero. Beyond the onset of necking, the the true fracture limit.

541
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

EE-1150 USE OF TRIAXIALITY FACTOR

Table EE-1150-1
Triaxiality Factor (TF) as used in the strain-based ac- Examples of Triaxiality Factor Calculations
ceptance criteria of FF-1140 is defined as: Normalized
Principal Stresses Calculated
σ1 σ2 σ3 TF Description
1 0 0 1 Uniaxial tension
1 1 0 2 Biaxial tension
where σ 1 , σ 2 , and σ 3 are the principal stresses at the lo- 1 1 1
/4 3 Triaxial tension
1 1
cation under evaluation. 1 /2 /2 4 Triaxial tension
1
1 1 /2 5 Triaxial tension
Many theories and formulations have been proposed to 1 1 1 ∞ Triaxial tension
account for material damage under multi-axial stress and
plastic strain conditions. The details of these theories and 1 −1 0 0 Tension/compression
1 −1/2 0 0.378 Tension/compression
formulations will not be discussed herein. However, the
1 1 −1 0.5 Biaxial tension/
chosen methodology employed in these criteria, as dis- compression
cussed in EPRI Report NP-1921 (ref. [3]), uses the triaxi- 1 −1 −1 −0.5 Tension/compression
ality factor in a simple formulation. −1 −1 −1 −∞ Triaxial compression
The equivalent plastic strain correctly calculates the
strain condition on the Von Mises yield surface in the ab-
sence of damage (crack initiation or flaw propagation).
However, real materials experience damage under plastic EE-1200 BACKGROUND INFORMATION
deformation, which is accelerated when multi-axial ten-
sile stress conditions exist. The concept of a stress triaxi- EE-1210 ACHIEVING DESIRED LEAKAGE RATES
ality factor was first proposed by Davis and Connelly (ref.
[4]), and has been widely discussed since (e.g., refs. [3] Drop testing research has been performed (refs. [6],
and [5]). As discussed above, the stress triaxiality factor [7]) on 18 in. (457 mm) diameter, 3/8 in. (9.53 mm) wall
is based on the principal stresses, and is the sum of the thickness and 24 in. (610 mm) diameter, 1/2 in.
three principal stresses (first stress invariant) divided (12.7 mm) wall thickness canisters, 10 ft and 15 ft (3 m
by the effective (Von Mises) stress at a location. The strain and 4.5 m) in length, weighing about 6,000 lb
at failure in a general case is related to the uniaxial ten- to 10,000 lb (26.7 kN to 44.5 kN). The canisters were
sion failure strain by: made of SA-312 and SA-240 austenitic stainless steel
(316L or 316/316L). These canisters were dropped from
30 ft (9 m) onto a rigid, flat surface, impacting at a variety
of orientations or from lower drop distances onto plate
Therefore, determining the allowable strain limits by edges or ends of round bars. After drop testing, the worst-
accounting for stress triaxiality effects will promote dam- strained canisters of each test sequence were helium leak
age prevention and the achievement of specified leakage tested and found to have leakage rates of less than 10–7
rates. std cc/sec, which is considered leaktight (ref. [8]). Certain
A triaxiality factor of 1.0 represents uniaxial tension, a canister test specimens had computer predicted maxi-
factor of 2.0 represents biaxial tension, and greater than mum equivalent plastic strains in excess of the average
2.0 indicates a triaxial tension state. Triaxiality factors through-wall thickness strain limits of FF-1140. This
of less than 1.0 are due to compressive principal stresses gives a clear indication that the average through-wall al-
in one or more directions. Examples of triaxiality factors lowable equivalent plastic strain of 67% of the true uni-
for varying normalized principal stresses are shown in form strain limit does indeed maintain desired leakage
Table EE-1150-1. rates, up to and including leaktight conditions. Other
Note that the triaxiality factor does not indicate that 24 in. (610 mm) diameter, 1/2 in. (12.7 mm) wall thickness
plastic straining is occurring — it merely indicates the as- canisters (Multi-Canister Overpacks) made from SA-312
sociated stress state. Therefore, only the triaxiality factor and SA-240 austenitic stainless steel (304L or 304/
calculated while plastic straining is occurring is applic- 304L) and weighing approximately 18,000 lb (80 kN)
able in the strain-based acceptance criteria. When plastic were drop tested and had similar results (ref. [7]).
straining has stopped, the triaxiality factor simply indi- During this canister drop testing effort, one canister of
cates the elastic stress state. the 18 in. (457 mm) diameter geometry was dropped
The strain-based acceptance criteria indicate that a from 30 ft (9 m) with an integral skirt experiencing signif-
minimum triaxiality factor of 1.0 (positive value) must icant deformation. The analytically predicted peak
be used. Using a minimum factor of 1.0 conservatively equivalent plastic strain was 107% on the outside surface,
ignores the potential strengthening/damage inhibiting ef- far beyond the maximum strain limit established in
fects of compressive stresses. FF-1140. Nondestructive examination (liquid penetrant)

542
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

was performed on this surface of the test canister and no the specific locations of use, reflecting an as-built condi-
indications were identified, demonstrating that no cracks tion. When calculating the resulting strains using inelastic
had initiated, even at these high strain levels. analyses, the material properties are varied at locations
Finally, over 500 impact tests have been performed for various components fabricated from different materi-
during research efforts to quantify strain rate effects for al heats to assure that the maximum energy is input into
austenitic stainless steel materials (refs. [9], [10]) includ- the containment boundary.
ing both 304/304L and 316/316L materials. This testing In order to properly implement the strain-based accep-
included base and weld materials at −20°F (−29°C), room, tance criteria, the necessary material property data [be-
300°F (149°C), and 600°F (316°C) temperature condi- yond those available in Section II or provided on the
tions. One hundred seventy-one of those impact tests Certified Material Test Reports (CMTRs)] are defined as
strained the test specimens to levels between 66% and the true stress–strain curve (for computer model input),
100% of the established uniform strain limit. These test the true uniform strain limit, and the true fracture strain
specimens, with strains above the average (through-wall) limit, for both base and weld materials at the tempera-
equivalent plastic strain limits established by the strain- tures necessary to define the coincident conditions of
based acceptance criteria, had no visible cracks in the sur- the dynamic energy-limited event. If the CMTR data do
face of the material. Forty-nine of these specimens were not accurately reflect the material property data of the fi-
strained to 90% of the uniform strain limit or higher. nal product being used in the fabrication of the contain-
Hence, the results of this testing have demonstrated that ment, then the material testing procedure of EE-1222
the 304/304L and 316/316L austenitic stainless steels should be used to establish existing material property
are sufficiently ductile to experience strains exceeding data.
the limits established in FF-1140 without developing Two options for determining appropriate material
crack initiation concerns. No crack formation means these properties used in the inelastic analyses are provided in
materials can achieve the desired leakage rates. The limits EE-1221 and EE-1222. In either option, the Code user
imposed by the strain-based acceptance criteria provide can assume material properties for preliminary analytical
additional margins of safety. evaluations as long as the final Design Report adequately
These test results demonstrate that austenitic stainless reflects the temperature-dependent base and welded ma-
steels have an ability to experience high strains without terial properties actually used in fabrication of the con-
crack formation and still achieve desired leakage rates tainment and their specific locations of use. In one
down to 10−7 std cc/sec. This is true under uniaxial load- extreme, the assumptions can reflect a wide range of ma-
ing and also multiaxial loading conditions because of the terial properties and material use locations via numerous
incorporation of the triaxiality factor into the strain-based analytical evaluations so that the procurement of fabrica-
acceptance criteria. tion material is simplified and the analytical work does
not have to be regenerated when the properties of the ac-
ð17Þ EE-1220 MATERIAL PROPERTIES FOR INELASTIC tual fabrication material become known. The other ex-
EVALUATIONS treme is to assume material properties that reflect a
Appropriate consideration of the actual inelastic very limited range of values (minimizing the analytical
response of the containment materials is vital to the accu- evaluations) but the material procurement process must
rate prediction of strains and the proper implementation then impose additional requirements in order to obtain
of the strain-based acceptance criteria. Material proper- material that properly reflects that limited range of mate-
ties in an aged condition (potential material degradation rial properties and material use locations. Regardless of
throughout the design life) must be considered. Tempera- the option chosen, evaluation of the material heats actu-
ture effects on material properties must also be incorpo- ally used in fabrication of the containment on a
rated into any inelastic evaluations using the strain-based location-by-location basis considering temperature must
acceptance criteria. Determination of containment strains be made for the final Design Report.
at multiple temperature conditions (not just at the maxi- For explanation purposes, it is assumed that the user
mum or minimum temperature) is required to assure the performs preliminary analyses prior to the actual initia-
resulting maximum product of the equivalent plastic tion of fabrication. It then becomes incumbent on the Cer-
strain and the associated triaxiality factor (maximum tificate Holder responsible for the final Design Report to
strain response) has been determined because an energy- justify the material properties used or to reanalyze the
limited event may occur at various temperature containment as necessary. This justification process is
conditions. discussed below.
Different heats of the same material specification can
have wide ranges of material properties. This mixture of EE-1221 ASME-Specified Material (Base and
material properties can complicate the determination of Weld) Strength Properties
the maximum strain response of the containment. There- At this time, the ASME-specified true stress–strain
fore, these varying material properties must be properly curves (reflecting minimum yield and ultimate tensile
defined in the complete containment analysis model at strength values) and the true uniform and fracture strain

543
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

limits (reflecting a 98% exceedance probability) asso- Step 6. Compare material properties. The heat-specific
ciated with the strain-based acceptance criteria of Non- true stress–strain curves for the actual material being
mandatory Appendix FF are still under development, so used in fabrication should be compared to the material in-
this option does not currently exist. Until these data be- put of the inelastic analysis performed, on a location-by-
come available, the user must develop the necessary ma- location basis. If the true stress–strain curves vary from
terial data based on tensile testing (see EE-1222) and the corresponding values used in any existing inelastic
their use justified in the final Design Report. analysis by more than 15% based on location use, the
complete containment design must be reanalyzed and
reevaluated.
EE-1222 Actual Material (Base and Weld) Step 7. Perform final analyses. Perform new inelastic
Strength Properties analyses as needed or redo any inelastic analyses that
The second option permits the use of tensile test data do not satisfy the material property data tolerance check.
reflecting the specific material properties from the actual These analytical evaluations must adequately reflect the
material heats used in the containment fabrication, pro- heat-specific material data at the appropriate locations
within each containment model for the various appropri-
vided the necessary material properties (true stress–
ate temperature conditions. Resulting maximum strain
strain curves, true uniform strain limits, and true fracture
strain limits) are correctly obtained. There are nine basic responses can then be determined as the highest values
steps associated with this option. from all of the pertinent analyses performed. This reana-
lysis effort is required because stronger materials (mate-
Step 1. Perform preliminary analyses. If necessary, per- rial properties greater than the ASME provided
form preliminary analyses using either limited analyses minimums) may alter the strain response of the contain-
(requiring assurance that the materials used are within ment. For the final inelastic analyses for the final Design
the acceptable range of tolerance for the material prop- Report, the assumed properties must eventually be recon-
erty data used in the inelastic analyses) or numerous ana- ciled with the actual material used in the fabrication.
lyses (sufficient to address both a wide range of potential
Step 8. Establish strain limits for the strain-based ac-
material property data and location uses). If material is
ceptance criteria. Using the best mean material test data
not available when the preliminary inelastic analyses
as established in Step 5, for each unique material heat
are performed, assumed material properties may be used.
and temperature, determine the 98% exceedance prob-
Step 2. Procure material and obtain appropriate ability true uniform strain limits and true fracture strain
CMTRs. limits for use in the strain-based acceptance criteria (98%
Step 3. Perform material testing. Perform the necessary exceedance probability is defined as the mean value
base and welded material testing at the various tempera- minus two standard deviations).
tures of interest. These tensile test data (true stress– Step 9. Compare predicted strains with strain criteria.
strain curves and appropriate strain limits) can be based Compare the predicted maximum strain responses to
on the mean (average) of three tests for each unique ma- the strain-based acceptance criteria in FF-1140. The
terial heat or weld, at the coincident temperature condi- tested true uniform and true fracture strain limits (ad-
tions of the event, performed in compliance with the justed to a 98% exceedance probability) must be used
requirements of SA-370. Weld material test specimens to establish the strain-based acceptance criteria limits
shall consist of weld material through the entire volume in FF-1140.
of the reduced section of the test specimen.
Step 4. Check validity of material testing. The appropri- EE-1230 BASE VERSUS WELDED MATERIAL
ate CMTR data should then be compared to the actual cor- RESPONSES
responding mean material test data and evaluated for Prior drop testing experience of full-scale Department
accuracy (±10% tolerance). This check assures that the of Energy spent nuclear fuel canisters (refs. [6], [7]) indi-
tensile testing was properly performed. If the test data cated there was no significant variation or discontinuity
are beyond this tolerance, the three tensile tests must in the deformation responses of the canister wall when
be repeated. If the mean values of the repeated tests impact occurred directly onto a canister weld. A limited
match the CMTR data within the established tolerance, number of strain rate impact tests performed at the Idaho
then the repeated test data should be used. If the repeated National Laboratory (ref. [11]) of welded material at ele-
test data matches the first set of test data within the vated temperatures were performed prior to the comple-
±10% tolerance, then the set of data whose mean values tion of that material’s quasi-static tensile testing. These
of yield and tensile strengths more closely match the first strain rate impact tests used the same drop weight
CMTR data should be used. and drop height as was used for the corresponding base
Step 5. Develop true stress–strain curves. Using the ap- material. The resulting strain rate responses of the
propriate mean test data, develop the true stress–strain welded material test specimens appeared to be very sim-
curves and determine the true uniform and true fracture ilar to the base material. However, some of the welded
strain limits at each temperature for each material heat. material test specimens necked or broke where the base

544
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

material test specimens had not. The conclusion reached permits the structural analyst to use the same strain rate
was that the welded material had a lower uniform strain factor data for both base and weld materials when incor-
limit and fracture strain than the base material. After porating strain rate effects into finite element models.
completion of all the quasi-static tensile testing, this in- However, the structural analyst must be fully aware that
deed turned out to be the case. the welds can have lower uniform strain and fracture
Figures EE-1230-1 and EE-1230-2 show, for 304/304L strain limits.
and 316/316L respectively, quasi-static tensile test re-
sults of base and welded materials at 300°F (149°C) tem- EE-1240 PROPER FINITE ELEMENTS MODELS
perature conditions. These representative engineering In order to properly implement the strain-based accep-
stress–strain plots illustrate that the uniform strain and tance criteria, it is imperative that accurate strains be cal-
fracture strain limits for the welded material are lower culated. In turn, this means accurate analysis models of
than the associated base material. Figures EE-1230-3 the containment are needed. These strain-based accep-
and EE-1230-4 are comparative strain history plots of tance criteria should be applicable only to strain results
304/304L and 316/316L base and welded material im- from Quality Models. A Quality Model is a model that ad-
pact tests performed at −20°F (−29°C). These impact tests heres to the guidance set forth in the ASME Computa-
used the same drop weight, drop height, and test speci- tional Modeling Guidance Document for Explicit
men geometry. These plots illustrate how similar the base Dynamics Software (currently being developed by the
and welded material were in terms of strain rate re- ASME BPV III Special Working Group on Computational
sponse. The plots also show that the welded material ab- Modeling For Explicit Dynamics), or using a model with
sorbs the impact energy with a lower maximum strain suitable convergence and sensitivity studies already
than the base material (i.e., welded material is stronger completed.
than base material). However, as discussed above, the Issues that need to be properly addressed in a Quality
welds fail at lower strain levels than the base material Model (or equivalent) include
(i.e., welded material is less ductile than the base (a) acceptable element types
material). (b) proper element aspect ratios
Based on the strain rate range achieved, the welded (c) adequate element transitioning
material test specimens responded very similar to the (d) appropriate finite element meshing
base material test specimens. Therefore, one would ex- (e) acceptable modeling of welded and bolted joints
pect the strain rate factors to be similar (ref. [11]). This (f) correct material property input

Figure EE-1230-1
Quasi-Static Tensile Test Results for 304/304L Base and Welded Material at 300°F (149°C)

80,000 552

70,000 483

60,000 414
Base
Engineering Stress, MPa
Engineering Stress, psi

Heat A
50,000 345
Welded
Heat A 276
40,000
Welded
Heat B
30,000 207
Base
Heat B
20,000 138

10,000 69

0
0.0000 0.1000 0.2000 0.3000 0.4000 0.5000 0.6000

Engineering Strain, in./in. (mm/mm)

545
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure EE-1230-2
Quasi-Static Tensile Test Results for 316/316L Base and Welded Material at 300°F (149°C)

80,000 552
Welded Base
Heat C Heat D
70,000 483
Base
Heat C 414
60,000
Engineering Stress, psi

Engineering Stress, MPa

50,000 345

40,000 276

30,000 207
Welded
Heat D
20,000 138

10,000 69

0
0.0000 0.1000 0.2000 0.3000 0.4000 0.5000

Engineering Strain, in./in. (mm/mm)

Figure EE-1230-3
Comparison of Base and Welded 304/304L Material to Identical Impact Tests at −20°F (−29°C)

0.025

0.2
Base
Strain, in./in. (mm/mm)

Welded

0.15

0.1

0.05

0
0 0.002 0.004 0.006 0.008 0.01 0.012 0.014 0.016 0.018 0.02

Time, sec

546
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure EE-1230-4
Comparison of Base and Welded 316/316L Material to Identical Impact Tests at −20°F (−29°C)

0.25

Base

0.2
Welded
Strain, in./in. (mm/mm)

0.15

0.1

0.05

0
0 0.005 0.01 0.015 0.02 0.025

Time, sec

(g) proper consideration of contact points, friction, (lower 20s mm/mm/s)]. Table EE-1250-1 provides a
gaps, and boundary conditions summary of the impact testing results and illustrates
(h) realistic application of loading the magnitude of the increased energy absorption capac-
(i) correct solution technique ity that can exist in these ductile stainless steel materials
(j) proper calculation of the Triaxiality Factor as de- at varying temperatures. The strain rate factor is applied
fined in FF-1140 to all of the stress values of a true stress–strain curve (de-
(k) useful and correct strain output veloped from data obtained using SA-370 methods) to re-
flect the increased energy absorption capacity.
EE-1250 STRAIN RATE EFFECTS
Strain rate effects refer to a material’s ability to absorb
increased amounts of strain energy during dynamic
events, beyond that determined during quasi-static ten- Table EE-1250-1
sile testing (EE-1120). Resulting strain predictions within Factors for Specified Strain Rates
a containment design may change when strain rate effects Strain
are properly considered. In order to address this beha- Rate in./
vior, additional inelastic analyses need to be completed in./sec
in order to assure that the resulting maximum strain re- (mm/ −20°F Room 300°F 600°F
mm/s) (−29°C) Temperature (149°C) (316°C)
sponses have been determined.
304/304L Stainless Steel
The strain rate testing mentioned above (refs. [9],
[10]) has provided data to support the development of 5 1.333 1.235 1.166 1.043
10 1.361 1.278 1.210 1.094
strain rate elevated true stress–strain curves for both
22 1.428 1.381 1.316 1.217
304/304L and 316/316L austenitic stainless steel base
316/316L Stainless Steel
and weld materials that account for strain rate strength-
5 1.275 1.265 1.162 1.040
ening up to a strain rate of nearly 40 in./in./sec
10 1.296 1.281 1.187 1.070
(40 mm/mm/s), depending upon temperature [highest 22 1.346 1.321 1.247 1.140
strain rates achieved at 600°F (316°C) with existing test
equipment were in the lower 20s in./in./sec

547
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

The results of the impact testing demonstrated that the [5] Design and Development Guide for NNSA Type B
effects of strain rate decreased with increasing tempera- Packages, National Nuclear Security Administration,
ture. Base and weld materials appeared to behave simi- SG-100 Rev. 2, Appendix M, September 2005.
larly during impact testing (same factors), but welded [6] S. D. Snow, D. K. Morton, T. E. Rahl, A. G. Ware, N. L.
materials were not able to achieve strains as high as their Smith, “Analytical Evaluation of Drop Tests Performed
associated base material (demonstrated for both quasi- on Nine 18-Inch Diameter Standardized DOE Spent Nu-
static and dynamic impact loadings). The uniform strain clear Fuel Canisters,” ASME Pressure Vessels and Piping
limits for both weld material and base material did not Conference, Seattle, Washington, ASME PVP-Vol. 408,
appear to change from the values established during pp. 97 – 106, July 2000.
quasi-static tensile testing for the strain rate range con- [7] S. D. Snow, D. K. Morton, T. E. Rahl, R. K. Blandford, and
sidered [up to 22 in./in./sec (22 mm/mm/s)]. T. J. Hill, “Drop Testing of DOE Spent Nuclear Fuel Can-
Using the strain rate data developed as material input isters,” ASME Pressure Vessels and Piping Conference,
into analytical models of the impact tensile tests per- Denver, Colorado, PVP2005-71134, American Society
formed resulted in analytical predictions that showed of Mechanical Engineers, New York, New York, July
marked improvements when compared to material input 2005.
reflecting quasi-static tensile test results. Hence, consid- [8] American National Standard for Radioactive Materials
ering the range of factors in Table EE-1250-1, the metho- – Leakage Tests on Packages for Shipment, American
dology of FF-1145 reflects the trend indicated by the data. National Standards Institute, ANSI N14.5-1997.
[9] D. K. Morton, S. D. Snow, T. E. Rahl, and R. K. Blandford,
EE-1260 REFERENCES “Impact Testing of Stainless Steel Material at Room and
[1] ASM International, Atlas of Stress–Strain Curves, Mate- Elevated Temperatures,” ASME Pressure Vessels and Pip-
rial Park: ASM International, Second Edition, 2002. ing Conference, San Antonio, Texas, PVP2007-26182,
[2] P. W. Bridgman, The Stress Distribution at the Neck of a American Society of Mechanical Engineers, New York,
Tension Specimen, Transactions of the A. S. M., Twenty- New York, July 2007.
fifth Annual Convention, Chicago, Illinois, October [10] D. K. Morton, R. K. Blandford, and S. D. Snow, “Impact
18–22, 1943. Testing of Stainless Steel Material at Cold Tempera-
[3] W. E. Cooper, Rational for a Standard on the Requalifi- tures,” ASME Pressure Vessels and Piping Conference,
cation of Nuclear Class 1 Pressure-Boundary Compo- Chicago, Illinois, PVP2008-61215, American Society of
nents, Electric Power Research Institute, NP-1921, Mechanical Engineers, New York, New York, July 2008.
Research Project 1756-1, 1981. [11] D. K. Morton and R. K. Blandford, “Impact Tensile
[4] E. A. Davis and F. M. Connelly, “Stress Distribution and Testing of Stainless Steels at Various Temperatures,”
Plastic Deformation in Rotating Cylinders of Strain- EDF-NSNF-082, Idaho National Laboratory, March
Hardening Material,” Journal of Applied Mechanics, 2008.
March 1959.

548
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX FF
STRAIN-BASED ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR ENERGY-LIMITED
EVENTS

ARTICLE FF-1000
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA

FF-1100 STRAIN-BASED ACCEPTANCE A number of additional limitations are imposed that

CRITERIA shall be satisfied prior to determining if these strain-
based acceptance criteria are appropriate to use. These
The strain-based acceptance criteria presented in this limitations are specified in the paragraphs below.
Nonmandatory Appendix utilize a variety of terminology
that must be clearly understood. In addition, background FF-1121 Limited Loadings
information that explains various strain concepts, materi-
al property variations, and strain responses is useful in Only energy-limited loadings shall be evaluated using
order to properly implement these strain-based accep- the strain-based acceptance criteria. Such loadings are
tance criteria. Therefore, Nonmandatory Appendix EE limited to one-time events per location on the contain-
has been established to provide this information to the ment where the strain-based acceptance criteria are im-
Code user. plemented. Cyclic and repeated incremental strain
responses are not allowed. The loadings include acciden-
FF-1110 GOAL OF STRAIN CRITERIA tal drops and impacts of nonsharp, blunt objects [e.g., 6 in.
(15 cm) diameter post with rounded edges, aircraft en-
The goal of the strain-based acceptance criteria is to es- gine shafts, etc.].
tablish plastic strain limits that are capable of maintaining
the allowable leakage rate identified in the Design Speci-
FF-1122 Limited Materials
fication, during and after energy-limited events. To
achieve this goal, only a limited number of proven ductile The strain-based acceptance criteria shall only be ap-
materials are allowed for which the strain limits have plied to 304, 304L, 304/304L, 316, 316L, and 316/316L
been established with sufficient margins of safety. When material. The permitted ASME material specifications
calculating the resulting strains using inelastic analyses, (as restricted by Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Table 2A)
the material properties are varied at locations for various are listed in Table FF-1122-1. Materials used shall have
components fabricated from different material heats to sufficient material properties determined (see Nonman-
assure that the maximum energy is input into the contain- datory Appendix EE) in order to properly implement
ment boundary (see EE-1220). The strain-based accep- the strain-based acceptance criteria and these properties
tance criteria have been established to prevent and their implementation in the analysis shall be justified
through-wall crack formation, thereby maintaining the in the final Design Report.
helium leakage rate specified in the Design Specification, If certain products from these material specifications
down to 10−7 std cc/sec (EE-1210) or lower. These strain- have been subjected to excessive cold working or lack a
based acceptance criteria are not allowed to be used in in- proper heat treatment and the result is a significant loss
stances where the resulting deformations could result in a of ductility (true fracture strain approaching the true uni-
breach of the containment. form strain limit), these products shall not have the
strain-based acceptance criteria applied to them.
FF-1120 CRITERIA LIMITATIONS FF-1140 provides additional requirements that assure
this concern is addressed.
The strain-based acceptance criteria specified in this
Nonmandatory Appendix were developed for the evalua-
tion of containments subjected to energy-limited dynamic FF-1123 Limited Temperatures
events that have been identified in the Design Specifica- The applicable material temperature range shall be lim-
tion as having to satisfy Level D Service Limits. ited from −40°F to 800°F (−40°C to 425°C).

549
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

where
Table FF-1122-1
Permitted Material Specifications and R f = final radius to centerline of the curved surface
Products R o = original radius (equal to infinity for a flat surface)
t = nominal thickness
Material
Specification Type/Grade Product (3) for other shapes, fabrication-induced strains shall
SA-182 F304L, F304, F316L, Forgings only be established by appropriate means (e.g., measurement
F316 or analytical methods) and documented in the final De-
SA-240 304L, 304, 316L, 316 Plate only (sheet and sign Report
strip excluded) (b) The effects of fabrication strains that exceed 5%
shall be minimized by means of post-fabrication heat
SA-312 (excluding TP304L, TP304, Seamless and
HCW pipe) TP316L, TP316 welded pipe treatment (per requirements specified for all grades in
Section II, Part A, Specification SA-312, Table 2, “Anneal-
SA-965 F304L, F304, F316L, Forgings ing Requirements,” or an equivalent heat treatment that
F316
reduces fabrication strain levels below 5%) or the fabri-
SA-376 TP304, TP316 Seamless pipe cation strain18 shall be deducted from the material’s true
SA-479 (excluding 304L, 304, 316L, 316 Bars and shapes
uniform and fracture strain limit values. Fabrication
strain-hardened strains that exceed 10% are not allowed.
material) (c) Residual stresses and the associated material
strains in, or adjacent to, welds resulting from the weld-
GENERAL NOTE: Single or dual-marked materials (see Sec- ing process alone are not to be considered in the determi-
tion II, Part D, Mandatory Appendix 7) are acceptable.
nation of fabrication strains.

FF-1126 Exclusions
FF-1124 Limited Welded Joints The strain-based acceptance criteria shall not be ap-
The applicability of these strain-based acceptance cri- plied to the following locations:
teria to welds is limited to full-penetration butt-welded (a) regions of the containment where strain deforma-
joints (Categories A and B) only. Autogenous seam welds tions are detrimental to maintaining the desired leakage
on SA-312 welded pipe shall be considered the same as rate (e.g., the sealing region of a bolted closure)
the base material, able to implement the strain-based ac- (b) structural or nonstructural attachments to the
ceptance criteria. Other categories of welds and their containment
heat-affected zones shall not use the strain-based accep- (c) containment boundary fillet or partial penetration
tance criteria but the base material adjacent to these welds and their heat-affected zones, including such welds
other types of welded joints, and heat-affected zones of attachments to the containment boundary
may still use the strain-based acceptance criteria. Note (d) threaded connections to the containment, even if
that the uniform strain limit for the weld material and ad- seal welded
jacent heat-affected zone may be different than that of the
base material. FF-1130 ACCURATE STRAIN DETERMINATION
The strain-based acceptance criteria shall be imple-
mented using strains calculated from Quality Models. A
FF-1125 Limited Fabrication Strains
Quality Model is a finite element model of the complete
Any process may be used to hot or cold form or bend containment model that adheres to the guidance set forth
containment boundary material including weld material in EE-1240. Alternately, a model with suitable conver-
provided that the following requirements are met: gence and sensitivity studies completed that demonstrate
(a) Fabrication-induced strains less than or equal to the accuracy capability of that containment model may
5% do not need to be addressed in the strain-based ac- also be used. The explicit dynamics solution technique
ceptance criteria, nor are additional heat treatments re- shall be employed for the analyses when using these ac-
quired to reduce these strains. The fabrication strain (in ceptable finite element models.
percentage) shall be established as follows:
(1) for cylinders, FF-1140 STRAIN-BASED ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
The highest calculated product of the equivalent plastic
strain and associated triaxiality factor (from each unique
combination of location and material heat) determined
(2) for spherical or dished surfaces, from the inelastic analyses using the material property
approaches described in Nonmandatory Appendix EE
shall be evaluated to satisfy the strain-based acceptance

550
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

criteria identified below. Appropriate material data (b) The maximum product of the equivalent plastic
(ε u n i f o r m and ε f r a c t u r e ) for base material and, if applic- strain ( ) and the associated TF value, [(TF)( )]max,
able, weld material (including heat-affected zone inter-
at any time at any containment location20 shall be
faces) are needed to implement the strain-based
acceptance criteria. If weld repairs per WB/WC-2500 ex-
ist in the containment material and strain-based accep-
tance criteria are used, appropriate material properties
of the repair weld shall be reflected in the inelastic ana- FF-1142 Criteria for Locations at a Gross or Local
lyses. However, if the depth of the repair cavity does Structural Discontinuity
not exceed the lesser of 3/8 in. (10 mm) or 10% of the sec- At a gross or local structural discontinuity or within 3t n
tion thickness, the inelastic analysis implementing the of a gross or local structural discontinuity, the following
strain-based acceptance criteria can treat these locations shall be satisfied:
as the adjacent base material.
(a) The products of the equivalent plastic strain ( )
All containment materials implementing the strain-
and the associated TF value at each evaluation location
based acceptance criteria must have sufficient ductility.
through the section shall be calculated for each calculated
Sufficient ductility of the base material shall be demon-
time interval. The average of these products through the
strated by satisfying either of the following requirements:
section, [(TF)( )]avg, at any time shall be
(a) the true fracture strain at room temperature shall
be at least two times the elongation value specified on
the Certified Material Test Report (CMTR),19 or
(b) when temperature-dependent test data are avail- (b) The maximum product of the equivalent plastic
able, the true fracture strain limit shall be at least two strain ( ) and the associated TF value, [(TF)( )]max,
times the true uniform strain limit at all temperatures un-
at any time at any containment location20 shall be
der consideration
In order to assure proper containment material re-
sponses throughout the specified design life, material
properties at the beginning of the design life as well as
at the end of the design life (aged condition) shall be eval- FF-1143 Triaxiality Factor
uated when implementing the strain-based acceptance The Triaxiality Factor (TF) is a time-dependent para-
criteria. Quantification of any potential material degrada- meter and is defined as
tion shall be justified in the Design Specification.
The required strain criteria evaluations are described
in the paragraphs below. Strain parameters ( ,
ε u n i f o r m , and ε f r a c t u r e ) are defined in Nonmandatory where σ 1, σ 2, and σ 3 are the principal stresses at the lo-
Appendix EE and the Triaxiality Factor (TF) is defined cation under evaluation. Only those TF values while the
in FF-1143. plastic straining is occurring need be considered.
The TF values to be used for the FF-1141 and FF-1142
evaluations shall be either
FF-1141 Criteria for Locations Away From a (a) the peak TF value at a location (time independent),
Gross or Local Structural Discontinuity where any TF value less than 1.0 is set to 1.0
(b) the instantaneous TF value at a location, where any
For material greater than 3t n (where t n is the adjacent TF value less than 1.0 is set to 1.0
nominal containment wall thickness) away from a gross
or local structural discontinuity, the following shall be FF-1144 Special Strain Limits
satisfied:
When the average (through the containment wall thick-
(a) The products of the equivalent plastic strain ( ) ness) equivalent plastic strain ( ) avg is due to pure
and the associated TF value at each evaluation location shear, the criteria in FF-1141 and FF-1142 shall be satis-
through the section shall be calculated for each calculated fied, but the Triaxiality Factor used shall equal 3.
time interval. The average of these products through the
section, [(TF)( )]avg, at any time shall be FF-1145 Strain Rate Effects
In order to address strain rate effects (EE-1250), addi-
tional inelastic analyses shall be completed in order to as-
sure that the maximum resulting product of the
equivalent plastic strain and associated triaxiality factor

551
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

have been determined. All inelastic analyses performed rate data may be used in the structural evaluations for the
for the entire containment model shall be repeated two final Design Report, provided the strain rate data address
additional times, increasing the true stress–strain curves the proper range of strain rates experienced, and the use
by 20% (in the stress direction only) each successive of the data is justified in the final Design Report.
time. As an alternative, experimentally determined strain

552
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX GG
MINIMUM THICKNESS FOR PIPE BENDS

ARTICLE GG-1000
MINIMUM THICKNESS FOR PIPE BENDS

GG-1100 SCOPE
When fabricating pipe bends, the requirements of
NB-3642.1, NC-3642.1, or ND-3642.1 shall be met. To
compensate for wall thinning from bending, Table
GG-1100-1 may be used as a guide for ordering pipe for
the appropriate process. Experience indicates that a mini-
mum thickness of straight pipe shown in Table
GG-1100-1 should be sufficient to meet the minimum
thickness requirements after bending. Interpolation is
permissible for bending to intermediate radii.

Table GG-1100-1
Minimum Thickness for Pipe Bends
Minimum Thickness
Recommended
Prior to Bending
Pipe Bends Bend Radius [Note (1)]
Furnace Bending 6 pipe diameters 1.06t m
5 pipe diameters 1.08t m
4 pipe diameters 1.16t m
3 pipe diameters 1.25t m

Induction and 6 pipe diameters 1.06t m

Incremental 5 pipe diameters 1.08t m
Bending 4 pipe diameters 1.10t m
3 pipe diameters 1.14t m
2 pipe diameters 1.22t m
1.5 pipe diameters 1.30t m

Rotary Draw Bending 6 pipe diameters 1.09t m

5 pipe diameters 1.14t m
4 pipe diameters 1.20t m
3 pipe diameters 1.28t m

Ram and Roll Bending 6 pipe diameters 1.08t m

5 pipe diameters 1.10t m
4 pipe diameters 1.13t m
3 pipe diameters 1.17t m

GENERAL NOTE: This Table is based on PFI Standard ES-24,

2001 Edition.
NOTE:
(1) t m is the minimum pipe wall thickness for Design Pressure.

553
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX HH
RULES FOR VALVE INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL ITEMS

ARTICLE HH-1000
REQUIREMENTS

HH-1100 INTRODUCTION Category 3 through 8 items for valves shall be manufac-

tured under the Certificate Holder Quality Assurance Pro-
HH-1110 SCOPE gram or Quality Control System, as applicable, except that
When selected for use, all the rules shall be applied to Material Organizations supplying Category 4 through 8
materials, design, fabrication, and examination of internal valve items are not required to comply with NCA-3800.
and external valve items for valves manufactured to Sub- The Design Report for valves manufactured to Subsec-
sections NB, NC, and ND. Valve internal and external items tion NB shall include an analysis of the primary stresses
are those items of a valve other than valve bodies, valve for Category 3 through 6 valve items, as required by
bonnets, valve items welded to valve bodies and bonnets HH-1400.
(but not including internal permanent attachments), and
bolting that join valve bodies and bonnets. As an alterna- HH-1220 CERTIFICATION MARK
tive to the requirements of Section III, internal permanent
attachments, disks, and those valve items covered by Stamping with the Certification Mark is not required for
NB-3546.3(a) may be constructed in accordance with the valve internal and external items described in
the requirements of this Appendix. HH-1110.

HH-1120 CATEGORIES
As set forth in Table HH-1120-1, Category is the group- HH-1300 MATERIALS
ing of various valve internal and external items for the HH-1310 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR
purpose of applying the rules of this Appendix. Categories MATERIAL
for typical valve types are shown in Figures HH-1120-1
HH-1311 Scope of Principal Terms Employed
through HH-1120-11. The figures are not to scale and
not intended to convey any preference for valve type or The term material as used in this Appendix applies both
design but are provided as a guide to the Manufacturer to those valve items produced to material specifications
to identify the various internal and exter¬nal items of a permitted by Section III and to the material permitted
valve for categorization. In determining Categories for by this Appendix.
valve items of valve types not specifically illustrated, a
valve or valve detail that is most nearly representative HH-1312 Permitted Material Specifications
shall apply. Categories 1 and 2 are those valve items pre-
sently covered by Subsections NB, NC, and ND. Categories (a) Materials used for Category 3 and 4 valve items
3 through 8 are internal and external valve items that may shall conform to the requirements of the specifications
be constructed in accordance with this Appendix. for materials given in Table HH-1312-1 of this Appendix
or materials listed in Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Tables
lA, 1B, and 3, and to the special requirements of this
HH-1200 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Appendix that apply to the valve item for which the mate-
rial is used. All of the requirements of the material spec-
HH-1210 RESPONSIBILITIES AND DUTIES ification and of this Appendix shall be satisfied.
It is the responsibility of the Certificate Holder to assign (b) Material used for Category 6 valve items shall con-
each valve item of a valve to the proper Category and to form to the requirements of one of the ASTM materials
indicate the Categories in the Design Report and/or on suitable for the application or an equivalent specification
a general assembly drawing. The Certificate Holder shall for materials listed in Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Tables
have an Article NCA-4000 Quality Assurance Program. 1A, 1B, and 3.

554
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Table HH-1120-1
Summary of Requirements
Certified Impact
Category No. and Valve Design Report Material MT/PT Charpy Material
Typical Valve Items Class [Note (1)] Test Report Examination V-Notch Identification
Body, Bonnet Category 1
All subsections Subsection NB, NC, and ND
Bonnet-Bolting Category 2
All subsections Subsection NB, NC, and ND
Disc, Stems Category 3
Subsection NB X X X [Note (2)] X X
[Note (3)]
Subsection NC … X X [Note (4)] X [Note (5)] X
Subsection ND … X … X [Note (5)] [Note (6)]
Seat Rings Category 4
Subsection NB X X X [Note (3)] X …
Subsection NC … X … X …
Subsection ND … X … X [Note (6)] …
Springs Category 5
Subsection NB X [Note (7)] X [Note (3)] … [Note (6)]
Subsection NC … [Note (7)] … … [Note (6)]
Subsection ND … [Note (7)] … … [Note (6)]
Yokes, Gland Flange, Gland Category 6
Bolts Subsection NB X [Note (7)] … … [Note (6)]
Subsection NC … [Note (7)] … … [Note (6)]
Subsection ND … [Note (7)] … … [Note (6)]
Lantern Ring, Gland, Yoke Category 7
Nut, Grease Fitting Subsection NB … … … … [Note (6)]
Subsection NC … … … … [Note (6)]
Subsection ND … … … … [Note (6)]
Packing, Gaskets, Seals, Category 8
Piston Rings All subsections … … … … …

NOTES:
(1) An analysis in the Design Report is required for valves manufactured to Subsection NB larger than NPS 4 (DN 100) (NB-3560).
(2) Radiography or ultrasonic examination of cast materials and valve disks for valves over NPS 2 (DN 50) is required.
(3) Applies to valves manufactured to Subsection NB larger than NPS 2 (DN 50).
(4) Cast materials for valve items over NPS 2 (DN 50) only.
(5) When required for the valve per Design Specification.
(6) The quality control system shall cover identification in accordance with HH-1317.1 and HH-1317.2.
(7) Material Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance.

(c) Category 5, 7, and 8 valve items may be made from HH-1313 Special Requirements Conflicting With
any material suitable for the intended service. Considera- Permitted Material Specifications
tion shall be given to stress relaxation when selecting ma- (a) Special requirements stipulated in this Appendix
terials for Category 5 items. shall apply in lieu of the requirements of the materials
(d) The Certificate Holder shall provide a list that iden- specifications wherever the special requirements conflict
tifies the material used for each Category 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 with the material specification requirements. Where the
valve item. This list may be included as a parts list on a special requirements include an examination, test, or
general arrangement assembly drawing or as a separate treatment that is also required by the materials specifica-
list. tion, the examination, test, or treatment need be per-
(e) Where the tensile strength, yield strength, hard- formed only once. Any required nondestructive
ness, tempering temperature, or aging temperature listed examinations shall be performed as specified in
in Table HH-1312-1 differs from the requirements of the HH-1330. Any examination, repair, test, or treatment re-
material specification, the requirements listed in Table quired by the material specification or this Appendix
HH-1312-1 shall apply. may be performed by the Material Organization or the

555
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure HH-1120-1
Gate Valve

Category Valve Item Name (Typical) Category Valve Item Name (Typical)
1 1 Body 7 12 Lifting stud (bolt)
2 Bonnet 13 Lifting nut
11 Lifting lug 16 Yoke-retaining nut
3 5 Gate (wedge) 8 Yoke nut
6 Stem 19 Gland
26 Gasket-retaining ring 22 Grease fitting
4 4 Seat ring 17 Lock bolting
21 Guide (when welded to body) 24 Bearings
6 14 Gland bolt 21 Guide (when mechanically held)
15 Gland nut 25 Lifting plate
3 Yoke 8 9 Gasket
18 Gland flange 10 Packing
20 Hinge pin
27 Clamp ring
28 Clamp ring bolting
GENERAL NOTE: Figure HH-1120-1 items not included in this Appendix:
7 Handwheel
23 Handwheel nut

556
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure HH-1120-2
Globe Valve

Category Valve Item Name (Typical) Category Valve Item Name (Typical)
1 1 Body 7 19 Gland
2 Bonnet 20 Lantern ring
3 Auxiliary connection 21 Set screw-locking
2 4 Bonnet stud (bolt) 22 Key
5 Bonnet nut 24 Grease fitting
3 8 Disc 14 Yoke nut
9 Stem 23 Washer
4 17 Disc stem union 8 27 Gasket
18 Stem collar 28 Packing
6 10 Yoke (when nonintegral)
11 Yoke cover (flange)
12 Yoke cover bolt
13 Yoke cover nut
15 Gland flange
6 Gland bolt
7 Gland nut
16 Hinge pins

557
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure HH-1120-2
Globe Valve (Cont'd)
GENERAL NOTE: Figure HH-1120-2 items not included in this Appendix:
25 Nameplate
26 Rivet
29 Handwheel
30 Handwheel nut
31 Yoke nut key
32 Lock screw

Certificate Holder. The Material Organization shall obtain HH-1317 Material Identification
approval from the Certificate Holder for the weld repair of HH-1317.1 Subsections NB and NC Valve Items.
materials (see HH-1340). (a) The identification of materials for Category 3 and 4
(b) For materials listed in Table HH-1312-1 for Catego- valve items used for valves manufactured to Subsections
ry 3 and 4 valve items, the tensile test requirements of the NB and NC shall consist of marking or tagging the materi-
material specification may be performed on representa- al with the applicable specification number, grade, heat
tive samples of each heat of material used, for each speci- number, or heat code and any additional marking re-
fied heat treatment. The tensile strength, yield strength, quired to facilitate traceability of the reports of the results
and hardness results shall meet or exceed the minimum of all tests and examinations performed on the material,
specified values listed in the table. Where the material except that heat number identification is not required
will be used to fabricate various valve item sizes in differ- for valves with all piping connections NPS 2 (DN 50)
ent heat-treated thicknesses, the Certificate Holder shall and smaller. Alternatively, a marking symbol and/or code
ensure that the heat treatment specified will be effective may be used that identifies the material with the material
for the entire size range. certification, and such symbol or code shall be explained
in the certificate (see HH-1315). For identification and
HH-1314 Allowable Stress Values marking during fabrication by the Certificate Holder, see
Allowable stress values, S , are listed in Table HH-1520.
HH-1312-1 of this Appendix or Section II, Part D, Subpart (b) The identification of material for Category 5
1, Tables lA, 1B, and 3. For Table HH-1312-1, the allow- through 8 valve items used for valves manufactured to
able stress values are based on trend curves adjusted to Subsections NB and NC shall consist of marking or tagging
the minimum specified room temperature tensile and the material or its container in accordance with the mark-
yield strengths shown in the table. The listed values are ing requirements of the applicable material specification.
allowable stress values and are not design stress intensity (c) Material may be marked by any method that will
values. not result in any harmful contamination or sharp discon-
tinuities. Stamping, when used, shall be done with blunt-
HH-1315 Certification of Materials nosed continuous or blunt-nosed interrupted dot die
(a) Material for Category 3 and 4 valve items, including stamps.
all welding and brazing material, shall be certified in ac- HH-1317.2 Subsection ND Valve Items. The identifi-
cordance with NCA-3862.1. Copies of all Certified Material cation of materials for Category 3 through 8 valve items
Test Reports shall be available to the Inspector. used for valves manufactured to Subsection ND shall con-
(b) For Category 5 and 6 valve items, a Material Organi- sist of marking the material or its container in accordance
zation Certificate of Compliance with the Material Specifi- with the requirements of the applicable material
cation, Grade, Class, and heat-treated condition, as specification.
applicable, shall be provided. HH-1317.3 Welding, Brazing, and Hardsurfacing
(c) Certified Material Test Reports or Material Organi- Material Identification. Welding, brazing, and hardsurfa-
zation Certificates of Compliance are not required for Cat- cing materials shall be clearly identified by legible mark-
egory 7 and 8 valve items. ing on the package or container to ensure positive
identification as acceptable material until actually con-
HH-1316 Welding, Brazing, and Hardsurfacing sumed in the process.
Material
All welding and brazing material used on Category 3
and 4 valve items shall meet the requirements of
NX-2400 as applicable. Hardsurfacing material shall meet
the requirements of AWS-A5.13, AWS-A5.21, or as other-
wise specified by the Certificate Holder (see HH-1542).

558
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure HH-1120-3
Swing Check Valve

Category Valve Item Name (Typical)

1 1 Body
2 Cap
2 12 Cap bolt studs
13 Cap bolt stud nuts
3 3 Disc
7 Hinge pin
4 Hinge
4 15 Seat ring
6 5 Disc nut
7 6 Disc nut pin
8 16 Disc washer
14 Cap ring gasket

559
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure HH-1120-4
Globe Check Valve

Category Valve Item Name (Typical)

1 1 Body
4 Cover
5 Canopy
3 2 Disc
5 3 Spring

560
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure HH-1120-5
Diaphragm Valve

Category Valve Item Name (Typical)

1 1 Body
3 Bonnet
20 Pipe plug
2 17 Bonnet bolting
3 6 Stem
7 Compressor
8 Pin
7 4 Stem nut
5 Spacer
8 11 Diaphragm
12 Liner

GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Figure HH-1120-5 items not included in this Appendix:
2 Handwheel
10 Nameplate
22 Handwheel retainer

(b) This Figure is shown for definition of items only. It is to be used only when this type of valve is permitted in Section III construction.

561
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure HH-1120-6
Plug Valve

Category Valve Item Name (Typical)

1 1 Body
5 Cover
14 Vent plug
2 4 Cover capscrew
3 2 Plug
6 6 Gland capscrew
8 Gland
7 7 Stop collar
10 Grease fitting
11 Thrust bearing
13 Bushing
8 3 Cover O-ring
9 Stem packing
12 Seat insert

562
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure HH-1120-7
Globe Check Valve

Category Valve Item Name (Typical)

1 1 Body
5 Equalizer
6 Pressure seal cover
13 Drain nipple
3 9 Gasket retainer
2 Disc
6 4 Body-guided disk nut
7 3 Locking key
8 Spacer ring
10 Cover retainer fasteners
11 Cover retainer fasteners
12 Cover retainer
8 7 Pressure seal gasket

563
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure HH-1120-8
Butterfly Valve

14 24 17
25 2 3

4 9
12 11
8
10

27 7 6
15 16
26 20
23

18 13
1

21 22 5

Category Valve Item Name (Typical)

1 1 Body
2 Shaft cover
10 Thrust adjustment screw
2 3 Shaft cover bolting
3 4 Front shaft
5 Stub shaft
6 Disc
7 Disc pin
4 8 Disc pin nut
13 Body liner (metallic)
20 Clamping ring
21 Clamping ring bolt
22 Clamping ring bolt lock
23 Disc seat (metallic)
6 15 Stuffing box stud
16 Stuffing box nut
7 9 Disc pin washer
11 Thrust adjustment nut
12 Thrust adjustment washer
14 Stuffing box gland
17 Shaft bearing
18 Thrust bearing
8 23 Disc seat (nonmetallic)
24 Packing
25 Gasket
26 O-ring
27 Retaining ring
13 Body liner (nonmetallic)

564
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure HH-1120-9
Control Valve

Category Valve Item Name (Typical)

1 35 Body
49 Bonnet
59 Pipe plug
2 46 Bonnet stud (bolt)
47 Bonnet nut
3 36 Disc (plug)
39 Disc (stem)
4 41 Seat ring
37 Cage (when seat retaining)
5 17 Actuator spring
55 Packing spring

565
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure HH-1120-9
Control Valve (Cont'd)
Category Valve Item Name (Typical)
6 18 Spring seat
15 Yoke
60 Yoke lock nut
50 Packing flange
51 Packing flange bolt
52 Packing flange nut
58 Packing follower
56 Packing box ring
40 Groove pin
16 Actuator stem
7 19 Spring adjustor
20 Stem connector
20C Stem connector cap screw
23 Nut
24 Jam nut
37 Cage (when not seat retaining)
8 42 Gasket
44 Gasket, spiral wound
45 Gasket, seat ring
43 Gasket, cage
53 Packing
57 Upper wiper
38 Piston ring

GENERAL NOTE: Figure HH-1120-9 items not included in this Appendix:

1 Diaphragm case (upper) 14 O-ring
2 Diaphragm case bolt 22 Travel indicator
3 Diaphragm case nut 26 Indicator screw
5 Diaphragm 27 Travel indicator scale
6 Diaphragm plate (upper) 29 Nameplate
7 Diaphragm stud 30 Screw
8 Diaphragm case (lower) 31 Vent
10 Diaphragm plate (lower) 34 Travel stop
11 Snap ring 41A Nut
12 Seal bushing 41B Locknut
13 O-ring 54 Washer

566
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure HH-1120-10
Ball Valve

Category Valve Item Name (Typical)

1 1 Body
2 Bearing plate
3 Bonnet
2 2A Bearing plate bolt
3A Bonnet stud
3B Bonnet nut
3 4 Ball
14A Stem
14B Trunion
4 5 Spool/seat
5 10 Spring
6 13 Gland flange
4A Gland bolt
7 6 Spring retainer
11 Spring cover
12 Trunion bearing
8 7 Gasket
8 Spool packing
9 Trunion seal

567
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

Figure HH-1120-11
Nozzle Check Valve

Valve Valve
Category Item Name (Typical) Category Item Name (Typical)
1 1 Body 7 4 Seat retainer
3 Seat ring 6 Body bushing
3 2 Disc 7 Seat bushing
5 Shaft 10 Cap screw
5 15 Spring 11 Cap screw
16 Pin
8 8 Gasket
9 O-ring
12 Seat seal
(nonmetallic)
GENERAL NOTE: Figure HH-1120-11 items not included in this Appendix:
13 Nameplate
14 Identification plate

568
 Table HH-1312-1
Allowable Stress Values, S, for Material for Internal and External Items (U.S. Customary Units)
Diameter Minimum Minimum Allowable Stress, ksi, for Temperatures Not
Type or Tensile Minimum Minimum Yield Tempering Exceeding, °F
Product or Thickness, Condi- Strength, Brinell Strength, or Aging
Material Form Spec. No. Grade in. tion ksi Hardness ksi Temp., °F Notes 100 200 300 400 500 600 650 700
13Cr FFBS A182 F6 8 max. … 165 351 132 900 (1)(4) 55.0 50.6 49.0 48.0 47.3 46.1 … 44.0
13Cr FFBS A182 F6 8 max. … 136 293 112 1,025 (1)(4) 45.3 41.8 40.4 39.6 39.0 38.0 … 36.3
13Cr FFBS A182 F6 8 max. … 125 269 100 1,075 (4) 41.7 38.4 37.1 36.4 35.8 34.9 … 33.4
13Cr FFBS A182 F6 8 max. … 120 255 95 1,100 (4) 40.0 36.8 35.7 35.0 34.4 33.5 … 32.0
13Cr FFBS A182 F6 8 max. … 116 248 92 1,125 (4) 38.7 35.6 34.4 33.8 33.0 32.4 … 31.0
13Cr FFBS A182 F6 8 max. … 110 235 90 1,175 (4) 36.7 33.8 32.6 32.1 31.6 30.7 … 29.4
13Cr FFBS A182 F6 8 max. … 100 212 80 1,275 … 33.3 30.7 29.7 29.2 28.7 27.9 … 26.7
13Cr FFBS A182 F6 8 max. … 90 192 65 1,375 … 30.0 27.6 26.7 26.2 25.8 25.2 … 24.1

13Cr Plate A240 410, 410S 8 max. … 165 351 132 900 (1)(4) 55.0 50.6 49.0 48.0 47.3 46.1 … 44.0
13Cr Plate A240 410, 410S 8 max. … 136 293 112 1,025 (1)(4) 45.3 41.8 40.4 39.6 39.0 38.0 … 36.3
13Cr Plate A240 410, 410S 8 max. … 125 269 100 1,075 (4) 41.7 38.4 37.1 36.4 35.8 34.9 … 33.4
13Cr Plate A240 410, 410S 8 max. … 120 255 95 1,100 (4) 40.0 36.8 35.7 35.0 34.4 33.5 … 32.0
13Cr Plate A240 410, 410S 8 max. … 116 248 92 1,125 (4) 38.7 35.6 34.4 33.8 33.0 32.4 … 31.0
13Cr Plate A240 410, 410S 8 max. … 110 235 90 1,175 (4) 36.7 33.8 32.6 32.1 31.6 30.7 … 29.4
13Cr Plate A240 410, 410S 8 max. … 100 212 80 1,275 … 33.3 30.7 29.7 29.2 28.7 27.9 … 26.7
13Cr Plate A240 410, 410S 8 max. … 90 192 65 1,375 … 30.0 27.6 26.7 26.2 25.8 25.2 … 24.1

… …

ASME BPVC.III.A-2017
13Cr Tube A268 TP410 8 max. 165 351 132 900 (1)(4) 55.0 50.6 49.0 48.0 47.3 46.1 44.0
13Cr Tube A268 TP410 8 max. … 136 293 112 1,025 (1)(4) 45.3 41.8 40.4 39.6 39.0 38.0 … 36.3
13Cr Tube A268 TP410 8 max. … 125 269 100 1,075 (4) 41.7 38.4 37.1 36.4 35.8 34.9 … 33.4
13Cr Tube A268 TP410 8 max. … 120 255 95 1,100 (4) 40.0 36.8 35.7 35.0 34.4 33.5 … 32.0
13Cr Tube A268 TP410 8 max. … 116 248 92 1,125 (4) 38.7 35.6 34.4 33.8 33.0 32.4 … 31.0
569

13Cr Tube A268 TP410 8 max. … 110 235 90 1,175 (4) 36.7 33.8 32.6 32.1 31.6 30.7 … 29.4
13Cr Tube A268 TP410 8 max. … 100 212 80 1,275 … 33.3 30.7 29.7 29.2 28.7 27.9 … 26.7
13Cr Tube A268 TP410 8 max. … 90 192 65 1,375 … 30.0 27.6 26.7 26.2 25.8 25.2 … 24.1

13Cr Bar, shapes A276 403, 410 8 max. … 165 351 132 900 (1)(4) 55.0 50.6 49.0 48.0 47.3 46.1 … 44.0
13Cr Bar, shapes A276 403, 410 8 max. … 136 293 112 1,025 (1)(4) 45.3 41.8 40.4 39.6 39.0 38.0 … 36.3
13Cr Bar, shapes A276 403, 410 8 max. … 125 269 100 1,075 (4) 41.7 38.4 37.1 36.4 35.8 34.9 … 33.4
13Cr Bar, shapes A276 403, 410 8 max. … 120 255 95 1,100 (4) 40.0 36.8 35.7 35.0 34.4 33.5 … 32.0
13Cr Bar, shapes A276 403, 410 8 max. … 116 248 92 1,125 (4) 38.7 35.6 34.4 33.8 33.0 32.4 … 31.0
13Cr Bar, shapes A276 403, 410 8 max. … 110 235 90 1,175 (4) 36.7 33.8 32.6 32.1 31.6 30.7 … 29.4
13Cr Bar, shapes A276 403, 410 8 max. … 100 212 80 1,275 … 33.3 30.7 29.7 29.2 28.7 27.9 … 26.7
13Cr Bar, shapes A276 403, 410 8 max. … 90 192 65 1,375 … 30.0 27.6 26.7 26.2 25.8 25.2 … 24.1

13Cr Billet, bar A314 403, 410 8 max. … 165 351 132 900 (1)(4) 55.0 50.6 49.0 48.0 47.3 46.1 … 44.0
13Cr Billet, bar A314 403, 410 8 max. … 136 293 112 1,025 (1)(4) 45.3 41.8 40.4 39.6 39.0 38.0 … 36.3
13Cr Billet, bar A314 403, 410 8 max. … 125 269 100 1,075 (4) 41.7 38.4 37.1 36.4 35.8 34.9 … 33.4
13Cr Billet, bar A314 403, 410 8 max. … 120 255 95 1,100 (4) 40.0 36.8 35.7 35.0 34.4 33.5 … 32.0
13Cr Billet, bar A314 403, 410 8 max. … 116 248 92 1,125 (4) 38.7 35.6 34.4 33.8 33.0 32.4 … 31.0
13Cr Billet, bar A314 403, 410 8 max. … 110 235 90 1,175 (4) 36.7 33.8 32.6 32.1 31.6 30.7 … 29.4
13Cr Billet, bar A314 403, 410 8 max. … 100 212 80 1,275 … 33.3 30.7 29.7 29.2 28.7 27.9 … 26.7
13Cr Billet, bar A314 403, 410 8 max. … 90 192 65 1,375 … 30.0 27.6 26.7 26.2 25.8 25.2 … 24.1

13Cr Billet, bar A314 416, 416Se 8 max. … 165 351 132 900 (1)(4) 55.0 50.6 49.0 48.0 47.3 46.1 … 44.0
13Cr Billet, bar A314 416, 416Se 8 max. … 136 293 112 1,025 (1)(4) 45.3 41.8 40.4 39.6 39.0 38.0 … 36.3
13Cr Billet, bar A314 416, 416Se 8 max. … 125 269 100 1,075 (4) 41.7 38.4 37.1 36.4 35.8 34.9 … 33.4
13Cr Billet, bar A314 416, 416Se 8 max. … 120 255 95 1,100 (4) 40.0 36.8 35.7 35.0 34.4 33.5 … 32.0
13Cr Billet, bar A314 416, 416Se 8 max. … 116 248 92 1,125 (4) 38.7 35.6 34.4 33.8 33.0 32.4 … 31.0
13Cr Billet, bar A314 416, 416Se 8 max. … 110 235 90 1,175 (4) 36.7 33.8 32.6 32.1 31.6 30.7 … 29.4
13Cr Billet, bar A314 416, 416Se 8 max. … 100 212 80 1,275 … 33.3 30.7 29.7 29.2 28.7 27.9 … 26.7
13Cr Billet, bar A314 416, 416Se 8 max. … 90 192 65 1,375 … 30.0 27.6 26.7 26.2 25.8 25.2 … 24.1

13Cr Castings A217 CA15 8 max. … 165 351 132 900 (1)(4) 55.0 50.6 49.0 48.0 47.3 46.1 … 44.0
 Table HH-1312-1
Allowable Stress Values, S, for Material for Internal and External Items (U.S. Customary Units) (Cont'd)
Diameter Minimum Minimum Allowable Stress, ksi, for Temperatures Not
Type or Tensile Minimum Minimum Yield Tempering Exceeding, °F
Product or Thickness, Condi- Strength, Brinell Strength, or Aging
Material Form Spec. No. Grade in. tion ksi Hardness ksi Temp., °F Notes 100 200 300 400 500 600 650 700
13Cr Castings A217 CA15 8 max. … 136 293 112 1,025 (1)(4) 45.3 41.8 40.4 39.6 39.0 38.0 … 36.3
13Cr Castings A217 CA15 8 max. … 125 269 100 1,075 (4) 41.7 38.4 37.1 36.4 35.8 34.9 … 33.4
13Cr Castings A217 CA15 8 max. … 120 255 95 1,100 (4) 40.0 36.8 35.7 35.0 34.4 33.5 … 32.0
13Cr Castings A217 CA15 8 max. … 116 248 92 1,125 (4) 38.7 35.6 34.4 33.8 33.0 32.4 … 31.0
13Cr Castings A217 CA15 8 max. … 110 235 90 1,175 (4) 36.7 33.8 32.6 32.1 31.6 30.7 … 29.4
13Cr Castings A217 CA15 8 max. … 100 212 80 1,275 … 33.3 30.7 29.7 29.2 28.7 27.9 … 26.7
13Cr Castings A217 CA15 8 max. … 90 192 65 1,375 … 30.0 27.6 26.7 26.2 25.8 25.2 … 24.1

13Cr Bar, shapes A479 410 8 max. … 165 351 132 900 (1)(4) 55.0 50.6 49.0 48.0 47.3 46.1 … 44.0
13Cr Bar, shapes A479 410 8 max. … 136 293 112 1,025 (1)(4) 45.3 41.8 40.4 39.6 39.0 38.0 … 36.3
13Cr Bar, shapes A479 410 8 max. … 125 269 100 1,075 (4) 41.7 38.4 37.1 36.4 35.8 34.9 … 33.4
13Cr Bar, shapes A479 410 8 max. … 120 255 95 1,100 (4) 40.0 36.8 35.7 35.0 34.4 33.5 … 32.0
13Cr Bar, shapes A479 410 8 max. … 116 248 92 1,125 (4) 38.7 35.6 34.4 33.8 33.0 32.4 … 31.0
13Cr Bar, shapes A479 410 8 max. … 110 235 90 1,175 (4) 36.7 33.8 32.6 32.1 31.6 30.7 … 29.4
13Cr Bar, shapes A479 410 8 max. … 100 212 80 1,275 … 33.3 30.7 29.7 29.2 28.7 27.9 … 26.7
13Cr Bar, shapes A479 410 8 max. … 90 192 65 1,375 … 30.0 27.6 26.7 26.2 25.8 25.2 … 24.1

13Cr Bar A582 416, 416Se 8 max. … 165 351 132 900 (1)(4) 55.0 50.6 49.0 48.0 47.3 46.1 … 44.0

ASME BPVC.III.A-2017
13Cr Bar A582 416, 416Se 8 max. … 136 293 112 1,025 (1)(4) 45.3 41.8 40.4 39.6 39.0 38.0 … 36.3
13Cr Bar A582 416, 416Se 8 max. … 125 269 100 1,075 (4) 41.7 38.4 37.1 36.4 35.8 34.9 … 33.4
13Cr Bar A582 416, 416Se 8 max. … 120 255 95 1,100 (4) 40.0 36.8 35.7 35.0 34.4 33.5 … 32.0
13Cr Bar A582 416, 416Se 8 max. … 116 248 92 1,125 (4) 38.7 35.6 34.4 33.8 33.0 32.4 … 26.7
570

13Cr Bar A582 416, 416Se 8 max. … 110 235 90 1,175 (4) 36.7 33.8 32.6 32.1 31.6 30.7 … 29.4
13Cr Bar A582 416, 416Se 8 max. … 100 212 80 1,275 … 33.3 30.7 29.7 29.2 28.7 27.9 … 26.7
13Cr Bar A582 416, 416Se 8 max. … 90 192 65 1,375 … 30.0 27.6 26.7 26.2 25.8 25.2 … 24.1

13Cr Bar, shapes A276 420 8 max. A 95 196 50 NA (7) 31.6 29.2 28.2 27.7 27.2 26.5 … 25.4
13Cr Bar, shapes A276 420 8 max. QT 250 477 195 750 (1)(3)(4)(7) … … … … … … … …
13Cr Bar, shapes A276 420 Over 8 to 12 QT 220 430 180 600 (1)(2)(3)(4)(7) … … … … … … … …
(8)

13Cr Bar, shapes A276 420 Over 12 to 14 QT 200 400 160 900 (1)(2)(3)(4)(7) … … … … … … … …
(8)

18Cr Bar, shapes A276 440C 8 max. HT 285 578 275 600 (1)(3)(4)(6) … … … … … … … …
13Cr Bar, shapes A565 615 8 max. HT 140 302 110 1,100 (3)(4) … … … … … … … …
12Cr Bar, shapes A565 616 8 max. HT 140 302 110 1,100 (3)(4) … … … … … … … …

17Cr–4Ni–4Cu Bar, shapes A564 630 8 max. … 190 388 170 900 (1)(4) 63.3 59.8 57.8 56.0 54.6 54.0 53.0 …
17Cr–4Ni–4Cu Bar, shapes A564 630 8 max. … 155 331 145 1,025 (1)(4) 51.6 48.8 47.1 45.6 44.6 44.0 43.3 …
17Cr–4Ni–4Cu Bar, shapes A564 630 8 max. … 145 302 125 1,075 (4) 48.3 45.6 44.0 42.6 41.6 41.1 40.5 …
17Cr–4Ni–4Cu Bar, shapes A564 630 8 max. … 140 311 115 1,100 (4) 46.6 44.0 42.6 41.4 40.4 39.8 39.0 …
17Cr–4Ni–4Cu Bar, shapes A564 630 8 max. … 135 277 105 1,150 (4) 45.0 42.5 41.0 39.8 39.0 38.3 37.6 …
17Cr–4Ni–4Cu Castings AMS–5355 … 8 max. … 190 388 170 900 (1)(4) 63.3 59.8 57.8 56.0 54.6 54.0 53.0 …
17Cr–4Ni–4Cu Castings AMS–5355 … 8 max. … 155 331 145 1,025 (1)(4) 51.6 48.8 47.1 45.6 44.6 44.0 43.3 …
17Cr–4Ni–4Cu Castings AMS–5355 … 8 max. … 145 302 125 1,075 (4) 48.3 45.6 44.0 42.6 41.6 41.1 40.5 …

17Cr–4Ni–4Cu Castings AMS–5355 … 8 max. … 140 311 115 1,100 (4) 46.6 44.0 42.6 41.4 40.4 39.8 39.0 …
17Cr–4Ni–4Cu Castings AMS–5355 … 8 max. … 135 277 105 1,150 (4) 45.0 42.5 41.0 39.8 39.0 38.3 37.6 …
17Cr–4Ni–4Cu Castings AMS–5398 … 8 max. … 190 388 170 900 (1)(4) 63.3 59.8 57.8 56.0 54.6 54.0 53.0 …
17Cr–4Ni–4Cu Castings AMS–5398 … 8 max. … 155 331 145 1,025 (1)(4) 51.6 48.8 47.1 45.6 44.6 44.0 43.3 …
17Cr–4Ni–4Cu Castings AMS–5398 … 8 max. … 145 302 125 1,075 (4) 48.3 45.6 44.0 42.6 41.6 41.1 40.5 …
17Cr–4Ni–4Cu Castings AMS–5398 … 8 max. … 140 311 115 1,100 (4) 46.6 44.0 42.6 41.4 40.4 39.8 39.0 …
17Cr–4Ni–4Cu Castings AMS–5398 … 8 max. … 135 277 105 1,150 (4) 45.0 42.5 41.0 39.8 39.0 38.3 37.6 …
17Cr–7N–1Al Bar, shapes A564 631 6 max. PH 170 352 140 1,050 (4) 56.7 53.7 52.0 50.5 49.1 47.6 45.5 …
 Table HH-1312-1
Allowable Stress Values, S, for Material for Internal and External Items (U.S. Customary Units) (Cont'd)
Diameter Minimum Minimum Allowable Stress, ksi, for Temperatures Not
Type or Tensile Minimum Minimum Yield Tempering Exceeding, °F
Product or Thickness, Condi- Strength, Brinell Strength, or Aging
Material Form Spec. No. Grade in. tion ksi Hardness ksi Temp., °F Notes 100 200 300 400 500 600 650 700

15Cr–6Ni–1.5Cu Bar, shapes A564 XM–25 8 max. STr 125 262 95 NA (4) 41.7 37.7 37.1 37.0 37.0 36.9 … …
15Cr–6Ni–1.5Cu Bar, shapes A564 XM–25 8 max. PH 180 363 170 900 (1)(2)(4) 60.0 55.0 52.6 51.0 49.7 48.6 48.0 47.1
15Cr–6Ni–1.5Cu Bar, shapes A564 XM–25 8 max. PH 145 262 135 1,050 (1)(2)(4) 48.3 45.3 43.5 42.0 40.8 39.8 39.1 38.3
15Cr–6Ni–1.5Cu Bar, shapes A564 XM–12 8 max. … 155 … 145 1,025 (1)(2)(3)(4) … … … … … … … …
15Cr–6Ni–1.5Cu Bar, shapes A564 XM–12 8 max. … 145 … 125 1,075 (1)(2)(3)(4) … … … … … … … …
26Ni–15Cr–Mo–Ti Bolting A453 660 8 max. A or B 130 248 85 1,325 (2) 43.3 42.8 42.6 42.5 41.8 41.3 … 40.8
18Cr–12Ni–2Mo Bar, shapes A638 660 … 1 or 2 130 248 85 1,300 … 43.3 42.8 42.6 42.5 41.8 41.3 … 40.8
18Cr–12Ni–2Mo Bar, shapes A276 316 Up to 3/4 B 125 … 100 NA (4) 41.7 37.9 35.8 34.5 34.3 34.3 … 34.3

18Cr–12Ni–2Mo Bar, shapes A276 316 3

/4 to 1 B 115 … 80 NA … 38.3 34.9 33.0 31.8 31.6 31.6 … 31.6
18Cr–12Ni–2Mo Bar, shapes A276 316 1 to 11/4 B 105 … 65 NA … 35.0 31.8 30.1 29.1 28.8 28.8 … 28.8
18Cr–12Ni–2Mo Bar, shapes A276 316 11/4 to 11/2 B 100 … 50 NA … 33.3 30.3 28.6 27.7 26.8 26.4 … 25.7
Ni–Cr–Fe Bar, shapes B637 N07750 Type 2 4 max. PH 170 302 115 1,350 (4) 60.0 59.7 57.1 55.8 55.2 55.0 … 55.0
Co–Cr–W–Ni Bar, shapes AMS–5759 … 4 max. CDr 150 311 100 1,100 (2)(3)(4) … … … … … … … …
Co–Cr–W Bar, shapes Comm. … … STr 150 352 90 1,000 (2)(3)(4) … … … … … … … …
Co–Cr–W Castings AMS–5373 … … As cast … 370/40HRC … NA (2)(3)(5) … … … … … … … …
Co–Cr–W Castings AMS–5387 … … As cast … 362/39HRC … NA (2)(3)(5) … … … … … … … …

ASME BPVC.III.A-2017
Co–27Cr–5Mo Castings A732 Gr. 21 … PH 120 352 100 1,350 (2)(3)(4) … … … … … … … …
Co–27Cr–5Mo Castings AMS–5385 … … PH 120 352 100 1,350 (2)(3)(4) … … … … … … … …
12Cr–Cb Bar SA–479 XM–30 … QT 125 302 100 1,100 (2)(3)(4) 41.7 39.0 37.5 36.3 35.5 34.5 … 33.3
571

NOTES:
(1) Not to be used for Category 3 valve items, except for safety valve disks and nozzles, when the nozzles are internally contained by the external body structure; control valve disks in auto-
matic flow control valves, when the primary function of the valve is flow control; and line valve disks in valves with inlet connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and less.
(2) Welding of these materials is not permitted
(3) For those materials in this Table that do not have allowable stresses assigned, use 1/4 of room temperature specified minimum tensile strength, up to 650°F, inclusive.
(4) The actual tensile strength shall not exceed the specified minimum tensile strength by more than 40.0 ksi.
(5) For design purposes [see (3)], use a minimum tensile value of 115 ksi for these materials.
(6) This material shall not be used at temperatures higher than 450°F.
(7) Carbon content shall not exceed 0.35%.
(8) Use one-fourth of the room temperature minimum specified tensile strength for assigned allowable stresses, up to 600°F, inclusive.
 Table HH-1312-1M
Allowable Stress Values, S , for Material for Internal and External Items (SI Units)
Diameter Minimum Minimum Allowable Stress, MPa, for Temperatures Not
or Tensile Minimum Minimum Yield Tempering Exceeding, °C
Product Spec. Thickness, Condi- Strength, Brinell Strength, or Aging
Material Form No. Type or Grade mm tion MPa Hardness MPa Temp., °C Notes 38 95 150 205 250 315 345 370
… … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … …
… … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … …
13Cr FFBS A182 F6 200 max. … 1 138 351 910 480 (1)(4) 379 349 338 331 326 318 … 303
13Cr FFBS A182 F6 200 max. … 938 293 772 550 (1)(4) 312 288 279 273 269 262 … 250
13Cr FFBS A182 F6 200 max. … 862 269 689 580 (4) 288 265 256 251 247 241 … 230
13Cr FFBS A182 F6 200 max. … 827 255 655 595 (4) 276 254 246 241 237 231 … 221
13Cr FFBS A182 F6 200 max. … 800 248 634 610 (4) 267 245 237 233 228 223 … 214
13Cr FFBS A182 F6 200 max. … 758 235 621 635 (4) 253 233 225 221 218 212 … 203
13Cr FFBS A182 F6 200 max. … 689 212 552 690 … 230 212 205 201 198 192 … 184
13Cr FFBS A182 F6 200 max. … 621 192 448 745 … 207 190 184 181 178 174 … 166

13Cr Plate A240 410, 410S 200 max. … 1 138 351 910 480 (1)(4) 379 349 338 331 326 318 … 303
13Cr Plate A240 410, 410S 200 max. … 938 293 772 550 (1)(4) 312 288 279 273 269 262 … 250
13Cr Plate A240 410, 410S 200 max. … 862 269 689 580 (4) 288 265 256 251 247 241 … 230
13Cr Plate A240 410, 410S 200 max. … 827 255 655 595 (4) 276 254 246 241 237 231 … 221
13Cr Plate A240 410, 410S 200 max. … 800 248 634 610 (4) 267 245 237 233 228 223 … 214
13Cr Plate A240 410, 410S 200 max. … 758 235 621 635 (4) 253 233 225 221 218 212 … 203
13Cr Plate A240 410, 410S 200 max. … 689 212 552 690 … 230 212 205 201 198 192 … 184

ASME BPVC.III.A-2017
13Cr Plate A240 410, 410S 200 max. … 621 192 448 745 … 207 190 184 181 178 174 … 166

13Cr Tube A268 TP410 200 max. … 1 138 351 910 480 (1)(4) 379 349 338 331 326 318 … 303
13Cr Tube A268 TP410 200 max. … 938 293 772 550 (1)(4) 312 288 279 273 269 262 … 250
13Cr Tube A268 TP410 200 max. … 862 269 689 580 (4) 288 265 256 251 247 241 … 230
572

13Cr Tube A268 TP410 200 max. … 827 255 655 595 (4) 276 254 246 241 237 231 … 221
13Cr Tube A268 TP410 200 max. … 800 248 634 610 (4) 267 245 237 233 228 223 … 214
13Cr Tube A268 TP410 200 max. … 758 235 621 635 (4) 253 233 225 221 218 212 … 203
13Cr Tube A268 TP410 200 max. … 689 212 552 690 … 230 212 205 201 198 192 … 184
13Cr Tube A268 TP410 200 max. … 621 192 448 745 … 207 190 184 181 178 174 … 166

13Cr Bar, shapes A276 403, 410 200 max. … 1 138 351 910 480 (1)(4) 379 349 338 331 326 318 … 303
13Cr Bar, shapes A276 403, 410 200 max. … 938 293 772 550 (1)(4) 312 288 279 273 269 262 … 250
13Cr Bar, shapes A276 403, 410 200 max. … 862 269 689 580 (4) 288 265 256 251 247 241 … 230
13Cr Bar, shapes A276 403, 410 200 max. … 827 255 655 595 (4) 276 254 246 241 237 231 … 221
13Cr Bar, shapes A276 403, 410 200 max. … 800 248 634 610 (4) 267 245 237 233 228 223 … 214
13Cr Bar, shapes A276 403, 410 200 max. … 758 235 621 635 (4) 253 233 225 221 218 212 … 203
13Cr Bar, shapes A276 403, 410 200 max. … 689 212 552 690 … 230 212 205 201 198 192 … 184
13Cr Bar, shapes A276 403, 410 200 max. … 621 192 448 745 … 207 190 184 181 178 174 … 166

13Cr Billet, bar A314 403, 410 200 max. … 1 138 351 910 480 (1)(4) 379 349 338 331 326 318 … 303
13Cr Billet, bar A314 403, 410 200 max. … 938 293 772 550 (1)(4) 312 288 279 273 269 262 … 250
13Cr Billet, bar A314 403, 410 200 max. … 862 269 689 580 (4) 288 265 256 251 247 241 … 230
13Cr Billet, bar A314 403, 410 200 max. … 827 255 655 595 (4) 276 254 246 241 237 231 … 221
13Cr Billet, bar A314 403, 410 200 max. … 800 248 634 610 (4) 267 245 237 233 228 223 … 214
13Cr Billet, bar A314 403, 410 200 max. … 758 235 621 635 (4) 253 233 225 221 218 212 … 203
13Cr Billet, bar A314 403, 410 200 max. … 689 212 552 690 … 230 212 205 201 198 192 … 184
13Cr Billet, bar A314 403, 410 200 max. … 621 192 448 745 … 207 190 184 181 178 174 … 166

13Cr Billet, bar A314 416, 416Se 200 max. … 1 138 351 910 480 (1)(4) 379 349 338 331 326 318 … 303
13Cr Billet, bar A314 416, 416Se 200 max. … 938 293 772 550 (1)(4) 312 288 279 273 269 262 … 250
13Cr Billet, bar A314 416, 416Se 200 max. … 862 269 689 580 (4) 288 265 256 251 247 241 … 230
13Cr Billet, bar A314 416, 416Se 200 max. … 827 255 655 595 (4) 276 254 246 241 237 231 … 221
13Cr Billet, bar A314 416, 416Se 200 max. … 800 248 634 610 (4) 267 245 237 233 228 223 … 214
13Cr Billet, bar A314 416, 416Se 200 max. … 758 235 621 635 (4) 253 233 225 221 218 212 … 203
13Cr Billet, bar A314 416, 416Se 200 max. … 689 212 552 690 … 230 212 205 201 198 192 … 184
13Cr Billet, bar A314 416, 416Se 200 max. … 621 192 448 745 … 207 190 184 181 178 174 … 166
 Table HH-1312-1M
Allowable Stress Values, S, for Material for Internal and External Items (SI Units) (Cont'd)
Diameter Minimum Minimum Allowable Stress, MPa, for Temperatures Not
or Tensile Minimum Minimum Yield Tempering Exceeding, °C
Product Spec. Thickness, Condi- Strength, Brinell Strength, or Aging
Material Form No. Type or Grade mm tion MPa Hardness MPa Temp., °C Notes 38 95 150 205 250 315 345 370

13Cr Castings A217 CA15 200 max. … 1 138 351 910 480 (1)(4) 379 349 338 331 326 318 … 303
13Cr Castings A217 CA15 200 max. … 938 293 772 550 (1)(4) 312 288 279 273 269 262 … 250
13Cr Castings A217 CA15 200 max. … 862 269 689 580 (4) 288 265 256 251 247 241 … 230
13Cr Castings A217 CA15 200 max. … 827 255 655 595 (4) 276 254 246 241 237 231 … 221
13Cr Castings A217 CA15 200 max. … 800 248 634 610 (4) 267 245 237 233 228 223 … 214
13Cr Castings A217 CA15 200 max. … 758 235 621 635 (4) 253 233 225 221 218 212 … 203
13Cr Castings A217 CA15 200 max. … 689 212 552 690 … 230 212 205 201 198 192 … 184
13Cr Castings A217 CA15 200 max. … 621 192 448 745 … 207 190 184 181 178 174 … 166

13Cr Bar, shapes A479 410 200 max. … 1 138 351 910 480 (1)(4) 379 349 338 331 326 318 … 303
13Cr Bar, shapes A479 410 200 max. … 938 293 772 550 (1)(4) 312 288 279 273 269 262 … 250
13Cr Bar, shapes A479 410 200 max. … 862 269 689 580 (4) 288 265 256 251 247 241 … 230
13Cr Bar, shapes A479 410 200 max. … 827 255 655 595 (4) 276 254 246 241 237 231 … 221
13Cr Bar, shapes A479 410 200 max. … 800 248 634 610 (4) 267 245 237 233 228 223 … 214
13Cr Bar, shapes A479 410 200 max. … 758 235 621 635 (4) 253 233 225 221 218 212 … 203
13Cr Bar, shapes A479 410 200 max. … 689 212 552 690 … 230 212 205 201 198 192 … 184
13Cr Bar, shapes A479 410 200 max. … 621 192 448 745 … 207 190 184 181 178 174 … 166

ASME BPVC.III.A-2017
13Cr Bar A582 416, 416Se 200 max. … 1 138 351 910 480 (1)(4) 379 349 338 331 326 318 … 303
13Cr Bar A582 416, 416Se 200 max. … 938 293 772 550 (1)(4) 312 288 279 273 269 262 … 250
13Cr Bar A582 416, 416Se 200 max. … 862 269 689 580 (4) 288 265 256 251 247 241 … 230
573

13Cr Bar A582 416, 416Se 200 max. … 827 255 655 595 (4) 276 254 246 241 237 231 … 221
13Cr Bar A582 416, 416Se 200 max. … 800 248 634 610 (4) 267 245 237 233 228 223 … 214
13Cr Bar A582 416, 416Se 200 max. … 758 235 621 635 (4) 253 233 225 221 218 212 … 203
13Cr Bar A582 416, 416Se 200 max. … 689 212 552 690 … 230 212 205 201 198 192 … 184
13Cr Bar A582 416, 416Se 200 max. … 621 192 448 745 … 207 190 184 181 178 174 … 166

13Cr Bar, shapes A276 420 200 max. A 655 196 345 NA (7) 218 201 194 191 188 183 … 175
13Cr Bar, shapes A276 420 200 max. QT 1 724 477 1 344 400 (1)(3)(4)(7) … … … … … … … …
13Cr Bar, shapes A276 420 Over 200 to 300 QT 1 517 430 1 241 315 (1)(2)(3)(4)(7) … … … … … … … …
(8)

13Cr Bar, shapes A276 420 Over 300 to 350 QT 1 379 400 1 103 480 (1)(2)(3)(4)(7) … … … … … … … …
(8)

18Cr Bar, shapes A276 440C 200 max. HT 1 965 578 1 896 315 (1)(3)(4)(6) … … … … … … … …
13Cr Bar, shapes A565 615 200 max. HT 965 302 758 595 (3)(4) … … … … … … … …
12Cr Bar, shapes A565 616 200 max. HT 965 302 758 595 (3)(4) … … … … … … … …

17Cr–4Ni–4Cu Bar, shapes A564 630 200 max. … 1 310 388 1 172 480 (1)(4) 436 412 399 386 376 372 365 …
17Cr–4Ni–4Cu Bar, shapes A564 630 200 max. … 1 069 331 1 000 553 (1)(4) 356 336 325 314 308 303 299 …
17Cr–4Ni–4Cu Bar, shapes A564 630 200 max. … 1 000 302 862 580 (4) 333 314 303 294 287 283 279 …
17Cr–4Ni–4Cu Bar, shapes A564 630 200 max. … 965 311 793 595 (4) 321 303 294 285 279 274 269 …
17Cr–4Ni–4Cu Bar, shapes A564 630 200 max. … 931 277 724 620 (4) 310 293 283 274 269 264 259 …
17Cr–4Ni–4Cu Castings AMS–5355 … 200 max. … 1 310 388 1 172 480 (1)(4) 436 412 399 386 376 372 365 …
17Cr–4Ni–4Cu Castings AMS–5355 … 200 max. … 1 069 331 1 000 553 (1)(4) 356 336 325 314 308 303 299 …
17Cr–4Ni–4Cu Castings AMS–5355 … 200 max. … 1 000 302 862 580 (4) 333 314 303 294 287 283 279 …

17Cr–4Ni–4Cu Castings AMS–5355 … 200 max. … 965 311 793 595 (4) 321 303 294 285 279 274 269 …
17Cr–4Ni–4Cu Castings AMS–5355 … 200 max. … 931 277 724 620 (4) 310 293 283 274 269 264 259 …
17Cr–4Ni–4Cu Castings AMS–5398 … 200 max. … 1 310 388 1 172 480 (1)(4) 436 412 399 386 376 372 365 …
17Cr–4Ni–4Cu Castings AMS–5398 … 200 max. … 1 069 331 1 000 553 (1)(4) 356 336 325 314 308 303 299 …
17Cr–4Ni–4Cu Castings AMS–5398 … 200 max. … 1 000 302 862 580 (4) 333 314 303 294 287 283 279 …
17Cr–4Ni–4Cu Castings AMS–5398 … 200 max. … 965 311 793 595 (4) 321 303 294 285 279 274 269 …
 Table HH-1312-1M
Allowable Stress Values, S, for Material for Internal and External Items (SI Units) (Cont'd)
Diameter Minimum Minimum Allowable Stress, MPa, for Temperatures Not
or Tensile Minimum Minimum Yield Tempering Exceeding, °C
Product Spec. Thickness, Condi- Strength, Brinell Strength, or Aging
Material Form No. Type or Grade mm tion MPa Hardness MPa Temp., °C Notes 38 95 150 205 250 315 345 370
17Cr–4Ni–4Cu Castings AMS–5398 … 200 max. … 931 277 724 620 (4) 310 293 283 274 269 264 259 …
17Cr–7N–1Al Bar, shapes A564 631 150 max. PH 1 172 352 965 565 (4) 391 370 358 348 339 328 314 …

15Cr–6Ni–1.5Cu Bar, shapes A564 XM–25 200 max. STr 862 262 655 NA (4) 288 260 256 255 255 254 … …
15Cr–6Ni–1.5Cu Bar, shapes A564 XM–25 200 max. PH 1 241 363 1 172 480 (1)(2)(4) 414 379 363 352 343 335 331 325
15Cr–6Ni–1.5Cu Bar, shapes A564 XM–25 200 max. PH 1 000 262 931 565 (1)(2)(4) 333 312 300 290 281 274 270 264
15Cr–6Ni–1.5Cu Bar, shapes A564 XM–12 200 max. … 1 069 … 1 000 553 (1)(2)(3)(4) … … … … … … … …
15Cr–6Ni–1.5Cu Bar, shapes A564 XM–12 200 max. … 1 000 … 862 580 (1)(2)(3)(4) … … … … … … … …
26Ni–15Cr–Mo–Ti Bolting A453 660 … A or B 896 248 586 720 (2) 299 295 294 293 288 285 … 281
18Cr–12Ni–2Mo Bar, shapes A638 660 … 1 or 2 896 248 586 705 … 299 295 294 293 288 285 … 281
18Cr–12Ni–2Mo Bar, shapes A276 316 Up to 19 B 862 … 689 NA (4) 288 261 247 238 236 236 … 236

18Cr–12Ni–2Mo Bar, shapes A276 316 19 to 25 B 793 … 552 NA … 264 241 228 219 218 218 … 218
18Cr–12Ni–2Mo Bar, shapes A276 316 25 to 32 B 724 … 448 NA … 241 219 208 201 199 199 … 199
18Cr–12Ni–2Mo Bar, shapes A276 316 32 to 38 B 689 … 345 NA … 230 209 197 191 185 182 … 177
Ni–Cr–Fe Bar, shapes B637 N07750 Type 2 100 max. PH 1 172 302 793 730 (4) 414 412 394 385 381 379 … 379
Co–Cr–W–Ni Bar, shapes AMS–5759 … 100 max. CDr 1 034 311 689 595 (2)(3)(4) … … … … … … … …
Co–Cr–W Bar, shapes Comm. … … STr 1 034 352 621 540 (2)(3)(4) … … … … … … … …

ASME BPVC.III.A-2017
Co–Cr–W Castings AMS–5373 … … As cast … 370/40HRC … NA (2)(3)(5) … … … … … … … …
Co–Cr–W Castings AMS–5387 … … As cast … 362/39HRC … NA (2)(3)(5) … … … … … … … …

Co–27Cr–5Mo Castings A732 Gr. 21 … PH 827 352 689 730 (2)(3)(4) … … … … … … … …

574

Co–27Cr–5Mo Castings AMS–5385 … … PH 827 352 689 730 (2)(3)(4) … … … … … … … …

12Cr–Cb Bar SA–479 XM–30 … QT 862 302 689 595 (2)(3)(4) 288 269 259 250 245 238 … 230

NOTES:
(1) Not to be used for Category 3 valve items, except for safety valve disks and nozzles, when the nozzles are internally contained by the external body structure; control valve disks in auto-
matic flow control valves, when the primary function of the valve is flow control; and line valve disks in valves with inlet connections DN 50 and less.
(2) Welding of these materials is not permitted
(3) For those materials in this Table that do not have allowable stresses assigned, use 1/4 of room temperature specified minimum tensile strength, up to 345°C, inclusive.
(4) The actual tensile strength shall not exceed the specified minimum tensile strength by more than 276 MPa.
(5) For design purposes [see (3)], use a minimum tensile value of 793 MPa for these materials.
(6) This material shall not be used at temperatures higher than 230°C.
(7) Carbon content shall not exceed 0.35%.
(8) Use one-fourth of the room temperature minimum specified tensile strength for assigned allowable stresses, up to 315°C, inclusive.
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

HH-1320 FRACTURE TOUGHNESS HH-1322.5 Retests.

REQUIREMENTS FOR MATERIALS (a) One retest at the same temperature may be con-
HH-1321 Materials to Be Impact Tested ducted provided
(1) the average of the test results meets the mini-
Materials for Category 3 valve items for valves manu- mum requirements
factured to Subsection NB and, when required by the De- (2) not more than one specimen per test is below the
sign Specification, for valves manufactured to Subsections minimum requirements
NC and ND shall be impact tested in accordance with the
(3) the specimen not meeting the minimum require-
requirements of HH-1320, except that materials meeting
ments is not lower than 0.005 in. (0.13 mm) below the
any of the following conditions do not require impact
specified requirements
testing:
(b) A retest consists of two additional specimens re-
(a) materials with a nominal section thickness of 5/8 in. moved from coupon as near as practicable to the failed
(16 mm) or less, where the thickness is based on the lar- specimens. For acceptance of the retest, both specimens
gest nominal pipe wall thickness of the connecting pipe shall meet the minimum requirements.
(b) bolting with a nominal size of 1 in. (25 mm) and less
(c) bars with a nominal cross-sectional area of 1 in.2
HH-1330 EXAMINATION OF MATERIALS
(650 mm2) and less
(d) all thicknesses of materials for valves with a NPS 6 Category 3 through 5 valve items for valves manufac-
(DN 150) and smaller tured to Subsection NB over NPS 2 (DN 50) and cast ma-
terials for Category 3 valve items for valves manufactured
(e) materials for valves with all pipe connections of
5 to Subsection NC over NPS 2 (DN 50) shall be examined
/8-in. (16-mm) nominal wall and less
by the magnetic particle or liquid penetrant method in ac-
(f) austenitic stainless steels, including precipitation cordance with NB-2545 or NB-2546, respectively. In addi-
hardening grade 660 (UNS S66286) tion, for valves manufactured to Subsection NB with
(g) nonferrous materials piping connections over NPS 2 (DN 50), all discs and cast
materials for Category 3 valve items shall be examined by
the applicable radiographic or ultrasonic methods and ac-
HH-1322 Impact Test Procedure ceptance standards in accordance with NB-2500. The ex-
HH-1322.1 Charpy V-Notch Tests. The Charpy amination may be performed by the Material
V-notch test shall be performed in accordance with Organization or the Certificate Holder. Acceptance stan-
SA-370. Specimens shall be in accordance with SA-370, dards for magnetic particle and liquid penetrant examina-
Figure 11, Type A. A test shall consist of a set of three full- tion shall be as follows:
size 10 mm × 10 mm specimens. The test temperature Materials for Category 6 through 8 valve items for
and lateral expansion shall be reported in the Certified valves manufactured to Subsection NB and for Category
Material Test Report. 3 through 8 valve items for valves manufactured to Sub-
sections NC and ND shall be examined in accordance with
HH-1322.2 Location and Orientation of Test Speci-
the material specification.
mens. Impact test specimens shall be removed from the
locations and orientations specified by the materials spec-
ification for tensile test specimens in each product form. HH-1331 Time of Examination
HH-1322.3 Material Conditions for Impact Testing. Magnetic particle or liquid penetrant examination shall
Impact testing shall be performed on specimens repre- be performed on the final surfaces of the items, except
senting the condition of the item after final heat treatment that threaded items may be examined prior to threading.
and material forming operations. Examinations shall be performed prior to any coating or
plating. Lapping of seating surfaces to reduce leakage or
HH-1322.4 Test Requirements and Acceptance lapping of bearing surfaces shall not require reexamina-
Standards. Three Charpy V-notch specimens shall be tion. Ultrasonic or radiographic examinations of cast
tested at a temperature equal to or lower than the lowest valve item material manufactured to Subsection NB, when
service temperature. All three specimens shall meet or ex- required, shall be performed in accordance with NB-2574
ceed 0.015-in. (0.38-mm) lateral expansion. Lowest ser- or NB-2575, respectively.
vice temperature is the minimum temperature of the
fluid retained by the valve or, alternatively, the calculated
HH-1332 Elimination of Surface Defects
volumetric average metal temperature expected during
normal operation, whenever the pressure within the (a) Unacceptable surface defects shall be removed by
valve exceeds 20% of the preoperational system hydro- grinding or machining, provided
static test pressure. The lowest service temperature shall (1) the remaining thickness of the section is not re-
be specified in the Design Specification. duced below the minimum required by the design

575
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(2) the depression, after grinding or machining, is HH-1345 Heat Treatment After Repair
blended uniformly into the surrounding surface and the
(a) Materials listed in Table HH-1312-1, which are re-
depression does not affect the function of the item
paired by welding, shall be heat treated after repair. Such
(3) after grinding or machining, the area is examined heat treatment shall be the heat treatment specified for
by the method that originally disclosed the defect to en- the finished item or in accordance with a qualified weld-
sure that the defect has been removed or the indication ing procedure.
reduced to an acceptable size (b) Material listed in Section II, Part D, Subpart 1,
(b) If grinding or machining reduces the thickness of Tables lA, 1B, and 3, which are repaired by welding, shall
the section below the minimum required by the design, be heat treated after repair in accordance with the heat
the item may be repaired in accordance with HH-1340. treatment requirements of NX-2500, as applicable.

HH-1346 Repair Weld Report

HH-1340 REPAIR BY WELDING OF VALVE ITEMS
A record shall be made of each defect repair of Category
Category 5 and 8 valve items shall not be repair welded. 3 and 4 valve items in which the depth of the repair cavity
Category 3, 4, 6, and 7 valve items may be repaired by exceeds the lesser of 3/8 in. (10 mm) or 10% of the section
welding, provided the requirements of the following are thickness. The record shall include the location and size of
met. the repaired cavity, the welding materials, the welding
procedure, the heat treatment, and the examination
results.
HH-1341 Defect Removal
The defect shall be removed or reduced to an accept-
able size by suitable mechanical or thermal cutting or HH-1400 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
gouging methods and the cavity prepared for weld repair. HH-1410 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
The requirements of HH-1400 apply to Category 3
HH-1342 Qualification of Welding Procedure and through 6 valve items used for valves manufactured to
Welders Subsection NB, Category 3 and 4 valve items used for
valves manufactured to Subsection NC, and Category 3
(a) Except as permitted in (b), the welding procedure
and 4 valve items used for valves manufactured to Sub-
and welders or welding operators shall be qualified in ac-
section ND. Only valve items for valves manufactured to
cordance with Section IX.
Subsection NB, larger than NPS 4 (DN 100), are required
(b) Heat-treated material listed in Table HH-1312-1 to be included in a Design Report.
that is not capable of passing bend tests required by Sec-
tion IX for procedure or performance qualification may be HH-1420 DESIGN CONDITIONS
qualified as required for fillet welding in accordance with
QW-180. In addition, a minimum of two cross sections of The Design Pressure and Design Temperature for the
the qualification test plate (assembly) shall be ground and valve items covered by this Appendix shall be determined
etched with a suitable etchant and visually examined at by HH-1421.
10x magnification. The weld metal and adjacent base ma-
HH-1421 Design Pressure and Temperature
terial of the ground and etched cross sections shall be free
of cracks. The Design Pressure and Design Temperature shall be
specified in the Design Specification.

HH-1343 Blending of Repaired Areas HH-1430 DESIGN COMPUTATIONS

After weld repair, the weld surface shall be blended The specific combinations and values of loadings, in-
into the surrounding surface. cluding mechanical loadings, that are considered in eval-
uating the primary stresses (see HH-1420) are those
anticipated during Service Levels A and B Loadings. The
HH-1344 Examination of Repair Welds actual mechanical loads resulting from these conditions
Each repair weld of material listed in Table HH-1312-1, shall be used in the computations made to show compli-
Category 3 and 4 valve items for valves manufactured to ance with the stress limits of HH-1431 through HH-1433.
Subsection NB and cast Category 3 valve items for valves
manufactured to Subsection NC shall be examined by the HH-1431 Design of Category 3, 4, and 6 Valve
method that originally exposed the defect. The finished Items
surface shall be examined by either the magnetic particle The stress limits for materials for Category 3, 4, and 6
or liquid penetrant method in accordance with NB-2545 valve items for Service Levels A and B Loadings shall be
or NB-2546, respectively. as follows:

576
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

(a) The primary membrane stress shall not exceed the HH-1541 Special Welds
design allowable stress, S (see HH-1314).
(b) The primary membrane plus primary bending Fillet welds and partial penetration welds 1/4 in. (6 mm)
stress shall not exceed 1.5S . and less in size may be made in the fabrication of valve
(c) Localized stresses associated with contact loading items or between valve items where either of the items
of seating surfaces do not require substantiation by is a material listed in Table HH-1312-1, provided the pro-
cedures and welders are qualified as follows:
analysis.
(a) A test assembly shall be made for each combination
HH-1432 Design of Category 5 Valve Items of materials to be welded.
The Certificate Holder shall perform an analysis that (b) The test assembly shall be a duplicate of the produc-
shall include stress and fatigue considerations. tion weld joint or a groove butt weld 1/4-in. (6-mm) mini-
mum thickness.
HH-1433 Design of Category 7 and 8 Valve Items (c) The test assembly shall be sectioned (a minimum of
This Appendix does not specify design rules, stress lim- four cross sections), ground, etched with a suitable etch-
its, or analytical requirements for Category 7 and 8 valve ant, and visually examined at l0× magnification. All sur-
items. faces of the weld and adjacent base material(s) shall be
free of cracks.

HH-1500 FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS

Category 3 through 8 valve items shall be fabricated in HH-1542 Hardsurfacing
accordance with the requirements of HH-1500 and shall Hardsurfacing shall be performed using qualified pro-
be manufactured from materials that meet the require- cedures and personnel in accordance with Section IX.
ments of HH-1300.

HH-1510 CERTIFICATION OF MATERIAL BY HH-1543 Examination of Welds

CERTIFICATE HOLDER
All welds including hardsurfacing shall be examined by
The Certificate Holder shall provide certification that
the magnetic particle or liquid penetrant method in accor-
all treatments, tests, repairs, or examinations performed
dance with NB-5340 or NB-5350, respectively, except for
on valve items are in compliance with the requirements
seating surfaces for which all indications shall be
of this Appendix. Reports of all required treatments and
removed.
the results of all required tests, repairs, and examinations
performed shall be maintained in accordance with
NCA-4134.17. HH-1544 Heat Treatment of Welds
HH-1520 MATERIAL IDENTIFICATION (a) Postweld heat treatment of welds that join material
Category 3 and 4 valve material and items for valves listed in Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Tables lA and 1B,
manufactured to Subsections NB and NC shall carry iden- shall be in accordance with the postweld heat treatment
tification markings, either directly on the item or on a se- requirements of NX-4620, as applicable.
parate tag that accompanies the item, that will remain (b) Postweld heat treatment of welds that join material
distinguishable until the item is assembled in the valve. listed in Table HH-1312-1 to material listed in Section II,
All other material and items shall be identified by a con- Part D, Subpart 1, Tables lA and 1B, shall be in accordance
trol procedure, as specified by a Quality Assurance Pro- with the postweld heat treatment requirements of
gram, that ensures the specified materials are used. NX-4620, as applicable. Special techniques, such as local
postweld heat treatment, may be necessary to avoid chan-
HH-1530 PERMANENT ATTACHMENT WELDS ging the base material properties of the item in locations
Items that are attached by welding to the surface of the not adjacent to the weld.
valve body or bonnet may be attached by full penetration, (c) Postweld heat treatment of welds for joining mate-
partial penetration, or fillet welds. The attachment and rials listed in Table HH-1312-1 shall be in accordance
weld joint shall meet the design requirements of with the heat treatment specified for the material of the
HH-1400. finished item, i.e., the heat treatment required to obtain
the tensile strength, yield strength, and hardness listed
HH-1540 WELDING REQUIREMENTS in Table HH-1312-1.
Except as permitted in HH-1541, all welds shall be (d) For fillet welds and partial penetration welds 1/4 in.
made using qualified welding procedures and welders (6 mm) and less in size, postweld heat treatment is
or welding operators in accordance with Section IX. neither required nor prohibited.

577
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ð17Þ NONMANDATORY APPENDIX JJ

EVALUATION OF THERMAL STRATIFICATION IN CLASS 1 PIPING
SYSTEMS

ARTICLE JJ-1000
CRITERIA

JJ-1100 SCOPE JJ-1300 STRESS ANALYSIS PER NB-3600

(a) This Appendix provides the stress classification, When piping analysis is performed using NB-3600, the
load combinations, and acceptance criteria for addressing primary plus secondary and peak stress intensity range
thermal stratification in Class 1 piping systems. The fol- equations shall be modified to account for thermal strati-
lowing criteria may be used in NB-3600 and NB-3200 fication as described in this paragraph.
for the evaluation of thermal stratification when identi-
JJ-1310 THERMAL EXPANSION: AVERAGE
fied in the Design Specification.
STRESS (T s t r a t )
(b) This Appendix is applicable only to temperature
The thermal expansion stress in NB-3653.1 eq. (10),
variations that are symmetric about the vertical axis of
NB-3653.2 eq. (11), and NB-3653.6 eq. (12) is calculated
the pipe. Stratification is present only in horizontal sec-
using an average of the temperatures of the hot and cold
tions of piping. Figure JJ-1100-1 illustrates typical ther-
mal stratification temperature and local stress profiles.
Figure JJ-1100-1
Sample Thermal Stratification Profiles

JJ-1200 LOAD DEFINITION Stratification Stress Profiles

Level A
(a) The Design Specification shall identify the systems (−)
requiring consideration of thermal stratification service
loadings. When stratification is specified, the loading de- Hot
finition shall specify the pipe top and bottom fluid tem-
peratures, number of stratification on/off cycles and A P p
associated ramp rates, hot/cold fluid interface height Cold
(+)
and/or flow rates, and variations in interface height, if
any. The loading definition shall specify whether the
top-to-bottom temperature profile is linear, step change, (−)
or another shape.
(b) The potential for stresses to occur due to high fre-
Stratification
quency cyclic temperature fluctuation at the interface be- Level B )+(
tween the hot and cold fluid, herein referred to as thermal
striping, shall be considered. Temperature fluctuations at
the interface between hot and cold fluids, and variations )−(
in the fluid interface height, shall be included where sig- Hot
P p
nificant when defining load sets for evaluation with the B
requirements of this Appendix. If thermal striping is re-
quired to be considered by the Design Specification, the Cold
loading definition shall specify the amplitude and fre- )+(
quency of fluctuations in the interface level.

578
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

regions of the pipe. The average temperature may be ad- T j (r , θ ),

justed to consider the level of the temperature interface T k (r , θ ) = temperature as a function of radius and angle
and the amount of hot and cold fluid in the pipe. The aver- on pipe for load sets j and k , respectively, °F
age temperature may differ between the portions of the (°C)
piping system being evaluated. r i = inside radius of the pipe, in. (mm)
r o = outside radius of the pipe, in. (mm)
θ = angle toward top of pipe with θ = 0 being the
horizontal centerline, radius

JJ-1320 STRATIFICATION GLOBAL BENDING: The temperature distribution range T ( r , θ ) may be

LINEAR STRESS (V s t r a t ) thought of as composed of three parts:
(a) the constant (average) value (JJ-1310):
The thermal stratification top-to-bottom temperature
gradient produces additional global bending moments
in the piping system. The resulting stresses are linearized
in the vertical plane. The stresses are evaluated by
assessing the ability of the piping system flexibility to ac- (b) the linear portion with zero average value (JJ-1320)
commodate the differential thermal expansion displace- having a variation given by
ments between the top and bottom pipe temperatures.
This may be done either by calculating the rotation of
the pipe cross section, or by calculating the equivalent
moment to keep the cross section vertical. The applicable
rotation or moment is applied in each stratified horizontal
(c) a nonlinear portion with zero average value and a
run in the piping system, and the resulting thermal stra-
zero first moment across the pipe diameter (JJ-1330).
tification moments are determined at each location. These
This decomposition of T ( r , θ ) into three parts is illu-
moments are added to the thermal expansion moments in
strated in Figure JJ-1330-1. The value of Δ T 3 to be used
the M i term in NB-3653.1 eq. (10), NB-3653.2 eq. (11),
in NB-3653.2(a) eq. (11) is the maximum absolute
and NB-3653.6 eq. (12).
difference

considering the entire pipe cross section.

JJ-1330 LOCAL STRATIFICATION STRESS
A local stratification stress is produced in the pipe cross
section by the top-to-bottom temperature distribution. JJ-1340 THERMAL STRIPING STRESS
This stress varies in the vertical plane and the maximum The stresses associated with thermal striping are
may not be located at the hot–cold fluid interface. It is highly localized and shall be treated as nonlinear, ΔT 3
classified as a peak stress as it does not produce gross de- stresses.
formation. The local stress is determined by subtracting
the average (T s t r a t ) and linear (V s t r a t ) temperature por-
tions from the overall temperature distribution. It is eval-
uated in the following manner: JJ-1350 THERMAL TRANSIENT STRESS CYCLES
In NB-3653.2(a), “+E α|ΔT 3 |” shall be added to eq. (11), When thermal stratification is initiated or terminated,
where through-wall thermal gradient stresses will result.
Although these stresses typically occur primarily in the
|ΔT 3 | = absolute value of the range of the maximum dif-
portion of the pipe cross section in which the temperature
ference between the linear top-to-bottom tem-
is changing, the methodology of NB-3600 treats these
perature (assuming an equivalent moment
stresses as applying to the entire pipe cross section. The
generating temperature distribution) and the ac-
thermal transient stresses resulting from initiation and
tual pipe wall temperature for piping with tem-
termination of thermal stratification are included in the
perature stratification, for the load set being
stress intensity equations of NB-3653, as follows.
evaluated, °F (°C)
For each cycle of thermal stratification initiation and
termination, the associated α a T a –α b T b range, if nonzero,
A quantitative definition of |ΔT 3 | is provided in the fol-
shall be included in NB-3653.1 eq. (10) and NB-3653.6 eq.
lowing nomenclature:
(13). For each stratification cycle, the ΔT 1 , ΔT 2 , and
T ( r , θ ) = temperature distribution range from condi- α a T a –α b T b stress intensity range terms shall be included
tion j to k , °F (°C) in NB-3653.2 eq. (11). The α a T a –α b T b stress range

579
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

includes the effects of differences in the top-to-bottom global stratification bending moment) is considered as an
temperature distribution between the two sides of the expansion stress, in addition to the thermal expansion
discontinuity, if any (such as at a reducer). The numbers stress based on the average stratified pipe temperature:
of cycles of these load sets are considered in determining
the cumulative fatigue usage in NB-3653.4. Stress
Classification Discontinuity
Pe Considering gross discontinuities
Q Considering gross discontinuities where an axial
thermal gradient exists
F Considering both gross and local discontinuities
JJ-1400 STRESS ANALYSIS PER NB-3200
When analysis is performed using NB-3200, the rules (b) Stress due to nonlinear portion of circumferential
specified in JJ-1410 and JJ-1420 apply. temperature gradient acting across pipe diameter (the lo-
cal stratification stress):

Stress
JJ-1410 STRESS CLASSIFICATION Classification Discontinuity
Stresses due to circumferential temperature gradients F Considering both gross and local discontinuities
in the piping system caused by thermal stratification shall
be classified as follows:
(a) Stress due to linear portion of circumferential tem-
perature gradient acting across the pipe diameter (the JJ-1420 STRESS COMBINATION
The requirements of NB-3200 shall be satisfied with
the inclusion of the average (expansion), linear (global),
and nonlinear (local) thermal stratification stresses, as
modified by JJ-1410.

Figure JJ-1330-1
Decomposition of Stratification Temperature Distribution Range

T3
T (r, ) Tstrat Vstrat

= + +

580
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

ENDNOTES

1 Illustrative samples of statements are shown in Mandatory Appendix XXIII, Supplement 4.

2 Iron Pipe Size (IPS) is typically used in the plastics industry instead of Nominal Pipe Size (NPS) but is dimensionally
equivalent.
3 Reference T-150(a) and (d).
4 Cozzone, F. P. Bending Strength in the Plastic Range. Journal of Aeronautical Sciences, May 1943.
5 Bruhn, E. F. Analysis and Design of Flight Vehicle Structures. Tri‐State Offset Company, 1965, Chap. C3.
6 Gavalis, R. Bending Strength in the Plastic Range. Machine Design, July 1964.
7 Applicable operability requirements are contained in the subarticles designated 200 in this Appendix, such as
B-2200, B-4200, etc.
8 Applicable regulatory requirements are contained in the subarticles designated 300 in this Appendix, such as
B-2300, B-4300, etc.
9 In addition to Section II, Part D, Subpart 1, Table U, S u values are also available in Code Cases covering new or ad-
ditional materials for components and their supports.
10 The stress intensity factor as used in fracture mechanics has no relation to and must not be confused with the stress
intensity used in Section III, Division 1. Furthermore, stresses referred to in this Appendix are calculated normal ten-
sile stresses not stress intensities in a defect‐free stress model at the surface nearest the location of the assumed
defect.
11 WRCB 175 (Welding Research Council Bulletin 175) “PVRC Recommendations on Toughness Requirements for Fer-
ritic Materials” provides procedures in Paragraph 5c(2) for considering maximum postulated defects smaller than
those described.
12 The coolant temperature is the reactor coolant inlet temperature.
13 The vessel metal temperature is the temperature at a distance one fourth of the vessel section thickness from the
inside wetted surface in the vessel beltline region. R T NDT is the highest adjusted reference temperature (for weld
or base metal in the beltline region) at a distance one fourth of the vessel section thickness from the vessel wetted
inner surface as determined by Regulatory Guide 1.99, Rev. 2.
14 An individual time history response may be considered to have dominant frequency if one‐half or more of its total
response can be identified with a single frequency.
15 “Technical Position on Piping Installation Tolerances,” Welding Research Council Bulletin 316, July 1986.
16 “Guidelines for Piping System Reconciliation” (NCIG‐05, Revision 1), Electric Power Research Institute, EPRI‐5639,
May 1988.
17 Other equivalent formats of this equation using different nomenclature are acceptable.
18 Engineering and true strains at these low strain values (less than 10%) are essentially the same numerical value, and
it is conservative to consider engineering strain as equivalent to true strain in this specific use.

581
 ASME BPVC.III.A-2017

19 This requires the material procurement effort for containment materials to require that reduction of area values be
specified on the CMTRs along with the elongation and other typical tensile test data. It is recognized that the CMTR
data are generated at room temperature conditions, which is acceptable for this effort of determining adequate ma-
terial ductility. FF-1140(a) is valid only if the CMTR data accurately reflect the material properties of the final pro-
duct being used in the fabrication of the containment.
20 Not applicable to points of numerical singularity in the finite element model as justified in the final Design Report.

582
2017 ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code
AN INTERNATIONAL CODE

The ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (BPVC) is “An

International Historic Mechanical Engineering Landmark,”
widely recognized as a model for codes and standards
worldwide. Its development process remains open and
transparent throughout, yielding “living documents” that have
improved public safety and facilitated trade across global
markets and jurisdictions for a century. ASME also provides
BPVC users with integrated suites of related offerings:

• referenced standards
• related standards and guidelines
• conformity assessment programs
• training and development courses
• ASME Press books

You gain unrivaled insight direct from the BPVC source,

along with the professional quality and real-world
solutions you have come to expect from ASME.

For additional information and to order:

Phone: 1.800.THE.ASME
(1.800.843.2763)
Email: [email protected]
Website: go.asme.org/bpvc17